Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales"

See other formats 


»!w7!i41i!iI««lmHll«Mii*{rifvj«M»irf«rfJlt!Hn.rnr«-4'r 


THE 


PROCEEDINOS 


LINNEAN  SOCIETY 


OF 


NEW  SOUTH  WALES. 


FOR  THE  YEAR 

1905. 

Vol.  XXX. 


WITH     THIRTY-SIX     PLATES. 


PRINTED  AND  PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  SOCIETY 
BY 

F.    CUNNINGHAME   &  CO.,    146  PITT   STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
1905-06. 


F.  CUNNINGHAME   AND   CO., 

I^ETTERPRESS   AND   I.ITHOGRAPHIC   PRINTERS, 

PITT  STREET,  SYDNEY. 


LTST  OF  CONTRIBUreR^-^LND  TITLES  OF  PAPERS. 


Baker,  R.  T.,  F.L.S.—  page 

On  an  Undescribed  Species  of  Actinotus[A.  Paddisoni] 

from  Eastern  Australia.     (Plateiv.)        ...  ...     225 

On  an  Undescribed  Species  of  Cryptocarya  \C.  foRtidci] 

from  Eastern  Australia.     (Plate  xxx.)    ...  ...     517 

Betche,  E.,  and  J.  H.  Maiden — 

Notes  from  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney.     No.  11  ...     354 

Cambage,  R.  H. — 

Notes    on    the    Native   Flora  of    New  South   Wales. 

Part   iii.    Orange     to     Dubbo    and    Gilgandra. 

(Plates  ii.-iii.)  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...     2O3 

Notes  on    the    Native   Flora   of    New  South  Wales. 

Partiv.  The  Occurrence  of  Casuarinastricia  Ait. ^ 

on  the  Narrabeen  Shales.     (Plates  xii.-xiii.)      ...     376 

Cambage,  R.  H.,  and  J.  H.  Maiden — 

Notes  on  the  Eucalypts  of  the  Blue  Mountains  ,.       190 

Carter,  H.  J.,  B.A. — 

Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Australian  Coleoptera. 

Parti 177 

Chapman,  Frederick,  A.L.S.,  F.R.M.S.,  National  Museum, 
Melbourne — 
Notes  on  the  Older  Tertiary  Foraminiferal  Rocks  on 
the  West  Coast  of  Santo,  New  Hebrides. 
(Plates  v.-viii.).  [Cojnmunicated  by  Professor 
David,]        261 


Chapman,  H.  G.,  M.D.,  B.S.— 

Contribution  to  our  knowledge  of  the  Physiology  of 
the  Pancreas.  (From  the  Physiological  Labora- 
tory 0/  the  University  of  Sydney)...  ...  ...        92 

DixsoN,  T.  Storie,  M.B.,  Ch.M.— 

Presidential     Address     delivered     at    the    Thirtieth 

Annual  General  Meeting,  March  29th,  1905      ...  2 


27788 


iv.  list  of  contributors  and  titles  of  papers. 

Grant,  F.  E.,  F.L.S.—  page 

Crustacea  dredged  off  Port  Jackson   in   deep  water. 

(Plates  x.-xi.)  312 

Hedley,  C,  F.L.S.— 

Studies   on    Australian    MoUusca.    Part  ix.       (Plates 

xxxi.-xxxiii.)  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...     520 

Kesteven,  H.  Leighton  — 

Notes  on  Prosohranchiala.  No.  iv.     The  Ontogenetic 

Stages  represented  by  the  G-astropod  Protoconch.     325 

Lea,  Arthur  M.,  F.E.S.— 

Revision  of  the  Curculionidce  belonging  to  the  '^\xh- 

ia^mily  Cryptorhynchides.    Part  vii.  ...  ...      235 

Maidbn,  J.  H.,  Government  Botanist  and  Director,  Botanic 
Gardens,  Sydney — 

On  a  new  Species   of  Eucalyptus  \_E.  Bunnii]  from 

Northern  New  South  Wales         336 

Further  Notes  on  Hybridisation  in  the  Genus  Euca- 
lyptus ...  ...  ...  ..  ...  .  .     49^ 

Miscellaneous  Notes  (chiefly  taxonomic)  on  Eucalyptus. 

Partii 502 

Maiden,  J.  H.,  and  E.  Betche — 

Notes  from  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney.     No.  11    ...     354 

Maiden,  J.  H.,  and  R.  H.  Gambage — 

Notes  on  the  Eucalypts  of  the  Blue  Mountains         ...     190 

Mawson,    D.,    B.E.,   B.Sc,    Lecturer    in    Mineralogy   and 
Petrology  at  the  University  of  Adelaide — 
The  Geology  of  the  New  Hebrides.    (Plates  xiv.-xxix.)     400 

Shearsby,  A.  J. — 

On  the  Occurrence  of  a  Bed  of  Fossiliferous  Tuff  and 
Lavas  between  the  Silurian  and  Middle  Devonian 
at  Cavan,  Yass,  N.S.W.,  similar  in  Age  and 
Character  to  the  Snowy  River  Porphyries  of 
Victoria.  [Coimtmnicated  by  W.  S.  Dun].  (Plate 
ix.) 275 


LIST  OP  CONTRIBUTORS  AND  TITLES  OF  PAPERS.  V. 

Sloane,  Thomas  Gr. —  pagk 

Revisional  Notes  on  Australian  Carahidce.    Part  ii.  ..       103 
Australian  Carahidce:  Check-List.    Parti.     Subfamily 

Carabinfe.     (Issued  separately  as  a  Supplement 

to  Part  i.  of  the  Proceedings). 
Five  New  Species  of  Gicindela  from  Tropical  Australia.     229 

Smith,  R.  Greig-,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the 
Society — 

Abstract  of  a  Lecture  entitled   "  Our  First  Line  of 

Defence  against  Microbic  Attacks."  ...  ...        26 

The  Possible  Relationship  between  Bacteria  and  the 
Gum  of  Hakea  saligna  \_Bac.  pseudarabinus  ii., 
n.sp.]  136 

The  Origin  of  Natural  Immunity  towards  the  Putre- 
factive Bacteria      ...  ...  ...  ...  149 

The  Probable  Bacterial  Origin  of  the  Gum  of  Linseed 

M.\xci\a.ge  [Bacilli  lini,  i -u.,  n.spp.]  ...  ...      161 

The  Role  of  Agglutination  in  Immunity         ...  289 

A   Gelatin-hardening  Bacterium   [Bacillus  indurans, 

n-sp-]  

The  Probable  Identity  of  the  Opsonins  with  the  Normal 

Agglutinins.  ...  ...  ...  ...  555 

A  Pleomorphic  Slime-Bacterium  [Bacillus  alatus,  n.sp.] 

(Plate  xxxv.j  570 

Steel,  Thomas,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.— 

Presidential  Address  delivered  at  the  Thirty-first 
Annual  General  Meeting,  March  28th,  1906. 
(Plate  xxxvi.)  605 

Tillyard,  R.  J.,  B.A. — 

On  Dimorphism  in  the  Female  of  Ischnura  heterosticta, 

Burm.  [Neuroptkra  :  Odonat,a\   ...  ...  ...      302 

On    the    supposed    Numerical    Preponderance    of   the 

Males  in  0(^ona««  .. .  ...  ...  ...  ...     344 

Descriptions  of  three  new  Australian  Species  of  the 

Genus   Austrogomphiis  [Neuroptera  :    Odo7iata]. 

(Plate  xxxiv.)  ...  547 


339 


VI.  LIST  OF  CONTRIBUTORS  AND  TTTLES  OF  PAPERS. 

Turner,  Fred.,  F.L.S.,  F.R.H.S.,  &c.— 

Botany  of  North- Western  New  South  Wales.  (Plate  i.)        32 

Watts,  Rev  W.  Walter,  and  Thomas  Whitelegge, 
F.R.M.S.— 
Census  Muscorum  Australiensium.  A  classified  Cata- 
logue of  the  Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia  and 
Tasmania,  collated  from  available  Publications 
and  Herbaria  Records.  Part  ii.  (Issued  sepa- 
rately as  a  Supplement  to  Part  4  of  the  Proceed- 
ings). 

Whitelegge,  Thomas,  F.R.M.S.,  and  Rev.  W.  Walter 
Watts — 
Census  Muscorum  Australiensium.  A  classified  Cata- 
logue of  the  Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia  and 
Tasmania,  collated  from  available  Publications 
and  Herbaria  Records.  Part  ii.  (Issued  sepa- 
rately as  a  Supplement  to  Pai-t  4  of  the  Proceed- 
ings), f 


CONTENTS  OF  PROCEEDINGS,  1905. 

PART  I.     (No.  117). 

(Isstied  July  Uth,  1905.) 

PAGK 

Presidential  Address,  delivered   at  the    Thirtieth   Annual    General 

Meeting,  March  29th,  1905,  by  T.  SToraE  Dixson,  M.B.,  Ch.M..,.  2 

Abstract  of  a  Lecture  entitled  "Our  First  Line  of  Defence  against 
Microbic  Attacks,"  delivered  by  R.  Gbeig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay 
Bacteriologist  to  the  Society 26 

Botany  of   North -We  stern  New  South  Wales.     By  Fred.  Turner, 

F.L.S.,  F.R.H.S.,  etc.     (Plate  i.)      32 


Contribution  to  our  Knowledge  of  the  Physiology  of  the  Pancreas 
By  H.  G.  Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.  (From  the  Physiological 
Laboratory  of  the  University  of  Sydney).    ... 

Revisional  Notes  on  Australian  Carabid(i\  Part  ii.  By  Thomas  G 
Sloane     

The  Possible  Relationship  between  Bacteria  and  the  Gum  of  Hakea 
saligna  (Bac.  pseudarahinus  ii.,  n.sp.).  By  R.  Greig  Smith 
D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society  

The  Origin  of  Natural  Immunity  towards  the  Putrefactive  Bacteria, 
By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society 

The  Probable  Bacterial  Origin  of  the  Gum  of  Linseed  Mucilage 
{Bacilli  lini,  i-ii.,  n.spp. ).  By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,,  Macleay 
Bacteriologist  to  the  Society    ... 


92 
10.3 

136 
149 

161 

28 


Balance  Sheet,  &c 

Elections  and  Announcements ...         27,31,102,176 

Notes  and  Exhibits 101,175 

Special  General  Meeting      1 

Supplement  (issued  separately) — Australian   Carabidce:    Check-List. 
Part  i.  Subfamily  Carabimf.     By  Thomas  G.  Sloane, 


viii.  CO  NT  K  NTS. 

PART  II.     (No.   118). 

(Issued  September  27th,  1905.) 

PAGE 

Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Australian  Coleoptera.  Part  i.     By  H. 

J.  Carter,  B.A.  ...  ...         ...         ...         ...         •■•       177 

Notes  on  the  Eucalypts  of  the  Blue  Mountains.     By  J.  H.  Maiden 

and  R.  H.  Cambage      .-         190 

Notes  on  the  Native  Flora  of  New  South  Wales.     By  R.  H.  Cambage. 

Part iii.  Orange  to  Dubbo  and  Gilgandra.     (Plates  ii.-iii.)  ...       203 

On  an  Undescribed  Species  of  Actinotus  from  Eastern  Australia.     By 

R.  T.  Baker,  F.L.S.,  Curator,  Technological  Museum.  (Plate  iv.)       225 

Five  New  Species  of  Cicindela  from  Tropical  Australia.     By  Thomas 

G.  Sloane 229 

Revision  of  the  Cumilionidce  belonging  to  the  Subfamily  Cruptorhyn- 

chides.    Part  vii.     By  Arthur  M.  Lea,  F.E.S 235 

List  of  Lichens  from  the  eastern  slopes  of  New  England,  N.S.W., 

exhibited  by  Mr.  Fred.  Turner  259,308 

Notes  on  the  Older  Tertiary  Foraminiferal  Rocks  on  the  West  Coast 
of  Santo,  New  Hebrides.  By  Frederick  Chapman,  A.L.S., 
F.R.M.S.,  National  Museum,  Melbourne.  {Communicated  by 
Prof essor  David.)     (Plates  v. -viii.) ...       261 

On  the  Occurrence  of  a  Bed  of  Fossiliferous  Tuff  and  Lavas  between 
the  Silurian  and  Middle  Devonian  at  Cavan,  Yass,  N.S.W., 
similar  in  Age  and  Character  to  the  Snowy  River  Porphyries  of 
Victoria.  By  A.  J.  Shearsby.  (Communicated  by  JV.  S.  Dun.) 
(Plate  ix.)  275 

The  Role  of  Agglutination  in  Immunity.     By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc, 

Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society  289 

On  Dim.orphism    in    the    Female    of    lachnura    heterosticta,   Burm. 

[Neuroptkra  :  Odonafa],     By  R.  J.  Tillyard,  B.A.  ...         ...       302 

Crustacea  dredged  off  Port  Jackson  in  deep  water.     By  F.  E.  Grant, 

F.L.S.     (Plates  x.-xi.) 312 

Notes  on  Frosobranchiata.  No.  iv.  The  Ontogenetic  Stages  repre- 
sented by  the  Gastropod  Protoconch.     By  H.  Leighton  Kesteven.       325 


CONTENTS.  IX. 

PART   II.   (continued. J 

PACK 

On  a  new  Species  of  Eucalyptufi  from  Northern  New  South  Wales. 
By  J.  H.  Maiden,  Government  Botanist  and  Director,  Botanic 
Gardens,  Sydney  ..  3.36 

A  Gelatin-hardening  Bacterium  {Bocillus  indurans,  n.sp.).    By  R. 

Greio  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society         ...       339 

On  the  supposed  Numerical  Preponderance  of  the  Males  in  Odonata. 

By  R.  J.  Till  YARD,  B.  A 344 

Elections  and  Announcements       224,260,311 

Notes  and  Exhibits 222,259,307,350 


PART  III.     (No.  119). 

(Ismed  December  20th,  1905.) 


PAGE 


Notes  from  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney.  No.  11.      By  J.  H.  Maiden 

and  E.  Betche 354 

Notes  on  the  Native  Flora  of  New  South  Wales.  By  R.  H.  Cambage. 
Part  iv.  The  Occurrence  of  Casuarina  stricta  Ait.,  on  the 
Narrabeen  Shales.     (Plates  xii.-xiii.)  ...  „         376 

Census  Muscorum  Australiensium.  A  classified  Catalogue  of  the 
Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia  and  Tasmania,  collated  from 
available  Publications  and  Herbaria  Records,  by  the  Rev.  W. 
Walter  Watts  and  Thomas  Whitelegge,  F.  R.  M.  S.     Part  ii.  * . . .       39 1 

[Title.] 

The  Geology  of  the  New  Hebrides.  By  D.  Mawson,  B.E.,  B.Sc, 
Lecturer  in  Mineralogy  and  Petrology  at  the  University  of 
Adelaide.     (Plates  xiv.-xxix.) 400 

Elections  and  Announcements      353,399 

Notes  and  Exhibits , 392 


*  Issued  separately  as  a  Supplement  to  Part  4  of  this  Volume. 
B 


X.  CONTENTS. 

PART  IV.     (No.   120). 

(Issued  April  mh,  1906.) 

PAGE 
Further  Notes  on  Hybridisation  in  the  Genus  Eucalpptus.     By  J.  H. 

Maiden,    Government  Botanist,    and    Director    of    the    Botanic 

Gardens,  Sydney 492 

Miscellaneous  Notes  (chiefly  taxonomic)  on  Eucalyptus,  ii.     By  J.  H. 

Maiden,  Government    Botanist,    and   Director    of    the    Botanic 

Gardens,  Sydney ..  ..  ..         ..  ..     502 

On  an  undescribed  Species  of  Cryptocarya  from  Eastern  Australia. 

By  K.  T.  Baker,  F.L.S.,  Curator,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney. 

(Plate  XXX.)  517 

Studies  on  Australian   Mollusca.    Part  ix.      By  C.   Hedley,   F.L.S. 

(Plates  xxxi.-xxxiii.) 520 

Descriptions  of  three  New  Species  of  Austrogomphus  [Neuroptera  : 

Odonata].     By  R.  J.  Tillyard,  B.A.     (Plate  xxxiv.)         ..         ..547 
The  Probable  Identity  of  the  Opsonins  with  the  Normal  Agglutinins. 

By  R.  Greig-Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society     555 
A  Pleomorphic  Slime-Bacterium  {Bacillus  alatus,  n.sp.).    By  R.  Greig- 

Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society.    (Plate  xxxv.)     57q 
Presidential  Address  delivered   at  the   Thirty-first   Annual    General 

Meeting,   March  28th,    1906,  by  Thomas  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S. 

(Plate  xxxvi.) 605 

Balance  Sheet,  &c 636 

Elections  and  Announcements         . .         . .  . .     492 

Notes  and  Exhibits 486,  574 

Donations  and  Exchanges     . . 580 

Title-page         . .         , .        i. 

List  of  Contributors  and  Titles  of  Papers ..         ..      iii. 

Contents  . .     vii. 

List  of  Plates xi. 

List  of  New  Generic  Terms  proposed  in  this  Volume     . .         . .         . .     xii. 

Corrigenda        . .         . .     xii. 

Isdex. 

Supplement  (issued  separately)— Census  Muscorum  Australiensium. 
A  classified  Catalogue  of  the  Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia  and 
Tasmania,  collated  from  available  Publications  and  Herbaria 
Records,  by  the  Rev.  W.  Walter  Watts  and  Thomas  Whitelegge, 
F.R.M.S.     Partii. 


LIST   OF   PLATES, 

PKOCEEDINGS,  1905. 

Plate  I.— Map  of  New  South  Wales. 

Plate  II. — Acacia  sp.,  "Motherumbung"  [A.  Gnidium  Benth.,  var.  latifoUa\ 

Plate  III. — Acacia  pendula  A.  Cunn.  (*'  Myall  "). 

Plate  IV. — Actinotus  Paddisoni  R.  T.  Baker. 

Plate  V. — Figs.  1-2.  Miocene  Foraminiferal  Limestones,  New  Hebrides. 

Plate  VI. — Figs.  1-2.  Miocene  Foraminifera,  New  Hebrides. 

Plate  VII. — Figs.  1-4.  Miocene  Fossils  from  the  New  Hebrides. 

Plate  VIII.  —Generalised  Geological  Section  across  South  Santo. 

Plate  IX. — Geological  Sketch  Map  of  portion  of  Parish  of  Cavan,  County  of 

Cowley,  Yass,N.S.W. 
Plate  X.  — Australian  Deep-water  Malacostraca, 
Plate  XI. — Australian  Deep-water  Malacostra^a. 
Plate  XII. — Gasuarina  strict  a  Ait. 
Plate  XIII. —Map   showing  the   100-fathom   line  on   Coast  of   South-East 

Australia. 
Plate  XIV.— Hills  to  the  South  of  Undine  Bay,  Efat6,as  seen  from  Pel6,  New 

Hebrides. 
Plate  XV.— The  Island  of  Mau,  taken  from  Pel^. 
Plate  XVI.— Fig.  1.  The  Island  Nguna,  N.E.  coast  of  Efat6. 

Fig.  2.  The  Islands  to  the  North,  as  seen  from  the  summit  of 
Nguna. 
Plate  XVII.— The  West  Coast  of  Santo  as  seen  from  Tasiriki  looking  North  : 

S.W.  Santo. 
Plate  XVIII. — Losubunu  from  Tangoa,  Santo. 
Plate  XIX. — Miocene  Limestones  of  the  Wai  Bubo,  S.W.  Santo. 
Plate  XX. — Cape  Ukuani,  S.W.  Santo. 
Plate  XXI.— The  hill  Tumebu  as  seen  from  Tangoa,  Santo. 
Plate  XXII.— Fig.  1.  View  taken  from  Vila  :  showing  raised  coral  plateau  in 

the  distance. 

Figs.  2-5.  New  Hebridean  rock  sections. 
Plate  XXIII. — Figs.  1-5.  New  Hebridean  rock  sections. 
Plate  XXIV.— Section  through  the  Coraliferous  Limestone  Terraces  at  Steep 

Gully,  Havannah  Harbour, 
Plate  XXV.— Sketch  Section  from  C.  Tsinone  to  Losubunu,  South-West  Santo. 
Plate  XXVI. — Generalised  Section  across  the  New  Hebrides. 
Plate  XXVII.— Map  of  New  Hebrides,  including  Banks  and  Torres  Groups, 

from  the  Admiralty  Charts. 
Plate  XXVIII.— Efat^  Island  (Sandwich  Island^,     From  Admiralty  Chart. 


xu. 


LIST    OF    PLATES. 


Plate  XXIX.— Map  of  South- West  8anto. 

Plate  XXX. — Cryptoca  7y a  fcetida,  n.sp. 

Plates  XXXI. -XXXIII. — Australian  MoUusca. 

Plate  XXXIV. — Fig.l.  Austrogomphm  arbustorum,  n.sp. 

Fig. 2.  ,,  arenarius,  n.sp. 

Fig. 3.  „  prasimis,  n.sp. 

Plate  XXXV. — Bacillus  alatus,  n.sp. 

Plate  XXXVI. — Chart  to  illustrate  the  Determination   of   the   Properties  of 
Waves. 


LIST  OF  NEW  GENERIC  TERMS 

Proposed  in  this  Volume  (1905). 


AnepigrapJiocis  (Coleoptera) 
Bleptocis  (Coleoptera) ... 


PAGE 

246 
247 


Episodiocis  (Coleoptera) 
Neomystocis  (Coleoptera) 


PAGE 

244 

242 


CORRIGENDA. 

Page  120,  line  27 — the  asterisk  refers  to  the  footnote  which,  inadvertently^ 

appears  first  on  p.  121. 
Page  127,  line  29 — for  Gonopteriim  lUorale  read  Conopterum  littorak. 
Page  212,  line  2.3 — for  Kunzea  parvifiora  read  Kunzea  parvifolia. 
Page  213,  line  1 — for  Ptilotus  exaltatum  read  Ptilotus  exaltatus. 
Page  367,  line  33 — for  Styphelia  trijiora  read  Styphelia  tuUflora. 
Page  422,  line  7 — for  plain  of  marine  erosion  read  plane  of  marine  erosion. 
Page  442,  line  29— /or  Plate  xix.  fig.  1  read  Plate  xxii.  fig.  I. 
Page  459,  line  10— /or  Plate  xix.  fig.  2  read  Plate  xxii.  fig.  2. 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN    SOCIETY 


OF 


3srE"^;7s7"   soxjTxa:  '^t^t'^^HjIb^. 


WEDNESDAY,  MARCH  29tii,  1905. 


A  Special  General  Meeting,  the  Thirtieth  Annual  General 
Meeting,  and  the  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  were  held  in  the 
Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  March  29th,  1905. 

SPECIAL  GENERAL  MEETING. 

Dr.  T.  Storie  Dixson,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

On  the  motion  of  Mr.  T.  Steel,  the  adoption  of — 
Rule  xi.  bis. — It  shall  not  be  competent  for  an  Ordinary  Member 
of  the  Society  to  hold  office  on  the  Council,  and  as  Macleay 
Bacteriologist  or  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow,  simultaneously, 
— was  confirmed  unanimously. 


ANNUAL  GENERAL  MEETING. 

Dr.  T.  Storie  Dixson,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

The    Minutes    of    the    preceding    Annual    General    Meeting 
(March  30th,  1904)  were  read  and  confirmed. 

The  President  delivered  the  Annual  Address. 


PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS. 


PRESIDENTIAL  ADDRESS. 


Before  offering  you  a  brief  report  upon  the  progress  of  the 
Societ3''s  affairs  during  the  year  1904,  I  may  remind  you  that 
the  Society  enters  to-day  upon  the  thirty-first  year  of  its  career 
of  steadil}^  growing  useful  work. 

Twelve  (nominally  thirteen)  Ordinar}"  Members  and  two 
Associate  Members  were  elected  during  the  year — a  very  satis- 
factory increase,  compared  with  the  numbers  for  the  preceding 
two  years;  especially  as  the  payment  of  entrance  fees  again 
became  operative  at  the  beginning  of  the  Session. 

Since  the  last  Annual  Meeting  the  Society  has  lost  by  death 
two  of  the  veterans  among  the  Ordinar}^  Members — Mr.  P.  N. 
Trebeck  in  his  82nd,  and  the  Hon.  P.  G.  King,  M.L.C.,  in  his 
86  th  year. 

Prosper  Nicholas  Trebeck  was  born  in  Calcutta  in  1823;  and 
after  some  time  spent  in  England,  came  out  to  Sydney  in  the 
year  1841.  During  his  subsequent  long  residence  in  Australia, 
he  was  actively  identified  with  the  great  sheep  and  cattle  indus- 
tries, either  as  a  squatter  or  in  business.  His  experiences  as  a 
pastoralist  in  Victoria  at  the  time  of  the  gold  discoveries,  when 
•the  energies  of  the  employer  of  labour  were  paralysed  by  the 
desertion  of  his  men,  were  of  a  very  eventful  character.  In  the 
3'ear  1863  Mr.  Trebeck  came  to  reside  in  Sydney,  and  in  1875  he 
took  an  active  part  in  raising  a  large  sum  of  money  to  further 
the  pioneering  efforts  of  the  late  Mr.  T.  S.  Mort  to  start  an  export 
trade  in  frozen  meat.  As  a  public-spirited  citizen  he  took  a 
keen  interest  in  various  other  important  organisations  in  this 
State  which  have  for  their  object  the  development  of  our  major 
primary  industries.  For  some  years  he  was  President  of  the 
Animals'  Protection  Society,  in  which  he  took  a  very  enthusiastic 
interest.  Mr.  Trebeck  became  a  Member  of  the  Linnean  Society 
of  New  South  Wales  in  the  year  1883.  In  1887  he  w^-is  elected 
a  Member  of  the  Council,  of  which  he  was  still  a  Member  at  the 
time  of  his  death.     From  1898  until  his  retirement  from  active 


PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS.  3 

business  life  in  August,  1901,  he  performed  very  efficiently  the 
duties  of  Hon.  Treasurer,  in  succession  to  the  Hon.  Dr.  Norton. 
During  this  period  Sir  William  Macleay's  scheme  for  the  endow- 
ment of  Bacteriological  research  was  successfully  put  into  work- 
ing order;  and  as  such  matters  as  the  appointment  of  a  Bacteri- 
ologist and  the  equipment  and  maintenance  of  a  bacteriological 
laboratory  have  a  financial  aspect,  the  enlargement  of  the 
Society's  sphere  of  operations  at  this  time  was  not  without 
additional  responsibility  for  the  Hon.  Treasurer. 

Mr.  Trebeck  was  a  most  valuable  Member  of  the  Council,  and 
it  is  becoming  that  the  Society's  obligations  to  him  should  be 
officially  recognised.  His  experience  and  knowledge  of  finance 
were  freely  placed  at  the  Society's  disposal  at  all  times.  And 
now  that  the  Society  has  such  large  pecuniary  interests  at  stake, 
the  inclusion  in  the  Council  of  a  fair  proportion  of  Members  of  the 
type  of  Mr.  Trebeck  is  a  very  necessary  and  important  factor  in 
the  successful  management  of  the  Society's  financial  affairs. 

Mr.  Trebeck's  attendance  at  the  Meetings  was  exemplary;  and 
his  interest  in  Science,  as  well  as  in  the  welfare  of  the  Society, 
was  maintained  to  the  last.  He  was  present  at  the  Council 
Meeting  in  December,  in  his  customary  cheerful  mood,  and 
without  any  unusual  premonition  of  the  heart-failure  which  a 
few  days  later  (on  December  26th,  1904),  and  at  short  notice? 
ended  his  long  and  honourable  career. 

Few,  if  any,  Australian  families  have  had  so  lengthy  and  so 
honourable  a  connection  with  the  country  as  that  of  which  Philip 
Gidley  King  was  a  member.  His  grandfather,  Captain  P.  G. 
King,  served  under  Captain  Phillip,  founded  the  Colon}^  of 
Norfolk  Island,  and  subsequently  filled  the  important  position  of 
Third  Governor  of  New  South  Wales  under  very  difficult  con- 
ditions but  in  a  manner  which  must  continue  to  demand  the 
cordial  approval  of  posterity. 

His  father,  Rear-Admiral  Philip  Parker  King,  was  born  at 
Norfolk  Island  in  1793,  and  entered  the  Navy  in  1807.  He  is 
well  known  as  the  officer  entrusted  with  the  important  work  of 


4  PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS. 

completing  Captcain  Flinders'  survey  of  the  coast  of  New  Holland 
(1818-22):  and  at  a  later  date  as  the  Commander  of  an  Expedition 
appointed  to  carry  on  important  survey  work  on  the  coasts  of 
South  America  (1826-30).  Captain  King's  Narratives  of  these 
Yo3'ages  are  still  valuable  works  of  reference.  He  was  a 
zoologist  of  no  mean  order,  and  is  deserving  of  great  credit  for 
the  hearty  encouragement  he  always  afforded  to  those  interested 
in  collecting,  and  to  Allan  Cunningham  in  particular.  On  his 
retirement  from  the  navy.  Captain  King  returned  to  Australia; 
and  undertook  the  management  of  the  Australian  Agricultural 
CoQipany's  affairs,  in  succession  to  Sir  Edward  Parry.  He  died 
in  Sydne}^  in  February,  1856. 

Philip  Gidley  King  was  born  at  Parramatta  in  October,  1817. 
In  the  year  1822,  with  two  of  his  brothers,  he  accompanied  his 
father  to  England.  After  some  years  at  school  he  entered  the 
Royal  Navy;  and  in  December,  1831,  as  a  midshipman,  left 
England  in  H.M.S.  Beagle  upon  that  memorable  circumnavigating 
voyage  with  which  Darwin's  name  and  fame  are  so  indelibly 
associated.  The  Beagle  arrived  in  Port  Jackson  on  January 
12th,  1836,  and  upon  her  departure  at  the  end  of  the  month, 
"  Mr.  King  remained  with  his  father  at  Sydney."*  In  his 
'Journal,'  Darwin  mentions,  in  connection  with  his  return 
journey  from  Bathurst,  that  :  "  On  the  road  to  Sydney  I  spent 
a  very  pleasant  evening  with  Captain  King  at  Dunheved  " 
(p. 443).  After  his  retirement  from  the  navy,  Philip  Gidley 
King  soon  became  actively  engaged  in  the  great  pastoral  industry 
in  connection  with  stations  in  Victoria,  in  the  Murrumbidgee 
District,  and  afterwards  in  the  Hunter  Paver  District.  In  1842, 
he  entered  the  service  of  the  Australian  Agricultural  Compan}-; 
and  still  later  became  the  first  General  Superintendent  of  the 
Peel  River  Land  and  Mineral  Company,  a  connection  which  was 
maintained  for  more  than  half  a  century  and  up  till  the  time  of 
his  death. 

*  Narrative  of  the  Surveying  Voyages  of  H.M.SS.  Adventure  and  Beagle. 
Vol.ii.  Proceedings  of  the  Second  Expedition.  By  Captain  R.  Fitzroy 
(p.20). 


PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS.  5 

Mr.  King  was  an  Original  Member  of  the  Societ}^  and  joined 
in  1874.  He  resigned  in  1877;  but  again  renewed  his  Member- 
ship in  1880.  For  six  years  (1881-86)  he  was  a  Member  of  the 
Council,  and  used  his  best  endeavours  to  forward  the  interests 
of  the  Societ}^  He  was  present  at  the  dedication  of  this  Hall 
in  October,  1885,  and  his  portrait  appears  in  the  group  photo- 
graphed upon  the  occasion  of  the  unveiling  of  the  bust  of  Sir 
William  Macleay  in  June,  1889.  But  during  recent  years  his 
increasing  age  deprived  him  of  the  pleasure  of  continuing  an 
active  interest  in  the  Society's  work. 

Mr.  King's  knowledge  of  the  history  of  settlement  in  Australia, 
his  inheritance  of  family  documents  and  relics  of  the  greatest 
interest,  and  his  own  long  connection  with  public  and  other 
affairs  made  him  a  very  interesting  personage.  But  to  his  other 
qualifications  there  was  superadded  an  interest  in  Science,  which 
was  kindled  by  his  intercourse  with  Darwin,  and  stimulated  by 
the  development  of  that  illustrious  naturalist's  scientific  work. 
On  one  occasion  Mr.  King  thus  referred  to  his  reminiscences  of 
Darwin  : — 

"  As  a  young  man  I  had  the  honour  of  serving  in  the  Royal 
Navy  under  Admiral  Fitzroy  ....  and  whilst  so  serving 
I  was  the  cabin  mate  of  the  great  man  who  has  recently  passed 
away,  and  of  whose  memory  I  cherish  the  very  highest  regard. 
When  I  had  the  honour  of  knowing  Mr.  Darwin  we  were  both 
young  men,  though  he  was  my  senior  by  several  3'ears. 
With  Mr.  Darwin  I  have  ranged  amongst  the  orange  groves  of 
Bahia  and  Botafogo;  I  have  explored  the  coral  rocks  of  the 
Abrolhos  and  the  South  Pacific;  I  have  been  tossed  and  tumbled 
about  on  the  fearful  tempestuous  seas  off  Cape  Horn — have 
trod  the  glaciers  in  the  Straits  of  Magellan — have  ridden  amongst 
the  wild  Patagonians,  and  fished  in  his  company  with  the  lowest 
order  of  created  man,  the  wretched  inhabitants  of  Terra  del 
Fuego.  In  company  with  Mr.  Darwin  I  have  shot  the  deer,  the 
cavy,  and  the  ostrich  on  the  plains  of  the  Pampas,  witnessing 
the  wonderful  skill  of  the  Gauchos  in  the  use  of  the  bolas  and 


6  PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS. 

the    lasso.       Every  remembrance   of    my  intercourse   with  that 
wonderful  man  burns  like  a  lighted  lamp."* 

Mr.  King  died  at  Sydney  on  5th  August,  1904. 

The  last  published  List  of  Members  was  issued  in  1900.  This 
shows  the  state  of  the  Roll  at  the  end  of  that  year,  and  com- 
prises the  names  of  120  Ordinary  Members.  During  the  interval 
of  four  years,  forty- three  additional  members  were  elected. 
After  deducting  the  names  of  those  who  have  been  lost  to  the 
Society  by  death  or  resignation  from  the  total  of  1G3,  there 
remain  upon  the  Roll  the  names  of  31  Members  whose  subscrip- 
tions are  in  arrears  for  two  years  and  upwards,  and  who  have 
made  no  response  to  the  usual  reminders  issued  from  time  to 
time,  thus  leaving  a  balance  of  about  110  Members  who  are 
effective  or  not  beyond  hope  in  this  respect. 

Of  the  110  Ordinary  Members,  16  reside  in  the  countr}',  10 
in  other  States  (Queensland,  Victoria,  Tasmania  and  New 
Zealand),  four  in  Europe,  and  three  in  Honolulu,  leaving  a  balance 
of  about  77  resident  in  the  metropolitan  area.  B}'  wa}'  of  com- 
parison, it  is  interesting  to  know  that  the  Hon.  Treasurer's  book 
shows  that  when  the  Society  was  founded,  subscriptions  were 
received  from  102  Original  Members  during  the  interval  of  less 
than  three  months  between  the  preliminary  Meeting  of  Novem- 
ber 5th,  1874,  and  the  First  General  Meeting  of  January  11th, 
1875.  Before  the  close  of  the  Session,  55  additional  Members 
were  enrolled,  giving  a  total  of  157  effective  Members  for  the 
first  year  of  the  Society's  scientific  career. 

Thirty  years  ago  the  number  of  men  of  science  in  New  South 
Wales  was  very  limited.  The  Universit}^  was  only  partially 
developed  on  the  scientific  side,  and  not  at  all  on  the  medical 
side.  Our  Museums,  and  the  State  Departments  whose  opera- 
tions need  to  be  conducted  mainly  by  scientific  men,  were  similarly 
more  or  less  undeveloped.  Yet  in  looking  over  the  earliest  Lists 
of  the  Members  of  this  Society,  one  cannot  fail  to  notice  the 
names  of  a  very  considerable  number  of  men  of  influence  and 

*  Jouiu.  Proc.  Eoyal  Soc.  N.  8.  Wales,  xvii.  ISSo,  p.216. 


PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS.  7 

standing  in  the  community  in  those  days,  not  particularly  identi- 
fied with  science,  but  who  joined  the  Society  in  recognition  of  its 
claims  for  support  on  the  broad  and  general  grounds  of  the 
encouragement  of  science  as  an  aid  to  the  advancement  of  know- 
ledge. This  fact  is  a  tribute  to  the  personal  influence  exercised 
by  Sir  William  Macleay,  and  to  the  recognition  of  his  capacity 
and  foresight;  but  it  is  also  a  tribute  to  the  public  spirit  which 
animated  no  inconsiderable  section  of  the  educated  members  of 
the  community  at  that  period. 

Since  that  time  Australia  has  developed  considerably,  popula- 
tion has  increased,  scientific  institutions  of  various  kinds  have 
become  more  numerous  and  more  effective,  and  men  of  science 
have  increased  in  numbers.  There  has  been  no  falling  off  in  the 
scientific  vitality  of  the  Society,  but,  on  the  contrary,  a  satisfac- 
tory growth  and  development  in  this  direction.  Nevertheless 
the  fact  remains,  that  the  List  of  Members  lias  not  proportionally 
increased  as  it  might  have  been  expected  to  do.  And  a  falling 
off  is  most  noticeable  in  that  particular  section  of  the  Members 
which  was  numerically  so  strong  at  the  beginning,  namely,  those 
who,  though  not  actively  engaged  in  scientific  work,  were  ready 
to  afford  sympathetic  support  to  a  local  participator  in  the  general 
warfare  against  ignorance;  and  ignorance,  it  is  to  be  remembered, 
is  the  ultimate  drag  upon  the  progress  of  the  human  race. 

Still,  the  Society's  experiences  in  the  respect  mentioned  seem 
not  to  be  altogether  peculiar.  Comparisons  of  last  year's  Lists 
with  those  of  previous  years  will  show  that  every  one  of  the 
senior  Scientific  Societies  of  Australia  can  point  to  one  or  more 
earlier  periods  of  its  history  when  its  membership  was  larger 
than  it  is  at  the  present  time. 

The  Society's  property  has  been  improved  by  connection  with 
the  low-level  sewerage  scheme,  as  contemplated  in  the  Address 
of  last  year;  and  also  by  new  or  renewed  fencing  to  the  extent 
of  half  our  boundary  line,  in  consequence  of  the  sale  and  occupa- 
tion of  the  adjoining  allotment  of  land  which  has  been  vacant 
since  it  ceased  to  be  portion  of  Sir  William  Macleay's  garden. 
The  total  cost  of  these  improvements,  including  fittings,  has  been 
£44  15s.  lOd. 


8  president's  address. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  Hon.  Treasurer  has  again  to 
report  a  debit  balance — on  this  occasion  amounting  to  c£63  2s.  Gd. 
This  is  due  to  a  combination  of  causes,  chief  among  which  are 
pressure  upon  our  publishing  resources,  special  expenditure  on 
.sewerage  connections  and  fencing,  but  particularly  to  the  loss  of 
.£50  per  annum  income,  due  to  the  re-investment  of  the  sum  of 
£5,000  upon  mortgage,  at  a  lower  rate  than  the  Society  had 
previousl}^  received.  The  Council  has  had  this  matter  under 
consideration,  and  being  keenly  alive  to  its  importance,  will, 
doubtless,  adopt  some  plan  to  overcome  this  serious  contingency. 
Should  the  strain  upon  our  publishing  resources  continue,  the 
Council  ma}^,  perhaps,  find  it  worth  wliile  to  follow  the  example 
of  the  Linnean  Society  of  London,  and  initiate  a  "  Donations-in- 
^id-of-publication  "  Fund.^  Usually  when  the  Society  accepts  a 
paper  it  bears  the  entire  cost  of  publication.  But  there  have 
been  some  exceptional  cases,  even  leaving  Sir  William  Macleay  out 
•of  consideration.  On  two  occasions  an  author  has  voluntarily 
defrayed  the  entire  cost  of  one  plate  ;  one  author  has  voluntarily 
provided  process  blocks,  free  of  cost,  for  the  illustration  of  a  series 
of  papers,  altogether  amounting  to  about  seventeen  plates;  and 
still  another  has  spontaneously  contributed  one-half  the  cost 
of  three  plates.  Obviously  if  Members  who  are  in  a  position 
to  do  so  will  continue  to  afford  help  in  this  direction,  it  will 
certainly  materially  assfst  in  relieving  the  stress 

The  attendance  at  the  Meetings  during  the  year  has  been 
<iuite  up  to  the  average.  Thirty-three  papers  w^ere  read,  and 
these  provided  an  ample  range  of  subjects  for  consideration  and 
discussion.  The  concluding  Part  of  the  Proceedings  for  1903, 
and  Parts  1-3  of  the  Proceedings  for  1904  were  published  and 
distributed  during  the  year.  Part  4  will  be  issued  in  about  ten 
days.  The  Volume  for  1904  comprises  871  +xxii.  pages  and  26 
plates. 

A  new  issue  of  the  Rules  and  List  of  Members  is  in  prepara- 
tion, and  will  be  sent  out  with  Part  i.  of  the  Proceedings  for  1  905. 

*  See  Proceedings  115th  Session  (1902-3),  p.79:  116th  Session  (1903-4), 
p.68. 


president's  address.  9 

The  additions  to  the  library  for  the  year  amounted  to  a  total 
of  1,272  (including  157  Vols.)  received  by  gift  or  exchange  from 
202  societies  and  17  individuals. 

At  the  last  Annual  Meeting  I  communicated  to  the  Members 
a  recommendation  from  the  Council  to  the  effect  that  the  sus- 
pension of  the  payment  of  the  entrance  fee  by  new  Members 
should  not  be  continued,  but  that  the  amount  of  the  entrance 
fee  should  be  reduced  from  £2  2s.  to  £\  Is.  for  Ordinary  Mem- 
bers, and  given  up  altogether  for  Associate  Members.  At  a 
Special  General  Meeting  held  on  27th  April,  1904,  the  recom- 
mendation of  the  Council  was  unanimously  confirmed,  and  Rule 
vi.,  as  then  amended, — 

vi.   The  Entrance   Fee  for  Ordinary  Members  shall  be  one 

guinea,  and  the  Annual  Subscription  one  guinea;  and 

for  Associate  'Members  the  Annual  Subscription  shall 

be  one  guinea,  without  Entrance  Fee — 

became  operative  after  confirmation  at  a  Special  General  Meeting 

held  on  25th  May. 

The  Rules  at  present  in  force  antedate  the  period  during  which 
the  Society  has  had  investigators  engaged  in  research  work 
officially  connected  therewith. 

During  the  settlement  of  the  details  of  the  scheme  for  the 
endowment  of  the  Fellowships,  the  Council  determined  that  it 
was  advisable,  as  a  mere  formal  matter,  without  any  retrospective 
significance  whatever,  to  recommend  the  addition  of  a  new  Rule 
enacting  that  Members  officially  engaged  in  research  work  under 
the  Society's  auspices  shall  not  be  eligible  for  election  into  the 
Council.  At  a  Special  General  Meeting  of  Members  held  on 
November  30th,  a  recommendation  upon  the  subject  by  the 
Council  was  offered  for  the  consideration  of  the  Members  and 
unanimously  adopted.      The  new  R-ule,  which  reads — 

Rule  xi.  bis. — It  shall   not  be  competent   for  an  Ordinar}'' 

Member  of  the  Society  to  hold  office  on  the  Council,  and 

as  Macleay  Bacteriologist  or  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow 

simultaneously — 

will  become  operative  forthwith  as  the  result  of  confirmation  hy 

the  Special  General  Meeting  held  this  evening. 


10  president's  address. 

During  the  past  year  the  Maclea}'  Bacteriologist  has  concluded 
his  research  upon  the  bacterium  responsible  for  the  production 
of  the  important  vegetable  gum,  araliin,  by  investigating  the 
nutrition  of  the  micro-organism.  ?Ie  found  that  the  gum  was 
formed  in  the  plant  from  the  wandering  sugars,  levulose  and 
maltose,  and  that  it  could  not  have  a  cellulosic  origin  (the  present 
botanical  theory)  because  the  saccharine  products  of  celluloses 
are  not  only  incapable  of  being  a  source  of  gum,  but  they  actually 
prevent  its  formation.  Arabin,  the  essential  constituent  of  Gum 
Acacia,  is  readily  soluble  in  water,  while  metarabin,  the  funda- 
mental substance  of  Cherry-tree  Gum,  is  insoluble.  The  gums 
obtained  from  certain  kinds  of  trees  are  very  uniform  in  char- 
acter, being  one  or  other  of  these  or  else  a  remarkably  constant 
mixture.  The  reason  of  this  was  found  to  be  that  the  tree  has 
the  power  of  profoundly  altering  the  physiological  activity  of  the 
gum-forming  microbe,  causing  it  to  produce  the  soluble  or  the 
insoluble  variety.  The  research  also  showed  the  possibility  of 
the  organism  being  used  in  the  examination  of  tannins,  some  of 
which  assist,  while  others  hinder,  the  formation  of  slime  upon 
artificial  media. 

In  continuation  of  the  subject  of  the  general  production  of 
vegetable  gums  by  microbes.  Dr.  Greig  Smith  investigated  the 
gum-flux  of  Jlaci'ozamia  spiralis  and  found  that  it  was  caused  by 
a  new  organism. 

The  Sugar-Cane  sometimes  exhibits,  when  cut  longitudinally, 
brilliantly  coloured  red  vascular  strings,  and  microscopical  obser- 
vation shows  that  the  colour  is  due  to  the  large  vessels  being 
filled  with  a  red  slime  or  gum.  Many  bacteria  may  produce 
gum,  but  the  colour  is  imparted  to  it  by  a  particular  microscopic 
mould  which,  when  in  the  cane,  can  only  produce  the  colour 
when  growing  in  gum.  The  most  suitable  gum  appeared  to  be. 
a  white  galactan,  the  product  of  Bac.  pseiidarabiniis.  A  race  of 
the  same  micro-organism  producing  a  yellow  slime  was  isolated 
from  the  Quince. 

Of  considerable  interest  is  the  constancy  or  variation  of  the 
slime-products  of  bacteria,  which  are  recognised  chiefly  by  the 


PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS.  11 

appearance  of  the  colonies  and  growths  upon  nutritive  media. 
The  slime,  which  is  the  matrix  of  the  zoogla^a,  is  remarkably 
constant,  but  variations  in  the  solubility  affecting  the  appearance 
of  the  cultures  and  the  diagnosis  of  the  bacteria  have  been  found. 
The  arabin  and  metarabin  bacterium  is  one  example.  Another 
was  given  in  a  bacterium  which  produced  an  insoluble  galactan 
when  freshly  isolated  from  plant  tissue  and  a  soluble  modification 
after  cultivation. 

In  addition  to  these  researches,  the  Society's  Bacteriologist 
found  a  possible  explanation  for  the  loss  of  colour  of  red  wines 
in  the  presence  of  acetic  bacteria  in  affected  samples. 

Three  students  received  full  courses  of  laboratory  instruction 
during  the  year. 

The  year  190-1:  has  been  an  exceedingly  important  one  in  one 
respect — that  of  getting  the  Linnean  Macleay  Fellowships  Scheme 
into  working  order. 

At  the  concluding  Meeting  of  the  Session  of  1903  an  announce- 
ment was  made  to  the  Society  to  the  effect  that  Sir  William 
Macleay's  executors  had  paid  over  to  the  Society  on  24th  October, 
1903,  the  sum  of  £33,250,  representing  a  bequest  of  £35,000  to 
the  Society,  after  the  deduction  of  5%  as  probate  duty,  for  the 
foundation  and  endowment  of  Research  Fellowships.  At  the 
same  time  it  was  mentioned  that  the  capital  had  been  invested 
at  4%,  and  that  in  consequence  of  the  deduction  for  probate 
duty  and  the  fall  in  the  rate  of  interest  obtainable  at  the  present 
time  as  compared  with  that  to  be  had  upon  a  similar  class  of 
securities  at  the  time  the  Will  was  made,  the  annual  income 
available  would  certainly  be  less  than  Sir  William  contemplated; 
and  that  consequently  some  slight  modification  of  his  plans  would 
be  necessary. 

The  Society's  choice  of  investment  for  the  now  considerable 
sum  of  trust  moneys  which  it  holds  for  general  or  special  purposes 
is  limited  by  the  terms  of  Sir  William's  will  relating  to  the  same 
to  Government  securities  or  to  loans  upon  mortgage  of  real 
estate  in  New  South  Wales  or  upon  deposit  in  approved  Banks 
in    New    South    Wales.       It    is    advantageous,   from    the    Hon. 


12  president's  address. 

Treasurer's  point  of  view,  that  our  investments  should  be  as  few 
in  number  and  for  as  large  amounts  as  circumstances  will  permit. 
After  considering  such  offers  of  investments  in  the  way  of  loans 
upon  mortgage  as  were  available,  the  Council  finally  decided  to 
invest  the  entire  sum  of  £33,250  in  Government  Inscribed  Stock, 
yielding  4  per  cent,  per  annum.  It  may  also  be  mentioned  that 
for  some  years  past  the  Society's  investments  have  yielded  no 
higher  return  than  this. 

Apart  from  the  question  of  a  diminished  income,  it  became 
apparent,  at  an  early  stage  of  the  Council's  consideration  of  the 
terms  of  the  bequest  for  the  endowment  of  Fellowships,  that 
these  offered  some  moot  points  which  it  might  be  unwise  to 
attempt  to  settle  without  legal  advice.  After  much  delibera- 
tion, the  Council  decided  to  seek  the  direction  of  the  Equity 
Court  upon  the  matters  in  question;  and  on  August  26th  the 
Society's  petition  for  advice  came  on  for  hearing  before  Mr. 
Justice  A.  II.  Simpson.  Following  precedent,  it  is  desirable 
for  the  guidance  of  those  who  come  after  us  that  a  record  of 
these  legal  matters  should  appear  in  oar  Proceedings  in  the 
otiicial  terms  while  they  are,  as  nearly  as  possible,  current  events. 
After  a  preliminar}'-  statement  of  matters  relating  to  the  bequest 
and  to  cognate  matters,  the  Society's  petition  proceeded 

Your  petitioners  therefore  humbly  pray  :  — 

1. — That  the  opinion  advice  or  direction  of  Your  Honour  ma}'' 
be  given  to  your  Petitioners  upon  the  following  questions  that 
is  to  say  :  — 

(a)  While  the  income  from  the  said  Fund  is  less  than  .£1600 
per  annum  will  your  Petitioners  be  justified  in  appointing 
four  Fellows  at  a  less  salar}''  than  £400  per  annum  for 
each  Fellow  or  will  your  Petitioners  be  justified  in 
appointing  a  smaller  number  of  Fellows  than  four  ? 
(/>)  Will  the  possessor  of  a  Degree  in  Science  of  Engineering 
who  is  not  also  a  Bachelor  or  Doctor  of  Science  be  eligible 
for  any  of  the  said  Fellowships  ? 
(c)  Will  a  Graduate  in  Science  of  the  other  Universities 
referred  to  in  the  foregoing  by-law  who  has  been  admitted 


president's  address.  13 

ad  eundem  gradum  in  the  said  University  of  Sydney  be 
eligible  for  any  of  the  said  Fellowships  ? 

(d)  Must  the  Candidates  for  the  said  Fellowships  reside  in 
this  State  and  must  they  continue  to  reside  within  the 
State  while  they  hold  such  Fellowships'? 

{e)  Is  it  compulsory  upon  your  Petitioners  to  publish  the 
results  of  the  work  and  investigation  of  the  said  Fellows 
with  the  proceedings  of  the  said  Society  in  detail  or  may 
your  Petitioners  publish  the  said  results  in  abstract  or 
partly  in  abstract  and  arrange  for  the  publication  thereof 
in  extenso  or  partly  in  abstract  and  partly  in  extenso 
elsewhere  as  suggested  in  paragraph  11  hereof. 

(/*)  If  it  is  compulsory  upon  your  petitioners  to  publish  these 
results  in  extejiso  must  your  petitioners  publish  in  each 
year  the  results  o'f  work  and  investigation  contributed  in 
that  year  1 

(g)  If  it  is  compulsor}^  upon  the  said  Society  to  publish  the 
said  results  in  detail  with  the  proceedings  of  the  said 
Society  will  your  petitioners  be  justified  in  using  portion 
of  the  income  from  unawarded  Fellowships  towards 
the  expense  of  publishing  the  said  results  1  . 
2. — That  your  Petitioners  may  have  such  further  or  other 
relief  as  the  nature  of  the  case  may  require. 

In  the  Supreme  Court  j 
of  New  South  Wales    I  No.  1.374/'04. 

in  Equity.  ) 

In  the  Matter  of  the  trusts  of  the  will  of  Sir  William 
Macleay  deceased  and  in  the  matter  of  the  Trusts  affect- 
ing a  fund  of  thirty  live  thousand  pounds  bequeathed 
by  the  said  Will 

and  in  the  matter  of  the  Trustee  Act  1898. 
Friday  the  twenty  sixth  day  of  August  one  thousand  nine 
hundred  and  four. 
Upon  the  petition  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
for  the  opinion  advice  or  direction  of  the  Honorable  Archibald 


14  PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS. 

Henry  Simpson  Esquire  Chief  Judge  in  Equity  preferred  on  the 
fifth  day  of  August  instant  and  coming  on  to  be  heard  before 
His  Honor  this  day  ivJiereupon  and  upon  hearing  read  the  said 
petition  and  vpon  hearing  what  was  alleged  by  Mr.  Langer  Owen 
of  Counsel  for  the  said  Petitioners  His  Honor  is  of  ojnnion  that, 

(a)  The  Council  of  the  said  Linnean  Society  of  New  South 

Wales  will  be  justified  in  appointing  three  Fellows  onl}'' 
with  a  salary  of  four  hundred  pounds  per  annum  until 
the  income  from  the  fund  in  the  said  petition  mentioned 
is  sufficient  to  pa}'-  to  four  Fellows  the  full  salary  of  four 
hundred  pounds  per  annum. 

(b)  The  possessor  of  a  degree  in  science  of  Engineering  in  the 

University  of  Sydney  who  is  not  also  a  Bachelor  or  Doctor 
of  Science  will  not  be  eligible  for  any  of  the  Fellowships 
in  the  said  petition  mentioned. 

(c)  A  graduate  in  Science  of  the  other  Universities  referred 

to  in  the  by-laws  in  the  said  petition  mentioned  who  has 
been  admitted  ad  eundem  gradnm  in  the  University  of 
Sydney  in  the  said  petition  mentioned  will  not  be  eligible 
for  any  of  the  said  Fellowships. 
{d)  The  Candidates  for  the  said   Fellowships  must  bona  fide 

reside  within  the  State  of  New  South  Wales. 
{e)  The  Council  of  the  said  Society  should  publish  the  results 
of  the  work  and  investigations  of  the  said  Fellows  with 
the  proceedings  of  the  said  Society  with  such  fulness  as 
the  said  Council  in  their  discretion  think  fit  having  regard 
to  the  income  of  the  said  Society  available  for  that  purpose 
but  it  is  not  necessary  that  such  results  should  be  pub- 
lished in  the  year  during  which  they  are  communicated 
to  the  said  Societ}-. 
(/)  The  income  from  unawarded  Fellowships  should  be  accumu- 
lated until  the  said  fund  is  sufficient  to  produce  an  income 
of  one  thousand  six  hundred  pounds  per  annum. 
And  His  Honor  doth  order  that  it  be  referred  to  the  Master  in 
Equity  to  tax  and  certify  the  costs  of  the  said  petitioners  of  and 
incidental  to  this  petition  as  between  solicitor  and  client.     And 


PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS.  15 

that  the  said  costs  when  so  taxed  and  certified  be  paid  out  of  tlie 
income  of  the  said  fund.  And  all  parties  are  to  be  at  liberty  to 
apply  as  they  may  be  advised. 

At  an  early  stage,  too,  the  Council  entered  into  communica- 
tion with  the  Senate  of  the  University,  with  the  object  of 
securing  its  co-operation  in  giving  effect  to  the  Fellowship 
scheme.  The  question  of  the  scientific  environment  of  the 
Fellows  is  a  most  important  one.  It  is  clear  from  the  terms  of 
the  bequest  that  Sir  William  contemplated  the  possibility  of 
Fellows  being  able  to  engage  in  research  work  while  keeping 
directly  in  touch  with  the  Universit}'. 

In  response  to  the  Council's  appeal,  the  Senate  courteousl}' 
approved  of  the  admission  of  Linnean  Macleay  Fellows  to  the 
University  laboratories  upon  the  footing  and  terms  of  Research 
Students.  The  Senate  was  also  good  enough  to  authorise  the 
Professorial  Board  to  draw  up  a  series  of  regulations  to  be 
observed  by  Research  Students;  and  after  due  consideration 
these  were  adopted  by  the  Senate. 

Another  necessary  preliminary  has  been  dealt  with  by  the 
Council,  whose  deliberations  upon  the  matter  were  considerably 
lightened  by  the  aid  rendered  by  an  advisory  Sub-Committee — 
namely,  the  preparation  and  adoption  of  a  set  of  Regulations  for 
the  guidance  of  Candidates  for  Fellowships  as  well  as  of  Fellows. 

As  soon  as  the  various  preliminary  matters,  to  which  I  have 
now  adverted,  were  settled,  the  Council  found  itself  in  a  position 
to  offer  three  Fellowships  without  further  delay.  The  necessary 
announcements  were  accordingly  made  at  the  Monthly  Meeting 
of  the  Societ}'  in  October  last,  and  afterwards  by  advertisement 
in  the  daily  papers;  the  object  being  that  the  question  of  appoint- 
ment might  be  settled  by  the  end  of  the  year,  and  the  way  pre- 
pared for  the  successful  Candidate  or  Candidates,  if  any,  to  enter 
formally  upon  active  work  at  the  beginning  of  the  April  quarter 
of  1905. 

In  response  to  the  Council's  offer,  five  applications  (of  which 
one  was  informal)  were  received.  After  due  consideration  of 
these,    in    conjunction    with    an    advisory    Sub-Committee,    the 


IQ  prksident's  address. 

Council  decided  upon  this  occasion  to  make  one  appointment 
only.  I  have  very  much  pleasure  in  taking  the  earliest  oppor 
tunity  of  publicly  announcing;  to  the  Society  the  name  of  the 
successful  applicant  and  the  first  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow — that 
of  Mr.  Harold  Ingemann  Jensen,  B.Sc;  and  of  giving  3-ou  some 
particulars  of  his  qualifications  for  the  position. 

Mr.  Jensen  is  a  native  of  Aarhuus,  Jutland,  Denmark.  He 
was  seven  years  of  age  when  his  family  came  to  Australia,  and 
settled  at  Caboolture  in  Queensland.  He  was  educated  at  the 
State  School,  Caboolture,  under  Mr.  P.  Z.  McGurk,  and  from 
that  school  won  a  scholarship  to  the  Brisbane  Grammar  School, 
where  the  remainder  of  his  school  education  was  gained  under 
Mr.  R.  H.  Roe.  After  passing  the  Sydney  University  Senior 
Examination  he  was  appointed  Meteorological  Assistant  at  the 
Kosciusko  Observatory,  and  spent  the  winter  of  1898  at  the 
summit  of  the  mountain.  In  1899  he  commenced  the  Science 
Course  at  the  Sydney  University,  and  distinguished  himself  at 
the  first  year  examinations.  He  was  unable  to  continue  his 
University  studies  for  the  following  two  years,  but  resumed  them 
in  1902.  At  the  end  of  that  year  he  obtained  first-class  honours 
in  Biology,  Chemistry  and  Geology,  and  won  the  Caird  Scholar- 
ship for  Chemistry  and  the  Deas-Thomson  Scholarship  for  Geology. 
In  his  third  year  course  in  1903  he  graduated  with  first-class 
honours  in  the  subject  specially  selected  for  his  degree  — Geology 
including  Palaeontology,  and  also  gained  second-class  honours  in 
the  additional  subjects  of  Chemistry  and  Mineralogy.  In  1904 
he  was  appointed  Junior  Demonstrator  in  Chemistry  and  Geology, 
in  which  capacity  he  was  acting  at  the  time  of  his  election  to  a 
Macleay  Fellowship. 

In  spite  of  the  arduous  nature  of  his  University  studies,  iVIr. 
Jensen  found  time  for  a  considerable  amount  of  scientific  research. 
In  June,  1902,  he  contributed  a  paper  on  the  "  Possible  Relation 
between  Sunspot  Minima  and  other  Volcanic  Eruptions  "  to  the 
Royal   Society  of   New   South   Wales.*     His   opinions   aroused 


Journ.  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xxxvi.  42. 


president's  address.  17 

considerable  interest  among  European  scientists;  and  by  a 
curious  coincidence  views  almost  identical  with  Mr.  Jensen's  were 
communicated  to  the  Royal  Society  of  London  by  Sir  Norman 
Lockyer  at  the  same  time  as  that  when  Mr.  Jensen's  paper  was 
read  in  New  South  Wales,  the  two  observers  having  arrived  at 
similar  conclusions  after  working  quite  independently  of  one 
another.  In  1903  Mr.  Jensen  contributed  to  the  Linnean 
Society  of  New  South  Wales  a  paper  on  "The  Geology  of  the 
Glasshouse  Mountains  and  District,  Queensland,"  an  original 
paper  of  much  interest  and  value.*  In  June,  1904,  Mr.  Jensen 
read  before  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  a  second 
paper  entitled  "Possible  Relation  between  Sunspots  and  Volcanic 
and  Seismic  Phenomena  and  Climate,"  in  which  the  position 
taken  up  by  him  in  his  former  paper  was  much  strengthened. 
In  it  he  argues  for  two  weather  cycles,  as  well  as  earthquake  and 
v^olcanic  cycles,  a  short  cycle  of  11  years  and  a  long  one  of  35 
years.  This  paper  is  in  course  of  publication.  In  November, 
1904,  Mr.  Jensen  also  read  before  the  Linnean  Society  of  New 
South  Wales  a  second  paper  entitled  "  Contribution  to  a  Know- 
ledge of  Australian  Foraminifera.  Parti.,"  which  will  appear  in 
the  forthcoming  Part  4  of  the  Proceedings  for  1904. 

Mr.  Jensen  has  always  taken  an  active  part  in  the  debates  at 
the  University  Union,  and  has  proved  himself  an  active  and 
enthusiastic  member  of  the  Naturalists'  Club  and  of  the  Uni- 
versity Science  Society.  It  is  confidently  expected  that  he  will 
have  a  brilliant  career  as  a  scientific  worker. 

I  may  also  add  that  Mr.  Jensen  proposes  to  begin  his  important 
work  by  devoting  his  attention  to  the  study  of  the  natural 
history  of  the  volcanic  rocks,  and  particularly  of  the  trachytes 
of  Eastern  Australia,  and  cognate  matters.  On  your  behalf  and 
in  the  name  of  the  Society  I  have  very  great  pleasure  in  cordially 
wishing  Mr.  Jensen  a  most  successful  career. 

The  University  of  Melbourne  has  furnished  the  Society  with 
a    copy    of    the    Regulations    for   the    Research    Prize    recently 

*  Proceedings,  xxviii.  p. 842. 


18  president's  address. 

endowed  by  Mr.  David  Syme,  of  Melbourne;  with  a  request  that 
publicity  may  be  given  to  the  project,  as  the  Prize  will  be  open 
to  all  persons  resident  in  Australia  during  five  of  the  preceding 
seven  years,  whether  Members  of  the  Melbourne  University  or 
not,  with  the  exception  of  Professors  and  Heads  of  Govern- 
ment Departments.  The  Prize  will  be  known  us  the  "David 
Syme  Research  Prize";  it  will  consist  of  a  medal  and  of  the 
sum  of  one  hundred  pounds,  and  it  will  be  offered  for  the  first 
time  in  March,  1906,  and  annually  thereafter.  It  will  be 
awarded  to  the  Candidate  who,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Examiners, 
shall  submit  the  best  Thesis  based  upon  original  work  in  Biology, 
Chemistry,  Geolog}^  or  Natural  Philosophy,  preference  being 
t^iven  to  original  research  connected  with  the  material  and  Indus- 
trial  development  of  Australia,  other  things  being  equal.  The 
endowment  of  the  prize  is  provided  for  by  Mr.  Syme's  munifi- 
cent gift  of  the  Slim  of  £3000  to  the  University  of  Melbourne. 
It  will  be  the  most  valuable  prize  of  the  kind  available  in  Aus- 
tralia, and  should  afford  a  very  desirable  stimulus  to  the  prose- 
cution of  original  investigations  in  this  part  of  the  world. 

One  of  the  drawbacks  of  Australia's  geographical  isolation  is 
a  tendency  in  some  directions  to  lag  behind  in  the  race  of  pro- 
gress through  lack  of  knowledge  of  what  is  transpiring  or  has 
transpired  abroad;  and  so  to  fail  to  profit  by  the  experience,  or 
to  reach  the  ideals  of  older  but  distant  countries.  An  example 
seems  to  be  offered  just  now  by  the  neighbouring  State  of  Queens- 
land. On  the  plea  of  economy  and  the  necessity  for  retrench- 
ment, the  Government  has  taken  action  with  regard  to  the 
Queensland  Museum  which  has  not  only  resulted  in  a  shrinkage 
of  its  resources,  but  which  may  also  bring  about  the  compulsory 
retirement  of  the  Curator,  Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis,  who  has  been  so 
long  and  so  creditably  connected  with  it.  The  welfare  of  the 
Queensland  Museum  is  thus  menaced,  and  in  times  which  are 
critical  for  the  well-being  of  the  fauna  and  flora.  Such  a  policy 
is  in  reality  a  retrograde  step,  opposed  to  the  principles  and 
practice  of  what  is  known  as  the  modern  museum  idea.  The 
legislators  of  Queensland  have  felt  called  upon  to  adopt  this  policy 


president's  address.  19 

of  retrenchment  under  a  stress  of  circumstances  which  is  known 
to  have  been  severe;  and  their  action,  so  far  as  the  Museum  is 
concerned,  thus  calls  merely  for  criticism  which  is  dispassionate  and 
not  wholly  unsympathetic.  But  the  point  which  arrests  attention 
is  that  this  action  seems  to  have  been  taken  from  a  standpoint 
which  has  advanced  little  beyond  the  ancient  idea  that  a  Museum 
is  onl}^  a  glorified  sort  of  curiosity  shop.  Another  important 
matter  also  seems  not  to  have  been  realised,  namel}',  that  the 
a,rrested  development  of  the  Queensland  Museum  would  mean  a 
standing  invitation  to  foreign  Museums  to  send  their  representa- 
tiv^es  or  to  subsidise  local  agents,  to  obtain  specimens  and 
collections,  since  a  paralysed  local  Museum  would  be  unable  to 
accumulate  satisfactory  duplicate  stores  for  exchange  purposes. 

To  use  the  words  of  the  late  Dr.  Brown  Goode,*  a  public 
museum  is  not  only  "  an'institution  for  the  preservation  of  those 
works  which  best  illustrate  the  phenomena  of  nature  and  the 
works  of  man,  and  the  utilization  of  these  for  the  increase  of 
knowledge  and  for  the  culture  and  enlightenment  of  the  people." 
It  is  also  a  bureau  of  information  "to  aid  the  occasional  inquirer, 
be  he  a  labouring  man,  schoolbo}'-,  journalist,  public  speaker  or 
savant,  to  obtain,  without  cost,  exact  information  upon  any  subject 
related  to  the  specialties  of  the  institution"  (o/?.  cit.  pp.196,  200). 

Queensland  has  not  yet  taken  upon  herself  the  financial  and 
other  responsibilities  of  a  Universit3^  Her  present  educational 
agencies,  therefore,  do  not  occupy  the  entire  field  so  completel}'- 
that  she  can  afford  to  cripple  the  usefulness  and  arrest  the 
development  even  of  one  of  them — and  that  the  only  one  of  its 
its  kind.  One  properly  manned,  equipped  and  maintained  public 
Museum — one  bureau  of  information  of  an  altogether  special 
character — is  certainly  not  an  extravagant  provision  for  a  State 

*  Late  Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  in  charge  of 
the  United  States  National  Museum,  and  an  acknowledged  authority  on  all 
matters  relating  to  Museums.  The  Smithsonian  Institution  has  issued  a 
Memorial  Vokmie,  comprising  the  record  of  a  Memorial  Meeting  of  scientific 
men,  together  with  a  selection  of  Goode's  papers  on  Museums,  and  on  the 
history  of  science  in  America;  which  is  of  the  greatest  value  to  all  interested 
in  Museums.  ( Annual  Report  of  the  Board  of  Regents  for  the  year  ending 
June,  1897  :  Report  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum.    Part  ii.). 


20  president's  address. 

with  a  population  of  over  half  a  million;  and  having  the  examples 
and  standards  set  by  the  other  Australian  States  to  follow. 

The  Aborigines  are  becoming  sophisticated,  and  are  steadily 
losing  ground.  Droughts,  bush  fires,  and  civilisation  with  its 
concomitants  are  })ringing  about  profound  changes  in  a  flora 
and  fauna  of  which  portions  are  of  tropical  richness  and  excep- 
tional interest.  What  prospect  is  there  of  rescuing  anything 
considerable  from  the  general  wreckage,  in  the  absence  of  an 
adequate  Museum  staff,  alert  and  vigilant,  and  read}^  to  enlist 
all  available  enthusiasts  as  allies  ^  If  the  only  public  Museum 
of  a  State  misses,  by  neglect,  the  opportunity  of  being  the  best 
and  most  satisfactory  exponent  extant  of  the  natural  and  other 
productions  of  that  particular  State,  which  come  Avithin  its 
scope,  then  the  Museum  as  well  as  the  State  must  be  regarded 
as  being  in  rather  a  serious  condition.  Brown  Goode,  indeed, 
asserts  that  museums  provide  the  test  of  the  status  of  civilised 
communities.  He  says: — "The  degree  of  civilisation  to  which 
any  nation,  city,  or  province  has  attained  is  best  shown  by  the 
character  of  its  public  museums  and  the  liberality  with  which 
they  are  maintained  "  {op.  cit.  p. 240). 

It  is  earnestly  to  be  hoped,  therefore,  that  the  efforts  of  the 
scientific  men  of  Brisbane  to  secure  the  co-operation  of  enlightened 
men  in  Queensland  and  in  the  other  States,  and,  thus  reinforced, 
to  memorialise  the  Premier  of  Queensland  upon  the  subject  of 
Mr.  De  Vis'  retention  in  office  may  be  successful.  Also  that  the 
Government  may  be  led  to  realise  that  any  action  which  results 
in  starving  the  State  Museum  and  cramping  its  usefulness  is  the 
poorest  sort  of  economy,  since  it  is  discounting  the  future  upon 
terms  which  cannot  but  prove  to  be  ruinous,  from  the  scientific 
standpoint.  Mr.  De  Yis'  knowledge  of  the  natural  history  of 
Queensland,  and  his  unrivalled  experience  are  of  so  special  a 
character  that  they  recommend  him  to  the  most  favourable  con- 
sideration when  the  question  of  retirement  at  the  statutory  age 
of  60  presents  itself.  Scientific  men  are  not  very  numerous 
in  a  young  State,  and  therefore  they  need  to  be  encouraged  and 
not  lightly  to  be  put  aside. 

In  response  to  a  request  from  the  Consul  for  Denmark,  who 
has  been  moved   to  take   action    under   instructions    from    the 


president's  address.  21 

Danish  Grovernment,  on  behalf  of  the  Danish  Committee,  I  have 
much  pleasure  in  directing  your  attention  to,  and  in  bespeaking 
your  sympathy  with  a  movement  to  perpetuate  the  memory  and 
continue  the  work  begun  by  the  late  Professor  Niels  R.  Finsen, 
of  Copenhagen,  which  is  rapidly  becoming  world-wide  in  char- 
acter. In  a  matter  of  this  kind  science  has  no  international 
frontiers.  A  most  influential  Central  Committee  of  over  1400  is 
organising  the  movement;  and  Sub-Committees  have  been  formed 
in  England  and  other  European  countries,  and  in  the  United 
States.  In  this  way  it  is  hoped  that  a  fund  may  be  raised  for 
the  endowment  of  the  Finsens  (Light)  Institute  at  Copenhagen. 
Finsen  is  Denmark's  contribution  to  the  ranks  of  benefactors  of 
the  human  race,  like  Jenner  and  Lister,  Pasteur,  Koch  and  many 
others — men  whose  nationality  becomes  merged  in  a  universal 
citizenship  accorded  by  humanity  at  large. 

Prof.  Finsen  died  at  Copenhagen  on  September  24th,  1904,  at 
the  early  age  of  43.  Soon  after  his  appointment  as  lecturer  on 
anatomy  at  the  University  of  Copenhagen  he  began  to  investigate 
the  influence  of  light  on  living  organisms.  In  1893  he  developed 
his  treatment  of  small-pox  by  red  light,  based  upon  the  realisa- 
tion of  the  fact  that  inflammation  and  the  danger  of  scars  can  be 
prevented  if  the  small-pox  patient  is  shielded  from  the  blue,  violet 
and  ultra-violet  rays,  since  it  is  exposure  to  these  which  causes 
irritation  of  the  skin  and  favours  the  growth  of  certain  unde- 
sirable microbes.  Then  followed  his  able  investigation  of  the 
bactericidal  power  of  the  ultra-violet  rays,  which  in  1895  resulted 
in  the  application  of  the  resulting  knowledge  to  the  successful 
treatment  of  lupus  patients. 

The  therapeutic  possibilities  of  the  light  treatment  are  very 
far  from  exhausted.  Already  there  are  between  twenty  and 
thirt}^  special  light  institutions  in  different  parts  of  Europe,  and 
as  far  as  possible  the  method  of  treatment  has  been  adopted  in 
hospitals  generally  where  necessary. 

Finsen  was  a  man  of  noble  qualities,  of  single  and  unselfish 
aims,  and  of  high  scientific  attainments,  who  was  esteemed  and 
beloved  by  all  who  had  to  do  with  him.      His  scientific  work 


22  PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS. 

possible  only  as  an  heroic  struggle  against  ill-health  and  at  the 
cost  of  the  greatest  self-denial  and  care. 

Further  particulars  of  the  movement  will  be  found  in  recent 
issues  of  the  British  Medical  and  other  journals;  and  the  Consul 
for  Denmark  will  be  glad  to  aftbrd  information  and  his  co-operation. 

The  subject  of  the  erection  of  a  statue,  as  a  permanent 
memorial  of  Sir  Joseph  Banks,  has  been  warmly  discussed  in  the 
columns  of  the  newspapers  during  the  last  few  montlis.  It  has 
also  been  brought  under  the  notice  of  the  Society  by  the  pro- 
moter." Sir  Joseph  Banks'  claims  upon  the  gratitude  of  posterity 
appeal  to  most  sections  of  the  community — among  others  to 
scientific  men,  who  are  thus  interested  in  the  subject  of  the  pro- 
posed memorial. 

The  correspondence  in  the  newspapers  unmistakably  revealed 
some  lack  of  exact  knowledge  respecting  Sir  Joseph  Banks  on 
the  part  of  some  of  the  writers  who  took  part  in  it.  This  point 
is  not  without  interest  because  it  indicates  how  large  a  share  an 
actual  want  of  authentic  information — which,  so  far  as  Australia 
is  concerned,  is  more  or  less  pardonable — has  had  to  do  with  the 
Empire's  delayed  appreciation  of  one  of  its  great  men. 

It  is  well-known  that  the  younger  Linnaeus  instituted  the 
genus  Banksia  for  the  reception  of  the  native  honeysuckles  which 
first  came  under  the  notice  of  Banks  and  Solanderat  Botany  Bay 
and  elsewhere,  during  the  voyage  of  the  Endeavour.  Perhaps  it 
is  not  so  well  known  how  Linnteus  himself  desired  to  see  the 
term  applied.  Writing  to  his  friend,  John  Ellis,  of  London,  in 
1771,  he  said: — "I  beseech  you,  by  your  warm  regard  for  me, 
and  your  sense  of  what  is  just  and  fair,  to  persuade  Solander  to 
send  me  some  specimens  of  plants  from  Banksia  or  Terra  aiis- 
tralis,  that  I  may  have  some  idea  of  the  vegetable  productions  of 
that  unknown  region.  .  .  .  The  newly  found  country  ought 
to  be  named  Banksia,  from  its  discoverer,  as  America  was  from 
Americus."* 

*  A  Selection  of  the  Correspondence  of  Linnteus  and  other  Naturalists 
from  the  Original  Manuscripts.  By  8ir  James  Edward  Smith,  M.D. ,  F  K.S. , 
President  of  the  Linnean  Society.     Vol.ii.  pp.273,  275(1^21). 


president's  address.  23 

The  adoption  of  a  proposal  so  one-sided  would  certainly  have 
been  somewhat  unfair  to  Captain  Cook.  Scarcely  more  so,  how- 
ever, than  the  position  which  8ir  Waiter  Besant  takes  up  in  his 
ver}'-  interesting  sketch  '  Captain  Cook  '  (English  Men  of  Action 
Series,  1894).  After  enumerating  the  scanty  honours,  according 
with  the  fashion  of  the  time,  that  were  paid  to  the  great  navi- 
gator, he  goes  on  to  say  : — "The  immeasurable  importance  of  the 
gifts  which  Cook  had  bestowed  upon  his  country  was  such  as  to 
require  the  prophetic  gift — the  supreme  wisdom — to  recognise  it; 
and  surely  there  vvas  little  of  that  wisdom  in  the  statesmen  of 
1770.  He  had  given  to  his  country  Australia  and  New  Zealand 
— nothing  less;  he  had  given  to  Great  Britain  Greater  Britain." 

It  is  no  detraction  from  the  merits  of  the  justly  celebrated 
Cook  to  say  that  this  proposition  also  is  one-sided  and  somewhat 
unfair  to  Banks.  The  fundamental  fact  in  the  history  of  Aus- 
tralia as  an  integral  part  of  the  British  Empire  is  —  Cook  and 
Banks,  each  being  the  complement  of  the  other  :  not  Cook  or 
Banks,  as  if  they  had  been  rivals  and  there  were  room  for  insti- 
tuting invidious  comparisons  between  them.  Cook's  discoveries 
made  Greater  Britain  possible;  but  Banks  was  the  antidote  to 
the  unwisdom  of  the  statesmen  of  the  period;  and  his  influence 
more  than  that  of  any  one  else  was  instrumental  in  converting 
possibility  into  actuality.  It  is  no  depreciation  of  Sir  Joseph's 
merits,  that  ev^en  his  influence,  great  and  far-reaching  hs  it  was, 
needed  to  be  fortified  by  a  national  stress  of  circumstances  result- 
ing from  the  necessity  of  finding  a  fresh  outlet  for  the  criminal 
population,  before  the  inertia  of  the  official  mind  could  be  wholly 
overcome. 

Cook's  share  in  the  series  of  historic  transactions  has  not  been 
allowed  to  go  altogether  unappreciated;  because  it  has  been 
recorded  pretty  fully  and  is  well-known.  The  publication  of  the 
'  Voyages,'  of  Kippis'  '  Life,'  of  Besant's  '  Captain  Cook,'  of 
Admiral  Wharton's  '  Cook's  Journal,'  of  the  '  Official  History  of 
New  South  Wales,'  and  especially  of  the  first  volume  of  the 
'  Historical  Records  of  New  South  Wales,'  has  made  known  to 
the  world  almost  all  there  is  to  be  known. 


24 

On  the  otlier  hand,  Banks'  share  has  been  almost  unappreciated 
until  within  the  last  decade.  As  far  as  Australia  is  concerned 
the  apparent  neglect  is  pardonable  since  it  is  attributable  to 
national  ignorance  arising  from  the  want  of  published  information. 
In  the  preface  to  '  Banks'  Journal,'  Sir  Joseph  Hooker  points  out 
that  no  adequate  '  Life  '  has  yet  appeared,  even  though  several 
abortive  attempts  to  accomplish  it  have  been  made.  Sir  Joseph 
Banks  was  President  of  the  Ro3^al  Society  for  fort3''-one  years. 
Nevertheless  Sir  Joseph  Hooker  ^ays  :  "  Great  as  his  services  to 
science  are  known  to  have  been,  these  will  never  be  full}^  realised 
till  his  correspondence  in  the  British  Museum  and  elsewhere 
shall  have  been  thoroughly  searched." 

But  the  tide  has  already  turned.  Among  the  important  factors 
in  producing  this  desirable  reaction  have  been  the  publication  of  Sir 
•Joseph  Hooker's  '  Banks' Journal '  (1896),  and  of  two  Parts  of 
•the  long  delayed  '  Illustrations  of  the  Botany  of  Cook's  Voyage 
in  the  Endeavour'  (Australian  Plants,  Parts  i.-ii.),  recently  issued 
by  the  British  Museum.  But  above  all,  admirers  of  Banks  are 
most  indebted  to  the  Government  of  New  South  Wales,  firstly, 
for  not  missing  the  opportunity  of  purchasing  the  '  Brabourne 
Papers,'  now  known  as  the  'Banks  Papers,'  when  the  opportunity 
offered;  and  secondly,  for  the  commencement  of  an  '  Official 
History,'  but  especially  for  the  publication  of  the  '  Official 
Records.'  Seven  volumes,  covering  the  period  1770  to  1811,  have 
been  published.  But  Sir  Joseph  lived  until  the  year  1820,  so  that 
we  are  still  in  the  dark  about  his  connection  with  Australian 
affairs  during  the  interval  indicated. 

The  'Records,'  however,  are  for  the  historian,  the  specialist 
and  the  student  rather  than  for  the  general  reader.  One  of  the  first 
to  recognise  both  the  importance  of  the  '  Records '  and  the  draw- 
backs from  the  general  reader's  standpoint  was  the  late  Professor 
Morris,  who  b}' his  lectures,  and  also  by  a  projected  work  entitled 
'  Cook  and  his  Companions,'  sought  to  make  known  Australia's 
obligations  to  Sir  Joseph,  and  to  arouse  a  healthy  public  spirit 
in  this  connection.  The  contemplated  book  was  not  quite  ready 
for  the  press  at  the  time  of  Prof.  Morris'  death  in  England;  but 
his  literary  executors  have  the  matter  of  its  publication  in  hand, 


PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS.  25 

and  it  is  hoped  that  the  work  will  be  ready  before  very  long. 
Such  a  book  is  eminently  calculated  to  .foster  the  enlightenment 
of  a  much  larger  circle  of  readers  than  that  to  which  the 
'Records'  can  be  expected  to  appeal. 

Whether  matters  are  sufficiently  advanced  at  the  present  time 
for  the  successful  inauguration  of  a  movement  to  commemorate 
Sir  Joseph  Banks'  eminent  services  to  the  nation,  is  a  question 
not  to  be  settled  definitely  off-hand.  Such  a  movement  would 
need  to  be  in  influential  hands,  to  be  initiated  at  an  appropriate 
time,  and  to  be  organised  on  a  very  broad  basis.  Sir  Joseph's 
interest  in  Australia  was  many-sided  ;  and  an  appropriate 
memorial,  on  anything  higher  than  a  provincial  scale,  is  a  question 
which  concerns  not  only  New  South  Wales  as  the  Mother-State, 
but  the  entire  Commonwealth.  New  Zealand  may  even  claim  a 
sentimental  interest  at  l6ast  in  such  a  movement.  The  erection 
of  a  statue  in  Sydney,  as  a  subordinate  feature  in  such  a  move- 
ment, would  be  an  admirable  idea  as  far  as  it  goes.  Those  who 
bring  a  wide  outlook  to  the  consideration  of  the  subject,  will  per- 
haps decide  that  whatever  else  the  '  Historical  Records '  may  be, 
they  certainly  promise  to  be  a  splendid  tribute  to  the  memory  of 
Sir  Joseph  and  of  greater  import  than  a  statue  alone.  Ministries 
rise  and  fall.  Colonial  Governors  and  Officials  come  and  go,  but 
Sir  Joseph  Banks,  the  Patron  of  Australia  in  the  best  sense  of 
the  term,  still  remains  a  central  figure  of  interest  throughout  the 
series  of  volumes  so  far  published.  From  first  to  last  the  State  has 
legitimately  expended  a  large  sum  of  money  on  the  production 
of  the  '  Records  '  ;  and  when  circumstances  permit,  it  is  to  be 
hoped  that  the  publication  will  be  resumed  and  continued.  In 
the  meantime  the  Government  of  the  State  deserves  great  credit 
and  appreciation  for  its  enterprise  in  taking  the  lead  in  publish- 
ing historical  matters  of  vital  interest,  previously  inaccessible 
and  unknown  except  to  officials  and  to  those  who  could  obtain 
access  to  the  English  State  archives  or  to  private  sources  of  infor- 
mation. 

Before  concluding  my  remarks,  I  should  like  to  take  upon 
myself    the  responsibility  of   offering  the  Society's  hearty  con- 


26  president's  address. 

gratulations  to  Dr.  Woolnough  and  Mr.  Goddard,  both  of  the 
Sydney  University,  upon*  their  return  from  Fiji,  bringing  with 
them  data  and  collections  bearing  upon  the  question  of  the  geo- 
logical history  and  former  geographical  relations  of  the  island, 
which  promise  to  be  of  very  great  interest  and  value.  Members 
will  remember  Dr.  Woolnough's  visit  to  Fiji  in  1901,  and  his 
conclusions  as  to  its  continental  origin,  embodied  in  his  important 
paper  published  in  the  Society's  Proceedings  for  1903.  On  that 
visit  Dr.  Woolnough  was  single-handed.  During  his  second  visit 
he  has  had  the  advantage  of  a  colleague,  Mr.  E.  J.  Goddard,  B.A. 
The  interval  since  their  return  has  been  too  brief  to  allow  of  my 
offering  you  a  more  detailed  account  of  the  work  of  the  expedition 
than  has  been  made  public  already.  By  way  of  the  Rewa  and 
Wainimala  Rivers,  and  a  cross-country  track,  the  party  reached 
Narokorokoyawa,  which  they  made  their  headquarters.  Thence 
excursions  were  made  in  as  many  directions  as  possible.  Not- 
withstanding unavoidable  delays  from  hurricanes  and  floods, 
important  observations  and  extensive  collections  were  made.  It 
will  be  some  time  before  the  complete  results — biological,  geo- 
graphical, and  geological — are  available;  but  these  may  confi- 
dently be  expected  to  yield  substantial  gains  to  science.  As  Mr. 
Goddard  reports  that  an  interloper,  in  the  shape  of  the  mongoose, 
is  ravaging  the  terrestrial  vertebrate  fauna,  a  visit  from  an 
expedition  interested  in  the  land  fauna  of  Fiji  seems  to  have 
been  very  seasonable. 

I  have  to  acknowledge  the  Secretary's  ready  assistance  in  my 
endeavour  to  put  before  you  an  adequate  summary  of  the  Society's 
affairs  during  the  past  eventful  year. 


Dr.  Greig  Smith,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society,  gave 
a  lecture  entitled  "Our  First  Line  of  Defence  against  Microbic 
Attacks,"»illustrated  with  lantern  views.  After  describing  the 
means  of  protection  which  the  organism  has  at  its  disposal  for 
the  destruction  and  especially  the  solution  of  microbes,  such  as 
phagocytosis  and  bacteriolysis,  the  lecturer  explained  the  nature 


treasurer's  statement  and  elections.  27 

of  the  immune  body  and  the  complement,  both  of  which  take 
part  in  bacteriolysis.  Passi^  e  and  active  immunity  were  then 
compared  from  the  standpoint  of  the  animal  cell,  the  differences 
between  the  two  forms  being  thus  clearly  distinguished.  The 
origin  of  natural  immunity  was  traced  to  the  microbes  that 
are  continually  traversing  the  intestinal  mucous  membrane  and, 
while  being  attacked  by  the  immunity  bodies,  cause  the  cells  to 
produce  a  fresh  supply  of  the  latter.  After  illustrating  the 
purely  physical  nature  of  the  "  swallowing "  by  the  mobile 
phagocytes,  the  lecturer  concluded  by  emphasising  the  close 
relationship  between  bacteriolysis  and  digestion. 

The  Hon.  Treasurer  presented  the  balance  sheet  for  the  year 
1904,  which  was  received  and  adopted.  The  Society's  income  for 
the  year  ended  December  31st,  1904,  was  £1,030  Is.  5d.;  the 
expenditure  £1,070  3s.  lid.;  with  a  debit  balance  of  £23  from 
the  previous  year,  leaving  a  debit  balance  of  £63  2s.  6d.  The 
income  of  the  Bacteriological  Department  was  £545  12s.  9d.; 
and  the  expenditure  £566  10s.  7d.;  with  a  credit  balance  of 
£214  12s.  lid.  from  the  previous  year,  leaving  a  credit  balance 
of  £193  15s.  Id.  In  regard  to  the  Macleay  Fellowships'  Account 
(Capital)  the  income  was  £1,069  9s.  Id.;  and  the  expenditure 
£48  19s.  4d.;  leaving  a  credit  balance  of  £1020  9s.  9d.  to  be 
carried  to  Capital  Account. 

No  nominations  of  other  Candidates  having  been  received,  the 
President  declared  the  following  elections  for  the  current  Session 
to  be  duly  made  : — 

President:  Thomas  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S. 

Mkmbers  op  Council  (to  fill  live  vacancies)  :  Prof.  T.  W.  E. 
David,  B.A.,  F.R.S.,  Henry  Deane,  M.A.,  F.L.S.,  M.  Inst.  C.E., 
James  Pv.  Garland,  M.A.,  F.  E.  Grant,  F.L.S.,  Jas.  P.  Hill,  D.Sc, 
F.L.S.,  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  c^-c. 

Auditors  :  Messrs.  Duncan  Carson  and  Edward  G.  W.  Palmer, 
J.P. 

On  the  motion  of  Professor  David,  a  cordial  vote  of  thanks  was 
accorded  to  the  President  for  his  interesting  Address,  and  for  his 
efforts  to  advance  the  Society's  welfare  during  his  term  of  office. 


28 


Mis  o 

aco  ^ 

O    cS    C 

C    43     O 


«rt 


o 

o 

o   , 

1 

o 

o 

o  1 

o 

s 

°i 

t^  ! 

"<*< 

lO 

ci  ; 

^ 

B  :a 


r::  o 

>    .  *  S 


-^^     j^     S-'^'- 


o 
o 

H 

o 
o 
o 

PU 

a 

O 

<! 

< 


^-  O  CO  O  Ci 

«2:: 

C<l  O 

^O 

•J3  & 


PL|    O 


«5     r"     O     Co 
CO     03  C^   jj 

^  I-  ° 

>i    -     -    - 

^     .     .    . 


C5 


<! 

<: 

o 

H 

2 

O 

o 
o 

< 

CO 

O 

< 

.J 
o 
< 


r-:        ^  «^ 

o 

«    ®«=* 

a  j 

oo 

o 

»0  (M 

1 

m        (NO 

c7 

CO   rJ^ 

"^j^' 

CO 

CO 

jaT    :    : 

o 

O         -»a 

•+3              3 

CO        5 

:  o 

Ti       •    O 

QJ            O 

1  <i 

S    !l 

j^sl- 

-*  asQ 

.s:;*^ 

^_     £C    43 

veste 
Aug 
Cred 

13  X    O 

•—    -W    43 

430     ^ 

S     QJ     O 

S    3    fi 

S'^  J 

C           cS 

<5     pq 

;  -^^        o 

05 

05  ; 

1    -         ^ 

Ci 

c: 

^ 

^ 

^  1 

40 

c^ 

!>• 

•=*?                   «^. 

o 

"^-i 

cc 

-* 

CO 

n\ 

it- 

: 

so 

1 

?l  ; 

o 

^ 

S-,    C 

.a  u 

43 

c^Ph    . 

:2 

..  S    • 

>»  S 

J2    <U 

o 

43 

'C  §      . 

< 

03 

2 

B 

s' 

43   lO 

o 

^ 

cS  CO 

o 

^'^ 

c 

,, , 

1— ( 

c 

r>;  ^ 

s 

M 

unt    b 
Maclea 
£1.750 

1 

43 

o 

rt 

£ 

'c3 

<< 

ca 

P^ 


p      o 


«!j   P-l 


r 


« 

^ 


29 


O  O  »0  CO  o 


?C  00  (M  O  05 
(M  l^  iCi  GO 
Tj^  CO 


O  Ci  O  O         -^ 

O  Tt^  o  o       o 


O  rH   !■- 

O  C5  C4 


^ 


0 


O 


^ 


0 

0) 

H 


EH 


u 


o 

Hi 


O 


0 

< 
< 


H      =- 


CO 

o    • 

en    : 


g--^ 
f^ 


o 

lO     i 

(M 

CO 

S 

cq 

o      o 
o      o 


2  ce 

O    O)    fl 


W  CO  0.  S  H  J  CO  O  Ph  ^ 
W -   ^    ^   ^ 


o  o  o      ^  o  o 

as    r-H   O  '+   o   (N 


P5 


o  o  o 
CO  o:  (M 

(N  Ci  (M 


'^  t  "^ 


2  S 


tV 


•  -^  •-  rt 


c5 

Qi    'CD 


0^  ."S 
^-^ 

fl    (X) 
h- <  r^J 

a   O 

O  -^^ 
en    o 


c3 


OJ 


o<5 
r!  o 


O) 


a 

^  w  0-3 
^  [if   CD  rn 


-(J     02 
CO     <^ 

'si    t>^ 


Oi 


P3A. 


o  o 


«rt 


30 


^OiSOCtiOOO        OOi— I 

CO  i-H  (M  t-  1.7.  O  O  C5        —  c<l  CO 
c-i  -^       o  !M  rM  — I  o: 


£1^ 


^  o 


o 


'';;w  £?;5 


.5  2 

£2    P- 


:§  £!  ^  o 

=*H    3    (1)    S3 


A^  <i1  C  hH  P3      O 


rs  nH  CD  O 
K  <M  CI  O 


(MO** 


i: 

; 

n 

a 

X 

i 

R 

«4-< 

i^ 

5^ 

1^   fl 

a»  0 

ci 

Qj  -^i 

rt 

•^  'Z 

PC 

^b^ 

0 

H 

"    "^ 

< 

H 

Or 
< 

a 

O 
O 
O 
< 

o 
o 
-J 
o 

Ixl 
H 
O 

< 
PQ 


-^ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

w 

0 

0 

0 

0 

«*? 

0^ 

(m' 

r-T 

— ' 

0 

a 

iJo  : 

s 

l^ 

"^< 

(M 

0 

r; 

■^ 

.u) 

+3 

0      • 

0 

0 

8 

'5 

"oT 

0 

l^< 

^      ■ 
0 

3: 

, , 

0 

-u 

c« 

i-i 

^ 

0 

s 

<^ 

0 

S    ' 

ep 

3 

^ 

f^    : 

2 

'S 

c^    ■ 

31 

0 

a; 

'o 

2 

"5  "^ 

1-^ 

-p 

:3 

0  CJ 

s 

^ 

OQ   i-H 

o      o      00 

o      o      00 


o      00 

o      o  >o 


^  0: 
o  g 


t:  o    • 
O)  o     ■ 


^  -S  'I  i    : 

O  Co    O 

-i^5  >.   :    : 

S  O  P-r- 

*«  2  §  o  s 

^  =  S  "^^  =^ 

<J5       £=^  hS 


o 

05 


31 


WEDNESDAY,  MARCH  29th,   1905. 


ORDINARY  MONTHLY  MEETING. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Messrs.  Launcelot  Harrison  and  Thomas  Griffith  Taylor, 
B.Sc,  were  elected  Ordinar}^  Members  of  the  Society.* 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous 
Monthly  Meeting  (30th  November,  1904),  amounting  to  48  Vols., 
217  Parts  or  Nos.,  98  Bulletins,  10  Reports,  31  Pamphlets,  2 
Maps,  and  7  Miscellanea,  received  from  118  Societies,  &c.,  and  6 
Individuals,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 


*  By  a  printer's  error,  the  notice  of  election  in  the  Abstract  for  November 
was  incorrectly  given.  It  should  have  stated  that  Miss  Mauian  Harris, 
B.A.,  B.Sc,  Ultimo,  was  elected  an  Associate  Member  of  the  Society. 


32 


BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES.* 

By  Fred.  Turner,   F.L.S.,  F.R.H.S.,  etc. 

(Plate  i.) 

Introduction. 

North-western  New  South  Wales,  as  defined  b}^  this  paper, 
includes  that  section  of  country  lying  between  the  boundary  of 
this  State  and  Queensland  and  the  parallel  32^  South  and  the 
meridians  147°  to  151°  20'  East;  to  the  south  of  parallel  31°  S.,  how- 
ever, the  eastern  boundary  is  the  meridian  151°.  E.  It  has  an  area 
of  about  fifty-seven  thousand  five  hundred  square  miles.  The 
configuration  of  this  region  consists  of  mountain  ranges,  isolated 
hills,  both  very  steeply  and  gently  undulating  country  and 
immense  nearly  level  plains.  The  principal  mountain  ranges  are 
the  Warrumbungle  and  Liverpool  (which  I  have  crossed  ten 
times)  in  the  south,  and  the  Peel,  Moonbi,  and  Nandewar  or 
Hardwicke  (all  of  which  I  have  crossed  several  times)  and  the 
Drummond  in  the  east.  There  are  very  many  curious  rock  for- 
mations on  this  area,  and  some  especially  interesting  ones  at 
Timor,  near  Coonabarabran.  None  of  the  mountain  ranges  or 
isolated  hills  are  of  great  altitude,  though  many  of  them  are 
very  steep,  rocky,  rugged  and  difiacult  to  ascend.  In  the  extreme 
south-east  there  is  the  only  burning  mountain,  as  far  as  is  at 
present  known,  on  this  continent.  Wingen,  as  it  is  called,  has 
an  altitude  of  1,820  feet,  and  is  looked  upon  as  a  great  natural 
curiosity.  The  fire  is  not  volcanic,  but  is  supposed  to  be  the 
combustion  of  a  coal  seam  which  has  become  ignited  in  some  way. 
The  famous  Liverpool  Plains  are  a  portion  of  the  north-west. 
These  plains,  which  are  known  to  the  aborigines  as  Cohhon  Com- 

*  Attention  is  directed  to  the  description  of  a  new  species  of  EragroHis  in 
the  Appendix  (p. 91). 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  33 

leroy^  have  an  area  of  about  ten  million  acres.     They  lie  between 
the  Liverpool  and  Peel  Ranges,  and  are  supposed  to  have  been  at 
one  time  the  bed  of  an  immense  lake.      Surveyor-General  Oxley 
discovered   these  plains   in    1818   and   named  them   after   Lord 
Liverpool,  who  was  then  Prime  Minister  of  England.     There  are 
immense  plains   east  of    the   meridian   149°   E.,  and  nearly  the 
whole  of  the  country  west  of  that  to  the  meridian  147°  E.,  the 
boundary  of  the  north-west,  is  practically  level.     Some  of  those 
plains  are  composed  of  black  soil,  others  of  red  loam,  while  con- 
siderable areas  are  of  a  sandy  nature.     Much  of  the  land  border- 
ing the  rivers  and  creeks  is  rich  alluvial  deposits.     Those  are  the 
principal   soils   of   the  north-west,  but   there   are  others  of   an 
intermediate  character.     Over  a  large  part  of  this  area  the  soil 
is  of  great  depth  and  very  fertile,  and  where  cultivation  is  carried 
on   abundant  crops   of   excellent   grain   and   other  produce  are 
raised  in  ordinary  seasons. 

Climate. 

Temperature  at  Narrahri. 

Mean  temperature      ..  ...  ...  ...  ..,  67  0°  F. 

Mean  Summer  temperature   ...  ...  ...  ...  81-1° 

Mean  Winter  temperature      ..  ...  ...  ...  52-3° 

Highest  temperature  (shade)...  ...  ...  ...        118*9° 

Lowest  temperature  (shade)  ...  ...  ...  ...  18-4° 

The  temperature  will  range  from  a  few  degrees  higher  in  the 
extreme  north  and  west  to  a  few  degrees  lower  in  the  extreme 
east  and  south,  but  those  mentioned  will  give  a  good  idea  of  the 
climate  of  north-western  New  South  Wales. 

Rainfall. 

The  average  annual  rainfall  at  Narrabri  is  27  J  inches,  but  it 
ranges  from  19^  inches  in  the  extreme  west  to  28 1  inches  in  the 
extreme  east. 

Water. 

Nearly  the  whole  of    the  eastern  watershed  of    the  Darling 
River  is  situated  in  the  north-west.     That  section  of  New  South. 
3 


34  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN   NK\V  SOUTH  WALES, 

Wales  is  i-cather  naturally  well  watered  b}^  the  following  rivers, 
or  portions  of  them  and  their  tributaries,  which  consist  of 
numerous  creeks : — Bogan,  Macquarie,  Castlereagh,  Namoi, 
Mooki,  Peel,  Moomin,  Gwydir,  Macintyre,  Severn,  Dumaresq, 
Bokhara,  and  Birie.  The  Narran  River  empties  itself  into  an 
immense  lake  or  swamp  of  that  name.  With  this  exception 
there  are  no  large  natural  lakes  in  the  north-west,  though 
artificial  ones  have  been  formed  by  the  water  flowing  from  some 
of  the  artesian  wells.  In  the  extreme  south-east  are  springs 
which  are  the  sources  of  some  of  the  eastern  rivers.  In  wet 
seasons  many  of  these  rivers  and  creeks  overflow  their  banks, 
and  then  the  deep  depressions  and  billabongs  contain  vast 
quantities  of  water.  Many  artesian  wells  have  been  sunk  (some 
of  them  outside  the  Cretaceous  belt)  and  abundant  supplies  of 
excellent  water  obtained. 

Food  and  other  Useful  Plants  of  the  North-Western 
Aborigines. 

For  many  years  past  I  have  made  numerous  enquiries  of  the 
aborigines  and  the  old  white  settlers  concerning  the  plants  used 
by  the  blacks  before  they  came  much  in  contact  with  civilised 
man,  and  I  think  the  following  is  a  correct  account  of  them. 
Having  devoted  much  time  to  this  subject,  I  thought  it  would 
prove  interesting  to  record  these  plants  and  their  uses  for  future 
reference.  Only  a  few  medicinal  plants  are  enumerated,  because 
I  could  get  little  or  no  reliable  information  even  from  the 
aboriginal  "  medicine  men,"  although  inducements  were  often 
held  out  to  them.  Although  the  blacks'  practice  of  medicine  is 
dominated  by  empiricism,  it  is  much  to  be  regretted  that  we  do 
not  know  more  about  the  plants  recognised  by  them  to  be  of 
therapeutic  value.  This  is  a  subject  that  might  w^ell  engage  the 
attention  of  the  Government  of  the  Commonwealth  with  regard 
to  those  tribes  that  have  not  yet  lost  this  knowledge. 

The  way  the  aborigines  cook  animal  food  leaves  much  to  be 
desired,  but  the  preparation  of  their  vegetable  food  is  interesting, 
and  anyone  having  but  a  superficial  knowledge   of   the  plants 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  35 

they  use  need  never  starve  in  the  bush.     Their  vegetable  foods 
may  be  arranged  as  follows  : — 

(a)  Those  eaten  without  any  preparation. 

(b)  Those  which  require  baking  before  being  eaten. 

(c)  Those  which,  being  deleterious  or  poisonous  in  a  fresh 
state,  require  careful  preparation,  such  as  pounding,  maceration, 
dessication,  or  baking. 

Under  the  first-named  may  be  included  the  different  fruits, 
nuts,  seeds,  etc.;  under  the  second  native  yams  and  other  tubers, 
also  the  thick  roots  of  various  plants;  and  under  the  third  the 
produce  of  such  plants  as  Macrozamia.  The  blacks'  method  of 
preparing  the  Macrozamia  nuts  as  an  article  of  food  is  embodied 
in  my  report  on  this  plant  to  the  Government  of  New  South 
Wales  (See  'Agricultural  Gazette,'  Vol.iv.  p.l58). 

Fruits  eaten  in  a  fresh  state,  unless  otherwise  stated,  by 
THE  Aborigines. 
Botanical  natiies.  Common  names. 

Atalantia  glauca,  Hook.  Native  cumquat. 

Gapparis  lasiantha,  R.Br.  A  native  caper. 

mitchelll,  Lindl.  Native  orange. 

nummular ia,  DC.  A  native  caper. 

Cucumis  trigonus,  Roxb.  Native  melon 

Encliyl(sna  tomentosa,  R.Br.  Barrier  saltbush. 

Exocarpus  cupressiformis,  Labill.         Native  cherry. 
Ficus  asperay  Forst.  Blue  fig. 

ruhiginosa^  Desf.  A  native  fig. 

Fusanus  acuminatus^  R.Br.  Quandong. 

persicariios,  F.v.M.  Native  peach. 

Lorantlius  exocarpi,  Behr.,  et  spp.        Mistletoe. 
Leptomeria  hillardieri^  R.Br.  A  native  currant. 

Marsdeiiia  leichhardtiana,  F.v.M.         Dooba. 

Young  fruit  eaten  fresh,  old  fruit  roasted  on  ashes. 
Mesemhryanthemiom  neqmlateralejllAVi'.Tig^s  face. 
Jli/oporum  desertlj  A.  Cunn.  Sweet-fruited  native  myrtle. 

Nitraria  sclioheri,  Linn.  Bean  caper. 


36  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Owen  in  acidic! a,  F.v.M.  Colane. 

Persooiiia  tenui folia,  R.Br.,  et  spp.  Geebung. 

Hhagodin  hastafa,  R.Br.  A  saltbush. 

Ruhus  2)arvifolius,  Linn.  A  native  raspberry. 

Solanicm  esuriale,  Lindl.  Native  tomato. 

Food  Plants  of  the  Abokigines. 

JBotanical  names.  Common  names. 

Acacia  sent  is,  F.v  M.,  et  spp.  Bramble  acacia,  etc. 

Seeds  roasted. 

Acacia  farnesiana,  Willd.  A  wattle. 

Pods  roasted  on  ashes. 
Amarantus  mifchdli,  Benth.  Wild  amaranth. 

Seeds  ground  between  stones  and  made  into  a  kind  of  bread. 
Antliistiria  avenacea,  F.v.M.  Tall  oat-grass. 

Grain  ground  between  stones  and  made  into  cakes. 
Arthropodium  minus,  R.Br.  Small  jointed  lily. 

Oblong  tubers  roasted  on  ashes. 
Astrehla  trificoides,  F.v.M.,  et  spp.       Mitchell  grass. 

Grain  ground  between  stones  and  made  into  cakes. 
Boerliaavia  diffusa,  Linn.  Hog-weed. 

Fleshy  roots  roasted  on  ashes. 
Bromus  arenarius,  Labill.  Barley  grass. 

Grain  ground  between  stones  and  made  into  cakes. 
C(Esiavittata,^.^\:.  Ribbon  lily. 

Tubers  roasted  on  ashes. 
Chenopodium  auricomum,  Lindl.  A  Blue  bush. 

Seeds  ground  between  stones  and  made  into  a  kind  of  bread. 
Grinum  flaccidum,  Herb.  Darling  lily. 

Bulbs  roasted  on  ashes.     A  kind  of  arrowroot  has  been  made 
from  the  bulbs. 

Gymhidium  canaliculatiim,  R.Br.  Orchid. 

.  P.seudo-bulbs  of  this  epiphytal  orchid  and  the  tubers  of  many 
of  the  terrestrial  ones  enumerated  in  the  following  pages  are 
roasted,  but  some  are  eaten  fresh. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  37 

Cyperits  esculentus,  Linn.  Edible  sedge. 

Tubers  eaten  fresh  and  after  roasting. 

Dantlionia  hipartlta,  F.v.M.,  et  spp.     A  "  mulga  "  grass. 
Grain  made  into  bread. 

Eragrostis  pilosa,  Beauv.  Weeping  love  grass. 

Grain  used  like  the  preceding  species. 

Geranium  dissectum,  Linn.  A  crow  foot. 

The  carrot-like  roots  roasted  on  ashes.     (Sheep  are  very  fond 
of  these  roots). 
Ileleocharis  spliacelata,  R.Br.  Water  sedge. 

Tubers  eaten  fresh  and  after  roasting. 

Hypoxis  hi/grometrica,  Labill.  Yellow  lily. 

Tubers  and  thick  roots  roasted  on  ashes. 
Lavate r a  pleheia^  '^ixn^,     '  A  marsh  mallow. 

Succulent  young  roots  cooked  and  eaten. 
Macrozamia  spiralis^  Miq.,  et  sp.  Banga,  native  pineapple, 

Burrawang.     Special  preparation. 
Ifarsilea  druiiimoiidil^  A.  Br.  Nardoo. 

Spore  cases  (involucres)  ground  between  two  stones  and  the 
resulting  meal  made  into  cakes,  etc.  A  figure  and  full  descrip- 
tion of  the  value  of  these  spore  cases  as  an  article  of  food  appear 
in  my  work  on  the  indigenous  '  Forage  Plants  of  Australia,' 
(non-grasses). 

Microseris  forsteri^  Hook.  f.  Native  scorzonera. 

The  palatable  fleshy  roots  are  considered  a  great  delicacy. 
Panicum  decompositum,  R.Br.  Australian  millet. 

Grain  of  this  and  other  free-seeding  species  of  Panicum  largely 
used  as  food. 

Pittosporum  pliillyi^cBoides,  DC.  Butter  bush. 

Ripe  seeds  sometimes  ground  between  stones  and  made  into  a 
kind  of  bread. 

Plant  ago  varia,  R.Br.  Native  sago. 

Seeds  bruised  and  made  into  a  kind  of  porridge. 


38  BOTANY  OF  ^•ORTH-^VESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Portulaca  oJeracea^  Linn.  Purslcane. 

Succulent  stems  eaten  fresh  and  after  roasting.     Seeds  cruslied 
between  stones  and  made  into  cakes. 
Pteris  aquiJina,  Linn.,  var.  esculenfa.  Bracken  fern. 

Underground  stems  roasted. 
Sporoholus  I/fuIIe///,  Benth.  Sporobolus. 

Grain  ground  and  made  into  a  kind  of  bread. 
Stercidia  diversifolia,  G.  Don.  Kurrajong. 

Fleshy  roots  and  seeds  eaten  fresh  and  after  being  roasted  on 
ashes. 
Thysanofus  fuberosiis,  R.Br.  A  fringed  violet. 

Tubers  roasted. 
Triglocliin  procera,  R.Br.  Tall  rush. 

Tubers  roasted  on  ashes. 
Triodia  mitcheJU,  Benth.,  et  spp.  Porcupine  grass. 

Grain  used  similarly  to  that  of  other  grasses. 
Typha  angustifolia,  Linn.  Bulrush. 

Roots  and  young  shoots  roasted. 

Gum  Exudations,  Galls  and  Manna  from  the  following 
Trees  are  eaten  ry  the  Aborigines. 

Botanical  names.  Common  names. 

Acacia  aneura,  F.v.M.  Mulga  apples. 

dealbafa,  Link.  Silver  wattle. 

decurrens,  Willd.  Black  wattle. 

liomalophylla,  A.  Cunn.  Ourley  yarren. 

excelsa,  Benth.  Ironbark  wattle. 

Eucalyptus  diimosa,  A.  Cunn.  Mallee,  Lerp. 

terminal  is,  F.v.M.  Western  blood  wood. 

viminalis,  Labill.  Manna  gum. 

Flindersia  maculosa,  F.v.M.  Spotted  tree. 

Some  Medicinal  Plants  of  the  Aborigines. 
Botanical  names.  Common  names. 

Capparis  mitclielli,  Lindl.  Native  orange. 

Bruised  bark  used  on  sores,  etc. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  39 

Duhoisia  hopwoodiiy  F.v.  M.  Pituri. 

Leaves  chewed. 
Euphorbia  dritmmoiidii,  Boiss.  Caustic  plant. 

Taken  as  an  infusion  for  dysentery,  etc. 
Gratiola  pedunculafa,  R.Br.  Brooklime. 

Purgative. 
Mentha  grandijlora,  Benth.  Native  mint. 

This  and   the   two   following  species    are   used    in  stomachic 
complaints. 

Mentha  australis,  R.Br.  Native  mint. 

satureioides,  R.Br.  Native  mint. 

Fapaver  horridum,  DC.  Native  poppy. 

Poison. 
Sarcostemonn  australe,  R.Br.  Milk  bush. 

Milky  juice  of  this  plant  applied  to  wounds,  etc. 
Verbena  officinalis^  Linn.  Vervain. 

Used  for  affections  of  the  bladder. 

Plants  from  which  the  Aborigines  obtain  fibre  for  making 
into  nets  to  catch  game,  and  leaves  for  manufacturing 
into  dillybags,  etc. 

Botanical  names.  Common  names. 

Abutilon  otocarpiim^  F.v.M.,  et  spp.  Mallow. 

Corchorus  cunninghamii,  F.v.M.  Native  jute. 

Hcemodorum planifolium.  R.Br.  Flat-leaved  lily. 

Seleocharis  sphacelata,  R.Br.  Water  sedge. 

Tmperata  arundinacea^  Cyr.  Blady  grass. 

Linicm  7nargi7iale,  A.  Cunn.  Native  flax. 
Panicum  Ze?^^^/)/^^??^;/?,  H.B.etK. ,etspp. Cotton  grass,  etc. 

Spartothammis  junceiis,  A.  Cunn.  Rush  bush. 

Sterculia  diversifolia^  G.  Don.  Kurrajong. 

Xerotes  longifolia,  R.Br.  Long-leaved  xerotes. 


40  botany  of  nokth-western  new  south  wales, 

Timbers  used  by  the  Aborigines  for  making  into  spears, 

CLUBS,    AND    BOOxMERANGS. 

Botanical  names.  Common  names. 

Acacia  aneura^  F.v.M.  Mulga. 

doraioxijlon,  A.  Cunn.  Spear  wood. 

hortialophylla  A.  Cunn.  Curley  Yarren. 

se?ifis,  F.v.M.  Bramble  acacia. 

Ventilago  viminalis,  Hook.  Supple  Jack. 

The  last-named  species  is  also  used  by  the  blacks  for  fire-sticks. 
Light  spears  are  also  made  from  the  matured  stems  of  Phrag- 
mites  communis,  Trin.,  and  Typha  anr/iisti folia,  Linn. 

Gum  and  resin,  used  as  cement  for  affixing  spear  heads,  etc., 
Are  obtained  from  Grevillea  striata,  R.Br.,  and  Xantliorrlioea 
■arbor ea,  R.Br. 

In  very  dry  seasons,  or  when  travelling  in  dry  country,  the 
aborigines  obtain  water  from  the  roots  of  several  species  of 
Eucalyptus,  especially  those  composing  the  Mallee  scrubs,  and 
Sakea,  particular!}^  H.  leucoptera,  R.Br. 

The  Flora. 

As  far  back  as  1877-8  I  examined  some  collections  of  north- 
western plants  made  on  the  borders  of  New  South  Wales  and 
Queensland  for  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Brisbane.  Since  that  time 
I  have  botanised  largely  in  the  north-west,  and  written  very 
many  special  reports  on  the  economic  value  of  the  vegetation 
growing  there.  In  addition,  I  have  figured  and  described,  as  to 
their  economic  value,  many  of  the  useful  plants  of  this  region 
for  the  Government  of  New  South  Wales.  These  figures  and 
descriptions  have  been  published,  so  that  pastoralists  and  those 
settled  upon  the  land  may  become  thorough!}^  acquainted  with 
the  great  value  of  the  indigenous  plants.  The  flora  of  the  north- 
west might  be  described  as  intermediate  in  character  between 
that  found  in  New  England*  and  that  growing  in  the  Darling 
country,!  though  there  are  many  plants  common  to  these  three 

*  These  Proceedings,  190:^,  p. 276. 
t  These  Proceedings,  1903,  p.  406. 


BY  FRED.   TURNER.  41 

regions.  From  a  long  study  of  the  flora  in  these  divisions  of  the 
State,  I  have  observed  that  there  is  a  gradual  change  from  the 
vegetation  of  New  England  to  the  meridian  149°  east,  and 
between  that  and  the  western  boundary  the  plants  approach  in 
character  those  found  in  the  Darling  country.  One  of  the  first 
changes  to  attract  attention,  as  one  proceeds  from  east  to  west, 
is  the  diminution  of  ferns  and  orchids,  until  on  approaching  the 
western  boundary  only  two  species  of  the  former  and  two  of  the 
latter  are  found.  This  is,  of  course,  to  be  attributed  to  a 
diminishing  rainfall.  As  one  travels  westward,  several  species 
of  Eucalyptus  common  in  the  eastern  portion  of  this  region  are 
gradually  replaced  by  other  species  peculiar  to  the  interior. 
Extensive  forests  of  these  valuable  trees,  several  of  which  furnish 
excellent  and  durable  timber,  are  dotted  over  various  parts  of 
the  north-west.  The  shrubby  species  of  this  genus  are  popularly 
called  "  Mallee,'^  and  occupy  Jarge  tracts  of  countr3\  The  pine 
scrubs  or  pine  forests  {^Frenda  spp.)  cover  vast  areas,  and  the 
matured  trees  are  of  considerable  commercial  value,  as  the 
timber  is  largely  used  for  building  purposes,  etc.  Many  of  the 
mountain  ranges  and  isolated  hills  are  thickly  covered  with 
Eucalypts,  Pine,  and  other  economic  timber  trees.  Amongst  the 
shrubby  and  subarboreal  vegetation  Leguminosoi  are  conspicuous 
over  nearly  the  whole  of  this  region.  Many  of  the  dense  scrubs 
that  cover  miles  of  country  are  to  a  great  extent  composed  of 
different  species  oi  Acacia.  A  "  Mulga  "  scrub  (^cacm  anenra, 
F.v.M.)  is  considered  a  valuable  asset  on  a  sheep  station  on 
account  of  the  economic  value  of  its  phyllodes  (leaves),  which 
provide  feed  for  stock  during  adverse  seasons.  The  predominance 
of  certain  species  of  Acacia  commonly  known  as  "  Brigalow " 
cause  certain  areas  to  be  called  "  Brigalow  scrubs."  That 
economic  and  ornamental  evergreen  tree,  the  Kurrajong  (^Sterculia 
diversifolia,  G.  Don)  grows  fairly  plentifully  on  the  slopes  of 
some  of  the  ranges,  and  from  a  distance  often  gives  the  appear- 
ance of  a  cultivated  area.  Many  exotic  plants,  including  some 
of  an  undesirable  character,  have  become  acclimatised  in  this 
region,  but  principall}-  in  the  eastern  and  south-eastern  portions. 


42  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH   WALES, 

Following  is  a  brief  description  of  some  of  the  principal  Orders 
and  noteworthy  species  and  varieties  growing  in  the  north- 
west : — 

The  Order  lianunculacece  is  represented  by  three  genera  and 
six  species,  more  common  in  the  eastern  than  in  the  western 
part  of  this  region.  The  most  showy  flowering  plant  of  this 
Order  is  Clematis  aristata,  R.Br.,  but  it  is  not  nearly  as  widely 
distributed  or  as  common  as  the  allied  species,  C.  micro2)hyllay 
DC.  A  variety  of  the  latter,  which  appears  to  be  rare,  has  dull 
purple  flowers.  Cruciferce  include  nine  indigenous  genera  and 
and  twenty-six  species.  Those  form  a  large  percentage  of  the 
vegetation  of  the  plains,  and  are  more  common  in  the  west  than 
in  the  east.  Some  of  the  species  are  rather  pretty  when  in 
bloom,  and  make  an  attractive  display  when  growing  in  large 
groups.  JIalvacece  are  fairly  numerous  almost  all  over  this  area. 
There  are  eight  indigenous  genera  and  twenty-three  species,  some 
of  them  producing  show}'  flowers  of  various  hues  at  different 
times  during  the  summer  and  autumn  months.  The  Order 
RutaceiH  consists  of  nine  genera  and  sixteen  species,  most  of 
which  are  confined  to  the  eastern  portion.  Only  one,  the  grace- 
ful and  widely-distributed  "  Wilga  "  [Geijera  parvijiora,  JAndX.) 
attains  the  dimensions  of  a  fair-sized  tree.  The  remainder  are 
shrubs,  some  of  which  are  very  floriferous,  and  in  spring-time 
are  often  a  charming  sight  amongst  the  more  sombre  vegetation. 
Under  Khamnece  are  six  genera  and  fourteen  species,  but  with 
two  exceptions  they  are  shrubs  more  interesting  to  the  botanist 
than  to  the  horticulturist.  Of  this  order  Ventilago  vmiiiialisy 
Hook.,  the  "  Supple-jack  "  of  stockmen,  is  a  small  tree,  the  wood 
of  which  is  put  to  various  uses  by  the  blacks,  and  the  leaves  pro- 
vide good  feed  for  pasture  animals  in  adverse  seasons.  Scqnn- 
dacece  include  three  genera  and  nine  species,  which  are  widely 
distributed.  Several  of  these  trees  and  shrubs  have  an  economic 
value,  as  their  leaves  provide  fairly  good  feed  for  stock  when 
pasture  herbage  is  scarce. 

Leguminosce  consist  of  thirty-one  indigenous  genera  and  one 
hundred  and  twenty-three  species,  besides  many  distinct  varieties. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  43 

The  Suborder  Papilionacece  is  represented  b}^  some  very  beauti- 
ful flowering  shrubs  and  herbaceous  plants.  Conspicuous  at  the 
flowering  period  are  many  species  of  the  genera  Clianthus, 
Daviesia,  Uovea,  Jacksonia,  Oxylohium^  Pultencea,  and  Swainsona. 

The  Suborder  Ccesalpiniece  includes,  amongst  others,  several 
species  of  Cassia,  which  produce  a  profusion  of  golden  yellow 
flowers  a  great  part  of  the  year. 

The  Suborder  Mimoseoi  is  a  great  feature  of  the  flora  of  the 
north-west.  The  genus  Acacia  has  no  less  than  fifty  species, 
besides  several  well-marked  varieties.  Amongst  some  of  the 
more  notable  of  the  Phyllodinece  are: — Acacia  hrachyhotrya, 
Benth.,  A.  cultriformis,  A.  Cunn.,  A.  decora,  Reichb.,  A.  dora- 
toxylon,  A.  Cunn.,  A.  excelsa,  Benth.,  A.  glaucescens,  Willd.,  A. 
neriifolia,  A.  Cunn.,  A.  notabilis,  F.v.M.,  and  A.  2:>endula,  A. 
Cunn.  The  most  beautiful  of  the  BipinnaUe  are  : — A.  dealbata. 
Link,  A.  decurrens,  Willd.,  A.  farnesiayia,  Willd  ,  A.  folyhotrya^ 
Benth.,  xi.  prminosa,  A.  Cunn.,  and  A.  spectabilis,  A.  Cunn. 

The  Myrtacece  comprise,  in  addition  to  the  genus  Eucalyjitihs 
(of  which  there  are  twent3''-three  species  and  varieties)  already 
referred  to,  eight  genera  and  seventeen  species,  several  of  which, 
especially  the  genera  Callistemon,  Leptospermuni,  and  Melaleuca, 
make  an  attractive  display  when  in  bloom.  The  different  species 
of  C allistemon  have  the  most  showy  flowers,  ranging  from  pink 
to  bright  scarlet.  There  are  only  two  genera  and  two  indigenous 
species  of  the  Order  Cucurbitacece,  but  the  South  African  plant, 
CuGumis  myriocarpus,  Naud.,  is  spreading  rapidly  on  many 
stations,  much  to  the  concern  of  stockowners.  Some  pastoralists 
say  this  plant  causes  blindness  in  horses  which  eat  it  and  its 
fruits  give  sheep  diarrhcea. 

Loranthacem  are  represented  by  three  genera,  nine  species  and 
one  variety.  These  parasitical  plants  are  established  on  many 
trees  and  shrubs,  and  from  an  aesthetic  point  of  view  are  quite 
an  interesting  feature  of  the  vegetation.  They,  however,  often 
cause  great  injury  to  their  hosts.  Visciim  articidatum,  Burm.,  is 
the  most  curious  of  these  plants,  and  the  most  remarkable  is 
Notothixos  cornifolius,  Oliv.     This  species  is  sometimes  parasitical 


44  BOTANY  OF  NORTII-'WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

on  Loranllinx,  affording  an  instance  of  a  parasite  upon  a  parasite. 
The  Composita',  consist  of  forty-one  indigenous  geneia  and  one 
hundred  and  twenty-four  species  besides  varieties,  and,  with  the 
exception  of  Grdminecti,  is  the  most  largely  represented  Order 
amongst  Phanerogams  in  the  north-west.  Almost  all  over  this 
immense  area  the  species  occur  in  more  or  less  profusion,  and 
when  in  bloom  make  a  wonderfully  effective  display.  A  tract  of 
country  covered  with  Composites  in  full  bloom  is  a  sight  no  pen 
could  adequately  describe  and  which  can  never  be  effaced  from  the 
memory.  Although  several  of  these  plants  are  of  shrubb}^  habit, 
the  greater  number  are  dwarf  perennials  or  annuals.  The  colours 
of  their  flowers  vary  from  pure  white  to  deep  yellow  and  from 
bronze  to  bright  red.  The  "  burr  "-like  fruiting  heads  of  several 
species  of  Calotis  are  regarded  with  disfavour  by  sheep-owners 
on  account  of  the  injury  they  sometimes  cause  to  wool.  The 
pappus  surmounting  each  achene  is  composed  of  barbed  bristles 
or  sharp  spines,  and  sometimes  causes  great  irritation  to  those 
who  camp  out.  Hence  stockmen  call  these  fruits  "  Bogan  Fleas," 
and  from  experience  I  can  say  they  are  more  annoying  to  the  flesh 
than  Pulex  irritans.  Although  there  are  only  one  genus,  four 
species  and  one  variety  of  the  Order  Stylidiece,  they  are  most 
interesting  plants  on  account  of  the  peculiar  structure  of  their 
flowers.  The  stamens  and  style  are  united  in  a  column  which  is 
very  irritable,  especially  in  fine  weather,  and  springs  up  when 
touched.  The  variety  album  of  Stylidiwm  grarnui'ifolium,  ISwartz, 
is  a  rare  plant,  and  like  most  of  the  species  quite  worth  garden 
culture.  Goodenoviece  comprise  five  genera  and  twenty  species, 
besides  varieties,  fairly  well  distributed  over  this  region.  The 
various  species  of  Goodenia  grow  plentifully  on  some  of  the  flats 
bordering  the  rivers  and  creeks,  and  when  in  bloom  attract 
attention.  Daminera  hrownii^  F.  v.M.,  is  one  of  the  most  interest- 
ing shrubs  of  this  Order.  Its  purple  or  blue  flowers  are  densely 
clothed  with  dark-coloured  plumose  hairs,  sometimes  very  long 
and  spreading,  especially  in  the  broad-leaved  forms.  Bruiionia 
austra/is,  Sm.,  is  another  interesting  allied  plant,  of  which  there 
are   two   forms   fairly  common  on  some  of  the  ranges  and  sand 


BY  FRED.   TUKNEK.  45 

ridges.  Its  numerous  blue  flowers  are  arranged  in  dense,  globular 
heads  on  scapes  about  one  foot  high.  The  Epacrids  [Epacridem) 
are  represented  by  six  genera  and  thirteen  species,  most  of  which 
are  found  in  the  eastern  portion.  Species  of  Lencopoijon  and 
Epacris  obiusifolia,  8m.,  usually  flower  very  profusely  in  spring- 
time, and  when  in  bloom  are  attractive  objects.  The  last-named 
species  is  generally  found  on  swampy  or  moist  land.  Jasminece 
include  two  genera  and  four  species,  only  one  of  which,  Jusmiyium 
lineare,  R.Br.,  extends  to  the  western  boundary.  J.  suavisshnnm, 
Lindl.,  has  very  sweetly  scented  flowers.  With  one  exception 
the  Apocynece  and  Asclepiadece  are  twiners  or  climbers,  some  of 
them  ascending  the  tallest  trees.  They  are  to  be  seen  in  many 
of  the  scrubs  and  much  of  the  timbered  country,  though  nowhere 
plentifully.  The  eight  indigenous  genera  and  species  of  the 
Boraginece  are,  with  one  exception,  widely  distributed  both  on 
high  and  low  land.  Myosotis  av.stralis,  K.Br.,  the  native  "  forget- 
me-not,"  is  found  only  in  the  eastern  portion,  generally  by  the 
borders  of  streams  or  in  damp,  shady  places,  and  its  flowers  vary 
from  white  to  blue.  The  Order  Convolvidace(f,  consists  of  eight 
genera  and  nine  species,  many  of  which  produce  rather  showj^ 
flowers  of  various  colours.  Some  of  them,  such  as  Cressa  cretica, 
Linn.,  often  cover  a  space  several  yards  square,  and  when  in 
bloom  are  a  charming  sight.  The  three  genera  and  fourteen 
indigenous  species  of  Solanece  are  found  almost  all  over  this  area, 
some  being  fairly  abundant.  A  few  kinds  are  suspected  poison- 
plants,  but  the  introduced  species  of  Datura  and  Nicotiana  have 
the  worst  reputation  in  this  respect.  Stockmen  sometimes  cook 
the  ripe  fruits  of  Solanum  esuriale,  Lindl.  (Native  Tomato),  and 
eat  them  with  their  mutton  chops.  They  are  also  eaten  fresh. 
Scrophularinece  are  represented  by  eight  genera  and  seventeen 
species,  which  are  widely  distributed,  but  more  plentifully  in  the 
eastern  than  in  the  western  part.  Many  of  them  are  very  pretty 
flowering  plants,  and  certain  of  them  are  used  as  rustic  remedies. 
Three  genera  and  seventeen  species  comprise  the  Myoporinece  of 
the  north-west.  A  few  attain  the  dimensions  of  small  trees,  but 
the  greater  number  are  of  shrubby  habit.     Most  of  them  occur 


46  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-AVESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

in  the  western  portion,  and  several  species  of  the  genus  Eremo- 
2)hila  are  amongst  the  most  showy-flowering  shrubs  of  the 
interior.  There  is  a  yellow-flowering  variet}'  of  E.  maculata, 
F.V.M.,  but  it  is  rare.  Sheep  sometimes  crop  the  more  dwarf 
kinds  so  neatly  as  to  make  them  appear  to  have  been  clipped  by 
shears.  Under  Lahiatce  are  included  eight  indigenous  genera  and 
twenty-one  species  fairly  well  distributed  on  both  high  and  low 
land.  Those  species  of  which  the  leaves  are  strongl}^  scented  are 
popularly  known  as  ''  Blackfellows'  Mint."  When  in  bloom  many 
of  these  plants,  especially  species  of  Prostanthera,  make  a  beau- 
tiful display,  and  are  quite  a  feature  in  the  landscape. 

Chenopodiacece,  either  as  shrubs,  dwarf  perennials,  or  annuals, 
are  found  in  greater  or  less  abundance  almost  all  over  this 
re^^ion.  West  of  the  meridian  150°  E.,  however,  they  form, 
speaking  generally,  a  larger  percentage  of  the  vegetation  than 
they  do  east  of  it.  Altogether  there  are  twelve  genera  and  tifty- 
one  species,  of  which  I  have  figured  and  described,  as  to  their 
economic  value,  twenty-nine  of  the  most  valuable  ones  under  the 
authority  of  the  Government  of  New  South  Wales.  The  genera 
Atriplex  and  Kochia  Sive  most  largely  represented  by  species;  the 
former  having  thirteen  and  the  latter  nine.  The  great  value  of 
many  of  these  plants  as  feed  for  stock  has  so  often  been  referred 
to  in  my  writings  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  mention  their 
virtues  here.  The  Order  Proteacece  includes  seven  genera  and 
twenty-seven  species,  which  are  widely  distributed,  being  more 
numerous  in  the  eastern  than  in  the  western  portion,  and  in  some 
places  fairly  plentifully.  Both  the  Suborders  Nucamentaceoi  and 
Follicular es  are  represented;  the  former  by  eleven  species  of  the 
genera  Petrophila,  Isopogon,  and  Persoonia,  and  the  latter  by 
sixteen  species  of  Grevillea,  Ilakea,  Lonmtia  and  Banksia.  The 
tallest-growing  species  of  this  Order  in  the  north-west  is 
Grevillea  striata,  R.Br.,  and  the  others,  with  one  exception,  are 
shrubs  of  a  most  interesting  character.  Only  one  genus,  Pimelea, 
nine  species  and  two  varieties  of  the  Thymelece  are  found  in  this 
part  of  the  State,  but  they  are  fairly  plentiful  in  many  districts. 
Eitphorhiacece  have  seven  indigenous  genera  and  twenty  species, 


BY  FRED.   TURNER.  47 

many  of  them  widely  distributed.  Several  species  of  both  these 
Orders  have  a  bad  reputation  amongst  stockowners,  and  are 
annually  considered  the  cause  of  the  deaths  of  many  animals, 
especially  sheep. 

The  Gy^nnospermcH  consist  of  one  genus  and  three  species  of 
ConifercE,  and  one  genus,  two  species  and  two  varieties  of 
Cycadew.  It  should  be  remembered,  however,  that  a  few 
authorities  have  described  as  species  what  others  consider 
varieties  of  Macrozamia  spiralis^  Miq. 

MonocotyledonecE  not  only  include  some  of  the  most  beautiful, 
dwarf,  flowering  plants  of  the  north-west,  but  also  many  of  the 
greatest  economic  value.  Most  of  the  species  are  abundantly 
distributed  all  over  this  region.  The  Orchidece  comprise  both 
epiphytal  and  terrestrial  kinds,  the  latter  greatly  predominating. 
Altogether  there  are  sixteen  genera  and  thirty-nine  species,  most 
of  which  are  found  in  the  eastern  division.  Only  two,  Cym- 
bidium  canaliculatuin,  R.Br.,  an  epiphytal  species,  and  Ptero- 
stylis  rvfa.  R.Br.,  a  terrestrial  plant,  extend  from  the  eastern 
to  the  western  boundary  of  this  region.  In  many  places  the 
terrestrial  species  are  an  interesting  feature  of  the  flora,  whilst 
the  epiphytal  kinds  give  variety  to  the  arboreal  vegetation. 
There  are  two  indigenous  genera  and  three  species  of  Iridece,  but 
they  do  not  appear  to  be  plentiful  anywhere.  The  white- 
flowering  variety  of  Patersonia  glauca,  R.Br.,  is  a  charming  plant 
and  well  worth  garden  culture.  Amongst  the  Amaryllidece  and 
Liliacece  are  many  beautiful  flowering  plants,  several  of  which 
make  a  great  floral  display  throughout  the  summer  and  autumn 
months.  There  are  thirteen  genera  and  fifty-two  species  of  the 
Order  Cyperacecu,  many  of  which  are  distributed  over  the  greater 
part  of  this  area.  Some  are  eaten  by  stock,  but  are  not  con- 
sidered of  much  feeding  value,  and  quite  a  number  are  of  an 
ornamental  character  when  in  bloom.  They  are  found  on  dry 
and  wet  land,  on  strong  soils  and  in  sandy  and  gravelly  places. 

Graminece  are  more  largely  represented  by  species  than  any 
other  Order  recorded  in  this  Census,  and  they  are  abundantly 
distributed  over  nearly  the  whole   of  this   region.     Although  I 


48  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

have  botanised  extensively  in  all  the  Australian  States,  I  never 
saw  so  many  species  of  GrajninecB  growing  to  a  given  area  as  in 
the  north-west  of  New  South  Wales.     There  are  fifty  indigenous 
genera  and  one  hundred  and  thirt3^-four  species,  besides  a  number 
of  well-marked  varieties;  most  of  the  important  ones  have  been 
figured  and  described,  as  to  their  economic  value,  by  me  under 
instructions  from  the  Government  of  New^  South  Wales,     The 
genus  Panicum  has  the  largest  number  of  species,  including  some 
of  the  most  valuable  pasture  grasses  of  Australia.     Andropogon 
sericeus,  R.Br.,  is  the  famous  "blue  grass,"  so  called  because  the 
young  growth  gives  quite  a  blue  tint  to  large  tracts  of  country. 
All  pastoralists  have  a  high  opinion  of  the  great  feeding  value  of 
this  species.     The  genus  Arithisiiria  includes  three  species — one 
of   them,  the    "kangaroo  grass,"  A.  ciliata,  Linn.,  is   the   most 
widely  distributed  grass  on  this  continent,  being  found  in  all  the 
States  of  the  Commonwealth.       A.  avenacea,  F.v.M.,  often  grows 
nine  feet  high  on  the  black  soil  plains,  and  in  ordinary  seasons 
produces  a  large  quantity  of  valuable  stock  feed.     Several  species 
of  the  genus  Stipa  are  regarded  with  disfavour  by  the  sheep- 
owner  on  account  of  the  spear-like  bases  of  their  flowering  glumes 
and    long    terminal    awns,    but    S.    aristiglumis,    F.v.M.,    is    an 
excellent  forage   plant.      I  have  seen  it  growing  nine  feet  six 
inches  high  on  the  Liverpool  Plains,  and  in  its  young  and  succu- 
lent state  cattle  are  remarkably  fond  of  it  and  fatten  on  it.     Six 
species  of  Danthonia  are  fairly  well  distributed  over  this  region, 
and  three  species  of  Astrehla  grow  over  large  tracts  of  country. 
The  former  genus  includes  the  well-known  "wallab}^  grass,"  and 
the  latter  the  famous  "Mitchell  grasses,"  which  stockmen  regard 
as  the  most  valuable  pasture  plants  in  the  interior  of  Australia. 
Most  of  these  grasses  are  remarkable  for  their  drought-enduring 
qualities.      The  "  windmill  grasses  '"  (Chloris  spp.)  and  species  of 
Eragrostis   are    also    prominent    amongst   the    pasture    herbage. 
Several  species  of  this  and  other  genera  are  really  very  beautiful 
when  in  flower,  and  are  worth  attention  from  those  who  grow 
grasses  for  their  ornamental  appearance  alone.     Several  exotic 
species,  four  of  an  undesirable  character,  viz.,  Avena  fatua,  Linn., 


BY  FRED.   TURNER.  49 

JJromus  sterllis^  Linn.,  Hordeum  murinum,  Linn.,  and  Loliurti 
temulentum,  Linn.,  have  become  acclimatised  on  this  area.  The 
first  and  third  are  most  abundant  and  most  disliked  by  the 
pastoralist  and  farmer. 

Hhe  AcotijledoiiecE,  as  far  as  vascular  Cryptogams  are  concerned, 
and  this  Census  does  not  take  into  account  cellular  Cryptogams, 
are  not  very  numerous  as  regards  species,  but  a  few  of  them  are 
widely  distributed.  The  greater  number  of  the  ferns,  however, 
are  principally  confined  to  sheltered  spots  in  the  extreme  south- 
east of  this  region.  There  is  little  doubt  that  when  many  of  the 
deep  and  sheltered  ravines  in  the  eastern  area  are  thoroughly 
explored  more  species  will  be  found,  and  probably  others  new  to 
science  will  be  recorded.  The  Filices  comprise  twenty  genera 
and  twentj'-eight  species,  only  two  of  which  are  fern-trees — 
Alsophila  australis,  R.Br.,  and  Dicksonia  antarctica,  Labill. — 
and  as  far  as  my  observations  go,  these  plants  are  confined  to  a 
small  area.  The  former  is  usually  found  in  sheltered  valleys 
and  the  latter  on  the  sides  of  timbered  ranges.  The  epiphytes 
consist  of  three  species,  viz.,  Davallia  pyxidata,  Cav.,  Asple^iiiwi 
Jcdcatum,  Lam.,  and  Polyjwdium  serpens,  Forst.,  which  grow  on 
various  trees,  but  nowhere  plentifully.  The  rarest  ferns  of  this 
region  appear  to  be  Ophioglossuin  vulgatum,  Linn.,  and  Botry- 
chium  ternatum,  Swartz,  and  the  most  widely  distributed  are 
Cheilanthes  tenuifolia,  Swartz,  Nothol(Hna  vellea,  R.Br.,  and 
Grammitis  rutwfolia,  R.Br.  The  fronds  of  the  second  plant  are 
densely  hairy  or  woolly  on  the  underside.  It  is  a  beautiful 
species,  but  rather  difficult  to  cultivate.  The  last-named  species 
has  pinnate  fronds  with  almost  fan-shaped  pinnae  covered  under- 
neath with  brown,  scaly  hairs.  It  is  a  most  interesting  little 
fern  and  widely  distributed  on  the  Australian  continent.  These 
three  species  are  found  in  various  situations  over  nearly  the 
whole  of  the  north-west.  Man}^  of  the  other  dwarf  species 
included  in  this  Census  are  amongst  the  most  admired  Australian 
ferns. 

North- Western  New  South  Wales  attracted  much  attention 
from   the  early  explorers   such  as   Evans,  Oxley,  Cunningham, 


50  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-AVESTERN  NEW  SOUTH   WALES, 

Fraser,  Sturt,  Leichhardt  and  Mitchell,  who  collected  man}'' 
plants  and  referred  to  some  of  them  in  the  published  accounts  of 
their  explorations.  All  those  men  have  earned  everlasting  fame 
for  the  noble  work  they  performed  in  the  face  of  immense 
difficulties  and  trials.  Since  those  earl}^  exploring  days  not  many 
men  appear  to  have  botanised  in  the  north-west.  Those  who 
have  made  the  largest  collections  of  plants  prior  to  my  own  were 
the  late  Rev.  Dr.  William  Woolls,  F.L.S.,  and  Mr.  Charles 
Moore,  F.L.S.,  late  Government  Botanist  of  New  South  Wales. 
Near  Mundooran  on  the  upper  Castlereagh  Dr.  Woolls  collected 
in  1872  about  two  hundred  species  of  plants  and  wrote  an  enter- 
taining and  most  informing  chapter  about  them  in  his  book 
entitled  '  Lectures  on  the  Vegetable  Kingdom.'  Mr.  Moore 
botanised  on  the  Castlereagh  and  Liverpool  Plains,  and  his  collec- 
tions of  plants  are  recorded  in  the  '  Flora  Australiensis.'     . 

This  is  the  first  Census  of  the  Flianerocjamia  and  vascular 
Cryptogamia  of  North-western  New  South  Wales,  and  I  hope  it 
will  be  found  useful  by  those  who  desire  to  study  the  flora  of 
that  portion  of  the  State.  Many  plants  not  hitherto  recorded 
from  that  region  will  be  found  in  the  following  pages. 

All  the  indigenous  plants  included  in  this  Census  that  I  did 
not  know  at  sight  I  have  worked  out  by  the  diagnosis  given  in 
Bentham's  'Flora  Australiensis'  and  Bailey's  'Queensland  Flora,' 
and  I  have  followed  the  same  classification  and  nomenclature  as 
have  been  adopted  in  the  former  indispensable  reference  work. 

The  plants  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  exotic,  but  many  of 
them  have  become  acclimatised  in  the  north-west. 

The  plants  marked  with  a  dagger  have  been  figured  and 
described,  as  to  their  economic  value  or  other  properties,  by  me. 

At  the  request  of  the  owners  and  occupiers  of  several  large 
sheep  and  cattle  stations  in  the  north-west,  I  have  named  and 
described  the  indigenous  and  exotic  vegetation  growing  on  their 
properties,  and  my  thanks  are  due  to  a  number  of  pastoralists, 
stockmen  and  others  for  forwarding  me  botanical  specimens 
during  the  last  seventeen  years. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER. 


51 


This  paper  completes  Vol.  i.  '  Botan}^  of  New  South  Wales,' 
being  botanical  surveys  of  about  219,660  square  miles  comprising 
two-thirds  the  area  of  the  State,  including  the  portion  so  seldom 
visited  by  botanists  on  account  of  its  great  distance  from  Sydney. 
The  extent  of  these  surveys  is  shown  by  the  shaded  portion  of 
the  accompanying  map  (Plate  i.). 

These  surveys  have  added  to  the  indigenous  plants  not  hitherto 
recorded  for  New  South  Wales  one  Order,  Pedalinece,  four 
genera,  Datura,  Josephinia,  Plagiosetnm,  and  Triumfetta,  and 
fifty-three  species.  I  have  described  three  of  them,  as  they  were 
new  to  science.  This  does  not  take  into  account  the  large  number 
of  species  indigenous  to  this  State  which  had  not  been  hitherto 
recorded  from  those  areas.  The  number  of  indigenous  species 
for  New  South  Wales  now  amount  to  3,259. 

The  accompanying  table  shows  the  percentage  of  the  indigenous 
Plianerogamia  and  the  vascular  Cryptogamia  of  the  north-west 
compared  with  the  similar  flora  of  New  South  Wales. 


New  South  Wales. 

Dicotyledonece. 

Genera  ...      665 

Species         ...   2427 


Monocotyledunece. 

Genera  ...      213 

Species         ...     687 


Acotyledonea\ 

Genera  ...        40 

Species  ...      145 


Total  Genera 
Total  Species 


918 
3259 


North- Western 
New  South  Wales. 

Dicotyledonece. 
Genera        ...      310 
Species       ...     817 


Pekcentage. 


Monocotyledonece. 
Genera       ...      118 
Species       ...     287 


Acotyledonece. 

Genera        ...        24 
Species       ...        33 


Total  Genera     452 
Total  Species  1137 


Genera 

Species 


Genera 
Species 


Genera 
Species 


Genera* 

Species 


46-61 
33-66 


55-39' 
41-77 


60-00 
22-75 


49-23 

34-88 


52  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Class  I.   DICOTYLEDONS,  Ray. 

Suljclass  I.  POLYPETAL^. 

Series  I.    T  h  a  l  a  m  i  f  l  o  r  .e. 

Ranunculace^,  B.  de  Juss. 
Clematis  aristata,  R.Br. 
microphylla,  DC. 
var.  colorata. 
Myosurus  minimus,  Linn. 
Ranunculus  lappaceus,  Sm. 
7'iviclaris,  Banks  et  Sol. 
parvijlorus^  Linn. 
m.uricatus,  Linn."^ 
DiLLENiACE^,  Salis. 

Hihhertia  striata,  R.Br. 

var.  canescens. 

var.  hirtijlora. 

acicularis,  F.v.M. 

glaherrima,  F.v.M. 

Papaverace.e,  Juss. 

Papavev  horridum,  DC. 
hyhridum,  Linn.* 
rhceas,  Linn.* 
Argemone  mexicana,  Linn.f^ 
Crucifer.?:,  B.  de  Juss. 

Nasturtium  palustre,  DC. 
Cardamine  stylosa,  DC. 
dictyosperma,  Hook. 
laciniata,  F.v.M. 
tenui folia.  Hook, 
Alyssum  linifolium,  Steph. 
Sisymhrium  officinale,  Scop.* 
Blennodia  trisecta,  Benth.f 
nasturtioides,  Benth.f 
eremigera,  Benth. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  53 


CRUCIFERiE. 

Blennodia  cardaminoides^  F.v.M. 

lasiocarpa,  F.v.M.f 

canescens,  R.Br. 

C2in7iinghamii,  Benth. 
Sieiiojyetalum  velutinum^  F.v.M. 

lineare,  R.Br. 

nutans,  F.v.M. 
GeococGus  pusillus,  J.  Drumm. 
Menkea  australis,  Lehm. 
Capsella  bursa-pastoris,  Moench.t* 
Senehiera  didyma,  Pers.^' 
Lepidium  strong ylopliylliLrri,  F.v.M, 

leptopetalum^  F.v.M. 

phlebopetalum,  'F.v.M. 

monoplocoides,  F.v.M. 

pajnllosum,  F.v.M. 

ruder  ale,  Linn. 
Thlaspl  cochlear inum,  F.v.M.f 

ochranthuni  F. v.  M. 
FuMARiACE^,  De  Cand. 

Fitraaria  2y(irvi/lora,  Linn."^ 

CAPPARIDEiE,  JUSS. 

Cap2)aris  lasiantha,  R.Br. 

nummularia,  DC. 

mitchelli,  Lindl. 

loranthifolia,  Lindl. 
Apophyllum  anomalum,  F.v.M. 
VioLARiEiE,  De  Cand. 

Viola  hetoniccf'folia,  Sm. 
lonidiiim  jioribundum,  Walp. 

filiforme,  F.v.M. 
PlTTOSPORE^,  R.Br. 

Pittosporum  phillyrceoides,  DC.f 
Bursar ia  spinosa,  Cav. 
Cheiranlhera  linearis,  A.  Cunn. 


54  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES 

POLYGALE.E,  JuSS. 

Comesperma  scopariiun,  Steetz. 
ericinum,  DC. 

FRANKENIACE.E,   St.   Hil. 

Frankenia  paucijiora^  DC. 
Caryophylle^,  Labill. 

Gypsophila  tiihulosa^  Boiss. 

2)erJoliata,  Linn."^ 
Dianthus  prolifer,  Linn.* 
Sapo7iaria  vaccaria,  Linn.* 
Silene  gallica,  Linn."* 
Lychnis  githago,  Lam.* 
Cerastmm  vulgatum,  Linn.^ 
Stellaria  jjungens,  Brongn. 

glauca,  With. 

7nedia,  Linn.* 
Spergula  arvensis,  Linn.* 
Siiergularia  rubra,  Pers. 

PORTULACE^,  JuSS. 

Portulaca  oleracea,  Linn.f 

Jilifolia,  F.v.M. 

digyna,  F.v.M. 
Calandrinia   polyandra,  Benth. 

pusilla,  Lindl. 

volubilis,  Benth. 

calyptrata.  Hook.  f. 
HypericineuE,  St.  Hil. 

Hypericum  gramineu^n,  Forst. 

japonicum,  Thunb. 

Malvaceae,  Juss. 

Lavatera  plebeia,  Sims.f 
Malva  rotundifolia,  Linn.* 

parvijlora,  Linn.* 

sylvestris,  Linn."^-' 

verticillata,  Linn.* 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  55 


Malvaceae. 

Modiola  inuUifida,  Moench.* 
Malvastrum  spicatum,  A.  Gray.']' 
Plagianthus  microphyllus,  F.v.M. 
Sida  corrugata^  Lindl. 

aryentea,  Bail. 

intricaia,  F.v.M. 

virgata,  Hook. 

petrophila,  F.v.M. 

subspicata,  F.v.M. 

rhombifolia,  Linn. 
Ahutilon  tubulosum^  Hook. 

leucopelalum,  F.v.M. 

mitchelli,  Benth. 

otocarpum,  F.v.M. 

avicennce,  Gsertn. 

oxgcarpum,  F.v.M. 

fraseri,  Hook. 
Pavonia  hastata^  Cav. 
Hibiscus  triomtm,  Linn. 

brachysiphonius,  F.v.M. 

krichauffianus,  F.v.M. 

sturtii,  Hook. 

var.  grandiflora. 
Gossypium  sturtii,  F.v.M.f 

SxERCDLiACEiE,  Vent. 

Sterculia  dlversi/olia,  G.  Don.f 
'Ridingia  rugosa,  Steetz. 
Keraudrenia  hookerimia,  Walp. 
Lasiopetalum  behrii,  F.v.M. 
baiteri,  Steetz. 

T1LIACE.E,  Juss. 

Grewia  latifolia,  F.v.M. 
Triumfetta  ivinneckeana,  F.v.M. 
Corchorus  cunninghainii^  F.v.M. 


56  BOTAXY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Series  II.   D  i  s  c  i  f  l  o  r  ^.. 
LiNE^,  DC. 

Linum  marginale,  A.  Cunn. 
Zygophylle.e,  R.Br. 

Tribulns  ierrestris,  Linn.f 

cistoides,  Linn. 
Nitraria  schoberi,  Linn. 
Zygophyllum  apiculatum,  F.v.M.f 

glaucescens,  F.v. M.  f 

iodocarpum,  F.v.M.f 

billardieri,  DC. 
fruticulosum,  DC. 

Geraniace^,  Juss. 

Geranium  dissectum,  Linn.f 
Erodium  cygnorum,  Nees.f 

ciciUm'ium,  L'Her.^'' 
Pelargonium  australe,  Willd. 
Oxalis  cornicidata,  Linn. 

RUTACEiE,  Juss. 

Zieria  asjyalathoides,  A.  Cunn. 

furfuracea,  R.Br. 
Boronia  microphylla,  Sieb. 
Eriostemon  m,yoporoides,  DC,  var.  minor. 

hispididus,  Sieb. 

difformis,  A.  Cunn. 

erici/olius,  A.  Cunn. 
Phehalium  elatius,  Benth. 

rotundi/olium,  Benth. 

glandulosum,  Hook. 

sqiiamulosuvi,  Vent. 
Philotheca  reichenbachiana,  Sieb. 
Asterolasia  mollis,  Benth. 
Correa  speciosa.  Ait,,  var.  leucodada. 
Geijera  j)CLrviJiora,  Lindl.f 
Atalantia  glauca,  Hook. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  57 


MELIACEiE,  JUSS. 

Owenia  acidula,  F.v.M. 
Flindersia  maculosa,  F.v.M.f 
OLACiNEiE,  Mirb. 

Olax  stricta,  R.Br. 
Celastrine.e,  R.Br. 

Celasfrus  cu7ininghamii,  F.v.M. 
SXACKHOUSIEiE,  R.Br. 

Stackhousia  monogyna,  Labill. 
muricata,  Lindl. 
viminea,  Sm. 
Rhamne.e,  Juss. 

Ventllago  vlminalis,  Hook. 
Alphitonia  excelsa,  Reissek. 
Pomaderris  lanigera,  Sims. 
phillyreoides,  Sieb. 
prunifolia,  A.  Cunn. 
Si)yridium  suhochreatum,  Reissek. 

eriocephalum,  Fenzl. 
Cryptandra  ericifolia,  Sm. 


amara,  Sm. 


tomentosa,  Lindl. 
propiiiqua,  A.  Cunn. 
huxifolia,  Fenzl. 
longistaminea,  F.v.M. 
Discaria  australisy  Hook. 

SAPINDACEiE,  Juss. 

Atalaya  hemiglauca,  F.v.M.f 
Nete7'odendron  olece/olium,  Desf.f 
Dodoncea  viscosa,  Linn. 
attenuata,  A.  Cunn.f 
peduncularis,  Lindl. 
lohidata,  F.v.M.f 
horonicefolia,  G.  Don. 
adenophora,  Miq. 
stenozyga,  F.v.M. 


58  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Series  III.     C  a  l  y  c  i  f  l  o  r  .e. 
Leguminos^,  Juss. 
Suborder  I.     PAPILIONACE^. 
Oxylohiiun  trilohatum,  Benth. 
Mirbelia  pungens^  A.  Cunn. 

speciosa,  Sieb. 
Jacksonia  scojmria^  R.Br. 
Daviesia  corymhosa,  Sm. 

filipeSj  Benth. 

acicularis,  Sm. 

geuistifolia,  A.  Cunn. 
Aotus  mollis,  Benth. 
Pultencea  pycnocejjhala,  F.v.  M. 

microphylla,  Sieb.,  var.  cuneata. 

styphelioides,  A.  Cunn. 

procumhens,  A.  Cunn. 

Jlexilis,  Sm. 
Dillwynia  juniperina,  Sieb. 
Bossicea  ensata,  Sieb. 

walkeri,  F.v.M. 

scortechinii,  F.v.M. 
Tenfipletonia  mitelleri,  Benth. 

egena,  Benth. 
Uovea  longifolia,  R.Br.,  et  vars, 
Crotalaria  mitchelli,  Benth. 
Jledicago  sativa,  Linn.* 

lupulhia,  Linn.* 

orbicularis,  Willd."^'* 

scutellata,  Willd.* 

denticulata,  Willd.* 

macidata,  Willd."^'' 

minima,  Willd."^ 

trihuloides,  Willd.* 
Melilotiis  2)arvlJlora,  Desf.* 
Trifolium  repens,  Linn.* 


BY   FRED.  TURNER.  59 


Papilionace^. 

Trifolium  arvense,  Linn.* 

glomeratum,  Linn.'^' 

fragiferum^  Willd.^* 

proGumhens,  Linn.* 
Triyonella  suavissima,  Lindl.f 
Lotus  corniculatus,  Linn. 

australis.  Andr. 
Psoralea  eriantha,  Benth. 

imtens,  Lindl. 

cinerea,  Lindl. 

tenax,  Lindl. 
Indigo/era  eiiueaj}hylla,  Linn. 

trita,  Linn.  f. 

australis,  Willd. 

breiudens,  Benth. 
Seshania  aculeata  Pers. 
Clianthas  dampieri,  A.  Cunn.f 
Swainsona  greyana,  Lindl. 

galegifolia,  U.Br.f  et  vars. 

hrachycarpa,  Benth. 

phacoides,  Benth. f 

burkittii,  F.v.M. 

oligophylla,  F.v.M. 

procumheyis,  F.v.M. f 

phacifolia,  F.v.M. 

orohoides,  F.v.M.f 

lessertii/olia,  DC. 

j7iic7'ophyUa,  A.  Gray. 

laxa,  R.Br. 
Glycyrrhiza  jjsoraleoides,  Benth. 
Desmodium  brachypodum,  A.  Gray. 

varians,  Endl. 
Lespedeza  cuneata,  G.  Don. 
Vicia  saliva,  Linn.* 

villosa,  Linn.* 


60  botany  of  north-western  new  south  wales, 

Papilionace^. 

Glycine  falcata,  Benth. 

clandestina,  Wencll. 

tabacinci,  Benth. 

sericea,  Benth. 

tomentosa,  Benth. 
Hardenhergia  monojohylla,  Benth.,  et  var.  ovata. 
Vigna  vexillata,  Benth. 

lanceolata,  Benth. 
Rhynchosia  minima,  DC. 

Suborder  II.     C^SALPINIE^. 
Cassia  sophera,  Linn.,  var.  schinifolia. 

ple^irocarpa,  F.v.M. 

pruinosa,  F.v.M. f 

circinata,  Benth.  f 

phyllodinea,  R.Br.f 

eremophila,  A.  Cunn.f 

artemisioides ,  Gaud.f 

sturtii,  R.Br.f  et  var. 

desolata,  F.v.M. 
Petalostyles  labicheoides,  R.Br. 
Bauhinia  carronii,  F.v.M. 

Suborder  III.     MIMOSE^i. 
Neptunia  g^'acilis,  Benth. 
Acacia  triptera,  Benth. 

lanigera,  A.  Cunn. 

colletioides,  A.  Cunn. 

tetragonophylla,  F.v.M'. 

rigens,  A.  Cunn. 
juncifolia,  Benth. 

calamijolia,  Sweet. 

ur?7iata,  li.Br. 

lineata,  A.  Cunn. 

undulifolia,  A.  Cunn. 

montana,  Benth. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER. 
MlMOSE^. 

Acacia  verniciflita,  A.  Cunn. 
sentis,  F.v.M.f 
neriifolia,  A.  Cunn. 
notahilis,  F.v.M. 
rubida,  A.  Cunn. 
amcenaj  Wendl. 
hakeoides,  A.  Cunn. 
salicina,  Lindl. 
suhulata,  Bonpl. 
linifolia,  Willd. 
decora^  Reichb. 
hrachyhotrya,  Benth. 
cuUriformis,  A.  Cunn. 
homalophylla,  A.' Cunn. f 
2)endula,  A.  Cunn.f 
osvjaldi,  F.v.M. 
stenophylla,  A.  Cunn. 
viscidida,  A.  Cunn. 

ixioj)hylla,  Benth. 

venulosa,  Benth. 
melanoxylon,  R.Br. 

harjjophylla,  F.v.M. 

excelsa^  Benth. 

complanata,  A.  Cunn. 

cyperophylla^  F.v.M. 

aneura,  F.v.M.f 

cibaria,  F.v.M. 

kempeana,  F.v.M. 

doratoxylon^  A.  Cunn. 

glaucescens,  Willd. 

pruinosa,  A.  Cunn. 

spectahilis,  A.  Cunn. 

polyhotrya,  Benth. 

discolor,  Willd. 

decurrens,  Willd.  f 


Gl 


62  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-AVESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

MiMOSEiE. 

Acacia  dealhata,  Link. 

cardiophylla,  A.  Cunn. 

leptoclada,  A.  Cunn. 

farnesiana,  Willd. 
PithecolobiuM  pruinosiim,  Benth. 

RoSACEiE,  JUSS. 

JRubus  parvifolius,  Linn. 

J'ruticos2is,  Linn.* 
Rosa  ruhiginosa,  Linn.* 
Accena  ovina^  A.  Cunn.f 

sanguisorhce,  Vahl. 
Crassulace^,  De  Cand. 

Tillcea  verticillaris,  DC. 

jnirpurata,  Hook. 

recurva,  Hook. 
Droserace^,  Sails. 

Drosera  peltata^  Sm. 
Halorage^,  R.Br. 

Haloragis  elata^  A.  Cunn. 

ceratophylla,  Endl. 

serra,  Brongn. 

glauca,  Lindl. 

alata,  Jacq. 

heterophylla,  Brongn. 

pinnatifida,  A.  Gray. 

tetragyna,  Hook.  f. 
Myriophyllum  varicpfoliiim,  Hook.  f. 

ve^-rucosum,  Lindl. 
Ceratophyllum  demersiwi,  Linn. 

Myrtace.e,  Juss. 

Homora7ithus  virgatus,  A.  Cunn. 
Calythrix  tetragona,  Labill. 
Micromyrtus  microphylla,  Benth. 
Leptospermum  Jlavescens^  Sm. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  63 


Myrtace^. 

Leptosjnrmum  ay'achnoideum,  Sm. 

lanigerum,  Sm. 

pai'vifolium,  Sm. 
Callistemon  lanceolattis,  DC. 

coccineus,  F.v.M. 

salignus,  DC,  var.  angustifolia. 

brachyandrus,  Lindl.,  et  var.  2^ithyoides. 
Melaleuca  genistifolia,  Sm. 

uncinata,  R.Br. 

hakeoides,  F.v.M. 

tamariscina,  Hook. 
Angophora  intermedia,  DO. 

lanceolata,  Cav. 
EucalyiHus  stelhdata,  "Sieb. 

coriacea,  A.  Cunn. 

amygdalina,  LabilL,  var. 

macrorhyncha,  F.v,M. 

leuGoxylon,  F.v.M. 

melliodora,  A.  Cunn. 

gracilis,  F.v.M. 

paniculata,  Sm. 

populifolia,  Hook. 

ochrophloia,  F.v.M. 

pendida,  A.  Cunn. 

uncinata,  Turcz. 

albens,  Miq. 

melanophloia,  F.v.M. 

microtheca,  F.v.M. 

dumosa,  A.  Cunn. 

incrassata,  Labill. 

dealhata,  A.  Cunn. 

viminalis,  Labill. 

rostrata,  Schlecht. 

stuartiana,  F.v.M. 

oleosa,  F.v.M. 


g4  botany  of  north-western  new  south  wales, 

Myrtace^. 

Eucalyptus  terminalis,  F.v.M. 
Syncarpia  leptopetala,  F.v.M. 

Lythrarie.e,  Juss. 

Ammannia  niuUiJlora,  Roxb. 
Lythrum  salicaria,  Linn. 
Onagrarie.e,  Juss. 

(Enothera  biennis^  Linn.* 

longiflora,  Jacq.* 
Epilobium  junceum,  Forst. 

hillardierianuin,  Ser. 
Jussicea  rep>ens,  Linn. 
Cucurbitace.e,  Juss. 

Cucumis  trig  onus,  Roxb. 
7ny7'iocar]jus,  Naud.*' 
Melothria  muelleri,  Benth. 

CACTEiE,  De  Cand. 

Opuntia  vulgaris,  Mill.f^ 
ferox,  Haw.f* 

FiCOIDEiE,  Dill. 

Mesemhryanthemum  cequilaterale,  Haw. 

pomeridianum,  Linn.* 
Tetragonia  expansa,  Murr.f 
Aizoon  quadrijidum,  F.v.M. 
Trianthema  decandra,  Linn. 
Mullugo  glinus,  A.  Rich. 

orygioides,  F.v.M. 

cerviana,  Ser. 
XJmbellifer^,  Juss. 

Hydrocotyle  laxijiora,  DC. 

trachycarpa,  F.v.M. 
Trachymene  cyanopetala,  Benth. 

australis,  Benth. 

glauci/olia,  Benth. 

incisa,  Rudge. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  65 


Umbellifer^. 

Siehera  linearifolia,  Benth. 
Actinotus  helianthi,  Labill. 

gibbonsii,  F.v.M. 
Eryngiuvi  roslratum,  Cav. 

vesiculosum,  Labill. 

plantagijieum,  F.v.M. 

expaiisum,  F.v.M. 
Apium  aust7'ale,  Thou. 
Daucus  hj'achiatus,  Sieb.f 
Sium  lati/olium,  Linn.'* 

Subclass  II.     MONOPETAL^. 
LORANTHACE^,  JuSS. 

Loranthus  longijlorus,  Desr. 

linear  if olius,  Hook. 

exocarpi,  Behr. 

linophyllus,  Fenzl. 

pendulus,  Sieb.,  et  var.  parvijlorus. 

quandajig,  Lindl. 

grandihracteus,  F.v.M. 
Viscum  articidatum,  Burm. 
Notothixos  coimifolius,  Oliv. 

RUBIACKiE,  JuSS. 

Uedyotis  tillceacea,  F.v.M. 
Canthium  latifolium,  F.v.M. 

olei/oliiwi,  Hook. 
Operculaina  hispida,  Spreng. 
Pomax  umbellata,  Soland. 
Asperula  scoparia,  Hook.  f. 

conferta,  Hook.  f. 
Galium  geminifolium^  F.v.M. 

gaudichatidi,  DC. 

austral e,  DC. 
Composite,  Vaill. 

Leuzea  australis,  Gaud. 
5 


66  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTEdN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

COMPOSITJE. 

Centauvf-.a  solstitialis,  Linri.f* 

meUtensis,  Linn.* 

calcitrapa,  Linn.f* 
Carthmmis  tinctorius,  Linn."*^ 
Onopordon  acantMum,  Linn.* 
Carduus  marianus,  Linn."^ 
Cirsium  lanceolatum,  Scop."*^ 

pahcstre,  Scop.* 

arvense,  Scop.f^ 
Olearia  chrysophylla,  Benth. 

rosinarioiifolia,  Benth. 

ci/do7iicefolia,  Benth. 

rarnulosa,  Benth. 

suhspicata,  Benth. 

ramosissima,  Benth. 

pimeleoides,  Benth. 

conocephala,  F.v.M. 

magniflora,,  F.v.M. 

TYiuelleri,  Benth. 

decurrens,  Benth. 

elliptica,  DC. 

tenuifolla,  Benth. 
Vittadinia  australis,  A.  Rich.,  et  vars. 

scabra,  DC. 
Podocoma  cuneifolia,  R.Br. 
Erigeron  canadensis^  Linn.* 
Minuria  leptophyVa,  DC. 
cunninghamii,  Benth. 
integer rinia,  Benth. 
denticulata,  Benth. 
Calotis  dentex,  R.Br. 
cuneifolia^  R.Br. 
cymbacantha,  F.v.M. 
erinacea,  Steetz. 
scabiosifolia,  Sond. 


BY  FRED.   TURNER.  67 


COMPOSITiE. 

Calotis  scapigera,  Hook. 

lappulacea,  Benth. 

microcephala,  Benth. 

plumuli/era,  F.v.M. 

porfjhyroglossa,  F.v.M. 

hisjndula,  F.v.M. 
Brachycome  melanocarpa^  Send. 

pachyptera^  Turcz. 

stuartii,  Benth. 

graminea,  F.v.M. 

basaltica,  F.v.M. 

trachycarpa,  F.V.M. 

decipiens,  Hook,  f . 

exilis,  Soncl. 

scapi/ormis,  DC. 

heterodonta,  DC. 

ciliaris,  Less. 

marginata,  Benth. 

discolor^  C.  Stuart. 

midtijida,  DC. 
Pluchea  eyrea,  F.v.M. 
Bpaltes  cicniihighamii,  Benth. 

australis,  Less. 
Xanthiuni  spinosum,  Linn.^ 
Siegesheck'ia  oi'ientalis,  Linn. 
Eclipta  platyglossa,  F.v.M. 
Spilanthes  grandijlora,  Turcz. 
Flaveria  australasica,  Hook. 
Cotida  australis,  Hook.  f. 
Myriogyne  miniUa,  Less.,  et  vars. 

racrmiosa,  Hook. 
Ceratogijne  ohionoidts,  Turcz. 
Isoetopsis  gi'dfiiinifjlla,  Turcz. 
Myriocephalus  rhizocephalus,  Benth. 

stuartii,  Benth. 


(jS  botany  of  north-western  new  south  wales, 

composit.e. 

Angianthus  hrachypappus,  F.v.M. 

pusillus,  Benth. 
Gnephosis  eriocarjm,  Benth. 

cyathopajjpa,  Benth. 
Calocephalus  sonderi,  F.v.M. 

citreits,  Less. 

platycephaliis,  Benth. 
Gnaphalodes  idiginosum,  A.  Gray. 
Craspedia  richea^  Cass. 

pleiocejihala,  F.v.M. 

chrysantha^  Benth. 

globosa,  Benth. 
Chthonocephalus  pseudoevax,  Steetz. 
Cassinia  Icevis,  R.Br. 

quinquefaria,  R.Br. 
Eriochlamys  behrii,  Send,  et  Muell. 
Rutidosis  helichrysoides,  DC. 
Millotia  greevesii,  F.v.M. 
Ixiolcena  hrevicompta,  F.v.M. 

lejytolepis,  Benth. 

to?nentosa,  Sond.  et  Muell. 
Podolepis  rutidochlamys^  F.v.]M. 

longipedata,  A.  Cunn. 

acuminata,  R.Br. 

canescens,  A.  Cunn. 

lessoni,  Benth. 

siemssenia,  F.v.M. 
Leptorhynchus  squamatus,  Less. 

pidchellus,  F.v.M. 
Helichrysum  semifertile,  F.v.M. 

hracteatum,  Willd. 

glutinosiun,  Hook. 

collinum,  DC. 

jjodolepideiim,  F.v.M. 

apicidatum,  DC. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  69 


COMPOSITiE. 

Helichrysum  semipapposum,  DC. 

diotophyllum,  F.v.M. 

diosmi/olium,  Less. 

cunninghainii,  Benth. 
Waitzia  corymhosa,  Wendl. 
Helipteruin  anthemoides^  DC. 

jjolygalifolium,  DC. 

Jloribuiidum,  DC 

incanum,  DC. 

cotula,  DC. 

polyphyllum,  F.v.M. 

strictum,  Benth. 

corymhiflorum,  Schlecht. 

moschatum,  Benth. 

dimorpholepis,  Benth. 
Gnaphaliiim.  japonicum,  Thunb. 

indicum,  Linn. 
Senecio  gregorii,  F.v.M. 

platylepis,  DC. 

macrmithus,  A.  Rich. 

lautus,  Forst. 

brachyglossus,  F.v.M. 

cunning ha7nii,  DC. 

anetliifolius,  A.  Cunn. 
Cymhonotus  lawsonianus,  Gaud. 
Cryptostemma  calendidaceu?n,  R.Bi'.f"^ 
Microseris forsteri,  Hook.  f. 
Hypochoeris  glabra,  Linn. 
Picris  hieracioides,  Linn. 
Sonchus  oleraceus,  Linn. 
Tragopogon  porrifolius,  Linn.t* 
Lactuca  saligna,  Linn.* 
Stylidie^e,  K.Br. 

Stylidiuni  graYnmifolium,  Swartz. 
var.  album. 


70  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Sty  LID  I E.^ 

Stylidium  dehile,  F.v.M. 
laricifolhiin,  Rich. 
eglandulosum,  F.v.M. 

GooDENOViK.^,  R.Br. 

Velleia  coriJiata,  F.v.M. 

paradoxa,  R.Br.,  et  var.  stenoptera. 
Goodenia  ovata,  Sm. 

genicidata,  R.Br. 

liederacea,  Sm. 

glabra,  R.Br. 

Totundifolia,  R.Br. 

calcarata,  F.v.M. 

cycloptera,  R.Br. 

pinnatijida,  Schlecht. 

heteromera,  F.v.M. 

glauca,  F.v.M. 

gracilis,  R.Br. 
Sccevola  spinescens,  R.Br. 

ovalifolia,  R.Br. 

cemula,  R.Br. 
Damjnera  hroivnii,  F.v.M. 

lanceolata,  A.  Cunn. 

stricta,  R.Br.,  var.  oblongata, 
Brunonia  australis,  Sm. 

Campanulace.e,  Juss. 

Pratia  erecta,  Gaud. 

puberida,  Benth. 
Isotoma  axillaris,  Lindl. 

petrcea,  F.v.M. 
Wahleribergia  gracilis,  DC. 

saxicola,  DC. 

Epacride^,  R.Br. 

Styphelia  Iceta,  R.Br. 

viridis,  Andr.,  var.  hreviflora. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  71 


Epacride^. 

Melichrus  rotatus,  R.Br. 

urceolatiis,  R.Br. 
Leucopogon  mdaleucoides,  A.  Cunn. 

pleiosperinus,  F.v.M. 

ericoides,  R.Br. 

hiflorus,  R.Br. 

neoanglicus,  F.v.M. 
Acrotriche  divaricata,  R.Br. 

aggregata,  R.Br. 
Monotoca  scoparia^  R.Br. 
Bpacris  ohtusifolia,  Sm. 
Primulace^,  Vent. 

Anagallis  arvensis,  Linn.* 
Jasmines,  Juss. 

Jas7ninum  lineare,  R.Br. f 

suavissimum,  Lindl. 
Notelcea  microcarpa,  R.Br. 

linearis,  Benth. 

APOCYNEiE,  Juss. 

Alstonia  constricta,  F.v.M. 
Parsonsia  lanceolata,  R.Br. 
Lyonsia  reticulata,  F.v.M. 
eucalyptifolia,  F.v.M. 
AsCLEPIADEiE,  R.Br. 

Sarcostemma  aitstrale,  R  Br.  f 
Pentatropis  quinquepartita,  Benth. 
Tylophora  grandijlora,  R.Br. 
Marsdenia  leichhardtiana,  F.v.M. f 

GENTIANE.E,  JuSS. 

Sehcea  ovata,  R.Br. 
Erythrcea  australis,  R.Br.f 
B0RAGINE.E,  Juss. 

Heliotr opium  asperrhnurti,  R.Br. 
Halgania  strigosa,  Schlecht. 


72  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

BORAGINE^. 

Trichodesma  zeylanicum,  R.Br. 
2Ii/osotis  australis,  R.Br. 
Eritrichium  australasicuniy  A. DC. 
Lithosjjerinura  arvense,  Linn.* 
Echinosjyermum  concavum,  F.v. M. 
Rochelia  inaccoya,  F.v.M. 
Cynoglossuin  sitaveolens,  R.Br. 

CONVOLVULACE.E,  JuSS. 

Ipomcea  sepiaria,  Keen. 

angusti folia,,  Jacq. 
Convolvulus  erubescens,  Sims. 
Polymeria  longi/olia,  lindl. 
Breweria  media^  R.Br. 
Cressa  cretica,  Linn. 
Evolvulus  cdsinoides,  Linn. 
Dichondra  repens,  Forst. 
Cuscuta  australis,  K.Br, 

europcea,  Linn.* 

SOLANEiE,  JusS. 

Solanum  nigrum,  Linn.f 

discolor,  R.Br. 

stelligerura,  Sm. 

p)arvifolium,  R.Br. 

ferocissimum,  Lindl. 

amhlymerum,  Dun. 

esuriale,  Lindl. 

chenopodinum,  F.v.M. 

semiarmatum,  F.v.M. 

sodom,(fium,  Linn.* 

armatum,  R.Br. 

cinereum,  R.Br. 

ellipticum.,  R.Br. 
Datura  leichhardtii,  F.v.M. 

stramonium,  Linn.t* 

tatula,  Linn."^' 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  73 

SOLANEiE. 

Nicotiana  suaveolens^  Lehm. 

glauca,  Grah.f"^ 
ScROPHULARiNE^i,  Mirb. 

Duboisia  hopivoodii,  F.v.JVI. 
Anthocercis  albicans,  A.  Cunn. 
Verbascum  virgatum,  With.* 
Celsia  cretica^  Linn."^ 
Linaria  elatine,  Mill."^ 
Mimulus  gracilis,  R.  Br. 

repens,  R.Br. 

prostratus,  Benth. 
Morgania  Jloribunda,  Benth. 

glabra,  R.Br. 
Gratiola  peduiiGulata,  R.Br. 
Veronica  deriventia,  Andr. 

plebeia,  R.Br. 

notabilis,  F.v.M. 

serpyllifolia,  Linn. 

peregrina,  Linn.  ^ 

Buchnera  gracilis,  R.Br. 
Euphrasia  collina,  R.Br. 

scabra,  R.Br. 

arguta,  R.Br. 
BiGNONIACEiE,  R.Br. 

Tecoma  australis,  R.Br. 
ACANTHACE^,  R.Br. 

Ruellia  australis,  R.Br. 
Justicia  jjrocumbenSj  Linn. 
Eranthemum  variabile,  R.Br. 
Pedaline.e,  R.Br. 

Martynia  proboscidea,  Glox.* 

Myoporine^,  R.Br. 

Myoporum,  acuminatum,  R.Br.,  var.  angustifoliiim. 
deserii,  A.  Cunn. 


74  botany  of  nokth-western  new  south  wales, 

Myoporine.e. 

Myoporum  2)lcttycarpum,  R.Br. 
Fholidia  dalyana,  F.v.  ]\r. 

divaricata,  F.v.M. 
Eremophila  botvmanni,  F.v.M. 

oppositifolia,  R.  Br.f 

sturtii,  R.  Br. 

mitchelli,  Benth. 

latrobeif  F.v.M. 

longifolia,  F.v.M. f 

polyclada,  F.v.M. 

hignoniceflora,  F. v.  M,  f 

goodivinii,  F.v.M. 

hrownii,  F.v.M. 

duttoni,  F.v.M. 

macidata,  F.v.M. f,  et  Ya.i\flava. 
Verbenace.e,  Juss. 

Verheiia  officinalis,  Linn. 
Spartothamnus  junceus,  A.  Cunn. 
Labiat^e,  Juss. 

Marruhimn  vidgare,  Linn.*^ 
Stachys  arvensis,  Linn.f* 
Moluccella  Icevis,  Linn.* 
Mentha  grandiflora,  Benth. 

australis,  R.Br. 

satureioides,  R.Br. 
Lycopus  australis,  R.Br. 
Salvia  plebeia,  R.Br. 
Scutellaria  humilis,  R.Br. 
Prostanthera  lasiauthos,  Labill. 

ovalifolia,  R.Br. 

rotundifolia,  R.Br 

denticulata,  R.Br. 

nivea,  A.  Cunn. 

striatijlora,  F.v.M. 

saxicola,  R.Br. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  75 


Labiat.e. 

Prostanthera  eujyhrasioides,  Benth. 

Q'ingens,  Benth. 

microphylla,  A.  Cunn. 
Westringia  rigida,  R.Br. 
Teucriuin  racemosicni,  R.Br. 

GOi'yjJiboswin,  R.Br. 

argutum,  R.Br. 
Ajuga  australis,  R.Br. 
Plantagine^e,  Juss. 

Plantago  debilis,  R.Br. 

varia,  R.Br.f 

lanceolata,  Linn.* 

Subclass  III.     MONOCHLAMYDfi^. 
PilYTOLACCACEiE,   Endl. 

C odonocarpits  cotini/olius,  F.v.  M.f 
Chenopodiace.e,  Meisn. 

Wiagodia  parabolica,  R.Br.f 

crassi/'olia,  R.Br. 

spinescens,  R.Br. 

hastata^  R.Br.f 

nutans,  R.Br.f 

linifolia,  R.Br. 
Chenopodium  nitrarlaceay  F.v. M.f 

auricomum,  Lindl.f 

album,  Linn."^' 

triangulare,  R.Br. 

carinatuni,  R.Br.f 

cristatum,  F.v.M. 

atriplicinum,  F. v.  M.  f 
Atriplex  stipitata,  Benth. f 

quinnii,  F.v.M. 

nummidar'ia,  Lindl.f 

vesicaria,  Hew.f 

angidata,  Benth,  f 


76  botany  of  nokth-western  neav  south  wales, 

Chenopodiace.e. 

Atriplex  semibaccata,  R.Br.f 

muelleriy  Benth.f 

campanulata,  Benth.f 

leptocarj)a,  F.v.M.f 

lijiibata,  Benth.f 

halimoides,  Lindl.f 

holocar'pa,  F. v.  M.  f 

spongiosa,  F.  v.  M. 
Enchylcena  microphylla^  Moq. 

tomentosa,  R.Br.f 

villosa,  F.v.M. 
Kochia  lanosa,  Lindl.f 

triptera,  Benth. 

brevi/olia,  R.Br.f 

villosa,  Lindl.f 

plani/olia,  F.v.M.f 

sedi/olia,  F.v.M.f 

aphi/lla,  R.Br.f 

brachyptera,  F.v.M.f 

stelligera,  F.v.M.f 
Chenolea  sclerolcenoides,  F.v.M. 
Babbagia  dipterocarpa,  F.v.M. 
Sclerolctina  diacantha,  Benth.f 

lanicuspis,  F.v.M. 

bicornis,  Lindl. 

b'rflova,  R.Br. 

paradoxa,  R.Br.f 
Threlkeldia  brevicus2ns,  F.v.M. 
Anisacantha  muricata,  Moq. 

divaricata,  R.Br. 

bicuspis,  F.v.M. 

echinopsila,  F.v.M. 
Salicor7iia  tenuis,  Benth. 
Salsola  kcdi,  Linn. 
Amarantace.e,  Juss. 

Deerlngia  celosioides,  R.Br. 


BY  FRED.   TURNER. 


77 


Amarantace^. 

Aniarantus  panicalatus,  Linn."*^ 

initcheUii,  Bentli. 

viridis,  Linn. 

macrocarpus,  Benth. 
Trichiniuin  obovatum,  Gaud.f 

parvijloruin,  Lindl. 

alopecuroideum,  Lindl. 

nohile,  Lindl.  f 

macrocephahim,  R.Br. 

exaltatum,  Benth. 

semilanatum^  Lindl. 
AUei'iianthera  nodijiora^  R.Br. 

de7iticulata,  R.Br. 

nana,  R.Br. 

PARONYCHiACEiE,  Meissn. 

Scleranthus  bijiorus,  Hook.  f. 

POLYGONACE^,  Juss. 

Emex  australis,  Steinh.'j'* 
Rumex  brotvnii,  Campd. 

dumosus,  A.  Cunn. 

halophilus,  F.v.M. 

bidens,  R.Br. 

acetosella,  Linn.* 
Polygonum  aviculare,  Linn."^ 

jylebeium,  R.Br. 

prostratum,  R.Br. 

minus,  Huds. 

lapathifoliuj7i,  Linn. 

convolvulus,  Linn."^ 
Muhlenbeckia  gracilUma,  Meissn. 

rliyticarya,  F.v.M. 

cuiininghamii,  F.v.M. 

Nyctagine.e,  Juss. 

Boerhaavia  diffusa,  Linn.f 


78  botany  of  north-western  new  south  wales, 

Proteace^,  Juss. 

PeArophila  pulchella,  R.Br. 
Isopogon  petiolaris,  A.  Cunn. 

anemoni/olius,  Knight. 
Fersoonia  cornifolia,  A.  Cunn. 

sericea,  A.  Cunn. 

fastigiaia,  R.Br. 

prostrata,  R.Br. 

lanceolata,  Anclr. 

curvifolia,  R.Br. 

mtiininghcwiii^  R.Br. 

tenuifolia,  R.Br. 
Grevillea  ilicifolia,  R.Br. 

striata,  R.Br. 

triternata,  R.Br. 

ramosissima,  Meissn. 

anethifolia,  R.Br. 
Hakea  eriantha,  R.Br. 

pampliniana,  Kipp. 

saligna,  Knight. 

purpui'ea,  Hook. 

acicularis,  R.Br. 

JeMcoptera,  R.Br.f 

microcarpa,  R.Br. 

dactgloides,  Cav. 
Lomatia  ilici/'olia,,  R.Br. 
Banksia  colliria,  R.Br. 

marginata,  Cav. 
Thymele^,  Juss. 

Pinielea  glauca,  R.Br. 

Golli7ta,  R.Br. 

simplex,  F.v.M. 

sericostachya,  F.v.M. 

trichostachya,  Lindl. 

7iiicrocephuIa,  R.Br. 

paucijiora,  R.Br. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  79 


Thyme  LEiE. 

Pimelea  Jlava,  R.Br. 
curviflora,  R.Br, 
var.  sericea. 
var.  pedunculata. 

EuPHORBIACEiE,  JuSS. 

Euphorbia  australis,  Boiss. 

drummondii,  Boiss. 

alsincEfloray  Baill. 

eremophila,  A.  Cunn. 
Beyeria  viscosa,  Miq. 
Eicinocarpus  hoivmanni,  F.v.M. 

ledifolius,  F.v.M. 
Bertya  jnnifolia,  Planch. 

Gunninghamii,  Planch. 

rosmarhiifoliay  Planch. 

lyiitchelli,  Muell. 
Phyllanthus  thesioides,  Benth. 

rig 6718,  Muell. 

ramosissimus,  Muell. 

fuernrohrii,  F.  v.  M. 

lacunarius,  F.v.M. 

thymoides,  Sieb. 

Jilicaulis,  Benth. 
B7'eynia  oblongi/olia,  Muell. 
Adriana  acerifolia,  Hook. 
Eicinus  co77i7nums,  Willd.f* 

XJRTICE.E,  Vent. 

Ficus  ruhiginosa,  Desf. 

aspera,  Forst. 
Elatostenima  reticidatum,  Wecld. 
Parietaria  debilis,  Forst. 
Urtica  U7'ens,  Linn."^' 

Casuarine^,  Mirb. 

Casua7'ina  st7nGta,  Ait. 


80  botany  of  north-western  new  south  wales, 

Casuarine^. 

Casuarina  glauca,  Sieb.  f 

suherosa^  Ott.  and  Dietr.f 

cunninghamiana,  Miq. 

distyla,  Vent. 
Santalace.e,  R.Br. 

Thesium  australe,  R.Br. 

Santaluin  lanceolatum,  R.Bf.,  var.  angustifolium. 

Fusanus  acuminatus,  R.Br.f 

persicarius,  F.v.M. 
Choretrum  glomeratum,  R.Br. 

candoUei,  F.v.M. 
Leptomeria  billardieri,  R.Br. 
Exocarjnis  mipressiformis,  Labill. 

spaj'tea,  R.Br. 

aphglla,  R.Br. 

stricta,  R.Br. 

Subclass  IV.     GYMNOSPERMffl. 
CONIFERiE,  JUSS. 

Frenela  rohusta,  A.  Cunn. 
muelleri,  Parlat. 
endlichei'i,  Parlat. 
Cycade^,  Rich. 

Macrozamia  paido-guliehni,  F.v.M. 
spiralis,  Miq.f 
var.  secunda. 
var.  diplomera. 

Class  II.     MONOCOTYLEDONS,  Ray. 

Hvdrocharide.e,  Lam. 

Ottelia  ovalifolia,  L.  C,  Rich. 

Vallisneria  spiralis,  Linn. 

Htjdrilla  verticillata,  Casp. 
Orchide^,  R.Br. 

Liparis  refiexa,  Lindl. 

ccelogynoides,  F.v.M. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  81 


OriCHIDE^. 

Dendrohium  pugioniforme,  A.  Cunn. 

ieretifoliiiin^  R.Br. 

mortii,  F.v.M. 
Bulbophyllum  elisce,  F.v.M. 
Dipodium  punctatwm,  R.Br. 
Cymbidium  canalicidatum,  R.Br. 
Spiranthes  australis,  Lindl. 
Thelymitra  ixioides,  S\v. 

loiigifolia,  Forst. 
Diuris  alba,  R.Br. 

aurea,  Sm. 

macidata,  Sm. 

pediincidata,  R.Br. 

pallens,  Benth.    ' 

abbreviata,  F.v.M. 

sulphurea,  R.Br. 
Prasophyllum  flavum ,  R.  Br. 

patens,  R.Br. 

fuscu7n,  R.Br. 
Microtis  porrifolia,  Spreng. 

parviflora,  R.Br. 
Tterostylis  aciiminata,  R.Br. 

reflexa,  R.Br. 

obtusa,  R.Br. 

mufica,  R.Br. 

rif/a,  R.Br. 
Caleana  inajor,  R.Br. 

minor,  R.Br. 
Acianthus  exsertus,  R.Br. 
Eriochilus  autumnalis,  R.Br. 
Caladenia jilamentosa,  R.Br. 

pate7'S07ii,  R.Br.,  var.  dilatata. 

suaveolens,  Reichb. 

carnea,  B.Br. 

ccerulea,  R.Br. 


82  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Orchidk^. 

Glossodia  major,  R.Br. 
minor,  R.Rr. 
Iride.e,  R.Br. 

Pater sonia  glaitca,  R.Br.,  et  var.  alha. 
sericea,  R.Br. 


Sisyrinchiitin  micranthmn,  C 


av 


* 


Lihertia  paniculata,  Spreng. 
Amaryllide.e,  St.  Hil. 

Hcemodorum  planifolium,  R.Br. 
Hypoxis  hygrometrica,  Labill. 

glabella,  R.Br. 
Crinum  flaccidur)i,  Herb. 
Calostemma  purpureum,  R.Br. 

luteum,  Sims. 
LiLiACE^,  De  Cand. 

Rliipogoniun  discolor,  F.v.M. 
Dianella  Icevis,  R.Br. 

ccerulea,  Sims. 
Geitonojylesium  cginosum,  A.  Cunn. 
Angnillaria  dioica,  R.Br. 
Bidhine  hulbosa.  Haw. 

semiharbata,  Haw. 
Thysanotns  tuherosus,  R.  Br. 

baueri,  R.Br. 
Cd'sia  vittata,  R.Br. 
Corynotheca  lateriflora,  F.v.M. 
Tricoryne  elatior,  R.Br. 
Stypandra  glauca,  R.Br. 
Arthropodium  minus,  R.Br. 
Dichopogon  strictus,  Baker. 

sieberianiis,  Kunth. 
La.vmannia  gracilis,  R.Br. 
PniLYDRACEiE,  R.Br. 

Philydrum  lanuginositm,  Banks. 


BY  FRED.  TURNER.  83 


Xyride.e,  Kunth. 

XyvL^  gracilis,  R.  Br. 
opevcnlala,  Labill. 
O0MMELYNACE.E,  Endl. 

Commelyna  cyanea,  R..  Br. 
Aneilema  acuminatum,  R.Br. 
gramineum,  R.Br. 
JuNOACE.E,  Agardh. 

Xerotes  longifolia,  R.Br, 
filiformis,  R.Br. 
eloiigata,  Benth. 
leucocephala,  R.  Br. 
Xanthorrhma  arborea,  R.Br. 
Luzida  campestris,  DC. 
Juncus  2^lctnif alius,  R.Br. 
homalocaulis,  F.v.M. 
communis,  E.  Mey. 
pallichis,  R.Br. 
prismatocai'pits,  R.Br. 
capillaceus.  Hook.  f. 
TypHACE^,  De  Cand. 

Typhoj  angustifolia^  Linn. 
Lemnace/E,  De  Cand. 

Lemna  trisulca,  Linn. 
'ininor,  Linn. 
oligorrhiza,  Kurz. 
Naiades,  Agardh. 

Triglochin  procera,  R.Br. 
Potamogeton  natans,  Linn. 
C7'ispus,  Linn. 

obtusifolius,  Mert.  et  Koch. 
pectinatus,  Linn. 
Xaias  tenuifolia,  R.Br. 

■CENTROLEPIDEiE,  DeSV. 

Centrolepis  aristaia,  Rcx3m.  et  Schult. 
fascicularis,  Labill. 


84  HOTANV  OF  NOKTII-WESTERX  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

Restiace.e,  R.Br. 

Lepyrodia  scariosa,  R.Br. 
Restio  gracilis^  R.Br. 
Hypolcena  lalerijiora,  Beiitli. 

CYPERACEiE,  R.Br. 

Kyllinga  intermedia,  R.Br. 
Cyperus  polystachyus,  Rottb. 
pygmceus,  Rottb. 
enervis,  R.Br. 
dJffoy'mis,  Linn. 
flavidus,  Retz. 
Goncinnus,  R.Br. 
filipes,  Benth. 
vaginatus,  R.Br. 
dactylotes,  Benth. 
•  fulvus,  R.Br. 

carinatus,  R.Br. 
rotundus,  Linn.f 
gun7iii,  Hook.  f. 
exaltatus,  Retz. 
esculentus,  Linn. 

boivmanni,  F.v.M. 
Heleocharis  sj^hacelata,  R.Br. 

cylindrostachys,  Boeckel. 

acuta,  R.Br. 

atricha,  R.Br. 
Fimhristylis  monostachya,  Hassk. 

velata,  R.Br. 

castivalis,  Vahl. 

diphylla,  YahL 

neilsoni,  F.v.M. 

barbata,  Benth. 
Scirpus  Jluitans,  Linn. 

setaceus,  Linn. 

inu7idatus,  Spreng. 

prolifer,  Rottb. 


BY  FRED.   TURNKR.  85 


Cyperace.e. 

Exocai'ya  scleroides,  Benth. 
Schcenus  melctnostachyus,  R.Br. 

vaginatus,  F.v.  M. 
Mesomelcana  sphctrocephala,  Benth. 
Leindosperraa  exaltatum,  R.Br. 

laterahy  R.Br. 
Cladium  articulatum^  R.Br. 

glomeratum^  R.Br. 

tetraqueirum,  Hook.  f. 

guiinii,  Hook.  f. 

junceiim,  R.Br. 
Gahnia  melanocarpa,  R.Br. 
Caustis  2^&ntand7'a,  R.Br. 
Carex  inversa,  R.Br.  ' 

paniculata,  Linn. 

contracta,  F.v.M. 

vulgaris,  Fries,  var.  gaudichaudiana. 

acuta,  Linn. 

loholepis,  F.v.M. 

gunniana,  Boott. 

2)seudocyperits,  Linn. 
Gramine^,  R.Br. 

Faspaluin  distichum,  Linn.f 
Eriochloa  punctata,  Hamilt.f 

annulata,  Kunth.f 
Panicum  cmnicoliim,  F.v.M. f 

divaricatisshnum,  R.Br.,  et  vars.f 

macr actinium,  Benth. f 

sanguinale,  Linn.f 

parvijlorum,  R.Br. | 

leuGophopAim,  H.B.  et  K.f 

semialatum,  R.Br. 

Jiavidum,  Retz.,  et  var.f 

gracile,  R.  Br.f 

helopus,  Trin. 


86  BOTANY  OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NEW  SOUTH  AVALES, 

GKAMINKiE. 

Panicum  (/ilesii,  Benth. 

d'lstachyum,  Linn.f 

r  ever  sum,  F.v.M. 

colonum,  Linn. 

crus-galli,  Linn.f 

adspe^'sum,  Trin. 

tidcumhense,  Turner. 

marginatum,  R.Br. 

obsept^im,  Trin. 

miliaceinn,  Linn.^' 

effusum,  R.Br.,  et  var.f 

mitchelli,  Benth. 

deco7npositum,  R.Br.f 

t7'achyrhachis,  Benth. 

prohituin,  F.v.M. f 
Setaria  glauca,  Beauv.f 

viridis,  Beauv."^ 
Chamceraphis  spinescens,  Poir. 
Spinifex  paradoxus,  Benth. 
Lappago  racemosa,  Willd. 
Neurachne  mitchelliana,  Nees.f 

munroi,  F.v.M. 
Per  Otis  rara,  R.Br. 

Heteropogon  coniortus,  Roem.,  et  Schult.f 
Ischcemuvi  pectinatwm,  Trin. 

laxum,  R.Br.f 
Pollinia  fulva,  Benth.  f 
Andropogon  eriantlioides,  F.v.M.f 

sericeus,  R.Br.f 

pertusus,  Willd  f 

bombycinus,  R.  Br.  f 

rpfr actus,  R.Br.f" 
lacJiuatherus,  Benth.  f 
Imperata  arundlnacea,  Cyr.f 
Clirysopogon  gryllus,  Trin. 


by  fred.  turner.  87 

Gramine^. 

Glirysoiwgon  pavvijiorus^  Bentli.,  et  \iiv.Jiavesce7ts. 
SoryJiuvi  hahpense,  Pers. 

plumosum,  Beauv.f 
Anthistiria  cilinta,  Linn.f 

avenacea,  F.v.M.y 

menibraiiacea,  Lindl.f. 
Arundinella  Qiepalensis,  Trin. 
Poly2)ogon  monspeliensis^  Desf.* 
MicrolcE7ia  stipoides,  R.Br.f 
Alopecui'us  geniculatus,  Linn.f 
Phalaris  canariensis,  Linn.* 
Aristida  stipoides,  K.Br. 

arenaria,  Gaud. 

hehriana,  F.v.M. 

lepiopoda,  Benth. 

vagans,  Cav.,  et  var.  compacla. 

ramosa,  R.Br. 

calycina,  R.Br. 
Sti'pa  elegantissima,  Labill. 

77iic7'antha,  Cav. 

setacea,  R.Br. 

semibay^bata,  R.Br. 

pubescens,  R.Br. 

aristigluinis,  F. v. M. 

scabra,  Lindl. 
Dichelachne  crinita,  Hook,  f.f 

sciurea,  Hook,  f.f 
Agrostis  scabra,  Willd. 
Deyeuxia  forsteri,  Kunth.f 

quadriseta,  Benth. f 

scabra,  Benth. 
Air  a  caryophyllea,  Linn. 
iJolcus  lanatus,  Linn.* 
Avena  fatua,  Linn.-'' 
Amphibromus  7ieesii,  Steud.f 


88  botanv  of  nokth-western  new  south  walks, 

Gramine.e. 

Danthonia  bipartita,  F.v.M.f 

carphoides,  F. v . M . t 

pallida,  R.Br.f 

racemosa^  R.Br.,  et  vars. 

pilosa,  R.Br. 

semiannidaris,  R.Br.f 
Aiyi2)hipogon  str ictus,  R.Br.f 
Uchhwpogon  oratus,  Beauv.f 
Pappophorum  nigricans,  R.Br.f 

avenaceum,  Lindl.f 
Astrehla  peciinala,  F.v.M.f 

triticoides,  F.v.M.,  et  var.  lajjpacea.j 

elymoides,  F.v.M.f 
Triraphis  mollis,  R.Br.,  et  var.  hiunilis.f 
I'riodia  mitchelU,  Benth. 

pungens,  R.Br. 

iri'itans,  R.Br. 
ijynodon  dactylon,  Pers.f 
Ghloris  acicidaris,  Lindl.f 

truncata,  R.Br.,f  et  var. 

vent7'icosa,  B.Br.,  et  var. 

harhata,  Sw.,  var.  decora. 
Eleusine  cegypliaca,  Pers.f 
Leptochloa  subdigitata,  Trin. 

chintnsis,  Nees. 
Biplachne  lolii/ormis,  F.v.M. 

fusca,  Beauv.f 
Sporobolus  virginicus,  Kunth,  var.  pallida,  j 

itidicus,  R.Br.f 

pulchellus,  R.Br. 

lindleyi,  Benth.  f 

actinocladus,  F.v.M. 
Eriachne  aristidea,  F.v.M. 

obtusa,  R.Br.f 
Ectrosia  leporina,  R.Br. 


BY  FRED.   TURNER.  89 


Gram  IN  E^. 

Lmnarckia  aurea,  Moencli."^ 
Phragmites  covwiunis,  Trin. 
Elytrophorus  artlculatus^  Beauv. 
Koeleria  cristata,  Pera.* 

phleoides,  Pers.  ^ 
Dactylis  glomerata,  Linn.'^ 
Eragrostis  tenella,  Beauv. 

nigra,  Nees,  var.  trachycarpa. 

megalosperma,  F.v.M. 

pilosa,  Beauv., ^  et  var.  humilis. 

brownii,  Nees. 

costata,  Turner. 

lanijiora,  Benth. 

eriopoda,  Beiith: 

cluetophylla,  Steud. 

lacunar ia,  F.v.M.f 

falcaia,  Gaud. 
Poa  ccespitosa,  Forst.,t  et  vars. 

annua,  Linn."^ 

lepida,  F.v.M. 
Glycerla  /ordeana,  F.  v.  M.  f 

Jluitans,  R.Br.f 

latispicea,  F.v.M. 

ramigera,  F.v.M.f 
Briza  minor,  Linn.* 
Bromus  inoUis,  Linn."^ 

arenarius,  LabilL,  var.  niacrostachya.j 

sterilis,  Linn.^' 
C eratochloa  unioloides,  DC*^'    ^ 
Festuca  bromoides,  Linn. 
Agropyruni  scabrum,  Beauv.  f 
Lolium  jyerenne,  Linn.^' 

iemulentuin,  Linn."^' 
Hordeum  murinum,  Linn."^ 


90  TiOTANY   OF  NORTH-WESTERN  NKW  SOUTH  WALES. 

Class  III.    ACOTYLEDONS,  Juss. 
Lycopodiace.e,  Svvartz. 

Lycopodium  densutn,  Labill. 
Selaylnella  preissiana^  Spring. 
Azolla  pinnata,  R.Br. 

rubra,  R.Br. 
Marsileace.e,  R.Br. 

Marsilea  drummoiidii,  A.Br.f 
FiLicES,  Linn. 

Ophioglossum  viilgaium,  Linn. 
Botrijchium  ternatum,  Swartz. 
Schizcea  bifida,  Swartz. 
Platyzoma  micro  pity  Hum,  R.Br. 
Gleichenia  dicarpa,  R.Br. 
Alsophila  australis,  R.Br. 
Dicksonia  antarctica,  Labill. 
Davallia  pyxid.ata,  Cav. 
Lindsfea  linearis,  Sw^artz. 

microphylla,,  Swartz. 
Adiantuin  ctthivpicnm,  Linn. 

formosum,  R.Br. 

hispidulum,  Swartz. 
Cheilanthes  tenuifulia,  Swartz. 
Pteris falcata,  R.Br. 

tremula,  R.Br. 

aquilina,  Linn.,  var.  escidenta. 
Lomaria  capensis,  Willd. 
Blechiium  cartilagiiieum,  Sw^artz. 
Doodia  aspera,  R.Br. 
Asplenium  flabellifoliuin,  Cav, 

falcatum,  Lam. 
Aspi'liiun  aculeatam,  Swartz. 
Poly  podium  serpens,  Forst. 
Notliolcena  vellea,  R.Br. 

distans,  R.Br. 
Grammitis  riUrnfolia,  R.Br. 

le2)tophylla,  Swartz. 


91 

APPENDIX. 

Description  of  a  New  Australian  Grass. 

By  Fred.  Turner,  F.L.S,  F.R.H.S.,  &c. 

Eragrostis  cost  ATA,  sp.nov. 

An  annual,  tufted  grass  from  six  to  fifteen,  rarely  eighteen, 
inches  high  including  tlie  inflorescence,  glabrous  except  for  a 
ring  of  spreading  white  hairs,  varying  in  intensity,  at  the  orifice 
of  the  sheaths.  Leaves  from  three  to  four  inches  long,  three 
lines  wide,  tapering  into  fine  points,  and  prominently  ribbed  on 
the  underside.  The  sheaths  also  are  ribbed,  but  not  so  pro- 
minently as  the  undersides  of  the  leaves.  Panicle  loosely 
pyramidal,  three  to  six  inches  long,  with  short  horizontal,  rather 
rigid  branches,  the  lower  ones  an  inch  and  a  half  long,  the  upper 
ones  shorter.  Spikelets  cllistered,  pedicellate,  very  flat,  of  a  pale 
leaden  colour  when  young,  Anally  assuming  a  light  straw  colour, 
three  to  seven  lines  long  and  two  lines  broad,  with  from  ten  to 
thirty  or  more  flowers,  the  rhachis  at  length  articulate.  The 
outer  empty  glumes  rather  unequal  and  somewhat  shorter  than 
the  flowering  ones,  keeled,  with  faint  lateral  nerves.  Flowering 
glumes  distichous,  one  line  long,  obtuse,  the  lateral  nerve  on  each 
side  near  the  margin  and  very  prominent.  Palea  shorter  than 
the  flowering  glume,  incurved,  thin,  the  keels  sparsely  ciliate. 
Stamens  usually  three,  with  very  small  anthers.  Grain  free, 
brown  when  ripe,  and  very  broadly  ovoid. 

Ilab. — Breeza  Plains,  Werris  Creek,  Namoi  River,  and  near 
Tamworth,  New  South  Wales.      (Collected  by  Fred.  Turner). 

Erag rostis  costata  belongs  to  the  Megastachya  section  of  the 
genus,  and  its  aflS.nities  are  E.  hroiunii,  Nees  (a  species  common 
to  many  parts  of  Australia),  and  E.  concinna,  Steud.  (a  North 
and  Central  Australian  grass).  It  differs  principall}^  from  the 
polymorphous  species  E.  brownii,  Nees,  by  its  distinctly  pedi- 
cellate spikelets,  its  obtuse  flowering  glumes,  and  its  very  pro- 
minent lateral  nerves  being  nearly  marginal;  and  from  E.  con- 
cinna, Steud.,  principally  by  its  leaves,  the  disposition  of  its 
inflorescence  and  its  flowering  glumes  and  palea. 


92 


CONTRIBUTION  TO  OUR  KNOWLEDGE  OF  THE 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  PANCREAS. 

By  H.  G.  Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S. 

{From  tlie  FlnjsioJoijical  Lahorafory  of  the  University  of  Sydney). 

Preliminary  Communication. 

Ilistoriccd. — Claude  Bernard^  in  1848  obtained  pancreatic 
juice  by  inserting  a  silver  canula  into  the  larger  pancreatic  duct 
in  the  dog  through  an  incision  in  the  h3'pochondrium.  When 
the  canula  was  inserted  almost  immediately  after  a  meal  of  meat 
and  water,  the  juice  was  found  flowing  along  the  duct,  and  was 
collected  from  the  canula.  Inserted  four  hours  after  a  meal, 
juice  flowed  at  a  rate  of  two  to  three  drops  a  minute  from  the 
tube.  In  a  dog  starved  for  twenty-four  hours  no  juice  was 
obtained  from  the  duct,  and  onl}^  a  ver}-  few  drops  appeared  in 
the  canula  in  a  day.  C.  Bernard-  also  noted  that  the  introduc- 
tion of  ether  into  the  stomach  produced  soon  after  a  flow  of  pan- 
creatic juice. 

Heidenhein'"'  investigated  the  relation  of  the  secretion  of  the 
juice  to  the  entry  of  food  into  the  stomach,  and  noted,  inter  cdia, 
the  increase  that  occurred  three  and  seven  hours  after  a  meal. 

Dolinski^  studying  the  action  of  bodies  j^i'omoting  the  flow  of 
pancreatic  juice,  noted  that  secretion  was  produced  by  the  intro- 
duction of  acid  into  the  duodenum.  He  thought  also  that  the 
acid  of  the  chj^ne  brought  about  its  own  neutralization  b}^  induc- 
ing a  flow  of  alkaline  pancreatic  juice.  Collating  these  results 
with  those  of  other  pupils,  Pawlow''  concluded  that  the  acid  was 
the  principal  factor  in  chyme  producing  a  reflex  secretion  of  pan- 
creatic juice.  Pawlow  had  already  shown  the  existence  of  fibres 
in  the  vagus,  stimulation  of  which  was  followed  by  a  flow  of  the 


BY    H.    G.    CHAPMAN.  93 

juice.  Other  observers  [Bernstein'^,  Gottlieb'],  earlier  and  later, 
had  shown  that  stimulation  of  the  peripheral  ends  of  the  vagi 
could  inhibit  an  already  established  flow.  Attempting  to  eluci- 
date this,  Popielski^  observed  that  the  flow  evoked  by  .stimulation 
of  one  vagus  might  be  inhibited  by  stimulation  later  of  the  same 
or  other  vagus;  and  further,  that  the  flow  produced  by  the  intro- 
duction of  acid  into  the  duodenum  was  regularly  inhibited  by 
stimulation  of  the  vagus.  He  also  found  that  the  flow  following 
upon  the  introduction  of  0*4%  HCl  into  the  duodenum  occurred 
after  section  of  the  vagi  and  of  the  sympathetic  trunks.  From 
these  results  he  concluded  that  the  reflex  centre  must  lie  in  the 
abdominal  cavity.  His  attempts  to  localise  its  position  were  not 
successful.  Later^  he  showed  that  the  flow  resulting  from  the 
acid  occurred  after  section  of  both  vagi  and  the  splanchnic  nerves, 
or  after  destruction  of  the  spinal  cord,  or  after  extirpation  of  the 
solar  plexus. 

Wertheimer  and  Lepage^"  found  that  the  introduction  of  acid 
into  the  small  intestine  produced  a  flow  which  became  less  as  the 
injection  was  made  nearer  to  the  caecum. 

Bayliss  and  Starling^^  repeated  these  experiments,  and  found 
that  the  injection  of  from  30  to  50  c.c.  of  0-4  %  HCl  into  a  loop 
of  jejunum,  after  a  latent  period  of  two  minutes,  produced  a 
marked  flow  of  pancreatic  juice.  This  effect  was  still  produced 
after  section  of  the  vagi,  section  of  the  spinal  cord  at  the  foramen 
magnum,  destruction  of  the  spinal  cord,  section  of  the  splanchnic 
nerves,  extirpation  of  the  solar  plexus,  or  any  combination  of 
these  operations.  On  introducing  acid  into  a  loop  of  intestine 
separated  from  the  body  except  for  the  artery  and  vein,  a  flow  of 
pancreatic  juice  was  evoked.  The  mucosa  was  then  scraped  from 
this  loop,  ground  up  with  sand  and  acid,  and  the  extract  filtered. 
This  was  introduced  into  the  jugular  vein,  and  called  forth  a 
copious  flow  of  pancreatic  juice,  Wertheimer  and  Lepage^- had 
already  shown  that  the  injection  of  acid  into  the  circulation  was 
without  effect  upon  the  secretion  of  pancreatic  juice.  Further 
investigation  revealed  the  exceeding  potency  of  the  body  in  the 
extract,  to  which  the  name  of  secretin  was  given. 


94  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    PANCUEAS, 

111  a  further  papei-^'*  Bayliss  and  Starling  showed  that  secretin 
from  the  pig,  squirrel,  new-born  kitten,  monkey,  man,  dog,  cat, 
frog,  tortoise,  sahnon,  dog-fish,  and  skate,  was  acti\e  upon  the 
dog.  Also  they  showed  that  secretin  produced  an  active  flow  of 
pancreatic  juice  in  the  rabbit,  cat,  and  monkey.  They  commented, 
therefore,  on  the  universality  of  the  mechanism.  They  also 
pointed  out  the  probability  of  the  chemical  stimulus  being  the 
active  one  in  calling  forth  pancreatic  juice  during  natural 
digestion. 

Scope  of  investigation. — In  this  investigation  the  effect  of 
extracts  of  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  intestine  of  numbers  of 
the  Australian  fauna  has  been  tested,  while  incidentally  a  number 
of  observations  on  factors  affecting  the  secretion  was  made. 

Methods,  etc. — The  animals  used  were  dogs  and  native  porcu- 
pines (Echidna  hystrix).  Ether  amiesthesia  was  used  after 
tracheotomy,  the  anaesthetic  being  given  through  a  Wolff's  bottle. 
The  dogs  were  previously  narcotized  with  morphia  hypodermically 
administered.  The  blood  pressure  was  recorded  by  a  mercurial 
manometer  connected  to  the  carotid  artery.  The  pancreatic 
juice  was  collected  through  a  glass  canula  inserted  into  one  of  the 
pancreatic  ducts.  The  drops  were  noted  with  a  watch  and 
marked  by  a  lever  on  the  recording  cylinder.  The  extracts  were 
injected  into  the  right  jugular  vein  by  means  of  a  burette  and 
canula  inserted  into  the  central  end  of  the  vein,  and  controlled 
by  VjuU  dog  forceps.  The  extracts  to  be  tested  were  prepared  by 
grinding  the  mucous  membrane  (either  fresh  or  kept  under 
absolute  alcohol)  with  sand.  This  mucosa  was  extracted  with 
from  2-5  times  its  weight  of  0'4  %  hydrochloric  acid  from  30 
minutes  to  16  hours.  The  extract  was  boiled,  rendered  fainth' 
alkaline  with  soda,  then  just  acid  with  acetic  acid  and  filtered. 
The  filtrate  was  collected  in  sterile  flasks,  which  were  plugged 
with  wool  while  hot,  and  then  boiled  for  five  minutes.  These 
will  keep  sterile  and  active.  If  this  is  not  done  the  extracts 
putrefy,  and  the  secretin  disappears  in  from  5-10  days.  In  one 
case  a  badly  smelling  extract  made  seven  days  before  was  filtered 


BY    H.    G.    CHAPMAN. 


95 


and  tested.     It  Ccaused  a  rapid  secretion,  though  it  had  stood  in 
the  laboratory  at  17°  C.  in  a  covered  beaker. 

The  sterilized  extracts  keep  for  several  weeks.  Active  secretion 
was  produced  by  an  extract  from  a  dog  made  fortj'^-two  days 
previously,  and  with  that  of  a  cat  made  thirty-seven  days  l^efore 
use.  The  rapid  deterioration  noted  b}^  May^^  has  not  been 
observed,  though  the  extracts  used  have  been  kept  at  tempera- 
tures from  3°-20°  C.  to  test  the  effect  of  temperature.  May 
stated  that  the  extracts  from  the  mucosa  ceased  to  contain 
secretin  in  two  days,  even  when  kept  in  an  ice-chest.  The  follow- 
ing table  shows  some  results  obtained  : — 


Animal. 

Date  of 
rreparation. 

Date  of  testing 
upon  a  dog. 

Time  kept. 

Resulting  rate  of 
seci-etion. 

Dog 

Dog 

Dog 

Dog 

Cat 

Echidna  ... 

Ibis* 

Sept.  2nd 
Sept.  14th 
Sept.  22nd 
Oct.  18th 
Oct.  23rd 
Oct.  nth 
Sept.  27th 

S^pt.  5th 
Sept.  22nd 
Oct.  4th 
Nov.  29th 
Nov.  29th 
Oct.  18th 
Oct.  4th 

3  days 

8  days 

1 2  days 

42  days 

37  days 

7  days 

7  days 

2  drops  a  minute. 

3  drops  a  minute. 

4  drops  a  minute. 

2  drops  a  minute. 

3  drops  a  minute. 

4  drops  a  minute. 
2  drops  a  minute. 

This  difference  from  May  seems  difficult  to  explain,  but  in  two 
cases  out  of  over  fifty  the  absence  of  secretin  was  noticed.  One 
extract  was  from  a  dog  prepared  seven  days  before  testing,  the 
other  from  an  echidna  made  twenty-four  hours  previously. 

JResidts. — As  the  work  of  Bayliss  and  Starling  has  been 
abundantly  confirmed,  there  is  no  need  to  more  than  mention  that 
their  results  with  acids  and  extracts  were  confirmed.  Secretion 
was  also  found  to  be  brought  about  by  the  injection  of  pilocarpine 
into  the  circulation.  This  secretion  differs  from  that  produced 
b}^  secretin  in  that  it  is  abolished  by  the  subsequent  injection  of 
atropine.  That  atropine  does  not  abolish  or  atTect  the  secretion 
called  forth  by  secretin  was  shown  by  Camus  and  Gley,^^  Bayliss 
and  Starling,  and  Wertheimer  and  Lepage. ^"^     Atropine  inhibits 


*  Shot  Sept.  15th.     Intestine  under  absolute  alcohol  until  Sept.  27th. 


96  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    PANCREAS, 

the   secretion   of    pancreatic  juice    through    pilocarpine,  and    if 
administered  previously  prevents  the  commencement. 

Protocols  of  an  experiment,  Oct.  4th. — 20  c.c.  of  *25  %  pilocarpine  were 
injected  into  the  jugular  vein  of  a  dog  weighing  12  kgms.  Three  minutes 
after  drops  of  juice  fell  at  intervals  of  forty  seconds  for  five  minutes,  when 
15  c.c.  of  "25%  atropine  were  injected.  In  three  minutes  secretion  stopped. 
After  twelve  minutes  20  c.c.  of  pilocarpine  solution  "25%  were  injected  into 
the  vein.  No  secretion  resulted  from  the  pancreas,  although  secretion  was 
very  rapid  from  the  salivary  glands.  Ten  minutes  later  16  c.c.  of  secretin 
were  injected,  and  after  105  seconds  secretion  at  five  drops  a  minute  started. 

Pancreatic  secretion  evoked  by  secretin  seems  independent  of 
the  blood  pressure.  It  occurs  with  considerable  vigour  even  when 
the  blood  pressure  is  lowered  greatly  by  the  depressor  substance 
in  the  intestinal  extract  or  by  toxic  atropine  doses. 

Protocol  of  an  experiment,  Sept.  14th. — There  were  injected  4  c.c.  of  an 
extract  from  the  tortoise  {Chelodina  lomikollis)  into  the  jugular  vein  of  a  dog 
weighing  S  kgms.  After  90  seconds  secretion  at  the  rate  of  one  drop  in  40 
seconds  was  established.  Five  minutes  later  18  c.c.  of  3  %  atropine  sulphate 
solution  were  injected  into  the  vein.  The  blood  pressure  fell  within  one 
minute  to  5  mm.  Hg.,  but  secretion  continued  for  nine  minutes,  at  the  rate  of 
about  one  drop  a  minute,  when  the  experiment  ceased. 

The  pressure  under  which  the  juice  was  excreted  was  measured 
by  allowing  the  juice  to  flow  up  a  vertical  tube.  The  fluid  was 
raised  8|  inches  and  9  inches  on  two  occasions  The  same 
heights  were  observed  by  filling  the  vertical  tube  to  a  greater 
height  when  the  pressure  fell  to  the  same  height  as  when  the 
fluid  flowed  up  the  tube.  These  two  methods  were  used  in  each 
case.  The  juice  flowed  up  the  tube  until  it  remained  constant. 
The  tube  was  connected  to  the  canula  by  a  piece  of  rubber 
tubing.  This  allowed  the  vertical  tube  to  be  then  raised.  The 
juice  then  ran  back  until  the  height  before  observed  was  obtained. 
The  flow  of  juice  was  very  active  on  opening  a  tube  connected 
with  the  canula  and  clamping  the  vertical  tube,  showing  that 
active  secretion  was  in  progress.  This  pressure  is  much  less  than 
that  in  the  arteries,  the  lower  pressure  in  the  carotid  artery  in 
my  observations  being  35  inches  of  blood  (calculated  from  mer- 
curial  manometer).      A    like   pressure  was  observed  in  the  pan- 


BY    H.    G.    CHAPMAN. 


97 


creatic  duct  by  Pawlow  when  secretion  was  evoked  by  stimulating 
the  vagus  nerve. 

Tlie  secretion  evoked  by  secretin  does  not  seem  to  be  inliibited 
by  stimuhition  of  the  peripheral  end  of  the  vagi,  although 
Popielski  (supra  vide)  found  the  flow  evoked  by  acid  in  the 
duodenum  to  be  inhibited  by  stimulation  of  the  vagus.  Neither 
single  slowly-repeated  nor  rapid  farad aic  stimulation  of  the  vagus 
produced  any  alteration  in  the  rate  of  secretion,  though  marked 
heart  inhibition  and  fall  of  blood  pressure  resulted.  This  is 
shown   in    the  appended 


curve  showing  the  results  of  faradaic 


Effect  of  Vagus  Stimulation  ox  Pancreatic  Secretion  evoked  by  Secretin 

IN  THE  Dog. 


cS    II 


~ 

~~^ 

i 

- 

I 

' 

y 

'' 

\ 

1 

/ 

y 

/ 

/ 

. 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

> 

i 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

Js 

/ 

/ 

/ 

) 

/ 

Ja 

H 

/ 

/ 

- 

■ 

/ 

1 

/ 

_ 

-X- 

-4- 

- 

— 

1 — ' 

20 

5 

3 

6 

3 

S 

40 

Time  in  minutes :  1  min.  =:  2  divisions. 

(a)  Injection  of  20  c.c.  secretin  from  the  cat  into  right   jugular  vein. 

Vagi  previously  divided. 

(b)  Faradaic  stimulation  of  peripheral  and  of  left  vagus  nerve. 

(c)  Faradaic  stimulation  of  peripheral  and  of  right  vagus  nerve. 

stimulation.     Mechanical  stimulation  of  the  vagus  was  also  with- 
out result. 

7 


OS  PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    PANCREAS, 

Secretins  prepared  from  the  dog,  cat,  Echidna  lii/strix,  wallaby 
{Petrogale  inornafa),  tortoise  {CheJodina  JougicoUis),  and  ibis, 
were  active  on  the  pancreas  of  the  dog. 

On  the  other  hand,  no  pancreatic  juice  could  be  obtained  in  the 
echidna.  Five  animals  were  used,  and  secretins  from  the  echidna, 
dog,  cat,  and  wallaby  were  tried.  Eleven  active  extracts  in  all 
were  introduced  into  the  jugular  veins  of  the  echidnas,  and  care 
was  taken  to  see  that  no  mechanical  blocking  of  the  tube 
occurred.  This  result  was  surprising,  but  as  it  was  tested  on 
five  animals  I  mention  it.  As  opportunity  arises  I  shall  further 
test  this  question. 

Properties  of  the  pancreatic  secretion  obtained. — This  was 
tested  upon  live  occasions,  three  by  myself  and  twice  by  Mr.  J.  L. 
Shellshear,  a  medical  student  working  in  the  laboratory.  The 
liuid  was  clear,  colourless,  limpid  and  odourless.  Its  specific 
gravity  taken  with  a  pyknometer  was  1014.  Its  alkalinity  was 
such  that  10  c.c.  required  13-2  c.c.  of  y^  HCl  to  neutralise  it. 
The  solids  were  2-9  parts  in  100,  and  the  ash  was  0*69  parts.  It 
contained  a  ferment  setting  free  fatty  acid  from  neutral  fat,  and 
another  converting  starch  into  maltose. 

The  secretion  digested  fresh  fibrin,  but  did  not  affect  fibrin 
which  had  been  previously  heated  to  80""  C.  for  thirty  minutes 
in  a  water-bath.  After  treatment  with  enterokinase  it  rapidly 
digested  fibrin,  and  coagulated  egg-white. 

It  was  further  found  that  leucocytes  contain  a  body  like  entero- 
kinase. Whipped  fibrin  from  a  dog  was  washed  and  heated  to 
80'  C.  in  a  water-bath.  Portions  of  this  were  then  placed  beneath 
the  skin  of  a  dog  for  twenty-four  hours.  Leucocytes  were  found 
to  have  penetrated  the  fibrin,  by  microscopic  examination. 

Series  of  tubes  containing  (a)  heated  fibrin  and  pancreatic 
juice,  (6)  fibrin  impregnated  with  leucocytes  and  pancreatic  juice, 
and  (c)  heated  fibrin  and  activated  pancreatic  juice,  were  then 
arranged.  The  tubes  were  kept  sterile  by  the  addition  of  2  % 
sodium  fluoride  or  2  /{  potassium  arsenite.  Three  tubes  were 
used  for  each  set,  making  nine  in  all.     The  fibrin  was  digested  in 


BY    11.    G.    CHAPMAX.  99 

the  tubes  of  series  (b)  and  (o)  in  from  twenty-five  minutes  to  four 
hours,  varying  with  the  quantity  of  juice.  Xo  alteration  was 
perceived  in  the  fibrin  in  tubes  of  series  (a),  even  after  weeks. 
The  sterility  of  the  tubes  was  tested  with  agar  and  gelatine  plates. 

Controls  were  also  made  with  serum  from  the  blood  of  the  dog, 
from  whom  the  leucocytes  were  obtained.  Xo  activation  of  the 
juice  was  observed. 

These  results  were  repeated  upon  five  occasions,  four  times 
using  sodium  fluoride,  and  once  potassium  arsenite. 

Protocols  of  two  series  are  appended  : — 

A  10  c.c.  2-0  XaF-0'1  c.c.  pancreatice  juice- 0"5  c.c.  enterokinase  solution 

[  —  fibrin. 

B             ,,              -                     „  —                        ,,                  „ 

^              >j              ~                     J)  ~^                       >j                  ft 

D             ,,               —                      ,,  -f- fibrin. 

E              „               -                      „  -     „ 

F              „               -                      „  -     „ 

G             ,,              —                      ,,  —fibrin    impregnated   with 

rieucocvt-es. 
H  ,,  -  „  -  „  ' 

J  „  - 

Ai  lOc.c.  2%  K3ASO  .  -  0-25  c.c.  pancreatic  juice  -  0-25  c.c.  enterokinase  soltn. 

[  —  fibrin. 

B^  ,,  -  „  - 

ri  _  _ 

D-  ,,  —  ,,  -fibrin. 

T  :  _  _ 

-^  -5  j;  ?! 

Fl  -  — 

G^  ,,  —  ,,  —fibrin    impregnated    with 

[lencoeytes. 
H  ,,  -7-  ,,  -f  „ 

All  the  tubes  were  kept  in  a  water-bath  at  39°  C.  A.  B.  and 
C  were  digested  in  two  hours;  G,  H,  J  in  three  hours;  A^,  B^, 
C\,  Ct\  H\  and  J^  in  twenty-five  minutes;  but  D,  E,  F,  D^,  E^, 
and  F^  showed  no  change  in  seventy-two  hours,  and  D,  E,  and 
F  none  in  ten  weeks.  No  tube  yielded  any  culture  upon  agar 
and  gelatine  plates. 


100  physiology  of  the  pancreas. 

Summary. 

(1)  Secretins  from  the  echidna,  wallaby,  Australian  water- 
tortoise,  and  ibis  are  active  upon  the  dog  in  causing  a  flow  of 
pancreatic  juice. 

(2)  Secretin  does  not  appear  to  cause  pancreatic  secretion  in  the 
echidna. 

(.3)  The  flow  of  pancreatic  juice  )>roduced  by  pilocarpine  is 
inhibited  by  atropine,  while  the  flow  produced  b}'  secretin  is  not 
so  inhibited. 

(4)  Stimulation  of  the  vagus  nerve  does  not  inhibit  the  secre- 
tion due  to  secretin. 

(5)  The  pressure  under  which  the  fluid  is  secreted  in  the  pan- 
creatic duct  is  equivalent  to  9  inches  of  the  juice. 

(6)  Pancreatic  juice  may  be  activated  by  leucocytes  so  that  it 
acts  upon  proteids. 

REFEKENCES. 

1.  Bernard,  C. — Lecons  dePhysiologie  Experimentale,  Tome  ii.  i:iA9S  et  seq. 
2. Loc.  cit.,  p.  226. 

3.  Heidenhein — Hermann's  Handbuch;    Physiologie    der    Absonderungs- 

vorgange,  s.183. 

4.  DoLixsKi — Bull.  Soc.  Biol.  St.  Petersburg,  1895,  Vol.  iii. 

5.  Pawlow — Die  Arbeit  der  Verdauungdrlisen.  Wiesbaden. 

6.  Bernstein — Ber.  Sach.  Ges.  Wiss.  Leipsig,  1869. 

7.  Gottlieb — Arch.  exp.  Path,  und  Pharm.  1895,  Bd.xxxiii. 

8.  Popielski— Cent.  f.  Physiol.  1896,  Bd.x. 
9. Gazette  de  Botkin,  1900. 

10.  Wertheimer  et  Lepage — Journ.  de  Physiol,  iii.  (1901),  p. 335. 

11.  Bayliss  and  Starling — Journ.  of  Physiol,  xxviii.  p. 325. 

12.  Wertheimer  et  Lepage — Loc.  cit.,  p. 695. 

13.  Bayliss  and  Starling — Journ.  of  Physiol,  xxix.  p.  174. 

14.  May — Journ.  of  Physiol,  xxx.  p. 405. 

15.  Camus  et  Gley— C.R.  Soc.  Biol.  Paris,  1902,  p. 465. 

16.  Wertheimer  et  Lepage— C.E.  Soc.  Biol.  Paris,  1901,  p. 759. 


101 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  C.  Hedley  exhibited,  on  behalf  of  Mr.  W.  F.  Petterd,  a 
collection  of  deep-sea  mollusca,  corals,  and  holothuria.  These 
were  dredged  at  a  depth  of  300  fathoms,  at  a  point  28  miles  east 
of  Sydney  Heads,  and  included  new  species  of  Coralliophila, 
Trophou,  Ci/mcUium,  Coliunbariiim,  Cuspidaria,  &c.,  and  an 
Elasipod  Holothurian  identified  by  Mr.  T.  Whitelegge  as  Pan- 
nychia  moseleyi. 

Mr.  Fred.  Turner  exhibited,  in  illustration  of  his  paper,  a 
large  collection  of  North-Western  plants,  including  a  grass  he 
described  as  new  for  Australia;  also  a  chart  of  the  North- West 
showing  the  predominant  vegetation  in  the  different  districts. 

Mr.  North  exhibited  a  specimen  of  Grass-Finch,  from  the 
Northern  Territory  of  South  Australia,  which  he  had  separated 
from  Foephila  acuticauda,  Gould,  under  the  name  of  Poephila 
mirantiirostris.*  Some  time  ago  he  had  found  that  it  had  been 
previously  described  by  Dr.  O.  Heinrothf  from  living  examples 
in  the  Berlin  Zoological  Gardens,  under  the  name  of  Poephila 
hecki,  but  this  was  the  first  opportunity  he  had  had  of  bringing  it 
under  the  notice  of  Members  of  the  Society.  P.  au7'antiirostris, 
North,  thus  becomes  a  synonym  of  Poephila  hecki,  Heinroth. 
The  part  of  Australia  from  which  the  birds  were  procured  was 
not  known  to  Dr.  Heinroth.  The  present  specimen,  Mr.  North 
was  informed  by  Mr.  Percy  Peir,  was  caught  with  others,  also 
Masked  Grass-Finches  {Poejjhila  per  sonata,  Gould)  a  few  miles 
from  Burrundie,  Port  Darwin  District.  Mr.  North  had  seen 
many  living  examples  from  the  same  district,  also  from  the 
neighbourhood  of  Wyndham,  North-western  Australia. 

*  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  Vol.xxvii.  p.207(1902). 
t  Ornitholog.  Monatsb.  Jahig.  viii.  p. 22(1900). 


102 


WEDNESDAY,   APRIL  26th,   1904. 


The  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  of  the  Society  was  lield  in 
the  Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  AVednesday 
evening,  April  26th,  1905. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Messrs.  T.  Dwyer,  Sydney  University,  Walter  Mervyn  Carne, 
Hunter's  Hill,  and  Douglas  Mawson,  B.E.,  B.Sc,  Adelaide 
University,  were  elected  Ordinar}^  Members  of  the  Society. 

The  President  announced  that,  under  the  provisions  of  Rule 
XXV.,  the  Council  had  elected  Mr.  Heruy  Deane,  M.A.,  F.L.S., 
ike,  the  Hon.  James  Norton,  LL.D.,  M.L.C.,  Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S.,  and  Dr.  T.  Storie  Dixson,  to  be  Vice-Presidents;  and 
Mr.  J.  R.  Garland,  M.A.  (56  Elizabeth  Street),  to  be  Hon. 
Treasurer,  for  the  current  year. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous 
Monthly  Meeting,  amounting  to  1  Vol.,  24  Parts  or  Nos.,  7 
Bulletins,  1  Report,  and  1  Miscellaneous,  received  from  26 
Societies,  etc.,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 


103 


REVISIONAL   NOTES   ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARABIDjE. 

By  Thomas  G.  Sloane. 

Part  II. 

Tribe  vi.— Scaritini. 

The  tribe  Scaritini,  as  here  limited,  contains  numerous  and 
highly  specialised  genera,  and  is  found  in  all  the  large  land  areas 
of  the  globe.  I  have  not  seen  any  record  of  its  occurrence  in 
New  Zealand,  though  it  has  been  found  in  Lord  Howe  Island 
(Scaraphites)  and  in  New  Caledonia  (Scaritoderus).  It  is  the  most 
important  carabidous  tribe  in  Australia,  and  as  there  represented 
may  be  divided  into  two  siibtribes,  as  under  : — 

Buccal  fissure  not  closed  by  sides  of  mentum,  but  extending  backwards  and 
dividing  submentum  from  paragenas."''  Elytra  with  lateral  channel 
granulate Scaritides. 

Buccal  fissue  closed  posteriorly  by  the  sides  of  the  mentum.  (Submentum 
and  paragenae  contiguous.)  Elytra  with  lateral  channel  Isevigate  (never 
granulatet  among  Australian  forms) JPasimachides. 

Subtribe  SCARITIDES. 
Two    Australian     genera    are    known,    each    representing   a 
different  and  widely  separated  group  in  the  subtribe  Scaritides. 
They  are  readily  differentiated  thus  :  — 

Maxilli©  hooked  at  apex.  Elytra  strongly  punctate-striate,  interstices  con- 
vex.    Eyes  very  small,  not  visible  from  above Stecjanomma. 

MaxilljB  obtuse  at  apex.     Elytra  smooth  (strias  obsolescent).     Eyes  distinct. 
Geoscaptns. 

*■  Parageme.  In  his  Monograph  of  the  Scaritides,  Chaudoir  proposed  the 
tevm.  paragence  ioY  a  2Mrt  of  the  underside  of  the  head  situated  between  the 
channel  in  which  the  frst  joint  of  tlie  antenna' is  lodged  when  the  inject  lays 
them  back,  and  the  sides  of  the  mentiiin. 

t  In  his  '  Monograph,'  Chaudoir  records  African  species  of  this  group  with 
the  elytra  non -granulate  on  the  sides. 

X  It  appears  that  for  the  sake  of  uniformity  in  nomenclature,  the  Aus- 
tralian group  heretofore  known  as  Carenides  must  be  included  in  the  Pasi- 
MACHiDEs,  the  latter  being  the  older  name. 


10-^  KEVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTEALIAN  CABA  HI D.f-:,U., 

Genus    S  T  E  G  a  n  o  m  m  a. 

Macleay.  Proc.  Linn.  J<oe.  X.  S.  ^Yales,  {'2)  ii.  1SS7,  p.  133. 

The  granulate  lateral  channel  of  the  elytra,  and  the  mentum 
concealing  the  base  of  the  maxilhv,  while  the  buccal  fissure  runs 
narrowly  back  and  divides  the  submentuni  from  the  paragen^v. 
indicate  the  place  of  Sfe(fauo)nma  to  be  in  the  subtribe  Scaritides: 
it  seems  to  lead  towards  the  CUvhiini. 

I  supplement  Macleay's  description  by  the  following  note  on 
the  single  recorded  species  of  the  genus  :  — 

Steganomma  poecatum.  Macleay. 

Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  (2)  iii.  1S87,  p.  133. 

Base  of  maxillae  concealed  by  mentum.  Buccal  fissure  extend- 
ing backwai*ds  and  dividing  submentum  from  the  small  paragems. 
Labial  j>alpi  with  p>enultimate  joint  bisetose.  Eyes  very  small 
(not  p>erceptible  from  abo^■e),  placed  on  anterior  declivity  of  the 
j)rojectiiig  orbits  in  the  angle  formed  by  the  anterior  margin  of 
the  orbits  and  the  supra-antenual  plates.*  Antenn:^  moniliform. 
four  basal  joints  glabrous.  Prothorax  a  little  wider  than  head 
(3  6  X  4-1  mm.),  widest  just  behind  anterior  angles:  anterior  mar- 
gin truncate;  base  wide,  not  lobate;  each  lateral  channel  with 
four  setigerous  punctures  on  curve  of  posterior  angles,  and  three 
similar  punctures  on  anterior  third.  Elytra  widest  a  little  behind 
middle  (7x4  mm.),  strongly  and  evenly  convex,  lightly  rounded 
on  sides;  six  wide  crenulate  sulci  on  each  elytron:  interstices. 
roundly  convex,  sixth  bearing  the  fine  seventh  stria,  eighth  inter- 
stice (between  linear  seventh  stria  and  granulate  margin)  very 
narrow;  marginal  channel  wide,  closely  granulate:  lateral  border 
narrow:  base  abrup>tly  and  deeply  declivous  to  peduncle,  bordered 
on  each  side, — the  border  forming  a  short  erect  humeral  tooth  at 


""  The  very  small  hidden  eves  call  to  mind  Horn's  note  that  the  minute 
European  species,  Eeicliia  luciuiga,  Saulcv,  a  Clivinid,  was  "  the  only 
known  member  of  the  Carabinw  with  the  eyes  so  reduced  as  to  be  with  diffi- 
ciilty  observed"  (Trans.  Amer.  Em.  Soc.  xi.  ISSl.  p.lSS). 


BY    THOMAS    r,.    SLOANE.  105 

base  of  sixth  interstice.  Prosternura  carrierl  forward  on  samf^ 
plane  as  intercoxal  part,  and  becoming  triangular  and  vertical  at 
apex.     Length  15,  breadth  4  mm. 

Hah.  — (I  :  Russell  River  (Froggatt;,  Kuranda  (Dodd;.  Two 
specimens  {$)  were  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  F.  P.  Dodd  f rom  Kuranda, 

near  Cairns. 

Genus  G  e  o  s  c  a  p  t  u  s. 

Chaudoir,  Bull.  Mosc.  1855,  i.  p.9;  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xxii. 
1879,  p.  135:  Scarites,  Macleay,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  X.  S.  Wales,  i.: 
Scarites,  Castelnau,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  viii.  1868. 

Baron  de  Chaudoir,  in  his  '  Monograph  of  1879,'*  .says  that 
the  Scaritides,  sensu  stricdore,  are  distinguished  completely  from 
the  other  sections  [of  the  Scaritini]  by  the  form  of  the  labium, 
which  has  nothing  analogous  in  the  whole  family  [Carabidse]. 
Under  Scarites,j  he  describes  the  labium  [ligula]  as  ''valde  concava, 
2)odice  hispida,  utrinqihe  in  dentera  setigerum  'producta,  paraglosscti 
harhatce,  angicstcp,  ligulam  longe  superantes.''  This  form  of  labium 
is  very  strongly  developed  in  the  Australian  genus  Geoscaptus; 
the  labium  of  the  Pasimachides,  though  very  different  from  that 
of  the  Scaritides,  seems  a  modification  of  the  same  archetype. 
The  following  sketch  gives  an  idea  of  the  form  of  the  labium  in 
Philoscaj^hus  and  Geoscaptus,  in  neither  of  which  genera  has  the 
labium  been  ficjured  before. 


^^ 


Labium  to  show  anterior  margin, 
Fig.l.  Philoscaphus  tiiherculatus,  Macl.     Fig.2.  GeoH-ajjtus  cacus,  Macl. 

From  the  table  of  genera  given  by  Chaudoir  in  his  Monograph 
(pp.  127-1 29),  it  is  learned  that  Geoscaptus  is  differentiated  from 


^  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xxii.  p.  129. 
t  Ih.  xxiii.  p. 6.3 


106  EEVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.i^,!!., 

all  the  other  genera  of    the  Scaritides  there  treated  of  by  the 
following  features  in  combination  :  — 

'' MaxilliE  mala  inferiore  superiorem  miiltum  auperante.  Maxillce  mala 
superiore  apice  obtuse  rotundata.  Episterna  postica  angustata  longaque 
(Elytra  libera;  species  alatie).  Elytra  intra  marginem  hand  carinata.  Tarsi 
articulo  ultimo  tenui  elongato.^' 

In  Chaudoir's  index  list  of  species  at  the  end  of  his  paper,  all 
Macleay  and  Castelnaii's  species  are  reduced  to  two,  viz.,  G.  cacus, 
Macl.,  and  G.  Uevissimus,  Chaud.  In  this  I  concur,  with  a 
reservation  in  favour  of  Scarites  plicatuhis,  Casteln.  (Vide  p.  107). 

Chaudoir  distinguished  the  two  well  known  species  G.  Icevissi- 
mus  and  G.  cacus  from  one  another  thus  :  — 

*'  1.  Tibif.E  intermedin'  unispinosce,  posticce  extu!<  simplices. . .  .G.  la^vissimus.^' 

*'  2.  Tibioi  intermedice  bispinosa,  posticce  apice  externo  in  dentem  acutum  pro- 

ducto G.  cacus. " 

This  accurately  differentiates  the  typical  forms  of  these  two 
species,  but  Queensland  specimens  have  been  given  to  me  by  Mr. 
C.  French  as  from  "Winton  District"  and  "Gulf  of  Carpentaria," 
which  have  the  facies  of  G.  Icevissinius,  but  the  second  external 
spine  of  the  intermediate  tibite  almost  as  well  defined  as  in  G. 
cacus,  the  posterior  tibiae  without  an  external  apical  tooth.  This 
form  I  consider  identical  with  G.  planiuscuLus,  Macl.  (from  com- 
parison with  Macleay's  type  in  the  Australian  Museum),  but  I 
cannot  see  more  in  it  than  a  form  of  G.  lavissimiis. 

Geoscaptus  l.evissimus,  Chaudoir. 

Bull.  Mosc.  1855,  i.  p.lO;  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xxii.  1879,p.l36; 
Scarites  geryou,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  N.  S.  Wales,  i.  (1863), 
p.68;  Sc.  damastes,^l3iQ\.,  I.e.;  Sc.  planiusculus,  Macl., /.c.  (1865), 
p.  193;  ♦S'c.  bostocki,  Casteln.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  (1868) 
p.U4. 

I  have  examined  the  type  of  Sc.  damastes,  Macl.,  which  was 
placed  under  G.  cacus  by  Chaudoir,  and  regard  it  as  identical 
with  G.  Icevissimus. 

jJah. — N.S.W.  :  Mulwala,  Urana,  Junee,  Grenfell  (Sloane). 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  107 

Geoscaptus  crassus,  Sloane. 

This  form  differs  from  G.  IcBvissinius,  Chaud.,  by  size  larger, 
form  more  convex  (particularly  of  under  surface);  mandibles  with 
upper  surface  closely  and  finely  striolate,  basal  edge  of  upper 
surface  not  extending  forward  as  a  ridge;  anterior  tibiae  with  two 
well  developed  small  external  teeth  above  the  three  large  ones, 
and  with  upper  internal  spur  wide  and  rounded  at  apex  (not 
wide  and  angulate  as  in  G.  Icevissimus);  intermediate  tibise 
bispinose  externally;  posterior  tibia?  with  outer  apex  raised  into 
a  short  dentiform  spur.  Further  investigation  of  the  differences 
between  it  and  Sc.  planiuscidus,  Macl,,  is  required,  but  I  do  not, 
from  the  data  available  to  me,  consider  these  forms  identical. 

Hab. — Q.  :  Cook  town  District  (King's  Plains  Station;  Mr. 
N.  H.  Gibson),  Townsville  (Dodd). 

Geoscaptus  plicatulus,  Casteln. 

Scarites  plicatulus,  Casteln.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  (1868), 
p.  143;  Chaudoir,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  1879,  xxii.  p.  138.      * 

Chaudoir  examined  the  type  of  Sc.  jAicatulus ;  his  whole 
note  on  it  is  so  short  that  I  translate  it  fully,  as  follows  : — 
In  Sc.  plicatulus,  Casteln.,  the  prothorax  is  a  little  broader  [than 
in  G.  cacus\,  the  clypeus  a  little  more  strongly  striate,  the  elytra  a 
little  more  oval,  but  I  doubt  from  the  single  specimen  in  the 
Casteluau  collection  whether  it  constitutes  a  distinct  species.  A 
specimen  found  by  Mr.  R.  Helms  on  the  Upper  Ord  River  (near 
Cambridge  Gulf)  has  the  tibial  characters  of  G.  cacus,  but  the 
facies  of  G.  Icevissimus  (though  the  metasternal  episterna  are 
shorter,  being  shorter  than  in  G.  cacus).  If  we  suppose  that 
Chaudoir  attached  more  importance  to  the  tibial  characters  he 
used  to  separate  G.  Icevissimus  and  G.  cacus  than  to  facies,  we 
may  consider  this  form  to  be  G.  2^licatidus,  Casteln.  Length  1 2 
lines  {fide  Castelnau). 

Hab. — Northern  Territory  :  Escape  Cliff  (fide  Castelnau). 


108  REVISIOXAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CAllABlDyK,  II., 

Geoscaptus  cacus,  Macleay. 

Scarites  cacus,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1663,  i. 
p. 67;  Sc.  appro.vimatus,  Macl.,  I.e.  1865,  i.  p.l91  ;  Sc.  tvaterhouseij 
Macl.,  ^.c.  p.  192  ;  Sc.  suhporcatulus,  MaoL,  /c.  p.l92;  Sc.  suh- 
striatus,  Casteln.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  1868,  viii.  p.  143;  Sc. 
mitchellii,  Casteln.,  I.e.  p.l43  ;  Sc.  rvficornis,  Casteln.,  I.e.  p.l44  ; 
Sc.  bipunctatus,  Casteln.,  I.e.  p.  144  ;  (?)  G.  maeleayi,  Chaud.,  Ent. 
Soc.  Belg,  1879,  xxii.,  p.  138. 

To  the  synonjmiy  given  by  Chaudoir*  T  add  Scarites  approxi- 
inatus,  Macl.,  and  Sc.  subporcatuliis,  Macl.,  the  types  of  which 
(in  the  Australian  Museum)  I  ha\e  examined  and  identified  as 
0.  cacus. 

Geoscaptus  macleayi,  Chaudoir. 

Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  1879,  xxii.  p.l38. 

I  have  not  been  able  to  identify  this  species,  so  append  a  trans- 
lation of  Chaudoir's  whole  note  on  it. 

Almost  as  convex  as  G.  cacus,  Macl.,  but  shorter.  Head 
shorter,  clypeus  wholly  striate,  a  couple  of  strife  near  the  frontal 
channels.  Prothorax  evidently  less  elongate  and  a  little  less 
convex;  elytra  decidedly  shorter,  a  little  flatter  along  the  suture, 
impressed  with  distinctly  punctate  but  shallow  striie,  the  punc- 
tures of  the  strine  wide,  the  interstices  slightly  convex.  Coloured 
like  G.  cacus,  but  a  little  less  shining  on  upper  surface.  The 
specimen  I  possess,  and  which  was  sold  to  me  by  M.  Deyrolle, 
comes  from  the  North-West  of  Australia.  Although  allied  to 
G.  cacAis,  the  relative  difference  in  length  seems  to  me  sufficiently 
decided  to  necessitate  the  formation  of  a  distinct  species. 
Length  20,  breadth  5i  mm. 

Subtribe  PASIMACHIDES. 

Genus  S  c  a  r  a  p  h  i  t  e  s. 

Westwood,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  1842,  p. 157;  Sloane,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc. 
N.  S.  Wales,  (2)  viii.  (1893)  p.449. 


Ent.  Soc.  Belg.  xxii.  1879,  p.  188. 


BY    THOMAS    G,    SLOANE.  109 

Table  of  Species  known  to  me. 

My  knowledge  of  the  genus  has  l)ecome  considerably  increased 
since  I  formerly  published  a  tabular  list  of  the  species  known  to 
me  eleven  years  ago;  it  is,  therefore,  hoped  the  present  table  will 
give  a  better  idea  of  the  relationship  of  the  species. 

A.  Elytra  without  widely  placed  punctures  on  lateral  )  Sc.  laticollis,  Macl. 

and  apical  declivities i  Sc.  gigas,  Casteln. 

AA.  Elytra  with  widely  placed  punctures  on  lateral  and  apical  declivities. 

B.  Prothorax  shortly  but  strongly  sinuate  on  each  side  posteriorly,  basal 

angles  sharply  marked,  subrectangular  (posterior  marginal  seta  at 

basal  angle);  elytra  with  border  wide  at  humeral  angles,  not  folded 

over  inwards,  but  with  edge  interrupted  just  behind  shoulders  to 

form  a  humeral  prominence Sc  lucidus,  Chaud. 

BB.  Prothorax  not  strongly  sinuate  on  each  side  posteriorly,  basal  angles 

not  sharply  marked;  elytra  with  border  continuous,  or  folded  over 

inwards  at  humeral  angles. 

C.  Elytra  with  border  continuous,  not  folded  over  or  thickened  at 

humeral  angles. 

D.  Intermediate  tibiae  with  external  apical  »  Sc.  silemis,  Westw. 

tooth  acute \  Sc.  mastersi,  Macl. 

DD.  Intermediate  tibiae  with  external  apical  tooth  dilatate  and 
obtuse, 
e.  Elytra  with  lateral  border  wide  at  humeral  angles  and  con- 
tinued on  to  base;    posterior  tibiae  hardly   thickened    at 

apex Sc.  Lemmis,  Westw. 

ee.  Elytra  with  lateral  border  narrow  and  ending  at  humeral 
angles;  posterior  tibiae  with  apex  strongly  produced  and 

prominent  externally Sc.  pacificus,  SI. 

CC.  Elytra  with   border   thickened   and   folded    over    inwards    at 
humeral  angles. 
F.  Intermediate  tibiae  with  external  apical  tooth  dilatate  and 

obtuse Sc.  hirtipes,  Macl. 

FF.  Intermediate  tibiae  with  external  apical  tooth  acute 

Sc.  rotimdipennis,  Dej. 

Note.  —  Sc.  bacchus,  Westw.,  I  do  not  know;  it  probably  would 
fall  into  section  "  D "  of  the  table  given  above.  Sc.  heros, 
Casteln.,  also  unknown  to  me,  seems  allied  to  Sc.  bacchus.  Sc. 
humeralis,  Casteln.,  evidently  should  be  placed  with  Sc.  laticollis^ 
Macl.,  differing    apparently    by    '*  the   protuberance    below  the 


110  EEVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CAPxABID^f:,!!., 

eyes  not  very  considerable,"  and  its  "  brilliant  "  black  colour;  it  is 
unknown  to  me. 

ScARAPHiTES  LUCIDUS,  Cliaudoir. 

Rev.  Mag.  Zool.  1863  (2),  xv.  p.ll5. 

It  seems  necessary  to  ojBfer  a  short  description  of  the  species  I 
identify  as  Sc.  lucidus,  Chaud.,  seeing  that  this  species  has  not 
been  commented  upon,  that  I  know  of,  since  Chaudoir  first 
described  it;  and  that  there  is  always  a  possibility  of  one's  identi- 
fications from  descriptions  proving  erroneous. 

Black,  shining,  Itevigate.  Head  transverse  (8  mm.  across  eyes); 
orbits  not  projecting  sharply  below  e3^es.  Prothorax  subcordate 
(6  X  9'7  mm.) ;  sides  subparallel  in  middle,  lightly  rounded 
anteriorly,  widely  rounded  at  posterior  angles  and  strongly  angus- 
tate  to  base,  shortly  and  sharply  sinuate  before  basal  angles; 
anterior  margin  widely  emarginate,  anterior  angles  advanced, 
obtuse;  base  truncate,  sloping  forward  obliquely  a  little  on  each 
side  to  basal  angles;  these  sharply  marked,  subrectangular;  a  mar- 
ginal seta  at  each  basal  angle.  Elytra  ovate  (13  x  10  mm.), 
smooth  (striae  obsolete);  border  wide,  reflexed,  widest  at  humeral 
angles,  not  folded  over  at  shoulders  but  sharply  raised  just  behind 
humeral  angles;  each  elytron  with  three  widely  placed  setigerous 
punctures  on  posterior  half  at  a  little  distance  from  margin,  and 
two  similar  punctures  on  apical  declivity.  Anterior  tibiae  3-den- 
tate,  middle  tooth  triangular,  acute,  not  nearer  apex  than  base  of 
inner  apical  spine,  upper  tooth  obtuse,  not  decidedly  raised  pos- 
teriorly from  the  outer  edge  of  the  tibiae;  intermediate  tibise  with 
a  sharp  erect  subapical  external  tooth,  posterior  tibiae  but  little 
dilatate  at  apex.     Length  28,  breadth  10  mm. 

Hab.—W.A.  :  Bunbury  (Lea). 

The  prothorax  with  strong  lateral  sinuosities  and  sharply 
marked  posterior  angles,  and  elytra  with  border  widely  reflexed 
at  humeral  angles — the  edge  being  sharply  and  suddenly  lowered 
behind  the  shoulders, — distinguish  this  species  at  once  from  all 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  Ill 

SCARAPHITES    MASTERSI,  Macl. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1869,  ii.  p.70. 

I  have  examined  the  type-specimen  in  the  Australian  Museum, 
Sydney;  it  is  very  closely  allied  to  Sc.  sileuus,  Westw.,  with 
which  it  agrees  in  form  of  prothorax  (with  widely  truncate  base 
and  basal  angles  not  marked);  the  posterior  marginal  setigerous 
puncture  is  exactly  similarly  placed  in  the  lateral  channel,  just 
before  the  basal  angle;  the  legs  are  similar;  the  humeral  angles 
of  the  elytra  the  same.  Compared  with  a  specimen  of  Sc.  silenus 
in  my  collection,  the  only  differences  seem  to  be  the  elytra  wider 
at  the  base  and  less  strongly  rounded  on  the  sides.  I  suspect 
these  differences  may  be  sexual,  but  am  not  prepared  to  say 
absolutely  that  Sc.  mastersi  is  synonymous  with  Sc.  silenus, 
Westw. 

ScARAPHiTES  MARTINI,  Castelnau. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  1868,  viii.  p.l33. 

The  description  of  Sc.  martini  reads  as  if  founded  on  a  species 
very  closely  aUied  to  Sc.  silenus,  Westw.;  indeed,  it  seems  as  if 
it  might  be  taken  from  a  specimen  of  Sc.  silenus.  Seeing  that 
Castelnau  gives  the  exact  habitat  (Champion  Bay)  of  his  species, 
its  identity  could  no  doubt  be  established  were  a  specimen  from 
that  locality  before  one. 

SCARAPHITES    LEN^US,   Westwood. 

Scarites  lenceus,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  1842,  p.87;  Scarapldtes  lati- 
pennis,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  K  S.  Wales,  1863,  i.  p.66. 

A  specimen  of  Sc.  ht.tij)ennis,  Macl.,  has  been  given  to  me  by 
Mr.  A.  M.  Lea,  which  I  have  compared  with  the  type  of  Sc. 
laiipennis  in  the  Macleay  Museum.  After  comparison  with 
Westwood's  description  and  figure  of  S'c.  lenceus,  I  feel  no  hesita- 
tion in  attributing  my  specimen  to  that  species.  It  differs  from 
Sc.  hirtipes,  Macl.,  by  {a)  prothorax  with  basal  angles  marked, 
the  posterior  marginal  seta  placed  in  the  marginal  channel  at 
the  basal  angle,  (6)  border  of  elytra  not  thickened  at  humeral 
angles;  from  Sc.  pacificus,  SI.,  by  form  more  parallel,  border  of 


112  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.f:, 11., 

elytra  much  thicker  and  more  retlexed   at  shoulders,  posterior 
tibife  not  strongly  dilatate  externally  at  apex. 

ScARAPHiTES  HiRTiPES,  Maclcay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1864,  i.  p.  147;  Sc.  crenaticollis, 
Macl.,  I.e.  p.l48;  Sc.  assimilis,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales, 
1893  (2),  viii.  p.452. 

The  characters  by  which  I  sought  to  differentiate  Sc.  assimilis 
from  Sc.  hirtipes,  Macl.,  do  not  now  appear  to  me  to  justify  its 
being  regarded  as  different. 

Jjab. — S.A.:  Fowler  Bay  (fide  French) — Vic.  :  Cape  Otway 
{Sloane);  Mallee  District  (C.  French,  Junr.). 

ScARAPHiTES  ROTUNDiPENNis,  Dejean. 

Scarites  rotundipennis,  Dej.,  Spec.  i.  1825,  p.401:  Scaraphites 
macleayi,  Westw.,  Arcau.  Ent.  i.  1842,  p.  157;  Sc.  intermedius, 
Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1865,  i.  p.l90;  Sc.  insulanus, 
SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  (2),  iii.  1888,  p.  1106. 

Castelnau  suggested*  that  Sc.  macleayi,  Westw.,  and  Sc.  inter- 
medins, Macl.,  were  synonyms  of  Sc.  rotundijyennis,  Dej.,  in 
which  view  he  was  evidently  right.  I  have  examined  the  type 
specimens  of  Sc.  intermedius  in  the  Macleay  Museum,  and  com- 
pared them  with  specimens  of  Sc.  rotundipennis  without  being 
able  to  find  any  specific  difference.  Sc.  insulanus,  SI.,  cannot  be 
maintained  as  distinct  from  Sc.  rotundipennis. 

Hah. — Vic.  :  Melbourne  —  N.S.AV.  :  Sydney  and  Illawana 
(Macleay)— Bass  Straits:  King  Is.  {fide  Sloane)  — Tasmania  {fide 
Bates)!— Lord  Howe  Is.  {fide  011iff.)t. 

Genus   E  u  R  y  s  c  a  p  ii  u  s. 
EuRYSCAPHUS  HOPEi,  Castelnau. 
Scaraphites   hopei,  Casteln.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  1868, 
p.  131;  (?)  Euryscaphus  politus,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales 
(2),  viii.  1893,  p.457. 

*  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  1868,  viii.  p.  133. 

t  Cist.  Ent.  1878,  ii.  p.  325. 

t  Mem.  Aust.  Mus.  1889. 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  113 

I  now  believe  that  I  erred  on  the  side  of  excessive  caution  in 
not  considering  the  specimen  on  which  I  formed  the  species  E. 
politus  to  be  E  hopei,  Casteln.  There  seems  every  probability  of 
their  being  synonymous;  Castelnau's  slight  description  of  E. 
hopei  is  applicable  to  E.  politus,  and  both  being  from  Central 
Australia  gives  additional  support  to  the  likelihood  of  their 
identity. 

EURYSCAPHUS    DILATATUS,  Macl. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  i.  1865,  p.l88;  E.  7ninor,  Macl., 
I.e.  p.l89:  Scaraphitescarhonarius,  Casteln.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict, 
viii.  1868,  p.l30;  Sc.  affinis,  Casteln.,  I c.  p. 130;  E.  are.narius,  SI., 
Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  (2),  iii.  p.  1108. 

I  formerly  published  the  synonymy  of  E.  affiyiis,  Casteln.,  and 
E.  arenarius,  SL,  with  E.  minor,  Macl.,  and  subsequent  examina- 
tion of  the  types  of  E.  dUdtatus  and  E.  minor  in  the  Australian 
Museum  in  comparison  with  specimens  in  my  possession  leads 
me  to  consider  these  as  synonymous. 

The  type  of  E.  carhonarius,  Casteln.,  was  formerly  in  the 
Howitt  Collection,  but  is  no  longer  in  existence.  I  saw  it  in 
1892j  but  merely  made  a  note  that  it  was  without  discoidal 
punctures  on  the  elytra.  The  descriptions  of  E.  dilcUatus,  Macl., 
and  E.  carhonarius,  Casteln.,  have  always  seemed  to  me  likely  to 
have  been  founded  on  the  same  species,  and  though  absolute 
certainty  cannot  now  be  attained,  I  believe  it  will  not  be  wrong 
to  consider  them  synonymous. 

Genus   Philoscaphus,   Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  ii.  1871,  p.96. 

Having  a  new  species  of  Philoscaphus  to  describe,  the 
following  table  of  the  genus  is  given  to  show  its  position,  and  as 
a  help  towards  the  identification  of  the  species. 

Marginal  declivity  of  elytra  double — divided  longitudinally  by  an  interme- 
diate costa Ph.  cos/aZ^s,  Macl. 

Marginal  declivity  of  elytra  single. 

8 


114  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARABm.f:,!!., 

Size  large,  elytra  tuberculate Ph.  tuherculatm*  Macl.;  Ph.  master-niy 

Macl.;  Ph.  duhonlayi,  Blackb.;  Ph.  hicostatus,  n.sp. 
Size  small,  elytra  not  tuberculate  on  disc. 

Black Ph.  carinatns,  Macl. 

Elytra  black,  with  bright  red-golden  margin Ph.  harnardi,  Macl. 

Philoscaphus  costalis,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Eiit.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  ii.  1873,  p.324. 

After  examination  of  the  types  of  Ph.  costalis^  Macl.,  and  PJi, 
lateralis.,  Macl.,  in  comparison  with  a  specimen  in  my  collection 
from  Kalgoorlie,  I  cannot  consider  Ph.  lateralis  more  than  a 
small  form  of  Ph.  costalia.  I  place  Ph.  crassus,  Blackb.,  under 
Ph.  costalis  for  two  reasons,  firstly,  because  a  careful  study  of  the 
description  discloses  nothing  to  differentiate  it  from  m}^  specimen 
of  Ph.  costalis  from  Kalgoorlie;  secondly,  because  the  identitica- 
tion  of  Ph.  lateralis  as  synonymous  with  Ph.  costalis  will  extend 
the  range  of  Ph.  costalis  sufficiently  to  take  in  the  locality  of 
Ph.  crassus. 

Hab.—W.A.  :  Nickol  Bay  (Jicle  Macleay),  Yilgarn  (Jide 
French),  Kalgoorlie  (G.  W.  Froggatt) — S.A.  :  Wallaroo  (type 
Ph.  lateralis,  in   Australian  Museum),  Ouldea  {fide  Blackburn). 

Philoscaphus  bicostatus,  n.sp. 

Black,  prothorax  very  wide,  transversely  rugulose-striate, 
lobate;  elytra  narrower  than  prothorax,  bicostate;  anterior  tibiae 
tridentate,  intermediate  tibise  strongly  unidentate  externally  at 
apex. 

Head  transverse-quadrate  (6-3  mm.  across  eyes),  similar  to  that 
of  Ph.  mastersi,  Macl.  Prothorax  transverse  (5  x  8*3  mm.);  disc 
transversely  rugulose ;  anterior  margin  truncate  behind  head; 
anterior  angles  obtuse,  shortly  and  decidedly  advanced;  sides 
subparallel;  posterior  angles  widel3M'ounded;  basal  curve  strongly 
sinuate  on  each  side;  basal  lobe  rounded;  marginal  channel  wide, 
shallow  on  sides;  border  lightly  reflexed  on  sides,  strongly  so  at 
posterior  angles.  El3nra  narrower  than  prothorax,  truncate- 
oval  (11  X  7'8  ram.);  surface  rough,  a  narrow  sharply  raised  con- 

*  Under  Ph.  tuhercidatiis,  Macl.,  I  place  Ph.  tepperi,  Blackb. 


BY    THOMAS    d.    SLOANE.  115 

tinuous  costa  on  each  elytron  extending  backward  from  each 
shoulder  for  two-thirds  the  length  of  elytra  (this  costa  parallel 
to  the  suture,  but  bending  lightly  outwards  and  joining  the 
middle  of  the  folded  humeral  border);  upper  margin  of  the  wide 
lateral  channel  costate.  Prosternum  lightly  channelled  between 
coxoe.     Length  '22  o,  breadth  8*3  mm. 

Hab.—Q.:  Townsville  (R  P.  Dodd;  Coll.  Sloane). 

Its  affinity  is  to  Ph.  mastersi,  MacL,  from  which  it  differs  by  its 
smaller  size,  lighter  form,  narrower  elytra — with  base  decidedly 
narrow,  sculpture  different  (the  conspicuous  feature  is  the  dis- 
coidal  costa  on  each  elytron;  between  these  cost?e  the  elytra 
are  rough,  the  elevations  being  narrow  and  irregular  with  a 
tendency  to  be  arranged  in  two  irregular  rows  on  each  elytron 
about  half-way  between  the  suture  and  the  costse;  there  are 
small  tubercles  amongst  the  elevations) — the  lateral  declivities 
above  the  lateral  channel  have  the  sculpture  more  tuberculate, 
with  a  row  of  elongate  narrow  elevations  forming  the  line  of  a 
broken  costa  rather  nearer  to  the  margin  than  to  the  discoidal 
costa.  The  prosternum  has  the  intercoxal  part  flat  and  lightly 
channelled,  not  deeply  excavate  at  the  base. 

Laccoscaphus. 

LacGopternyn,  MacL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1878,  ii. 
p.214;  and  I.e.  1887,  (2)  ii.  p.l22;  Laccoscaphus,  SI.,  op.  cit., 
1904,  pp.706,  708. 

It  appears  to  me  that  the  name  Laccopterum  cannot  stand, 
being  too  near  Laccoptera  used  by  Bohemann  in  1855  for  a  genus 
of  Cassididce.  1  have  already  proposed  to  replace  it  by  Laccos- 
caphus. 

The  genus  Laccoscaphus,  as  here  intended,  will  at  the  present 
time  include  fourteen  species,  which  are  tabulated  below,  the 
names  of  those  species  which  are  unknown  to  me  being  printed 
in  italics;  these  have  been  worked  into  the  table  from  data  sug- 
gested by  the  original  descriptions;  it  is  believed  they  will  show 
all  the  characters  attributed  to  them  in  the  table. 


116  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARAniD.E, 11., 

A.  Elytra  with  a  single  row  of  discoidal  foveiform  punctures  on  each. 

B.  Elytra  4-punctate,  colour  cyaneous L.  (Scarites)  cyaneus,  Fabr. 

BB.  Elytra  with  more  than  two  large  punctures  on  each. 

c.  Upper  surface  golden-bronze L.  (Carenum)  deauratus,  Macl. 

^,     ,  f  Tj.  (Caremtm)miiltiimpres!^ns,  Casteln. 

cc.  Black \  '  "^        V     oi  * 

t  L.  (Laccopterum)  humeralis,  SI. 

AA.  Elytra  with  several  rows  of  fovetb  on  each. 

d.  Elytra  with  a  non-foveate  space  along  suture  (a  row  of  small  ocellate 
punctures  in  the  lateral  channel). 
e.  Colour  not  black. 

f.  Upper  surface  green,  with  coppery  reflections 

L.  {Carenum)  gemmatns,V\'estw. 

ff.  Upper  surface  dark  blue L.  {Caremim)foveolatus,  Macl. 

ee.  Black. 

g.  Elytra  with  three  regular  rows  of  large  foveas,  divided  by  con- 
tinuous slightly  raised  interstices... L.  (Carenum)  spencei,  Westw. 

gg.  Elytra  with  the  large  fovea?  more  or  less  confused 

L.  (Carenum)  salebrosus,  Macl. 

dd.  Elytra  with  space  near  suture  (first  interstice)  foveate. 

H.  General  colour  black,  ocellate  pores  along  lateral  margin  placed 
in  a  deep  channel  and  usually  in  large  depressions. 

i.  Elytra  with  the  fovete  confused  and  irregular.     (Black) 

L.  (Carenum)  loculosus,  Newm. 

ii.  Elytra  with  four  rows  of  fovea?  on  each, 

j.  Black L.  (Laccopterum)  macleayi,  SI. 

jj.  Black,  with  lateral  margins  of  prothorax  and  elytra  bluish... 

,^ L.  {Caremim)  foveigerns,-\-  Chaud. 

ijj.  Black,  with  lateral  margins  and  bottoms  of  fovejB  of  elytra 

bluish L.  {Laccopterum)  lacunosns,  Macl. 

jjjj.  Black,  with  lateral  margins  and  bottoms  of  fovea?  of  elytra 

greenish />.  {Caremim)  foveipennif.,  Macl. 

HH.  Upper  surface  golden-green,  a  row  of  closely  placed  small  ocellate 
pores  along  lateral  margins. .L.(Laccopterum)darwiniensis,  Macl. 


*  I  suspect  that  L.  humeralis  may  be  conspecific  with  L.  mjdtiiiiqn-essus, 
and  that  Castelnau"s  type-specimen  was  aberrant  in  the  number  and  position 
of  the  elytral  fovete.  Mr.  French  has  recently  received  J.,  humeralis  from 
the  Roebuck  Bay  District. 

t  It  seems  possible  that  with  further  knowledge  L.  foveipennis,  Macl.,  L. 
lacunosns,  Macl.,  and  L.  macleayi,  SI.,  may  come  to  be  considered  only 
colour-varieties  of  L.  foveigerus,  Chaud. 


BY    T1£0MAS    G.    SLOANE.  117 

Genus  C  a  r  e  n  u  m. 

Bonelli,  Mem.  Acad.  Turin,  1813,  p.  479;  Scarites,  Fabricius, 
Ent.  Syst.  i.  p.  95 ;  Arnidius  (Leach,  MSS.),  Boisduval,  Yoy. 
Astrolabe,  pt.2,  p.23;  Butoma  (uom.  prcnoc),  Newman,  Ent.  Mag. 
V.  1838,  p.  170;  Carenoscajjhus,  Macleay,  Proc.  Linn.  8oc.  N.  S. 
Wales,  (2)  ii.  1887,  p.23;  Calliscapterus,  Macleay,  ibid.,  P-121; 
FlatytliovaM  (nom.  prcmoc),  Macleay,  ibid,.,  p.  122;  CUarisca'plp.rus, 
Sloane, /.c.  (2)  iii.  1888,  p.l 111;  Paliscaplius^^Xod.w^^ihid.^'^.WYi; 
Tabulation  and  List  of  Species,  Sloane,  Ix.  xxv.  1900,  pp. 363- 
368. 

Eutoma  is  here  again  united  with  Carenum.     It  is  a  preoccupied 

name*  for  a  group  of  species  which  I  do  not  regard  as  entitled  to 

generic  rank;  therefore  I  do  not  attempt  to  coin  a  new  name  for 

it. 

Carenum  cupreo -marginatum,  Blackburn. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  1887,  x.  p. 63;  G.  ( Chariscapterus) 
opulensj  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  (2)  iii.  1888,  p.l  11 2. 

I  now  think  Chariscapterus  opidens,  SI.,  must  be  placed  as  a 
synonjan  of  Carenum  cupreo-marginatLcm,  Blkb.,  a  species  which 
probably  varies  considerably  in  size  and  colour,  and  very  likely 
has  a  wide  range  east,  north  and  west  of  Eucla. 

Carexum  coruscum,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  K  S.  Wales,  1864,  i.  p.  141. 

From  examination  of  the  type  in  the  Macleay  Museum,  I 
record  that  C.  coruscum  is  allied  to  C.  elegaus,  Macl.,  and  would 
come  into  section  "  p"  of  the  table  I  have  given  of  the  smarag- 
dulum-^^voM^  of  the  genus  Carenum  in  these  Proceedings,  xxv. 
1900,  p. 371. 

Carenum  concinnum,  n.sp. 

Elongate-oval,  convex;  frontal  sulci  diverging  posteriorly; 
prothorax  with  posterior  angles  rounded,  base  lobate,  marginal 
channel  narrow,  tripunctate;  elytra   oval,   bipunctate  on   apical 

*  Eutomus,  Dej.,  1834  {Curculionidir.) 


118  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CAIIADID.!-:,!!., 

third;  anterior  tibite  trideiitate.  Head  and  undersurface  black; 
prothorax  black,  becoming  faintly  purple  towards  sides,  marginal 
channel  green  (except  across  basal  lobe — black);  elytra  purple, 
blackish  near  suture,  lateral  channel  viridescent;  inflexed  margins 
with  greenish  reflections. 

Head  transversely  subquadrate  (2-5  x  3-8  mm.);  sides  abrupt 
above  eyes;  front  subdepressed ;  frontal  sulci  deep,  lightly 
sinuate,  divergent  and  defining  lateral  frontal  spaces  posteriorly; 
preocular  sulcus  short,  strongly  defined;  eyes  rather  protuberant; 
orbits  not  prominent  behind  eyes;  two  supraorbital  punctures 
on  each  side.  Prothorax  transverse  (3'3  x  4*5  mm.),  convex, 
roundly  declivous  posteriorly  to  the  well-defined  basal  area; 
sides  subparallel  in  middle,  widely  and  evenly  rounded  from 
intermediate  marginal  puncture  to  basal  lobe;  anterior  angles 
strongly  advanced ;  basal  lobe  short,  rounded,  well  defined ; 
border  narrow,  reflexed,  thicker  and  more  strongly  reflexed  on 
basal  lobe;  marginal  channel  narrow,  wider  across  basal  lobe;  a^ 
shallow  basal  impression  on  each  side  near  basal  sinuosities; 
median  line  strongly  impressed.  Elytra  oval  (8*0  x  4-7  mm.), 
convex;  sides  evenly  rounded;  base  narrow,  obliquely — but 
strongly — declivous  to  peduncle,  bordered  on  each  side  (the 
border  narrow  and  sharply  defined);  margin  explanate  at  apex; 
border  nari'ow,  reflexed,  prominent  at  humeral  angles,  arcuate 
on  each  elytron  near  apex;  inflexed  margin  wide,  vertical  at  apex. 
Intercoxal  part  of  prosternum  hardly  longitudinally  impressed, 
bipunctate  on  each  side.  Second  ventral  suture  obsolete  in 
middle.  Legs  light;  anterior  femora  not  dilatate  in  middle; 
anterior  tibiae  slender;  posterior  tibiie  not  thick.  Length  15, 
breadth  4 '7  mm. 

JIab.—W.A.  :  East  Murchison  District  (Coll.  French). 
Its  athnity  is  to  C.  distinctum,  Macl.,  these  two  species  being 
differentiated  from  their  near  allies  by  the  following  features  in 
combination  : — head  with  two  supraorbital  punctures  on  each 
side;  prothorax  with  three  marginal  punctures  on  each  side, 
marginal  channel  and  border  narrow;  posterior  tibine  slender. 
C.  concinnum   may  be  distinguished  from  C.  distinctura   by  its 


BY   THOMAS    G.    SLOAN  K.  119 

smaller  size;  imrrower  form;  elytra  more  convex,  proportionately 
more  elongate,  less  strongly  rounded  on  sides;  margins  of  pro- 
thorax  and  elytra  and  intlexed  margins  of  elytra  viridescent. 

In  C.  distinctiim  and  G.  concinnum  the  supraorbital  sulcus 
extends  backwards  and  downwards  in  a  wide  shallow  course  till 
it  meets  the  suborbital  channel,  so  that  the  orbits  are  thus  defined 
from  the  adjacent  parts  of  the  head;  this  feature  is  more  de- 
veloped in  0.  distinctum. 

Carenum  subcyaneum,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1869,  ii.  p.66;  (?)  C.  rugatum, 
Blkb.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  1887,  x.  p. 62;  (?)  C.  sulcaticejys, 
SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1897,  xxii.  p.l99. 

The  form  which  I  formerly  recorded  as  "C.  sidcfticeps,  var.  0." 
(these  Proceedings,  xxii.  1897,  p.  201),  proves,  after  comparison 
with  the  type  of  C.  stibc/jcmeum,  Macl.,  to  be  identical  with  that 
species.  I  now  think  C.  subcyaneum  will  prove  to  be  a  variable 
species  ranging  over  a  wide  area  of  Australia  to  the  north,  east 
and  west  of  the  Great  Australian  Bight,  and  in  that  belief 
suggest  that  G.  ru^gatum,  Blkb.,  and  G.  sidcaticeps,  SI.,  should  be 
placed  under  C.  subcyaneum,  possibly  as  varieties. 

Carenum  carbonarium,  Castelnau. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  1868,  viii.  p.  134;  G.  vicinum,  SI ,  Proc. 
Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  (2),  iv.  1889,  p.l293. 

In  these  Proceedings  (xxii.,  1897,  p.206)  I  suggested  that  C. 
vicinum,  SI.,  might  prove  to  be  conspecific  with  G.  carbonarium, 
Casteln.  I  have  now  seen  a  specimen  from  Esperance,  W.A. 
(sent  to  me  by  Rev.  Thos.  Blackburn)  which  is  identical  in 
colour,  etc.,  with  my  type  of  C.  vicinum,.  The  range  of  G.  vicinum 
being  thus  extended  to  Esperance  (Castelnau's  locality  for  G. 
carbonarium),  I  think  it  must  be  considered  as  synonymous  with 
G.  cai'bonarium,  for  the  mere  fact  of  a  Garenum  being  flushed 
with  purple  towards  the  sides  of  the  prothorax  and  elytra  is  quite 
insufficient  to  differentiate  it  from  an  allied   but  wholly  black 


120  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.r.,  II., 

species.  C.  anthracinum,  Macl.,  C.  inter r upturn,  Macl.,  and  C. 
Icf.vigatum,  Macl.,  are  species  which  var}'^  in  colour,  some  speci- 
mens being  wholly  black,  while  others  have  the  sides  brightly 
flushed  with  purple. 

Carenum  subporcatulum,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1865,  i.  p.  184;  C.  mridimar- 
ginatum,  Macl.,  I.e.  1871,  ii.  p. 97:  C.  politulum,  Macl.,  I.e.  p.98. 

I  have  already  published  the  identity  of  C.  politulum,  Macl., 
with  C.  subporcatulum,  Macl.  (these  Proceedings,  xxv.,  1890,  Pt.3, 
p.379);  I  have  since  carefully  examined  the  types  of  C.  viridi- 
marginatum,  Macl.,  in  the  Australian  Museum,  and  have  no 
hesitation  in  placing  that  species  as  a  synonym  of  C.  subjyorca- 
tulum. 

Hah. — S.  Q.  :  Gayndah  (Masters),  Ipswich  {jide,  Macleay), 
Finche's  Creek  (-40  miles  S.W.  from  Dalby;  Sloane). 

Carenum  kixgi,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1869,  ii.  p. 64;  C.  propinquum, 
Macl.,  Ic. 

Formerly  I  expressed  doubt  as  to  the  specific  difference  of  C. 
kingi  and  C.  propinqiuun  (these  Proceedings,  1897,  xxii.,  p.  205). 
I  have  since  compared  the  types  of  these  species  in  the  Macleay 
Museum  and  could  find  no  reason  for  keeping  them  separate. 

Carenum  cyanipenne,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1869,  ii.  p. 62;  C.  nitescens, 
Macl.,  I.e.  p. 6 4. 

I  have  hitherto  been  unable  to  indicate  the  position  of  C. 
nitescens,  Macl.,  in  the  genus  Carenum,*  but  having  recently 
carefully  examined  the  type-specimen  of  C.  nitescens  in  com- 
parison with  the  type  of  C.  cyanipenne  (both  in  the  Macleay 
Museum),  I  am  compelled  to  consider  these  one  species,  C. 
7iitescens  being  a  specimen  in  which  the  two  posthumeral  dis- 
coidal  punctures  of  the  elytra  are  wanting,  as  sometimes  happens 
in  other  Carenums  with  4-punctate  elytra. 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANB.  121 

G.  nitescens  has  the  fcacies  of  C.  cfjanipeune,  indexed  margin  of 
elytra  similar,  prothorax  (3-3  x  4*4  mm.)  with  the  lateral  setiger- 
ous  punctures  on  each  side  as  in  0.  (inthracinum,  MacL,  elytra 
(6-5  X  4-7  mm.)  bipunctate  towards  apex.     Length  14  mm. 

C.  ct/anijjenue  is  probably  a  form  of  C.  anthracinum,  Macl.f 
It  will  be  seen  from  the  note  given  above  that,  in  Macleay's  note 
following  his  Latin  diagnosis  of  C.  iiitescens,  the  statement  that 
*'  The  thorax  is  as  long  as  broad  "  is  not  borne  out  b}^  actual 
measurement,  and  that  it  is  evidently  b}'  an  error  that  the  width  is 
given  as  "  2  lines." 

Carenum  bonellii,  Westwood. 

C.  cyaneum,  Bonelli,  Mem.  Acad.  Turin,  1813,  p. 479;  C.  hojiellii, 
Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  1842,  i.  p. 83;  C.  vh^idipeyme,  Westw.,  Trans. 
Ent.  Soc.  1849,  v.  p. 202;  C.  scituhim,  Mac!.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc. 
N.  S.  Wales,  1863,  i.  p.  144;  C.  zvestwoodi,  Casteln.,  Trans.  Roy. 
Soc.  Vict.  1868,  viii.  p.  136;  C.  chaudoiri,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc. 
N.  S.  Wales,  1869,  ii.  p.63. 

This  is  the  type-species  of  Carenum  on  which  Bonelli  founded 
the  genus;  he  took  it  to  be  Scarites  ci/aneus,  Fabr.,  in  which  he 
was  wrong,  as  was  shown  by  Westwood,  who  named  it  C.  honeUii;X 
however,  if  Bonelli  gave  a  specific  as  well  as  a  generic  diagnosis 
of  his  Carenum  cyaneum,  the  name  should  stand,  Scarites  cyaneus, 
Fabr.,  being  now  referred  to  the  genus  Laccoscaplius.  I  have 
not  seen  Bonelli's  paper,  so  cannot  settle  this  point.  All  the 
synonymy  given  above  has  been  previously  recorded  except  that 
of  C.  chaudoiri^  the  type  of  which  (in  the  Macleay  Museum)  I 
have  examined  without  being  able  to  differentiate  it  from  C. 
bonellii. 

"    Vide  these  Proceedings,  xxv.  1900,  p. 368. 

t  Vide  Blackburn,  Trans.  Hoy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.  1887,  p. 58;  and  Sloane, 
these  Proceedings,  xxv.  1900,  p. 379. 

Ij:  Brulle  also  figured  this  species  and  made  some  notes  on  it  {vide  White, 
an  Grey's  Travels,  ii.  p.  457),  and  m  Masters'  Catalogue  the  reference  is  "C. 
bonellii,  Brulle,  Hist.  Nat.  v.  p.63";  this  reference  is  correct,  but  it  is  an 
error  to  attribute  the  name  C,  bondlii  to  Brulle. 


122  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CAIIAIUDJ:,  TI., 

Carenum  hrisbanense,  Castelnaii. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  18G^,  viii.  p.l33;  C.  opacuiu,  MacL, 
Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1869,  ii.  p.63. 

I  have  compared  the  type-specimen  of  C.  opacum,  Mac!.,  in  the 
Macleay  Museum,  with  a  specimen  of  C.  brisbanense,  Casteln., 
and  consider  them  the  same  species. 

J{ah. — Q.  :  Brisbane  {^fide  Castelnau) — N.S.W.  :  Richmond 
River  (WoUongbar;  Froggatt),  Clarence  River  {^fide  Macleay). 

Carenum  simile,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  X.  S.  Wales,  1865,  i.  p.lS2;  C.  irisfc,  Mad, 
I.e.  1869,  ii.  p.63;  C.  ovipeiuie,  Mad,  I.e.  1871,  ii.  p.98. 

The  type-specimens  of  C.  triste,  Mad,  and  C.  ovipenne,  Mad, 
are  in  the  Australian  ^luseum,  where  I  have  seen  and  compared 
them  without  finding  any  specific  differences  between  them,  nor 
can  I  find  any  grounds  for  separating  them  from  C.  simile,  MacL 

Carenum  coracinum,  Macleay. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1865,  i.  p.  178;  Carenoscaphus 
lucidus,  MacL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1887,  (2)  ii.  p.  131. 

The  type  of  C.  eoracinum,  Mad,  is  in  the  Australian  Museum, 
where  I  have  seen  it,  and  found  it  conspecific  with  Carenoscaphus 
lucidus,  Mad,  the  type  of  which  is  in  the  Macleay  Museum.  A 
specimen  from  the  Dawson  River,  Q.,  in  my  possession  was  com- 
pared with  both  types  and  found  the  same. 

Jlab. — Q.  :  Dawson  River  (Barnard),  Ipswich  {^fide  Macleay) 
— N.S.W.  :  Nyngan  (Brown). 

]\^ote. — Two  specimens  which  seem  conspecific  with  C.  coraci- 
num, Macl.,  have  been  given  to  me  by  Mr.  H.  W.  Brown,  who 
took  them  near  Nyngan,  N.S.W.  These  specimens  are  in  a 
damaged  condition;  one  has  the  elytra  4-punctate  as  in  C.  coraci- 
num, and  is  wholly  black;  the  other  is  black,  with  the  prothorax 
narrowly  edged  with  purple;  the  elytra  are  purple  with  the  disc 
near  the  suture  purple-black,  quadripunctate  (the  posterior  punc- 
tures being,  however,  double),  and,  in  addition,  each  elytron  has 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  125 

a  row  of  widely  placed  punctures  (of  same  size  as  the  usual  dis- 
coidal  punctures)  extending  from  the  anterior  to  the  apical  dis- 
coidal  punctures,  but  placed  on  a  line  about  one  millimetre  nearer 
the  suture  than  the  anterior  discoidal  puncture.  There  are  five 
punctures  in  the  row  on  the  left  elytron,  and  three  on  the  right; 
their  presence  is  probably  abnormal. 

Carenum  tinctilatum,  Newman. 

Enioma  {nom.  iwoioc.^  tiitctilatiim,  Newm.,  Ent.  Mag.  v.  p.171; 
Carenum  bijnmctatiun,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  i. 
1863,  p. 60;  O.  suhstriatuliim,  Macl.,  I.e.  1865,  p.  179;  C.  glaberri- 
nmm,  MacL,  Ic.  p.  180;  C.  suhrugosulum,  Macl.,  I.e.  p.  180;  6'. 
undnlatum,  MacL,  I.e.  p.  180;  Eutoma  nmvmani,  Casteln.,  Trans. 
Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  1868,  p.  140;  E.  Iceve,  Casteln.,  I.e.  p.  141;  E, 
loddonense,  Casteln.,  I.e.  p.  142;  E. punetulatiwi,  MacL,  Proc.  Linn. 
Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  (2),  ii.  1887,  p.l30. 

I  have  already  suggested  the  likelihood  of  all  the  above 
synonymy,  and  a  recent  examination  of  the  types  in  the  Macleay 
Collection  of  C.  suirugosulum,  C.  suhstriatulum,  C.  glaherrimumy 
and  C,  undidatutn  has  convinced  me  of  their  identity  with 
Eutoma  tinctilatuin,  Newm.  The  type  of  Eutoma  mastersi, 
MacL,  is  not  in  the  Macleay  Collection,  but  I  think  it  unlikely 
that  it  will  prove  different  from  C.  tinctiUatum. 

Trichocakenum  castelnaui,  n.sp. 

/J.  Elongate,  cylindrical,  laevigate.  Head  large;  three  supra- 
orbital punctures  on  each  side;  suborbital  channel  short,  wide, 
not  longitudinally  divided  by  a  median  ridge  :  prothorax  longer 
than  broad,  each  lateral  channel  with  six  setigerous  punctures  : 
elytra  oval;  inflexed  lateral  margin  narrow  behind  first  ventral 
segment;  a  longitudinal  row  of  six  or  seven  widely  placed  punc- 
tures on  each  elytron  at  about  the  external  third  of  its  width  : 
anterior  tibiae  bidentate.      Black,  shining. 

Head  large,  convex  (3-8  mm.  across  ej^es);  frontal  sulci  long, 
deep,  diverging  lightly  backwards  and  reaching  to  opposite  base 
of  orbits;  intermediate  angles  of  clypeus  short,  dentiform;  eyes 
deeply  set   in    orbits,    depressed;    orbits    prominent,    postocular 


124  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CAEABIDJ:,  IL, 

part  projecting  strongly  from  head  and  reaching  slightly  beyond 
ej^es;  paragen?e  longitudinally  striolate  and  with  two  or  three 
setigerous  punctures  just  below  insertion  of  antennte.  Palpi 
with  apical  joint  securiform,  of  maxillary  moderately  so,  of  labial 
enormously  so;  penultimate  joint  of  labial  short,  plurisetose. 
Prothorax  very  little  broader  than  head  (4-4  x  4  mm.),  strongly 
convex,  strongly  and  roundly  declivous  to  base;  sides  parallel, 
roundly  narrowed  to  base;  anterior  angles  lightly  advanced  : 
border  narrow,  subsinuate  on  eacli  side  of  base;  marginal  channel 
narrow.  Elytra  a  little  wider  than  prothorax  (9*5  x  4"2  mm.); 
suture  depressed  (so  that  each  elytron  is  separately  convex);  base 
very  roundly  and  deeply  declivous  to  peduncle,  shoulders  rounded; 
lateral  border  narrow,  lightly  upturned  and  closing  lateral  channel 
a,t  humeral  angles;  point  of  junction  of  lateral  border  with  the 
border  of  the  sides  of  the  base  forming  merely  a  lightly  marked 
angle,  not  folded  back  or  the  least  upturned;  a  row  of  closel}^ 
placed  ocellate  punctures  in  lateral  channel  very  near  border; 
five  punctures  on  each  side  of  basal  declivity.  Prosternum  with 
a  few  scattered  setigerous  punctures  before  coxa?.  Abdomen 
with  second  segment  setigerous  on  each  side  under  the  tro- 
chanters; ambulatorial  setie  present.  Legs  long,  light;  anterior 
femora  dilatate,  with  four  or  five  punctures  along  posterior  edge 
of  lower  side;  posterior  coxa?  with  two  setigerous  punctures.* 
Length  17-5,  breadth  4-2  mm. 

Hab. — W.A.:  Ptoebuck  Bay  District  (Coll.  French). 

Differs  evidently  from  T.  elderi,  Blackburn,  ^from  description) 
by  smaller  size,  three  (not  four)  setigerous  punctures  above  each 
eye,  prothorax  with  six  setigerous  punctures  (not  "  a  close-set 
row  '*)  in  each  lateral  channel,  elytra  with  one  row  (not  two)  of 
widely  placed  punctures  on  each  elytron;  from  the  description  of 
T.  cylindricum,  SI.,  it  differs  by  smaller  size,  head  with  three 
supraorbital  punctures  on  each  side,  prothorax  longer  than  broad, 
and  with  more  than  three  marginal  setigerous  punctures  on  each 
side. 


*  The  "  anteiioi "  and  the  "inner  marginal"  punctures  are  present;  the 
position  of  the  "  apical"  puncture  is  indicated,  but  does  not  bear  a  seta. 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  125 

Genus   C  A  r  e  n  i  d  i  u  m. 

Chaudoir,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  18G9,  p.  149;  Cono-pterura  {gen. 
ined.),  Chaudoir,  I.e.  p.  148. 

The  genus  Carenidium  may  be  differentiated  from  the  other 
Carenid  genera  by  the  following  features  in  combination  : — 

Palpi  with  apical  joint  very  widely  securiform;  labial  with 
penultimate  joint  short,  plurisetose  in  front  ;  the  suborbital 
antennal  scrobes  deep,  narrow,  bordering  and  following  the  con- 
tour of  the  paragense,  their  upper  margin  forming  a  more  or  less 
distinct  ridge;  antennae  setaceous;  elytra  with  lateral  border 
narrow  and  neither  thickened  nor  upturned  in  a  projection  at 
the  humeral  angles;  apical  ventral  segment  with  upturned  edge 
foveate  on  each  side  of  apex. 

I  do  not  think  Conopterum,  which  has  the  labrum  and  clypeus 
truncate,  can  be  separated  as  a  genus  distinct  from  Carenidium. 
G.  septentrionale,  MacL,  with  the  clypeus  as  in  C.  riverince,  Mack, 
but  the  wide  labrum  lightly  emarginate  (also  mandibles  in  Q 
intermediate  in  form  between  those  of  C.  gagatinum,  Mack,  and 
C.  riverince,  Macl);  and  C.  sapphirin^im,  Bates,  with  both  clypeus 
and  labrum  only  lightly  emarginate,  are  species  which  seem  to 
compel  the  union  of  Conopterum  with  Carenidium. 

Table  of  Species. 

I.  Labrum  and  median  part  of  clypeus  emarginate;  mandibles  when  closed 

not  forming  a  raised  ridge  before  labrum  (Carenidium,  typical  form). 

A.  Elytra  not  mucronate  at  apex. 

B.  Head  strongly  narrowed  on  each  side  behind  eyes;  infiexed  margins 

of  elytra  wide,  strongly  and  continuously  narrowed  to  apex. 

c.  Elytra  impunctate. 

d.   Punctures  on  base  of  elytra  not  placed  in  a  depression. 

e.  Prothorax  subparallel  on  sides  between  marginal  punctures; 

colour  black C.  gagatinum,  Mack 

ee.   Prothorax  cordate,  sides  rounded;  upper  \ 

surface  with  metallic  tints  (violaceous)  l^"  ^upe'-bum,  Cast. 

^  \  U.  pyripemie,  hi. 

at  least  near  margins J 

dd.   Punctures  on  base  of  elytra  placed  \ 

1 T       1    •         J  •  /TT  I  C.  sapphiriinim,  Kates, 

obliquely  in  a  depression.     (Upper  V^  Jj^ingi,  Mack 

surface  green,  at  least  near  sides)..  ) 


126  REVI3I0NAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CAllAlilD.K,  II., 

cc.  Elytra  with  four  discoiclal  punctures C  damtli,  Macl. 

BB.  Head  lightly  narrowed  behind  eyes;    inflexed  margins  of   elytra 
rather  narrow  and  but  little  reduced  in  width  opposite  third  and 

fourth  ventral  segments C.  septentrioiiale,  Macl. 

AA.  Elytra  bimucronate  at  apex. 

f.  Apical  declivity  of  elytra  without  ante-apical  tubercles 

C.  nmcrondtum,  Macl. 

ff.  Apical  declivity  of  each  elytron  with  an  ante-apical  tubercle  a  little 

before  the  apical  mucro C  leai,  SI. 

II.   Labrum  and  median  part  of  clypeus  truncate;  mandibles  in    $    when 
closed  forming  a  transverse  ridge  in  front  of  labrum,  in   J  the  left 
mandible  bearing  an  erect  horn  (Coxoptekum,  Chaudoir). 
G.  Prothorax  broader  than  long. 

H.   Elytra   with   inflexed    margins    wide,    strongly   and    continuously 
narrowed  to  apex. 

i.  Prothorax  roundly  ampliate  on  sides,  elytra  impunctate 

C.  tropicctle,  Macl. 

ii.  Prothorax  narrower,  sides  very  lightly  rounded  between  marginal 

punctures;  elytra  4-punctate  on  disc C.  riverime,  Macl. 

HH.  Elytra  with  inflexed  margins  rather  narrow  and  but  little  reduced 
in  width  opposite  third  and  fourth  ventral  segments, 
j.  Clypeus   with    intermediate    angles   normal;  )  C.  modestum,  SI. 

elytra  4-punctate jC  pinyuratnm,  SI. 

jj.   Clypeus  with  right  intermediate  angle  of  clypeus  (in  ^)  developed 

into  a  strong  erect  horn;  elytra  impunctate... (7.  hicornutum,  Macl. 

GG.  Prothorax  longer  than  broad G.  aberrans,S\. 

Notes. 

Carenidiuni  sapvhirinum,  Bates. — My  former  note  on  this 
species*  was  founded  on  the  male;  Mr.  French  has  since  sent 
me  the  female,  which  agrees  better  with  the  original  description, 
having  the  elytra  convex.  Length  29-32,  breadth  9-5-11  mm. 
Bates  gave  the  size  of  his  specimen  as  12  lines,  but  I  think  Mr. 
French's  specimens  must  be  referred  to  C.  sapphirinum,  for  mere 
size  is  too  unimportant  to  rel}'^  on  as  a  specific  character  in  Careni- 
dium;  specimens  of  C.  super'bum,  Casteln.,  in  my  possession, 
taken  at  Mulwala,  N.S.W.,  vary  in  length  from  26  to  32  mm., 
and  I  have  a  specimen  of  the  same  species  from  near  Grenfell 
only  24  mm.  in  length. 

ffab.—^AY.A.  :  Shark's  Bay  (Canarvon;  Jide  French). 

*  These  Proceedings,  xxv.  1900,  p.  386. 


BY    THOMAS    O.    SLOANE.  127 

Careuulium  Spalding i,  Macl.  —  Allied  to  C  sapphiriuum,  Bates, 
but  differently  coloured,  the  elytra  having  the  sutural  part  of  the 
disc  blue-black;  this  sutural  area  is  sharply  defined  by  the  golden 
green  colour  of  the  lateral,  apical  and  basal  declivities.  I  regard 
it  as  specificall}'^  distinct  from  C.  sajjphirinum. 

Carenidium  chaudoiri,  Macl.,  is  very  like  C.  tropicale^  Macl., 
but  has  the  labrum  semicircular,  and  the  mandibles  without  a 
raised  ridge  in  front  of  the  labrum.  Tht  following  note  was 
made  with  the  types  of  both  species  (uniques  in  Macleay  Museum) 
l)efore  me.  C.  tropkale  has  head  and  labrum  of  a  Conopterum; 
it  is  of  same  form  and  convexity  as  C.  chaudoiri^  but  differs  by 
labrum  truncate,  clypeus  truncate,  mandibles  with  raised  ridge 
before  labrum;  prothorax  with  anterior  angles  widely  rounded 
(very  widely  obtuse  and  not  advanced),  anterior  marginal  punc- 
ture nearer  anterior  angle. 

Carenidium  darlingense,  Macl. — I  have  examined  the  type- 
specimen  of  this  species  in  the  Macleay  Museum.  It  has  the 
labrum  and  clypeus  truncate,  and  the  facies  of  C.  riverince,  Macl., 
to  which  it  is  closely  allied.  The  original  description  is  wrong  as 
to  the  shape  of  the  elytra,  which  have  not  "  the  length  three  times 
the  width." 

Conoptervbm  incorautum,  Macl. — After  examining  the  type- 
specimen  in  the  Macleay  Museum,  I  hesitate  to  consider  this 
species  as  different  from  C.  riverince,  Macl.;  it  is,  however,  of 
slightly  wider  form.  Mr.  Froggatt  has  given  me  two  specimens 
from  Gin  Gin  in  the  Wide  Bay  District  of  Queensland;  one  of 
these  has  a  strong  erect  horn  on  the  left  mandible,  as  in  C 
riverince  (J,  but  a  little  shorter. 

Conoptei'um  litorale,  Macl. — I  have  seen  the  type-specimen  in 
the  possession  of  Mr.  Masters  (now  in  the  Macleay  Museum). 
It  is  identical  in  facies  with  C.  incornutum,  Macl.,  but  with  im- 
punctate  elytra;  I  should  expect  the  type  to  be  abnormal  in  this 
respect  and  to  be  conspecific  with  C.  incoriiutum;  the  examina- 
tion of  more  specimens  of  both  forms  w^ill  be  necessary  to  deter- 
mine this. 


128  KEVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARAniD.K,  II., 

CaKENIDIUM    PURPUKATUM,  11. sp. 

^.  Elongate;  head  large,  wide  across  eyes  (5 -3  mm.);  labrum 
short,  truncate;  prothorax  subcordate,  lobed  at  base,  bipiinctate 
in  lateral  channel;  elytra  flat  on  disc,  strongly  declivous  to  sides 
and  apex,  4-punctate ;  anterior  tibia^  2-dentate.  Violaceous; 
head  black,  with  a  purple  flush  on  sides  of  vertex,  on  lateral 
frontal  spaces,  and  on  guise;  prothorax  black  in  middle  of  disc, 
widely  violaceous  towards  sides  and  base  with  cyaneous  tints  near 
posterior  angles;  elytra  of  a  uniform  bright  violet;  under  surface 
and  legs  black,  a  slight  violaceous  flush  on  episterna  of  proster- 
num  and  on  inflexed  sides  of  el3^tra. 

Head  convex,  declivous  to  anterior  margin;  front  with  median 
space  strongly  convex,  lateral  spaces  convex,  wide,  strongly 
roundl}^  declivous  before  eyes;  frontal  sulci  long,  deep,  diverging- 
posteriorly;  supraocular  sulcus  extending  decidedly  forward  on 
to  lateral  frontal  spaces,  but  not  attaining  anterior  margin; 
clypeus  with  median  part  declivous,  truncate  and  with  three 
impressions  (a  longitudinal  sulciform  impression  at  each  side,  at 
base  of  intermediate  tooth,  and  a  lighter  wider  one  in  middle), 
intermediate  teeth  short,  obtuse,  prominent;  eyes  prominent, 
strongly  inclosed  at  base;  orbits  concave  below  eyes,  their  post- 
ocular  parts  rising  from  head  in  a  sharp  oblique  slope;  two  supra- 
orbital punctures  on  each  side.  Mandibles  thick,  outer  side 
abrupt  towards  base;  right  with  a  very  large  prominent  irregular 
tooth  in  the  middle,  left  with  a  wide  tooth  in  middle  (this  tooth 
not  greatly  upturned,  but  very  wide  and  with  an  obtuse  promi- 
nence at  each  side  of  apex).  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (4-5 
X  5-9  mm.),  not  much  wider  than  head  with  e3^es,  widest  near 
posterior  marginal  puncture,  depressed  along  median  line;  sides 
subparallel  (narrowing  a  little  forward  in  a  very  gentle  oblique 
curve);  basal  curve  strongly  sinuate  on  each  side  of  basal  lobe; 
anterior  margin  widely  emarginate;  anterior  angles  prominent, 
obtuse,  roundly  subtruncate;  basal  lobe  roundl}^  truncate;  basal 
area  defined  b}^  a  strong  transverse  line  and  very  little  depressed 
below  plane  of  disc;  border  narrow  on  sides,  widely  reflexed  on  each 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  129 

side  of  basal  curve,  thicker  and  less  reflexed  on  basal  lobe;  median 
line  strongly  impressed;  a  wide  shallow  impression  near  each  basal 
sinuosity.  Elytra  of  same  width  as  prothorax  (11  x  5-9  mm.),  sub- 
parallel,  very  gently  and  roundly  narrowed  to  base,  flattened  on 
disc  near  suture,  strongly  declivous  to  peduncle  and  to  border  at 
humeral  angles;  border  narrow;  four  or  five  punctures  on  base  of 
each  elytron  not  placed  in  a  depression;  submarginal  row  of 
punctures  close  together  at  humeral  angles,  more  distant  (but  not 
widely  placed)  on  sides.     Length  20,  breadth  5-9  mm. 

Hah. — Q.  :  Winton  District  (Colls.  French  and  Sloane;  sent  to 
me  by  Mr.  C.  French) 

If  the  subgenus  Coyiopterinn  be  recognised,  C.  jnirp^iratwm 
would  come  into  it;  in  facies  it  resembles  C.  bicorrtutum,  Macl., 
with  the  type  of  which  I  have  compared  it,  and  from  which  it 
differs  conspicuously  by  the  quadripunctate  elytra,  and  by  the 
form  of  the  clypeus — in  C.  hicornutum  the  right  intermediate 
angle  of  the  clypeus  is  developed  into  a  strong  erect  horn.  C 
2)nrpnratum  is  allied  to  C.  inodestuiii,  SI.,  but  differs  by  its 
violaceous  colour;  narrower  form;  head  more  convex,  postocular 
part  of  orbits  rising  sharply  and  obliquel}^  from  head;  prothorax 
more  flattened  on  disc,  less  rounded  on  sides,  with  sinuosities  of 
basal  curve  stronger;  elytra  flatter  on  disc  and  narrower,  humeral 
curve  less  strongly  rounded,  apical  declivity  more  abrupt  and 
without  a  deep  longitudinal  channel  along  suture,  lateral  punc- 
tures more  closely  placed  at  humeral  angles,  &c.  In  C.  inirpura- 
ium  and  G.  moflestutn.  the  antennal  scrobes  are  deep  and  narrow, 
with  a  strongly  developed  ridge  on  upper  side;  the  space  between 
this  ridge  and  the  eye  is  strongly  concave. 

G  A  R  B  N  A  R  C  H  U  S. 

E arygnatlius^  Blackburn,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  1887,  x. 
p.l3;  Epilectufi,  Blackburn,  I.e.  p.  177;  Garenarchus^  SL,  Proo. 
Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1904,  pp.706,  709. 

In  1887  Mr.  Blackburn  described  a  large  Carenid  as  Eurygna- 
thus  forti s;  subsequently  finding  Enrygaalhus  already  in  use,  he 
altered  it  to  Kpilectus^  but  this  name  is  too  near  Epilecta  used 
9 


130  REVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.K, 11., 

by  Hiibnei"  previously  foi-  a  genus  of  Lepidoptera.  It  therefore 
becomes  iieccssar}'  to  form  a  new  generic  name  to  replace  Epileclus. 
I  have  already  suggested  Cnrenarchus. 

Cahenarciius  mastehsi,  Macleay. 

Neocarenum  mastersi^  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  ISI.  S.  Wales,  1869, 
ii.  p.G8. 

I  have  examined  the  type-specimen  of  Nf,ocarenum  mastersi, 
Macl.,  in  the  Australian  Museum,  and  have  no  hesitation  in 
i-eferring  it  to  Carpmarchua.  I  have  not  seen  the  type-specimen 
of  Eurygnalhus  fortis,  Blkb.,  but  there  is  a  specimen  in  Mr. 
French's  Collection  which  I  have  identified  as  Mr.  Blackburn's 
species  from  the  description.  ]\Ir.  French's  specimen  is  from 
Victoria,  and  he  has  given  me  a  mutilated  specimen  (only  the 
elytra  and  body  without  legs  remain),  taken  by  Mr.  C.  French, 
Junr,,  in  the  Mallee  District  of  Victoria.  I  have  compared  these 
elytra  with  the  type  of  C.  masterd  without  finding  any  differences. 
Sir  William  Macleay's  description  is  so  poor  that  it  is  practically 
useless,  but,  as  far  as  it  goes,  it  agrees  with  Mr.  Blackburn's 
description  of  C.fortis,  so  that  I  suspect  identity  between  these 
species,  and  feel  some  doubt  as  to  whether  the  type-specimen  of 
Neocarenum  mastersi  was  found  in  Western  Australia. 

Genus   T  e  r  a  t  i  d  i  u  M. 

Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  1874,  xi.  p.  100;  Monocentrum,  Chaudoir, 
Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  1869,p.l46. 

The  genus  Monocentrum^  Chaudoir,  was  anticipated  by  Mono- 
centrus,  Cuvier  (Class  Pisces),  but  I  do  not  propose  to  replace  it 
by  a  new  name,  being  of  opinion  that  the  limits  of  the  genus 
Teratidium  should  be  extended  to  take  in  the  species  hitherto 
attributed  to  Monocentruni,  which  will  then  become  a  s3monym. 

Table  of  Specie>t. 

A.  Head  with  frontal  impressions  only  present  at  sides  of  elypeus,  obsolete 
between  eyes.     Elytra  with  a  deeply  marked  oblique  punctate  depres- 
sion behind  a  transverse  basal  prominence  near  each  humeral  angle. 
b.   Eyes  convex T.  macros,  Bates. 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  131 

bb.  Eyes  depressed  (not  more  prominent  than  posterior  part  of  orbits), 
c.   Eyes,  including  orbits,  standing  decidedly  out  beyond  preocular  part 
of  head,  and  strongly  rounded  on  outer  side. 
d.  Form  stout;  elytra  not  exceeding  half  the  length  of  insect  (12-5  x 

6'lmm.)  T.  frenchi,  SI. 

dd.   Form  narrow;  elytra  more  than  half  the  length  of  insect  (13*6  x 

5  "5  mm, ) T.  perlond'iim ,  SI. 

cc.  Eyes,  including  orbits,  hardly  more  prominent  than  preocular  part 
of  head,  and  lightly  or  hardly  rounded  on  outer  side. 
6.  Colour  obscure   (black,  with  some  faint  purple   reflections   on 

sides);  elytra  convex T.  conrexinii,  SI. 

ee.  Colour  metallic  green  or  purple,  disc  of  elytra  depressed 

*T.  Utticeps,  SI. 

AA.  Head  with  frontal  impressions  well  marked  between  eyes.  Elytra  with 
a  slightly  marked  oblique  punctate  depression  near  each  humeral 
angle,  base  of  elytra  not  raised  into  a  ridge  before  these  depressions. 

f.  Black;  stout;  eyes  prominent t7'.  //rancZicej^s,  Chaud. 

ff.  Violaceous;  very  elongate;,  eyes  depressed XT.  longiceps,  Oh2i>\ii\.. 

fff.   Prothorax  bright  green;  elytra  splendid  coppery-green    [fide  West- 
wood) T.  inegacephahnii,  Westw. 

Teratidium  macros,  Bates. 

Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  1874,  xi.  p.  100. 

Narrow,  elongate.  Black.  Head  large  (6 -3  mm.  across  eyes), 
convex,  strongly  narrowed  behind  eyes;  anterior  margin  truncate 
behind  mandibles;  preocular  processes  large,  protuberant,  rounded 
externally;  front  with  a  light  linear  oblique  impression  on  each 
side  rising  from  a  puncture  at  inner  extremity  and  defining  sides 
of  clypeus;  a  puncture  on  each  side  of  clypeus;  median  part  of 
clypeus  lightly  trisinuate,  tlie  teeth  on  each  side  triangular,  small 
but  prominent;  eyes   large,   convex,    more   prominent   than  pre- 

*  Note.  —I  have  said  in  the  description  of  T.  hUiceps,  "Elytra  hardly  as 
wide  as  prothorax  (10  x  4'5  mm.),"  the  size  of  the  prothorax  being  given  as 
4*75  X  4*25 mm;  it  should  have  read — Elytra  hardly  as  wide  as  Jiead  (4*5  mm.); 
the  measurements  are  correct. 

t  Head  5  mm.  acrosseyes;  proth.  o  x  5;  el.  11  x  5*3;  length  21  mm.  Hah. 
— Cairns,  Queensland  (Dodd). 

X  Head  4-25  mm.  acrosseyes;  proth.  5*2  x  4*2;  el.  lO'S  x  42;  length  21mm. 
Hab. — Duaringa,  Queensland  (the  late  G.  Barnard). 


132  RE  VISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARAIIIDJ:,  IL, 

ocular  processes;  postocular  part  of  orbits  rising  decidedly  but 
roundly  from  head,  not  forming  anteriorly  a  thick  border  to 
external  part  of  eyes;  one  supraoibital  puncture  on  each  side.* 
Prothorax  convex,  a  little  longer  than  broad  (7x65  mm.);  lightly 
rounded  on  sides,  sinuate-angustate  to  base;  anterior  margin 
truncate;  border  not  the  least  advanced  at  anterior  angles;  lateral 
margins  bipunctate,  posterior  puncture  a  little  before  posterior 
sinuosity,  anterior  (double  on  both  sides  in  specimen  before  me) 
near  apex — about  1-6  mm.  behind  anterior  angle.  Elytra  long 
(14-5  X  6-7  mm.),  laevigate,  depressed  along  suture;  base  of  each 
elytron  with  a  wide  strongly  raised  oblique  ridge  rounded  on 
summit,  these  ridges  rather  widely  separated  from  one  another 
by  the  sutural  depression;  a  row  of  ocellate  punctures  along- 
posterior  side  of  each  ridge  in  a  slight  depression;  el3'tra  united 
at  apex  to  form  a  rather  prominent  triangular  projection;  lateral 
borders  becoming  wide  and  thick  posteriorly,  divided  from  one 
another  at  apex  by  the  apical  prominence  ;  a  dentiform  pro- 
minence behind  each  humeral  angle.  Prosternum  with  inter- 
coxal  part  impunctate  and  gently  declivous  to  base.  Ventral 
segment  and  posterior  coxee  impunctate.  Length  28,  breadth 
6*7  mm. 

Hab. — W.A.:  Roebuck  Bay  (Coll.  French;  unique). 

The  larger  size  and  black  colour  at  once  distinguish  it  from 
other  described  allied  species.  There  is  a  faint  suspicion  of  a 
bluish  tinge  on  the  sides  of  the  elytra,  so  that  I  should  expect 
this  species  to  be  somewhat  variable  in  colour,  perhaps  in  some 
localities  showing  a  tendency  to  become  violaceous. 

I  consider  the  species  before  me  to  be  T.  macros,  Bates,  but 
would  call  attention  to  the  following  characters  in  the  original 
description  as  presenting  differences  : — 

"Head  broader  than  the  thorax" — I  believe  Bates  to  have 
made  this  statement  from  the  appearance  of  these  parts;  to  the 

"  There  is  a  single  puncture  on  the  right  side,  and  two  closely  placed  on 
the  left — evidently  a  case  of  the  duplication  of  single  setigerous  punctures  so 
frequently  met  with  throughout  the  Carenides. 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOAN E.  133 

eye  the  head  does  appear  wider  than  the  thorax,  though  by 
measurement  it  is  not  actually  so.  "  Four  teeth  of  the  clypeus 
of  equal  size  " — in  the  specimen  before  me  this  is  not  the  case; 
the  outer  pair  of  teeth  are  prominent  and  triangular,  the  inner 
pair  merely  obtuse  prominences.  "  Prothorax  much  longer  than 
broad  '"' — it  appears  so  to  the  eye,  but  is  only  slightly  longer  b}'' 
measurement. 

Teratidium  frenchi,  n.sp. 

Elongate,  Isevigate.  Head  large,  constricted  posteriorly ;  pro- 
thorax  hardly  longer  than  broad,  strongly  angustate  to  base, 
marginal  channel  unipunctate  about  half-way  between  anterior 
and  posterior  angle;  elytra  long,  impunctate,  lateral  border  thick 
— particularly  posteriori}';  anterior  tibiae  unidentate.  Head 
black  with  green  tinge  on  neck  (above  and  below)  and  beneath 
eyes  ;  prothorax  green,  brighter  towards  sides,  under  surface 
green,  brighter  on  episterna;  elytra  green;  body  and  legs  black 
with  greenish  reflections  on  sides  of  mesosternum  and  of  ventral 
segments. 

Head  la^vigate,  convex  ;  anterior  part  widely  subquadrate, 
defined  posteriorly  1)}^  a  transverse  impression;  front  with  a  light 
oblique  linear  impression  on  each  side  defining  sides  of  clypeus, 
a  punctiform  impression  at  internal  extremity  of  each  of  these 
sulci;  clypeus  impunctate,  convex,  strongly  declivous  to  anterior 
margin,  median  part  lightly  produced  in  middle — this  median 
prominence  wide  and  very  lightly  emarginate — intermediate 
angles  rather  prominent,  obtuse,  wide  at  base;  supra-antennal 
plates  large,  convex,  rounded  externally;  eyes  deeply  set  in 
orbits,  rather  prominent;  orbits  large,  enclosing  posterior  two- 
thirds  of  eyes,  obliquely  and  roundly  narrowed  to  neck;  one 
supraorbital  puncture  on  each  side.  Prothorax  of  same  width  as 
head,  hardly  longer  than  broad  (5-6  x  5  5  mm.),  convex,  declivous 
posteriorly  to  the  wide  basal  area  between  juxtabasal  sinuosities 
of  border;  sides  subparallel  in  middle,  lightly  narrowed  to  anterior 
angles;  posterior  angles  not  marked;  apex  truncate,  anterior 
angles  feebly  advanced;  base  widely  and  evenly  rounded  between 
juxtabasal    sinuosities^    border  narrow,  even,  a  little   wider   at 


134  EEVISIONAL  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.K,  II., 

apex  to  form  the  slightly  prominent  anterior  angles,  lightly  sinuate 
on  each  side  just  before  the  })ase,  thicker  but  hardly  raised  on 
base;  a  light  elongate  lateral  basal  impression  extending  forward 
from  each  juxtabasal  sinuosity;  median  line  linear  but  strongly 
impressed.  Elytra  wider  than  prothorax,  elongate-oval  (12-5  x 
6-1  mm.),  widest  (including  border)  behind  middle,  narrowed  to 
base,  convex,  lightly  depressed  on  each  side  of  suture,  strongly 
declivous  to  apex ;  base  lightly  emarginate  behind  peduncle, 
strongly  and  abruptly  declivous,  the  declivity  impunctate;  apical 
curve  wide,  apex  produced  shortly  and  obtusely  beyond  lateral 
border;  a  strongly  raised  roundly  convex  oblique  ridge  on  each 
elytron  above  basal  declivity,  a  punctate  depression  behind  this 
ridge;  border  narrow  near  shoulders,  becoming  very  wide  and 
thick  posteriorly,  reaching  peduncle,  strongly  upturned  and 
rounded  at  humeral  angles;  a  row  of  umbilicate  punctures  along 
margin,  these  becoming  more  widely  placed  near  apex.  Ventral 
segments  impunctate.  Legs  long,  light;  anterior  tibiae  with  apex 
strongly  produced,  a  minute  denticulation  on  external  side  level 
with  base  of  tarsus;  intermediate  tibia3  not  dentate  externally  at 
apex.     Length  23-5,  breadth  6-1  mm. 

Hah. — W.A.  :   Roebuck  Bay  (Colls.  French  and  Sloane). 

Teratidium  convexum,  n.sp. 

Elongate,  cylindrical,  Itevigate;  head  convex,  subquadrate,  con- 
stricted posteriorly,  posterior  part  of  frontal  impressions  very 
feebly  indicated,  not  sulciform;  elytra  elliptical,  convex,  impunc- 
tate. Nitid,  black  with  a  very  obscure  purple  tinge  on  sides  of 
elytra  and  prothorax. 

Head  large  (4x4  mm.);  anterior  part  widely  subquadrate,  con- 
vex; front  with  a  well  marked  but  shallow  oblique  sulcus  on  each 
side  defining  the  sides  of  the  clypeus;  clypeus  with  median  part 
strongl}'  and  abruptly  declivous,  emarginate-truncate;  two  supra- 
orbital punctures  on  each  side;  eyes  deeply  set  in  orbits,  depressed; 
orbits  large,  equally  prominent  w^ith  and  enclosing  posterior  two- 
thirds  of  eyes,  projecting  abruptly  behind  from  sides  of  head. 
Antennae    moniliform  ;    joints    4-11    compressed,    bisulcate    and 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  135 

sparsely  setose  on  edges.  Prothorax  convex,  as  wide  as  head, 
longer  than  broad  (4-6x4  mm.),  lightly  angustate  to  base;  sides 
parallel,  lightly  sinuate  just  before  base;  anterior  margin  trun- 
cate, with  angles  feebly  advanced;  base  rounded;  basal  angles 
obtuse;  border  narrow,  thicker  and  more  raised  on  base;  marginal 
channel  narrow,  3-punctate  (one  puncture  at  posterior  angle,  and 
two  close  together  about  anterior  fourth),  median  line  fine. 
Elytra  a  shade  wider  than  prothorax (9  x  4-1 5mm.),  convex,  lightly 
rounded  on  sides,  a  little  narrowed  to  base,  widest  just  behind 
middle;  base  subemarginate,  strongly  and  abruptly  declivous; 
lateral  border  thick  and  convex  posteriorly,  narrow,  upturned  and 
rounded  at  humeral  angles;  lateral  row  of  umbilicate  punctures 
closely  set  on  basal  third,  wider  apart  posteriorly;  a  wide  oblique 
punctate  impression  on  each  side  near  base.  Ventral  segments 
3-6  with  two  setigerous  punctures  on  each  side.  Legs  light; 
anterior  tibise  with  apex  strongly  produced;  intermediate  tibiae 
with  a  short  external  spur-like  projection  at  apex;  posterior  coxae 
and  trochanters  without  setigerous  punctures.  Length  18, 
breadth  4-15  mm. 

Hab. — Q. :  Cooktown  (Coll.  French;  unique,  $). 

It  belongs  to  the  section  of  the  genus  in  which  the  front  is 
without  strong  sulci  between  the  eyes  {Teratidium,  sensu  Bates). 
Its  general  resemblance  is  to  T.  perlongum,  SI.,  from  which  it 
differs  by  smaller  size;  eyes  less  prominent,  postocular  protu- 
berances larger  and  rising  more  sharplyfrom  head;  elytra  narrowed 
to  base,  the  ridge  dividing  the  basal  depressions  from  the  base 
narrower  and  less  elevated. 


136 


THE  POSSIBLE  RELATIONSHIP  BETWEEN  BACTERIA 
AND  THE  GUM  OF  HAKEA  SALIGNA. 

(Bac.  pseudarabinus  a.,  n.sp.) 

By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the 

Society. 

Specimens  of  gum  that  were  picked  from  Hakea  saligna  ap- 
peared as  transparent,  colourless,  rounded  and  conical  masses  as 
well  as  clusters  of  conical  drops  (tears).  Other  fragments  were 
brownish-yellow  and  blackish.  They  were  easily  cut  with  a 
knife,  showing  that  they  had  a  tough  and  gelatinous  but  not  a 
brittle  consistency.  Some  of  the  conical  masses  measured  about 
4  cm.  in  circumference  and  1  cm.  high,  the  base  being  attached 
to  the  bark  of  the  tree  through  punctures  from  which  the  gum  had 
exuded. 

The  gums  of  species  of  Hakea  other  than  Hakea  saligna  have 
been  examined  by  Maiden,"^  who  found  that  they  consisted  of 
arabin  (5-16%)  and  pararabin  (63-69  %),  together  with  moisture 
and  ash.  He  also  notesf  the  presence  of  a  jelly  at  the  roots  of 
certain  Hakeas,  but  that  was  probably  the  undried  gum. 

The  gum  which  I  received  when  placed  in  a  small  quantity  of 
water  swelled  in  it,  forming  a  thick  paste  of  the  lumpy  consistency 
•of  fruit  jam.  With  much  water  a  homogeneous  paste  was  formed 
in  a  day  or  two.  The  water  made  no  differentiation  between 
parts  of  the  gum;  it  appeared  to  be  a  single  substance,  not  a 
mixture  ot  two  constituents  with  differing  solubilities.  The 
viscosity  of  the  gum  appeared  to  be  midway  between  arabin  and 
metarabin. 

*  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Australia,  1889,  54. 
+  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1901,  161. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  137 

The  examination,  by  means  of  plate  cultures,  of  the  tissues  of 
branches  near  the  site  of  the  exudate,  revealed  the  presence  of  a 
number  of  bacteria,  many  of  which  appeared  to  be  capable  of 
producing  gum.  Some  of  the  original  colonies  were  slimy,  ropy 
or  gelatinous  and  did  not  liquefy  the  gelatine,  while  others 
liquefied  the  glucose-gelatine  upon  which  they  were  growing. 
Many  of  those  colonies  which  were  considered  to  be  representa- 
tive were  picked  out  and  grown  upon  saccharose-potato-agar, 
upon  ordinary  nutrient  agar  and  in  saccharose-peptone- fluid. 

These  secondary  cultures  enabled  the  bacteria  to  be  classified 
into  races  of  several  probable  species.  Those  bacteria  which 
gave  no  evidence  of  being  capable  of  producing  slime  readily 
upon  the  media  already  mentioned  as  well  as  upon  levulose- 
asparagine-tannin-agar*  were  rejected  as  being  of  no  importance. 
Typical  growths  of  the  several  supposed  species  were  "plated" 
in  glucose-gelatine  to  ensure  the  purity  of  the  bacteria. 

Two  bacteria  were  recognised  as  races  of  Bac.  levanifoviuans ; 
one  of  them  grew  as  a  thin  wrinkled  skin  on  saccharose-potato- 
agar,!  while  the  other  produced  a  luxuriant  semi-white  slime. 
Eventually  the  probable  formers  of  Hakea  gum  were  reduced  to 
two,  one  of  which  readily  produced  a  ropy  and  almost  trans- 
parent slime  in  saccharose-asparagine-fluid,  :|:  On  levulose-aspara- 
gine-tannin-agar  the  slime  was  cohesive  and  suggestive  of  a  gum, 
the  solubility  of  which  was  similar  to  that  of  the  natural  gum. 
The  other  will  be  referred  to  subsequently. 

The  colonies  upon  glucose-gelatine  were  like  little  whitish 
irregular  masses,  which  appeared  semi-opaque  with  irregularly 
darkened  patches  when  viewed  microscopically.  The  stroke  on 
glucose-gelatine  appeared  as  a  broad,  whitish,  wrinkled  ribbon 
with  a  depressed  centre.  The  gelatine  was  at  first  consumed  as 
was  shown  by  the  depression  in  the  middle  of  the  growth;  after- 


*  Levulose  20,  asparagine  1,  tannin  1,  potassium  citrate  1,  agar20grni., 
water  to  1000  c.c. 

t  Potato  juice  250,  glycerine  10,  saccharose  20,  agar  20  grm.,  ^Yater  to 
1000  c.c. 

X  kSaccha  Ose  50,  asparagine  1,  potassium  citrate  5,  tap-water  1000  cc. 


138  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  IIAKEA, 

wards  it  became  liquid.  The  stab-culture  in  the  same  medium 
developed  as  a  rough  thread  at  the  top  of  which  stood  a  wrinkled, 
semi-transparent,  whitish  nail-head.  The  upper  layers  of  the 
gelatine  became  liquefied  in  a  stratiform  manner.  Upon  nutrient 
agar  the  culture  was  at  first  narrow  and  dirty-white  or  yellowish 
and  raised  with  a  slightly  wrinkled  Hat  margin.  The  growth 
became  broader  and  the  wrinkles  more  pronounced,  while  the 
centre  deepened  in  colour  to  buff.  The  potato-culture  was  buff, 
raised  and  dr}-.  Bouillon  became  very  turbid,  producing  a  film 
and  a  coherent  sediment.  The  indol  reaction  was  obtained  and 
nitrates  were  reduced  to  nitrites.  Milk  became  slightly  viscous. 
On  saccharose-potato-agar  the  growth  was  luxuriant,  convex, 
slimy  and  dirtj^-white;  the  margin  was  flattened  and  rough  and 
the  condensed  water  became  a  thick  slime.  The  organisms 
generally  exhibited  polar  staining,  and  they  were  negative  to 
Gram's  method.  The  cells,  which  were  motile,  varied  in  size. 
In  bouillon  they  ranged  from  0*5  :  0*7 /x  to  0-75  :1 -5 /x,  but 
generally  measured  0  6  :  12  jx.  On  saccharose-potato-agar,  they 
varied  from  0-3  :  O'S^  to  0-7  :  1-2  /.. 

The  nature  of  the  colonies  on  glucose-gelatine  (indicative  of 
the  production  of  an  insoluble  gum),  as  well  as  the  slow  liquefac- 
tion of  the  medium,  show  that  the  bacterium  has  its  nearest 
allies  in  Bact.  metarahinum  and  Bac.  atherstonei. 

A  quantity  of  the  slime  svas  prepared  by  growing  the  organism 
on  a  medium  containing  saccharose  20,  potato-juice  100,  glycerine 
10,  tannin  3,  and  agar  20  grm.  in  the  litre.  A  prescription 
almost  similar  had  been  used  originally  in  growing  the  slime  of 
Bact.  7netarahinv.n),  but  it  had  been  subsequently  discarded,  as 
no  slime  could  be  obtained  upon  it.  The  slime  tended  to  adhere 
to  the  agar,  but  this  was  overcome  by  pouring  about  10  c.c.  of  a 
nutritive  fluid  over  the  grosvth  in  each  plate.  The  nutritive 
fluid  consisted  of  the  levulose-asparagine  fluid,  the  prescription 
for  which  has  already  been  given,  and  it  was  used  because  it 
chanced  to  be  convenient  at  the  time.  The  slime  yiekled  a  gum 
by  the  autoclave  treatment.  This  gum,  when  dehydrated, 
absorbed  water,  becoming  a  thick  mucilage.     It  did  not  dissolve 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  139 

freely  like  the  arabin  from  Bad.  acacia',  but  seemed  to  swell  like 
the  natural  gum  of  Hakea.  The  mucilage  was  tested,  and  it  gave 
the  reactions  for  arabin,  that  is  to  sa}',  it  was  coagulated  by 
alcohol,  basic  and  ammoniacal  lead  acetates,  by  ferric  chloride. 
Fehling's  solution  gave  no  precipitate,  although  1  %  copper  sul- 
phate followed  by  potassium  hydrate  gave  a  colourless  coagulum. 
Barium  hydrate  gave  a  slight  precipitate,  while  other  reagents 
were  inactive. 

When  hydrolysed  by  boiling  with  5  %  sulphuric  acid  for  five 
hours,  the  gum  yielded  reducing  sugars,  and  these  were  readily 
recognised  as  arabinose  and  galactose  by  means  of  their  osazones. 

Thus  the  organism  was  a  race  of  Bad.  acacioi,  midway  between 
that  bacterium  which  produces  arabin  and  its  modified  form 
which  gives  metarabin,  and  which  I  have  named  Bad.  tnetara- 
binum.  Although  the  cultural  characters  were  not  typical  of 
either  of  the  forms,  yet  the  points  of  variance  were  not  suffi- 
ciently pronounced  to  say  that  it  was  not  Bad.  inetarahinum. 
the  diagnosis  of  the  gum  bacteria  is  not  an  easy  matter, 
because  the  cultural  characters  of  some  of  the  races  are  extremely 
variable.  Slight  alterations  in  the  chemical  constitution  of  the 
gum  influence  its  degree  of  solubility,  and  that  controls  the 
microscopical  appearance  of  the  colony.  The  colour  is  another 
point  upon  which  too  much  reliance  cannot  be  placed.  That  has 
been  emphasised  by  my  researches  upon  Bac.  levaniformans  and 
upon  Bac.  pseitdarabiiius,  both  of  which  occur  as  white  or  as 
yellow  races. 

Meanwhile  the  natural  gum  of  Hakea  saliyna  had  been  under 
investigation  to  see  if  it  was  really  a  variety  of  metarabin.  The 
swollen  gum  was  useless  for  the  purpose  of  testing  with  reagents, 
as  the  drop  of  mucilage  was  too  gelatinous  to  mix  with  the  drop 
of  reagent.  By  subjecting  the  gelatinous  suspension  of  the 
swollen  gum  to  a  pressure  of  three  atmospheres  in  the  autoclave, 
a  thin  solution  of  a  soluble  modification  was  obtained,  and  upon 
evaporation  this  yielded  a  good  mucilage  which  was  tested  with 
several  reagents.  Basic  and  ammoniacal  lead  acetates  gave  trans- 
parent clots.     Barium  hydrate  gave  a  white  precipitate,  but  with 


140  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  IIAKEA, 

another  mucilage  a  thickening  onty  was  produced.  Neutral  lead 
acetate,  ferric  chloride,  copper  sulphate,  silver  nitrate,  iodine, 
tannic  acid,  Fehling's  and  Schweitzer's  solutions  gave  no  reactions. 
The  hydrates  of  some  of  the  metals  formed  insoluble  compounds 
with  the  gum.  Ferric  chloride  followed  by  a  trace  of  potassium 
hydrate  gave  a  transparent  yellow  clot;  barium  chloride  and 
alkali  produced  a  mottled  transparent  and  white  clot;  copper 
sulphate  gave  a  transparent  coagulum.  Potassium  hydrate 
thickened  the  mucilage.  These  are  not  quite  the  reactions  either 
of  arabin  or  of  soluble  metarabin.  A  coagulation  with  neutral 
1  %  ferric  chloride  is,  as  for  as  I  know,  always  obtained  with 
these  mucilages.  Attempts  were  made  to  induce  a  coagulation. 
As  the  gum  was  acid,  the  mucilage  was  neutralised  and  then 
dialysed  to  remove  any  organic  salts  that  might  possibly  have 
prevented  coagulation.  Still  no  reaction  was  obtained.  Other 
methods  were  tried,  such  as  by  making  the  gum  neutral  to  litmus 
and  precipitating  with  alcohol,  but  by  no  method  could  a  positive 
reaction  with  ferric  chloride  be  procured.  The  probability  was 
that  the  gum  was  neither  arabin  nor  metarabin. 

The  gum  was  h3''drolysed  by  boiling  it  with  4%  sulphuric  acid 
for  four  hours.  The  solution  contained  substances  that  reduced 
Fehling's  solution,  but  no  recognisable  osazones  could  be  obtained. 
With  the  same  treatment,  arabin  and  metarabin  give  arabinose 
and  galactose,  the  osazones  of  which  can  be  obtained  and  recog- 
nised with  comparative  ease;  pararabin  is  not  attacked  by  that 
strength  of  acid.  The  gum  of  Hakea,  therefore,  did  not  appear 
to  contain  any  of  these  substances,  so  that  it  differed  from  the 
common  vegetable  gums.  Since,  however,  reducing  bodies 
resulted  from  the  hydrolysis,  it  seemed  advisable  to  repeat  the 
operation  with  some  alterations.  These  were  the  boiling  of  the 
acid  solution  for  a  shorter  time  and  the  use  of  a  smaller  amount 
of  acetic  acid  in  the  phenylhydrazine  mixture.  In  the  course  of 
many  recent  researches,  the  proportion  of  acetic  acid  had  been 
increased  until  the  mixture  contained  three  parts  of  glacial 
acetic  acid  to  one  part  of  phenylhydrazine.  The  reason  for  this 
was  that  certain  indefinite  substances  that  simulated  osazones 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH,  141 

were  destroyed  by  the  acid  and  removed  as  a  partly  soluble  oil 
or  tar.      But  this  will  be  seen  more  clearly  as  we  proceed. 

A  second  portion  of  the  natural  gum  was  boiled  for  one  hour 
with  4%  sulphuric  acid,  neutralised  with  barium  carbonate  and 
precipitated  with  alcohol.  The  insoluble  gum  was  boiled  for  an 
hour  with  5  %  acid.  From  this  no  gum  precipitable  by  alcohol 
was  obtained.  Both  these  portions  gave  osazones  with  phenyl- 
hydrazine.  By  treatment  with  ether  followed  by  water  the 
precipitates  were  separated  into  portions  which  melted  between 
107°  and  117°  and  into  others  which  melted  between  168°  and 
186°.  Tn  one  of  the  latter  portions,  while  the  bulk  melted  at 
186",  the  dust  in  the  tube  melted  at  190'^,  which  suggested  the 
possible  presence  of  galactosazone.  Its  actual  presence,  however, 
could  not  be  proved.  The  portions  with  the  low  melting  points 
were  largely  destroyed  when  evaporated  with  dilute  acetic  acid. 

In  view  of  the  unsatisfactory  results  which  had  been  obtained 
a  third  portion  was  hydrolysed.  The  gum  was  dissolved  in  the 
autoclave  and  coagulated  with  alcohol.  The  coagulum  after 
being  dissolved  in  water  and  evaporated,  was  tested  with  Fehling's 
solution;  no  reduction  was  obtained.  The  gum  was  boiled 
under  an  aerial  condenser  for  an  hour  with  0*5  %  sulphuric  acid. 
The  neutralised  and  evaporated  solution  was  treated  with  alcohol 
and  filtered.  The  insoluble  gum  was  boiled  with  1  %  acid  for  an 
hour  and  treated  as  described.  The  gum  unacted  upon  was 
boiled  with  5  %  acid  for  an  hour,  wdien  only  a  trace  of  unattacked 
gum  remained.  Thus  there  were  obtained  three  solutions  of 
hydrolysed  gum,  and  all  reduced  Fehling's  solution.  I  shall 
describe  the  investigation  of  the  products  of  hydrolysis  with 
some  detail  because  similar  reducing  substances  were  obtained 
from  the  gum  of  linseed  mucilage.  The  reducing  solutions  were 
treated  while  on  the  water-bath  with  phenylhydrazine  mixture 
containing  of  the  base  1  part,  glacial  acetic  acid  1  part,  glacial 
acetic  acid  saturated  with  sodium  acetate  1  part,  water  1  part. 
The  acetate  was  added  because  potassium  chloride  was  sometimes 
used  to  flocculate  the  milk}''  solutions  of  the  gum.  Any  tarrj' 
matter  that  formed  during  the  heating  on  the  water-bath  was 


142  BACTERIA  AND  THE  OUM  OF  IIAKEA, 

removed  by  filtration  through  a  hot,  wetted,  double  filter,  and 
the  osazones  that  formed  upon  the  cooling  of  the  solution  were 
filtered  off,  dried  on  porous  porcelain  and  examined.  As  a  rule 
these  osazones  formed  as  voluminous  yellow  masses  which  con- 
sisted of  interlacing,  indefinite,  feathery,  cr3^stalline  tufts.  Some- 
times the  mass  appeared  as  a  flabby  yellow  jelly,  which  shrank 
to  small  volume  on  the  filter.  The  solutions  were  treated  twice 
with  phenylhydrazine  solution,  a  third  treatment  being  unneces- 
sary. The  individual  precipitates  were  kept  separate  until  the 
melting  points  showed  that  the  fractions  were  similar. 

The  osazones  of  the  first  fraction  of  the  first  hydrolysis  (0-5  % 
acid)  dried  on  porcelain  as  brownish  skins  like  arabinosazone,  but 
they  were  largely  soluble  in  ether,  which  enabled  four  fractions 
to  be  obtained;  these  melted  at  118°,  118-120°,  122°,  and  132°. 
They  appeared  to  consist  of  the  same  osazone  or  mixture  of  osa- 
zones; the  ethereal  solutions  upon  evaporation  left  reddish-yellow 
crusts  which,  when  dissolved  in  water  and  evaporated,  gave  a 
yellow  amorphous  powder  and  a  reddish-brown  vitreous  film. 
Evaporation  with  dilute  acetic  acid  converted  everything  into  a 
brownish  tar.  The  second  fraction  of  the  first  hydrolysis  was 
separated  by  ether  into  portions  melting  at  118°,  123-126°,  130°, 
and  142°  with  the  same  characters  as  the  portions  of  the  first 
fraction. 

The  fractions  of  the  second  hydrolysis  (1  %  acid  for  I  hour) 
gave  osazones  which  also  dried  on  porcelain  as  brown  skins,  but 
which  melted  at  158-159°  and  at  164-166°.  These  were  added 
together  and  treated  with  water  on  the  water-bath.  A  part  dis- 
solved and  separated  out  upon  cooling  as  stellate  clusters  of 
delicate  needles  mixed  with  small  jagged  spheres.  On  porcelain, 
the  precipitate  formed  a  brown  skin  which  melted  at  114°.  The 
residue  was  again  heated  with  water  and  filtered.  A  precipitate 
of  indefinite  cr3^stals  separated  out  upon  cooling.  These  melted 
between  162°  and  166°.  The  residue,  insoluble  in  the  quantities 
of  hot  water  that  were  used,  was  suspended  in  a  small  volume  of 
water  and  carefully  treated  with  alcohol  while  on  the  water-bath, 
until  the  whole  of  it  dissolved.     The  alcoholic  solution  was  cooled 


BY  R.   ghek;  smith.  143 

when  a  yellow  precipitate  wliich  melted  at  176-178"  separated 
out.  A  vitreous  yellow  residue  was  obtained  upon  evaporating 
the  mother-liquor.  When  dissolved  in  water  and  evaporated,  the 
same  vitreous  residue  remained. 

The  third  hydrolysis  (5  %  acid  for  1  hour)  yielded  two  fractions. 
The  first  was  a  brown  powder  which  when  treated  with  hot  dilute 
acetic  acid,  to  dissolve  the  brown  constituent,  furnished,  upon 
cooling,  rosettes  of  microscopic  needles  which  melted  at  130^. 
A  dirty-brown  vitreous  residue  was  obtained  upon  evaporating 
the  mother-liquor.  The  second  osazone  was  a  yellow  powder 
which  melted  at  174-176°.  Ether  extracted  a  constituent  which 
dried  as  reddish-yellow  crusts  and  when  evaporated  from  aqueous 
solution  gave  a  slight  yellow  powder  and  a  brown  tar.  Follow- 
ing the  ether  treatment,  the  yellow  powder  was  heated  with 
water  upon  the  water-bath  and  filtered;  the  residue  was  again 
heated  with  water  and  filtered.  Both  hot  solutions  deposited, 
upon  cooling,  yellow  precipitates  of  small  microscopic  sj^heres 
which  dried  as  brown  skins.  The  first  melted  at  162-164";  the 
second  melted  at  170\  The  ftrst  was  heated  with  water  and 
filtered,  when  stellate  tufts  of  pale  yellov)  needles  tnelling  at  162" 
settled  out.  The  residue,  insoluVjle  in  the  hot  water,  melted  at 
166°.  The  residue  of  the  original  yellow  powder  not  dissolved 
by  the  repeated  treatment  with  hot  water  was  dissolved  in 
alcohol,  heated  until  much  alcohol  had  evaporated,  and  then 
cooled.  The  osazone  that  settled  out  melted  at  182°,  while  the 
residue  oVjtained  upon  the  evaporation  of  the  mother-liquor 
melted  at  176*^.  The  osazone  (182^)  was  treated  with  cold  strong 
alcohol  which  dissolved  a  constituent  melting  at  179°,  leaving 
undissolved  a  lemon-yellow  osazone  melting  at  186-187^.  An 
osazone  with  a  melting  point  higher  than  this  could  not  be 
obtained. 

The  italics  in  the  last  paragraph  indicate  the  osazones  which 
approached  most  closely  to  arabinosazone  and  galactosazone. 
Although  they  simulated  these  compounds,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
that  they  were  other  substances,  for  it  is  a  comparatively  easy 
matter  to  separate  the  definite  osazones  of  arabinose  and  galac- 


Ilu    LI  BR  AR  Y 


141  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  IIAKEA, 

tose.  The  compound  that  simuLated  galactosazone  was  much  too 
easily  soluble  in  water  and  in  alcohol,  while  the  arabinosazone- 
like  body  did  not  separate  out  from  water  with  the  normal  ap- 
pearance of  that  substance.  It  was  difficult  to  say  whether  one 
had  to  do  with  interlacing  crystals  or  with  a  jelly,  and,  further, 
the  precipitate  while  on  the  filter  was  more  gelatinous  than  the 
crystalline  precipitate  of  arabinosazone.  The  osazone-like  bodies 
with  the  low  melting  points  (about  120°)  were  decomposed  by 
acetic  acid.  It  must,  therefore,  be  concluded  that  arabinose  and 
galactose  are  not  among  the  products  of  hydrolysis,  and  further- 
more that  the  osazones  that  are  produced  lack  the  definite 
characters  of  the  osazones  of  the  well-known  sugars.  The  gum 
is  hydrolysed  to  substances  that  reduce  Fehling's  solution,  that 
give  ofi"  the  furfural  odour  during  hydrolysis,  but  which  give 
indefinite  osazones  with  phenylhydrazine.  The  latter  can  be 
separated  into  groups  which  have  melting  points  about  120°, 
160°  and  190°.  But  since  dilute  nitric  acid  oxidises  the  gum  to 
mucic  acid,  it  must  be  assumed  that  there  is  present  a  substance 
allied  to  a  galactan.  Possibly  these  indefinite  bodies  are  akin  to 
the  furfuroids  which  Cross,  Bevan  and  Smith  obtained  from 
straw.  It  is  also  possible  that  the  gum  is  that  indefinite  but 
much  referred  to  substance,  pectin. 

It  was  evident  from  the  investigation  of  the  products  of 
hydrolysis  that  the  gum  was  not  metarabin  and  that  the  bac- 
terium allied  to  Bad.  jnetarabuivm  probably  played  no  direct 
part  in  its  production.  At  the  same  time  it  must  not  be  forgotten 
that  Bad.  metarabinu77i  is  capable  of  producing  a  secondary 
substance  which  while  yielding  arabinose  and  galactose  upon 
hydrolysis,  did  not  give  the  typical  reactions  for  arabin  or  dis- 
solved metarabin,  inasmuch  as  it  gave  a  precipitate  with  barium 
hydrate.     I  suggested  that  it  was  possibly  a  pectin  body. 

Since  the  organism  did  not  appear  to  be  responsible  for  the 
gum,  I  investigated  the  only  other  which  produced  a  ropy  solu- 
tion in  saccharose-asparagine-fluid.  This  grew  as  a  thick,  mottled- 
white  slime  on  .saccharose-potato-agar.  The  cells  appeared  as 
rods  of  various  lengths  and   breadths  measuring  OTo-OO  :  1'6 /x 


BY    R.    GKEIG    SMITH.  145 

and  0*9  :  3 /x.  The  bcacterium  was  motile,  the  motility  being  pro- 
duced by  single  terminal  or  b}^  many  peritrichous  flagella;  up  to 
five  were  observed.  On  nutrient  agar,  the  stroke  was  narrow,  white, 
raised  and  lumpy,  becoming  dry  and  rough  from  the  formation 
of  small,  lateral  folds.  Upon  glucose-gelatine,  the  stroke  spread 
laterally  as  a  broad,  corrugated,  white,  moist-glistening  growth 
with  an  amoeboid  tendency.  The  culture  spread  over  the  greater 
part  of  the  slope,  and  in  time  became  depressed  and  finally 
liquefied  the  medium.  The  stab  in  the  same  medium  grew  in  a 
pronounced  tubercular  fashion,  the  lateral  outgrowths  measuring 
up  to  3  mm.  The  nail-head  spread  over  the  whole  surface  as  a 
depressed,  corrugated,  white  film  which  was  partly  rough  and 
partly  glistening.  A  stratiform  liquefaction  eventually  set  in. 
Bouillon  developed  a  strong  white  film  and  became  turbid,  with 
a  white  sediment.  The  indol  reaction  w^as  obtained  and  nitrates 
were  reduced  to  nitrites.  Upon  potato  the  growth  was  dry  and 
scanty,  in  colour  dirty-white.  Milk  was  slowly  made  viscous. 
A  thick  transparent  slime  was  formed  on  levulose-asparagine- 
tannin-agar.  The  colonies  on  glucose-gelatine  were  waxy-white 
and  either  rounded  or  amoeboid.  The  centre  of  the  colony  was 
raised,  then  looking  towards  the  periphery  came  a  depression, 
then  a  corrugated  circle,  and  finally  a  smooth  margin.  The  con- 
sistency was  viscous.  Microscopically,  the  centre  appeared 
indefinite,  then  came  a  circle  with  dark  spots,  then  a  granular 
margin  with  radial  markings.  By  the  fourteenth  day,  the  margin 
of  the  colony,  and  especially  the  amoeboid  outgrowths,  showed  a 
patchy  structure  as  if  the  granules  had  collected  in  heaps,  leaving 
clear  spaces  intervening. 

There  seemed  to  be  little  similarity  between  this  organism  and 
Bad.  metarahiniim,  either  the  normal  race  or  the  race  already 
described  in  this  paper.  The  slime  grew  well  on  saccharose- 
potato-agar  without  tannin,  and  although  rather  stijff  it  could  be 
removed  without  disturbing  the  agar  surface.  After  being  con- 
verted into  the  soluble  form  by  the  autoclave  treatment,  the  gum 
behaved  to  reagents  like  arabin.  Dehydration  did  not  make  it 
insoluble  as  in  the  case  of  metarabin;  it  dissolved  in  water,  form- 
10 


146  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  HAKEA, 

ing  a  thickened  mucilage.  When  boiled  with  5  %  sulphuric  acid 
for  an  hour,  the  bulk  of  the  gum  was  hydrol3^sed  to  reducing 
substances  which  readily  j^elded  osazone  fractions.  These  were 
found  to  consist  of  tarry  impurity  and  galactosazone;  no  arabin- 
osazone  could  be  obtained.  The  remaining  portion  of  the  gum 
hydrolysed  to  the  same  sugar. 

Already  races  of  a  bacterium  which  produced  a  galactan  gum 
and  which  gave  the  reactions  for  arabin  had  been  separated  from 
the  Sugar-Cane  and  from  the  Quince.  The  white  race  from  the 
Su^ar-Cane  was  different  from  this  in  its  cultural  characters,  the 
chief  differences  being  in  the  nature  of  the  colonies  and  the  stab 
in  glucose-gelatine,  its  appearance  on  saccharose-potato-agar,  the 
absence  of  gas  production  in  glucose  media,  the  slow  liquefaction 
of  the  gelatine,  and  the  larger  size  of  the  organism.  As  it  does 
not  appear  to  have  been  hitherto  described,  I  suggest  the  name 
Bacillus  pseudcu-abinus  ii.^  in  order  that  the  bacteria  which  pro- 
duce approximately  similar  gums  may  have  approximately  similar 
names. 

The  three  bacteria,  viz.,  Bac.  levaniformans,  Bad.  metarahinum 
and  Bac.  pseudarahinus  ii.,  were  the  only  active  gum-formers 
found  in  the  branches  that  were  examined.  Since  the  natural 
gum  was  different  from  those  formed  by  the  bacteria,  there  is  the 
probability  that  they  did  not  directly  produce  the  gum.  At 
present  it  cannot  be  said  that  the  host-plant  can  modify  the  gum 
once  formed  by  these  bacteria  into  another  kind.  We  know  that 
it  can  induce  the  bacterium  to  produce  a  gum  of  another  solu- 
bility, and  since  it  can  do  this  it  may  be  able  to  do  a  little  more 
and  alter  the  nature  of  the  gum.  Of  the  bacteria,  ^ac^  metara- 
hinum produces  a  gum  most  nearly  allied  to  the  natural  exudate. 
The  possibility  that  the  natural  gum  might  be  pectin  led  me 
to  examine  it  in  this  light.  Pectose*  occurs  in  unripe  fruits,  etc., 
and  is  insoluble  in  water  and  alcohol,  but  is  converted  into  the 
soluble  modification  known  as  pectin  b}^  boiling  with  water 
or  dilute  acids   and  by  enzymes.     The  solution   of  pectin,  like 

*  Morley  and  Muir's  edition  of  Watts'  Dictionary  of  Chemistry;  Eeynolds 
Green's  The  Soluble  Ferments. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  147 

mucin  and  the  gums,  is  rendered  more  viscous  by  the  presence 
of  albuminoids.  Alcohol,  barium  hydrate,  and  the  basic  lead 
acetates  coagulate  it,  while  neutral  lead  acetate  and  tannin  have 
no  action.  It  is  oxidised  by  dilute  nitric  acid  to  mucic  acid. 
When  boiled  with  dilute  alkalis  it  is  converted  into  pectic  acid, 
which  is  insoluble  in  water,  and  which  when  boiled  with  dilute 
acids  is  converted  to  arabic  acid,  that  is  arabin.  The  arabic  acid 
thus  obtained  is  hydrolysed  to  pectinose  (arabinose)  and  a  little 
known  organic  acid  [possibly  one  of  O'Sullivan's  galactan-geddic 
acids]. 

Had  the  Hakea  gum  been  pectin,  the  digestion  in  the  autoclave 
ought  to  have  changed  part  of  it  at  least  into  parapectin  or 
metapectin,  which  are  precipitated  with  neutral  lead  acetate  and 
barium  chloride  respectively.  As  these  reagents  did  not  induce 
precipitation,  the  gum  is  probably  not  pectin.  In  view  of  the 
doubtful  nature  of  the  gum,  I  resolved  to  boil  it  first  with  dilute 
alkali,  then  with  dilute  acid,  and  to  test  the  products  to  see  if 
any  information  could  be  gained  respecting  its  possible  affinities 
with  pectin.  Accordingly  pieces  of  gum  were  boiled  under  an 
aerial  condenser  with  1  %  sodium  hydrate  for  two  hours.  It  did 
not  appear  to  dissolve,  but  remained  as  slightly  swollen  opalescent 
lumps  in  the  boiling  alkali.  The  solution  was  filtered  oif  and 
treated  with  alcohol,  when  a  small  precipitate  settled  out.  When 
treated  with  water  and  made  faintly  acid,  this  gave  a  ropy  solu- 
tion like  the  gum  before  treatment.  Its  reactions  were  identical 
with  those  given  by  the  gum,  so  that  the  alkali  had  not  altered 
this  portion.  The  swollen  gum,  after  being  washed  with  water, 
was  boiled  with  1  %  hydrochloric  acid,  in  which  it  speedily  dis- 
solved. After  an  hour's  boiling,  the  solution  was  neutralised  and 
treated  with  alcohol,  when  a  precipitate,  which  became  fiocculated 
with  a  drop  of  hydrochloric  acid,  was  obtained.  The  alcoholic 
solution  contained  substances  that  reduced  Fehling's  solution. 
The  precipitate,  thrown  down  by  the  alcohol,  dissolved  readily  in 
water,  forming  a  comparatively  slightly  viscous  solution  like 
arabin.  When  the  solution  was  made  faintly  acid  and  tested, 
coagula  were  obtained  with  ferric  chloride  and  basic  lead  acetate. 


148  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  II AREA. 

Barium  hydrate  gave  a  slight  stringy  precipitate.  Coagula 
were  not  obtained  with  Fehling's  solution  or  with  copper  sulphate, 
although  when  the  latter  was  followed  by  a  trace  of  alkali  a  clot 
was  formed.  These  are  practically  the  reactions  of  arabin,  and 
especially  of  dissolved  metarabin.  This  is  exactly  what  would 
have  been  expected  from  pectin,  and  supports  the  idea  that  the 
natural  gum  is  that  substance. 

Unfortunately  for  this  supposition,  the  hydrolysed  products 
of  the  alkali-treated  gum  did  not  contain  either  arabinose  or 
galactose,  and  from  this  we  must  conclude  that  the  gum  is  not 
pectin.  In  testing  this  point,  the  digested  guin  was  boiled  for 
two  hours  with  1  %  potassium  hydrate,  neutralised  and  precipi- 
tated with  alcohol.  The  flocculent  precipitate  was  boiled  for 
three  hours  with  5  %  sulphuric  acid,  neutralised  and  treated  with 
alcohol,  when  a  very  small  precipitate  was  thrown  out.  The 
solution,  after  elimination  of  the  alcohol,  was  treated  with 
phenylhydrazine  acetate  and  the  resulting  osazone-like  bodies 
purified  with  ether.  They  had  much  the  same  indefinite  character 
of  the  substances  previously  obtained,  and  melted  at  about  120°, 
140°  and  175°.  Neither  arabinosazone  nor  galactosazone  could 
be  detected. 

The  conclusions  to  which  this  research  has  led  are  as  follows: — 

1.  The  gum  of  Hakea  saligna  is  neither  arabin,  metarabin,  nor 
pararabin.  The  hydrolytic  products  consist  of  reducing  bodies 
that  yield  indefinite  osazones  and  are  probably  akin  to  the  fur- 
furoids  of  Cross,  Bevan  and  Smith.  It  is  not  pectin,  although  it 
approaches  this  substance  in  some  respects. 

2.  Of  the  bacteria  occurring  in  the  tissues  of  the  plant,  the 
most  probable  producer  of  the  gum  is  one  intermediate  between 
Bact.  acacice  and  its  variety,  JJact.  7netarabinum,  but  as  we  do 
not  yet  know  that  the  host-plant  can  alter  a  gum  once  formed 
by  a  bacterium,  it  cannot  be  said  that  the  gum  is  produced  by 
this  micro-organism. 

3.  Bacteria  that  produce  galactan  gums  which  behave  to 
reagents  like  arabin  are  not  uncommon.  A  second  is  described 
under  the  name  of  Bacillus  pseudarabiyius  ii.,  n.sp. 


U9 


THE    ORIGIN   OF   NATURAL   IMMUNITY   TOWARDS 
THE  PUTREFACTIVE  BACTERIA. 

By  R.  Greig  Smith,   D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the 

Society. 

Immunity  towards  the  putrefactive  bacteria,  that  normall}'- 
inhabit  the  intestine,  is  but  a  part,  although  an  important  one, 
of  the  whole  subject  of  immunity.  It  is,  as  we  shall  see,  inti- 
mately related  to  natural  immunity  towards  stray  pathogenic 
bacteria  that  may  obtain  access  to  the  tissues  of  an  animal. 
This  form  of  immunity  is  the  first  line  of  defence  of  the  animal, 
the  second  being  the  production  of  anti-toxines  in  response  to 
the  presence,  action  or  effect  of  micro-organisms  that  have 
obtained  a  foothold  in  the  tissues.  Individuals,  races  and 
genera  of  animals  exhibit  differences  in  their  susceptibility 
towards  bacterial  invasion,  but  this  is  a  question  subsidiary  to 
that  of  a  general  immunity  such  as  all  animals  possess  towards 
the  bacteria  that  normally  inhabit  the  intestinal  tract.  It  is 
towards  the  elucidation  of  this  general  immunity  that  I  bring 
forward  certain  views  which  appear  to  me  to  be  feasible  and 
worthy  of  consideration. 

There  is  a  tendency  among  writers  to  consider  immunity 
against  bacteria  as  being  in  some  way  bound  up  with  enzyme 
action,  and  perhaps  Pfeiffer  may  be  cited  as  holding  the  most 
advanced  views  in  this  direction.  But  beyond  expressing  the 
idea  that  the  action  is  enzymic,  little  is  brought  forward  to  explain 
how  the  enzymes  may  act,  and  probable  analogies  are  rarely 
quoted.  Immunity  against  toxines  appears  to  be  of  a  definite 
chemical  nature  in  opposition  to  the  indefinite  action  that  is 
generally  associated  with  the  name  of  enzyme.  The  combination 
between  the  anti-toxine  and  toxine  is  like  that  which  occurs  when 
an  acid  unites  with  a  base.     Many  writers  have  emphasised  this, 


150  OKIGIX    OF    NATURAL    IMMUNITY, 

but  probably  none  so  clearly  as  Madsen  and  Arrhenius,  who, 
while  showing  that  the  union  is  like  that  of  a  strong  base  with  a 
weak  acid,  such  as  boric,  have  cleared  the  path  of  certain  of 
Ehrlich's  degraded  toxines  that  served  only  to  obscure  the  view. 

Associated  with  immunity  there  is  a  phenomenon  known  as 
agglutination,  which,  like  toxine  immunity,  obeys  the  laws  of 
chemical  combination.  The  immobilisation  of  the  bacteria  by 
an  agglutinating  serum  is  caused  by  the  formation  of  a  precipitate 
between  the  bacterial  product  and  agglutinine  under  the  influence 
of  the  residual  affinity  of  a  flocculating  salt  or  other  substance. 
Peculiarities  in  the  flocculating  action  have  lately  been  noted  by 
Dreyer,*  who,  while  comparing  some  of  the  actions  with  those 
exhibited  by  chemical  substances,  such  as  the  combination  of  gum 
mastic  and  ferric  chloride,  at  another  place  speaks  of  a  destruc- 
tion of  agglutinine  by  caustic  alkalies,  which  is  restored  by  acids. 
This  is  an  example  of  the  tendency  shown,  even  among  those 
investigators  who  incline  to  the  chemical  nature  of  the  phenome- 
non of  agglutination,  to  regard  it  sometimes  in  a  chemical  light 
and  sometimes  as  a  mysterious  something  with  laws  of  its  own. 
Flocculation  has  not  been  deeply  studied,  especial]}'-  with  regard 
to  the  precipitation  of  the  weak  organic  acids  and  bases,  but 
when  it  shall  have  been,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  parallels  will 
be  found  to  show  that  agglutination  and  precipitation  are  one 
and  the  same  thing. 

But  in  returning  to  the  origin  of  immunity,  it  will  be  necessary 
to  consider  the  possibility  of  bacteria  passing  from  the  intestine 
into  the  tissues.  8chott,t  in  reviewing  the  literature  of  the  sub- 
ject up  to  1901,  concluded  that  we  w^ere  not  justified  in  assuming 
that  pathogenic  or  non-pathogenic  bacteria  could  pass  through 
the  wall  of  the  uninjured  alimentary  canal.  Rogozinski;  found 
that  the  mesenteric  glands  always  contained  bacteria,  while  the 
chyle,  liver  and  spleen  were  free.      Falting  found  that  bacteria 


Brit.  Med.  Journ.  Sept.  10,  1904.  No.  2280,  564. 
+  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  1,  xxix.  289. 
:  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  1,  Kef.  xxxiv.  323. 
§  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  1,  Ref.  xxxi.  544. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  151 

may  pass  to  the  kidney,  and  thence  get  to  the  bladder. 
Klimenko,"^  after  reviewing  his  own  work  and  that  of  others, 
concluded  that  micro-organisms  could  not  pass  through  the  unhurt 
intestinal  wall  of  thoroughly  healthy  animals,  but  that  the  latter 
w^ere  very  seldom  to  be  met.  The  smallest  pathological  injury 
of  the  whole  animal  organism,  or  an  insignificant  mechanical 
injury  of  the  intestinal  mucosa,  is  enough  to  render  possil)le  the 
passage  of  bacteria  from  the  intestine.  On  this  account  the 
transmigration  of  micro-organisms  is  relatively  frequent.  From 
the  frequency  with  which  bacteria  were  met  with  in  the  mesenteric 
lymph  glands,  and  not  in  the  other  internal  organs,  he  considered 
that  it  is  probable  that  the  animal  possesses  in  these  a  protective 
apparatus  against  bacterial  invasion. 

Nikolskyt  mixed  anthrax  spores  with  the  food  of  various 
animals  and  found  that  they  germinated  in  the  contents  of  the 
intestine  in  spite  of  the  antagonism  of  the  intestinal  bacteria 
and,  as  a  rule,  penetrated  the  mucous  membrane,  and  so  obtained 
access  to  the  lymph  vessels  and  thence  to  the  blood.  Metchnikoff 
mentions  some  unpublished  work  of  Mitchel,  who  mixed  anthrax 
spores  with  the  food  of  one  set  of  guinea-pigs,  and  anthrax  spores 
and  glass  with  the  food  of  another.  He  always  obtained  fatal 
results  in  the  latter  set  of  animals,  wdiile  in  the  former  the  results 
were  not  alwa3''s  so  pronounced.  He  also  quotes  the  experiments 
of  Porcher  and  Desoubry,  who  showed  that  the  chyle  of  the 
dog  contained  bacteria  capable  of  growing  in  ordinary  media  that 
could  pass  into  the  general  circulation  and  be  recovered  therefrom. 
These  disappear  soon  after  feeding,  and  in  the  practice  of  obtain- 
ing curative  sera  it  is  customary  to  bleed  the  horses  or  other 
animals  fasting  in  order  to  obtain  a  serum  free  from  microbes. 

It  is  apparent  from  these  abstracts  that  there  is  a  considerable 
divergence  of  opinion  among  investigators  as  to  whether  or  not 
bacteria  traverse  the  uninjured  intestinal  wall,  and  perhaps  there 
always   will    be,    for    reasons  which  I   shall    subsequently  give. 


*  Zeit.  f.  Hyg.  xlviii.  67. 
t  Ami.  Inst.  Past.  xiv.  794. 


JUJ    L  !  s?  R  A  F- 


152  ORIGIN    OF    NATURAL    IMMUNITY, 

Before  doing  so,  however,  let  me  bring  forward  the  subject  of  the 
production  of  enzymes. 

Oppenheimer,*  after  discussing  the  production  of  enzymes, 
says  : — "  The  mould-fungi  produce  no  ferments  so  long  as  they 
are  grown  upon  media  from  which  they  can  directly  supply 
their  wants;  but  they  immediately  develop  proteoh^tic  enzymes 
when  they  are  cultivated  upon  a  culture  medium  containing 
albumin,  diastase  when  they  are  supplied  with  starch,  and  so  on." 
In  the  higher  plants  it  is  known  that  there  are  no  enzymes  in  the 
resting  seed,  and  that  under  suitable  conditions  of  moisture  and 
temperature  the  presence  of  food,  capable  of  being  digested, 
determines  the  formation  of  the  digestive  ferments.  In  the 
animal  body  it  has  been  found  that  the  digestive  enzymes  of  the 
stomach  are  secreted  in  response  to  the  presence  and  even  to  the 
sight  of  food;  and  furthermore,  the  nature  of  the  food  appears 
to  cause  the  secretion  of  the  appropriate  digestive  enzyme. 
Bayliss  and  Starling,!  in  discussing  the  alteration  of  the 
pancreatic  enzymes  according  to  the  nature  of  the  food,  quote 
the  experiments  of  Pawlow  and  his  pupils,  which  show^ed  that  a 
starchy  food  caused  a  rise  in  the  amylolytic  power,  and  a  meat 
food  a  rise  in  the  proteolytic  power,  and  fats  in  the  fat-splitting 
power.  While  doubting  the  accuracy  of  the  conclusions  concern- 
ing the  proteolytic  secretions,  they  considered  that  "  there  seems 
no  reason  to  doubt  the  results  obtained  by  these  workers  as 
regards  the  starch-digesting  power  of  the  juice." 

This,  however,  applies  to  a  case  or  cases  in  which  the  digestive 
apparatus  has  been  acting  for  some  time,  and  not  to  the  original 
production  of  the  ferments.  I  understand  that  renninf  is 
obtained  from  the  stomachs  of  calves  which  have  digested  milk, 

*  Ferments  and  their  Actions,  p. 78. 
t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  1904,  Ixxiii.  [494]  318. 
*  Rennin  is  not  a  digestive  enzyme  in  the  ordinary  sense,  although  it 
undoubtedly  is  one,  for  does  it  not  split  up  casein  into  paracasein  and  a 
soluble  albuminoid  or  albumose '?  This  partial  digestion  appears  to  be  the 
function  of  rennin  in  the  animal  stomach.  The  faeces  of  children  fed  solely 
with  cow's  milk  appear  to  consist  chiefly  of  paracasein. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  153 

and  that  when  the  calf  ceases  to  be  carnivorous  and  becomes 
herbivorous,  the  secretion  of  rennin  ceases.  This  may  be  so  in 
practice,  but  Moro^  found  rennin  in  the  mucous  membrane  of  the 
stomachs  of  children  soon  after  birth  and  before  feeding.  A 
dead-born  child  has  none.  The  loss  of  weight  of  an  animal 
during  the  first  week  or  ten  days  after  birth  can  probably  be 
explained  by  a  certain  time  being  necessary  to  get  the  digestive 
system  into  working  order  in  response  to  the  stimulus  given  by 
the  presence  of  food  in  the  alimentary  tract.  As  we  shall  see, 
lactase  takes  some  time  before  it  is  secreted.  Portier  obtained 
lactase  from  ducks  after  they  had  been  fed  with  lactose  for  25 
days,  and  Bayliss  and  Starling  say  that  "  the  pancreas  of  new- 
born animals,  for  instance,  is  quite  free  from  lactase,  which,  how- 
ever, makes  its  appearance  two  or  three  days  after  birth  as  a 
result  of  the  milk  diet.  .  .  .  For  the  production  of  lactase 
in  the  pancreas,  or  its  juice,  it  is  therefore  necessary  that  lactose 
should  act  on  the  intestinal  mucous  membrane  for  some  time. 
The  reaction  is  a  slow  one     . 

It  is  evident  from  these  few  examples  that  digestive  enzymes 
are  originally  and  subsequently  formed  or  secreted  both  by  plants 
and  animals  in  response  to  the  stimulation  made  by  the  presence 
of  the  nutrient  capable  of  being  acted  upon.  The  presence  of 
food  nutrients  in  the  alimentary  tract  brings  forth  from  the  cells 
of  the  tract  or  glands  connected  therewith  the  appropriate  diges- 
tive enzymes. 

If  dead  bacteria  were  fed,  or  if  living  bacteria  were  killed  in 
a  part  of  the  canal,  it  will  not  be  gainsaid  that  they  would  share 
the  fate  of  the  food  nutrients.  Metchnikoif,t  in  discussing  the 
role  of  microbes  in  the  intestine,  mentions  Klein,  Schutz  and 
Kohlbrugge  as  having  found  a  bactericidal  action  occurring  in 
the  intestine;  the  latter  investigators  traced  the  action  to  the 
small  intestine.  He  quotes  the  results  of  some  unpublished 
experiments  of  Delezenne,  which  showed  that  neither  the  pan- 

*  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  Orig.  xxxvii.  485. 
t  Bull,  rinst.  Past.  i.  217. 


154:  ORIGIN    OF    NATURAL    IMMUNITY, 

creatic  nor  the  intestinal  juices  were  by  themselves  bacteriolytic, 
although  together  they  were. 

In  the  intestine  we  have  a  bactericidal  action,  and  the  dead 
cells  will  naturally  call  into  being  appropriate  digestive  enzymes; 
and  furthermore,  the  constituents  of  the  bacteriol3'sed  cells  will, 
together  with  the  digested  constituents  of  the  dead  micro- 
organisms, be  absorbed  b}'  the  mucous  membrane,  in  the  cells  of 
which,  or  possibly  in  some  more  i-emote  organ,  they  may,  if  the 
products  of  digestion  can  stimulate  the  formation  of  digestive 
enzymes,  give  rise  to  what  are  known  as  immune  bodies. 

When  an  animal  dies,  micro-organisms  swarm  into  the  tissues 
from  the  alimentary  tract,  and  soon  there  is  an  active  decomposi- 
tion of  the  whole  organic  structure  of  the  corpse.  Why  does 
not  this  occur  in  the  living  animal  1  That  the  mucous  membrane 
of  the  alimentary,  and  especial]}^  of  the  intestinal,  tract  is 
impervious  to  bacteria  because  the  animal,  and  therefore  the 
epithelial  lining  cells  are  endowed  with  life,  is  rather  a  feeble 
explanation,  since  it  refers  the  question  to  the  unquestionable. 
That  the  living  tissues  are  normall}^  protected  admits  of  little 
doubt,  but  how  are  they  so  ?  It  is  known  that  the  mother  confers 
immunity  upon  the  offspring,  that  is  to  say,  she  transfers  a  quantity 
of  the  immune  bodies  that  she  possesses.  These  are  sufficient  to 
render  the  young  animal  immune  for  some  time.  But  when  these 
are  exhausted,  as  in  time  they  must  be,  whence  does  it  obtain  its 
own  supply  1  Are  we  justified  in  saying  that  the  immunity 
bestowed  upon  the  child  by  the  mother  is  of  a  permanent  and 
creative  nature,  that  it  persists  throughout  the  life  of  the  child, 
and  is  by  it  bestowed  upon  its  descendants,  generation  after 
generation,  through  all  time  ?  No  !  Before  the  maternal  allot- 
ment is  exhausted  the  offspring  must  have  manufactured,  and  be 
capable  of  producing  on  its  own  account,  immune  bodies  of  its 
own,  among  which  are  the  bacteriolytic  enzymes. 

When  weakened  pathogenic  bacteria  are  introduced  into  the 
tissues  of  an  animal  they  are  rapidly  dissolved  or  digested,  and 
at  the  same  time  they  stimulate  the  cells  to  secrete  the  diverse 
immune  bodies  which   confer  an  increased  immunity  upon  the 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  155 

experimental  animal,  enabling  it  to  attack  and  dissolve  more  viru- 
lent bacteria  of  the  same  kind.  Thus  immunity  against  one 
microbe  is  begotten,  as  it  were,  by  the  previous  digestion  in  the 
tissues  of  the  same  micro-organism,  and  a  multiplicity  of  immune 
substances  can  only  be  obtained  by  the  previous  lysis  of  a  diver- 
sity of  bacteria.     In  a  young  animal  this  must  occur. 

In  ^yriting  upon  the  question  of  bovine  and  human  tuberculosis, 
Behring  appears  to  say  : — "  The  freedom  with  which  milk-bacteria 
find  their  way  through  the  walls  of  the  alimentary  tract  into  the 
circulation,  owing  to  the  incomplete  continuity  of  the  epithelium 
and  absence  of  active  ferment  secretion  in  youDg  animals,  makes 
the  disposition  to  tuberculous  infection  entirely  physiological  and 
normal."*  Without  discussing  the  particular  case  of  tuberculous 
infection,  does  it  not  seem  possible  that  the  non-continuity  of  the 
epithelium  of  the  alimentary  tract  of  young  animals  is  the  means 
by  which  an  all  wise  Providence  endeavours  to  accelerate  the  for- 
mation of  protective  bodies  before  the  immunity  bestowed  upon 
them  by  the  parents  has  become  exhausted  1 

We  have  seen  that  all  investigators  do  not  admit  the  passage 
of  bacteria  through  the  uninjured  intestinal  wall,  for  the  reason 
that  bacterial  growths  cannot  always  be  obtained  when  portions 
of  the  organs  or  membrane  are  sown  in  nutritive  fluids.  The 
cause  of  this  failure  will  l)e  apparent  if  we  assume  that  they  are 
capable  of  passing  through.  In  doing  so,  they  will  be  attacked 
either  there  or  in  the  more  remote  tissues,  first,  in  the  case  of 
the  young  animal,  by  the  maternal,  then  by  the  individual  immune 
substances.  During  the  lysis  of  these  microbes  the  cells  will  be 
trained  or  stimulated  to  produce  more  immune  bodies.  It  is  also 
possible  that  the  presence  of  bacteria  in  the  intestinal  tract  causes 
the  cells  of  the  mucous  membrane  to  secrete  immunity  enzymes 
which  diffuse  not  only  into  the  lumen,  but  also  throughout  the 
membrane.  The  diversity  of  bacteria  produces  a  variety,  and 
the  continued  solution  of  organisms  will  induce  the  formation  of 
a  quantity  of  immune  substances.     The  quantity  and  the  hetero- 

*  Nature,  June  6th,  1904,  p. 126. 


156  ORIGIN    OF    NATURAL    IMMUNITY, 

geiiit3'of  these  produce  the  condition  known  as  natural  immunity. 
As  the  bacteria  are  constantly  traversing  the  mucous  membrane 
and  being  dissolved,  the  stock  of  immune  bodies  is  being  con- 
stantly replenished.  With  a  perfectly  sound  and  health}-  animal 
there  will  be  an  abundance,  so  to  speak,  of  immune  bodies,  and 
the  bacteria  will  in  consequence  be  dissolved  soon  after  leaving 
the  lumen  of  the  intestine.  Thev  will  not  get  so  far  as  the  orgfans 
which  will  be  found  to  be  sterile,  so  that  investigators  might 
conclude  that  bacteria  given  with  the  food  do  not  leave  the  intes- 
tine. Should  the  animal  not  be  perfectl}^  healthy  and  the  store  of 
immune  bodies  low,  the  intestinal  micro-organisms  will  probably 
travel  further  and  be  found  in  the  glands  and  organs.  The  same 
thing  would  happen  if  the  intestine  were  injured,  for  the  num- 
bers crossing  the  wall  would  be  relatively  enormous,  and  the  small 
supply  of  immune  bodies  would  be  quickly  used  up.  While 
positive  results,  obtained  by  sowing  mucous  membrane  and 
lymphatic  organs  in  nutritive  media,  are  undoubted  proofs  of  the 
passage  of  bacteria  from  the  intestine,  negative  results  simply 
show  the  absence  of  living  bacteria.  The  sterility  may  be  due 
to  no  bacteria  having  traversed  the  intestinal  wall  or  having 
crossed,  they  have  been  destroyed  during  or  after  the  passage  by 
the  immune  bodies.  Experimental  work  upon  this  subject  will, 
therefore,  always  be  conflicting. 

It  is  thus  unreasonable  to  expect  to  obtain  information  regard- 
ing the  permeability  of  the  intestine  to  putrefactive  and  saprophy- 
tic bacteria  by  an  examination  of  the  organs.  With  pathogenic 
bacteria  the  case  is  different.  If  they  survive  the  passage  through 
the  acid  juice  of  the  stomach,  they  Avill  traverse  the  intestinal 
walls  and,  multiplying  in  the  tissues  and  organs,  will  produce  their 
characteristic  lesions,  provided  that  they  can  get  across  the  mucosa 
in  sufficient  numbers  to  absorb  any  trace  of  specific  immune  body. 

I  have  regarded  the  solution  or  lysis  of  bacteria  as  a  process  of 
digestion,  all  the  substances  which  are  necessary  to  dissolve  the 
cells  being  called  the  bacteriolytic  immune  bodies.  Several 
substances  are  involved  in  the  lysis  of  one  cell.  Until  quite 
recently  two  were  known — the  immune  body  and  the  complement 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  157 

— but  now  we  have  a  third,  the  opsonin.  It  is,  perhaps,  on 
account  of  this  complexity  that  bacteriologists  have  refrained  from 
regarding  digestion  and  lysis  as  being  analogous  in  other  than 
a  half-hearted  manner,  although  it  has  recently  been  shown  that 
the  secretion  of  digestive  enzymes  is  anything  but  a  simple  pro- 
cess. Emmerich  and  Loew  have  certainly  emphasised  the  tryptic 
nature  of  their  pyocyanase,  but  the}^  practically  stand  alone  in  so 
emphatically  regarding  a  digestive  enz3ane  as  being  a  source  of 
immunity.  Metchnikoff,*  after  mentioning  Delezenne's  work 
upon  the  antiseptic  action  of  the  intestinal  juice,  says  that  it 
proves  for  the  first  time  the  great  analogy  that  exists  between  the 
mechanism  of  intestinal  digestion  and  the  bactericidal  and  hfemo- 
lytie  effect  of  the  blood  sera.  Wright  and  Douglas f  think  it 
probable  that  the  bacteriolytic,  bactericidal  and  bacterio-opsonic 
effects  are  each  in  their  degree  manifestations  of  a  digestive 
power  exerted  by  the  blood  fluids  upon  bacteria. 

When  a  substance  is  introduced  or  finds  its  way  into  the  tissues 
or  into  the  body  cavity  the  animal  endeavours  to  get  rid  of  the 
intruder.  If  the  substance  is  soluble  and  diffusible  it  may  be 
eliminated  by  way  of  the  kidneys.  If  not,  it  may  be  altered  into 
other  bodies  that  can  be  so  eliminated.  Ignoring  the  case  of 
substances  that  are  absolutely  insoluble  and  indigestible,  we  are 
left  with  organic  bodies  that  are  digestible.  To  this  class  belong 
the  bacteria.  When  they  are  digested  they  are  called  harmless, 
but  when  they  are  not  digested  and,  multiplying,  produce  toxines 
that  interfere  with  the  health  of  the  animal,  they  are  pathogenic. 
The  difference  between  the  two  is  that  the  pathogenic  cell 
encounters  no  enzyme  capable  of  dissolving  it.  It  is  a  stranger, 
and  has  not  recently  been  within  the  animal.  Had  the  animal 
been  immunised  either  by  the  introduction  of  weakened  cells  or 
of  blood  serum  from  immune  subjects,  the  pathogenic  cell  would 
not  have  been  a  stranger  and  would  have  been  dissolved  like  a 
harmless  microbe.     Although  the  cells  of  the  body  respond  to 

*  Bull.  I'Inst.  Past.  i.  228. 
t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Ixxii.  369. 


158  ORIGIN    OF    NATURAL    IMMUNITY, 

the  presence  of  a  foreign  cell  (microbe)  and  secrete  immunity 
bodies  that  dissolve  the  intruder,  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that 
the  microbe  Avill  in  turn  secrete  anti-bodies  which  will  annul  the 
action  of  the  immunity  bodies.  Welch |  pointed  this  out,  but  why 
did  he  stop  at  the  response  of  the  microbic  cell  ?  The  body  cells 
will  respond  to  the  microbic  anti-body,  and  so  the  production  of 
enzymes  and  anti-enzymes,  toxines  and  anti-toxines,  will  go  on 
until  the  microbe  or  the  animal  is  overcome.  The  digestion  of 
bacteria  may  take  place  in  the  body  fluids  or  in  the  bod}^  cells 
and  tissues,  which,  it  must  not  be  forgotten,  are  saturated  with 
the  same  fluids  and  contain  the  same  digestive  enz3^mes,  if  the 
latter  are  diftusible.  That  some  of  them  are  difl'usible  is  shown 
by  the  bacteriolytic  power  of  the  fluids.  It  is  inconceivable  that 
immunity  bodies  can  be  generated  in  the  fluids  themselves.  The 
constituents  of  these  fluids  must  be  produced  and  be  contained  in 
and  be  excreted  or  secreted  b}^  the  wandering  and  fixed  body 
cells,  the  plasma  of  which  will  be  saturated.  Digestion  will, 
therefore,  be  more  rapid  when  the  micro-organism  is  within  the 
body  cell,  and  especially  is  this  the  case  if  the  enzyme  is  feebly 
diffusible  or  non-diffusible.  In  the  event  of  a  bacterium 
getting  into  the  bod}^  fluids  it  will  be  attacked  by  the  enzymes  of 
that  fluid,  and  by  the  nearest  cells  which  will  also  respond  to  the 
stimulus  and  secrete  more.  The  cells  which  come  into  action  are 
and  must  be  the  most  mobile  ones,  for  they  get  nearer  to  the 
intruders  than  the  others;  distance  must  be  of  great  moment  in 
supplying  the  stimulus.  It  would  be  foolish  to  expect  that  the 
cells  of  the  ear  would  respond  to  the  presence  of  an  organism  in 
the  toe.  It  is  because  of  the  mobility  of  the  leucocytes  that  we 
have  the  idea  that  they  are  chiefly  responsible  for  the  production 
of  the  immune  digestive  enzymes. 

The  inclusion  or  swallowing  of  the  microbe  by  the  leucocyte  is 
not,  strictly  speaking,  an  immunity  phenomenon,  for  any  amoeboid 
cell  will  surround  and  enclose  any  digestible  or  slowly  soluble 

:  Brit.  Med.  Journ.  Oct.  11th,  1902,  p.  1109. 


BY    I^.    GREIG    SMITH.  159 

particle.^'  In  the  case  of  pathogenic  bacteria  that  resist  the 
leucocytes,  there  must  be  something  in  or  on  the  cells,  or  given 
out  by  them,  of  a  leucocyte-repelling  (negative  chemotaxic)  nature. 
What  this  is  we  do  not  at  present  know,  but  it  is  likely  that 
there  is  much  the  same  physical  relation  between  the  leucocyte 
and  the  capsule  of  the  pathogenic  microbe  as  there  is  between 
water  and  fat,  so  that  if  the  capsule  is  partly  digested  by  a  cytase 
or  covered  with  a  layer  of  some  substance  which  will  annul  the 
repelling  influence,  the  bacterium  will  be  mechanically  absorbed 
by  the  leucocyte. 

It  is  possibly  here  that  agglutination  enters  actively  into  the 
arena  of  immunity.  We  know  that  bacteria,  ^.(7.,  typhoid,  which 
have  been  treated  with  the  aggiutinine  contained  in  patient's 
serum,  become  immobilised  and  gather  into  clumps  through  the 
formation  and  flocculation  of  a  precipitate  upon  the  capsules. 
We  also  know  that  after  a  time  the  bacteria  regain  their  motility. 
The  simplest  reason  to  account  for  the  reassumption  of  mobility  is 
that  the  precipitate  is  slowly  dissolved.  The  solubility  of  the 
covering  would  enable  the  microbe  to  be  absorbed  by  the  leuco- 
cyte! in  the  same  way  that  a  covering  of  shellac  would  enable  a 
fragment  of  glass  to  be  seized  by  a  drop  of  chloroform.  When 
the  bacterium  is  within  the  protoplasm  of  the  phagocyte,  there 
ought  to  be  an  increased  production  of  immune  bodies.  The 
reason  for  the  precipitation  of  an  albuminoid  by  a  specific  preci- 
pitin is  doubtless  to  be  found  in  the  fact  that  the  albuminoid 
is  non-diffusible  and  does  not  get  within  the  phagocyte.  But 
what  does  get  in  contact  with  the  surface  of  the  cell  calls  forth 
a  precipitin  which  c<'agulHtes  the  non-diffusible  and  foreign 
albuminoid.  The  coagulated  particles  are  then  rapidly  engulfed 
by  the  phagocytes  and  are  digested  with  a  greater  rapidity  than 
would  otherwise  have  been  the  case. 


*  The  purely  physical  nature  of  the  movements  and  swallowing  powers  of 
amoebas  are  well  described  in  Journ.  App.  Micros,  v.  1597. 

t  The  subject  is  under  investigation. 


160  ORIGIN    OF    NATURAL    IMMUNITY. 

In  this  pcaper  I  have  endeavoured  to  show  : — 

(1)  That  tliere  is  a  close  analogy  or  identity  between  the  pro- 
duction of  bacteriolytic  bodies  and  the  digestion  of  food. 

(2)  That  bacteria  do  traverse  the  intestinal  wall,  and  that 
negative  experimental  results  regarding  the  same  are  untrust- 
worthy. 

(3)  That  natural  immunity,  especially  towards  the  l)acteria  that 
normally  inhabit  the  intestinal  tract,  is  occasioned  and  maintained 
by  the  comparatively  few  bacteria  which,  in  crossing  the  intesti- 
nal wall  and  possibly  gaining  access  to  the  body  fluids  and  organs, 
stimulate  the  cells  to  produce  immune  bodies. 

(4)  That  the  asrglutination  of  bacteria  may  play  a  much  more 
active  part  in  the  production  of  immunity  than  is  generally 
supposed. 


161 


THE  PROBABLE  BACTERIAL  ORIGIN  OF  THE  GUM 
OF  LINSEED  MUCILAGE. 

{Bacilli  LiNi,i.-n.,  n.spp. ) 

By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the 

Society. 

That  the  production  of  gum  or  slime  in  plants  may  be  due  to 
bacteria,  can  be  readily  understood  in  those  cases  in  which  the 
production  is  evidently  abnormal  such  as  the  gummosis  of  the 
Sugar-Cane  and  the  gum-flux  of  certain  members  of  the  Legu- 
minosa3,  Rosacese,  etc.  But  when  the  formation  of  gum,  slime 
or  mucilage  is  a  normal  or  presumably  normal  feature  of  a  plant 
as  in  Tilia,  Linum  and  the  Quince,  it  is  not  so  easy  to  believe 
that  the  origin  may  be  bacterial.  Still,  since  it  has  been  proved 
by  the  author  that  many  of  the  vegetable  gums  have  a  bacterial 
genesis  there  is  the  possibility  that  the  vegetable  mucilages,  which 
are  after  all  but  varieties  of  gum,  maybe  the  products  of  bacteria 
even  when  these  occur  normally  in  plants. 

I  have  examined  the  tissues  of  the  Lime,  Quince  and  Linseed 
bacteriologically,  and  in  all  cases  I  have  found  slime-forming 
bacteria,  but  as  Linseed  is  perhaps  the  most  important  economi- 
cally, I  shall  in  this  paper  deal  with  it. 

It  is  a  matter  of  common  knowledge  that  the  seed  of  Linum 
usitatissimum  contains  practically  no  starch,  and  that  the 
digestible  carbohydrates  consist  chiefly  of  mucilage.  Much  of 
the  mucilage  is  found  as  a  layer  on  the  outer  surface  of  the  seeds, 
and  when  these  are  soaked  in  water  the  mucilage  swells  but  does 
not  to  any  extent  dissolve.  It  may  be  removed  mechanically 
and  a  slime  obtained. 
11 


162  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  LINSEED  MUCILAGE, 

According  to  Andes,*  Linseed  mucilage  is  dextrorotatory  and 
insoluble  in  Schweitzer's  reagent  (ammonio-copper  hydrate). 
AVhen  boiled  with  1*25%  sulphuric  acid  it  is  converted  into 
cellulose  and  a  gum.  Further  boiling  produces  a  sugar.  The 
gum  is  indifferent  to  iodine  and  is  dextrorotatory.  The  most 
recent  work  upon  the  chemistry  of  the  slime  is  that  of  Hilger,t 
who  found  that  the  crude  slime  after  extraction  with  hydro- 
chloric acid  to  remove  the  mineral  constituents  was  dextroro- 
tatory. The  concentrated  aqueous  solution  gave  insoluble  com- 
pounds w4th  copper  sulphate,  Fehling's  solution,  mercury  salts 
and  basic  lead  acetate;  neutral  lead  acetate  formed  a  compound 
only  upon  warming.  The  purified  slime  was  starch-free  and  con- 
tained, besides  a  little  ash,  about  half  a  per  cent,  of  cellulose. 
With  nitric  acid  it  yielded  mucic  acid,  and  with  hydrochloric 
acid,  furfural.  From  the  analysis  and  the  estimation  of  the 
amounts  of  mucic  acid  and  furfural  he  devised  the  formula  for 
the  gum  2(CoHio05).2(C.H80J.  When  hydrolysed  with 
0"5-l  %  sulphuric  acid,  it  yielded  a  mixture  of  galactose,  dextrose, 
arabinose  and  xylose  as  shown  by  a  method  devised  by  him  for 
the  detection  of  these  sugars. 

I  have  prepared  many  samples  of  the  gum  from  the  mucilage 
by  soaking  the  whole  seed  as  well  as  the  meal  overnight  in  water 
and  pressing  the  mucilage  through  calico  and  thereafter  separat- 
ing the  cellulose  by  subjecting  the  mucilage,  acidified  preferably 
with  sulphuric  acid,  to  a  pressure  of  three  atmospheres  in  the 
autoclave.  The  cellulose  was  thus  separated,  though  not  so  easily 
as  could  have  been  wished,  and  the  solution  of  gum  was  pre- 
cipitated with  alcohol  and  afterwards  made  into  a  thick  mucilage 
with  water.  The  tests  were  made  with  drops  of  the  mucilage 
and  drops  of  reagent.  The  reactions  of  the  several  samples, 
purchased  from  different  stores  in  Sydney,  are  given  in  tabular 
form. 

*  Gummi  Arabicum  und  dessen  Surrogate,  Leipzig,  1896,  p.  162. 
t  Beriehte  der  Deut.  Gesell.  36,  3197. 


by  r.  greig  smith.  163 

The  Reactions  of  Samples  op  Linseed  Gums. 


1 

i     ._  _ . 

2 

3 

4 

5 

(meal) 

Hilger 

Alcohol 

••       ■*" 

t 

t 

i- 

t 

t 

Fehling's  sol 

..!      t 

t 

t 

+ 

0 

t 

Basic  lead  acetate 

..:     t 

t 

+ 

t 

t 

t 

Neutral  lead  acetate  ... 

? 

? 

t 

9 

t 

? 

Barium  hydrate 

? 

t 

t 

t 

t 

- 

Copper  sulphate 

.,         0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

t 

Ferric  chloride 

..1        0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

- 

Phosphotungstic  Acid 

!        9 

+ 

+ 

t 

t 

- 

Tannic  acid      

••         "^ 

? 

t 

t 

? 

- 

Silver  nitrate 

..j        0 

0 

9 

9 

0 

- 

Mercuric  chloride 

0 

0 

0 

- 

+ 

t,  A  coagulation  or  a  precipitate;  ?,  an  opalescence  or  a  slight  precipitate; 
o,  no  reaction  ;    -  ,  not  tested . 

These  tests  are  sufficient  to  show  that  samples  of  Linseed  yield 
gums  which  behave  differently  with  chemical  reagents,  and  from 
this  it  must  be  inferred  that  the  gum  is  to  a  certain  extent  a 
variable  product. 

From  a  perusal  of  Hilger's  paper,  there  would  appear  to  be  no 
difficulty  in  obtaining  the  sugars.  He  used  sulphuric  acid,  the 
strength  of  which  lay  between  0'5  and  1  %.  I  have  used  the 
same  acid  in  strengths  between  1  and  5  %  and  have  boiled  the 
solution  for  times  varying  from  2  to  30  hours  in  order  to  preclude 
any  doubt  that  the  hydrolysis  had  not  been  complete.  The 
experiments  showed  that  the  gum  is  easily  hydrolysed  and  that 
the  products  of  hydrolysis,  while  reducing  Fehling's  solution,  are 
chiefly  non-saccharine.  The  bulk  of  the  reducing  substances 
yield  those  indefinite  osazones  that  were  obtained  in  the  case  of 
Hakea  gum.  Out  of  many  examinations  I  have  only  obtained 
one  detinite  osazone-galactosazone,  and  that  was  present  in  com- 
paratively small  amount. 

These  indefinite  osazones  are  converted  by  the  further  action 
of  phenylhydrazine  solution  or  of  dilute  acetic  acid  into  brown 


164:  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  LINSEED  MUCILAGE, 

or  black  tarry  bodies  with  a  low  melting  point.  It  is  all  a 
question  of  the  time  that  the  solution  remains  on  the  water-bath 
as  to  whether  one  obtains  a  yellow  indefinite  osazone  or  a  brown 
tar.  In  one  case  the  gum  was  hydrolysed  with  1  %  acid,  and  half 
of  the  neutralised  solution  was  heated  with  phenylhydrazine  and 
acetic  acid  for  three  hours  on  the  water-bath.  Little  more  than 
tar  was  formed.  The  second  half  was  heated  carefully  for  thirty 
minutes  after  each  addition  of  reagent,  and  a  quantity  of  osazone- 
like  bodies  was  obtained.  The  first  fraction  consisted  of  a  buff- 
coloured  powder  which  consisted  of  a  mixture  of  osazones  readily 
soluble  in  ether.  This  solvent  was  used  for  fractionating  the 
mixture,  and  portions  were  obtained  melting  at  130*^,  139*^,  141 '^j 
145'^  and  149°.  The  mixture  probably  consisted  of  two  osazones 
melting  about  130^  and  loO^"*.  All  the  other  fractions,  which 
were  more  or  less  dark  in  colour,  were  added  together  and  treated 
with  (1)  ether  [twice],  (2)  hot  water  [twice],  and  (3)  cold  alcohol 
[thrice].  When  the  quantity  justified,  the  fraction  was  further 
split  up  with  ether  or  cold  alcohol.  In  this  way  the  osazone 
product  was  resolved  into  a  tarry  substance  and  into  yellow 
osazones  melting  about  130"^",  150^\  170'',  and  193^.  The  last 
was  galactosazone. 

The  above  is  an  example  of  other  examinations,  and  it  is 
evident  that  the  gum  is  similar  in  its  nature  to  the  exuded  gum 
of  Hakea  saligua*  The  only  point  of  difference  is  that  in  Lin- 
seed gum  there  is  a  component  that  hydrolyses  to  galactose, 
while  in  Hakea  gum  the  nearest  allied  body  furnished  an  osazone 
melting  at  190^. 

Had  Linseed  gum  been  capable  of  giving  dextrose  or  arabinose 
upon  hydrolysis,  the  osazone  of  either  sugar  would  have  been 
detected  with  comparative  ease.     These  sugars  are  not  decom- 

*  Since  writing  the  above,  I  have  seen  an  abstract  (Biochem.  Cent.  iii. 
1904,  225)  of  a  paper  by  Lemeland  upon  the  gum  of  Cochlospermwn  gossy- 
pium,  DC.  It  was  hydrolysed  with  difficulty  by  1  %  sulphuric  acid,  pro- 
ducing pentoses  (proved  by  the  formation  of  furfural),  galactose  and  inter- 
mediate bodies.  It  appears  to  be  much  the  same  kind  of  gum  as  that  of 
Hakea  saligna  and  of  Linseed  mucilage. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  165 

posed  to  any  extent  by  boiling  5  %  acid,  and  their  osazones  are 
not  destroyed  when  heated  with  dilute  acetic  acid,  for  I  have 
repeatedly  obtained  their  osazones  during  my  researches  in  con- 
nection with  the  bacterial  origin  of  the  gums.  It  would  appear 
tliat  the  method  devised  by  Hilger  for  the  recognition  or  separa- 
tion of  arabinose,  glucose,  galactose  and  xylose  is  not  capable  of 
distinguishing  between  the  first  two  sugars  and  substances  that 
may  be  closely  allied.  Glucosazone  is  one  of  the  easiest  osazones 
to  isolate,  and  it  undoubtedly  was  not  among  the  products  of 
hydrolysis  of  the  gum. 

With  the  object  of  examining  the  tissues  of  the  plant  to  deter- 
mine the  nature  of  the  gum  that  "might  be  produced  by  the 
bacteria  contained  therein,  I  obtained  several  plants  from  the 
Hawkesbury  Agricultural  College,  and  these  were  subjected  to 
the  usual  bacteriological  process  for  the  separation  of  the 
individual  organisms.  The  bacteria  were,  comparatively  speak- 
ing, very  numerous,  and  the  majority  were  capable  of  producing 
slime  upon  media  containing  saccharose  or  levulose.  The  organ- 
isms were  found  not  only  in  the  capsules  but  also  in  the  stems, 
where  they  preponderated.  There  were  many  kinds,  but  those 
that  appeared  to  be  similar  were  grouped  together,  and  from  each 
group  one  organism  was  selected.  These  were  gradually  nar- 
rowed down  to  what  appeared  to  be  three  species.  There  were 
many  races  of  these  species,  and  that  race  which  seemed  to  pro- 
duce the  most  slime  was  taken  as  the  representative  of  the 
species. 

Obviously  the  iirst  thing  to  be  done  was  to  obtain  the  gums 
from  these  bacteria  in  sufficient  quantity  for  testing  so  that  they 
could  be  compared  with  the  gum  from  the  natural  mucilage.  It 
is  here  that  the  indefinite  nature  of  Linseed  gum  is  found  to  be 
so  troublesome.  The  only  reactions  that  were  constant  were 
obtained  with  alcohol,  basic  lead  acetate  and  tannin.  As  the 
first  two  reagents  coagulate  practically  every  gum,  the}'  are  of 
little  value  for  the  recognition  of  different  gums.  Then  the  pro- 
ducts of  hydrolysis  furnish  indefinite  osazones.  In  short,  it 
appeared   that  it  would  be  difficult  to    trace  any   relationship 


166 


BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  LINSEED  MUCILAGE, 


between  the  natural  mucilage   and  the  gum   formed   by  micro- 
organisms inhabiting  the  tissues  of  the  plant. 

The  three  bacteria  were  grown  upon  the  media  that  assisted 
them  to  form  a  maximum  of  slime,  and  from  the  slimes  the 
bacterial  cells  were  separated  as  completely  as  possible  by  the 
autoclave  method  of  treatment.  The  gums  were  evaporated  to 
mucilages  and  tested  to  see  how  closely  they  resembled  Linseed 
gUQi.  The  reactions  are  given  in  the  following  table,  and  it  will 
be  seen  that  the  organism  marked  "  b  "  appears  to  be  the  most 
promising.  Its  reactions  are  practically  those  of  Linseed  gum. 
The  alcoholic  precipitate  was  curdy,  and  not  adhesive  when  touched 
like  so  many  of  the  gums;  in  this  it  resembled  Linseed  gum.  The 
gums  were  also  similar  in  giving  thin,  weakly-adhesive  mucilages 
with  considerable  quantities  of  precipitate.  Furthermore,  the 
gum  was  rather  difficult  to  obtain  from  the  bacterial  slime,  a 
condition  suggestive  of  the  not  readily  decomposible  cellulose-gum 
compound  of  Linseed  mucilage. 

The  Reactions  of  the  Bacterial  Gums. 


a 

b 

b(2) 

c 

Average 
'  Linseed 
t    Gum. 

Alcohol        

+ 

t 

t 

t 

t 

Fehling's  solution 

t 

t 

t 

0 

t 

Basic  lead  acetate 

t 

r 

t 

t 

t 

Neutral  lead  acetate 

0 

9 

9 

0 

9 

Barium  hydrate 

Copper  sulphate 

Ferric  chloride      

+ 

0 
0 

t 
0 
0 

t 
0 

o 

t 

o 

t 

t 
0 

Phosphotungstic  acid 
Tannic  acid           

9 

t 

0 

t 

9 

t 

9 

t 
t 

Silver  nitrate        

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Mercuric  chloride 

O 

0 

O 

0 

0 

t,  A  coagulation  or  a  precipitate; 
o,  no  reaction. 


an  opalescence  or  a  slight  precipitate; 


The  2um  of  or<janism   "c"  gave  the  reactions  of  arabin  and 


the  bacterium  had  the  cultural  characters  of  Jjcict. 


There 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  167 

were  but  few  colonies.  The  column  marked  "b(2)"  shows  the 
reactions  given  by  a  second  quantity  of  the  gum  of  organism  "  b." 

Organism  "  b "  was  a  large-sized  spore-forming  bacillus  and 
grew  moderately  well  on  saccharose-potato-agar,  on  which  it  pro- 
duced a  white  slimy  growth.  In  the  slime  the  cells  appeared  to 
preponderate.  The  slime,  as  has  been  already  mentioned,  did 
not  easily  separate  into  gum  and  coaguluni.  It  had  to  be  acidified 
with  several  drops  of  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  which,  bearing  in 
mind  that  it  was  already  acid,  meant  a  stronger  acidification  than 
is  usually  necessary  with  bacterial  slimes.  Acidification  with 
tartaric  acid  did  not  effect  a  separation  even  when  the  heating  in 
the  autoclave  was  prolonged;  this  acid  had  been  found  very  useful 
during  my  earlier  researches  in  gum-formation.  After  being 
freed  from  reducing  substances,  by  repeated  precipitation  from 
aqueous  solution  with  alcohol,  the  gum  was  boiled  with  5% 
sulphuric  acid  for  six  hours.  Portions  of  the  solution  when 
tested  showed  the  presence  of  reducing  sugars  and  the  absence  of 
gum  precipitable  with  alcohol.  The  osazones  were  prepared  in 
the  usual  manner,  and  after  purification  from  tarry  bodies 
were  separated  into  galactosazone,  and  another  with  a  melting 
point  near  170^  The  latter  was  very  difiicult  to  separate  from 
the  former  as,  although  it  was  more  soluble  in  alcohol,  water  and 
ether,  the  difference  in  solubility  was  not  sufficiently  pronounced 
to  enable  the  separation  to  be  easily  effected. 

Thus  the  gum  formed  by  the  bacterium  has  been  found  to  con- 
tain an  anhydride  of  galactose  and  another  substance  which 
yields  an  osazone  having  a  melting  point  near  170°. 

Organism  "  a "  was  by  far  the  most  numerous  bacterium  in 
the  tissues  of  the  plants,  if  the  colonies  that  developed  on  the 
plates  were  any  criterion.  Its  slime  was  more  viscous  than  that 
of  the  others,  and  this  would  accentuate  the  relative  preponder- 
ance on  account  of  the  tendency  of  the  cells  to  aggregate,  many 
giving  rise  to  one  colony.  The  reactions  of  the  gum  are  very 
similar  to  those  given  by  average  Linseed  gum,  the  only  difference 
being  with  neutral  lead  acetate.  Upon  levulose-asparagine-agar, 
with  or  without  tannin,  it  produced  a  tough  slime  which  yielded 


168  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  LINSEED  MUCILAGE, 

a  relatively  thin  gum.  When  hydrolysed,  the  gum  gave  off 
furfural  and  3^ielded  a  solution  which  reduced  Fehling's  solution. 
Treatment  of  this  solution  with  phenylhydrazine  solution  gave 
galactosazone  and  tarry  impurity. 

With  regard  to  the  tarry  impurity,  I  showed  in  my  work  upon 
Hakea  gum  that  the  impurity  is  formed  by  the  action  of  the 
phenylhydrazine  solution,  or  even  of  dilute  acetic  acid  upon  cer- 
tain indefinite  osazone-like  bodies  which  are  formed  from  indefi- 
nite reducing  substances,  probably  akin  to  the  furfuroids  of 
Cross,  Bevan  and  Smith.  These  are  found  among  the  products 
of  hydrolysis  of  every  vegetable  gum."^  In  some  cases,  as  in  the 
natural  and  artificial  product  of  Bact.  acacue,  the  definite  sugars, 
arabinose  and  galactose,  preponderate  in  the  products  of  hvdro- 
tysis  and  the  tarry  imparity  is  rapidlj^  sejDarated.  In  other  cases, 
as  in  Linseed  gum,  Hakea  gum  and  the  gums  of  organisms  "a  " 
and  "  b,"  the  definite  sugar  galactose  is  in  small  am.ount,  and  the 
tarry  body  preponderates  to  such  an  extent  as  to  make  it  evident 
that  the  gums  are  hydrolysed  to  the  furfuroid  bodies  chiefly. 

As  in  the  case  of  the  gum  of  Hakea  saligna,  the  indefinite 
nature  of  the  products  of  the  hydrolysis  of  Linseed  gum  militate 
against  the  possibility  of  being  able  to  trace  the  source  of  the 
gum  to  any  organism.  It  must,  however,  be  borne  in  mind  that 
Linseed  mucilage  is  admitted  to  consist  of  a  gum  and  of  cellulose. 
The  latter  is  not  generally  formed  by  bacteria  (the  only  known 
case  being  that  of  Bact.  xijlinum^  the  vinegar  bacterium),  and  it  is, 
therefore,  possible  that  the  gum,  while  being  originally  produced 
by  a  bacterium  or  by  several  species  of  bacteria,  is  altered  by  the 
host-plant  into  the  mucilage  which  we  find. 

The  arguments  in  favour  of  such  a  view  are  man}'.  We  can- 
not conclude  that  the  gum  has  not  a  bacterial  origin,  because  it 
does  not  exude  from  the  plant  like  other  recognised  bacterial 
gums.  As  a  rule,  it  is  only  when  the  plant  is  surcharged  with 
gum  that    it  exudes  from   punctures,  cracks   or  other  wounds. 

*  The  so-called  galactan  gums  give  the  furfural  reaction,  e.g.,  the  gum  of 
Bact.  saccliari. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  169 

The  species  of  Sferculla  appCcar  to  contain,  normally,  a  mixture 
of  arabin  and  pararabin  gums,  and  I  have  shown  that  two  bacteria 
are  responsible  for  the  production  of  these.  In  Halcea  saligna 
we  have  a  case  in  which  a  gum,  very  similar  to  Linseed  gum,  is 
found  oozing  from  the  plant;  it  differs  from  Linseed  mucilage  in 
containing  no  cellulose.  In  the  gummosis  of  the  Sugar-cane  the 
gum  can  be  seen  only  when  the  canes  are  cut  transversely. 

The  host-plant  can  alter  the  functional  activity  of  the  microbe 
ao  that  a  gum  of  a  different  chemical  constitution  is  produced. 
This  was  noted  after  Peach  trees  had  been  infected  with  the 
arabin-former.  Metarabin  exuded,  and  in  the  tissues  of  the 
plant  were  found  transition  forms  between  Bad.  acacke  and  Bad. 
metarahinum,  which  clearly  indicated  that  the  former  was  being 
converted  into  the  latter.  Although  Bad.  acacke  was  in  the 
tissues  of  the  plant,  its  product,  arabin,  was  not  in  the  exudate.  It 
was  assumed  that  it  had  been  there,  but  that  it  had  been  washed 
away  by  rain.  This  assumption  might  have  been  wrong,  for  it  is 
just  possible  that  the  arabin  had  been  altered  directly  into 
metarabin.  In  Bad.  macro zamke  we  have  an  organism  that 
produces  the  natural  gum  of  Macrozamia  and  which  formed  the 
same  gum  in  the  laboratory  soon  after  its  isolation.  After  a  time, 
however,  the  product  altered,  a  gum  with  different  chemical 
reactions  being  formed. 

These  instances  show  that  the  plant  has,  in  some  cases,  a 
tendency  to  alter  the  bacterial  production  of  the  gum.  AVe 
must  believe  that  there  is  a  reason  for  this.  Either  the  alteration- 
product  is  less  noxious  or  it  is  more  useful.  I  can  hardly  incline 
to  the  former,  because  it  is  difficult  to  understand  how  a  more 
insoluble  and,  therefore,  more  viscous  gum  can  be  less  harmful 
than  a  limpid  variety.  It  is  more  likel}^  that  the  plant  tinds  a 
use  for  a  limited  quantity  of  the  gum  and  that  certain  kinds  are 
adapted  to  certain  plants.  It  is  quite  possible  that  the  pectin 
bodies  may  be  in  part  formed  from  the  gums  that  have  been 
prepared  by  bacteria.  If  the  bacterium,  which  has  gained  entrj- 
into  the  plant,  produces  a  suitable  gum,  good  and  well,  but  if  it 
does  not,  the  host  modifies  the  functional  activity.     It  may  alter 


170  BACTERIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  LINSEED  MUCILAGE, 

the  gum,  but  the  alteration  of  a  bacterial  gum  while  in  the  tissues 
of  the  plant  would  be  extremely  difficult  to  prove,  for  it  is  only 
by  the  stability  of  the  bacterial  product  that  we  are  enabled  to 
trace  the  relationship.  Yet  it  requires  no  great  stretch  of 
imagination  to  believe  that  such  an  alteration  of  gum  is  probable. 
If  the  transmutation  of  the  carbohydrates  and  the  alteration  of 
oil  into  carbohydrates  are  admitted,  why  not  also  admit  the 
conversion  of  bacterial  gums  ? 

The  alteration  of  the  functional  activity  of  a  bacterium  raises 
the  question  of  the  relationship  of  the  gum  bacteria.  Was  there 
originally  one  species  which  has  become  so  modified  by  different 
plants  that  it  appears  as  many  1  The  determination  of  a  bacterial 
species  depends  largely  upon  the  growth-characters,  and  as  these 
are  influenced  by  the  nature  of  the  matrix  in  which  the  cells  are 
imbedded,  it  follows  that  the  matrix  or  gum  plays  an  important 
part  in  determining  the  species.  No  two  bacteria  could  be  more 
different  in  their  cultural  characters  than  JBact.  acacice  and  Bad. 
metarahinum,  yet  these  are  varieties  of  the  same  organism,  pro- 
ducing gums  of  different  solubility.  Another  example  is  Bac. 
Atherstonei,  which  forms  a  soluble  or  an  insoluble  gum.  A 
difference  of  colour-character  is  met  in  Bac.  pseudai'ahiiius,  which 
may  produce  a  yellow  or  a  white  colony.  What  may  be  called 
the  bacteria  of  the  vegetable  gums,  i.e.,  those  whose  gums  are 
hydrolysed  to  arabinose  or  galactose,  are  similar  in  size,  in 
motility,  in  flagella,  in  the  absence  of  spores,  in  being  negative 
to  the  Gram  stain,  and  in  slowly  liquefying  gelatine.  As  it  is 
chiefly,  if  not  only,  in  the  nature  of  the  gum-product  and  in  the 
characters,  which  this  involves,  that  the  bacteria  of  this  group 
vary,  there  is  a  strong  probability  that  they  had  one  common 
origin,  and  that  the  forms  in  which  we  find  them,  are  due  to  the 
transmuting  action  of  the  host-plants.  This  group  of  bacteria 
contains  organism  "a."  Even  before  the  products  of  the  bacteria 
had  been  examined,  I  was  led  to  the  belief  from  the  comparative 
variety  of  the  races  and  of  the  species  of  bacteria  as  well  as  the 
comparative  numbers  present  in  the  tissues  of  the  plant,  together 
with  the  variable  reactions  of  the  samples  of  Linseed  gum,  that 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  171 

Linseed  mucilage  is  derived  not  from  one  microbe  but  from  many. 
I  may  be  wrong  in  my  belief,  and  one  bacterium  may  indeed  be 
responsible.  If  so,  then  organism  "  a "  or  "  b  "  may  be  the 
active  microbe.  On  the  other  hand,  the  true  producer  may  not 
have  been  isolated. 

From  the  research  the  following  conclusions  may  be  sum- 
marised : — 

1.  The  gums  of  Linseed  mucilages  vary  in  their  chemical 
reactions,  and  therefore  probably  vary  in  their  chemical  constitu- 
tion. 

2.  The  product  of  hydrolysis  consists  of  galactose  and  reducing 
substances  which  yield  indefinite  osazones  and  which  are  possibly 
akin  to  the  furfuroids  of  Cross,  Bevan  and  Smith. 

3.  The  gum  bacteria  in  the  tissues  of  Linum  are  relatively 
very  numerous,  and  consist  chiefly  of  races  of  two  species. 

4.  The  chemical  reactions  of  the  gums  from  these  are  practically 
identical  with  the  reactions  of  Linseed  gum. 

5.  The  gum  of  one  of  the  bacteria  is  hydrolysed  to  galactose, 
and  of  the  other  to  galactose  and  a  reducing  substance  that  yields 
an  indefinite  osazone.  Both  gums  contain  a  large  proportion  of 
the  furfuroid  substances. 

6.  The  gum,  formed  b}^  bacteria,  is  probably  altered  by  the 
plant  into  mucilage  and  other  substances  required  in  the  plant 
economy. 

7.  A  number  of  so-called  species  of  gum  bacteria  have  probably 
one  common  origin;  the  host  plant  can  alter  the  nature  of  the 
gum  product  which  influences  the  growth-characters. 

Bacillus  lini  i.,  n.sp.     (Organism  "a.") 

Shape,  etc. — The  bacterium  appears  as  a  motile  short  rod, 
negative  to  the  Gram  stain.  On  nutrient  agar,  the  cells  are  thin 
and  measure  0*3  :  0-6-1 -5 /u,  the  average  being  0*3:1/li.  On 
saccharose-potato-agar,  the  cells  were  stouter  and  measured 
0-5  :  0-8-1 -2 /x,  the  average  being  0-5  : 1 /x.  In  bouillon,  they 
appeared  as  a  mixture  of  the  thin  and  thick  forms.  The  flagella 
are  numerous  and  peritrichous;  up  to  five  have  been  observed. 


17-  I^CTKRIA  AND  THE  GUM  OF  LIXSKKD  MUCILAGE, 

AVai.'«<>h  to  Unij^^nitur^^  e/<*. — Slime  is  pixxiuccd  at  22",  and 
there  is  uo  growth  under  the  mica  plate. 

(r/»iOL\*r'-<7#/<i^iH<'  }>i<iU. — The  colonies  do  not  grow  so  freely  as 
many  other  slime  bacteria.  They  are  white  and  raised  and  dull 
with  an  irregular  margin.  The  centre  of  the  colony  is  raised 
above  the  remainder,  and  from  the  base  of  the  i*aised  centre 
short  furrows  radiate  out  half-way  to  the  edge.  Mici\>scopiciilly, 
the  structure  is  coarsely  granular,  much  more  so  than  the  colonies 
of  Ra^L  a^j'ciir:  the  granular  masses  are  aggregated  in  the  middle 
and  the  margin  is  practically  homogeneous  and  non-granular. 
While  the  surface  colonies  are  yellow  and  translucent,  the  deep 
colonies  are  circular,  brown,  and  clouded  or  opaque.  By  the 
sixth  day.  the  colonies  have  become  depressed  centrally  and  the 
colour  has  altei^ed  to  pale  buff. 

XHiri<£Hi  a^ar  />/«#«?, — The  white  coionies  are  always  thin  or 
flat  and  semi-transparent:  they  tend  to  spread  either  in  a  circular 
or  an  amivboid  manner.  Microscopicallyj  the  colony  is  yellowish 
and  transparent,  with  large  loose  granules  in  the  centra?:  the  deep 
cs>lonies  are  irregular,  translucent  and  granular. 

Gfiuose-ffdatina  stab. — ^The  growth  is  filiform,  with  a  flat, 
siuik(»i  white  nail-head  which  becomes  broad.  semi-Transparent 
and  dry,  while  the  centre  sinks  and  the  subsurface  geiatiue 
becomes  liquefied  in  a  napif  orm  manner. 

Qiwca^^-geiatiHa  iirohs, — It  develops  as  a  narrow,  white,  raised, 
dry  growth  with  a  somewhat  lobular  margin.  The  medium  under 
the  growth  slowly  liquefies. 

JTM-frsV^!/  a^ar  sfr&ke, — The  stroke  at  first  is  broad,  flat  and 
pale  buflpj  with  a  smooth  edge:  the  infection  line  becx-»mes  raised 
and  rough  frooi  the  formation  of  minute  wrinkles. 

Sa^ockar(^i>e-p<j4a^<iMs^ar  ^roi>€, — The  growth  is  at  nrst,  raised, 
buff  and  glistening :  the  edge  is  smooth  and  the  cross-section 
angular.  The  culture  spreads  out,  the  margin  becomes  lobular 
and  the  surface  contoured. 

PtitaliK — A  moist-glistening,  raised,  bufl^  spreading  growth 
which  deepens  in  colour  to  yellow. 


BY    P..    GREIG    .SMITH.  173 

BouiUon. — The  medium  becomes  verv  turbid,  develops  a  loose 
film  and  a  coherent  sediment.  Indol  Ls  formed  and  nitrates  are 
reduced  to  nitrites. 

MUk. — The  medium  becomes  slightly  acid,  but  Is  otherwise 
unaltered. 

Bacillus  lini  ii.,  n.sp.     (Organism  "  b."; 

Shape,  etc. — The  organism  appeared  as  a  large  rod,  staining 
deeply  but  irregularly;  the  outline  of  the  freshly  isolated  celLs 
was  generally  lobular.  The  dimensions  were  variable,  1-2- 
1-5  :  3-10 /t;  the  a%-erage  being  1'5  :  5  ^.  In  boaillon  and  saccha- 
rose media,  chains  of  cells  and  thread  forms  were  found.  The 
cells  were  coloured  by  the  Gram  method  of  staining,  but  a  few 
were  decolorised,  these  being  in  all  probability  dead  cells.  After 
about  nine  months'  cultivation,  the  spongy  protoplasm  of  the  cell 
had  condensed,  the  rod  stained  uniformly  and  measure<:l  1-2  : 3-6/x. 
The  spores,  when  mature,  were  generally  oval,  measuring 
1-2:  1-7-2^;  occasionally  they  were  reniform.  As  a  rule  thev 
were  central,  but  some  were  excentric.  The  microbe  was  verv 
feebly  motile;  the  flagella  were  numerous  and  peritrichous. 

Relation  to  temperature,  etc. — Sh'me  is  produced  at  ordinarv 
temperatures.  There  was  practically  no  growth  under  the 
anaerobic  conditions  that  prevail  under  the  mica-sheet  in  plate 
cultivations. 

Glucose-gelo^tiae  plate. — The  colonies  appeared  as  circular,  white, 
liquefied  areas,  and  when  x-iewed  microscopically  were  brownish- 
black  and  granular  like  a  yeast  colony.  As  the  liquefaction  of 
the  medium  proceeded,  the  colony  consisted  of  a  white  spot  in  a 
crateriform,  liquefied  area.  The  subsurface  colonies  were  verv 
slow  to  liquefy  the  gelatine,  and  appeared  flat,  white  and 
glistening. 

Nutrvirit  agar  plate. — The  colonies  were  raised,  circular,  and  of 
a  pale  cream  colour;  the  surface  was  rough,  although  the  sheen 
was  that  of  a  fat.  Microscopically,  the  colour  was  grey-brown, 
the  centre  was  opaque  and  indefinite,  the  margin  clouded  and  the 
edge  waved,  showing  the  finely  granular  structure  of  a  yeast 
colonv. 


174  RACTEHIA  AND  THE  GVM   OF  LINSEED  MUCILAtiK. 

Glucose-gelatine  stnh. — This  was  filiform;  at  the  surface,  a 
restricted  crateriform  area  bore  a  Mliite  lihn.  The  liquefied  area 
became  funicular. 

Xutrient  agar-stroke. — At  first,  narroNv,  white  and  glistening, 
the  stroke  became  broad,  fat-like,  canary-coloured,  raised  and 
terraced. 

Saccharose-potato-agar  sfroke. — A  broad,  raised,  translucent 
white  slime  was  formed.  It  became  mottled,  parti}-  transparent, 
partly  translucent.  Finally,  the  culture  gravitated  to  the  foot 
of  the  vertical  slope. 

Potato. — There  grew  scant}-,  dry,  white  crusts,  which  fused  and 
became  pale  buff,  while  the  medium  darkened. 

liouillou. — This  remained  clear,  but  produced  a  fiocculent  sedi- 
ment anil  slight  surface  ring.  The  indol  reaction  was  obtained, 
and  nitrates  were  not  reduced  to  nitrites. 

Milk. — This  became  slowly  peptonised  and  developed  an  acid 
reaction. 


175 


NOTES    AND    EXIIIHITS. 


Mr.  Froc^c^att  exhibited  specimens  of  Oligotoina  giirneyi, 
Froggatt  (Fam.  Embiida),  together  with  one  of  tlie  webs  which 
they  fabricate,  received  from  Mr.  Thomas  Steel;  the  species  was 
described  in  last  year's  Proceedings  from  the  study  of  a  single 
individual  taken  at  light;  since  that  time  the  insects  had  been 
found  in  great  numbers  in  the  Colonial  Sugar  Company's  Refinery 
at  Pyrmont,  the  presence  of  the  webs  giving  the  walls  the  appear- 
ance of  being  coated  with  mould.  Also  pupte  of  one  of  the 
common  Sydney  bulldog  ants  {Myrmecia  pyriformis,  Sm.),  cut 
out  of  the  pupal  cocoons;  and  exhibited  to  show  the  curious 
spiny  structures  present  on  the  body,  but  which  are  absent  in 
the  imago. 

Dr.  Greig  Smith  exhibited  samples  of  gum,  and  cultures  in 
illustration  of  his  papers. 

Mr.  Alex.  G.  Hamilton  sent  for  exhibition  a  very  regular  con- 
cretion (calcareous)  presenting  considerable  resemblance  to  an 
obsidianite,  from  the  Moore  River,  N.  W.  Australia. 

Mr.  Steel  read  the  following  Note  on  Zea  mays,  Linn.  : — "At 
a  meeting  of  the  Society  last  year,  Mr.  Fred.  Turner  exhibited 
specimens  of  abnormal  cobs  of  this  plant,  in  which  the  sheaths 
were  not  developed,  the  cobs  being  situated  in  the  midst  of  the 
male  inflorescence.  '^  It  seemed  to  me  that  it  would  be  of  interest 
to  endeavour  to  grow  plants  from  these  cobs,  and,  through  the 
courtesy  of  Mr.  Turner,  I  was  able  to  do  so.  A  number  of  the 
seeds  which  I  planted  in  my  garden  germinated  and  grew  into 
healthy  plants  6  or  7  feet  in  height  which  were  in  all  respects 
normal,  the  relative  positions  of  the  male  and  female  inflorescences 
being  as  usual.  The  cobs  were,  like  the  parent  ones,  somewhat 
small  in  size,  the  seed-heads  being  about  6  inclies  in  length." 


*  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xxix.  p.  129. 


176 


WEDNESDAY,  MAY  31st,   1905. 


The  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  of  the  Society  was  held  in 
the  Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  May  Slst,  1905. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

The  Hon.   Sir  Arthur   Renwick,  Kt.,  B.A.,  M.D.,  M.L.C. 

was  elected  a  Member  of  the  Society. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous 
Monthly  Meeting,  amounting  to  11  Vols.,  50  Parts  or  Nos.,  14 
Bulletins,  3  Reports,  9  Pamphlets,  and  2  Miscellanea,  received 
from  50  Societies,  itc,  and  1  Individual,  were  laid  upon  the 
table. 


[Printed  off  June  27th,  1905.] 


SUPPLEMENT 

TO    THE 
OF    THE 

LINNEAN    SOCIETY 

OF 

1905  (Part  i.). 


xVUSTRALIAN  CARABIDjE. 

CHECK-LIST.     Part  i.  Subfamily  CARABINiE.t 

By  Thomas  G.  Sloane. 
April  30th,  1905. 

E.v.planatory  Note. — §  Denotes  a  preoccupied  name.  "^  Denotes 
a  species  unknown  to  the  author;  this  sign  has  not  been  used 
with  names  that  are  synonyms,  except  in  a  few  cases  to  show  that 
though,  in  the  author's  opinion,  these  names  are  synonyms,  abso- 
lute proof  of  this  is  still  wanting. 

The  numbers  following  the  names  of  species  indicate  their  dis- 
tribution in  Australia  according  to  the  numbered  divisions  shown 
on  the  accompanying  map.  (Species  of  which  the  habitat  is  not 
known  to  the  author  to  come  within  any  of  these  numbered 
divisions  on  the  map  are  followed  by  the  initials  of  the  State  in 
which  they  are  believed  to  be  found.)  The  territorial  divisions 
Nos.  1-8  are  considered  to  have  an  actual  value,  though  of  varying 
importance,  as  entomological  faunal  districts  of  Australia;  but 
Nos.  9  and  10  are  introduced  chiefly  because  their  use  seems 
convenient. 

t  This  Catalogue  is  published  free  from  any  charge  on  the  funds  of  the 
Society— 7^<L 


CHECK-LIST  OF  AUSTRALIAN  CARABIDA], 


by  thomas  g.  sloan k. 

List  of  Faunal  Districts  indicated  on  Map. 

1.  West  Torresian  District     j 

2.  Middle  Torresian  District   -  Torresian  Subregion  of  Spencer. 

3.  South  Torresian  District     ' 

4.  North  Bassian  District       I  t>      •       a   i        •         r>  ^  .  <" 
^,^•11,^      .       T^.      .         r  Bassian  bubregion  of  Spencer.  A 

5.  Middle  Bassian  District     J  ^     >./ .    : 

6.  Riverina  District. 

7.  South  Australian  District. 

8.  South- Western  Australia. 

9.  North-Western  Australia. 
10.  Central  Australia. 


Note. — The  boundary  lines  and  divisions  between  these  Dis- 
tricts are  merely  provisional,  but  I  believe  Nos.  1-8  indicate  the 
nuclei  of  entomological  faunal  districts  of  actual,  though  varying 
importance. 


1.  Tribe  CARABINI. 

1.  Gen.   C  A  L  o  s  0  M  a,  Weber,  Obs.  Ent.  1801,  20. 

1.  *AUSTRALE,  Hopc,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  iv.  104,  1845 S.A. 

2.  SCHAYERI,  Erichs.,  Wiegm.  Arch.  1842,  i.  122 3-7, 10 

curtisi,  Hope,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  iv.  104,  1845. 
grandipenne,  Cast.,f  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  99,  1868...  5 

3.  WALKERi,  Waterh.,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (7)  i.  99,  1898...  1 

2.  Tribe  PAMBORINI. 

2.  Gen.  Pam  b  o  r  u  s,  Latreille,  Regn.  An.  iii.  198,  1817. 

4.  ALTERNANS,  Latr.,  Enc.  Meth.  viii.  678 3,4 

elongatus,  Gory,  Mag.  Zool.  1836,  156. 

viridiaureus,  Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  viii. 409, 1883..  3 

5.  BRiSBANENSis,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  96,  1868 3 


t  This   is   the   abbreviation   of   Count    Castelnau's   name    adopted    and 
recommended  by  the  International  Congress  of  Zoology. 


4  CHECK-LIST  OF  AVSTRALTAX  CARASfD^F.^  L, 

6  GCERiKi,  C^ry,  M«^.  de  Z<k>L  vi.  Col  pll67,  t%  1836 3 

7,  MACLEAVi,  Cast.,  Trails.  R  Soc,  Vict.  viii.  %,  1868 3 

S.  MORBiLLOSUS,  Boisd.,  Voy.  AstroL  Col.  27,  1835 3 

cunytmfk'OMiii,  Cast.,  Etud,  Ent,  156,  1835. 

9,  OPAcrs,  Gtehin,  Catalogue,  79,  1885 3 

10.  PRADiERi,  Cha«dl,,  R^v,  Mag,  <3e  ZooL  <2)  xxi,  66,  1869.... 3 
IL  TiRiDis,  G^^ry,  Mag,  de  Zool  >^,  OoLpl.l66,  f.l,  183C  3 

S,  Tribe  ?. 

3,  Gren,  Xebriosoma,  Castelnau,  Trans,  R.  Soc 

Vict,  viii,  179,  1868. 

12,  FALLAX,  Cast.,  Lc.      4 

4.  Tribe  XTSTROPOXISIt 

4,  Oen,  Mystropomus,  Chaudoir,  Ball  Sc>c  Imp, 

Nat.  Mosc,  1848,  i,  107, 

13,  CHACDOiRi,  Cast.,  Tran^v.  R,  Soc  Vict  viii  120,  1S<>8 3 

14,  SUBCX>STATUS,  Chawd.,  Bwll, Soc Imp. Nat Mosc  I848,i,109,.4 

5.  Tribe  CLmxiyi. 

5,  G«n,  Clivixarchus,  Slcvane.  Proc .  Linn.  Soc 

N,aW,  1896,  xxL  249, 

15,  PEiiijoy<JC«,  Si,  !«,  250 2 

6,  G&i,  Platysphyrus,  Sloane,  Proc  linn,  Soc. 

X.S,W,  1904,  xxix.  710, 

16,  TIMALTS,  SI,  lc  711 1 

7,  Gen.  C  L  I  T  I  X  A,  Latreille,  Consid.  G^ner,  156,  1810, 

17,  ABBREviATA,  Piitz,,  Ann,  Soc  Ent.  Belg,  x\i.  11,  1873,.,     3 
IS.  *iEX5UALTS,  Blackk,Proe.  Iinn,SocN,aW,(2)iv,71S,1889„l 

19,  anCtUSTIPES,  Putz.,  Ann,  Soc  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  12,  1868 8 

+  In  tbese  Proceedings  fox  3904  (xrix,  p,704)  I  proposed  Pmu0lma"nim  to 
r^jiaoe  tbe  name  Myftropammi  given  by  Dr.  G.  H.  Horn  to  tbis  tribe,  tinder 
tbe  belief  tihat  tbe  oldest  genns  of  a  tribe'  should  be  the  n&ja>e-^nns.  In  doing 
so  I  €fvid<eBa!%  eomtraven^d  tbe  recognised  rales  of  Noaaa-endatore,  wbicb  act 
ia  tibe  saioe  iQani>er  witb  i^ard  to  names  of  bigber  groops  as  tbey  do  with 
i^^ard  to  feiia<6ra  and  sped<es. 


20.  ^ATfeATA,  Paiz.,  3Ieixi.  Soc,  Sc-  Li-=:ge,  xviii.  54,  1%^;3- 

21.  ATBiDORSiij,  .SL,  Proc,  liniL  Soc.  X.S.W.  1904,  xiix.  71- 2 

22.  AUSTKALAiiiJK,  B<:Jiewi,,  HeA.  Eageao,  ^,  l!55'!! 4,5,6 

23.  AU3TEALICA,  ST,  Proc.  LiDD.  .Soc.  y.S.W.  18^,  xxL  VjZ.I 

24.  BAAALiii,  Cbaod,  BalL  Soe.  Imp  Nat.  Moec.  xtL733,  1 543...  4-7 

*rrd(rrod(/n,  Patz.,  Ann.  .Soc.  Ent.  Belg,  x.  l!^3,  l5^,.,.  S 

25.  ^BiiiycTA- 

WyJ/xfJi  .SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc  N.S.W.  Ie«r6,  xxL  170.....  8 

26.  BIPLAGIATA,  Potz.,  .Stett.  Ent.  2^it.  xxrii  4-3,  l5€^3 2-6 

27.  BLACKBi:Byi,Si-,Proc.  Linn.  soc.  X.S.W.1S&6,  xxL1«j4-.  SJk, 

28.  BOOP3,  Blackb.,  o/>.  ci/.  (2;iv.  719,  18-59 7 

29.  BOTiLL^  Blackb.,  /.<:.  717 1^8 

30.  CABPE5TJLSIA,  SL,  Proc.  LunL  Soc.  N.5.W.  1896,  xxL  175...  2 

31.  CAVA,  Patz.,  Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii  .38,  1866 ...1,2 

32.  COEOXATA,  Patz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xtL  16,  1873 8 

33.  *CBAiiaicoLLii,  Patz.,  o/>.  r«^.  x.  25,  1866 V^W. 

34.  cp.iBRiFBoys,  SI.,  Proc  Linn.  Soc.2f.S.W.  l&04,xxix.716...  t 

35.  CEiBRoaA,  Patz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent,  Bels.  xL  20,  l!!6^ 8 

36.  CTLi?»DBiF0BMi3,  SL,  Proc.Linn-Soo.N.S.W.  lii^,  xxLi66,^2 

37.  CTLiTDBiPEyyii,  SL,  fjp.  c^.  1904,  xxix.  729^ 1 

38.  DEBIL15,  Biackb.,  oj,.  cU.  r2)  iv.  722,  1889 2;  7 

39.  DEXTioLLii,  SL,  o/>.  d/.  1896,  xxi.  171~ 1,2 

eyren^,  Blac^b.,  Trans,  R.  Soc.  S.  Anat.  xxir.  55,  1900. 

40.  ♦diftoemis,  Patz.,  Ann,  Soc  Ent,  Bel*.  xL  19,  1868. 

41.  DiLCTiPEa,  Patz., /./:.  12 4-7 

^jdneyetuiU,  SL,  Proc  Linn,  Soc  X.S.W.  1896,  xxL  222^.  4 
var.  rrietori/B,  SL,  «^.  ci/.  1904,  xxix.  726^ 5 

42.  DDTGO,  SL,/.<:.  724 3 

43.  DODDi,  SL,  /.c  715... 2 

44.  ELEGAya,  Patz.,  Mem,  Soc  Scli^e,  xriiL  44, 1863 3,4 

Ceralogloip*a  /vr-iic^/)*,  MacL.  Trans.  Ent.  Soc  X.S.W.  L 

73,  1863. 
Seoitfptu*  Mimgu^.  Patz.,  Ann.  S*x:.  Ent.  ^ttkSf  xvi.  10, 

1873. 

45.  *EMAifcGi3rATA,  Patz.,  fjp.  ciL  xi  15,  18^. 


5  CHECK-LIST  OF  AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.E,  I., 

46.  *EREMicoLA,   Blackb.,  Proc.    Linn.   Soc.  N.S.W.   (2)  ix.  87, 

1894 10 

47.  EXiMiA,  SI.,  op.  cit.  1896,  xxi.  214 1,2 

48.  FELIX,  SI.,  Ic.  213 ,  4-7 

49.  FERRUGiNEA,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  14,  1868 2 

50.  FLAVA,  Putz.,  I.e.   16 2 

51.  FORTis,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi.  158.    N.S.W, 

52.  FRENCHi,  SL,  I.e.  159 2 

53.  FROGGATTI,   SI.,  l.C.  '21d) 1 

54.  GRAciLiPES,  SL,  l.C.  247 2 

55.  GRANDICEPS,  SL,  l.C.    177 2 

56.  ^HELMSI,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  xvi.  22,  1892. 

57.  HETEROGENA,  Putz.,  Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii.  41,  1866 3-7 

ciiigiistula,  Putz.,  I.e.  42. 

deplanata,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  x.  190,  1866. 
5S.  iNCONSPicuA,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxL  277...  1 

59.  *iS0G0NA,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  13,  1868. 

60.  LEAi,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi.  209 3,10 

var.  apicalis,  SL,  I.e.  211 1 

61.  LEPiDA,  Putz.,  Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii.  38,  1866 5 

juvenis,  Putz.,  I.e.  37. 

62.  LOBiPES,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi.  182 2 

63.  MACLEAYI,  SL,  I.e.  236 1 

64.  MARGiNATA,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  8,  1868 2 

65.  MASTERSi,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxL  242 1 

66.  MELANOPYGA,  Putz.,  Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii.  41,  1866 6,  7 

"^dimidiata,  Putz.,  I.e.  39 5 

67.  MisELLA,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1904,  xxix.  727. ..3,  4 

68.  MONiLicoRNis,  SL,  op.  cit.  1896,  xxi.  229 2 

69.  NANA,  SL,  I.e.  202 2,3,6 

70.  NIGRA,  SL,  op.  eit.  1904,  xxix.  722 6 

71.  NYCTOSYLOiDES,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  10,  1868...  2 

interslitialis,%^\.,Vvoc.\Ann.  Soc.  N.S.AV.  1896,  xxL241..  2 

72.  OBLiQUATA,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  1866,  x.  188 7 

adelaidw,  Blackb., Proc. Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  W.(2}iv.720, 1889..  7 

73.  OBLiQUicoLLis,  SL,  Of.  cit.  1904,  xxix.  732 1 


BY  THOMAS  G.  SLOANE.  7 

74.  OBLiTERATA,  SL,  op.  clt.  1896,  xxi.  154 5,  6 

75.  OBSCURIPES,  Blackb.,  op.  cit.  (2)  iv.  1247,  1889 1,2 

76.  OBSOLETA,  SL,  op.  Clt.   1896,  xxi.  167 2 

77.  OCCULTA,  SI.,  I.e.  201 2 

78.  ODONTOMERA,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  18,  1868... 3,  6 

79.  OLLiFFi,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi.  185 8 

80.  OODXADATT^,  Blackb.,  op.  cit.  (2)  ix.  86,  1894 10 

81.  ovALiPENNis,  SL,  op.  cit.  1904,  xxix.  733 2 

ovipeunis,^  SL,  op.  cit.  1896,  xxi.  244. 

82.  PALLiDicfiPS,  SL,  op.  cit.  1904,  xxix.  728 6 

83.  PECTONODA,  SL,  I.e.  724 2 

84.  PECTORALis,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  14,  1868  ..2,3,6 

85.  PLANicEPS,  Putz.,  Mem.  Soc.  Sc.  Liege,  xviii.  42,  1863 5.6 

Ceratoglossa  rugiceps,  MacL,   Trans.   Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i. 

73,  1863 6 

d>Q.  PROCERA,  Putz.,  Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii.  34,  1866 4-7 

87.  "^PROMiNENS,  Putz.,  l.C.  35 5 

88.  PUNCTATICEPS,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  18,  1868....  2 

89.  QUADRATiFRONS,  SL,  Pi'oc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi.  174 

[5,  6,  7 

90.  QUEENSLANDICA,   SL,  l.C.   208 3,  6 

91.  REGULARIS,  SL,  /.c.  238 N.S.W. 

92.  RivERiNiE,  SL,  l.C.  164 6 

93.  ROBUSTA,  SL,  op.  cit.  1904,  xxix.  731 4 

94.  "^RUBRiPES,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  13,  1868  .., 2 

95.  SELLATA,  Putz.,  Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii.  40,  1866 2-7 

96.  siMULANS,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi.  218 6 

97.  suLcicoLLis,  SL,  I  c.  276 1 

98.  suTURALis,  Putz.,  Mem.  Soc.  Sc.  Liege,  xviii.  39,  1863.  ..7,  8 

dorsalis,  Blackb.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)iv.  719,  1889. 
^verticalis,  Putz.,  Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii.  40,  1866. 

99.  ^TUBERCULiFRONS,   Blackb.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iv. 

721,  1889 10 

100  TUMiDiPES,  SL,  I.e.  1896,  xxL  180 6 

101.  VAGANS,  Putz.,  stett.  Ent.  Zeit.  xxvii.  38,  1866 T. 

var.  tasmaniensis,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi. 
•?99 


8  CHECK-LIST  OF  AUSTKALIAX  CARABID.E,  L, 

102.  VITTATA,   SI.,  Ic.   211 6,7 

103.  *wiLDi,  Blackb.,  op.  cit.  (2)iv.  721,  1889 10 

8.  Gen.   D  Y  s  c  H  I  R  I  u  s,   Bonelli,  Mem.  Acad.  Turin,  1810. 

104.  MACLEAYi,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1896,  xxi.279 1 

105.  MASTERSi,  Mad,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  X.S.W.  i.  lix.  1866 8 

106.  ovENSENSis,  Blackb.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  iSr.S.W.(2)  v.775, 1890  5 

107.  STEPHENSi,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  195,  1866....  4 

108.  *TORRENSENSis,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  xiii.S2, 1890  7 

109.  zoNATUS,  Putz.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.xi.9,1868 2 

6.   Tribe  SCARITINI. 

Sabtiibe  Scaritides. 

9.  Gen.    S  t  e  g  a  n  o  m  m  a,    Macleay,  Proc.   Linn.   Soc. 

X.S.W.  (2)  ii.  133,  1887. 

110.  PORCATUM,  MacL,  l.c 3 

10.  Gen.   G  E  0  s  c  A  p  T  u  s,  Chaudoir,   Bull.  Soc.  Imp. 

Nat.  Mosc.  1855,  i.  9. 

HI.  CACUS,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  X.S.W.  i.  67,  1863 1-6 

approximatus,  Macl.,  I.e.  191. 

hipunctatus,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  l-li,  1868...  2 

V^macleayi,  Chaud.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xxii.  138, 1879.. 1? 

mitcheUi,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  U3,  1868. 

rujicornis,  Cast.,  l.c.  144. 

suhporcatulus,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  X.S.W.  i.  192,1865. 

substriaLus,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  143,  1868....  5 

icaterhousei,  Macl..  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  X.S.  W.  i.  192,  1865. 

112.  CRASSUS,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  X.S.AV.  (2)  ix.  393,  1894 2 

113.  L.EVissiMUS,  Chaud.,  Bull.  Soc.  Imp.  Xat.  Mosc.  1855,1.10.2-6 

bostocki,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  144,1868. 
dcnnastes,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  X.S.W.  i.  68,  1863. 
geryoji,  Macl.,  l.c.  68. 
jacksoniensis,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  i.  193,  1865. 
planhisculus,  Macl.,  I.e.  193. 

114.  PLiCATULCS,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  143,  1868 1 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOAN E.  9 

Subtiibe  Pasimachides. 

11.  Gen.  ScARAPHiTES,    Westwood,  Arcan.  Ent.  i. 

157,1842. 

115.  *BACCHUS,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  87,  1842 8 

116.  GIGAS,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Yict.  viii.  132,  1868 9 

117.  *HEROS,  Cast.,  ^.c.l29 8 

118.  *HUMERALIS,  Csist.,  Lc.  131 W-A- 

119.  LATicoLLis,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  KS.W.  i.  Ivi.  186G 1 

120.  LATiPENNis,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  i.  66,  1863 7,8 

assimilis,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  W.  (2)  viii.  452, 1893. 
crenaticoUis,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  147,  1864. 
hirtipes,  Macl.,  I.e.  148. 

121.  LEN.EUS,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  1842,  i.  87 8 

122.  LUCIDUS,  Chaud.,  Rev.  Mag.  de  Zool.  (2)  xv.  115,  1863 8 

123.  "^MARTINI,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vici:.  viii.  133,  1868 8 

124.  MASTERSi,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  70,  1869 8 

125.  PACiFicus,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iii.  1107,  1888..  8 

126.  ROTUNDiPENNis,  Dej.,  Species  i.  4:01,1825 4,5 

viacleai/i,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  157,  1842. 

insidaiius,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iii.  1106,  1888. 

intermedins,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  190,  1865. 

127.  siLENUS,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  87,  1842 8 

12.  Gen.    E  u  r  y  s  c  a  p  h  u  s,    Macleay,    Trans.    Ent. 

Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  187,  1865. 

128.  angulatus,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  188,  1865. ...Q- 

129.  ATRATUS,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  viii.  456,  1893...  2 

130.  *CHAUD0iRi,  Blackb.,  op.  cit.  (2)  vii.  82,  1892 S.A. 

131.  CONCOLOR,  SL,  op.  cit.  (2)viii.  459,  1893 S.A. 

132.  DiLATATUS,  ^lacl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  188,  1865....  6 

affinis,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  130,  1868. 
areiiarius,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iii.  1108,  1888. 
carbonarius,  Cast,,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  130,  1868. 
minor,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  189,  1865. 

133.  EBENiNUS,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  v.  641,  1890 9 


10  CHECK-LIST  OF  AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.f:,  L, 

134.  *ii0PEi,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  131,1868 10 

tpolitus,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  viii.457,1893..10 

135.  OBESus,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  65,  1863 6,  7 

^.  bipunctatus  Macl.,  op.  cit.  i.  189,  1865. 

^.ferox,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iii.  1109,  1888. 

$.  hoivitti,  Cast.,  Trans.  Pv.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  130,  1868 7 

136.  SUBSULCATUS,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.2,  1887. S.A. 

137.  *suLCiC0LLis,  Blackb.,  Proc.  Linn.   Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  vii.  81, 

1892 S.A. 

138.  %ATEi,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  x.  1,  1887 S.A. 

139.  TERRENUS,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)ix.  394,  1894...  9 

140.  WATERHOUSEi,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  147,  1864.10 

tUauus,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iv.  1288,  1889. 

1 3.    Gen.    P  h  i  l  o  s  c  a  p  h  u  s,    Macleay,    Trans.    Ent. 
Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  96,  1871. 

141.  BARXARDi,  Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  ii.  973,  1887...  2 

142.  BicosTATUs,  SI.,  op.  cit.  1905,  xxx.  114 2 

143.  CARINATUS,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  142,  1864...   6 

144.  cosTALis,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  ii.  324,  1873 8,9 

'^crassus,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.  37,  1887. S.A. 
lateralis,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  324,  1873.. S.A. 

145.  *DUBouLAYi,  Blackb., Proc.  Linn.  Soc.N.S.W.(2)v.554,1892.  2 

146.  MASTERSi,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  96,  1871 3 

147.  TUBERCULATus,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  i.  63,  1863 6 

tepperi,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.  36,  1887  .  S.A. 

14.  Gen.  Laccoscaphus,  Sloane,   Proc.  Linn.  Soc. 
N.S.W.  1905,  xxx.  115. 
=  Laccopterum,^  Macl.,  op.  cit.  ii.  214,  1878. 

148.  CYANEUS,  Fabr.,  Ent.  Syst.  i.  95,  1775 2 

149.  DARWiNiENSis,  MacL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  214,  1878.  1 

150.  DEAURATUS,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  140,  1864...  3 

151.  *F0VEIGERUS,  Chaud.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  138,  1868.. ,3? 

152.  FOVEiPENNis,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  325,  1873...  7 

153.  *foveolatus,  Macl.,  o/Aci7.i.  141,1864 2? 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANK.  11 

154.  ^GEMMATUS,  Westw.,  Arcaii.  Ent.  i.  85,  1842  1 

155.  HUMERALis,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1900,  xxv.  .3G1..  ..  1 

156.  *LACUNOSUS,  MacL,  op.  cit  (2)  ii.  132,  1887 N.S.W. 

157.  LocuLOSUS,  Newm.,  The  Entomol.  369,  1842....  6,7 

variolosum,  Mad,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.143,1864...  6 

158.  MACLEAYi,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  192..4,  5,6 

159.  *MULTiiMPRESSUS, Cast.,  Trans.  R. Soc.  Vict,  viii.135,1 868. W. A. 

160.  SALEBROSUS,  Macl,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.SW.  ii.  97,  1871....  3 

161.  SPENCEI,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  85,  1842 3 

digglesi  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  326,  1873. 

15.  Gen.  0  a  r  e  n  u  m,  Bonelli,  Mem.  Acad.  Turin, 
1813,479. 
Arnidius,  Leach  (MSS.),  Boisd.,  Voy.  Astrol.  Col.  23,  1835  — 
Eutoma,%  Newm.,  Ent.  Mag.  v.  170,  1838 — Carenoscajjhus, 
Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  ii.  120,  1887— Calli- 
scaj^terus,  Macl.,  l.c,  121 — Platythorax,%  Macl.,  I.e.  122 — 
Chariscapterus,  SL,  I.e.  (2)  iii.  1111,  1888  —Paliscaphns, 
SI.,  (subgen.)  l.c.  1117. 

162.  ACUTIPES,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  213 1 

163.  *ADELAiD^,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.  52,  1887...  7 

164.  AFFiNE,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  142,  1864 4 

165.  AMPLicoLLE,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  207..  7 

166.  ANGUSTiPBNNE,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  98, 1871..  3 

167.  ANTHRACiNUM,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  i.  135,  1864..  ..  7 

cyanipenne,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  ii.  62,  1869 7 

ebeninum,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  134,  1868 7 

nitescens,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  64,  1869...S.A. 
var.  gracile,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  ix.  401,  1894.  6 

168.  -^BATESi,  Masters,  Cat.  Described  Col.  p.31,  No.349,  1885..  9 

planipenne,%  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  97,  1874. 

169.  BONELLI,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  83,  1842 4,5 

chaudoiri,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  63,  1869. 
scitulum,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  i.  144,  1864. 
viridipenne,  Westw.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  v.  202,  1849. 
westwoodL  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  136,  1868 5 


12  CHECK-LIST  OF  AUSTRALIAN  CAIIABIDJ],  L, 

170.  BREVicoLLE,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  (2)  viii.467,  1893 8 

171.  13REVIF0RME,  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  96,  1874 1 

172.  BKEViPENxVE,  Macl,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  W.  (2)  ii.  131,  1887  3 

173.  BRiSBANENSis,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  133,  1868...  3 

opacum,  Macl ,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.VV.  ii.  63,  1869. 

174.  CARBONARiUM,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  134,  1868...  8 

vicinum,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iv.  1293,  1889. 

175.  *caviph:nne,  Bates,  Ent.  iMo.  Mag.  xi.  99,  1874 W.A. 

176.  COGNATUM,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  KS.W.  (2)  ix.  399,  1894..  3 

177.  coxciNNUxM,  SL,  ojj.  cit.  XXX.  117,  1905 1 

178.  *coNVEXUM,  Chaud.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  142,  1868. 

179.  CORACINUM,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  178,  1865...  3 

Carenoscaphus  lucidus,  Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2) 
ii.  131,  1887. 

180.  CORDIPENNE,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  xxii.  196,  1897...  6 

181.  CORL'SCUM,  Mad.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  141,  1864 1 

182.  CUPREOMARGINATUM,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.Soc.  S.A.x.63, 1887.  8 

oimlens,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)iii.  1112,  1888. 

183.  CUPRIPENNE,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  61,  1863....  8 

184.  DECORUM,  Sl.,Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)iii.  1115,  1888 

[N.S.W. 

185.  ^DEVASTATOR,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  137,  1868..W.A. 

186.  *DE  visi,  Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  viii.  412,  1883.. .Q. 

187.  DiGGLESi,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  iL  67,  1869 3 

188.  DisPAR,  MacL,  I.e.   m,  1869 6 

189.  DisTiNCTUM,  MacL,  op.  cit.  i.  145,  1864 6,10 

190.  JDUCALE,  SI 8 

frenchi,%  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  ix.  396,  1894. 

191.  ELEGANS,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  144,  1864.. ..6,  8 

campestre,  MacL,  oj).  cit.  i.  186,  1865. 
ryjipes,  MacL,  op.  cit.  ii.  65,  1869. 

192.  EMARGixATUM,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1900,  xxv.372...9 

t  The  suppression  of  the  old  genus  Iviitoma  brings  Eutoma  frenchi,  SI. 
(1893)  into  the  genus  Carenum,  thereby  necessitating  a  change  of  the  name 
Carenum  frenchi,  SL  (1894). 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  13 

193.  *EPiscoPALE,  Cast.,  Trans.  K.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  140, 1868 6 

194.  FELIX,  SI,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)iii.  1118,  1888...N.S.W. 

195.  *FiLiFORME,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  140,  1868.N.S.W, 

196.  F0VE0LATUM,Macl., Proc. Linn. Soc.N.S.W.(2)iii. 462, 1888..  1 

197.  FRENCHi,  SI.,  op.  cit.  (2)  viii.  476,  1893 2 

198.  FROGGATTi,  SL,  op.  cit.  1897,  xxii.  198 8 

199.  *FUGiTivuM,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.  61,  1887...  7 

200.  GRATiosuM,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  217..  7? 

201.  HABILE,  SL,  op.  cit.  (2)  vL  428,  1891 8 

202.  HABiTANS,  SL,  op.  cit.  (2)  iv.  1290,  1889 10 

203.  lANTHiNUM,  MacL,  op.  cit.  viiL  412,  1883 d. 

204.  IMITATOR,  SL,  op.  cit.  1897,  xxii.  206 ...  6 

205.  *iNC0NSPicuuM,  Blackb., Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.Aust.x. 59,1887. .S.A. 

206.  INEDITUM,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  iL  65,  1869 7 

207.  iNTERiORis,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iiL  1113,  1888..  6 

208.  INTERRUPTUM,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  181,  1865 

[3,  4,  6 
arenarium,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iii.  1114,  1888. 
castehiaui,  Chaud.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  141,  1868. 
obsGurum,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  182,  1865. 

occultum,  MacL,  op.  cit.  ii.  97,  1871 3 

purpureomarginattim,  MacL,   Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2) 

iL  132,  1887. 
sexpunctatum,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  62,  1869. 

209.  IRIDESCENS,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)viii.470,1893...  6 

210.  KiNGi,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  iL  64,  1869 4 

propinquum,  MacL,  I.e. 

211.  L^viGATUM,  MacL,  op.  cit.  i.  134,  1864.- 5,6,7 

frontale,  MacL,  op.  cit.  i.  185,  1865 7 

murrumhidgense,  MacL,  I.e.  183 6 

punctulatum,  MacL,  op.  cit.  i.  143,  1864 6 

schomburgki,  Cast.,  Trans.  K.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  137,  1868...  7 

212.  L^viPENNE,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  L  59,  1863 8 

IcevicoUe,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iii.  1116,  1888. 

213.  L^vissiME,  SL,  op.  cit.  1900,  xxv.  384 1 

214.  LATERALE,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  183,  1865 4 


14  CHECK-LIST  OF  AUSTRxVLIAN  CARABID.K,  I., 

215.  LEPiDUM,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  iv.  1291,  1889...  8 

216.  LOBATUM,  SI.,  op.  Cit.  1900,  XXV.  375 1 

217.  MACLEAYi,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.  64,  1887 7 

218.  MAGNiFicuM,  Macl., Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)ii.  130, 1887. .a. 

219.  MARGINATUM,  BoisfL,  Voy.  Astrol.  Col.  23,  1835 4 

220.  ^NiCKLERi,  Ancey,  Le  Nat.  ii.  221,  1880. 

221.  *0BS0LETUM,  Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)ii.  972,  1887.  3 

222.  occiDENTALE,  SL,  op.  cit.  1897,  xxii.  195 9 

223.  ODEWAHNi,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  137,  1868 7 

ordinatum,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  m,  1869. 

224.  OPACicoLLE,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  209...  2 

225.  OPTIMUM,  SI.,  op.  cit.  (2)ix.  397,  1894 9 

226.  OVALE,  SL,  op.  cit.  1900,  xxv.  374 2 

227.  PARVULUM,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  iL  325,  1873...  4 

228.  PERPLEXUM,  White,  Grey's  Trav.  ii.  456 8 

229.  PLANiPENNE,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  326,  1873...  7 

230.  ^'POLITUM,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  \.  84,  1842 T, 

231.  ^PORPHYREDM,  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  95,  1874 8? 

232.  PULCHRUM,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  xxii.  215,  1897.. .W.A. 

233.  puNCTicoLLE,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  L  135,  1864.. .7  ? 

234.  puNCTiPENNE,  MacL, Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  viiL  411,  1883..  2 

235.  ^PURPURATUM,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viiL  141,  1868...  7 

236.  PURPUREUM,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxiL  201. .S.A. 

237.  PUSILLUM,  MacL,  op.  cit  viiL  412,  1883 2 

238.  QUADRiPUNCTATUM,   MacL,   Trans.   Ent.    Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  59, 

1863 2 

239.  RECTANGULARE,  MacL,  op.  cit.  i.  139,  1864 10 

240.  REFLEXUM,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  194. 

241.  REGULARE,  SL,  op.  cit.  1900,  xxv.  380 10 

242.  scARiTioiDES,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  L  192,  1842 4-8 

amhiguum,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  177,  1865. 
atronitens,  MacL,  op.  cit.  i.  137,  1864. 
ignotum,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  vi.  427,  1891. 
intermedium ,  Westw.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  v.  203,  1849. 
nigerrimum,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  176,  1865. 
oblongurn,  MacL,  op.  cit.  i.  138,  1864. 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  15 

striatopunctulatum,  Mad,  Trans,  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  178, 

1865. 
suhquadratum,  Macl.,  I.e.  177. 

243.  SERRATiPES,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1300,  xxv.  376...  9 

244.  SIMILE,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  182,  1865 3 

ovipenne,  Macl.,  op.  ciL  ii.  98,  1871. 
iriste,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  ii.  63,  1869. 

245.  *SMARAGDULUM,  VVestw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  84,  1842 ...8 

246.  sPECiosuM,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)iii.  1110,  1888...  9 

247.  SPLENDENS,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  136,  1868 2 

248.  SPLENDIDUM,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  60,  1863...  8 

249.  STRiATOPUNCTATUM,  Macl.,  0^9.  cit.  i.  184,  1865 10? 

250.  SUBCOSTATUM,  Macl.,  I.e.  186 3,4 

251.  suBCYANEUM,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  ii.  66,  1869 7,  8 

rugatum,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  x.  62,  1887. 
sulcaticeps,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  199. 

252.  SUBMETALLICUM,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent. Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  98,  1871..  3 

253.  SUBPLANATUM,  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  96,  1874 9 

254.  suBPORCATULUM,Macl.,Trans. Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.l84,  1865..  3 

politulum,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  ii.  98,  1871. 
viridhnarginatum,  Macl.,  I.e.  97. 

255.  SUMPTUOSUM,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  86,  1842 1 

256.  *TERRA-REGiN^,  MacL,  Proc.Linn.Soc.N.S.  W.  viii.  411,'83..Cl. 

257.  TiBiALE,  SI.,  op.  cit.  (2)viii.  468,  1893 10 

258.  TiNCTiLLATUM,  Newm.,  Ent.  Mag.  v.  171,  1838 2-7 

bipunctatum,  Macl,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  60,  1863..  2 
glabei'rimum,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  i.  180,  1864. 

Iceve,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  141,  1868 4 

loddonense,  Cast.,  I.e.  142 , 6 

mastersi,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  67,  1869. 

7iewma7ii,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  140,  1868 2 

jow7ic«2^/a^i6m,  Macl,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)ii.  130,  '87..  2 
subrugosidu7n,  Macl., Trans.  Ent. Soc. N.S.W.  i. 180, 1865.. 4 

substriatrdum,  Macl.,  I.e.  179 4 

undulatum,  Macl.,  I.e.  180 4 


16  CHECK-LIST  OF  AUSTRA.LIAN  CAliAlUD.E,  I., 

259.  TRANSVERSicoLLE,   Cliaud.,    Ann.   Soc.   Ent.   Belg.    xi.   139, 

18G8 10 

260.  TUMiDiPES.  SI,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1900,  xxv.  377....  1 

261.  VENUSTUM,  SI.,  op.  cit.  1S97,  xxii.  212 W.A. 

262.  VERSICOLOR,  SI.,  I.e.  208 6 

263.  vioLACEUM,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  138,  1864....  8 

264.  viRESCEXS,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  viii.  471,  1893...  9 

265.  viRiDLENEUM,  MacL,  op.  cit.  (2)  iii.  461,  1888 ...1 

266.  viRiDicoLOR,  SI.,  op.  cit.  (2)  ix.  402,  1894 1 

267.  viRiDissiMUS,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  (2)  iii.  460,  1888 1 

16.  Gen.  Trichocarenum,  Blackburn,  Trans.  R. 

Soc.  S.  Aust.  xvi.  20,  1892. 

268.  castelxaui,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1905,  xxx.  123  ..1 

269.  CYLiNDRicuM,  SI.,  op.  cU.  1897,  xxii.  220 2 

270.  *elderi,  Blackb.,  Trans.  E.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  xvi.  21,  1892. .W.A. 

17.  Gen.  N  e  o  c  a  r  e  n  u  m,  Castelnau,  Trans.  R.  Soc. 

Vict.  viii.  138,  1868. 

271.  ANGUSTATUM,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  viii.478,1893..  8 

272.  BLACKBURNi,  SI.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  xix.  124,  1895...  10 

273.  -^cylindripenne,  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  99,  1874 W.A. 

274.  elongatum,  Macl,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  136,  1864...  7 

kreuslerm.,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  139,  1868. 

275.  parviceps,  SL,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  viii.  480,  1893.8 

276.  *retusum.  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  98,  1874 9 

277.  RUGOSULUM,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  68,  '69...S.A. 

278.  ^singulare,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  139,  1868.. W.A. 

279.  spenceri,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  221 10 

18.  Gen.   Neoscaphus,   Sloane,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc. 

N.S.W.  (2)  iii.  1888. 

280.  simplex,  SL,  I.e.  1120,  1888 6 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  17 

19.  Gen.   C  A  ii  e  n  a  k  c  h  u  s,   Sloaue,  Proc,  r.inn.  Soc. 

N.8.W.  1905,  XXX.  129. 
Eurygiiathus,^  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Au.st.  x,  12,  1887 
—EpilecfMs,^  Blackb.,  I.e.  111. 

281.  FORTis,  Blackb.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  1887,  x.  13 7 

282.  MASTERSi,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  68,  18G9 8? 

20.  Gen.  Carenidium,!  Chaudoir,  Ann.  Soc.  Enb. 

Belg.  xi.  U9,  1868. 
Gono])tert(,m,j  Chaudoir,  (gen.  ined.)  I.e.  148. 

283.  aberrans,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  218....  2 

284.  BICORNUTUM,  Macl.,  op.  cit.  {'2)  ii.  128,  1887 2 

285.  CHAUDOiRi,  Macl.,  I.e.  125 2 

286.  DAMELi,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  69,  1869 2 

287.  DARLiNOENSE,  Macl.,   Proc.  Linn.  Soc.   N.S.W.   (2)  ii.  124, 

1887 : N.S.W. 

288.  GAGATiNUM,  MacL,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  N.S.W.  i.  136,  1864...  7 

289.  LEAi,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  223 8 

290.  MODESTUM,  SI.,  op.  cit.  (2)  iii.  1119,  1888 1 

291.  MUCRONATUM,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  Iv.  1866..   7 

292.  PURPURATUM,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1905,  xxx.  129.2 

293.  PYRiPENNE,  fi\.,op.  cit.  1900,  xxv.  386 9 

294.  RIVERINE,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  i.  181, '65...  3,  4,  6 

amabile,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  135,  1868 6 

harnardi,  Macl,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)ii.  129,  1887.  3 

iiicornutimi,  Macl.,  l.e 3 

uidigue,  Chaud.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  148,  1868. 
iUtorale,  Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)ii.  128,  1887.3 
violaeeum,,  Macl.,  /.c.  127 4 

295.  SAPPiiiRiNUM,    Bates,  Ent.  Mo   Mag.  xi.  99,  1874 9 

296.  SEPTENTRioNALE,  Macl.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2)  ii.  126, 

1887 a. 

t  It  may  be  well  to  point  out  that  the  names  Carenidium  and  Conopteram 
do  not  appear  either  in  the  '  Nomenclator  Zoologicus  '  of  Scudder,  or  in  the 
'  Index  Zoologicus  '  (London,  1902). 
2 


18  CHECKLIST  OF  AUSTRALIAN  CAIiABIDj:,!, 

297.  8PALDINGI,  xMacL,  op.  ciL  ii.  214,  1878 1 

298.  suPEHBUM,  Cast.,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Vict.  viii.  135,  1868....  6,7 

kreuderce,  Macl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.W.  ii.  70,  18G9...  7 
lacnstre,  IMacl.,  op.  cit.  ii.  326,  1873 6 

299.  TROPiCALE,  Mad.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.(2)ii.  127, 1887...  2 

21.  Gen.  T  e  r  a  T  i  d  i  u  m.  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  99, 

1874. 
Mo nocentr urn, %C\\?iVidoir,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  145,  1868. 

300.  CONVEXUM,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1905,  xxx.  134...  2 

301.  FRENCH!,  SI.,   I.e.  133   1 

302.  GRANDiCEPS,  Cliaud.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  146,  1868...  2 

303.  LATicEPS,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  227..  9, 10 

304.  LONGiCEPS,  Chaud.,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Belg.  xi.  147,  1868...  3,6 

305.  MACROS,  Bates,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  xi.  100,  1874 1 

306.  "^'megacephalum,  Westw.,  Arcan.  Ent.  i.  86,  1842 1 

307.  PEHLONGUM,  SI.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1897,  xxii.  226..  8 


As  Entomologists  may  be  glad  to  know  the  dates  of  publication 
of  the  Parts  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of 
New  South  Wales,  the  following  list  is  appended  :  — 

Vol.  i.— Parti,  (pp.  i.-xvi.  :  1-74)— 1863. 

ii.  (pp.  xvii.-xxxvi.  :  75-154)  — 1864. 

iii.  (pp.  xxxvii.-l.  :  155-198) — 1865. 

iv.  (pp.  199-298)— 1865. 

V.  (pp.  li.-lxvi.  :  299  340)-  1866. 
Vol.  ii.— Parti,  (pp.  1-78)— 1869. 

ii.(pp.  79-158)— 1871. 
iii.  (pp.  159-238)— 1871. 
iv.  (pp.  239-318)  — 1872. 

V.  (pp.  319-370)— 1873. 

[Printed  olf  June  30th,  1905.] 


17' 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN 
COLEOPTERA.     Part  I. 

By  H.  J.  Carter,   B.A. 

Fam.  TENEBHIONID^. 
Pterohel.eus  ICARUS,  n.sp. 

Dull  opapue  black,  ovate,  slightly  convex. 

Head  large,  smooth,  lateral  border  of  epicranium  rounded  at 
base  angles  and  raised  but  not  toothed;  clypeus  slightly  convex 
and  rounded,  front  depressed.  Antennae  longer  than  prothorax 
(7  mm.),  last  four  joints  orbicular  and  closely  jointed.  Prothorax 
(5  X  12  mm.)  evenly  rounded,  strongly  transverse,  smooth,  with 
well  defined  broad  margin  of  even  width,  strongly  dentate  and 
flattened  posteriorly,  rounded  and  raised  anteriorly,  where  its 
angles  reach  to  one-third  the  length  of  and  close  to  the  head. 
Of  two  specimens  under  observation  one  shows  a  faint  medial  line. 
Elytra  (13-2  x  12*5  mm.)  oval,  parallel  to  half  their  length,  then 
regularly  rounded  to  apex,  depressed  at  humeral  region,  abruptly 
convex  behind;  margins  flat  and  broad  at  shoulders,  gradually 
narrowing  towards  apex.  Disc  of  elytra  with  three  indistinct 
costse,  which  become  obsolete  at  apex,  three  very  faint  striae 
between  these.  Femora  dilated,  tihioi  and  tarsi  clothed  beneath 
with  light  brown  hair.  Abdomen  densely  but  finely  striated 
longitudinally. 

^a6.— Forbes,  N.S.W.  (per  Mr.  W.  A.  Stephen,  of  Lachlan  Gold 
Fields),  also  Weddin  Mountains,  N.S.W. 

This  species  belongs  to  the  quasi-apterous  group  noticed  by 

Mr.  Lea  (these  Proceedings,  1896,  p. 284),  except  that  while  the 

wings  are  rudimentary  the  elytra  are  not  soldered  together.     It  is 

quite  distinct  from  any  Pterohelreus  with  which  I  am  acquainted, 

12 


178  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN  COLROPTERA,   I., 

though  in  size  and  general  outline  it  is  not  unlike  I\  Walkeri, 
Breme,  but  it  is  easily  distinguished  by  its  smoother,  opaque 
surface,  greater  convexity  (especially  of  apical  declivity),  border 
of  pronotum  more  reflexed  than  in  that  species. 

Encara  nigrum,  n.sp. 

Oval,  dull  black  covered  with  brownish  dust,  except  the  under 
part  of  tarsi  which  are  clothed  with  red  hair,  and  the  legs  which 
are  shiny  black.     Beneath  dull  black. 

^eac?  transverse,  minutely  longitudinally  rugose,  widest  in  front 
of  eyes,  lateral  border  reflexed,  towards  the  apex  narrowed  and 
rounded,  clypeus  straight.     Eyes  separated  by  about  the  diameter 
of  one  (wider  apart  than  in  E,  suhmaculatuni).      Antennce  short, 
3rd  joint  fully  as  long  as  4th  and  5th  jointly,  apical  four  longer 
than    preceding.       Prothorax  4x10  mm.   (length    measured    at 
centre,  width  at  base).     Disc  convex,  with  central  longitudinal 
ridge  strongly  marked  at  base,  finely  and  densely  punctate  (under 
the  pruinose  dust).     Lateral  flange  wide  at  base,   sharply  nar- 
rowing to  front  angles,  which  enclose  the  head  beyond  insertions 
of  antennas,  but  not  so  closely  as  in  E.  suhmaculatum.     Anterior 
angles  obtuse   and   blunt,  posterior   angles   bluntly  acute,  sides 
curving  inwards  and  downwards  at  these  angles.     Width  between 
anterior  angles  4  mm.      Base  strongly  bisinuate.     Scutellum  large, 
curvi-triangular  punctate  with  two  sides  ridged.      Elytra  11-12  x 
10*11  mm.     Same  width  at  base  as  prothorax,  then  widening  to 
half  way,    thence    roundly  narrowing    to    apex;    margins  wide 
except  at  apical  third  part,  where  they  are  narrower  than  in  E. 
suhmaculatum.      Lateral  border  reflexed.      Prominently  ridged 
at  suture,  this  ridge  causing  extreme  longitudinal  convexit}',  so 
that  viewed  sideways  it  is  much  higher  than  E.  submaculatum, 
while  its  highest  point  is  much  nearer  the  apex.     Whole  surface 
rugosely  punctate    and    uneven.      On   each  elytron   two  round 
humps  at  base  in  line  with  humeral  callus,  another  about  half- 
way near  suture,  more  or  less  connected  by  a  ridge  with  a  cor- 
responding  rising  on   lateral  flange.      Apical  declivity  steeper 
than  in  E.  suhmaculatum.     (Whether  a  lusiis  naturce  or  other- 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  179 

wise,  botli  of  my  specimens,  (J 9'  have  the  left  elytron  rather 
longer  than  the  right,  so  that  the  left  apical  angle  is  more 
prominent  and  acute  than  that  of  the  right  elytron).  Abdomen 
finely  and  longitudinally  rugose.  Legs  stouter,  claws  and  tarsi 
(especially  1st  and  -ith  of  posterior  pair)  longer  than  in  U. 
submaculatum.     Dimensions  15-16  x  11-12  mm. 

/Ta^.— Moruya,  N.S.W.  (Mr.  G.  W.  Cheesman). 

I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  G.  W.  Cheesman,  of  Moruya,  for  this 
interesting  addition  to  the  genus,  which  is  sufficiently  distinct 
from  the  other  five  species  recorded  by  Sir  William  Macleay 
(these  Proceedings,  1887).  I  have  compared  it  with  E.  submacu- 
lahim,  De  Breme,  since  that  is  the  commonest  of  the  genus  in 
New  South  Wales.  Of  this  latter  insect  Sir  William  says  it  is 
*'  by  no  means  common,  though  having  a  wide  range."  It  is  very 
common  in  the  Blackheath  district.  Blue  Mountains,  crawling  on 
the  trunks  of  Eucalyptus  trees,  protected  only  by  the  colouring. 

Menephilus  ^neus,  n.sp. 

Subparallel,  shining,  green-bronze  or  bronze.  Head  and  thorax 
darker  than  elytra.  Antennae,  tarsi  and  tibise,  under  side  of  legs 
and  abdomen  castaneous. 

Head  densely  and  minutely  punctate,  episternal  ridge  extend- 
ing between  the  insertions  of  the  antennae.  Antennae  about  the 
length  of  head  and  thorax  (2  mm,),  fine  at  base,  gradually  thick- 
ening to  apex,  11th  joint  large  and  rounded.  Frothorax  strongly 
punctate,  convex,  sides  subparallel,  slightly  marginate  at  base, 
where  the  angles  are  marked  and  rectangular,  closely  joining  the 
•elytra.  Front  of  prothorax  rounded  and  slightly  raised,  giving 
a  humped  appearance  when  regarded  lengthwise  from  behind. 
Elytra  acutely  ovate;  striate-punctate;  striations  deep.  Convex 
with  sides  parallel  for  two-thirds  of  length,  then  gently  narrowed 
to  apex.  Apical  declivity  steep  and  round.  Abdomen  densely 
punctate,  tibiie  slightly  arcuate.     Dimensions  6  x  2-2*2  mm. 

Hab. — Rose  Bay  and  La  Perouse,  near  Sydney,  under  bark  of 
rotting  logs  (H.  J.  Carter). 


180  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA,   I., 

This  apparently  rare  species  has  most  affinity  with  M.  rvjicornisy 
Champ.,  in  the  colour  of  antennae  and  legs,  size  and  general  out- 
line. It  is,  however,  a  much  flatter  insect,  its  colour  is  darker 
and  its  elytral  striation  deeper  and  more  regular. 

Otrintus  jacksoni,  n.sp. 

Elongate,  slightly  convex,  opaque,  black  throughout  except 
that  antenna?,  tarsi  and  tibia?  beneath  are  clothed  with  casta- 
neous  hairs. 

Head  as  long  as  broad  (3  mm.),  widest  at  the  eyes-  clypeus  with 
front  margin  straight  and  reflexed.  Frontal  impression  deep 
and  irregularly  coarsely  punctate-foveate  {$  wrinkled,  9  with- 
out wrinkles).  E^^es  widely  separate.  Antennae  long  and  stout, 
extending  slightly  beyond  base  of  prothorax,  3rd  joint  about  as 
long  as  -ith  and  5th  combined.  Pi'othorax  (4-5x4  mm.),  in  9 
widest  at  front  angles,  in  ^  widest  a  little  behind  the  front;  flat, 
with  fine  shallow  punctures,  emarginate  anteriorly,  margin  nar- 
row at  base,  sides  gradually  and  sinuously  narrowing  to  base. 
Anterior  angles  marked,  but  not  so  prominent  as  in  0.  Behri. 
Base  angles  rectangular,  wider  at  apex  than  at  base.  Median 
line  pronounced  throughout.  Elytra  {$  10*5  x  5,  9  11  x  5*6  ram.) 
less  convex  than  0.  Behri,  with  a  series  of  eleven  deep  strice  on 
each  elytron,  without  perceptible  punctures.  Two  strife  next 
suture  extending  to  apex,  the  others  alternately  joined  before 
reaching  apex.  Interstices  minutely  rugose.  Epipleurse  lightly 
punctate.  Legs  black,  joints  slightly  castaneous,  hind  tarsi  long, 
l.st  and  4th  joints  longer  than  in  0.  Behri.  Sternum  and  abdomen 
finely  but  not  densely  punctate.  Dimensions  16-17  x  5-5*6  mm. 
Hab.—Vpper  Bellinger  Biver,  N.S.W.  (S.  W.  Jackson,  Esq.). 
So  far  as  I  am  aware,  this  is  the  second  member  of  this  genus 
that  has  been  described.  It  diff'ers  widely  from  0.  Behri,  Germ., 
in,  inter  alia,  its  opaque  colour,  slenderer  and  flatter  form,  its 
infoveate  frontal  sculpture,  the  long  hind  tarsi,  and  its  antennae. 
(In  0.  Behri  the  3rd  joint  is  little  longer  than  the  4tli).  I  have 
named  it  from  its  discoverer,  who  generously  gave  me  a  pair. 


BY    n.    J.    CARTER.  181 

Adelium  helmsi,  n.sp. 

Purple-bronze,  shining,  under  surface  darker  bronze.  Legs 
piceous,  antennae  and  tarsi  brown, 

Hfiad  (3  X  4  mm.)  shining  and  ahnost  smooth,  widest  between 
the  eyes,  witli  a  high  rounded  transverse  ridge  between  the  eyes, 
above  which  is  a  well  marked  frontal  impression.  Antennae  stout 
and  clothed  with  brown  hairs,  3rd  joint  longer  than  4th  and  5th 
combined,  11th  longer  than  10th  and  rounded.  Frotliorax  (5  x 
7  mm.)  widest  slightly  behind  middle,  almost  semicircular  on 
sides,  with  sharper  declivity  at  base.  Sides  with  wide  reflex 
borders  and  well  marked  marginal  rim  the  whole  way  round. 
Sides  forming  obtuse  angle  at  apex  and  base,  wider  at  base  than 
at  apex  (5  mm.  base,  4  nun.  apex).  Surface  smooth  or  with 
variable  number  of  fove^e  (one  to  three)  near  the  middle  of  each 
lobe  of  disc.  ScuteUum  triangular,  with  rounded  angles.  Elytra 
(14  X  10  mm.)  very  convex,  sides  rounded  anteriorly,  then  gently 
curved  outwards  to  the  point  of  greatest  width  (a  little  behind 
half  Avay)  whence  they  abruptly  narrow  to  a  blunt  point.  Finely 
punctate-striate,  stride  scarcely  visible  on  sides.  In  some  speci- 
mens the  seven  interstices  form  an  interrupted  raised  line. 
Epipleuroi  smooth,  with  narrow  reflexed  border.  Abdomen 
smooth  and  shining,  tarsi  thickly  clothed  with  short  brown  hair. 
Dimensions  20-22  x  10  mm. 

llah. — Macleay  River,  N.S.W.  (Mr.  R.  Helms,  to  whom  I  am 
indebted  for  specimens);  also  taken  by  Mr.  Lea,  at  Ash  Island, 
N.S.W. 

Easily  distinguished  for  the  combination  of  size  and  bright 
bronze  colouring,  its  almost  circular  prothorax  and  its  marked 
convexity  from  any  Adelium  with  which  I  am  acquainted.  It 
has  the  size  of  A.  striatum,  Pasc,  the  colour  of  A.  ellijHicum, 
Blackb.,  and  elytral  sculpture  somewhat  like  A.  coiwexiuscidum, 
Macl. 

Adelium  reticulatum,  n.sp. 

Black,  shining.  Tarsi  and  front  tibiae  lightly  clothed  with 
short  brown  pubescence. 


182  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA,   I., 

Head  densely,  coarsely,  almost  regularly  punctate;  punctures 
less  frequent  on  apex  of  forehead  than  elsewhere.  Distinct 
transverse  impression  in  front  of  eyes.  Antennce  stout,  black  at 
base,  shading  off  to  brown  at  apex,  3rd  joint  the  length  of  4th 
and  5th  combined.  Each  of  last  three  joints  stouter  and  longer 
than  the  preceding,  11th  about  one-half  longer  than  the  10th. 
Prothorax  (3-2x5  mm.)  cordate,  with  apical  angles  prominent 
and  acute.  Sides  reflexed;  widest  towards  basal  half.  Strongly 
sinuate  and  incurved  towards  base ;  base  angles  rectangular. 
Slightly  sinuate  and  less  abruptly  incurved  towards  apical  angles. 
Smooth  narrow  reflexed  border  round  the  whole  prothorax,  which 
is  densely  and  coarsely  punctate.  Medial  line  well  marked  in 
one  specimen,  in  another  barel}^  perceptible  on  basal  half.  Scu- 
tellwn  almost  circular  and  finely  punctate.  Elytra  subparallel 
to  near  apex,  wider  than  thorax  (7  or  8  x  5  or  5*5  mm.),  shoulders 
slightly  rounded,  strongly  striate-foveate,  fovese  forming  a  regular 
network,  reticulation  longer  than  broad  and  strongly  punctate^ 
as  also  the  interstices,  which  are  regular  and  narrower  than  the 
fovese.  Epipleurie  minutely  punctate.  Four  anterior  tibiae 
slightly  curved.     Dimensions  11-12  x  5-5-5  mm. 

Hah. — Kurrajong,  KS.W.  (H.  J.  Carter). 

A  distinct  species,  nearer  A.  plicigerum,  Pasc,  than  any  other 

species  known  to  me  in  the  sculpture,  but  differs  in  the  stronger 

sculpture,  in  shape  of  prothorax,  in  its  darker  colour  and  smaller 

size. 

Adelium  violaceum,  n.sp. 

Violet-bronze,  shining,  elongate-ovate,  convex.  Head  and 
thorax  dark  violet-black.  Elytra  and  abdomen  much  lighter 
shade.  Legs  dark  bronze,  except  at  knees.  Antennae,  palpi  and 
tarsi  light  chestnut. 

Head  finely  but  densely  punctate,  epistoma  prominent  and 
rounded.  Forehead  with  central  ridge  at  apex,  and  slight 
depression  on  each  side  of  this  ridge  near  the  eyes.  Antennce 
thick  and  long,  reaching  considerably  behind  prothorax,  joints 
not  so  distinctly  marked  as  in  most  other  species,  hirsute,  3rd 
joint  as  long  as  4th  and  5th  combined,  in  colour  varying  from 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  183 

bright  chestnut  (joints  1-3)  to  a  pale  brown  (joints  4-11).  Pro- 
thorax  (3  X  4-4-5  mm.)  finely  punctate,  with  well  marked  longi- 
tudinal fovese  near  each  side  margin,  and  irregularly  shaped  fovese 
at  base  angles.  Sides  narrowly  emarginate.  Apical  angles 
obtuse  but  distinct.  Sides  irregularly  sinuate,  greatest  width 
towards  basal  half  where  the  sides  are  abruptly  narrowed  and 
sinuate  so  that  base  angles  are  subrectangular.  Elytra  wider  than 
prothorax  (8-9  x  5-5'7  mm.)  regularly  and  deeply  striate.  Inter- 
stices regular  and  convex.  ^^^ip/eM?Te  minutely  punctate.  Under 
surface  nitid,  but  densely  and  minutely  punctate.  Dimensions 
13-14  X  5-5-7  mm. 

Ilab. — Tweed  River  (near  Murwillumbah;  H.  J.  Carter). 

Its  general  shape  and  regular  striation  of  the  elytra  give  it  the 
appearance  of  a  dwarf  A.  striatum,  Pasc,  from  which  it  widely 
differs  in  size  and  colour. 

Adelium  minor,  n.sp. 

Bronzy-olive,  very  nitid,  convex,  ovate.  Antennae,  legs  and 
palpi  red,  under  surface  a  pale  brown. 

Head  minutely  punctate,  frontal  depression  well  marked, 
epistoma  large  and  rounded.  Anteurue  with  lst-4th  joints  very 
line,  each  joint  onward  stouter  than  the  preceding,  9th  and  10th 
markedly  stouter  than  8th,  11th  largest  of  all  and  rounded. 
Frothor ax  about  as  long  as  broad  (1*7  mm.),  apex  and  base  about 
the  same  width;  feebly  emarginate  at  base;  strongly  convex. 
Sides  evenly  rounded,  greatest  width  at  middle,  joining  front  and 
base  obtusely,  minutely  punctate  without  a  trace  of  medial  line. 
SciUellum  finely  punctate.  Elytra  strongly  striate-punctate, 
shoulders  rounded  and  not  meeting  prothorax;  slightly  wider 
than  prothorax;  subparallel  to  a  little  bej'ond  half-way,  where 
they  are  sharply  rounded  to  an  obtuse  joint  at  the  apex;  striations 
and  punctures  marked  and  regular;  interstices  flat.  Epvpleurce 
densely  and  finely  punctate.     Dimensions  4-5-5  x  2  mm. 

Hah. — Ourimbah,  N.S.W.  (under  damp  moss  in  thick  scrub; 
H.  J.  Carter). 


184  NEAV   SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA,  I., 

Apparently  has  some  artinity  with  A.  ininutum,  Lea,  as  to  size 
and  colour,  but  differs  in  the  measurements  of  prothorax  and 
shape  of  elytra.  I  showed  the  specimen  to  Mr.  Lea,  who  was 
certain  of  the  distinctness  from  A.  minutum.  I  subsequently 
verified  this  distinction  by  an  examination  of  A.  minutum  in  the 
Macleay   Museum;    it  is  a   much   narrower  insect  of    a  darker 

colour. 

Adelium  globulosum,  n.sp. 

Shining  black-bronze,  extremely  convex  and  globular.  Antennae, 
palpi  and  knees  dark  red.     Tarsi  light  red. 

Head  strongly  punctate, -frontal  impression  shallow,  epistoma 
rounded  and  projecting.  Antennce  stout,  slightly  increasing  to 
apex,  11th  joint  ovate  and  longer  than  10th.  Prothorax  (1  x 
I'-lmm.)  strongly  convex  and  rounded  at  apex,  less  markedly 
narrowed  at  base,  which  is  truncate  and  continuous  with  the 
elytra,  no  sign  of  medial  line,  small  fovefe  at  middle  of  sides. 
Elijtra  with  shoulders  slightly  rounded  and  little  wider  than 
prothorax,  then  slightly  widening  to  about  half-way  where  the}^ 
are  sharply  curved  to  a  bluntly  pointed  apex.  Striate-punctate 
in  rows  of  well  marked  punctures,  striae  not  deep,  interstices 
flat,  2nd  and  4th  wider  than  1st  and  3rd,  strongly  convex,  with 
abrupt  and  round  apical  declivity.  Epipleurce  densely  and  strongly 
punctate.  The  whole  under  side  is  densely  punctate,  the  sternum, 
which  is  black,  almost  rugose,  abdomen  a  shiny  bronze  and 
-covered  with  punctures,  especially  as  to  the  apical  segment. 
Dimensio7is  5  5  x  3  mm. 

Hab. — Kurrajong,  X.S.W.  (H.  J.  Carter). 

A  very  stout,  thick  insect  differing  markedly  from  A.  'minor  in 
shape  of  prothorax,  less  marked  stria3  on  elytra  but  stronger 
punctuation,  especially  beneath. 

CoRiPERA  morleyana,  n.sp. 
Flat,  ovate,  shining  bronze.     Head  and  disc  of  prothorax  dark 
bronze,  margins  of  elytra,  tarsi,  four  apical  joints,  and  all  under 
side  of    antennae  castaneous.      Lender  surface  and    legs    black- 
bronze. 


BV    11.     J.     CAKTER.  185 

Head  irregularly  covered  with  shining  bronze  rugosity,  frontal 
impression  forming  a  small  raised  horseshoe  curve  between  the 
insertions  of  antennas  with  convexity  behind.  Eyes  prominent, 
widely  separated,  strongly  granulated.  Epistoma  slightly  emar- 
ginate  and  bisinuate.  AntenncE  short  (3-5  mm.),  stout,  1st  joint 
thick,  2nd  small,  3rd  ver}^  little  longer  but  slighter  than  -ith, 
5th-10th  gradually  stouter,  11th  largest  and  ovate.  Prothorax 
(3  X  4  vix  mm.)  transverse,  slightly  convex  in  front,  strongly  and 
irregularly  punctate-rugose.  Sides  and  disc  having  irregular 
depressions,  sides  gently  rounded  in  front,  sinuate  and  subrectan- 
gular  at  base;  apical  angles  rounded  but  prominent,  basal  angles 
dentate,  width  at  base  between  teeth  3  mm.  Elytra  (6-5  x  4  mm.) 
about  as  w^ide  at  shoulders  as  prothorax  at  widest,  thence  parallel 
for  over  -|  of  length,  then  sharply  narrowed  to  a  blunt  point  at 
apex,  the  abrupt  longitudinal  convexity  forming  with  the  lateral 
curve  an  apparent  depression  and  break  in  outline  near  apex. 
Interruptedly  striate-punctate,  the  strias  consisting  of  three  series: 
(V?)  from  two  to  three  striae  on  each  side  of  suture  extending  from 
base  almost  to  apex  finely  punctate;  (h)  a  series  of  stria?  inter- 
rupted by  reticulate  rugose  sculpture,  reticulation  irregular  but 
generally  longitudinal,  extending  to  the  margin;  (c)  two  well 
marked  marginal  strise  on  the  light-coloured  border.  Epipleuroi 
coarsely  punctate.  Legs  smooth,  nitid,  tibiae  slender  and  slightly 
curved,  femora  thicker.  Under  side  smooth  and  shining.  Dimen- 
sions 9-10  X  3-5-4  mm. 

Hah. — Mt.  Irvine,  Blue  Mts.  (under  logs;  E.  Ferguson  and 
H.  J.  Carter);  Kurrajong  (Mr.  A.  M.  Lea). 

This  species  is  nearest  to  C.  ocellata^  Pasc.  (of  those  known  to 
me),  from  which  it  differs  in  the  widely  different  sculpture  of 
■elytra,  from  which  the  ocellate  pattern  is  wanting.  Its  size, 
colour  and  shape  sutticiently  distinguish  it  from  C.  yeniinata^  Lea, 
C  distincta,  Carter,  and  C.  deplanata,  Boisd. 

The  comparative  shortness  of  the  3rd  joint  of  antenn<\?  and 
the  curious  depressions  or  pits  on  the  prothorax  are  characteristic. 
These  pits  vary  in  number  from  4-6,  and  in  position,  in  different 
specimens,  but  there  is  generally  one  large  shallow  depression 


186        NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA,  I., 

about  the  middle  of  the  disc,  and  a  deep  punctate  pit  near  the 
border.  (I  have  named  this  interesting  insect  after  Mr.  H. 
Morley,  on  wliose  land  it  was  found,  and  to  whose  hospitality  we 
owed  much.) 

CORIPERA    DISTINCTA,   n.sp. 

Flat,  ovate,  shining,  dark  bronze.  Under  side  of  tarsi  casta- 
neous.  Under  surface  and  legs  shining  black.  Antennae  and 
palpi  dull  black. 

Head  coarsely  punctate,  except  on  epistoma,  where  punctua- 
tion is  finer  and  denser.  Eyes  prominent,  globular  and  coarsely 
granulated.  Strongly  impressed  bisinuate  epistomal  ridge,  with 
convex  central  part,  seen  from  behind,  swollen.  Antennce  stout, 
5  mm.  long,  1st  joint  short  and  thick,  2nd  small,  3rd  about  as 
long  as  4th  and  5th  together,  8-11  evidently  larger  than  preceding 
and  hirsute,  11th  bluntly  ovate.  Prothorax  (3*5  x  5  mm.)  strongly 
transverse,  disc  slightly  convex  in  front;  in  general  an  evident 
median  line.  (In  two  out  of  tive  cases  before  me,  only  visible  on 
front  of  disc.)  Whole  surface  rugose,  marginal  rugosity  trans- 
verse. Disc  with  irregular  (in  number  and  position)  deep 
depressions,  filled  with  punctures,  one  larger  than  others,  generally 
on  middle  of  disc.  Margin  broad  with  narrow  recurved  border^ 
front  angles  blunt  but  prominent,  reaching  to  one-half  width  of 
eyes;  from  here  the  sides  widening  gradually  to  about  J  length 
of  prothorax,  where  they  round  in  a  sharp  curve  to  base,  to  meet 
at  right  angles  a  strongly  toothed  base  angle.  Width  between 
teeth  1  mm.  Elytra  (8-9  x  5-5-5  mm.)  as  broad  at  base  as  pro- 
thorax at  widest  (in  one  specimen  before  me  distinctly  wider),  sides 
parallel  for  %  of  length,  then  sharply  narrowed;  ap)ical  declivity 
steep,  elytra  meeting  almost  at  a  point.  On  each  elytron  four 
rows  of  geminate  striae,  faintly  punctate  (stride  rarely  conjoined 
so  as  to  appear  as  enclosing  long  o\'al  spaces).  Between  these, 
three  rows  of  ocellate,  longitudinal  rings,  generally  eight  in 
number,  becoming  fainter  towards  apex.  Epii^leuro',  shallowly 
punctate.  Scutellum  small,  transverse  and  finely  punctate. 
Leys  with  tibire  distinctly  curved,  under  side  of  tarsi  and  tibiae 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  187 

densely  clothed  with  castaneous  pile.  Dimensions  11-14x4  5- 
55  mm. 

Hah. — Blue  Mts.  (Medlow  and  Grose  Valley;  under  logs; 
Garter). 

Differs  from  C.  oceUata,  Pasc,  in  its  larger  size,  darker  colour, 
absence  of  light  border,  shape  of  prothorax  and  sculpture  of 
elytra;  from  C.  geminata,  Lea,  in  its  more  coarsely  sculptured, 
more  transverse  and  differently  shaped  prothorax  (C.  (jeminata 
being  without  the  basal  dentation),  wider  elytra  and  other 
particulars;  from  C.  morleyana  in  its  widely  different  sculpture, 
size  and  colour. 

I  am  indebted  for  the  above  note  on  C.  geminata,  as  for  much 
other  valuable  information,  to  Mr.  A.  M.  Lea,  to  whom  I  sent  a 
specimen  of  the  above  for  comparison. 

Family  (EDEMERID.E. 
PSEUDOLYCHUS    MONTANUS,  n.sp. 

Head,  antenna?  (except  base  of  four  apical  joints,  which  are 
red),  palpi,  legs  and  abdomen  black  and  shining ;  shoulders, 
margin  and  apical  J  of  elytra  red,  the  rest  of  the  elytra  dull  black. 

Head  with  the  portion  in  front  of  base  of  antennae  consisting 
of  three  divisions: — (1)  a  small  round  epistoma  ;  (2)  a  raised 
frontal  impression;  (3)  small  round  shining  lateral  impressions 
between  (1)  and  (2).  Front  densely  punctate,  eyes  large,  promi- 
nent and  granulated.  Antennoi  (of  ,^)  6-2  mm.  long;  1st  joint 
stout  and  filiform,  2nd  joint  much  shorter  than  others,  3rd-6tli 
serrate  and  flattened,  3rd  wider  than  4th,  4tli  than  5th,  5th  than 
6th,  7th-llth  linear  and  red  at  base  :  (of  9)  ^'^  mm.  long,  joints 
all  linear  and  slighter  than  in  (J,  1st  stout  and  long,  2nd  very 
short,  7th-l  1th  as  in  ^  but  slighter.  Prothorax  about  same  length 
as  head,  1-5  mm.,  widest  at  middle,  where  it  is  as  wide  as  the 
head  between  the  eyes,  narrowing  gently  towards  base  and  apex, 
which  are  of  equal  width.  Strong  oval  lateral  depression  on  each 
side  at  the  widest  part.  Raised  medial  line  not  extending  to 
the  base.     Elytra  subparallel,  slightly  wider  at  base  than  at  apex, 


188  NEW  SPECIKS  OF  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA,   I., 

wliich  is  rounded,  elytra  slightly  separated  at  apex.  Four  rather 
indistinct  costse  extending  from  base  to  near  the  apex;  3rd  on 
black  part;  the  4th  on  red  margin.  Cost?e  less  pronounced  in  9. 
Dimensions  10  x  2*5-3  mm. 

Ifah. — Blackheath,  N.S.W.  (taken  on  flower  of  Eucalyptus 
atricta;  H.  J.  Carter). 

Differs  from  the  congeneric  P.  marginatus^  to  which  it  bears  a 
superficial  likeness,  in  having  the  whole  thorax  black,  in  its 
pronounced  prothoracic  lateral  projections,  in  the  sculpture  of  the 
head,  in  having  less  red  on  apical  joints  of  antennae,  etc. 

PSEUDOLYCHUS    RUFIPENNIS,    n.sp. 

Elongate,  parallel,  moderately  convex.  Black  throughout, 
except  the  elytra  which  are  a  pale  red.  Head,  antennae  and 
prothorax  very  similar  to  P.  hcemorrJioidalis,  Fabr.,  but  the  ej^es 
are  larger  and  more  prominent,  while  the  lateral  depressed  lobes 
of  the  pronotum  occupy  a  relatively  larger  space. 

Elytra  very  little  wider  posteriorly  than  anteriorly;  pubescent 
and  entirely  concolorous.  SciUellam  black  and  finely  punctate. 
Dimensions  11  x  3'5  mm. 

//a^,._Blackheath,  Blue  Mts.  (H.  J.  Carter). 

The  structural  likeness  suggests  that  this  is  possibly  onl}'  a  red 
variety  of  P.  luenion'/ioidalis,  Fabr.,  but  the  total  absence  of  any 
black  colour  on  the  elytra,  its  more  parallel  sides  and  convex 
form,  and  its  larger  eyes,  sufficiently  distinguish  it  from  that 
.species,  which  T  have  not  yet  met  with  in  this  district. 

Pseudolycus  pitberiUus,  Blackb. — I  have  been  able  to  identify 
this  insect  from  the  Blue  Mts.  which  Mr.  Blackburn  described* 
from  the  female.  He  is  correct  in  stating  the  colour  to  be 
variable.  I  have  specimens  in  which  the  black  markings  on  the 
elytra  vary  from  a  broad  band  extending  from  the  base  almost  to 
the  apex,  to  a  thin  black  line  on  each  side  of  the  suture, 
thickening  towards  the  apex.     The  male  differs  from  the  female 

*  Trans.  Koy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  Vol,  xxiii.,  S7,  1899, 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  189 

in  its  smaller  and  narrower  form,  in  having  linear  antennae,  of 
which  segments  8,  9  and  10  are  yellow  or  pale  red,  except  at  the 
joints  which  are  black. 

P.  elegantulus,  Blackb. — An  example  of  this  occurred  to  me 
at  Bulli,  N.S.W. 

P.  luchtosus,  Boisd. — I  have  identified  this  from  Mt.  Macedon, 
Vic. 

P.  viarglnatus,  Guer. — Fairly  plentiful  in  the  Blue  Mts., 
N.S.W. 

Family  PEDILID^. 

Egestria  albilineata,  n  sp. 

Head,  prothorax  and  elytra  a  slightly  shining  bronze-black,  all 
thickly  covered  with  long  blackish  hairs.  Palpi  and  two  basal 
joints  of  antennae  castaheous,  the  rest  darker;  three  apical  joints 
black,  the  suture  of  elytra  narrowly  whitish,  a  white  longitudinal 
vitta  a  little  broader  than  the  sutural  vitta  stretching  in  a  curve 
from  the  shoulder  to  near  the  apex  of  elytra,  the  space  between 
these  lines  gradually  narrowing  towards  the  apex. 

Head  2  mm.  long,  eyes  large  and  prominent,  a  deep  depression  on 
front  between  the  eyes.  Antennoi  of  $  3-5,  of  ^  5  mm.;  slender. 
Prothorax  2x1  mm.,  subcjdindrical,  slightly  attenuated  behind, 
well  defined  medial  channel,  rounded  and  slightly  protuberant  at 
front  angles.  Elytra  5x2  mm.,  widest  at  base,  shoulders 
rounded  but  subrectangular,  thence  gradually  tapering  to  the 
apex ;  flat  at  base,  more  convex  towards  apex.  Epipleurce 
strongly  punctate  and  non-pilose.  Abdomen  smd  sternum  whitish 
and  clothed  with  fine  recumbent  pile.  Dimensions  (J  10,  9  9  mm. 
long. 

Hah. — Gosford,  N.S.W.  (on  flower  of  Turpentine;  H.  J.  Carter). 
Also  taken  in  the  same  district  by  Mr.  W.  W.  Froggatt. 

This  species  is  readily  distinguished  by  the  three  white  lines 
on  the  black  ground  of  the  elytra,  its  narrow  prothorax,  and  its 
clear  cut  tapering  elytra. 


190 


NOTES  ON   THE  EUCALYPTS  OF  THE  BLUE 
MOUNTAINS. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden  and  R.  H.  Cambage. 

We  have  botanically  explored  the  Blue  Mountains  for  many 
years,  but  the  part  more  particularly  dealt  with  in  this  paper  is 
that  near  the  Main  Western  Road  and  extending  from  Emu 
Plains  to  Eskbank.  Recently  we  walked  leisurely  over  the 
Blue  Mountains  from  Penrith.  We  have  also  recently  explored 
the  Cox's  River  on  Allan  Cunningham's  tracks,  and,  for 
the  purpose  of  making  specific  observations,  we  spent  three 
weeks  in  collecting  material  for  this  paper,  with  Blackheath 
for  a  centre.  We  believe  that  no  list  of  the  Eucalypts  of 
the  Blue  Mountains  has  hitherto  been  published.  The  summer 
of  1904-5  will  be  remembered  by  us  as  the  best  season  for 
obtaining  seedlings  and  sucker  foliage  of  Eucalypts  that  has 
presented  itself  for  a  number  of  years.  This  was  in  con- 
sequence, in  part,  of  the  exceptionally  dry  spring.  The 
descriptions  of  the  seedlings  were  drawn  up  from  living  specimens 
in  the  field,  and  most  of  them  are  new.  Except  on  the  lower 
parts  of  the  mountains  east  of  Spring  wood,  there  are  neither  Box 
nor  Ironbark  trees,  as  both  avoid  cold  country;  and  it  may  be 
mentioned  that  none  of  them  occur  in  Tasmania.  E.  coriacea, 
A.  Cunn.,  is  also  a  notable  absentee  from  the  Blue  Mountains 
proper.* 

We  desire  to  invite  attention  to  our  observations  on  possible 
Eucalyptus  hybrids. 

*  E.  coriacea  has  been  recorded  from  Mount  Wilson  by  Rev.  Dr.  Woolls 
(these  Proceedings,  1887,  p.  6),  and  also  by  Mr.  A.  G.  Hamilton  (these 
Proceedings,  1899,  p.  358),  but  we  have  not  collected  it. 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN  AND  R.  H.  CAMBAGE.  191 

1.  Eucalyptus  Moorei,  sp.nov. 

Syn.  E.  stellulata,  Sieb.,  var.  angusti/olia,  Benth.,  B.Fl.  iii.  201. 
See  also  further  synonom}^  in  Maiden's  '  Critical  Revision  of  the 
Genus  Eucalyptus,'  v.  129,  together  with  figs.  5a,  .56  and  6  of 
Plate  2.5. 

An  erect,  rather  slender  shrub  of  up  to  10  or  12  feet  in  height, 
with  a  stem  diameter  of  2  to  4  inches.  It  forms  dense  masses  of 
small  area,  reminding  one  somewhat  of  a  whipstick  Mallee,  but 
lacking  the  root  stockiness  of  that  form  of  Eucalyptus  growth. 

Juvenile  leaves  narrow-lanceolate,  glaucous  blue,  the  plant 
sometimes  flowering  while  still  in  the  opposite-leaved  stage. 
Leaves  profusely  dotted  with  oil  glands. 

Mature  leaves. — "  Leaves  narrow,  very  thick  and  smooth, 
scarcely  showing  the  venation"  (Benth.).  Shiny  on  both  sides; 
the  tips  of  the  leaves  often  hooked. 

Buds  arranged  in  stellate  clusters  with  longish  sharply  pointed 
opercula.     Opercula  sometimes  red  in  fresh  specimens. 

Flowers  in  dense  heads  of  four  or  five  to  ten  and  even  more. 
Anthers  small  and  reniform.  Borne  in  profusion  in  the  axils  of 
the  leaves. 

Fruits  in  dense  heads,  say  half  an  inch  in  diameter.  The  com- 
mon peduncle  absent  or  very  short;  the  pedicels  always  wanting. 
The  individual  fruits  of  the  size  of  a  peppercorn,  smooth  (often 
dotted  when  fresh),  rim  narrow,  and  valves  always  sunk. 

Bark  smooth,  with  the  outer  bark  peeling  off  in  ribbons. 

Timber  pale,  nearly  white. 

Ilab. — On  the  highest  parts  of  the  Blue  Mountains. 

Affinities. — (1)  Its  affinity  with  F.  stellulata,  Sieb.,  is  very  close, 
and  it  has  been  long  looked  upon  as  a  variety  of  that  species. 
The  forms  are,  however,  sharply  separated  by  the  broad  juvenile 
foliage  of  F.  stellulata.  The  mature  foliage  of  F.  stellulata  is 
also,  as  a  rule,  much  broader,  while  F.  stellulata  attains  the 
dignity  of  a  medium-sized  tree. 

(2)  Its  aflinity  to  the  narrow-leaved  form  of  F.  stricta,  Sieb., 
has  already  been  indicated  by  Bentham  (B.Fl.  iii.  201),  and,  when 
mature  leaves  are  alone  available,  it  is  very  difficult  and  perhaps 


192  NOTES  ON"  THE   EL'GALYPTS  OF  THE  J3LUE  MOUNTAINS, 

ordinarily  impossible  to  distinguish  the  two  species.     The  juvenile 
leaves,  buds  and  fruits,  however,  sharply  separate  them. 

It  is  named  in  honour  of  the  late  Charles  Moore,  for  many 
years  Director  of  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

2.  E.  AMYGDALINA,  LabiU. 

This  species,  as  a  medium-sized,  elegant  tree,  redolent  with  a 

pleasing  odour,   is    common    on    the  higher   parts  of    the    Blue 

Mountains.     Along  the  road  we  first  came  across  it  at  the  top  of 

the  big  hill,  about  a  mile  from  Lawson  on  the  way  to  Wentworth 

Falls. 

3.   E.  AMYGDALINA,  Labill.,  var.  nitida,  Benth. 

We  found  this  in  a  gully,  going  west  from  the  Baptist  Church 
at  Blackheath,  a  small,  smooth-stemmed  shrub  of  3  to  4  feet, 
adjacent  to  shrubs  of  E.  Moorei,  Maiden  and  Cambage.  Inter- 
mediate foliage  (suckers)  slightly  glaucous,  and  emitting  a  pepper- 
mint odour  when  crushed,  though  much  less  than  the  form  of 
amygdalina  common  on  the  Blue  Mountains.  Opercula  remark- 
abl}^  red,  hemispherical  and  dotted. 

Mr.  Maiden  has  dealt  with  this  form  at  some  length  in  his 
'  Critical  Revision,'  Part  vi.,  p.  163,  and  announces  the  discovery 
of  this  variety  at  Mt.  Victoria.  Our  Blackheath  specimens  are 
identical  w^ith  the  Mt.  Victoria  ones. 

We  now  raise  the  question  that  E.  nitida,  Hook,  f.,  (reduced 
to  a  variety  of  E.  amygdalina,  LabilL,  by  Bentham)  may  be  a 
valid  species  after  all.  We  have  not  juvenile  foliage  in  the 
earliest  stage,  but  the  coriaceous  leaves  in  the  intermediate  stage 
seem  to  be  sufficiently  distinct  from  those  of  E.  amycjdalina. 

4.    E.   REGNANS,   F.V.M. 

Occurs  at  the  foot  of  Govett's  Leap,  Blackheath,  and  Hassan's 
Walls,  while  it  is  common  on  basalt-capped  mountains  such  as 
Mts.  Tomah  and  Wilson. 

5.  E.  DIVES,  Schauer. 

Occurs  at  Mount  Victoria,  becomes  common  between  Bell  and 
Eskbank,   and    is   plentiful   around    Bowenfels.       Being  a  cold 


BY  J.   H.   MAIDEN  AND  R.   H.   CAMBAGE.  193 

country  species,  it  is  not  found  towards  the  eastern  edge  of  the 
Blue  Mountains. 

6.  E.  EUGENioiDES,  Sieb. 

One  of  the  commonest  species  of  the  Blue  Mountains,  being 
found  practically  all  over  the  range.  It  is  the  commonest 
Stringy  bark. 

7.   E.  EUGENioiDEvS,  Sicb.,  var.  nana,  Deane  and  Maiden. 

Common  on  exposed  situations,  King's  Tableland,  Wentworth 
Falls. 

8.    E.   CAPITELLATA,  Sm. 

We  now  draw  attention  toa  Eucalypt  from  the  Blue  Mountains 
which  has  almost  invariably  gone  under  the  name  of  E.  capi- 
tellata^  Sm.,  but  which  is  worthy  of  special  remark.  We  will 
proceed  to  describe  it'. 

Bavk. — Not  a  perfect  Stringy  bark  as  compared,  e.g.,  with 
macrorrhyncha,  which  is  more  fibrous.  The  more  fibrous  bark  is 
yellowish;  close  to  the  wood  it  is  white.  Has  clean  limbs,  at 
times  slightly  ribbony. 

Reference  to  the  bark  being  not  a  typical  Stringybark  is  borne 
out  by  the  Mt.  Wilson  name,  which  is  Messmate.  At  Blackheath, 
some  years  ago,  Mr.  H.  Deane  called  it  a  peppermint  bark,  and 
suggested  hybridism.  On  a  specimen  from  Jenolan  Caves,  the 
collector  ( W.  F.  Blakeley)  has  a  note  : — "  Bark  on  the  lower  por- 
tion of  stem  light  reddish-brown  ifi  colour,  resembling  Stringy- 
bark.     Upper  portion  grey.     Branches  yellowish-green." 

Tiinher  brownish. 

Juvenile  leaves. — The  margins  undulate  and  with  a  reddish 
rim  when  fresh.  The  leaves  roughish,  particularly  on  the  lower 
side,. owing  to  the  presence  of  stellate  hairs,  which  are  also  on 
the  edges  of  the  leaves  and  on  the  twigs. 

In  the  intermediate  stage  they  are  E^ige'niaAike  and  shining  on 
both  sides,  only  very  slightly  darker  on  the  upper  side. 

The  branchlets  are  brittle  and  appear  to  be  much  less  fibrous 
than  those  of  E.  mgenioides  in  the  vicinity. 

Mature  leaves  resemble  those  of  typical  E.  capitellata. 
13 


194:  NOTES  ON  THE  EUCALYPTS  OF  THE  BLUE  MOUNTAINS, 

Buds.  —  Clavate.  Mt.  Wilson  specimens  and  otliers  from  the 
higher  parts  of  the  Blue  Mountains  show  the  buds  rugose,  after 
the  fashion,  though  not  so  well  marked,  as  some  from  Victoria. 

Flowers. — Anthers  reniform. 

Ft'idts  packed  in  a  dense  head;  often  white-dotted.  In  the 
ripe  fruits  valves  well  exserted,  rather  more  so  than  in  E.  macror- 
rhyncha.  Indeed  the  Rev.  Dr.  Woolls  labelled  the  Mt.  Wilson 
specimens  E.  macrorrhyncha.  In  that  species,  however,  the  rim 
remains  domed  in  mature  fruits,  while  in  this  Blue  Mountain 
form  of  E.  capitellata  the  rim  is  turned  outwards  till  it  becomes 
almost  a  continuation  of  the  calyx. 

Hah. — We  have  collected  this  form  from  Woodford  to  Cox's 
River  (Bowenfels)  and  theJenolan  Caves,  and  also  at  Mt.  Wilson. 
Further  localities  to  connect  with  the  coast  will  be  looked  for. 

We  have  the  same  form  on  the  Clyde  Mountain  (Southern 
mountain  ranges),  No.  31,  W.  Biiuerlen,  July,  1890,  precisely 
matching  the  Blue  Mountains  form. 

In  the  Outer  Domain,  Sydney,  we  have  an  interesting  tree 
w^hich  is  unplanted,  and  which  attracts  attention  from  the  fact 
that  it  is  more  "  bark -bound  "  than  the  majority  of  E.  capitellata 
trees  around  Port  Jackson;  that  is  to  say,  the  bark,  though 
fibrous  in  texture,  is  thinner,  denser,  and  more  closely  appressed 
to  the  trunk. 

The  juvenile  leaves  and  the  intermediate  leaves  depart  from 
the  type,  being  narrower,  more  lanceolate,  and  more  closely 
resemble  those  of  the  Blue  IMountain  form  referred  to  at  p.  193. 

Incidentally  it  may  be  remarked  that  the  orbicular  suckers  of 
E.  capitellata  from  type-localities  (Port  Jackson)  would  appear 
to  be  a  product  of  an  exposed  situation.  All  the  forms  of  E. 
capitellata  appear  to  have  more  or  less  lanceolate  juvenile  leaves 
in  their  earliest  stage. 

Seedlings  raised  from  typical  capitellata  trees  early  take  on  a 
lanceolar  shape  with  entire  margins.  This  is  succeeded  by  an 
undulate  margin,  with  stellate  hairs  on  the  leaves  and  on  the 
irregularly  toothed  margin  and  petiole  and  rhachis. 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN  AND  R.  II.  CAMBAGE.  195 

These  display  a  remarkable  similarity  to  those  of  the  Blue 
Mountains,  and  it  seems  impossible  to  assume  other  than  that 
they  belong  to  the  same  species.  It  would  appear  impossible  to 
seize  on  characters  even  to  make  a  well-defined  variety. 

Both  of  us  have  independently  grown  seedlings  from  Port 
Jackson  and  Port  Hacking  seed,  and  we  cannot  see  any  difference 
between  these  seedlings  and  those  of  the  Blue  Mountain  trees. 

9.    E.   MACRORRHYNCHA,   F.V.M. 

At  Hassan's  Walls. 

10.    E.   PIPERITA,  Sm. 

This  is  a  common  tree  by  the  roadside  most  of  the  wa}^,  but 
does  not  continue  much  beyond  the  sandstone  area  towards 
AVallerawang. 

The  seedlings  are  cordate  at  the  base;  stem-clasping,  blunt,  or 
with  a  short,  sharp  apex.  They  are  arranged  decussately  and 
horizontally;  hardly  glaucous;  paler  on  underside.  Venation 
well  marked.     They  have  a  strong  peppermint  perfume. 

11.    E.    SlEBERIANA,  F.V.M. 

Has  a  range  very  similar  to  that  of  E.  jnperita,  and  is  confined 
to  the  more  barren  parts  of  the  mountains. 

The  seedling  leaves  are  vertically  arranged;  of  the  same  colour 
on  both  sides;  glaucous,  and  larger  than  those  of  B.  2:>iperita. 
The  venation  is  rather  acute  with  midrib. 

12.   E.  CoNSiDENiANA,  Maiden. 

Common  near  the  1:0  mile-post  (road),  and  the  last  tree 
observed  near  the  road  was  near  the  western  boundary  of  Portion 
12,  Parish  of  Linden  (nearly  midway  between  Linden  and  Wood- 
ford Stations). 

In  full  flower  at  10  feet  high,  and  the  only  Eucalypt  in  full 
flower  in  the  district  (12th  November).  It  is  usually  a  tree  of 
30  or  40  feet.  E.  pipei-ita  was  in  early  bud,  and  E.  Sieberiana 
had  nearly  flowered  off.     (It  has  been  suggested,  and  we  concur, 


196     NOTES  OS   THE  EUCALYPTS  OF  THE  BLUE  MOUNTAINS, 

that  E.  Co/isiclenia7ia  is  possibly  a  hybrid  between  the  two  species 
named). 

F.  jjiperita  fruits  in  large  masses  or  bunches,  while  E.  Con- 
sideniana  is  a  comparatively  shy  fruiter.  The  fruits  resemble 
those  of  E.  Sieheriana  a  good  deal. 

The  bark  of  E.  Consideniana  is  nearest  that  of  E.  piperita.  In 
small  trees,  E.  Consideniana  may  have  bark  as  smooth  as  piper'ita, 
which  is  really  quite  smooth,  fibrous  in  large  trees.  The  Blue 
Mountains  trees  of  E.  Sieheriana  have  not,  as  a  rule,  the  furrowed, 
Ironbark-looking  bark  of  the  typical  form,  and,  speaking  in 
general  terms,  the  bark  of  E.  Consideniana  presents  some 
resemblance  also  to  the  bark  of  the  trees  of  E.  Sieheriana,  with 
which  it  is  associated. 

13.  E.  STRICTA,  Sieb. 

Our  first  specimen  was  observed  just  past  Faulconbridge 
Station,  and  was  9  inches  in  diameter  with  a  height  of  20  feet. 
It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  the  young  leaves  contain  Caoutchouc, 
In  favourable  localities  this  species,  usuall}'  a  shrubby  plant, 
grows  taller,  with  fewer  flowers  and  coarser  foliaofe.  The  coarse- 
ness  of  the  species  appears  to  be  a  matter  of  good  soil  and  shelter. 
The  opercula  are  often  red  in  fresh  specimens. 

The  seedling  leaves  are  lanceolate,  erect,  equally  green  (bright 
or  sap-green)  on  both  sides.  The  oil  dots  on  the  juvenile  foliage 
are  well  marked.  The  young  twigs  are  reddish,  with  tubercles 
of  a  darker  colour. 

14.  E.  viRGATA,  Sieb.,  var.  altior,  Deane  &  Maiden  {E.  oreades, 
R.  T.  Baker). 

Found  in  the  valleys  or  on  the  taluses  of  the  hills  from  Spring- 
wood  higher.     Its  precise  range  is  a  matter  for  observation. 

Young  seedlings  remind  one  of  those  of  E.  Sieheriayia  a  good 
deal.  They  are  medium  lanceolate,  bluish-green,  equally  green 
on  both  sides.  Decussate  at  first,  after  two  or  three  pairs  they 
lose  their  horizontal  character.  At  length  they  are  more  or  less 
undulate  and  pendulous. 


BY  J.   II.   MAIDEN  AND  R.    II.  CA.MBAGE.  197 

The  true  atttiiity  of  this  species  appears  to  be  witli  E.  Sieh- 
eriana.  This  is  shown  in  the  seedlings,  and  to  a  less  extent  in 
the  fruits  and  timber. 

15.   E.  iLEMASTOMA,  Sni.,  var.  micrantiia,  Ben-th. 
{E.  micrantha,  DC.) 

This  small-fruited  form  continues  the  whole  way  across  the 
Mountains,  and  is  confined  to  the  poor  soil,  avoiding  the  deep 
valleys. 

The  seedling  leaves  tend  to  be  vertical,  and  therefore  are 
equally  green  (blue-green)  on  both  sides.  The  twigs  are  red,  as 
also  in  mature  specimens.  Venation  less  acute  than  in  E.  Sieb- 
eriana.  Certainly  as  regards  juvenile  leaves  there  is  a  close 
affinity  with  E.  Sic.beriana. 

16.  E.  crebra,  F.v.M. 
Occurs  at  Lapstone  Hill. 

17.    E.   PANICULATA,  Sm. 

On  Lapstone  Hill. 

18.  E.  siDEROPHLOiA,  Benth. 
Lapstone  Hill. 

19.  E.  MELLIODORA,  A.  Cunn. 

In  the  Kanimbla  Valley;  also  in  a  paddock  on  Jack  White's 
Creek,  half  a  mile  from  Hassan's  Walls.  It  is,  of  course,  common 
on  granite  country,  and  in  the  localities  cited  it  is  either  on 
granite  or  where  the  detritus  from  the  sandstone  ridges  is  not 
thick. 

20.    E.   GONIOCALYX,   F.V.M. 

A  common  tree  in  many  of  the  valleys  of  the  Blue  Mountains, 
at  least  from  Lawson  to  Bowenfels;  but  never  continues  right  up 
on  to  the  tableland  proper.  Besides  the  valleys,  it  is  often  found 
on  the  taluses  of  the  hills. 

21.  E.  Cambagei,  Deane  k  Maiden. 
Hartley  to  Hassan's  Walls. 


198  NOTES  ON  THE  EUCALYPTS  OF  THE  BLUE  MOUNTAINS, 

22.  E.  Deanei,  Maiden. 

In  the  Blue  Mountains  this  species  is  usually  confined  to  the 
valleys,  so  that  it  rarely  approaches  within  sight  of  the  Great 
U'estern  Road.  It  occurs  abundantly,  however,  close  to  the 
railway  line  at  Springwood,  having  followed  up  the  gullies  in  the 
vicinity. 

23.  E.  RESINIFERA,  Sm. 

The  well-known  Red  or  Forest  Mahogany  is  distributed  along 
the  roadside  till  the  vicinity  of  Linden  is  reached,  after  which  it 
was  not  noticed.  The  form  seen  between  Emu  Plains  and  Linden 
was  remarkable  for  its  very  short,  blunt  operculum,  but  could 
usually  be  distinguished  from  other  trees  with  stringy  bark  by 
its  large  leases. 

24.  E.  PUNCTATA,  DC. 

Lapstone  Hill  to  Springwood. 

25.   E.  GuNNii,  Hook,  f.,  var.  rubida,  Maiden  (E.  ri'hida,  Deane 

ct  Maiden). 

In  gullies  about  Blackheath,  Mt.  Victoria,  and  the  highest 
parts  of  the  mountains.  The  leaves  depart  a  little  from  the  type. 
Leaves  in  3^oung  trees  often  large,  drooping  and  undulate.  With 
twigs  of  absolutely  mature  foliage  and  with  the  buds,  as  they  are 
in  threes,  we  doubt  if  anyone,  in  the  absence  of  fruits  (and  per- 
haps with  difficulty  then)  can  differentiate  this  species  from 
vimiiialis. 

Of  course  with  suckers  the  matter  is  perfectly  easy. 

26.   E.  GuNNii,  Hook,  f.,  var.  maculosa.  Maiden  (U.  maculosa^ 
R.  T.  Baker). 

First  observed  on  the  Great  Western  Road  as  one  enters 
Katoomba.  Thence  forward  it  is  a  very  common  tree.  Puzzling 
intermediate  forms  of  E.  Gunnii.,  Hook,  f.,  are  found  at  Mt. 
Victoria  and  on  the  western  slopes  of  the  Blue  Mountains. 


BY  J.   H.   MAIDEN  AND   K.  H.   CAiMBAGE.  199 

27.  E.  viMiNALis,  Labill. 

On  basalt  and  on  sandstone  at  Mt.  Wilson;  at  Hassan's  Walls 
and  thence  to  Cox's  River;  also  Lowther  Road,  Mt.  Victoria  into 
Kanimbla  Valley;  also  Jenolan  Caves. 

'28.    E.   CORYMBOSA,  Sm. 

This  common  coastal  species  is  plentiful  on  the  Blue  Mountains 
till  the  vicinity  of  Wentworth  Falls  is  reached,  after  which  the 
elevation,  which  is  upwards  of  3000  feet  above  sea-level,  appears 
to  be  too  great  for  it. 

29.  E.  EXIMIA,  Schauer. 

Very  common  about  G-lenbrook  and  Blaxland,  but  was  not 
observed  beyond  Springwood.  October  is  the  usual  flowering 
time  for  this  species,  but  the  evidence  available  on  12th  Novem- 
ber last  went  to  show  that,  with  but  few  exceptions,  it  did  not 
flower  last  spring;  and  it  is  worthy  of  note  that  it  flowered  pro- 
fusely in  1900  and  1902,  but  was  almost  destitute  of  flowers  in 
1901  (vide  these  Proceedings,  1902,  p  206).  Many  of  the  trees 
were  rendered  attractive  in  November  by  the  display  of  purple 
foliage  on  the  young  shoots. 

We  now  bring  under  notice  three  Eucalypts  which  are  certainly 
suggestive  of  hybridisation.  They  are  all  rare  and  were  found 
by  us  at  Blackheath  during  January,  1905. 

A — A  tree  of  about  25  feet,  16  inches  in  diameter  at  2  feet 
from  the  ground. 

Juvenile  leaves  ovate-lanceolate,  decussate,  apex  somewhat 
blunt,  slightly  petiolate.  No  seedlings  over  four  inches  high 
were  procurable. 

Mature  leaves  bright  green,  rather  coriaceous,  veins  prominent 
and  spreading  from  the  base;  intramarginal  vein  at  a  considerable 
distance  from  the  edge. 

Buds. — Operculum  conical. 

Floivers. — Anthers  reniform. 


200     NOTES  ON  THE  EUCALYPTS  OF  THE  BLUE  MOUNTAINS, 

Fruits  in  umbels  of  up  to  six  or  eight  in  the  head;  the  peduncle 
say  I  inch  long,  and  the  pedicels  short,  but  distinct.  The  indi- 
vidual fruits  somewhat  pear-shaped,  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  in 
diameter,  the  rim  somewhat  domed,  and  the  valves  a  little 
exserted. 

Bark. — A  ribbony  gum.  For  the  bottom  three  feet  black, 
scaly;  the  rest  of  the  tree  smooth-barked,  thin  and  ribbony. 

Thnher  pale-coloured,  full  of  gum  veins  and  very  inferior. 

Affinities. — We  have  no  doubt  that  this  tree  is  closely  allied  to 
E.  stricta,  Sieb.,  or  that  F.  stricta  is  a  parent.  Its  foliage  and 
buds  resemble  those  of  F.  stricta;  its  bark  in  the  upper  part 
resembles  that  of  F.  stricta,  while  where  it  is  toning  off  from  the 
lower  it  reminds  one  of  that  of  F.  j^iperita,  8m.  Its  fruits  differ 
from  those  of  both  species,  while  both  have  sunken  ^•alves  as  a 
rule.  The  fruits,  as  regards  their  domed  shape,  remind  one  of 
those  of  F.  Guniiii,  Hook,  f.,  var.  maculosa,  somewhat. 

It  is  expected  that  juvenile  foliage  will  throw  light  upon  its 
affinities,  and  until  these  are  available  it  is  desirable  to  reserve 
judgment. 

On  the  Medlow  Road,  left  hand  side,  a  few  hundred  yards 
from  last  house  at  Blackheath. 

B — Forms  a  small  clump  of  about  10  saplings,  perhaps  from 
the  same  root.  They  are  10  feet  high,  and  the  stems  are  2-2 J 
inches  in  diameter.     Very  strict  in  habit. 

Juvenile  leaves  narrow-lanceolate,  broadening  while  still  in  the 
opposite  stage,  decussate,  apex  rather  blunt,  petiole  very  short, 
almost  stem-clasping.  These  leaves  certainly  remind  one  of  those 
of  E.  stricta,  Sieb. 

Mature  leaves  lanceolate  or  narrow-lanceolate,  thick,  in  most 
specimens  the  venation  not  prominent,  the  few  veins  seen  spread- 
in<^  from  the  base.  They  bear  some  resemblance  to  those  of 
Sieber's  Fl.  Nov.  Holl.  No.  472  (type  of  F.  stricta,  Sieb.). 

Buds  rather  clavate.     Operculum  nearly  conical  and  red. 

Flowers  nearly  capitate,  and  up  to  18  in  the  head. 


BY  J.   n.  MAIDEN  AND  R.   H.   CAMBAGE.  201 

Fruits  subcylindrical  or  truncate-ovoid.  Common  peduncle 
say  \  inch  long,  the  pedicels  distinct,  but  ver}^  short.  Edge 
sharp,  rim  distinct  and  tapering  inwards.  Valves  quite  included. 
Intermediate  in  size  between  those  of  E.  stricta^  Sieb.,  and  E. 
Moorei. 

Bark  smooth,  white,  slightly  ribbony. 

Timber  pale. 

Affinities. — Occurs  amidst  clumps  of  E.  Moorei,  Maiden  and 
Cambage,  and  near  masses  of  E.  striata,  Sieb.  We  cannot  but 
regard  it  as  strongly  suggestive  of  a  hybrid  of  both  these  species; 
certainly  it  appears  to  be  intermediate  between  these  two  species, 
with  a  leaning  towards  the  former,  from  which  its  most  obvious 
difference  is  its  larger  fruits  and  broader  seedling  leaves. 

►Short  of  seeing  the  actual  plants  and  specimens,  carefully 
executed  illustrations-  can  alone  make  their  characters  clear. 

C — A  sapling  tree,  say  4  inches  in  diameter  and  12  feet  high. 
One  small  clump  also  seen. 

Juvenile  Leaves. — Not  seen  in  the  earliest  stage,  but  in  what 
may  be  termed  the  intermediate  stage.  In  that  stage  they  are 
oval  or  oblong,  and  say  1^  inch  long  by  J  inch  broad  and  pro- 
fusely dotted  with  oil  glands. 

Mature  leaves  bright  green,  rather  coriaceous.  Veins  fairly 
prominent,  and  spreading  from  the  base;  intramarginal  vein  a 
considerable  distance  from  the  edge.  Tips  of  the  leaves  hooked 
as  a  rule.  Reminds  one  of  foliage  of  E.  stricta,  amongst  which 
it  grows,  though  the  venation  is  probably  more  prominent  than 
that  of  E.  stricta. 

Buds  numerous,  pointed,  and  in  heads,  giving  it  a  stellate 
aspect.  Hardly  so  clavate  as  those  of  E.  stricta,  but  not  seen 
ripe.     Four  to  ten  in  the  umbel. 

Flowers. — Expanded  ones  not  seen. 

Fruits  in  dense  heads,  the  common  peduncle  up  to  a  quarter 
of  an  inch,  pedicels  absent.  Individual  fruits  rarely  hemi- 
spherical, slightly  compressed  at  the  base,  rim  broad  and  reddish- 
brown,  slightly  domed,  tips  of  valv^es  flush  with  the  orifice. 


202     NOTES  ON  THE  EUCALYPTS  OF  THE  BLUE  MOUNTAINS. 

Bark  smooth,  very  long  ribbons. 

Timber  pale-coloured. 

Affinities. — The  surrounding  species  are  E.  stricta,  Sieb.,  E, 
Sieberiana,  F.v.M.,  E.  Moorei,  Maiden  and  Cambage,  and  E. 
Gitnnii,  Hook,  f.,  var.  maculosa,  Maiden  {E.  maculosa,  R.  T. 
Baker).  It  has  already  been  pointed  out  that  the  foliage 
resembles  that  of  E.  striata.  The  buds  exhibit  slight  resem- 
blances at  least  to  E.  stricta  and  to  E.  Gunnii,  var.  maculosa, 
particularly  to  the  former,  but  the  affinity  of  the  fruits  is  not  at 
present  obvious,  though  they  are  suggestive  of  some  forms  of 
both  E.  capitellata  and  E.  eugenioides,  to  which  trees  our  plant 
has  otherwise  not  the  slightest  resemblance;  and  it  may  turn  out 
to  be  a  good  species. 


203 


NOTES  ON  THE  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH 
WALES. 

By  R.  H.  Cam  bag  e. 

Part  iii.     Orange  to  Dubbo  and  Gilgandra. 

(Plates  ii.-iii.) 

These  notes  are  the  result  of  observations  made  at  various 
periods,  but  the  most  of  them  were  taken  in  October,  1904,  those 
referring  to  parts  of  the  country  between  Orange  and  Dubbo 
being  made  from  the  train.  At  Dubbo  various  plants  were 
collected,  but  from  there  to  Gilgandra  the  notes  refer  to  the 
country  in  the  vicinity  of  the  railway  line,  while  a  further 
collection  was  made  in  the  latter  district.  As  no  detailed 
examination  of  the  country  was  possible,  it  follows  that  many  of 
the  smaller  plants  have  been  overlooked,  but  the  appended  lists 
are  sufficient  to  convey  an  impression  of  the  general  character  of 
the  tiora  over  the  area  described. 

The  altitude  of  the  country  around  Orange  is  about  3000  feet 
above  sea-level,  while  at  Wellington  it  has  fallen  to  lOUO  feet, 
and  at  Dubbo  and  Gilgandra  the  heights  at  the  railway  stations 
are  867  and  942  feet  respectively.  The  climatic  influence  on  the 
vegetation  is  evident  owing  to  this  change  in  altitude,  with  its 
corresponding  difference  in  rainfall,  the  higher  country  around 
Orange  having  an  annual  rainfall  of  38  inches,  while  at  Welling- 
ton it  is  23*8  inches  and  at  Dubbo  22*8  inches,  according  to  the 
records  at  the  Sydney  Observatory. 

The  general  direction  of  Gilgandra  from  Orange  is  a  little  west 
of  north,  the  distance  being  approximately  120  miles,  and  the 
whole  of  the  area  described  is  within  that  valuable  wheat-growing 
belt  of  country  which  runs  throughout  New  South  Wales,  west 


/ 


I 

/ 


204  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,   IIL, 

of  and  nearly  parallel  to  the  Great  Dividing  Range,  and  situated 
partly  on  the  western  slopes  and  partly  on  the  eastern  margin 
of  the  great  plains. 

Some  species  of  Eucalyptus  noticed  near  Orange  continue 
southerly  along  the  highlands  and  extend  into  Tasmania,  though 
they  are  also  in  the  north  on  the  colder  parts  of  New  England 
as  well;  while,  on  the  other  liandj  several  plants  found  at 
Gilgandra,  and  which  require  much  warmer  conditions,  spread 
northwards  into  Queensland. 

The  distance  between  Orange  and  Wellington  is  about  55  miles; 
and  as  the  country  falls  gradually  the  whole  way,  in  all  nearly  2000 
feet,  this  area  is  one  in  which  the  change  of  flora  is  very  marked, 
and  is  chiefly  owing  to  the  difference  in  climatic  conditions. 
The  geological  formation  around  Orange  is  igneous  in  origin, 
niuch  of  it  basaltic,  but  in  proceeding  towards  Wellington  areas 
of  Silurian  slates  are  passed,  with  considerable  deposits  of  lime- 
stone near  Wellington.  Much  of  the  country  beyond  this  shows 
very  little  rock,  but  near  Dubbo  there  are  some  Triassic  sandstone 
tracts,  and  some  basaltic  flows ;  while  between  Dubbo  and 
Gilgandra,  except  for  some  patches  of  basalt,  very  little  rock  is 
seen,  and  the  country  begins  to  assume  the  characteristic  levels 
of  the  western  plains. 

The  Eucalypts  noticed  between  Orange  and  Wellington  were: — 
E.  mmMiaZ2.9,Labill.,(a  somewhat  drooping  White  Gum,  sometimes 
called  Manna  Gum),  E.  coriacea,  A.  Cunn.,  (White  or  Scribbly  or 
Cabbage  Gum),  E.  aniygdalina,  LabilL,  (Peppermint),  E.  Bridyes- 
iana,  R.  T.  Baker,  and  one  of  the  trees  identified  by  Baron  von 
Mueller  as  E.  Stuartiajia,  F.v.M.,  (Apple  or  Woollybutt),  E. 
mdliodora,  A.  Cunn.,  (Yellow  Box),  E.  ter^ticornis,  Sm.,  (Forest 
Red  Gum),  E.  macrorrhynclia,  F.v.M.,  (Stringy bark),  E.  rubida, 
Deane  &  Maiden  {E.  Giinnii,  var.  rubida,  Maiden;  White  Gum), 
E.  dives,  Schau.,  (Peppermint),  E.  maculosa,  R.  T.  Baker  {E. 
Gunnii,  var.  maculosa,  Maiden;  White  or  Spotted  Gum),  E. 
hcemastoma,  Sm.,  var.  micrantha,  Benth.,  {E.  Rossii,  Baker  ifc 
Smith;  Brittle  Gum  or  Brittle  Jack),  E.  Cambayei,  Deane  ifc  Maiden 
(Mountain  Apple,    known    between    Rockley    and    Burraga    as 


BY    R.    H.    CAM  BAG  E.  205 

Bundy),  E.  polyanthemos,  Schau.,  (Red  Box),  E.  hemiphhia,  var. 
alhens,  Miq.,  (White  Box,  first  seen  near  Euchareena),  E.  sider- 
oxylon,  A.  Cunn.,  (Ironbark  or  Mugga),  and  E.  rostrata,  Schl., 
(River  Red  Gum),  found  only  along  the  banks  of  streams  near 
Wellington. 

The  first  three  species  mentioned  extend  to  Tasmania. 

Of  the  above  Eucalypts  only  the  following  were  noticed  after 
passing  Stuart  Town,  where  the  elevation  above  sea-level  is  about 
1800  feet : — E.  tereticornis,  E.  hemiphloia,  var.  albens,  E.  mellio- 
dora,  E.  polyanthemos,  E.  macrorrhyncha  (scarce),  E.  sideroxylon, 
and  E.  rostrata. 

E.  sideroxylmi  is  the  Ironbark  from  which  the  old  mining 
township  of  Ironbarks,  now  Stuart  Town,  derived  its  name. 

The  other  species  which  were  seen  nearer  Orange  usually  prefer 
a  colder  climate  than  is  found  in  these  latitudes  below  an  altitude 
of  ]  800  feet.  The  species  which  predominates  between  Stuart 
Town  and  Wellington  is  var.  albens,  and  in  travelling  westward 
it  is  found  that  this  tree  is  generally  more  in  evidence  than  any 
other  in  heralding  the  approach  of  the  western  flora;  and  it  is 
commonly  found  growing  on  land  suitable  for  wheat  cultivation. 
A  few  trees  of  this  species  were  noticed  in  flower  in  October, 
though  the  usual  flowering  time  for  this  tree  is  the  autumn. 

Other  trees  and  shrubs  noticed  between  Orange  and  Wellington 
were: — Acacia  dea/bata,  Link  (Silver  Wattle),  A.  lanigera,  A. 
Cunn,,  A.  decora,  Reichb.,  A.  melanoxylon,  R.Br.,  (Hickory),  A. 
annata,  R.Br.,  A.  vestita,  Ker  (a  few  miles  off  the  railway  line 
towards  Ophir  and  known  as  Black  Willow  around  Hargraves, 
according  to  L.  F.  Harper),  Daviesia  latifoHa,  R.Br  ,  (Hop  scrub 
of  the  cold  country),  Exocarfus  ciipressiformis,  Labill.,  (Native 
Cherry),  Loranthits  sp.,  Hibbe^'tia  sp.,  Diuris  sp.,  Hardenbergia 
(Kennedya)  monojyhylla,  Benth.,  (False  Sarsaparilla),  Stackhousia 
linarifolia,  A.  Cunn.,  Gassinia  Theodori,  F.v.M.,  Stercidia  diver- 
sifolia,  G.  Don  (Currajong),  Gallitris  robusta,  A.  Cunn.,  (White 
or  Cypress  Pine),  Argernone  mexicana,  L.,  (Mexican  Poppy),  and 
towards  Wellington  much  Hordeiiin  nnirinutn,  L.,  (Barley  Grass) 


1206  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  III., 

The  Flannel  Flower,  Ac.tiaotns  ^^/trt?i<7u',  Labill.,  is  to  be  found 
■on  the  hillside  al)out  one  mile  south-westerly  from  Wellington, 
this  being  one  of  the  isolated  spots  in  the  western  district  where 
this  well  known  beautiful  coastal  flower  is  found. 

Neither  the  Pine  nor  the  Currajong  was  noticed  in  any  (juantity 
till  Mumbil  was  reached,  where  the  altitude  is  about  1500  feet, 
after  which  both  species  were  very  common. 

From  Wellington  to  Dubbo  is  about  30  miles,  and  as  most  of 
the  country  has  been  cleared  near  the  railway  line,  the  list  of 
plants  noticed  is  not  an  extensive  one,  but  is  sufficient  to  show 
that,  with  the  exception  of  an  occasional  plant,  the  cold  country 
flora  has  been  left  behind. 

The  district  around  Wellington  is  very  productive  and  presents 
a  very  different  appearance  from  that  which  met  the  gaze  of  the 
explorer  Oxley  on  the  19th  August,  1817,  when  this  spot  was 
discovered.  On  approaching  this  locality  after  a  tedious  journey 
across  the  Upper  Bogan  from  the  Lachlan,  near  Euabalong, 
Oxley  speaks  of  the  sound  of  the  mogo  (stone  tomahawk), 
denoting  the  presence  of  the  natives,  and  on  entering  the  valley 
of  the  Bell  River,  near  its  junction  with  the  Macquarie,  he 
writes  : — "  Imagination  cannot  fancy  anything  more  beautifully 
picturesque  than  the  scene  which  burst  upon  us.  The  blue  gum 
trees*  were  exceedingly  fine,  whilst  that  species  of  Eucalyptusf 
which  is  vulgarly  called  the  Apple  Tree,  and  which  we  had  not 
seen  since  we  quitted  the  eastern  coast,  again  made  its  appearance 
on  the  flats,  and  of  large  size."; 

But  now  the  sound  of  the  mogo  is  heard  no  more,  and  in  its 
place  there  is  the  bleating  of  sheep,  as  well  as  the  humming  of 
the  stripper,  and  the  noise  of  the  harvester  on  one  of  our  richest 
wheatfields. 

The  Eucalypts  growing  between  Wellington  and  Dubbo  are  : — 
E.  rostrata^  E.  hcmiphloia,  var.  alhens^  E.  meUiodora,  E.  conica, 
Deane  &  Maiden  (E.  Baueriana^  var.  conica,  Maiden;  Woolly  butt 

*  Evidently  Eucalyptus  rostrata, 
t  Angophora  intermedia. 
Z.  Oxley's  Expeditions. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  207 

or  Apple-Box),  E.  tereticor-nis,  with  var.  dealhata  on  the  hillside, 
E.  Woollsiana,  R.  T.  Baker  (Narrow-leaved  Box),  a  little  of  E. 
viridis,  R.  T.  Baker  (Narrow-leaved  or  Whipstick  Mallee,  usually 
the  first  of  the  Mallees  met  with  in  going  west),  E.  sideroxylon, 
and  a  little  of  E.  affinis,  Deane  &  Maiden  (Ironbark  Box). 

The  last  two  species  were  formerly  more  plentiful  in  the 
vicinity  of  Murrumbidgerie  than  is  the  case  at  present,  many  of 
the  trees  having  been  cut  down  for  the  timber,  and  these  species 
will  soon  be  unobservable  from  the  train. 

Other  trees  and  shrubs  noticed  were  : — Angophora  intermedia, 
DC,  (Apple),  Callitris  rohusta,  Acacia  homalojyhylla,  A.  Cunn., 
(Yarran),  A.  decora,  Pimelea  limfolia,  Stercidia  diver sifolia 
(plentiful  in  places),  Heterodendron  oleaifoliiiin,  Desf.,  (Rosewood), 
Eremophila  longi/olia,  F.v.M.,  (one  of  the  plants  called  Emu-bush), 
Casuarina  Litehynanni,  R.  T.  Baker  (Bull  Oak),  and  C.  Cnnning- 
harniana,  Miq.,  (River  Oak,  a  tree  found  only  along  the  banks  of 
fresh-water  streams).  Although  this  species  extends  up  the 
Macquarie  to  the  Fish  River  above  Bathurst,  I  was  unable  to 
jfind  its  terminal  point  down  the  stream,  but  was  informed  that 
it  ceases  before  the  river  enters  the  reed  beds  where  the  channel 
is  lost. 

The  Wellington-Dubbo  district  is  one  of  the  few  places 
where  Angophora  i^iter-media  crosses  to  the  southern  side  of  the 
Great  Western  Railway,  excepting  on  the  east  of  the  Great 
Dividing  Range;  and  it  is  remarkable  that  its  absence  from  the 
area  extending  from  Penrith  to  the  Lower  Lachlan  and  Upper 
Bogan  was  noted  and  commented  upon  by  Oxley  in  the  first 
journey  ever  made  by  white  men  over  this  latter  part  of  the 
country,  though  the  observations  were  probably  made  by  Allan 
Cunningham  and  Charles  Fraser.  the  botanists  who  accompanied 
Oxley's  expedition. 

The  plants  mentioned  in  the  following  list  were  noted  along  the 
Mudgee  road,  by  far  the  greater  number  being  collected  on  a  sand- 
stone hill  at  about  four  miles  from  Dubbo,  the  alteration  in  geolo- 
gical formation  being  in  this  instance  responsible  for  a  wonderful 
change  in  the  flora.     The  following  plants  were  seen  : — Clematis 


208     NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IIL, 

niicrophi/lla,  DC,  Hihhertia  linearis,  R.Br.,  Sterculia  diversifolia, 
Stackhoiisia  linarifolia,  CryptandiYi  amara,  Sm.,  var.  lo7igiflora, 
F.V.M.,  Heterodendron  oJecpfoUum,  Dodoncca  viscosa,  L.,(Hopbush), 
D.  truncatiales,  F.v.M.,  D.  triangularis,  Lindl.,  D.  horonutifolia, 
G.  Don,  Mirhelia  jmngens,  A.  Cunn.,  Pultencea  microphylla,  Sieb., 
Indigo/era  australis,  Willd.,  Sivainsona  procumbens,  F.v.M., 
Glycine  clandestina,  Wendl.,  Cassia  sp.,  Acacia  decora  (a  little 
shrub  sometimes  called  Silver  Wattle  in  the  west),  A.  homalo- 
phylla,  A.  spectahilis,  A.  Cunn.,  Haloragis  elata,  A.  Cunn., 
Calythrix  tetragona,  Labill.,  Melaleuca  uncinata,  R.Br.,  Angophora 
intermedia,  Eucalyptus  Woollsiana,  E.  conica,  E.  tereticornis  and 
var.  dealhata,  E.  heniiphloia,  var.  albens,  E.  melliodora,  E.  crehra, 
F.v.M.,  (Narrow-leaved  Ironbark),  E.  sideroxylon,  E.  affinis, 
Galium  umhrosum,  Sol.,  Centaurea  melitensis,  L.,  Miniiria  lepto- 
phylla,  DC,  Calotis  cuneifolia,  R.Br.,  Helichrysum  hracteatum, 
Willd.,  (often  known  as  Everlasting-flower),  H.  apiculatum,  DC, 
H.  diosmifoliuiii,  Don,  Helipterum  incayium,  DC,  (a  very  pretty 
composite  and  one  which  contributes  much  towards  the  beauty  of 
the  Western  Plains  flora),  Goodenia  pinnatifida,  Schl.,  Dampiera 
adpressa,  A.  Cunn.,  Br  luionia  austral  is,  Sm.,  (a  very  pretty  purple 
flower),  Wahlenhergia  gracilis,  DC,  (Bluebell),  Lissanthe  strigosa, 
R.Br.,  Echimtm  violaceum,  Linn.,  (locally  called  Beggar's  Blankets 
from  the  hairyness  of  the  leaves),  Convolvidus  erubescens,  Sims, 
Kochia  microphylla,  F.v.M.,  (a  Cotton-bush),  Fimelea  glauca, 
R.Br.  Casuarina  Luehmanni,  C.  paludosa,  Sieb.  (I),  Callitris 
robusta,  Hordeum  murinum,  L.,  and  Cheilanthes  tenuifolia,  Sw., 
a  small  fern  growing  among  the  rocks. 

An  interesting  form  of  Dodoncea  truncatiales  (Hopbush)  was 
found  on  the  sandstone  hill  before  mentioned,  the  leaves  being 
both  simple  and  pinnate,  the  latter  often  divided  into  three  or 
five  leaflets.  The  same  form  was  also  found  near  Gilgandra, 
though  the  occurrence  of  this  feature  had  not  previously  been 
recorded.  This  form  has  since  been  described  by  Maiden  and 
Betche  as  D.  truncatiales,  F.v.M.,  var.  heterophylla  (these 
Proceeedings,  1904,  p.  738). 

Calythrix  tetragona  was  found  on  the  sandstone  area  at  an 
approximate  elevation   of    1000   feet    above    sea-level.     It  is  ^^i 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  209 

somewhat  showy  little  shrub  when  in  bloom,  with  its  dense  heads 
of  whitish  flowers,  and  its  identification  is  assisted  by  the  long 
fine  awns  which  remain  when  most  of  the  flower  has  fallen. 
Some  interest  attaches  to  this  plant  through  its  almost  total 
disregard  for  climatic  conditions,  for  it  may  be  found  around  Port 
Jackson,  on  the  sandstone  of  the  Blue  Mountains  at  3000  feet, 
on  the  volcanic  formation  of  the  Canoblas  near  Orange  at  4000 
feet,  and  on  man}''  of  the  sandy  areas  of  the  interior.  It  has 
been  recorded  from  all  the  States  of  Australia,  and  although  its 
habitat  is  not  altogether  regulated  by  the  geological  formation, 
it  appears  to  show  a  preference  for  sandy  soil. 

Eucalyptas  affinis  was  also  found  on  the  sandstone  hill,  and 
usually  frequents  a  sedimentary  formation.  One  tree  in  parti- 
cular was  noticed  close  to  the  northern  side  of  the  road;  and 
although  its  identification  might  perhaps  present  some  difficulty 
to  the  botanist,  the  ordinary  bushman  would  quickly  and  con- 
fidently dispose  of  it  as  a  hybrid  with  E.  sideroxfjlon  (Mugga)  as 
one  parent,  and  perhaps  E.  hemiphloia,  var.  alhens  (White  Box), 
as  the  other,  both  of  which  are  growing  around. 

E.  C7'eb7'a,  the  Narrow-leaved  Ironbark,  appears  scarce  near 
Dubbo,  but  is  plentiful  along  the  Dubbo-Gilgandra  railway  line, 
particularly  on  the  eastern  side.  It  has  a  reddish  timber  of  good 
quality,  and  afifords  employment  for  a  number  of  men  who  are 
engaged  cutting  railway  sleepers.  In  the  district  mentioned  this 
species  seems  to  be  by  far  the  most  important  for  sleeper-cutting, 
and  great  stacks  of  sleepers  may  be  seen  at  most  of  the  small 
railway  stations  between  Dubbo  and  Gilgandra.  Though  in 
general  appearance  it  has  some  resemblance  to  the  coast  White 
or  Grey  Ironbark,  E.  paniculata,  Sm  ,  its  leaves  are  usually 
narrower,  its  fruits  smaller,  the  bark  darker  and  perhaps  rougher, 
while  its  timber  is  much  redder.  The  seedling  and  "  sucker " 
leaves  of  this  species  are  very  narrow,  some  of  the  latter  collected 
near  Gilgandra  being  only  one  line  wide  by  two  inches  in  length, 
while  others  were  under  two  lines  wide  and  over  four  inches  long. 
E.  crebra  is  common  in  Queensland,  and  in  coming  southerly,  it, 
like  some  other  species  already  referred  to  in  previous  papers, 
U 


210  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,   IIL, 

crosses  to  tlie  east  of  the  Liverpool  Range,  and  though  it  con- 
tinues for  some  distance  south-westerly  along  the  western  side  of 
the  range  to  the  Dubbo  district,  it  also  comes  south  along  the 
coastal  area,  and  is  fairly  common  on  the  Wianamatta  shale 
formation  between  Penrith,  Parramatta  and  Picton. 

E.  siderophloin,  Benth.,  the  Broad-leaved  Ironbark,  was  not 
seen  near  the  railway  line,  though  I  and  others  have  collected  it 
on  the  Harvey  Range  south  of  Dubbo,  and  it  is  a  well  known 
tree  north-easterly  of  Dubbo;  but  its  timber  in  this  localit}^  is 
regarded  as  inferior  to  that  of  E.  crehra,  and  this  western  form 
is  more  inclined  to  split  in  concentric  circles,  or,  as  the  splitter 
terms  it,  to  ring.  This  species  attains  its  greatest  dimensions  in 
the  coastal  area,  where  it  is  often  known  as  Red  Ironbark.  A 
form  in  the  Western  district  often  has  pale  glaucous  leaves,  and 
has  been  named  E.  siderophloia,  var.  glauca,  Deane  &  Maiden 
(these  Proceedings,  1899,  p.  461). 

E.  melatiophloia,  F.v.M.,  the  Silver-leaved  Ironbark,  or  Ghinghit 
of  the  Macquarie  River  aborigines,  was  also  absent  from  the 
area  described,  although  it  occurs  near  Narromine  west  of  Dubbo,. 
and  extends  north-easterly  towards  Barraba. 

The  species  mentioned  as  Casuarina  paludosa  (?)  is  a  small  oak 
tree  or  shrub,  often  about  10  feet  high,  and  in  the  western  area 
is  generally  found  growing  on  ridges.  (It  has  previously  been, 
alluded  to  in  these  Proceedings,  1902,  p.  193). 

C.  stincta,  Ait.,  (C.  qnadrivalvis,  Labill.),  an  oak  tree  with 
pendulous  branches,  and  which  also  prefers  ridges,  was  not 
noticed  near  the  railway  line,  but  occurs  on  various  hills  near 
Dubbo.  It  is  often  known  as  Sheoak,  and  has  been  freely  used 
as  fodder  for  stock. 

Cailitris  I'ohusf.a,  the  White  or  Cypress  Pine,  is  a  common  and 
useful  tree  in  the  Dubbo  district,  providing  the  chief  timber  for 
the  sawmills.  From  enquiries  made  local  1}^,  it  was  found  that 
this  species  is  divided  by  timber  getters  into  two  varieties  under 
the  names  of  White  and  Red  Pine;  while  C.  calcarata,  R.Br., 
which  grows  on  the  hills,  though  it  was  not  noticed  from  the  rail- 
way line,  is  usually  known  as  Black  or  Green  Pine.     Tall  treea 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  211 

of  C.  rohusta  with  clean  barrels  are  generally  recognised  in  the 
Dubbo  district  as  White  Pine,  while  those  with  branches  on 
their  stems,  and  which  are  probably  younger  and  sounder,  are 
cut  in  the  sawmills  under  the  name  of  Red  Pine. 

From  Dubbo  to  Gilgandra  is  a  distance  northerly  of  about  40 
miles,  and  the  following  Eucalypts  were  seen  from  the  train  : — 
E.  meUiodora,  E.  conica.  E.  her^iiphloia,  var.  albens,  E.  Woollsiana, 
E.  rostrata,  E.  fopulifolia^  Hook.,  (Grey  or  Shiny-leaved  or 
Bimble  Box),  E.  crehra,  E.  sideroxylon,  E.  viridis,  E.  dumoso, 
A.  Cunn.,  (White  Mallee),  and  E.  tereticornis. 

E.  'populifolia  is  an  inland  species,  seldom  coming  so  far  east 
as  the  western  slopes,  excepting  in  the  north  of  this  State,  and 
its  eastern  margin  roughly  coincides  with  the  western  edge  of  E. 
hemijyhloia,  var,  albens,  though  in  many  places  they  overlap, 
while  in  others  there  are  spaces  from  which  both  species  are 
absent  {vide  these  Proceedings,  1901,  p. 331). 

E.  viridis  and  E.  dumosa  formed  a  Mallee  scrub  at  about  15 
miles  from  Dubbo,  and  in  this  locality  were  many  interesting 
shrubs,  some  of  which  could  not  be  identified  from  the  train. 

Various  trees  and  shrubs  noticed  near  the  railway  line  were: — 
Hibbertiasp.,  Argenione  7nexicana,  Apophylhim  anomahim,  F.v.M., 
(Currant  Bush),  Pittosjyorum  phillyrceoides,  DC,  ^Sterculia  diver- 
sifolia,  Geijm-a  parvijiora,  Lindl.,  (Wilga),  Heterodendron  olece- 
folium,  DodoncEa  sp.,  Cassia  sp..  Acacia  homaIoj)hylla  (Yarran), 
A.  decora,  A,  spectabilis,  A.  Cunn.,  (sometimes  called  Blue  Wattle 
from  the  general  colour  of  the  bark),  A.  triptera,  Benth.,  (Wait- 
a-while),  A.  dealbata  (green  variety),  A.  pendida,  A.  Cunn., 
(Myall),  A.  sp.,  Anyophora  intermedia  (Apple  Tree),  Wahle^i- 
beryia  gracilis,  Myoporum  platycarpum,  R.Br.,  (Dogwood), 
Ereriiophila  Mitchelli,  Benth.,  (Budtha  or  Sandalwood),  Kochia 
microjjhylla,  Casuarina  Cun^iinyhamiana  (on  the  Talbragar  River 
and  again  on  the  Castlereagh  at  Gilgandra),  C.  Luehmanni  (Bull 
Oak),  C.  Ca/nboyei,  R.  T.  Baker,  (Belah),  Fusanus  acuminatus, 
DC,  (Quandong),  Exoca7'pus  citpressifo7nnis,  Labill.,  (Native 
Cherry),  and  Callitris  robusta  (White  Pine). 


212  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,   IIL, 

Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden  has  expressed  the  opinion  that  Casuarina 
Camhagei,  R.  T.  Baker,  is  identical  with  C.  lepidophloia,  F.v.M., 
('  Forest  Flora,'  Part  xiii.). 

The  following  is  a  list  of  plants  noticed,  and  in  many  instances 
collected,  on  Bongeabong  Holding  at  from  6  to  10  miles  westerly 
from  Gilgandra  and  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Marthaguy  Creek  :  — 
Hibhertla  linearis,  R.Br.,  var.  canescens,  Argemone  vnexicana, 
Blennodia  lasiocarpa,  F.v.M.,  Capparis  Mitchelli,  Lindl.,  (Native 
Orange),  Apojjhyllum  anomalum,  Pittosporum  phillyrceoides, 
Spergidaria  rubra,  Cambess.,  Sterculia  diversifolia  (Currajong), 
Linum  marginale,  A.  Cunn.,  (a  blue  flower  often  known  as  Blue 
Bell  but  usually  larger  than  Wahlenhergia  gracdis),  Zygophyllwni 
glaucescens,  F.v.M.,  Geijera  parvijlora  (Wilga),  Atalantia  glauca, 
Hk.,  (Wild  Lemon),  Alalaya  hemiglauca,  F.v.M.,  (Whitew^ood, 
scarce  in  this  locality  but  increases  towards  the  north),  Hetero- 
deudron  olecefolium  (Rosewood),  Dodoncea  viscosa  (Hopbush), 
Psoralea  patent,  Lindl.,  Swainsona  sp..  Cassia  er-emophila,  A 
Ounn.,  Acacia  hakeoides,  A.  Cunn.,  A.  triptera,  A.  decora,  A. 
homalophylla  (Yarran),  A.  pendida  (Mj^^all),  A.  Oswaldi,  F.v.M., 
^Milldy  or  Miljee),  A.  implexa,  Benth.,  (Broadleaved  Wattle),  A. 
doratoxylon,  A.  Cunn.,  (Currawong),  A.  sp>ectahilis  (Blue  Wattle), 
A.  dealbata  (called  Black  Wattle  in  this  locality),  A.  sp.  (Mother- 
umbung),  Kunzea  parvifiora,  Schl.,  Melaleuca  uncinata,  R.Br., 
Aug  ophor  a  inter  media.  Eucalyptus  rostrata,  E  .t^7'etico7'nis  and  var. 
dealbata,  E.  Woollsiana,  E.largiflorens,¥.\.lsl..,E.conica,  E.popidi- 
folia,  E.  hetniphloia,  var.  albens,  E.  sideroxylon  (scarce),  Loranthus 
pendidus,  Sieb.,  (growing  on  Acacia  pendida),  Olearia  pimeleoides, 
A.  Cunn.,  Calotis  cuneifoUa,  Cassinia  Icevls,  R.Br.,  (?)  probably 
a  short-leaved  form,  IxiolcPAia  leptolepis,  Benth.,  IJelipterum 
incanum,  Goodenia  pinnatijida,  Sccevola  spinescens,  R.Br., 
Dampiera  adpressa,  Brunonia  australis,  Wahlenbergia  gracilis, 
Jasminum  lineare,  R.Br.,  Lyonsia  eucalyptifolia,  F.v.M.  (?), 
Marsdenia  Leichhardtiana,  F.v.M.,  Convolvulus  erubescens, 
Mimulus  gracilis,  R.Br.,  Myoporum  plalycarpuni  (Dogwood), 
Ereniophila  Mitchelli  (Budtha),  E.  longifolia,  F.v.  J\L,  (Emu-bush), 
E.  Brownii,  F.v.M.,    Verbena  officinalis,   Linn.,  Ajuga   australis. 


BY    R.    II.    CAMBAGE.  213 

R.Br.,  Kochia  inicro2)hyUa  (Cotton  Bush),  Ptilotus  exaJtatum, 
Nees,  Hakea  leucoptera,  R.Br.,  (Needlewood),  Pimelea  linifolia, 
P.  microcephala,  R.Br.,  P.  glauca,  R.Br.,  Casuariria  Luehmanni 
(Bull  Oak),  C.  Cainhagei  (Belah),  Fusanus  acuminatus  (Quan- 
clong),  Choretrutn  Candollei^  F.v.M.,  Exocarpus  aphylla^  R.Br., 
(Stiff  Cherry),  Callitris  robusta  (White  Pine),  Bufbine  bulbosa, 
Haw.,  Thysanotus  tuberosus,  R. Br., (Fringed  Violet), ^r^/i?'oy90c^m?/i 
strictum,  R.Br.,  Cypei^us  lucidus,  R.Br.,  (growing  in  Marthaguy 
Creek),  and  Cheilanthes  tenuifolia. 

AtalarUia  glauca^  known  as  Wild  Lemon,  was  not  plentiful, 
only  one  cluster  of  bushes  being  noticed.  Its  vernacular  name 
is  in  allusion  to  its  sharp  spines,  and  round  acid  berries,  about 
half  an  inch  in  diameter,  which  somewhat  resemble  small  lemons, 
though  they  are  really  more  like  limes.  The  species  belongs 
chiefl}^  to  Queensland. 

In  many  localities  throughout  the  western  districts  there  is  a 
small  form  of  Yarran  [Acacia  homalophylla)  which  appears  to 
diflfer  in  the  root  from  the  large  trees  of  this  species.  Old  trees 
have  a  system  of  lateral  roots  extending  all  round  the  base  of  the 
trunk,  but  many  of  these  smaller  trees,  though  erect  in  the 
barrel,  are  found  to  be  supported  by  one  root  in  a  horizontal 
position,  or  practically  at  right  angles  to  the  stem.  Still  no 
botanical  differences  could  ever  be  detected  between  the  two 
forms  of  Yarran.  On  looking  into  the  matter  near  Gilgandra 
and  examining  very  young  trees,  it  was  found  that  all  those 
which  grew  with  the  stem  at  right  angles  to  the  root  were 
suckers.  It  was  further  noticed  that  there  was  an  absence  of 
suckers  around  a  large  growing  tree,  but  where  one  had  been 
cut  down,  or  ringbarked,  quite  a  crop  of  suckers  had  sprung  up, 
and  in  one  instance  the  outermost  plant  was  27  feet  from  the 
parent  tree.  The  observations  clearly  proved  that  the  felling  of 
the  trees  caused  the  growth  of  many  suckers  which  would  in 
time,  if  left,  form  small  clumps  of  trees.  In  examining  the 
small  roots  which  proceeded  from  the  parent  stump,  it  was  noticed 
that  they  increased  in  size  immediately  beyond  the  point  from 
which  the  young  plants  grew,  and  just  behind  this  point  there 


214     NOTES  OX  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  III., 

often  seemed  a  tendency  for  the  root  to  gradually  deca}",  which 
would  therefore  have  the  effect  in  such  cases  of  eventually  leaving 
the  new  tree  with  its  one  horizontal  root,  and  this  latter  stage  is 
commonly  found  when  the  young  trees  exceed  10  or  12  feet  high. 
It  therefore  seems  probable  that  most  of  the  old  Yarran  trees 
grew  from  seedlings,  and  that  suckers  have  become  much  more 
common  since  the  advent  of  clearing  and  ringbarking  operations. 

Acacia  implexa  was  sparsely  distributed  around  Gilgandra, 
and  this  spot  appears  to  1)6  about  on  the  western  edge  of  the 
habitat  of  this  species.  It  is  known  as  Broadleaved  Wattle  and 
Hickory. 

A.  saliclyia,  Lindl.,  the  Cooba  of  the  Lachlan  countr}^,  was  not 
seen,  but  has  been  recorded  for  the  Castlereagh  by  Dr.  Woolls 
('  Lectures  on  the  Vegetable  Kingdom,'  p. 69). 

Neither  was  A.  neriifolia,  A.  Cunn.,  observed,  though  it  is 
common  in  the  northern  part  of  New  England  and  is  known  to 
extend  past  Gilgandra  to  the  Nyngan  district.  The  Acacia 
mentioned  by  me  in  these  Proceedings  for  1900  (p. 7 17)  as 
occurring  about  7  miles  west  of  Trowell  Creek  House  has  since 
been  identified  as  this  species,  from  a  comparison  with  more 
complete  material  collected  by  Mr.  J.  L.  Boorman  near  Hermi- 
dale  in  the  same  district. 

A.  doratoxylon  (Currawong)  is  not  plentiful  near  Gilgandra, 
but  was  noticed  on  a  low  ridge  about  10  miles  westerly  from  that 
town.  The  ridge  in  question  is  so  low  as  to  be  scarcely  notice- 
able, but  in  prehistoric  times  has  been  higher,  and  is  being 
gradually  lowered  by  ordinar}^  denudation.  On  it  were  also 
what  might  be  termed  a  few  remnants  of  Eucalyptus  sideroxylon 
and  E.  tereticorrds,  var.  dealbata,  both  of  which  prefer  ridges  in 
the  western  districts.  Ev^en  should  this  land  not  be  cleared,  it 
seems  probable  that  these  three  species  would  disappear  from  it 
in  the  distant  future,  and  a  stud}'  of  the  feature  shows  that  a 
field  geologist  with  some  knowledge  of  the  local  flora  in  this  level 
class  of  country  would  thereby  receive  great  assistance  in  tracing 
disappearing  contours. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  215 

Associated  with  the  above  trees  was  another  species  of  Acacia 
known  locally  as  Motherumbung,  and  which  has  not  yet  been 
identified,  as  pods  were  not  procurable.  So  far  as  seen,  it 
appears  to  have  much  the  same  habit  as  A.  doratoxylon,  growing 
in  clusters  with  long  thin  stems  about  2-4  inches  in  diameter 
and  perhaps  20-30  feet  high  (Plate  ii.).  But  botanically  it  is  quite 
a  different  plant,  for  while  the  Currawong  has  phyllodia  with 
numerous  tine  parallel  nerves  and  flowers  arranged  in  spikes,  the 
Motherumbung  has  "  leaves  "  with  a  distinct  midrib  and  lateral 
veins  placed  at  a  fairly  acute  angle,  and  its  flowers  arranged  in 
capitula  or  heads  instead  of  spikes.  The  Motherumbung  has 
narrow-lanceolate  plwllodia,  obtuse,  often  with  a  callous  point 
sometimes  slightly  curved,  rarelj^  exceeding  2  lines  broad,  and 
from  about  f  of  an  inch  to  over  2  inches  long,  the  terminal  ones 
being  short  and  very  glutinous  towards  the  ends,  1 -nerved  with 
sometimes  a  gland  about  2  lines  from  the  base.  The  peduncles 
are  solitary,  about  2-3  lines  long,  bearing  a  rather  small  globular 
head  of  about  25  flowers.  Pinnae  on  the  seedlings  soon  disappear, 
but  three  or  four  pairs  were  noticed  on  the  lower  phyllodia  of 
one  plant.  Judging  by  the  description,  it  appears  to  have 
affinities  to  A.  Gnidhim,  Benth.,  a  Queensland  species  (B.Fl.  ii. 
359),  but  in  Bailey's  'Queensland  Flora'  there  is  nothing  to 
show  that  this  Acacia  has  been  collected  except  at  Mount  Pluto 
by  Mitchell,  and  the  pods  are  not  described. 

Specimens  of  Motherumbung,  without  pods,  are  in  the  National 
Herbarium,  Botanic  Glardens,  Sydney. 

The  Black  Wattle  of  the  district  appears  to  be  a  form  of  A. 
dealhata,  though  the  glaucous  appearance  seen  on  this  species  in 
the  highlands  is  absent,  the  green  leaves  thus  giving  the  trees 
the  aspect  of  A.  deciirrens^  Willd.,  the  common  Green  or  Black 
Wattle  of  the  coast. 

A.  spectabilis  is  often  known  in  this  locality  as  Blue  Wattle, 
chiefly  from  the  colour  of  the  bark  on  the  stems,  and  A.  decora 
is  referred  to  as  Silver  Wattle,  but  these  names  are  not  so  con- 
stantly used  for  those  species   as   that  of  Brigalow  is   for  A. 


216  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,   IIL, 

harpophylla,  F.v.M.  This  latter  tree  was  not  seen  near  Gilgandra, 
but  northerly  towards  Coonamble  it  becomes  common. 

Of  the  Eucalypts,  the  Box-trees  predominate,  especially  E. 
populi/olia,  E.  conica,  and  E.  Woollsiano.  The  latter  was  noticed 
to  have  very  narrow  leaves  and  small  fruits,  and  towards  the 
western  margin  of  the  habitat  of  this  species  the  character  seems 
accentuated,  while  towards  the  eastern  edge,  which  to  the  south 
of  Wellington  is  near  the  foot  of  the  western  slopes,  the  leaves 
and  fruits  increase  in  size.  In  these  Proceedings  for  1904  (id.764) 
Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden  has  suggested  that  these  two  forms  might  be 
regarded  as  separate  species;  but  in  travelling  through  the 
western  districts  I  have  found  it  difficult  to  decide  on  a  line  of 
demarcation  between  the  two  forms,  the  change  in  size  of  leaves 
and  fruits  appearing  to  be  gradual,  as  suggested  above.  In  one 
spot  on  Bongeabong,  seedlings  of  E.  WooUsiana  were  found 
covering  an  area  of  about  100  acres  and  forming  a  thicket  as 
dense  as  a  Mallee  scrub. 

E.  largijiorens,  F.v.M.,  a  River  Box  with  rough  bark  on  the 
branches  and  often  a  silvery  drooping  foliage,  was  not  seen  at 
Gilgandra,  but  specimens  were  procured  on  the  Marthaguy  near 
Bongeabong,  which  spot  marks  a  point  on  the  eastern  margin  of 
the  habitat  of  this  species.  North-westerly  from  here,  towards 
the  Darling  River,  this  tree  becomes  common. 

E.  conica  was  noticed  to  be  flowering  throughout  the  Dubbo- 
Gilgandra  district  in  October,  1904,  and  from  observations  made 
on  the  Lachlan  the  species  was  usually  found  flowering  there  in 
the  Spring  months  also. 

E.  hemiphloia,  var.  albens,  the  common  large  glaucous-lea\'ed 
White  Box  of  the  western  slopes,  was  scarce  around  Gilgandra, 
the  western  margin  of  its  range  being  almost  reached. 

E.  melliodora,  Yellow  Box,  was  seen  only  near  the  banks  of 
the  Castlereagh  River,  the  species  being  one  which  gradually 
leaves  the  hills  as  the  far  west  is  approached,  reaching  its  most 
western  points  by  following  down  the  river  flats.  This  tree  is 
generally  indicative  of  a  fairly  good  soil,  and  in  some  districts 
selects  the  very  best. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  217 

3Iarsdenia  Leichhardtiana  was  found  twining  over  shrubs  on 
the  low  ridge  previously  referred  to,  and  being  covered  with  its 
large  green  somewhat  egg-shaped  fruits  (follicles)  presented  a 
very  ornamental  appearance, 

Alimulus  gracilis  was  noticed  on  the  plains  in  small  patches, 
about  six  inches  high,  the  hooded-looking  little  blue  flowers  being 
very  attractive. 

During  recent  years  all  trees  which  are  suitable  as  fodder  have 
been  lopped  in  order  to  provide  feed  for  stock,  and  many  of  the 
native  trees  in  consequence  present  a  very  different  appearance 
from  that  ordinarily  seen,  for  the  process  of  trimming  has  caused 
several  species  to  become  covered  with  quite  a  dense  foliage 
which  has  increased  their  beauty  and  symmetry.  Amongst  these 
may  be  mentioned  HeMrodendr on  ohcefolium  (Rosewood),  usually 
not  a  very  attractive-looking  tree,  Myojionini  jjlatycar'pwm 
(Dogwood),  Geijera  parvijiora  (Wilga),  Sterculia  diver sifolia 
(Currajong),  and  Casuarina  Camfta^ei  (Belah),  though  the  latter 
three  at  all  times  add  to  the  beauty  of  the  landscape.  Acacia 
pendula,  the  far-famed  Myall  or  Boree,  alwa3's  an  emblem  of  grace 
and  beauty,  does  not  usually  recover  to  the  full  extent  its  former 
attractive  appearance,  but  a  healthy  half-grown  plant,  which  each 
year  it  is  becoming  more  difficult  to  find  owing  to  the  fact  that 
the  seedlings  are  so  readily  eaten  by  sheep  and  cattle,  is  one  of 
the  most  handsome  objects  to  be  seen  amongst  the  members  of 
the  western  flora  (Plate  iii.). 

Eremophila  Mitchelli,  the  widely  distributed  Budtha  or  Sandal- 
wood, is  not  a  fodder  tree,  the  only  part  which  stock  appear  to 
appreciate  at  any  time  being  the  buds  and  young  flowers. 

At  a  point  about  7  or  8  miles  north-easterly  from  Gilgandra 
and  just  east  of  the  Bidden  road  is  an  area  of  sandy  soil  formed 
from  a  disintegrating  sandstone,  and  producing  a  local  flora  of 
its  own,  although  interspersed  with  some  of  the  common  western 
plants.  The  locality  in  question  has  something  of  a  heathy 
appearance,  though  owing  to  the  presence  of  various  tall  shrubs 
and  little  trees,  it  cannot  be  regarded  as  a  typical  heath.  The 
chief  Eucalypts   on    the   area  are   some   small  specimens  of    E. 


218     NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IIL, 

crebra,  E.  tereticornis,  var.  dealbata,  and  a  few  scattered  clumps 
of  E.  viridis.  The  following  is  a  list  of  plants  collected  during 
a  short  visit  to  the  spot : — 

Dodoncna  viscosa,  I),  cuneata,  Rudge,  D.  truncatiales,  D.  tri- 
augidaris,  Mirhelia  puiigens,  Daviesia  idicina,  Sm,,  Pultencea 
microphylla^  P.  sp.,  DUlwyma  Jioribunda,  Sm.,  D.  jimiperinaj 
Sieb.,  Hardenbergia  7)ionophyUa,  Acacia  triptera,  A.  implexa,  A. 
decora^  A.  cultriformis,  A.  Cunn.,  (not  very  plentiful),  A.  lineata, 
A.  Cunn.,  A.  (jladii/ormis,  A.  Cunn.,  A.  Oswaldi,  A.  spectabilis, 
A.  dealbata  (green  variety),  A.  hakeoides,  Calythrix  tetragona^ 
Kttnzea  parvifolia^  Melaleuca  unciaata,  Calotis  cuneifolia,  Heli- 
chrysutn  diosmifolium,  Don,  U.  bracteatum,  Willd.,  Goodenia 
pinnatijida,  Dampiera  adpresscc,  Melichrus  iirceolatus,  R.Br., 
Brachyloma  daphnoides,  Benth.,  Lissanthe  strigosa,  R.Br.,  <Sola- 
7ium  Jerocissimuw.,  Lindl.,  Cassytha  glabella  R.Br  ,  (parasitic  on 
Melaleuca  uiicinata),  Persobnia  sp.,  GrevUlea  arenaria,  R.Br., 
Pimelea  linifolia,  C asuarina  paludosa  (?),  Exocarpus  cupressi- 
formis  (Native  Cherry),  Stypandra  glauca,  R.Br.,  and  Xanthor- 
rhcea  sp.  (Grass-tree). 

The  following  is  a  list  of  plants  found  near  Port  Jackson,  on 
the  higher  parts  of  the  Blue  Mountains,  and  also  around  Dubbo 
and  Gilgandra,  though  some  occur  in  other  parts  of  the  State  as 
well,  and  they  cannot  all  be  regarded  as  typical  of  the  sandstone 
areas : — Cryptandra  amara,  Sm.,  Daviesia  ulicina,  Sm.,  Z>ill- 
wynia  Jloribu7ida,  Sm.,  Hardenbergia  (^Kennedya)  monojyhylla, 
Benth.,  Indigofera  australis,  Willd.,  Acacia  implexa,  Benth., 
Glycine  clandestina,  Wendl.,  Calythrix  tetragona,  LabilL,  Loran- 
thus  pendulus^  Sieb.,  Helichrysum  diosinifolium,  Less.,  Wahlen- 
bergia  grcccilis,  DC,  Melichr-us  urceolatus,  R.Br.,  Lissanthe 
strigosa,  R.Br.,  Brachyloma  daphnoides,  Benth.,  Ajuga  australis, 
R.Br.,  Cassytha  glabella,  R.Br.,  Pimelea  lini/olia,  Sm.,  Exocarpus 
cupressi/ormis,  LabilL,  Choretrum  Candollei,  F.v.M.,  lliysanotus 
tuberosics,  R.Br.,  and  Stypandra  glauca,  R.Br. 

The  pinnate-leaved  form  of  Dodoucea  truncatiales  was  also 
found  in  this  locality,  the  shrubs  being  from  3-5  feet  high,  and 
3-foliolate  leaves  were  fairly  common. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  219 

An  interesting  Pulten?ea  was  also  collected  on  this  area.  With 
its  fine  leaves  and  yellow  flowers,  it  presents  the  general  facies 
of  Dillwynia  ericifolia,  Sm.,  but  on  inspection  it  is  seen  to  be 
covered  with  fine  stipules,  the  presence  of  which  separates  it 
from  the  latter  genus,  and  it  may  turn  out  to  be  a  new  species. 
►Specimens  are  in  the  National  Herbarium,  Sydney. 

The  well-known  Hardenbergia  {Kennedy a)  monophylUt  or  False 
Sarsaparilla  was  also  noticed.  This  pretty  purple-flowering, 
twining  plant  is  very  common  in  the  coastal  area,  being  often  a 
mass  of  bloom  in  the  Spring  on  the  sides  of  the  railway  line 
between  Sydney  and  Gosford ;  but  it  is  not  plentiful  in  the 
interior,  consequently  its  occurrence  on  this  sandy  area  is  of 
interest  in  showing  some  connection  between  the  eastern  and 
western  floras,  which  may  be  traceable  to  a  similarity  of  geological 
formation. 

Acacia  yladilforniis  was  recognised  by  its  one-nerved  linear- 
lanceolate  phyllodia,  always  curving  gently  upwards  and  having 
from  about  2-5  glands  on  the  upper  edge. 

A.  Oswaldb  was  noticed  at  intervals  with  its  fairly  straight 
tough  little  stems  and  somewhat  umbrella-shaped  head.  In  this 
district  it  is  often  known  as  Milld}^  or  Miljee,  which  is  said  to 
be  an  aboriginal  name,  but  in  many  places  between  the  Bogan 
and  Lachlan  it  is  called  Dead  Finish,  though  this  name  appears 
to  properly  belong  to  a  Queensland  shrub,  Albizzia  basaltica, 
Benth. 

It  was  noticed  that  Gassy tha  glabella,  R.Br.,  was  parasitic  on 
Melaleuca  nucinata;  and  in  the  Mallee  scrubs  around  Wyalong 
the  latter  plant  is  also  the  host  of  a  species  of  Cassytha. 

The  general  result  of  the  observations  may  be  summarised  as 
follows  :  —Starting  at  Orange,  at  an  elevation  of  about  3000  feet 
above  sea-level,  we  are  among  much  of  the  cold  country  flora,  but 
during  the  descent  of  2000  feet  to  Welliuiiton  a  complete  change 
takes  place,  and  a  diff'erent  class  of  vegetation  is  found  towards 
Dubbo  and  Gilgandra.  The  chief  influence  regulating  this 
change  is  climatic,  and  this  is  also  afiected  by  a  decreasing  rain- 


220     NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IIL, 

fall  as  the  lower  countr}^  is  reached.  But  in  this  lower  area, 
which  approximates  1000  feet  above  sea-level,  the  further  changes 
in  the  flora  are  due  to  different  geological  formations,  or  to  the 
difference  between  rocky  and  alluvial  situations;  and  it  is  worthy 
of  note  that  among  the  plants  found  on  the  sandstone  areas  a 
considerable  number  belong  to  coastal  genera,  and  some  are 
actually  the  same  species  as  those  growing  on  the  sandstone 
around  Sydney.  It  is  interesting,  therefore,  to  trace  the  con- 
necting links  with  a  view  to  explaining  the  distribution  of  these 
species.  Certain  plants  are  found  growing  on  the  Triassic 
Sandstone  near  Sydney,  many  of  which  continue  westwards  on 
to  the  Blue  Mountains,  where  the  geological  formation  is  exactly 
the  same,  though  owing  to  the  increased  elevation,  which  often 
exceeds  3000  feet,  a  considerable  number  do  not  reach  the 
mountain  tops.  Amongst  those  which  do,  however,  and  which 
therefore  are  more  amenable  to  geological  formation  than  to 
climate,  several  continue  over  the  mountains,  and  are  now  found 
using  the  various  remnants  of  the  once  larger  sandstone  areas  as 
stepping  stones  till  they  are  carried  right  out  into  the  western 
districts  amidst  surroundings  very  different  from  that  of  their 
coastal  habitat.  It  is  well  known  that  an  area  of  Triassic  and 
Permo-Carboniferous  rocks,  which  under  similar  conditions  pro- 
duce a  somewhat  similar  vegetation,  extends  north-westerly 
towards  Gulgong  and  Dubbo  (as  well  as  northwards  towards 
Gunnedah  and  Narrabri),  and  it  is  chiefly  along  this  tract  of 
country  that  those  plants,  which  to  a  great  extent  disregard 
climatic  conditions,  have  found  their  way  from  the  coast  to  this 
part  of  the  interior  or  vice  versa. 

A  careful  examination  of  the  flora  along  this  route  would 
reveal  many  points  of  interest,  not  only  to  the  botanist,  but  also 
to  the  geologist  who  gives  any  attention  to  the  relation  which 
exists  between  the  vegetation  and  the  geological  formation  upon 
which  it  grows.  And  in  studying  the  two  subjects  together 
some  information  might  be  found  which  would  help  to  decide 
from  which  direction  certain  forms  of  plant  life  came,  and  tho 
conditions  which  assisted  their  distribution. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  221 

The  following  is  a  complete  list  of  all  the  Eucalypts  noticed 
between  Orange  and  Gilgandra  :  —  E.  viminalls,  E.  coriacea,  E. 
aniygdalina,  E.  Bridgesiana,  E.  nielliodora,  E.  tereticornia  and 
var.  dealhata,  E.  macrorrhyncha,  E.  rubida,  E.  dives,  E.  maculosa, 
E.  hcemastoma,  var.  tnicrantha,  E.  Cambagei,  E.  polyanthemos, 
E.  hemiphloia,  var.  albeAis,  E.  sideroxylon,  E.  rosirata,  E.  conica, 
E.  Woollsiana,  E.  siderophloia  and  var.  glauca,  E.  viridis,  E. 
affinis,  E.  crebra,  E.  pojndifolia,  E.  d2i7nosa,  and  E.  largijiorens. 

The  Acacias  seen  were  : — A.  dealbata,  A.  decora,  A.  melan- 
oxglon  (scarce),  A.  armada  (scarce),  A.  homalophylla,  A.  spectabilis, 
A.  triplera,  A.  pendula,  A.  sp.,  A.  Oswaldi,  A.  hakeoides,  A. 
implexa,  A.  doi'atoxyhn,  A.  cuUriformis,  A.  lirieata,  A.  gladii- 
formis,  and  A.  sp.  known  locally  as  Motherumbung. 

The  Casuarinas  noted  were  : — C.  Cunning  ham  I  a7ia,  C.  Lueh- 
manni,  G.  Cambagei,  C  stricta,  and  C.  paludosa  (?). 

I  have  to  acknowledge  my  indebtedness  to  Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S.,  for  assistance  in  identifying  some  of  the  plants;  and  to 
Mr.  James  Barling,  of  Bongeabong  near  Gilgandra,  and  Mr.  W. 
M.  Thomas,  Stajff  Surveyor,  of  Dubbo,  for  general  information, 
id  affording  facilities  for  visiting  spots  of  botanical  interest. 


ar 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  ii.-iii. 

Plate  ii. 

Acacia  sp.;  locally  known  as  Motherumbung  {vide  p. 215). 

Plate  iii. 

Acacia  pendula,  A.  Cunn.;  Myall;  half-grown  tree;  Gilgandra,  N.S.W.  {vide 
p.217). 


222 


NOTKS    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  a  collection  of  Javanese  plants,  chiefly 
species  newl}^  described  by  Dr.  B.  P.  G.  Hochreutiner,  and  form- 
ing portion  of  a  set  of  '*  Plants  Bogorienses  Exsiccataj "  (1904). 
They  were  presented  by  Dr.  M.  Treub,  Director  of  the  Botanic 
Gardens  of  Buitenzorg,  to  the  National  Herbarium,  Sydney. 
Also  a  selection  of  the  plants  collected  by  Banks  and  Solander 
at  Botany  Bay  and  Northern  Queensland  during  the  First  Expe- 
dition of  Captain  Cook  in  the  "Endeavour"  in  1770.  These 
plants  were  figured  by  artists  employed  by  Sir  Joseph  Banks,  and 
the  figures  were  engraved  on  copper  during  the  eighteenth 
century,  but  not  published  by  Mr.  Britten,  under  the  authority 
of  the  Trustees  of  the  British  Museum,  until  the  year  1900  and 
subsequently.  The  plants,  to  the  number  of  nearly  six  hundred, 
were  presented  by  the  Trustees  of  the  British  Museum.  The 
Botany  Bay  specimens  have,  of  course,  special  interest  for  Sydney 
botanists,  to  whom  Cook's  landing  place  is  very  familiar,  since  it 
is  but  a  suburb  of  their  city. 

Messrs.  Maiden  and  Cambage  exhibited  a  series  of  specimens 
illustrative  of  the  Eucalypts  of  the  Blue  Mountains. 

Mr.  Cambage  showed  photographs  and  botanical  specimens  in 
illustration  of  his  paper  on  the  flora  of  the  country  between 
Orange,  Dubbo  and  Gilgandra,  N.S.W.  Also  a  photograph  of 
a  carved  Aboriginal  Grave  Tree  (in  this  case  a  Bull  Oak, 
Casuarina  Luehmanni,  R.  T.  Baker)  on  Bongeabong  Station, 
Marthaguy  Creek,  Gilgandra. 

Mr.  R.  T.  Baker  exhibited  the  edible  tubers  of  a  species  of 
Vitis,  at  present  undetermined,  from  Moor  Creek,  Tamworth, 
N.S.W.,  collected  by  Mr.  B.  E.  Simpson.  The  specimens  shown 
weighed  about  4  lbs.,  but  the  largest  obtained  by  the  collector 
w^eighed  over  17  lbs.  They  differ  from  most  indigenous  tubers 
in  the  absence  of  fibrous  tissue;  and  the  taste  much  resembles 
that  of  a  turnip.  A  chemical  analysis  and  experiments  remain 
to  l)e  carried  out  and  the  results  will  be  submitted  to  the  Society 
later  on. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  223 

Mr.  Steel  exhibited  living  examples  of  four  land  planarians 
from  Bright,  Victoria,  namely,  Geoplana  ccerulea,  G.  saiiguinea^ 
G.  spenceri,  and  G.  inediolineata,  var.  simularis. 

Mr.  Fletcher  pointed  out  that  Mr.  Maiden's  exhibit  of  the 
Banksian  plants  suggested  a  matter  of  more  than  sentimental 
interest  to  Australian  naturalists  which  needed  ventilation, 
namely,  the  whereabouts  of  Dr.  Solander's  Journal,  and  the 
prospects  of  its  publication  as  a  companion  volume  to  Admiral 
Wharton's  "Captain  Cook's  Journal"  (1893),  and  Sir  Joseph 
Hooker's  "Journal  of  the  Right  Hon.  Sir  Joseph  Banks  "  (1896). 
It  was  not  generally  known  perhapsthatSolanderkept  a  Journal,  as 
very  few  published  references  to  it  can  be  found.  The  speaker  had 
met  with  only  two.  In  his  preface  to  "Cook's  Journal,"  Admiral 
Wharton  refers  to  it  under  the  impression  that  Hawkesworth 
had  actually  made  use  of  it  in  drawing  up  his  well-known  com- 
pilation. But  neither  Hawkesworth's  preface,  nor  a  comparison 
of  Hooker's  "  Banks  "  with  Hawkesworth's  "  Cook  "  lends  any 
countenance  to  this  view.  On  the  other  hand,  Captain  P.  P. 
King  seems  to  be  the  only  author  who  has  had  anything 
definite  to  say  about  the  Journal,  and  this  apparently  from 
personal  knowledge.  In  his  remarks  upon  Sting-ray  Bay  as 
the  earlier  name  of  Botany  Bay,  Captain  King  says — "it  is 
so  called  in  the  charts  of  the  Endeavour's  voyage,  in  the  Hydro- 
graphical  Office  at  the  Admiralty,  as  well  as  in  Sir  Joseph  Banks's 
copy  of  the  Endeavour's  journal,  and  in  Dr.  Solander's  MS. 
journal,  both  of  which  are  in  the  possession  of  my  friend  Robert 
Brown,  Esq.""^  The  subsequent  fate  of  the  Journal  seems  to  be 
a  matter  of  unpublished  history.  If  the  supposition  be  not 
altogether  groundless  that  when  the  Endeavour  was  in  harbour 
and  there  was  a  prospect  of  botanising.  Banks  left  the  record  of 
zoological  and  anatomical  details  to  Solander  for  the  most  part, 
one  can  understand  Sir  Joseph's  brief  mention  of  certain  topics, 
such  as  the  characteristics  of  the  kangaroo,  concerning  which  his 
Journal  might  otherwise  have  been  expected  to  be  more  explicit. 

*  King's  Narrative  of  a  Survey  of  the  Intertropical,  &c.,  Coasts  of  Aus- 
tralia.    Vol.ii.  p. 9  (1827). 


•224  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Three  kangaroos  were  captured  during  the  stay  of  the  'Endeavour' 
at  the  Endeavour  River.  But  Sir  Joseph  says  nothing  about  the 
sex  of  these  animals,  of  their  dentition,  of  the  syndactylism  of 
the  hind  feet,  nor  of  any  possible  affinity  to  the  female  phalanger 
with  two  young  ones  which  he  himself  captured.  Nevertheless 
we  know  from  other  sources  that  some  of  these  points  did  not 
altogether  escape  the  notice  of  members  of  the  party.  Oliver 
Goldsmith's  account  of  the  kangaroo,  published  in  1774,  appears 
to  have  been  based  largely  on  information  supplied  by  Sir  Joseph; 
and  this  contains  one  observation  which  is  possible  only  upon 
the  skull  in  a  fresh  condition.  And  though  not  a  naturalist, 
Sj^dney  Parkinson  makes  a  very  fair  attempt,  in  his  Journal,  to 
describe  both  the  dentition  and  the  syndactyle  hind  foot.  It 
seems  hardly  credible  that  Solander's  Journal  would  reveal 
nothing  upon  these  and  other  interesting  points.  Therefore  the 
expectation  that  its  publication  would  supply  a  valuable  com- 
plementary volume  to  Hooker's  "  Banks  "  appeared  to  be  not 
altogether  a  vain  one.  It  was  to  be  hoped  that  some  effort 
might  be  made  to  rescue  it  from  oblivion  and  to  make  it  accessible 
to  those  who  would  gladly  welcome  its  publication — or  even  the 
portion  of  it  which  relates  to  Australia. 


WEDNESDAY,  JUNE  28th,   1905. 

The  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  of  the  Society  was  held  in 
the  Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  June  28th,  1905. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Mr.  Edward  Sutherland  Stokes,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  Department 
of  Water  Supply  and  Sewerage,  Sydney,  was  elected  a  Member 
of  the  Society. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous 
Monthly  Meeting,  amounting  to  7  Vols.,  42  Parts  or  Nos.,  7 
Bulletins,  1  Report  and  4  Pamphlets,  received  from  40  Societies, 
<fcc.,  and  3  Individuals,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 


225 


ONT    AN    UNDESCRIBED    SPECIES    OF    ACTINOTUS 
FROM    EASTERN    AUSTRALIA. 

By  R.  T.  Baker,  F.L.S.,  Curator,  Technological  Museum. 
(Plate  iv.) 

AcTiNOTUs  Paddisoni,  sp.nov. 

A  prostrate  annual  with  perennial  base,  having  strong,  wiry, 
slightly  pubescent,  dichotomous  branches  which  measure  one  or 
two  feet  in  length,  curving  upwards  at  the  ends  and  radiating 
from  the  perennial  base. 

Leaves  not  numerous,  stem-clasping,  solitar}'-  or  rarely  two  at 
the  same  node,  sometimes  over  2  inches  long,  3-partite  or  2-partite, 
with  linear  cuneate  or  oblong  linear,  nearly  acute  segments,  1  to  3 
lines  long,  entire  or  2-  or  3-lobed,  almost  glabrous  above,  a  few 
scattered  silky  plumose  hairs  on  the  under  surface  especially  on 
the  midrib  and  thickened  edges. 

Umbels  dens©;  on  stout  peduncles  measuring  2  to  5  lines  long, 
depressed  on  the  peduncle.  Involucre  radiating  to  9  lines  when  in 
flower  and  to  over  1  inch  in  diameter  when  in  fruit,  consisting  of  12 
to  20  lanceolate,  acute  bracts  united  for  about  one-half  their 
length,  covered  on  both  sides  with  silky  plumose  hairs,  nerved  or 
striated  from  the  base. 

Flowers  very  numerous,  almost  sessile;  pistillate  flowers  very 
few,  hermaphrodite  flowers  predominating,  often  imperfectly 
developed,  having  also  staminodia.  Calyx  divided  into  five  acute 
15 


226  AN  UNDESCRIBED  SPECIES  OF  ACTISOTUS, 

lobes  covered  with  silky  plumose  hairs,  inside  glabrous.  Petals 
none.  Fertile  stamens  few,  rarely  5  in  each  flower,  mostly  2. 
Staminodia  strap- shaped  or  linear,  these  often  are  5  in  number. 
Styles  2,  shortly  joined  at  the  base,  thick  and  short,  clavate, 
curved  inwards.  Fruit  nearly  orbicular,  black,  glabrous  or 
slightly  ciliate  on  the  ridges  just  below  the  calyx. 

This  plant  was  exhibited  as  probably  new  at  the  April  Meeting 
of  the  Society  in  1904;  as  since  then  more  perfect  data  having  been 
obtained,  it  is  now  described  as  new. 

Dividing  the  known  Actinoti  into  two  divisions,  i.e.,  the  erect 
and  prostrate,  this  species  would  be  classed  with  the  latter,  for  Mr. 
Paddison  informed  me  that,  "  from  the  centre  the  stalks  radiate 
in  every  direction  and  lie  on  the  ground  slightl}'  turned  up  at  the 
base,"  and  also,  "that  it  was  growing  in  rather  stony  ground 
made  up  of  red  loam,  sand  and  stone." 

As  a  prostrate  plant  its  systematic  classification  becomes  easy, 
for  only  two  or  three  of  the  species  are  placed  as  decumbent  and 
none  actually  as  prostrate. 

The  umbels  and  involucre  have  the  facies  of  those  species  with 
erect  habit,  the  bracts  of  the  involucre,  however,  being  a  little 
smaller,  but  much  larger  than  those  of  A.  Gihbonsii,  F.v.M.,  and 
having  a  different  tomentum  from  any  described  species. 

Like  A.  Heliajithi,  Labill.,  A. minor,  DC,  A.helUdioides,  Benth., 
and  A.  glomeratus,  Benth.,  it  has  no  petals,  the  absence  of  which 
organ, along  with  other  features,  separates  it  from  A.  leucocephaluSy 
Benth.,  A.rhomhoideiis,  Benth.,  and  A.  Forsjjthii,  ]Maiden  k  Betche. 
From  A.  Schwarzii,  F.v.M.,  it  differs  in  the  length  of  peduncles 
and  pedicels,  habit  and  floral  characters. 

When  herbarium  specimens  of  this  Flannel-flower  are  placed 
in  juxtaposition  with  those  of  described  species,  macroscopical 
differences  are  at  once  apparent;  and  when  examined  microscopi- 
cally these  are  still  further  emphasised. 

The  numerous  hairs  on  the  sepals  are  plumose  as  well  as  those 
occurring  on  other  parts  of  the  plant. 

Some  of  the  floral  structures  are  perhaps  not  so  regular  or  rather 
constant  as  pertain  in  other  species.     Only  a  few  of  the  flowers 


BY    R.    T.    BAKER.  227 

are  pistilLate,  the  remainder  having  both  stamens  and  pistil  as 
well  as  staminodia  or  pistil  and  staminodia.  These  staminodia 
are  strap-shaped  and  in  some  flowers  are  regularly  5  in  number, 
so  that  they  were  at  first  regarded  as  linear  petals,  but  their 
absence  in  a  few  flowers  having  only  a  pistil,  led  to  their  finally 
being  determined  as  staminodia,  — organs  not  recorded  in  connec- 
tion with  any  other  Actinotus,  although  Bentham  (B.Fl.  iii.  369) 
mentions  under  A.  bellidioides  "petals  none  (or  sometimes 
linear  ?);  and  probably  it  was  organs  similar  to  those  now  shown 
to  occur  in  this  species  that  he  found  in  his  species,  and  was  in 
doubt  as  to  their  true  significance. 

In  no  instance  were  five  perfect  stamens  found  in  a  flower, 
although  very  many  were  examined,  the  usual  number  being  two, 
along  with  staminodia.  It  was  thought  at  first  that  the  anthers 
had  become  detached,  but  the  evidence  was  opposed  to  this  con- 
clusion, as  the  filaments  bearing  the  anthers  tapered  upwards  to 
a  fine  point  to  the"  back  of  the  anther,  and  no  such  similar 
filaments  could  be  found,  the  other  organs,  the  staminodia, 
expanding  upwards  and  being  quite  obtuse  at  the  top,  and  wanting 
in  proof  that  they  had  ever  performed  the  function  of  filaments. 

The  disc  mentioned  in  connection  with  other  species  is  entirely 
absent  in  the  flowers  of  this  plant;  the  pistil  is  bifurcated  almost 
from  the  base,  the  arms  being  short  and  comparatively  thick. 

The  above  floral  features  alone  difi'erentiate  the  species  from 
the  more  recently  described  species  such  as  A.  Gihhonsii,  F.v.M., 
A.  Schwarzii,  F.v.M.,  and  A.  Forsythii,  Maiden  k,  Betche,  and  as 
well  as  from  those  species  enumerated  in  the  'Flora  Australiensis  ' 
(Vol.  iii.  p.  367).  The  junction  of  the  strongly-nerved  involucre 
bracts  for  one-half  their  length,  and  the  concave  base,  are  also 
good  distinguishing  features  of  the  species.  A.  Gibbonsii  is  a 
much  more  delicate  plant  with  greener  leaves,  smaller  sessile 
umbels  and  bracts  and  different  floral  organs  and  tomentum. 

In  botanical  sequence  it  might  be  placed  between  A.  bellidioides 
and  A.  gloryieratus,  the  staminodia  connecting  it  with  the  former, 
althousfh  it  has  not  much  in  common  with  the  latter. 


228  AN  UNDESCRIBED  SPECIES  OF  ACTINOTUS. 

It  is  named  after  Mr.  A.  Paddison  of  New  Aiigledool,  its 
discoverer,  who  has  devoted  much  time  to  studying  the  flora  of 
that  arid  part  of  Australia,  and  who  has  also  been  instrumental 
in  bringing  other  botanical  novelties  to  light. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  IV. 
Fig.  1. — Branch. 

Fig.  2. — Hermaphrodite  flower  (part  of),  showing  stamens  and  staminodia. 
Fig.  3. — Pistillate  flower  (part  of). 
Pig.  4,— Pistil. 
Fig.  5. — Individual  flower. 
Fig.  6.— Seed. 
Fig.  7.-  Plumose  hair. 

All  enlarged  but  Fig.  1. 


229 


FIVE  NEW  SPECIES  OF  CICINDELA  FROM 
TROPICAL  AUSTRALIA. 

By  Thomas  G.  Sloane. 


ClCINDELA    HACKERI, 


n.sp. 


Elongate.  Antennae  with  joints  5-11  swollen.  Head  and 
prothorax  of  a  greenish -bronze,  front  and  clypeus  greenish : 
elytra  black,  opaque;  a  white  stripe  on  each  elytron  extending 

from  shoulder  nearly  to  apical 
sutural  angle — inner  margin  of 
this  white  stripe  produced  at 
about  basal  fourth,  middle,  and 
apical  fourth,  middle  process 
about  as  wide  as  the  stripe  itself 
and  extending  inwards  to  about 
the  sutural  third  of  the  width 
/  KIS  \  ^^   elytron,    anterior    and    pos- 

/  ^^S  \  terior  processes  merely  forming 

I  ^m^^k  V  sinuosities  in  the  outer  margin 

of  the  black  discoidal  area;  mar- 
gin black,  very  narrow  on  apical 
curve ;     under    surface    bright 
metallic-blue,    prosternum    and 
mesosternum  with   white  hairs 
above  anterior  and  middle  coxj«, 
a  stripe  of  white  hair  extending 
from   anterior   margin  of    met- 
episterna    obliquely  backwards 
on  to  posterior  coxse;  all  the  coxse  with  white  hair,  and  the  femora 
with  scattered  white  setae;  labrura  white  with  anterior  margin 
infuscate,   the  anterior  infuscation  reaching  backwards  for  half 


230  FIVE  NEW  SPECIES  OF  CICINDELA, 

the  length  of  the  labrum;  palpi  black  with  greenish  reflections; 
antennae  black  with  four  basal  joints  purple;  legs  metallic-green 
or  purple. 

Head  2-5  mm.  across  eyes,  deeply  channelled  and  striolate 
between  eyes;  occiput  rugulose;  front  and  clypeus  shagreened. 
Labrum  large,  convex,  particularly  in  middle  of  base,  7-dentate. 
Prothorax  a  little  broader  than  long  (1-6  x  1*75  mm.),  rugose, 
strongly  transversely  impressed  anteriorly  and  posteriorly, 
canaliculate  in  middle,  anterior  impression  widely  >  shaped. 
Elytra  long,  parallel  (5-8  x  2-9  mm. 'i,  opaque;  discoidal  area 
shagreened,  punctulate  on  basal  half,  puncturation  obsolete  on 
apical  half;  sutural  border  with  a  short  spine  at  apex;  a  sub- 
sucural  longitudinal  row  of  green  punctures  extending  backwards 
from  each  side  of  scutellum  to  apical  fourth,  a  few  similar 
punctures  in  a  depression  near  each  shoulder.  Length  10, 
breadth  5  8  mm. 

Hah. — Q.  :  Cooktown  (Colls.  Hacker,  Lea,  Sloane,  French). 

This  elegant  species  was  brought  from  Queensland  by  Mr. 
Henry  Hacker,  who  took  a  number  of  specimens  along  the  rail- 
way line  about  three  miles  from  Cooktown;  and  who  presented 
me  with  specimens.  It  is  allied  to  C.  iosceles,  Hope,  but 
evidently  differs  by  the  pattern  of  the  elytra,  etc.;  it  is  also  allied 
to  C.  doddi,  SI.,  but  differs  by  antennae  swollen  after  fourth  joint, 
serrations  of  anterior  margin  of  labrum,  pattern  of  elytron,  etc. 
According  to  the  accepted  system  of  classification,  it  comes  into 
the  genus  Antennaria  (Dokhtourhoff,  1883),  but  (apart  from  the 
fact  that  Antennaria  is  invalidated  by  an  earlier  generic  use  of 
Aatennarius)  it  appears  to  me  that  C.  doddi,  wdiich  has  not  the 
antennae  swollen  towards  the  apex,  is  congeneric  with  C.  hackeri, 
and  that  therefore  the  swollen  antennas  of  C.  iosceles  and  C. 
hackeri  do  not,  in  themselves,  form  a  character  requiring  these 
species  to  be  separated  from  the  genus  Qicindela. 

CiCINDELA    DODDI,   n.Sp. 

(J.  Head  and  prothorax  with  upper  surface  bronzy;  elytra 
black  with  a  bronzy  tinge  (the  dark  part  opaque,  subsericeous, 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  231 

shagreened),  three  whitish  spots  on  each  elytron — the  first 
humeral,  narrow,  oblong,  extending  backwards  to  about  the  level 
of  the  posterior  margin  of  the  metasternal  episterna,  infuscate 
behind  humeral  angle;  the  second  irregularly  triangular,  opposite 
second  ventral  segment;  the  third  narrow,  extending  from  apical 
curve  two-thirds  of  distance  towards  sutural  apex;  under  surface 
of  body  and  prothorax,  and  sides  of  head  metallic-blue;  femora 
green,  four  anterior  ones  with  apex  obscurel}"  testaceous;  tibiae 
brown  near  base,  becoming  of  an  obscure  purple  tinge  towards 
apex;  tarsi  similar  in  colour  to  apex  of  tibiae;  trochanters  black; 
antennae  with  joints  5-11  almost  black,  joints  1-4  brownish  with 
a  greenish  tinge  on  upper  surface  of  first  and  towards  base  of 
third  and  fourth;  labrum,  base  of  mandibles  and  palpi  whitish; 
extreme  edge  of  labrum,  apex  of  mandibles,  and  apical  joint  of 
palpi  black;  four  anterior  coxse,  and  sides  of  mesosternum  and 
metasternum  clothed  with  long  white  hair,  similar  hairs  (but 
shorter)  on  femora,  these  much  sparser  on  posterior  femora. 

Head  much  wider  than  prothorax  (1-9  mm.  across  eyes); 
clypeus  smooth.  Labrum  rather  long,  convex,  a  small  distinct 
setigerous  lateral  angle  on  each  side  at  about  half  the  length; 
margins  sloping  forward  lightly  and  obliquely  from  these  lateral 
angles;  anterior  angles  sharply  marked,  shortly  triangular; 
anterior  margin  lightly  advanced  in  middle;  a  deep  notch,  with 
a  seta  at  bottom,  on  each  side  of  median  prominence;  a  small 
triangular  prominence  between  each  anterior  angle  and  the  notch 
defining  the  median  prominence.  Prothorax  narrow,  as  long  as 
broad  (1*4  x  1-4  mm.);  anterior  transverse  impression  hardly 
marked;  basal  transverse  impression  feebly  developed.  Elytra 
narrow,  oval  (4-5  x  2-5  mm.),  subparaJlel  on  sides,  subdepressed; 
a  short  distinct  punctate  longitudinal  depression  extending 
backwards  from  each  side  of  peduncle;  a  longitudinal  row  of 
about  nine  subfoveolate  punctures  extending  from  each  side  of 
scutellum  to  apex,  the  punctures  closer  together  near  base;  a 
similar  row  of  punctures  extending  backwards  from  each  side  of 
peduncle  to  middle  of  elytra.  Prosternal  episterna  l^evigate, 
convex.     Length  8,  breadth  2-5  mm. 


232  FIVE  NEW  SPECIES  OF  CICINDELA, 

Hah. — Q.  :  Kuranda  (Coll.  Sloane;  unique). 

I  received  a  single  specimen  from  Mr.  F.  P.  Dodd  (from  whom 
I  have  had  large  and  valuable  collections  of  Carabidse  from  North 
Queensland),  and  to  whom  I  have  much  pleasure  in  dedicating 
this  interesting  species.  Its  affinity  seems  to  be  towards  C. 
iosceles,  Hope,  from  which  its  narrow  antennae  not  swollen 
towards  apex  at  once  differentiate  it.  Though  somewhat  resem- 
bling C .  froggatti,  it  differs  too  conspicuously  from  that  species 
to  be  taken  for  it,  having  the  head  and  prothorax  narrower; 
elytra  not  covered  with  variolose  punctures,  their  pattern 
different,  disc  with  two  longitudinal  rows  of  punctures. 

CiCINDELA    PLEBEIA,   n.sp. 

9.  Upper  surface  of  a  general  blackish  colour;  head  between 
eyes  subviolaceous,  clypeus  blue,  labrum  whitish  with  middle 
of  apex  black;  disc  of  prothorax  olivaceous,  submetallic;  sides  of 
head  behind  eyes  and  sides  of  pronotum  greenish;  elytra  black, 
opaque  (subsericeous),  with  a  metallic  tinge  on  each  side  behind 
shoulders;  a  triangular  pale  spot  on  margin  of  each  elytron  just 
after  the  beginning  of  apical  curve;  under  surface  of  head,  pro- 
thorax and  body  of  a  beautiful  blue  colour;  femora  greenish. 

Head  as  in  C.  interrupta,  Fabr.,  (2-2  mm.  across  eyes).  Labrum 
with  anterior  margin  rounded  and  strongly  unidentate  in  middle, 
4-setose.  Prothorax  as  in  C.  interrupta  (1*3  x  1*5  mm.),  but  more 
coarsely  rugulose  and  less  strongly  transversely  impressed 
anteriorly  and  posteriorly.  Elytra  as  in  C.  interru2Jta  (4-75  x  2  7 
mm.),  shagreened,  punctate,  the  puncturation  stronger  towards 
base  than  apex.     Length  7*5,  breadth  2-2  mm. "^ 


*  Postscript  {added  July  10th,  1905).— While  this  paper  has  been  passing 
through  the  press,  I  have  received  from  Mr.  Dodd  the  male  of  C.  pleheia, 
which  differs  from  the  female  only  in  being  a  little  smaller,  and  by  the 
shape  of  the  anterior  margin  of  the  labrum.  J .  Labrum  with  apex  rounded 
on  sides,  bisinuately  truncate  in  middle,  outer  angles  of  this  median  trun- 
cature  small,  subdentiform,  more  prominent  than  the  feeble  median  promi- 
nence; sixth  ventral  segment  very  lightly  and  widely  emarginate  at  apex. 
Length  7,  proth.  1  -2  x  1-35,  el.  4*4  x  2-")  mm. 


BY    THOMAS    G.    SLOANE.  233 

IJab.—Q.  :  Ccairns  (Dodd  :  Coll.  Sloane). 

Allied  to  C  interrupta,  Fabr.,  ( =  C.  circiimcincta,  Cast.)  but 
differing  by  smaller  size,  labrum  unidentate  in  middle,  under 
surface  glabrous,  with  only  a  few  scattered  hairs  on  middle  of 
abdomen  and  sides  of  metasternum,  colour  of  elytra  and  under 
surface,  etc. 

CiCINDELA    CURVICOLLIS,   H.sp. 

(J.  Of  a  bronze  colour;  elytra  opaque,  subnitid  towards  lateral 
margins;  a  narrow  transverse  white  fascia  at  half  the  length 
extending  from  lateral  border  towards  middle  of  width,  inner  end 
of  this  fascia  curved  backwards;  a  small  white  spot  at  apical 
third  of  the  length  and  sutural  third  of  the  width;  labrum  dirty 
white;  mandibles  pallid  with  apex  infuscate;  femora  bronzy; 
00X86,  apex  of  femora,  and  greater  part  of  tibiae  lurid-testaceous; 
abdomen  metallic-blue! 

Head  2  mm.  across  eyes,  rugulose;  eyes  large  and  prominent. 
Labrum  finely  3-dentate  in  middle,  4-setose.  Prothorax  small,  a 
little  broader  than  long  (1-25  x  1*4  mm.);  upper  surface  coarsely 
shagreened;  a  rather  deep  transverse  impression  near  anterior 
margin,  and  a  wider  and  less  strongly  marked  impression  across 
base;  disc  subconvex;  sides  lightly  rounded  between  anterior  and 
posterior  transverse  impressions;  base  and  apex  truncate.  Elytra 
subparallel  on  sides  (4-5  x  2-5  mm.),  roundly  and  decidedly 
declivous  to  lateral  border  on  basal  half;  derm  finely  shagreened 
and  punctate,  the  puncturation  fine  but  distinct  on  basal  half, 
very  fine  on  apical  half;  apex  evenly  curved,  with  border  finely 
and  closely  serrulate;  sutural  border  shortly  mucronate  at  apex. 
Length  7,  breadth  2-5  mm. 

Hah. — North-west  Australia  (Coll.  Sloane;  given  to  me  by 
Mr.  C.  French). 

Allied  to  C.  mastersi,  Macl.,  by  form  of  labrum  and  rounded 
sides  of  prothorax,  but  distinct  by  different  colour;  smaller  size; 
prothorax  less  transverse;  elytra  less  strongly  shagreened,  and 
with  different  pale  markings.  In  general  appearance  it  resembles 
C.froggatti,  Macl.,  but  differs  by  the  labrum  3-dentate,  and  only 


234  FIVE  NEW  SPECIES  OF  CICINDELA. 

4-setose ;    prothorax  more    strongly    rounded  on   sides ;    elytral 
markings,  etc. 

CiCINDELA    LEAI,   n.sp. 

Subcylindrical  cupreous;  elytra  strongly  and  closely  punctate. 
Clypeus  and  a  narrow  mark  extending  backwards  between  eyes 
from  base  of  antennae  on  to  vertex  blue;  labrum  dirty  white,  with 
a  large  infuscate  basal  area;  each  elytron  with  two  lateral 
triangular  white  spots,  the  anterior  just  behind  middle,  the 
posterior  on  external  half  of  apical  margin ;  sides  of  head  and 
prothorax  of  a  bright  cupreous  colour;  abdomen  blue;  sides  of 
mesosternum,  metasternum  (including  episterna)  and  posterior 
coxaa  clothed  with  white  hair;  femora  greenish  towards  base, 
lurid  towards  apex;  tibiae  and  tarsi  blackish-green. 

Head  1*8  mm.  across  eyes,  channelled  and  striolate  between 
eyes;  occiput  rugulose.  Labrum  7-dentate.  Prothorax  rugulose, 
as  long  as  broad  (IS  x  1-3  mm.),  subcylindrical;  anterior  and 
posterior  transverse  impressions  well  marked,  but  not  deep;  sides 
hardly  rounded  between  them.  Elytra  much  wider  than  pro- 
thorax (4  X  2-15  mm.),  very  convex,  parallel  on  sides;  punctura- 
tion  close  and  coarse,  finer  towards  apex  than  towards  base; 
sutural  border  with  a  small  sharp  spine  at  apex.  Length  6-75, 
breadth  2  15  mm. 

Hah. — Cooktown  (Colls.  Hacker,  Lea,  French  and  Sloane). 
Mr.  Hacker  (to  w^iom  I  am  indebted  for  specimens;  took  this 
pretty  little  species  near  the  same  s]3ot  where  he  obtained  C. 
hackeri^  SI.  It  is  closely  allied  to  C.  tenuicollis,  Macl  ,  but  differs 
by  larger  size ;  prothorax  wider,  not  longer  than  broad  (C. 
tenuicollis  1-25  x  I'l  mm.),  the  disc  more  depressed  (not  roundly 
convex)  both  transverse  impressions  less  deeply  marked,  sides 
less  rounded  between  them  ;  elytra  with  anterior  white  spot 
larf'er,  not  circular,  its  outer  ediie  not  a  considerable  distance 
from  border. 


235 


BEVISION    OF   THE    AUSTRALIAN    CURGULI0N1B.E 

BELONGING  TO  THE  SUBFAMILY 

CRYPTORHYNC  HIDES. 

Part  YIL 

By  Arthur  M.   Lea,  F.E.S. 

Genus  Blepiarda,  Pascoe,  Journ.  of  Ent.  ii.  p. 430,  1866. 

Head  small,  not  concealed;  ocular  fovea  small  and  deep.  Eyes 
large,  subtriangular,  finely  faceted,  distant.  Rostrum  long  and 
rather  thin,  feebly  curved,  longer  than  prothorax.  Mandibles 
rather  prominent,  each  tridentate  internally.  Antenytce  slender, 
sexually  variable;  scape  of  $  inserted  at  apex  of  rostrum,  the 
length  of  funicle  and  club  combined;  of  9  inserted  slightly 
nearer  apex  than  base,  shorter  than  funicle  and  club  combined : 
two  basal  joints  of  funicle  elongate;  4th-7th  transverse;  club 
elongate,  cylindrical,  apparentl}^  not  jointed,  in  ^  shorter  than 
funicle,  in  ^  the  length  of  or  shorter  than  funicle.  Prothorax 
transverse,  disc  scarcely  convex,  apex  produced,  narrow  and  raised, 
base  bisinuate;  ocular  lobes  prominent  but  slightly  obtuse. 
Scutellum  moderately  large  and  distinct.  Elytra  about  thrice 
the  length  of,  closely  applied  to  prothorax,  and  not  much  wider 
at  base;  base  trisinuate,  shoulders  feebly  produced,  apex  rounded. 
Pectoral  canal  rather  narrow  and  deep,  terminated  between  four 
anterior  coxse.  Mesosteraal  receptacle  raised,  walls  thin  and 
rapidly  sloping  behind,  keeled  along  middle,  emargination  very 
feebly  transverse,  u-shaped;  cavernous.  J/etaster fiiwi  moder- 
ately large,  very  slightly  shorter  than  basal  segment  of  abdomen; 
episterna  large.  ^6(iomen  moderately  large,  sutures  distinct;  1st 
segment  slightly  longer  than  2nd,  its  apex  rather  strongly  incurved 
to  middle,  intercoxal  process  rounded  and  narrow;  3rd  and  4th 
large,  feebly  rounded,  their  combined  length  slightly  more  than 


*-\>l>  KKVISION   OV  THK  AlSVKAl.lAN  OU  KOll.lON  1  P.F..   \  11.. 

that  ot  "Jnd  and  oonsidorably  moiv  than  that  of  apical.  Ltys 
rather  short,  ex^vpt  the  anterior  in  ^C;  toniora  grooved  and  feebly 
dentate,  pvv<torior  terminatevi  considerably  befoiv  apex  of  abdo- 
men; tibi;v  oompr^sstHi,  straight,  except  at  extreme  base;  tarsi 
m<.xierately  long.  oi\i  joint  wide,  divply  biloWd,  claw-joint 
elongate,  sei«.\;;e.  SulvUiptic,  squam«.\<e.  punctate,  feebly  tuWr- 
culate,  wingt^ii. 

This  genus  Wongs  to  M.  Lacoixiaire's  "groupe"  M'cistO!{ti/!iiies, 
and  linds  its  nearest  allies  in  the  New  Zealand  genera  M^cisto- 
styius  and  I\%ninomoct*nis  rather  than  in  the  Australian  Proto- 
palu^.  The  sexual  distinctions  are  very  pronounced.  Six  species^ 
have  Ixvn  described  from  Australia,  New  Guinea  and  Fiji. 

Blkpiakda  usiH'LArA.  Pasc,  Journ.  of  Ent.  ii.  430.  pl.xvii.  tig  !_; 
Mast.  Cat.  Sp.  No.  or^Tl. 

C.  Black,  sulx^paque,  antennae  piceous  or  reddish-piceous. 
Up^vr  surface  densely  clothed  with  rv»undeii  scales,  much  larger 
on  prothorax  than  on  elytra.  Scales  of  pivthorax  almost  uniform 
in  colour,  but  varying  on  different  specimens  fix>m  almost  white 
to  pale  ochreous-brown.  A  triangular  patch  of  similar  scales  on 
elytra  limiteii  by  a  line  drawn  fn.^m  each  shoulder  to  suture  at 
alv>ut  the  middle:  a  small  and  very  distinct  rounded  spot  of  pale 
scales  on  each  elytrv>n  near  apex  and  feebly  or  not  at  all  connecteti 
with  apex:  elsewhere  the  scales  vary  from  oohreous  to  dark 
velvety-brown.  Head  and  rostrum  sparsely  squamose  :  the 
funicle  with  long  ivourved  hair  on  one  side,  setose  hair  on  the 
other.  Club  finely  pubescent.  Under  surface  with  oohreous  and 
sooty  scales  rather  sparsely  and  unevenly  distributed. 

Heoti  densely  punctate:  excavated  along  middle,  the  excava- 
tion widest  and  deepest  on  forehead.  Rostrum  rather  coarsely 
punctate  throughout:  sides  dilateil  near  base,  middle  with  a 
distinct  carina  continuous  fi\>m  ocular  fovea  to  a  shallow  longi 
tudiual  excavation  between  antennse,  a  feeble  waved  carina  on 
each  side  of  the  median  one.  Second  joint  of  funicle  distinctly 
longer  than  1st,  4th-7th  feebly  decreasing  in  width.  Profhoraj' 
triangular,  moderately  transven>e,  verv  feeblv  convex,  raised  iu 


front;  ;ipf;x  fiiVfior  than  olytra,  l^ss  than  orif.-fourth  thfi  width  of 
baso  and  ff.fjhly  bifurcatf^;  disc  with  iaahUt  elevation"  and  depres- 
Hions,  four  Hrnall  but  moderately  distinct  fasciculate  tuVjercles 
across  middle,  a  feeble  carina  showing  Vjetween  the  two  median; 
densely  punctate,  punctures  concealed.  Elytra  somewhat 
flattened  beneath  the  pale  basal  scales,  the  sides  and  apex 
strongly  declivous;  striate-punctate,  punctures  large  but  some- 
what irregular:  interstices  the  width  of  or  wider  than  punctures, 
feebly  convex;  suture,  3rd  and  5th  feebly  raised  and  subfascicu- 
late  in  parts,  in  places  feebly  connected  by  transverse  or  oblique 
subfasciculate  elevations.  Under  aurfacA  moderately  densely  but 
feebly  punctate,  apical  segment  densely  and  strongly  punctate. 
Femora  den.sely  punctate,  the  anterior  long  and  rather  acutely 
dentate  Vjut  feebly  grooved,  the  posterior  feeVjly  dentate  and 
.strongly  grooved.      Length  10^,  rostrum  4;  width  oj  rnrn.* 

5.  Differs  in  having  the  excavation  on  the  forehead  narrower 
and  deeper:  rostrum  shorter  and  glaVjrous  except  at  base,  thinner 
and  finely  but  at  Vjase  moderately  strongly  punctate,  raised  Vjut 
not  carinate  at  middle,  greatest  width  at  (not  near)  extreme  ba.se 
and  least  at  apex;  insertion  of  antennae  and  relative  lengths  of 
its  parts  difierent,  funicle  with  ordinary  set^e  and  the  anterior 
legs  only  as  long  as  the  posterior. 

Wih,—il:  "Cape  York"  (Pascoe)— N.S.W.  :  Tweed  and 
llichmond   Rivers  (Lea). 

A  remarkable  and,  so  far  as  I  arn  aware,  unique  (in  the  Aus- 
tralian Cryptorhynchides)  feature  of  the  ^7  is  that  the  joints  of 
the  funicle  diminish  in  width  from  the  middle  to  both  Vjase  and 
apex;  the  difference  is  certain I3"  flight,  Vjut  it  can  Vje  seen  at  a 
glance.  The  peculiar  velvety  fasciculate  elevations  on  the  elytra 
are  not  at  all  constant  in  shape  or  position;  in  some  specimens 
they  appear  as  feeVjle  waved  lines,  in  others  as  more  or  le.ss 
irregular  rings,  h»ut  they  are  usually  more  pronounced  across  the 
middle  and  very  rarely  encroach  on  the  pale  basal  .scales. 

*  A  small  male  under  examination  measures  but  5  mm.  in  length. 


238  REVISION  OF  THE  AUSTRALIAN'  CURCULIONID.E,  VII., 

Blepiarda  vitiata,  Pasc,  Jourii.  Linn.  8oc.  Zool.xi.  1871,  p.210. 

5.  Pteddish-brown  or  piceous;  rostrum  red  or  piceous;  antennae 
(club  excepted)  paler  than  rostrum.  Upper  surface  densely 
squamose.  Scales  of  prothorax  of  an  uniform  fawn  colour,  stouter 
than  those  of  elytra  and  suberect.  Elytra  with  similarly 
coloured  scales  forming  a  subtriangular  basal  patch,  bounded 
behind  by  a  line  drawn  from  the  shoulders  to  the  suture  before 
the  middle,  a  small  distinct  elongate  spot  of  pale  scales  on  each 
side  near  apex;  elsewhere  with  brown  scales.  Head  and  base  of 
rostrum  with  scales  varying  from  almost  white  to  sooty-brown, 
a  moderately  distinct  spot  on  each  side  behind  eyes.  Under 
surface  with  rather  sparse  but  evenly  distributed  scales,  varying 
from  white  to  sooty,  the  darker  scales  short  and  stout,  the  paler 
long  and  thin;  legs  rather  densely  clothed  with  scales,  similarly 
varying  in  colour,  but  all  more  or  less  elongate. 

Head  densely  punctate;  longitudinally  and  rather  narrowly 
excavated  in  middle.  Rostrum  wider  at  base  than  at  apex; 
smooth  and  finely  punctate,  towards  base  rather  coarsely  punc- 
tate. Two  basal  joints  of  funicle  equal  in  length,  3rd-7th  trans- 
verse and  equal  in  width.  Prothorax  strongly  transverse,  apex 
feebly  produced  and  about  half  the  width  of  base,  sides  parallel 
on  basal  half,  disc  feebly  convex,  very  feebly  tuberculate,  tubercles 
feebly  fasciculate,  four  moderately  large  ones  forming  a  median 
transverse  row.  a  feeble  carina  showing  between  the  two  median; 
apex  very  feebly  bifasciculate;  densel}"  punctate,  punctures  con- 
cealed. Elytra  raised  at  base,  not  much  wider  than  prothorax, 
strongly  convex,  middle  level  with  apex  of  prothorax;  striate- 
punctate,  punctures  moderately  large  but  partially  concealed, 
interstices  wide,  feebly  convex,  3rd  with  about  five  or  six  feeble 
fasciculate  tubercles,  5th  with  three,  suture  with  two  or  three 
near  summit  of  posterior  declivity.  Metasternum  with  large 
round  punctures,  rather  sparse  in  middle,  very  large  and  rather 
numerous  towards  sides;  episterna  each  with  a  single  row  of 
large,  round  punctures.  Abdomen  with  moderately  large  but 
not  very  numerous  punctures,  a  distinct  row  across  each  of  the 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  239 

intermediates.  Femora  feebly  dentate  and,  except  the  posterior, 
feebly  grooved.      Length  8,  rostrum  2|;  width  4  mm. 

Hab. — Queensland  (Herr  J.  Faust).  Described  by  Mr.  Pascoe 
as  coming  from  Aru. 

I  have  two  specimens  under  examination;  in  one  of  them  the 
rostrum  is  almost  black,  in  the  other  it  is  almost  a  bright  red. 
The  excavation  on  the  head  is  much  less  pronounced  than  in 
undulata,  and  cannot  be  seen  from  above,  although  very  distinct 
if  viewed  from  along  the  rostrum;  the  eyes  are  more  coarsely 
faceted,  the  two  basal  joints  of  the  funicle  are  equal,  the  disc  of 
the  prothorax  is  not  triangular,  and  the  apex  is  not  raised  above 
the  level  of  the  elytra;  these  are  not  triangularly  flattened  at  the 
base;  the  punctures  of  the  under  surface,  especially  at  the  sides 
of  the  metasternum  and  on  its  episterna,  are  very  much  larger, 
and  the  whole  insect  is  considerably  smaller. 

Genus  Pezichus,  Waterhouse. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.  (2)  ii.  p.  193;  Lacord.,  Gen.  Col.vii.  p.  126. 

Head  convex,  not  concealed.  Eyes  large,  coarsely  faceted, 
almost  touching  beneath.  Rostrum  long  and  thin,  feebly  or 
moderately  curved.  Antennce  long  and  thin;  scape  in  9  inserted 
about  one  third  from  apex,  in  $  almost  at  extreme  apex;  2nd 
joint  of  funicle  long  or  very  long;  club  long  or  very  long,  joints 
not  visible.  Prothorax  subconical,  deeper  than  wide,  ocular  lobes 
obtuse  and  almost  level  with  apex,  constriction  shallow,  base 
truncate.  Scutellum  small.  Ehjlra  widest  at  base  and  consider- 
ably wider  than  prothorax.  Pectoral  canal  deep  and  narrow, 
terminated  between  intermediate  coxa?.  Mesosternal  recejytacle 
sloping  from  base  to  apex,  U-shaped;  slightly  cavernous.  Meta- 
sternum shorter  than  the  following  segment,  episterna  rather 
wide.  Abdomen  with  straight  sutures.  Legs  long  and  thin; 
femora  dentate  and  very  feebly  grooved,  posterior  passing  elytra; 
tibijB  compressed  and  slightly  curved;  tarsi  thin,  1st  joint  very 
long.     Convex,  moderately  squamose,  fasciculate,  winged. 

A  remarkable  genus,  allied  to  Protopalus,  as  noted  by  Mr. 
Waterhouse. 


*240  REVISION  OF  THE  AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONID.E,  VII., 

Pezichus  binotatus,  Waterh.;  Mast.  Cat.  Sp.  No.  5565. 

Black,  opaque,  antennae  and  apical  joints  of  tarsi  reddish. 
Above  with  irregular  and  not  dense  ferruginous  scales,  denser 
on  elytral  suture,  prosternum  and  legs  tlmn  elsewhere;  sparse  on 
under  surface  and  subfasciculate  on  elj^tral  tubercles;  on  rostrum 
of  9  at  base  only,  on  ^  almost  to  middle.  A  small  whitish 
fascicle  on  each  side  of  elytra  just  behind  the  middle  on  3rd 
interstice. 

Read  with  three  small  rounded  nude  spaces  in  the  middle  like 
a  pawnbroker's  sign,  in  9  two  only.  Rostrum  in  ^  almost  as  long 
as  anterior  femora,  almost  straight,  a  feeble  carina  extending  to 
apical  third  (which  is  shining);  with  two  almost  obsolete  rows  of 
punctures  on  each  side  of  carina;  in  9  the  rostrum  is  shorter  and 
more  curved,  shining  almost  its  entire  length,  carinate  and 
punctate  only  on  basal  fourth.  Antennae  in  g  very  elongate; 
scape  inserted  almost  at  extreme  apex  of  rostrum;  1st  joint  of 
f unicle  short,  not  one-third  the  length  of  2nd,  2nd  as  long  as  four 
following  combined  and  a  little  longer  than  club,  7th  shortest  of 
all;  in  9  the  scape  is  inserted  about  one-third  from  apex,  2nd 
joint  of  f unicle  not  three  times  as  long  as  1st,  not  as  long  as  four 
following  combined,  and  shorter  than  club,  which  is  a  little 
thicker  than  in  ^.  Prothorax  longer  and  deeper  than  wide,  apex 
rounded,  basal  two-thirds  parallel,  ocular  lobe  rounded;  a  narrow 
shining  carina  extending  from  apex  and  becoming  feebler  at  base; 
upper  sides  with  regular  granules;  lower  punctate.  SciUellum 
small,  round,  elevated,  almost  nude.  Elytra  about  once  and 
one-half  the  width  of  prothorax  and  more  than  twice  its  length, 
shoulders  oblique;  with  regular  rows  of  punctures  that  are  more 
distinct  towards  the  sides;  interstices  convex  and  wider  than 
punctures,  3rd  and  5th  feebly,  the  7th  and  9th  still  more  feebly 
tuberculate;  apex  narrow  and  feebly  emarginate.  Mesosternal 
receptacle  twice  as  long  as  wide.  Basal  segment  of  abdomen  in 
(J  not  twice  the  length  of  2nd,  sparsely  punctate,  intercoxal 
process  narrow,  truncate,  its  sides  raised  and  parallel,  2nd  not 
distinctlv  longer  than  3rd,  both  flattened  in  the  middle,  3rd  with 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  241 

an  oblique  row  of  squamose  punctures  on  each  side  of  middle,  4th 
strongly  punctate  and,  conjointl}^  with  the  5th,  largely  excavated, 
5th  with  a  distinct  keel  or  ridge  on  each  side;  in  9  the  inter- 
coxal  process  is  not  raised  at  the  sides  and  is  less  parallel  than  in 
(J,  3rd  with  a  feeble  transverse  row  of  punctures,  4th  and  5th 
not  excavated.  In  (J  posterior yemor«  shining  beneath,  and  not 
dentate;  tibiae  narrow,  especially  at  apex,  in  the  posterior  without 
spur,  apical  third  shining  and  feebly  twisted;  tarsi  very  long,  1st 
joint  as  long  as  the  rest  combined,  2nd  not  twice  as  long  as  3rd, 
4th  as  long  as  2nd  and  3rd  combined;  in  9  the  femora  have  an 
almost  obsolete  ridge  terminating  at  tooth,  all  the  legs  shorter 
than  in  ^J,  posterior  tibia?  neither  twisted  nor  shining,  and  with 
apical  hook.  Length  5"  H?  rostrum  4J;  width  4|  :  9  10  x  3J  x 
4  J  mm. 

Hah. — Q.  :  "Moreton  Bay"  (Waterhouse),  Brisbane (Illidge) — 
N.S.W.  :  Tweed  River  (Helms  and  Lea). 

The  shining  and  edentate  posterior  femora,  peculiar  curvature 
and  absence  of  terminal  hook  of  the  posterior  tibiae,  and  excava- 
tion of  apical  segment  in  the  $,  as  well  as  the  antennae  and  tarsi 
of  both  sexes  are  unique  in  the  subfamily. 

Pezichus  gracilis,  n.sp. 

Black,  subopaque;  antennae  and  apical  joints  of  tarsi  reddish. 
Prothorax  with  sparse  sooty  scales  and  with  a  distinct  fascicle  in 
the  middle;  elytra  with  minute  scales  and  with  fascicles  on  3rd 
and  5th  interstices,  a  feeble  pale  fascicle  on  3rd  at  summit  of 
posterior  declivity.  Prosternum  with  whitish  scales,  rest  of 
under  surface  feebly  squamose.  Legs  with  soot}^,  intermingled 
with  longer  and  whitish,  scales. 

Head  with  a  feeble  median  carina;  with  large  squamose 
punctures.  Rostrum  distinctly  curved,  with  smaller  and  denser 
punctures  than  on  head  continued  almost  to  scape,  a  feeble 
shining  carina  indistinct  near  base;  apex  shining.  Scape  inserted 
about  one-fourth  from  and  more  than  one-half  its  length  passing 
apex,  its  extreme  base  very  narrow;  1st  joint  of  funicle  thick,  as 
long  as  2nd,  2nd  not  longer  than  two  following  combined;  club 
16 


242  REVISION  OF  THE  AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONID.E,   VII., 

as  long  as  5  apical  joints  and  thicker  than  in  the  preceding 
species.  Prothorax  longer  and  deeper  than  wide;  densely  covered 
with  large  regular  punctures;  ocular  lobes  a  little  more  prominent 
than  in  the  preceding  species;  a  distinct  fasciculate  tubercle 
slightly  in  advance  of  the  middle.  Scutellum  small,  feebly 
raised,  longer  than  wide,  squamose.  Elytra  about  once  and  one- 
half  the  width  of  prothorax  and  more  than  twice  its  length, 
base  almost  truncate,  shoulders  feebly  rounded;  interstices  con- 
vex, 3rd  and  5th  obsoletely  tuberculate  beneath  fascicles,  w4th 
regular  rows  of  punctures,  smaller  and  more  elongate  on  disc  and 
tow^ards  apex,  larger  at  sides,  especially  near  base.  Mesosternal 
receptacle  wider  than  long.  Abdomen  coarsely  punctate;  1st 
segment  not  once  and  one-half  the  length  of  2nd,  intercoxal  pro- 
cess subtriangular,  2nd  not  much  longer  than  3rd  or  4th  and 
sloping,  its  middle  with  several  deep  irregular  foveae  or  large 
punctures;  5th  not  as  long  as  3rd  and  4th  combined  and  densely 
punctate.  Legs  as  in  the  9  of  the  preceding  species,  1st  tarsal  joint 
not  much  longer  than  4th.     Length  5,  rostrum  1  J;  width  2^  mm. 

Hab.—l^.Q.  :  Barron  Falls  (Mr.  A.  Koebele). 

Besides  the  many  prominent  distinctions  between  this  and  the 
preceding  species,  the  elytra  are  more  convex,  more  suddenly 
elevated  at  the  base,  without  even  feeble  tubercles  elsewhere 
than  on  the  3rd  and  5th  interstices,  and  the  punctures  are  larger. 
The  unique  specimen  under  examination  is  perhaps  a  female;  the 
punctures  of  the  rostrum  and  abdominal  segments  might  be 
regarded  as  characteristic  of  the  male  sex,  but  these  appear  to 
be  more  than  counterbalanced  by  the  curvature  of  the  rostrum, 
insertion  of  scape^  dentate  posterior  femora,  non-excavated  apical 
segments  and  intercoxal  process  of  abdomen  not  parallel-sided. 

Neomystocis,*  n.g. 

Head  rather  large  and  convex,  not  concealed.  Eyes  large, 
ovate,  moderately  separated,  very  finely  faceted.  Rostrum  long, 
thin  and  curved.  Antenncethm;  scape  inserted  nearer  apex  than 
base  of  rostrum  and  shorter  than  funicle;  two  basal  joints  of  the 

■^  ve6fxv(TT0i,  newly  dedicated;   Kt?,  weevil. 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  243 

latter  elongate;  club  elongate,  the  joints  with  oblique  sutures. 
Prothorax  transverse,  base  bisinuate,  sides  rounded,  constriction 
feeble,  ocular  lobes  rounded  but  not  obtuse.  Scutellum  distinct. 
Elytra  wider  than  prothorax  and  more  than  twice  as  long. 
Pectoral  canal  deep  and  narrow,  terminated  between  intermediate 
coxse.  Jlesosiernal  receptacle  raised  in  front,  U-shaped;  open. 
Metasternum  slightly  shorter  than  the  following  segment ; 
episterna  of  moderate  width.  Abdomen  with  straight  sutures, 
1st  segment  almost  as  long  as  2nd  and  3rd  combined,  3rd  and  4th 
combined  slightly  longer  than  2nd  or  5th.  Legs  long;  femora 
dentate,  not  grooved,  posterior  passing  elytra;  tibiae  compressed 
and  thin,  almost  straight;  tarsi  almost  the  length  of  tibise,  1st 
and  4th  joints  elongate.  Elliptic,  moderately  convex,  squamose, 
tuberculate,  winged. 

Allied  rather  closely  to  Pezichus,  but  may  be  at  once  distin- 
guished by  the  decidedly  open  mesosternal  receptacle.  Of  the 
species  described  below,  I  have  only  a  female  specimen  under 
examination. 

Neomystocis  squamiventris,  n.sp. 

9.  Black,  antennae  dull  red.  Rather  densely  clothed  with 
small  muddy-fawn  coloured  scales  feebly  tinged  in  places  (apex  and 
lower  flanks  of  prothorax  and  2nd  abdominal  segment)  with 
yellowish-green,  a  small  spot  of  sooty  scales  on  each  side  of  middle 
of  prothorax,  a  moderately  large  round  patch  on  1st  abdominal 
segment  and  a  few  loose  scales  on  elytral  tuberosities.  Rostrum, 
except  at  sides  of  base,  scutellum  and  prothoracic  carina  bare  and 
shining.     Pectoral  canal  rather  densely  clothed  throughout. 

Head  with  small,  dense,  concealed  punctures;  feebly  depressed 
between  eyes.  Rostrum  rather  strongly  curved,  considerably 
longer  than  prothorax,  shining  and  lightly  punctate,  punctures 
denser  and  larger  (but  still  small)  at  base  than  elsewhere.  Scape 
inserted  two-fifths  from  apex  of  rostrum  and  the  length  of  the 
five  following  joints;  funicle  with  the  1st  and  2nd  joints  equal 
and  each  the  length  of  3rd  and  4th  combined,  each  of  these 
the  length  of  5th  and  6th  combined,  5th  sHghtly  longer  than  6th 
or   7th,  these   with  pubescence  as   on   club.      Prothorax   rather 


244  REVISION  OF  THE  AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONID^,  VII., 

strongly  transverse,  base  distinctly  bisinuate  and  more  than  twice 
the  width  of  apex;  punctures  small  and  concealed;  with  a  short 
shining  median  carina  but  which  is  feebly  traceable  to  apex,  each 
side  of  apex  with  a  short  obtuse  ridge.  Scutellum  suboblong. 
Elytra  oblong-cordate,  one-fourth  wider  than  prothorax  and 
almost  thrice  as  long,  base  trisinuate,  widest  across  shoulders,, 
thence  feebly  decreasing  to  apical  fourth  which  is  rather  strongly 
arcuate;  with  series  of  moderately  large  but  almost  entirely  con- 
cealed punctures;  interstices  wider  than  punctures  but  not  convex 
or  regular,  with  feeble  (a  moderately  distinct  one  on  3rd  interstice 
at  basal  third  and  another  about  the  middle)  tubercular  elevations 
scattered  about  and  more  numerous  (but  smaller)  on  posterior 
declivity  than  elsewhere.  Under  surface  feebly  and  very  indis- 
tinctly punctate.  Femora  not  very  strongly  but  acutely  and  very 
distinctly  dentate.  First  joint  of  tarsi  longer  than  2nd  and  3rd 
combined,  2nd  twice  the  length  of  3rd,  the  two  combined  equal 
to  the  4th.     Length  11,  rostrum  3 J;  width  5  mm. 

ffab.—Q.:  Mount  Bellenden-Ker  (Rev.  T.  Blackburn;  No.3082). 

Episodiocis,*  n.g. 

Head  moderately  large  and  convex,  not  concealed.  Eyes- 
moderately  large,  ovate,  lateral,  rather  finely  faceted.  Rostrum 
long,  thin  and  curved.  AntenncE  thin;  scape  inserted  nearer 
apex  than  base  of  rostrum  and  the  length  of  funicle;  two  basal 
joints  of  the  latter  elongate ;  club  briefly  ovate.  Prothorax 
transverse,  sides  rounded,  base  bisinuate,  apex  feebly  produced, 
ocular  lobes  somewhat  obtuse.  Scutellum  distinct.  Elytra  con- 
siderably wider  than  prothorax,  base  trisinuate.  Pectoral  canal 
rather  deep  and  narrow,  terminated  between  intermediate 
coxse.  Mesosternal  receptacle  feebly  and  equally  raised,  elongate 
U-shaped;  open.  Metaste^mum  the  length  of  the  folio sving  seg- 
ment; episterna  moderately  wide.  Abdomen  with  straight  sutures:. 
1st  segment  shorter  than  2nd  and  3rd  combined,  3rd  and  4th 
combined  distinctly  longer  than  2nd  or  5th.  Legs  rather  short, 
femora    moderately    stout,   dentate,  not  grooved,  posterior   not 

'^"  €7rei(TQ8ios,  episodic;  kis. 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  245 

extending  to  apex  of  abdomen;  tibiae  slightly  compressed;  tarsi 
shorter  than  tibiae,  4th  joint  moderately  long.  Elliptic,  moderately 
convex,  squamose,  winged. 

Allied  to  the  preceding  genus,  but  the  eyes  smaller  and  with 
larger  facets,  the  club  of  the  antennae  much  shorter  and  with 
almost  straight  sutures  and  the  legs  shorter.  The  mesosternal 
receptacle  in  both  is  U-shaped,  but  in  the  preceding  genus  it  is 
raised  in  front  and  almost  obliterated  at  base,  so  that  the  termi- 
nation of  the  pectoral  canal  is  not  sharply  defined.  In  the 
present  genus,  although  decidedly  open,  the  termination  of  the 
canal  is  sharply  defined. 

Episodiocis  microderes,  n.sp. 

(J(?),  Black,  antennae  dull  red.  Densely  clothed  with  ochreous- 
brown  scales,  scutelluTii  with  whitish  scales.  Under  surface 
(except  between  four  posterior  coxae,  where  the  scales  are  darker 
and  denser)  with  longer,  paler  and  sparser  clothing  than  elsewhere. 
Head  and  basal  third  of  rostrum  densely  clothed. 

Head  with  dense  concealed  punctures.  Rostrum  moderately 
curved,  slightly  longer  than  prothorax;  shining  and  finely  punctate 
except  at  base  where  the  clothing  is  dense  and  the  punctures 
rather  coarse.  Scape  inserted  slightly  closer  to  apex  than  base 
of  rostrum;  1st  joint  of  funicle  the  length  of  2nd-3rd  combined, 
2nd  the  length  of  3rd-4th  combined,  7th  moderately  transverse. 
Prothorax  small,  base  lightly  bisinuate  and  less  than  twice  the 
width  of  apex;  punctures  dense  but  concealed.  Scutellum  sub- 
oblong.  Elytra  oblong-cordate,  once  and  one-half  the  width  and 
almost  thrice  the  length  of  prothorax,  base  trisinuate,  shoulders 
oblique,  sides  subparallel  to  apical  third;  with  series  of  rather 
strong  but  almost  concealed  punctures;  interstices  not  convex, 
much  wider  than  punctures,  third  with  two  feeble  tubercular 
elevations  (one  at  basal  third  and  one  at  middle),  the  fifth  with 
one  (forming  the  preapical  callus).  Under  surface  rather  densely 
but  not  very  distinctly  punctate.  Femora  stout  and  rather 
obtusely  dentate.      Length  7,  rostrum  2;  width  3 J  mm. 

Hab. — N.S.W.  :  Clarence  River  (Macleay  Museum). 


246  REVISION  OF    THE  AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONIDiE,   VII., 

Anepigraphocls,"*^  n.g. 

Head  rather  large  and  convex,  not  concealed.  Eyes  large, 
coarsely  faceted,  distant.  Rostrum  long  and  rather  thin,  dis- 
tinctly curved.  Antennce  moderately  thin;  scape  inserted  closer 
to  apex  than  base  of  rostrum,  the  length  of  funicle;  two  basal 
joints  of  the  latter  moderately  long;  club  of  moderate  size, 
elliptic-ovate.  Prothorax  transverse,  base  bisinuate,  constriction 
deep  but  irregular,  ocular  lobes  very  obtuse.  Scutellum  distinct. 
Elytra  elongate-cordate,  wider  than  prothorax  and  each  separately 
rounded  at  base.  Pectoral  canal  deep  and  narrow,  terminated 
between  intermediate  cox?e.  Mesosternal  receptacle  feebly  raised, 
U-shaped;  slightly  cavernous.  Metasternum  shorter  than  the 
following  segment,  episterna  distinct.  Abdomen  with  straight 
sutures;  1st  segment  as  long  as  the  two  following  combined, 
intercoxal  process  narrow;  2nd,  3rd  and  4th  equal  in  length,  each 
slightly  shorter  than  5th.  Legs  rather  long  and  thin;  femora  not 
grooved,  edentate,  posterior  not  passing  elytra,  tibiae  lightly 
curved;  tarsi  moderately  long,  4th  joint  longer  than  1st.  Elliptic, 
convex,  winged. 

Possibly  close  to  Mr.  Pascoe's  genus  Glyphayia,  but  the  ocular 
lobes  distinct,  the  mesosternal  receptacle  cavernous,  the  femora 
not  grooved  and  edentate,  the  tarsi  with  the  4th  joint  distinctly 
longer  than  the  1st,  and  the  3rd  rather  widely  bilobed. 

Anepigraphocis  basiventris,  n.sp. 

Black,  subopaque,  antennee  and  claw-joints  reddish-brown. 
Prothorax  with  thin  setose  scales,  one  in  each  puncture;  elytra 
with  large  adpressed  reddish-ferruginous  scales,  a  distinct  oblique 
stripe  of  cream-coloured  scales  from  each  shoulder  to  near  suture 
just  before  middle,  and  a  longitudinal  patch  on  each  side  of  apex. 
Under  surface  very  sparsely  squamose  except  for  a  patch  on  each 
side  in  front  of  anterior  coxjb;  the  middle  of  the  metasternum 
and  of  basal  and  apical  segments  of  abdomen  with  dense  setae; 
legs  rather  sparsely  squamose.  Head  and  rostrum  almost 
glabrous. 

*  dv€7rLypa(f)os,  without  a  title;  kis- 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  247 

Head  with  sparse  and  moderately  large  punctures  not  at  all 
concealed.  Rostrum  slightly  longer  than  prothorax,  sides  almost 
parallel,  with  rather  sparse  and  small  elongate  punctures,  no 
denser  towards  base  than  elsewhere;  with  a  very  feeble  median 
ridge  from  base  to  between  antennae.  Scape  inserted  two-fifths 
from  apex  of  rostrum;  1st  joint  of  funicle  slightly  shorter  than 
2nd,  the  others  subglobular.  Prothorax  moderately  transverse; 
with  large,  deep,  not  very  dense  but  in  places  confluent  punctures. 
Elytra  about  once  and  one-half  the  width  and  almost  thrice  the 
length  of  prothorax;  striate-punctate,  punctures  deep  and  longer 
than  wide,  of  large  size  but  partially  concealed;  interstices  scarcely 
separately  convex,  regular  and  wider  than  punctures.  Under 
surface  with  sparse  and  indistinct  punctures,  except  for  a  few  of 
moderate  size  at  sides  of  metasternum  and  of  1st  and  5th 
abdominal  segments;  the  1st  with  a  subcircular  flat  (setose)  space 
in  the  middle  from  which  the  sides  rapidly  slope  away.  Posterior 
femora  almost  extending  to  apex  of  abdomen.  Length  8, 
rostrum  2|;  width  4  mm. 

Hob. — Swan  River  (Herr  J.  Faust). 

A  remarkably  distinct  species.  The  clothing  of  the  meta- 
sternum and  basal  segment  of  abdomen,  with  the  shape  of  the 
latter  are  almost  unique  in  the  subfamily.  The  prothoracic 
punctures  are  of  an  unusual  character,  and  each  contains  a  long 
thin  scale,  the  surface  elsewhere  being  nude. 

Bleptocis,*  n.g. 

Eijes  subapproximate.  Pectoral  canal  terminated  between  four 
anterior  coxae.  Mesosternal  receptacle  feebly  raised,  base  rather 
stout,  emargination  briefly  U-shaped,  cavernous.  Metasternutn 
longer  than  the  following  segment ;  episterna  rather  narrovv. 
Second  segment  of  abdomen  the  length  of  5th  and  slightly  but 
noticeably  longer  than  3rd  or  4th.  Legs  long  and  thin;  femora 
dentate  and  feebly  grooved.  Other  characters  as  in  the  preceding 
genus. 

This  genus  is  very  close  to  the  preceding  one,  but  the  above 
characters  should  prevent  the  two  from  being  confounded  together. 

*  ^XfTTTos,  worth  seeing;  kis. 


248  REVISION  OF  THE  AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONID^,  VII., 

Bleptocis  collaceratus,  n.sp. 

g  (1).  Black  and  moderately  shining;  antennae  dull  red,  club 
darker.  Apical  third  of  prothorax  and  posterior  declivity  of 
elytra  (except  on  sides)  with  dense  white  scales,  rest  of  upper 
surface  with  indistinct  and  very  sparse  sooty  and  obscure  whitish 
scales.  Under  surface,  legs,  head  and  rostrum  with  rather  sparse 
sooty  and  white  or  whitish  scales. 

Head  with  coarse  but  rather  indistinct  punctures.  Rostrum 
slightly  longer  than  prothorax,  not  very  thin,  distinctly  curved; 
with  moderately  coarse  punctures  throughout  but  partially  con- 
cealed behind  antennte,^  behind  which  is  a  feeble  median  ridge. 
Scape  inserted  two-fifths  from  apex  of  rostrum  and  very  slightly 
shorter  than  funicle;  two  basal  joints  of  the  latter  equal  in  length, 
5th-7th  transverse.  Prothorax  moderately  transverse,  base 
bisinuate,  sides  rounded;  with  coarse  confluent  punctures,  the 
interspaces  appearing  as  granules;  with  a  very  distinct  shining 
and  almost  continuous  median  carina.  Scutellnm  convex,  its 
outlines  rounded.  Elytra  elongate-cordate,  about  thrice  the 
•length  and  once  and  one-third  the  width  of  prothorax,  each 
separately  rounded  at  base  and  apex,  sides  subparallel  to  near 
apex;  with  deep,  more  or  less  oblong  and  very  large  punctures  or 
fove^,  except  posteriorly;  interstices  much  narrower  than  and 
considerably  interrupted  by  punctures;  suture  distinctly  granu- 
late, a  few  granules  elsewhere.  Under  surface  with  indistinct 
punctures  except  for  some  large  ones  at  the  sides  between  the 
four  posterior  coxse.  Legs  thin  and  densely  punctate;  femora 
rather  finely  but  acutely  dentate,  posterior  extending  to  apical 
segment.      Length  6^,  rostrum  2;  width  3  mm. 

Ilab. — N.S.W.  :  South  Country  (t3^pe  in  Macleay  Museum). 

The  white  (or  cream-coloured)  patches  of  scales  at  the  apex 
of  prothorax  and  elytra  are  very  distinct  and  sharply  defined. 
The  elytral  punctures  are  unusually  large,  the  alternate  inter- 
stices between  them  being  feebly  raised,  this  elevation  being 
more  distinct  to  the  naked  eye  than  under  a  lens.  "South 
Country  "  probably  means  about  Goulburn. 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  249 

Genus  Glochinorrhinus,  Waterhouse. 

Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.  (2)  ii.  p.lO-i,  Proc.  p.cii.  1853;  Lacord., 
Gen.  Col.  vii.  p.  103. 

Head  moderately  large,  convex,  not  concealed;  ocular  fovea 
small,  narrow.  Eyes  slightly  produced  in  front,  finely  faceted, 
distant.  Rostrum  long,  slightly  curved;  in  $  widening  to  apex 
and  laterally  barbed,  in  9  subparallel,  smooth  and  shining. 
Ante  mice  moderately  long;  scape  in  ^  inserted  one-third  from 
apex  of  rostrum,  in  9  two-fifths ;  two  basal  joints  of  funicle 
elongate,  7th  obconic,  longer  than  5th-6th  combined,  subadnate 
to  and  appearing  to  form  part  of  club;  club  ovate,  the  length  of 
two  preceding  joints.  Protliorax  large,  convex,  sides  rounded, 
apex  produced  and  somewhat  depressed,  base  bisinuate;  constric- 
tion feeble;  ocular  lobes  prominent.  Scutellum  small,  distinct. 
Elytra  not  twice  the  length  of  prothorax;  in  ^  narrower,  in  9 
the  same  width  as  prothorax,  in  ^  decreasing  from  base  to  apex, 
in  9  subparallel  to  near  apex.  Pectoral  canal  moderately  deep, 
terminated  between  intermediate  coxse.  Mesosternal  receptacle 
strongly  raised,  emargination  slightly  transverse,  slightly  cavern- 
ous. Metasternum  about  half  the  length  of  basal  abdominal 
segment,  episterna  narrow  and  wedge-shaped,  the  anterior  portion 
almost  concealed.  Abdomen  regularly  sloping  from  base  to  apex, 
sutures  very  distinct;  1st  segment  large,  almost  as  long  as  2nd- 
5th  combined,  2nd-4th  subequal  and  each  slightly  shorter  than 
5th.  Leys  long  and  slender;  anterior  femora  feebly  ridged 
beneath  at  apex,  four  posterior  very  feebly  dentate,  posterior 
passing  elytra;  tibias  much  longer  in  ^  than  in  9;  tarsi  long  and 
slender  (especially  in  $),  1st  joint  almost  as  long  as  2nd-4th  com- 
bined, 3rd  short,  deeply  bilobed,  4th  pubescent.  Subcylindrical, 
convex,  tuberculate,  squamose,  winged. 

A  very  distinct  genus,  allied  to  Pezichus  as  noted  by  Mr, 
Waterhouse. 

Prothorax  distinctly  carinate,  strongly  depressed  at 

apex.  Douhledayi,  Waterh. 

Prothorax  feebly  or  not  at  all  carinate,  feebly  de- 
pressed at  apex evanidus,  Lea. 


250  REVISION  OF  THE  AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONID.E,  VII., 

Glociiinorrhinus  Doubledayi,  Waterh.;  Mast.  Cat.  Sp.  No. 5498. 

(J.  Black,  opaque;  antennae  reddish-piceous.  Den^^ely  clothed 
with  greyish  or  brown  scales,  which,  when  the  insect  is  alive,. 
have  a  greenish  tinge;  three  intermediate  segments  of  abdomen 
nude,  except  for  small  patches  of  scales  at  the  sides  and  down 
the  middle.  Prothorax  with  long  recurved  setae,  dark  on  disc, 
pale  on  sides;  head  and  rostrum  setose.  Ciliation  rather  long,^ 
golden-yellow,  irregular,  distinctly  visible  with  head  in  position. 

Head  scarcely  punctate,  a  feeble  longitudinal  impression  at 
base.  Rostrum  granulate  and  punctate,  depressed  on  each  side 
of  apex;  each  side  slightly  in  front  of  middle  with  a  strong 
recurved  spine  resembling  a  boar's  tusk,  a  smaller  spine  close 
behind  it,  a  small  spine  in  front  of  ocular  fovea.  Prothorax  with 
large  granules  or  small  tubercles  at  sides  and  towards  base,  with 
a  distinct  median  carina  close  to  which  there  are  no  granules  but 
the  setae  are  more  numerous;  apex  depressed,  sides  rounded. 
Scutelluni  transverse,  densely  squamose.  Elytra  decreasing  in 
width  from  base  to  near  apex,  apex  rounded;  sides  precipitous 
and  strongly  seriate-punctate;  disc  with  numerous  granules,  3rd 
interstice  with  three  crests  or  ridges  of  granulate  tubercles,  5th 
with  about  eight  small  tubercles,  some  of  which  are  conjoined, 
•ith  with  a  single  conical  tubercle,  7th  with  a  row  of  granules  or 
small  tubercles.  Length  12 J,  rostrum  4J,  anterior  legs  16; 
width  5^,  middle  of  elytra  4|  mm. 

9.  Differs  in  having  the  prothorax  smaller  and  not  wider  than 
elytra,  these  less  noticeably  decreasing  in  width  to  apex,  the  legs 
(especially  the  tibiae  and  tarsi)  shorter,  and  the  rostrum  smooth, 
glabrous  and  finely  punctate.  Length  12,  rostrum  4 J,  anterior 
legs  11  J;  width  5  mm. 

Hah. — Coastal  districts  of  S.  Queensland  and  Northern  New 
South  Wales. 

An  excellent  figure  of  this  species  is  given  by  the  late  Mr.  A. 
Sidney  Olliff  in  the  Agricultural  Gazette  of  New  South  Wales 
[Yol.  vi.,  in  a  plate  facing  p.261].  The  armature  and  granulation 
of  the  rostrum  are  varial)le.      Tn  one  specimen  under  examina- 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  251 

tion  the  barbs  are  almost  the  length  of  the  scapes  and  project 
upward  and  outward  and  then  downward  and  slightly  inward; 
in  another  specimen  they  are  scarcely  the  length  of  the  1st 
funicular  joint,  and  are  projected  backwards  and  inwards.  The 
males  are  usually  larger  than  the  females.  The  clothing  and 
elytral  tubercles  are  subject  to  variation.  The  length  varies 
from  9  to  16  mm. 

Glochinorrhinus  evanidus,  Lea,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales, 
1895,  Vol.  X.  (2nd  Ser.)  p.306;  G.  Cooki,  Faust,  Stett.  Ent. 
Zeit.  1895,  p.227. 

The  paper  containing  the  description  of  G.  evanidits  was  read 
in  May  and  published  in  November,  1895.  Herr  J.  Faust 
informs  me  that  G.  Cooki  was  not  published  till  February,  1896, 
so  that  my  name  has  priority. 

Genus  Aonychus,  Schonherr,  Gen.  et  Spec.  Cure.  Vol. 8  (1),  p.  387, 
Genus  530;  Lacordaire,  Gen.  Col.  Tome  vii.  p.  11 4. 

Head  slightly  convex,  not  concealed.  Eyes  large  and  finely 
faceted.  Rostrum  long,  thin,  rounded,  distinctly  curved. 
Antermce  thin;  scape  very  short,  inserted  much  closer  to  base 
than  apex  of  rostrum;  two  basal  joints  of  funicle  elongate;  club 
elongate-ovate.  Prothorax  subcorneal,  sides  rounded,  base  bisinu- 
ate.  Scutellum  distinct,  semicircularly  triangular.  Elytra  sub- 
cordate,  wider  than  prothorax  at  base.  Pectoral  canal  narrow, 
deep,  terminating  between  intermediate  cox.'io,  bounded  between 
four  anterior  coxas  by  perpendicular  walls  formed  by  supple- 
mentary processes  of  prosteroum.  Mesosternal  receptacle  appearing 
as  a  small  slightly  curved  ridge  between  bases  of  intermediate 
coxje;  open.  Metasternum  almost  or  quite  the  length  of  the 
following  segment;  episterna  large.  Two  basal  segments  of 
abdomen  large,  3rd  and  4th  very  short  and  combined  with  5tli 
slightly  shorter  than  2nd.  Le^s  short;  femora  edentate;  tibia? 
rather  thick;  tarsi  three-jointed,  3rd  large,  rounded,  pad-like. 
Short  or  moderately  short,  convex  above  and  below,  densely 
squamose,  non-tuberculate,  winged. 


'2d'2         revision  of  the  Australian  curculion'id.e,  vii., 

The  only  genus  in  the  subfamily  (at  least  in  Australia)  in 
which  the  claw-joint  is  entirely  absent.  The  species  are  all 
denselv  clothed  with  a  ground  layer  of  white  closely  adpressed 
scales,  and  with  black  or  brown  scales  forming  various  and  often 
extremely  variable  patterns. 

Ehtra  striped lineatus,  Pasc. 

Elvtra  maculate. 

Apex  of  elytra  entire $triatu.<i,  n.sp. 

Apex  of  elytra  feebly  emarginate. 

Rostrom  with  a  few  scales  at  base,  form  narrow. 

Antennae  black pa chy pus,  n.si^. 

Antennae  tinged  with  red argu.?,  n.sp. 

Bostram  entirely  nude,  form  broader. 

Scales  of  upper  surface  white  and  black luctuogus,  Pasc. 

Scales  white  and  brov.Ti Hopei,  Bohem. 

AONYCHUS  HoPEi,  Bohem.;  Mast.  Cat.  Sp.  2So.  5531. 

Black,  rostrum  highly  polished,  eyes  dark  brown.  Densely 
clothed  all  over  with  white  scales  mixed  on  the  upper  surface  with 
sooty-brown  scales,  forming  on  prothorax  a  broad  median  stripe: 
on  elytra  there  is  usually  a  broad  sutural  stripe  to  about  the 
middle,  when  it  is  suddenly  directed  outwards  to  the  margins  and 
then  becomes  marginal  to  apex,  but  very  irregidar;  there  are 
usually  three  large  irregular  patches  of  white  scales,  one  on  each 
side  at  and  behind  shoulders,  and  one  behind  the  middle  about 
suture;  head  with  a  patch  of  sooty-brown  scales  behind  eyes; 
rostrum  entirely  nude.  Ciliation  short,  sparse,  white,  moderately 
distinct  when  head  is  removed. 

Head  denselv  punctate  ;  ocular  fovea  shallow,  indistinct. 
Rostrum  the  length  of  prothorax,  distinctly  curved,  in  g  slightly 
enlarged  at  insertion  of  antennae ;  densely  punctate  at  base, 
margins  and  extreme  apex  less  noticeably  punctate,  smooth  else- 
where. Scape  not  as  long  as  two  basal  joints  of  funicle,  these 
subequal,  2nd  as  long  as  twofollo%ving  combined,  5th-6th  globular, 
7th  transverse.  Prothora:>:  in  ^  slightly  longer  than  wide,  in  9 
about  equal  in  length  and  width,  apex  about  half  the  width  of 
base,  base    strongly  bisinuate,   sides    straight,   posterior    angles 


BY  ARTHUR  M.   LEA.  253 

acute.  Scutellum  feebly  raised.  Elytra  more  than  twice  the 
length  of  prothorax  and  much  wider  (especially  in  (J)  at  base, 
subcordate,  apex  feebly  but  distinctly  emarginate;  striate,  the 
striae  almost  entirely  concealed  except  towards  sides  and  apex, 
the  sutural  one  is,  however,  traceable  throughout ;  shoulders 
rounded,  raised,  a  depression  at  their  sides  immediately  behind 
sides  of  prothorax.  Under  surface  and  legs  densely  punctate, 
the  punctures  entirely  concealed  by  scales.  Anterior  tibice  with 
small  obtuse  teeth  on  their  lower  surface.  Length  6f ,  rostrum  24; 
width  3J  mm. 

Hah — South  Australia — Western  Xew  South  Wales.  Common 
in  collections. 

I  have  described  the  usual  form  of  the  dark  mottling  of  scales, 
but  it  is  extremely  variable:  in  several  specimens  under  exami- 
nation the  prothoracic  scales  are  entirely  white,  and  on  the  elytra 
there  are  but  few  dark  spots,  some  eye-like  in  character. 

Yar.  BicRUCiATUS  (Faust  MS.). 

Scales  white:  a  slight  brown  patch  on  forehead:  on  elytra  a 
sutural  patch  of  brown  scales  commencing  at  scutellum.  triangu- 
larly dilated  then  suddenly  narrowed  and  again  dilated,  the  second 
patch  enclosing  a  white  spot  and  terminated  at  middle:  sides 
about  middle  with  two  spots,  the  posterior  one  of  which  encloses 
a  white  spot,  each  side  of  apex  with  a  small  brown  spot. 

Hab. — Australia  (Herr  J.  Faust)  —  X.A.  :  Victoria  River 
(Mitchell's  Expedition) — W.A.  :  Swan  River  (Lea). 

A  well  marked  but  not  always  constant  variety;  both  dilated 
spaces  on  the  suture  may  enclose  a  white  spot,  or  neither  may. 
In  a  pair  (taken  in  cop.)  from  the  Swan  River  the  9  i^  exactly  as 
described,  but  the  g  has  the  markings  black,  with  a  patch  on 
the  prothorax  and  additional  markings  on  the  elytra:  it  shows  a 
decided  approach  to  some  of  the  varieties  of  hictuosus. 

AOXYCHUS    STRIATUS,  n.sp. 

Black,  rostrum  highly  polished  and  tinged  with  red,  an  tennis 
piceous-red,    eyes   dark    brown.       Densely    clothed    with    white 


251  REVISION  OF  THE  AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONID.E,  VII., 

adpressed  scales;  above  with  greyish-  or  pale  sooty-brown  scales 
forming  on  prothorax  a  broad  median  stripe  not  continuous  to 
apex,  with  a  few  small  spots  and  a  feeble  white  stripe  down  its 
middle;  scutellum  with  white  scales;  elytra  with  numerous  white 
transverse  spots  seldom  extending  over  one  interstice,  and  some- 
times partly  confluent;  the  spots  are  more  numerous  towards 
base  and  sides  than  elsewhere;  posterior  declivity  with  a  white 
stripe  on  suture;  head  with  white  scales,  rostrum  entirely  nude. 

Head  densely  punctate;  ocular  fovea  elongate,  rather  distinct. 
Rostrum  as  long  as  prothorax,  distinctly  curved,  subparallel  to 
insertion  of  antennae,  densely  punctate  at  extreme  base  and  sides, 
smooth  elsewhere.  Scape  not  as  long  as  two  basal  joints  of  funicle, 
these  subequal,  about  once  and  one-half  the  length  of  3rd,  3rd- 
7th  gradually  decreasing  in  length,  none  of  them  transverse. 
Prothorax  transverse,  sides  rounded,  base  strongly  bisinuate, 
apex  slightly  more  than  half  the  width  of  base.  Scutellum  sub- 
quadrate,  not  at  all  raised.  Elytra  about  twice  and  one-half  the 
length  of  prothorax,  and  at  base  scarcely  more  than  once  and 
one-quarter  the  width,  subcordate,  apex  entire;  with  ten  striae 
on  each  elytron,  narrow,  but  distinct  throughout  and  apparently 
with  elongate  punctures.  Unclear  surface  as  in  the  preceding. 
Anterior  tibice  with  numerous  small  distinct  teeth,  less  numerous 
and  noticeable  on  the  two  posterior.  Length  5|,  rostrum  2; 
width  2 1  mm. 

Hah. — N.W.  Australia  (Macleay  Museum). 

In  this  species  the  prothorax  is  more  rounded  than  is  usual; 
the  white  scales  in  the  dark  prothoracic  stripe  occasionally  form 
a  feeble  cross;  A.  argus  and  A.  Uneatus  are  the  only  other  species 
with  visible  elytral  striae;  in  the  others  they  are  concealed  by 
scales  except  at  sides  and  apex. 

AoNYCHUs  LUCTUosus,  Pasc;  he.  No.  5533. 

Black,  rostrum  highly  polished,  eyes  dark  brown.  Densely 
clothed  with  narrow  white  elongate  adpressed  scales,  mixed  above 
with  sooty-black  scales  irregularly  dispersed,  and  either  occupy- 


BY  ARTHUR  M.  LEA.  255 

ing  more  or  less  than  half  the  surface;  on  the  prothorax  the  black 
scales  usually  form  a  broad  stripe  down  the  middle,  sometimes 
leaving  a  white  median  line,  and  often  they  occupy  the  whole 
surface  except  for  a  few  small  white  spots;  the  scutellum  is 
usually  entirely  covered  with  white  scales;  occasionally,  however, 
there  are  a  few  black  ones  at  the  sides;  on  the  elytra  the  black 
scales  are  massed  more  towards  the  suture  than  elsewhere,  but 
in  nine  specimens  under  examination  not  two  are  similarly 
clothed;  sometimes  they  appear  as  if  spotted  with  black  and 
sometimes  with  white;  the  white  scales  appear  sometimes  in  short 
white  lines.  Under  surface  and  legs  usually  entirely  clothed 
with  white  scales,  but  occasionally  a  few  black  ones  at  sides  of 
meso-  and  metasternum,  on  coxae  and  base  of  femora.  Head 
with  black  and  white  scales  irregularl}^  mixed;  rostrum  entirely 
nude. 

Head  densely  punctate;  ocular  fovea  appearing  as  a  shallow 
transverse  impression.  Rostrum  the  length  of  prothorax,  dis- 
tinctly curved,  parallel  to  insertion  of  antennse,  base  and  sides 
densely  punctate,  smooth  elsewhere,  in  ^  slightly  wider  near 
apex  than  in  9-  Scape  distinctly  shorter  than  two  basal  joints 
of  funicle;  'ind  joint  longer  than  1st  and  almost  the  length  of 
3rd-6th,  5th-7th  globular.  Prothorax  as  long  as  wide  in  (J,  in  ^ 
transverse;  sides  rounded;  base  strongly  bisinuate,  apex  more 
than  half  the  width  of  base.  Scutellum  feebly  raised.  Elytra 
about  once  and  one-third  the  width  of  prothorax,  subcordate, 
shoulders  rounded,  somewhat  prominent,  apex  feebly  emarginate; 
striation  only  visible  at  extreme  sides  and  apex.  Tihice  with 
small  distinct  teeth,  more  numerous  on  the  anterior  than  on  the 
four  posterior.      Length  5-J,  rostrum  1|;  width  2 J  mm. 

Hah. — W.A.  :   Swan   River. 

A  common  and  extremely  variable  species,  originally  described 
from  a  headless  specimen.  I  have  specimens  measuring  from  4 
to  6  mm. 

AONYCHUS    ARGUS,  n.sp. 

Black,  rostrum  highly  polished,  antennas  piceous-red,  eyes  dark 
brown.     Densely  covered  with  white  adpressed  scales;  prothorax 


735:  ±Z?T3Li±lAS  CrECTLI'JSTDi.  TO,. 


witti  :  .     '-T  apata  id  hramrn.  scales,  tvo  d^tly 

im  a  -~o  at  baae;  eijtra  with  ftghterw  apote 

9hL^-  rax,  fov  on  ear^  nde  of  sstere,  the 

3Mi  and  3ffd    :  '^r^  ^l^rger  titan  the  others;  the  two  basal 

ne^  \^a  the  two  ;^ieal  pairs,  b«t  in 

aL  s    ^s!!   ^o-   cr  =aeh  side  of 

two  a.T  T  -lall  narrow 

spot  OB  Ihe  «:  :'     >str«m 
with  a  few  w:i 

logthcf  pr^^ 


jontolfamde,  I^    .  .  is  3rd-4th, 

5ih4th  ^oiMlar,  II:. 
ailes  rookled,  base  ¥tr      . 

widdi  of  ba»e  in  O,  kas  in  5-     •--  "^  '    ■  -.'-'.;   r---  '-z. 


r«oepbmi^  shaQow,  g 

the  two  anterior  pabx  with  iiMilJ  l^:eth  r>^iieatli. 
a,  roatnun  1^:  width  3|^  sub. 

JBT^^^, — ^5^orth'We^Anst3raltaniaei6aTMTL^imi/;£     ,  1 

(Mr,  W.  W.  Fro^att;, 

The  ^Ki4s  are  iB^'  ^^r  wat  tb*ir  %hape  and 

poaiticMi  are  eoestaat,  : .  -  -.  .  ,  _  -  ..^-j  a  small  *pr>t  on  tb*r 
cljrtia  SKKj  ifisd^pear.  On  £r*t  examimng  tlte;  r<>n;iim  of  tb«  ^ 
it  i^ipears  to  he  eariBgv  in  coii»^tieiie*r 

of  (^i^t  ro"^i  of  pTinc-  .  ,  ,     ^     -c. 

£3adE,  rostmm  iji^Ij  pcrli%ij«d-  eje*  -.5^:---'  •.".--'  Zj'--.\h.j 
ek^hed  with  wLit^  %^sal.fe%,  orj  ^rlytri  51  ^tnp-r  -  -,  ■  -..i,-  rx- 
teadisg  froos  sesteOmw  vr^  ,  ^  it:  t^-nr..'.'.:^ 


BY  ASTHUK  M.  LXA  2-57 

in  a  point:  the  stripe  is  parallel  for  most  of  its  lengtlu  aod covers 
two  inter-tices:  elsewhejne  the  scales  are  white;  nostram  with  a 
few  small  scale*  at  extreme  base,  elsewheie  niKie. 

H*ad  densely  punctate:  ocular  fovea  Icoigitodinal,  distinct. 
Rostrnm  cnrved,  di^htly  Icmger  than  prothorax,  poiictate  at  littse 
and  sides  and  with  a  few  straggling  pnnctnres  to  near  the  middle. 
Scape  longer  and  thinner  than  is  nsnaL  longer  than  first  tiro 
joints  of  funicle,  these  also  slightly  longer  than  usual,  iad  joint 
distinctly  longer  than  1st  or  3rd-5th  ccmbined,  5th-6th  globular, 
7rh  transverse,  PnrfAarii*"  longer  than  wide,  con vei:,  sides  almost 
straight,  apex  not  much  more  than  half  the  width  of  base,  base 
strongly  bisinuate:  scales  on  the  disc  slightly  raised  and  ailowing 
punctures  to  be  seen  ^mW/mjm  transverse,  not  at  all  n^ed. 
E'ljini  oblong-cordate,  not  much  wiier  than  prothorax  at  base, 
shoulders  round-xi.  rafher  proaninent.  apex  feebly  einarsinare, 
striation  very  feeble  and  only  noticeable  at  extreme  apex  and 
sides.  M^^:^tirnal  nc^ptad*  as  in  the  preceding.  Li^$  short, 
thick:  all  the  tibise  with  small  teeth  beneath.  Leagth  4».  rv>stnim 
1|:  width  24  mm. 

^^,r._W.A.  :   Swan  River. 

I  have  but  one  specimen  <^ taken  with  the  sweep  net  at  3d[idlaiid 
Junction^:  it  is  probably  a  female,  but  the  sexual  characters  in 
^oaycAw^  are  so  very  slight  that  (witho  it  dissection)  it  is  almost 
impossible  to  tell  the  sex  of  a  unique  specimen. 

AoNYCHUS  LiXKATrs.  Pasc;  /.c,  Xo  553:?. 

Black,  rostium  shining:  antenn;ie  ^the  club  black)  dingy-red, 
Clothevi  with  whitish,  variegated  with  pale  greyish-lrown  scales* 
having  a  stripe^!  appearance  on  elytra,  the  stripes  distinct 
^especially  on  sutured  to  the  nnked  eye.  but  indistinct  under  a 

lens. 

Rostrum  long,  thin,  modei-ately  curvevi.  parallel-sided:  dnelv 

pinctate:  behind  antenna  feebly  ridged  in  middle,     Funicle  with 

the  second  joint  on^v  and  one-third  the  length  of  Ist.  6th  and  7] 

17 


\ 


258  REVISION  OF  THE   AUSTRALIAN  CURCULIONIDiE,  VII. 

strongly  transverse.  Prothorax  moderately  transverse,  base 
strnngly  bisinuate.  Elytra  considerably  wider  than  prothorax, 
shoulders  subtuberculately  produced,  striate-punctate,  punctures 
concealed,  striae  moderately  distinct;  interstices  wide,  gently  con- 
vex; apex  feebly  emarginate.  Tibice  with  numerous  minute  teeth 
which  are  traceable  with  difficulty.  Length  8,  rostrum  3 ; 
width  5  mm. 

Hah. — W.  A.  :   "  Champion  Bay  "  (Pascoe). 

The  largest  and  most  distinct  species  in  the  genus.  The 
specimen  described  has  been  kindly  lent  to  me  for  examination 
by  Mr.  George  Masters. 


259 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  (1)  an  interesting  collection  of  named 
Australian  Thysanura,  popularly  known  as  Silver-fishes,  for 
whose  determination  he  was  indebted  to  Dr.  Silvestri,  of  Portici. 
The  destructive  species  only  too  common  in  Australian  houses 
turns  out  to  be  an  African  alien,  Lepisma  lorigicaudata,  Escherich, 
unknown  in  Europe  and  America,  and  now  for  the  first  time 
recorded  from  Australia.  Previously  it  had  been  looked  upon 
as  L.  saccharina,  L.,  which  has  a  wide  range  in  Europe  and 
America ;  and  Australian  specimens  have  been  erroneously 
recorded  under  this  name  (Journ.  Roy.  Microscop.  Soc.  1882, 
p.500).  Other  species  represented  in  the  collection  were  Z. 
jjroducta,  Escherich,  'recorded  from  Condoblin,  N.S.W.,  the 
animals  living  under  stones  in  pine  scrub;  the  representatives  of 
three  new  species  found  in  the  bush  under  stones;  examples  of  a 
remarkable,  somewhat  shrimp-like  form  frequenting  open  caves 
on  the  seashore  at  Terrigal,  N.S.W.  (2)  A  named  collection  of 
Italian  forms  of  the  genera  Japy?c^  Lepisma  and  Machilis, 
received  from  Dr.  Silvestri.  (3)  A  named  collection  of  six 
species  of  Japanese  Cicadas  taken  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Tokyo.  And  (4)  living  species  of  a  Paussid  beetle,  Arthroptervs 
darlingeiisis,  MacL,  obtained  on  the  banks  of  the  Darling  River 
between  Bourke  and  Brewarrina,  N.S.W.,  during  last  month. 

Mr.  Baker  exhibited  specimens  of  the  Actinotus  described  in 
his  paper.  Also  examples  of  a  remarkable  Puffball  fungus,. 
Podaxon  jEgyptiaciis;  the  only  know^n  representative  of  the  genu& 
in  Australia;  collected  by  Mr.  R.  H.  Cambage  at  Bourke,  N.S.W. 

Mr.  Fred.  Turner  exhibited,  and  offered  some  observations  on,, 
a  collection  of  Lichens  from  the  eastern  slopes  of  New  England, 
N.S.W."^  He  also  showed  Triiicwm  repens,  Linn.,  a  European 
grass  now  established  at  Stonehenge,  New  England. 

*  A  list  of  these  will  be  found  on  p. 308. 


260  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  North  sent  for  exhi))ition  (1)  an  adult  female  Cnculus 
intermedius,  Vahl,  a  close  ally  of  the  common  Cuckoo,  C.  canorus. 
of  Europe;  it  was  received  b}'  Mr.  J.  A.  Thorpe  from  Mr,  James 
Yardley,  who  procured  it  on  Dungay  Creek,  Tweed  River,  N.S.  W., 
in  August,  1902  ;  a  specimen  was  procured  in  1904  by  Dr. 
Hamilton  Kenny  near  G^'mpie,  Queensland.  There  are  also 
specimens  in  the  Australian  Museum  from  Wide  Ba}',  Port 
Denison  and  Cairns.  (2)  An  adult  male  of  Ptihfis  plamula, 
obtained  in  July,  1883,  by  the  late  Mr.  K.  H.  Bennett  at  Moolah, 
Western  New  South  Wales.  And  (3)  the  following  sets  of  eggs  : 
(a)  from  Mr.  A.  E.  Ivatt's  collection,  an  egg  of  the  Warty-faced 
Hone3'eater  taken  by  him  at  Glanmire,  near  Bathurst,  on  the 
12th  November,  1894,  and  with  it  in  the  same  nest  an  egg  of 
the  Pallid  Cuckoo  :  (6)  from  Mr.  Leslie  W.  Moore's  collection,  an 
egg  of  the  Fulvous-fronted  Honeyeater  and  one  of  the  Pallid 
Cuckoo  taken  by  him  in  the  nest  of  the  former  at  Loftus,  on 
the  3rd  November,  1900;  and  three  eggs  of  the  Yellow-throated 
Miner  and  one  of  the  Pallid  Cuckoo,  received  by  him  from  New 
Angledool,  and  taken  together  from  the  same  nest  in  September, 
1901. 


W^EDNESDAY,  JULY  26th,   1905. 


The  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  of  the  Society  was  held  in 
the  Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  July  26th,  1905. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous 
Monthly  Meeting,  amounting  to  30  Vols.,  SQ  Parts  or  Nos.,  12 
Bulletins,  5  Reports,  33  Pamphlets,  and  8  Miscellanea,  recei\ed 
from  61  Societies,  ikc,  and  2  individuals,  were  laid  upon  the 
table. 


261 


NOTES  ON  THE  OLDER  TERTIARY  FORAMINIFERAL 
ROCKS   ON  THE  WEST   COAST  OF  SANTO,    NEW 
^,  HEBRIDES. 

By  Fkederick  Chapman,  A.L.S.,  F.R.M.S.,  National  Museum, 

Melbourne. 

(Communicated  by  Professor  David.) 

(With  Plates  v.-viii.) 

CONTENTS. 

PAGE. 

i.  Introduction  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         •■•         •••  261 

ii.  Description  of  the  Rock  Specimens      .^  ...  262 

iii.  Distribution  List  of  the  Foraminifera,  with  Notes  on  the  New  and 

Rare  Forms 26S 

id  iv.  Note  on  the  Ostracod      272 

V.  Summary  of  Results        273 

I.Introduction. 

A  short  while  ago  I  received  some  samples  of  rocks,  collected 
in  the  New  Hebrides,  from  Prof.  T.  Edgeworth  David,  of  Sydney 
University.  These  rocks  are  chiefly  limestones,  and  there  was 
included  a  foraminiferal  tuff. 

Since  the  exact  geological  age  of  the  Tertiary  rocks  in  the  New 
Hebrides  is  a  matter  of  particular  interest,  I  have,  with  the  per- 
'  mission  of  the  Director  of  the  National  Museum,  dealt  with  them, 

at  the  request  of  Prof.  David,  in  order  to  ascertain  that  fact. 
The  specimens  which  form  the  subject  of  this  paper  were  collected 
in  the  Island  of  Santo  (Espiritu  Santo)  by  Mr.  Douglas  Mawson, 
B.Sc,  B.E.,  of  Sydney  University. 

The  more  recent  reef-rocks  found  at  considerable  elevations  in 
the  islands  of  this  group  have  already  been  referred  to  by  Dr.  G . 
J.  Hinde,  in  an  Appendix  to  Lt.  Frederick's  paper  '*  Geological 


262      FORAMINIFERAL  ROCKS  ON  WEST  COAST  OF  SAXTO, 

Notes  Oil  Certain  Islands  in  the  New  Hebrides,"*  but  no 
information  is  there  given  regarding  the  oldest  limestones  of  the 
group. 

On  the  west  coast  of  the  island  of  Santo,  the  oldest  Tertiary 
limestones  are  found  dipping  at  a  steep  angle,  and  are  overlain 
with  beds  of  tuff,  soapstone  and  volcanic  rocks.  This  older  series, 
Prof.  David  informs  me,  is  apparently  divisible  into  two  groups, 
marked  by  a  slight  unconformity.  It  is  to  the  lower  part  of  this 
series  (group  No  7  of  Prof.  David's  list)  that  I  have  confined  my 
observations,  only  dealing  with  such  specimens  as  were  found  in 
situ,  or  which  by  their  organic  contents  showed  them  to  be  of  a 
similar  age. 

ii. Description  of  the  Rock  Specimens. 

The  localities  referred  to  below  are  taken  from  the  list  accom- 
panying the  specimens,  and  printed  between  quotation  marks. 

For  the  main  part  I  have  relied  on  specimen  No.  182  for  the 
exact  determination  of  species;  and  have  at  the  same  time  made 
full  use  of  the  thin  slices  of  the  limestones  prepared  under  Prof. 
David's  direction,  as  well  as  several  additional  microscope  slides 
and  sections  of  selected  foraminifera  prepared  by  myself. 

133.  —  "A  pebble  on  small  rise  in  the  valley  between  Lobweri 
and  Partua  Tabua,  Santo.  Probably  in  situ."  A  cut  surface  ©f 
the  hand  specimen  is  of  a  purplish  or  dull  plum  colour.  This 
rock  may  be  termed  a  Lepidocyclina  Limestone.  Its  structure 
is  somewhat  brecciated,  and  it  is  largely  composed  of  tests  of 
Foraminifera  (Lepidocyclina)  and  branchlets  of  the  calcareous 
alga,  Lithothamnion.  The  interstitial  structure  of  the  rock,  as 
seen  in  thin  sections,  is  partly  crystalline  and  partly  organic, 
formed  by  the  cementation  of  comminuted  shell-fragments  by 
calcite;  some  crystals  of  augite  and  fragments  of  a  basic  lava  also 
occur  in  parts  of  the  slide.  Amongst  the  coarser  organic  contents 
of  the  rock,  plates  and  spines  of  echinoids  were  seen. 

•  Quart.  Journ,  Geol.  Soc,  Vol.  xlix.,  1893,  pp.230,  231. 


BY  FREDERICK  CHAPMAN.  263 

The  Foraminifera  contained  in  this  specimen  are  as  follows  : 

Globlgerina  sp.  (of.  G.  buUoides,  d'Orb.,  or  G.  rosacea,  d'Orb.). 
Carpenteria  sp. 

?  Polystomella,  or  a  related  nummulinoid  form,  the  peripheral 
edge  showing  the  "marginal  cord." 

Lepidocyclina  insulce-natalis,  Jones  &  Chapm. 

,,  ),  var.  incequalis,  Jones  &  Chapm. 

134.—"  From  the  top  of  the  N.W.  spur  of  Partua  Tabua,  on 
the  track  1500  ft.  above  sea-level,  Santo." 

A  dark  greyish  Nullipore  Limestone  with  Lepidocyclina.  In 
thin  sections  this  rock  is  seen  to  consist  of  organic  material  as 
foraminiferal  fragments  of  the  coenosteum  of  (?)  Millepora  tests, 
{Lepidocyclina  and  Heterostegina),  Lithothamnion,  both  encrust- 
ing and  branching  forms  very  abundant  (one  encrusting  example 
showing  conceptacles'),  together  with  fragments  of  an  andesitic 
rock.  The  interspaces  between  the  coarser  organic  and  frag- 
mentary constituents  are  filled  with  a  fine  calcareous  mud,  and 
in  places  they  are  cemented  by  crystalline  calcite. 

The  Foraminifera  are  : — 

1  Planorhulina  (encrusting). 

?  Truncatulina  (of  the  lobatula  type). 

Miogypsina  biirdiyalensis,  Giimbel  sp. 
,,  1  globulina,  Michelotti  sp. 

Heterostegina  cf.  margaritata,  Schlumberger. 

Cycloclypeus  sp, 

Lepidocyclina  cf.  martini,  Schlumberger. 

,,  1  insulce-natalis,  Jones  &  Chapm. 

176. — "  Limestone  outcrop  on  Wai  Malikoliko  near  where  the 
track  descends  to  the  river,  Santo.     Beds  dipping  70°." 

A  dense  cream-coloured  limestone. 

In  thin  sections  this  rock  is  seen  to  consist  chiefly  of  the  tests 
of  Lepidocyclina  and  fragments  of  branching  and  encrusting 
Lithothamnion,  together  with  occasional  pieces  of  molluscan 
shells,  often  (?)  alga-bored,  plates  and  spines  of  echinoids,  coral 
and  milleporid  fragments.     The  organisms  in  this  limestone  are 


264  FORAMINIFERAL  ROCKS  ON  WEST  COAST  OF  SANTO, 

very  well  preserved,  the  interspaces  being  filled  in  with  calcareous 
mud,  and  often  further  cemented  by  crystalline  calcite.  The 
Foraminifera  are  as  follows  : — 

Miliolina  sp. 

Carpenteria  sp.  (somewhat  crushed);  common. 

Polytrema  plamim,  Carter  (encrusting  masses  of  Lithothamnion). 

Amphisteghia  lessoni,  d'Orb.;  frequent. 

Heterostegina  cf.  margaritata,  Schlumb. ;  frequent. 

Cycloclypeus  sp.  (fragmentary);  fairly  common. 

Lepidocyclwa  martini.,  Schlumb. 

178. — "Shaley  beds  from  Wai  Malikoliko,  same  locality  as  176, 
Santo." 

A  detrital  limestone  with  variable  structure.  The  rock-section 
shows  several  layers  bedded  upon  one  another.  The  coarser 
portion  of  the  rock  is  a  fragmental  organic  limestone  containing 
a  few  (?)  andesitic  particles.  The  only  organic  remains  which 
can  be  recognised  in  this  portion  of  the  rock  are,  besides  fora- 
miniferal  tests,  Lithotlt amnion  (branching  form)  and  a  few  shell- 
fragments.      The  Foraminifera  in  this  coarser  portion  are  : — 

Bolivina  cf.  textilarioides,  Reuss. 

Glohigerina  cf.  bidloides,  or  G.  7'osacea,  d'Orb.;  numerous. 

1  Carpenieria  (fragments). 

Le2ndocycli7ia  sp. 

The  finer  layers  in  this  slide  consist  of  an  impure  calcareous 
mud,  with  well-marked  lines  of  sedimentation.  There  are 
numerous  transparent  particles,  evidently  organic,  but  too  frag- 
mentary to  be  recognisable,  with  the  exception  of  an  occasional 
test  of  Glohigerina. 

182. — "Decomposed  friable  rock  just  below  the  limestone  at 
Wai  Malikoliko." 

This  is  an  ochreous-coloured  tuff  containing  numerous  Fora- 
minifera, chiefly  of  the  genus  Lepidocydina.  An  Ostracod 
[Bairdia)  and  a  fragment  of  an  echinoid  spine  were  also  seen. 
The  Foraminifera  are  more  or  less  corroded,  and  only  the  larger 
forms,  as  a  rule,  seem  to  be  left.      The  Foraminifera  obtained 


BY  FREDERICK  CHAPMAN.  265 

from  this  rock  specimen  by  breaking  up  and  washing  are  of  very 
great  interest.     The  following  were  found  : — 

Gaudrijina  suhrotvAidata,  Sch wager;  one  specimen. 
Bolivina  nobilis,  Hantken;  one  specimen. 
Glohlgerina  buUoides,  d'Orb.;  one  specimen. 
Sphcero'idina  bulloides,  d'Orb.;  occasional. 
Discorbina  {V)  biconcava,  Parker  &  Jones;  one  specimen. 

,,  bertheloti,  d'Orb.  sp.;  one  specimen. 

Truncatulina  ungeriana,  d'Orb.  sp.;  one  specimen. 
Carpenteria  proteiformis,  Goes;  one  specimen. 
Miogypsiyia  irregularis,  Michelotti  sp.;  frequent. 

„  burdigalensis,  Giimbel  sp.;  several  specimens. 

,,  comj^lanata,  Schlumberger;  rare. 

Pulvinidina  sp.;  one  specimen. 
Amphistegina  lessoni,  d'Orb.;  common. 
Heterostegina  depressa,  d'Orb.;  frequent. 

,,  viargaritata,  Schlumb.;  common. 

Gycloclypeus  p>ustulosus,  sp.nov.;  common. 
Lepidocyclina  martini^  Schlumb.;  very  common. 

,,  ,,  ,,  var.  rotula,  nov.;  rare. 

190.— "  Stratified  sedimentary  rocks  25  feet  above  sea-level, 
south  of  Saurii,  Santo." 

The  two  samples  of  rock,  marked  A  and  B,  are  very  dark  in 
colour  and  resemble  in  appearance  an  indurated  ash. 

Slide  A.  —Under  the  microscope  this  rock  is  seen  to  consist 
of  a  tine-grained  calcareous  mud  largely  of  organic  origin,  and  to 
a  great  extent  intermixed  with  fine  particles  of  volcanic  pro- 
ducts, as  in  No.  178. 

The  only  recognisable  organisms  seem  to  belong  to  Globigerina 
budoides,  d'Orb. 

Slide  B. — A  fragmental  organic  limestone  with  numerous 
lava  particles  and  crystals. 


266      FORAMINIFERAL  ROCKS  ON  WEST  COAST  OF  SANTO, 

The  organic  fragments  comprise  Lithothamnion  (branching 
form),  foraminifera,  echinoid  spines  and  molluscan  shell-fragments. 
The  Foraminifera  are  as  follows  : — 

1  Truncatulina. 

Carpenteria  sp. 

Lepidocycliyia  afF.  insulce-natalis,  Jones  it  Chapm. 

199. — "  Lower  portion  of  sedimentary'  beds,  C.  Karai,  Santo." 
A  volcanic  tuff  with  a  few  organic   particles.      The  rock  is 

largely  composed  of  pyroxenic  and  other  minerals. 

One  test  of  a  foraminifer,  apparently  referable  to  Glohigerina 

conglobata,  Brady,  was  noticed. 

208.— "Older  sedimentary  beds  (dipping  55°)  of  the  Wai 
Bubo,  Santo." 

A  fine-grained  calcareous  and  tufaceous  mud,  with  occasional 
tests  of  a  starved  Glohigerina  (aff.  hulloides,  d'Orb.). 

210. — "Older  sedimentaries  of  the  Wai  Bubo  at  the  farthest 
point  reached^  Santo." 

A  brecciated  limestone,  chiefly  organic,  but  intermixed  with 
crystals  and  fragments  of  igneous  rocks. 

The  following  organisms,  badly  preserved,  were  recognised  :  — 

Lithothamnion  (branching  form). 

Heterostegina  sp.  (fragmentary);  numerous. 

?  Lepidocyclina. 

21  Ic. — "Limestone  pebbles,  in  tuif  dipping  55°,  Wai  Bubo, 
Santo." 

A  compact  grey  or  greenish  limestone.  The  microscopic 
structure  is  seen  to  be  largely  that  of  a  foraminiferal  limestone; 
the  organic  material  is  admixed  with  some  andesitic  fragments, 
and  minerals  such  as  felspar,  and  altered  ferro-magnesian  silicates. 
The  cement  of  the  rock  is  in  parts  a  tufaceous  mud,  in  other 
places  a  crystalline  cement.  Besides  foraminifera  (of  which 
there  is  in  this  rock  a  great  variety)  there  are  numerous  examples 
of  Lithothamnion^  both  branching  and  encrusting,  echinoid  spines 
and  plates,  and  molluscan  shell-fragments.     The  structure  of  the 


BY  FREDERICK  CHAPMAN.  267 

organisms  has  been  well  preserved  in  this  limestone.     The  Fora- 
minifera  are  as  follows  : — 

Miliolina  cf.  semhiuhim,  Linn,  sp, 

,,  cf.  ohlonga,  Mont.  sp. 

,,  cf.  subrotu7ida,  Mont.  sp. 

Textularia  cf.  grameii,  d'Orb. 
GlohigerUia  hulloides,  d'Orb.;  common. 
Truncatulina  refuJgens,  Montf.  sp. 
Cm'penteria  sp. 

Miogypsina  neodit^pansa,  Jones  &  Chapm.  sp. 
Aniphistegiiia  lessoni,  d'Orb. 
Heterostegina  margm-itata^  Schlumb. 
Lepidocyclina  insulce-natalis,  Jones  tfe  Chapm. 

,,  ,,        var.  incEqualis,  Jones  &  Chapm. 

,,  (?)  sicmatreusis,  Brady. 

212.  — "  Tuff  with  calcareous  fragments  interbedded  with  the 
sedimentaries  dipping  55°.     Wai  Bubo,  Santo." 

A  tufaceous  limestone.  In  hand  specimens  it  is  of  a  dark 
blue-grey  colour,  showing  on  the  fractured  surfaces  angular  frag- 
ments of  a  decomposed  (greenish)  andesitic  rock. 

The  microscopical  examination  of  this  rock  shows  it  to  be 
largely  made  up  of  organic  fragments  such  as  are  seen  in  a  typical 
consolidated  coral-sand,  but  with  the  addition  of  chips  of  igneous 
rocks  and  numerous  felspar  crystals.  The  cement  appears  to  be 
formed  of  a  fine  brownish  volcanic  ash. 

The  calcareous  particles  consist  of  the  coenenchyma  of  corals, 
Lithothamnloyi,  and  spines  of  echinoids.  The  following  Fora- 
minifera  were  also  met  with  :  — 

Textularia  sp. 

Glohigerina  bulioides,  d'Orb. 

Carpenteria  sp. 

Amphistegina  lessoni,  d'Orb. 

Lepidocyclina  insulce-iiatalis,  Jones  &  Chapm. 
5,  cf.  martini,  Schlumb. 


268  PORAMINIFERAL  ROCKS  ON  WEST  COAST  OF  SANTO, 

223. — "  Older  sedimentary  rocks  25  ft.  thick  and  dipping  50°, 
on  the  Wai  Bubo,  Santo." 

A  compact  dark  grey  limestone  largely  composed  of  Litho- 
thamnion  and  Lepidocyclina.  Besides  the  above,  the  following 
organic  remains  are  present :  numerous  other  Foraminiferal 
echinoid  spines,  and  lamellibranch  shells.  The  Foraminifera 
are  : — 

Millolina  sp.  (a  triloculine  form). 

Textularia  rugosa,  Reuss. 

Glohigerina  hulloides,  d'Orb. 

SphcEroidina  hulloides,  d'Orb. 

Truncatulina  sp. 

Anomalina  sp. 

Polytrema  planum,  Carter. 

Amphistegina  lessoni,  d'Orb.;  common. 

Opercidina  complanata,  Defr. 

Heterostegina  sp. 

Cycloclypeus  pustulosus,  sp.nov. 

Lepidocyclina  (?)  sumatrensis,  Brady. 
,,  martini,  Schlumberger. 

,,  andreivsiana,  Jones  &  Chapm. 

,,  insulcB-natalis,  Jones  &  Chapm. 

iii.DiSTRiBUTiON  List  of  thk  Foraminifera,  with  Notes  on 
THE  New  and  .Rare  Forms. 

Miliolina  spp.;  Nos.  176,  223. 

M.  cf.  semimdum,,  Linn,  sp.;  No.  21L 

M.  cf.  oblonga,  Mont,  sp.;  No.  2n. 

M.  cf.  subrotunda,  Mont,  sp.;  No.  211.  [Our  example  agrees- 
in  cross-section  with  this  form,  which  is  commonly  found  in 
littoral  sands,  and  is  also  a  familiar  Miocene  fossil]. 

Textularia  rugosa,  Reuss  sp.;  No.  223.  [A  well-known  coral- 
reef  species  and  found  fossil  in  strata  as  old  as  Oligocene]. 

T.  cf.  gramen,  d'Orb.;  No.  211.  [But  for  the  fact  that  there 
are  thin-shelled  examples  they  might  be  considered  to  belong  to 
the  preceding  species]. 


BY  FREDERICK  CHAPMAN.  269 

T.  sp.;  No.  212. 

Gaudryina  snbrotundata,  Schwager;  No.  182.  [This  species 
is  ah-e  tdy  described  from  the  Miocene;  and  has  been  obtained  in 
recent  dredgings  from  Torres  Straits  and  the  West  Indies]. 
Bolivina  cf.  textllaj'ioides,  Reuss;  No.  178. 
B.  nobilis,  Hantken  ;  No.  182.  [The  fossil  specimens  were 
obtained  by  von  Hantken  from  the  "  Clavulina-szaboi "  beds  of 
Ofen,  Hungary.  At  the  present  day  its  distribution  is  confined 
to  the  Pacific]. 

Glohigerina  hulloides,  d'Orb.;  Nos.  182.  190,  211,  212,  223. 

cf.  hulloides,  d'Orb.;  Nos.  133,  178,  208. 
[The  thin-shelled  variety  of  G.  bulloides,  indicating  a  somewhat 
turbid  marine  condition,  is  fairly  common  in  these  rocks]. 
G.  conglohata^  Brady;  No.  199. 
Sphceroidina  bulloides,  d'Orb.;  Nos.  182,  223, 
Discorbina  (?)  biconcava,   Parker  and    Jones;    No.    182.      [A 
slightly    aberrant   form  of    what  is  probably    the    above-named 
species.     D.   biconcava,  as    a    living    foraminifer,  seemed  to   be 
confined   to  the   seas    around  Australia    until   Mr.   Siddall    dis- 
covered the  same  form  in  the  estuary  of  the  Dee,  represented  by 
minute  but  otherwise  typical  examples]. 
D.  berthe/oti,  d'Orb.;  No.  182. 

1  Plariorbulina',  No.  134.      [An  encrusting  form]. 
Ti'uncatulina  ungeriana,  d'Orb.;  No.  182. 
T.  cf.  lobatula,  Walker  &  Jacob  sp.;  No.  134. 
T.  refulge7is,  Montfort  sp.;  No.  211. 
T.  sp.;  No.  223. 
1  Truncatulina.',  No.  IDO. 
Anomalina  sp.;  No.  22o. 

Carpftutei'ia  'proteifoinnis,  Goes;  No.  182.  [A  fragment  of  a 
cylindrical  test  showing  several  chambers,  the  acervuline  character 
of  the  latter  agreeing  with  some  varieties  remarked  upon  by  the 
late  Or.  H.  B.  Brady. "^  In  our  specimen  the  perforations  are 
filled  up  and  stained  of  a  dark  colour]. 

*  Rep.  Chall.  Vol.  ix.  1884,  p.679. 


270      FORAMiyiFERAL  ROCKS  ON  WEST  COAST  OF  SANTO, 

CcD'peyiieria  sp.;  No.  133.  [Fragments  of  a  wild-growing  form 
like  C.  raphidodendron,  Moebius,  sp.  It  also  shows  a  resemblance 
to  C.  capitata,  Jones  k,  Chapm."^ 

Carpenteria  (fragments);  Nos.  176,  (?)  178,  190,  211,  212. 

Pulvinulina  sp.;  No.  182. 

Jfiogypsina  burdigalensis,  Giimbel,  sp.;  Nos.  134,  182.  [Not 
uncommon]. 

M.  C?)  globulina,  Mich,  sp.;  No.  134. 

M.  irregidaris,  Mich,  sp.;  No.  182.     [Not  uncommon]. 

M.  complanata,  Schlumberger;  No.  182.     [Rare]. 

M.  7ieodispansa,  Jones  &  Chapm.  sp.;  No.  211.  [Under  the 
name  of  Orbitoides  {Lepidocyclina)  neodispa^isa  this  form  whs 
first  described  from  the  Miocene  limestones  of  Christmas  Island. 
It  properly  belongs  to  the  genus  Miogypsina,  however,  since  the 
median  series  of  chamberlets  is  arranged  in  a  spiral;  the  latter 
feature  was  not  shown  in  the  thin  slides  made  from  the  Christmas 
Island  rocks,  t  In  its  general  form  M.  neodispansa  approaches 
that  of  M.  burdigalensis,  Giimbel,  sp.,  but  differs  in  having  the 
vertical  pillars  of  the  outer  series  much  less  pronounced].! 

Poltyrema  planum,  Carter;  Nos.  176,  223.  [This  important 
encrusting  reef-organism  was  also  met  with  in  some  abundance^ 
associated  with  Lepidocyclince,  in  the  limestones  of  Christmas 
Island;§  before  this  occurrence  it  had  been  found  only  as  a  living 
species.  It  is  interesting,  therefore,  to  meet  with  it  again  in  tlie 
fossil  condition]. 

1  Poli^stomella;  No.  133.  [Section  of  a  nummulinoid  form 
showing  peripheral  edge  with  the  "  marginal  cord"]. 


*  Men.  of  Christmas  Is.  (Brit.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.)  1900,  p.246,  pl.xx.  f.7. 
t  Oj).  cit.  p. 235,  pl.xx.  figs. 3,  4. 

+  See  Schlumberger,  'Note  sur  le  genre  Miogypsina.'  Bull.  Soc.  Geol. 
France,  S^r.  3,  Vol.xxviii.  p.330,  pi  ii.  tigs.  11, 12,  pl.iii.  figs.22-25.  I  have, 
since  writing  the  above,  seen  a  note  by  Lemoine  &  Douville  referring  to  this 
form  as  Miogxjimna  (?).  Mem.  Soc.  G^o\.  Fr.  1904,  Vol.xii.  fasc.ii.  M6m.32, 
p.  35.— F.C.,  July,  '05. 

§  Recorded  under  the  name  of  Polytrema  miniaceum  var.  involva.  Op. 
siqjra  cit.  p. 255,  etc. 


BY  FREDKRK'K  CHAPMAN.  271 

Amphifitegina  lessoni,   d'Orb.;    Nos.  176,   182,   211,   212,   223. 
[Usually  the  small,  compressed,  lenticular  variety]. 
Operculina  complanaCa,  Def ranee;  No.  223. 
Heterostegina  deprr.Hsa,  d'Orb.;  No.  182. 
H.  jiiarcjaritata,  Schlumberger"^ ;  Nos.  182,  211. 
H.  cf.  margaritata;  Nos.  134,  176. 
H.  sp.;  Nos.  210,  223. 
Cycloclypetis  sp.;  Nos.  134,  176,  223. 

C.  PusTULOsus,  sp.nov. 
(Plate  V.  fig.l;  pl.vi.  fig.  2;  pl.vii.  fig.  2). 

[Description. — This  species  is  readily  separable  from  already 
known  forms  by  its  closely  pimpled  shell-surface.  This  decora- 
tion is  not  confined  to  the  central  area  of  the  test  as  in  the 
megalospheric  form  of  C.  carpenteri  (Brady's  G.  guembelianus), 
but  is  uniformly  distributed  over  the  whole  surface.  In  the 
present  form  the  chamberlets  are,  generally  speaking,  more 
rectangular  than  those  of  C.  ca7ye7iteri,  and  towards  the  peri- 
phery become  very  narrow.  A  fine  example,  in  median  section,  of 
a  microspheric  form,  is  shown  on  pl.vi.  fig. 2.  Diameter  of  test  1 
to  6  mm.;  Nos.  182,  223J. 

Cycloclype7is  sp.;  Nos  134,  176. 

Lepidocyclina  insulce-natalis^  Jones  &  Chapm.;  Nos.  133,  (?)  134, 
(?)190,  211,  212,  223. 

L.  insuUa-yiatalis  var.  incequalis,  Jones  &  Chapm;  Nos.  133 
211.  [The  Lejndocyclina  described  by  Prof.  Rupert  Jones  and 
myself  from  the  Miocene  limestones  of  Christmas  Island  under 
the  name  of  L.  insulce-natalisj  represented  the  microspheric  con- 
dition. The  megalospheric  individuals  may  possibly  be  repre- 
sented by  the  so-called  variety  incequalis,X  which  is  closely 
comparable,  if  not  identical  with  L.  murrayana,  Jones  &  Chapm. ,§ 

*  Samml.  Geol.  Reichs-Mus.  Leiden,  Ser.  1.  Vol.  vi.  pt.3,  1902,  p.252, 
pl.vii.  fig. 4. 

t  Mon.  of  Christmas  Island  (Brit.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.)  1900,  p.242,  pl.xx. 
fig.o,  pl.xxi.  figs.  13,  14. 

XOp.  cit.  pp.254,  255,  pl.xxi.  fig.  12. 
§  Op.  cit.  pp.252,  253,  pl.xxi.  fig.  10. 


272  FORAMIKIFEKAL  ROCKS  ON  WEST  COAST  OF  SANTO, 

and  L./ormof<a,  Schlumberger.*  The  characters  shown  by  thin 
slices  of  tlie  tests  in  the  rocks  before  us,  as,  for  example,  in  the 
saddle-like  form,  in  the  4-rayed  aspect  in  median  section  due  to 
twisting  in  process  of  growth,  and  in  the  invariable  accompaniment 
of  a  megalosphere,  together  with  its  association  with  shells  of  L. 
insuke-nat'dis,  lend  support  to  this  view] 

L.  martini,  Schlumberger;!   Nos.  176,  182,  223. 

L.   MARTINI,  var.  ROTULA,    nov.;  No.  182. 
(Plate  vii.  fig. 4). 

[Description.  —  Some  examples,  probabl}-  of  the  megalospheric 
form,  of  an  almost  globular  shape,  with  short  regular  peripherical 
processes  were  met  w^ith.  At  first  sight  they  seemed  suggestive 
of  a  form  of  Tirioporas,  but  thin  sections  showed  them  to  be 
related  to  the  above  species.] 

L.  cf.  nmrtini;  Nos.  134,  212. 

Lepiclocyclina  sp.;  No.  178. 

^  Lepidocyclina;  No.  210. 

Lepidocijclina  (i)  fiUinatrensis,  Brady;  Nos.  211,  223. 

L.  aiidreivsia7ia,  Jones  A:  Chapm.;  No.  223. 

iv.  Note  on  the  Ostracod. 
Bairdia  cK  foveolata,  G.  S.  Brady. 

Bairdia  foveolata,  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall.  Zool.  pt.  iii. 
p.  55,  pi.  viii.,  figs  1  a-f. 

Id,  1890,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  Edinb.  Vol.  xxxv.  p.  493. 

Chapman,  1902,  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  Zool.  Vol.  xxviii.  p.  423. 

The  pre.sent  example,  which  occurred  in  sample  No.  182,  is  a 
left  valve  of  a  form  of  Bairdia  most  like  the  above  species.  In 
outline,  this  valve  is  exactly  comparable  with  B.  foveolata,  more 
especially  with  certain  specimens  I  have  already  obtained  from 

*  Samml.  desGeol.  Reichs-Mus.  Leiden,  Ser.l.  Vol.vi.  pt.8,  1902,  pp. 251-2, 
pi. vii.  figs.  1-3. 

t  Samml.  Geol.  Reichs-Mus.  Leiden,  Ser.  1,  Vol.vi.  pt.  3,  1900,  p.  1.31 
pl.vi.  figs.  5,  8. 


BY  FREDERICK  CHAPMAN.  273 

shallow  water  sands  of  the  coral  islets  at  Funafuti.  The  orna- 
mentation of  this  valve  is  not  very  clear,  as  it  appears  to  have 
been  corroded  over  the  anterior  portion  of  the  outer  surface. 
What  may  be  indications  of  a  pitted  surface  are  visible  in  one  or 
two  places.  B.foveolata  is  a  characteristic  and  often  common 
form  in  the  Southern  Seas,  and  it  has  occurred  as  far  south  as 
Bass  Strait. 

V.  Summary  of  Results. 

The  foregoing  examination  of  the  oldest  sedimentary  rocks 
seen  and  collected  by  Mr.  Mawson  in  the  Island  of  Santo  proves 
them  to  be  of  Miocene  age  (Aquitanian  and  Burdigalian). 

A  point  of  particular  interest  brought  out  by  the  present 
investigations  is  the  association  of  Lepidocyclina  with  the 
excentric  forms  of  Miogypsina  in  the  New  Hebrides.  According 
to  H.  Douville,"^  the  .latter  make  their  appearance  after  the 
Lepidocydina  in  the  Miocene  of  the  South-west  of  France; 
although  the  regular  form,  M.  burdigcdensis,  is  contemporaneous 
with  that  genus  in  beds  of  Aquitanian  age  (basal  beds  of  Miocene). 
The  next  stage  in  ascending  order,  the  Burdigalian,  is  in  the 
same  area  characterized  by  Miogypshia  globulina,  M.  irregularis 
and  M.  complanata. 

In  the  Miocene  rocks  of  Santo,  however,  both  the  excentric 
and  the  regular  forms  occur  in  the  same  deposit,  namely,  the 
f oraminiferal  tufaceous  rock  underlying  the  massive  Lepidocyclina 
limestone  at  Wai  Malikoliko.  From  this  we  naturally  infer  that 
faunas,  distinct  in  the  European  area,  were  living  together  in  the 
New  Hebrides  Miocene  sea. 

A  similar  association  of  species  occurs  here  as  in  the  Miocene 
limestones  of  Christmas  Island,  and  also  of  Madoura,  and  other 
parts  of  the  Dutch  East  Indies,  with  which  the  New  Hebrides 
marine  area  was  most  probably  connected  when  these  fossiliferous 
beach  and  shallow-water  deposits  were  laid  down. 

The  occurrence  of  a  new  species  of  Cycloclypeus  in  the  New 
Hebrides  rocks  further  emphasises  the  fact  that  certain  genera 

*  Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  France,  Ser.  4,  Vol.  ii.  1902,  p.  312. 
18 


274      FORAMINIFERAL  ROCKS  ON  WEST  COAST  OF  SANTO. 

and  species  of  even  such  lowly  forms  as  protozoa  have  been  more 
or  less  restricted  in  their  geographical  distribution  from  their 
earliest  geological  appearance  until  recent  times;  for  this  part  of 
the  world  afforded  us  the  earliest  dredged  specimens  of  Cyclo- 
clypeus,  and  with  the  exception  of  an  Arabian  fossil  species,  the 
Tertiary  examples  seem  to  be  restricted  to  this  area  also. 

Note. — Since  writing  the  above  (Aug.,  1904),  I  have  received 
from  Messrs.  P.  Lemoine  &  R.  Douville  an  interesting  and 
important  monograph  on  the  genus  Lepidocyclina  (Mem.  Soc. 
Geol.  France,  Vol.xii.  fasc.ii.  Mem.32,  1904). 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  V.-VIIL 

Plate  V. 

Fig.  I. — Foraminiferal   limestone,   with   Cycloclyi^eiis,  Lithothamnion  and 
echinoid  spines  (  x  16). 

No.  223.     The  Bubo,  Santo. 
Fig.  2. — Foraminiferal  limestone,  with  Lepidocyclina  martini,  Schlumberger, 
and  Poly trema  planum,  Carter  (  x  16). 

No.  176.     Wai  Malikoliko,  Santo. 

Plate  vi. 

Fig.  1. — Lepidocyclina  insnlce-natalis,  Jones  &  Chapm.     Section  across  the 
median  plane  (  x  16). 

No.  211a.     Wai  Bubo,  Santo. 
Fig.  2. — GyclocUjpeus  piistulosus,  sp.nov.     Section  through  the  median  plane 
of  a  microspheric  form  (  x  16). 

No.  182.     Wai  Malikoliko,  Santo. 

Plate  vii. 

Fig.  l.—Bairdia  sp.  cf.  foveolata,  G.  S.  Brady.     A  left  valve  (  x  32).     From 

the  decomposed,  friable  rock  just  below  the  limestone  at  Wai 

Malikoliko  (No.  182). 
Fig.  2,—Cycloclypem  pustulosus,  sp.nov.  (  x  32).     Wai  Malikoliko  (No.l82). 
Fig.  3. — Lepidocyclina  martini,  Schlumberger,  var.  rotula,  nov.  {  x  16).     Wai 

Malikoliko  (No.  182). 
Fig.  4, — L.    martini,  var.   rotula,  nov.      Section   through  the    test,   partly 

median,  partly  tangential  (  x  32).     Wai  Malikoliko  (No.  182). 

Plate  viii. 
Generalised  Geological  Section  across  South  Santo.     By  D.  Mawson. 


275 


ON  THE  OCCURRENCE  OF  A  BED  OF  FOSSILIFEROUS 
TUFF  AND  LAVAS  BETWEEN  THE  SILURIAN 
AND  MIDDLE  DEVONIAN  AT  CAVAN,  YASS; 
SIMILAR  IN  AGE  AND  CHARACTER  TO  THE 
SNOWY  RIVER  PORPHYRIES  OF  VICTORIA. 

By  a.  J.  Shearsby. 

(Communicated  by  W.  S.  Dun). 

(Plate  ix.) 

The  Parish  of  Cavan  should  in  the  future  be  of  intense  interest 
to  the  geologist,  as  it  shows  rocks  of  the  Upper  Silurian  age, 
which  until  quite  recently  had  not  been  observed  in  that  district, 
appearing  as  a  conspicuous  outcrop  from  beneath  a  bed  of  por- 
phyries, tuffs  and  lavas  which  forms  a  distinct  line  of  demarca- 
tion separating  them  from  a  formation  of  more  recent  age,  of 
which  the  main  portion  of  the  Cavan  beds  are  composed. 

The  Cavan  beds  have  in  many  instances  been  termed  Siluro- 
Devonian,  but  they  will  probably  receive  a  more  definite  name 
after  a  careful  geological  survey  is  made  of  the  north-eastern 
portion  of  the  Parish,  and  the  southern  portions  of  the  Parishes 
of  Boambolo  and  Waroo. 

The  Parish  of  Cavan  is  about  twelve  miles  to  the  south  of  the 
town  of  Yass,  and  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  Murrumbidgee 
River,  which  in  this  part  of  the  country  pursues  an  exceedingly 
tortuous  course  on  account  of  the  many  obstacles  in  the  shape  of 
the  rugged  hills  of  limestone  and  igneous  rocks,  which  cause  the 
river  to  twist  about,  and  add  such  a  picturesqueness  to  the  land- 
scape. The  district  is  essentially  a  pastoral  one,  sheep  and  cattle 
doing  remarkably  well  on  the  rich  succulent  grasses  which  abound 
on  all  sides.  The  limestone  ridges,  however,  require  plenty  of 
rain,  as  although  in  spring  they  look  much  fresher  and  greener 
than  the  adjoining  hills,  the  warm  sun  of  summer  soon  makes  a 


276  FOSSILIFEROUS    TUFF,    ETC.,    AT    CAVAN, 

change,  and,  unless  good  showers  are  experienced,  the  grass  gets 
burnt  up  and  disappears  much  more  readily  than  elsewhere. 

It  was  whilst  on  a  holiday  trip  to  the  Murrumbidgee  River, 
near  the  Boambolo  ford,  that  I  noticed  a  splendid  anticlinal 
fold  consisting  of  arches  of  limestone,  shale  and  sandstone  on  the 
left  bank  of  the  river,  about  half  a  mile  below  the  ford.  Believ- 
ing myself  to  be  in  the  vicinity  of  Devonian  limestones,  I  went 
to  the  formation  in  order  to  see  if  I  could  add  to  my  collection 
of  Devonian  fossils.  I  found  the  anticline,  which  I  have  called 
the  "Glenbower  Anticline,"  as  it  is  situated  on  the  property 
known  as  Glenbower,  portion  33,  Parish  of  Cavan,  to  be  about 
one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  high;  the  summit  being  of  porphyritic 
tufiF,  overlying  a  band  of  quartzite,  which  in  turn  covers  the 
following  layers  in  descending  order  : — Tufaceous  limestone,  thin 
layers  of  sandstone,  shale  and  limestone,  thick  hard  compact 
limestone,  thin  bands  of  sandstone,  shale  and  limestone,  hard 
compact  limestone,  sandstone  showing  current  bedding,  hard 
compact  limestone,  and  finally,  at  the  river-level,  sandstone. 
The  dip  of  these  strata  is  about  30°  south.  On  overhauling  the 
fossils,  which  I  obtained  in  large  numbers  m  situ,  to  my  surprise 
I  found  a  Try  plasma  of  an  undescribed  species  which  is  also 
common  in  the  Upper  Silurian  rocks  at  Hatton's  Corner,  and 
Derrengullen  Creek,  near  Yass. 

Further  search  was  rewarded  with  specimens  of  Favosites 
gothlandica^  Heliolites,  Stromatopora,  Cyathophyllum  (fasciculate), 
Syringopora  (dendroid),  Favosites,  Amplexus,  Alveolites,  Atrypa 
reticularis,  Linn.,  together  with  another  large  species  of  Atrypa 
as  yet  undescribed,  which  is  common  to  the  Yass  Silurian.  A 
few  minute  forms  of  Orthis  and  Chonetes  were  unearthed  in  the 
shales,  which  also  bore  Crinoid  stems  in  abundance.  Trilobites 
were  represented  by  a  species  of  Cromus  or  Encrinurus,  and  a 
very  small  form  which,  on  account  of  the  friable  nature  of  the 
shale  preventing  my  obtaining  more  than  the  merest  fragments, 
I  was  unable  to  have  determined. 

On  forwarding  some  of  the  material  to  Mr.  R.  Etheridge,  junr., 
of  the  Australian  Museum,  for  identification,  he  reported  on  them 


BY    A.    J.    SHEARSBY.  277 

as  Upper  Silurian,  but  vseemed  surprised  at  their  being  obtained 
at  the  locality;  and  I  promised  to  make  a  further  examination  of 
the  surrounding  country  when  opportunity  offered.  This  oppor- 
tunity did  not  occur  till  twelve  months  had  elapsed,  I  having 
been  away  from  the  district  in  the  meantime. 

My  next  visit  enabled  me  to  spend  a  little  more  time  in  the 
locality,  with  the  result  that  I  feel  certain  this  place  will  be 
found  to  be  of  absorbing  interest  to  future  visitors,  for  it  is  here 
that  we  have  a  section  of  country  showing  the  Upper  Silurian 
and  Middle  Devonian  rocks  separated  by  a  layer  of  contempo- 
raneous tuffs  and  lavas,  which  occur  in  massive  beds,  and  also  of 
a  fragmentary  nature.  Further  search  at  Glenbower  anticline 
revealed  many  more  fossils  of  undoubted  Upper  Silurian  age  in 
the  shales  and  also  the  hard  compact  limestones,  which  contain 
many  corals,  Crinoid- stems,  brachiopods,  and  gastropods;  but  I 
did  not  succeed  in  discovering  any  in  the  sandstones. 

Leaving  the  anticline,  I  followed  the  river  bank  down  for  some 
distance,  and  found  that  a  narrow  strip  of  country,  extending  for 
about  a  mile,  consisted  of  shale  with  thin  bands  of  limestone,  the 
whole  mass  being  very  highly  contorted  and  covered  here  and 
there  with  masses  of  the  porphyritic  tuff  mentioned  before  as 
capping  the  anticline.  At  about  a  mile  below  the  anticline  the 
shale  disappears,  and  is  followed  by  an  alluvial  river  flat,  which 
ends  lower  down  the  river  at  the  foot  of  an  imposing  hill,  known 
locally  as  Clear  Hill. 

As  the  shales  seemed  to  me  to  be  a  continuation  of  the  Glen- 
bower formation,  I  examined  them  carefully  for  fossils,  and  was 
rewarded  by  finding  the  following : — Stroinato'pora,  Favosites 
gothlandica,  Heliolites^  Alveolites,  Syringopora,  Tryplasma,  Am- 
2)lexus,  Pachypora  (?),  Cyathophyllum  shear sbyi,  Eth.  fil.  (1), 
fasciculate  Cyathophyllum,  Spirifera,  Atrypa  reticularis,  Linn., 
Pentamerus  (Barrandella)  linguifer,  Sby.,  var.  tvilkinsoni,  Eth. 
fil.,  Pentamerus  Knightii  (?),  Meristella,  Loxonema  compressa, 
Munst.,  Orthoceras  (at  least  two  species),  Crinoid  stems,  and  the 
trilobite  Encrinurus  barrandei,  De  Kon. 


•278  FOSSILIFEROUS    TUFF,    ETC.,    AT    CAVAN, 

All  the  above  are  thickly  distributed  in  the  shales,  and  one  is 
reminded  of  the  Hume  beds(2)  at  Hatton's  Corner  where  the  same 
species  are  to  be  found;  so  that  there  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  the 
Glenbower  formation  being  of  the  same  age,  that  is.  Upper 
Silurian. 

As  Mr.  R.  Etheridge,  junr.,  in  writing  about  Barrandella 
Imgui/era,  Sby.,  var.  wUkinsoni,  and  Cyathophyllum  shearshyi, 
mentions(3)  that  these  two  fossils,  together  with  Rhizophyllum 
inter punctatiim,  De  Kon.,  are  so  characteristic  of  the  Hatton's 
Corner  shale  that  the  name  of  either  may  be  selected  as  a  designa- 
tion for  that  bed;  but  as  the  Rhizophyllum  is  also  found  in  a 
lower  bed  of  the  section,  he  prefers  to  call  the  bed  the  "  Barran- 
della Shale";  the  occurrence  of  both  the  Cyathophyllum  and  the 
Barrandella  in  the  shale  at  Cavan  should,  then,  prove  a  very 
close  relationship  between  the  Hatton's  Corner  and  Glenbower 
beds. 

The  width  of  this  exposed  strip  of  Upper  Silurian  strata  is  not 
more  than  about  fifteen  chains,  for  it  is  overlaid  on  the  west  and 
south-west  by  the  mass  of  igneous  rocks  consisting  of  a  dark 
coarse  tufaceous  rock  resembling  quartz  porphyry  near  the  Glen- 
bower anticline,  and,  lower  down  towards  Clear  Hill,  of  felspar 
porphyries,  felsite  and  rhyolite.  The  felspar  porphyries  are  of 
two  colours,  one  of  a  dark  chocolate,  and  the  other  of  a  beautiful 
green,  each  with  crystals  of  pink  felspar  embedded  in  the  base. 
The  felsites  are  also  of  a  similar  green  colour,  probably  owing  to 
the  presence  of  chlorite.     All  these  rocks  take  a  high  polish. 

These  lavas  and  tuffs  rise  to  a  height  of  about  from  300  to  500 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  river  in  the  near  vicinity,  but  farther 
south  they  form  grand  and  imposing  hills  known  as  the  Murrum- 
bidt^ee  Mountains,  from  which  extensive  views  of  the  Yass- 
Murrumbidgee  district  can  be  obtained. 

Knowing  that  some  attempts  had  been  made  to  trace  the 
junction  of  the  Silurian  and  Devonian  rocks  of  the  Yass  district, 
I  was  of  the  opinion,  after  overhauling  the  fossils  contained  in 
the  Glenbower  deposits,  that  I  was  in  close  proximity  to  the 
required  spot.      I  knew  I  could  not  be  far  from  Devonian  rocks, 


BY    A.    J.    SHEARSBY.  279 

as  a  couple  of  miles  lower  down  the  river  I  had  previously 
obtained  fossils  belonging  to  the  Middle  Devonian,  but  I  did  not 
know  how  far  the  formation  extended  in  the  direction  under 
review. 

Seeing  that  the  Silurian  beds  had  dipped  away  under  the 
igneous  belt,  I  came  to  the  conclusion  they  had  left  me  altogether 
as  far  as  that  part  of  the  country  was  concerned,  so  I  turned  my 
attention  to  Clear  Hill,  which  I  mentioned  before  as  one  of  the 
boundaries  of  the  river  flat.  This  hill  is  about  two  miles  north- 
west from  Glenbower  anticline,  and  is  a  noticeable  feature  of  the 
landscape,  as  it  forms  an  imposing  escarpment  rising  to  about 
300  feet  above  the  river,  showing,  even  from  a  distance,  bold 
lines  of  stratification;  and  resting  as  it  does  on  the  volcanic  rocks, 
it  struck  me  that  I  would  find  it  of  later  origin  than  the  Glen- 
bower formation. 

On  reaching  the  foot  of  the  hill,  I  found  its  base  consisted  of 
a  porphyry  of  a  similar  nature  to  that  which  appeared  to  so  much 
advantage  higher  up  the  river  and  overlying  the  Silurian  shales. 
Resting  on  the  porphyry  are  about  200  feet  of  shale,  the  lower 
portion  being  of  a  hard  silicious  banded  nature;  to  the  north- 
west of  the  hill  the  shale  is  followed  by  quartzite.  Then  comes 
a  bed  of  hard  chert-like  felsitic  or  trachytic  tufif,  about  30  or 
40  feet  thick.  This  tufif  is  overlaid  by  about  150  feet  of  shale, 
somewhat  calcareous,  then  limestone  to  the  crown  of  the  hill. 
All  these  strata  are  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about  50°  south-west. 
Amongst  the  loose  material  scattered  about  the  slope  of  the  hill 
were  many  pieces  of  limestone  which  had  been  weathered  and 
displaced  from  the  upper  portions  of  the  formation.  One  of 
these  pieces  contained  good  specimens  of  Spirifera  yassensis, 
De  Kon.,  so  I  knew  at  once  I  must  expect  to  find  fossils  on  the 
crown  of  the  hill  of  a  more  recent  date  than  those  I  had  obtained 
higher  up  the  river. 

On  reaching  the  summit,  the  first  specimen  I  picked  up  proved 
to  be  Diphyphyllum  gemmiforme,  Eth.  fil.,  a  coral  belonging  to 
the  Middle  Devonian  age.  This  find  was  followed  by  Stroma- 
topora,    Cystiphyllum  aastralasicum,  Eth.  fil.,  Favosites,  Cyatho- 


280  FOSSILIFEROUS    TUFF,    ETC.,    AT    CAVAN, 

phylhitn,  Chcetetes  (?),  Alveolites,  Desmidopora,  Syringoj^ora, 
Leptctna,  Spirifira  yassensis,  De  Kon,,  and  some  undeterminable 
univalves.  In  the  shale  overlying  the  porphyry  at  the  foot  of 
the  hill  I  afterwards  unearthed  Cyatliophyllum,  Favosites,  and 
Syringopora.     All  of  these  belong  to  the  Middle  Devonian. 

From  the  top  of  Clear  Hill  is  obtained  a  splendid  view  of  the 
Murrumbidgee  River  as  it  winds  its  way  in  and  out  among  the 
hills,  and  the  strike  of  the  limestone  ridges  can  be  followed  by 
the  eye  over  hill  and  dale,  as  it  runs  in  a  north-westerl}'  direc- 
tion, and  recalls  to  one's  mind  the  furrows  of  a  newly  ploughed 
field  on  a  highly  magnified  scale.  To  the  south-west  the  country 
is  rugged  and  broken,  and  the  boundary  of  the  furrows  cannot 
be  traced  by  the  eye  far  from  the  hill,  but  a  clear  line  of  igneous 
rocks  bounds  them  on  the  north-east  just  as  a  wall  or  fence 
marks  the  boundary  of  an  ordinary  paddock.  In  the  creeks 
about  here  I  found  man}^  blocks  of  rock  which  had  broken  away 
from  the  main  mass  of  the  volcanic  sheet,  which  showed  a  distinct 
brecciated  structure  consisting  of  fragments  of  rhyolite  in  a 
felsitic  base. 

On  leaving  Clear  Hill  and  examining  the  limestone  ridges  to 
the  west  and  north-west,  I  found  many  interesting  fossils  of  the 
Middle  Devonian  period.  It  is  a  wonderful  collecting  ground, 
and  awaits  a  more  searching  scrutiny  than  I  have  been  able  to 
give  it.  Amongst  others,  the  following  were  obtained  .• — Astylo- 
spongia,  Receptaculites  austrcdis,  Salter,  Stromatopora,  Syringo- 
pora, Microplasma,  Cyatho2)hylluin,  Diphyphylluin,  Spongo- 
phyllum,  LitophyUum,  dendroid  Favosites  and  Alveolites,  Lep)tcena, 
Atrypa  reticularis,  Linn.,  Chonetes  culleni,  Dun,  Loxonema, 
Actinoceras,  and  what  look  like  weathered  sections  of  Nautilus. 

Many  of  the  corals  from  this  locality  are  of  extra  interest  on 
account  of  their  partial  transition  into  Beekite  (SiOo),  one 
specimen  of  Litophyllum  especially  looking  very  attractive,  the 
surface  being  covered  with  rosettes  of  this  mineral.  The  Stroma- 
toporoids  to  be  found  in  this  locality  are  also  very  beautiful,  the 
weathering  they  have  been  subjected  to  showing  up  the  structural 
detail  of  the  canals  to  advantasre. 


BY    A.    J.    SHEARSBY.  281 

The  close  proximity  of  the  Glenbower  series  of  fossils,  which 
are  without  doubt  Upper  Silurian,  to  those  of  Clear  Hill,  which, 
from  the  presence  of  Diphyphylium  gemmiforme,  Eth.  fil., 
Spirifera  yassensis,  De  Kon.,  and  Cho7ietes  culleni,  Dun,  are 
Middle  Devonian,  and  being  separated  at  this  locality  by  such  a 
narrow  margin  of  country,  seem  to  indicate  that  this  is  the 
probable  collecting  ground  of  the  late  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  where 
he  obtained  "  the  series  of  shells,  corals,  etc.,  from  the  Murrum- 
bidgee  "  which  he  submitted  to  Messrs.  Salter  and  Lonsdale;  for 
he  mentions  in  his  *'  Sedimentary  Formations  of  N.S.W."  that 
Mr.  Salter's  report(4)  was  as  follows  : — "  These  fossils  are  of  a 
mixed  character,  many  being  of  unquestionable  Silurian  age,  and 
others  having  all  the  aspect  of  Carboniferous  and  Devonian 
fossils.  It  will  not  be  easy  to  predicate  those  of  the  Devonian 
type,  as  there  is  much,  similarity  between  fossils  of  that  age  and 
those  of  either  of  the  other  systems.  .  .  .  But  if  none  of  the 
fossils  came  from  the  Carboniferous  beds,  then  there  must 
certainly  be  Devonian  forms  mixed  with  Upper  Silurian."  Had 
Mr.  Clarke  made  further  investigations  at  this  locality,  he  would 
most  likely  have  been  able  to  make  out  the  actual  limits  of  the 
Upper  Silurian  and  Devonian  formations,  at  any  rate  as  far  as 
the  Yass  district  was  concerned. 

If  the  strike  of  the  bed  or  belt  of  volcanic  rocks  which  divides 
the  sedimentary  formations  of  this  district  into  two  such  distinct 
series  be  traced  three  or  four  miles  to  the  south-east,  it  brings 
one  to  a  range  known  as  Nutter's  Mountain,  the  summit  of 
which  is  composed  of  banded  felsitic  tuff,  the  intervening  country 
and  that  beyond  consisting  of  jumbled  masses  and  beds  of  por- 
phyries and  tuffs  and  tufaceous  rhyolites. 

If  the  strike  be  followed  in  a  north-westerly  direction,  one  has 
to  travel  over  other  high  and  rugged  hills  of  porphyries,  etc.,  till 
at  a  distance  of  about  eleven  miles  the  Devil's  Pass  is  reached, 
where  the  Yass  River  has  found  a  path  through  on  its  way  to 
join  the  Murrumbidgee.  All  along  this  line  of  country,  which 
extends  for  many  miles  beyond  the  Pass,  are  to  be  found  outcrops 
of  galena,  which  in  two  cases  have  been  found  to  be  payable,  and 


282  FOSSILIFEROUS    TUFF,    ETC.,    AT    CAVAN, 

further  prospecting  will  probably  prove  the  existence  of  more 
payable  lodes. 

At  the  Devil's  Pass  the  rocks,  which  are  similar  to  those  at 
Nutter's  Mountain,  are  piled  up  to  a  great  height,  and  the  views 
from  this  look-out  are  magnificent. 

I  do  not  know  how  far  this  volcanic  belt  extends  to  the  south- 
west from  this  point  before  the  Devonian  limestones  are  met 
with  :  it  is  not  far  I  believe,  but  to  the  north-east  a  distance  of 
three  and  a  half  miles  has  to  be  covered  before  one  meets  at  the 
Horseshoe  Bend,  on  the  Yass  River,  the  Upper  Silurian  shales 
and  limestones.  At  this  point  the  sedimentary  rocks  are  very 
highly  inclined,  and  strike  in  a  north-westerly  direction.  They 
underlie  the  same  strange  porphyritic  tuff  which  is  met  with  in  the 
Glenbower  anticline,  but  at  this  point  there  is  an  enormous  body 
of  it,  for  nearly  the  whole  of  the  country  between  the  Horseshoe 
Bend  and  the  Devil's  Pass  is  composed  of  it. 

This  peculiar  rock  is  of  a  dark  grey  colour,  and  containing,  as 
it  does,  coarse  blebs  of  quartz,  together  with  felspar  and  mica, 
has  been  diagnosed  by  some  as  a  quartz  porphyry;  but  as  it 
occurs  in  places  showing  distinct  bedding,  and,  above  all,  in 
several  parts  of  the  district  it  contains  unaltered  fragments  of 
limestone  and  shale  with  fossils,  I  think  it  must  be  put  down  as 
a  tuff  highly  metamorphosed  and  silicitied. 

This  will  then  account  for  the  occurrence  of  the  beds  of 
*'  Fossiliferous  Granite,"  as  it  has  been  called,  which  I  have  come 
across  at  Murrumbateman  and  Oak  Range,  both  places  near 
Yass.  At  these  localities  may  be  seen  large  masses  of  this  rock, 
which,  if  broken  open,  will  be  found  to  contain,  scattered  through 
the  mass,  fragments  of  limestone  and  shale,  with  corals  and 
brachiopods,  which  show  in  some  cases  signs  of  weathering,  but 
no  trace  of  alteration  by  heat.  One  specimen  of  this  tuff  obtained 
at  Oak  Range,  a  few  miles  north  of  Yass,  contains  a  very  good 
cast  of  the  columnal  of  a  Crinoid,  Cyathocrinus  (?),  and  another 
the  pygidium  of  the  trilobite,  Encrlnurus,  in  a  matrix  of  lime- 
stone, showing  that  these  tuffs  were  laid  down  after  the  forma- 
tion of  the  Upper  Silurian  rocks. 


BY    A.    J.    SHEARSBY.  283 

These  beds  of  contemporaneous  lavas  and  tuffs  which  cover 
such  a  large  area  of  the  Yass  district,  and  are  intercalated  between 
the  Upper  Silurian  and  Middle  Devonian  strata,  are  of  such  a 
nature  that  I  feel  very  much  disposed  to  look  upon  them  as 
forming  the  only  record  we  have  in  the  Yass  district  of  the  Lower 
Devonian  period.  The  close  of  the  Upper  Silurian  period  seems 
to  have  been  attended  by  vast  volcanic  disturbances,  which  kept 
up  in  a  state  of  great  activity  till  the  Middle  Devonian  was 
ushered  in. 

The  thick  beds  of  shale  at  the  base  of  Clear  Hill  are  also 
probably  tufaceous  in  nature,  and  the  layer  of  felsitic  tuff,  which 
divides  the  shale  into  two  parts,  is  also  indicative  of  intermittent 
volcanic  disturbances  during  the  laying  down  of  the  Middle 
Devonian  sediments. 

This  question  of  the  age  of  the  volcanic  rocks  of  Yass  being 
Lower  Devonian  is  one,  I  think,  that  could  be  settled  if  a  careful 
geological  survey  were  made  of  the  country  comprised  in  the 
parishes  of  Cavan,  Waroo  and  Boambolo. 

I  was  unable  to  make  a  collection  from  the  southern  portion 
of  the  parish  of  Boambolo,  but  a  few  specimens,  stated  to  be 
from  that  locality,  were  handed  to  me  for  inspection,  and  I 
recognised  them  as  being  similar  to  those  of  the  Glenbower 
formation,  showing  that  the  outcrop  of  Upper  Silurian  rocks  was 
continued  on  the  other  side  of  the  river. 

I  find  that  if  the  proposed  weir  be  built  at  Barren  Jack,  lower 
down  the  Murrumbidgee,  the  water  will  be  dammed  back  some 
distance  above  the  Glenbower  anticline,  so  that  portion  of  the 
outcropping  Silurian  rocks  will  be  submerged;  and  it  is  advisable, 
in  the  event  of  that  water  conservation  scheme  being  carried  out, 
that  any  examination  of  the  geological  features  of  the  Cavan 
district  be  entered  into  at  an  early  date,  otherwise  an  interesting 
section  of  the  country  will  be  hidden  from  view. 

The  sketch  map  illustrating  this  short  paper  on  the  geology  of 
Cavan  must  be  treated  as  a  sketch  only,  for  it  was  impossible  to 
make  it  complete,  considering  the  fact  that,  having  no  assistance 
during  the  short  flying  visits  I  was  able  to  make  to  the  locality. 


284  FOSSILIFEROUS    TUFF,    ETC.,    AT    CAVAN, 

together  with  the  absence  of  suitable  instruments,  etc.,  I  was 
only  able  to  make  a  very  rough  examination  of  the  country  as 
shown  on  the  plan;  still  I  think  there  is  enough  detail  shown  to 
be  a  guide  to  anyone  possessing  the  time  and  inclination  who 
may  feel  disposed  to  thoroughly  investigate  the  surroundings, 
map  out  the  district  on  a  scientific  basis,  and  so  help  to  clear  up 
the  question  of  the  so-called  "Passage  beds"  of  the  Yass  district. 

I  have,  since  writing  the  above  notes,  had  an  opportunity  of 
visiting  Melbourne  and  perusing  various  reports  and  papers  on 
the  Snowy  River  porphyries,  which  are  held  by  the  Victorian 
geologists  to  be  of  Lower  Devonian  age.  I  was  also  allowed  by 
the  officers  of  the  Geological  Survey  Department  to  inspect  the 
collection  of  rock  specimens  from  the  Snowy  River  district,  and 
found  that  they  were  nearly  all  similar  to  the  rocks  which  I 
obtained  at  Cavan. 

In  a  paper  entitled  *'  The  Physiography  of  the  Australian 
Alps  "(6)  Mr.  Jas.  Stirling,  F.G.S.,  F.L.S.,  says:— "There  is  a 
well  marked  stratigraphical  break  between  the  underlying  Silu- 
rian beds  and  the  lowest  members  of  the  Devonian  series.  The 
sedimentary  rocks  of  the  latter  occupy  basins  in  the  former^ 
and  are  found  in  isolated  areas.  The  lowest  Devonian  rocks  are 
certain  quartz  porphyries,  fragmental  porphyries,  andfelsitic  rocks 
— the  products  of  volcanic  activities  which  marked  the  close  of  the 
Silurian  Period.  These  rocks  occupy  a  large  portion  of  the  western 
watershed  of  the  Snowy  River.  At  several  points,  notably  the 
Cobberas  Mountains,  Wombargo  Mountains,  etc.,  are  very  distinct 
remnants  of  this  period  of  igneous  action;  round  these  centres  are 
grouped  beds  of  consolidated  ash  and  tufa,  while  resting  in  hollows 
in  these  igneous  masses  are  beds  of  conglomerate,  shale,  and  crys- 
talline limestone  containing  fossils  of  distinctly  Middle  Devonian 
age.  Such  Middle  Devonian  areas  now  form  mere  pockets  in  the 
general  land  surface,  and  have  suffered  extensive  denudation. 
The  lithological  and  palseontological  characteristics  of 
the  Middle  Devonian  are  as  follows  : — At  Bindi,  on  the  east  side 
of  the  Tambo,  beds  of  blue  crystalline  limestone  rest  on  sub- 
ordinate beds  of  conglomerate.     The  limestone  beds  are  inclined 


BY    A.    J.    SHEARSBY.  285 

at  an  angle  of  from  40  to  60°  to  the  west,  and  contain  the  follow- 
ing fossils  :— P/i?'rt^??ioceras  sn^^W^oni^m,  McCoy,  Favosites  gold- 
/ussi,  d'Orb.,  Spirifera  (Atrypa)  reticularis,  Linn.,  Chonetes  aus- 
trcdis,  McCoy,  Spirifera  Icevicostata,  Val.,  Stromatopora  concen- 
trica,  Cy^tiphyllum,  etc." 

Through  the  courtesy  of  Mr.  F.  Chapman,  A.L.S.,  I  have  been 
able  to  compare  Spirifera  yassensis  with  S.  Icevicostata,  at  the 
National  Museum,  Melbourne,  with  the  result  that  I  find  these 
two  are  very  closely  allied.  Mr.  Chapman  is  working  on  these  two 
brachiopods,  and  his  report  will  come  under  notice  shortly.* 
Chonetes  culleni  and  C.australis  have  also  been  compared,  and  they 
also  appear  to  be  closely  related,  but  in  this  case  there  are  distinct 
differences  between  the  two  forms,  both  in  external  shape  and 
ornamentation,  to  warrant  their  separation  into  two  species. 
Mr.  A.  W.  Howitt,  F.O.S.,  also  states(6)  "The  age  of  the  Snowy 
River  porphyries  is  fixed  by  the  Silurian  sediments,  which  are 
inferior  to  them,  and  the  Middle  Devonian  marine  limestones, 
which,  for  instance,  at  Gelantipy  rest  upon  them." 

In  reference  to  the  reports  of  these  two  recognised  authorities, 
I  cannot  help  noticing  the  similarity  between  the  porphyries  at 
Cavan  and  the  Victorian  series,  and  am  of  opinion  that  the  beds 
are  in  direct  communication  with  one  another.  The  Snowy 
River  porphyries  extend  from  the  Victorian  border  to  Mount 
Kosciusko,  and  further  search  will,  I  think,  show  outcrops  of  the 
same  beds  all  along  the  country  between  Mount  Kosciusko  and 
Yass.  Further  interesting  comparisons  may  be  made  between 
the  Cavan  porphyries  and  the  Snowy  River  series  by  quoting 
from  Mr.  Howitt  in  his  paper  "On  the  Devonian  Rocks  of  North 
Gippsland."(7)  He  states  : — "The  Snowy  River  porphyries  may 
be  regarded  as  a  great  volcanic  sheet,  the  lowest  part  of  which  is 

*  Dealing  with  the  identity  of  these  two  specified  forms,  Mr.  F.  Chapman 
read  a  paper  before  the  Eoyal  Society  of  Victoria  at  Melbourne  last  June 
(1905),  in  which  he  gave  evidence  proving  the  two  were  identical,  i.e., 
Spirifera  yassensis,  De  Kon.  This  determination  by  Mr.  Chapman  will 
tend  to  connect  the  Victorian  beds  in  question  with  the  Middle  Devonian 
beds  of  Cavan,  N.S.W. 


286  FOSSILIFEROUS    TUFF,    ETC.,    AT    CAVAN., 

seen  in  the  Little  River,  cand  the  upper  part  at  the  Woinbargo 
uplands.  It  rests  upon  the  'Lower  Palfeozoic  Foundation,'  and 
ill  places  has  been  let  down  by  faults  into  it.  Its  lowest  portions 
approach  the  quartz  porphyries  in  character,  and  in  ascending 
it  becomes  more  and  more  fragmentary.  It  seems  to  me  that  the 
facts  I  have  detailed  naturally  lead  up  to  the  inference  that  in 
tlie  Snowy  River  Porphyries  we  may  see  the  accumulations  of 
ash,  agglomerates,  and  lavas  due  to  former  volcanic  activity  in 
Palaeozoic  time.  Those  rocks  whose  characters  are  obscure  may 
well  be  regarded  as  having  undergone  such  changes  that  former 
beds  of  fine  ash,  or  even  of  agglomerates,  may  have  become 
structureless  rock  masses  of  silicious  and  felsitic  character." 

These  remarks  of  Mr.  Howitt's  will  also  apply  equally  to  the 
rocks  of  the  Cavan  beds. 

In  another  place  in  the  same  paper  he  goes  on  to  say,  in  refer- 
ence to  some  displaced  rock  masses: — "Here  and  there  these  great 
rocks  beautifully  showed  their  fragmentary  nature,  as  well  as 
the  composition  of  the  jutting  cliffs  far  above  our  heads  from 
which  they  had  fallen.  They  were,  as  usual,  composed  of  angular 
fragments  of  quartziferous,  or  fine-grained,  or  coarse  porphyritic 
felstones,  or  of  the  compact  or  banded  varieties.  Many  of  the 
included  blocks  were  up  to  two  feet  in  diameter;  and  in  one 
enormous  mass  I  observed,  together  with  a  beautiful  assortment 
of  varieties  of  felstones  and  quartz  porphyries,  a  fragment  of 
'well  marked  granite.  It  is  worthy  of  note  that  I  nowhere 
observed  in  these  agglomerates  any  fragments  of  sedimentary 
rocks." 

This  statement  agrees  with  what  I  noticed  at  Cavan,  for  I 
found  many  displaced  blocks  of  a  brecciated  nature  containing 
angular  fragments  of  porphyries  and  banded  felsites.  The  more 
I  read  of  this  interesting  description  of  the  Victorian  rocks,  the 
more  I  was  inclined  to  link  the  Yass  series  with  them;  a  differ- 
ence arises  when  the  author  states  : — "  And  I  noted  also  one 
circumstance  worthy  of  consideration,  that  scarcely  an  instance 
was  to  be  observed  of  such  appearances  as  might  be  referred  to  the 
action    of   water    in    sorting   and    arranging  the    various    beds. 


BY    A.    J.    SIIEARSBY.  28  < 

Nowhere,  in  fact,  have  I  observed  sedimentary  strata  among  the 
fragmentary  beds  of  the  Snowy  River  porphyries."  However,  a 
footnote  on  the  same  page  reads  as  follows  : — "  Since  these  notes 
have  been  in  the  press,  I  have  examined  a  most  interesting 
series  of  sections  observable  in  traversing  the  country  from  the 
W  Tree,  near  Murendel  Hill,  eastward  to  the  Butcher's  Creek. 
I  found  here  that  the  Snowy  River  Porphyries  consist  of  beds 
over  a  thousand  feet  in  thickness,  of  the  usual  fragmental  char- 
acter, with  interbedded  sheets  of  felstone,  whose  lower  surfaces 
when  visible  are  scoriaceous  and  conformable  to  the  inequalities 
of  the  underlying  strata.  Here,  however,  for  almost  the  first 
time,  I  notice  that  some  of  the  beds  have  a  marked  conglomerate 
character,  and  nearly  all  of  them  include  numerous  fragments  of 
slates  and  sandstones  (quartzites)  of  the  character  of  the  Lower 
Silurian  of  the  district. ''(8) 

This  note  cleared  away  the  difference,  for,  as  I  mentioned 
before,  I  have  found  in  the  Yass  porphyries,  which  rest  upon  the 
Silurian  rocks,  very  many  pieces  of  shale  and  limestone  whicli 
contained  fairly  well  preserved  fossils  of  the  Silurian  period. 

The  foregoing  interesting  comparisons  strengthen  my  opinion 
as  to  the  age  of  the  main  mass  of  the  volcanic  rocks  in  the  Yass 
district,  and  I  further  believe  that  I  am  right  in  looking  upon 
them  as  part  of  the  Snowy  River  Porphyries.  Macroscopically, 
the  Yass  rocks  are  identical  with  those  of  Victoria,  and  it  would 
be  difficult  to  differentiate  between  those  belonging  to  each 
district  in  a  mixed  collection  of  rocks  from  both  localities. 

It  will  therefore  l)e  seen  that  a  detailed  study  of  the  volcanic 
rocks  of  Yass  will  be  most  interesting  and  instructive.  The 
localities  where  they  occur  are  most  accessible,  being  close  to  well 
made  roads,  a  point  in  their  favour  which  I  am  informed  is  not 
possessed  by  the  localities  in  Victoria  where  the  Snowy  Kiver 
Porphyries  abound. 

They  are  also  worth  investigation  from  a  commercial  point  of 
view,  on  account  of  the  numerous  traces  of  galena  and  copper 
which  occur  in  many  places  among  these  rocks,  and  which  so  far 
have  not  received  much  attention  at  the  hands  of  the  local 
people. 


288  FOSSILIFEROUS    TUFF,    ETC.,    AT    CAVAN. 

REFERENCE  NOTES. 

(1)  Etheridge,  R.,   Junr. — Records  of  the  Australian  Museum,  v.   1904, 

P.2SS. 

(2)  Jenkins— Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  iii.  1,  1878,  p. 76. 

(3)  Etheridge,  R,,  Junr. — Loc.  cit.  p. 289. 

(4)  Clarke,  W.  B. — Remarks  on  the  Sedimentary  Formations  of  N.S.W., 

4th  Edition,  1878,  p.  13. 
<6)  Stirling,  J. — Report  Austral.  Assoc,  for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 
Sydney,  i.,  1887,  p.  382. 

(6)  HowiTT,  A.  W. — Report  Austral,  Assoc,  for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 

Sydney,  i.  1887,  p.209. 

(7)  HowiTT,  A.  W.— Geol.  Surv.  of  Vict.,  Report  of  Progress,  1876,  p.  199. 

(8)  I  find  since  making  the  above  extracts  that  the  Lower  Silurian  rocks 

mentioned  here  are  now  considered  to  be  Ordovician. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE. 

Geological  Sketch  Map  of  Portion  of  Parish  of  Cavan,  County  of  Cowley, 
Yass,  N.S.W. 


289 


THE  RULE  OF  AGGLUTI:N^ATI0N   IN  IMMUNITY. 

By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay   Bacteriologist  to  the 

Society. 

When  certain  substances  are  introduced  into  the  body-fluids  of 
animals,  there  are  soon  produced  and  found  in  the  same  fluids 
bodies  of  an  "  anti-"  nature.  Speaking  generally,  it  may  be  said 
that  these  bodies  act  upon  the  substance  originally  introduced, 
rendering  it  unfit  to  do  harm  to  the  animal.  The  manner  in 
which  they  do  this  depends  largely  upon  the  nature  of  the  sub- 
stance or  substances  which  stimulated  their  production  or  called 
them  into  being.  An  easily  difi'usible  toxin  gives  rise  to  an  anti- 
toxin which  appears  to  neutralise  the  toxin  much  as  a  strong  base 
neutralises  a  weak  acid.  Organised  cells  are  dissolved  by  specific 
lysins,  bacteria  by  bacteriolysins,  red  blood  corpuscles  by  hsemo- 
lysins,  and  so  on.  It  is  to  the  employment  of  these  methods  of 
overcoming  the  attack  of  micro-organisms  and  their  injurious 
products  that  the  condition  of  the  animal  which  we  term  immu- 
nity is  due.  But  there  are  certain  associated  phenomena,  the 
significance  of  which  is  not  clear  and  whose  function  in  immunity 
is  not  understood.  One  of  these  is  the  agglutination  of  bacteria 
by  specific  and  even  non-specific  agglutinins.  The  formation  of 
precipitates  by  specific  precipitins  is  practically  the  same  pheno- 
menon, the  difierence  being  that  the  precipitation  occurs  in  the 
absence  of  microbic  cells. 

With  regard  to  the  mechanism  of  agglutination,  I  have  shown"^ 
that  it  could  only  be  explained  by  the  formation  of  a  precipitate 
(Kraus'  precipitate)  on  the  capsules  and  flagella  of  the  bacteria, 
and  that  it  is  really  this  precipitate  or  coating  upon  the  cells 
that  is  flocculated  or  agglutinated  by  the  salts  of  the  serum  or 
suspension.      The   bacteria   are    carried    mechanically    with    the 

*  These  Proceedings,  1900,  75. 
19 


\ 


290  THE  ROLE  OF  AGGLUTINATION  IN  IMMUNITY, 

precipitate.  I  pointed  out  that  in  conformation  with  the  known 
facts  of  precipitation,  the  agglutinated  substance  would  form  first 
on  the  flagella  on  account  of  their  relative  fineness,  and  the 
motility  of  the  microbe  would  cease  owing  to  the  coated  flagella 
being  flocculated,  i.e.,  drawn  together.  G.  de  Rossa*  finds  that 
the  flagella  are  exceedingly  sensitive  to  the  agglutinins  of  specific 
sera.  As  it  was  Kraus'  precipitate  that  was  formed  on  the 
flagella  and  capsules  of  the  bacteria,  it  is  interesting  to  note  that 
Krausf  retracts  a  former  conclusion  of  his  that  precipitins  and 
agglutinins  are  different  substances,  and  now  considers  that  they 
are  the  same.  I  also  clearly  indicated  the  role  of  salts  in  the 
phenomenon,  which  I  considered  to  be  simply  a  case  of  chemical 
flocculation  concerning  which  I  had  previously  written.l  My 
conclusions  have  been  confirmed  by  the  physical  researches  of 
Bechhold.§  Soon  after  the  publication  of  my  paper,  Joos  and 
Friedberger  contributed  papers  emphasising  the  function  of  salts. 
In  a  later  paper, jj  I  criticised  the  interpretation  of  their  investi- 
gations, and  at  the  same  time  showed  the  fallacy  of  Harrison's 
conclusions  that  the  agglutinable  substance  is  contained  in  the 
outer  membrane  of  the  microbic  cell. 

The  actual  observation  of  a  precipitate  with  the  imbedded 
bacteria  was  first  seen  by  Lowit,1i  who  was  able  to  colour  the 
precipitate  and  at  the  same  time  to  diff'erentiate  the  bacteria  in 
the  matrix  by  the  Nocht  modification  of  the  Romanowsky  stain. 
I  have  also  been  able  to  demonstrate  the  precipitate  in  much  the 
same  way.  Typhoid  bacteria,  which  had  been  grown  in  heated 
agglutinating  serum,  were  found  to  be  firmly  held  together.  The 
clumps   were   broken   up   and   washed    four  times    with    normal 


*  Centrb.  f.  Bakt.  Orig.  xxxvi.  (1904)  685  and  xxxvii,  (1904)  107. 
t  Ihid.  xxxvi.  (1904)  662  and  xxxvii.  (1904)  73. 
X  Journ.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  1898,  xvii.  117. 
§  Z.  physik.  Chem.  1904,  48,  385,  through  Journ.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  1904^ 
xxiii.  730. 

II  These  Proceedings,  1902,  66. 
IT  Centrb.  f.  Bakt.  Orig.  1903,  xxxiv.  156,  251. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  291 

saline  to  remove  the  serum,  after  which  the  suspension  was  spread 
over  cover-glasses  and  allowed  to  dry  in  the  air.  The  films  were 
stained  with  recently  prepared  Leishman  stain.  The  bacterial 
cells  were  stained  blue  and  were  enclosed  in  a  reddish-coloured 
matrix — the  agglutinated  substance. 

The  knowledge  of  the  function  of  agglutination  in  the  question 
of  immunity  appears  to  have  advanced  but  little  since  Metchnikoff 
published  his  work,  Immunitdt.*  In  it  he  decides  against  any 
important  role  being  played  by  agglutination  for  several  reasons. 
The  chief  of  these  is  that  it  does  not  appear  to  be  constantly 
associated  with  immunity.  The  agglutinating  action  of  blood 
serum  can  be  absent  in  an  actively  immunised  animal,  and 
agglutination  may  be  present  and  yet  immunity  be  absent. 
Furthermore,  the  agglutinating  power  of  the  serum  in  typhoid 
fever  does  not  increase  with  the  development  of  immunity. 
According  to  Breuer,  it  remains  constant  during  the  height  of 
the  disease  and  during  convalescence.  That  this  is  not  the  case 
is  clearly  shown  by  the  work  of  Jorgensen.  f  The  agglutinating 
power  of  the  serum  rises  to  a  maximum  and  then  falls.  It  was 
chiefly  from  these  facts  that  Metchnikoff  concluded  that  agglu- 
tination is  only  a  side  action  and  is  not  a  cause  of  immunity. 
This  was  in  opposition  to  the  views  of  Gruber  and  Durham,  who 
supposed  that  the  clumping  was  caused  by  the  swelling  of  the 
membranes  of  the  bacteria  whereby  they  were  rendered  more 
susceptible  to  the  action  of  the  bactericidal  substance. 

The  non-specificity  of  the  Gruber- Widal  reaction  may  be  raised 
against  agglutination  having  an  important  part  to  play  in 
immunity.  This  side  of  the  question  has  been  dealt  with  by 
Liidke,J  who  notes  a  peculiarity  in  the  behaviour  of  typhoid 
bacteria  towards  agglutinin.  Freshly  isolated  bacteria  do  not 
always  react  with  the  patient's  own  serum,  while  older  races 
show  a  high  degree  of  sensitiveness.     This  has  been  noted  by 


*  Handb.  d.  Hygiene  (Weyl).  Lief.32.  Jena,  1897. 

t  Centrb.  f.  Bakt.  Orig.  xxxviii.  (1905),  475,  566. 

X  Centrb.  f.  Bakt.  Orig.  1905,  xxxviii.  216. 


292  THE  ROLE  OF  AGGLUTINATION  IN   IMMUNITY, 

Stern,  who  ascribed  it  to  the  production  of  the  agglutinable 
substance  being  temporarily  in  abeyance.  Walker  found  the 
same  loss  of  agglutinating  power  in  races  recently  isolated  from 
stools  and  grown  in  a  mixture  of  immune  serum  and  bouillon. 
This  was  said  to  have  been  caused  by  a  weakening  of  the  receptors 
of  the  bacteria  through  contact  with  the  specific  agglutinin. 
Bail  noted  the  insensibility  of  bacteria  introduced  into  the  peri- 
toneum, and  explained  it  as  being  due  not  to  the  production  of  a 
non-agglutinable  race  but  to  a  linking  of  the  agglutinin-seizing 
receptors  of  the  bacteria  with  the  byproducts  [Abbauproducte] 
of  the  agglutinin,  which  he  designated  as  agglutinophores.  This 
insensibility  was  lost  in  the  first  subculture.  Kirstein  traces 
the  indifference  to  agglutinin  to  the  loss  of  the  mobile,  aggluti- 
nophore  group  of  the  agglutinin  molecule. 

The  insensibility  of  bacteria  grown  in  the  presence  of  agglutinin 
to  the  further  action  of  agglutinin  might  be  better  explained 
than  by  the  invention  of  new  terms  by  considering  the  mechanism 
of  ao-glutination.  The  ao^fdutinable  substance  which  is  formed 
by  the  bacterial  protoplasm  saturates  the  cell  and  exudes  through 
the  membranes.  If  the  agglutinin  is  more  diffusible  than  the 
agglutinable  substance,  as  it  very  probably  is,  it  will  diffuse  into 
the  membranes  of  the  developing  cell  before  the  agglutinable 
substance  can  diffuse  out,  and  the  reaction  will  take  place  in  or 
within  the  membrane.  The  precipitate  formed  in  this  place  will 
undoubtedly  hinder  the  further  diffusion  of  the  agglutinable  sub- 
stance, so  that  the  bacteria  will  be  incapable  of  reacting  to  more 
agglutinin,  and  the  Gruber-Widal  reaction  will  fail.  When, 
however,  these  bacteria  are  cultivated  in  the  absence  of  agglutinin, 
the  diffusion-hindering  layer  of  agglutinated  substance  will,  by 
the  increase  of  the  cells,  become  so  attenuated  that  the  agglutin- 
able substance  will  once  more  diffuse  out  and  the  reaction  will 
be  obtained. 

In  a  previous  paper*  I  discussed,  inter  alia,  the  mechanical 
swallowing  or  englobing  of  microbes  by  the  mobile  leucocytes, 

*  This  volume,  cnitca  p.lSS. 


BY    H.    GREIG    SMITH.  293 

'  and  suggested  that  the  reason  why  pathogenic  bacteria  are  not 
so  readily  phagocytosed  as  non -pathogenic  microbes  may  be  that, 
in  the  absence  of  specific  cytases,  there  is  much  the  same  physical 
relationship  between  the  surface  of  the  bacterium  and  the 
phagocyte  as  there  is  between  a  drop  of  oil  and  water.  A  better 
illustration  is,  perhaps,  the  relation  between  a  particle  of  glass 
and  a  drop  of  chloroform  floating  in  water.  The  glass  is  not 
englobed  by  the  chloroform.  If,  however,  the  glass  is  coated 
with  a  covering  of  shellac,  it  is  quickly  englobed.  The  coated 
particle  of  glass  appears  to  be  analogous  to  the  condition  of 
bacteria  which  have  been  agglutinated  with  active  serum,  for  as 
the  clumped  cells  regain  their  motility  we  can  infer  that  the  pre- 
cipitate coating  the  bacteria  is  slowly  soluble, t  and  is  on  this 
account  capable  of  being  absorbed  by  the  phagocytes.  By  thus 
covering  or  preparing  the  bacteria,  agglutination  may  play  a 
much  more  active  part  in  immunity  than  is  generally  supposed. 

At  the  same  time  I  suggested  the  function  of  precipitins. 
These  are  formed  in  the  body-fluids  of  animals  when  foreign 
substances,  such  as  soluble  albuminoids,  are  introduced.  When 
added  to  solutions  of  the  same  albuminoids,  they  cause  the 
formation  of  precipitates.  We  must  assume  that  the  alien  sub- 
stance is  not  wanted  in  the  body-fluids  of  the  inoculated  animal 
and  that  it  will  endeavour  to  get  rid  of  it.  The  method  adopted 
by  the  animal  is  by  the  production  of  specific  precipitins  which, 
in  conjunction  with  the  salts  of  the  serum,  coagulate  the  foreign 
albuminoid  or  other  substance.  The  precipitated  particles  are 
englobed   by  the  phagocytes   like   any  other  digestible   particle 


t  This  was  the  line  of  thought,  but  it  may  be  wrong.  The  precipitate 
formed  by  the  union  or  interaction  of  the  albuminoid  and  its  specific  pre- 
cipitin is  soluble  in  an  excess  of  the  albuminoid  (Michaelis,  Biochem.  Centrb. 
iii.  [April,  19051  693).  The  reassumption  of  motility  is,  therefore,  probably 
due  to  the  exudation  of  an  excess  of  agglutinable  substance  from  the  bac- 
teria. This  would  only  occur  when  all  the  agglutinin  present  had  been  fixed 
or  precipitated. 


294  THE  ROLE  OF  AGGLUTINATION  IN  LMMUNITY, 

and  subsequently  dissolved.*  It  is  probable  that  without  this 
coagulation  and  consequent  inception  by  the  phagoc3^tes,  the 
albuminoid  could  not,  on  account  of  its  non-diffusibility,  be  so 
speedily  removed. 

It  promised  to  be  an  easy  matter  to  put  these  ideas  regarding 
the  function  of  agglutination  and  precipitation  to  the  test.  If 
normal  bacteria  such  as  Bad.  typhi  are  not  engulfed  by  the 
mobile  phagocytes  and  agglutinated  typhoid  bacteria  are  englobed, 
then  the  matter  is  proved.  And  since  agglutination  is  but  a 
special  case  of  precipitation,  it  follows  that  the  function  of 
agglutination  is  also  the  function  of  precipitation. 

The  typhoid  bacterium  is  one  of  the  weaker  microbes,  and  is 
attacked  by  the  immunity  bodies  of  normal  blood.  These  com- 
prise the  bactericidal,  the  bacterioWtic  and  the  opsonic  bodies. 
The  first  two  of  these  attack  the  bacteria  in  the  blood  and  tissue 
fluids,  and  the  effect  is  shown  by  a  loss  of  staining  power  and  by 
a  swelling,  alteration,  or  disappearance  of  the  bacterial  proto- 
plasm. The  opsonic  bodies  or  opsonins  also  act  in  the  blood,  etc., 
but  the  effect  is  made  manifest  by  phagocytosis.  The  opsonic 
effect  would  therefore  interfere  with  the  demonstration  of  what 
I  may  call  the  agglutinative  effect,  since,  if  my  contention  is 
correct,  both  effects  are  demonstrated  in  the  same  manner,  viz  , 
by  phagocytosis.  On  this  account  the  properties  of  the  opsonins 
require  consideration. 

The  opsonins  occur  in  the  body-fluids  of  normal  animals  in 
which  they  were  discovered  by  Wright  and  Douglas,  f  They  are 
thermolabile,  being  destroyed  when  exposed  for  ten  minutes  or 
longer    at    60*.       Bulloch    and    Atkinl;    found    that    they   were 

'Since  reading  that  paper  to  the  Society  in  April,  I  find  that  Michaelis 
published  a  survey  of  the  work  of  himself  and  others  upon  the  precipitins  in 
the  second  April  part  of  the  Biochemisches  Centralblatt.  He  brings  forward 
or  accepts  this  idea  as  the  physiological  signification  of  the  precipitins,  and 
compares  it  to  the  increase  in  the  phagocytic  power  of  the  leucocytes  towards 
streptococci  which  have  been  treated  with  their  antibodies,  as  had  been 
shown  by  Neufeld  and  Kimpau(n).  I  have  not  been  able  to  see  the  paper  of 
these  authors  or  an  abstract  of  it,  but  from  Michaelis'  reference  it  appears 
probable  that  the  antibodies  would  include  the  opsonins  of  Wright  and 
Douglas. 

t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Ixxii.  (1903),  357,  and  Ixxiii.  (1904),  128. 
:;:  Ibid.  Ixxiv.  (1904),  504. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  295 

destroyed  by  an  exposure  for  3  minutes  at  60°  and  for  60  minutes 
at  55°.  The  experiments  were  chiefly  made  upon  staphylococci, 
but  other  bacteria  responded  to  the  action,  showing  that  in  all 
probability  the  opsonins  exercise  their  power  upon  all  bacteria. 
The  opsonin  is  supposed  to  fix  itself  upon  the  bacterium  and  so 
prepare  or  render  it  fit  for  absorption  by  the  phagocytes.  When 
so  fixed,  the  opsonin  is  not  destroyed  by  exposure  to  temperatures 
for  times  that  would  destroy  the  free  body,  such  as  60°  for  5 
hours. 

It  is  obvious  that  before  testing  the  influence  of  agglutination 
upon  phagocytosis,  it  would  be  necessary  to  destroy  the  opsonins, 
say  by  exposing  serum  containing  agglutinin  for  15  minutes  to 
60°.  Our  knowledge  with  regard  to  the  effect  of  this  exposure 
upon  opsonin  is  certain,  but  we  are  not  so  decided  about  the 
effect  upon  the  specific  agglutinins.  Duclaux"^  says  that  the 
activity  of  agglutinating  serum  increases  up  to  55°  and  even  60° 
at  which  it  persists  but  becomes  enfeebled,  agglutination  becoming 
less  sharp  and  less  prompt.  Weilf  found  that  while  an  exposure 
for  5  minutes  at  80°  destroyed  the  agglutinable  substance  on 
typhoid  bacteria,  it  did  not  destroy  the  agglutinating  substance  in 
the  serum.  Joos|  and,  later,  Eisenberg  and  Volk,§  distinguish 
between  thermostable  and  thermolabile  agglutinins.  Scheller|| 
denies  the  existence  of  two  kinds  of  agglutinin,  as  he  found  that 
horse  serum,  which  contains  quantities  of  typhoid  agglutinin, 
lost  but  small  traces  of  its  power  when  heated  at  60°-62°,  and 
that  rabbit  typhoid  serum  lost  little  or  none  of  its  power  after  an 
exposure  for  two  hours  at  60°-62°.  According  to  Dreyer,1I  the 
immune  serum  of  animals  treated  with  Bad.  coli  commune  loses 
half  of  its  agglutinating  power  when  heated  for  30  minutes  at 
65°,  and  when  the  agglutination  is  observed  at  the  end  of  two 
hours.  When  examined  at  the  end  of  20  hours,  there  is  no  loss. 
The  apparent  loss  is  therefore  caused  by  a  slowing  of  the  reaction. 

*  Microbiologie,  iii.  711. 

+  Centr.  f.  Bakt.  Orig.  xxxvi.  084. 

X  Zeit.  f.  Hygiene,  xxxvi.  422. 

§  Zeit.  f.  Hygiene,  xl.  155. 

II  Centr.  f.  Bakt,  Orig.  xxxvi.  694. 

H  Brit.  Med.  Journ.  10th  Sept.  1904,  566. 


296  THE  ROLE  OF  AGGLUTINATION  IN   IMMUNITY, 

With  the  exception  of  perhaps  Duclaux,  all  these  authorities 
experimented  with  the  serum  of  animals  that  were  naturally 
immune  or  had  been  immunised  with  cultures  of  typhoid  bacteria. 
Although  human  serum  was  not  employed,  the  results  point  to 
the  agglutinin  of  human  serum  being  able  to  withstand  in  great 
part  or  entirely  an  exposure  to  60°  for  15  minutes,  and  this  would 
destroy  all  opsonins. 

Technique. — In  freeing  the  leucocytes  from  blood  plasma,  the 
method  of  Wright  and  Douglas  was  followed.  The  blood  was 
drawn  off  into  an  equal  volume  of  1%  citrate  of  soda  contained  in 
bent  capsules  and  centrifuged.  The  deposit  was  transferred  into 
ordinary  centrifuge  tubes  containing  about  20  volumes  of  normal 
saline.  The  corpuscles  were  uniforml}^  distributed  by  blowing 
air  through  the  suspension,  the  capillary  pipette  being  used  for 
the  purpose.  After  centrifuging,  the  supernatant  liquid  was 
removed  and  replaced  by  more  normal  saline.  The  corpuscles 
were  in  this  manner  washed  four  times  with  normal  saline.  The 
bacteria  were  grown  upon  nutrient  agar  for  24  hours  at  37°  and 
suspended  in  normal  saline.  After  being  agglutinated,  they  were 
washed  twice  with  normal  saline  and  distributed  in  as  much 
normal  saline  as  sufficed  to  make  an  opalescent  fluid.  The  clumps 
were  broken  up  and  distributed  by  passing  the  suspensions  in 
and  out  of  the  capillary  pipette.  Equal  volumes  of  the  corpuscular 
and  bacterial  suspensions  were  mixed  upon  a  glass  slide,  and  the 
mixture  was  allowed  to  run  into  a  capillar}^  tube  and  sealed,  or  it 
was  covered  with  a  cover-glass  and  placed  in  a  moist  chamber. 
The  tests  were  incubated  at  37°  for  30  minutes.  Films  were 
prepared  and  coloured  by  the  Leishman  stain. 

The  Investigation. 
Washed  leucocytes   and   normal    typhoid   bacteria. — The    films 
showed  a  complete  absence  of  phagocytosis. 

Washed  leucocytes  with  agglutinated  aud  normal  bacteria. — The 
active  serum  agglutinated  in  ratios  of  1:75  and  under. 

Normal  bacteria No  phagocytosis. 

Agglutinated  bacteria.     1:75      Phagocytosis 

,,  ,,  1 :  2o      ...         ...         ...  j> 


BY    R,    GREIG    SMITH. 


297 


Washed  leucocytes  ivith  bacteria  aggJutinatedhy  heated  serum. — 
This  was  the  same  serum  as  in  the  previous  experiment. 

Normal  bacteria      No  phagocytosis. 

Bacteria  treated  with  heated  active  serum — 

15'  at  60".     1  :  75.     ...     Phagocytosis. 
30' at  65 ^     1:25.       .. 

A  week  later,  a  fresh  supply  of  active  serum  was  obtained  from 
the  same  patient,  and  it  was  found  that  the  limiting  ratio  had 
risen  from  1:75  to  1:250.  Upon  heating  the  serum,  much  of  the 
agglutinating  power  disappeared  and  the  limit  became  1 :45. 

Bacteria  treated  with  heated  active  serum  — 

15' at  60°.     1:25.      ...     Phagocytosis. 
1:75.     ... 
The  experiment  was  made  in  triplicate  with  identical  results. 

Washed  leucocytes  with  other  races  of  Bact.  tyi^hi.  —  Hitherto  the 
race  of  Bact.  tyj?hi  that  had  been  used  was  marked  "Newcastle," 
which  along  with  othets  marked  "Pasteur  Institute"  and  "Jenner 
Institute  of  Preventive  Medicine,"  had  been  obtained  from  Dr. 
Tidswell,  of  the  Board  of  Health,  Sydney.  The  "Newcastle" 
race  had  been  employed  because  it  appeared  to  be  least  affected 
by  the  immune  bodies  in  normal  serum.  But  as  the  race  of 
bacterium  might  influence  the  phagocytic  effect,  the  other  races 
were  tested.  In  this  and  all  future  experiments,  heating  means 
an  exposure  to  60°  for  15  minutes. 


Experiment  1,  18- v. -05. 

Race  of  Bacterium. 

Pasteur  Institute. 

Jenner  Institute. 

... 

Control  (no  serum)     

No  phagocytosis. 

No  phagocytosis. 

Serum  not  heated.     1 :  75     

Phagocytosis. 

Phagocytosis. 

Serum  heated.            1:75     

^, 

5J 

Experiment  2,  22-V.-05. 

Control  (no  serum)     

No  phagocytosis. 

No  phagocytosis. 

Serum  heated — 1  :  75. 

supernatant    suspension   after   1st 

centrifuging         Phagocytosis. 

Phagocytosis. 

supernatant  suspension  after  2nd 

centrifuging        |             ,, 

5? 

deposit          

>> 

,, 

Experiments,  22-V.-05. 

Normal  serum  (R.G.S.)  1:25;  bac- 

teria washed  twice Phagocytosis. 

The  same  with  heated  serum            ...  No  phagocytosis. 

298  THE  ROLE  OF  AGGLUTINATION  IN  IMMUNITY, 

The  experiments  showed  that  the  race  of  bacterium  had  no 
influence:  all  races  are  phagocytosed   after   agglutination.      In 
washing  the  agglutinated  bacteria,  there  are  always  a  number  of 
cells  that  remain  suspended  in  the  normal  saline  after  centrifuging 
in  the  hand-centrifuge  (h?ematocrit,  Beck).     They  are  undoubtedly 
free  cells  broken  away  from  the  clumps,  and  though  they  refuse 
to  sediment  readily,  they  are  still  covered  with  the  agglutinated 
substance.     A  similar  refusal  to  sediment  could  be  obtained  by 
triturating  a  flocculated  precipitate  with  a  saline  solution  of  the 
same  densit}'^  and  composition  as  that  in  which  the  flocculation 
was  induced.     Experiment  3  shows  the  effect  of  the  opsonins  of 
normal  serum  upon  the  bacteria  and  their  destruction  by  heat. 

The  confirmation   of  previous   results. — A    small   quantity  of 
active  serum  was  obtained  from  a  fresh  case,  that  of  a  boy  who 
had  been  ill  for  nine  or  ten  days.     The  limit  of  agglutination 
was  1  :  100;  the  tubes  being  maintained  at  37°  for  30  minutes. 
After  being  heated  at  60°  for  15  minutes,  the  limit  of  aggluti- 
nation had   sunk   to    1:10.       The   ratio   1:12-5    was   doubtful, 
and  ratios  of  1  to  20,  33,  50  and   100  showed  no  agglutination. 
The  tubes  containing   the   tests  were  gently  centrifuged   (2000 
revolutions  per  minute  for  three  minutes)  and  a  sedimentation 
was  noted  in  all  of  those   containing    the  heated   serum.     The 
precipitate  became  smaller  and  smaller  as  the  dilution  became 
greater.     This  behaviour  is  in   sharp  distinction  to  that  of  the 
unheated    serum,    which,    under  the    same    treatment,   shows    a 
sedimentation    in   those   tubes  only  that  exhibit  agglutination. 
The    same    phenomenon    was    observed    in     the    active    serum 
previously  examined.      It  would  appear  that  Dreyer's  contention 
is  correct  and  that  centrifuging  accelerated  the  reaction  which 
had  been  slowed  by  the  exposure  to  60°. 

In   the  following   experiment   the  bacteria,   agglutinated    by 
unheated  serum  in  a  dilution  of  1  :  100,  were  tested  against  those 
agglutinated  by  the  heated  serum  of  which  all  the  precipitates 
were  collected  and  washed. 

Serum  unheated.     1:100..  ...         ...         ...     Phagocytosis. 

Serum  heated  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  , , 

Control  (no  serum)...         ...  ..         ...         ...     No  phagocytosis. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  299 

Two  very  small  quantities  (lOc.mm.)  of  active  sera  obtained 
from  the  Board  of  Health  laboratory  were  heated  and  used  to 
agglutinate  suspensions  of  bacteria.  Phagocytosis  was  pro- 
nounced in  both  cases. 

The  jjhagocytosis  of  bacteria  groivn  in  active  serum. — A  small 
spindle-shaped  capsule  which  had  been  partly  filled  with  the 
serum  of  the  first  case  was  infected  with  Bact.  typhi  and  incubated 
for  four  days  at  37°.  At  the  time  of  infection  the  serum 
was  10  days  old.  Another  capsule  partly  filled  with  serum 
from  the  second  case  was  heated  at  60°  for  15  minutes  and  sub- 
sequently infected.  This  was  done  upon  the  day  that  it  was 
obtained.  The  two  capsules  were  incubated  together,  and  in 
both  the  bacteria  grew  in  clumps  or  colonies  at  the  surface  of 
the  air-bubbles  and  in  the  capillary  limbs  of  the  capsules.  After 
removal  from  the  capsules,  the  clumps  were  washed  four  times 
with  normal  saline.  They  broke  up  with  difficulty  into  smaller 
clumps  and  sedimented  rapidly  when  centrifuged.  Chains  of 
swollen,  irregularly  staining  cells  were  noted  in  the  clumps  grown 
in  the  unheated  serum,  while  in  the  heated  serum  the  clumps 
consisted  of  bacteria  which  although  not  swollen  yet  stained 
somewhat  irregularly. 

Bacteria  grown  in  unheated  serum  of  first  case Phagocytosis. 

Bacteria  grown  in  heated  serum  of  second  case Phagocytosis. 

In  all  the  previous  experiments  the  microbes  appeared  generally 
in  the  films  as  isolated  cells  or  in  groups  of  a  few  individuals, 
while  in  this  experiment  they  were  chiefly  in  large  clumps  around 
which  the  poly  nuclear  leucocytes  had  gathered.  It  might  be 
reasoned  that  because  some  investigators  failed  to  obtain  agglu- 
tination with  bacteria  grown  in  immune  and  therefore  agglu- 
tinating serum,  the  agglutinated  substance  is  not  formed  on  the 
microbic  cells.  Had  such  been  the  case,  agglutination  would 
undoubtedly  have  played  a  very  minor  part  in  immunity.  But 
it  is  not  the  case,  for  not  only  were  clumps  obtained  in  unheated 
as  well  as  heated  serum,  but  the  cells  grown  in  the  sera  were 
phagocytosed. 


300  the  role  of  agglutination  in  immunity, 

The  So-called  Chemical  Agglutination. 

Although  chemical  agglutination,  i.e.,  clumping  b}^  means  of 
definite  chemical  substances,  such  as  vesuvin,  formaldehyde,  can 
have  little,  if  any,  bearing  upon  immunity,  yet  as  the  subject  was 
interesting,  experiments  were  made  to  determine  the  behaviour 
of  washed  leucocytes  towards  bacteria  so  agglutinated.  I  have 
already^  pointed  out  that  many  of  the  chemical  agglutinants 
produce  a  precipitate  when  added  to  nutrient  bouillon,  and  that 
the  agglutination  is  probably  due  to  the  flocculation  of  this  pre- 
cipitate which  has  formed  upon  the  surface  of  the  cells.  Since  it 
occurs  with  bouillon,  it  may  also  occur  with  the  traces  of  bouillon 
adhering  to  the  bacteria  which  have  been  grown  upon  nutrient 
agar,  so  that  the  chemical  agglutination  of  bacteria  suspended  in 
normal  saline  may  be  caused  by  the  formation  of  the  precipitate 
in  an  exceedingly  thin  film  upon  the  bacteria  and  the  subsequent 
flocculation  of  the  films. 

In  the  following  experiments  cells  from  a  48  hours'  nutrient 
agar  culture  of  the  Jenner  Institute  race  were  suspended  in  normal 
saline  and  filtered  through  paper.  Quantities  were  pipetted 
into  small  test-tubes,  and  to  each  an  equal  volume  of  a  solution 
of  the  chemical  agglutinating  substance  was  added.  Agglutina- 
tion or  precipitation  was  decided  with  formalin,  alcohol  and 
vesuvin,  but  not  with  the  others.  The  tubes  were  centrifuged 
and  the  sediment  washed  with  and  finally  suspended  in  normal 
saline. 


Equal  volumes  of  suspension  of  Bact.  typhi  in  pi.orv^^T-f^c,;o 

normal  saline  and  ^    '' 


Vesuvin,  0*1%  .        Negative. 

Mercuric  chloride,  0-07%      ;  ,, 

Saffranin,  0-1%  i  „ 

Formalin  (commercial)         ...          ...  ..         ...         ...  ,, 

Alcohol  (absolute)     ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  ,, 

Hydrochloric  acid  (0-5  mgrm.  HCl  to  1  c.c.   of  suspen- 
sion    ,, 

Control  1  ,, 


These  Proceedings,  1900,  82. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH. 


301 


A  repetition  of   the   experiment  with  a  slight  variation  wi 
made  and  similar  results  were  obtained. 


Yesuvin 

precipitate     

Negative. 

Mercuric  chloride        

no  agglut 

Saffranin 

slight  microsc.  agglut. 

>> 

FormaUn           

precipitate     

)  t 

Alcohol 

»> 

Phosphoric  acid  (0-33  mgrm.  H3PO4 

to  1  c.c.  of  suspension)     

microsc.  agglut. 

)) 

Control 

>» 

These  experiments  show  that  bacteria  when  treated  with  the 
so-called  chemical  agglutinating  agents  are  not  capable  of  being 
absorbed  by  the  phagocytes. 

The  conclusions  to  which  this  research  has  led  are  as  follows: — 

1.  Normal  typhoid  bacteria  are  incapable  of  being  absorbed  by 
the  leucocytes  when  these  have  been  freed  from  adhering  serum. 

2.  Typhoid  bacteria,  when  treated  with  active  agglutinating 
serum  which  has  been  heated  to  destroy  the  opsonins,  are  agglu- 
tinated and  are  then  englobed  by  the  leucocytes. 

3.  Typhoid  bacteria  which  have  been  grown  in  agglutinating 
serum,  heated  or  not  heated,  are  also  absorbed. 

4.  While  active  agglutinating  serum  prepares  the  microbes  for 
inception  by  the  phagocytes,  the  so-called  chemical  agglutinating 
substances  do  not  possess  this  property. 

5.  The  function  of  agglutinin  is,  therefore,  to  coat  the  bacteria 
with  a  precipitate  which  is  positively  chemiotactic  towards  the 
leucocytes,  and  thus,  by  facilitating  the  absorption  of  the  microbes, 
agglutination  plays  an  active  part  in  immunity. 


302 


ON"  DIMORPHISM  IN  THE  FEMALE  OF  ISCHXURA 
HETEROSTICTA,  BURM. 

By  R.  J.  TiLLYARD,  B.A. 

The  pretty  little  dragonfly,  Iscluiura  heterosticta,  belongs  to  the 
family  Agrionidce,  of  which  there  are  about  thirty  known  species 
in  Australia.  Of  these,  six  belong  to  the  genus  Ischnura.  They 
are  remarkable  for  their  brilliant  colours  and  small  size.  Very 
little  is  known  of  their  habits,  owing  to  the  difficulty  of  collect- 
ing them.  /.  heterosticta  is  our  largest  species;  the  male,  being 
very  conspicuous,  is  often  collected  where  the  duller  female  is 
overlooked.  It  is  common  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Sydney,  and 
extends  southwards  across  Victoria  to  South  Australia,  while 
northwards  it  is  plentiful  as  far  as  Brisbane,  and  probably  has 
an  extended  range  further  up  the  coast.  It  flies  from  October 
to  March. 

While  collecting  at  Cook's  River  in  February  last,  I  found  a 
remarkable  new  female  form  of  this  species.  An  hour's  hunting 
had  yielded  about  a  dozen  beautifully  coloured  insects  which 
appeared  to  be  males,  with  half  a  dozen  females  of  the  ordinary 
dull  blackish  type.  On  examination,  however,  it  was  found  that^ 
with  the  exception  of  three,  all  the  supposed  males  were  in 
reality  females;  yet  so  closely  did  they  resemble  the  male  in  form 
and  colouring  that  the  fact  might  easily  have  been  overlooked. 

The  male  differs  from  the  typical  female  in  having  the  sides  of 
the  thorax,  the  first  two  and  last  two  segments  of  the  abdomen 
brilliantly  coloured  with  rich  blue.  The  female  has  no  blue 
markings,  and  the  abdomen  is  of  a  uniform  dull  fuscous,  approach- 
ing black.     The  abdomen  of  the  male  is  very  slender,  with  the 


BY    R.    J.    TILLYARD. 


303 


tip  somewhat  clubbed,  that  of  the  female  stouter  and  practically 
cylindrical  throughout.  The  new  form  of  the  female  is  interme- 
diate in  shape  between  the  two,  the  abdomen  being  thicker  than 
in  the  male,  but  with  the  tip  distinctly  enlarged.  In  colouring  it 
almost  exactly  resembles  the  male,  and  bears  not  the  slightest 
resemblance  to  the  typical  female.  Like  the  latter,  however,  it 
possesses  the  pale  pterostigma  on  the  forewings,  whereas  in  the 
male  this  is  black. 

The  remarkable  difference  between  the  two  forms  of  female  is 
best  shown  by  the  tabular  description  which  follows.  Forma  A 
denotes  the  typical  female,  Forma  B  the  new  form  : — 


Forma  A. 

Wings  as  in  ^  except  ptero- 
stigma of  forewings,  pale  olive- 
brown. 

H  e  a  d. — Epicranium  black, 
with  a  transverse  band  of  dull 
olive  in  front  reaching  to  the 
eyes.  Eyes  black,  with  a  small 
round  olive  spot  at  the  back  of 
each.  Fost-dypeiis  black.  Ante- 
clyj)eus  dull  olive.  Lahrimi 
black.  Labium  and  lower 
mouth  parts  pale  yellowish-grey. 


T  h  o  r  a  x. — Prothorax  black, 
with  a  narrow  olive  collar. 
Thorax  black  above,  a  yellowish- 
brown  or  olive-brown  stripe  on 
each  shoulder.  Sides  greyish; 
underside  pale  greyish. 


Legs  black. 


Forma  B. 
Wiyigs  as  in  A. 


H  e  a  d. — Epicranium  black, 
with  a  transverse  band  of  bright 
bluish-green  in  front,  reaching 
to  the  eyes.  Eyes  black,  with 
a  small  round  spot  of  brilliant 
blue  at  the  back  of  each.  Post- 
clypeus  black.  Ante-clypeus 
blue,  separated  from  labrum  by 
a  black  suture.  Labrum  light 
blue.  Labium,  etc.,  pale  yel- 
lowish-grey. 

Thorax. — Prothorax  bronze- 
black,  with  a  narrow  blue  collar. 
Thorax  deep  bronze-black  above, 
a  narrow  stripe  of  brilliant  blue 
on  each  shoulder  (in  some  speci- 
mens this  stripe  is  almost  obso- 
lete). Sides  brilliant  blue; 
underside  pale  greyish. 

Legs  black. 


304:  DIMORPHISM  IN  FEMALE  OF  ISCIiyUJiA   IIETEROSTICTA 


Forma  A. 
Abdomen. — Shape    stouter 
than  in  ^,  cylindrical. 


Colour  dull  black  or  fuscous; 
in  some  specimens  there  is  a 
tinge  of  bronze,  in  others,  pro- 
bably the  most  mature,  a  slight 
covering  of  powdery  greyish 
bloom.  Segments  8  and  9  paler, 
of  a  brownish-bronze.  Under- 
side greyish. 


FOKMA   B. 

Abdomen. — Shape  slightly 
stouter  than  in  (J,  but  not  so 
stout  as  in  A;  the  first  two 
segments  very  slightly  enlarged; 
segments  8  and  9  also  some- 
what enlarged,  as  in  $. 

Colour. — Segment  1  blue;  2 
blue  with  a  dorsal  spot  of  deep 
bionze  in  the  form  of  an  up- 
turned goblet;  in  some  speci- 
mens this  s|)ot  exten'ls  over  the 
whole  dorsal  surface  of  2;  3-7 
deep  bronze;  8  bright  blue;  9 
bright  blue,  with  a  deep  trans- 
verse black  band  in  the  suture; 
10  black.  Underside  dull 
greyish. 
Appendages  very  small,  rather  Appendages  as  in  A. 

blunt,  separated,  black. 

Forma  B  of  the  9  differs  from  the  male  as  follows  : — 
The  transverse  epicranial  band  of  bluish-green  in  Forma  B  is 
replaced  by  one  of  brilliant  blue  in  the  $.  Abdomen  more 
cylindrical,  slightly  stouter  than  in  $.  The  appendages  of 
course  differ  as  usual  in  the  sexes.  In  the  wings  the  only 
difiference  is  a  generic  characteristic,  viz.,  tlie  pterostigma  of  the 
forewings  of  the  ^  is  black,  while  in  both  forms  of  the  9  it  is 
olive-brown. 

It  is  difficult  to  account  for  the  existence  of  Form  B.  We 
know  that  the  genus  Ischnura  exhibits  in  some  of  its  species  a 
variation  of  colouring  in  the  9,  for  an  American  species*  has 
been  described  having  a  typical  green  9  and  an  orange  form  also. 
This,    however,    appears   to   be  merely   a   variety   in    which  the 


Kellicott,  "  Dragonfiies  of  Ohio,"  p. 48,  Ischnura  vertical^,  Say. 


BY    R.    J.    TILLYARD.  305 

ground  colour  has  been  modified  ;  whereas  in  the  case  of  /. 
heterosticta  the  9  Form  B  imitates  the  (J  almost  completely.* 

The  only  possible  explanation  seems  to  be  as  follows  : — The 
genus  Ischnura  contains,  of  all  the  Agi'ioriidce,  some  of  the  most 
fragile  and  defenceless  insects.  Their  powers  of  flight  are 
usually  confined  to  skimming  from  reed  to  reed  over  the' surface 
of  the  water,  rarely  more  than  an  inch  or  two  above  it,  or  hover- 
ing in  the  sun  for  a  short  period.  Hence  they  fall  an  easy  prey 
to  the  more  rapacious  species  that  roam  over  the  ponds  and 
rivers.  It  seems  probable  that  the  second  form  of  9  may  in 
some  manner  help  to  prevent  the  extermination  of  the  species  by 
deceiving  its  enemies.  For  the  female,  having  a  more  robust 
abdomen  than  the  male,  would  appear  a  far  more  preferable  and 
palatable  morsel,  so  that  the  species  might  easily  be  threatened 
with  extinction  by  the  destruction  of  the  ova-laden  females. 
The  second  form  of  the  female  might  be  overlooked  owing  to  its 
difference  of  colour,  and  thus  escape  destruction. 

Now  /.  heterosticta  is  remarkable  in  being  a  larger  and  more 
active  insect  than  the  other  species  of  the  genus.  The  develop- 
ment of  the  two  forms  may  therefore,  in  the  more  robust  species, 
have  reached  beyond  a  mere  change  of  ground  colour  and  involved 
a  change  in  the  shape  of  the  abdomen  also.  It  is  at  any  rate 
remarkable  that  the  change  in  this  case  is  one  of  almost  com- 
plete mimicry  of  the  male,  suggesting  that  the  male  is  regarded 
as  an  unpalatable  and  worthless  capture  by  its  enemies  in  com- 
parison with  the  fat  and  well-favoured  female.  It  is  also  worthy 
of  note  that  so  far  no  second  form  of  the  female  has  yet  been 
found  in  any  other  Australian  species  of  Ischnura.  The  small 
size  of  most  of  the  other  species  is  perhaps  a  sutHcient  protection 
against  their  enemies. 

*  See  also  "  Entomologist,"  Vol.xxxvii.  p. 252,  where  is  described  a  form 
of  the  $  of  Ischnura  elegans,  in  which  the  ordinary  blue  parts  are  replaced 
by  dull  olive.  This,  however,  appears  to  be  only  a  local  variety.  It  is 
interesting  to  note  that  the  writer,  F.  W.  Campion,  considers  it  a  reversion 
to  an  ancestral  type. — R.  J.  T. 
20 


306  DIMORPHISM  IN  FEMALE  OF  ISCHXURA  HETEROSTICTA. 

One  of  two  things,  then,  seems  to  have  happened.  Either, 
firstly,  Form  A  is  the  original  specific  female,  in  which  case  Form 
B  may  have  been  evolved  as  a  protective  form,  mimicking  the 
males  because  of  the  latter's  immunity  from  destruction;  or, 
secondly,  Form  B,  resembling  the  male  so  remarkably,  was  the 
original  specific  female,  in  which  case  Form  A  may  have  developed 
its  sombre  colouring  as  a  protective  garb  for  the  preservation  of 
the  species,  the  typical  female  being  particularly  liable  to  destruc- 
tion from  its  brilliant  colouring.  We  must  then  suppose  that 
the  male,  being  less  palatable  and  attractive,  had  no  need  of  a 
protective  guise,  and  therefore  remained  constant  in  form  and 
colouring.  If  the  second  supposition  be  correct,  we  should  expect 
the  protected  form  of  the  female  to  become  more  abundant  and 
more  fertile  than  the  unprotected  form.  This  is  at  present  the 
case,  Form  A  being  by  far  the  more  abundant,  and  the  stouter 
and  more  developed  abdomen  indicating  greater  fecundity. 

As  regards  the  distribution  of  the  two  forms,  Form  A  occurs 
wherever  the  male  insect  has  been  taken.  Form  B  was  found  to 
be  fairly  common  at  Cook's  River  on  my  first  visit  in  February 
last,  but  a  second  visit  only  yielded  one  specimen,  while  Form  A 
was  still  very  abundant.  Form  B  also  occurs  sparingly  at 
Mittagong,  and  will  no  doubt  be  found  in  many  other  localities. 
It  is  most  difficult  to  distinguish  it  from  the  male  except  by 
careful  examination,  and  hence  the  fact  that  it  has  been  so  long 
entirely  overlooked. 


307 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Tillyard  exhibited  mounted  and  spirit  specimens  of  the 
sexes  of  Ischnnra  hete^'osticta,  Burm.  [Fam.  Agrionidce\,  treated 
of  in  his  paper. 

Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  (1)  some  coloured  drawings  of  Port 
Jackson  plants  of  considerable  historical  interest.  They  were 
executed  by  J.  W.  Lewin  during  the  period  1805-1808,  for 
Governor  and  Mrs.  King,  and  some  years  later  were  examined  by 
Allan  Cunningham,  whose  determinations  in  manuscript  they 
still  bear.  The  drawings  had  been  presented  to  the  Botanic 
Gardens  by  Miss  Goldfinch,  great  great  grand-daughter  of 
Governor  King.  (2)  Specimens  of  a  new  genus  of  Compositse 
{Cratjjstylis,  Spencer  Moore,  Journal  of  Botany,  May,  1905), 
founded  on  Olearia  (1)  cotiocephala,  F.v.M.  (B.Fl.  iii.  480)  and  its 
varieties.     The  plant  is  remarkable  for  its  flattened  style-arms. 

Dr.  Greig  Smith  showed  a  number  of  lantern  .slides  in 
illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  (1)  a  remarkably  deformed  terminal 
branch  of  Eucalypt  obtained  by  Mr.  Kenneth  Stephen  from  a 
garden  at  Rose  Bay;  the  pathological  condition  of  the  specimen 
seemed  to  be  due  to  a  fungoid  disease  similar  to  that  which 
attacks  the  Black  Wattle.  (2)  Examples  of  two  species  of 
Coleoptera  received  from  Mr.  Maiden,  with  an  intimation  that 
they  were  pests  of  coconut  palms  in  the  New  Hebrides.  One  was 
a  lamellicorn;  the  other  an  undetermined  species  of  Promecotheca 
of  the  Family  Hispidce,  a  group  of  the  Chrysomelidce  in  which 
the  larvae  feed  in  the  tissues  of  plants  and  often  do  considerable 
damage.  Some  years  ago  Mr.  J.  J.  Walker,  R. N.,  collected 
specimens  of  the  same  species  from  the  fronds  of  coconut  palms 


308  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

also  in  the  New  Hebrides.  In  the  Society's  Proceedings  for 
1903,  Dr.  Sharp  described  another  species  of  the  Hispidcer 
destructive  to  coconut  pahus  in  New  Britain. 

Mr.  Edgar R.  Waite  reported  that  a  Leopard  Seal  (Ogmorhimis 
leptonyx,  Blainv.)  came  ashore  alive  at  Manly  Beach  on  25th  inst., 
and  was  secured  by  two  men.  It  is  eleven  feet  in  length.  This 
antarctic  species  so  very  rarely  straggles  so  far  north  that  the 
occurrence  is  worthy  of  record.  Mr.  Waite  also  exhibited  young- 
examples  of  the  Paradise  Fish  (Polyacanthus  opercularis, 
Linnseus)  bred  by  him,  in  Sydney,  from  specimens  received  from 
China.  An  account  of  the  breeding  habits  of  this  fish  will  be 
found  in  a  recent  No.  of  the  Records  of  the  Australian 
Museum  (vi.  1905,  pp.  1-4). 


Following  is  a  list  of  the  Lichens  exhibited  by  Mr.  Fred.  Turner 
at  the  Meeting  on  June  28th  (antea  p. 259). 

CoLLEMA,  Ach. 

G.  hyrsinum,  Ach. — Upper  Macleay  River.  Common  on  the 
trunks  of  trees. 

C.  leucocarpum,  Tayl.  — Upper  Clarence  River.  Not  common. 
On  bark  of  trees  and  on  rocks. 

Leptogium,  Ach. 

L.  IremeUoides,  L. — Upper  Bellingen  River.  Very  common  on 
bark  of  trees  and  on  rocks. 

L.  marginelhim,  Sw. — Tabulam,  Clarence  River.  Epiphytal 
on  other  lichens  and  mosses.     Not  common. 

L.  hypotrachynum,  Miill.  Arg. — Upper  Clarence  River.  Not 
common.     On  bark. 

SPHiEROPHOKON,  Nyl. 

S.  cojnpressum,  Ach. — Upper  Richmond  River.  Fairly  com- 
mon on  trunks  of  trees. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  309 

Stereocaulon,  Schreb. 

S.  ramulosuwif  Ach. — Upper  Richmond  River.  Not  common. 
Orowing  on  the  ground. 

Cladonia,  Hffm. 

G.  macilenta,  Hffm. — Upper  Macleay  River.  Common  on 
decaying  logs. 

C.  aggregata,  Sw. — Upper  Clarence  River.  Fairly  common  on 
decaying  logs. 

C.  retipora,  Floerke. — Upper  Clarence  River.  Not  common. 
On  decaying  logs. 

Heterodea,  Nyl. 

H.  rtiuelleri,  Nyl. — Upper  Richmond  River.  Fairly  common. 
Growing  on  the  ground. 

Ramalina,  Ach. 

R.  gracilis,  Nyl. — Upper  Richmond  River.  Common.  On  the 
branches  of  trees  and  shrubs. 

Usnea,  Hffm. 

U.  harhata,  Ach. — Head  of  Hastings  River.  Very  common 
on  trees. 

U.  trichoidea,  Ach. — Upper  Richmond  River.  Not  common. 
On  trees. 

U.  longissima,  Ach. — Upper  Macleay  River.  Common  on 
trees. 

Parmhlia,  Ach. 

P.  perforata,  Ach. — Near  Apsley  Falls.  Common  on  both 
trees  and  rocks. 

P.  tinctorum,  Despr. — Head  of  Hastings  River.  Common  on 
both  trees  and  rocks. 

P.  Gonspersa,  Ehrenb. — Upper  Bellingen  River.  Fairly  com- 
mon both  on  bark  and  rocks. 

P.  limhala,  Laur. — Near  head  of  Richmond  River.  Fairly 
common  both  on  bark  and  rocks. 


310  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Stictina,  Nyl. 

S.  fragilima,  Bab. — iSTear  base  of  Mount  Sea  View.  Fairly 
common  on  living  trees  and  decaying  logs. 

S.  quercizaiiSy  Ach.  —  Near  base  of  Mount  Sea  View.  Fairly 
common  on  the  trunks  of  trees. 

S.  retigera^  Miill.  Arg. — Upper  Clarence  River.  Not  common. 
On  bark  of  trees. 

Sticta,  Ach. 

S.  jndmonacea,  Ach. — Upper  Clarence  River.  Not  common. 
On  bark  of  trees. 

S.  subvariabilis,  Nyl. — Near  head  of  Richmond  River.  Not 
common.     On  trunks  of  trees. 

S.  dichotomoides,  Nyl. — Near  head  of  Clarence  River.  Not 
common.     On  trunks  of  trees. 

S.  filix,  Hffm. — Upper  Clarence  River.  Fairly  common.  On 
trunks  of  trees. 

S.  aurata,  Ach. — Upper  Hastings  River.  Fairly  common. 
On  bark  of  trees  and  shrubs. 

S.  karstenii,  Miill.  Arg. — Upper  Richmond  River.  Rare.  On 
bark  of  trees. 

RiCASOLiA,  De  Not. 

E.  rhaj)hispora,  C.K. — Upper  Clarence  River.  Fairly  common. 
On  the  bark  of  trees  and  logs. 

B.  hartmanni^  J.  Muell.  Upper  Richmond  River.  Not  com- 
mon.    On  trunks  of  trees. 

Peltigera,  Ach. 

P.  'polydactyla^  Hffm. — Upper  Bellingen  River.  Not  common. 
On  the  bark  of  trees  and  logs. 

Physcia,  Nyl. 

P.  chrysophthalma,  L. — Upper  Nymboi  River.  Common  on 
the  bark  of  trees  and  shrubs. 

P.  speciosa,  Wulf. — Upper  Nymboi  River.  Common  on  the 
bark  of  trees  and  shrubs. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  311 

P.  picta,   Sw. — Upper    Clarence   River.      Fairly    common  on 

both  bark  and  rocks. 

Pannaria,  Del. 

P.  77iaria7ia,   Fee.      Upper  Richmond  River.      Not  common. 

On  decaying  logs. 

Lecanora,  Nyl. 

L.  subfusca,  L.     Upper  Clarence  River.     Common  on  the  bark 
of  trees  and  on  rocks. 

Lecidea,  Ach. 

L.  parvifolia,  Pers.     Upper  Bellingen  River.     Not   common. 
On  trees  and  logs. 


WEDNESDAY,  AUGUST  30th,   1905. 


The  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  of  the  Society  was  held  in 
the  Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  August  30th,  1905. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Messrs.  Edmund  Allen,  Cairns,  N.Q.,  and  Henry  Hacker, 
Cairns,  N.Q.,  were  elected  Ordinary  Members  of  the  Society. 

The  President  made  the  following  announcement  : — 

Graduates  in  Science  of  the  University  of  Sydney  who  may  wish 
to  qualify  as  Candidates  for  two  Linnean  Macleay  Fellowships  to 
be  offered  by  the  Council  before  the  close  of  the  year,  but  who 
are  not  at  present  Members  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  New  South 
Wales,  are  recommended  to  take  steps  to  provide  for  their  nomina- 
tions at  the  Meeting  to  be  held  on  the  27th  September  or  at 
that  on  2oth  October,  1905. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous 
Monthly  Meeting,  amounting  to  15  Vols.,  120  Parts  or  Nos.,  17 
Bulletins,  13  Pamphlets,  1  Map,  and  2  Miscellanea,  received  from 
61  Societies,  &c.,  and  2  Individuals,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 


312 


CRUSTACEA  DREDGED  OFF  PORT  JACKSON  IN 
DEEP  WATER. 

By  F.  E.  Grant,  F.L.S. 

(Plates  x.-xi) 

The  small  collection  of  Crustacea  forming  the  subject  of  this 
paper  was  dredged  in  250-300  fathoms  about  28  miles  east  from 
Port  Jackson  Heads,  on  an  excursion  in  March  of  this  year, 
organised  by  Mr.  W.  F.  Petterd.  The  object  of  the  excursion 
was  mainly  to  obtain  marine  shells  on  the  margin  of  the  con- 
tinental shelf,  and  the  dredges  used  were  designed  rather  for 
this  end  than  for  obtaining  such  objects  as  crabs.  Six  species 
only  of  Malacostraca  were  taken,  of  which  four  are  Brachyura 
and  two  Macrura.  But  as  four  of  the  species  are  new,  and  of 
the  remaining  two  only  one  has  been  recognised  as  belonging  to 
our  fauna,  the  importance  of  the  collection  was  greater  than 
would  appear  from  its  numbers. 

I  desire  to  here  express  my  thanks  to  Mr.  Petterd  for  his 
kindness  in  placing  the  specimens  in  my  hands  for  study,  and  to 
Messrs.  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  and  T.  Whitelegge,  of  the  Australian 
Museum,  for  much  assistance  rendered  me  in  the  task. 

The  types  of  the  species  described  will  be  lodged  in  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum. 


BY  F.   E.  GRANT.  313 

Suborder  BRACHYUKA. 

Tribe  OXYRHYNCHA. 

Legion  MAIINEA. 

Family  MAIID^. 

Subfamily  PISIN^. 

Alliance  Pisoida. 

Hyastenus  White. 

Hyastenus  Fultoni,  sp.nov.     PL  xi.  fig.l. 

Carapace  elongate-triangular,  rounded  behind,  covered  every- 
where both  dorsally  and  ventrally  with  a  short  and  scant  pubes- 
cence, beneath  which  the  surface  is  smooth  and  polished.  The 
legs  carry  a  similar  but  shorter  pubescence  with  the  exception 
of  the  tips  of  the  dactyli,  which  are  naked. 

The  regions  are  ill  defined. 

The  gastric  region  is  swollen,  and  on  the  median  line  of  the 
carapace  there  are  (1)  a  low  tubercle  on  the  posterior  margin  of 
the  gastric  swelling;  (2)  a  more  prominent  tubercle  about  half 
way  between  it  and  the  posterior  margin;  and  (3)  a  prominent 
horizontally  directed  spinule  on  the  rounded  posterior  margin. 

The  rostrum  consists  of  two  slender,  somewhat  widely  divergent 
spines,  which  are  slightly  less  than  one-third  the  total  length  of 
the  carapace. 

The  supraocular  eaves  are  scarcely  so  prominent  as  in  most 
members  of  the  genus,  and  are  pointed  anteriorly.  The  post- 
ocular  lobes  are  prominent,  but  do  not  reach  beyond  the  eyes. 
Their  anterior  border  is  excavated,  but  the  eyes  are  not  so  far 
retractile  against  it  as  to  render  the  cornea  invisible  when 
viewed  from  above. 

Behind  the  supraocular  eaves,  and  separated  from  them  by  a 
short  concave  interval,  there  is  on  either  side  a  somewhat  more 
prominent  outwardly  directed  and  sharply  pointed  spinule. 


314:  CRUSTACEA  DREDGED  OFF  PORT  JACKSON, 

There  is  a  further  strong  horizontally  directed  spine  on  either 
branchial  region  on  the  same  line  as  the  median  spine  on  the 
dorsum  of  the  carapace. 

The  basal  antennal  joint  is  broad,  with  its  antero-external 
angle  produced.  The  flagella  are  visible  from  above  outside 
the  rostral  cornua. 

The  chelipedes  are  only  slightly  more  stout  than  the  amVjula- 
tory  legs,  and  are  of  the  same  length  as  the  carapace.  The  palms 
and  fingers  are  slender,  the  latter  being  finely  toothed  and  with 
a  slight  space  between  them  at  their  bases  when  closed. 

The  second  pair  of  legs  are  considerably  longer  than  the  cheli- 
pedes or  than  any  of  the  three  last  pairs.  The  joints  of  all  the 
ambulatory  legs  are  subcylindrical,  and  the  dactyli  are  curved, 
but  without  serrations  on  their  inner  margins.  The  basal  joints 
of  the  last  pair  are  visible  beyond  the  posterior  margin  of  the 
carapace  on  a  dorsal  view^ 

The  merus  of  the  external  maxillipedes  is  shorter  but  con- 
siderably broader  than  the  ischium,  and  is  expanded  at  its 
antero-external  angle.  The  short  palp  is  carried  at  its  antero- 
internal  angle. 

Dimensions  of  type  {^) — 

From  tip  of  rostrum  to  posterior  margin 1 1  '0  mm. 

Breadth  across  branchial  region 7*5    ,, 

Length  of  chelipedes 11*0    ,, 

Length  of  second  pair  of  legs 15-0    ,, 

Six  specimens  were  taken,  of  which  two  are  males  and  four 
females.  All  except  two  were  much  distorted  through  the 
presence  of  a  parasite  of  the  family  Bohyridce  in  the  branchial 
cavity.  My  knowledge  of  this  group  is,  however,  insufficient  to 
enable  me  to  determine  its  generic  position. 

All  the  specimens  taken  are  of  approximately  the  same  size, 
and  there  is  little  difference  between  the  male  and  female 
specimens. 

In  the  figure  submitted  the  specimen  is  shown  as  denuded  of 
its  pubescence — the  medium  of  line  work  adopted  not  being 
suitable  for  the  adequate  representation  of  such  a  surface. 


BY  F.   E.   GRANT.  315 

Colour  orange-brown. 

I  have  had  much  pleasure  in  dedicating  this  species  to  my  old 
friend  and  co-worker  in  the  group,  Mr.  S.  W.  Fulton,  of  Mel- 
bourne. 

Tribe   OXYSTOMA. 

Family  LEUCOSIID.-E. 

Subfamily  LEUCOSIIN^. 

E  B  A  L  I  A  Leach. 

Ebalia  tuberculosa  a.  Milne  Edwards. 

Fersephona  tuberculosa,  1873,  A.  M.  Edw.,  Journ.  Mus.  Godeffroy 

i.  4,  p.86. 
Ebalia  tuberculosa,  1886,  Miers,  "Challenger"  Zool.  xvii.  p.306, 

pi. XXV.  fig.  1;  1900,  Whitelegge,  Mem.  Austr.  Mus.  No.  iv. 

Pt.2,  p.l61. 

Eight  specimens  of  this  species,  which  appears  to  be  common 
at  moderate  depths  off  our  coast,  were  taken.  One  hundred  and 
sixty  specimens  are  recorded  as  being  taken  by  the  "  Thetis  "  at 
depths  ranging  from  22  to  75  fathoms.  The  present  record 
extends  its  range  to  300  fathoms. 

It  is  recorded  by  Haswell  under  the  synonym  P.  granulosa 
Hasw.,  from  Port  Jackson  Heads,  and  was  taken  by  the  "  Chal- 
lenger "  in  the  same  localit3^ 

Family  DOKIPPID.^. 

Subfamily  TYMOLINJE. 

C  Y  M  0  N  o  M  0  p  s  Alcock. 

Cymonomops  similis  n.sp.     PI.  x.,  fig.l. 

The  whole  animal,  including  the  ventral  surface,  post-abdomen 
and  limbs,  is  covered  with  a  short  pubescence,  beneath  which  the 
surface  is  granular. 

Carapace,  with  that  portion  of  the  abdomen  seen  from  above, 
subcircular,  the  cephalothorax  having  its  greatest  breadth  at  its 
extreme  posterior  limit;  about  half  the  abdominal  terga  are 
exposed  to  dorsal  view. 


316  CRUSTACEA  DREDGED  OFF  PORT  JACKSOX, 

Front  about  one-third  the  greatest  breadth  of  the  carapace, 
and  consisting  of  a  main  central  lobe  which  is  cleft  in  front,  and 
two  lateral  lobes  which  form  the  anterior  angles  of  the  orbits. 
Between  the  cleft  in  the  central  lobe,  and  also  between  this  lobe 
and  the  anterior  orbital  angles,  the  characteristic  extension  of 
the  buccal  cavern  can  be  seen  from  above.  The  external  orbital 
angle  also  forms  a  conspicuous  spine. 

The  regions  of  the  carapace  are  well  delimited.  The  gastric 
region  is  much  swollen,  but  bej^ond  the  spines  forming  the  front 
none  are  present  on  either  the  carapace  or  limbs. 

The  abdomen  in  the  female  is  large  and  consists  of  6  segments, 
the  terminal  segment  having  the  form  of  the  broad  semicircular 
plate  characteristic  of  the  genus. 

The  orbits  are  of  moderate  size.  The  eye-stalks  are  slender, 
readily  movable  and  slightly  pigmented. 

Neither  antennules  nor  antennae  are  capable  of  flexion  beneath 
the  front;  the  former  are  much  larger  than  the  latter. 

The  buccal  cavern  is  long  and  deep,  and  the  external  maxilli- 
pedes  are  correspondingly  produced.  Viewed  laterally,  these  are 
exceedingly  convex  in  form. 

The  chelipedes  are  equal,  and  shorter  but  more  massive  than 
the  second  and  third  pairs  of  legs.  The  palm  is  swollen.  The 
fingers  are  of  about  the  same  length  as  the  palm  and  are  finely 
serrate  along  their  cutting  edge.  They  leave  a  narrow  gap 
between  their  proximal  third  when  closed. 

The  second  and  third  legs,  which  are  approximately  equal,  are 
more  than  twice  the  length  of  the  chel«,  and  terminate  in  a  long 
slender  curved  dactylus.  The  bases  of  both  pairs  are  visible 
from  a  dorsal  view. 

The  fourth  and  fifth  pairs  are  carried  over  the  carapace,  which 
they  slightly  exceed  in  length.  They  are  of  hair-like  tenuity  and 
both  end  in  a  hook-like  dactylus. 

Two  specimens  were  taken,  both  of  which  are  unfortunately 
females.  One  carries  ova  which  for  so  small  a  crab  are  of  large 
size. 


BY  F.   E.   GRANT.  317 

The  species  closely  resembles  the  type-species  of  the  genus,  C. 
glaucomma  Alcock,*  but,  besides  minor  differences,  it  varies  so 
remarkably  in  the  proportions  of  the  carapace  and  limbs  that  I 
have  little  hesitation  in  describing  it  as  new. 

I  append  measurements   of  the   two  species  for   purposes  of 

comparison. 

C.  similis,      C.  glaucomma. 

Length  of  carapace 7'Omm.  ...       6'5mm. 

Breadth  of  carapace 7*0    ,,  ...  6*5    ,, 

Length  of  chelipede 8*5    ,,  ...       9*0    ,, 

Length  of  second  leg 21-0    ,,  ...  28-5    ,, 

Length  of  fourth  leg 8*0    ,,  ...       4*5    ,, 

[Note. — In  the  figure  submitted  the  length  of  the  carapace  is 
shown  as  slightly  shorter  than  it  should  be.) 

Tribe   DROxMIACEA. 

Subtribe  HOMOLIDEA. 

Family  LATKEILLIDiE. 

Latreillopsis  Henderson. 

Latreillopsis  Petterdi,  n.sp.     PI.  x.  figs. 2,  2a,  26. 

Carapace  subquadrilateral,  longer  than  broad,  with  deep 
vertical  sides,  not  concealing  the  basal  joints  of  the  ambulatory 
legs. 

Linea  anomurica  only  faintly  discernible. 

Pront  ending  in  a  rostral  spine  which  is  somewhat  concave 
above  and  is  slightly  deflexed.  This  is  flanked  on  either  side  by 
a  supraocular  spine  about  twice  the  length  of  the  rostrum.  These 
supraocular  spines  point  sharply  upwards  and  bear  a  small 
tubercle  near  the  distal  end  of  their  inner  margin  and  two  sharp 
spines  on  their  outer  margin. 

The  regions  of  the  carapace  are  well  defined.  There  is  on 
either  side  a  row  of  six  sharp  spiniform  tubercles  of  which  the 

*  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  May,  1894,  p.406;  Journ.  Asiatic  Soc.  Bengal, 
Vol.lxv.  Pt.  ii.  p.287,  1896;  and  III.  Zool.  "Investigator,"  Crust,  pi.  xiv. 
fig.  9,  taken  at  depths  of  205  and  405  fathoms  in  the  Andaman  Sea. 


318  CRUSTACEA  DREDGED  OFF  PORT  JACKSON, 

two  centre  ones  are  the  largest;  below  this  the  hepatic  regions 
are  much  swollen  and  are  armed  with  three  rounded  tubercles 
terminating  in  sharp  horizontally  directed  spinules. 

The  gastric  region  carries  three  well  marked  tubercles  in  the 
form  of  a  triangle,  of  which  the  apex  is  directed  backwards. 

The  carapace  also  bears  a  number  of  irregularly  disposed  short 
tubercles  clothed  with  minute  hairs. 

The  eye-stalks  are  little  more  than  half  the  length  of  the  supra- 
ocular spines,  which  completely  conceal  them  from  dorsal  view. 
The  eyes  are  subspherical  and  well  pigmented. 

Chelipedes  about  half  the  length  of  the  three  following  legs, 
cylindrical,  very  slender  and  entirely  smooth.  Fingers  about 
half  as  long  as  the  palm.  Only  the  joints  from  the  merus  to  the 
dactylus  are  visible  when  viewed  from  above. 

The  three  following  legs  are  about  three  times  the  length  of 
the  carapace  and  have  all  their  joints  visible  when  view-ed  from 
above.  The  basal  joint  of  each  is  armed  above  with  a  spinule. 
The  merus  of  each  has  a  series  of  about  six  spinules  almost  equi- 
distantly  placed  both  above  and  below,  in  addition  to  which  the 
distal  end  is  armed  with  a  sharp  upwardly  directed  spine.  The 
carpus  and  propodus  are  entirely  smooth  and  cylindrical.  The 
dactj^i  are  long,  flat  and  curved,  and  are  armed  on  their  inner 
margin  with  six  sharp  spiniform  teeth. 

The  last  pair  of  legs  are  somewhat  shorter  than  the  preceding 
pairs.  The  basal  joint  is  armed  with  a  spinule  and  the  merus 
has  a  series  of  five  equidistant  spines  below  and  one  above  at  its 
extreme  distal  end.  The  carpus  is  unarmed.  The  flattened 
dactylus  carries  a  series  of  sharp  spines  on  its  inner  border  and 
folds  down  like  a  knife-blade  between  a  double  row  of  spines  on 
the  posterior  border  of  the  propodus. 

The  abdomen  (fig.2rt)  has  seven  distinct  segments;  the  1st,  2nd, 
and  3rd  terga  carry  an  acute  spinule  in  the  middle  line,  which 
in  the  next  two  segments  is  replaced  by  a  blunt  tubercle.  The 
penultimate  carries  two  acute  spinules;  there  is  also  a  prominent 
spine  with  serrate  edges  in  the  middle  of  its  anterior  margin. 

The  last  tergum  has  the  characteristic  shape  of  a  spear-head. 


BY  F.   E.   GRANT.  319 

The  only  specimen  taken  (a  male)  has  the  following  measure- 
ments— 
Length  of  carapace  from  tip  of  rostrum  to  first  abdominal  segment...    9  mm. 

Length  of  chelipecle 13    ,, 

Length  of  first  ambulatory  leg 25    ,, 

Length  of  fourth  ambulatory  leg 17    ,, 

This  species  is  readily  distinguished  from  the  type-species,  L. 
bispinosa  Henderson,  by  the  spinules  of  the  carapace  and  on  the 
merus  of  the  ambulatory  legs.  L.  bispinosa  was  taken  by  the 
"  Challenger  "  in  95  fathoms  off  Zebu,  Philippine  Islands.  It  is 
also  recorded  by  Alcock*  from  53  fathoms  in  the  Andaman  Sea. 

Suborder  MACRURA. 

Tribe   ANOMALA. 
Legion  PAGURINEA. 

Family  PAGURID^. 

Paguristes  Dana. 

Paguristes  aciculus,  sp.nov.     PL  xi.  fig.3,  Sa. 

Anterior  region  of  the  carapace  rugose  with  a  well  defined 
margin,  the  rostrum  reaching  very  slightly  beyond  the  marginal 
teeth.  The  lateral  margin  is  armed  with  three  or  four  obscure 
spinulations  and  with  scattered  hairs.  The  posterior  and  little 
calcified  wings  of  the  carapace  also  carry  scattered  setse. 

The  ocular  scales  carry  an  acute  tooth  on  their  inner  margin 
and  are  separated  by  a  considerable  interval. 

The  ocular  peduncles  are  slender,  slightly  thicker  at  the  base 
than  at  the  summit  and  somewhat  constricted  in  the  middle. 
Their  upper  surfaces  carry  scattered  hairs  in  their  proximal  half. 

The  first  exposed  joint  of  the  outer  antennae  is  without  any 
spine.  The  succeeding  joint  carries  two  spines  on  its  outer 
margin  near  the  distal  end  and  one  on  its  inner  distal  extremity. 

*  Journ.  Asiatic  Soc.  Bengal,  Vol.  Ixviii.  Pt.  ii.  No.3,  p.  167,  1900. 


320  CRUSTACEA  DRKDGED  OFF  POUT  JACKSON, 

The  final  joint  is  sharply  pointed  and  bears  six  spinules  on  its 
inner  margin  and  three  on  its  outer  distal  half. 

The  major  flagellum  of  the  inner  antenna?  consists  of  25  articuli 
and  is  clothed  with  hairs  below.  The  inner  flagellum  is  naked 
and  consists  of  13  articuli. 

All  the  pereiopoda  are  clothed  with  scattered  long  stiff  hairs. 

Chelipedes  subequal.  The  merus-joint  is  trigonous,  the  inferior 
angles  carrying  minute  spinulse.  There  are  no  spines  or 
tubercles  on  its  superior  angle,  but  the  line  of  junction  with  the 
next  joint  bears  a  row  of  minute  spines,  below  which  and  parallel 
to  it  there  is  a  well  marked  linear  depression. 

The  carpus  is  sub  trigonous,  and  carries  on  its  superior  angle 
three  prominent  forwardly  directed  teeth  and  a  further  small 
tubercle  at  its  proximal  end.  On  the  lower  outer  margin  there 
is  a  well  marked  row  of  small  forwardly  directed  spinules,  and 
between  this  and  the  upper  margin  a  further  series  of  spinules 
scarcely  forming  a  line. 

The  propodus,  which  has  the  palm  somewliat  swollen,  has  three 
strong  forwardly  directed  teeth  on  its  upper  margin,  with  a  small 
tubercle  at  its  proximal  end,  as  in  the  case  of  the  carpus.  Its 
lower  margin  is  denticulate.  The  outer  surface  of  the  palm  on 
the  right  hand  (which  is  slightly  the  larger  of  the  two)  and  of 
the  fingers  carries  a  number  of  spinulous  tubercles  without  any 
definite  linear  arrangement.  In  the  case  of  the  left  hand,  how- 
ever, they  are  on  the  palm  arranged  in  four  well  defined  rows. 

Fingers  somewhat  corneous  at  the  tips  and  spoon-excavate^ 
with  a  slight  gap  in  their  distal  halves  when  closed. 

Of  the  ambulatory  legs,  the  first  pair  are  scarcely  so  long  as 
the  second,  which  they  closely  resemble  in  their  armature.  The 
merus,  in  common  with  the  other  joints,  is  somewhat  flattened^ 
and  is  thicker  at  its  proximal  than  at  its  distal  extremity.  It  is 
fringed  above  with  stiff  setae,  and  bears  a  few  scattered  hairs  on 
its  lower  margin,  but  is  without  spinules  or  tubercles. 

The  carpus  carries  a  strong  row  of  spines  on  its  upper  margin, 
and  two  inconspicuous  rows  on  its  outer  surface.  The  propodus 
is  also  conspicuously  spinose  above,  and  there  is  a  well  defined 


BY  F.  E.  GRANT.  321 

median  row  of  about  7  granular  spinules  on  its  outer  surface. 
The  dactylus  is  of  about  the  same  length  as  the  carpus  and 
propodus  combined,  and  is  without  spinules  on  its  surface.  The 
last  three  joints  are  all  clothed  with  scattered  stiff  hairs. 

The  remaining  legs  have  the  characters  usual  with  the  genus, 
the  fourth  pair  being  monodactyle  and  the  fifth  with  minute 
chelse.  The  upper  margins  of  both  are  stiffly  fringed  with 
hairs,  whilst  the  posterior  margins  are  more  sparingly  setose. 
The  last  pair  are  normally  carried  folded  back  and  not  extended 
laterally  as  shown  in  the  figure. 

The  basal  joints  of  the  chelse  are  closely  approximate  at  their 
anterior  angle,  but  the  sternum  is  visible  between  them  poste- 
riorly. The  distance  between  the  bases  of  the  succeeding  three 
pairs  increases  rapidly,  giving  to  the  sternum  a  much  more  widely 
trigonous  appearance  than  is  usual  in  the  group.  The  bases  of 
all  the  legs  are  clothed  with  a  fringe  of  long  hairs. 

The  bases  of  the  external  maxillipedes  are  closely  approximate, 
but  do  not  quite  touch. 

The  abdomen  is  entirely  uncalcified  except  in  its  terminal 
segments.  The  boundaries  of  the  other  segments  are  obscurely 
delimited. 

The  first  pair  of  abdominal  appendages  in  the  male  are  short 
and  stout,  somewhat  swollen  at  their  apices,  bilobed,  and  setose. 
The  second  pair  are  long,  slender,  and  sharply  geniculate.  Their 
apices  are  enlarged  and  flattened,  their  superior  margin  being 
fringed  with  stiff  hairs. 

The  appendages  of  the  third,  fourth  and  fifth  segments  are 
uniramous,  laminar,  and  fringed  with  long  setse. 

The  calcified  terminal  segments  of  the  pleou  (fig. 3a)  have  the 
lateral  appendages  very  unequal. 

Colour  of  the  chelipedes,  anterior  part  of  the  carapace,  and  the 
second  and  third  legs  salmon-pink  shading  into  cream  in  the  less 
exposed  parts. 

Only  one  female  was  taken,  and  in  it  the  abdomen  is  unfortu- 
nately damaged  and  cannot  consequently  be  described. 
21 


322  CRUSTACEA  DREDGED  OFF  PORT  JACKSON, 

Dimensions  of  type  ((J) — 

From  rostrum  to  posterior  end  of  carapace 11  "5  mm. 

Length  of  eye  peduncles 5'0    ,, 

Chelipede  of  right  side 16*5    ,, 

Length  of  second  leg  (first  ambulatory) 23*0    ,, 

Thirteen  specimens  in  all  were  taken,  the  shells  occupied  being 
of  various  genera  and  species.  They  vary  considerably  in  size, 
that  described  being  the  largest;  the  characters  described,  how- 
ever, appear  to  be  uniform  throughout. 

The  nearest  ally  of  this  species  appears  to  be  P.  tuberxulatus 
Whitelegge,*  from  which  it  differs  in  the  armature  of  the  legs 
and  in  various  other  well-marked  minor  particulars.  P.  tuher- 
cidatus  was  taken  by  the  "  Thetis  "  in  large  numbers  nearer  the 
coast  in  depths  of  20-30  fathoms,  and  the  present  species  would 
appear  to  replace  it  in  the  deeper  water  further  out  where  our 
haul  was  taken. 

In  the  figure  submitted  the  limbs  of  the  right  side  are  shown 
as  denuded  of  hairs.  The  hairs  are  also  much  more  numerous  on 
the  left  side  than  appears  from  the  drawing — the  line  work 
renderin^r  this  course  desirable  for  clearness. 


o 


Tribe   SCYLLARIDEA. 

Family  SCYLLAEIDiE. 

I  B  A  c  u  s  Leach. 


Pl.xi.,  tig.L 


Ibacus  alticrenatus  Spence  Bate,  var.  septemdentatus,  var.nov, 

1888,  C.  Spence  Bate;   Zool.  H.M.S.   "  Challenger,"  Vol.  xxiv. 
p.63,  PJ.ix.  fig.2 

Two  specimens  to  which  I  refer  as  above  were  taken.  /. 
alticrenatus  is  recorded  by  the  "  Challenger "  as  having  been 
dredged  off  New  Zealand  in  150  fathoms. 


Mem.  Aust.  Museum,  No.iv.  pi. 2,  p.  167,  1900. 


BY  F.   E.   GRANT.  323 

Spence  Bate  says  of  his  specimens  that  the  antennse  bear 
"  five  or  six  teeth  of  equal  size  distantly  separated  from  each 
other  on  the  distal  margin  of  the  anterior  plate."  In  one  of  the 
specimens  under  consideration  each  distal  margin  carries  seven 
teeth,  while  on  the  other  specimen  there  are  seven  teeth  on  one 
plate  and  six  on  the  other.  In  both  cases  the  central  teeth  are 
the  largest,  and  the  series  diminishes  regularly  both  posteriorly 
and  anteriorly;  the  teeth  are  also  confluent  at  their  bases  and 
not  "distantly  separated." 

The  difference  also  between  the  first  of  the  large  teeth  on  the 
margin  of  the  carapace  posterior  to  the  deep  branchial  incision 
and  those  immediately  following  it  is  not  so  marked  as  in  the 
type  figured  in  the  "  Challenger." 

Under  the  circumstances  our  specimens  have  appeared  to  me 
deserving  of  varietal  rank. 

It  will  be  noted  that  none  of  the  species  of  Decapods,  said  to 
have  been  taken  by  the  "Challenger"  Expedition  in  their  Station 
known  as  164b  at  a  depth  of  410  fathoms  east  of  Sydney, 
occurred  in  our  hauls.  Doubt  has  already  been  thrown  by  Mr. 
Hedley  from  conchological  data  on  the  correctness  of  ascribing 
these  specimens  of  the  "  Challenger  "  to  this  Station.* 

The  following  are  the  species  said  to  have  been  taken — 
Lispognathus  Thomsoni  Norman,  Uropfychus  australis  Henderson, 
JJroplychiis  gracilimanus  Henderson,  Plesionika  semilcevis  Spence 
Bate. 

Of  these  the  first  mentioned  is  an  Atlantic  species,  former 
records  being  from  the  Straits  of  Gibraltar  and  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope.  Uroptychus  australis  was,  however,  taken  also  at  Stations 
170  and  171  off  the  Kermadec  Islands,  and  at  Station  194a  off 
Banda.  The  remaining  species  have  not,  so  far  as  I  can  ascertain, 
again  occurred  in  literature.  From  this  evidence  it  would  conse- 
quently rather  appear  that  the  product  of  two  different  hauls  had 
become  mixed. 

*  These  Proceedings,  1901,  p.  22. 


324         CRUSTACEA  DREDGED  OFF  PORT  JACKSON. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 
Plate  X. 
-Cymonomops  similis,  sp.nov. 
-Latreillopsis  Petterdi,  sp.  nov. 

—  „  „         abdominal  segments. 

—  „  „         frontal  region  seen  from  below. 

Plate  xi. 
-Hyastenus  Fultoni,  sp.nov. 

-Ibacus  alticrenatus  Spence  Bate,  var.  septemdentatus,  var.nov. 
-Paguristes  aciculus,  sp.nov. 

—  ,,  ,,         terminal  segments  of  pleon. 


Fig. 

1.- 

Fig. 

2.- 

Fig. 

2a. 

Fig. 

2&. 

Fig. 

L- 

Fig. 

2.- 

Fig. 

3.- 

Fig. 

3a. 

325 


NOTES  ON  PROSOBRANCHIATA. 

No.  iv. — The  Ontogenetic  Stages  represented  by  the 
Gastropod  Protoconch. 

By  H.  Leighton  Kesteven. 

i.  — Intkoduction. 
ii. — The  Ontogenetic  Stages. 
iii. — The  Naticoid  Initial  Whorl. 
iv. — The  Systematic  Value  of  the  Protoconch. 

i.  — Introduction. 

Since  the  publication  of  my  paper  on  the  *'  Protoconchs  of 
certain  Port  Jackson  Gastropoda"  (3)  in  May,  1902,  I  have  con- 
tinued to  devote  a  good  deal  of  time  to  the  study  of  these 
interesting  "  monuments  "  of  early  Gastropod  development;  some 
of  the  conclusions  and  results  arrived  at  have  appeared  from 
time  to  time  in  these  Proceedings  and  in  the  publications  of  the 
Australian  Museum.  The  published  results,  however,  stand  for 
but  a  small  portion  of  the  study  that  has  been  devoted  to  the 
subject.  In  the  execution  of  my  duties  while  a  member  of  the 
staff  of  the  Australian  Museum,  many  thousands  of  specimens 
passed  through  my  hands  for  mounting  and  bestowal  in  their 
places  in  the  cabinets  and  cases;  all  these  were  carefully  examined 
as  to  their  protoconchs,  as  was  also  no  small  portion  of  the  large 
collection  already  bestowed  and  arranged  before  my  appointment. 
Added  to  this,  I  have  zealously  collected  material  for  the  studj^, 
personally  in  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland,  and  by 
exchange  from  Victoria,  South  Australia  and  Tasmania.  Here 
I  should  like  to  acknowledge  my  indebtedness  to  Mr.  W.  T. 
Bednall,  of  Adelaide,    whose  many  consignments  of   rich   shell 


326  NOTES  ON  PROSOBRANCHIATA,   IV., 

sand  have  provided  me  with  much  useful  material.  Several 
genera  have  been  studied  as  extensively  as  was  Lotorium  (3),  but 
as  there  was  no  such  immediate  call  for  descriptions  and  figures 
of  their  protoconchs  as  there  was  in  that  case,  I  have  not  thought 
it  desirable  to  publish  the  results. 

When  No.  iii.  of  the  present  series(4)  was  written,  I  had  been 
led  to  the  conclusion  that  in  some  instances,  e.g.^  Cyniatiunij'^ 
the  so-called  protoconch  was  really  a  secondary  shell,  and  there 
suggested  the  term  "  pseudoprotoconch "  for  such.  A  more 
recent  study  of  the  protoconch  of  Jlegalatractus  aruanus  Linn. (5) 
has  convinced  me  that  a  protoconch  may  be  composed  of  portions 
formed  during  one  or  all  of  four  important  stages  of  early  growth. 
An  ideal  protoconch  would,  in  my  conception,  be  composed  of — 
(I)  the  plug  of  the  primitive  shell-gland,  (2)  a  portion  formed  by 
the  veliger,  (3)  a  portion  formed  during  the  nepionic  stage,  and 
finally  (4)  a  portion  formed  during  early  neanic  stages.  1  am 
therefore  now  inclined  to  withdraw  the  term  pseudoprotoconch 
and  replace  it  with  the  more  explicit  terms  nepioconch  and 
ananeanoconch  proposed  below. 

Before  proceeding  to  the  purpose  of  the  present  paper,  namely, 
a  definition  of  and  nomenclature  for  the  above  four  conchyliaceous 
developmental  records,  I  would  justify  my  retention  of  and 
incidentally  define  the  term  "protoconch,"  which  the  conclusions 
herein  set  forth  would  seem  to  show  to  be  a  redundant  misnomer. 
The  term  has  been  in  the  past,  and  is  here,  used  to  designate  those 
few  apical  whorls  which  differ  markedly  either  in  contour  or 
sculpture,  or  both,  from  the  succeeding  structure,  which  latter  I 
have,  for  want  of  a  better  term,  designated  "adult  structure." 
In  the  above  sense  the  term  "  protoconch  "  is  certainly  useful, 
and  even  were  I  to  advocate  that  it  be  no  longer  used,  and  were 
to  coin,  or  make  use  of,  some  more  explicit  term,  I  am  unable  to 
flatter  myself  that  my  advice  would  be  generally  followed,  a  dual 

*  The  name  Cymatium  is  here  used  instead  of  Lotorium  (the  erstwhile 
Triton)  in  deference  to  the  opinion  of  a  growing  majority  that  Bolton's  names 
are  admissible  as  nomenclatural  entities. 


BY  H.  LBIGHTON  KESTEVEN.  327 

nomenclature  would  result.  In  fact,  such  a  proceeding  would  be 
an  unwarranted  piece  of  pedantry;  some  such  term  is  necessary, 
therefore  that  which  already  has  a  currency  should  be  used,  and 
at  its  current  value.  Grabau(l)  has  suggested  that  "  protorte- 
conch  "  would  be  more  explicit  than  the  term  under  considera- 
tion; in  comparing  the  bulbous  protoconch  with  the  twisted  pro- 
torteconch,  the  term  will  doubtless  prove  useful,  but  except  in  such 
cases  its  use  is  rather  to  be  deprecated;  it  is  in  this  way, 
apparently,  that  its  author  would  use  it. 

ii. — The  Ontogenetic  Stages. 

The  names  which  I  would  give  to  the  four  component  parts  of 
the  ideal  protoconch  are — Phyloconch,  Veloconch,  Nepioconch  and 
Ananeanoconch,  and  their  definitions  as  follow  : — 

1.  Phyloconch. — This  is  the  "  primitive"  shell  of  Lankester.(6) 
It  is  formed  by  almost  every  member  of  the  phylum,  but,  with 
rare  exceptions,  it  is  shed  at  an  early  age  and  does  not  enter  into 
the  composition  of  the  protoconch. 

2.  Veloco7ich. — The  greater  portion  of  this  is  formed  during 
the  veliger  stage,  though  it  may  have  been  begun  just  before  that 
stage. 

3.  N'epioconch. — This  is  formed  during  thenepionic  stage,  but, 
for  reasons  given  in  a  preceding  paper, (4)  I  am  inclined  to  regard 
it  as  of  rare  occurrence. 

4.  Ananeayioconch. — Formed  during  early  neanic  stages. 

The  phyloconch  is,  as  already  stated,  the  "primitive  shell"  of 
Lankester,  and  has  been  noted  in  every  Gastropod  of  which  the 
development  has  been  studied.  Sometimes  it  takes  the  form  of 
a  chitinous  plug  filling  the  first  shell-gland.  The  phyloconch  is 
very  generally  shed,  but  when  retained  it  may  be  detected  in  the 
very  young  protoconch;  instances  of  this  are  Clausilia,  Nerithia, 
and  Paludiyia.  In  these,  however,  it  is  so  minute  that,  had  not 
the  development  of  the  molluscs  been  studied,  it  is  doubtful 
whether  its  presence  in  the  protoconch  would  have  been  detected; 
in  view  of  this  fact,  it  appears  likely  that  only  by  the  method 


328  NOTES  ON  PROSOBRANCHIATA,  IV., 

which  led  to  its  discovery  in  the  above  instances  will  its  presence 
or  absence  be  demonstrated  in  any  protoconch. 

The  veloconch  is  of  very  general  occurrence  throughout  the 
Gastropoda,  occurring  even  in  many  of  the  molluscs  which  in 
later  life  are  without  any  trace  of  shell  {jEoUs,  etc.).  It  may  be 
succeeded  by  either  nepioconch  (Murex  denndata  Perry)  or 
ananeanoconch  (Oymatium),  may  be  distinctly  marked  off  from 
the  succeeding  portion  (Murex,  Bolmm,  Cassis,  Cajyulus,  etc.)^ 
or  may  be  undefinable  as  to  its  ultimate  limit  {Triphora,  some 
Cymaiia  and  Systra),  may  be  retained  throughout  life,  or  lost  by 
abrasion  and  corrosion  {^Triphora,  Meg  a  I  atr  actus)  or  shed,  by 
testaceous  as  well  as  naked  molluscs,  at  an  early  age  {Cymatium). 
Finally,  it  may  be  either  of  the  same  substance  as  the  adult 
cuticle  or  periostracum  [Cymatium)  or  it  may  be  calcareous 
{Murex,  Triphora). 

The  nepioconch  is  perhaps  existent  only  as  the  varix  which 
divides  the  protoconch  from  the  succeeding  adult  structure,  as 
typified  in  some  Murices  and  Fusi;  it  may  also  be  represented  by 
some  of  the  smooth  protoconchs  which  have  been  moulded  inside 
a  horny  veloconch,  which  was  later  shed.  In  a  previous  paper, 
however,  wherein  I  have  discussed  the  nepionic  stage  at  some 
length,  I  showed  that  such  casts  are  sometimes  ananeanic 
structures  (4  vide  also  3), 

The  ananeanoconch,  whilst  present  in  all  shells,  unless  lost  by 
abrasion  or  corrosion,  may  be  a  component  part  of  the  protoconch, 
but  may,  as  in  Murex  and  some  other  genera,  be  a  portion  of  the 
true  conch.  The  name,  it  must  be  remembered,  designates,  not 
some  particular  portion  of  a  shell,  but  any  portion  formed  during 
a  particular  stage  of  development;  thus  maj^  it  be  either  pro- 
toconch or  true  conch.  The  ananeanoconch  of  Cymatium  is 
formed  after  the  pelagic  larva  has  come  to  rest,  and  has  lost  the 
velum;  it  is  in  this  instance  moulded  inside  the  horny  veloconch, 
which  is  later  shed;  there  is  no  nepioconch.  In  Jfelo  and  Mega- 
latractus  it  was  formed  in  the  egg-capsule  and  was  deposited 
inside  a  horny  covering,  but  this  latter  is  perhaps  more  nearly 
analogous  to  the  adult  periostracum  than  to  the  veloconch  of 


BY  H.  LEIGHTON  KESTRVEN. 


329 


Cymatium,  and  probably  grew,  pari  passu,  with  the  calcareous 
ananeanoconch,  exactly  as  does  the  adult  periostracum  and  shell; 
moreover,  in  Megalatractus  the  horny  covering  is  extremely  thin. 
All  the  last  three  stages  may  be  shown  to  be  present  or  absent 
by  the  study  of  one  or  two  growth-stages  of  the  shell,  and  by 
taking  into  consideration  the  size  and  sculpture  of  the  protoconch. 
Taking  Megalatractus  aruanus  Linn.,  as  being  a  good  example 
wherewithal  to  illustrate  the  deductive  methods  which  may  be 
brought  to  hear  on  the  subject.^"  From  the  large  size  of  the 
mollusc  when  it  escapes  from  the  egg-capsule,  we  md^y  deduce 
the  fact  that  the  velum  had  been  aborted  some  time  prior  to  that 
date;  from  the  fact  that  the  whorls  are  angled  and  nodulose,  and 


Fig.  1.  Fig:.  2. 

Fig.  1. — Protoconch  (nat.  size).  Fig.  2. — Apical  whorls  of  decollated 
protoconch  showing  the  variation  in  the  direction  of  its  long  axis  and 
apparently  in  size,  of  the  portion  lost. 

that  some  are  striate,  we  deduce  a  mantle  assuming  the  adult 
condition,  and  therefore  well  developed;  this  we  ma}'-  the  more 
safely  do  from  the  fact  that  there  is  no  demarcation  between  the 
later  whorls  of  the  protoconch  and  the  earlier  whorls  of  the 
conch,  in  short  no  signs  of  nepionic  interruption.  Again,  there 
is  a  smooth  thimble-shaped  nuclear  portion  very  distinctly  marked 
off  from  the  coiled  whorls.  The  conclusions  that  may  be  arrived 
at  from  these  deductions  are  that  the  smooth  nuclear  portion  is 


*  A  full  description  of  the  protoconch  is  given  in  my  report  on  the 
"Anatomy  of  Megalatractus  aruanus  Linn."  (5).  For  the  opportunity  of 
reproducing  the  figures,  I  have  to  thank  the  Trustees  of  the  Australian 
Museum,  who  kindly  granted  the  loan  of  the  text-blocks. 


330  NOTES  ON  PROSOBRANCHIATA,  IV.^ 

not  older  than  the  veloconch,  that  the  nepioconch  was  very  pro- 
bably not  formed,  and  that  the  whole  of  the  coiled  portion  is 
ananeanoconch.  If  the  nepioconch  is  present,  it  is  represented 
by  the  earliest  of  the  coiled  whorls. 

From  the  large  size  and  very  slight  excentricity  of  the  extreme 
apex  (which  consists  of  phyloconch  (?)  and  veloconch)  it  may  be 
inferred  that  the  trochosphere  was  large,  since  excentricity  of 
growth  commences  very  shortly  after  that  stage,  and  the 
symmetrical  portion  was  probably  moulded  on  the  late  trocho- 
sphere or  early  veliger,  and  the  early  veliger  could  hardly  have 
been  large  had  not  the  preceding  stage  been  correspondingly 
large.  From  the  absence  of  a  nepioconch  I  deduce  a  poor 
development  of  the  velum,  because  the  absence  of  nepioconch 
probably  indicates  a  very  brief  nepionic  stage  {vide  4).  Finally, 
in  the  large  size  of  the  mollusc  at  the  time  of  its  escape  from  the 
capsule  we  have  certain  evidence  that  there  was  no  free-swimming 
stage.  Thus  if,  as  I  trust  they  are,  my  interpretations  be 
correct,  we  are  able  to  briefly  outline  the  later  embryonic  history 
of  a  mollusc  from  its  protoconch,  and  to  this  extent  embryology 
is  placed  within  the  range  of  palseomalacology. 

The  section  may  be  fittingly  concluded  by  the  following  quota- 
tion from  Lankester — "  ....  we  may  speak  of  primary, 
secondary,  and  tertiary  shells  in  Mollusca,  recognising  the  fact 
that  they  may  be  merely  phases  fused  by  continuity  of  growth 
so  as  to  form  but  one  shell,  or  that,  in  other  cases,  they  7nay 
be  presented  to  us  as  separate  individual  things,  in  virtue  of  the 
non-development  of  the  later  phases,  or  in  virtue  of  sudden 
changes  in  the  activity  of  the  mantle-surface  causing  the  shedding 
or  disappearance  of  one  phase  of  shell-formation  before  a  later 
one  is  entered  upon. "(6) 

iii. — The  Naticoid  Initial  Whorl. 

In  the  paper  above  referred  to  (1)  Grabau  concludes  that, 
because  the  initial  whorl  of  many  Gastropods  was  smooth, 
rounded  and  umbilicate,  the  Gastropod  radicle  was  of  this 
"  naticoid  "  character.     The  conclusion  is  ver}'  tempting,  but  it 


BY  H.  LEIGHTON  KESTBVEN.  331 

seems  that  if  we  look  below  the  surface  we  shall  find  that  it  is 
one  which  will  not  stand  the  light  of  investigation.  Although 
he  does  not  explicitly  state  so,  it  is  to  be  concluded  that  Grabau 
regarded  the  character  as  inherited;  for  I  take  it  that  it  could 
have  phylogenetic  significance  only  as  an  inherited  character. 
Reviewing  the  two  characters,  rotundity  and  umbilication. 
Firstly,  rotundity  :  at  the  age  when  the  mollusc  deposits  the 
initial  whorl  it  is  little  more  than  a  viscous  particle  of  protoplasm, 
differentiated  into  cells  certainl}^  but  very  little  firmer.  Now  it 
is  inconceivable  that  this  viscous  particle  could  form  an  angulated 
shell;  it  is  nob  endowed  with  pseudopodia  or  power  to  change  its 
rounded  form  for  an  angulated  one  as  are  the  Rhizopoda.  This 
consideration  must,  it  would  seem,  deprive  the  rounded  form  of 
the  initial  whorl  of  any  phylogenetic  significance.  Secondly, 
having  regard  to  the  umbilication,  a  moment's  thought  will  show 
that  all  torteconchs  are  more  or  less  umbilicate,  and  must  of  a 
necessity  be  so.  In  some  instances  the  umbilicus  is  filled  up  with 
callus,  and  when  the  former  is  small  we  designate  the  latter 
columella.  This  is  not  a  juggling  with  words,  but  a  statement 
of  a  fact.  It  is  impossible  to  wind  a  tube  spirally  without 
having  an  umbilicus  at  first,  when  the  said  tube  is  round  in  cross- 
section.  When  the  whorls  are  wound  in  the  same  plane  and  are 
increasing  in  size  there  will  be  a  concavity  on  both  sides,  one  of 
which  is  merely  a  wide,  much  flattened  umbilical  cavity.  Were 
it  possible  to  so  wind  a  shell  as  to  envelop  the  preceding  whorls, 
then  would  the  umbilicus  be  non-existent,  but  the  initial  portion 
is  thimble-shaped  and  symmetrical,  so  that  such  a  thing  is  a 
practical  impossibility.  Thus  we  see  that  even  such  genera  as 
Cyprcea,  Bulla,  Volvula,  etc. — types  from  which  both  columella 
and  umbilicus  are  absent — must  have  had  an  umbilicus  at  an 
early  stage  of  development,  for  the  envelopment  of  the  whorls 
did  not  begin  till  one  or  two  whorls  were  formed.  From  this 
it  will  be  seen  that  the  "  naticoid  initial  whorl"  is  not  an 
inherited  character  so  much  as  the  result  of  the  twisting;  i.e.,  the 
twisting  is  the  inherited  character  and  the  umbilicus  a  necessary 
result.     The  endeavour  to  determine  a  Gastropod  radicle  seems 


332  NOTES  ON  PROSOBRANCHIATA,   IV., 

to  be  somewhat  futile.  Granted  that  the  torteconch  evolved 
from  a  planoconch  (such  as  Patella)  and  that  we  had  the  complete 
series  to  study,  then  would  we  be  unable  to  draw  the  line 
between  planoconch  and  torteconch;  or  granted  that  the  torsion 
was  inherited  directly  from  the  molluscan  ancestor  and  that  we 
had  the  complete  genealogical  tree,  then  would  we  debate  as  to 
which  was  mollusc  and  which  ancestor. 

iv. — The  Systematic  Value  of  the  Protoconch. 

This  is  a  question  that  is  coming  into  greater  and  greater  pro- 
minence, and  one  worthy  of  our  closest  attention;  kept  within 
its  proper  limits,  it  bids  fair  to  be  a  most  valuable  character 
in  arriving  at  a  natural  classification  of  the  minor  groups  of  the 
Gastropoda.  There  seems,  however,  to  be  a  growing  inclination 
to  overestimate  its  value. 

If  the  protoconch  is  a  veloconch,  then  must  we  not  lose  sight 
of  the  fact  that  it  was  formed  by  the  mollusc  at  the  age  when  it 
had  only  just  assumed  a  definite  Gastropod  character,  that  is  the 
mollusc  was  so  young  that  it  had  not  as  yet  assumed  generic 
characters,  therefore  the  protoconch  can  hardly  be  reasonably 
used  as  a  generic  character.  The  same  applies  to  an  ananeano- 
conch  moulded  inside  a  veloconch.  An  ananeanoconch  such  as 
that  of  Megalatractus,  which  was  formed  independently  of  the 
veloconch,  will,  however,  betray  generic  characters,  as  would  the 
mollusc  itself  in  the  same  (ananeanic)  stage. 

I  concur  with  Grabau's  contention(l)  "that  the  protoconchs  of 
all  species  within  a  given  genus  should  agree  as  to  their  essential 
characters,  and  that  no  species  can  be  congeneric  in  which  the 
protoconchs  show  a  radical  difference,"  (the  italics  are  nnne)  but 
I  maintain  that  it  has  never,  and  believe  that  it  never  will  be 
shown  that  there  is  a  really  essential  deep-seated  difference 
between  the  protoconchs  of  moUusca  generically  allied  as  to  their 
shells  and  anatomy,  unless  the  said  protoconchs  be  ananeano- 
conchs. 

The  question  hinges  on  what  is  to  be  considered  an  essential 
or  radical  difference.      Let  us  review  one  or  two  instances.     Sup- 


BY  H.   LEIGHTON  KESTEVEN.  333 

posing  that  we  are  presented  with  shells  absolutely  congeneric, 
as  far  as  they  themselves  show,  but  having,  the  one  an  almost 
planorboid  protoconch,  the  other  an  elevated  conoidal  protoconch, 
would  we  be  justified  in  separating  them  generically  1      I  would 
answer  the  question  by  instancing  the  conoidal  Polinices  conicus 
Lam.,  and  the  almost  planorboid  P.   incei  Phil.,  and  still  more 
striking  Littorina  tieritoides  Brown,  and  L.  scabra  Linn.,  and  ask 
do  we  separate  these  generically  for  the  same  reason.     Moreover, 
our  hypothetical  case  is  almost  paralleled  in  the  genus  Cymatium 
by  species  which  are   undoubtedly  congeneric  in   shell,  radula, 
operculum  and  every  point  of  anatomy.     Thus  we  see  that  the 
plan  of  coiling  is  not  of  generic  importance  as  opposed  to  adult 
characters.      Again,  it  is  sometimes  found  that  the  protoconchs 
of  a  single  genus  differ  in   that  the  later  whorls  of   some   are 
sculptured  whilst  the  whole  protoconch  of  others  is  smooth.     The 
sculpture  in  such  cavses  will  be  found  to  be  merely  the  first  indi- 
cation of  the  adult  ornamentation,  and  to  be  attributable  merely 
to  extreme  tachygenetic  tendencies  of  the  species  possessing  it, 
rather  than  to  be  regarded  as  an  essential  difference.     Lastly,  in 
the  one  genus  there  sometimes  occur  symmetrical  conoidal  pro- 
toconchs, and  others  having  a  large  nucleus  placed  excentrically, 
with  the  later  whorls  coiled  regularly.     All  protoconchs  at  their 
inception  are  thimble-shaped,  therefore,  if  the  trochosphere  larva 
is  large,   and   therefore    also    the    early   veliger,    then    will    the 
thimble-shaped  portion  of  the  veloconch  be  large  in  proportion, 
it  follows  that  when  the  asymmetry  begins  to  appear  the  resultant 
coiling  will  be  more  or  less  excentric  at  first,  unless  the  diameter 
of    the    shell-mouth  increases  very   rapidly,    that  is,  unless  the 
mollusc  itself  enlarges  very  rapidly.     From  this  we  see  that  a 
large  nucleus,  excentric  or  regular,  results  from  a  large  trocho- 
sphere larva;  that  is  to  say,  the  size  of  the  nucleus  is  governed 
by  the  size  of  the  <d^^^^.     It  would  therefore  be  just  as  wrong  to 
regard  it  as  a  character  of  classificatory  value  as  it  would  be  to 
classify  the  Aves  by  the  size  of  their  eggs. 

Really  critical  differences  between  two  protoconchs  would  be — 
(I)  two  absolutely  different  types  of  sculpture,  which  were  not 


334  NOTES  ON   PROSOBRANCHIATA,  IV., 

merely  the  first  appearance  of  the  adult  sculpture,  whether 
accompanied  or  not  by  differences  of  contour;  (2)  the  presence  in 
one  and  absence  from  the  other  of  some  such  bizarre  feature  as  the 
sinuation  and  claw-like  processes  of  Purpura  protoconchs;  and 
(3)  a  completely  different  axis  of  coiling  in  the  two,  as  between 
Tripliora  and  Turhonilla.  Such,  however,  will  most  probably  be 
found  to  be  correlated  with  differences,  of  equal  or  greater 
importance,  in  shell  or  anatom3^ 

The  conclusions  of  this  section  are  that  the  protoconch  is  to  be 
used  in  conjunction  with  other  features,  and  that  only  where  the 
other  features,  anatomic  or  conchological,  are  negative  or  unknown 
is  it  to  be  used  in  deciding  a  systematic  position  or  generic 
segregation.  It  will  often  be  found  useful  as  an  indicator  of 
deeper  seated  differential  characters  otherwise  unsuspected. 

Just  as  this  goes  to  press  the  Journal  de  Conchyliologie  for 
May,  1905,  has  come  to  hand;  in  this  number  is  an  abstract  by 
G.  D(ollfus)  of  a  review  by  Dr.  Boettger  of  a  recent  paper  from 
the  pen  of  Grabau;  the  original  of  this  review  is  not  available  to 
me,  but  as  the  writer's  conclusions  are  very  pertinent  to  the 
present  discussion,  I  give  the  following  free  translation  of  the 
abstract — Dr.  Boettger  is  of  opinion  that  7io  iveighty  conclu- 
sions can  he  based  on  '  Heterostylie,^  that  is  to  say,  on  the 
difference  in  the  course  of  growth  of  the  spire  of  Gastropod 
shells;  he  recalls  the  fact  that  Sturany  in  the  expedition  of  the 
'  Pola '  found  very  different  embryos  for  3Iurex  trihuliis,  and  for 
Fasics  hifrons,  according  to  the  situation  whence  they  were 
collected,  and  that  they  were  always  larger  when  he  collected 
these  species  in  great  depths  than  when  he  collected  them  in 
coastal  regions.  It  seems,  indeed,  that  the  embryos  of  a  single 
species  are  able  to  undergo  a  kind  of  adaptation,  and  that  this 
differential  character,  far  from  recalling  an  ancestral  form^ 
appears  as  an  '  accommodation '  entirely  secondary. 


BY  H.  LEIGHTON  KESTEVEN.  335 

BIBLIOGKAPHY. 

1.  Grabau,  a.    W.— "Studies    of    Gastropoda."      American    Naturalist 

xxxvi.,  No.43,  1902,  p.917  et  seq. 

2.  Kesteven,  H.  Leighton.— "The  Protoconchs  of  Certain  Port  Jackson 

Gastropods."    Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xxvii.  Pt.  4,  1902,  p. 606 
et  seq. 

3. "Notes on ProsoftrancTiia^a.  No.i.  Lotorium.'' 

Loc.  cit.  p.  709  et  seq. 
4. "Notes  on  Prosobranchiata.      No.  iii.      The 

Neanic  Shell  of  Melo  diadema  Lamk. ,  and  the  Definition  of  the  Nepionic 

Stage  in  the  Gastropod  Mollusc."     Loc.  cit.   xxviii.  Pt.2,  1903,  p. 443 

et  seq. 
5. "The  Anatomy  of  Meg alatr actus.''     Austr. 

Mus.  Mem.  iv.  Sci.  Res.  of  the  Trawling  Exped.  of  H.M.C.S.  'Thetis.' 

Pt.8,  1904,  p.  419  et  seq. 
6.  Lankester,   E.  Bay.— Ency.  Brit.  edit.  9,  xvi.  p. 639  and  p. 662,  1885; 

Zool.  Arts.  p.  125,  1891. 


336 


ON  A  NEW  SPECIES  OF  EUCALYPTUS  FROM 
NORTHERN  NEW  SOUTH  WALES. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden,  Government  Botanist  and  Director 
Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

Eucalyptus  Dunnii,  sp.nov. 

A  large  White  Gum,"^  much  resembling  the  Blue  Gum  {E. 
saligna)  when  groNving  (W.  Dunn),  therefore  an  erect  grower. 
My  specimens  were  taken  from  a  tree  3  feet  in  diameter  and  70 
feet  high  (measured  felled). 

Bark. — Rough,  flaky  or  more  or  less  corky  at  the  butt  and 
for  a  varying  distance  up  the  stem;  thenceforward  the  bark  hangs 
in  ribbons.  "  The  rough  bark  or  ribbons  follow  the  tree  up  to 
the  topmost  branches,  and  the  tree  always  carries  more  of  it  than 
does  E.  saligiia  "  (W.  Dunn). 

Timber. — White  throughout,  from  the  sap  to  the  heart,  some- 
what coarse-grained  and  fissile.  Apparently  a  tough  wood. 
Stress  is  laid  on  the  quality  of  this  timber,  as  the  name  White 
Gum  usually  indicates  timber  of  poor  quality.  ]Mr.  Dunn 
writes:  "I  prefer  this  timber  to  that  of  our  local  Blue  Gum 
{E.  saligna),  the  White  Gum  being  not  so  free,  i.e.,  not  so  liable 
to  split.  It  is  the  best  White  Gum  I  have  ever  seen,  being  very 
free  from  gum  veins."  On  asking  for  verification  of  the  above 
high  estimate  of  the  timber,  Mr.  Dunn  wrote  under  date  4th 
June:  "Yesterday  I  measured  another  14,000  super,  feet  of  it. 
I  may  say  without  hesitation  that  it  is  very  durable,  and  superior 

*  "Recently  I  measured  15  of  these  trees,  felled  for  sawmill  timber,  con- 
taining 28,523  super,  feet;  this,  at  the  small  royalty  of  6d.  per  100  super. 
feet,  amounted  to  £7  2s.  7d."  (W.  Dunn,  30-iv.-05). 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN.  337 

to  the  E.  sdligna  that  grows  here.  [The  local  saligna  appears  to 
be  of  average  quality — J.H.M.]  I  again  interviewed  one  of  the 
saw-millers  who  is  sawing  some  of  it,  and  was  informed  b}'  him 
that  the  White  Gum  ?vill  keep,  and  he  intends  to  lay  in  a  stock 
of  it.  The  logs  will  not  crack  with  the  sun  like  Blue  Gum  does; 
altogether  it  is  a  tougher  timber  than  Blue  Gum,  and  it  becomes 
pretty  hard  when  it  is  exposed  to  the  sun  for  a  year  or  two.  It 
is  used  for  general  building  purposes,  joists,  rafters,  etc." 

Juvenile  foliage. — Nearly  cordate  to  broadly  lanceolate  (often 
up  to  4  inches  long  and  2  inches  wide  while  still  in  the  opposite 
stage);  petioles  thin,  and  usually  from  J  to  f  inch.  Texture 
thin,  undulate.  Bright  green,  paler  on  the  underside;  oil-dots 
abundant,  the  midrib  conspicuous  (particularly  on  the  underside), 
the  primary  veins  roughly  parallel,  and  at  an  angle  of  about  45° 
with  the  midrib;  intramarginal  vein  at  some  distance  from  the 
edge. 

Mature  foliage. — Lanceolate  leaves  with  petioles   of  an   inch 

and  more;  6  inches  and  more  in  length,  with  a  usual  breadth  at 
the  widest  part  of  1  to  1 J  inches.     Of  medium  texture;  oil-dots 

abundant.        Midrib    very    conspicuous    (white);    penniveined; 

intramarginal  vein  well   removed   from  the   edge.     The  mature 

leaves  resemble  those  of  the  well-known  E.  tereticornis  a  good 

deal.     Twigs  often  angular.     I  expect  this  species  will  yield  a 

good  percentage  of  oil. 

Buds. — Symmetrical  in  shape,  the  operculum  conical,  and  the 

calyx  of  similar  size  and  shape,  tapering  into  the   rather  short 

pedicel. 

Flowers. — Rather  small;  usually  3  to  5  in  the  umbel;  anthers 

with  parallel  cells. 

Fruits. — Hemispherical,  barely  \   inch   in   diameter,  abruptly 

tapering  into  a  pedicel  of  the  same  length.     Peduncle  of  about 

^  inch.      Rim  narrow  and  rather  sharp,  valves  well  exserted  and 

mostly  4  in  the  specimens  seen. 

Affinities. — Its   closest  affinity  would   appear  to   be   with    E. 

Daanei  Maiden.     The  juvenile  foliage  of  tlie  two  species  is  often 

remarkably  similar  in  texture,  shape,  and  apparently  many  other.. ^, 

22  /f,ti'  C"»:  /- 


vSk'V/ 


338  A  NEW  SPECIES  OF  EUCALYPTUS  FROM  NORTHERN  N.S.W. 

respects.  The  valves  of  the  fruits  of  E.  Deanei  are  not  exserted, 
or  but  slightly  so,  while  the  timbers  are  sharply  different,  that  of 
E.  Deanei  being  red. 

Certainly  E.  propinqua  Deane  and  Maiden,  is  a  species  with 
which  it  might  be  confused  with  herbarium  specimens  alone  (the 
bark  of  E.  propinqua  is  grey  and  patchy,  and  the  timber  red). 

The  leaves  of  E.  propinqua  have  finer  and  more  parallel  veins, 
but  in  buds,  flowers  and  fruits  the  resemblance  of  the  two  species 
is  sufficiently  close  to  necessitate  caution. 

The  similarity  of  the  leaves  of  E.  Dunnii  to  those  of  E.  tereti- 
cornis  is  often  marked,  as  has  already  been  noted. 

Hah. — Acacia  Creek,  Macpherson  Range,  New  South  Wales 
side.  Extends  into  Queensland  territory,  "  but  I  do  not  believe 
it  is  found  north  of  the  Condamine  River "  (William  Dunn, 
Forest  Guard;  specimen  No.  88). 

"  As  a  rule  it  is  found  on  the  lower  lands,  on  rich  volcanic  soil, 
along  the  banks  of  water-courses  and  the  like.  There  is  a  good 
deal  in  the  district,  but  I  do  not  know  any  other  district  where 
it  grows  "  (W.  Dunn).  It  would  appear  desirable  to  search  for 
further  localities  for  this  apparently  very  desirable  timber. 

The  species  is  named  in  honour  of  William  Dunn,  Forest  Guard, 
Acacia  Creek,  who  first  sent  it;  and  who  has  assiduously  collected 
the  forest  flora  of  his  district. 


339 


A  GELATIN-HARDENING  BACTERIUM. 

(Bacillus  indurans,  n.spj 

By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the 

Society. 

Bacteria  which  soften  and  liquefy  gelatin  are  very  numerous, 
but  a  microbe  that  hardens  gelatin  is,  I  think,  a  novelty.  Such 
a  micro-organism  was  isolated  during  the  bacteriological  examina- 
tion of  the  tissues  of  Schinus  molle,  the  specimen  of  which  was 
exuding  small  quantities  of  a  turquoise-coloured  gum-resin.  Two 
bacteria  were  isolated;  one  of  them,  from  the  bacterioscopic 
characters,  appeared  to  be  closely  allied  to,  if  not  identical  with, 
Bad.  acacice  var.  meiarabinum,  and  there  its  interest  ends.  The 
other  produced  a  slime,*  but  not  in  sufficient  quantity  to  warran  t 
one  in  considering  it  to  be  of  any  importance  on  that  account. 
When  it  was  grown  upon  ordinary  glucose-gelatin  in  stroke 
culture,  the  medium  was  slowly  darkened  in  colour  to  a  deep 
reddish-brown  or  mahogany  colour.  There  were  no  signs  of 
liquefaction,  but  on  the  contrary  when  the  culture  tube  was  put 
into  a  beaker  of  water  and  the  water  boiled,  the  gelatin  main- 
tained its  sloped  position,  which  prolonged  boiliDg  did  not  alter. 
The  original  medium  would  have  liquefied  soon  after  a  temperature 
of  25°  had  been  reached.     There  was  thus  something  secreted  by 

*  The  slime  was  grown  upon  levulose-asparagin-tannin  agar,  and  from  it 
a  gum  was  prepared  in  the  manner  that  has  been  frequently  described.  The 
gum  was  coagulated  by  alcohol,  basic  and  ammoniacal  lead  acetates,  barium 
hydrate  and  copper  sulphate  followed  by  potassium  hydrate.  Tannin  gave 
a  slight  opalescence.  No  reaction  was  obtained  with  copper  sulphate,  ferric 
chloride,  neutral  lead  acetate,  or  ferric  chloride  followed  by  ammonia. 


340  A    GELATIN-HARDENING    BACTERIUM, 

the  bacterium  that  was  capable  of  diffusing  through  gelatin  and 
either  directly  or  indirectly  affecting  it.  The  darkening  of  the 
medium  was  probably  a  phenomenon  connected  with  the 
hardening. 

Bearing  in  mind  the  action  of  tannin  upon  gelatin,  I  thought 
it  possible  that  some  of  the  constituents  of  the  medium  might 
have  been  altered  to  tannin  and  the  darkening  caused  by  traces 
of  iron  salts.  This,  however,  did  not  prove  to  be  the  case,  for 
the  addition  of  ferric  chloride  to  a  tube  of  the  molten  medium 
before  the  hardening  had  proceeded  far  showed  no  reaction. 
Fluid  cultures  contained  no  formaldehyde,  so  that  this  substance 
is  probably  absent  in  the  cultures  on  solid  media. 

Believing  that  the  mahogany  colour  might  be  caused  by  an 
oxidase  acting  upon  traces  of  tyrosin  in  the  medium,  I  added 
tyrosin  to  nutrient  gelatine  and  at  the  same  time  tried  the  effect 
of  different  sugars,  etc.,  and  noted  the  appearances  at  the  end  of 
9  and  28  days.  With  saccharose,  mannit,  lactose  and  levulose 
the  growths  were  good,  the  medium  slowly  liquefied,  and  only  a 
trace  of  colour  was  produced.  With  tyrosin  the  nutrient  gelatin 
showed  a  slight  tinge  of  brown  in  the  upper  layers,  but  the  colour 
disappeared.  With  galactose,  dextrose,  and  dextrose-tyrosin, 
the  growth  was  scanty  and  the  medium  became  deep  brown  in 
colour,  especially  in  the  middle  layers;  there  was  a  very  slight 
liquefaction;  a  single  drop  of  fluid  rested  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
stroke  on  the  28th  day.  As  no  increase  of  colour  resulted  from 
the  addition  of  tyrosin  to  dextrose,  and  as  the  colour  that 
developed  in  the  tube  with  tyrosin-nutrient  gelatin  was  faint,  it 
is  probable  that  the  production  of  colour  is  not  due  to  the  forma- 
tion and  oxidation  of  tyrosin  by  the  bacterium.  Oxidising 
enzj^mes  were  sought  for  by  adding  an  alcoholic  solution  of  gum 
guiacum  to  the  glucose-gelatin  before  sterilisation.  The  medium, 
after  infection,  behaved  as  glucose-gelatin;  the  brown  colour  was 
obtained  without  a  trace  of  blue,  which  is  characteristic  of  the 
oxidising  enzymes. 

The  partial  liquefaction  of  the  gelatin  leads  us  to  infer  that 
there  are  two  agents  at  work,  one  hardening,  the  other  liquefying 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  341 

the  gelatin.  In  the  presence  of  dextrose  or  galactose  the  latter 
is  almost  overcome  by  the  former,  but  with  other  sugars  the 
hardening  and  darkening  substance  is  not  produced.  When  the 
gelatin  is  hardened,  the  growth  is  always  scanty,  as  if  the  active 
substance  were  an  antiseptic  like  formaldehyde. 

The  hardening  substance  does  not  appear  to  be  formed  in  fluid 
cultures,  for  when  various  cultures  of  the  bacterium,  such  as 
Hansen's  fluid,  meat-extract  bouillon,  saccharose-peptone  fluid, 
dextrose-asparagin  fluid,  were  added  to  a  solution  of  gelatin  no 
hardening  was  obtained;  the  test  in  every  case  melted  at  the 
same  temperature  as  the  control. 

The  liquefaction  appears  to  proceed  slower  than  the  hardening, 
as  the  liquefied  gelatin  can  be  removed  from  above  the  dark 
medium  by  carefully  washing  it  with  water  and  the  unhardened 
gelatin  by  slowly  raising  the  temperature  and  removing  the 
medium  as  it  liquefies.  The  portions  at  the  bottom  of  the 
tube  as  well  as  the  top  parts  of  the  slope  as  a  rule  remain  in 
those  cases  in  which  the  liquefaction  has  made  a  slight  headway. 
It  is  only  when  the  medium  is  very  dark  that  the  hardening 
effect  can  be  clearly  demonstrated.  When  the  tube  is  placed  in 
boiling  water,  the  upper  portion  of  the  gelatin  slope  in  some 
cases  separates  from  the  glass  and  appears  to  be  of  a  horny 
nature,  while  the  medium  at  the  lower  part  of  the  slope  seems  to 
be  somewhat  flabby. 

The  effect  was  obtained  readily  when  the  microbe  had  been 
recently  isolated,  but  after  the  lapse  of  nearly  a  year  the  bacterium 
had  so  far  increased  the  relative  production  of  the  liquefying 
enzyme  that  one  had  to  adopt  means  for  circumventing  the  lique- 
faction. These  consisted  in  growing  the  bacterium  upon  glucose- 
gelatin  in  the  air  for  a  day  or  two  until  the  darkening  had  made 
a  slight  headway  and  then  putting  the  culture  tube  into  a 
Buchner  tube.  In  about  three  weeks  the  medium  had  become 
uniformly  dark  and  almost  black-brown.  In  some  cases  the 
medium  at  the  lower  part  of  the  stroke,  although  apparently  soft, 
had  not  liquefied,  and  in  placing  the  culture  tube  in  water  at  40° 
about  0  5   CO.   of  the   soft  medium  liquefied ;    upon  this  being 


342  A    GELATIN-HARDENING    BACTERIUM. 

removed,  the  remainder  remained  firm  when  the  temperature  was 
raised  to  100°.  In  other  cases  the  medium  remained  firm,  dark 
brown,  and  did  not  liquefy. 

Bacillus  indurans,  n.sp. 

Shape,  etc. — The  cells  appear  as  rods  with  rounded  ends.  They 
vary  in  size;  when  taken  from  saccharose-potato-agar  and  stained, 
the  smallest  measure  0-5:  1-3 /x,  the  largest  0-6:  2-2 /x.  When 
taken  from  bouillon,  they  vary  from  0*4  :  1  /x  to  0-8  :  2  /m.  Many 
of  the  cells  are  vacuolated.  The  bacteria  are  active]}'-  motile,  the 
flagella  being  numerous  and  peritrichous.  They  are  negative  to 
the  Gram  stain.      No  spores  were  observed. 

Glucose-gelatin  plate. — The  colonies  are  flat,  glistening  and 
translucent  white  with  a  lacerate  edge.  Microscopically  they  are 
translucent  and  yellowish  with  central  granules  and  club-shaped 
structures  scattered  chiefly  in  the  middle  portions.  The  margin 
is  very  finely  granular.  At  a  later  date,  when  the  colony  has 
sunk  into  the  gelatin,  a  crumpling,  especially  at  the  margins,  is 
observed. 

Nutrient  agar  plate. — The  colonies  are  raised,  glistening,  trans- 
lucent white  and  rounded.  When  magnified  the  colonies  appear 
translucent  and  yellowish  with  granules  scattered  around  the 
centre. 

Glucose-gelatin  stroke. — The  growth  is  narrow,  white  and  flat, 
with  lateral  amoeboid  offshoots.  The  medium  may  be  very  slowly 
liquefied  in  the  vicinity  of  the  lower  end  of  the  stroke.  A 
reddish-mahogany  colour  appears  in  the  upper  layers  and  slowly 
diffuses  downwards,  while  the  colour  deepens.  The  white  culture 
takes  up  the  colour  and  becomes  a  reddish-buff.  The  medium  is 
rendered  insoluble. 

Glucose-gelatin  stab. —  The  stab  is  filiform,  the  nail-head  small, 
white  and  flat.  There  is  no  apparent  liquefaction,  and  the  dark 
colour  slowly  diffuses  downwards. 

Nutrient  gelatin  stab.  —  A  white  flat  surface-growth  is  imbedded 
in  the  softened  medium.  The  stab  appears  as  a  spiral  thread 
within  a  tube  of  soft  gelatin. 


BY    R.    GREIG    SMITH.  343 

Nutrient  agar  stroke. — A  smooth,  flat,  translucent  white  growth 
with  a  smooth  edge.  A  slightly  brownish  tinge  appears  in  the 
upper  portion  of  the  slope. 

Saccharose-potato-agar. — A  white,  moist,  slimy  growth. 

Potato. — A  yellowish,  raised,  dry-glistening,  restricted  growth. 
The  medium  becomes  purplish  then  brownish. 

Bouillon. — The  medium  becomes  turbid  and  there  is  formed  a 
faint  surface-ring  and  a  coherent  sediment.  Indol  is  produced 
and  nitrates  are  reduced  to  nitrites. 

Milk. — The  medium  is  unaltered. 


344 


ON  THE  SUPPOSED  NUMERICAL  PREPONDERANCE 
OF  THE  MALES  IN  ODONATA. 

By    R.    J.    TiLLYARD,    B.A. 

Those  entomologists  who  have  paid  any  attention  to  the 
"  Odonata,"  or  Dragonflies,  have  all  agreed  in  stating  that  the 
males  outnumber  the  females  very  considerably  in  most,  if  not  in 
all,  of  the  species.  It  is  not  necessary  here  to  give  a  lengthy  list 
of  quotations  from  European  or  American  authors  who  have  made 
this  observation;  it  is  sufficient  to  quote  M.  Rene  Martin,  one  of 
the  very  best  authorities  on  the  Odonata,  and  one  who  has  an 
extensive  knowledge  of  many  of  our  Australian  species.  Speaking 
of  Xanthagrion  erythroneurum,  one  of  the  Australian  Agrionidce, 
he  says,  "Les  males  semblent  etre  plus  nombreux  que  les  femelles; 
ce  qui  est  un  cas  frequent  chez  beaucoup  d'especes  d'Odonates.""^ 
The  statement  can  be  well  borne  out  by  anyone  who  will  take  the 
trouble  to  examine  any  extensive  collection  of  Odonata  from  any 
part  of  the  world.  It  is  generally  found  that  in  collections  the 
males  outnumber  the  females  by  nearly  two  to  one.  One  may 
well  doubt,  however,  that  Nature  has  struck  such  an  uneven 
balance  between  the  sexes.  In  this  paper  I  shall  endeavour  to 
set  out  the  reasons  which  have  led  to  the  prevailing  view,  and  to 
show  that  in  reality  it  is  not  the  case,  but  that  the  numbers  of 
the  sexes  are  approximately  equal. 

My  own  collection,  made  in  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland 
during   the    past    season,   is   no  exception   to  the  general    rule. 

*  A  List  of  Dragonflies  of  Australia  :  J.  G.  0.  Tepper;  annotated  by  M. 
Een6  Martin. 


BY  R.  J.  TILLYARD.  345 

Knowing  that  a  day's  collecting  generally  yields  many  more 
males  than  females  of  any  given  species,  I  have  always  made 
great  efforts  to  secure  sexual  equality  in  my  series  by  searching 
out  the  haunts  of  the  females.  The  final  result  appears  as 
follows  : — Out  of  a  total  of  563  set  specimens,  352  are  males 
and  210  females,  a  proportion  of  5  to  3  in  favour  of  the 
males.  This  is,  however,  stating  the  case  unfairly,  for  out 
of  several  hundred  unset  specimens  which  I  have  collected 
besides,  nearly  all  are  males.  Taking  a  total  of  over  800  speci- 
mens, I  find  that  under  300  are  females;  so  that  the  proportion 
is  in  reality  very  nearly  2  to  1.  Turning  to  species,  out  of  90 
species  collected,  only  five  species  are  unrepresented  by  male  speci- 
mens; while  in  no  less  than  26  cases  have  I  failed  to  secure  the 
female  of  a  particular  species  at  all.  This  is  a  remarkable  result, 
and  appears  to  make  it  extremely  doubtful  whether  the  numerical 
equality  of  the  sexes  really  holds  in  the  "  Odonata." 

There  are,  however,  many  reasons  why  a  collector  always 
captures  many  more  males  than  females.  The  males  are  the 
more  conspicuous  of  the  two,  the  more  brilliantly  coloured,  and 
more  frequently  on  the  wing.  Moreover  they  love  to  congregate 
in  marshy  spots  and  along  the  borders  of  creeks  and  rivers  where 
one  is  accustomed  to  search  for  dragonflies,  while  the  females 
often  retire  into  the  bush  or  hide  themselves  in  the  herbaore. 
The  female,  too,  is  fond  of  coming  out  to  feed  at  dusk^  when 
crowds  of  gnats  and  mosquitoes  fall  an  easy  prey  to  her.  I  have 
a  specimen  of  T elephlehia  GocUfroyi,  a  female,  which  flew  into  a 
lighted  room  about  10  o'clock  at  night,  and  a  female  of  Hemianax 
Papioensis  taken  at  an  arc-light  in  the  city.  I  do  not  know  of 
any  case  in  which  a  male  has  been  taken  so  late  at  night.  On 
one  occasion  an  hour's  collecting  on  the  borders  of  a  large  lagoon 
in  Northern  Queensland  yielded  me  nearly  two  dozen  Rhyothemis 
graphiptera,  all  males;  but  a  walk  of  a  mile  or  more  through  the 
bush  and  back  yielded  four  females  and  no  males.  On  another 
occasion  I  took  over  a  dozen  Synthemis  eustalacta,  all  males,  in 
a  marsh  on  the  Blue  Mountains;  on  the  way  home  two  specimens 
were  captured   far   from   any   water;  these   were  both  females. 


346  NUMERICAL  PREPONDERANCE  OF  THE  MALES  IN  ODONATA, 

Again,  a  dozen  males  of  Diplacodes  melayiopsis  were  taken  by  me 
one  afternoon  round  a  small  pond  near  the  Clarence  River;  in  the 
bush  some  hundreds  of  yards  away  I  took  four  females  and  saw 
only  one  male.  The  female  of  D.  bipicnctata,  too,  was  common 
in  this  spot,  but  I  succeeded  in  taking  only  one  male.  Still 
another  species  of  Diplacodes,  D.  hcamatodes,  is  abundant  along 
many  small  creeks  and  rivers;  yet  I  never  succeeded  in  taking  the 
female  of  this  species  until  one  day  I  returned  home  along  the 
railway  line  some  distance  from  any  water.  In  one  of  the 
cuttings  the  females  simply  swarmed,  but  I  saw  only  one  male. 
On  another  occasion  I  collected  along  13  miles  of  railway  track 
in  Northern  Queensland,  mostly  through  dense  bush;  out  of  21 
specimens  taken,  17  were  females,  and  two  of  them,  which  I 
caught  actually  inside  a  tunnel,  were  females  of  a  species  of 
which  I  have  never  seen  the  male. 

These  facts,  I  think,  prove  conclusively  that,  except  during 
oviposition,  the  males  and  females  are  in  many  instances  quite 
separated,  and  only  those  collectors  who  will  take  the  trouble  to 
search  in  out  of  the  way  places,  often  far  from  water,  will  be 
able  to  obtain  a  good  series  of  females.  That  this  separation 
and  retirement  of  the  females  is  the  reason  for  the  apparent 
numerical  superiority  of  the  males,  there  can  be  very  little  doubt. 

But  something  more  than  this  is  required  to  prove  the  actual 
numerical  equality  of  the  sexes.  Even  when  searching  for  the 
females  in  their  special  haunts,  it  is  only  on  very  few  occasions 
that  they  will  be  found  in  anything  like  the  abundance  of  the 
males  in  their  special  haunts.  A  glance  at  the  cases  of  R. 
graphiptera  and  D.  melanopsis  given  above  (and  many  other 
instances  could  be  given)  still  leaves  us  with  the  conviction  that 
the  males  are  greatly  in  the  majority.  To  prove  that  either  this 
or  the  contrary  is  really  the  case,  it  would  be  necessary  to  show 
the  proportion  that  actually  exists  among  the  nymphs  of  any 
given  species.  This  I  have  endeavoured  to  do  by  rearing  a  large 
number  of  the  nymphs  of  any  given  species.  The  nj'mph 
that  is  most  easily  obtained  around  Sydney  is  that  of 
Lestes     Leda,     one     of     our  commonest     Agrionids,     and     one 


BY  R.  J.  TILLYARD. 


347 


moreover  in  which  the  proportion  of  two  to  one  in  favour 
of  the  male  can  easily  be  shown  to  prevail  in  the  case  of 
the  perfect  insect.  I  have  taken  this  insect  in  man}^  localities 
around  Sydney,  and  wherever  it  occurs  I  have  found  the  males 
far  more  numerous  than  the  females.  The  result  obtained  then 
by  breeding  out  a  number  of  the  nymphs  should  carry  great 
weight.  During  last  season  I  kept  in  my  aquarium  about  a 
hundred  nymphs  of  this  species.  These  nymphs  were  taken  from 
waterholes  and  small  creeks  without  any  selection  of  the  darkest 
or  largest  forms;  in  fact  every  specimen  brought  out  of  the 
water  by  the  net  was  put  into  the  aquarium.  One  only,  a  fine 
and  healthy  specimen  of  a  very  dark  form,  was  separated  from 
the  rest  and  put  into  a  small  jar  for  observation.  During  August 
and  September  of  last  year  many  of  these  nymphs  emerged  from 
the  aquarium.  The  period  of  observation  was  just  one  month, 
from  August  8th  to  September  7th,  none  emerging  after  the 
latter  date.  The  following  is  a  careful  record  of  the  sex  and 
date  of  appearance  of  the  specimens  :  — 


Date. 

No.  OF  Males. 

No.  OF  Females. 

Aug.    8th 

"i 

"3 

"1 
2 
3 
2 

1 

1 
1 

,,     l.Sth 

,,     18th 

,.     19th 

,      21st                          

..     23rd         

„     25th 

„     27th 

,,     28th 

Sept.    1st 

„       3rd 

4th    .              

,,       5th  

7th 

Total 

13 

12 

One  of  these,  the  male  that  emerged  on  Aug.  1 3th,  was  the 
one  that  had  been  specially  selected  and  separated  for  observa- 
tion. Since  he  had  the  advantage  over  the  others  in  an  abund- 
ance of  food,  which  the  others  certainly  had  not,  and  since  he 


348  NUMERICAL  PREPONDERANCE  OF  THE  MALES  IN  ODONATA, 

was  a  picked  specimen,  I  propose  to  leave  him  out  of  account, 
both  as  regards  his  early  date  of  appearance  and  as  affecting  the 
numerical  ratio  of  the  sexes.  We  then  have  the  following 
remarkable  result — remarkable,  I  mean,  in  view  of  the  supposed 
numerical  inequality  of  the  sexes — that  out  of  100  nymphs  24 
bred  out,  and  of  these  exactly  half  were  males  and  half  females. 

With  other  species  I  had  not  the  same  success  in  breeding. 
The  nymphs  of  Ischnura  delicata,  of  which  I  had  about  a  score, 
nearly  all  fell  victims  to  the  rapacious  nymphs  of  larger  species. 
Of  four  which  emerged,  two  were  males  and  two  females. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  breed  a  large  number  of  nymphs  of 
other  common  species  in  order  to  see  whether  the  result  given  by 
Lestes  Leda  is  really  typical  of  the  generality  of  species.  Of 
this,  however,  there  can  be  very  little  doubt.  To  my  mind,  the 
experiment  proves  the  ratio  of  the  numbers  of  the  sexes  to  be 
one  almost  of  equality  in  any  given  species. 

The  other  fact  to  be  noticed  is  that  the  females  of  L.  Leda 
appear  before  the  males  (leaving  out  of  account  the  selected 
specimen).  The  first  female  appeared  on  Aug.  8th  and  the  first 
male  on  Aug.  27th,  nearly  three  weeks  later.  This  has  to  be 
borne  in  mind  when  collecting.  In  the  early  part  of  the  season 
I  have  always  found  the  females  of  species  before  the  males.  It 
seems  probable  that  the  females  fly  early  near  their  breeding 
places  and  later  on  retire  into  the  bush  or  conceal  themselves  in 
the  herbage,  only  appearing  again  in  company  with  the  males  for 
oviposition.  This,  then,  would  account  for  collectors  who  are 
out  in  mid-season  only  obtaining  a  few  females. 

There  is  one  subfamily,  the  Aeschnince,  which  appears  to  be  an 
exception  to  the  general  rule.  In  this  subfamily  the  number  of 
females  captured  is  nearly  always  equal  to,  if  not  actually  in 
excess  of,  the  number  of  males.  Thus  out  of  38  specimens  taken 
by  me  last  season,  18  were  males  and  20  females.  There  were 
twelve  species  represented;  in  four  cases  I  did  not  obtain  the 
male,  and  in  four  cases  also  I  failed  to  obtain  the  female.  In 
this  case,  then,  the  rule  of  numerical  equality  of  the  sexes  is 
borne  out  in  collecting.      The  reason  appears  to  be  that  they  are 


BY  R.  J.  TILLYARD.  349 

by  far  the  swiftest  and  strongest  of  our  Dragonflies,  and  that 
therefore  neither  the  male  nor  the  female  relies  very  much  upon 
concealment,  both  hawking  freely  together  over  the  creeks  and 
rivers. 

We  conclude,  then,  that  the  ratio  of  numbers  of  the  sexes  in 
the  "Odonata  "  is  a  ratio  of  equality;  the  idea  of  the  preponder- 
ance of  the  males  suggested  by  a  consideration  of  existing  collec- 
tions, and  voiced  from  time  to  time  by  many  eminent  naturalists, 
is  not  borne  out  by  rearing  a  large  number  of  nymphs,  and  has 
its  origin  in  the  causes  suggested  above. 


350 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  (1)  specimens  of  the  new  species  of 
Eucalyptus  described  in  his  paper.  (2)  A  specimen  of  Acacia 
leptoclada  A.  Cunn.,  from  Howell,  showing  stem-fasciation,  which 
appears  to  be  rare  in  the  genus.  And  (3)  a  number  of  coloured 
drawings  of  seedlings  of  various  stages,  from  cotyledon  leaves 
to  first  leaves  and  first  alternate  leaves,  in  the  genus  Eucalyptus. 
His  plan  is  to  sow  seed  from  well-authenticated  materials  of 
which  herbarium  specimens  are  preserved  for  reference.  Under 
his  direction  Miss  Margaret  Flockton  had  made  about  200 
drawings  so  far,  and  he  had  described  the  seedlings  in  detail, 
somewhat  on  the  lines  of  Lubbock's  "  Seedlings."  The  results 
were  very  interesting,  and  brought  out  affinities  between  species, 
some  of  which  were  perhaps  unexpected,  or,  it  may  be,  only  guessed 
at.  He  intended  to  increase  the  number  of  seedlings  (all  raised 
in  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney)  very  considerably  before 
submitting  a  monograph  for  publication. 

Mr.  T.  Steel  exhibited  very  fine  living  examples  of  the  follow- 
in"-  land  planarians  : — Geoplana  Sugdeni,  G.  McJIahoni,  and  G. 
sang^dnea,  collected  by  Mr.  H.  W.  Davey  in  Victoria. 

Mr.  R.  H.  Cambage  exhibited  a  good  series  of  specimens  of 
irregularly  cylindrical,  more  or  less  tubular,  aggregations  of 
quartz  (and  shell)  sand,  cemented  to  a  coherent  mass  with 
carbonate  of  lime,  from  Barren] oey,  where  they  are  plentifully 
distributed  over  a  distance  of  200-300  yards  on  the  upper  part 
of  the  beach  which  separates  Pittwater  from  the  ocean.  Many 
are  standing  upright  in  the  sand,  about  6  inches  high,  as  though 
the  incrustation  had  formed  about  the  lower  parts  of  plants, 
before  the  sand  had  been  denuded.  Others  were  winding  about 
on  the  top  of  the  sand,  and  were  at  once  suggestive  of  root  shapes. 
These  incrustations,  which  have  a  general  resemblance  to 
fulcrurites,  vary  in  diameter  from  f  to  |  of  an  inch,  and  show  a 
pipe  which,  it  is  supposed,  was  originally  occupied  by  a   root. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  351 

Similar  specimens,  lent  by  Mr.  G.  W.  Card,  A.R.S.M.,  from  the 
Geological  Survey  Museum,  Mines  Dept.,  and  collected  at  Port 
Hacking,  were  also  exhibited.  The  exhibits  were  apparently  of 
a  similar  nature  to  the  tubular  structures  noticed  in  dune  sands 
in  other  parts  of  Australia,  as  described  in  detail  by  Mr.  T.  S. 
Hall,  M.A.,  in  a  paper  "On  certain  Incrustations  on  Wood  in 
Dune  Sand."* 

Mr.  Froggatt  showed  specimens  of  the  Vine  Moth,  Phalcenoldes 
(Agarista)  glycine  Lewin;  and  also  of  a  parasite,  the  Red-legged 
Ichneumon,  Pimpla  iiitricatoria  Fabr.  The  pupse  of  the  Moth 
were  collected  in  an  orchard  at  Canley  Yale.  Pupation  ordinarily 
takes  place  in  the  ground;  but  in  this  particular  instance  the 
chrysalides  were  developed  among  leaves  pressed  against  the 
stakes  when  the  vines  were  tied  up;  and  scarcely  a  single  one 
had  escaped  the  attention  of  the  parasite. 

On  behalf  of  the  author,  Mr.  Hedley  exhibited  the  types  of 
the  deep-water  Crustacea  described  in  Mr.  Grant's  paper. 

Mr.  Hedley  also  exhibited,  on  behalf  of  Mr.  Bassett  Hull, 
good  examples  of  Pearl  Oyster  Spat  (probably  Meleagrina 
vulgaris  Schumacher)  found  on  pieces  of  pumice  washed  up  on 
the  beaches  north  of  Sydney,  between  7th  February  and  31st 
March,  1904.  At  the  end  of  1903  a  submarine  disturbance 
occurred  at  Tanna,  New  Hebrides.  On  the  8th  January,  1904, 
the  schooner  '  Enterprise '  sailed  for  two  days  through  floating 
pumice  some  200  miles  west  of  the  Banks  Islands.  From  Feb- 
ruary to  March,  1904,  many  tons  of  pumice  were  washed  ashore 
on  the  beaches  of  Deewhy,  Curl  Curl,  Freshwater  and  Manly. 
Many  pieces  bore  pearl  oyster  spat  from  ^  of  an  inch  to  IJ^  inch 
in  diameter.  These  were  all  alive,  and  even  after  exposure  to 
rain  and  sun  for  72  hours  showed  signs  of  life.  From  one  piece 
of  pumice  weighing  about  20  oz.  no  less  than  40  spat  were  taken. 

Mr.  R.  T.  Baker  exhibited  specimens  of  a  nut  (sic)  found  a 
few  inches  in  the  ground,   and  which  are  scratched  up,  and  the 

*  Victorian  Naturalist,  xviii,  45,  July,  1901. 


352  NOTKS    AND    EXHIBITS. 

kernels  eaten  by  rat  kangaroos.  Mr.  H.  J.  O'Neill,  who  dis- 
covered these  specimens  at  Wombeyan,  Taralga,  writes  concerning 
them,  ''1  am  forwarding  some  more  of  the  nuts  (sic)  at  your 
request.  These  I  found  in  loose  sandy  soil  of  a  high  situation; 
the  piece  of  soil  was  about  an  acre  in  extent,  and  outside  this 
area  no  more  of  the  nuts  could  be  found.  I  could  not  hear  of 
any  being  found  in  other  parts  of  this  district.  There  is  very 
little  doubt,  if  any,  of  the  wallabies  eating  the  kernels;  they 
scratch  to  the  depth  of  about  three  inches,  and  about  the  edge 
of  the  holes  are  found  the  broken  outside  crusts  of  the  nuts 
and  sometimes  the  yellowish  powder.  They  are  attached  to 
roots,  as  you  will  see  by  some  of  the  specimens,  and  a  number 
of  the  nuts  are  generally  together,  like  potatoes  beneath  a  stalk. 
The  local  people  know  very  little  concerning  them;  those  from 
whom  I  have  sought  information  had  never  seen  them  before." 
So  far  it  has  not  been  possible  to  botanically  place  them. 
They  vary  in  size  from  a  large  Queensland  nut  (Macadamia 
ternijolia)  to  a  small  Quandong  (Fusanus  acuminatus).  The 
outer  shell  or  coating  consists  of  cemented  sand  adhering  to 
an  apparently  extraneous  root.  The  interior  is  composed  of 
three  portions — (1)  a  thin  shell  or  testa;  (2)  a  middle  layer 
(?  tegmen)  about  i  inch  thick,  and  composed  entirely  of  fungus 
spores;  (3)  the  kernel  which  is  about  J  inch  in  diameter,  a  dirty 
white  in  colour,  and  is  rich  in  a  tixed  oil — the  constituent  which 
probably  makes  the  kernel  palatable  to  the  rat  kangaroo. 

Mr,  H.  J.  Carter  exhibited  examples  of  two  beetles — Paussojy- 
tinus  laticornis  Lea  (Fam.  Ptiuidce),  and  Nepharis  alata  Castelnau 
(Fam.  Colydidce) — taken  from  ants'  nests  in  North  West  Victoria, 
and  described  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Victoria 
for  1905  by  Mr.  Lea. 

Mr.  Kesteven  showed  j)rotoconchs  of  Meyalatr actus  aruanus 
Lian.,  in  illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Palmer  gave  some  additional  particulars  of  the  breeding 
haljits  of  the  Chestnut-eared  Finch  in  captivity. 

[Printed  off  September  2.Srd,  1905.] 


P.L.S.N.S.W.,    190£ 


-V^:P 


^'S^^,lM^-&t, 


&# 


ACACIA    SP.    ("  MOTHERUMBUNG  "J. 


P.L.S.N.S.W.,    190E 


ACACIA    PENDULA, 


.i.   Canii  (,"  myall"), 


PLSN.S.W.  1905, 


PI .  tv. 


R.T.B.del. 


HJABarvnJith 


ACTINOTUS    PADDISONI,  R.T.B 


P.L.S.N.S.W.,    1905. 


Fig.  1  (X  16). 


F.C.,  Photoluicr. 


Fiy.   -1  (X  LU). 

MIOCENE    KORAMINIFEHAL    LIMESTONES,    NEW    HEBRIDES. 


'.L.S.N.S.W..     1905. 


Fi?.  1. 


F.C.,  Fhotuiuicr. 


lOCENE    FORAMINIFERA.     NEW    HEBRIDES. 


P.L.S.N.S.W.,    1905. 


X32 


K  3a 


^^fcftii^.. 


%  3X 


F.C  ,  Photo. 


MIOCENE    FOSSILS    FROM    THE    NEW    HEBRIDES. 


P.L.S.N.S.W.I905 


'"^"'»     I    Vert.cc- 


^Shwrst,^    j.'l       30  n 


I 


.S.N.fi.w..    1908. 


-//X//  i^< 


F.t  G   dU 


aiAN    PEEP-WATER    M ALACOSTRACA  , 


353 


WEDNESDAY,  SEPTEMBER  27th,   1905. 


The  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  of  the  Society  was  held  in 
the  Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  September  27th,  1905. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.',  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

The  President  made  the  following  announcement  : — 
Graduates  in  Science  of  the  University  of  Sydney  who  may  wish 
to  qualify  as  Candidates  for  two  Linnean  Macleay  Fellowships  to 
be  offered  by  the  Council  before  the  close  of  the  year,  but  who 
are  not  at  present  Members  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  New  South 
Wales,  are  recommended  to  take  steps  to  provide  for  their  nomina- 
tions at  the  Meeting  to  be  held  on  25th  October,  1905. 

The  President  commended  to  the  notice  of  Members  circulars 
setting  forth  the  objects  and  organization  of  the  projected  British 
Science  Guild,  received  from  Professor  Liversidge,  LL.D.,  F.R.S., 
Hon.  Secretary,  Australasian  Association  for  the  Advancement 
of  Science,  Sydney.  Attention  was  called  also  to  a  preliminary 
circular  announcement  respecting  the  contemplated  publication 
of  the  "  Australian  Journal  of  Science,  edited  by  Professor 
Liversidge,"  to  be  issued  monthly. 

The  Donations   and   Exchanges  received    since   the   previous 

Monthly   Meeting,  amounting  to  9  Vols.,  35  Parts  or  Nos.,  27 

Bulletins,   32  Pamphlets,  1   Report,  and  1  Miscellanea,  received 

from  34  Societies,  ifec,  and  1  Individual,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 

23 


354 


NOTES  FROM  THE  BOTAKIC  GARDENS,  SYDNEY. 

No.  11. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden  and  E.  Betche. 

CRUCIFER^. 

LepidiUxM  rotundum  DC,  var.  phlebopetalum,  var.nov. 

(Syn.  Lepidium  phlebopetalum  F.v.M.). 

The  West  Australian  Lepidium  rotundum  was  added  to  the 
flonn  of  New  South  Wales,  in  1893,  in  Moore  and  Betche's  Hand- 
book of  the  Flora  of  New  South  Wales,  from  specimens  trom 
Byrock  with  such  broad  pod-wings  that  they  could  not  \vell  be 
included  in  L.  phlebo-petalum.  Since  then,  more  East  as  well  as 
West  Australian  material  has  passed  through  our  hands,  and  has 
convinced  us  that  L.  phlehopetalum  cannot  be  upheld  as  a  species. 
Bentham  remarked  as  early  as  1863  (B.Fl.  i.  p.85)  : — "  L.  pMeho- 
petalum  is  very  closely  allied  to  L.  rotundum,^  and  perhaps  a 
variety  only,  scarcely  differing  from  it  except  in  the  pod."  We 
now  propose  to  reduce  it  to  a  variety  of  L.  rotundum. 

CAPPAIIIDE.S:. 
Capparis  sarmentosa  a.  Cunn. — New  for  New  South  Wales. 

Acacia  Creek,  Macpherson  Range,  near  the  Queensland  border 
(J.  L.  Boorman;  Feb.  '05). 

Previously  recorded  only  from  Southern  Queensland.  Accord- 
ing to  the  collector  it  is  fairly  common  in  the  Acacia  Creek  district, 
on  the  edges  of  scrubs. 

Capparis  nobilis  F.v.M.,  var.  pubescens,  Benth. 

Acacia  Creek  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Feb.  '05). 

Though  we  refer  this  plant  to  Bentham's  var.  pubescens,  it 
differs  from  it  in  the  climbing  habit.  According  to  the 
collector's  notes    it   perfectly  assumes  the    habit  of    a   climber; 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN    AND    E.    BETCHE.  355 

the  stem,  covered  with  short  conical  prickles,  overruns  tall  forest 
trees,  attaining  a  length  of  over  120  feet  and  4  inches  in 
diameter.  The  flowers  are  smaller  than  in  the  arborescent  and 
shrubby  forms,  and  white  with  pale  blue  stamens.  The  young 
branches  and  underside  of  the  leaves  are  densely  covered 
with  short  soft  hairs.  The  Acacia  Creek  form  of  C.  nobilis 
has  the  climbing  habit  in  common  with  the  Norfolk  Island  form, 
the  type  on  which  the  species  was  founded  (as  Busbeckia), 
but  only  the  habit;  the  shape  of  the  leaves,  the  inflorescence,  bud, 
and  colour  of  flowers  are  those  of  the  continental  form;  the 
fruits  we  have  not  seen.  It  difi'ers  further  from  the  Norfolk 
Island  form  in  the  stem,  which  is  smooth  in  the  Norfolk  Island 
plant  and  prickly  in  that  from  Acacia  Creek.  Capparis  nobilis 
is  truly  a  polymorphous  plant.  We  have  leaf-specimens  of  a  fair- 
sized  seedling  plant  from  Ash  Island,  in  the  Hunter  River, 
collected  by  one  of  us  in  October,  1903,  of  totally  different 
appearance.  The  leaves  are  ovate,  acuminate,  |  to  1  inch  long, 
distichous,  shortly  petiolate,  and  with  stipular  spines  4  to  6  lines 

long. 

SAMYDACE^. 

Casearia   esculenta  Roxb. — New  for  New  South  Wales. 

Sandiland  Ranges  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Nov.  '04,  in  flower). 
Acacia  Creek,  Macpherson  Range  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Feb.  '05,  in 
fruit). 

A  shrub  or  small  tree  attaining  20  to  30  feet  in  height,  with  a 
stem  not  exceeding  6  inches  in  diameter,  as  far  as  seen. 

The  species  is  widely  spread  over  the  East  Indies,  where  the 
leaves  are  used  by  the  natives  as  a  spice  in  stews,  hence  the 
specific  name;  we  have  no  evidence  that  the  Australian  aborigines 
made  use  of  the  plant  in  any  way. 

This  record  adds  a  new  Natural  Order  to  the  flora  of  the  State. 

STERCULIACEiE. 
Lasiopetalum  longistamineum,  sp.nov. 
Mt.  Dangar,  Gungal;  in  moist  warm   places  in   rich  alluvial 
deposits  (J.    L.    Boorman;    Sept.  '04,   in   bud;  and  Dec.  '04,  in 
flower  and  fruit). 


356  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.   XL, 

A  spreading,  somewhat  pendulous  shrub,  about  3  to  4  feet  high, 
the  young  branches  somewhat  flattened  and  densely  rust-coloured 
tomentose.  Leaves  narrow-lanceolate,  mostly  3  to  5  inches  long 
and  f  to  above  1  inch  broad,  rounded  and  often  slightly  cordate 
at  the  base,  tapering  towards  the  apex;  green  and  glabrous  above 
when  full-grown,  densely  white-tomentose  underneath,  the  mid- 
vein  more  or  less  rust-coloured.  Flowers  sessile  and  crowded  in 
two  one-sided  rows  on  the  spike-like  branches  of  the  pedunculate 
leaf-opposed  cymes,  the  whole  infloresence  densely  rust-coloured 
tomentose.  Bracteoles  oblong,  densely  tomentose  on  both  sides, 
slightly  longer  than  the  calyx,  and  appressed  to  it.  Calyx- 
segments  almost  free  (approaching  the  genus  Lysiosepalum), 
linear-lanceolate,  tomentose  outside,  glabrous  inside  except  on  the 
edges,  about  3  to  4  lines  long.  Petals  scale-like,  very  small. 
Stamens  about  as  long  as  the  calyx,  the  filaments  fully  four  times  as 
long  as  the  anthers;  anthers  exserted,  opening  in  terminal  pores. 
Ovarium  tomentose,  3-celled,  the  style  loosely  covered  with 
stellate  hairs  from  the  base  to  near  the  summit.  Seeds 
strophiolate,  slightly  downy. 

Our  new  species  is  most  nearly  allied  to  L.  macrojyhyllum  Grah., 
and  may  perhaps  be  regarded  as  a  form  of  it,  but  peculiar  circum- 
stances render  identification  with  the  type  a  matter  of  exceptional 
difficulty.  L.  macrophylhtm  was  described  and  figured  by  Graham 
from  plants  grown  at  Kew  from  seeds  transmitted  from  New 
South  Wales  by  Richard  Cunningham  in  July,  1835,  and  no 
wild  specimens  exactly  identical  have  ever  been  collected. 
R.  Brown's  specimens  from  "  Paramatta  and  Sydney,"  and  Allan 
Cunningham's  specimens  from  "  Southward  of  the  Colony,"  which 
Bentham  united  in  the  Flora  Australiensis  with  L.  macrophyUicm, 
have  smaller  flowers  and  narrower  bracteoles.  In  habit  and 
foliage  the  specimens  from  Mt.  Dangar  hardly  differ  from  L. 
tyiacroj?hyllum,  except  in  the  rather  narrower  leaves;  the  inflor- 
escence is  exactly  as  described  in  Graham's  cultivated  plant,  but 
the  flowers  differ  in  such  essential  points  that  we  do  not  feel 
justified  in  identifying  our  specimens  with  L.  macrofhyllum. 


BY   J.    H.    MAIDEN    AND    E.    BETCHE.  '657 

The  genus  Lasiopetalum  is  generally  characterized  by  very  short 
filaments;  therefore  the  long  filaments  of  L.  longistamineum  are  a 
very  striking  character.  Benthara  describes  the  filaments  of  R. 
Brown's  and  A.  Cunningham's  specimens  of  L.  jnacrophyllum  as 
"  rather  long,"  an  expression  quite  unsuitable  to  the  remarkably 
long  filaments  of  our  new  species;  and  Graham  describes  the 
filaments  of  the  type  as  "twice  as  long  as  the  anthers,"  while  they 
are  in  our  specimens  fully  four  times  as  long.  Another  essential 
difference  is  in  the  style.  The  style  is  glabrous  in  all  New  South 
Wales  species  previously  known,  but  stellate-hairy  in  L.  longi- 
stamineum;  and  Graham  specially  emphasises  the  glabrous  style 
in  L.  macrophylhun  by  writing  "  the  style  and  the  inside  of  the 
calyx  are  the  only  parts  attached  to  corymb  which  are  glabrous." 
Other  distinctions  of  the  two  species  are  :  in  L.  inacropliyllum 
the  segments  of  the  calyx  are  ovate,  and  the  ovarium  is  4-  or  5- 
celled;  in  L.  longistamineum  the  calyx-segments  are  narrower 
and  the  ovarium  is  normally  3-celled. 

LINEiE. 
Erythroxylon  australe  F.v.M. — New  for  N.  S.  Wales. 

Acacia  Creek  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Feb.  '05). 

Previously  recorded  from  Queensland  only.  The  collector 
writes — "  It  is  a  shrub  about  4  to  6  feet  high,  with  weak  rather 
pendulous  branches,  not  common  in  the  district,  on  the  sides  of 
one  particular  dry  hill  near  the  Queensland  border."  The  fruits 
are  red  when  ripe,  and  in  shape  almost  exactly  like  the  illustra- 
tion of    the    fruit    of    E.    Coca  Lam.,    in    Engler's   '  Natiirliche 

Pflanzenf  amilien. ' 

RUTACE^. 

Boronia  granitica,  sp.nov. 

Howell,  N.S.  W.  (J.  H.  Maiden  and  J.  L.  Boorman;  Aug.  '05). 
A  compact  erect  shrub  from  3  to  6  feet  high,  with  a  stem  over 

1  inch  thick  near  the  ground;  and  with  densely  stellate-hairy 
young  branches.  Leaves  pinnate,  generally  with  11  to  17  leaflets; 
the  leaflets  linear-lanceolate  with  much  recurved  margins,  about 

2  to  4  lines  long,   the  terminal  odd   one   the  shortest;  rhachis 


358  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.  XL, 

winged,  with  recurved  margins,  so  that  the  segments  of  the 
rhachis  between  the  pairs  of  leaflets  resemble  the  leaflets  in  size 
and  shape,  the  whole  leaf  rarely  above  1  inch  long,  slightly 
stellate-hairy.  Peduncles  axillary,  much  shorter  than  the  leaves, 
densely  stellate-hairy,  1- or  3-flowered.  Sepals  lanceolate,  rather 
acute,  densely  tomentose  outside  and  inside,  about  2  lines  long. 
Petals  valvate  in  bud,  lanceolate,  about  or  above  twice  as  long  as 
the  sepals,  somewhat  tomentose  outside  and  with  a  prominent 
midrib,  very  slightly  hairy  inside,  vieux  rose  in  colour,  the  fully 
expanded  flower  1  inch  in  diameter.  Stamens  unequal  in  length, 
the  sepaline  ones  twice  as  long  as  the  petaline  ones;  filaments 
ciliate  in  the  lower  half,  rough  with  short  asperities  in  the  upper 
part;  anthers  all  prominently  apiculate.  Ovarium  glabrous,  with 
a  short  glabrous  style  slightly  thickened  at  the  stigmatic  end. 

The  affinity  of  B.  granitica  is  undoubtedly  closest  to  B.  ledifolia 
J.  Gay;  in  fact  the  flower  in  all  its  parts  is  quite  identical  with 
that  species,  but  the  foliage  and  habit  are  so  strikingly  different 
that  we  cannot  include  it  in  its  varieties  without  being  logically 
compelled  to  unite  the  whole  group  of  allied  Boronias,  from  B. 
ledifolia  to  B.  mollis  and  B.  Fraseri.  The  pinnate-leaved  forms 
of  B.  ledifolia  are  always  variable,  the  3-foliolate  form  of  leaves 
merging  into  the  pinnate  form.  But  our  new  species  is  as 
constant  as  B.  pinnata  itself. 

It  grows  in  the  fissures  of  granite  rocks  at  one  of  the  highest 
elevations  in  the  vicinity  of  Howell  township,  19  miles  south- 
east of  Inverell. 

Since  the  above  description  was  prepared  it  has  been  received 
(through  Mr.  R.  H.  Cambage)  from  Mr.  E.  C.  Andrews,  who 
obtained  it  at  The  Gulf,  Emmaville,  July,  '05. 

Xanthoxylum  brachyacanthum  F.v.M. 

Sandiland  Ranges  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Nov.  '04),  Acacia  Creek 
(W.  Dunn;  Jan.  '05). 

This  is  not  a  rare  plant  in  the  Northern  brush-forests,  but  we 
mention  it  here  to  correct  an  error  in  Bentham's  description. 
Bentham  describes  the  inflorescence  as  axillary;  the  inflorescence 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN    AND    E.    BETCHE.  359 

is  terminal  in  all  our  specimens,  and  we  have  nine  specimens 
from  different  localities  of  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland. 
According  to  the  notes  of  the  collectors,  it  is  in  its  youthful  state 
almost  a  climber,  at  least  a  scrambler,  throwing  up  shoots  of 
almost  even  thickness  attaining  20  feet  in  length,  and  supporting 
itself  by  means  of  its  hooked  prickles.  Later  in  life  it  drops 
most  of  its  spines  and  becomes  a  tall  slender  tree,  attaining 
perhaps  50  feet  in  height  by  6  inches  stem-diameter.  The  leaves 
are  slightly  crenate  and  have  large,  very  conspicuous  oilglands  in 
the  sinuses  of  the  crenatures,  a  striking  character  by  which  the 
species  can  be  readily  recognised  from  leaves  alone,  at  least  in 
this  State,  where  it  is  the  only  representative  of  the  genus. 

LEGUMINOSJE. 
OXYLOBIUM    PULTEN^A    DC. 

(Syn.  0.  ha mitlosuin  'Benth.,  Bot.  Amer.  Expl.  Exped.  i.  379). 

Branxton,  Hunter  River  (Mrs.  J.  Lynch;  Sept.  '04,  and  J.  L. 
Boorman,  Nov.  '04)  :  Greta,  Hunter  River  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Nov. 
'04)  :  Gungal,  Upper  Hunter  River  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Dec.  '04). 

Bentham  described  0.  hamulosum  from  fruiting-specimens  col- 
lected on  the  Hunter  River  about  1840,  but  in  the  Flora  Aus- 
traliensis  (Vol.  ii.  p.  20)  he  expresses  doubt  about  the  species,  and 
writes — "This  will  probably  prove  to  be  a  variety  of  0.  Pultencea, 
but  the  leaves  are  too  distinct  to  unite  it  without  having  seen 
the  flowers."  From  the  abundant  material  of  both  flowering  and 
fruiting  specimens  obtained  from  the  Hunter  River  we  find 
Bentham's  doubt  fully  justified.  0.  hamulosum  cannot  be  main- 
tained as  a  species;  the  narrow-  and  broad-leaved  forms  run  so 
gradually  into  each  other  and  are  entirely  unaccompanied  by 
corresponding  differences  in  flower  or  fruit  that  we  cannot  even 
separate  it  as  a  good  variety. 

We  propose  to  abandon  the  name  0.  hamulosum  and  to  amend 
the  description  of  the  leaves  of  0.  Pultencea  to — Leaves  from  ovate- 
lanceolate  to  narrow-linear,  with  much  revolute  margins,  more  or 
less  pointed  and  hooked  at  the  end,  from  3  to  above  6  lines  long. 


360  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.  XL, 

MiRBELIA    AOTOIDES    F.V.M. 

Boonoo  Boonoo  (J.  L.  Boorman,  Nov.  '04). 

A  rather  rare  and  imperfectly  described  plant.  According  to 
the  collector's  notes  it  is  a  bushy  rigid  shrub,  4  to  7  feet  high  and 
about  7  or  8  inches  in  diameter,  growing  by  the  side  of  running 
water  in  sandstone  formation.  The  leaves  in  our  specimens  are 
not  "almost  pungent,"  as  described  by  Bentham,  but  decidedly 
pungent,  and  attain  fully  1  inch  in  length.  The  flowers  are 
orange-coloured,  in  short  racemes,  terminal  or  in  the  upper  axils, 
often  reduced  to  almost  sessile  clusters.  In  bud  the  racemes  are 
almost  spike-like,  with  a  dense  tomentum  on  the  rhachis,  bracts, 
pedicels  and  the  calyces,  the  pedicels  lengthening  out  in  flower 
and  fruit. 

The  specimens  from  Boonoo  Boonoo  are  identical  with  Dr. 
Beckler's  type-specimen  from  Mt.  Mitchell,  except  that  the 
inflorescence  is  much  reduced  in  the  latter  specimen. 

Daviesia  recurvata  Maiden  &  R.  T.  Baker. 

Warialda  (J.  L.  Boorman;  July,  '05;  the  most  northerly  locality 
recorded) :  Howell,  near  Inverell  (on  granite;  J.  H.  Maiden  and 
J.  L.  Boorman;  Aug.  '05), 

The  range  of  the  species  is  now  from  the  Rylstone  to  the 
Warialda  and  Inverell  districts.  At  Warialda  it  is  fairly  common 
throughout  the  district  in  sandy  soil,  from  the  flats  to  the  tops 
of  the  hills,  and  attains  a  height  up  to  6  feet.  At  Howell  it 
seems  less  diffused  and  less  robust. 

PULTEN.EA    MOLLIS    Lindl. 

Bidden  Road,  7  miles  from  Gilgandra,  Castlereagh  River,  north 
of  Dubbo  (R.  H.  Cambage;  Nov.  '04). 

New  for  New  South  Wales;  previously  recorded  for  Victoria 
and  South  Australia.  Our  specimens  differ  from  the  type  in  the 
calyx,  which  has  acuminate  lobes  much  longer  than  the  tube,  and 
smaller  and  narrower  bracteoles  attached  higher  up;  but  as  this 
is  the  only  essential  difference  it  seems  not  advisable  to  separate 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN    AND    E.    BETCHE.  361 

it  from  p.  mollis.  Bentham  describes  the  flowers  as  "  in  dense 
terminal  heads."  This  is  a  rather  misleading  statement;  in  our 
Victorian  specimens  the  flowers  are  not  always  strictly  capitate, 
and  in  the  Gilgandra  specimens  they  may  be  described  as 
"crowded  in  the  axils  of  the  upper  leaves  or  forming  few-flowered 
terminal  heads." 

PULTENiEA    CINERASCENS,  sp.nOV. 

Warialda  (J.  L.  Boorman;  July,  '05). 

An  erect  dense-growing  shrub,  1  to  2  feet*  high,  with  white- 
tomentose  young  branches  becoming  glabrous  with  age.  Leaves 
alternate,  crowded  and  clustered  from  the  shortness  of  the  lateral 
branchlets,  shortly  petiolate,  linear  with  revolute  margins,  leaving 
only  the  midrib  visible  underneath,  generally  4  lines  long,  rather 
acute,  with  a  short  often  recurved  point,  but  not  pungent;  stipules 
lanceolate,  acuminate,  brown  and  conspicuous  on  the  white  young 
shoots  but  deciduous  and  soon  disappearing.  Flowers  solitary, 
nearly  sessile  in  the  axils  of  the  upper  leaves  or  apparently 
terminal  and  a  few  together  on  the  short  lateral  branchlets,  but 
without  persistent  bracts,  and  never  forming  heads.  Calyx 
sparingly  hairy,  with  acuminate  lobes  rather  shorter  than  the 
tube,  the  upper  ones  united  higher  up;  bracteoles  small,  linear- 
subulate,  hairy  like  the  calyx,  attached  high  up  on  the  calyx- 
tube.  Ovarium  sessile,  densely  pubescent  with  appressed  hairs; 
style  slender,  hairy  in  the  lower  part.  Standard  broader  than 
long,  orange-coloured,  marked  with  reddish-brown;  keel  dark 
brown,  rather  shorter  than  the  standard,  the  wings  orange,  about 
as  long  as  the  keel.     Fruits  and  seeds  not  seen. 

In  systematic  position  it  should  be  placed  near  P.  Hartmanni 
F.V.M.,  a  species  with  which  it  has  most  essential  characters  in 
common,  and  from  which  it  is  yet  widely  different  in  appearance. 
The  mode  of  growth  is  the  same  in  both  plants,  but  P.  Hartmanni 

*  Since  the  above  was  written  we  have  received  it  from  the  Rev,  H.  M.  R. 
Rupp,  who  collected  it  at  Coolatai,  25  miles  north  of  Warialda,  where  it 
attains  a  height  of  5  feet,  and  with  leaves  rather  longer  than  the  type, 


362  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.   XI., 

is  taller,  hirsute  with  grey  hairs,  and  has  broad  leaves,  while  our 
new  species  has  narrow  clustered  leaves  and  silvery-white  young 
branches,  very  attractive  in  the  new  growth.  The  clustered 
appearance  of  the  leaves  is  caused  by  the  short  lateral  branchlets 
being  often  reduced  to  a  mere  cluster  of  leaves,  very  much  as  in 
Hihherlia fasciculata  R.Br.,  a  peculiarity  not  shared  by  P.  Hart- 
manni,  whose  lateral  branchlets  are  often  very  short,  but  not 
reduced  to  such  an  extent. 

The  habitat  of  our  new  species  is  also  very  similar  to  P.  Hart- 
manni,  and  suggests  that  it  may  be  the  southern  form  of  that 
species.  P.  cinerascens  is  fairly  common  on  the  tops  of  hills  near 
Warialda;  while  P.  Hartmanni  has  been  collected  by  Mr.  Boor- 
man  on  the  tops  of  granite  hills  between  boulders  of  rocks  near 
Stanthorpe  in  Southern  Queensland,  and  traced  from  there  to 
Wallangarra  in  Northern  New  South  Wales.  When  the  moun- 
tainous country  intervening  between  W^allangarra  and  Warialda 
is  thoroughly  botanically  explored,  a  connecting  link  between 
the  two  species  may  yet  be  found,  unless  it  has  died  out. 

Acacia  doratoxylon  A.  Cunn.  var.  ovata,  var.nov. 

Stanthorpe,  Southern  Queensland  (J.  L.  Boorman;  July,  '0-4) : 
Howell,  N.S.W.  (J.  H.  Maiden  and  J.  L.  Boorman;  Aug.  '05). 

A  low  spreading  shrub  not  exceeding  2  feet  in  height,  with 
densely  intricate  branches.  Flowers  in  short  ovate  heads,  often 
almost  globular,  rarely  in  short  but  distinctly  cylindrical  spikes. 
Seeds  shorter  than  in  the  typical  A.  doratoxylon,  and  with  a 
more  compact  arillus.  All  other  characters  are  those  of  the 
type. 

This  well-marked  variety  seems  to  be  confined  to  the  granite 
rocks  capping  the  tops  of  many  hills  in  the  northern  New  England 
district.  It  grows  in  dense  masses  along  the  fissures  of  the  rocks, 
forming  in  many  places  almost  the  only  vegetation  of  the  bare 

rocks. 

Acacia  Gnidium  Benth.  var.  latifolia,  var.nov. 

Gilgandra  (No.  1132;  R.  H.  Cambage;  Oct.  '04). 
A  viscid  shrub  locally  known  as  "  Motherumbung, '*  distin- 
guished from  the  type  only  in  the  broader  phyllodia.     Leaves 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN  AND  E.  BETCHE.  363 

narrow-lanceolate,  from  under  1  to  2  inches  long,  and  2  lines 
broad  in  the  broadest  part.  A.  Gnidiumis  an  imperfectly  known 
plant,  only  known  from  Mitchell's  specimens  from  Mt.  Pluto  in 
Queensland,  and  also  Bid  will's  No.  19  in  the  Hookerian  Herbarium, 
Kew.  It  is,  perhaps,  hardly  a  good  species,  unless  the  unknown 
fruits  supply  a  better  distinctive  character.  Bentham  writes  in 
the  Flora  Australiensis  in  a  footnote  to  his  description  of  A. 
Gnidium — "  The  nearest  affinity  appears  to  be  A.  dodonceifolia, 
from  which  our  specimens  chiefly  differ  in  the  very  narrow 
phyllodia."  Mr.  Cambage's  Gilgandra  specimens  tend  to  bring 
out  this  affinity  still  closer,  so  that  we  were  in  some  doubt 
whether  to  regard  it  as  a  small  and  narrow-leaved  form  of  A. 
dodonceifolia  or  as  a  broad-leaved  form  of  A.  Gnidium,  but  it  has 
the  slender  habit  and  small  flowers  of  the  latter.  The  fruits  are 
still  unknown. 

We  have  to  thank  the  Director  of  Kew  for  a  small  specimen 
of  Mitchell's  type  of  A.  Gnidiicni,  a  rare  plant  not  previously 
represented  in  any  Australian  herbarium. 

MYHTACE^. 

KUNZEA    BRACTEOLATA,   Sp.nOV. 

Wallangarra  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Nov.  '04). 

An  erect,  rather  stiff  shrub  about  3  to  4  feet  high,  glabrous  in 
all  its  parts  except  a  slight  pubescence  on  the  young  branches. 
Leaves  alternate,  very  shortly  petiolate,  linear-lanceolate,  4  to  5 
lines  long,  acute,  flat  but  somewhat  concave,  erect  and  almost 
imbricately  crowded  on  the  smaller  branchlets.  Flowers  glabrous, 
about  10  or  less,  sessile  in  a  small  terminal  head,  often  becoming 
lateral  by  the  development  of  the  axis,  with  hardly  any  floral 
leaves  in  the  heads.  Bracts  and  bracteoles  broadly  ovate,  boat- 
shaped,  acuminate,  almost  as  large  as  the  calyx-tube  and  enclos- 
ing it,  nearly  of  equal  size  but  the  bract  rather  larger,  with  a 
longer  point  and  often  minutely  ciliate.  Calyx-tube  ovoid,  quite 
glabrous,  the  lobes  lanceolate,  acute,  about  f  the  size  of  the  tube. 

*  See  R.  H.  Cambage,  this  Vol.  p. 215.  Plate  ii.  is  a  photo  showing  the 
habit  of  this  tree. 


364       NOTES  FROM  THE  BOTANIC  GARDENS,  NO.  XI., 

Petals  white,  scarcely  exceeding  the  sepals.  Stamens  not 
numerous,  the  filaments  hardly  twice  as  long  as  the  petals. 
Ovarium  3-  or  rarely  4-celled,  with  numerous  ovules  in  each  cell 
on  a  peltate  placenta.     Fruits  not  seen. 

This  new  Kunzea  occurs  in  a  dry  watercourse  in  the  moun- 
tainous country  about  Wallangarra,  near  the  Queensland  border, 
in  company  with  K.  corifolia.  Its  most  distinctive  character  is 
the  remarkably  large  bracts  and  bracteoles  in  which  the  single 
flowers  are  wrapped  up;  in  this  respect  it  comes  near  some  West 
Australian  species  of  Section  Eukunzea,  but  the  characters  of 
the  ovarium  are  those  of  Section  Salisia,  and  its  nearest  affinity 
is  K.  capitata.  In  general  appearance  it  is  somewhat  like  a 
glabrous  form  of  K.  capitata^  with  white  flowers  and  narrower 
leaves,   but   the  large   bracteoles  well  distinguish   it   from   any 

described  species. 

Kunzea  opposita  F.v.M. 

Howell  (J.  H.  Maiden  and  J.  L.  Boorman;  Aug.  '05). 

A  new  locality  for  a  rare  plant,  described  by  Mueller  from 
specimens  collected  at  Timbarra,  New  England,  in  granite 
fissures.  The  new  locality  is  some  100  miles  south-west  of  the 
original  habitat,  but  still  in  granite  country.  It  is  a  compact 
shrub  about  1  to  2  feet  high,  growing  at  Howell  on  moist  flats 
with  a  rocky  foundation,  in  company  with  K.  capitata  Reichb. 

Eugenia  cyanocarpa  F.v.M. 

Under  Barrenjoey  Lighthouse,  at  the  100  feet  level;  also  1^-2 
miles  south  of  Barrenjoey,  at  edge  of  Pittwater  (J.  H.  Maiden 
and  R.  H.  Cambage,  July,  '05). 

UMBELLIFER^. 
Actinotus  Gibbonsii  F.v.M.,  var.  Baeuerlenii,  var.nov. 

Shuttleton,  near  Nymagee,  on  stony  hills  (W.  Biiuerlen,  Nov. 
'03). 

Mr.  Biiuerlen  writes  in  his  notes  : — ''  This  differs  from  A. 
Gibbonsii  in  the  following  characters — Always  quite  prostrate, 
more  weak  and  flaccid,  and  the  leaves  always  of  a  darker  colour, 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN    AND    E.    BETCHE.  365 

radiating  with  shoots  sometimes  up  to  18  inches  in  length. 
Flowers  considerably  smaller;  sepals  smaller;  of  a  different  shape, 
deltoid.  Anthers  apparently  larger;  filaments  shorter.  Hairs 
on  the  fruit  with  a  large  gland  on  the  apex.  Hairs  on  the  sepals 
quite  different,  cellular;  with  whorled  branches,  sometimes  like 
the  antlers  of  a  horn  of  a  stag.  Pedicels  longer  and  terete,  not 
flat  and  broader  at  the  base  as  in  ^4.  Gibbonsii." 

As  far  as  the  habit  goes  there  is  no  difference  between  this 
form  and  the  type.  The  type  is  variable  in  habit;  we  have  seen 
it  quite  prostrate,  forming  patches  4  to  5  feet  in  diameter,  and  in 
other  localities  again  almost  erect.  With  regard  to  the  details  of 
the  flowers,  Mr.  Bauerlen's  observations  are  quite  correct  in  the 
main.  The  chief  and  only  essential  difference  is  in  the  fruit  and 
the  persistent  calyx-lobes.  The  shape  of  the  fruit  is  about  the 
same,  but  in  the  type  the  edges  are  densely  ciliate  with  long 
white  simple  hairs,  and  the  calyx  is  at  least  half  as  long  as  the 
fruit,  and  in  the  variety  the  hairs  on  the  edge  are  shorter  and 
tipped  with  a  gland,  and  the  calyx  is  much  shorter,  the  lobes 
broader  and  the  hairs  are  branched. 

These  characters  seem  to  be  constant,  but  the  general  appear- 
ance, habit,  leaves  and  inflorescence  of  the  specimens  are  so  much 
like  the  typical  A.  Gibbonsii,  that  we  do  not  share  Mr.  Bauerlen's 
view,  who  regards  it  as  a  new  species. 

We  have  to  thank  Mr.  R.  T.  Baker  for  the  communication  of 
the  specimens. 

COMPOSITE. 

Helichrysum  diosmifolium  Less. 

Wallangarra  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Nov.  '04). 

A  tall  shrub  attaining  about  5  feet  in  height,  with  lanceolate 
leaves,  generally  rather  above  |  inch  long,  yellowish  underneath 
and  slightly  woolly,  apiculate,  the  margins  slightly  recurved. 
Involucral  bracts  pale  yellowish.     Flowers  about  10  in  the  head. 

The  common  H.  diosmifolium  is  a  very  variable  plant,  but  the 
forms  pass  so  gradually  into  each  other  that  we  cannot  divide 
them  into  named  varieties.  The  Wallangarra  specimen  described 
above  is  the  most  broad-leaved  form  we  have  met  with.     Bentham 


366  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.   XL, 

describes  the  leaves  as  "narrow-linear  with  revolute  margins,"  and 
so  they  are  in  all  the  southern  specimens;  but  in  the  northern 
localities  the  leaves  have  a  tendency  to  flatten  out,  though  both 
narrow-  and  broad-leaved  forms  may  occur  together.  The  flower- 
heads  also  vary  much  in  size,  colour  and  number  of  flowers. 
White  is  the  predominant  colour;  the  not  uncommon  pinkish  tint 
is  already  mentioned  by  Bentham,  but  the  pale  yellowish  tint 
seems  to  be  rare.  Small  white  sterile  heads,  either  empty  or 
with  a  very  few  flowers,  are  of  common  occurrence  in  this  species. 

Helichrysum  Boormanii,  sp.nov. 

Atherton,  N.  Queensland  (E.  Betche;  Aug.  '01);  Boonoo  Boonoo, 
N.S.W.  (J.  L.  Boorman,  Nov.  '04). 

The  Queensland  specimens  are  upright  shrubs  3  to  4  feet  high, 
without  any  trace  of  woolly  hairs.  Stems  and  leaves  glutinous 
with  short  glandular  hairs,  especially  dense  on  the  branches. 
Leaves  lanceolate,  acuminate,  sessile,  2  to  3  inches  long,  the 
upper  leaves  reduced,  but  the  stems  generally  leafy  to  near  the 
large  solitary  flower-head.  Involucral  bracts  all  claw^ed;  pure 
white,  narrow  and  acuminate;  the  outermost  ones  short  and 
shortly  clawed;  the  intermediate  ones  nearly  an  inch  long,  with 
a  narrow  claw  2-3  lines  long;  the  innermost  ones  reduced  to  the 
long  claw,  with  a  lamina  hardly  1  line  long. 

The  New  South  Wales  specimens  differ  only  slightly  from  the 
Queensland  ones.  The  claws  of  the  outer  involucral  bracts  are 
woolly-hairy  and  broader  and  less  sharply  distinguished  from  the 
lamina,  and  the  stalk  under  the  flower-heads  is  woolly-hairy  as 
well  as  the  floral-leaves,  thus  approaching  closer  to  H.  elatum  of 
the  Section  Xerochlsena. 

We  were  first  inclined  to  regard  the  Queensland  specimens  as 
a  form  of  H.  elatum  A.  Cunn.  (in  F.  v.  Mueller's  wider  sense  of 
this  species,  including  H.  glutinosum  Hook.),  but  Mr.  Boorman's 
discovery  of  the  same  plant,  almost  unchanged,  though  found 
about  12  degrees  of  latitude  further  south,  induced  us  to  describe 
it  as  a  new  species. 

In  systematic  sequence  it  should  be  placed  near  to  H.  colli7ium 
DC. 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN  AND  E.  BETCHE.  367 

Senecio  lautus  Forst. 
(Syn.  *S'.  capillifolius  Hook,  f.) 

J.  D.  Hooker  established  his  »S'.  capillifolius  on  a  single  Tas- 
manian  specimen  in  1847.  Mueller  continued  to  keep  it  as  a 
distinct  species  in  his  '  Second  Census  of  Australian  Plants  '  in 
1889;  but  L.  Rodway  unites  it  with  S.  lautus  in  his  '  Tasmanian 
Flora'  (1903).  We  fully  agree  with  Mr.  Rodway  that  it  is 
merely  a  form  of  the  variable  S.  lautus;  in  fact  it  passes  so 
gradually  into  the  pinnate-leaved  forms  of  that  species  that  we 
cannot  draw  a  line  between  them,  and  cannot  even  separate  it 
as  a  well-marked  variety. 

The  following  are  New  South  Wales  localities  of  the  true  S. 
cajnllifolius  Hook,  f.,  as  figured  in  Hook.,  Fl.  Tasm.  t.66  : — 
Howell  (J.  H.  Maiden  and  J.  L.  Boorman;  Aug.  '05);  Warialda 
(J.  L.  Boorman;  July,  '05);  Nundle  (J.  L.  Boorman;  June,  '04); 
Warrumbungle  Ranges  (W.  Forsyth;  Oct.  '01);  Weddin  (J.  H. 
Maiden;  Dec.  '99). 

It  extends  into  Southern  Queensland,  e.g.,  Stanthorpe  (J.  L. 
Boorman;  July,  '04);  Head  of  the  Gwydir  River  (Dr.  Leichhardt; 
April,  1843).  We  have  no  Victorian  specimens  in  the  Herbarium, 
and  it  is  evidently  a  rare  plant  in  Tasmania. 

STYLIDIE^. 
Stylidium  debile  F.v.  M.  var.  paniculatum,  var.nov. 

Boonoo  Boonoo,  near  Tenterfield  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Feb.  '05). 

A  very  weak  slender  plant  sometimes  nearly  1  foot  high,  with 
a  paniculate  inflorescence,  the  lower  panicle-branches  often  above 
1  inch  long.  Leaves  and  flowers  like  the  type,  but  the  calyx- 
lobes  longer  and  narrower,  and  the  capsules  shorter  and  broader. 
Specimens  collected  at  Wardell,  Richmond  River  (E.  Betche; 
Aug.  '84),  and  Wallangarra  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Nov.  '04)  are 
intermediate  forms  between  the  typical  S.  dehile  and  this  variety. 

EPACRIDE^. 
Styphelia  triflora  Sm. 

Blackheath,  on  the  Blue  Mountains  (W.  Forsyth;  April,  '05; 
a  coast  plant  previously  not  recorded  from  the  Blue  Mountains). 


368  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.  XI., 

A  form  with  greeinsh-3^ello\v  flowers;   Galston,  near  Sydney  (J. 
H.  Maiden;  June,  '05). 

LOGANIACE-E. 

Strychnos  psilosperma  F.v.M. — New  for  N.  S.  Wales. 

Acacia  Creek,  near  the  Queensland  border  (J.  L.  Boorman; 
Feb.  '05). 

Previously  recorded  from  Queensland  only.  Bentham  describes 
it  as  a  shrub  with  weak  branches.  Bailey  writes  in  his  'Queens- 
land Flora' — "In  the  Brisbane  district  an  erect  tree  60  or  more 
feet  high,  armed  with  slender  spines  1  inch  long."  Mr.  Boorman 
describes  it  in  his  field-notes  as  a  "  handsome  compact  tree  40-50 
ft.  high,  very  suitable  as  an  ornamental  shade  tree,"  but  there 
are  no  spines  on  his  specimens,  and  he  is  positive  that  all  the 
trees  he  has  seen  are  without  spines.  Possibly  this  is  one  of  the 
trees  which  are  armed  with  spines  in  the  juvenile  state,  and 
become  spineless  when  they  are  grown  up  and  have  raised  their 
foliage  above  the  reach  of  browsing  animals. 

The  structure  of  the  timber  appears  to  be  unique  amongst 
New  South  Wales  timbers. 

SOLANACE^. 

Anthocercis  albicans  a.  Cunn. 

Boonoo  Boonoo,  near  Tenterfield  (J,  L.  Boorman;  Kov.  '04). 

An  erect  much-branched  shrub  2  to  3  feet  high,  with  long 
drooping  branches,  covered  all  over  with  branched  hairs,  densely 
so  on  the  under  side  of  the  leaves,  more  sparingly  on  the  branches 
and  upper  side  of  the  leaves.  Leaves  from  broad-  to  narrow- 
ovate,  and  from  J  to  less  than  J  inch  long,  with  recurved  margins, 
nearly  sessile  and  much  spreading  or  even  refracted.  Flowers 
pale  yellow,  solitar}'-  on  slender  pedicels  about  ^  inch  long. 
Calyx  about  1  line  long,  the  lobes  about  as  long  as  the  tube. 
Corolla-tube  longer  than  the  calyx,  the  lobes  obtuse  and  about  as 
long  as  the  tube. 

From  the  above  description  it  will  be  seen  that  the  Boonoo 
Boonoo  specimens  differ  essentially  from  Bentham's  description 
in  the  'Flora  Australiensis.'     According  to  Bentham,  the  flowers 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN  AND  E.  BETCHE.  369 

nre  shortly  petiolate,  usually  2  or  3  together,  white,  with  acute 

lobes  longer  than  the  tube.     These  are  very  essential  differences, 

but  for  all  that  we  cannot  separate  our  plant  specifically  from 

A.    albicans.      The   comparative    length    of   the    corolla-lobes  is 

variable  in  the  genus  and  apparently  very  variable  in  the  species. 

A.  Cunningham  describes  the  flower  of  his  type  in  the  following 

words  —  "corollse  laciniis  tubo  sequalibus,"  but  figures  the  plant 

in  the  same  work  (Barron  Field's  '  New  South  Wales,'  p. 335,  t.2) 

with  corolla-lobes  acute,  and  decidedly  longer  than  the  tube.     In 

the  Herbarium  specimens  we  find  the  length  of  the  corolla-lobes 

very  variable.     In  specimens  from  the  Warrumbungle  Ranges 

(W.  Forsyth)  the  lobes  are  long  and  acute,  as  figured  in  Sweet's 

*  Flora  Australasica'  (t.l6);  in  Berrima  specimens  (J.  H.  Maiden 

and  J.  L.  Boorman)  the  lobes  are  shorter  and  rather  obtuse,  but 

both  have  the  characteristic  white  tomentum  of  branched  hairs. 

The  same  difference  is  in  the  length  of  the  pedicels  and  in  the 

densenessof  the  indumentum,  but  we  cannot  draw  a  line  between 

the  forms. 

With  these  modifications  in  the  description  of  A.  albicans  it 

seems  rather  difficult  to  distinguish  between  this  species  and  A. 

scabrella  Benth.,  in  sharp  characters;  but  as  far  as  our  Herbarium 

material  goes,  A.  scabrella  is  a   much   more  slender  plant  with 

filiform  pedicels  and  often   almost  filiform  branches   and   more 

distant  leaves,   always   easily  separated  from    all    forms   of   A. 

albicans. 

LABIATE. 

Prostanthera  granitica,  sp.nov. 

Howell  (Bora  Creek:  J.  H.  Maiden  and  J.  L.  Boorman;  Aug. 
'05). 

A  compact,  bushy  shrub,  about  3  feet  high,  somewhat  of  the 
habit  of  Westriiigia  rosmarinifolia,  covered  all  over  with  white 
hairs,  long  and  dense  on  the  young  shoots,  on  the  calyces  and 
on  the  under  side  of  the  leaves,  short  and  scanty  on  the  upper 
side  of  the  leaves  and  on  the  old  branches.  Leaves  very  shortly 
petiolate  or  almost  sessile,  ovate-lanceolate,  with  occasionally  a 
slightly  cordate  base,  3  to  5  lines  long,  the  margins  recurved  or 
24 


370  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.  XL, 

revolute,  leaving  frequently  the  under  side  exposed  only  on  the 
broad  base,  the  upper  side  almost  glabrous  on  some  of  the  old 
stem-leaves.  Flowers  almost  sessile  in  the  axils  of  the  upper 
leaves,  forming  interrupted  leafy  spike-like  racemes,  generally 
with  a  tuft  of  empty  leaves  at  the  top.  Calyx  about  2  lines  long, 
the  lips  nearly  equal  in  length  and  breadth  and  nearly  equally 
pubescent,  with  a  pair  of  pubescent  linear  bracts  close  at  the 
base.  Corolla  lavender-coloured,  hardly  twice  as  long  as  the 
calyx,  the  only  glabrous  part  of  the  plant.  Anthers  with  hardly 
a  conspicuous  free  appendage.     Fruits  not  seen. 

In  affinity  it  comes  nearest  P.  rhonihea  R.Br.,  but  is  markedly 
distinguished  from  it  in  foliage  and  indumentum.  The  typical 
P.  rhombea  is  a  rather  sparse-leaved  plant  with  glabrous  rhomboid 
leaves  on  which  the  resinous  glands  can  be  distinctly  seen  as 
little  brown  sparkling  dots,  while  in  our  new  species  no  glands 
are  visible  on  any  part  of  the  plant,  and  the  shape  and  consistence 
of  the  leaves  and  calyces  are  very  different. 

It  seems  to  be  a  very  local  plant;  as  far  as  is  known  at  present, 
it  is  confined  to  the  fissures  of  rocks  on  the  top  of  a  granite  ridge 
overlooking  the  township  of  Howell,  19  miles  south  of  Inverell. 

EUPHORBIACEffl. 
Glochidion  umbratile,  sp.nov. 

Atherton,  North  Queensland  (E.  Betche;  Aug.  '01). 

An  erect,  glabrous,  almost  herbaceous  shrub,  about  4  to  6  feet 
high,  with  a  slender  straight  stem,  and  almost  horizontally 
spreading,  slender,  straight,  green,  slightly  flattened  branches. 
Leaves  shortly  petiolate,  alternate,  distichously  arranged,  ovate- 
lanceolate,  generally  3  to  4  inches  long  and  1 J  to  nearly  2  inches 
broad  in  the  broadest  part  near  the  base,  dark  green  and  shining 
above,  rather  paler  underneath.  Stipules  persistent,  above  1^ 
lines  long,  tapering  from  a  broad  base  to  a  point,  with  scarious 
edges.  Flowers  in  axillary  clusters,  generally  2  to  5  together, 
the  males  minute  and  on  pedicels  not  exceeding  2  or  3  lines,  the 
females  much  larger  and  on  stouter  pedicels  lengthening  out  to 
1 J  inches  in  fruit,  both  sexes  usually  in  the  same  cluster.     Calyx- 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN  AND  E.  BETCHE.  371 

segments  6,  broad  and  obtuse,  minute  in  the  males,  much  larger 
in  the  females.  Anthers  apparently  3,  sessile  or  nearly  so 
on  a  short  central  column.  Ovarium  glabrous;  styles  short  and 
flat,  with  two  broad  flat  spirally  recurved  stigmatic  branches. 
Fruit  bright  red,  somewhat  succulent,  about  ^  inch  in  diameter, 
scarcely  depressed  in  the  centre,  with  6  large  triangular  seeds. 

A  strikingly  handsome  plant,  on  account  of  the  contrast 
between  the  bright  red  fruits  and  the  dark  glossy  green  foliage; 
confined  to  the  dense  shade  of  the  tall  forests  of  Atherton,  as  far 
as  known  to  the  collector. 

We  place  this  plant  with  Glochidion^  or  Bentham's  section 
Glochidion  of  Phyllanth^is,  in  spite  of  the  succulent  fruit,  which 
is  quite  unique  in  the  genus,  if  our  proposed  name  is  adopted. 
Perhaps  it  might  be  placed  under  Breynia,  but  also  in  that  genus 
its  position  would  be  abnormal  on  account  of  the  calyx,  which  is 
that  of  Glochidion,  and  very  different  from  Breyriia.  Unfortu- 
nately we  had  very  scanty  material  to  work  upon,  so  that  we 
could  not  satisfy  ourselves  that  our  description  of  the  male 
flowers  is  correct  in  detail. 

MONOTAXIS    MACROPHYLLA    Benth. 

Howell  (J.  H.  Maiden  and  J.  L.  Boorman,  Aug.  '05).  A  new 
locality  for  a  very  rare  plant.  Found  in  one  place  growing  in  a 
little  sediment  near  the  summit  of  a  granite  hill. 

An  erect,  rather  succulent  plant,  with  yellow  flowers. 

CASUARINACEiE. 
Casuarina  distyla  Vent.,  var.  prostrata,  var.nov. 

Near  the  ocean  clifis  north  of  entrance  to  Narrabeen  Lagoon^ 
on  Narrabeen  Shale  formation  (R.  H.  Cambage;  Feb.  '00);  New- 
port to  Barrenjoey  (R.  H.  Cambage  and  J.  H.  Maiden;  July,  '05). 

A  low  decumbent  shrub  forming  dense  patches  several  feet  in 
diameter  and  2  to  4  feet  high.  Branches  nearly  as  stout  as  the 
common  erect  Port  Jackson  form  of  the  species,  but  always 
curved,  often  almost  curled,  and  conspicuously  hirsute  with  hairs 
arranged  in  rows  along  the  ridges  of  the  branches;  teeth  of  the 
whorls  8  in  all  specimens  seen,  long-pointed.     Cones  sessile  or 


372  NOTES    FROM    THE    BOTANIC    GARDENS,    NO.   XI., 

rarely  on  short  stalks,  smaller  than  in  the  erect  Port  Jackson  form 
and  nearly  always  truncate,  the  fine  points  of  the  bracteoles  often 
persistent  on  the  mature  cones.      Male  flowers  not  seen. 

This  variety  is  very  distinct  from  the  coast-form  of  C.  distyla, 
so  common  on  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone  formation,  but,  on 
analysing  the  characters,  we  cannot  point  out  a  single  character 
not  included  in  Bentham's  description  of  C.  distyla  Vent,  (which 
includes  C.  paludosa  Sieb.)  in  his  '  Flora  Australiensis.'  The 
spreading  habit  and  curved  branches  occur  also  in  some  Victorian 
and  West  Australian  forms;  hairy  branches  are  not  rare,  though 
we  have  seen  no  other  form  so  conspicuousl}^  hairy.  The  char- 
acters of  the  cones  are  quite  those  of  C.  distyla,  which  vary  from 
small  and  truncate  in  some  New  South  Wales  inland  forms  to 
large  and  pointed  by  the  protruding  rhachis  in  the  Hawkesbury 
Sandstone  forms.  Though  Bentham  describes  the  cones  as 
"  sessile  or  nearly  so,"  strictly  sessile  cones  are  ver^--  rare  in  this 
species;  in  fact  we  have  not  a  single  specimen  with  strictly  sessile 
cones  in  the  large  number  of  specimens  from  all  States,  except 
the  specimens  now  described.  The  plant  is  so  uniformly  different 
in  appearance  from  the  form  of  C.  distyla,  which  is  very  abundant 
in  the  localities  named,  that  it  seems  desirable  to  name  it. 

Casuarina  suberosa  Otto  tfe  Dietr. 

Newport  to  Barren  joey  (R.  H.  Cambage  and  J.  H.  Maiden; 
July,  '05). 

We  also  draw  attention  to  a  pigmy  form  of  this  species,  2  feet 
high,  and  with  small  cones.  It  is  erect  and  yet  bushy,  reminding 
one  of  the  habit  of  C.  nana.  C.  suberosa,  of  normal  size,  is  in 
the  immediate  neighbourhood,  and  while  we  note  no  characters, 
other  than  that  of  size,  in  regard  to  this  form,  we  think  that  its 
dwarf  habit  should  be  pointed  out. 

Casuarina  inophloia  F.v.M.  tfe  F.  M.  Bailey  in  '  Melbourne 
Chemist  and  Druggist,'  April,  '82. 

Warialda  (J.  L.  Boorman;  July,  '05). 

Though  this  is  a  well-described  plant,  it  is  not  well  known  in 
this  State,  where  it  is  confined  to  the  northern  tableland,  pro- 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN    AND    E.    BETCHE.  373 

bably  only  west  of  the  northern  railway  line,  from  about  30°  S. 
lat.  extending  northward  far  into  Queensland.  It  is  perhaps  the 
most  interesting  species  of  the  interesting  genus  Casuarina  on 
account  of  the  thick  medullary  rays  of  the  timber,  quite  unique 
in  the  vegetable  kingdom. 

Mr.  Bailey  writes  of  this  species  in  his  *  Catalogue  of  the 
Woods  of  Queensland'  (Melb.  Exhib.  1888) -"Wood  very 
beautiful,  of  a  reddish  colour,  but  with  numerous  dark  marks." 
These  dark  marks  are  the  medullary  rays,  which  appear  in  the  cross- 
section  as  thick  dark  lines  from  just  above  1  to  IJmm.  in  thick- 
ness, radiating  from  the  centre  to  the  bark  and  penetrating  even 
half-way  through  the  fibrous  bark,  where  they  form  partition- 
walls  between  which  the  fibres  are  packed.  In  the  tangential 
cut  the  medullary  rays  appear  as  interrupted  perpendicular  thick 
lines,  and  in  the  radial  cut  as  large,  irregular  blotches.  The 
fibrous  bark  is  also  quite  unique  in  the  genus,  and  is  the  most 
conspicuous  character  from  which  the  specific  name  is  derived. 
Mueller  and  Bailey  point  out  in  the  original  description  of  the 
species  that  the  tree  to  which  Leichhardt  refers  ('Overland 
Expedition  from  Moreton  Bay  to  Port  Essington,'  p.49)  in  the 
following  words — "  I  met  (in  the  gullies  on  Robinson's  Creek, 
Expedition  Range)  with  a  new  species  of  Forest  Oak,  which 
deserves  the  name  villosa,  for  its  bark  looks  quite  villous  "  is 
probably  this  species,  because  the  bark  of  no  other  Casuarina 
known  could  possibly  be  called  villous. 

Mr.  Boorman  describes  the  habit  of  the  tree  at  Warialda  as — 
"  A  tree  8  to  16  feet  high,  with  pendulous  branches  and  ribbony 
bark  not  readily  separable  from  the  stem,  as  is  the  case  in  the 
stringy-barks  of  Eucalyptus.  The  general  character  of  the  plant 
is  like  C.  distyla,  stooling  in  habit  in  the  early  stage,  eventually 
growing  into  a  single  stem  generally  much  crooked  and  branched, 
with  a  wide  spreading  top.  It  grows  on  dry  ironstone  ridges,  in 
the  poorest  land."  The  piece  of  stem  brought  home  by  Mr. 
Boorman  is  2J  feet  long  by  9  inches  in  diameter,  but  even  such 
short  straight  pieces  of  stem  are  rare,  so  that  it  would  be  very 
difficult  to  procure  a  good  supply  of  this  remarkable  wood  for 
cabinet-making  purposes. 


374        NOTES  FROM  THE  BOTANIC  GARDENS,  NO.  XL, 

CYPERACE^. 

Lepidosperma  lineare  R.Br. 

Warialda  (J.  L.  Boorman;  Aug.  '05). 

Most  northern  locality  of  a  plant  common  in  the  southern  parts 
of  Australia,  from  Tasmania  upwards. 

RHIZOSPEEM^. 
Marsilea  angustifolia  R.Br. — New  for  New  South  Wales. 

Gilgunnia  (W.  Bauerlen;  No.  3175;  Jan.  '04). 

Small  plants  with  a  filiform  rhizome.  Barren  fronds  glabrous, 
on  filiform  stalks  from  1  to  rarely  above  2  inches  long,  the 
leaflets  narrow-cuneate,  2  to  rarely  3  lines  long  and  f  to  1  line 
broad  at  the  top,  entire  or  obscurely  crenate.  Sporocarp  solitary, 
shortly  stalked  or  almost  sessile,  covered  with  very  short  appressed 
hairs,  nearly  horizontal,  about  1  line  broad  and  IJ  lines  long, 
only  the  lower  tooth  developed,  obtuse. 

Previously  recorded  by  R.  Brown,  Bentham,  and  A.  Braun 
only  from  North  Australia.  Mueller  unites  all  Australian  species 
under  one  name,  so  that  his  '  Census  '  is  no  guide  to  the  distribu- 
tion of  the  various  species. 

It  is  not  possible  to  identify  M.  angustifolia  from  R.  Brown's 
original  brief  description  of  six  words  :  "  foliolis  lanceolatis  apice 
subdentatis;  adultis  glabris  "  without  type-specimens,  but  from 
Bentham's description  in  the  'Flora  Australiensis,'  and  Alexander 
Braun's  description  in  his  classical  paper  '  Neuere  Untersuchungen 
iiber  die  Gattungen  Marsilea  und  Pilularia  "  (1870),  we  have  no 
doubt  that  Mr.  Bauerlen's  Gilgunnia  specimens  are  the  dwarf 
narrow-leaved  form  mentioned  in  both  papers.  F.  M.  Bailey 
figures  M.  angustifolia  with  lanceolate  acute  leaves  ('Queensland 
Flora,'  Part  vi.  p.  1929,  t.87)  but  describes  the  leaflets  in  the 
same  place  as  truncate,  copying  literally  Bentham's  description 
in  the  '  Flora  Australiensis.' 

The  most  striking  feature  in  the  Gilgunnia  specimens  is  the 
distinctly  pinnate  arrangement  of  the  leaflets,  in  contradiction 
to  the  erroneous  but  quite  popular  conception  that  Marsilea  has 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN    AND    E.    BETCHE.  375 

digitate  leaflets,  like  a  four-leaved  clover  or  like  Oxalis.  The 
fact  is,  as  clearly  pointed  out  and  proved  in  A.  Braun's  paper 
before  mentioned,  that  the  four  apparently  digitate  leaflets  are 
really  two  pairs  of  leaflets,  one  pair  above  the  other,  with  a  short 
rhachis  between  them,  though  the  very  short  rhachis  disappears 
sometimes  entirely  in  the  swollen  top  of  the  leafstalk  of  floating 
leaves,  and  is  in  air-leaves  nearly  always  indistinct,  twisted  and 
often  concealed  by  hairs.  The  pinnate  arrangement  of  the  leaflets 
can  be  distinctly  seen  in  the  aestivation,  and  in  the  position  the 
leaflets  of  air-leaves  take  at  night;  at  night  the  leaflets  close  like 
Mimosa  leaves;  the  lower  and  upper  pair  fold  up  and  show  dis- 
tinctlv  the  short  rhachis  between  them. 


376 


NOTES  ON  THE  NATIVE  FLORA   OF  NEW  SOUTH 
WALES. 

By  R.  H.  Cambage. 

Part  iv.     The  Occurrence  of  Casuarina  stuicta  Ait.,  on 

THE    NaRRABEEN    ShALES. 

(Plates  xii.-xiii.) 

The  occurrence  of  C asuarina  stricta  Ait.  (C  quadrivalviG 
Labill.)  near  Sydney  is  a  matter  of  considerable  interest  both 
from  a  geological  and  botanical  standpoint. 

This  species  is  often  known  as  She-oak  and  sometimes  as 
Mountain  Oak;  and  although  it  cannot  be  said  to  grow  into  large 
trees,  being  usually  about  20  feet  high,  its  shapely  rounded  head 
and  pendulous  habit  render  it  a  very  graceful  and  picturesque 
member  of  our  native  flora.  It  is  a  common  tree  on  many  of  the 
hills  throughout  the  western  districts  of  New  South  Wales,  and 
is  recorded  from  various  localities  in  Victoria,  South  Australia, 
Western  Australia  and  Tasmania.  It  may  be  seen  from  several 
points  on  the  railway  line  between  Albury  and  Melbourne, 
between  Melbourne  and  Adelaide,  and  also  between  Launceston 
and  Hobart,  being  common  on  the  igneous  formation  around  the 
former,  especially  near  The  Gorge.  In  my  '  Notes  on  the  Botany 
of  the  Interior  of  New  South  Wales'  (these  Proceedings  1900-1902) 
it  has  been  recorded  under  the  name  of  C.  quadrivalvis  Labill., 
from  many  localities  extending  from  Cobar,  Nymagee,  Mount 
Hope,  Condobolin,  Trundle,  Forbes,  Wyalong,  Cootamundra  to 
Junee;  and  by  others  from  the  Mudgee  and  Goulburn  River  dis- 
tricts south-westerly.  It  occurs  at  Mount  McDonald  (on  granite), 
Wagga,  Tumut  and  Gundagai,  being  formerly  very  conspicuous 
on  a  hill  east  of  Coolac.  It  has  been  recorded  from  South-eastern 
New  South  Wales;  and  specimens  in  the  National  Herbarium,, 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  377 

Sydney,  show,  in  addition,  that  it  has  been  found  at  Jervis  Bay, 
and  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Liverpool  Range  on  the  Upper 
Hunter,  having  come  across  from  the  west  to  the  latter  locality 
in  company  with  other  western  plants. 

Although  the  species  is  fairly  common  in  the  cool  climate  of 
Tasmania,  yet  in  New  South  Wales  it  appears  to  flourish  more 
in  the  warm  interior  than  on  the  cold  highlands,  in  which 
feature  it  differs  altogether  from  the  majority  of  species  which 
occur  in  both  the  States  mentioned.  In  New  South  Wales  we 
usually  find  the  representatives  of  the  Tasmanian  flora  along  or 
close  to  the  Great  Dividing  Range,  though  some  follow  at  lower 
levels  along  the  coastal  area;  but  in  my  experience  C.  st^-icta  has 
seldom  been  found  at  an  altitude  exceeding  2000  feet  above  sea- 
level,  and  in  the  western  districts  may  be  seen  more  often  at 
elevations  below  1500  feet.  In  descending  the  western  slopes 
from  the  Blue  Mountains,  it  does  not  become  common  till  the 
White  Box  [Eucalyj^ttts  albens  Miq.)  country  is  almost  crossed, 
and  it  then  continues  intermittently  through  the  remainder  of 
that  zone  of  country,  extending  beyond  to  the  dryer  areas  around 
Nymagee  and  Mount  Hope,  and  in  fact  through  South  and 
Western  Australia. 

In  Western  New  South  Wales  it  has  a  distinct  preference  for 
growing  on  the  tops  of  hills,  which  thereby  suggests  the  name  of 
Mountain  Oak;  and  in  many  cases  these  hills  are  so  isolated  that 
there  may  be  10  or  20  miles  of  forest  land  intervening  without  a 
solitary  tree  of  this  species  to  be  found.  In  studying  the  dis- 
tribution of  the  species,  this  seems  to  be  a  point  which  should  be 
kept  in  view,  for  it  is  somewhat  suggestive  of  the  species  being  a 
remnant  of  what  previousl}^  had  a  more  continuous  range.  From 
observations  made  in  the  western  districts  it  appears  to  favour 
hills  of  igneous  origin,  especially  porphyry,  but  is  by  no  means 
restricted  to  that  formation,  as  it  occurs  on  several  isolated  sand- 
stone peaks,  probably  of  Devonian  age,  one  in  particular  being 
the  Pinnacle,  south  of  Forbes,  while  others  are  the  Weddins,  west 
of  Grenfell.  It  certainly  seems  to  avoid  the  Hawkesbury  Sand- 
stone of  the  coastal  area.     A  remarkable  instance  of  partiality, 


378  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IV., 

however,  lUcay  be  noticed  near  Mount  Hope,  where  it  occurs 
plentifully  on  a  rounded  porphyry  hill  known  as  Mount  Allen; 
while  on  Double  Peak,  only  four  miles  away,  but  which  is  chiefly 
of  Silurian(?)  slate  formation,  not  a  single  She-oak  can  be  found. 
Another  characteristic  of  the  species  is  that  it  seems  to  select 
spots  on  hills  that  are  otherwise  fairly  clear,  and  it  apparently 
objects  to  grow  in  forests  under  the  shelter  of  larger  trees.  In 
this  way  it  makes  itself  fairly  conspicuous,  and  its  rounded 
pendulous  form  becomes  a  notable  feature  on  some  of  these  clear 
and  rather  bald  hill-tops.  It  is  a  prolific  fruiter,  some  of  the 
trees  being  literally  covered  with  cones  (Plate  xii.). 

Its  qualities  as  a  fodder  plant  are,  however,  so  far  as  New 
South  Wales  is  concerned,  causing  it  to  be  exterminated  from 
many  of  the  western  hills,  and  in  some  cases  the  only  traces  now 
to  be  found  consist  of  the  large  somewhat  cylindrical  cones,  at 
times  up  to  two  inches  long,  lying  scattered  about  on  the  ground, 
while  the  remaining  stumps,  with  their  conspicuous  medullary 
rays,  are  standing  as  sentinels  beside  the  fallen  and  decaying 
branches. 

Its  very  wide  distribution  over  Western  and  Southern  Aus- 
tralia, including  Tasmania,  and  its  being  now  able  to  grow  under 
so  many  different  conditions  of  climate,  suggest  that  it  is  a 
species  of  great  antiquity,  probably  antedating  the  time  when 
Tasmania  ceased  to  be  connected  with  the  mainland. 

Recently  I  found  it  growing  over  a  small  area  on  the  Narra- 
been  Shale  formation  near  Newport,  at  about  a  dozen  miles  north 
of  the  entrance  to  Port  Jackson;  and  this  is  the  most  northern 
locality  recorded  for  the  species  on  the  eastern  coast  of  Australia. 

To  thoroughly  appreciate  the  significance  of  this  discovery,  it 
is  necessary  to  first  understand  the  disposition  of  these  Narrabeen 
Beds.  This  formation  consists  of  shales  and  sandstone  which 
were  laid  down  as  sediment  in  the  early  Triassic  period.  In  its 
upper  part  is  a  band  of^  fine  chocolate-coloured  shales,  and  it 
has  been  suggested  by  Professor  David"*"  that  they  have  probably 

*  Anniversary  Address  to  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  May, 
1896.     Journ.  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xxx.  1896. 


BY    R.    H.    CAM B AGE.  379 

derived  their  colouring  from  the  oxidation  of  magnetite  contained 
in  fine  volcanic  tuff  interstratified  with  the  shales.  They  extend 
approximately  from  about  Maitland  in  the  north  to  the  westward 
of  Kiama  in  the  south,  and  near  Lithgow  in  the  west,  though 
their  north-western  extent  is  not  at  present  definitely  defined; 
and  they  are  overlaid  throughout  by  a  considerable  thickness  of 
Hawkesbury  Sandstone,  which  in  the  Parramatta  to  Penrith, 
Picton  and  surrounding  districts  is  again  covered  by  the  Wiana- 
matta  Shales.  Towards  the  edges  of  the  above  first-mentioned 
area  the  chocolate  shales  thin  out,  and  in  some  cases  have  been 
so  denuded  as  well,  that  they  only  appear  as  reddish-brown  bands 
in  the  face  of  the  cliflts,  particularly  on  the  Blue  Mountains  or  on 
the  talus  slopes  of  ridges  capped  by  Hawkesbury  Sandstone;  and 
while  having  little  or  no  influence  on  the  surrounding  vegetation, 
they  afford  a  splendid  geological  horizon  for  the  correlation  of 
adjacent  rocks.  Owing  to  subsidence  of  the  central  part  of  the 
coal  basin  west  of  Sydney,  the  Narrabeen  Series  are  found  to 
have  dipped  from  above  sea-level  at  Narrabeen  to  nearly  900  feet 
below  sea-level  on  the  northern  shore  of  Port  Jackson,  as  proved 
by  the  first  Cremorne  bore.  They  rise  again,  however,  on  the 
southern  side  of  the  basin,  and  reappear  on  the  coast  to  the 
north-east  of  Otford,  nearly  30  miles  southerly  from  the  entrance 
to  Port  Jackson.  That  they  rise  again  to  the  eastward  in  the 
Sydne}^  district  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  at  The  Sydney  Harbour 
Collieries'  shaft  at  Balmain  the  Chocolate  Shales  are  about  950 
feet  below  sea-level,  while  at  the  first  Cremorne  bore,  which  is 
situated  about  three  miles  to  the  eastward,  they  are  met  with  at 
about  890  feet,  though  the  strata  are  rising  more  rapidly  to  the 
eastward  in  this  latter  locality,  as  proved  by  the  results  of  the 
first  and  second  Cremorne  bores.  At  these  two  before-mentioned 
extreme  points,  viz.,  Narrabeen  to  Newport  on  the  north,  and 
near  Otford  on  the  south,  these  shales  are  exposed  to  a  greater 
extent  than  is  commonly  found  in  any  other  part  of  their  area, 
the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone  having  been  denuded;  and  it  was 
owing  to  their  exposure  and  the  facilities  thus  afforded  for  their 
study  in  the  northern  area  that   the  local  name  of   Narrabeen 


380     NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IV., 

Series  was  suggested  by  Mr.  C.  S.  Wilkinson  for  this  particular 
formation. 

Now  having  in  view  the  fact  of  their  exposure  at  the  two 
places  mentioned,  and  that  Casum-ina  stricta  was  not  common 
on  the  coast  of  New  South  Wales  excepting  perhaps  in  the 
extreme  south,  and  was  really  an  inland  tree,  the  finding  of  this 
species  on  this  somewhat  rarely  exposed  formation  near  Newport 
suggested  the  idea  that  it  had  probably  wandered  so  far  from  its 
regular  habitat  owing  to  geological  causes,  there  being  no  climatic 
reason  why  it  should  not  also  occur  along  the  whole  of  the  coast;, 
and  that  therefore  it  might  perhaps  be  successfully  looked  for  on 
the  similar  formation  at  Otford.  Before  proceeding  to  search  this 
locality,  however,  enquiries  were  made  at  the  Botanic  Gardens, 
where  it  was  learned  from  Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden  that  this  plant  w^as 
certainly  growing  near  Otford,  as  both  he  and  Mr.  E.  Betche 
had  collected  it  there  some  years  ago,  though  it  had  not  been 
recorded."^ 

An  unsuccessful  search  was  subsequently  made  on  the  coast 
near  Kincumber  to  the  north  of  Broken  Bay,  and  extending 
from  Terragal  Head  to  First  Point,  locally  known  as  Winny;  but 
although  the  formation  is  mapped  as  belonging  to  the  Narrabeen 
Beds,  the  country  is  somewhat  sandy  from  the  disintegration  of 
the  sandstones  in  the  district.  The  interesting  fact  was  noticed, 
however,  that,  growing  along  the  edge  of  the  cliffs  and  over  much 
of  the  headland  known  as  First  Point,  the  surface  of  which  was 
composed  of  sandstone,  with  loose  pebbles  scattered  at  intervals, 
was  another  species  of  Casuarina,  viz.,  C.  distyla  Vent.,  which 
was  not  found  inland  towards  Gosford,  though  it  is  common 
enough  on  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone  formation  around  Port 
Jackson.  What  was  apparently  this  same  dwarf  oak  shrub  could 
also  be  seen  covering  a  considerable  area  on  Second  Point,  about 
1 J  miles  to  the  southward,  the  aggregation  of  male  flowers  giving 

Postscript  (added  26th  October,  1905). — I  have  since  been  informed  by- 
Mr.  A.  G.  Hamilton  that  C.  stricta  is  growing  near  Mt.  Kembla.  This 
extends  its  range  about  20  miles  southerly  from  Stanwell  Park  but  still  on. 
the  exposed  strip  of  Narrabeen  Shales. 


BY    R.    11.    CAMBAGE.  381 

the  headland  quite  a  brown  appearance.  It  may  be  mentioned 
that  this  locality  is  the  most  northern  coastal  spot  recorded  for 
C.  distyla,  though  it  extends  north-westerly  a  considerable  dis- 
tance inland,  following  the  Triassic  formation. 

Although  the  occurrence  of  C.  stricta  at  Newport  and  Otford 
appears  to  indicate  a  preference  for  the  particular  local  geological 
formation,  it  still  remains  a  somewhat  difficult  matter  to  account 
for  its  being  there  at  all.  Its  general  habit  as  well  as  its  wide 
and  curious  distribution  on  the  hill-tops  of  the  western  districts 
appear  to  certainly  point  to  the  antiquity  of  the  species;  and  if 
it  could  be  shown  that  the  Narrabeen  Shales  in  prehistoric  times 
had  extended  eastward  from  the  present  coast-line  and  were 
olothed  with  vegetation,  it  would  seem  quite  possible  that  this 
Casuarina  may  have  formed  part  of  its  flora;  and  these  isolated 
patches  now  on  the  present  coast  are  the  remnants  of  this  par- 
ticular species,  the  greater  part  of  which  has  been  destroyed  in 
the  intermediate  localities  by  the  alteration  of  the  shore-line. 
That  the  coast-line  of  New  South  Wales  was  formerly  some  15 
or  20  miles  further  eastward  is  regarded  by  geologists  as  almost 
beyond  doubt  (Plate  xiii.). 

The  Rev.  W.B.  Clarke"^  suggested  that  "the  eastern  extension 
of  Australia  has  been  probably  cut  off  by  a  general  sinking," 

Mr.  C.  S.  Wilkinson,!  writing  on  the  subject,  and  speaking  of 
the  present  sea-floor  within  some  20  miles  of  the  coast,  says  : — 
^'  Here  the  bed  of  the  ocean  probably  consists  of  the  old  land 
surface  which  once  formed  a  continuation  of  that  upon  which  the 
City  of  Sydney  now  stands  and  which  has  been  faulted  to  a  depth 

of  over  12,000  feet We  have  evidence  that  these 

faultings  probably  took  place  towards  the  close  of  the  Tertiary 
epoch,  for  no  marine  Tertiary  deposits  are  known  along  this  por- 
tion of  the  coast  of  Australia,  whereas  in  New  Guinea  and  Vic- 
toria the  marine  Miocene  beds  occur  at  elevations  up  to  eight 


*  Remarks  on  the  Sedimentary  Formations  of  New  South  Wales.     Fourth 
Edition,  1878,  p.  7. 

t  Mineral  Products,  etc.,  of  New  South  Wales.    1882,  p. 52. 


382     NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IV., 

hundred    feet  above   the    sea Had   this    low-lying 

country  along  the  coast  then  existed  it  must  have  been  covered 
by  the  Miocene  sea.  .  .  .  But  it  is  very  probable  that  until 
or  during  the  Pliocene  period  it  stood  at  a  much  higher  level,  and 
extended  some  distance  beyond  the  present  coast-line.  Then 
again  the  Tertiary  deposits  throughout  east  Australia  show  that 
the  valleys  draining  the  Great  Dividing  Range  have  been  chiefly 
eroded  since  the  Miocene  period.  .  .  .  Therefore  the  sinking 
of  the  land  traversed  by  any  of  these  valleys,  such  as  that  of 
Port  Jackson,  evidently  took  place  in  comparatively  recent 
geological  times,  and  may  have  been  contemporaneous  with  the 
extensive  volcanic  eruption  of  the  Upper  Pliocene  period  during 
which  the  southern  portion  of  Victoria  especially  was  the  locale 
of  great  volcanic  activity.  How  far  this  old  land  extended  to 
the  east  it  is  difficult  to  indicate;  but  no  doubt  future  observa- 
tions upon  the  distribution  of  the  marine  and  terrestrial  fauna 
and  flora  of  the  South  Pacific  region  will  throw  much  more  light 
upon  the  subject." 

Professor  David"^  also  gives  evidence  to  show  that  the  Coal- 
measures  upon  which  the  Narrabeen  Shales  are  superimposed 
rise  towards  the  eastward  of  Port  Jackson,  and  it  therefore 
follows  that  these  shales  must  also  have  risen  (evidence  of  which 
has  already  been  given  from  the  results  of  the  Balmain  shaft  and 
Cremorne  bore),  and  may  in  part  have  formed  the  eastern  margin 
of  the  depression  in  which  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone  was 
deposited.  Subsequently  to  Triassic  time  continuous  erosion  and 
denudation  would  remove  much  of  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone 
from  the  eastern  edge,  thus  exposing  the  Narrabeen  Beds;  and 
this  formation,  or  the  Permo-Carboniferous,  or  possibly  the 
upturned  edges  of  both,  would  remain  exposed  until  the  final 
subsidence,  which  is  estimated  to  have  occurred  in  late  Pliocene 
or  Post-Tertiary  time.  The  extension  of  that  former  land-surface 
for  some  distance  north  and  south,  and  possibly  its  eastern  margin 
also,  would  probably  be  composed  of  Permo-Carboniferous  forma- 

*  Journ.  and  Proc.  Roy,  Soc.  N.S.Wales.     Vol.xxx,  pp.43,  48,  69. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  383 

tion  similar  to  that  at  Jervis  Bay,  another  point  at  which  C. 
stricta  has  been  found. 

Evidence  of  submergence  is  given  by  Etheridge,  David  and 
Grimshaw*  who  state,  amongst  other  matters,  that  at  Shea's 
Creek  near  Sydney  "  there  is  evidence  of  an  alteration  in  the 
level  of  the  land  and  sea  in  recent  geological  time  to  the  amount 
of  about  fifteen  feet,  as  the  trees  found  in  situ  by  us  at  a  depth 
of  fifteen  feet  below  high  water  all  belong  to  genera  which  do  not 
flourish  below  the  level  of  high  tide."  .  .  .  "The  date  .  .  . 
cannot  therefore  be  moved  back  below  the  limits  of  the  Post- 
Tertiary  time.  .  .  .  It  is  questionable  whether  it  is  likely 
that  the  date  can  be  carried  back  into  Pleistocene  time." 

E.  C.  Andrews,  B.  A.,  refers  to  this  coastal  subsidence  as  Post- 
Tertiary,!  and  says  : — "  The  movement  is  still  youthful,  as  may 
be  seen  by  a  study  of  the  cliffs  between  Port  Jackson  and  Botany 
Bay,  where  the  250  feet  walls  end  abruptly  in  8  to  10  fathoms 
of  water,  thus  showing  that  the  formation  of  forelands  and 
beaches  in  that  locality  is  still  distant  in  point  of  time." 

Attention  is  drawn  to  the  evidence  already  quoted  in  regard 
to  marine  Tertiary  deposits,  which  goes  to  prove  that  the 
original  continental  shelf  must  have  stood  above  sea-level  at  least 
till  late  Tertiary  time;  but  this  evidence  does  not  show  that  the 
submergence  may  not  have  been  delayed  even  until  the  Pleisto- 
cene period,  although  in  Victoria  the  deposits  are  chiefly  of 
Eocene  and  Miocene  age.  Possibly  therefore  it  may  not  be 
necessary  to  prove  such  great  antiquity  for  this  Casuarina  as 
would  at  first  sight  appear. 

It  may  be  noted  that  at  each  of  the  places  mentioned,  viz., 
Newport,  Otford,  and  Jervis  Bay,  this  tree  has  been  found  only 
within  a  short  distance  of  the  ocean,  so  that  had  the  subsidence 

•  "On  the  Occurrence  of  a  Submerged  Forest  with  Remains  of  the 
Dugong  at  Shea's  Creek,  near  Sydney."  By  R.  Etheridge,  Jr.,  Prof.  David 
and  J.  W.  Grimshaw.  Journ.  and  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales.  Vol.xxx. 
pp.178,  179. 

t  "Notes  on  the  Geography  of  the  Blue  Mts.  and  Sydney  District." 
Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1903,  pp.814,  815. 


584  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,   IV., 

and  erosion  extended  westerly  another  mile  or  so,  or  less  than 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  at  Newport,  probably  no  trace  of  this  species 
would  be  found  to-day  near  either  place. 

If  therefore  we  could  have  a  living  species  which  had  existed 
from  late  or  Post-Tertiary  time,  and  evidence  is  available  to 
show  that  such  could  happen,  then  it  seems  that  the  conditions 
are  fav^ourable  to  Casuarina  striata  being  such  a  species.  That 
it  is  ancient  is  proved  by  its  wide  distribution  and  adaptability 
to  varying  conditions.  Such  Eucalypts  as  E.  coriacea  A.  Cunn., 
E.  amygdalina  LabilL,  and  E.  viminalis  Labill.,  are  common  to 
both  Tasmania  and  New  South  Wales,  but  in  the  latter  State 
their  home  is  on  the  highest  land.  Not  a  single  Eucalypt  which 
is  found  in  Tasmania  is  known  to  occur  in  the  interior  of  New 
South  Wales. 

Benthamf  speaks  of  the  Order  Casuarineae  as  a  very  distinct 
one,  the  remarkable  vegetative  characters  having  no  nearer 
parallel  than  amongst  some  Conifer^e.  Now  the  Natural  Order 
Coniferge  is  well  known  to  be  an  ancient  one.  True  Coniferse 
are  stated  by  Sir  Archibald  Geikie*  to  have  been  abundant  in 
Carboniferous  time,  and  evidence  is  recorded  of  their  occurrence 
prior  to  that  period. 

The  genus  Casuarina  is  also  regarded  as  an  ancient  one,  and 
there  are  records  of  its  having  been  found  fossil  in  Tertiary,  and 
possibly  Cretaceous  time,  though  the  absolute  identity  of  some 
of  the  Tertiary  specimens  has  been  questioned. 

In  describing  the  Potomac  Formation,  Lester  F.  Wardt  makes 
lengthy  reference  to  a  fossil  plant,  and  after  discussing  the  pos- 
sibilities of  its  being  a  Casuarina,  saj^s  : — "  I  have  therefore 
decided  upon  the  whole  to  refer  this  form  to  Casuarina,  with  all 
necessary  reservation,  and  to  name  it,  in  honour  of  Mr.  Coville, 
C.  Covillei.  It  would  certainly  be  an  interesting  fact  if  it  were 
proved  that  this  anomalous  type  of  vegetation  lived  in  America 
during  Lower  Cretaceous  time." 

*  '  Flora  Australiensis,'  vi,  133. 
+  Text  Book  of  Geology.  Third  Edition,  p.Sll. 
:::  Fifteenth  Annual  Report  of  the  U.S.  Geological  Survey,  1893-94,  p. 353. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  385 

A.  Schenk,*  however,  expresses  some  doubt,  and  exercises  con- 
siderable caution  in  criticising  fossil  specimens  of  Casuarina 
described  by  Ettingshausen  and  Heer,  and  refers  to  fossils  from 
Bilin  figured  by  Ettingshausen  as  of  less  value  as  proof  of  the 
existence  of  the  genus  Casuarina  in  the  European  Tertiary,  than 
those  described  by  Heer,  which  are  nothing  but  the  remains  of 
scarcely  determinable  twigs  with  opposite  leaves.  Heer's  Sumatra 
specimens  Schenk  considers  are  of  much  greater  value,  even 
though  the  determination  does  not  appear  to  him  as  absolutely 
definite. 

From  the  Tertiary  flora  of  New  South  Wales,  Ettingshausenf 
has  described  a  species  of  Casuarina  found  near  Emmaville  and 
named  it  C.  Cookii.  He  describes  the  sheath-teeth  as  four 
in  number,  which,  it  may  be  pointed  out,  corresponds  with  the 
number  found  on  C.  torulosa  Ait.,  a  species  common  along  the 
north-eastern  coast  of  New  South  Wales  to-day,  and  extending 
up  along  the  eastern  slopes  of  New  England  to  within  about  20 
miles  of  where  C.  Cookii  has  been  found. 

Whether  the  existence  of  the  genus  Casuarina  in  Europe  or 
America  during  Tertiary  or  Cretaceous  time  is  ultimately  proved 
or  not  does  not  seriously  afi'ect  the  question  under  discussion. 

That  plants  have  persisted  from  late  Tertiary  time  to  the 
present  day  is  an  acknowledged  fact.  Clement  Reid,  F.R.S.,| 
writing  on  the  origin  of  the  British  Flora,  regards  the  Preglacial 
period  as  latest  Pliocene,  and  gives  a  list  of  plants  including  57 
genera  and  75  species  which  are  found  fossil  in  the  Preglacial 
period  and  are  also  living  plants,  all  but  three  being  still  in  Great 
Britain. 

Other  instances  could  be  quoted;  and  the  same  persistence 
applies  to  the  fauna  as  well. 

It  must  also  be  remembered  that  new  fossil  plants  are  often 
necessarily  described  from  very  imperfect  material,  and  although 

*  Traits  de  Pal6ontoIogie.  Par  Karl  A.  Zittel.  Partie  ii.  Pal^ophytologie. 
A.  Schenk,  pp.396,  397. 

t  Contributions  to  the  Tertiary  Flora  of  Australia.    Ettingshausen,  p.l07. 
X  The  Origin  of  the  British  Flora,  1899,  p.52,  and  pp.  171-179. 
25 


386     NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IV., 

the  best  available,  it  is  at  the  same  time  often  so  meagre  that 
sufficient  comparison  cannot  be  made  with  living  specimens  to 
decide  whether  or  not  the  fossil  and  some  living  plant  may  not 
belong  to  the  same  species,  the  result  being  in  many  such  cases 
that  the  fossil  is  described  as  a  new  species.  Owing  to  force  of 
circumstances,  therefore,  the  question  of  the  identity  of  fossil 
plants  with  living  species  is  one  that  is  not  satisfactorily  investi- 
gated, and  even  where  differences  are  noted,  the  fossil  may 
possibly  be  in  some  cases  the  ancestral  form  of  a  living  plant. 

In  the  case  of  G.  Cookii  found  near  Emmaville,  the  specimen 
is,  according  to  the  drawing,  only  a  fragment  of  a  branchlet,  and 
from  its  diameter  and  number  of  sheath-teeth,  there  seems  prac- 
tically nothing  to  differentiate  it  from  C.  torulosa,  which  is 
flourishing  to-day  along  much  of  the  eastern  coast  of  northern 
Australia. 

As  previously  stated  (supra)  the  occurrence  of  C.  stricta  in 
Tasmania  as  well  as  on  the  mainland  goes  very  far  to  prove  its 
existence  while  a  land-connection  extended  from  the  former  to 
Victoria.  Dr.  A.  W.  Howitt,  who  has  closely  studied  the  ques- 
tion of  this  land-connection,  when  dealing  with  the  origin  of  the 
Aborigines  of  Tasmania,  writes*  : — "  The  commencement  of  this 
later  connection  of  Tasmania  and  Victoria  may  be  provisionally 
placed  in  the  Pliocene  epoch.  What  may  have  been  its  duration 
it  is  not  possible  to  state  within  definite  limits;  but  it  may  have 
been  as  late  as  the  more  recent  volcanoes  of  south-western 
Victoria  and  the  south-eastern  district  of  South  Australia." 

Professor  Ralph  Tatef  says  of  the  latter  that  "  they  are  newer 

than  the  Pliocene  sand  and  loess  which  are  interstratified  between 

the  Mount  Gambler  limestones  and  the  ashbeds  of  that  place. '^ 

.     .     "  Leaves  of  Casuarina  and  Banksia  are  impressed  on  the 

under  surface  of  the  superimposed  ash-layer." 

It  will  therefore  be  seen    that  Wilkinson  suggests   that  the 
subsidence  along  the  coast  of  New  South  Wales  may  have  been 

*  Presidential    Address    (Section    F.      Ethnology    and    Anthropology)^ 
Report  Aust.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.  1898,  vii.  p.  741. 

t  Ann.  Address,  Trans.  Philosophical  Soc.  Adelaide,  1878-9,  p.lxix. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  387 

contemporaneous  with  the  volcanic  eruption  of  the  Upper  Plio- 
cene period;  that  Howitt  places  the  latest  land-connection 
between  Tasmania  and  Victoria  as  possibly  during  that  period 
of  volcanic  disturbance  also;  and  that  Tate  considers  this  par- 
ticular volcanic  period  to  be  newer  than  Pliocene,  and  to  have 
occurred  at  a  time  when  Casuarina  and  Banksia  were  growing 
in  the  south-eastern  part  of  South  Australia,  and  that  the 
Aborigines  probably  witnessed  the  glow  of  internal  fires  from 
the  cones  of  these  volcanoes. 

In  these  Proceedings  for  1901  (pp.687,  688)  I  drew  attention 
to  some  trees  of  Casuarina  Cunninghamiana  Miq.  (River  Oak) 
which  are  growing  on  a  fresh-water  creek  near  the  head  of  Burrill 
Lake  at  Ulladulla,  and  no  others  being  in  the  district,  it  was 
suggested  (after  discussion  with  Mr.  J.  J.  Fletcher,  B.Sc.)  that 
these  few  were  the  descendants  of  what  had  once  been  a  greater 
number,  extending  perhaps  some  miles  down  the  creek,  which, 
owing  to  this  coastal  subsidence,  had  been  nearly  tilled  by  the 
inflow  of  salt  water,  thus  destroying  all  the  fresh-water  oak  trees 
except  those  which  were  growing  on  this  limited  area. 

The  foregoing  particulars  are  given  to  show  the  possibilities  in 
regard  to  C.  slricta  having  existed  in  Pleistocene  or  perhaps  late 
Pliocene  times;  but  what  changes  it  may  have  undergone  during 
that  great  lapse  of  time  it  is  quite  impossible  to  say.  If  it  did 
not  occur  on  these  isolated  coastal  spots  prior  to  the  subsidence 
referred  to,  then  its  presence  there  to-day  has  to  be  otherwise 
accounted  for. 

The  methods  of  distribution  which  most  readily  suggest  them- 
selves are  those  by  ordinary  growth  of  seedlings  near  the  parent 
tree,  by  wind,  birds  and  water. 

In  this  instance  the  first  mode  can  be  ignored  altogether,  as 
the  distance  between  Newport  and  Otford  is  about  40  miles,  and 
so  far  as  is  known  there  is  not  a  single  tree  of  C.  stricta  any- 
where between  the  two  places;  while  three  large  sheets  of  water 
in  Port  Hacking,  Botany  Bay  and  Port  Jackson  would  have  to 
be  crossed. 


388  NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH   WALES,   IV., 

The  distribution  by  wind  is  also  most  unlikely  owing  to  the 
distance,  and  also  the  fact  that  the  air  near  the  ocean  is  so 
heavily  charged  with  moisture  that  small  objects  are  unlikely  to 
float  very  far.  The  only  dry  winds  we  have  on  the  coast  blow 
out  to  sea.  In  the  hot  and  dry  interior  the  conditions  are 
different. 

The  possibility  of  seeds  being  carried  by  birds  requires  more 
serious  consideration.  It  is  well  known  that  the  seeds  of  this 
particular  She-oak  are  eaten  by  birds  of  the  Black  Cockatoo 
family  {Calyptorhynchus  sp.),  one  known  to  many  along  the  coast 
as  a  so-called  Macaw  being  especially  fond  of  them.  I  have  seen 
this  bird  among  these  trees  as  far  west  as  Nymagee,  while  on 
eastern  New  South  Wales  they  are  usually  to  be  found  on  the 
Forest  Oak  (C.  torulosa  Ait).  Clement  Reid,  F.R.S.,*  gives  an 
instance  of  his  finding,  in  an  old  chalk  pit,  the  remains  of  a 
pigeon  which  had  met  with  an  accident.  Its  crop  was  full  of 
broad-beans  which  were  growing,  though  under  ordinary  circum- 
stances they  would  have  been  digested  and  destroyed.  But 
although  distribution  occurs  through  the  agency  of  birds,  it 
must  be  borne  in  mind  that  C.  stricta  is  a  dioecious  species,  and 
ordinarily  it  would  therefore  be  necessary  for  two  trees  to  grow 
fairly  close  together,  one  bearing  male  and  the  other  female 
flowers,  before  the  propagation  of  the  species  could  be  accom- 
plished. It  would  seem  unreasonable,  therefore,  to  look  for  any 
accidental  dispersal  of  seeds,  forty  miles  apart,  answering  the 
above  conditions,  and  at  the  same  time  being  placed  respectively 
on  the  northern  and  southern  outcrops  of  the  Narrabeen  Shales. 

The  cones  of  a  Casuarina  might  certainly  be  carried  b}'  water, 
though  the  seeds  would  probably  be  destroyed  by  a  lengthy 
immersion.  The  transporting  agent  in  this  case  could  only  be 
the  ocean,  but  compliance  with  the  conditions  mentioned  above 
would  probably  be  again  necessary  as  regards  the  male  and  female 
trees.  As  the  home  of  C.  stricta  is  in  the  southern  part  of  Australia, 
and  it  is  not  known  to  occur  along  the  eastern  coast  of  Northern 

*  Origin  of  the  British  Flora,  p. 30. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  389 

Australia,  it  could  only  be  brought  to  Otford  and  Newport  from 
the  south;  but  the  prevailing  ocean  current  in  the  vicinity  of 
these  places  is  from  the  north.  Mr.  G.  H.  Halligan,  F.G.S., 
Hydrographic  Surveyor,  Public  Works  Department,  who  has 
made  a  special  stud}^  of  these  currents,  writes  to  me  as  follows — 
"It  is  certain  that  the  N.E.  current  coming  through  Bass' 
Straits,  and  which  would  become  a  northerly  current  if  it  skirted 
the  east  coast  of  Australia,  never  reaches  much  further  north 
than  Twofold  Bay,  except  perhaps  as  an  undercurrent.  It  seems 
to  me  quite  impossible  that  G.  stricta  can  have  been  conveyed  by 
water  from  the  southern  coast  as  far  north  as  Jervis  Bay."  It 
might  also  be  mentioned  that  near  Otford  the  species  is  confined 
to  the  upper  part  and  sides  of  the  hills,  and  does  not  extend  to 
the  low  land  near  the  ocean.  The  same  remark  applies  to  New- 
port, though  there  the  sloping  hill  approaches  nearer  the  ocean 
at  one  spot;  so  that  if  the  seeds  were  washed  ashore  the  available 
evidence  indicates  that  they  would  still  have  to  be  carried  to  the 
hillside  before  young  plants  would  grow. 

Looking  at  the  matter  from  any  point  of  view,  it  remains 
difficult  to  definitely  explain  the  occurrence  of  this  Casuarina  at 
Newport  and  Otford,  though  it  cannot  appeal  to  one  as  being 
the  result  of  accident  or  coincidence.  The  suggestion  that  it 
may  have  formed  part  of  the  ancient  flora  and  have  continued 
southerly  to  Victoria  partly  along  the  area  which  now  forms  the 
continental  shelf  seems  quite  possible  and  even  probable.  In 
view  of  its  suggested  antiquity,  the  question  will  naturally  arise 
as  to  why  has  it  not  spread  across  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone 
on  to  the  Wianamatta  Shales  about  12  to  15  miles  away,  and 
which  should  produce  a  flora  somewhat  similar  to  that  of  the 
Narrabeen  Shales.  Had  the  distribution  been  by  birds,  this 
would  probably  have  happened  long  ago.  The  reason  why  it  is 
not  on  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone  area  is  probably  a  geological 
one. 

A.  0.  Seward,  M.A.,  F.G.S.,*  quotes  Fuchs  in  reference  to  the 
nature  of  the  soil  on   the  character  of  the  vegetation,  and  in 

*  Fossil  Plants  as  Tests  of  Climate.  1902,  p.  42. 


390     NOTES  ON  NATIVE  FLORA  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES,  IV., 

speaking  of  the  Italian  flora  says  : — "  He  notes  a  change  from  a 
central  European  to  a  Mediterranean  flora  independent  of 
climate.  The  occurrence  of  the  Mediterranean  flora  he  considers 
to  depend  not  so  much  upon  the  climate  as  upon  the  nature  of 
the  surface  rocks." 

In  New  South  Wales  alone  we  have  innumerable  instances 
where  the  flora  changes  with  a  distinct  line  of  cleavage,  but  in 
most  of  such  cases  it  is  at  the  meeting  of  igneous  and  sedimentary 
formations.  In  the  locality  under  discussion  we  have  sandstone 
and  shale,  which  are  both  sedimentary.  But  there  are,  at  a 
rough  estimate,  probably  twenty  to  thirty  per  cent,  of  the  plants 
growing  on  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone  which  do  not  occur  on 
the  Wianamatta  Shale,  excepting  around  the  fringe  or  where  the 
shale  is  shallow  and  the  influence  of  the  sandstone  operates. 
Two  well  known  instances  in  the  case  of  large  trees  may  be 
quoted,  viz.,  Eucalyptus  corymbosa  Sm.,  the  well  known  Blood- 
wood,  and  Angophora  lanceolata  Cav.,  the  smooth-barked  Apple 
or  so-called  Red  Gum,  both  of  which  are  common  on  the  sand- 
stone, but  practically  never  on  the  deep  shale.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  common  Box  around  Parramatta  and  Penrith,  Euca- 
lyptus hemiphloia  F.v.M.,  is  abundant  on  the  Wianamatta  Shale, 
but  rarely,  if  ever,  occurs  on  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone.  Some 
of  these  species  are  probably  as  ancient  as  any  of  the  genus 
Eucalyptus,  and  have  had  thousands  of  years  to  spread  only  a 
matter  of  a  few  yards  on  to  the  adjoining  formation  without 
having  done  so.  Further  enlightenment  in  regard  to  plant  food 
may  make  the  reason  apparent. 

Tracts  of  isolated  but  similar  vegetation  are  not  uncommon, 
and  an  examination  of  the  surrounding  country  in  many  cases 
discloses  the  fact  that  these  particular  floras  are  growing  on  the 
same  geological  formation  which  was  formerly  more  extensive, 
but  in  intervening  areas  has  been  removed  by  denudation.  The 
presence  of  trees  in  distant  situations  may  often  be  explained  by 
an  investigation  of  former  conditions  and  an  imaginary  recon- 
struction of  the  old  land-surface  in  the  locality;  or,  in  other 
words,  outliers  may  often  be  more  satisfactorily  accounted  for  as 
ancient  remnants  than  as  recent  extensions. 


BY    R.    H.    CAMBAGE.  391 

After  investigating  the  various  methods  of  distribution,  and 
having  in  view  the  isolated  occurrence  of  Casuarina  stricta  along 
the  east  coast  of  New  South  Wales,  the  suggestion  that  it  formed 
part  of  the  latest  flora  on  the  present  continental  shelf  before 
its  final  submergence,  seems  to  me  less  open  to  destructive  criticism 
than  any  other  put  forward.  Such  a  conclusion  is  supported  by 
an  inspection  of  the  She-oaks  now  growing  on  the  narrow  sloping 
strip  of  Narrabeen  formation  near  Otford  and  Stanwell  Park. 
Here  C.  stricta  may  be  seen  creeping  up  to  the  foot  of  the 
Hawkesbury  Sandstone  hills,  but  going  no  further,  its  place  being 
then  taken  by  G.  suberosa  Ott.  &  Dietr.  The  contemplation  of 
this  patient  though  persistent  progression,  especially  in  the 
light  of  our  geological  knowledge  of  the  past  history  of  this 
coastal  area,  suggests  that  the  species  has  worked  its  way  up 
from  the  south  along  the  old  land-surface  where  the  formation 
was  found  suitable,  and  on  reaching  the  sandstone,  quietly  awaited 
its  erosion,  in  exactly  the  same  way  as  we  find  it  doing  to-day. 

I  am  much  indebted  to  Mr.  W.  S.  Dun,  Palaeontologist,  Mines 
Department,  for  references  to  literature  bearing  on  the  subject 
matter  of  this  paper. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  XII.-XIIL 

Plate  xii. 
Casuarina  stricta  Ait. ,  on  Narrabeen  Shale  Formation;   Otford  to  Stanwel 
Park,  N.S.W. 

Plate  xiii. 

Map  showing  the  100-fathom  line  on  the  Coast  of  South-East  Australia. 


CENSUS  MUSCORUM  AUSTRALIENSIUM. 

A  CLASSIFIED  Catalogue  of  the  Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia 
AND  Tasmania,  collated  from  available  Publications  and 
Herbaria  Records,  by  the  Rev.  W.  Walter  Watts  and 
Thomas  Whitelegge,  F.R.M.S. 

Part  II. 

(To  be  issued  separately  as  a  Supplement  to  Part  4  of  this  Volume). 


392 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Mr.  Steel  exhibited  a  string  of  copra  as  brought  to  the  dealers 
by  the  natives  of  Fiji  and  other  South  Sea  Islands.  The  half 
segments  of  the  dried  cocoanut  kernel  are  perforated  in  the  centre 
and  strung  on  a  piece  of  bark  or  a  fibrous  palm  leaf. 

Dr.  Chapman  exhibited  a  sample  of  the  dried  blood-serum  of 
a  rabbit  which  contained  a  precipitin  for  the  egg-albumen  of  the 
ostrich,  and  which  he  had  prepared  with  the  collaboration  of 
Professor  D.  A.  Welsh.  The  precipitating  substance  in  the 
serum  was  produced  by  the  intraperitoneal  injection  at  intervals 
of  2,  3,  3,  5,  6,  4,  4,  and  2  days  of  5,  8,  10,  10,  7,  10,  10,  5,  and 
10  c.c.  respectively  of  the  white  of  an  ostrich's  egg  presented  to 
them  by  Mr.  Le  Soeuf,  Curator  of  the  Zoological  Gardens.  The 
rabbit  was  killed  by  bleeding,  12  days  after  the  last  injection. 
The  serum  expressed  from  the  clot  was  collected  partly  in  sterile 
sealed  tubes,  and  the  remainder  dried  in  vacuo  over  anhydrous 
CaClo  at  20°  C.  In  24  hours  5  c.c.  were  dried,  and  this  yielded 
0-511  gramme  of  dried  substance.  The  fluid  serum  was  found 
to  produce  strong  precipitation  with  diluted  ostrich  egg-white. 
It  gave  instantaneous  clouds  with  dilutions  as  great  as  1  in  5000 
of  normal  saline,  when  added  in  the  proportion  of  1  of  antiserum  to 
5  of  dilution.  Clouds  appeared  in  30  minutes  with  dilutions  of 
1  in  20,000,  yielding  a  deposit  in  16  hours.  Standardised  by 
Nuttall's  method,  the  precipitate  measured  0-072  c.c.  The  dried 
serum  was  dissolved  in  normal  salt  solution  in  the  proportion  of 
0-02  gramme  in  1  c.c.  This  solution  was  filtered  and  tested.  It 
gave  reactions  with  0*1  c.c.  of  the  solution  of  antiserum  to  0*5 
c.c.  of  diluted  ostrich  albumen  to  an  extent  comparable  to  that 
obtained  with  undried  antiserum.  It  had  long  been  known  that 
the  precipitable  substance  in  serum  is  not  destroyed  by  dr3ang, 
but,  as  far  as  he  was  aware,  the  antiserum  had  hitherto  been 
kept  in  the  fluid  state,  which  involved  much  time  and  labour 
spent  in  placing  it  in  sterile  tubes.  The  dried  serum  was  pre- 
served with  greater  ease.     Some  human  antiserum  kept  dry  for 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  395 

over  a  month  had  suffered  no  deterioration.  Tested  by  Nuttall's 
method,  no  alteration  could  be  detected  when  the  dried  antiserum 
was  tested  against  fluid  antiserum. 

Mr.  Fred.  Turner  exhibited,  and  offered  some  observations  on, 
fifteen  species  of  Acacia  collected  in  the  Dubbo  district,  where 
they  were  flowering  during  August  and  September,  viz., 

PHYLLODINEiE. 

Acacia  t^'iptera  Benth. — This  rigid  shrub  has  pungent-pointed, 
prominently  nerved  phyllodes.  It  sometimes  grows  in  dense 
masses  which  are  most  difficult  to  penetrate. 

A.  colletioides  A.  Ounn.,  is  a  rigid  shrub,  with  rather  remarkable 
almost  linear-terete,  many  finely-nerved  phyllodes.  It  usually 
grows  on  good  land. 

A.  conferta  A.  Cunm,  is  a  tall-growing  species  with  very  small 
linear  phyllodes,  which  are  crowded  on  the  branches.  It  flowers 
most  profusely. 

A.  lineata  A.  Cunn.,  attains  sometimes  a  height  of  ten  feet, 
with  usually  pubescent  branches  and  small  linear  hairy  phyllodes. 
It  is  a  pretty  sight  when  in  bloom. 

A.  penninervis  Sieb. — The  phyllodes  of  this  rather  tall  tree  are 
most  variable  as  regards  size.  Sometimes  they  are  only  from  two 
to  three  inches  long,  at  other  times  from  six  to  eight  or  more 
inches  long.  This  species  may  be  recognised,  even  when  not  in 
flower,  by  its  more  or  less  prominently  finely  penniveined 
phyllodes,  and  by  its  secondary  nerve  when  present  terminating 
in  a  marginal  gland. 

A.  notahilis  F.v.M. — This  is  a  nota,ble  and  handsome  species, 
sometimes  growing  into  a  small  tree  and  producing  globular, 
comparatively  large  heads  of  flowers.      It  is  fairly  common. 

A.  hakeoides  A.  Cunn.,  is  a  tall  and  very  floriferous  shrub.  It 
is  fairly  plentiful,  growing  on  both  good  and  inferior  country. 

A.  decora  Reichb.,  although  flowering  profusely  as  a  dwarf 
shrub,  sometimes  grows  several  feet  high,  and  is  a  very  pretty 
sight  when  in  bloom.     It  is  fairly  common. 


394  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

A.  buxi/olia  A.  Cunn.,  is  a  shrub  of  compact  habit,  and  in 
spring  displays  a  wealth  of  bloom. 

A.  cultri/ormis  A.  Cunn. — This  well-known  species  has  long 
been  an  inhabitant  of  our  gardens,  where  it  is  justly  prized  for 
its  remarkably  shaped  phyl lodes  and  free-flowering  habit. 

A.  amhlygona  A.  Cunn.,  is  a  rather  remarkable  diffuse  shrub, 
with  elongated  branches,  and  almost  triangular  very  small 
phyllodes,  which  are  prominently  nerved,  the  lower  nerve  being 
prolonged  into  a  pungent  point. 

A.  aneura  F.v.M.  — This  shrub  or  tree  is  the  principal,  and 
often  the  only  species  comprising  the  famous  "  Mulga  "  shrubs  of 
the  interior. 

B1PINNAT.S:. 

A.  spectahilis  A.  Cunn.,  is  a  very  beautiful  species  cultivated 
in  many  Australian  gardens.  It  grows  into  a  fair-sized  tree,  and 
flowers  profusely  as  a  shrub.  It  is  fairly  plentiful  in  many  parts 
of  the  central  division  of  this  State. 

A.  polyhotrya  Benth. — Many  admirers  of  trees  and  shrubs 
regard  this  species  as  the  most  beautiful  member  of  this  well 
represented  genus.  Its  elegant  pinnate  foliage  and  free-flowering 
habit  never  fail  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  most  unobservant 
person.  There  is  a  charming  variety  (foliolosa)  of  this  species, 
but  it  is  not  nearly  as  common  as  the  typical  form. 

A.  cardiophylla  A.  Cunn. — This  is  another  elegant  species  that 
is  well  worth  cultivating,  both  for  the  sake  of  its  foliage  and 
flowers.     It  is  rather  uncommon. 

Mr.  A.  A.  Hamilton  exhibited  a  specimen  of  Pieris  falcata 
R.Br.,  showing  a  bipinnate  form  under  cultivation.  Mr.  Hamilton 
pointed  out  that  the  plant  exhibited  and  recorded  by  him  at  a 
former  Meeting,  under  the  name  Cyperus  platystylis  R.Br. 
{Proceedings  xxvi.  472)  was  not  that  species,  but  C.  Icevigatus 
Linn.,  a  correction  for  which  he  was  indebted  to  Mr.  Maiden. 

Mr.  Waite  showed  living  examples  of  the  Fighting  Fish  [Betta 
pugnax  Cantor).  An  account  of  the  breeding  habits  had  been 
published  in   the   Records  of   the   Australian  Museum  (v.  293) 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  395 

together  with  a  photo  of  the  nest.  The  original  examples  and 
joung  died  on  the  approach  of  cold  weather,  but  Mr.  Waite 
hoped  to  be  more  successful  with  the  specimens  exhibited, 
recently  imported  from  Pinang. 

Mr.  A.  G.  Hamilton  showed  specimens  of  a  thalloid  Hepatic 
{probably  Targionia  sp.)  remarkable  for  its  fruits  being  borne  on 
the  underside  of  the  apex  of  the  thallus;  specimens  of  a  Riccia 
growing  on  damp  soil;  specimens  of  Phylloglossum  Drummondii 
(LvcoPODiACEiE)  from  Western  Australia;  and  a  specimen  of  a 
rather  localised  species,  Boronia  Barkeriana  F.v.M.,  collected  at 
■Sailor's  Bay,  near  Willoughby. 

Mr.  W.  S.  Dun  exhibited  a  specimen  of  a  large  Co7iularia  from 
the  Carboniferous  mudstone  of  Clarence  Town.  This  Pteropod 
was  a  large  one,  though  smaller  than  C.  inornata  occurring 
in  the  Permo-Carboniferous,  which  attained  a  length  of  20  inches. 
The  species  brought  to  light  at  Clarence  Town  is  new  and  is 
easily  distinguishable  from  C.  quadrisulcata  Miller,  recorded  by 
De  Koninck  from  the  Carboniferous  of  Gloucester,  N.S.W. 

Mr.  North  sent  for  exhibition  a  skin  and  set  of  two  eggs  of 
Melithreptus  albigularis  Gould.  They  were  obtained  at  Cop- 
manhurst  on  the  Clarence  River,  New  South  Wales,  by  Mr. 
George  Savidge,  who  also  forwarded  a  nest  he  had  procured  on 
the  22nd  instant.  Altogether  three  birds  in  the  flesh  had  been 
received.  Previously  this  species  had  not  been  recorded  from 
further  south  than  Wide  Bay,  Queensland.  In  the  Catalogue  of 
Birds  in  the  British  Museum  (Vol.  ix.).  Dr.  H.  Gadow  regards  M. 
albigularis  as  only  subspecifically  distinct  from  M.  lunnlatus 
Shaw.  There  is,  however,  no  intergradation  between  these  two 
birds,  and  in  addition  to  the  olive-yellow  upper  parts,  and  white 
<;hin  of  M.  albigidaris,  it  is  furthermore  distinguished  b}^  having 
the  bare  skin  above  and  behind  the  eye  dull  greenish-blue,  which 
in  i/.  lunuiatus  is  rich  orange-scarlet.  Mr.  North  also  recorded 
seeing  an  Albatros  {Thalassogeron  cautus)  on  the  22nd  ult.  at 
the  entrance  of  Lavender  Bay.  It  was  resting  on  the  water  not 
far  from  Milson's  Point,  but  on  the  approach  of  a  ferry  steamer 


396  NOTKS    AND    EXHIBITS. 

it  flew  towards  Darling  Harbour,  then  circled  round,  passing 
Milson's  Point,  and  settling  down  again  on  the  water  in  Farm 
Cove.  During  August  one  of  these  birds  was  received  by  the 
Trustees  of  the  Australian  Museum  which  was  captured  alive  by 
Mr.  R.  S.  Thomas,  of  South  Clifton.  Of  curious  nesting  sites  of 
the  Rock  Warbler,  Origma  rubricata  Latham,  Mr.  A.  F.  Hull 
informed  Mr  North  that  a  pair  had  built  their  nest  round  a 
piece  of  string  hanging  down  inside  from  the  roof  of  a  tent  at 
Freshwater,  Manly.  This  tent,  the  entrance  to  which  was 
partially  concealed  by  a  rock  shelter,  was  occupied  from  Saturday 
to  Monday,  and  every  other  night  by  several  youths,  but  the 
birds,  unconcerned  at  their  presence,  had  finished  the  nest,  and 
the  female  had  since  the  17th  inst.  been  sitting  on  a  full  com- 
plement of  eggs.  Last  year  Mr.  Herbert  E.  Ross  informed  him 
a  pair  had  built  their  nest  in  a  small  cave  that  had  been  fitted 
up  as  a  dark-room  for  photographers,  in  the  rocky  and  spacious 
grounds  of  a  well  known  resort  at  Medlow  on  the  Blue  Mountains. 
At  Lane  Cove  Mr.  Arthur  Muddle  found  a  nest  last  year 
attached  to  the  timbers  beneath  the  verandah  of  a  waterside 
cottage,  and  in  the  same  locality  several  seasons  ago  Mr.  Edgar 
R.  Waite  saw  a  nest,  containing  young,  attached  to  the  roof 
inside  a  bathing-box  at  Longueville. 

Mr.  H.  I.  Jensen  exhibited  (I)  hand-specimens  and  thin 
slices  of  glaucophane  schist  from  Mt.  Mee,  in  the  D'Aguilar 
Range,  Queensland.  This  rock  occurs  associated  with  actinolite 
schist,  anthophyllite  schist,  uralite  and  other  amphibole  schists, 
all  of  which  represent  a  highly  metamorphosed  Palaeozoic  lava  or 
tufif.  They  are  interbedded  with  highly  metamorphic  granulites, 
phyllites  and  mica  schists,  probably  of  Devonian  age.  For 
comparison  thin  slices  of  riebeckite  trachyte  from  Mt.  Tibrogar- 
gan,  and  arfvedsonite-cossyrite  trachyte  from  Ngun-Ngun,  in 
the  Glass  House  Mountains,  were  exhibited.  The  occurrence  of 
glaucophane,  which  is  closely  allied  to  riebeckite  in  chemical 
constitution,  in  the  same  district  as  the  alkaline  trachj^tes,  but 
in  highly  altered  lavas  of  much  greater  age,  is  an  interesting 
piece  of  evidence  that  this  district  was  an  alkaline  province  even 


NOTKS    AND    EXHIBITS.  397 

in  Palaeozoic  times.  (2)  Raised  beach  shells  from  Point 
Arkwright,  north  of  the  mouth  of  the  Marooch}^  River,  Queens- 
land. The  shells  represented  include  Turbo  imperialis,  Helcio- 
niscus  tramosericus,  Donax  deltoidalis,  Risella  melanostoma, 
Nerita  melanotrayus,  and  Monodonta  zebra.  The  raised  beach  is 
found  at  an  altitude  of  150  to  210  feet,  the  shells  exhibited  being 
picked  up  at  an  altitude  of  180  feet.  The  perfection  of  the  large 
shells,  the  similarity  of  the  relative  proportion  of  small,  large 
and  broken  shells  to  that  of  the  present  beach,  the  absence  of 
ashes  and  implements,  and  the  nature  of  the  sand  all  tend  to 
show  that  the  bank  is  not  of  "kitchen-midden"  origin.  The 
occurrence  of  very  large  turbos,  waterworn  porphyry  and  grano- 
phyre  boulders,  and  the  high  elevation  offer  evidence  that  they 
are  not  of  a  wind-blown  origin.  The  shellbank  overlies  altered 
sandstone  at  the  top  of  the  Point  Arkwright  Cliff,  and  about 
100  feet  below,  near  sea-level,  the  porphyry  laccolite  comes  in 
view,  yet  boulders  and  pebbles  of  porphyry  are  found  in  the 
bank.  And  (3)  water  from  a  sulphuretted  hydrogen  spring  at 
Point  Arkwright.  This  water  supports  a  luxuriant  growth  of 
slime  which  was  found  to  be  Beggiatoa  (probably  arachnoidea) 
filaments.  The  water  was  also  found  to  abound  in  desmids  and 
diatoms.     Oscillaria  and  Nostoc  were  also  abundant  in  the  water. 

Mr.  Fletcher  said  that  he  had  been  led  to  take  an  interest  in  the 
Loranths  of  a  circumscribed  locality  of  limited  area  in  which  the 
conditions  for  their  development  were  very  favourable;  and  that 
at  the  next  Meeting  he  proposed  to  exhibit  some  rather  remark- 
able specimens,  and  to  offer  some  observations  upon  these  and 
cognate  matters.  He  therefore  suggested  that  Members  who 
were  interested  in  Loranths,  and  who  were  in  a  position  to 
exhibit  noteworthy  specimens,  to  record  unusual  occurrences,  or 
to  give  brief  succinct  accounts  of  the  Loranths  of  other 
localities,  should  take  advantage  of  the  opportunity  of  doing  so 
at  the  next  Meeting,  for  the  sake  of  comparison  and  in  order  that 
the  records  might  be  kept  together. 

Mr.  Fletcher  said  also  that  the  specimens  which  he  hoped  to  be 
able  to  show  next  month  would  include  a  series  of  examples  of 


398  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Loranths  '  feeding '  (to  adopt  Mr.  Bentham's  expression)  other 
Loranths  (i.e.,  representatives  of  the  genus  Loranthns).  He 
would  draw  particular  attention  to  these  because  they  seemed  to 
throw  light  upon  the  question  of  the  interpretation  to  be  placed 
upon  a  remarkable  statement  in  the  "  Narrative  of  a  Visit  to 
the  Australian  Colonies"  by  the  late  Mr.  James  Backhouse,  a 
very  capable  botanist  and  a  keen  and  accurate  observer : — 
"  20th  [July,  1835].  Three  species  of  the  genus  Loranthus, 
which  consists  of  plants,  allied  to  Mistletoe,  grow  parasitically 
on  trees  in  this  neighbourhood  ["  a  few  miles  to  the  east  of 
Sydney"].  They  have  handsome  blossoms,  a  little  like  Honey- 
suckle, but  with  more  green,  than  yellow  or  red  in  them.  Two 
of  them  have  external  roots  adhering  to  the  bark  of  the  trees 
that  support  them,  and  incorporating  themselves  with  it;  but 
occasionally,  one  of  these  species  happens  to  grow  upon  the  other, 
and  then  it  emits  no  external  root !  This  is  a  striking  instance 
of  that  power,  sometimes  exhibited  by  a  plant,  to  adapt  itself  to 
circumstances,  and  which  is  called  Vegetable  Instinct." 

At  next  Meeting  discussion  would  be  invited  upon  the  subject 
of  the  relationship  subsisting  between  two  Loranths  under  the 
conditions  indicated.  As  well-established  Loranth-fed  Loranths 
were  scarce  and  difficult  to  obtain.  Members  who  were  able  to 
show  specimens  were  especially  requested  to  be  good  enough  to 
do  so. 


399 


WEDNESDAY,  OCTOBER  25th,  1905. 


The  Ordinary  Monthly  Meeting  of  the  Society  was  held  in 
the  Linnean  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  October  25th,  1905. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

The  President  announced  that  the  Council  was  prepared  to 
receive  applications  for  two  Linnean  Macleay  Fellowships  from 
qualified  candidates.  Applications  should  be  in  the  hands  of  the 
Secretary  on  or  before  30th  November,  1905.  In  the  meantime 
intending  Candidates  were  recommended  to  put  themselves  in 
communication  with  the  Secretary,  who  would  afford  all  necessary 
information. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous 
Monthly  Meeting,  amounting  to  25  Vols.,  56  Parts  or  Nos.,  34 
Bulletins,  4  Reports,  31  Pamphlets  and  2  Maps,  received  from 
55  Societies,  &c.,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 


400 


THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES. 

By  D.  Mawson,  B.E.,  B.Sc,  Lecturer  in  Mineralogy  and 
Petrology  at  the  University  of  Adelaide. 

(Plates  xiv.-xxix.). 


CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Preface  401 

Introduction 402 

Geographical  Features       403 

Part  I. — Sec.1.     Systematic  Geology      404-427 

Aneityum— Tanna— Aniwa — Futuna — Erromanga — Efat^  —  Mataso 
Monument  Rock — Makura— The  Cook  Reef — The  Shepherd 
Islands  —  Epi  —  Pau  Uma  —  Lopevi — Ambrym  —  Malekula  — 
Santo  —  Aoba  —  Aragh  Aragh  —  Aurora.  The  Banks 
Group:  Vanua  Lava — Mota — Valua— Pakea — The  Reefs 
Islands — Gaua — Ureparapara.     The  Torres  Islands. 

Sec.  2.     Vulcanology  and  Seismology 427-434 

Active,  dormant,  and  extinct   volcanoes — hot   springs— earth- 
quakes. 

Sec.  3.     Mineral  Resources       

Part  II. — Sec.1.     Detailed  Geology  of  Efate 
(i.)  Submarine  volcanic  origin 
(ii.)  Coarse  pumice  tuffs 
(iii.)  Soapstone  series 


(iv.)  Agglomerates    ... 

(v.)  Raised  reefs 

(vi.)  Later  basic  eruptions 
(vii.)  River  alluvials  ... 
Local  Features— Vila — Shepherd's  Hill — Meli  District — Havannah 
Harbour  Tableland — Leleppa — Undine  Bay  District — Nguna, 
Mau  and  Pele 441-446 


434 
435 
435 
436 
436 
438 
438 
440 
440 


•Sec 2.     Detailed  Geology  of  South-West  Santo    ... 

(i.)  The  earlier  volcanic  series      

(ii.)  Miocene  Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion  series 
(iii.)  Later  volcanic  series   ... 


446 
446 
446 
447 


BY  D.   MAWSON. 


401 


(iv.)  Bedded  rocks  underlying  the  recent  raised  reefs 
(v.)  Eecent  raised  reefs 
(vi.)  Recent  fresh-water  deposits    ... 

(vii.)  Evidence  of  faulting  in  Santo  

XocAL   Features  —  Tangoa  —  Araki  —  Tasiriki-Tasmalum 

Tasiriki — Tasiriki  to  Talapone — Wuss      

.Sec.  3.     Petrological  Descriptions      

(i.)  Efat^  soapstones 

(ii.)  Raised  reef  limestone 

(iii.)  Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion  limestones  ... 
(iv. )  Mineral  tuffs    ... 
(v.)  Perlitic  hypersthene  andesite  glass  ... 

(vi.)  Hornblende  andesite  ...  

(vii.)  Glomeritic  basalt  porphyrite... 

(viii.)  Olivine  basalt  porphyrite       

(ix.)  XJralite  porphyry         ..  

'Summary  ,         

Conclusions 

Appendix. — List  of  fossil  forms  identified  at  the  Australian 
from  the  recent  raised  reefs  and  foundation-beds 

Bibliography 

Explanation  of  Plates 

dORRIGENDA 


447 

448 

449 

449 

Track— 

450-453 

453 

453 

454 

455 

456 

456 

459 

462 

465 

467 

470 

473 


Museum 


477 
479 
482 

485 


PREFACE. 

The  following  paper  on  the  geology  of  the  Nevvr  Hebrides,  with 
which  are  incorporated  the  Banks  and  Torres  Groups,  is  the  result 
of  six  months'  field  work  carried  out  under  the  auspices  of  Capt. 
E.  G.  Rason,  R.N.,  during  the  winter  months  of  1903. 

In  an  introductory  note  read  before  the  Australian  Association 
for  the  Advancement  of  Science,*  both  Mr.  W.  T.  Quaife 
(biologist  to  the  expedition)  and  myself  have  already  acknow- 
ledged our  indebtedness  to  the  various  Presbyterian  Missionaries 
in  the  Group  for  their  ever  ready  hospitality,  and  especially  to 
the  Rev.  F.  Bowie,  M.A.,  of  Tangoa,  and  Rev.  Dr.  McDonald, 
of  Sema,  by  whose  assistance  districts  otherwise  inaccessible  were 
brought  within  our  sphere  of  operations. 

Since  our  return,  by  the  co-operation  of  Professor  T.  W.  E. 
David,  F.R.S.,  the  elaboration  of  the  collections  has  been  pushed 


*  Report  of  the  Tenth  Meeting,  Dunedin,  1904  [1905]. 
26 


%.::'"K^ 


402  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

on  with  as  rapidly  as  circumstances  permitted,  and  is  now  pre- 
sented in  as  condensed  a  form  as  is  consistent  with  not  losing 
sight  of  such  details  as  may  throw  light  on  the  main  issues  of 
geological  research  in  these  islands. 

The  work  of  describing  the  foraminifera  has  been  kindly  under- 
taken by  the  National  Museum  of  Melbourne,  and  Mr.  F. 
Chapman,  A.L.S.,  P.R.M.S.,  has  already  published  one  paperf 
on  the  oldest  fossiliferous  horizon  in  the  Group,  and  has  at 
present  under  examination,  as  time  permits,  a  collection  of 
foraminiferous  material  ranging  from  Miocene  to  recent  beach 
sands. 

The  examination  of  the  mollusca  and  corals,  etc.,  was  under- 
taken by  the  Australian  Museum  of  Sydney,  and  the  results  of 
much  careful  work  by  Mr.  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  Conchologist,  and 
Mr.  T.  Whitelegge,  Zoologist,  appear  arranged  in  tabulated  order 
in  the  Appendix.  The  frequent  references  to  genera  of  fossil  forms 
found  in  the  beds  described,  which  occur  scattered  through  the 
text,  are  all  drawn  from  the  work  of  Messrs.  Hedley,  Whitelegge 

and  Chapman. 

DsTEODUCTIOX. 

Although  the  existence  of  the  Xew  Hebrides  has  been  known 
to  Europeans  for  300  years  past,  dating  from  the  landing  of 
Quiros  in  1606  at  the  mouth  of  the  Jordan  River,  yet  on  account 
of  the  extreme  hostility  of  the  natives,  and  the  prevalence  in  many 
parts  of  malaria  of  an  acute  type,  this  group  long  remained  a  Terra 
Incognita;  only  comparatively  recently,  since  the  establishment 
of  the  Missions,  has  a  proper  knowledge  of  the  geography  and 
natural  features  been  obtained.  Geological  knowledge  of  these 
islands  still  remained  very  limited,  and  with  the  exception  of 
four  or  five  short  papers  on  the  subject,  is  practically  all  that  can 
be  gleaned  from  vague  reports  of  vessels  cruising  in  the  vicinity, 
and  from  casual  observations  appearing  in  works  of  resident 
missionaries.  Several  of  these  notices  being  very  much  in  error 
somewhat  complicated  our  work  at  the  outset. 

t  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1905,  p. 261. 


BY   D.   MAWSON.  403 

It  may  be  said,  therefore,  that  when  we  commenced  work 
in  the  Group  previous  knowledge  of  their  geological  features 
was  not  only  very  partial,  but  also  to  some  extent  unreliable. 
As  our  work  progressed,  however,  the  evidence  (geological  and 
biological)  we  were  able  to  collect  demonstrates  the  great 
interest  that  attaches  to  the  Group  as  an  important  factor  in 
elucidating  the  past  history  of,  at  an}--  rate,  this  portion  of  the 
Pacific,  and  should  be  of  service  in  settling  that  much  debated 
subject — the  history  of  coral  reefs. 

GEOGEAPHICAL  FEATURES. 

Omitting  the  Santa  Cruz  Islands,  often  geographically 
considered  a  continuation  of  the  main  New  Hebrides  Group, 
the  belt  of  islands  under  consideration  stretches  for  a  length  of 
550  miles  in  a  N.N.W.  direction,  between  Aneityum  169°  51' 
E.  long.,  20°  15'  S.  lat.  and  North  Island  of  the  Torres  Group 
165°  40'  E.  long.,  13°  10'  S.  lat. 

Hunter  Island,  an  active  volcano  180  miles  to  the  S.W.  by  S. 
of  Aneityum,  and  Matthew  Island  in  the  same  direction,  but 
30  miles  nearer,  are  to  be  considered  as  representing  geologically 
a  southerly  continuation  of  the  belt. 

In  relation  to  neighbouring  islands,  a  reference  to  the  map  will 
show  the  New  Hebrides  Group  to  lie  more  or  less  centrally 
placed,  with  New  Caledonia  to  the  S.W.  distant  about  190  miles, 
Viti  Levu  of  the  Fiji  Group  about  400  miles  to  the  east,  and 
San  Cristoval  of  the  Solomon  Islands  about  300  miles  to  the 
north-west. 

Amongst  the  islands  of  the  New  Hebrides  proper  (Plate  xxvii.) 
there  are  twelve  larger  islands  varying  in  size  from  Espiritu 
Santo  with  an  area  of  approximately  1500  sq.  miles,  to  Aneityum 
with  an  area  of  approximately  40  sq.  miles;  of  smaller  islands 
there  are  about  18,  averaging  a  little  over  5  sq.  miles;  in 
addition  there  are  innumerable  small  flat  coral  islands  to 
be  considered  only  as  portions  of  the  larger  islands  around 
which  they  are  distributed.  The  archipelago  preserves  a 
general  N.N.W.  direction,  along  which  the  factors  are  arranged 


404  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

either  in  single  file  as  is  the  case  in  the  south,  or  two  and  three 
abreast  as  in  the  north  (see  appended  map,  Plate  xxvii.)  The 
larger  islands  are  high  (highest  point  5520  ft.),  and  show  extensive 
exposures  of  volcanic  rocks  underlying  areas  of  raised  coral 
■terraces,  which  latter  reach  in  some  cases  an  elevation  of  quite 
2000  ft.  The  smaller  islands  are  often  wholly  volcanic;  in  others 
raised  coral  reef-material  predominates,  and  may  even  completely 
hide  from  view  the  more  solid  rocks  below. 

The  Banks  Islands,  which  are  really  a  northerly  extension  of 
the  eastern  arm  of  the  New  Hebrides,  are  almost  solely  volcanic 
in  origin,  reef  debris  taking  relatively  only  a  very  small  share  in 
their  formation;  as  a  result  they  are  high  and  rugged.  Vanua 
Lava  and  Gaua  are  the  largest  islands,  with  areas  each  about  85 
«q.miles;  ten  other  smaller  islands  complete  the  group  and  bring 
the  total  area  up  to  about  193  sq.  miles. 

Further  to  the  north-west  lies  the  Torres  Group  of  six  small 
islands  with  a  total  area  of  only  about  30  sq.  miles.  They  are 
composed  wholly  of  raised  coral  with  underlying  detrital  founda- 
tion beds,  and  rise  up  in  terrace-formation  to  a  maximum  height 
of  1230  ft. 

The  prevailing  wind  is  a  south-easterly  trade,  though  light 
north- westerlies  are  not  uncommon  at  certain  seasons  of  the  year. 
Hurricanes  are  to  be  expected  any  time  between  the  latter  end 
of  November  and  the  end  of  February,  and  are  often  accountable 
for  much  destruction  of  property. 

There  are  several  active  volcanoes  in  the  Group,  and  it  is  to 
such  agencies  that  the  whole  land-surface  probably  owes  its 
origin.  Earthquakes  are  of  frequent  occurrence,  and  are  some- 
times alarmingly  severe  ;  these  have  occasionally  been  followed 
b)y  tidal  waves. 

Part  I.— Sec.1.     SYSTEMATIC  GEOLOGY. 

This  section  deals  with  each  of  the  islands  separately,  and 
contains  all  available  accurate  geological  information  relating 
thereto.  The  limited  time  at  our  disposal  necessitated  very  short 
calls  at  the  various  islands  excepting  Efat^  and  Santo;  indeed, 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  405 

many  had  to  be  passed  by  with  no  further  examination  than 
could  be  prosecuted  from  the  deck  of  the  vessel.  A  detailed 
report  of  observations  made  on  the  island  of  Efate  and  in  South- 
West  Santo  appears  in  a  later  part  of  this  paper. 

The  titles  of  references  when  previous  observers  are  quoted 
will  be  found  in  the  bibliography  (p.  479). 

Aneityum  is  the  southernmost  island  of  the  New  Hebrides 
proper;  it  is  almost  circular  in  outline,  with  a  diameter  of  about 
7  miles  and  an  area  approximately  40  sq. miles. 

Our  stay  at  Anelgauhat  was  so  limited  that  it  was  possible 
only  to  make  a  geological  examination  for  some  two  miles  inland. 
A  well  developed  fringing  reef  completely  encircles  the  island  at 
a  distance  of  about  ^  mile  from  the  shore,  affording  one  of  the 
the  best  examples  of  growing  coral  reef-formation  to  be  found 
in  the  Group.  Beach  sand  rock  is  well  developed  along  most 
parts  of  the  coast  visited,  giving  place  above  high-water  mark  to 
a  blown  sand  rock  composed  of  the  finer  beach  sand  material 
which  has  been  piled  up  to  a  height  of  10  ft.  or  so  by  the  trade 
wind,  and  there  become  loosely  connected,  forming  a  porous  lime- 
stone containing  a  large  proportion  of  mineral  fragments;  this 
rock  is  well  shown  in  a  cutting  just  behind  Wilson's  store. 

Inland  from  the  Mission  Station  is  an  area  of  low-lying  ground 
about  half  a  mile  in  diameter,  evidently  once  a  shallow  lagoon, 
but  since  reclaimed  by  the  deposition  of  large  quantities  of 
volcanic  boulders  and  other  finer  material  brought  down  by  a 
small  river  which  empties  into  the  sea  a  little  to  the  south. 
Beyond  this  depressed  area  the  land  gradually  rises  to  the  flanks 
of  the  central  range  of  hills,  which  attain  a  maximum  height  of 
2788  ft.  The  rocks  of  this  region  are  all  eruptive,  either  dark 
greenish-grey  or  light  grey  olivine  basalt  porphyrites  (1,  2)-  the 
latter  variety  outcrops  some  distance  inland,  and  is  relatively 
less  abundant  than  the  former. 

It  is  possible  that  remains  of  old  coral  reefs  may  exist  at 
higher  altitudes,  as  is  the  case  in  most  of  the  other  islands;  the 
contour  of  the  hills,  however,  does  not  suggest  such  to  be  the 
case,  nor  were  any  boulders  of  coral  seen  in  the  river  bed. 


406  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

When  making  a  call  on  the  northern  coast  of  the  island  a  very 
strongly  developed  volcanic  agglomerate  could  be  seen  forming 
some  low  cliffs  close  by  the  shore.  What,  in  the  distance, 
appeared  to  be  a  similar  agglomerate  forms  a  small  knob"^  just 
to  the  south  of  the  Mission  Station  at  Anelgauhat. 

From  what  we  have  been  able  to  ascertain,  therefore,  Aneityum 
represents  the  remains  of  an  ancient  volcano  of  the  same  age 
probably  as  Mau  and  others  further  to  the  north.  The  northern 
boundary  of  the  old  crater  ring  appears  to  be  represented  by  the 
existing  chain  of  hills;  the  southern  portions  do  not  appear,  due 
to  denudation  and  other  causes. 

The  absence  of  raised  coral  reefs  demonstrates  the  fact  that 
regular  upheaval,  such  as  is  strongly  evidenced  in  the  more 
northerly  islands,  has  not  visited  this  region  to  the  same  extent; 
the  conditions  being  probably  that  of  stable  equilibrium  or  very 
slow  subsidence  allowing  of  the  silting  up  of  old  lagoons  and  tha 
formation  of  a  comparatively  wide  100  fathom  belt. 

1.  Olivine  Basalt  Porphyrite  outcrops  a  few  hundred  yards 
behind  Wilson's  store. 

Macroscopic  Character s. — A  compact  dark  greenish- 
grey-coloured  rock,  with  porphyritic  individuals  of  pyroxene  and 
olivine  standing  out  conspicuously  in  a  dark  base  of  finer  texture. 
Steam  holes  are  developed  to  a  slight  extent  only. 

Microscopic  Character  s. — A  holocrystalline  porphy- 
ritic rock.  The  porphyritic  felspar  individuals  are  even-sized 
and  rectangular,  about  O'GxO'-imm.;  they  contain  numerous 
regularly  included  fragments  of  magnetite  and  black  glass,  and 
exhibit  very  perfect  polysynthetic  twinning  after  the  albite  law 
with  an  extinction  angle  referring  them  to  the  more  basic  labra- 
dorites.  Large  porphyritic  'pyroxenes  0*5  cm.  diameter  represent 
about  10  %  of  the  rock,  and  another  5  %  is  represented  by  idio- 
morphic  crystals  of  a  pinkish  olivine  0'8  mm.  diameter.  The 
hase^  which  is  present  to  the  extent  of  abont  15  %  of  the  rock,  is 

*  Since  returning  we  have  heard  that  M.  Pelatan  had  described  the  rocks 
of  this  hill  as  being  similar  to  New  Caledonian  serpentines.  The  source  of 
the  information,  however,  cannot  be  located. 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  407 

microcrystalline  granular  consisting  of  felspar,  greenish-yellow 
pyroxene  and  magnetite;  it  appears  as  a  cementing  material 
between  the  coarser  individuals. 

2.  Olivine  Basalt  Porphyrite  outcrops  at  the  timber-shoot 
about  1  mile  inland. 

Macroscopic  Character  s. — A  light  grey-coloured  rock 
in  which  large  pyroxenes  and  clear  felspars  appear  in  a  micro- 
crystalline  base. 

Microscopic  Character  s. — The  rock  is  seen  to  be  com- 
posed of  two  distinct  factors — porphyritic  constituents  of  idio- 
morphic  felspar,  pyroxene  and  olivine  individuals  to  the  extent 
of  about  50  %  of  the  rock  scattered  through  a  typical  pilotaxitic 
base. 

Of  the  porphyritic  constituents  the  felspars^  which  represent 
about  25  %  of  the  rock,  are  large  clear  crystals,  often  7  mm.  in 
length,  with  extinction  angle  corresponding  to  basic  labradorite. 
Another  15  %  is  represented  h^^  pyroxene  crystals,  more  or  less 
granular,  and  averaging  2  mm.  diameter;  they  are  of  a  very  light 
lemon-yellow  colour,  only  faintly  pleochroic,  and  are  free  from 
inclusions.  Large  pinkish  olivines,  about  1  mm.  diameter,  com- 
pose another  8  %,  and  magnetite  grains,  0-5  mm.  diameter, 
another  2  %. 

The  microcrystalline  pilotaxitic  groundmass  of  the  rock  is  a 
meshwork  of  lath-shaped  plagioclase  crystals  O'l  to  02  mm.  in 
length,  with  interstices  occupied  by  tiny  light  greenish-yellow 
granular  pyroxenes  and  magnetic  grains. 

Both  this  rock,  and  the  one  described  preceding  it,  have  certain 
of  the  characters  of  a  dolerite,  but  are  in  the  main  more  nearly 
related  to  the  basalts.  They  differ  from  each  other  not  in  magma 
composition,  only  in  relative  development  and  size  of  the  mineral 
constituents.  The  darker  colour  of  the  first-described  type  is 
attributable  to  the  darker  appearance  of  the  felspars,  due  to  very 
numerous  inclusions. 

Tanna  has  always  attracted  much  attention  from  travellers  on 
account  of  its  containing  the  active  volcano  of  Yasowa.* 


*  For  details  see  Section  2  (p.  429). 


4C8  THE  GEOLOGV  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

The  island  is  roughly  18  miles  long  by  10  miles  broad,  with 
an  area  approximately  150  sq. miles.  The  general  direction  of 
the  land-surface  agrees  with  that  of  the  central  range  of  hills, 
and  trends  to  the  KN.W.  and  S.S.E.  The  Admiralty  chart 
indicates  the  maximum  height  attained  as  about  3500  ft. 

As  we  were  not  able  to  land  on  this  interesting  island  we 
quote  from  reports  by  the  Rev.  W.  Gray  and  others,  who  state 
that  it  is  composed  mainly  of  volcanic  material  such  as  scoria 
and  agglomerate,  but  that  at  the  north  end  the  soil  seems  to  be 
derived  from  sedimentary  rocks.  Raised  coral  reefs  are  stated 
to  occur  along  part  of  the  east  coast,  round  the  north  end,  and 
down  the  west  coast,  attaining  a  maximum  elevation  in  the 
latter  locality  where  they  appear  at  heights  of  over  100  ft. 

Professor  A.  Liversidge  has  recorded  the  analyses  of  three 
samples  of  Tanna  lava.*  These  specimens  appear  to  have  been 
chocolate-coloured  to  black  glassy  lavas,  for  the  most  part  highly 
vesicular  to  a  degree  approaching  that  of  pumice,  carrying 
porphyritic  glassy  crystals  of  felspar. 

A  specimen  of  a  similar  lava  from  Tanna,  preserved  in  the 
Sydney  University  Geological  Museum,  contains  porphyritic 
albite  crystals  (R.I.  1-535);  the  lava  is  therefore  an  andesite. 

Aniwa  is  a  small  island  about  4  miles  long  by  2  miles  wide, 
situated  12  miles  E.N.E.  of  Tanna. 

The  Rev.  W.  Gray  has  reported  raised  coral  limestone  from 
this  island,  and  as  it  attains  a  height  of  only  140  ft.,  it  is 
probable  that  the  whole  of  the  land  above  sea-level  is  built  up  of 
raised  reef-material. 

The  same  author  has  reported  native  traditions  to  the  effect 
that  a  volcano  previously  existed  on  the  island,  and  that  it  was 
once  connected  up  to  the  south  end  of  Tanna  by  a  land-bridge. 
If  such  be  true  it  would  partially  reconstruct  what  might  once 
have  been  a  huge  crater  ring,  the  island  of  Tanna  representing 
the  western  side  only.  To  settle  this  point  it  would  be  interesting 
to  run  a  line  of  soundings  to  the  eastward  of  Tanna  over  this 
submerged  bank,  if  such  exists  at  all. 


*  Journ.  Proc.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xx.  1886,  236-237  [1887]. 


BY  D.   MAWSON,  409 

FuTUNA  is  a  small  island  2^  miles  in  diameter,  situated  about 
36  miles  due  east  of  Tanna. 

It  appears  to  be  practically  wholly  volcanic,  rising  abruptly 
from  the  sea  to  a  height  of  1930  ft.  As  it  is  directly  in  a  line 
with  the  earlier  eruptive  centres,  it  may  be  composed  of  andesite 
lavas. 

Erromanga  is  larger  than  any  of  the  preceding  islands.  The 
dimensions  are  approximately  30  miles  by  20  miles,  with  an  area 
of  330  sq.miles.  It  is  rugged  and  mountainous;  the  highest 
peak  is  reported  to  be  about  2750  ft.  high. 

From  the  ship,  the  island  appeared  to  be  composed  for  the  most 
part  of  lavas  and  volcanic  agglomerates;  at  lower  levels,  however, 
a  well-developed  terrace-formation  of  raised  coral  reefs  was  seen 
to  predominate.  The  Rev.  W.  Gray  reports  having  counted  six 
or  seven  of  these  terraces  up  to  a  height  of  800  ft.  Mr.  Morrison 
has  noted  coral  at  a  height  of  over  400  ft.  at  Dillon's  Bay,  and 
mentions  also  the  existence  of  tablelands  at  an  elevation  of 
lOOUft.  as  a  dominant  feature;  this  suggests  a  positive  movement 
of  the  land  of  1000  ft.  or  more.  To  the  east  of  Port  Narevin, 
some  five  miles  distant,  is  a  high  rocky  islet  hardly  more  than  one 
mile  in  diameter;  it  appears  to  consist  entirely  of  volcanic  rocks. 

Efate  is  considered  by  some  writers  to  be  the  southernmost 
island  of  a  northern  subdivision  of  the  Group,  as  uot  only  is  it 
the  junction-point  of  the  two  northern  arms,  but  it  is  separated 
by  a  comparatively  wide  gap  of  63  miles  from  Erromanga,  the 
northernmost  island  of  the  southern  subdivision. 

It  is  necessary  here  only  to  outline  the  main  features  as  the 
island  is  dealt  with  in  detail  in  Part  ii.  (p.  435). 

The  dimensions  are  approximately  22  miles  by  18  miles,  with 
an  area  of  300  sq.  miles.  Of  the  two  very  fine  harbours.  Port 
Vila^'  and  Havannah  Harbour,  the  former  has  been  chosen  as  the 
main  shipping  station  and  central  port  of  call  for  vessels  trading 
in  the  Group.     The  mountain   system  is  arranged  with  a  main 

*  The  native  name  is  Fila;  the  general  use  of  the  corruption  Vila  is  due 
to  its  adoption  by  trading  companies. 


410  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW   HEBRIDES, 

axis  in  a  more  or  less  east  and  west  direction,  from  which  several 
lesser  ridges  branch  off  to  the  south;  the  razorbacks  are  highest 
at  the  north-east  corner  of  the  island,  culminating  in  Mt. 
Macdonald,  2203  ft. 

Briefly  summarised,  the  geological  features  are, — a  base  of 
andesite  pumice  tuff  overlaid  by  thick  beds  of  submarine  tuff, 
varying  in  texture  from  coarse  to  much  finer-grained  types,  some 
of  which  cannot  be  distinguished  from  Fiji  Soapstone.  Later 
basic  eruptions  have  affected  the  N.E.  corner  of  the  island, 
producing  thick  beds  of  agglomerate.  Superimposed  on  this 
foundation  and  arranged  in  terrace-formation  to  a  height  of 
quite  2000  ft.,  is  a  thin  veneer  of  coral  reef -material,  which,  from 
its  extensive  lateral  development,  has  given  rise  to  the  popular 
notion  that  Efate  is  entirely  composed  of  coral  limestone. 

The  small  islands  of  Mau,  Nguna,  and  Pele  are  practically 
wholly  volcanic,  resulting  from  a  continuation  of  the  agglomerate, 
forming  basic  eruptions  of  the  mainland.  Moso,  Leleppa,  and 
Erradaka  are  built  up  of  coral  limestone  on  a  foundation  of  fine 
submarine  tuffs. 

Mataso  is  a  small  island  lying  10  miles  N.N.E.  of  Nguna,  and 
has  been  described  by  Lieut.  Frederick  as  consisting  of  two 
distinct  hills  joined  by  a  low  beach  of  sand  and  coral.  The 
higher  of  the  two  hills  is  a  remarkable  peak  1669  ft.  in  height, 
and  only  1870  yds.  long  by  1000  yds.  broad.  The  lower  hill  is 
485  ft.  high.  The  whole  island  is,  he  says,  of  volcanic  origin;  a 
narrow  fringing  reef  is,  however,  growing  at  present  on  either 
side  of  the  island  (Plate  xvi.,  fig.l). 

Monument  Rock. — A  precipitous  pyramid  rising  vertically 
from  the  sea  1  mile  E.  of  Mataso,  is  described  by  the  same 
authority  as  being  422  ft.  high  and  130  yds.  in  diameter  at  the 
base;  although  a  landing  could  not  be  effected  for  the  purpose  of 
collecting  specimens,  yet  he  states  it  is  evidently  wholly 
composed  of  volcanic  rock. 

Makura  is  situated  6  miles  north  of  Mataso,  and  is  just  one 
mile  in  length.     It  is  of  volcanic  origin,  rising  up  in  the  form  of 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  411 

a  peak  1000  ft.  in  height.      A  dolerite  collected  from  this  island 
has  been  described  by  Mr.  J.  J.  H.  Teall. 

Mai  lies  four  miles  N.E.  of  Makura,  and  has  approximately 
the  following  dimensions  :  length  5J  miles,  breadth  2^  miles,  and 
an  area  of  7 J  sq. miles.  Capt.  Cook  named  it  Three  Hills  Island 
on  account  of  a  well  marked  topographical  feature;  the  highest 
of  the  peaks  reaches  an  elevation  of  2171  ft.  Lieut.  Frederick 
has  reported  the  island  to  be  of  volcanic  origin. 

The  Cook  Reef  is  an  example  of  a  coral  atoll  in  its  earlier 
stages  of  development.  As  we  were  not  able  to  visit  this  interest- 
ing spot,  we  can  only  quote  from  the  Admiralty  surveys.  Its 
external  dimensions  are  roughly  2  miles  by  1 J  miles.  The  lagoon 
is  completely  enclosed  by  a  belt  of  growing  coral  reefs  which  are 
exposed  at  low  tide  in  patches  for  a  width  averaging  about  a 
quarter  of  a  mile.  The  absence  of  permanently  dry  land  is  no 
doubt  owing  to  its  youth,  and  it  is  probable  that  in  a  compara- 
tively short  time  to  come  patches  of  land  will  make  their  appear- 
ance, due  to  the  piling  up  of  broken  off  fragments  of  reef-material. 
The  future  histor}'-  of  the  atoll  is  entirely  dependent  on  local 
movements  of  the  earth's  crust,  in  so  far  as  if  the  upheaval,  so 
generally  evidenced  throughout  the  Group,  be  continued,  the  Cook 
reef  will  some  day  be  presented  to  us  as  another  Mango;  if,  on 
the  other  hand,  a  slow  subsidence  makes  its  appearance  in  the 
Group,  then  by  upgrowth  and  outgrowth  a  typical  coral  atoll  of 
the  Funafuti  type  might  result. 

The  Shepherd  Islands  are  a  group  of  seven  small  islands, 
together  with  numerous  islets,  reefs  and  banks,  extending  S.E.  of 
Epi  for  a  distance  of  14  miles.  Lieutenant  Frederick  describes 
the  Shepherd  Islands  as  being  all  of  recent  volcanic  origin.  He  is 
of  opinion  that  they  once  formed  part  of  a  huge  crater.  As  sub- 
stantiating this  argument,  he  refers  to  a  native  legend  to  the 
effect  that  about  300  years  ago  the  land  broke  up  in  this  vicinity 
and  remnants  only  were  left,  forming  the  present  system  of 
isolated  islands.      However  far  this  may  be  true,  there  certainly 


412  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

appears  to  be  evidence  of  the  existence  of  an  old  crater  between 
Tongoa  and  Epi. 

ToNGOA,  the  largest  of  the  three  islands,  is  subcircular  in  out- 
line, with  an  area  of  about  10  sq.miles.  Abutting  on  to  the  sea- 
cliffs  at  the  north  side  is  a  district  about  twenty  acres  in  extent 
where  the  ground  is  heated  to  almost  212°  F.;  just  three  miles 
N.W.  of  this  point  a  submarine  eruption  took  place  in  1897.  A 
specimen  of  rock  taken  from  the  vicinity  of  the  hot  ground  has 
been  described  by  Mr.  J.  J.  H.  Teall  as  an  augite  andesite.  Another 
specimen  of  rock  from  the  summit  of  the  highest  point  on  the 
island — 1674  ft. — examined  by  the  same  authority,  proved  to  be 
basalt. 

Epi  is  of  special  interest,  as  it  was  briefly  visited  by  the 
'  Challenger '  Expedition;  little  examination  of  the  island  was, 
however,  then  effected,  as  the  scientists  during  the  few  hours 
spent  on  shore  did  not  venture  to  wander  out  of  sight  of  the 
beach.  Dr.  J.  Murray  recorded  the  existence  of  raised  coral  5  ft. 
above  sea-level,  and  reported  having  found  water-worn  fragments 
of  coral  limestone  in  a  creek  bed  hard  by.  It  is  the  tracing  of  these 
pebbles  back  to  their  position  in  situ  that  Moseley  refers  to  when, 
he  says  that  on  this  occasion  Dr.  Murray  came  so  near  making 
an  important  discovery. 

Our  examination  of  the  island  was  limited  to  short  visits  at 
The  Foreland  and  at  Diamond  Bay. 

The  dimensions  of  the  island  are  approximately  22  miles  by  9 
miles,  with  an  area  of  100  sq.miles.  The  hills  run  in  a  W.  to 
K.W.  direction,  and  attain  a  maximum  elevation  of  2791  ft. 

The  island  appears  to  be  wholly  composed  of  volcanic  material 
overlaid  by  raised  coral  limestone.  Along  the  west  coast  cinder 
beds  and  soft  volcanic  tuffs  are  extensively  developed,  as  also  are 
the  overlying  limestones.  The  best  section  obtained  was  at  The 
Foreland,  (text-fig.  1)  where  a  well  developed  coral  limestone, 
elevated  to  a  height  of  at  least  100  ft.,  caps  thick  beds  of  gre3dsh- 
coloured  foundation-beds  composed  partly  of  organic  remains  and 
largely  of  volcanic  cinder(l).     In  the  upper  portions  of  these  beds 


BY  D.   MAWSON. 


413 


rounded  pebbles  of  pyroxene  andesite  make  their  appearance  and 
are  specially  frequent  in  the  passage  beds  just  below  the  coral 
capping. 


k  Mil   s 


!i!'i'\iii 


1  I 


lil.i 


,1 


Passage  beds   12ft   thich- 


-Eroded  reef  limeston# 
Sft. above   sea   level 


/ —  — \v 


w 


Fig.l.     Section  of  the  cliffs  at  The  Foreland,  Epi. 

1,  Fossiliferous  Cinder  Beds  below  the  raised  coral  at  The 
Foreland,  Epi.  The  rock  is  of  a  medium  grey  colour,  readily 
friable,  and  abounds  in  marine  organic  remains. 

About  50%  or  more  of  the  material  is  represented  by  small 
fragments  of  olivine^  felspar^  'pyroxene  and  magnetite^  and  very 
numerous  dark-coloured  fragments,  sometimes  up  to  2  cm.  diam., 
of  more  or  less  glassy  vesicular  volcanic  cinder. 

The  remainder  of  the  rock  is  represented  by  shells  and  skeletons 
of  various  marine  organisms,  often  of  large  dimensions.  Isolated 
corals  and  rounded  pebbles  of  pyroxene  andesite  are  scattered 
through  it  indiscriminately,  but  become  more  abundant  just 
below  the  coral  capping,  where  12  ft.  of  passage  beds  are  indicated 
in  the  section.     These  passage  beds,   by  gradually  losing  their 


■o^ji''/i7 


uj  I  L  I  B  R  A  R  Y  ) 


414  THK  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

cinder}'  appearance  and  acquiring  an  increased  abundance  of 
corals,  pass  upwards  into  a  solid  coral  rock. 

The  following  forms  have  been  identified  as  occurring  in  this 
bed:- 

Pelecypoda—?,,  6,  7,  9,  11,  12,  13,  23,  26,  27,  30. 

Gastropoda— b,  8,  12,  17,  19,  24,  26,  34,  35,  38,  39,  43. 

Echinoderms — 1,  2,  4. 

Cora/s  —  S,  15. 

In  the  lower  portions  of  the  overlying  reef  the  following 
fossils  were  collected  : — 

Pelecypoda — 4 . 

Corals— \0,  14. 

Pau  Uma  is  a  rugged  island  situated  between  Epi  and  Ambrym. 
It  has  a  length  of  5  miles,  breadth  2  miles,  and  area  9  sq.miles. 
Running  in  a  N.  and  S.  direction  down  the  centre  of  the  island 
is  a  chain  of  mountains,  apparently  volcanic,  attaining  a  height 
of  1825  ft.  No  reliable  data  relating  to  the  geology  of  this  island 
are  available. 

LoPEVi  is  a  remarkable  volcano  situated  16  miles  S.E.  of  the 
crater  of  Ambrym.  It  is  only  3  miles  in  diameter  at  the  base, 
but  it  towers  upwards  in  a  perfect  cone  to  the  crater,  about  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  in  diameter,  situated  at  an  elevation  of  4755  ft. 
Although  not  always  active,  Lopevi  has  several  times  since 
European  occupation  poured  forth  lava,  which,  welling  over  the 
crater,  has  descended  from  that  immense  height  in  brilliant 
streams  down  into  the  sea. 

Ambrym  is  triangular  in  general  outline,  with  a  greatest  length 
of  21  miles,  and  an  area  of  160  sq.miles.  The  island  is  a  remnant 
of  an  immense  volcano,*  with  an  extinct  crater  six  miles  in 
diameter;  at  the  present  time,  however,  activity  is  restricted  to 
minor  vents  situated  in  two  daughter-cones. f     The  floor  of  the 

•  For  further  details  of  volcanic  phenomena,  see  Section  2  (p.  427). 
t  The  term  daughter-cone  is  here  used  to  signify  a  younger  development 
inside  an  older  crater. 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  415 

old  crater,  2100  ft.  above  sea-level,  is  now  thickly  covered  with 
ash  derived  from  subsequent  outbursts,  which  feature  has  gained 
for  it  the  name  of  "  great  ash  plain."  Bounding  this  plain  is 
a  broken  line  of  peaks  averaging  almost  3000  ft.  in  height. 
Towards  the  western  side  the  two  daughter-cones  are  overhung 
by  Mt.  Benbow,  3720  ft.,  and  Mt.  Marum,  4380  ft.,  which  rise 
high  above  the  old  rim;  each  of  these  younger  craters  is  about 
one  mile  in  diameter. 

Lieut.  Beresford  has  remarked  the  fact  that  these  more  elevated 
portions  of  Ambrym  are  built  up  of  tuff  and  cinder  beds,  whilst  out- 
crops of  solid  lava  are  a  more  prominent  feature  of  lower  levels. 

The  remains  of  several  parasitic  craters  can  be  seen  when 
steaming  round  the  island;  a  radical  section  through  one  of  these 
is  beautifully  exhibited  on  the  sea-cliffs  at  Dip  Point,  where  a 
perfect  cone  several  hundred  feet  in  height,  built  up  of  alternat 
ing  layers  of  coarser  and  finer  ejactamenta,  ideally  portraits  the 
interior  structure  of  a  volcanic  cone. 

Malekula  is  the  second  largest  island  of  the  Group,  with  a 
length  of  50  miles,  greatest  breadth  of  20  miles,  and  area  about 
450  sq.  miles.  The  general  topographical  features  of  this  island 
are  in  striking  contrast  with  the  coral-terraced  volcanic  slopes  of 
the  more  southerly  islands  just  considered.  The  whole  aspect  is 
that  of  an  older  land-mass;  the  dome-shaped  mountains  of  no 
very  great  height  (highest  point  Mt.  Penot,  2925  ft.)  with  flat 
land  intervening  indicate  a  considerable  lapse  of  time  since  first 
the  land  was  raised  above  the  sea  and  exposed  to  a  tropical 
denudation  which  since  has  planed  down  and  laid  bare  the  cores 
of  then  existing  lofty  peaks  and  usurped  the  strippings  to  even 
up  the  valleys,  leaving  a  permanent  record  of  its  extensiveness 
in  thick  beds  of  alluvium  exposed  in  present  river  cuttings. 

On  account  of  the  prohibitive  savagery  of  the  natives,  explora- 
tions in  this  island  are  necessarily  limited;  we  were,  however, 
able  to  examine  the  east  coast  from  Port  Stanley  to  the  north- 
ward, making  several  excursions  well  into  the  interior. 

Numerous  small  flat  coral  islands  form  an  almost  continuous 
chain  extending  along  the  northern  part  of  the  east  coast,  distant 


416  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

usually  about  one  mile  from  the  mainland.  These  islands  seldom 
exceed  30  ft.  in  elevation,  and  are  formed  of  decomposed  basic 
tuff  covered  over  by  a  thin  veneer  of  coral  limestone.  A  thriving 
fringing  reef  is  rapidly  extending  the  eastern  shores,  but  does 
not  appear  to  the  same  extent  on  the  landward  side. 

Our  first  excursion  on  the  mainland  was  to  the  hills  above 
Port  Stanley,  where  recent  raised  coral  limestone  (87)  was 
•observed  to  give  out  shortly  above  sea-level,  to  be  succeeded 
above  by  a  decidedly  more  ancient-looking  dense,  white  lime- 
stone;* this  latter  was  traced  up  for  a  height  of  500  ft.,  after 
which  several  outcrops  of  decomposed  tuffs  were  noted. 

An  excursion  from  the  island  of  Rano  to  the  mainland  at 
Pinalum  Point  and  inland  about  four  miles  was  of  little  interest, 
AS  the  track  lay  on  fairly  level  ground,  the  only  outcrop  noticed, 
besides  occasional  patches  of  hard  compact  yellowish  fragmentary 
limestone,  was  that  of  a  basic  tuff(l)  underlying  the  limestone, 
and  though  only  occurring  very  rarely  in  recognisable  outcrops,  is 
probably  extensively  developed  as  detected  by  the  slipperiness  of 
the  path  for  the  whole  distance.  Several  pebbles  collected  from 
a  creek-bed  at  the  farthest  point  reached  proved  to  be  Miocene 
limestones  and  hornblende  andesites.  Large  slabs  of  Miocene 
limestone  (91)  are  used  as  seats  in  an  amil  several  miles  inland; 
these  had,  according  to  the  natives,  been  transported  some 
•distance. 

With  our  camp  on  the  small  island  of  Atchin  we  made  two 
■excursions  to  the  mainland. 

On  the  first  of  these,  after  landing  on  the  shore  directly 
opposite  our  camp,  we  followed  a  track  leading  due  west,  and 
Anally,  after  about  a  two  miles'  tramp,  arrived  at  the  upper 
reaches  of  a  river  which  enters  the  sea  just  to  the  north  of 
Atchin.  A  flat  shore-belt  elevated  only  a  few  feet  above  sea- 
level  occupied  the  first  half  mile  or  so,  after  which  a  gradual  rise 

*  According  to  Mr.  Chapman,  the  absence  of  LepidocycUna  indicates  a 
Post-Miocene  age  for  this  material,  though  no  doubt  the  disparity  is  not  great, 
AS  evidenced  by  the  presence  of  abundant  forms  found  associated  in  the  local 
Miocene. 


BY  D.  MAWSON. 


417 


of  aboufc"*^  150  ft.  brought  us  to  the  top  of  a  recent  raised  coral 
reef  in  which  Orbicella  sp.  was  recognised.  Just  beyond  this 
point  a  steep  descent  of  50  ft.  brought  us  to  the  river-bed,  where 
a  collection  of  rolled  pebbles  was  made.  Several  of  these  speci- 
mens proved  to  be  pyroxene  andesites,  one  a  uralite  porphyry,! 
whilst  two  others  appear  to  belong  to  the  same  parent-type  as 
the  latter,  but  differ  in  degree  of  metamorphism.  The  river  at 
this  spot  cuts  through  quite  50  ft.  of  drift  material,  which 
had  probably  been  laid  down  on  an  extensive  scale  at  a  time 
previous  to  the  uplift  indicated  by  the  neighbouring  raised  reef. 
On  arriving  at  the  beach,  we  examined  the  deposits  of  magnetite 
iron  sand(2)  extensively  developed  along  this  coast. 

Our  second  excursion  from  Atchin  was  directed  to  the  village 
of  LaleppeJ  and  resulted  in  several  interesting  discoveries.  Our 
route  lay  direct  to  Bartaleppe,  thence  by  a  detour  after  mounting  a 


Fig.  2.     Sketch  section  from  Atchin  to  Laleppe,  North  Malekula. 
sharp  spur  we   arrived   at   Laleppe.     Turning   to  the  left  and 
partly  doubling  back  we  continued  to  rise  to  the  point  1145  ft. 
high  indicated  on  the   chart.     A  rapid  descent  brought  us  to 
Bartaleppe    again.       In    the    woodcut    (text-fig. 2)    a    slightly 

*  Our  aneroid  got  out  of  gear,  and  we  were  obliged  for  several  months  to 

calculate  the  heights  as  best  we  could.     Later  on,  however,  Professor  David 

forwarded  an  excellent  instrument,  lent  by  Mr.  G.  H.  Knibbs,  F.R.A.S.,  by 

which,  with  the  aid  of  a  vernier,  readings  could  be  readily  taken  to  one  foot. 

t  For  description,  refer  to  Part  ii. ,  Section  3,  §  9. 

it  Such  names  may  be  spelt  either  Laleppe  or  Lalembe,  as  it  appears  on 
the  Admiralty  chart. 

27 


418  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

generalised  section  is  given,  whereb}'  the  outcrops  on  both  tracks 
to  Laleppe  are  incorporated  in  the  same  section.  The  trip  took 
us  a  whole  day's  hard  walking,  and  a  considerable  number  of  miles 
must  have  been  covered.  Nevertheless,  when  plotted  in  a  direct 
line,  it  pans  out  as  three  miles  only. 

The  tirst  mile  inland  passes  over  low  fiat  country  of  the  nature 
of  recent  raised  reef  and  shore  debris;  beyond  it  rises  gently  for 
|-mile  to  the  village  of  Bartaleppe,  elevated  probably  400  ft. 
above  sea-level.  Outcrops  along  this  part  of  the  track  show  it 
to  be  underlaid  by  coarse-grained  foraminiferal  tuffs  (99)  of 
doubtful  age,  either  Miocene  or  newer.  About  100  yds.  before 
arriving  at  Bartaleppe  a  narrow  creek  is  crossed,  in  which  well- 
bedded  Miocene  tuffs  and  limestones  (3)  (106)"^  dipping  28°  due  S. 
are  encountered.  After  leaving  Bartaleppe  further  outcrops  of 
Miocene  (109)  tuff  beds  appear  for  a  height  of  several  hundred 
feet.  Then  comes  a  20  ft.  sill  of  augite  andesite  intersecting  the 
limestones  along  the  bedding  planes;  the  sill  is  overlaid  by  a 
30  ft.  bed  of  a  hard  white  limestone;  above  this  again,  is  quite 
100  ft.  of  a  granular  foraminiferal  limestone  (4)  (102)  of  Miocene 
age,  much  resembling  sandstone,  and  dipping  17°  S.,  40°  W. 

We  had  now  arrived  at  Laleppe;  continuing  to  ascend  we 
passed  over  thick  beds  of  coarse  and  fine  mineral  tuff8(5)  capped 
by  foraminiferal  limestones,  the  Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion 
limestone  (6)  (105)  outcropping  at  the  amil.  Limestones  (108) 
continued  to  outcrop  to  the  top  of  the  hill,  1145  ft.  On  the  way 
down  to  Bartaleppe  tine-grained  grey  submarine  tuffs  (7)  (107) 
with  abundant  Globigerina  and  pellets  of  pumice  were  met  with 
below  the  white  limestone  zone,  dipping  14°  S.,  20°  E. 

Note  that  the  three  dip  readings  taken  in  the  Miocene  series 
differ  very  widely;  this  points  to  great  local  earth-movements, 
contemporaneous  with  or  subsequent  to  their  deposition. 

Summarising  the  preceding  observations,  we  notice  as  a 
conspicuous  feature  of  the  geology  of  Malekula  in  the  districts 

*  The  small  figure  refers  to  accompanying  description;  numbers  in  large 
they  are  those  appearing  on  the  specimens,  and  are  inserted  for  reference  in 
connection  with  Mr.  Chapman's  work. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  419 

examined,  the  meagre  development  of  recent  raised  reefs,  and 
tiieir  complete  absence  at  elevations  exceeding  150  ft.  This  is 
more  to  be  wondered  at  when  it  is  remembered  that  it  lies 
midway  between  Efate  and  Santo,  both  regions  of  extensive 
recent  upheaval. 

Referring  to  the  Admiralty  chart  it  will  be  noticed  that 
elevated  plateaux  and  white  cliffs  are  a  dominant  feature  of  the 
north-west  coast;  these  cliffs  may  possibly  be  composed  of 
Miocene  limestones,  but  the  contour  strongly  suggests  a  more 
recent  age.  If  this  latter  be  the  case,  then  the  non-appearance 
of  recent  coral  at  similar  elevations  on  the  parts  of  the  coast 
examined  may  be  due  to  proximity  to  the  volcano  of  Ambryra.* 

The  land  appears  to  be  built  up,  for  the  most  part,  of  a  great 
thickness  of  Miocene  submarine  tuffs  and  foraminiferous  lime- 
stones, intruded  by  andesite  sills  and  dykes, 

In  all  probability  dry  land  has  existed  since  Miocene  or  early 
Pliocene  times;  and  although  little  subsequent  elevation  is 
evidenced,  yet,  situated  as  it  is,  in  the  midst  of  abundant 
proof  of  extensive  recent  upheaval,  there  can  be  little  doubt  but 
that  it  has  weathered  out  a  succession  of  oscillations  resulting 
finally  in  a  slight  positive  movement. 

1.  A  decomposed  fine-grained  basic  ash  derived,  no  doubt, 
from  the  volcano  of  Ambrym,  which  is  situated  only  38  miles  to 
windward.  Small  fragments  of  decomposed  pyroxene  appear  in 
a  very  fine-grained  yellowish  dust-like  base,  which  when  dried  is 
light  and  very  absorbent.  This  rock  is  found  also  underlying 
a  scanty  coral  capping  and  composing  the  main  body  of  the  small 
islands  of  Rano  and  Atchin ;  in  all  probability  obtains  an 
extensive  development  on  this  coast  of  Malekula. 

2.  Black  sand  is  a  marked  feature  of  the  sea-shores  throughout 
a  large  part  of  the  Group,  and  in  such  neighbourhoods  is  also 
found  to  a  less  extent  in  the  river-beds. 

*  Referable  to  two  causes — First,  an  inward  dip  towards  the  volcano  of 
Ambrym  is  to  be  expected  and  might  be  sufficient  to  account  for  a  much 
greater  elevation  on  the  west  than  on  the  east  coast  of  Malekula.  A  second 
explanation,  though  much  more  limited  in  application,  might  be  found  in 
Lieut.  Frederick's  observation  that  coral  polyps  do  not  live  near  the  active 
volcanic  islands,  e.g.^  Tongoa. 


420  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

At  Black  Sand  Bay  on  the  east  coast  of  Malekula,  and  for 
some  distance  to  the  northward,  very  large  quantities  are  to  be 
found,  highly  concentrated  within  the  wash  of  the  weaves  and 
decreasing  in  richness  very  rapidly  towards  the  land,  w^here  it 
blends  with  the  soil.  It  consists  very  largely  of  magnetite,  in 
addition  to  which  is  a  varying  quantity  of  pyroxene  and  felspar; 
the  sand  is  derived  from  the  decomposition  of  ash-beds  and  lavas. 
Usually  on  digging  down  into  it  alternating  bands  of  a  black  and 
of  a  yellowish-green  hue  a  few  inches  in  thickness  can  be  detected, 
due  to  the  varying  concentration  of  the  magnetite  constituent. 
The  grain-size  usually  averages  0-2  mm.,  but  exceeds  this  in 
several  localities,  as,  for  example,  near  the  Roman  Catholic 
Mission  on  the  north  coast  of  Aoba,  where  it  averages  2  mm. 
diam. 

3.  Well  bedded  Miocene  tuffs  and  limestones  appearing  in  the 
stream  a  few  hundred  yards  below  Bartaleppe.  The  coarser- 
grained  grey  types  are  largely  composed  of  subangular  fragments 
of  pre-existing  calcareous  rocks  averaging  0*5  mm.  diam.,  and  fine 
mineral  grains;  the  binding  material  is  a  calcareous  cement. 
Other  fine-grained  grey  types,  often  much  stained  along  the 
joints  by  manganese,  are  very  largely  built  up  of  Globigerina 
tests. 

4.  Granular  foraminiferal  limestone  resembling  a  sandstone 
in  general  appearance  and  of  a  greyish  colour  tinged  with  brown 
and  black  spots.  It  .is  composed  of  a  mass  of  foraminifera 
(Miocene),  pieces  of  black  volcanic  glass  containing  lath-shaped 
felspars,  angular  fragments  of  a  yellowish  calcareous  sedimentary 
rock,  and  occasional  grains  of  plagioclase,  pyroxene  and  magnetite. 

5.  A  grey  mineral  tuff  similar  to  those  of  the  Wai  Bubo  in 
S.W.  Santo.  The  rock  is  composed  of  grains  of  felspar,  horn- 
blende, augite,  and  magnetite,  together  wdth  numerous  fragments 
of  andesite  lavas,  and  much  decomposed  reddish-stained  opaque 
material  resembling  palagonite.  This  rock  is,  for  the  most  part, 
barren  of  organic  remains,  though  the  discovery  in  it  of  an 
echinoderm  spine  served  to  settle  its  submarine  origin. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  421 

This  coarse  variety  gives  way  in  parts  to  a  very  fine-grained 
chocolate -coloured  rock  recalling  some  of  the  shaly  tuffs  of  the 
Wai  Malikoliko,  S.W.  Santo. 

6.  Miocene  limestone  in  situ  at  the  amil  above  Laleppe.  It  is 
a  hard  Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion  limestone  containing  small 
fragments  of  a  basic  eruptive  rock,  and  of  a  fine-grained  sub- 
marine tuff. 

7.  Fine-grained  grey  siihmarine  tuffs  containing  abundant 
Globigerina.  They  are  well  bedded,  finer-grained  beds  several 
cms.  thick  alternating  with  coarser  beds  in  which  tiny  pellets  of 
white  pumice  are  visible.  This  structure  strongly  resembles  that 
of  the  soapstones  at  Largeaux's  plantation  in  Efate. 

Dr.  Hinde  described  three  rock-specimens  collected  by  Lieut. 
Frederick  from  Malekula  : — 

{a)  From  Rocky  Point,  Sasun  Bay,  at  3  ft.  above  sea-level.  A 
brownish  compact  claystone,  containing  a  few  Globigerina  casts. 
The  matrix  was  recognised  as  being  composed  of  very  fine 
volcanic  material.  This  rock  tallies  with  the  Miocene  submarine 
tuffs  collected  by  us  further  north,  and  also  with  some  of  the 
bands  of  the  Efate  soapstones. 

{b)  From  the  same  locality  at  10  ft.  above  sea-level.  A  grey 
soft  granular  limestone  with  nullipores,  foraminifera,  etc. 

(c)  From  Port  Stanley,  at  an  elevation  of  550  ft.  A  white 
limestone,  in  which,  among  other  forms,  Lithothamnion  was 
recorded. 

We  collected  specimens  of  what  must  be  the  same  limestone, 
and  find  that  it  is  probably  to  be  relegated  to  some  part  of  the 
Pliocene. 

Professor  Liversidge  analysed  a  rock  collected  by  Commodore 
Goodenough  from  the  shore  below  h.w.m.  at  Port  Sandwich. 
This  appears  to  be  a  fine  tuff,  but  details  are  not  sufficiently 
definite  to  warrant  quotation. 

Santo  is  the  largest  island  in  the  New  Hebrides,  and  has  the 
following  approximate  dimensions  : — Length,  75  miles;  breadth, 
30  miles;  and  area,  1500  sq. miles. 


422  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Extending  continuously  down  the  west  coast  is  a  high  range 
of  mountains  attaining  a  maximum  elevation  in  Losubunu, 
5520  ft.  (Plate  xviii.).  These  mountains  ascend  steeply  from  the 
sea,  rising  in  a  succession  of  sharp  ridges  culminating  in  lofty 
peaks  onl}^  four  to  six  miles  inland.  The  eastern  flanks  are  much 
less  precipitous;  after  descending  to  4000  ft.,  what  appears  to  be  a 
plain  of  marine  erosion,  deeply  furrowed  by  short  and  rapid  rivers, 
is  a  noticeable  feature  extending  along  the  range  for  quite  10  miles, 
surrounding  the  peak  which  rises  high  above  it  as  a  monadnock. 
Beyond  as  far  as  the  east  coast,  a  distance  of  20  miles,  the  high 
lands  of  the  interior  continue  to  maintain  their  plateau-like 
aspect,  though  with  decrease  in  altitude,  and  occasional  inter- 
ruption by  minor  features  (Plate  xxi.)  On  the  east  coast,  where 
the  plateau  was  ascertained  to  be  built  of  recent  raised  coral 
and  reef  debris,  it  is  only  500  or  600  ft.  in  height,  and  is 
noticeably  more  elevated  in  the  north  than  in  the  south.  This 
agrees  with  the  evidence  obtained  in  Malekula  indicating  a  general 
dip  to  the  east  in  conjunction  with  a  less  noticeable  sag  in 
towards  the  nearest  volcanoes. 

On  the  south  and  east  numerous  small  islands  line  the  coast, 
and  are  found  to  maintain  the  same  general  geological  features 
with  the  adjacent  mainland.  Along  the  west  coast  recent  raised 
reef-material  is  little  represented  further  north  than  C.  Ukuani 
(Plate  XX.).  Beyond  that  point  older  rocks,  amongst  which  is  a 
highly-tilted  Miocene  series  similar  to  that  already  described 
from  Malekula,  outcrop  at  sea-level  (Plate  xvii.),  and  rising 
steeply  appear  to  compose,  with  related  andesites,  the  whole  mass 
of  the  neighbouring  elevated  ridges. 

Above  the  Miocene,  and  developed  most  strongly  on  the 
eastern  side  of  the  island,  come  soft  submarine  tuffs  of  the  Fiji 
soapstone  type,  capped  above  by  a  variable  thickness  of  recent 
raised  coral  attaining  a  maximum  observed  elevation  of  about 
1000  ft. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  fine-grained  grey  gneiss  reported  by 
M.  Levat  as  being  eminently  characteristic  amongst  the  rocks  of 
West  Santo  and  West  Malekula,  was  not  met  with  by  us;  the 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  423 

oldest  rocks  encountered  being  volcanic  agglomerates  underlying 
the  fossiliferous  Miocene  series. 

AoBA  occupies  a  position  midway  between  the  eastern  and 
western  wings  of  the  Group.  It  is  oval-shaped  with  the  following 
appi-oximate  dimensions  : — Length,  25  miles;  breadth,  8  miles; 
area,  105  sq. miles. 

There  is  a  little  low-lying  land,  undulating  in  character,  at 
either  extremity  of  the  island;  for  the  rest  it  rises  steeply 
to  a  height  of  4000  ft.,  at  which  elevation  the  natives  report  the 
existence  of  a  shallow  lake,  no  doubt  occupying  the  position  of  a 
former  crater. 

The  island,  so  far  as  ascertained  in  our  short  visit,  is 
entirely  volcanic,  and  cannot  long  have  been  extinct.  Specimens 
collected  of  the  volcanic  rocks  were  tuffs,  agglomerates,  and 
vesicular  and  porphyritic  basic  lavas,  conspicuous  amongst  which 
were  olivine  basalts  bearing  olivines  one-third  of  an  inch  in 
diameter,  and  porphyritic  pyroxene  olivine  basalts. 

The  fragmentary  types  of  rocks  proved  to  be  much  more 
abundant  than  solid  lavas;  the  former  being  specially  abundant 
at  the  eastern  and  western  extremities  of  the  island. 

A  very  fine  example  of  bedded  tuffaceous  ash-beds  is  to  be 
noted  at  the  north  end  of  Bice  Roads,  where  they  appear  well 
bedded,  dipping  12°  S.,  45°  W.,  and  overlie  solid  lava.  The  finer 
material  constituting  these  beds  is  of  the  nature  of  pulverised 
volcanic  rock;  distributed  through  this  base,  in  roughly  parallel 
bands,  are  pebbles  and  boulders,  up  to  2  ft.  in  diameter,  of 
various  types  of  basalt.  No  raised  coral  was  observed  on  the 
island,  though  growing  reefs  fringe  the  south-east  shore. 

Aragh  Aragh  or  Pentecost  Island  extends  northward  of 
Ambrym,  forming  part  of  the  eastern  wing  of  the  Group,  which 
continues  through  the  Island  of  Aurora  to  the  Banks  Group. 

The  island  is  long  and  narrow,  with  a  greatest  length  of  35 
miles,  breadth  6  miles,  and  approximate  area  of  125  sq.miles. 
A  high  ridge  attaining  a  maximum  elevation  of  2500  ft.  runs  in 
a  north  and  south  direction,  forming  a  backbone  to  the  island. 
Its  rugged  aspect  bears  the  semblance  of  a  volcanic  island. 


424  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Aurora  or  Maewo  Island  is,  like  Aragh  Aragh,  long,  narrow, 
and  mountainous.  It  is,  however,  more  elevated,  probably 
attaining  a  height  of  close  on  4000  ft.*  The  dimensions  are  : — 
Length,  32  miles;  breadth,  3J  miles;  and  approximate  area, 
90  sq.miles.     It  is  probably  wholly  composed  of  volcanic  rocks. 

The  Banks  Group  lies  about  50  miles  to  north  of  Aurora. 
With  the  exception  of  some  of  the  smallest,  the  islands  are  all  of 
volcanic  origin,  and,  as  evidenced  by  the  fumaroles  of  Vanua 
Lava,  are  of  comparatively  recent  age. 

Vanua  Lavaj  or  the  Great  Banks  Island. — Approximate 
dimensions  are  : — Length,  15  miles;  breadth,  10  miles;  area,  85 
sq.miles. 

High  rugged  ranges  of  mountains  run  in  a  general  north  and 
south  direction,  attaining  a  maximum  elevation  of  3120  ft.  In 
the  north  centre  hot  springs  and  fumaroles  cover  a  considerable 
area  of  ground,  giving  rise  to  hot-water  creeks  which,  uniting 
together,  enter  the  sea  at  Port  Patteson. 

The  entire  island  appears  to  be  composed  of  volcanic  rocks,  of 
which  porphyritic  pyroxene  and  olivine  pyroxene  basalts  are  the 
most  abundant.  Other  than  basic  lavas,  was  one  specimen  of  a 
pyroxene  andesite. 

It  seems  probable  that  Vanua  Lava  represents  the  south-west 
portion  only  of  a  former  immense  crater,  which  included  also  the 
islands  of  Mota  and  Valua.  The  general  distribution  of  the 
islands,  the  soundings,  and  the  dip  of  the  agglomerate  and  cinder 
beds,  all  favour  this  view. 

Mota  is  a  hat-shaped  island  2  miles  in  diameter.  The  rim  of 
the  hat,  so  to  speak,  is  a  broad  shore-flat,  in  the  development  of 
w-hich,  coral  has  no  doubt  participated;  the  central  peak,  1350  ft. 
high,  appears  to  be  volcanic. 

*  The  Admiralty  chart  has  it  marked  down  as  about  2000  ft.,  but  to  us  it 
seemed  quite  as  lofty  as  Aoba. 

t  M.  Levat  has  reported  the  occurrence  of  gneiss  and  trachyte  on  Vanua 
Lava;  this  we  think  is  entirely  a  mistake. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  425 

Valua  is  6  miles  long,  and  7  sq.  miles  in  area.  Viewed 
from  the  vicinity  of  Mota,  we  noted  sharp  outcrops  of  steeply 
dipping  rocks,  forming  the  central  range,  with  sufficient  distinct- 
ness as  to  be  almost  certain  that  they  represent  alternating  beds 
of  solid  lava  and  softer  tuff. 

Pakea. — A  small  flat  island  situated  at  the  southern  entrance 
to  Port  Patteson,  and  elevated  only  a  few  feet  above  sea-level,  is 
composed  of  tuflfaceous  volcanic  material  which,  near  the  shore, 
has  been  cemented  by  calcareous  orgianisms  into  more  solid  beds. 

The  Reef  Islands  are  about  five  permanently  dry  patches  of 
small  dimensions,  scattered  along  a  semicircular  coral  reef,  5| 
miles  long,  and  IJ  miles  wide  at  the  broadest  part. 

In  course  of  time  the  growing  reef  will  probably  complete  the 
ring,  supplying  a  further  example  of  coral  atoll-development. 

Gaua  is  approximately  10  miles  square.  The  area,  85  sq.  miles, 
is  equal  to  that  of  Vanua  Lava.     Highest  point,  2300  ft. 

Towards  the  eastern  side,  elevated  a  considerable  height 
above  the  sea,  is  an  old  crater  lake  two  miles  in  diameter. 
Good  exposures  of  lavas,  alternating  with  tuff  beds,  were  noted 
at  several  points  along  the  sea-cliffs.  At  Lakona  Bay,  where  a 
landing  was  effected,  a  bed  of  lava  20  ft.  thick  was  found  over- 
lying coarse  tufts.  In  the  same  locality  several  different  lava 
streams  were  noted  within  a  short  distance  along  the  coast 
which,  when  traced  inland,  were  found  to  alter  very  little  in 
character  for  a  distance  of  upwards  of  two  miles.  The  specimens 
of  lava  collected  were  various  types  of  basalts,  in  most  of  which 
appeared  phenocrysts  of  pyroxene  and  olivine. 

Ureparapara  is  oval  in  shape,  4J  miles  by  3^  miles;  area 
about  11  sq.miles.  Highest  point,  2440  ft.  The  island  is  an 
extinct  volcano,  possessing  a  unique  harbour  in  the  old  crater, 
which  has  been  invaded  by  the  sea  breaking  through  on  the 
eastern  side.  Anchored  there  in  Dives  Bay,  a  wonderful  view  is 
presented  all  around  in  the  steep  slopes  leading  up  to  the  crater 
lip,  over  2000  ft.  above. 


426  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

The  island  is  entirely  volcanic.  Rocks  collected  on  the  south- 
east side  of  Dives  Bay  proved  to  be  porphyritic  basalts(l)  and 
an  interesting  type  of  basic  lava(2)  possessing  an  andesitic  facies. 

Merlav,  2900  ft.,  Merig,  200  ft.,  Vatganai,  250  ft.,  and 
several  minor  islets  not  mentioned,  we  were  not  able  to  visit,  but, 
like  the  rest,  they  are  no  doubt  of  volcanic  origin. 

1.  Porphyritic  Basalt  from  the  south  shore  of  Dives  Bay. 
Macroscopic     Characters. — A     compact     grey    rock 

homogeneous  in  appearance. 

Microscopic  Character  s. — A  fine-grained  basaltic  base 
through  which  are  porphyritically  distributed  abundant  corroded 
labradorite  felspars  up  to  1  mm.  diameter,  constituting  about 
18  %  of  the  rock;  occasional  porphyritic  individuals  of  a  light 
gveQH  i^yroxene  frequently  twinned  on  the  (100)  face  and  measured 
up  to  1  mm.  diameter;  relatively  large  grains  of  magnetite,  up  to 
0-75  mm.  diameter.  The  base  consists  mainly  of  tiny  lath-shaped 
felspars  with  augite  microlites,  magnetite  dust,  and  an  indistinct 
glassy  residue. 

2.  Olivine  Pyroxene  Porphyry  from  the  south  shore  of  Dives 
Bay,  near  the  Mission  Station. 

Macroscopic  Character  s. — A  dense  dark-coloured 
rock  with  gleaming  porphyritic  pyroxenes  and  abundant  rect- 
angular felspars. 

Microscopic  Character  s. — Distributed  through  a 
more  or  less  glassy  base  are  porphyritic  individuals  present  to 
the  extent  of  about  one-half  the  rock-mass.  The  felspars  are 
rectangular,  pointing  in  the  direction  of  flow,  and  regular  in 
size,  averaging  1  mm.  x  3  mm.;  they  are  well  zoned,  dusty  bands 
being  especially  characteristic;  judging  by  the  extinction  angle 
on  the  albite  twin,  its  composition  must  be  in  the  vicinity  of 
Abg  An  4.  From  the  description  these  felspars  will  be  seen  to 
have  the  facies  of  those  developed  in  andesite  lavas;  appearing 
in  so  basic  a  rock  as  this,  they  are  therefore  of  special  interest. 
In  addition  to  felspar  individuals,  which  compose  about  25  %  of 
the  rock,  are  large  apple-green  pyroxenes  to  the  extent  of  12%; 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  427 

smaller  olivines  5  %,  much  decomposed  and  stained  red  by  iron 
oxide;  large  magnetite  grains  3  %.  The  base  is  largely  glassy, 
but  contains  particles  of  plagioclase,  augite,  olivine,  with  abundant 
magnetite  dust. 

Torres  or  Vava  Islands. — The  approximate  dimensions  of 
the  four  main  islands  are  :  Toga  or  South  Island — 3  miles  long, 
area  5  sq.miles,  height  896  ft.  Lo  or  Saddle  Island — 2>\  miles 
long,  area  4  sq.miles,  height  390  ft.  Tegua  or  Middle  Island — 
4  miles  long,  area  (with  Ovale  I.)  7  sq.miles,  height  640  ft.  Hiu 
or  North  Island — 7  miles  long,  area  14  sq.miles,  height  1230  ft. 

The  islands  of  this  chain  preserve  a  W.N.W.  trend,  and  are 
separated  b}'-  narrow  channels  about  2  miles  wide;  they  appear 
to  be  a  continuation  of  the  western  arm  of  the  New  Hebrides. 

Time  did  not  allow  of  a  detailed  examination,  and  general 
impressions  only  can  be-  given. 

They  appear  to  be  wholly  composed  of  a  coralliferous  limestone 
formation  rising  up  in  terraces  to  a  maximum  elevation  of  1230ft. 
All  the  rocks  examined  were  coral  limestones,  but,  no  doubt, 
these  are  underlaid  shortly  below  by  tuffaceous  foundation-beds. 


^-- 


Fig.3.     General  outline  of  Hiu,  Torres  Group;  looking  from  the  south. 

The  woodcut  (text-fig. 3)  was  sketched  from  the  deck  of  H.M.S. 
'Archer'  while  steaming  along  the  south  coast  of  Hiu,  and  affords 
a  general  idea  of  the  topography  of  the  Torres  Islands. 

Sec.  2.  VULCANOLOGY  AND  SEISMOLOGY. 

Active  Volcanoes.  —  The  volcanoes  of  the  New 
Hebrides  have  attracted  more  attention  from  visitors  than  have 
any  of  the  other  physical  features,  and  as  a  result  numerous 
descriptions  are  on  record. 

Included  within  the  region  of  our  explorations  are  the  two 
permanently  active  volcanoes  of  Yasowa  and  Ambrym.     Further 


428  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

to  the  south,  buk  still  part  of  the  same  volcanic  zone,  are  the 
volcanoes  of  Hunter  I.  and  Matthew  I.,  the  former  of  which 
was  reported  to  be  in  active  eruption  at  the  time  of  our  visit;  to 
the  northward  in  the  Santa  Cruz  group  is  the  active  volcano  of 
Tinakula. 

Ambrym. — The  Island  of  Ambrym  represents  the  truncated 
cone  of  an  ancient  volcano  of  gigantic  dimensions;  now,  however, 
exhibiting  only  a  tithe  of  its  former  energy.  Distributed  around 
its  flanks  are  numerous  parasitic  cones,  most  of  which  are 
extinct,  though  several  are  known  to  have  been  active  within 
recent  years  (for  topographical  features  refer  to  Parti.,  Seel). 

The  most  violent  of  recorded  outbursts  from  this  volcano  took 
place  in  October,  1894,  and  has  been  excellently  described  by 
Capt.  Purey-Cust,  at  that  time  Commander  of  the  survey  ship 
H.M.S.  '  Dart,'  then  stationed  at  Ambrym.  With  the  first 
shock  of  the  outburst,  ash,  steam,  and  smoke  from  the  burning 
timber  which  had  thickly  clothed  the  slopes  almost  to  the  top, 
rose  up  in  dense  cerebriform  masses  of  clouds  over  Mt.  Benbow 
to  a  height  of  15,000  ft.;  streams  of  lava  poured  out  of  fissures  in 
the  ground  at  several  points  along  the  slopes  of  the  old  cone  and 
rushed  down  into  the  sea.  Capt.  Purey-Cust,  anxious  to  obtain 
a  nearer  view,  steamed  the  '  Dart '  to  within  J-mile  of  where  one 
of  these  flows  was  making,  and  describing  the  sight  witnessed, 
says  : — "  Presently  the  head  of  the  stream  appeared — a  red  hot, 
rapidly  moving  mass  of  molten  lava,  some  thirty  yards  wide,  with 
lumps  of  clinker  tossing  about  on  its  surface.  In  another 
moment  it  entered  the  sea,  and  then  a  most  wonderful  sight  was 
seen,  such  as  none  of  us  as  then  saw  it  will  probably  ever  see 
again  as  long  as  we  live;  a  dense  pillar  of  steam  rapidly  rose 
straight  up  to  a  height  afterwards  measured  by  a  sextant  and 
found  to  be  4600  ft.  There  was  no  explosion  as  the  lava  touched 
the  water,  but  a  few  seconds  later  enormous  bubbles  of  water 
commenced  to  rise  up  to  100  ft.  or  more,  like  the  explosions  of 
heavy  submarine  mines,  and  then  burst  violently  outwards  in 
radiating  tongues  of  water  and  black  masses  of,  presumably, 
lava." 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  429 

Later  on  with  the  opening  of  a  second  vent  a  mass  of  dark- 
coloured  smoke  rose  up  rapidly  to  a  height  of  26,000  ft.  in  ten 
minutes.* 

As  soon  as  matters  had  calmed  down  somewhat  a  party  from 
H.M.S.  '  Dart '  made  a  daring  trip  to  the  crater  of  Mt.  Benbow, 
where,  leaning  over  the  edge  and  viewing  the  swirling  lava  in 
several  active  vents  some  1000  ft.  below  them,  they  experienced 
what  Capt  Purey-Cust  has  described  in  the  following  words  : — 
''Far  down  in  the  bowels  of  the  earth  could  be  heard  a  roarinsf 
like  a  heavy  surf  beating  on  the  shore.  The  crackling  of  the 
stones  as  they  struck  one  another  in  the  air  was  like  a  constant 
heavy  roll  of  musketry  fire,  with  occasional  reports  and  echoes 
back  from  the  walls  of  the  crater,  until  it  sounded  as  if  a  general 
engagement  was  taking  place.  The  ground  where  we  sat  was  in 
a  state  of  constant  tremor,  with  an  occasional  rather  severe 
shock." 

At  the  time  of  our  visit  a  wreath  of  smoke  could  be  seen  in 
the  daytime  curling  upwards  from  the  vicinity  of  Mt.  Benbow; 
at  night  a  brilliant  sight  was  presented  for  miles  to  the  south- 
ward, where  the  reflection  of  a  red  glare  on  the  smoke  and  steam 
clouds  overhanging  the  crater  could  be  seen  perceptibly  brightening 
every  three  or  four  minutes,  only  to  diminish  gradually  until  the 
next  period. 

The  volcano  of  Yasowa  on  the  island  of  Tanna  was  first 
visited  by  Captain  Cook,  from  whose  report  it  appears  to  have 
been  more  active  then  than  now.  Though  continuously  active,  no 
inconvenience  is  caused  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  island,  except 
for  occasional  showers  of  ash. 

Situated  on  the  slope  of  the  main  range,  about  four  miles 
inland  from  the  Mission  Station  at  Port  Resolution,  it  is 
roughly  conical  in  shape,  and  surrounded  by  absolutely  barren 
ground,  J-mile  to  2  miles  wide.  The  most  elevated  portion  of 
the  rim  is  on  the  N.W.  side,  and  is  about  1300  ft.  in  height;  just 
below   this  point  at   the   foot  of    the    cone    is  a   shallow  lake. 

*  These  figures  are  interesting,  as  they  are  no  doubt  highly  accurate. 


430  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Extensive  solfataras  exist  on  the  range-side  of  the  cone.  The 
crater  is  stated  by  the  Rev.  W.  Gray*  to  be  elliptical  in  shape 
with  a  circumference  of  quite  1  mile,  and  a  depth  of  300  ft. 
Two  main  divisions  separated  by  a  rocky  barrier  each  contain 
several  active  vents,  which  are  continuously  throwing  out  bombs; 
the  accumulation  of  these  ejected  fragments  appears  to  have  built 
up  an  inner  ring  round  the  crater,  portions  of  which  occasionally 
slide  down  into  the  chasm  below,  temporarily  blocking  the  vents. 
Several  sudden  uplifts,  immediately  due  possibly  to  intrusions 
of  lava,  but  undoubtedly  primarily  resulting  from  a  continuance 
of  folding  movements  in  the  rocks  below,  have  been  reported 
from  the  vicinity  of  the  crater,  resulting  in  the  original  safe 
harbour  of  Port  Resolution,  where  Capt.  Cook  anchored  in  1774, 
being  rendered  almost  useless.  The  first  of  these  recorded 
happened  in  1878,  when,  after  a  series  of  earthquake  shocks,  the 
land  jumped  up  a  distance  of  20  ft.,  and  later  another  12  ft.  In 
1888  severe  earthquake  shocks  and  increased  activity  of  Yasowa 
were  again  accompanied  by  an  upheaval  of  the  land  to  a  height 
of  at  least  30  ft. 

Dormant  Volcanoes.! — Lopevi  is  a  perfect  cone  in 
shape,  with  a  small  crater  situated  at  an  elevation  of  4755  ft. 
It  was  reported  to  be  ver}^  active  in  1863-64,  and  less  so  again 
about  1884. 

Parasitic  cones  on  Ambrym  break  out  at  intervals,  notably 
one  at  an  elevation  of  1190  ft.,  towards  the  S.E.  end,  which  is 
known  to  have  been  active  in  1888  and  again  in  1894. 

At  the  north-west  end  of  Tongoa  there  is  permanently  hot 
sround.  In  1897  a  small  island  was  formed  bv  a  submarine 
volcano  between  this  point  and  the  island  of  Epi;  it  has,  however, 
since  been  reduced  to  a  shoaL 


*From  a  letter  addressed  to  Mr.  H.  C.  Russell,  B.A.,  C.M.G.,  F.R.S., 
Government  Astronomer,  Sydney,  then  Secretary  A.A.A.S.  Seismological 
Committee. 

t  The  Rev.  S.  Ella,  in  1890,  when  enumerating  the  volcanoes  of  the  Group, 
mentions  that  the  island  of  Pau  Uma  has  one  crater.  We  heard  nothing  of 
this  when  in  the  Group;  it  may  nevertheless  be  correct. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  431 

At  Erromanga,  between  Traitor's  Head  and  High  Rocky 
Islet,  a  submarine  volcano  was  reported  in  1881. 

Vanua  Lava,*  in  the  Banks  Group,  is  famous  for  its  boiling 
springs,  which,  covering  a  considerable  area,  indicate  its  dormant 
condition. 

Extinct  Volcanoe s. — As  practically  all  the  islands  of 
the  New  Hebrides  represent  some  part  of  the  wreck  from  a 
volcanic  eruption,  a  list  of  the  extinct  volcanoes  would  embrace 
almost  all  the  Group  not  already  included  under  the  titles  of 
active  and  dormant.  The  several  mentioned  below  are  therefore 
only  such  as  are  known  to  still  preserve  their  typical  shape. 

Ureparapara,  Gaua,  Merlav,  and  Aoba  all  have  their  craters 
filled  with  water.  Nguna,  Mau,  and  Pele  are  cones  of  tlie  later 
basic  eruptions  of  Efate. 

Hot  Springs.! — The  following  have  come  under  observa- 
tion : — 

Boiling  springs  in  an  elevated  region  close  to  the  easterly 
slope  of  Mt.  Suretamati  on  Vanua  Lava. 

On  the  island  of  Tanna,  in  the  vicinity  of  the  crater  of  Yasowa 
boiling  springs  are  numerous. 

Hot  springs  on  the  island  of  Ambrym  at  Bat-in,  and  again  on 
the  N.W.  coast  south  of  Rannon  Anchorage.  The  temperature 
of  these  springs  was  determined  in  1894  by  Capt.  Purey-Cust  to 
be  between  100°  F.  and  107°  F. 

Hot  springs  on  the  island  of  Efate,  l  mile  to  the  north  of  Quoin 
Hill;  again  on  the  N.W.  of  Meli  Bay,  where  hot  water  is 
reported  to  ooze  out  of  the  sand  between  the  tide-marks. 

Investigating  the  former  of  these  latter  two,  we  found  warm 
water  oozing  out  of  a  considerable  area  of  low-tying  ground, 
resulting  in  the  formation  of  a  swamp  connected  M^ith  the  sea. 
The  water  was  running  only  very  gently,  and  the  temperature 
such  that  the  hand  could  be  immersed  for  half  a  minute  without 

*  The  Rev.  J.  Atkin,  in  186S,  described  the  islands  of  Vanua  Lava  and 
Gaua  as  active  volcanoes;  this  is  evidently  a  mistake. 

t  The  Rev.  S.  Ella  reports  the  presence  of  a  boiling  spring  on  the  island 
of  Gaua.     This  we  were  not  able  to  verify. 


432  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

inconvenience.  In  the  rainy  season,  however,  the  flow  is  reported 
to  much  increase,  and  at  the  same  time  to  rise  considerably  in 
temperature.  A  quantity  of  white  saline  material  is  deposited 
as  an  earthy  encrustation  in  the  vicinity,  and  studding  the 
shallow  swamp  are  innumerable  carcases  of  boiled  land  crabs 
which  have  been  unfortunate  enough  to  fall  in.  Surrounding 
the  spring  is  a  glade  a  couple  of  acres  in  extent  devoid  of  trees 
or  scrub.  Closely  investing  this  grassy  clearing,  and  contrasting 
strongly  with  it,  is  a  dense  jungle  of  stunted  vegetation.* 

Earthquakes  are  of  regular  and  frequent  occurrence, 
often  assuming  a  violent  character.  Most,  undoubtedly  proceed 
from  the  local  volcanoes  which,  when  they  increase  in  activity, 
are  in  a  constant  state  of  tremor,  punctuated  at  intervals  by 
severer  shocks,  felt  at  considerable  distances. 

To  give  an  idea  of  their  frequency  at  such  times,  it  is 
interesting  to  note  that,  after  the  outbreak  of  Ambrym  in  1894, 
shocks  were  felt  every  ten  minutes  on  board  H.M.S.  'Dart' 
anchored  at  Dip  Point;  later  on  as  she  steamed  over  to  Malekula, 
shocks  continued  to  be  felt  at  repeated  intervals  by  those  on 
board,  even  when  in  the  open  sea;  again,  whilst  at  anchor  at 
Port  Sandwich,  thirty  shocks  were  felt  in  a  single  night. 

At  other  times  shocks  are  much  less  frequent,  and  several 
weeks  may  go  by  without  even  a  tremor. 

During  our  visit,  amongst  those  experienced,  two  were  of 
special  interest.  One  of  these  was  a  sharp  shock  felt  at  Tangoa 
at  12.25  a.m.  on  July  29th,  followed  at  1.15  a.m.  by  a  smaller 
shock.  These  shocks  were  accompanied  by  much  noise,  and 
several  articles  were  thrown  down  from  the  cupboard  shelves  in 
the  Mission  houses. 

The  other  of  these  two  happened  at  6.30  p.m.  on  August  28th, 
and  was  experienced  under  novel  conditions.  We  were  out  at 
the  time  in  a  canoe  on  Erakor  Lagoon,  when  the  boat  suddenly 
received  a  shock  accompanied  by  a  sound  just  as  if  it  had  been 

*  This  feature  recalls  that  reported  by  Lieut.  Frederick  as  existing  under 
similar  conditions  in  the  vicinity  of  the  hot  ground  on  Tongoa. 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  433 

struck  sharply  from  below.  Indeed,  although  there  seemed  to 
be  quite  4  ft.  of  water  under  the  keel,  it  was  our  impression  that 
the  boat  had  been  bumped  on  the  coral.  Captain  Kason  who, 
at  the  time,  was  at  the  Residency  some  two  miles  awg,y,  noting 
the  direction  of  swing  of  a  hanging  lamp,  decided  that  the  shock 
must  have  travelled  in  a  more  or  less  east  and  west  direction. 

Earthquakes  of  a  much  more  alarming  character  are  felt  at 
longer  intervals.  As  an  example,  one  which  happened  several 
years  ago,  and  was  severely  felt  right  through  the  Group,  might 
be  mentioned.  Accompanying  this  shock  permanent  fissures 
were  formed  in  the  ground  in  certain  localities,  several  wooden 
buildings  were  demolished,  iron  tanks  were  thrown  down  and 
burst,  and,  in  the  Mission  premises,  pianos  and  heavy  furniture 
were  flung  across  the  rooms. 

With  regard  to  the- origin  and  direction  of  travel  of  these 
shocks  it  is  a  lamentable  fact  that  so  little  accurate  knowledge 
is  obtainable."^ 

Undoubtedly  most  of  the  shocks  travelling  in  a  general  N.  and 
S.  direction  originate  from  the  active  volcanoes;  many,  however, 
result  from  a  continuation  of  the  cross-faulting.  Those  with  an 
east  and  west  swing  are  most  probably  due  to  flectional  move- 
ments, originating  no  doubt  in  the  deep  abyss  between  the  New 
Hebrides  and  New  Caledonia. 

It  is  sincerely  to  be  hoped  that  before  long  numerous  seismo- 
logical  stations  will  be  distributed  through  the  South  Pacific 
Islands,  as  only  by  analysing  such  data  as  would  result,  can 
definite  decisions  regarding  the  present  earth-movements  in  this 
much-troubled  area  be  arrived  at. 

Summarising  this  section  the  following  points  deserve  special 
attention  : — 

1.  The  extreme  importance  of  volcanoes  and  materials  derived 
therefrom  in  the  formation  of  the  islands  of  the  New  Hebrides. 

*  All  available  material  is  due  to  the  Rev.  W.  Gray,  and  is  to  be  found  in 
A.A.A.S.  Reports. 
23 


434  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

2.  The  arrangement  of  the  volcanoes  in  definite  directions: 
older  andesite  extrusions  along  the  septum  of  a  great  fold  which 
has  detined  the  land-surface  of  the  Group,  followed  later  by  basic 
eruptions  on  the  inner  wing  along  a  line  approximately  parallel 
to  the  former.  A  tendency  for  subordinate  arrangement  of 
cones  along  cross-fractures  is  only  imperfectly  marked. 

3.  The  immense  size  of  many  of  the  Pliocene  and  recent 
craters. 

4.  Differentiation  in  the  magma  reservoir  resulting  in  andesite 
lavas  preceding  more  recent  basaltic  tlows.* 

Sec.  3.  MINERAL  KESOURCES. 

Reports  of  rich  prospects  of  nickel  and  copper  ores  in  the  New 
Hebrides  have  been  widely  circulated,  and  were  readily  believed 
on  account  of  the  proximity  to  New  Caledonia. 

Since,  however,  the  vastly  more  recent  age  of  the  New 
Hebrides  has  been  demonstrated,  such  announcements  must  be 
taken  cum  grano  sali^.  Traces  of  these  minerals  are  no  doubt  to 
be  found  widely  distributed  through  the  Group,  but  we  do  not 
think  that  any  payable  deposits  exist  above  sea-level. 

These  remarks  do  not  apply  to  deposits  of  sulphur  and  of 
magnetic  iron,  which  are  extensive,  and  will  in  the  near  future 
undoubtedly  command  considerable  attention. 

Sulphur  depositsf  are  developed  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Yasowa  on  Tanna  and  at  the  fumaroles  on  Vanua  Lava:  the 
latter  deposits  are  much  the  more  important. 

Magnetic    iron    sand   similar    to    that    of    Taranaki    in    New 
Zealand  occurs  in  large  quantities  on  the  beaches  of  many  of  the 
islands.      A    fairly   rich  sample  collected    at    Meli    Bay,    Efate, 
without  undergoing  concentration  gave  the  following  results  : — 
Fe  ...         45-6% 

TiOo         ...  3-5% 

thus  accounting  for  over  ^66%  of  the  material  when  calculating^ 

•  Judging  bv  analyses  of  lavas  recently  erupted  from  Yasowa,  it  would 
appear  that  the  latest  phase  is  again  that  of  an  andesite  magma.     Note  that 
East  Indian  volcanoes  are  now  also  ejecting  andesite. 
•  See  reports  by  M.  Pelatan. 


BY  D.   MAWSOX.  435 

the  Fe  as  FegO^.  On  account  of  its  high  titanium  content  and 
fine  character  this  ore  is  practically  useless  at  the  present 
moment,  but  with  success  of  experiments  on  titanium  steels  now 
in  progress,  might  at  any  moment  assume  commercial  importance. 

Some  of  the  finer  non-calcareous  bands  in  the  Efate  Soapslones 
would  make  an  excellent  abrasive  for  polishing  metals,  and  as  the 
cost  of  mining  would  be  only  nominal,  good  results  might  be 
expected  from  such  an  enterprise. 

With  respect  to  guano  deposits,  our  discoveries  were  restricted 
to  scattered  bodies  of  bat  guano  occurring  in  caves  penetrating 
the  recent  coral  limestone.  These  deposits  were  found  both  in 
Santo  and  Efate,  but  on  account  of  the  distance  apart  and  of  their 
small  dimensions — the  largest  of  them  containing  a  few  hundred 
tons  only — they  will  never  be  of  much  commercial  importance. 

Numerous  small  samples  of  copper,  manganese,  and  other  ores 
supposed  to  have  been  collected  in  the  Group,  were  examined  by 
us,  but  as  nothing  further  was  ascertained  of  their  occurrence 
they  do  not  warrant  further  mention. 

Part  ii.— Sec.  1.   DETAILED  GEOLOGY  OF  EFATE. 

i.  Submarine  Volcaxic  Origin  (Refer  to  Plate  xxviii.)— The 
island  of  Efate  owes  its  immediate  origin  to  extensive  submarine 
volcanic  activity  resulting  in  the  piling  up  of  thick  beds  of  tuff, 
which,  later  on,  effectually  hidden  beneath  a  veneer  of  coralliferous 
limestone,  were  raised  to  heights  above  sea-level.  Over  the 
greater  part,  so  perfect  is  this  limestone  veneer,  as  to  lead  the 
casual  observer  to  believe  it  to  be  a  purely  coral  island. 

Careful  examination  discloses  the  fact  that,  underlying  the 
coral  limestone  at  short  distances,  are  fine-grained  submarine 
tuffs,  shading  off  below  into  coarser  varieties,  in  which  distinct 
fragments  of  a  white  pumice  are  visible;  in  other  parts  of  the 
island  massive  agglomerates  are  developed  below  the  coral. 

As  regards  the  location  of  the  original  crater,  it  would 
undoubtedly  be  situated  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  coarser 
ejactamenta.     Bearing  this  in  mind,  and  recalling  the  distribution. 


436  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

and  general  dip  of  the  rough  bedding  planes  of  the  agglomerates 
at  the  north-east  corner  of  the  island,  we  were  early  led  to  con- 
sider Undine  Ba}"  as  the  remnant  of  an  old  crater  whose  lip 
ringed  in  the  islands  of  Nguna  and  Mau,  which,  on  this  hypothesis, 
would  be  daughter-cones  standing  in  the  old  crater,  as  do  Mts. 
Benbow  and  Marum  in  the  crater  of  Ambrym. 

Although  the  evidence  supporting  this  view  seemed  at  first 
sight  conclusive  enough,  yet,  when  further  attention  was  paid  to 
the  character  of  the  rocks,  it  was  at  once  evident  that  the 
Undine  Bay  agglomerates  are,  for  the  most  part,  to  be  referred 
to  the  later  basic  eruptions,  and  could  not  be  reconciled  with  the 
andesitic  pumice  tuffs  of  Havannah  Harbour  and  elsewhere. 

It  seems  probable,  therefore,  that  several  smaller  vents  now 
largely  obliterated  by  later  extravasations  of  more  basic  lavas  and 
agglomerates,  contributed  to  the  earlier  series  of  andesitic 
eruptions.  One  of  these  craters  must  have  been  situated  in  the 
vicinity  of  Havannah  Harbour. 

ii.  Coarse  Pumice  Tuffs.  —  A  coarse  tuff  composed  of 
fragments  of  an  ashy-grey  pumice  with  occasional  pieces  of  a 
dark-coloured  glass  forms  the  base  of  the  series  At  Havannah 
Harbour  (see  Section,  Plate  xxiv.)  where  these  beds  are  so  well 
developed,  they  are  coarsest  at  sea-level,  containing  fragments 
up  to  4:  inches  diameter;  above,  at  an  elevation  of  several  hundred 
feet,  they  pass  into  a  finer-grained  rock  which  has  all  the  essential 
characters  of  the  Fiji  soapstone;  this  succession  is  repeated 
several  times  at  higher  levels.  Examination  has  shown  that 
these  tuffs  are  referable  to  an  andesite  lava;  the  fragments  are 
in  every  respect  similar  to  the  light  grey  pumice  found  at  the 
present  day  drifting  in  the  Pacific,  derived  from  submarine 
volcanoes  distributed  along  the  great  fold-area  further  to  the 
east.  Analysis  of  some  of  the  perlitic  glass  (Sec. 3,  §5)  contained 
in  these  tuffs  shows  that  it  is  similar  in  composition  to  the 
pumice,  though  slightly  more  acid. 

iii.  The  Soapstone  Series. — The  fine-grained  beds  noted 
in    the    last   paragraph    as   being   similar    to   the  .soapstones   of 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  437 

Fiji  are  so  extensively  developed  as  to  form  the  most  important 
horizon,  after  the  limestones,  outcropping  on  the  island  (see  Sec. 3, 
§1).  They  represent  deposits  of  the  finer  material  from  the  same 
eruptions  as  were  derived  the  coarser  fragments  of  the  associated 
pumice  tuffs.  The  differentiation  is  due  partly  to  the  varying 
degree  of  buoyancy  of  the  material  causing  the  finer  to  settle 
last,  and  largely  to  the  fact  that,  subsequent  to  the  sinking  of 
the  denser  pumice,  a  vast  amount  of  fine  powder  would  be  con- 
tinuousl}''  showered  down,  dei-ived  from  the  attrition  of  extensive 
fields  of  the  lighter  floating  material.  Several  successive  repeti- 
tions or  the  passage  of  coarser  into  finer  tuffs  were  noted,  each 
probably  connected  with  a  separate  outburst. 

It  is  probable  that  beds  in  the  upper  part  of  the  series  owe 
their  origin  to  the  later  basic  eruptions  of  Undine  Fay  and  to 
seas  of  floating  pumice  drifting  from  other  localities. 

The  fine-grained  beds  of  the  soapstone  series  are  extremely 
well  bedded,  contrasting  strongly  with  the  almost  massive  pumice 
tufts;  where  the  dip,  undisturbed  by  faults,  could  be  measured, 
it  was  generally  found  to  be  a  small  angle  in  towards  Undine  Bay. 

Well  in  towards  the  centre  of  Efate,  at  Antonio's  plantation, 
where  an  outcrop  of  the  soapstone  was  examined,  an  interbedded 
band  of  calcareous  rock"^  two  feet  in  thickness,  composed  almost 
wholly  of  tiny  foraminifera  and  one  specimen  of  Dentalium,  was 
noted;  this  find  is  of  special  interest,  as  it  was  the  only  locality 
where  fossils  other  than  Globigerina  were  found  in  the  soapstone. 

For  the  most  part  the  soapstones  are  fossiliferous  and  only 
slightly  calcareous,  the  materials  contributing  to  their  forma- 
tion being  chiefly  glass  fragments  and  to  a  less  extent  mineral 
fragments,  chiefly  felspar.  Often  amongst  the  finer  soapstones 
occasional  rounded  pellets  of  white  pumice  are  to  be  found, 
evidently  representing  water-logged  particles. 


*  Mr.  F.  Chapman,  to  whom  a  slide  of  this  rock  has  been  forwarded,  states 
that  it  contains  no  forms  such  as  would  definitely  fix  its  age.  The  absence 
of  the  larger  forms  like  Lejndocijclina,  he  thinks,  refers  it  to  a  later  period 
than  the  Miocene. 


438  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

iv.  The  Agglomerates. — At  Undine  Bay,*  outcropping  from 
near  sea-level  to  elevations  of  about  2000  ft.  (Plate  xiv.)  is  a  thick 
series  of  agglomerates  composed  of  fragments  of  rock  similar  to 
the  basic  lavas  of  Man  and  Nguna.  This  series  appears  to 
overlie  the  more  acid  pumice  tuffs  met  with  further  to  the  west. 

In  some  of  the  gullies  where  sections  of  these  rocks  are  obtained, 
bedding  planes  varying  considerably  in  dip  within  short  distances 
can  be  seen,  representing  the  surface  slope  of  deposition.  The 
rounded  volcanic  boulders  composing  the  agglomerate  were  found 
up  to  2  ft.  in  diameter,  and  represent  a  variety  of  types  from 
that  of  a  basic  andesite  to  a  basalt,  usually  cellular  and  invariably 
retaining  a  certain  amount  of  glass  base. 

Crossing  the  agglomerate  beds,  generally  along  the  planes  of 
deposition  though  to  a  less  extent  in  every  possible  direction, 
are  very  numerous  dykes  and  sills  of  porphyritic  basalt  (Sec. 3,  §8) 
measuring  up  to  30  ft.  in  thickness.  These  intrusions  must 
have  taken  place  at  a  comparatively  late  period,  as  they  were 
found  intruding  the  older  coral  cappings  in  the  vicinity;  their 
injection  was  probably  contemporaneous  with  activity  in  the 
vicinity  of  Fatmalapa,  where  a  small  centre  of  eruption  seems 
to  have  been  developed  synchronously  with  those  of  Mau  and 
Nguna. 

V.  The  Raised  Rkefs. — Capping  all  the  formations  previously 
described  are  beds  of  coral  limestone,  probably  seldom  exceed- 
ing 50  ft.  in  thickness,  but  developed  on  such  an  extensive  scale 
as  to  leave  little  of  the  underlying  foundation-rocks  exposed 
(see  Sec.3,  §2).  Two  of  these  raised  reefs,  soniwehat  older  than 
the  others,  cap  the  agglomerate  hills  to  the  south  of  Undine  Bay, 
and  have  been  intruded  as  mentioned  in  the  last  paragraph.  The 
upper  of  these  can  be  seen  in  the  photograph  (Plate  xiv.)  at  an 
elevation  of  over  2000  ft.,  forming  the  crowns  of  the  hills. 

Below,  at  an  elevation  of  1000  ft.  and  upwards,  is  the  second 
development  of    older   reef-limestone,  which   in   the   vicinity  of 

•  See  Plate  ii.  in  '  Preliminary  Note.'     Report  A.A.A.S.  x.  1904. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  439 

Fatmalapa  appears  to  be  overlaid  by  a  couple  of  hundred  feet  of 
tuffaceous  agglomerate. 

Newer  raised  reefs  occur  at  intervals  in  terrace-formation 
down  to  the  beach,*  evidently  marking  a  succession  of  sea-levels 
resulting  from,  sudden  uplifts  of  the  land,  probably  quite  parallel 
with  those  recorded  at  Port  Resolution  within  recent  years. 
When  the  time  that  elapsed  between  any  two  succeeding  uplifts 
was  considerable,  the  resulting  coral  reef-growth  would  be  cor- 
respondingly extensive;  in  a  case  where  several  lesser  upheavals 
taking  place  within  a  few  years  of  each  other  have  contributed 
to  the  total  elevation,  little  trace  of  these  intermediate  beach- 
lines  could  be  expected  preserved  now,  after  exposure  to  a  tropical 
denudation  for  many  years.  Special  attention  was  paid  to  this 
point,  and  as  a  result  we  are  able  to  say  with  certainty,  from  the 
evidence  of  corrosion-marks  in  the  terrace-faces,  that  at  any  rate 
the  more  recent  of  them  were  elevated  by  a  succession  of  minor 
upheavals  following  each  other  at  intervals,  very  short  compared 
with  the  periods  of  time  elapsing  between  the  major  upheavals 
resulting  in  the  formation  of  distinct  terraces.  The  evidence  of 
these  minor  uplifts  is  only  faintly  marked,  even  in  the  case  of 
the  more  recent  upheavals;  it  has  been  completely  obliterated  in 
the  older  raised  reefs. 

On  account  of  the  steep  shore-slope  and  continuous  upheaval, 
the  reefs  have  narrow  platforms  which  are  usually  level  or  even 
gently  rising  towards  the  land;  where  the  platforms  are  wider, 
however,  they  may  be  noticeably  depressed  on  the  landward  side, 
indicating  the  existence  formerly  of  a  calm-water  channel. 

Most  instructive  sections  of  the  coral  veneers  are  exposed  in 
several  localities  where  they  have  been  cut  through  by  torrential 
watercourses,  notably  at  Steep  Gully  (Plate  xxiv.).  Such  sections 
show  that  after  an  upheaval,  the  coral  begins  to  grow  in  the 
shallower  water,  building  directl}'  on  the  solid  rock  below,  or,  as 
is  more  often  the  case,  separated  from  it  by  a  few  feet  of  beach 
sand  or  beach  pebble  conglomerate.     As  the  reef  continues  to 

*  See  Plate  i.  in  'Preliminary  Note.'     Report  A.A.A.S.  x.  1904. 


440  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  XEW  HEBRIDES, 

grow  it  extends  outward  on  a  platform  of  foraminiferal  and  «hell 
limestone  containing  frequent  blocks  of  coral  broken  off  from 
above.  In  this  way.  owing  to  the  steep  shore-slopes,  a  face  of 
coralliferous  limestone  300  ft.  or  400  ft.  in  height  may  Ije  rapidly 
built  up. 

vi.  Later  Basic  Ekuptions. — The  extrusion  of  the  basic  la\as 
composing  the  islands  of  Nguna,  (Plate  xvi.  fig.  1)  Mau  (Plate  xv.) 
and  Pele  is  here  made  the  subject  of  a  separate  paragraph,  but 
must  be  regarded  only  as  a  later  phase  in  a  sequence  of  events 
beginning  with  the  accumulation  of  the  thick  series  of  agglomer- 
ates on  the  mainland. 

The  lava-types  are  quite  similar  in  both  localities,  but  the 
outlying  islands  undoubtedly  remained  active  long  after  the 
mainland  had  become  extinct.  Proof  of  this  latter  fact  is 
evidenced  by  the  well  preserved  shape  of  the  cones  and  the 
absence  of  limestone  at  any  considerable  elevation  on  Nguna, 
Mau  and  Pele.  On  the  mainland  three  distinct  coral  limestone 
terraces  are  distinguishable  (Plate  xiv.)  overlying  the  agglomerate 
beds  (their  growth  therefore  post-dating  the  basic  eruptions  of 
the  mainland)  and  dipping  down  towards  the  east;  no  trace  of 
these  is  observable  on  the  lava-slopes  of  the  neighbouring  islands, 
which  fact  seems  to  show  that  ele\  ations  of  the  mainland  were 
contemporaneous  with  activity  in  the  latter  localities. 

The  rocks  of  this  series  are  almost  all  solid  lavas,  basalts  and 
basalt  porphyries  (Sec. 3,  §7).  At  the  southern  extremities  of  the 
islands  only  is  there  any  notable  development  of  raised  coral,  and 
that  of  limited  extent  and  elevated  a  few  feet. 

vii.  River  Alluvials.  —  Owing  to  the  soft  nature  of  the  sub- 
marine tuffs  so  extensively  developed  on  Efate,  river-erosion  is 
comparatively  rapid,  resulting  in  the  formation  of  considerable 
areas  of  alluvial  flats  at  the  extremities  of  the  larger  streams. 

The  soil  composing  these  flats  contains,  in  addition  to  strippings 
from  the  tuffs  and  agglomerates  of  the  hills,  a  large  proportion 
of  marine  material  admixed  with  it,  indicating  that  deposition 
took  place  largely  in  sea  water,  and  that  consequently  recent 
upheaval  must  be  responsible  for  its  present  elevated  position. 


BY  D.   MAWSON. 


441' 


Local    Features. 

Vila. — In  the  vicinity  of  Vila  the  hills  are  low,  seldom  exceeding 
350  ft.  in  height;  almost  all  the  outcrops  are  of  coral  limestone, 
and  though  so  near  the  surface  very  little  is  seen  of  the  underlying 
soapstone.  Similar  low  hilly  country  occupies  the  whole  of  the 
southern  division  of  the  island. 

Directly  behind  the  township  is  an  arm  of  the  sea,  Erakor 
Lagoon,  encircled  for  the  most  part  hy  coral-covered  hills  350  ft. 
in  height.  This  coral  limestone  is  not  more  than  100  ft.  thick, 
being  underlaid  by  soapstone  beds,  found  outcropping  best  in  the 
vicinity  of  Largeaux's  plantation,  where  they  dip  8°  S.,  60°  W. 

Shepherd's  Hill,  a  prominent  feature  of  the  south  side  of 
Vila  Harbour,  is  a  raised  reef,  at  first  sight  apparently  wholly 


Fig.  4.     Section  of  the  north  face  of  Shepherd's  Hill,  Efat^. 

built  up  of  coral  limestone  material.     At  its  eastern  end  where 
it  was  examined  (see  text-fig. 4)  it  rises  very  steeply  to  a  height 


442  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

of  430  ft.,  then  slopes  away  gradually  to  the  south.  The  steep 
northern  face,  we  think,  is  due  probably  to  a  fault,  though  little 
direct  evidence  of  such  is  obtainable.  The  discovery  of  a  few 
derived  pebbles  of  fine-grained  tuffaceous  rock  at  about  230  ft. 
level  indicates  the  proximity  of  underlying  foundation-beds  to 
the  surface.  In  the  section  several  newer  coral  limestone  growths 
are  indicated  skirting  the  lower  slopes.  In  all,  three  zones  are 
differentiated  : — 

1.  The  old  coral  reef  capping  the  hill  and  yielding — 

Corals  — \,  4,  18. 

2.  The  foundation-beds  of  the  old  reef  yielding — 

Pelecypoda—2,  10,  25. 
Gastropoda — 9,  15. 
Al^a — 1. 
Corals— 2,  12,  14. 

3.  The  newer  veneers  at  lower  elevations  yielding — 

Pelecypoda — 2 1,30. 
Corals—^,  19. 

Meli  District. — Extensive  alluvial  flats  as  much  as  two  miles 
in  width  are  developed  here.  At  the  foot  of  the  Tripple  Top 
Mountain  in  the  bed  of  a  river  deeply  scored  in  coarse  pumice 
tuffs,  pebbles  of  glassy  andesite  were  found,  indicating  proximity 
to  one  of  the  old  andesite  vents;  other  pebbles,  found  to  be 
varieties  of  submarine  tuff,  were  composed  of  fragments  of 
soapstone-like  rock  and  organic  remains,  amongst  which 
Conocyathus  sp.,  and  Lima  sp.  were  recognised. 

Havannah  Harbour  Tableland. — This  we  found  to  be  one  of 
the  most  excellent  examples  of  raised  coral  reef-formations 
imaginable  (Plate  xix.,  fig.  1).  A  more  complete  examination 
than  we  were  able  to  carry  out  in  our  limited  time,  could  be 
readily  accomplished,  by  working  on  the  magnificent  exposures 
in  the  steep  cliffs  of  the  Ai  Stream  gorge,  and  should  be  of  the 
greatest  interest. 

Several  traverses  were  made  in  the  most  promising  directions. 
The  first  was  up  Steep  Gully  (Plate  xxiv.)  to  the  west  of  the  Ai 


BY  D.  MAWSON. 


443 


SAONE    (SSSrt. I 


Corsl  linttton* 


ssogt  bcdc. 


Stream.     The   second  was   along   a   track  leading   from  White 

Sands  to  the  village  of  Saone,*  then  back  by  the  steep  gorge  of 

the  Ai  Stream  (text-tig.5). 

A  third  traverse  run  across 

the    tableland  from     Meli 

Bay    to    Havannah    Har-  i? 

bour  gives  a  good  general 

idea  of  the  surface-contour 

and  terrace-formation  (text- 

fig.6,  p.444). 

Much  faulting  is  to  be 
expected  in  a  region  such 
as  this,  where  thick  beds  of 
soft    rocks    are    developed 
close    to    volcanic    centres 
and    where    orogenic    pro- 
cesses are  actively  in  pro- 
gress.    In  the  Steep  Gully 
section  a  fault  with  a  down- 
throw   to    the    north    was 
noted;     this     same    fault,  Fig.5.     Section  of  the  beds  underlying  Saone 
though  not  proved  in  the         as  exposed  in  the  Ai  Stream  gorge. 
Ai  Stream  traverse,  may  have  thrown  down  the  40  ft.  bed  of  fine 
tuff,  thus  duplicating  it  in  the  section. 

These  faults  ante-date  the  development  of  the  coral  veneer, 
and  so  do  not  show  on  the  surface;  for  this  reason  and  from  the 
fact  that  suitable  outcrops  were  not  always  available,  other  faults 
may  have  been  omitted  from  our  sections. 

Leleppa  preserves  the  same  general  characters  exhibited  on 
the  adjacent  mainland.  Coarse  pumice  tuff,  with  fragments  of 
brown  glass,  persists  to  an  elevation  of  250  ft.  Above  this  is  a 
yellowish  submarine  tuff  composed  of  numerous  fragments  of 
maruie  organic  remains  in  a  fine-grained  soapstone-like  base; 
this  rock  is  similar  to  the  fragment  found  on  the  mainland  in  the 


*  For    surface   sections    of    terraces    met    with    on    this    occasion, 
Preliminary  Note  '  in  Report  A.  A.  A  S.,  1904. 


444  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Meli  District.     Above  the  280  ft.  level  outcrops  of  coral  lime- 
stone were  alone  observed. 

There  are  two  large  caves  on  the  island.     One  near  the  north- 
east corner  runs  in  the  recent  raised  coral  at   an  elevation  of 

^1025ft. 

970ft  _ 


MELI  BAY 


—  sea  Level 

Horizontal  Scale  i ^  tnile.__ 

Fig. 6.  Traverse  across  the  Havannah  Harbour  plateau. 
about  30  ft.,  penetrating  for  a  distance  of  120  yards,  though  only 
quite  narrow  after  the  first  40  yards.  Another  in  the  south- 
west corner  excavated  in  the  coarse  pumice  tuff  is  in  the  form  of 
a  dome,  40  yards  in  diameter  and  quite  80  ft.  high.  It  has  a 
small  entrance  50  ft.  above  sea-level,  and  thus  presents  the 
appearance  of  a  huge  bee-hive.  It  has  no  doubt  been  formed  by 
the  sea  eating  away  some  soft  bed  below,  causing  the  unsupported 
tuff  originally  forming  the  interior  of  the  dome  to  subside. 

Erradaka  and  Moso  are  similar,  geologically,  to  Leleppa 
Island,  and  with  it  are  probably  separated  from  the  mainland 
by  a  subsided  area  giving  rise  to  Havannah  Harbour. 

Undine  Bay  District. — Several  excursions  were  made  to  the 
hills  in  this  vicinity,  with  results  incorporated  in  the  section 
(text-fig.  7).  The  limestones  of  the  two  upper  raised  reefs  are 
quite  similar  to  each  other,  and  much  older  in  appearance  than 
that  composing  the  lower  terraces.  When  making  the  ascent  of 
the  highest  hills  along  the  track  shown  in  the  map,  outcrops  of 
a  similar  limestone,  much  intruded  by  porphyritic  basalt,  (Sec.  3,  §8) 
were  continually  met  with  at  intervals  between  the  horizons  of 
the  two  older  raised  reefs.  From  this  fact,  and  judging  bj-  the 
contour    of    the    land-surface    in    the    vicinity,  (Plate  xiv.)  it   is 


BY  D.   MAWSON. 


445 


probable  that  an  extensive  fault^  has  been  developed  along  the 
face  of  what  are  now  the  highest  hills,  letting  down  the  north 

side. 

On  this  assumption,  the  lower  development  of  older  raised  coral 
limestone  would  not  be  a  separate  horizon,  but  merely  a  subsided 
portion  of  that  outcropping  abo^'e. 


Coral  limestone,! 
about  40ft 


Fig.  7.     Section  through  the  hills  south  of  Undine  Bay,  Efat6. 
Contemporaneous  with  this  faulting  would  be  lava-intrusions 
and  the  extrusion  of  volcanic  material  in  the  vicinity  of  Fatmalapa. 


*  This  fault  seems  to  have  crossed  the  older  crater  which  had  Prided  the 
agglomerate  beds.  Its  direction,  traced  by  the  topography  of  the  hills,  seems 
to  have  been  peripheral,  with  Nguna  as  centre. 


446  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Nguna,  Mau  and  Pele  (Plates  xv.,  xvi.  fig.l,  xvi.  fig. 2)  are 
built  up  of  basic  lavas  (Sec. 3,  §7)  and  call  for  no  special  descrip- 
tion. One  point  perhaps  worthy  of  note  is  revealed  on  the  north- 
east coast  of  Pele,  where  part  of  the  old  crater-lip  has  been 
broken  down,  revealing  beds  many  feet  in  thickness  of  a  fine- 
grained volcanic  ash  apparently  developed  under  water  and  later 
overlaid  by  further  flows  of  lava. 

Sec. 2.     DETAILED  GEOLOGY  OF  SOUTH-WEST  SANTO.* 

i.  The  Earlier  Volcanic  Serie  s. — The  oldest 
rocks  met  with  in  Santo  are  thick  beds  of  agglomerates  and 
tuffaceous  rocks  developed  in  the  Puria  Etsa  District  on  the  west 
coast  of  Santo.  In  this  locality  they  are  at  least  400  ft.  thick 
(above  sea-level),  built  up  of  fragments  of  andesitic  lavas  largely 
glassy.  They  are  of  a  greenish-grey  colour,  due  to  the  develop- 
ment of  much  chlorite,  which  gives  them  a  decidedly  older 
appearance  than  the  more  recent  agglomerates  of  the  Wai  Bubo 
and  La  La  Vura.  Below  they  are  coarsest,  much  crossed  by 
veins,  often  several  inches  thick,  of  white  to  greenish  secondary 
minerals  resembling  zoisite  in  physical  properties;  above  they  are 
much  finer  and  split  up  readily  along  numerous  cleavage  direc- 
tions until  reduced  to  the  smallest  fragments. 

As  regards  age,  they  are  no  doubt  early  Miocene,  for  they 
appear  to  pass  up  regularly  into  the  Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion 
limestone  above,  f  Thick  beds  of  agglomerate  observed  out- 
cropping in  the  cliffs  along  the  coast  southward  from  Sauri'i  to 
C.  Babana  are  no  doubt  referable  to  this  same  series. 

ii.  Miocene  Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion 
Series  . — These  beds  occupy  large  areas  in  south-west  Santo, 
where  they  are  highly  tilted  and  intruded  by  andesites  of  the 
later  volcanic  series.  In  their  lower  portions  they  are  fine- 
grained dark  grey  tuffaceous  rocks  containing  occasional  radiolaria 

*  Refer  to  Plate  xxix.  for  map. 
t  A  more  thorough  examination  of  these  beds  is  desirable,  as  on  account 
of  faulting  the  evidence  obtained  of  their  relative  age  was  not  altogether 
satisfactory. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  447 

and  small  Globigerina;  above,  the  foraminiferal  remains  become 
relatively  more  numerous  until  beds  of  nearly  pure  limestone 
(Sec.3,  §3)  up  to  20  ft.  in  thickness  are  met  with.  Much  of  the 
upper  portion  of  the  series  was  hidden  from  view  in  the  sections 
examined  by  us;  such  outcrops  however,  as  were  available,  proved 
to  be  coarse  fragmentary  types  in  which  pebbles  of  foraminiferal 
limestone  and  andesitic  volcanic  material  figured. 

The  series  is  much  faulted  and  intruded  by  hornblende  and 
pyroxene  andesite;  interbedded  bands  30  to  40  ft.  thick  of 
andesite  agglomerate  were  also  noted. 

In  most  localities  the  beds  dip  in  towards  Losubunu  at  an^^les 
varying  between  27°  and  53°;  further  west  (the  Wai  Bubo  outcrop) 
(Plate  xix.)  they  are  completely  reversed,  dipping  55°  S.,  17°  W, 
The  total  thickness  of  the  Miocene  beds  exposed  on  the  Wai  Bubo 
is  probably  not  less  than  800  ft. 

iii.  Later  Yolcanic  Series. — After  a  considerable 
period  of  subdued  activity,  allowing  of  the  accumulation  of  the 
bedded  Miocene  limestones,  intense  folding  and  faulting  seems  to 
have  taken  place,  accompanied  by  extensive  extravasations  of 
andesite  lavas  (Sec.3,  §6)  and  agglomerates.  On  the  Wai  Bubo 
thick  beds  of  dark  grey  tuff  (Sec.3,  §4),  composed  mainly  of 
mineral  fragments,  through  which  are  scattered  occasional 
Globigerina  tests,  are  interbedded  with  this  series,  and  dip 
uniformly  27°  due  S. 

The  lavas  are  usually  pyroxene  andesites,  though  more  basic 
varieties,  especially  among  the  later  flows,  are  not  uncommon,  as, 
for  instance,  an  olivine  pyroxene  andesite  from  the  base  of 
Lobweri,  and  several  basalts  outcropping  between  Tasiriki  and 
C.  Ukuani. 

In  the  vicinity  of  the  Losubunu  the  total  thickness  of  this 
series  cannot  be  less  than  5000  ft. 

iv.  Bedded  Rocks  underlying  the  Recent 
Raised  Reefs  . — The  foundation-rocks  immediately  under- 
lying the  recent  raised  reefs  in  Santo,  are  similar  to  those  found 
elsewhere  in  the  Group,  and  vary  in  character  from  types  similar 


448  THE  GKOLOGY  OF  THE  NP:W  HEBRIDES, 

to  the  Efate  soapstones,  to  coarser  littoral  deposits  like  the 
fossiliferous  cinder  beds  of  the  Foreland,  Epi.  At  Tasiriki,  are 
developed  beds  intermediate  in  character  between  these  two, 
containing  abundant  marine  fossils;  a  little  further  to  the  north, 
at  C.  Ukuani  (Plate  xx.),  they  are  seen  passing  down  insensibly 
into  the  agglomerate.  On  the  Atsone  is  an  evenly  bedded  light 
yellow  variety,  dipping  8°  S.,  70°  E.,  and  texturally  resembling 
soapstone,  though  composed  so  largely  of  Globigerina  tests  as  to 
deserve  the  title  of  Globigerina  ooze. 

Occasionally,  as  for  example  on  the  north  side  of  the  Wai  Bubo 
near  the  ford,  the  recent  limestone  rests  either  directly  on  the 
aforlooierates,  or  is  separated  by  a  few  feet  only  of  drift  sand 
rock. 

The  regular  dip  of  these  beds  is  about  8°  in  an  easterly 
direction,  showing  that  since  the  cessation  of  the  lava-extrusions 
of  the  later  volganic  series,  orogenic  movements  have  been  of 
the  nature  of  almost  horizontal  uplifts.  Where  we  had  an 
opportunity  of  examining  them,  these  beds  did  not  exceed  100  ft. 
in  thickness;  there  is  little  doubt  though  that  in  east  Santo, 
where  they  are  thickest,  they  are  to  be  measured  in  many 
hundreds  of  feet. 

v.  Recent  Raised  Reefs.  — The  recent  raised  coral 
reefs  are  most  extensively  developed  in  the  eastern  portions  of 
the  island,  where  they  form  an  immen.se  elevated  tableland 
sloping  gently  downwards  in  a  south-easterly  direction.  The 
island  of  Araki  and  the  hill  Tumebu  (Plate  xxi.)  are  outliers  of 
this  formation,  exhibiting  the  characteristic  steep  slopes  descend- 
ing in  three  major  terraces. 

Towards  the  west  coast  the  regular  terraces  lose  their  distinc- 
tiveness owing  apparently  to  considerable  faulting  having  taken 
place  since  the  coral  limestone  was  formed. 

In  the  Tano  Busi  Busi  district  coral  limestone  was  traced  to 
elevations  of  about  1000  ft.  Further  north  it  becomes  scanty 
(Plate  xvii.)  and  past  C.  Ukuani  does  not  appear  at  all  at  heights 
exceedinj'  more  than  a  few  feet  above  .sea-level.     At  C.  Karai  to 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  449 

the  north  of  Wuss,  raised  coral  limestone  encrustations  appeared 
along  the  shores  at  elevations  of  12  ft.  only. 

vi.  Recent  Fres  h-w  ater  D  eposit  s.—  On  the  banks 
of  the  Atsone  River,  about  two  miles  from  the  mouth,  beds  out- 
crop quite  30  ft.  in  thickness  composed  of  fresh-water  drift 
materialj  mostly  matted  leaf-remains  with  fairly  numerous  fresh- 
water .shells.  Their  deposit  was  formed  prior  to  the  latest 
upheaval,  which  gave  the  river  a  chance  to  cut  a  channel  through 
its  earlier  sediments.  Similar  deposits  are  developed  in  greater 
or  less  extent  near  the  mouths  of  all  the  more  important  streams. 
Along  the  valley  of  the  Navaka  for  a  considerable  distance  from 
its  mouth  are  great  flood-deposits  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  width, 
of  volcanic  boulders  and  pebbles  brought  down  from  the  high 
mountains  to  the  north. 

Another  deposit  relatively  unimportant  is  that  of  travertine 
encrusting  the  beds  of  creeks  which  traverse  limestone  regions. 
Leaves  of  trees,  sticks  and  other  matter  happening  to  fall  into 
such  streams  are  after  a  time,  as  they  rot  away,  reproduced  as 
negative  casts  in  travertine.* 

vii.  Evidence  of  Faulting  in  S  a  n  t  o. — Along  the 
west  coast  considerable  faulting  has  taken  place,  resulting  in 
much  complication  of  the  geology. 

The  general  features  of  the  district  south  of  Wuss  suggest 
peripheral  faulting  around  Losobunu,  developed  most  strongly  in 
a  N.N.  W.  direction;  crossing  this  series  there  appears  to  be  radial 
faulting,  allowing  the  rivers  a  ready  passage  to  the  sea.  An 
example  of  this  type  is  seen  at  Sauri'i,  evidenced  by  the  discord- 
ance of  the  rocks  on  either  side  of  the  narrow^  river  valley.  A 
further  example  is  very  noticeable  crossing  the  agglomerates  on 
the  cliffs  a  little  north  of  Pareo.  As  indicated  by  the  direction 
of  trend  of  the  ridges  on  the  eastern  side  of  Losubunu,  peripheral 
faulting,  no  doubt,  extends  in  that  direction  also. 


Dr.  Guppy  noted  the  same  thing  occurring  in  Solomon  Island  streams. 
29 


450  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

The  complete  reversion  of  dip  in  the  thick  series  of  Miocene 
rocks  exposed  on  the  Wai  Bubo  argues  extensive  folding,  followed 
by  faulting  probably  overthrust  in  a  westerly  direction. 

A  few  hundred  yards  inland  from  Tasiriki  is  a  well  exposed 

fault  trending  in  a  N.W.  direction.     This  fault  is  much  newer 

than  those  previously  mentioned,  as  it  cuts  across  the  raised  coral 

limestone. 

Local    Features. 

Tangoa,  like  the  other  small  islands  so  numerous  along  the  east 
and  south-east  coasts  of  Santo,  is  built  up  completely  of  coral 
reef  debris.  On  the  mainland,  opposite,  a  broad  flat  averaging 
one  mile  in  width,  composed  mainly  of  river  debris,  leads  to  the 
foot  of  the  coral  terraces  800  ft.  to  900  ft.  in  height. 

Pebbles  collected  in  the  Atsone  River,  some  distance  from  the 
mouth,  proved  to  be  of  no  special  interest,  with  perhaps  one 
exception — that  of  a  sedimentary  rock  composed  largely  of 
volcanic  ash,  and  containing  ver}^  abundant  organic  remains, 
notably  Halimeda  opuntia. 

Araki  is  an  exact  counterpart  of  the  hill  Tumebu  (Plate  xxi.) 
on  the  mainland  adjacent.  On  the  east  side  at  an  elevation  of 
about  200  ft.,  just  below  the  second  terrace,  there  is  a  fair-sized 
cave  running  into  the  coral  limestone  for  a  distance  of  100  yards. 
In  it  we  collected  a  few  specimens  of  stalactites,  the  first  we  had 
met  with  in  the  New  Hebrides.  A  considerable  quantity  of  bat 
guano,  estimated  at  14  tons,  covers  the  floor  at  its  inner  end  for 
a  depth  of  one  foot,  six  inches. 

Tasiriki  Tasmalum  Track. — From  Tasmalum  the  track  crosses 
a  low  raised  reef  limestone  plateau  not  exceeding  100  ft.  in 
height  descending  later  on  into  the  bed  of  the  Navaka.  About 
\  mile  walk  over  the  pebbles  and  sand  banks  brings  one  to  the 
opposite  side,  where  the  track  leaves  the  river  and  commences  a 
long  ascent.  At  this  spot  a  good  outcrop  of  fossiliferous  soap- 
stone-like  foundation-beds  dipping  8^  S.,  83^  E.  appears,  capped  a 
short  distance  above  by  raised  reef  limestone.  The  ascent  con- 
tinues until  within  \\  miles  of  the  ford  on  the  Wai  Bubo;  at 
this  point  it  has  reached  an  elevation  of  close  on  1000  ft. 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  451 

As  the  track  proceeds  it  descends  rapidly  to  the  bed  of  the 
Wai  Bubo,  passing  downwards  from  foundation -beds  of  the  soap- 
stone  class  over  massive  agglomerates  and  interstratified  tuffs  to 
unconformable  Miocene  limestone  (208,  210,  211c,  212,  223) 
tilted  at  an  angle  of  55°,  so  well  exposed  along  the  river  banks 
(Plate  xix.).  Further  on,  nearer  to  the  ford,  better  exposures 
of  the  mineral  tuffs  (Sec. 3,  §4)  dipping  28°  due  S.  are  obtained 
capping  the  older  Miocene  series.  At  the  ford,  on  the  north  side, 
the  mineral  tuffs  are  replaced  by  agglomerate  beds  which  are 
capped  directly  above  by  the  recent  coral  limestone. 

Tasiriki  itself  is  within  easy  distance  of  many  interesting 
spots.  Immediately  above  the  cove  on  the  hillside  are  soft 
foundation-beds  yielding  very  numerous  fossil  forms,  amongst 
which  the  following  have  been  recognised  : — 

Brachiopoda — 1. 

Pelecypoda—\,  5,  6,  8,  15,  16,  18,  20,  21,  27,  2'8,  29. 

Scaphopoda — 1,  2. 

Gastropoda— I,  2,  3,  4,  6,  7,  10,  11,  13,  14,  16,  17,  18,  22,  23, 
25,  27,  28,  29,  30,  31,  32,  33,  36,  37,  40,  42,  43. 

Pteropoda — 1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6. 

Hydrocoralliiue —  1 . 

Corallince — 3. 

Echinoidea — 1 . 

The  rocks  forming  the  southern  breakwater  to  the  bay  are  an 
interesting  type  of  conglomerate,  in  which  water-worn  volcanic 
pebbles  several  inches  in  diameter,  such  as  constitute  the  beaches 
in  the  vicinity,  are  bound  together  by  calcareous  organisms. 
Above,  where  the  pebbles  become  Jess  numerous,  corals  make 
their  appearance. 

To  the  north  on  the  hills  behind  Penanbo,  and  as  far  as 
C.  Ukuani,  lavas  and  agglomerates  make  their  appearance 
underneath  the  foundation-beds.  Specially  good  outcrops  of 
these  are  obtained  in  the  vicinity  of  C.  Tsinone;  here  they  contain 
occasional  fragments  of  limestone,  which,  however,  has  lost  any 
trace  of  organic  structure. 


452  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Tasiriki  to  Talapone  (see  Plate  xxv.  for  Section) — Our  track 
lay  through  Penanbo,  then  over  the  coral  terraces  in  a  fairly 
direct  line  to  Partua  Tabua.  Soon  after  leaving;  the  \illage  of 
Narerea  the  plateau  of  more  recent  rocks  was  left  behind,  and 
the  steep  ascent  of  Partua  Tabua  begun  over  Miocene  rocks  with 
occasional  outcrops  of  andesite  and  tuffs.  The  descent  on  the 
far  side  was  steeper  than  the  ascent,  until  finally  the  creek  below 
Maliu  was  arrived  at,  where  outcrops  of  agglomerate  were  noted. 
From  this  point  the  track  rises  in  gentle  stages  to  La  La  Vura. 

The  rocks  in  the  vicinity  of  our  headquarters  at  La  La  Vura 
proved  to  be  mostly  agglomerates,  with  occasional  flows  of 
olivine  pyroxene  andesite.  At  higher  elevations  hornblende 
andesites  and  pyroxene  andesites  were  continuously  met  with 
until  we  finally  arrived  at  the  neck  of  land  separating  Lobweri 
from  Talapone.  Here  a  small  outcrop  of  mineral  tuff  was  noted. 
Further  on,  after  passing  over  the  andesites  of  Talapone,  we 
again  met  with  outcrops  of  these  mineral  tuffs,  which,  from  their 
similarity  to  those  found  on  the  Wai  Bubo,  are  probably  of 
submarine  origin,  arguing  a  subsequent  upheaval  of  quite  4000  ft. 

On  our  return  journey  we  met  with  an  outcrop  of  Miocene 
limestone  between  Lobweri  and  Partua  Tabua  (133),  followed  by 
outcrops  of  volcanic  rock,  and  again,  further  developments  of  the 
Miocene  series  (134)  at  an  elevation  of  about  1500  ft.  From  this 
point  down  to  the  meeting  of  Dry  Creek  and  the  Malikoliko 
continuous  outcrops  (176,  178,  182)  of  the  Miocene  beds  were  met 
with.  Just  at  this  spot  they  have  been  intruded  by  a  horn- 
blende andesite  (Sec. 3,  §6),  which  near  its  junction  with  the 
intruded  rocks,  passes  into  a  pyroxene  andesite. 

Beyond,  outcrops  of  andesite  are  met  with  until  near  C.  L^kuani, 
where  the  recent  coral  limestone  predominates. 

Several  fossils  of  this  limestone  proved  to  be  :  — 

Corah  — 7,  17. 

Gasirojwds — 14,  41. 

Wuss,  on  account  of  its  situation,  handy  to  mountainous 
country,  is  a  particularly  interesting  locality.  Good  sections  of 
steeply  dipping  Miocene  tuffaceous  rocks  are  to  be  noted  on  every 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  453 

hand,  with  a  general  dip  inwards  to  the  land  side.  Near 
C.  Karai  they  are  intruded  by  a  glassy  hypersthene  andesite. 

In  the  Puria  Etsa  district  agglomerate  beds  are  developed 
apparently  underlying  the  bedded  Miocene  series. 

In  this  promising  locality  beach  and  river  pebbles  were 
diligently  examined  in  the  hope  of  finding  traces  of  the  gneiss 
reported  to  be  largely  developed  in  this  locality.  The  search 
proved  fruitless,  however;  the  only  rock-type  discovered  not 
already  found,  occurring  in  situ,  was  a  pebble  of  a  biotite 
hornblende  andesite. 

Sec.3.  PETROLOGICAL  DESCRIPTIONS. 

i.  Efate  Soapstone s. — Under  this  title  are  grouped  a 
variety  of  fine-grained  submarine  tuffs,  so  named  on  account  of 
the  resemblance  which  typical  specimens  bear  to  the  well-known 
Fiji  Soapstone.  They  are  well  bedded,  differentiated  into 
alternating  coarser  and  finer  bands,  the  former  of  which  occa- 
sionally pass  over  into  a  coarse  pumice  tuff.  Endless  varieties 
are  further  produced  by  the  introduction  of  varying  quantities 
of  organically  derived  calcium  carbonate  which  is  present  usually 
as  Glohigerina  tests,  though  in  one  locality  quite  a  variety  of  the 
smaller  forms  of  the  foraminifera  were  observed. 

Distinctive  features  of  these  beds  are  softness,  friability,  earthy 
odour,  greasy  feel  of  the  finer  samples,  and,  above  all,  marked 
absorptive  properties.  If  a  dried  sample  be  placed  in  water  it 
immediately  sinks,  and,  as  it  continues  to  absorb  moisture,  streams 
of  tiny  air  bubbles  are  given  off,  accompanied  by  a  fizzling  sound. 
In  the  case  of  the  yellowish  samples  (the  most  greasy  and 
probably  the  more  basic)  subsequent  drying,  even  slowly  in  a 
normal  atmosphere,  causes  them  to  crumble  up. 

In  colour  they  vary  from  a  pure  white  to  shades  of  yellow  and 
grey,  usually  ashy-grey.  Brown  manganese  stains  are  sometimes 
observed,  more  commonly  along  the  joints.  Apparently  homo- 
geneous samples  will  as  a  rule,  on  more  careful  examination, 
be  found  to  contain  coarser  and  finer  bands  often  only  a  few 
millimetres  thick.     These  finer  bands  represent  material  of  the 


454  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  TilK   NKW   HEBltlDKS, 

natiu'e  of  the  finest  dust,  the  particles  never  exceeding  0*02  mm. 
diam.;  the  fragments  in  the  coarser  bands  average  0  08  mm. 
diameter.  Fragments  of  volcanic  glass  and  pumice,  and  in  small 
quantities  felspar  granules,  are  invariable  constituents;  accessories 
are  particles  of  magnetite  and  pyroxene,  and  organic  remains, 
chiefly  tests  of  small  foraminifera. 

One  variety  noted  in  the  series  differs  rather  widely  from  the 
type-speqimens,  and  deserves  special  mention.  It  outcrops  as  a 
compact  band  a  few  feet  in  thickness  at  the  300  ft.  level  in  the 
gorge  of  the  Ai  Stream.  It  is  quite  hard  and  much  coarser  in 
texture  than  usual.  Felspar  referable  to  andesine  constitutes 
about  8  %  of  the  rock  and  is  present  as  fragments  sometimes 
1-5  mm.  diam.;  about  another  1  %  is  represented  by  augite  and 
magnetite  in  very  small  grains;  the  rest  of  the  section  consists  of 
irregular  particles  of  fibrous  volcanic  glass  and  2-)umice  fragments 
much  infiltrated  by  calcium  carbonate,  and  attaining  a  maximum 
length  of  1-5  mm. 

Professor  Liversidge  has  recorded  the  analysis  of  a  specimen 
of  a  rock  collected  at  Havannah  Harbour,  from  a  terrace  at  an 
elevation  of  525  ft.  The  rock  is  described  as  greyish- white  in 
colour  and  readily  friable.  This  can  be  no  other  than  the  Efate 
soapstone.* 

ii.  Raised  Reef  Limestone.  — This  limestone  is  built 
up  of  the  fossil  remains  of  calcareous  reef-haunting  forms  of 
life,  amongst  which  the  corals  figure  conspicuously.  In  most 
instances  it  is  so  recent  that  the  cell-cavities  have  not  yet  been 
filled  up,  nor  has  the  intimate  structure  been  lost.  Tracing  the 
reefs  back  from  newer  to  older,  the  limestone  becomes  noticeably 
more  compact  with  obliteration  of  cell-spaces  and  development 
of  crystalline  calcite.     No  true  dolomites  were  obser\'ed. 

Often  a  more  darkly  coloured  layer  resembling  dense  travertine 
appears  as  a  facing  half  an  inch  or  more  in  thickness;  this  seems 
to  have  resulted  from  concentration  of  the  more  insoluble  parts 
of  the  limestone  by  percolating  water. 

*  Journ.  Proc.  R.  Soc.  N.  8.  Wales,  xiv.  161  [1881]. 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  455 

The  limestone  from  the  lower  portions  of  a  reef  is  always 
fragmentary,  and  though  invariably  coralliferous,  may  often  be 
most  largely  composed  of  remains  of  mollusca,  calcareous  algae, 
and  foraminifera,  with  a  cement-like  base  of  calcareous  mud;  in 
addition  a  small  percentage  of  inorganic  matter  is  often  present, 
resulting  in  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  staining. 

In  the  upper  part  of  the  reefs  is  a  zone,  never  relatively  very 
thick,  where  prior  to  elevation  the  polyps  thrived — here  the 
limestone  is  quite  white  and  is  composed  of  large  upright  heads 
of  coral. 

Dr.  Hinde  examined  two  specimens  of  coralliferous  limestone 
from  the  raised  reefs  of  Efate  and  found  Lithothamnion  con- 
tributing largely  to  its  formation. 

Professor  Liversidge  has  also  recorded  analyses  of  two  samples 
of  raised  reef  limestone  from  this  locality.! 

iii.  Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion  Lim  e- 
STONES  . — Lepidocyclina-Lithothamnion  limestones  of  Miocene 
age  are  found  widely  distributed  both  in  Santo  and  Malekula. 
On  account  of  their  greater  compactness  and  even  fracture,  they 
are  readily  distinguishable  from  the  more  recent  coralliferous 
limestones  just  described.  Among  the  most  conspicuous  of  the 
organisms^'  represented  is  Lepidocydina,  specimens  of  which  are 
common,  6  mm.  in  diameter;  branching  and  encrusting  forms  of 
Lithothamnion  are  also  present  in  considerable  quantity. 

Inorganic  matter  of  the  nature  of  mineral  fragments  and 
pellets  of  volcanic  rocks  are  always  present,  though  in  variable 
amount,  resulting  in  varieties  differing  considerably  in  colour  and 
composition.  The  purer  types  are  almost  white,  but  far  more 
common  is  a  light  grey  to  plum-coloured  limestone,  containing 
upwards  of  20%  of  inorganic  matter. 

t  Loc.  cit.  p. 160. 
*  For  microphotographs,  a  complete  list  of  the  forms  present  in  these  beds, 
and  for  detailed  descriptions  of  several  of  the  specimens,  see  Mr.  Chapman's 
paper  {antea,  p. 261). 


456  TIIK  GKOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW   HEBRIDES, 

No  dolomites  were  observed,  though  some  of  the  beds,  'no 
doubt,  run  high  in  magnesia,  as  contraction  cracks  are  observable 
in  some  of  the  sections. 

Similar  beds  have  now  been  traced  from  Europe  by  way  of 
Arabia,  the  East  Indies,  and  swinging  round  the  continent  of 
Australia  they  appear  along  the  north  coast  of  New  Guinea,  and 
finally  in  the  New  Hebrides. 

iv.  Mineral  Tuffs  compare  with  specimens  from  the 
Wai  Bubo  a  few  hundred  yards  above  the  ford,  where  they 
overlie  the  Miocene  limestones  uncomformably. 

They  vary  in  colour  through  shades  of  grey,  usually  dark  grey. 
The  rock  is  compact  and  hard,  and  is  composed  of  fine  grains  of 
mineral  matter  and  tin}^  particles  of  lava.  In  the  hand-specimen 
it  is  readily  distinguished  from  a  volcanic  rock  by  its  rough 
fracture.  Bedding  planes  are  as  a  rule  not  well  marked,  though 
often  indicated  by  dark  streaks  where  magnetite  grains  are  more 
numerous  Under  the  microscope,  however,  a  rough  differentiation 
of  the  particles  into  coarser  and  finer  bands  is  apparent  The 
constituent  grains  are  angular  to  subangular,  and  vary  in  size 
from  0  2  mm.  to  0'03  mm.  The  constituents  stated  in  order  of 
abundance  ave -.- —  Plai^ioclase  abundant  and  much  decomposed; 
Vohanic  glass  usuall}^  dusty,  sometimes  palagonitised;  Hornblende 
light  yellowish-green;  Pjjroxene,  faintly  coloured  augite;  Magnetite 
relatively  exceptionally  abundant.  Organically  derived  calcium 
carbonate  is  almost  entirely  absent,  though  occasional  Globigerina 
tests  and,  less  frequently,  shells  of  tiny  gastropods  have  been 
noted,  attesting  to  its  submarine  origin. 

5.  Perlitic  hypersthene  andesite  glass. 

Local  i  ty. — Embedded  in  the  hypersthene  andesite  pumice 
tuffs  40  ft.  above  sea-level  at  the  south-west  end  of  Leleppa 
Island.  In  the  coarse  tuffs  near  the  mouth  of  the  cave  fragments 
of  this  glass  are  fairly  common  up  to  10  cm.  diameter;  they  are 
usually  more  or  less  rounded,  and  are  often  faced  in  one  or  several 
directions  as  if  roughly  polished.  On  the  mainland,  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  the   Ai  Stream,  embedded  in  these  tuffs  were 


BY  D.   MAWSON. 


457 


found  specimens  representing  a  variety  of  stages  in  the  devitri- 
fication of  the  glass  to  the  development  of  a  porphyritic  felsite. 

MacroscopicCharacter  s. — Colour  dark  brown  to  black; 
translucent  in  thin  splinters.  Fracture  hackly;  a  well  developed 
perlitic  structure  causes  it  to  break  up  into  tiny  granules  a  few 
mms.  in  diameter.  Texture  glassy.  Constituents  chiefly  dark 
brown  glass,  in  which  occasionally  the  tiny  white  felspars  are 
evident. 

Microscopic  Characters. — Texture  hypohyaline  por- 
phyritic (vitrophyric).  Minerals  prese7it  (in  approximate  propor- 
tions by  area)  : — 

Glass 90% 

Felspai'-andesine  (Ab^  Ang)     ...         ...       6% 

Hypersthene  ^ 

Magnetite        I 4% 

Apatite  ) 

Glass  base  uniformly  brown  and  isotropic;  crossed  by  numerous- 
perlitic  cracks.  Felspar's  in  clear  idiomorphic  crystals  often 
1  mm.  long;  generally  rectangular  in  shape  and  exhibiting  albite 
twinning  with  the  extinction  angle  of  andesine.  Regular 
inclusions  of  a  brown  glass  are  invariably  present;  this  character- 
istic is  well  shown  in  the  photograph  (Plate  xxii.,  fig.5).  Corrosion 
by  resorption  is  always  strongly  evident,  and  in  some  of  the  less 
glassy  varieties  of  the  andesite  appears  to  have  been  followed  by 
further  additions  to  the  crystal  of  a  more  basic  felspar. 
Flypersthene  in  rods  and  rectangular  prisms  of  a  light  green 
colour,  up  to  0-5  mm.  in  length  :  pleochroism  is  very  faint. 
Magnetite  in  grains  often  attached  to  hypersthene  crystals.  It  is 
developed  in  about  equal  quantities  with  the  hypersthene. 
Apatite  in  long  slender  rods  often  crossing  crystals  of  the  other 
minerals. 

Order  of  consolidation. —  . 
Apatite. 

Magnetite. 

Hypersthene. 

Felspar. 

Analysis  (see  appended  table). 


458  THE  GEOLOGY  OP  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 


Nam  e. — Hypersthene  andesite  per 

'lite. 

Jevons's  nomenclature.  - 

-  Vitrophy\ 

ri-hyper 

-andesite. 

American  classification 

Noini. 

Quartz 

17-22 

Orthoclase... 

... 

19-46 

Albite 

36-15 

Anoi'thite  ... 

14-18 

Hypersthene 

5-44 

Magnetite  ... 

2-09 

Ilmenite     ... 

1-37 

Apatite 

0-30 

H^O 

4-18 

100-39 

Class  ii.j  dosalane. 
Order  4,  quardofelic,  Austrare. 
Rang  2,  domalkalic,  Dacase. 
Subrang  3,  sodipotassic,  Adamellose. 
Vit7^ophyri-adamellose . 

Addend  a. — The  pumiceous  variety  of  this  lava  is  abundantly 
developed  in  a  fragmentary  condition  forming  thick  beds  of  tuff. 
In  the  hand-specimen  it  closely  resembles  the  white  drift  pumice 
of  the  Pacific,  which  is  now  definitely  ascertained  to  be  derived 
from  submarine  outbursts  such,  for  instance,  as  are  known  to 
have  taken  place  within  recent  years  along  the  Kermadec 
Tongan  fold-line.  Careful  estimations  of  silica  in  the  Havannah 
Harbour  pumice  and  in  a  specimen,  collected  by  us  in  the  New 
Hebrides,  of  white  drift  pumice  known  to  have  originated  from 
a  submarine  eruption  which  took  place  early  in  1903  in  the 
vicinity  of  Tonga,  gave  the  following  results  : — 

Hav.  Harb.  pumice  tuti  (dried  at  100° C.)  SiO 2      59-68%. 

Drift  pumice  from  vicinity  of  Tonga  (dried  at  100°  C.)  SiO.^        ...     66*80  %. 

Professor  Liversidge  has  published*  analyses  of  the  two 
varieties  of  Pacific  drift  pumice,  which  are  interesting  for  com- 
parison. 

•  Journ.  Free.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xx.  1886,  235. 


BY   D.   MAWSON.  459 

6.  Hornblende  audesite. 

Locality.  — As  a  boss  quite  50  yards  in  diameter  intruding 
the  Miocene  limestones  and  tuffs  on  the  Wai  Malikoliko  at  its 
junction  with  Dry  Creek. 

Macroscopic  Character  s. — Colour  light  ashy-grey. 
Fracture  uneven.  Texture  line-grained  with  base.  Co7tstituents 
indefinite,  slightly  yellowish-stained  felspars  are  most  numerous, 
but  less  conspicuous  than  tiny  black  prisms  of  liornhlende. 

Microscopic  Characters  (Plate  xix.,  fig.2) — Texture : 
Crystallinity,  pauidiomorphic  hypohyaline.  Grain-size  variable, 
averaging  0*5  mm. 

Minerals  present  (in  approximate  proportions  by  area) : — 

Glass— greyish  and  dusty        58% 

Felspar— acid  labradorites  (AbgAn.^-AbjAn^)        ...     30% 

Hornblende — light  yellowish-green 7% 

Pyroxene— almost  colourless  ...         ...         ...         ...       2 '5% 

Magnetite — line  grains  


Apatite— a  minute  quantity  only      i 


2-5% 


100-0 


Base. — The  vitreous  appearance  of  the  glass  is  relieved  by  the 
presence  of  much  fine  dusty  matter,  resulting  in  a  general 
yellowish-grey  colour;  in  addition,  abundant  microlites  and 
cryptoscopic  fragments  of  the  constituent  minerals  help  to 
increase  the  turbidity. 

Felspar  appears  in  the  usual  idiomorphic  rectangular  prisms, 
averaging  1  mm.  in  length.  They  are  much  zoned,  dusty  areas 
of  acid  labradorite  (Ab^  An^)  alternating  with  clearer  bands  of 
andesine  (Abg  An^).  Some  of  the  more  dusty  zones  closely 
resemble  the  glassy  groundmass  without,  and  it  appears  as  if, 
during  the  growth  of  the  crystal,  envelopes  of  the  base  material 
had  occasionally  been  sealed  up  within  further  additions  of  the 
crystal  substance. 

Hornblende  appears  in  perfectly  idiomorphic  small  even-sized 
crystals,  O'l  to  0-3  mm.  diam.  Multiple  twinning  on  a  plane 
parallel  with  the  a  face  was  observed  in  several  cases.     It  is  of  a 


460  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

light  yellowish-green  colour  and  has  a  narrow  dark  border  in 
which  magnetite  dust  is  readily  discernible.  It  has  an  extinction 
angle  of  11°  on  the  h  pinacoid,  and  exhibits  strong  pleochroism. 

a  =  light  yellow, 

b  =  greenish-yellow. 

t  —  yellowish-green. 
a  <  b  =  c 

Pyroxene  is  very  scanty,  appearing  as  tiny  faintly-tinted 
irregular  fragments  whose  physical  properties  agree  closely  with 
diopside.  Magnetite  occurs  as  scattered  grains  of  small  dimensions. 
Apatite  is  present  in  minute  amount  as  tiny  rods,  rendered  most 
noticeable  when  embedded  in  the  substance  of  the  felspars. 

Order  of  consolidation — 
Mag. 

Apat. 

Horn. 

Fels. 
Analysis  (see  appended  table). 
Nam  e.  —  Hornblende  andesite. 

Jevons's  nomenclature  —  Fanidiomorphi-hypohyali-monodioro- 
phite. 

American  classification  : — 

Norm. 
Quartz       ...         ...         ...         ...         17'76 


Oi'thoclase 

Albite 

Anoithite 

Diopside 

Magnetite 

Ilmenite 

Apatite 

CO., 


20-02 
25-15 
21-96 
6-45 
5-57 
0-91 
0-50 
0-10 
1-21 

99-76 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  461 

Class  ii.,  dosolane. 

Order  4,  quardofelic,  Austrare. 

Rang  3,  alkalicalcic,  Tonalase. 

Subrang  3,  sodipotassic, 

Hornhlende-}?anidiomorpho-hypoJiyali-to7ialase. 

Addend  a. — (a)  Around  the  margin  of  this  intrusion,  and 
occupying  numerous  narrow  dykes  in  the  vicinity,  is  a  hornblende 
pyroxene  andesite^  differing  considerably  in  microscopic  characters 
from  the  hornblende  andesite  (just  described)  within;  there  is  no 
line  of  demarcation  between  them,  the  one  gradually  passing 
over  into  the  other.  In  addition  to  the  greater  abundance  of 
glassy  base  the  following  special  characters  of  the  minerals  are 
to  be  noted  : — The  felspars  are  much  less  perfectly  developed 
here,  having  neither  the  sharply  defined  boundaries  nor  attaining 
to  such  dimensions  as  their  fellows  of  the  interior.  The  hornblende 
gradually  becomes  more  basic  towards  the  margin,  where  it  is  a 
true  basaltic  hornblende  of  a  clove-brown  colour  and  deep 
pleochroism;  this  change  in  composition  is  closely  followed  b}^ 
increasing  breadth  of  opaque  border.  The  pyroxene  of  the  same 
general  character  as  before,  though  in  larger  crystals,  is  now 
almost  more  abundant  than  the  hornblende  constituent. 

(b)  A  pebble  from  the  beach  at  Wuss  proved  to  be  a  hornblende 
andesite  nearly  related  to  (a)  above.  Specially  abundant  in  it  are 
large  basaltic  hornblendes^  with  nearly  straight  extinction  and 
strong  pleoohroism — 

a  =  light  yellow. 
b  ==  brownish-red. 
C  =  deep  red  (nearly  opaque). 
a  <  <  b  <  r. 

(c)  In  a  hornblende  pyroxene  andesite  found  as  a  pebble  in  the 
river  near  Bartaleppe  active  corrosion  of  the  hornblende 
constituent  is  to  be  noted  (Plate  xxii.,  fig. 4),  resulting  in  the 
production  of  fine  grains  and  dust  of  magnetite,  and  a  clear 
constituent,  probably  pyroxene.* 

*  This  is  the  well-known  alteration  by  magniatic  resorption  affecting  the 
hornblendes  of  basic  andesite  lavas. 


462  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Examination  of  various  types  of  this  andesite  discloses  the 
fact  that  miixh  of  the  fine  mo.gnetite  which  is  present,  darkening 
the  base,  is  produced  by  secondary  processes,*  and  has  resulted 
from  the  disintegration  of  pre-existing  silicates  rendered  unstable 
by  succeeding  physical  conditions. 

Such  operations  are  no  doubt  widely  experienced  in  the 
volcanic  types  of  rocks,  more  especially  in  the  basic  varieties, 
and  account  for  much  of  the  second  generation  magnetite. 

(d)  In  the  hornblendes  of  the  Santo  andesites,  as  has  already 
been  hinted,  a  certain  relation  between  thickness  of  altered 
border  and  basicity  of  the  hornblende  seems  to  prevail,  whereby 
the  more  basic  types  have,  in  comparative  degree,  a  broader 
peripheral  zone  of  secondary  magnetite  and  pyroxene. 

In  some  cases,  notably  the  andesite  from  the  Wai  Bubo,  this 
alteration  has  continued  so  far  that  cojuplete  magmatic  paramor- 
phisrii  of  the  hornblendes  has  resulted.  When  highly  magnified, 
tiny  rod-like  microlites  of  augite,  arranged  parallel  to  the  hornblende 
cleavage,  can  be  seen  amongst  the  magnetite  dust.  In  the  centre 
of  one  of  the  crystals  (Plate  xxiii.,  fig.  2)  is  still  preserved  a 
remnant  of  the  former  mineral  which,  with  its  light  yellow 
colour  and  faint  pleochroism,  is  decidedly  more  acid  than  was 
expected. 

7.  Glomeritic  Basalt  Porphyrite. 

L  o  c  a  1  i  t  y. — From  the  island  of  Mau,  taken  from  the  western 
spur  at  an  elevation  of  about  600  ft. 

Macroscopic  Characters.  —  Colour  light  grey. 
Fracture  uneven.  Texture  microcrystalline  porphyritic.  Con- 
stituents :  the  only  distinguishable  minerals  are  abundant,  some- 
what rounded,  faintly  lighter-coloured,  porphyritic  ])lagioclases 
and  occasional  dark- stained  olivines. 

Microscopic  Character  s. — Texture  :  Crystallinity, 
holocrystalline  porphyritic.  Grain-si::e  and  Fabric  \  two  distinct 
crystallisations — (a)  An  elder   generation   of   much  larger  indi- 

*  Subsequently  it  was  discovered  that  Washington  had  aheady  noted  this 
phenomenon.     Journ.  Geol.,  iv.,  273.  1S96. 


66  /o 

'■  26%  :." 

66 

.       26 

•      24%     .. 

24 

...     1-8%     . 

■    8-2%     .. 

10 

7 

BY  D.   MAWSON.  463 

viduals  averaging  1*5  mm.  diam.,  porphyritically  scattered  through 
a   groundmass;    (b)    A   younger    generation    represented    by    a 
microcrystalline,  somewhat  pilotaxitic,  granular  groundmass. 
Minerals 2^^'esent  (in  approximate  proportions  by  area): — 

1st  Gen.       2nd  Gen.       Total. 
Felspar     ...intermed.  labrad.  (Ab^  An  J 

,,  ...basic  andesine  (Abg  An2) 

Pyroxene  ... 

Olivine      ...  

Magnetite... (generations  not  separable) 

Apatite      ...(minute  quantity  only).  

100 

Felspars  of  the  first  generation  are  represented  by  labradorite 
(Abi  An^)  which  exhibits  the  usual  twinning,  and  is  much 
marked  by  cleavage  cracks.  Inclusions  are  numerous  and  show 
a  decided  inclination  to  elongation  in  the  direction  of  the  prism 
zone;  brown  glass,  pyroxene,  magnetite  grains,  serpentinous- 
looking  matter,  and,  less  often,  liquid  enclosures  are  to  be  noted. 
The  crystals  are  typically  developed  in  aggregates  averaging 
2  mm.  diam.,  in  which  the  individuals  are  bunched  in  an  obscure 
radial  fashion.  This  is  a  variety  of  the  glomero-porphyritic 
structure  described  by  Prof.  Judd;"^  this  case  is  distinguished  by 
the  fact  that  the  aggregates  are  composed  of  felspars  only.  A 
typical  felspar  glomerulef  is  shown  in  the  photograph  (Pl.xxiii. 
fig. 4);  in  it  the  clear  area  within  the  zone  darkened  by  increased 
abundance  of  inclusions  is  an  assemblage  of  first  generation 
labradorite  crystals,  whose  multiplicity  is  rendered  evident  under 
crossed  nicols  (Pl.xxiii.  fig.5).  These  felspar  glomerations  were 
no  doubt  developed,  freely  suspended,  at  a  time  preceding  the 
final  ascent  of  the  lava;  this  crisis  is  indicated  by  the  narrow 
peripheral  zone  in  which,  owing  to  very  rapid  crystallisation, | 
inclusions  are  extremely  abundant.  Outside  this  latter  dark 
zone,  there  appears  a  narrow  marginal  band  of  clear  glassy  felspar 

*  Q.J.G.S.  xlii.  71,  1886. 

t  Glomerule  is  a  botanical  term,  but  can  be  equally  well  applied  to 
such  mineral  agglomerations. 

ij:  Under  high  power  magnification  the  labradorites  show  up  with  a 
rounded  and  somewhat  ragged  outer  border,  suggesting  that  possibly  corro- 
sion was  the  cause  of  the  darkened  zone. 


464  THE  OEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

which  proves  to  be  a  rather  basic  andesine  (Ab;3  Aiio),  the  same 
with  that  of  the  second  generation;  this  addition  has  been  made 
during  the  second  generation  of  crystallisation,  and  is  in  crys- 
talline continuity  with  the  labradorites  of  the  kernel;  the  felspar 
glomerules  show,  therefore,  the  phenomenon  of  rejuvenescence. 

Pyroxene  is  represented  only  in  the  groundmass,  where  it 
appears  in  quantity  as  light  greenish-yellow  grains.  Olivine  in 
large  clear  porphyritic  crystals  up  to  2  mm.  diam.;  also  in  the 
groundmass  as  microscopic  idiomorphic  grains.  Magnetite 
appears  in  scattered  grains,  usually  very  tiny.  Apatite  in  tiny 
laths,  one  of  the  first  products  of  crystallisation. 

Order  of  consolidation — 


Fels. 

Mag. 

OHv. 


Mag. 

Oliv. 

Fels. 


A  n  a  1  }'■  s  i  s  (see  appended  table). 

N  a  m  e. — Glonieritic  basalt  porphyrite.^ 

Jevons's  nomenclature. — Glomerophyri-pilotaxi-oli-feh^-gahhro- 

niicrite.X 

American  classification  : — 

Norm. 

Quartz           4-20 

Orthoclase     3-34 

Albite 12-05 

Anorthite       49-76 

Diopside         ,         ...  6-31 

Hypersthene             13-19 

Magnetite      6-37 

Ilmenite         2-28 

Apatite           ,         ...  0*90 

H.,0 1-44 


100-20 


*  The  term  basalt  i)orpliyrite  seems  to  be  particularly  applicable  to  a  rock 
of  this  type — a  basalt  containing  a  generation  of  coarsely  crystalline  matter 
more  abundant  than  the  expression  porphyritic  basalt  signifies. 

t  Although  felspar  is  here  an  index  mineral,  yet  its  exceptional  abundance 
warrants  special  mention. 

X  No  definite  knowledge  of  the  dimensions  of  the  mass  were  obtained;  all 
that  can  be  said  with  certainty  is  that  it  is  an  intrusion. 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  465 

Class  ii.,  dosalane. 

Order  5,  perfelic,  Gernianare. 

Rang  4,  docalcic,  Hessase. 

Subrang  3,  presodic,  Hessose. 

Oli-salglomero])hi/ro-pilotaxiti-hessose. 

8.  Olivine  Basalt  Porphyrite. 

L  o  c  a  li  t  y.  —  From  the  numerous  dykes  and  sills  intruding 
the  agglomerates  in  the  vicinity  of  Fatmalapa,  Efate. 

Macroscopic  Characters. — Colour  dark  grey  with 
scattered  reddish-stained  plienocrysts.  Fracture  fairly  even  with 
a  rough  surface.  Texture  microcrystalline  porphyritic.  Con- 
stituents :  porphyritic  olivines  stained  reddish  by  iron  oxide  are 
very  noticeable.  Less  frequent  are  large  pyroxenes  which  appear 
darker  than  the  fine-grained  base. 

Microscopic  Characters.  —  Texture  :  Crystallinity, 
holocrystalline  porphyritic.  Grain-size  :  two  distinct  crystallisa- 
tions :  (a)  An  elder  generation  of  scattered  individuals  averaging 
1  mm.  diam.;  (b)  A  younger  generation  represented  by  the  micro- 
crystalline  pilotaxitic  groundmass,  equal  to  65  %  of  the  rock  by 


1st  Gen. 

2nd  Gen. 

Total 

...     30% 

.      28%     . 

.     58% 

...       3% 

...     27%     . 

.     30% 

...       2o/o 

...       4%     , 

.      6% 

...       4% 

- 

.       4% 
.       2% 

Minerals  present  (in  approximate  proportions  by  area) 

Felspar — labradorite  ( Ab 2  An  3 ) 
Pyroxene — light  yellow  augite 

Magnetite         

Olivine , 

Apatite  and  decomposition  products 

Felspar  of  both  generations  is  labradorite  (Aba  An 3),  in 
crystals  more  or  less  rectangular  in  habit  and  exhibiting  the 
usual  cleavage.  The  earlier  crystallisations  average  about  2mm. 
diam.,  and  though  usually  single,  the  crystals  are  often  aggregated 
into  small  bunches  containing  several;  these  are  the  felspar 
glomerules  noted  in  the  Mau  basalt.  In  this  rock,  however,  the 
glomerules  are  distinct  in  that  tbey  are  neither  so  well  developed 
nor  do  they  show  evidence  of  rejuvenescence  in  the  same  d( 
30 


.^' 


iy  ^  vy 


466  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Large  inclusions,  chiefly  of  glassy  materials,  are  a  feature  of  these 
bigger  individuals.  The  second  generation  is  represented  by  the 
microcrystalline  reticulated  laths  of  the  groundmass  and,  only  to 
a  very  limited  extent,  as  a  marginal  zone  around  the  earlier 
crystallisations,  from  which  it  is  distinguished  by  its  less  basicity. 
Pyroxene  is  a  light  yellow  augite  developed  chiefly  as  tiny 
grains  (microgranulitic)  in  the  interstices  of  the  felspar  laths  of 
the  base.  Large  idiomorphic  crystals  up  to  2  mm.  diam.  are 
present  only  to  the  extent  of  about  3  %.  Olivine  phenocrysts  up 
to  3  mm.  diam.  are  a  prominent  feature  even  in  the  hand-speci- 
men, not  only  on  account  of  their  size,  but  for  the  fact  that 
they  are  stained  reddish  along  the  cracks  by  deposition  of  iron 
oxide.  The  clear  olivine  itself  has  a  slightly  pinkish  appearance, 
probably  indicating  a  high  iron  percentage.  Magnetite  is  present 
in  grains  derived  from  both  crystallisations."^  It  is  represented 
in  the  former  to  the  extent  of  about  2  %  by  individuals  up  to- 
0"5  mm.  diam.;  in  the  base  it  appears  as  tiny  particles  scattered 
about  indiscriminately.  Apatitu  in  microscopic  needles  is  present 
adhering  in  radial  fashion  to  the  tiny  magnetite  grains  of  the 
groundmass.  A  little  apatite  is  included  in  the  first  generation 
individuals.  Secondary  minerals :  Serpentine  and  other  fine 
fibrous  secondary  minerals  of  a  greenish  colour,  are  developed  to 
a  slight  extent,  filling  up  small  crevices. 

Order  of  consolidation — 

Fels.  I     Mag, 


Mag.  I  Apat. 

Oliv. 

Pyr. 


Pyr. 


Fels. 


Analysis  (see  appended  table). 

Nam  e. — Olivine  basalt  j^orphyrite. 

Jevons's  nomenclature. — phyri-pilotaxi-oli-gahbromicrite. 

*  In  such  a  rock  as  this  it  is  quite  uncertain  how  much  of  the  magnetite 
is  primary  and  how  much  has  been  developed  by  later  crystallisations  and 
recrystallising  processes. 


BY  D.   MAWSON. 


467 


American  classification  : — 


Norm. 


Orthoclase     ... 

.. 

3-34 

Albite 

.. 

11-53 

Anorthite 

.. 

40-59 

Diopside 

., 

.. 

11-74 

Hypersthene  ... 

. 

15-97 

Olivine 

., 

2-31 

Magnetite 

8-82 

Ilmenite 

2-28 

Apatite 

0-62 

H2O 

.. 

2.72 

99-92 

Class  iii.,  salfemane. 

Order  5,  perfelic,  Gallare. 

Rang  4,  docalcic,  Aiiverc/nase. 

Subrang  3,  presodic,  Auvergnose. 

Salfemphyro-pilotaxiti-auvergnose. 

Addend  a. — This  rock  has  been  derived  from  the  same 
magma  as  has  the  Mau  basalt,  the  difference  lying  in  that  it  is 
the  habitant  of  narrower  intrusions,  which  has  had  the  effect  of 
breaking  up  the  large  glomerules.  In  character  it  is  slightly 
more  basic  and  shows  evidence  of  more  rapid  crystallisation. 
Where  there  is  an  intrusive  contact  with  the  coralliferous  lime- 
stone of  the  older  terraces,  a  marginal  zone  about  one  foot  wide 
appears,  which,  owing  to  the  presence  of  very  numerous  white 
particles,  presents  a  speckled  appearance.  Under  the  microscope 
these  white  particles  are  found  to  be  irregular  fragments  of  the 
limestone,  averaging  1  mm.  diameter;  very  little  resorption  is 
evidenced,  and  no  new  minerals  have  been  developed,  though  the 
limestone  has  lost  all  trace  of  organic  structure  and  has  assumed 
the  characters  of  marble. 

9.  Uralite  Porphyry. 

Locality . — Specimens  were  collected  on  Malekula  as  rolled 
pebbles  in  the  bed  of  the  river  entering  the  sea  just  to  the  north 
of  Atchin.  The  material  represents  various  stages  in  the 
metachemisation. 


468  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Macroscopic  Characters.  —  A  dark  grey  compact 
rock  with  porph^^ritic  texture  and  uneven  fracture.  Large 
porphyritic  uralites  with  greenish  sheen  are  very  noticeable 
constituents;  much  less  common  are  whitish  areas  of  saussuritised 
felspar.  Pyrites  is  present  in  strings  and  grains  in  notable 
amount. 

Microscopic  Characters  (PL  xxiii.,  fig- 3)  —  Texture 
hypocrystalline  porphyritic.  Composition:  evidently  a  very  much 
altered  pyroxene  porphyry,  but  retaining  little  of  its  former 
appearance. 

The  grouyidmass,  which  composes  quite  60%  of  the  rock,  is 
almost  opaque,  owing  to  the  large  amount  of  fine  magnetite 
scattered  through  it ;  tiny  plagioclase  laths  of  microlitic 
dimensions  are,  however,  discernible  to  some  extent.  There  are 
three  notable  porphyritic  constituents  : — Felspar  in  rectangular 
crystals  about  1  mm.  in  length  and  still  retaining  traces  of  albite 
twinning,  though  now  completely  converted  to  saussurite;  traces 
of  original  inclusions  are  still  retained,  though  now  almost 
w^ithout  exception  converted  to  some  form  of  actinolite.  Uralite 
in  beautiful  crystals  up  to  5  mm.  diam.  retaining  the  perfect 
idiomorphic  form  of  the  original  pyroxene.  Sections  parallel  to 
the  vertical  axis  are  always  strongly  striated  (PI.  xxiii.,  iig.3). 
Some  of  the  sections  prepared  show  crystals  in  which  an  outer 
zone  of  uralite  appears  enveloping  a  central  area  still  occupied  by 
the  original  pyroxene  (PI.  xxii.,  fig  3).  The  pyroxene  is  perfectly 
colourless,  has  a  low  extinction  angle,  and  in  the  basal  section 
shows  three  cleavages;  it  is  therefore  related  to  diallage.  The 
amphibole  has  an  extinction  angle  of  12°,  appears  light  yellowish- 
green  in  section,  and  is  strongly  pleochroic  : 

a  =  faint  yellow. 
b  =  olive  green. 
C  =  grass  green. 

a  <  b  =  r. 

It  therefore  closely  resembles  actinolite,  and  is  the  variety  termed 
Smaragdite.  The  third  notable  constituent  is  an  alteration 
product   of   some   mineral    whose  identity  is  yet  doubtful.     It 


BY  D.   MAVVSON.  469 

appears  usually  irregular  in  outline  and  seldom  exceeding  1  mm. 
diam. ;  in  two  cases  the  form  was  such  as  to  suggest  hornblende* 
as  the  original  mineral — see  photograph  of  one  of  these  (PI.  xxiii., 
fig.l).  The  most  noticeable  of  the  minerals  composing  these 
aggregates  is  actinolite,  in  perfectly  idiomorphic  yellowish-green 
rods  crossing  and  recrossing  each  other  indiscriminately.  It  has 
an  extinction  angle  of  20*^,  and  the  following  pleochroism — 

a  =  light  yellow. 

b  =  grass-green. 

C  =  light  bluish-green. 
n  <  <h>  c 
Between  these  actinolite  laths  is  a  base  of  tiny  granular  clear 
felspa7\     A  zone  of  magnetite  grains  is  often  present,  forming  a 
dark  ring  towards   the   centre   of   the  section   (PI.  xxiii.,  fig.3). 
Zoisite  in  small  quantity  is  sometimes  present  near  the  periphery. 

Addenda.  — Another  pebble  fragment  collected  in  the  same 
locality  evidently  represents  a  further  stage  in  the  alteration  of 
this  rock.  In  it  the  original  structure  has  almost  entirely 
disappeared,  and  the  minerals  present  are  all  of  secondary  origin. 
Zoisite  and  various  forms  of  actinolite  are  the  chief  constituents. 
The  zoisite  and  epidote  in  very  tiny  particles  form  considerable 
areas,  which  appear  as  a  mosaic  under  crossed  nicols.  The 
actinolite  is  fibrous,  arranged  in  radiating  and  sheaf -like  aggregates 
without  sharply  defined  borders.  Pyrites  is  comparatively 
abundant,  scattered  indiscriminately  through  the  section.  Some 
of  the  lighter  areas  appear  to  represent  the  sites  of  former 
felspar  crystals,  which  have  passed  through  the  various  stages  of 
saussuritisation,  and  are  now  represented  by  a  mosaic  of  colourless 
to  faintly  grey  zoisite,  in  which  are  scattered  aggregates  of 
actinolite-like  amphibole  and,  occasionally,  epidote  in  recognisable 
grains.  In  the  less  metachemisised  varieties  of  the  rock  these 
actinolite  aggregates  are  seen    to  be  developed  from  inclusions 


*  Others,  again,  are  so  irregular  in  form  that  it  is  thought  more  than 
probable  that  they  are  the  sites  of  original  cell-spaces. 


470 


THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NF.W  HEBRIDES, 


which  are  chie%  glassy.      Phenocrysts  of  smaragdite  are  still 
discernible,  though  their  sharp  outline  has  been  lost. 


TABLE  OF  ANALYSES. 


SiO^ 

i. 

ii. 

iii. 

iv. 

63-60 

46-78 

43-98 

60-96 

AI2O3 

15-84 

21-22 

17-69 

16-62 

Fe^Oa 

1-45 

4-63 

5-97 

3-87 

FeO 

2-72 

6-17 

6-68 

2-61 

MgO 

1-14 

4-30 

7-83 

0-95 

CaO 

3-03 

12-07 

11-71 

6-35 

Na^O 

4-33 

1-40 

1-34 

3  01 

K2O 

3-26 

0-64 

0-64 

3-40 

H2O  + 

3-88 

0-94 

1-77 

1-03 

H^O- 

0-30 

0-50 

0-95 

0-18 

CO2 

nil 

trace 

trace 

0-10 

TiO^ 

0-70 

1-20 

1-20 

0-50 

P2O5 

0-10 

0-31 

0-32 

0-25 

Cr^Og 

trace 

0-05 

0-05 

0-04 

MnO* 

inconsiderable 

inconsiderable 

inconsiderable 

inconsiderable 

SrO 

nil 

nil 

nil 

nil 

BaO 

nil 

nil 

nil 

nil 

Li^O 

nil 

nil 

nil 

nil 

S 

faint  trace 

nil 

nil 

trace 

CI 

faint  trace 

faint  trace 

faint  trace 

faint  trace 

s 

Sp.Gr. 

100-35 

100-21 

100-13 

99-87 

2-51 

2-90 

2-95 

2-54 

INDEX. 

i.  Hypersthene  andesite  perlite;  Leleppa  Island, 
ii.  Basalt  porphyrite  (with  felspar  glomerules);  Island  of  Mau. 
iii.  Basalt  porphyrite,  the  dyke  equivalent  to  No.ii.;  from  dykes  and  sills 

intersecting  the  agglomerates  in  the  vicinity  of  Fatmalapa  on  the 

mainland  of  Efat^. 
iv.  Hornblende  andesite;  Wai  Malikoliko,  S.  W.  Santo. 

SUMMARY. 
The  chain  of  islands  forming  the  New  Hebrides  group,  owes  its 
existence,  primarily,  to  the  development  during  Miocene  times  of 
a  fold-ridge,  apparently  continuous  with  that  passing  around  the 


*  The  colour  of  the  fused  cake  was  in  all  cases  very  faint,  indicating 
probably  not  more  than  0-15%  MnO;  in  order  to  save  time,  this  was  pre- 
cipitated with  the  Fe203. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  471 

north  of  New  Guinea,  through  Sumatra,  and  on  to  the  better 
known  region  of  the  Himalayas  and  Southern  Europe.  In  the 
New  Hebrides,  the  folding  period  was  preceded  by  local  shallow 
marine  conditions  and  subdued  volcanic  activity.  The  folding 
force  would  appear  to  have  been  exerted  from  the  direction  of 
Fiji,  against  the  foreland  of  New  Caledonian  crystalline  schists 
and  gneisses;  a  single  ridge  probably  resulted,  defining  the  western 
line  of  islands  where  extensive  outcrops  of  Miocene  strata  are 
exposed — in  Santo,  Malekula  and  possibly  Efate. 

In  accordance  with  Professor  Suess's  observations,  subsidence 
of  the  outer  wing  has,  judging  by  the  evidence  of  the  Wai  Bubo 
beds,  been  overthrust,  allowing  of  the  intrusion  of  andesite 
lavas  followed  by  extensive  late  Miocene  andesitic  eruptions 
along  the  plane  of  weakness.  The  result  of  the  accumulation  of 
volcanic  products  from  these  eruptions  along  the  ridge  has  been 
to  accentuate  its  features,  so  that,  at  the  present  day,  a  drop  of 
almost  22,000  feet  is  experienced  within  50  miles  (see  Plate  xxvi.). 

The  next  epoch-making  feature  in  the  development  of  the  New 
Hebrides  was  probably  a  faulting  of  the  inner  wing  of  the  fold 
along  the  line  of  present  active  volcanoes,  letting  down  the  sea 
floor  to  the  east,  thus  putting  fairly  deep  water  between  the  New 
Hebrides  and  the  Fiji  land-surface.  Along  this  fracture  even 
larger  volcanoes  than  ever  were  developed,  extruding  not  ande- 
site lavas  but  basalts.  These  eruptions  commenced  probably 
about  middle  Pliocene  and  extended  down  to  recent  times. 

During  all  this  period  of  volcanic  activity,  extensive  submarine 
tuffaceous  beds  were  accumulating  above  the  folded  Miocene 
series;  the  earlier  deposits  of  the  nature  of  the  Wai  Bubo  mineral 
tuffs,  followed  later  by  varieties  of  soapstone.  No  interbedded 
coral  limestone  was  met  amongst  these  tuffs,  though  occasional 
beds  proved  to  be  highly  calcareous,  due  to  the  presence  of 
abundant  remains  of  the  smaller  foraminifera. 

Capping  this  series,  are  the  raised  coral  reefs  elevated  to 
heights  of  over  2000  feet.  The  oldest  of  these  is  referable  to  a 
period  not  earlier  than  late  Pliocene  and  probably  not  much 
later,  as  it  has  since  been  intruded  by  lavas  from  centres  now 


472  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

extinct.  The  limestone  forming  the  series  of  more  recent  raised 
reefs  is  considerably  newer  in  ajjpearance,  and  so  is  probably  to 
be  relegated  to  a  very  recent  epoch. 

The  elevatory  movements  evidenced  in  these  raised  reefs  is  of 
a  see-saw  type,  greatest  in  the  west,  and  least  (probably  in  many 
cases  a  minus  quantity)  in  the  east,  where  the  great  recent  basic 
eruptions  have  taken  place.  As  these  eruptions  were  contem- 
poraneous with  the  upheaval  it  might  be  argued  that  they  were 
the  prime  cause  of  the  disturbance;  this,  however,  can  hardly  be 
the  case,  as  the  tilt  is  down  towards  the  centres  of  eruption, 
where  it  is  usually  negative. 

The  proportionate  increase  in  relative  heights  of  the  terraces 
in  an  east  to  w^est  traverse  is  proof  that  the  upheavals  were  not 
primarily  horizontal,  and  the  present  easterly  dip  produced  later 
by  the  development  of  a  sag  in  towards  the  volcanic  centres. 

From  these  facts  it  seems  most  reasonable  to  relate  the 
elevatory  tendency  to  a  continuance"^  of  the  tectonic  movements 
so  critically  developed  in  Miocene  times,  and  to  regard  the 
volcanic  eruptions  as  a  direct  outcome  of  the  folding  and 
consequent  on  it.  It  is,  however,  still  maintained  that  minor 
elevations  may  have  been  directly  due  to  the  volcanoes,  as 
evidenced  by  the  fairly  numerous  intrusions  of  andesite  into  the 
Miocene  series. 

If  at  any  time  the  New  Hebrides  ridge  formed  continuous 
land  connected  in  the  north  or  elsewhere  wdth  other  land-masses, 
these  conditions  are  most  likely  to  have  prevailed  in  its  early 
history.  Geological  evidence,  so  far  as  ascertained,  is  in  this 
respect  uncertain,  but  that  such  must  have  been  the  case  has 
been  conclusively  proved  on  biological  grounds  by  evidence 
brought  forward  by  Mr.  C.  Hedley.f 

*  The  Himalayas  afford  a  classical  example  of  continuance  of  folding, 
beginning  in  the  Eocene  and  extending  down  to  recent  times.  Vide  Suess,, 
'  The  face  of  the  Earth.' 

f  **A  Zoogeographic  Scheme  for  the  Mid-Pacific."  Proc.  Linn.  Soc. 
N.  S.  Wales,  xxiv.  391,  1899. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  473 

Extensive  trough-faulting  crossing  the  original  fold  almost 
perpendicularly*  and  resulting  in  the  development  of  an  island 
chain,  most  probably,  therefore,  did  not  follow  directly  on  the 
formation  of  the  primary  fold,  but  succeeded  it  after  the  lapse  of 
a  longer  or  shorter  period,!  giving  time  for  the  migration  of 
representatives  of  the  Papuan  fauna  as  advocated  by  Mr.  C. 
Hedley. 

Comparing  New  Hebridean  tectonic  geology,  as  developed  in 
this  paper,  with  that  of  Sumatra,  a  continuation  of  the  same  fold 
chain,  the  perfect  similarity  will  be  at  once  apparent.  As  no 
beds  older  than  the  Miocene^  were  met  with  in  the  Group,  the 
nature  of  such  developed  at  a  depth  is  entirely  problematical; 
since,  however,  later  geological  features  in  these  two  regions 
have  so  much  in  common,  it  is  probable  that  the  similarity 
extends  back  to  the  older  formations,  and  we  should  then  expect 
to  find  below  the  New  Hebrides  Miocene  an  extensive  develop- 
ment of  serpentine  and  diabase.  The  probability  of  such  being 
the  case  is  greatly  strengthened  by  the  fact  that  in  New  Cale- 
donia, not  far  distant,  and  in  New  Zealand,  to  the  south,  a 
continuation  of  the  same  fold-chain,  the  serpentine  horizon  is 
strongly  developed. 

CONCLUSIONS. 

The  discovery  that  the  New  Hebrides  Islands  are  a  fold-chain 
of  Alpine  age  throws  great  light  upon  our  knowledge  of  South 
Pacific  geology,  and  at  once  suggests  the  application  of  similar 
principles  with  regard  to  other  island  groups. 

Accordingly,  after  a  careful  study  of  the  Admiralty  charts  and 
an  elementary  knowledge  of  the  geology  of  the  islands,  it  will  be 

*  Lines  of  weakness  crossing  the  fold  would,  in  all  probability,  be  pro- 
duced contemporaneously  with  its  formation  in  accordance  with  the  blatter 
type  of  faulting;  actual  trough  subsidences  though  would  be  precipitated  by 
the  later  extravasations  of  lava. 

t  So  far  as  our  observations  went,  such  was  found  to  be  the  case,  e.g. ,  the 
Tasiriki  fault  crossing  the  recent'raised  coral,  and  the  Havannah  Harbour 
fault  crossing  the  soapstone. 

J  It  is  none  the  less  probable  that  limited  outcrops  do  occur,  as  from  the 
advanced  metamorphic  state  of  the  pebbles  of  uralite  porphyry  from  Malekula 
they  must  date  back  to  times  preceding  the  folding. 


474  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

at  once  conceded  that  the  South  Pacific  Island  Groups  are  lined 
along  great  fold-chains  concentric  on  the  Australian  archibole. 
Discontinuity  of  the  land-areas  is  due  to  a  variety  of  local  causes, 
two  of  which  figure  most  prominently;  in  the  first  place,  inevit- 
able cross-faulting  of  the  blatter  type,  succeeded  by  its  attendant 
after-result  cross  trough-faulting;  secondly,  the  fact  that  many  of 
the  ridges  would  probably  not  be  sufficiently  elevated,  to  rise 
above  sea-level,  the  present  isolated  land-areas  chained  along  the 
crests,  resulting  from  subsequent  continued  accumulation  of 
volcanic  products,  derived  from  eruptive  centres  developed  along 
the  septa. 

The  direction  of  folding  has  probably  been  defined  by  the 
trend  of  parallel  fold-ridges  of  Hercynian  age,  which  can  be 
traced,  one  following  closely  the  contour  of  the  east  coast  of 
Australia;  another  seems  to  pass  down  the  Owen  Stanley  Ranges 
of  New  Guinea,*  through  New  Caledonia,,!  to  meet  the  great  Car- 
boniferous fold  of  the  Southern  Alps  of  New  Zealand,  which 
latter,  pointing  as  it  does,  seems  to  indicate  a  continuation  to 
the  northward  in  the  direction  of  Samoa,  or  more  probably,  now 
that  we  know  of  the  existence  in  Viti  Levu|  of  older  rocks, 
through  Fiji.  It  is  this  Hercynian  folding  which,  by  isolation^ 
from  Australia,  gave  birth  to  Mr.  Hedley's  Mid-Pacific  Continent. 
The  similarity  of  the  Mesozoic  fossils] |  in  New  Caledonia  and 
New  Zealand,  shows  that  the  land-area  in  this  direction  must  have 


•  Annual  Eepoit  on  British  New  Guinea.  Parliamentary  Papers,  Bris- 
bane, 1893.  Also  "  The  Salient  Geological  Features  of  British  New  Guinea." 
By  A.  Gibb  Maitland,  Journ.  West  Aust.  Nat.  Hist.  Soc.  No.ii.  May,  1905. 

t  Piroutet,  M.,  "Preliminary  Note  on  the  Geology  of  a  Part  of  New 
Caledonia."     Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  France,  iii.  156,  1903. 

I  Woolnough,  W,  G.,  "The  Continental  Origin  of  Fiji."  Proc.  Linn. 
Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xxviii.  457,  1903. 

§  As  shown  by  the  similarity  among  the  fossils  in  these  two  regions  in 
times  preceding  the  later  Carboniferous,  and  dissimilarity  in  succeeding 
periods. 

II  The  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke  was  the  first  to  draw  attention  to  this,  from 
which  he  argued  an  extensive  land-area  connecting  both  these  localities, 
*'  Plain  Statements,"  1851,  p. 6. 


BY  D,   MAWSON.  475 

been  considerable  and  permanent  during  that  period.  It  is  pro- 
bable though  that,  in  the  early  Tertiaries,  with  the  development  of 
further  folding,  the  land  began  to  break  up,"**"  until,  as  now,  so  little 
of  the  original  remains.  Evidence  available  in  New  Caledonia  and 
New  Zealand  dates  the  commencement  of  this  folding  to  a  period 
subsequent  to  the  Cretaceous,  whilst  unconformities  in  the  later 
rocks  of  the  New  Hebrides  are  proof  of  its  continuance  down  to 
the  present  time.  Extreme  upheaval,  which  in  Santo  and 
Malekula  has  laid  bare  a  continuous  series,  from  horizontally 
bedded  recent  raised  reef  debris  above,  to  a  basis  of  folded 
Miocene  below,  allows  of  a  critical  enquiry  into  the  nature  of 
the  movements  which  have  contributed  to  the  present  topography. 
Analysing  this  evidence,  it  would  seem  that  earlier  features  in 
the  development  were  of  the  nature  of  true  folding,  but  that 
later  tendencies  had  been  towards  almost  horizontal  uplifts, 
resulting  in  a  maximum  elevation  above  sea-level  of  perhaps 
4000  feet,  t 

Extended  observation  in  South  Pacific  tectonics  seems  to 
show  that  a  similar  cycle  of  operations  has  been  most  widely 
exercised.  The  interesting  result  is  therefore  arrived  at  that 
more  or  less  horizontal  positive  and  negative  movements  are  often 
a  feature  of  the  later  phases  in  mountain-building. 

Situated  as  this  region  is  in  a  tropical  climate,  these  slow, 
progressive,  and  fairly  regular  movements  have  been  faithfully 
and  indelibly  recorded  by  the  industrious  coral  polyp,  whose 
mode  of  life  has  resulted  in  the  development  of  three  main  types 
of  islands,  from  as  many  possible  land-movements. 

*  Just  as  the  East  Indian  Continent  is  known  to  have  "  gradually  and 
irregularly  broken  up,"  Wallace,  A.  R.,  "  On  the  Physical  Geography  of  the 
Malay  Archipelago."     Journ.  Geogr.  8oc.  xxxiii.  233,  1863. 

t  See  Parti.  Seel.  Santo.  The  fact  that  some  mountain-ridges  owe 
their  elevated  position  to  nearly  horizontal  uplifts  through  considerable 
heights  has  been  clearly  demonstrated  by  Prof.  W.  M.  Davis,  ' '  The  bearing 
of  Physiography  upon  Suess'  Theories,"  xix.  265,  1905.  Also  by  the  same 
author,  "The  Geographical  Cycle  in  an  arid  Climate,"  Journ.  Geol.  1905, 
p.  381. 


476  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

Firstly,  in  regions  of  continuous  iij^heaval^  islands  are  veneered 
with  coralliferous  limestone  terraces,  e.g.,  The  New  Hebrides. 

Secondly,  islands  situated  on  subsiding  areas  are  typically 
atolls,  e.g.,  The  Ellice  Group. ^' 

The  third  type  of  island,  is  one  in  which  coralliferous  limestone 
is  found  interbedded  with  submarine  tuffs  or  other  material, 
being  evidence  both  of  upheaval  and  subsidence;  such  areas  are, 
as  a  rule,  larger  land-masses,  e.g.,  Viti  Levu,t  and  have  been 
affected  by  oscillatory  movements  of  the  earth's  crust,  and  not  by 
folding  of  the  acute  type  defining  most  of  the  South  Sea  Island 
ridges. 

The  most  promising  field  for  future  work,  extending  these 
observations  on  Pacific  tectology,  is  undoubtedly  South-Eastern, 
New  Guinea  and  the  neighbouring  islands,  where  it  is  hoped 
that  shortly  further  investigations  may  be  prosecuted. 

The  author  wishes  to  express  his  great  indebtedness  to  Capt. 
E.  G.  Rason,  R.N.,  British  Resident  Deputy  Commissioner  in 
the  Group,  for  help  afforded  and  considerable  trouble  taken  to 
ensure  as  thorough  an  examination  of  the  Group  as  circumstances 
would  permit  of. 

To  Professor  T.  W.  E.  David,  B.A.,  F.G.S.,  F.R.S.,  we  have 
been  in  a  chronic  state  of  indebtedness  for  much  assistance 
rendered  ever  since  his  first  suggestion  of  the  undertaking. 

Our  thanks  are  also  due  to  the  following  gentlemen  : — Com- 
mander J.  P.  Rolleston  of  H.M.S.  "Archer"  for  cordial  assist- 
ance in  extending  our  field  operations;  Professor  A.  Liversidge, 
M.A.,  LL.D.,  F.R.S.,  and  Acting  Professor  J.  A.  Schofield, 
A.R.S.M.,  F.C.S.,  for  facilities  offered  the  conduct  of  the 
research;!  Messrs.  W.  S.  Dun  and  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  for  advice 
in  publication. 

*  ''  The  Atoll  of  Funafuti,"  Lond.  1904. 

+  Woolnough,  W.  G.,  "The  Continental  Origin  of  Fiji,"  Plate  xxii., 
fig.l. 

+  The  several  rock-analyses  undertaken  were  conducted  in  the  chemical 
laboratory  during  the  author's  term  of  Junior  Demonstratorship. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  477 

APPENDIX. 

List  of  fossil  forms  identified  at  the  Australian  Museum,  and 
occurring  in  the  New  Hebrides,  in  rocks  ranging  from  Pliocene 
to  Recent. 

Determinations  of  Mollusca. 
By  Mr.  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  Conchologist. 

"After  spending  considerable  time  on  Mr.  Mawson's  collec- 
tion, I  return  it  with  such  identifications  of  shells  as  I  was  able 
to  make.  It  contains  a  number  of  species  which  are  probably 
new  to  science,  but  the  task  of  elaborating  these  for  publication 
would  be  both  lengthy  and  laborious.  Viewed  as  recent  species, 
the  material  is  not  well  enough  preserved  for  description.  The 
collection  represents  material  from  a  deeper  zone  than  the  beach. 
As  no  dredging  has  been  done  in  this  archipelago,  nothing  is 
known  of  the  deep-water  fauna,  with  which  this  collection  ought 
to  be  compared.  The  lot  numbered  165  [Tasiriki  foundation- 
beds]  reminds  me  of  the  mollusca  I  dredged  in  15  fathoms  off 
the  Palm  Islands.  In  lot  242  [Foreland  fossiliferous  cinder-beds] 
the  appearance  of  Cucullcea,  Conus,  Pleurotoma,  and  Cardium 
suggests  a  like  origin." 

Brachiopoda- 
1.  Thecidia  maxilla  Hedley. 

Pelecypoda. 

1.  Area  sp.  12.  Dosinia  sp. 

2.  A.  antiquata  Linn.  13.  D.  sp. 

3.  A.  clathrata  Rv.  14.  Hippopus  hippopiis  Linn. 

4.  A.  lima  Rv.  15.  Leda  sp. 

5.  Amusium  sp.  16.  Lima,  sp.nov. 

6.  Cardium  sp.  17.  L.  sp.  (?  L.  alata  Hedley). 

7.  C.  bechei  Rv.  18.  Limopsis  sp. 

8.  Cardita  sp.  19.  Lithophaga  sp.  ("?  L.  levigata 

9.  Chlamys  sp.  Q.  &  G.) 

10.  Circe  gibha  Lam.  20.  Lucina  sp. 

11.  Cucullcea  earner ata  Brug.  21.  Peeten  sp. 


478 


THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 


22.  P.  pallinyyi  Linn. 

27.  Tellina  sp. 

23.  Pectiuiculus  sp. 

28.  TAeora  sp. 

24.  Pimctitrella  sp. 

29.  Thracia  sp. 

25.  Spondyhts  varians  Sowb. 

30.  Tridacna  yigas  Linn. 

26.  Tapes  sp. 

ScaphoDoda. 

1.  Cadulus  sp. 

3.  Z>.  quadricostatum  Brazier. 

2.  Denlalium  sp. 

Gastropoda. 

1.  ^c??iea  sp. 

23.  Olivella  sp. 

2.  ^c^fcoTi  sp. 

24.  Oliva  irisans  Lam. 

3.  Atlanta  sp. 

25.  Pleurotoma  sp. 

4.  Bittium  sp. 

26.  /*.  crispa  Lam. 

5.  Cassis  vibex  Linn. 

27.  Pyrgulina  sp. 

6.  Columhella. 

28.  i?e^wsa  sp. 

7.  Conus  sp. 

29.  i^.  pyriformis  A.  Ad. 

8.  (7.  guhernator  Hwass. 

30.  Ringicula  sp. 

9.  C  lividus  Hwass. 

31.  Seal  a  sp. 

10.  Cylichna  sp. 

32.  Seguenzia,  sp.no v. 

IL  Eidima  sp. 

33.  Solarium  sp. 

12.  Gyrineum  pusUlum  Bred. 

34.  Stromhus  urceus  Linn. 

13.  Liotia  sp. 

35.  *S'.  ustulatus  Schumacher. 

14.  Mitra  sp. 

36.  Syrnola  sp. 

15.  Jtf.  coronata  Lam. 

37.  Teinostoma  sp. 

16.  Mure.c  ternispina  Lam 

38.  Terehra  dimidiata  Linn. 

17.  Nassa  sp. 

39.  T.  subula  Linn. 

18.  Natica  sp. 

40.  TrijDhora  sp. 

19.  iV^.  areolata  Recluz. 

41.  Troclius  macidatus  Linn. 

20.  Nerita  maxima  Gmelin 

I. 

42,  Turhonilla  sp. 

21.  iV.  undulata  Linn. 

43.  Turritella  sp. 

22.  Odostomia  sp. 

Pteropoda. 

1.  Cavolinia  injlexa  Less. 

4.  C^io  pyraniidata  Linn. 

2.  C.  longirostris  Less. 

5.  C.  suhulata  Q.  &  G. 

3.  C.  sp. 

6.  Cuvierina  columnella  Rang. 

BY  D.  MAWSON. 


479 


Determinations  op  Alg^e,  &c. 
By  Mr.  T.  Whitelegge,  F.R.M.S.,  Zoologist. 
Algae. 
1.  Halimeda  opuntia  Ellis  &  Solander. 


1.  Retepora. 

1.  Distichopora  sp. 


Polyzoa. 

Hydrocorallinae. 

CorallinaB. 


1.  Astrcea  sp. 

2.  Coeloria. 

3.  Conocyathus  sp. 

4.  Cyphastrcea  sp. 

5.  Echinopora  reflexa  Dana. 

6.  Fungia. 

7.  Galaxea  sp. 

8.  Goniastrcea  sp. 

9.  6^.  sp. 
10.  Heliopora{1). 

Echinoidea. 

1.  Brissus  carinatus  Lam.  3.  Echiiiocyamus  sp. 

2.  Clypeaster  scutiformis  Gmel.     4.  Laganum, 


11.  Herpolitha  (I). 

12.  Leptastrcea. 

13.  Leptoria  sp. 

14.  Madrepora  sp. 

15.  Mussa  sp. 

16.  Orbicella  sp. 

17.  Pavonia  (?)  sp. 

18.  Porites  sp. 

19.  Stylophora palmata{'^)'B\3An\\ 


Lesson. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

A  summary  of  the  early  history  of  the  New  Hebrides  Group  will  be  found  in 
Commander  Markham's  papers  {infra),  or  in  the  same  author's  '  Cruise 
of  the  Eosario.' 

Atkin,  Rev.  J. — "  On  Volcanoes  in  the  New  Hebrides  and  Banks  Islands," 
Proc.  R.  Geog.  Soc.  Lond.  xxiv.  305,  1868. 

Beaune,  G. — La  Terre  Australe  inconnue.  Onze  croisieres  aux  Nouvelles- 
Hebrides."     Lyon,  1894. 

Beresford,  Lieut.  C.  W.  de  La  Poer,  R.N. — "  Note  on  the  Ascent  of 
Ambrym  Volcano  in  the  New  Hebrides."  Proc.  R.  Geog.  Soc.  n.s.  vi. 
129,  1884. 


480  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  IIKHKIDES, 

Bridge,  Capt.  C.  ,  R.N.—"  Cruises  in  Melanesia,  Micronesia,  and  Western 
Polynesia,  in  1882,  1883,  1884,  and  Visits  to  New  Guinea  and  the 
Louisades  in  1884  and  1885."     Proc.  R.  Geog.  Soe.  n.s.  viii.  545,  1886. 

Campbell,  F.  A. — "  A  Year  in  the  New  Hebrides."     Melbourne,  1874. 

Challenger  Expedition.  —  "Report  on  the  Scientific  Results  of  the  Exploring 

Voyage  of  H.M.  S.  'Challenger,'  "  1873-76.     See  Narrative  of  the  Cruise, 

i.  2,  514-519. 

Quoted  further  in  Moseley's  "  Notes  by  a  Naturalist  on  the  '  Challenger."' 
New  ed.     London,  1902. 
Chapman,  F.  —  "Notes  on  the  Older  Tertiary  Foraminiferal  Rocks  on  the 

West  Coast  of  Santo,  New  Hebrides."     Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales, 

XXX.  261,  1905. 
Cook,  Capt.  J. — "Voyage  towards  the  South  Pole  and  round  the  World 

performed  in  H.M.  Ships  'Resolution'  and  'Adventure,'  in  the  years 

1772-1775  (Second  Voyage)."     ii.  25-103.     London,  1777. 

Ekskine,  Admiral  J.  E.  — "  Islands  of  the  Western  Pacific."     London,  1853. 

Ella,  Rev.  S. — "  Some  Physical  Phenomena  of  the  South  Pacific  Islands." 
Rept.  Aust.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.  ii.  559,  1890. 

Findlay's  "  South  Pacific  Directory." 

Frederick,  Lieut.  G.  C. — "Geology  of  certain  Islands  of  the  New  Heb- 
rides," with  Appendices.  Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  Soc.  xlix.  227,  1893. 
Appendix  i. — '  Description  of  the  Volcanic  Rocks.'  By  J.  J.  H.  Teall, 
F.R.S.,  etc.  Appendix  ii. — 'Descriptions  of  the  Limestones.'  By  G.  J. 
Hinde,  M.D.,  etc. 

Garnier,  M. — "Essaisur  La  Geologic  et  Les  Ressources  Min^rales  de  la 
Nouvelle-Caledonie."     Paris,  1867. 

GooDENOUGH  (Mrs.  VICTORIA  H.).  — "  Joumal  of  Commodore  Goodenough, 
R.N.,  etc."     London,  1876. 

GouEY  DE  Saint  Seine,  Le  Compte  J. — "Les  Nouvelles-Hebrides,  aper9U 
historique  et  g^ographique."  A  travers  le  Monde,  Tour  du  Monde,  iii. 
401,  1897. 

Gray,  Rev.  W. — "  Some  Notes  on  the  Tannese."  Rept.  Aust.  Assoc.  Adv. 
Sci.  ii.  645,  1890. 

Greffrath,  von,  H. — A  short  Article  in  Deutsche  G.  Blatter,  xxi.  1 10,  1898. 

GuppY,  Dr.  H.  B. — "The  Solomon  Islands:  their  Geology,  etc."  London, 
1887. 

Levat,  M.  D. — "Note  sur  la  Geologic  des  Nouvelles-Hebrides."  Noumea 
"  Colon,"  12th  July,  1889.  This  extract  is  contained  in  "  Les  Nouvelles- 
Hebrides,"  par  E.  N.  Imhaus.     Paris,  1890. 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  481 

LiVERSiDGE,  Prof.  A.--"  On  the  Composition  of  some  Coral  Limestones,  etc., 

from  the  South  Sea  Islands."      Journ.  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales, 

xiv.  159,  1880. 
'*  On  the  Composition  of  some  Pumice  and  Lava  from 

the  Pacific."      Op.  cit.,  xx.  235,  1886.      Quoted  in  "Minerals  of  New 

South  Wales,  etc.,"  p.258.     A.  Liversidge,  M.A..,  F.R.S.    London,  1888. 

Analyses  of    Tanna  Lavas  again  quoted  in   "Chemical   Analyses    of 

Igneous  Rocks/'  p. 429,  by  H.    S.    Washington.      Professional  Paper 

No.  14,  U.S.  Geol.  Survey,  Washington,  1903. 
Markham,  Commander  A.  H.,  R.N.—"  The  New  Hebrides  and  Santa  Cruz 

Groups."     Proc.   R.  Geog.    Soc.   xvi.  388,  1872;  Journal  xlii.  213-243, 

1872. 

"  The  Cruise  of  the  Rosario."     London,  1873. 

Mawson,  D. — "  Preliminary  Note  on  the  Geology  of  the  New  Hebrides." 

Kept.  Aust.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.  x.  213,  1904. 
Morrison,   A. — An  Appendix  to   "  Erromanga,  the  Martyr  Isle."    By  H. 

A.  Robertson.     London,  1902. 
Pelatan,  L. — "Sulphur  Deposits  of   the  New  Hebrides."      Quoted  from 

"  Le  G^nie  Civil,"  Mineral  Industry,  p.517,  1894. 
PuREY-CusT,  Capt.  H.  E.,  R.N. — "Report  on  the  Eruption  of    Ambrym 

Island,   New   Hebrides,   South- West  Pacific,  October  and   November, 

1894."     (Map)  4to.,  Admiralty,  London,  1896. 

Geogr.  Journ.  viii.  585,  1896. 

Rendle.  J.  J.,  AND  Levat,  M.  D. — "  Report  on  the  Solfataras  and  Sulphur 

Deposits  of  Vanua  Lava."     Trans.  Geol.  Soc.  Aust.  Melb.,  6th  Sept., 

1889. 
"Geology  of  the  New  Hebrides  and  Banks 

Groups."     4  pages,  Paris,  ca.  1895. 
Reports  of  the  Seismological  Committee.      Aust.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.  Reports. 

Data  relating  to  the  New  Hebrides  reported  by  Rev.  W.  Gray  of  Weasisi, 

Tanna.    v.  208  &  217-225,  1893;  vi.  314,  1895;  vii.  70,  1898. 
Short  Notices  in  the  following  text-books  : — 

Dana,  J.  D. — "Corals  and  Coral  Islands,"  p.2l32,  London,  1875. 

Darwin,  C. — "Structure  and  Distribution  of  Coral  Islands,"  p.  110, 
Minerva  Lib.  Edn. 

"Encyclopedia  Britannica  "  (9th  edn.),  xvii.  395,  1884. 

SuEss,  Prof.  E.— "  La  Face  de  la  Terre,"  ii.  265  (foot-note),  Paris,  1900. 

"  Meyer's  Konversations-Lexikon,"  (5th  edn,),  xii.  866,  1897, 

31 


482  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  HEBRIDES, 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  XIV. -XXIX. 

Plate  xiv. 
View  of  the  hills  (highest  point,  Mt.  Macdonald,  2203  ft. )  to  the  south  of 
Undine  Bay,  Efate;  taken  from  near  the  north-west  corner  of  Pele. 
Note  the  various  raised  reefs  and  their  respective  dips.  The 
foundation-rock,  a  basic  agglomerate  traversed  by  numerous  dykes 
and  sills,  is  largely  exposed  at  the  higher  levels;  above,  forming  a 
capping,  distinctly  outlined  in  the  photograph,  is  a  further  raised 
reef-horizon. 

Plate  XV. 

View  of  the  volcanic  Island  of  Mau,  taken  from  the  north-east  coast  of  Pele. 
The  rock  in  the  foreground  is  a  recent  coral  limestone  very  much 
darkened,  owing  to  the  quantity  of  basic  lava  fragments  bound  up 
in  it.  Such  fragments  are  washed  or  rolled  down  from  the  steep 
cliffs  behind,  and  carried  out  into  the  growing  reef.  The  surf -line 
marks  the  edge  of  the  fringing  reef;  the  large  black  rocks  supported 
on  it  nearer  inshore  are  rolled  masses  of  basalt. 

Plate  xvi. 

Fig.  1. — Nguna  Island,  taken  from  Scott's  Plantation,  Efat6.  The  island  is 
here  seen  to  be  formed  of  a  line  of  craters,  three  of  which  are 
visible  in  the  photograph.  The  one  furthest  to  the  left  is  Tavanaki 
(2013  ft.),  from  the  top  of  which  several  photos  were  subsequently 
taken. 

Fig.  2.— View  of  the  islands  to  the  north,  taken  from  the  summit  of  Nguna 
(Tavanaki).  The  islands  in  view,  reading  from  the  left,  are  : — Mai, 
distant  25  miles;  Makura,  20  miles;  Matoso  (two  hills  joined  by  a 
low  spit),  12  miles;  Monument  Kock  ok  Wot  (an  isolated  rock 
standing  to  the  right  in  the  photograph),  12  miles.  The  three 
islands  in  the  back  row  are  : — Tangoa  (behind  the  eastern  extremity 
of  Matosa),  35  miles;  Buxinga  (next  in  order)  30  miles;  ToNGAraia 
(on  the  extreme  right  behind  Wot),  31  miles. 

Plate  xvii. 
The  west  coast  of  Santo  taken  from  Tasiriki,  looking  north.     To  the  right, 
the  recent  coral  formations  appear,  contrasting  strongly  with  the 
precipitous  blufi's  of  Miocene  rocks  at  Cape  Babana  in  the  distance. 

Plate  xviii. 
Taken  from  Tangoa,  looking  towards  Losubunu  (Santo  Peak,  5520  ft.), 
distant  IG  miles;  showing  the  disposition  of  the  Miocene  Kanges. 
A  horizontal  sky-line  in  the  vicinity  of  Losubunu,  terminating  to  the 
south  of  Talapone,  probably  indicates  a  former  sea-level  now 
elevated  over  4000  ft. 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  483 


Plate  xix. 


The  highly-tilted  Miocene  limestones  (dip  55°  S. ,  17°  W.)  of  the  Wai  Bubo, 
Santo. 

Plate  XX. 

Cape  Ukuani  from  the  south,  Santo.  The  rock  in  the  foreground  is  recent 
raised  coral  limestone.  Outcropping  at  the  base  of  the  headland, 
and  at  increasingly  higher  elevations  inland,  are  massive  agglomer- 
ates which  pass  upwards  into  well-bedded  soapstone-like  foundation- 
beds,  a  good  face  of  which  can  be  seen  on  the  photo  amongst  the 
trees;  a  coral  limestone  capping  is  developed  in  the  right  hand  top 
corner,  but  is  hidden  from  view  by  the  dense  foliage. 

Plate  xxi. 

The  hill  Tumebu  and  vicinity  as  seen  from  Tangoa,  South  Santo.  Tumebu, 
an  outlier,  so  to  speak,  of  the  terraces  behind,  is  a  typical  raised 
coral  hill. 

Plate  xxii. 

Fig.  1. — View  taken  from  M.  Chevillard's  plantation  overlooking  Vila 
Harbour  and  Meli  Bay,  and  showing  a  wonderful  raised  coral 
plateau  (almost  blending  with  the  sky)  in  the  distance  eight  miles 
away. 

Fig.2. — Hornblende  andesite  of  Wai  Malikoliko;  magnified  23  diams.;  for 
description,  see  p. 459. 

Fig.3. — A  crystal  of  uralite  still  retaining  a  kernel  of  the  original  pyroxene; 
magnified  30  diams.;  surrounding  the  lighter  pyroxene  is  fibrous 
smaragdite.  From  the  uralite  porphyry  of  Malekula;  for  descrip- 
tion, see  p. 468. 

Figi4. — Corroded  hornblende  crystal  out  of  basic  hornblende  pyroxene 
andesite  from  North  Malekula;  magnified  27  diams.;  for  descrip- 
tion, see  p.461. 

Fig. 5. — A  typical  felspar  crystal  in  the  felsophyric  hypersthene  andesite  of 
Havannah  Harbour;  magnified  24  diams.  Shows  glass  inclusions 
arranged  in  curtain-structure.  The  white  patches  in  the  ground- 
mass  are  cellular  cavities;  for  description,  see  p. 457. 

Plate  xxiii. 

Fig.l. — Pseudomorph  in  actinolite  (dark  lath-shaped  crystals)  and  felspar, 
etc.,  after  a  mineral  (species  uncertain)  in  the  uralite  porphyry 
from  Malekula;  magnified  47  diams,;  for  description,  see  p. 469. 


484  THE  GEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  nEHRIDES, 

Pig. 2. — Hornblende  crystal  paramorph  in  magnetite  dust  and  angite  micro- 
lites,  from  the  Wai  Bubo  andesite;  magnified  23  diams.  The  light 
central  area  is  part  of  the  original  amphibole;  for  description,  see 
p.  462. 

Fig.3.  — Uralite  porphyry  from  North  Malckula;  magnified  23  diams.  The 
large  crystals  arc  uralite  in  a  dense  groundraass.  To  the  left  of  the 
section  a  small  crystal  with  a  triangular  zone  of  magnetite  is  a 
diametral  section  through  an  aggregate  similar  to  that  shown  in 
Fig.l;  for  description,  see  p. 468. 

Fig,  4. — A  felspar  glomerule  in  the  Mau  basalt;  magnified  24  diams.  Note 
the  central  labradorite,  peripheral  zone  darkened  by  inclusions,  and 
marginal  andesine;  for  description,  see  p.463. 

Fig. 5, —The  same  aggregate  under  crossed  nicols  showing  the  multiple 
character;  magnified  24  diams. 

Plate  xxiv. 
Section  along  Steep  Cxully,  Havannah  Harbour;  showing  the  character  of 
the  terraced  limestone  veneer  and  of  the  andesite  foundation-tuffs. 

Plate  XXV. 
Sketch  section,  slightly  generalised,  from  Cape  Tsinone  to  Losubunu  (the 
highest  point  in  the  New  Hebrides),  South-west  Santo;  showing 
the  folded  Miocene  tuffaceous  limestones  intruded  by  andesite 
lavas.  At  the  north-east  end  of  the  Section,  the  site  of  an  old 
Miocene  volcano,  the  lava-series  appears  to  be  quite  5000  feet  thick. 
Toward  the  left  hand  side,  a  small  outcrop  of  the  Miocene  series, 
dipping  steeply  to  the  S.W.,  represents  the  overfolded  beds  exposed 
on  the  Wai  Bubo. 

Plate  xxvi. 

Generalised  Section  across  the  New  Hebrides  chain.  A  typical  section  of 
the  primary  Miocene  fold-chain  is  shown  in  Santo  on  the  left. 
Note  the  overfolding  of  the  Miocene  series,  and  extrusion  of 
andesite  lavas.  Ambrym,  one  of  the  islands  of  the  eastern  wing,  is 
a  great  recent  volcano,  situated  probably  along  an  inner  wing-fault 
which  has  let  down  the  sea-floor  considerably  between  the  New 
Hebrides  and  Fiji. 

Plate  xxvii. 

Map  of  New  Hebrides  Group  taken  from  Admiralty  charts.  Note  the  east 
and  west  wings  typified  by  basic  and  andesitic  lavas  respectively; 
at  Efatti  the  two  wings  junction,  and  both  series  of  lavas  are  found 
in  juxtaposition;  further  south,  after  crossing  the  western  land- 
ridge,  the  line  of  basic  cones  alone  remains  visible. 

[Printed  off  "December  18th,  1905.] 


P.L.S.N.S.W.    1906. 


CASUARINA    STRICTA,    AIT. 


I>.L.S.N.S.W.    1900. 


MAP 

shewirig  Ifie  loo  fctthoTW  Ujue^  oiv  coast  of 

SOUTH  -  EJIST     /lOSTRAUA 


,/WiU^ 


SO         'eo        ISO 


Co'ba.r 


NEWCASTLE 


NEW   SOUTH    WALES 


Ar£^P9^Toi 

</ 

SYDfir£y(yf 

OTFflpoJ  ^ 

/  ^ 

/     t 
1    « 

/    f 

I 

yj^ffvi 

vMr 

^ 

f  * 

1  1 

\  1 

\ 

/  # 

^ 

V  \CT  O  R  /A 


X 


vrtypnto  Bf\ 


^ 


JDvrtcbion^cf  Ocearu        ^ 
Qirrents  shju^rnythvs  ->    % 


Jftir  A  WHorvttt 

il»ry  pcirtirrxJ 


P.L.S.N.S.W.    1906. 


Fig.  1. 

THE    ISLAND    OF    NGUNA,    N.E.    COAST    OF    EFATE. 


THE    ISLANDS    TO    THE    NORTH,    AS    SEEN    FROM    THE   SUMMIT    OF    NGUNA. 


I 


1 


f 


P.L.S.N.S.W.  1905. 


Fig.  1. 


TAKEN    FROM    VILA   ;    SHOWING    RAISED    CORAL    PLATEAU    IN    THE    DISTANCE. 


P.L.S.N.S.W.    190B. 


Fig.  4. 


Fi?.  .^. 


^  r 


'.  I  -I   :|s  i 

1     al  ill   .^ 


i  \. 


X 

^ 

w 

1 

Q 

Ei^ 

Pi 
pa 

G 

-a 

w 

ifi 

ffi 

^ 

1 

w 

or 

•h 

^ 

1 

r^"  -ilvf 


1^  i.=' 


h  i  5^" 


L_fi 


i 


t  iL;;i;|a^'^ 


^..' 


it      H 


Nil 


li 


I^TVTTI   v„, 


L  S.N  S.W.  1905. 


SOUTH  WEST  SANTO 

Coast  Line  drawn  from  AdmiraJty  Chart, 
Features  eketched  m  tyDMawsonB.E.BSc 


Recan  t  A  Ituvtala 


lurT8WN-|    MaPtiy  Volcarajc  iYerajvcLi 

1      "^     I     aju:tGsdui(J3ba£odtu>a^glorn&x2/^ 


£L£bstMvocenje. 


itLE     ■  s  TR^^ 


BY  D.  MAWSON.  485 

Plate  xxviii. 
Map  of  Efat6  from  Admiralty  chart.  The  hatched  areas  are  only  approxi- 
mately accurate,  but  serve  to  illustrate  the  text.  The  details  of 
geological  features  are  not  in  any  way  complete;  indeed,  it  is  quite 
likely  that  outcrops  of  Miocene  rocks  may  occur  near  Mt.  Macdonald 
to  the  south. 

Plate  xxix. 

Sketch  Map  of  South-west  Santo;  outline  drawn  from  Admiralty  chart  and 
detail  filled  in  by  the  author  to  illustrate  the  text.  Hatched  areas 
are  only  roughly  approximate. 


CORRIGENDA. 

On  p.  422,  line  7— /or  plain  of  marine  erosion  read  plane  of  marine  erosion. 
On  p.442,  line  29— /or  Plate  xix.  fig.l  read  Plate  xxii.  fig.l. 
On  p. 459,  line  lO^^or  Plate  xix.  fig.2  read  Plate  xxii.  fig.2. 


32 


486 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Professor  David,  who  communicated  Mr,  Mawson's  paper  in  the 
author's  absence,  showed  a  number  of  lantern  slides  in  illustration 
thereof. 

Mr.  D.  G.  Stead  exhibited  (1)  a  particularly  fine  example  of  a 
curious  and  rarely  obtained  scorpjenoid  fish,  Glyptauchen  jpandu- 
ratus  Richardson,  measuring  155  mm.,  which  had  been  recently 
captured  by  means  of  a  trammel-net  on  South  Reef  at  the 
entrance  to  Port  Jackson.  (2)  A  specimen  of  the  curious  noto- 
thenioid,  Centropercis  nudivittis  Ogilby,  upon  which  the  follow- 
ing observations  were  offered  : — "  This  is  the  third  record  of  the 
occurrence  of  this  species,  which  was  described  by  Ogilby  in  these 
Proceedings  in  1895  (Second  Series,  x.  322)  from  a  single  speci- 
men measuring  78  mm.,  obtained  at  Maroubra  Bay  :  the  second 
known  specimen  was  obtained  during  the  trawling  operations  of 
the  "  Thetis "  in  1898,  8  miles  south  of  Maroubra;  and  this 
measured  103  mm.;  while  the  example  exhibited,  66  mm.  in 
length,  was  captured  in  a  hauling-net  during  1903  at  Terrigal, 
a  little  to  the  north  of  Broken  Bay."  And  (3)  a  number  of 
specimens  of  Amia  roseig aster  Ramsay  and  Ogilby,  respecting 
which  Mr.  Stead  stated  that,  while  examining  some  of  them  for 
the  purpose  of  specific  determination,  he  had  discovered  that  a 
large  percentage  had  their  mouths  packed  with  ova  and  "young 
fry  "  in  all  stages  of  development  (some  of  which  were  exhibited). 
This  pointed  to  the  interesting  fact  that  these  fishes  use  the 
mouth  as  an  incubating  chamber,  in  the  same  manner  as  do  the 
catfishes  of  the  genus  Galeichthys  and  some  others.  It  was  also 
pointed  out  that  Ogilby,  in  1888,  exhibited  before  the  Society  a 
specimen  of  the  allied  Ainia  guentheri  Castlenau,  "whose  mouth 
was  crammed  with  ova,"*  and  suggested  the  possibility  of  this 
species  having  contracted  the  habit  of  hatching  out  the  ova  in 
the  mouth. 

*  These  Proceedings,  (2)  iii.  1889,  p.  1559. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  487 

Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  specimens  of  wheat-stalks  damaged  by 
aphids,  taken  from  fields  at  Cumnock,  near  Molong,  before  the 
rain,  in  which  often  one-quarter  of  the  stalk  was  killed  back  : 
the  aphis  appeared  to  be  identical  with  the  European  wheat 
pest,  Siphonophora  granaria  Kirby.  *'  Frosted  "  wheat-stalks  for 
comparison  were  likewise  shown.  Also  specimens  of  a  fresh-water 
crustacean  {Lepidurus  sp.)  in  various  stages  of  development, 
collected  from  lagoons  bordering  the  Murrumbidgee  at  Hay, 
N.S.W.,  in  the  middle  of  August. 

Dr.  Hill  exhibited  specimens  of  a  land  nemertean  {Geonemertes 
sp.)  from  the  Barrington  River  scrubs. 

Mr.  Tillyard  exhibited  set  specimens  of  a  dragon-fly  (Lestes 
leda),  illustrating  the  mode  of  oviposition.  He  also  communicated 
statistical  data  bearing  upon  the  numerical  relations  of  the  sexes 
of  five  species  of  dragon-flies  based  upon  breeding  experiments 
during  September  and  October,  namely  : — 

^s.  $s.  Total. 

Lestes  leda 7  10  17 

Lestes  cingulata    2  2  4 

Ischnura  heterosticta 10  6  16 

Ischnura  delicata 3  2  5 

Pseudagrion  cyane .  8  10  18 

Total 30  30  60 

The  larvae  of  L.  cingulata  were  obtained  at  Woodford,  Blue  Mts., 
those  of  L.  leda  at  Belmore,  and  the  rest  at  Cook's  River,. 
Canterbury. 

Mr.  T.  G.  Taylor  showed  a  fossil  echinoderm  referable  to  the 
Blastoidea,  a  group  not  previously  recorded  from  New  South 
Wales;  from  the  Glenwilliam  Carboniferous  Beds,  Clarence 
Town,  N.S.W. 

Mr.  Steel  showed  a  very  instructive  stage  in  the  germinatioa 
of  a  seed  of  Loranthus. 


488  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Fletcher  communicated  the  subjoined  list  of  fifty-six 
species  of  host-plants  (38  indigenous,  18  exotic)  for  three  species 
of  Loranthus — L.  celastroides^  L.  longiflorus,  and  L.  miraculosus 
Miq.  (included  under  L.  pendulus  var.  parviflorus  in  the  *  Flora 
Australiensis  ").  These  had  been  noted  in  a  circumscribed  and 
limited  area  (comprising  the  neighbouring  portions  of  the  con- 
tiguous Boroughs  of  Lane  Cove,  Hunter's  Hill  and  Ryde),  while 
looking  for  examples  of  double  parasitism  of  the  kind  first 
recorded  by  the  late  Mr.  James  Backhouse  {antea,  p. 398). 
PiTTOSPOREiE  :  Bursaria  spinosa  (*b,  c) — Meliace^  :  "^Melia  com- 
posita  (b) — LEGUMiNOSiB  :  Acacia  stricta  (a,  b),  A.  falcata  (a,  b,  c), 
A.  longifolia  var.,  (a,  b),  A.  decurrens  (a,b,  c),  ^A.  Baileyana  (c) — 
MYRTACEiE  :  Leptospermum  Jlavescens  var.(b);  Kunzea  corifolia 
(a, b,c);  Callistemon  linearis  {&,  b);  Melaleuca  linarii/olia  {si,h,c\ 
M.  styphelioides  (a,  b,  c),  M.  nodosa  (b);  Angophora  cordifolia  (a,b), 
A.  intermedia  (a,  b,  c),  A.  lanceolata  (a,  b,  c);  Eucalyptus  capi- 
tellata  (a,  b),  E.  paniculata  (a,  b),  E.  jnperita  (b),  E.  pilularis  (a), 
E.  hcemastoma  (a),  E.  siderophloia  (a),  E.  punctata  (a,  b),  E. 
saligna  (a,  b),  E.  resinifera  (a,  b),  E.  corymhosa  (a,  b),  E.  eugeni- 
oides  (a);  Syncarpia  laurifolia  (b) — LoRANTHACEiE  :  Loranthus 
celastroides  (a,  b,  c) — MYRSiNACEiE  :  Myrsine  variabilis  (b) — Pro- 
TEACE.E:  %Grevillea  robusta{h);  Hakea  saligna{a,),  H.  acicularis{h), 
H.  dactyloides{a,,h);  Banksia  serrata  (a) — Casuarine^:  Casuarina 
suberosa  (a,  b,  c),  C.  torulosa  (b) — Santalace^e  :  Exocarpus  cup- 
ressiformis  (a,  b) — Exotics  :  Lisbon  Lemon  (b),  Pepper  Tree 
{Schinus  molle :  a),  Robinia  pseudacacia  (a,  c),  Almond  (c), 
Peach  (a),  Pear  (a,  b,  c),  Apple  (b),  Apricot  (a),  Quince  (a,  b), 
English  Hawthorn  (a,  c),  Chinese  Hawthorn  (Photinia  serrtdata : 
a,  c),  Eugenia  sp.  (b),  Oleander  (c),  Chinese  Elm  (Ulmus  chinen- 
sis :  b),  Oriental  Plane  (sp.'?),  British  Oak  (a),  Weeping  Willow 
(sp.?),  Pinus  insignis  (a). 


*  a=I/.  celastroides^  a=L.  celastroides,  short,  broad-leaved  form — h=L. 
longiflorus — c=L.  miraculosus  Miq.  (included  under  L.  pendulus  var.  par- 
vifiorus  in  the  *  Flora  Australiensis  '). 

§  Indigenous  but  cultivated. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  489 

In  addition  to  specimens  of  Loranths  in  situ  upon  portions  of 
the  stems  or  branches  of  some  of  the  more  uncommon  hosts 
in  the  above  list,  Mr.  Fletcher  exhibited  eleven  branches 
or  parts  of  stems — being  portions  of  eight  individual  plants 
of  Loranthus  celastroides,  parasitic  upon  four  Eucalypts,  two 
Angophoras,  a  Quince  tree,  and  a  Pinus  insignis.  These 
eight  Loranths  had  been  victimised  in  their  turn  by  seven- 
teen Loranths  (shown  in  situ  upon  the  host- Loranths)  refer- 
able to  three  species.  Attention  was  directed  to  the  marked 
absence  of  the  usual  signs  of  the  irritability  which  manifests 
itself  in  the  production  of  woody  excrescences  or  tumours  on 
the  host  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  its  junction  with  the 
parasite,  invariably  present  when  the  former  belongs  to  any 
other  Natural  Order  than  the  Lorantliacece  (illustrative  examples 
were  shown).  This  is  the  characteristic  difference;  for  several  of 
the  specimens  exhibited  showed  that  L.  celastroides  and  Z.  longi- 
florus  normally  develop  runners  or  creeping  stems  with  haustoria 
("roots"  of  Backhouse)  whether  the  host  be  a  Loranth  or  a 
member  of  some  other  natural  order  than  the  Loranthacece — con- 
trary to  the  supposition  of  Mr.  Backhouse."^  The  suggestion  was 
offered  that  the  exhibits  were  possibly  natural  grafts  comparable 
with  the  artificial  grafts  of  the  gardener — that  is  to  say,  cases  in 
which  there  was  cohesion  of  the  corresponding  constituents  of 
the  tissues  of  scion  and  stock  (cambium  with  cambium,  etc.); 
though  in  the  case  of  the  former  perhaps  the  radicle  may  even 
develop  rhizoids  in  the  initial  stages.  The  subject  was  an 
interesting  one,  worthy  of  detailed  investigation. 

Mr.  Musson  stated  that  he  had  investigated  the  Loranths  of 
the   Hawkesbury  Agricultural   College  farm  at   Richmond,  an 

*  Exceptionally  runners  or  creeping  stems  are  absent;  and  it  would  appear 
that  one  of  these  exceptional  specimens  presented  itself  to  Mr.  Backhouse. 
But  whether  in  such  cases  there  is  no  development  of  runners  at  any  stage; 
or  whether  the  apparent  absence  is  due  merely  to  failure  to  secure  satisfactory 
attachments,  followed  by  atrophy  and  disappearance — are  matters  that  need 
looking  into. 


490  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

area  of  3000  acres,  without  finding  representatives  of  more  than 
three  species,  and  that  these  for  the  most  part  occurred  sparingly 
and  upon  only  a  limited  number  of  species  of  host-plants,  namely 
— MYRTACEiE  :  Melaleuca  linariifolia  (f),  M.  genistifolia  (f); 
Angophora  suhvelutina  (a);  Eucalyptus  heiniphloia  (e),  E.  tereti- 
cornis  (a).  He  also  exhibited  fresh  specimens  from  the 
neighbourhood  of  Richmond,  illustrating  the  occurrence  of  three 
species  of  Loranths  (a,  b,  sp.?)  on  one  Kurrajong  tree  {Sterculia 
diversifolia).  Mr.  Musson  also  showed  herbarium  specimens 
from  Coolabah,  N.S.W.,  illustrating  the  occurrence  of  Loranthus 
exocarpi  upon  five  difi'erent  hosts,  namely — Wild  Orange 
{Capparis  Mitchelli),  Warrior-bush  (Apophyllum  anomalum), 
Wilga  (Geijera  parvijlora),  Myall  {Acacia  pendula),  and  Iron  wood 
{A.  excelsa);  one  example  of  L.  exocarpi  parasitic  upon  L. 
pendulus  upon  Box  (Euc.  populifolia);  and  L.  linearifolius  on 
Beef  wood  {Grevillea  striata). 

Mr.  Alex.  G.  Hamilton  reported  that  the  most  noteworthy 
examples  of  Loranths  and  their  hosts  which  had  come  under  his 
observation  at  Mt.  Kembla,  lUawarra,  included  the  following — 
MAGNOLiACEiE  I  Drimys  dipetala%  (d) — STERCULiACEiE  :  Commer- 
sonia  Fraseri{ab) — Meliace/E  :  Synoum  glandidosum  {c)  —  Celas- 
TRiNE^  :  Eloeodendron  australe  (a) — Saxifrages  :  Ceratopetalum 
apetalum  (d) — Myrtaces  :  Eucalyptus  longifolia  and  other  Euca- 
lypts  (a),  Backhousia  myrtifolia  (c) — RuBiACEiE  :  Psychotria 
loniceroides  (a) — MoNiMiACEiE  :  Doryphora  sassafras  (d)— Protea- 
CES:  Persoo7iia  salicina  (a) — Euphorbiaces:  Croton  Verreauxii 
(c) — Casuarines  :  Casuarina  stricta  (c).  Also  Loranthus  mira- 
culosus  upon  various  exotics  such  as  Peach,  Apple,  Pear,  Orange, 
Lemon,  Willow,  Elm  and  Oleander  :  Viscum  articulatum  on 
Peach  trees  and  on  Ceratopetalum  apetalum :  and  Notothixos 
incanus  on  Loranthus  celastroides. 


e--L.  pendulus — i  =  L.   penduhLi>  var.  parvijlorus  of  the   'Flora  Aust.' 
(  =  L.  MelaleiLca'hQh.ra..), 

%  d=L.  dictyophlebus. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  491 

Mr.  Hamilton  also  referred  to  the  Loranths  of  the  Mudgee 
district*;  and  he  exhibited  fresh  flowering  specimens  of  Loranthus 
longiflorus  growing  on  "  White  Cedar "  {Melia  composita)  and 
L.  miraculosus  on  Acacia  decurrens  from  Willoughby;  and 
herbarium  specimens  of  Nuytsia  .  fiorihunda  and  of  a  terete- 
leaved  Loranth  with  a  distinct  tomentum,  growing  on  Casuarina, 
collected  by  him  at  Perth,  W.A. 

Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  and  offered  some  observations  on  a 
series  of  specimens  illustrative  of  the  Loranths  of  the  County  of 
Cumberland.  He  pointed  out  that  the  host-plants  were  very 
numerous;  and  he  suggested  the  advisability  of  some  co-operative 
effort  on  the  part  of  observers  and  collectors  to  reduce  the  records 
to  order  and  tabulate  the  results. 

Mr.  Baker  showed  -  a  specimen  of  Loranthus  pendulus  on 
Eucalyptus  hemiphloia  growing  near  Prospect;  and  also  a  series 
of  photographs  furnished  by  Mr.  M.  A.  Sullivan,  of  Granville, 
illustrating  various  stages  in  the  unequal  contest  between  the 
parasites  and  their  hosts. 


See  these  Proceedings,  (2),  ii.  1887,  p.282. 


492 


FURTHER  NOTES  ON  HYBRIDISATION  IN  THE 
GENUS  EUCALYPTUS. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden,  Government  Botanist,  and  Director  of  the 
Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

Towards  the  end  of  1903  I  sent  a  paper*  to  the  Australian 
Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  which,  through 
unavoidable  causes  was  issued  only  in  June,  1905.  It  was 
intended  as  a  manifesto  formally  announcing  my  belief  in  hybri- 
disation in  the  genus.  Since  that  paper  was  written,  and  before 
it  was  published,  I  have  taken  various  opportunities!  of  drawing 
attention  to  the  subject,  and  the  object  of  the  present  paper  is  to 
bring  additional  evidence  before  this  Society. 

I  take  the  opportunity  of  emphasising  the  fact  (related  in 
detail  under  E.  Boormani,  infra)  that  the  original  discoverer  of 
hybridisation  in  the  genus  was  G,  Caley,  and  he  made  his 
observation  before  1810. 

I  also  take  the  opportunity  of  recording  that  Mr.  Walter  Gill, 
Conservator  of  Forests,  Adelaide,  has  informed  me  that  he  has 
held  the  opinion  for  over  twenty  years  that  Eucalypts  hybridise. 

How  is  a  natural  hybrid  to  be  determined  1  I  believe  the 
following  are  guides  : — 

1.  A  natural  hybrid  is  usually  found  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
its  reputed  parents,  and  is  always  sparsely  distributed. 

2.  In  many  cases  the  reputed  hybrid,  practically  identical  in 
character,  is  found  in  localities  widely  separated. 

*  "  On  Hybridisation  in  the  Genus  Eucalyptus,'^  Report  Vol.x.  (Dunedin 
Meeting,  January,  1904).  The  paper  contains  several  bibliographical 
references. 

i  E.g.,  'Critical  Revision  of  the  Genus  Eucalyptus,'  v.  140;  vi.  164: 
'  Forest  Flora  of  New  South  Wales ' :  papers  in  these  Proceedings.  See  also 
Victorian  Naturalist,  xxi.  114, 116. 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN.  493 

3.  The  reputed  parents  must,  of  course,  flower  at  the  same 
tnne,  and  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  there  is  considerable 
irregularity  in  the  flowering  periods  of  most  species. 

4.  A  hybrid  possesses  characters  intermediate  (not  always 
strictly  intermediate)  between  its  two  reputed  parents. 

5.  Where  species  are  closely  related  it  is  obviously  more 
difficult  to  detect  hybridism  than  where  the  parents  have 
characters  which  readily  contrast. 

E.  AMYGDALINA  X  CORIACEA. 

E.  vitellina  Naudin  (see  these  Proceedings,  1903,  p. 900)  and 
E.  vitrea  R.  T.  Baker,  are,  in  my  opinion,  closely  related  (perhaps 
identical)  hybrids  between  E.  amygdalina  and  E.  coriacea. 
Naudin  looked  upon  his  species  as  a  hybrid  (and  even  suggested 
the  above  two  parents).  I  have  dealt  with  this  form,  and  also 
the  evidence  for  looking  upon  E.  vitrea  as  a  hybrid  in  my 
'Critical  Revision  Genus  Eucalyptus'  (Part  vi.  pp.  164-1 66). 

E.  OBLiQUA  L'Herit.  var.  alpina  Maiden. 

(E.  delegaiensis  R.  T.  Baker);  E.ohliqua  x  coriacea  (?). 

It  is  possible  that  this  interesting  form  may  be  a  hybrid 
between  E.  ohliqua  and  E.  coriacea^  but  I  am  confronted  with 
the  difficulty  that  usually  this  form  is  not  met  with  at  so  low  an 
elevation  as  E.  obliqua,  as  it  appears  to  "  succeed  "  E.  ohliqua  in 
higher  elevations.  A  reply  to  this,  of  course,  would  be  that  the 
hybrid  once  established  it  could  have  gradually  become  accli- 
matised to  higher  elevations. 

E.  Baileyana  F.v.M. 

I  have  evidence  which  tends  to  show  that  this  species  is  pro- 
bably a  hybrid  between  E.  trachyphloia  F.v.M.  (or  E.  corymhosa 
Sm.)  and  E.  Planchoniana  F.v.M.  I  am  dealing  with  the  matter 
in  my  '  Critical  Revision,'  so  will  not  take  up  space  here.  The 
leaves  and  flowers  have  been  described  from  a  dififerent  tree  from 
that  carrying  the  characteristic  fruits. 


494        NOTES    ON    HYBRIDISATION    IN    THE    GENUS    EUCALYPTUS, 

E.  CoNSiDENEANA  Maiden. 

In  describing  this  form  (these  Proceedings,  1904,  p. 475)  I  have 
expressed  the  opinion  that  it  may  be  a  hybrid  between  E. 
piperita  and  E.  Siheriana.  In  expressing  this  opinion  I  desire 
to  make  a  note  inculcating  caution.  It  is  sometimes  difl5cult  to 
properly  assign  the  use  of  names,  for  the  fact  is  all  species  have 
probably  arrived  at  their  present  development  largely  by  means 
of  hybridism.     The  following  will  illustrate  what  I  mean. 

E.  Consldeneana  probably  has  E.  piperita  and  E.  Sieheriana 
blood  in  its  veins.  We  therefore  might  perhaps  explain  its 
position  by  saying  that  it  is  a  hybrid  between  these  two.  But 
if  E.  Consideneana  had  been  described  firsts  it  perhaps  would  not 
have  occurred  to  botanists  to  describe,  say,  E.  piperita  as  a 
hybrid  of  it. 

Mr.  Cambage  and  I  found  E.  Consideneana  in  full  bloom  (Nov. 
1904)  and  not  rare  near  the  40-mile  post  on  the  road  from  Sydney, 
4^  miles  east  of  Springwopd. 

The  Ironbark  Boxes. 

The  Ironbarks  and  the  Boxes  appear  to  hybridise  with  facility. 
Following  are  some  combinations  of  this  class  : — 

E.  BooRMANi  Deane  &  Maiden. 
{E.  siderophloia  x  hemiphloia). 

See  a  paper  (these  Proceedings,  xxv.  Ill,  1900)  'On  apparent 
hybridisation  between  E.  siderophloia  Benth,,  and  E.  hemiphloia 
F.V.M.'  I  desire  to  say  that  I  have  no  doubt  in  my  own  mind 
as  to  E.  Boormani  being  a  hybrid  between  the  species  named. 

Here  I  would  draw  attention  to  my  paper  '  George  Caley, 
Botanical  Collector  in  New  South  Wales,  1800-1810'  in  the 
Agric.  Gazette,  N.  S.  Wales  (Oct.  1903,  p. 990).  Caley  gave  the 
aboriginal  name  for  E.  hemiphloia  as  "Barilgora"  or  "Berigora," 
and  "  Derrobarry  "  and  also  "  Burryagro  '*  for  E.  siderophloia. 
Attached  to  a  specimen  of  E.  Boormani  Caley  makes  the  follow- 
ing statement — "  '  Burryagro.'  A  hybrid  between  '  Barilgora  ' 
and  '  Derrobarry  '  ! " 


BY    J.  H.    MAIDEN.  495 

I  made  the  following  comment: — "The  blacks  had  but  one 
name  for  this,  the  Ironbark  Box,  and  the  Ironbark  {aider ophloia), 
but  Caley  saw  that  they  were  different.  Caley's  surmise  at 
hybridisation  in  this  case  is  marvellously  shrewd."  (See  Proc. 
Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1901,  p.339). 

It  is  only  proper  to  emphasise  Caley's  discovery.  He  is 
undoubtedly  the  first  man  who  wrote  down  a  statement  that 
hybridisation  takes  place  in  Eucalypts,  which  discovery  is  there- 
fore a  century  old !  Little  is  known  in  regard  to  Caley's  scientific 
work,  as  he  published  little;  and  botanists  do  not  clearly  know 
what  became  of  most  of  his  specimens.  Careful  examination  of 
his  labels  might  show  other  important  observations.  At  present 
I  would  submit  that  the  discovery  to  which  I  have  already 
alluded  is  a  very  valuable  one,  and  he  should  be  credited  with  it. 

E.  SIDEROXYLON  X  MELLIODORA. 

I  do  not  propose  to  give  a  hybrid  a  species-name  if  I  am 
satisfied,  as  in  the  present  case,  it  is  a  h)^brid  before  I  describe 
it.  This  particular  hybrid  was  collected  by  myself  and  Mr.  J.  L. 
Boorman  in  May,  1902,  near  Murrurundi,  N.S.W.  Following  is 
a  copy  of  my  notes  made  on  the  spot  at  the  time — "  Yellow  cast 
of  bark.  A  yellow  box,  though  with  some  harder,  more  rugged 
bark  at  the  butt  (though  little  more  so  than  the  melliodora  near), 
yet  undoubtedly  more  a  Yellow  Box  than  an  Ironbark.  A  very 
hard  tough  interlocked  timber  of  a  Box  character,  of  a  brown 
colour,  not  so  yellow  as  typical  E.  melliodora  sapwood  usually  is. 
Not  a  red  timber  like  sideroxylon  is.  The  wood  is  more  like 
hemiphloia.  At  the  same  time  the  fruits,  etc.,  are  those  of  E. 
sideroxylon.  The  E.  sideroxylon  around  is  typical.  Kino  dots 
in  bark  as  usual.  Thin  inner  layer  of  bark  as  yellow  as  the  pro- 
verbial guinea  and  like  that  of  melliodora.  Timber  red  and 
chippy,  not  interlocked.  E.  melliodora  abundant  in  the 
vicinity." 

As  whether  a  tree  is  considered  to  be  a  hybrid  or  not  must 
depend  on  the  character  of  the  neighbouring  species,  it  is 
desirable,  in  collecting  any  unfamiliar  forms,  to  take  special  note 


496  NOTES  ON  HYBRIDISATION  IN  THE  GENUS  EUCALYPTUS, 

of  the  species  in  the  neighbourhood.  For  example,  it  is  some- 
times difficult  to  say  whether  a  certain  tree  is  E.  affinis  {sider- 
oxylon  X  hemiphloia  var.  albens),  or  E.  sideroxylon  x  melliodora, 
but  the  matter  might  be  settled  effectively  if  the  surrounding 
Box  were  noted  to  be  E.  hemiphloia  var.  albens  or  E.  melliodora. 

E.  sideroxylon  is  a  species  which  readily  hybridises,  with  the 
Boxes,  at  any  rate.  Some  of  the  hybrids  are  so  like  E.  sider- 
oxylon that  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  them  unless  the  trees  be 
seen,  or  a  complete  suite  of  specimens,  including  juvenile  foliage, 
be  available.  E.  sideroxylon  has  narrow  juvenile  foliage,  and 
hence  is  readily  seen  to  be  different  from  a  number  of  broad- 
foliaged  trees  more  or  less  related  to  it. 

E.  SIDEROXYLON  A.  Cunn  ,  and  E.  leucoxylon  F.v.M. 

As  I  had  seen  specimens  which,  in  my  view,  showed 
hybridism  between  E .  sideroxylon  A.  Cunn.,  and  E.  leucoxylon 
F.V.M.,  I  wrote  to  Mr.  J.  Blackburne,  then  Secretary  of  the 
National  Forest  League  of  Maryborough,  Victoria,  drawing  his 
attention  to  the  subject.  In  a  few  weeks  he  sent  me  four  speci- 
mens from  the  Maryborough  district. 

No.  1  is  typical  E.  sideroxylon  A.  Cunn.,  "  Red  Ironbark." 
Timber  red,  bark  furrowed. 

No.  4  is  typical  E.  leucoxylon  F.v.M.,  called  by  Mr.  Blackburne 
"  Smooth-barked  Ironbark."  Timber  pale,  bark  smooth.  I 
wrote  to  Mr.  Blackburne  in  regard  to  his  use  of  the  term  "  Iron- 
bark  "  for  this  species,  it  being  often  termed  "  White  Ironbark  " 
in  Victoria,  although  there  is  often  little  or  no  "iron"  bark.  To 
this  he  replied,  "  I  think  Victorian  writers  in  speaking  of  ^^  White 
Ironbark  "  undoubtedly  referred  to  E.  leiicoxylon.  I  know  that 
Howitt  did  so.  Another  tree,  E.  Sieberiana,  is  sometimes 
alluded  to  as  White  or  White-topped  Ironbark,  but  I  think  you 
can  rest  assured  that  E.  leucoxylon  is  the  tree  generally  meant. 
E.  leucoxylon  is  not  altogether  a  white  wood,  although  the  heart 
wood  is  much  paler  in  colour  than  sideroxylon." 

His  Nos.  2  and  3  he  described  in  the  following  words  : — 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN.  497 

"No.  2  has  a  thin,  brown  bark,  lighter  in  colour  than  No.  1, 
and  not  so  deeply  furrowed;  the  upper  portion  of  the  trunk  and 
branches  are  smooth  like  No.  4." 

"  No.  3  has  at  the  lower  part  of  the  stem  or  trunk  the  deeply 
furrowed,  dark-coloured  bark  of  No.  1,  changing  then  for  some 
feet  into  the  type  of  No.  2  (thin  and  brown).  Higher  up  it 
becomes  thinner  and  flaky  in  texture.  Upper  portion  of  stem 
and  branches  like  No.  4  (Gum  top)." 

He  then  adds  :  —  "  You  will  of  course  understand  that  Iron- 
bark  trees  showing  hybrid  forms  are  not  common  in  our  young 
forest,  being  only  occasionally  met  with." 

I  have  received  from  Mr.  Blackburne  a  complete  suite  of 
herbarium  specimens,  bark  and  timbers  of  these  trees.  They 
bear  out  his  descriptions.  Nos.  2  and  3  are  intermediate 
between  Nos.  1  and  4,  and  on  these  specimens  alone  I  fail  to 
see  how  the  fact  that  E,  sideroxylon  and  E.  leucoxylon  hybridise 
can  be  resisted. 

E.  LEUCOXYLON  F.V.M.,  and  (?)  E.  fasciculosa  F.v.M. 

Mr.  Walter  Gill,  Conservator  of  Forests,  Adelaide,  sent  me 
herbarium  specimens,  timber  and  bark  of  an  aberrant  tree  from 
Kuitpo,  S.A.,  with  the  following  note — "  I  send  you  specimen  of 
E.  leucoxylon  timber  showing  a  very  red  heartwood  which  I  have 
only  seen  in  this  district,  the  northern  Blue  Gum  {E.  leucoxylon) 
being  all  one  colour." 

The  herbarium  specimens  are  obviously  strongly  akin  to  those 
of  E.  leucoxylon  F.v.M.  (They  also  resemble  those  of  E.  sider- 
oxylon A.  Cunn.,  but  I  do  not  know  an  individual  of  that  species 
nearer  than  some  hundreds  of  miles).  The  timber  is  deep  red 
and  the  bark  is  somewhat  fibrous  (Box-like),  characters  rarely 
present  in  E.  leucoxylon.  It  seems  reasonable  to  look  upon  this 
rare  plant  as  a  hybrid;  and  as  to  the  other  parent,  Mr.  Gill 
suggests  E.  fasciculosa  as  likely.  The  points  in  which  these 
specimens  dififer  from  E.  leucoxylon  could  be  supplied  by  E. 
fasciculosa,  a  red-timbered  species  abundant  locally. 


498  NOTES  ON  HYBRIDISATION  IN  THE  GENUS  EUCALYPTUS, 

E.  AFFiNis  Deane  &  Maiden,  these  Proceedings,  1900,  p. 104, 
with  a  plate. 

In  that  paper  some  doubt  was  expressed  as  to  the  hybrid 
origin  of  E.  affinis.  I  desire  to  say  that  I  have  now  no  doubt 
as  to  its  hybrid  origin.  Others  and  myself  have  found  it  grow- 
ing over  large  areas  of  country  with  E.  sideroxylon  and  E.  hemi- 
phloia  var.  alhens.  The  tree  certainly  is  an  intermediate  between 
this  species  and  variety,  and  I  look  upon  these  trees  as  its 
parents. 

E.  SIDEROXYLON  A.  Cunn.  X  WooLLSiANA  R,  T.  Baker,  '*  Mallee 

Box." 
I  have  evidence  that  these  two  species  frequently  hybridise. 
Mr.  R.  H.  Cambage  has  drawn  attention  to  these  hybrids."*^     I 
have  emphasised  the  matter,!  adding  the  Cooburn  or  Black  Box 
of  the  Narrabri  district. 

E.  SIDEROXYLON  A.  Cunn.  X  FASCicuLOSA  F.v.M.,  "  Mallee  Box." 
I  believe  these  two  species  hybridise. 

E.    PANICULATA  Sm.  X  HEMIPHLOIA  F.V.M. 

In  these  Proceedings  (1901,  p. 340)  Mr.  Deane  and  I  referred, 
though  with  some  doubt,  to  a  "  Black  Box  "  or  "  Ironbark  Box  " 
from  Concord  near  Sydney.  I  desire  to  say  that,  having  kept 
these  trees  under  observation,  I  have  no  doubt  as  to  their  being 
hybrids  of  the  species  named. 

E.   POPULIFOLIA  Hook.  X  FASCICULOSA  F.V.M. 

I  believe  these  two  species  hybridise. 

E.  SALIGNA  Sm.  X  ACAciiEFORMis  Deane  &  Maiden  (?). 

Mr.  A.  R.  Crawford,  Moona  Plains,  Walcha,  sends  me  speci- 
mens with  the  following  note — "  No.  5.  Supposed  hybrid 
between    E.   maligna  and   E.  acacice/ormis  (Black   Peppermint). 

*  These  Proceedings,  1900,  p.  716. 
+  These  Proceedings,  1904,  p.  763. 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN.  499 

The  tree  is  from  60-70  feet  in  height,  rough-barked  from  the 
ground  to  within  5  or  6  feet  or  less  of  the  smallest  twig ;  in 
appearance  the  tree  reminds  me  of  the  true  saligna,  although  the 
bark  resembles  that  of  the  '  Black  Peppermint.'" 

The  fruits  of  this  tree  are  intermediate  in  size  and  shape,  and 
the  buds  intermediate  in  size  and  shape  between  those  of  U, 
saligna  and  E.  dcaciceformis.  The  suggestion  as  to  the  hybrid 
origin  appears  reasonable  enough. 

E.  Stuartiana  F.v.M.  x  nova-anglica  Deane  &  Maiden  (?). 

Seven  miles  east  of  Walcha  (J.H.M.)  we  have  a  tree  with 
Peppermint  bark  all  up  the  trunk  (bark  of  E.  nova-anglica). 
Suckers  narrower  than  those  of  E.  Stuartiana.  Fruits  smaller 
than,  but  near  those  of,  E.  Stuartiana.  Foliage  intermediate 
in  character  between  that  of  Stuartiana  and  nova-anglica.  I  am 
inclined  to  think  this  is  a  case  of  hybridism. 

E.  PSEUDO-GLOBULUS  (?)  Naudin  (or  Trabut),  see  these  Proceed- 
ings, 1903,  p.899. 

I  have  received  specimens  of  this  form  from  Dr.  Trabut,  with 
the  note  "feuilles  tr^s  longues,  fruits  petits.  Ne  reproduit  des 
graines."  It  seems  to  me  a  small-fruited  form  of  E.  globulus, 
more  pedicellate  than  usual.  It  may  be  a  hybrid,  but  I  am  not 
satisfied  of  this. 

E.  viMiNALis  Labill.  var.  macrocarpa  Rodway. 

{E.  globulus  Labill.  x  viminalis  Labill.). 

Some  time  ago  I  expressed  the  opinion  that  the  above  form  is 
identical  with  E.  Maideni  F.v.M. "^^  Having  received  better 
seedlings  from  Mr.  Rodway  than  I  originally  possessed,  I  incline 
to  Mr.  Rodway's  view  that  it  is  nearer  viminalis,  and  I  also 
accept  the  view,  which  I  resisted  at  the  time,  that  it  is  a  hybrid. 
Some  of  the  juvenile  foliage  in  my  possession  is  coarser  than  any 
I  have  seen  in  E.  viminalis,  and  I   think  that   Mr.  Rodway's 

*  Kept.  Aust.  Ass.  Adv.  Science  (Hobart),  ix.  p.374  (1902). 


500  NOTES  ON  HYBRIDISATION  IN  THE  GENUS  'EUCALYPTUS, 

statement  that  this  form  only  occurs  in  plantations  "of  E. 
viminalis  growing  with  E.  globulus  "  is  a  sufficient  explanation. 

The  seedlings  of  E.  Bduerleni  F.v.M.  {E.  viminalis  Labill.  var. 
Bduerleni  Deane  &  Maiden)  are  identical  with  those  of  Mr. 
Rodway's  variety.  The  fruits  also  have  much  in  common,  but 
those  of  Mr.  Rodway  are  usually  more  domed.  The  rim  of  the 
junction  of  the  calyx  and  operculum  is  very  prominent  in  var. 
Bduerleni;  I  have  not  ripe  buds.  The  ripe  buds  of  var.  macro- 
carpa  are  rounded  and  glaucous. 

The  two  forms  (so  called)  of  E.  vijiiinalis,  viz.,  var.  macrocarpa 
and  var.  Bduerleni,  are  undoubtedly  closely  related.  I  think 
var.  macrocarpa  is  a  hybrid  of  E.  viminalis  x  globulus.  Whether 
var.  Bduerleni  is  also  a  hybrid  I  cannot  say,  but  I  incline  to 
think  it  is,  the  parents  being  possibly  E.  viminalis  and  E. 
Maideni  F.v.M. 

E.  KiTSONi  Luehmann,  and  E.  neglecta  Maiden. 

In  describing*  these  two  species,  I  have  expressed  the  opinion 
that  they  are  both  hybrids  of  E.  Gunnii  Hook.  f. 

E.  gomphocornuta  Trabut. 

See  my  remarks  in  these  Proceedings  (1903,  p.900).  I  have 
since  received  excellent  specimens  from  Dr.  Trabut.  This  plant  is 
an  interesting  hybrid,  of  which  E.  gomphocephala  is  undoubtedly 
a  parent.  As  to  the  other  parent,  I  think  it  is  less  likely  to  be 
E.  cornuta  Labill.,  than  E.  occidentalis  Endl.  The  characteristic 
bell-shape  of  the  fruit  of  the  latter  species  is  well  brought  out  in 
the  specimens  before  me.  Dr.  Trabut's  illustration  (in  Rev. 
Hort.)  was  made  from  fresh  specimens;  dried  specimens  show 
construction  which  accentuates  the  bell-shape. 

E.  ALGERiKNSis  Trabut,  Rev.  Hort.  de  I'Algerie,  Juin,  1904,p.l46. 

This  is  a  species  that  Dr.  Trabut  looks  upon  as  E.  rostrata 
Schlecht.  X  rudis   Endl.,  but  he  does  not   formally  describe    it. 

*  '  Descriptions  of  two  Victorian  Eucalypts.'     Vict.  Nat.  xxi.  112(1904) 


BY    J.    H.    MAIDEN.  501 

He    states    that   it   flowers   abundantly  in  the  spring,   and    its 
flowers  have  not  the  disagreeable  odour  of  those  of  E.  rostrata. 

M.  Trabut  has  been  kind  enough  to  send  me  twigs  in  bud,  flower 
and  early  fruit  of  his  species.  I  do  not  consider  it  sufficiently 
removed  from  the  very  variable  E.  rudis  to  warrant  its  being 
designated  a  new  species.  It  is  a  broad-leaved  form,  but  I  have 
seen  naturally  grown  E.  rudis  with  leaves  as  broad.  I  do  not 
see  any  evidence  of  admixture  of  E.  rostrata  in  my  specimens. 
As  regards  the  leaves,  an  admixture  of  E.  rostrata  would  tend  to 
narrow  them. 

E.  KiRTONiANA  F.v.M.  {E.  pateyitinervis  R.  T.  Baker). 

In  my  paper  on  hybridisation  in  this  genus,*  through  an 
annoying  misprint,  the  word  ''^rostrata"  has  been  substituted  for 
"  robusta."     I  look  upon  this  form  as  E.  robusta  x  resini/era.    ^^ 


*  Rept.  Aust.  Ass.  Adv.  Science,  1904,  p.?02. 


502 


MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  (CHIEFLY  TAXONOMIC)  ON 
EUCALYPTUS,   ii. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden,  Government  Botanist  and  Director  of  the 
Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

1.  E.  saligna  Sm.,  and  E.  botryoides  Sm.  {E.  botryoides  Sm. 
=  E.  saligna  Sm.  var.  botryoides,  var.nov.). 

I  propose  to  show  that  the  above  two  species  are  conspecific. 
Their  affinity  long  ago  impressed  me.  In  1889*  I  wrote,  "In 
external  appearance  and  timber  it  {E.  botryoides)  seems  to  merge 
into  E.  saligna."  I  have  examined  the  trees  for  many  years, 
latterly  with  Mr.  R.  H.  Cambage,  to  settle  this  one  point,  i.e.,  is 
there  any  character  to  separate  the  species'?  To  carry  out  this 
work  we  chose  (amongst  other  localities)  the  Brisbane  Water 
(N.S.W.)  district,  which  is  the  home  of  typical  "  Blue  Gum  " 
{^E.  saligna);  and  the  Otford,  Stanwell  Park,  district,  in  which 
typical  E.  botryoides  is  abundant. 

We  found  E.  saligna  with  rough  bark  up  to  the  first  fork  and 
even  higher  up  in  shallow  valleys  facing  the  sea,  e.g.,  at  Kincum- 
ber,  Brisbane  Water.  From  the  Blue  Gum  flats  (with  good 
soil)  in  the  neighbourhood,  with  their  typical  examples  of  the 
species,  as  we  approach  the  sea  and  the  innutritious  sandy  soil 
and  strong  sea  breezes,  we  find  that  the  rough  bark  gradually 
creeps  up  the  butt,  and  the  trees  themselves  become  more 
crooked  and  even  gnarled,  finally  merging  into  E.  botryoides. 
The  same  thing  was  noticed  in  southern  localities. 

The  following  states  the  case  in  regard  to  typical  specimens: — 
"  The  differences  between  E.  saligna  and  E.  botryoides  are 
habitually  very  great  on  account  of  their  respective  bark,  thin, 
smooth  and  pale  in  the  one;  thick,  rough  and  dark  in  the  other; 

*  Useful  Native  Plants  of  Australia,  p.  435. 


BY  J.    H.   MAIDEN.  503 

but  the  characteristics  of  the  iiowers  and  fruits  are  far  less 
marked,  being  ahnost  reduced  in  E.  botryoides  to  a  shorter  and 
blunter  lid,  an  usually  more  angular  tube  of  the  calyx  and 
retracted,  totally  enclosed  valves  of  the  fruit "  (Eucalyptographia, 
Mueller,  under  E.  saligna). 

In  the  same  work,  under  E.  botryoides^  he  says  : — "  When  the 
tree  has  arisen  on  rich  soil  along  running  streams,  its  wood  is 
regarded  as  one  of  the  best  among  those  of  Eucalypts  .  .  . 
[this  is  E.  saligna,  J.H.M.]-  when  the  tree  grows  on  the  coast- 
sands,  its  wood  is  still  useful  for  sawing  and  fencing,  though  the 
stems  occur  there  often  gnarled  .  .  .  [this  is  E.  botryoides, 
J.H.M.].  E.  saligna  is  in  nature  easily  enough  distinguished 
by  the  smoothness  of  its  bark,  which  secedes  in  its  outer  layers 
successively;  otherwise  the  differences  are  slight,  consisting  in 
the  often  somewhat  longer  lid  and  in  fruits  with  half  exserted 
valves.'' 

E.  saligna  is  the  stately  "  Blue  Gum  "  of  rich  soil  flats,  which 
yields  the  timber  so  well  and  so  favourably  known  in  New 
South  Wales.  Bark  smooth,  and  with  a  little  rough  bark  at  the 
butt.  E.  botryoides  is  known  as  "  Bangalay "  or  "  Bastard 
Mahogany,"  and  is  a  rough-barked  (corky  scaly)  gnarled  tree 
found  in  low-lying  situations  near  the  sea.  E.  botryoides  has 
coarser  fruits,  with  the  valves  not  exserted;  buds  coarser,  more 
squat;  opercula  more  blunt.  I  see  no  difference  in  the  seedling 
leaves  or  in  the  timber.  Between  the  two  types,  as  already 
defined,  I  find  perfect  connecting  links;  and  the  differences  are, 
I  am  satisfied,  entirely  owing  to  soil  and  aspect. 

Messrs.  Baker  and  Smith  distilled  leaves  of  E.  saligria  from 
Lismore,  N.S.W.,  and  of  E.  botryoides  from  Milton,  N.S.W.,  and 
found  differences  in  the  composition  of  the  particular  distillates 
obtained  by  them."^'  I  would  suggest  that  here  we  have  an 
excellent  opportunity,  by  making  a  series  of  distillations  of  leaves 
of  E.  saligna  and  E.  botryoides  to  see  whether  any  real  difference 
between  the  trees  can  be  ascertained  that  morphology  fails  to 

*  '  Research  on  the  Eucalypts. ' 


504  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  ON  EUCALYPTUS,  II., 

show.  I  believe  that,  by  testing,  at  the  same  season,  the  trees 
wl)ich  morphologically  show  a  complete  transition  between  the 
two  species,  the  oils  would  show  a  transition  equally  complete. 

Holding  the  views  that  I  do  as  to  the  identity  of  E.  saligna 
and  E.  boiryoides,  I  am  obliged  to  combine  them.  I  therefore 
propose  to  reduce  E.  hotryoides  to  a  variety  of  E.  saligna.  Both 
species  were  described  by  Smith  in  the  same  paper*,  but,  follow- 
ing the  precedent  that  has  been  adopted  by  a  number  of  botanists, 

E.  saligna  (p. 285;  E.  hotryoides  is  p.  286)  is  the  earlier  name 
because  it  was  described  earlier  in  the  paper. 

New  South  Wales  is  the  home  of  the  types,  both  of  E.  saligna 
and  E.  hotryoides.  It  will  be  convenient,  as  will  be  seen  presently, 
to  deal  with  E.  saligna-hotryoides  in  this  order:  —  Queensland, 
New  South  Wales,  Victoria. 

dueensland.— Following  are  notes  showing  the  additions  Mr. 

F.  M.  Bailey  has  made  in  his  '  Queensland  Flora '  to  Bentham's 
*  Flora  Australiensis.' 

E.  hotryoides  Sm.  "A  tall,  handsome  tree,  with  a  rough,  furrowed 
persistent  bark  towards  the  base,  white  and  smooth  on  the  U2?per 
jDart  of  trunk  and  branches."  Mr.  Bailey  only  adds  the  words 
in  my  italics,  which  are  a  description  of  the  bark  of  typical 
saligna. 

He  adds:  "  Brisbane;  various  southern  localities,  in  mountain 
gullies  and  river  flats  (probably  the  largest  tree  of  the  Queens- 
land species).  Wood  of  a  red  colour,  close  in  grain,  hard,  tough 
and  durable;  useful  in  large  buildings,  wheelwrights'  work,  and 
in  all  work  where  large  beams  of  hardwood  are  required."  This 
is  an  accurate  description  of  E.  saligna. 

The  only  alleged  Queensland  locality  given  in  the  '  Flora 
Australiensis'  ("Brisbane,  Blue  Gum,  McArthur,  No.  91,  of 
Paris  Exhibition  Woods  ")  is  founded  on  an  error,  as  will  be 
explained  later. 

Coming  to  E.  saligna  Sm.,  Bentham  in  the  'Flora  Austra 
liensis^  omits  Queensland,  but  Bailey  adds,  "Forests  in  southern 

*  Trans.  Linn.  Soc.  iii.,  1797. 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN.  505 

parts,"  and  describes  the  timber:  "  Wood  very  tough  and  close- 
grained;  very  hard;  of  a  grey  colour,"  which  is  not  a  description 
of  saligna  timber. 

In  the  '  Catal.  of  the  Queensland  Forestry  Museum  '  (Forest 
Branch,  Lands  Department,  1904),  we  have  : — 

(«)  "No. 241.  Grey  Gum  {^Eucalyptus  saligna):  Plentiful; 
generally  found  on  mountain  slopes  or  in  deep  gullies  on  and  near 
the  coast  of  southern  Queensland.  Usually  a  very  tall  tree,  with 
thick  grey  bark,  and  having  longitudinal  patches  of  a  brownish 
colour.  Wood  red  colour,  close-grained,  hard,  and  durable. 
Logs  split  rather  freely  at  the  ends  on  quarter.  Used  for  general 
building  purposes."     This  is  undoubtedly  E.  saligna. 

(b)  "iS'o.260.  Ylooded  Gnm  (Eucalyptus  hotryoides)  \  Plenti- 
ful in  moist  situations,  on  the  borders  of  scrubs  and  mount- 
ain gullies  along  the  coast  of  Southern  Queensland.  A 
very  large  tree,  with  a  long  smooth  trunk  of  almost  perfect 
cylindrical  form,  extending  often  50  or  60  feet  without  a  branch; 
bark  deciduous,  falling  off  in  long  narrow  strips,  often  very 
white,  and  sometimes  of  a  pale-green  colour.  Wood  pink-brown; 
not  so  hard  or  heavy  as  many  other  Eucalypts.  Splits  on  the 
quarter  rather  freely.  Logs  when  cut  about  six  months  will 
almost  float  in  sea  water.  Used  for  general  building  purposes, 
but  will  not  last  in  the  ground.  Makes  good  flooring  and 
weather-boards,  joists  and  studs.  Being  comparatively  light,  it 
is  suitable  for  punt-building."  This  is,  doubtless,  that  form  of 
E.  saligna  known  in  New  South  Wales  as  "  Flooded  Gum,"  and 
•discussed  by  me  at  length  in  Agric.  Gazette,  N.  S.  Wales,  and 
in  the  '  Forest  Flora  '  of  N.  S.  Wales  (Partiv.  p. 75). 

In  the  Report  of  Tests  on  "  Blue  Gum "  from  Queensland, 
experimented  upon  by  the  Victorian  Timber  Board,  1884,  this 
timber  is  called  E.  botryoides — additional  evidence  of  the  confusion 
of  nomenclature. 

I  have  indubitable  specimens  of  E.  saligna  from  the  following 
Queensland  localities  : — "  3-mile  Brush,  Moreton  Bay,"  and  other 
•Queensland  localities  (Leichhardt;.  Maroochie;  Eumundi  (F. 
M.  Bailey).     Brisbane  (J.  L.  Boorman;  J.H.M.;. 


506  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  ON  EUCALYPTUS,  II., 

Speaking  of  E.  hotryoides,  Mueller  ("Eucalyptographia")  says: 
** Probably  it  does  not  extend  into  Queensland,  as  the  Blue  Gum- 
tree  mentioned  from  thence  is  referable  to  a  species  of  the  series 
of  Leiophloiae,  probably  E.  saligna."  I  have  not  seen  E.  hotryoides 
from  Queensland,  but  am  far  from  saying  that  it  will  not  be 
found  in  exposed  south  coast  localities. 

Following  is  the  history  of  the  Brisbane  Water,  N.S.W., 
specimens  which  have  caused  such  confusion  through  the  locality 
being  mistaken  for  Brisbane,  Queensland. 

The  following  specimens  are  in  Herb.  Kew,  where  I  examined 
them  : — 

{a)  "No.91.  Sydney  woods,"  labelled  "  100-160  ft.,  Brisbane 
River*  Gum,  W.  Macarthur,  1854"  (for  the  Paris  Exhibition, 
1855). 

ih)  "No. 18.  Blue  Gum."  This  specimen  bears  the  further 
label,  "  Corresponding  with  wood  collection  in  Museum  Coll. 
by  Macarthur  and  others,  S.  district,  N.  S.  Wales,  London 
Exhibition,  '62." 

Sir  William  Macarthur's  catalogue  ('Catal.  of  N.S.W.,  (fee. 
Timbers  at  the  Paris  Exhibition,  1855')  gives  the  following 
additional  information — "Aboriginal  name  at  lllawarra  '  Cou- 
ranga';  the  Blue  Gum  of  the  Coast  districts,  particularly  at 
Brisbane  Water.  Diameter  40-72  inches,  height  100-160  ft.  A 
magnificent  timber  for  ship-building,  and  a  favourite  wood  for 
house-carpentry;  not  nearl}^  so  hard  or  heavy,  and  not  so 
durable  as  the  Ironbarks." 

Both  these  herbarium  specimens  are  in  bud  only,  and  refer  to 
the  same  samples,  No.  18  being  the  number  of  the  same  timber 
specimen  (London  Exhibition,  1862)  which  at  the  Paris  Exhibi- 
tion of  1855  bore  the  number  91. 

They  were  labelled  E.  hotryoides  by  Bentham  and  referred  to 
in  the  '  Flora  Australiensis  '  under  that  species. 

♦  Brisbane  Water  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Hawkesbury  River,  about  50 
miles  north  of  Sydney.  The  "Brisbane  River"  is,  of  course,  in  Queensland. 
The  label  is  in  Sir  William  Macarthur's  handwriting,  and  is  a  slip  of 
the  pen  for  "  Brisbane  Water." 


BY  J.   H.  MAIDEN.  507 

Following  are  some  further  New  South  Wales  specimens  also 
examined  by  Bentham.  They  were  exhibited  by  Macarthur  at 
the  Paris  Exhibitions  of  1855  and  London  1862. 

"Nos.  42  (London),  94  (Paris)  '  Bangalay '  or  'Swamp 
Mahogany '  of  Brisbane  Water.  Diameter  30-36  inches. 
Height  40-80  feet.  A  crooked-growing  tree,  the  timber  much 
valued  for  knees  and  crooked  timbers  of  coasting  vessels." 

"No.  136.  Sydney  woods,  Paris  Exhibition,  W.  Macarthur, 
1854."  Its  number  in  the  London  Exhibition  Catal.  was  43. 
Sir  William  Macarthur  called  this  "  Swamp  Mahogany  "  (a  name 
now  reserved,  as  far  as  possible,  for  E.  robusta)  and  stated  that 
the  aboriginal  name  at  the  Illawarra  is  "  Burram  Murra."  His 
further  note  is  :— "  Diam.  36-60  inches,  height  60-100  ft.  A 
useful  timber  for  inside  work,  but  not  equal  to  the  better  sorts  of 
Eucalypti  in  strength-  or  durability."  In  bud  and  nearly  ripe 
fruit.     Specimen  in  Herb.  Kew,  where  I  saw  it. 

"No.244.  Sydney  woods,  Paris  Exhibition,  W.  Macarthur, 
1 854,  from  Appin,  50-80  ft."  In  the  Exhibition  Catalogue  Sir 
William  Macarthur  gives  the  following  additional  information: — 
"Name  in  Cumberland  and  Camden  'Grey  Gum'  and  '  Maan- 
dowie  '  (aboriginal).  Diameter  24-48  inches,  height  60-1 00  ft. 
An  excellent  gum  timber." 

Bentham  has  marked  this  specimen  E.  hotryoides  (?).  It  is  in 
bud  only,  is  in  Herb.  Kew,  where  I  examined  it. 

Macarthur  calls  this  "  Grey  Gum,"  a  name  never  applied  to  E, 
hotryoides,  but  sometimes  applied  to  E.  saligna. 

New  South  Wales. — Both  E.  salicj7ia  and  E.  hotryoides  are 
common  in  the  Sydney  district.  Southward  from  Milton,  I  have 
no  specimens  of  E.  saligna  other  than  with  a  rough  bark.  These 
connect  with  the  Victorian  trees. 

The  following  notes  in  regard  to  New  South  Wales  trees  will 
be  suggestive.  E.  saligna  is  common  on  the  northern  tableland 
extending  from  the  Hunter  to  New  England.  It  is  to  be  found 
at  the  foot  of  Mt.  Lindsay,  with  rather  small  fruits  and  very 
exserted  valves  (W.  Forsyth).     I  have  it  also  from  the  Macpherson 


508  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  ON  EUCALYPTUS,  II., 

Range,  on  both  sides  of  the  New  South  Wales-Queensland  border 
<W.  Dunn). 

Local  name  "  Woollybutt,"  aboriginal  name  "  Mudione." 
Height  130ft.,  diam.  2ft.  Gin.  Near  Nelligen  (J.S.Allan). 
As  regards  "  Woollybutt,"  this  is  a  name  that  as  between  E. 
botryoides  and  E.  saliyna  could  only  be  applied  to  the  former, 
yet  the  herbarium  specimens  are  typical  saligna. 

"  Woolly  Butt,"  South-west  Milton.  The  fruits  rather  like 
those  of  E.  saligna  (R.  H.  Cambage).  "Woolly  Butt,"  Burrill, 
Milton.     The  fruits  like  those  of  E.  botryoides  (R.  H.  Cambage). 

Going  south,  typical  saligna  may  be  found  in  the  Bateman's 
Bay  district,  which  is  the  southernmost  locality  known  to  me. 
At  p. 436  of  my  '  Useful  Native  Plants  of  Australia'  is  a  note  of 
a  specimen  (there  referred  to  E.  botryoides)  which  is  very  inter- 
esting.    It  is  a  "White  or  Scribbly  Gum." 

Going  north,  E.  botryoides  is  common  from  Sydney  to  New- 
castle. What  the  northern  range  is  can  only  be  ascertained  by 
searching  along  the  coast. 

Victoria. — Mueller  in  his  '  Key  to  the  System  of  Victorian 
Plants,'  excludes  E.  saligna  as  a  Victorian  plant.  He,  however, 
includes  E.  botryoides,  "finally  tall,  bark  persistent,  dark,  rough," 
and  records  it  from  the  east  (which  includes  Gippsland,  but  not 
alpine  localities). 

Dr.  A.  W.  Howitt  wrote  some  years  ago  to  me  : — "  'Gippsland 
Mahogany,'  Eucalyptus  botryoides.  Locally  it  seems  to  be  well 
thought  of.  It  is  confined  to  certain  localities  near  the  coast  of 
East  Gippsland,  not  extending  in  the  mainland  west  of  the 
mouth  of  the  Mitchell  River,  but  in  the  sandy  tracts  between 
the  lakes  and  the  sea  at  least  as  far  as  Seacombe.  In  this  part, 
however,  as  also  generally  in  the  sandy  coast-land,  the  timber  is 
small.  Timber  of  size  for  milling  purposes  grows,  I  think,  only 
about  the  Snowy  River." 

The  Victorian  specimens  in  the  National  Herbarium,  Sydney, 
all  belong  to  E.  botryoides. 


BY  J.   H.   MAIDEN.  509 

Metung  (A.  W.  Howitt).  I  may  mention  that  juvenile  leaves 
from  this  locality  collected  by  Mr.  Howitt  precisely  resemble 
those  of  typical  E.  saligna  from  Brisbane  Water. 

"Sea-coast  at  Lake  King.  Dr.  F.  Miiller."  {E.  botryoides  in 
Bentham's  handwriting). 

"  Mahogany  tree  of  Snowy  River  "  (W.  H.  Harvey,  ex  Herb. 
Hook.). 

E.  Gippsland  (E.  E.  Pescott  through  C.  Walter). 

2-3.  E.  UMBRA  R.  T.  Baker;  E.  resinifera  Sm.  var.  grandiflora 
Benth. 

Mr.  R.  H.  Cambage  and  the  writer  found  on  the  summit  of 
First  Point,  near  Kincumber,  these  forms  as,  dense  mallee-like 
scrubs,  5-6  feet  high,  fruiting  freely. 

4.  E.  WiLKiNsoNiANA  R.  T.  Baker. 

This  is  a  form  of  E.  Muelleriana  Howitt,  showing  transition 
to  E.  eugenioides  Sieb.  I  promised  (in  Part  i.  of  this  Series; 
these  Proceedings,  1904,  p. 760)  to  explain  its  position  in  this 
paper,  but  as  I  find  that  illustrations  are  very  desirable  for  the 
purpose,  I  will  deal  with  the  matter  in  Part  viii.  of  my  '  Critical 
Revision  of  the  genus  Eucalyptus.' 

5.    E.  DREPANOPHYLLA  F.V.M.(?) 

I  have  specimens  from  Woolooma  Mountain,  via  Belltrees, 
Scone,  November,  1903  (H.  L.  White)  in  fruit  and  half-ripe  bud. 
No  further  particulars  are  available.  They  appear  to  come 
nearest  to  E.  dre2)anophyUa.  The  tree  is  less  near,  apparently, 
to  E.  hemiiohloia  F.v.M.,  but  the  foliage  is  different  from  that 
species.  It  is  an  interesting  form,  and  I  publish  this  note  in 
the  endeavour  to  trace  E.  drepanophylla  for  New  South  Wales 
(c/.  Deane  &  Maiden,  these  Proceedings,  1901,  p.342). 

6.  E.  juGALis  Naudin  (see  these  Proceedings,  1903,  p.897). 

This  appears  to  be  a  form  of  the  very  variable  E.  melanophloia 
F.v.M. 


510  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  ON  EUCALYPTUS,   IL, 

7.  E.  VERNicosA  Hook.  f. 

Mueller  held  the  view,  which  he  expressed  to  me  verbally,  that 
E.  vernicosa  is  an  extreme  form  of  E.  Gunnii  Hook,  f.  At  the 
same  time  it  is  such  an  extreme  form  that  I  think  it  seems 
desirable  to  retain  it  as  a  species.  E.  Muelleri  T.  B.  Moore* 
appears  to  be  a  connecting  link  between  E,  vernicosa  and  E, 
Gunnii. 

8.  E.  Gunnii  Hook.  f.  var.  acervula  Deane  &  Maiden. 

I  have  specimens  with  fruits  nearly  twice  the  ordinary  size. 
Glencoe  near  Mt.  Gambier,  South  Australia  (Walter  Gill). 

Since  writing  my  paperf  I  have  obtained  specimens  of  E. 
McClatchie  Kinney,  from  Prof.  A.  J.  McClatchie,  and  they  are 
identical  with  the  above  large-fruited  form. 

E.  Gunnii  var.  maculosa  Maiden. 

I  have  Mr.  Baker's  E.  lacteal  before  me  as  I  write,  and  am 
familiar  with  the  country  from  which  most  of  the  type-specimens 
were  obtained.  I  cannot  separate  them  from  var.  maculosa,  and 
some  of  the  specimens  show  transition  to  var.  acervula  (of  which 
transition  I  have  abundant  evidence  from  other  sources).  Speci- 
mens such  as  these  tend  to  prove  the  reasonableness  of  my  view 
that  it  is  undesirable  to  break  up  a  polymorphic  species  like  E. 
Gunnii  into  a  number  of  species.  The  species  varies  exceedingly 
under  varying  conditions  of  climate  and  soil.  It  is,  in  my  view, 
scientific  to  maintain  the  forms  as  varieties  to  show  their 
intimate  and  branching  relations  with  the  "  parent "  species. 
The  differences  in  oil  constituents  I  assert  are  apparent,  not  real. 
When  specimens  of  leaves  are  distilled  from  many  forms  and  at 
different  seasons  of  the  year,  then,  I  submit,  it  will  be  found  that 
the  oil  results  will  exhibit  curves  and  not  steps  as  at  present. 


*  Trans.  Koy.  Soc.  Tas.  1886,  p.  207. 

t  These  Proceedings,  1903,  p. 900. 

t  These  Proceedings,  xxv.,  691. 


BY  J.  H.  MAIDEN.  511 

E.  GuNNii  var.  rubida  Maiden. 

Called  "  Spotted  Gum "  at  Dalgety,  Snowy  River  (A.  W. 
Hewitt),  a  term  more  commonly  applied  to  var.  maculosa.  Mr. 
Howitt's  specimens  of  juvenile  foliage  are  as  narrow  as  those  of 
var.  maculosa  ever  are. 

Around  Wingello  I  have  collected  typical  rubida  and  also 
specimens  which  show,  both  as  regards  fruits  and  juvenile  foliage, 
transit  between  var.  riihida  and  var.  maculosa. 

9.  E.  viMiNALis  Labill.,  and  E.  Gunnii  Hook.  f.  var.  rubida. 

Miquel,*  speaking  of  E.  viminalis  Labill.,  gives  E.  saccharifera 
F.  Miiller,  and  E.  criicivalvis  F.  Miiller,  as  synonyms.  I  concur, 
having  seen  specimens  of  E.  saccharifera  and  E.  criccivalvis  (the 
latter  having  very  exserted  valves). 

Incidentally  I  may  remark  that  saccharifera  was  sometimes 
written  saccharifua.  Two  specimens  are  before  me  as  I  write, 
viz.,  one  in  M iquel's  handwriting,  and  a  second  in  W.  H.  Harvey's 
handwriting  "ex  herb.  Hook."  circa  1855.  We  may  therefore 
with  safety  put  saccharifera,  sacchariflua  and  crucivalvis  as 
synonyms  of  viminalis. 

Then  Miquel  (loc.  cit.)  describes  a  variety  ''microcarjm  F.  Miill., 
Ad  Fifteen  Miles  Creek."  I  have  seen  an  original  specimen, 
and  it  bears  the  following  label—"  Eucalyptus  sacchariflua  Ferd. 
Miiller  var.  microcarpa  C?)  Fifteen  Miles  Creek,  Lofty  Ranges 
[South  Australia,  J.H.M.],  E.  viminalis  ws^v.  microcarpa.''  It  is 
E.  Gunnii  var.  rubida,  to  which  we  must  add  the  above  synonym. 

There  are,  indeed,  two  Manna  Gums,  each  worthy  of  the  name 
E.  saccharifera.  E.  viminalis  is  one,  but  the  tree  which  in  the 
highlands  of  the  Southern  Monaro,  Northern  Victoria,  and  also 
South  AustraHa  (to  mention  no  other  localities)  which  most  pro- 
fusely yields  manna  is  undoubtedly  E.  Gitnnii  var.  rubida. 

10.   E.  TERETICORNIS  Sm. 

In  my  last  paper  (these  Proceedings,  1904,  p. 7 7 3)  I  referred 
to  this  species.     See  also  my  'Forest  Flora  of  New  South  Wales,' 

*  Ned.  Kruidk.  Arch.  iv.  125  (1856). 


512  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  ON   EUCALYPTUS,   IL, 

Part  xi.,  quoted  therein.  In  my  last  paper  I  promised  to  refer 
to  var.  C?)  latifolia,  but  I  cannot  do  so,  as  I  have  failed  to  obtain 
certain  Queensland  material  to  complete  specimens.  The  matter 
is  therefore  in  abeyance. 

The  following  four  forms  have  been  carved  out  of  the  species, 
but  there  can  be  honest  differences  of  opinion  in  regard  to  all  of 
them,  as  to  whether  they  are  species  or  varieties.  I  have  speci- 
mens which  connect  all  to  E.  tereticornis  and  to  each  other. 

A. — E.  amplifolia  Naudin  (these  Proceedings,  1904,  p.  773; 
E.  tereticornis  Sm.  var.  latifolia  Benth.  jmrtim  (?). 

B. — var.  dealhata  Deane  &  Maiden  (these  Proceedings,  1899, 
p.  466;  E.  dealbata  A.  Cunn.).  The  juvenile  foliage  would 
appear  to  be  thinner,  and  blunter  at  the  apex  than  that  of  the 
typical  species. 

C — var.  squamosa  Maiden,  '  Forest  Flora  of  N.  S.  Wales,' 
Part  xi.  [E.  squamosa  Deane  &  Maiden,  these  Proceedings, 
1897,  p.561).  One  of  the  most  marked  of  the  forms,  but  so 
indeed  is  var.  brevifolia,  which  is  absolutely  a  transition  form. 

D. — var.  Bancrofti  Maiden,  vel  E.  Bancrofti  Maiden  ('Forest 
Flora  of  N.  S.  Wales,'  xi.).  This  includes  var.  brevifolia  Benth., 
and  the  various  transition  forms  are  fully  explained. 

11.    E.  CORYMBOSA  Sm. 

Seeds  of  this  species  from  the  Port  Jackson  district  are  plump, 
with  solid  angles  and  with  little  or  no  wing.  As  one  proceeds 
northwards  the  seeds  flatten  and  become  more  winged.  By  the 
time  Rockhampton,  Queensland,  is  reached,  the  seeds  are  very 
flat,  and  resemble  Casuarina  seeds.  The  timbers  are  red  and 
appear  to  be  like  that  of  the  common  Blood  wood  in  each  case. 

12.  Eucalyptus  Caleyi,  sp.nov. 

A  tall  Ironbark  tree,  often  glaucous,  and  finally  becoming 
glabrous,  but  remaining  dull-coloured. 

Vernacular  Names. — Called  "Broad-leaved  Ironbark"  at  Howell 
in  comparison  with  the  local  "  Narrow-leaved  Ironbark,"  which 
is   E.  sideroxylo7t^  and  which  is   rare  in  the  immediate  district. 


BY  J.   H.   MAIDEN.  515^ 

Also  called  *'  Silver-leaved  Ironbark,"  but  not  to  be  confused 
with  E.  melanophloia,  which  is  not  found  in  the  neighbourhood,, 
but  which  is  exceedingly  abundant  near  Bingara,  Inverell,  &c. 

Bark  very  deeply  furrowed  and  hard,  with  much  less  kino  in 
grains  throughout  the  bark  than  E.  sideroxylon,  and  therefore 
not  a  true  "  Fat-cake  Ironbark  "  like  that  species. 

Timber  deep  red  in  colour,  locally  esteemed,  and  apparently  a 
timber  of  good  quality. 

Juvenile  leaves  nearly  orbicular,  3  inches  in  diameter  being  the 
usual  dimensions.  The  leaves  are  symmetrical  and  taper  rather 
abruptly  into  a  petiole  of  about  J  inch.  Texture  thick  and  cori- 
aceous, dull  and  even  glaucous.  Midrib  rather  prominent,  and 
the  intramarginal  vein  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  edge. 
The  secondary  veins  (of  which  the  intramarginal  vein  is  one) 
numerous,  usually  about  \  inch  apart,  roughly  parallel,  but  con- 
verging and  finally  becoming  nearly  parallel  to  the  midrib. 

Mature  leaves  broadly  lanceolar,  up  to  a  breadth  of  2  inches 
and  a  length  twice  as  great  and  rather  more.  Nearly  symmetri- 
cal, blunt-pointed,  tapering  at  the  base  into  a  petiole  of  about 
an  inch.  Coriaceous  and  rather  thick,  equally  dull  on  both  sides; 
often  glaucous.  Intramarginal  vein  at  a  considerable  distance 
from  the  edge.  The  secondary  veins  rather  prominent  and  wide 
apart,  and  disposed  at  about  an  angle  of  45°  to  the  midrib. 

Buds. — Operculum  conical  and  of  less  diameter  than  the  calyx, 
which  tapers  much  more  than  does  the  operculum.  The  buds 
often  glaucous. 

Flowers  axillary,  becoming  terminal  by  reduction  of  the  upper 
leaves.  Up  to  7  in  the  head,  the  common  peduncle  rather 
slender  and  about  J  inch  in  length,  each  flower  on  a  distinct 
pedicel.  Anthers  almost  quadrangular  in  shape,  opening  in 
pores  nearly  terminal,  which  are  a  little  wider  in  the  direction 
of  the  broad  portion  of  the  anther.  Filaments  often  tinged  red 
and  minutely  glandular.     In  full  flower  in  August. 

Fruits  pear-shaped,  slender,  tapering  into  a  distinct  pedicel. 
Diameter,  say,  \  inch,  with  a  length  about  twice  as  great.  Dark 
brown  and  glossy  when  fully  ripe.     They  have  a  marked  dark 


514  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  ON   EUCALYPTUS,   II., 

coloured  thin  rira  such  as  is  common  in  E.  sideroxylon  and  E. 
meUiodora.  Valves  well  sunk,  usually  half-way  down  the 
capsule. 

Hab. — Howell  (Bora  Creek),  19  miles  south  of  Inverell,  on  the 
tin-granite  (E.  C.  Andrews,  per  favour  of  E.  H.  Cambage;  April, 
1904,  and  April,  1905,  in  bud  and  fruit);  (J.  H.  Maiden  and  J. 
L.  Boorman,  August,  1905). — Head  of  the  Gwydir  (Dr.  Leich- 
hardt,  circa  1842). — "Mountain  Ironbark,"  Upper  Hunter  (H. 
Deane,  1888). — "Stunted  Ironbark,"  Murrumbo,  Rylstone  (E. 
T.  Baker,  December,  1893);  at  Howell  it  would  appear  that  the 
trees  obtained  a  finer  development. — Tingha  (J.  L.  Boorman, 
June,  1904),  with  fruits  less  pear-shaped  than  those  of  the  type. 
— Emmaville  (J.  L.  Boorman,  June,  1904).     Very  glaucous. 

This  species  appears  to  be  very  widely  distributed  over  northern 
Xew  South  Wales,  extending  from  the  Rylstone  (Mudgee)  dis- 
trict north-east  to  near  the  Queensland  border,  and  as  far  east  as 
Emma%-ille.  The  range  of  the  species  requires  to  be  more  fully 
defined,  but  it  appears  to  be  found  over  the  greater  portion  of 
New  England  and  over  a  considerable  area  of  the  western  slopes 
of  this  tableland. 

This  species  is  named  in  honour  of  George  Caley,  Banks' 
botanical  collector  in  New  South  Wales  (1800-1810),  and  whose 
shrewd  observations  in  regard  to  another  Ironbark  have  been 
referred  to  at  p. 494  of  these  Proceedings. 

This  tree  has  puzzled  me  for  a  number  of  years,  but  I  have 
collected  an  absolutely  perfect  series  of  specimens,  and  trust  that 
this  species,  which  has  a  number  of  affinities,  may  now  be  clearly 
understood. 

Affinitie-s,—{l)  E.  sideroxylon  A.  Cunn.  E.  Caleyi  is  sharply 
distinguished  from  this  species  by  its  broad  juvenile  foliage,  that 
of  E.  sideroxylon  being  very  narrow.  The  fruits  of  E.  sideroxyon 
are  more  globular  and  warted;  the  opercula  are  not  constricted. 
In  E.  sideroxylon  (and  I  have  chosen  an  equally  fresh  local 
specimen  for  the  observation)  the  filaments  have  a  line  line  or 
ridge  extending  the  whole  length.  In  E.  Caleyi  the  line  is  less 
marked,  and  extends  only  for  the  lower  half  of  the  filament. 


BY  J.   H.   MAIDEN.  515 

Let  US  turn  to  a  reputed  variety  of  E.  sideroxylon  A.  Cunn., 
viz.,  var.  paUeTis  Benth.  "Leaves  not  .so  coriaceous  and  whitish." 
New  England,  C.  Stuart  (B  Fl.  iii.  210).  I  have  not  seen  the 
type  specimens,  but  have  travelled  over  a  good  deal  of  C.  Stuart's 
country  (northern  New  England,  Tenterfield  to  Drake,  <fcc.),  and 
have  no  doubt,  in  my  own  mind,  that  E.  Caleyi  is  the  plant 
referred  to.  At  the  same  time  I  cannot  state  absolutely  that  it 
is  a  synonym  without  the  type.  The  tree  is  often  as  glaucous  as 
it  can  be,  and  young  lanceolate  leaves  at  the  ends  of  branches 
are  often  less  coriaceous  than  the  maturer  leaves  down  the 
branches. 

On  my  showing  Mr.  R.  T.  Baker  specimens,  and  informing 
him  that  I  deemed  this  tree  to  be  new,  he  very  kindly  sent  me 
specimens  collected  by  him  at  Murrumbo  Plains,  Goulburn  River, 
north  of  Rylstone,  and  informed  me  that  the  tree  was  referred 
by  him  and  Mr.  Smith  in  their  '  Research  on  the  Eucalypts '  to 
E.  ifideroxylon  A.  Cunn.  var.  pallens.  It  will  be  observed  that 
the  authors  state  that  the  "  oil  has  little  resemblance  to  that 
obtained  from  E.  sideroxylon." 

(2)  E.  affiiiis  Deane  k  Maiden.  E.  Caleyi  resembles  this 
species  in  general  characters,  and  even  in  fruits,  but  the  timbers 
sharply  .separate  them,  that  of  E.  affinis  being  pale. 

(.3)  E.  siderojMoia  Benth.  var.  glauca  Deane  k  Maiden. 
E.  Caleyi  certainly  presents  some  resemblance  to  this  variety. 
Both  forms  are  glaucous,  and  the  juvenile  foliage  of  both  forms 
has  much  in  common,  but  the  opercula  of  the  var.  of  E.  sider- 
ophloia  are  not  constricted,  while  its  valves  are  not  only  not  sunk, 
but  they  are  exserted. 

(4)  E.  paniculata  Sm.  E.  Caleyi  was  by  Mueller  and  others 
sometimes  labelled  E.  paniculata  with  bud  and  flower  specimens 
alone  available.  The  inflorescence  often,  indeed,  takes  on  a 
paniculate  character,  and  the  fruit,  when  unripe  and  the  rim  not 
defined,  is  certainly  reminiscent  of  that  of  E.  paniculata,  but 
the  leaves,  ripe  fruits  and  timber  sharply  distinguish  the  species. 


516  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES  ON  EUCALYPTUS,  II. 

Note  added,  20:xii.  :'05. — Mr.  J.  L.  Boorman  has  since 
brought  me  specimens  of  this  species  from  Peak  Hill,  roughly- 
halfway  between  Dubbo  and  Parkes.  He  calls  it  "the  Red 
Ironbark"  of  the  district,  and  says  it  is  now  scarce  because  of  the 
run  on  it  for  sleepers.  The  fruits  are  rather  less  pyriform  (more 
flat- topped)  than  those  of  the  type,  but  they  are  different  in 
shape  from  those  of  E.  siderophloia,  also  found  in  the  Dubbo 
district,  while  the  broad  juvenile  foliage  leaves  sharply  separate 
it  from  E.  sideroxylon,  a  third  Ironbark  also  found  in  the 
district.     The  range  of  the  species  is  thus  considerably  extended. 


517 


ON   AN  UNDESCRIBED   SPECIES    OF   GRYPTOCARYA 
FROM  EASTERN  AUSTRALIA. 

By  R.  T.  Baker,  F.L.S.,  Curator,  Technological  Museum, 

Sydney. 

(Plate  XXX.) 

Cryptocarya  fcetida,  sp.nov. 

A  small  tree  from  30  to  50  feet  high,  and  9  inches  in  diameter, 
so  far  as  at  present  known;  glabrous,  except  the  inflorescence, 
which  is  minutely  rusty  or  silvery. 

Leaves  glabrous  on  both  sides,  ovate  to  oblong,  acuminate  or 
obtuse,  mostly  4  to  5  inches,  rarely  6  inches  long,  from  IJ  to  2 J 
inches  broad,  rarely  3  inches,  paler  on  the  underside  but  not 
glaucous,  not  shining,  although  perhaps  a  little  so  on  the  under 
surface,  rigid,  thick,  almost  coriaceous,  margins  slightly  recurved, 
reticulations  well  marked  and  coarsely  so  on  the  undersurface. 
The  leaves  have  irregularly  scattered  over  the  upper  surface 
black  spots  or  markings,  probably  caused  by  sudden  changes  of 
temperature,  as  they  do  not  appear  to  be  caused  by  any  organism. 

Panicled  cymes  axillary  or  terminal,  solitary,  but  occasionally 
in  twos  or  threes;  flowers  numerous,  hoary  pubescent,  smaller 
than  those  of  C.  patentiyiervis  F.v.M.,  but  larger  than  those  of  G. 
glaucescens  R.Br.  Perianth  segments  about  1  line  long,  the 
tube  turbinate  half  the  length  of  the  tube.  Glands  shortly 
stipitate,  much  shorter  than  the  inner  or  outer  stamens,  and  not 
attached  to  either  the  inner  or  outer  series  of  these  organs. 
Staminodia  three,  about  half  the  length  of  the  stamens.  Fruit- 
ing perianth  globular,  4  to  5  lines  in  diameter,  mostly  with  a 
*'  bloom." 

Hah. — Moreton     Bay    (Allan     Cunningham) ;     Ballina     (W. 
Bauerlen). 
34 


518  ON  AN  UNDESCRIBED  SPECIES  OF  CRYPTOCAEVA, 

The  earliest  herbarium  specimen  of  this  species  extant  is  in 
the  Kew  Herbarium.  This  was  collected  by  Allan  Cunningham 
at  Moreton  Bay  in  1828. 

The  material  collected  by  W.  Bauerlen  was  under  observation 
for  some  time,  and  was  at  first  placed  provisionally  as  C. 
glaucesceiis,  var.,  as  it  was  thought  it  might  eventually  work 
out  as  one  of  the  varieties  of  that  species  enumerated  by 
Bentham  (B.Fl.  Vol.v.  297). 

As  material  of  these  varieties  (sic)  was  identified,  it  became 
apparent  that  some  of  them  were  distinct  species;  and  Maiden 
and  Baker"*^  restored  Meissner's  C.  microneura  to  specific  rank. 

When  examining  the  Cryptocaryas  in  the  Kew  Gardens 
herbarium  recently,  it  appeared  to  me  that  more  than  one  dis- 
tinct species  was  included  by  Bentham  under  the  name  C. 
glaucescens.  It  must  not  be  forgotten,  however,  that  Bentham 
laboured  under  the  great  disadvantage  of  not  knowing  the  trees 
in  the  field,  and  so  had  only  dried  specimens  upon  which  to 
make  his  determinations. 

As  Bentham's  type  C.  glaucescens  {loc.  cit.)  is  identical  with 
what  is  so  regarded  in  Australian  herbaria,  the  way  is  thus  clear 
to  differentiate  the  various  forms  at  present  placed  under  that 
species. 

C.  glaucescens  (type)  has  an  extensive  range  along  the  eastern 
coast,  is  constant  in  morphological  characters,  and  is  distinct 
from  any  other  known  Cryptocarya;  and,  so  far,  I  have  been 
unable  to  trace  any  intermediary  forms. 

This  new  species  differs  altogether  from  C.  glaucescens  in  the 
shape  of  fruit,  also  shape,  size,  texture  and  venation  of  the  leaves, 
and  in  inflorescence. 

C.  microneura  Meissn.  has  thin,  long,  narrow  leaves,  and  an 
elongated  fruit. 

C.  pate7itinervis  F.v.M.  has  also  long  lanceolate  leaves  and  a 
very  distinct  cymose  inflorescence,  and  an  oblong  fruit. 

*  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1895,  p.515. 


BY  R.  T.   BAKER.  519 

C.  obovata  R.Br.,  differs,  more  especially  in  its  leaf  characters, 
as  well  as  in  the  form  of  its  fruits;  the  inflorescence,  however,  is 
similar. 

The  timbers  of  all  the  above  show  scarcely  any  distinct  specific 
differences. 

In  shape  and  reticulation  of  leaf  C.  fve.tida  approaches  more 
nearly  C.  Mackinoniana  F.v.M.,  and  in  botanical  sequence  it 
should  perhaps  come  between  that  species  and  C.  obovata  R.Br. 

Meissner's  C.  Cunningha7nii  is  only  a  slightly  larger-liow^ered 
form  of  the  typical  C,  yiaucescens;  and  the  same  author's  C. 
Moretoniana  has  shiny  leaves  and  a  finer  reticulation,  features 
that  do  not  appear  in  G.  fcelida. 

Apart  from  the  other  systematic  characters  above  enumerated, 
the  fruits  are  quite  unlike  those  of  any  other  described  species. 

It  might  also  be  added  that  it  was  not  until  the  material  had 
been  compared  with  that  at  Kew  Gardens  Herbarium  that  I  was 
prepared  to  describe  it  as  new. 

Eco7iomics. — Timber  not  seen  to  any  size,  but  most  of  the 
Cryptocaryas  are  famed  for  their  hard,  durable  wood,  and  this 
one  probably  is  no  exception. 

One  of  its  economics  is  worthy  the  attention  of  the  apiarist, 
for  Mr.  Bauerlen  writes  concerning  the  tree  : —  "  The  flowers  have  a 
very  offensive  odour,  but  are  nevertheless  very  much  visited  by 
bees,  wasps,  and  other  insects." 

I  have  to  acknowledge  my  indebtedness  to  Sir  William 
Thiselton-Dyer,  K.C.M.G.,  &c.,  &c.,  Director  of  the  Royal 
Botanical  Gardens,  Kew,  for  his  kindness  in  giving  me  free 
access  to  the  Kew  herbarium  and  the  use  of  the  material  there 
for  comparison. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  XXX. 

^  Cryptocarya  foetida,  sp.n. 

Fig.  L — Twig  showing  inflorescence  and  leaves. 
Fig.  2. — Bud  (enlarged). 
Fig.  3.— Expanded  flower  (enlarged). 
Fig.  4.— Fruit. 


520 


STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA.  Part  IX. 

By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S. 

(Plates  xxxi.-xxxiii.) 

(Continued  from  Vol.  xxix,  p. 211). 

Haliotis  cyclobates  Peron. 

A  prolific  collecting  ground  was  traversed  by  Peron  on 
Kangaroo  Island,  South  Australia.  At  the  mouth  of  the  little 
"  Port  Dache,"  the  Pelican  Lagoon  of  our  Admiralty  chart,  two 
handsome  species  of  Haliotis  especially  attracted  his  attention. 
One,  whose  perforations  project  so  as  to  form  open  truncated 
cones,  he  named  H.  conicopora.  This  answers  to  the  If.  tubifera 
of  Lamarck,  which  has  been  referred  to  H.  rtcevosa  Martyn,  but 
which  may  perhaps  be  H.  granti  Pritchard  and  Gatliff. 

A  second  Haliotis,  which  Peron  named  H.  cyclobates,  "because 
of  its  very  deep  and  almost  round  aperture  "*  is  evidently  the 
H.excavata  of  Lamarck,!  distinguished  as  an  "  espece  singuliere- 
ment  remarquable  par  saprofonde  excavation  et  sa  forme  presque 
ronde,"  brought  by  Peron  from  New  Holland. 

Remembering  that  Lamarck,  who  had  no  scruples  about  dis- 
carding names,  had  the  notes  and  specimens  of  Peron  at  his 
disposal,  the  coincidence  of  description ,  locality,  and  collector 
amount  to  proof  that  these  names  are  synonymous.  H.  cyclobates 
Peron,  must  replace  H.  excavata  Lamarck,  over  which  it  enjoys 
six  years'  priority. 

While  on  the  subject  of  Australian  Haliotis,  I  may  add  that 
H.  hargravesi  Cox,  is  quite  distinct  from  H.  roei  Gray,  with 
which  Pilsbryl  has  united  it.     H.  hargravesi  grows   no  larger 

*  P^ron,  Voy.  Terr.  Aust.  ii.  1816,  p.  80. 

t  Anim.  s.  vert.  vi.  (2),  1822,  p.2l5. 

X  Man.  Conch,  xii.  1890,  p.  11 8. 


BY  C.  HEDLEY.  521 

than  the  original  figure;  it  is  peculiar  to  the  coast  of  New  South 
Wales,  whereas  //.  roei  is  exclusively  a  West  Australian  species. 
It  further  seems  to  me  that  //.  rubicundus  Montfort,  should 
replace  the  later  H.  tricostalis  Lamarck.  Montfort's  name, 
which  Pilsbry  marked  as  very  doubtful,  was  recognised  and 
accepted  by  Dr.  J.  E.  Gray,"^  who  had  unusual  facilities  for 
ascertaining  the  facts  of  the  case. 

Emarginula  incisura  a.  Adams. 
A.  Adams,  Proc,  Zool.  Soc.  1851,  p.84. 

No  locality  was  known  for  this  species  when  it  was  announced 
by  A.  H.  Cookef  from  the  Gulf  of  Suez.  It  was  afterwards 
reported  by  E.  A.  Smith  J  from  the  Maldives. 

All  these  records  were  based  on  single  specimens.  But  Mr.  G. 
Gross  has  shown  me  numerous  examples  which  he  gathered  in 
Moreton  Bay.  It  has  been  obtained  also  at  Caloundra,  Queens- 
land, by  Mr.  H.  L.  Kesteven.  Since,  at  the  time  the  species  was 
described,  the  London  market  was  flooded  with  the  Moreton  Bay 
shells  of  F.  Strange,  it  is  probable  that  the  type  was  a  Queens- 
land shell. 

Emarginula  dilecta  A.  Adams. 
(Plate  xxxiii.,  figs. 37-38). 

This  species  was  originally  described^  from  King  George's 
Sound,  W.A.,  and  was  afterwards  figured  by  Sowerby.||  It  was 
added  to  our  fauna  by  Angas,^  who  again  announced  it  as*a 
fresh  discovery,*"^  and  remarked  laterff  that  he  had  in  the  first 
instance  mistaken  E.  Candida  A.  Ad.,  for  this  species.     Tenison 

*  Gray,  King's  Survey  Trop.  Austr.  Append,  ii.  1827,  p.  495. 

t  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xvi.,  1885,  p.271. 

X  Fauna  Geogr.  Maldive  &  Laccadive  Arch.  ii.  1903,  p. 618. 

§  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1851  (1852),  p. 85. 

II  Thes.  Conch,  iii.  1863,  pl.245,  f.5. 

U  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1867,  p.219. 

**  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1871,  p.  97. 

ft  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1877,  p.  189. 


522  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

Woods    commented*'  on    this   confusion.      Henn    and    Brazierf 
recognised  E.  dilecta  from  Watson's  Bay. 

The  distinction  between  E.  dilecta  and  E.  Candida  is  not  made 
clear  in  literature,  and  I  have  found  the  species  difficult  to 
identify.  Dr.  J.  C.  Verco,  who  has  examined  the  types  of  each 
in  the  British  Museum,  kindly  points  out  to  me  that,  from  the 
apex  to  the  notch,  E.  dilecta  has  a  furrow  but  E.  Candida  a  ridge. 
To  facilitate  recognition,  I  add  a  drawing  of  an  example  of  E. 
dilecta,  13  mm.  long,  from  Maroubra  beach.  According  to  my 
experience  E.  dilecta  is  a  rare  shell  here,  and  only  occurs  on  the 
ocean  beaches. 

DiALA    TRANSLUCIDA,   n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxiii.,  fig.35.) 

Shell  of  variable  form,  ovate  conic,  sometimes  broader  in  pro- 
portion to  height  than  the  figure,  smooth  and  glossy,  very  thin, 
usually  transparent  enough  for  the  axial  pillar  to  be  seen  through 
the  whorls.  Whorls  nine,  regularly  tapering,  first  dispropor- 
tionately minute,  others  rounded,  last  sometimes  subcarinate,  a 
row  of  opaque  spots  often  occurs  on  the  periphery.  Aperture 
oblong,  sometimes  effuse  anteriorly.  Columella  straight,  a  little 
thickened.      Length  5-6,  breadth  2'6mm. 

Hah. — Balmoral  Beach,  Sydney  (the  late  Mrs.  C.  T.  Starkey). 

T  y  p  e. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

This  shell  is,  like  its  congeners,  very  variable.  The  transparent 
shell  distinguishes  it  from  other  Australian  Diala,  and  the 
straight  columella  will  serve  to  separate  it  from  such  translucent 
shells  as  Eidima  or  Sty  lifer,  to  which  it  has  a  deceitful  resem- 
blance. Mr.  J.  H.  Gatliff,  who  detected  this  species  in  Victoria, 
compared  it  to  the  Queensland  A.  goniochila  Ad.  The  northern 
.shell  differs  by  its  subulate  spire  and  much  smaller  size. 

*  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1876,  p.  103. 

t  These  Proceedings  (2),  ix.  1894,  p. 178. 


BY  C.   HEDLEY.  523 

DiALA  MONiLE  A.  Aclams. 
(Plate  xxxiii.,  fig.36.) 

Alaba  monile  A.  Ad.,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (3),  x.  1862,  p.296. 

This  shell  has  never  been  illustrated.  I  therefore  present  a 
drawing  of  a  Tasmanian  shell  5  mm.  in  length,  such  as  is  accepted 
by  local  collectors  for  the  above  species. 

It  ranges  as  far  north  as  Broken  Bay,  N.S.W.* 

Alaba  (Styliferina)  sulcata  Watson. 

This  species  was  represented  in  the  "Challenger"  collection 
by  a  single  shell  dredged  in  six  fathoms  off  Cape  York,  Queens- 
land.! Concerninsj  it  Dr.  Watson  remarked,  "  I  do  not  feel  at 
all  certain  that  this  is  a  Styliferina;  it  may  be  only  a  young 
shell  of  some  other  genus." 

These  doubts  were  well  founded,  for  a  series  I  dredged  last 
year  off  the  Capricorn  Islands,  Queensland,  prove  Watson's 
species  to  be  the  apex  of  Stromhus  campbelli  Gray.  It  is  note- 
worthy that  the  same  haul  which  gave  Watson  his  Alaba  sulcata 
included  Strombus  campbelli  in  the  adult  stage. 

While  on  the  subject  of  East  Australian  Alaba  I  may  point  out 
that  three  species  were  omitted  from  an  enumeration  of  the  genus 
by  Mr.  E.  A.  Smith.  J  Perhaps  as  a  consequence  they  have  since 
been  renamed. 

Alaba  flammea  Pease,§  which  ranges  down  the  whole  length  of 
the  Great  Barrier  Reef,  seems  to  me  a  prior  name  of  Diala  albugo 
Watson.  1 1 

Alaba  semistriata  Philippi,1I  whose  Australian  distribution  is 
similar  to  that  of  the  preceding  species,  appears  to  me  to  differ 


*  Hedley,  Mem.  Austr,  Mus.  iv.  1903,  p. 352. 

.      t  Watson,  Chall.  Rep.  Zool.  xv.  1886,  p.570,  PI.  xlii.  f.7. 

X  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1875,  p.  538. 

§  Am.  Jom-n.  Conch,  iii.  1867,  p.297,  PI.  xxiv.  f.33. 

II  Chall.  Rep.  Zool.  xv.  1886,  p.568,  PI.  xlii.  f.3. 

1[  Zeitsch.  Malak,  vi.  1849,  p.34;  Savigny,  Deser.  Egypte,  PI.  iii.,  f. 27, 28. 


524  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,  IX., 

only  in  colour,  in  which  character  it  is  variable,  from  Barleeia 
imbricata  Watson.* 

Alaba  martensi  Issel,t  associated  geographically  with  the  fore- 
going, is  apparently  inseparable  from  Diala  hardyi  Melvill  k 
Standen.J 

Alahafulva  Watson,  its  variety  lyijrrhacme  Melvill  &  Standen, 
and  Alaba  striata  Watson,  are  to  be  transferred  to  Obtortio.% 
The  latter  species  has  occurred  at  Thursday  Island, 

EULIMELLA    ANABATHRON,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxiii.,  figs. 39,  40.). 

Shell  tall,  slender,  opaque,  rather  fragile.  Whorls  ten,  exclu- 
sive of  a  prostrate  heterostrophe  apex  of  two  whorls,  deeply  con- 
stricted at  the  suture  and  produced  at  the  periphery  into  a  ridge 
or  crest.  Colour  white.  Sculpture  :  no  spirals;  coarse  irregular 
riblets  proceed  from  the  lower  suture  in  a  backward  convex  curve 
to  the  peripheral  crest,  thence  in  a  concave  curve  to  the  upper 
suture.  Aperture  ovate,  columellar  margin  a  little  reflected, 
appressed  to  the  preceding  whorl.      Length  4-8;  breadth  1-2  mm. 

Hab. — Balmoral  Beach,  Middle  Harbour  (the  late  Mrs.  C.  T. 
Starkey). 

T  y  p  e. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

Odostomia  opaca,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxiii.,  fig. 41.) 

Shell  cylindro-conic,  solid,  opaque.  Whorls  five,  exclusive  of 
the  protoconch.  Colour  buff  or  pale  purple,  zoned  with  three 
narrow  spiral  lines,  one  running  below  the  suture  on  the  last  four 
whorls,  another  on  the  periphery  of  the  last  two  whorls,  and  the 
other  on  the  base  of  the  final  whorl.  Sculpture:  regularly  spaced 
smooth  round  prominent  radial  ribs  which  project  at  the  suture, 

*  Chall.  Rep.  Zool.  xv.  1886,  p.584,  PI.  xliii.  f.2. 

t  Malacologia  Mar  Rosso,  1869,  p.206;  Savigny,  Descr.  Egypte,  PI.  iii.,  f.26. 

X  Journ.  of  Conch,  viii.  1895,  p.  118,  PI.  ii.,  f.lO. 

§  Hedley,  Mem.  Austr.  Mus.  iii.  1899,  p. 41 2. 


BY  C.  HEDLEY.  525 

bend  a  little  on  crossing  the  whorl,  and  taper  on  the  base.  The 
last  whorl  has  about  twenty;  they  do  not  continue  from  whorl  to 
whorl,  but  are  interrupted  at  the  suture.  There  is  no  trace  of 
spiral  sculpture.  Aperture  small,  perpendicular,  rounded  beneath, 
angled  above,  peristome  slightly  thickened,  columellar  fold  slight,, 
oblique.      Length  2-95,  breadth  1-1  mm. 

Hah, — Chinaman's  Beach,  near  Sydney;  two  specimens  in  shell 
sand  (Miss  L.  Parkes). 

T  y  p  e. — Miss  Parkes  has  kindly  presented  her  type-specimen 
to  the  Australian  Museum. 

A  form,  apparently  a  variety  of  this,  has  been  collected  at 
Caloundra,  Queensland,  by  H.  L.  Kesteven.  It  is  smaller  than 
the  Sydney  specimens,  and  white  with  three  orange  spiral  threads. 

The  Queensland  0.  pupa  Watson,  and  0.  kymatodes  Watson,* 
seem  allied,  but  according  to  the  description  the  former  has  feebler 
ribs,  and  in  the  latter  the  broadened  summits  of  the  ribs  coalesce 
and  crown  the  whorls  with  a  continuous  ridge.  Neither  species 
has  the  dark  spiral  lines. 

Herviera  isidella  Melvill  &   Standen,t  from   New  Caledonia,  is 

much  like  this,  but  differs  in  outline,  has  narrower,  straighter  ribs 

and  no  colour  bands.     The  genus  Herviera  appears  superfluous? 

in  forming  it  the  authors  probably  overlooked   Odostomella  Bucq. 

Dautz  &  Dollf.j 

Leiostraca  inusta,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxiii.,  fig. 43.) 

Shell  small,  thin,  almost  translucent,  blunt-topped,  smooth. 
Whorls  six  and  a  half,  gradually  increasing.  Colour  white,  baser 
aperture,  and  sometimes  a  varix,  cinnamon-brown.  No  sculpture 
except  a  few  weak  irregular  varices.  Sutures  ragged.  Aperture 
oval,  peristome  slightly  thickened  and  reflected.  Length  2*75, 
breadth  085  mm. 

Hab. — Manly  Beach  (Miss  L.  Parkes). 

Type. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 


*  Chall.  Rep.  Zool.  xv.  1S86,  p.486. 

t  Journ.  of  Conch,  ix    1899,  p.  186,  fig. 

X  Moll.  Mar.  Rosillon,  i.  1883,  p.  167. 


526  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

RiSSOA    EMBLEMATICA,  11. Sp. 

(Plate  xxxii.,  fig.24.) 

A  "  Rissoa  "  of  the  group  of  R.  cheilostoma,  small,  short,  stout, 
solid  and  glossy.  Whorls  four,  parted  by  impressed  sutures,  the 
first  three  forming  less  than  half  the  shell,  the  last  becoming 
ultimately  detached.  Colour  :  amber,  darkening  to  brown  on  the 
base,  peristome  white.  Sculpture  :  the  minute  umbilicus  is 
margined  by  a  heavy  spiral  ridge  which  runs  up  into  the  anterior 
corner  of  the  peristome.  To  this  succeeds  a  groove  and  a  second 
spiral  ridge,  upon  which  are  planted  the  bases  of  a  dozen  thick, 
oblique  radiating  ribs.  Ascending  to  the  shoulder,  these  ribs 
there  project  as  heavy  buttresses,  giving  to  the  whole  shell  a 
peculiar  angular  expression.  From  the  shoulder  these  ribs 
diminish  rapidly  to  the  suture,  which  they  undulate.  The 
shoulder  buttresses  are  linked  each  to  the  next  by  a  spiral  ridge. 
On  the  last  whorl  behind  the  aperture,  the  radial  ribs  vanish, 
but  the  shoulder  links  continue  to  the  peristome  as  a  prominent 
undulating  cord.  A  secondary  sculpture  of  minute  spiral  undu- 
lating scratches  covers  the  entire  surface  without  reference  to 
the  features  of  the  major  sculpture.  The  basal  cord,  radiating 
buttress  ribs  and  shoulder  links  are  repeated  on  the  third  whorl. 
The  second  whorl  is  broadly  tabulate,  but  unsculptured.  The 
apex  is  tilted, so  appearing  papillate.  Aperture  in  the  plane  of  the 
axis,  oblong,  surrounded  by  a  heavy,  widely  projecting,  complete 
peristome,  doubled  by  a  groove  on  its  face.  Length  4,  breadth 
2  mm. 

ZTrt^.— Manly    Beach,   Chinaman's    Beach   {Miss   L.    Parkes), 
Middle  Head  and  Wreck  Bay,  N.S.W.  (C.  Hedley). 

Type. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

From  its  nearest  allies  the  comparative  simplicity  of  sculpture, 
the  predominance  of  radii  over  spirals,  distinguish  it. 

RissoA  PULVILLUS,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxii.,  fig. 25.) 

Shell  small,  oblong-ovate,  imperforate,  thin  and  glossy.    Whorls 
four  and  one-half,  inflated.     Colour  :  upper  part  uniform  ochreous- 


BY  C.   HEDLEY. 


527 


brown,  the  last  two  whorls  dull  white,  each  crossed  by  two  narrow 
spiral  brown  bands,  base  and  part  of  peristome  dark  chocolate. 
Sculpture  :  the  smooth  surface  scarcely  roughened  by  microscopic 
growth-lines.  Aperture  subcircular,  peristome  complete,  a  little 
expanded.     Length  2-44,  breadth  1-08  mm. 

Hah. — Manly  Beach,  in  shell  sand  (Miss  L.  Parkes). 

T  y  p  e. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

L^viLiTORiNA  MARi^  Ten.Woods. 

This  species  was  originally  described  by  Tenison  Woods  as 
Rissoa  (Cingula)  marice,*  from  King's  Island.  It  was  figured  by 
Tryon.f  By  Pritchard  &  Gatliff  it  was  reported  from  Victoria;^ 
and  by  Tate  &  May  from  S.  Australia.§  A  specimen  I  collected 
at  the  entrance  of  Sussex  Inlet  enables  me  to  add  it  to  the  fauna 
of  this  State. 

It  is  here  proposed  to  transfer  the  species  from  Rissoa  to 
Pfeffer's  genus  Lcevilitorina,\\  with  the  type  of  which,  L.  caliginosa 
Gould,  I  have  compared  it,  and  to  which  it  closely  corresponds. 
Loevilitorina  is  represented  by  three  species  in  New  Zealand,  but 
is  now  first  announced  as  Australian. 

AssiMiNEA  TASMANiCA  Ten.  Woods 

(Plate  xxxii.,  figs. 27,  28,  29.) 

Two  names  were  bestowed  on  Tasmanian  examples  of  this 
species  by  Tenison  Woods;  firstly  Assiminea  tasmanica,^  secondly 
Rissoa  siennce**  Subsequently  the  second  name  was  withdrawn 
by  its  author. ft  A  figure  of  the  shell  was  given  by  W,  F. 
Petterd.ll 


*  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tasm.  1875  (1876),  p.  147. 

f  Man.  Conch,  ix.  PI. 71,  f.9. 

X  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  xiv.  1902,  p.  108. 

§  These  Proceedings,  xxvi.  1901,  p. 459. 

II  Jahrb.  Anst.  Hamburg,  iii.  1886,  p.Sl. 

IT  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1875  (1876),  p. 79. 

**  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1876  (1877),  p. 15,3. 

+t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1879  (1880).  p.  70. 

;t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1888  (1889),  pi-  ii.,  f.2. 


528  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

Formerly  Prof.  Tate  reduced  it*  to  a  synonym  of  Paludina 
granum  Menke;  but  ultimately!  restored  it  to  its  former  position. 

Incidentally  it  may  be  here  remarked  that  Paludina  granum 
is  a  West  Australian  species  whose  description  does  not  agree 
with  A.  tasmanica,  and  whose  figure  J  was  not  then  known  to 
Prof.  Tate.  Nevill  had  referred  P.  granum  to  the  genus  Larina,^ 
It  is  not  to  be  confused  with  Assiminea  granum  Morelet,  which 
by  its  author  was  tinally  regarded||  as  a  synonym  of  Hydrocena 
hidalgoi  Gassies. 

The  shell  was  noticed  by  Mr.  J.  H.  GatlifiP^  in  Western  Port, 
Victoria.  By  Mr.  T.  Whitelegge  it  was  added**  to  the  fauna  of 
this  State.  It  is  abundant  under  sticks  and  stones  and  on  weed 
near  high  water  mark  in  mangrove  swamps.  The  individual 
figured,  3-2.5  mm.  long,  I  took  in  the  Lane  Cove  near  Sydney. 
The  species  ranges  north  at  least  as  far  as  the  Richmond  River. 
In  Queensland  it  is  replaced  by  a  species  known  by  the  MS.  name 
of  A.  affinis  Mousson.ff 

Mr.  F.  E.  Grant,  who  kindly  drew  for  me  the  accompanying 
figure  of  the  radula,  points  out  how  closely  it  resembles  the 
radulae  of  other  species  of  Assiminea  illustrated  by  Tro.schel.  1 4 


The  operculum,  of  which  I  show  both  aspects  (Pl.xxxii.,  f.28, 29), 
has  not  been  previously  figured. 


*  These  Proceedings,  vi.  1881,  p.  389. 
t  These  Proceedings,  xxvi.  1901,  p. 305. 
X  PhiUppi,  Abbild.  Beschr.  Conch,  v.  1844,  pi.  iii.,  f.l6. 
§  Cat.  Moll.  Indian  Mus.  1877,  p.21. 
II  Journ.  d.  Conch,  xxxi.  1883,  p.208. 
II  Vict.  Naturalist,  xxii.  1905,  p.  15. 
**  .Journ.  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1889,  p. 321. 
+t  Cat.  Godeffroy  Museum,  v.  1874,  p.  103.    Nevill,  Handlist  Moll.  Indian 
Museum,  ii.  1884,  p. 70. 

Xt  Gebiss  d.  Schnecken,  i.  1856,  pi.  vii.,  f.l3,  14. 


Br  C.   HEDLEY.  529 

Maculotriton  bracteatus  Hinds. 

In  a  recent  revision  of  this  specjes  it  is  suggested  by  Pilsbry 
and  Vanatta*  that  Cantharus  WaterhousuB  Brazierf  is  a  related 
form.  On  again  examining  Brazier's  species,  I  am  unable  to 
separate  it  from  that  of  Hinds.  An  unrecorded  synonym  appears 
to  be  Columbella  epidelia  Duclos.J 

The  species  has  not  otherwise  been  recorded  from  Australia. 
In  my  experience  though  widespread  it  is  nowhere  common.  I 
found  it  at  the  Palm  Islands  and  the  Capricorn  Group,  Queens- 
land, and  have  seen  specimens  from  Lord  Howe  Island. 

Cerithiopsis  cessicius,  nom.  mut. 

This  species  was  introduced  by  Tenison  Woods  under  the  name 
of  Bittium  minimum.^  By  Messrs.  Tate  and  May  it  was  trans- 
ferred to  Cerithiopsis.W  '  Unfortunately  this  trivial  name  was 
already  employed  in  Cerithiopsis.  Cerithium  minimum  described 
by  Brusina  in  1864,  was  by  Monterosato  placed^  as  a  variety  of 
Cerithiopsis  tuber cularis.  The  latest  notice,*^'  however,  ranks  the 
Mediterranean  form  as  a  full  species  under  the  title  of  Cerithi- 
opsis minima  Brusina.  For  the  Australian  shell  a  new  name  is 
therefore  required,  and  is  here  proposed. 

Pyrazus  herculeus  Martyn. 

Because  this  was  one  of  the  half-dozen  shells  which  the  com- 
panions of  Captain  Cook  are  known  ft  to  have  gathered  at  Botany 
Bay  in  April,  1770,  it  will  always  have  a  sentimental  interest 
for  Australian  collectors. 

On  the  return  of  the  "Endeavour"  to  England,  G.  Humphries, 
a  celebrated  naturalist  of  that  period,  acquired  some  of  the  shells 


*  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philad.  Ivi.  1904,  p. 593, 

+  These  Proceedings,  xxiv.  1899,  p. 434,  f.7. 

+  Duclos  in  Chenu,  Illustr.  Conch.  Columbella,  1846-1858,  pi.  xxv.,  f.17-18. 

§  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1877  (1879),  p.  123, 

il  These  Proceedings,  xxvi.  1901,  p. 385. 

1[  Journ.  de  Conch,  xxii.  1874,  p. 272. 

**  Watson,  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  Zool.  xxvi.  1897,  p.280. 

ft  Von  Martens,  Malak.  Blatt.  xix.  1872,  p.29. 


530  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

collected  during  the  Expedition.  Through  him  the  specimens  were 
dispersed  to  various  European  conchologists.  Spengler  seems  to 
have  been  the  tirst  to  publish  an  account  of  this  species.*  He 
was  shortly  followed  by  Zorn  f  Neither  of  these  authors 
employed  Linnean  nomenclature,  and  their  writings  have  there- 
fore only  an  historical  interest  for  systematists. 

From  material  provided  by  Humphries,  our  shell  was  next 
superbly  pictured  by  Thomas  Martynj  under  the  title  of  Clava 
hercidea,  a  name  long  neglected,  but  whose  right  to  use  is  indis- 
putable. Martyn  erroneously  credited  his  shell  to  the  Friendly 
Islands.  In  the  same  year,  the  Catalogue  of  the  Portland 
Museum,  drawn  up  by  Dr.  Solander,  advertised  the  shell  as 
"  the  black  Hercules  Club  from  New  South  Wales." 

Under  a  polynomial  name,  Chemnitz§  refigured  and  described 
the  species,  giving  an  account  of  the  literature,  which  was  already 
considerable.  Then  Bruguiere,||  who  had  actually  never  seen 
the  shell,  imposed  upon  it  the  name  of  Cernthium  eheninum,  and 
compiled  a  description  from  the  work  of  his  predecessors. 

Montfort  increased  the  synonomy  by  renaming  it  Pyrazus 
baudini;^  his  specimen  was  brought  from  Australia  by  Baudin's 
Expedition. 

The  fourth  and  last  name  was  bestowed  by  Perrj',  who  called 
a  shell  from  "  the  East  Indies  "  Cerithiumferruginosum.'^^'^ 

After  this  date  the  shell  became  well  known  to  European 
collectors  under  Bruguiere's  name,  which,  supported  by  Lamarckft 
and  Gray, ;  |  circulated  generally.  An  imperfect  bibliography  has 
been  lately  issued  by  L.  Vignal.§§ 


*  Naturforscher,  ix.  1776,  p.  145  pi.  v.,  f.3. 
t  Abhandl.  danziger  naturf.  Gesellsch.  i.  1778,  p.  173. 

+  Universal  Conchologist,  i.  1784,  p.  13. 

§  Conch.  Cab.  x.  1788,  p.257,  pi.  clxii.,  f.l548, 1549. 

11  Ency.  M6th.  Vers  (2),  1792,  p.490. 

H  Conch.  Syst.  ii.  1810,  p. 459,  pi.  cxv. 

•*  Conchology,  1811,  pi.  xxxvi.,  f.l 

tt  Anim.  s.  vert.  vii.  1822,  p.  67. 

XX  Append.  Kmg's  Survey,  ii.  1827,  p.483. 

§§  Journ.  de  Conch,  liii.  1905,  p. 33. 


BY  C.   HEDLEY.  531 

Having  stated  the  case  for  the  specific  name,  that  of  the  genus 
now  requires  consideration.  The  first  used  was  Clava,  but  Dall* 
has  shown  that  this  name  should  be  restricted  to  the  group 
usually  called  Vertagus.  Bruguiere  placed  it  in  Cerithium,  the 
modern  limits  of  which  are  too  narrow  to  include  his  C.  eheninum. 
Reeve  and  subsequent  authors  include  our  species  in  Potamides, 
a  genus  framed  for  a  French  Tertiary  fossil.  The  original  refer- 
ences to  this  genus  are  not  within  my  reach,  but  I  find  that 
according  to  Agassiz.f  the  publication  of  Potamides  by  Alex. 
Brongniart|  dates  only  from  1822.  But  P.  herculeus  is  the  type 
of  Pyrazus  instituted  in  1810,  hence  even  if,  as  most  authors 
consider,  Potamides  and  Pyrazus  refer  to  one  genus,  then  Pyrazus 
must  take  precedence. 

The  animal  was  described  and  figured  by  Quoy  and  Gaimard.§ 
Tenison  Woods  gave  some  account  of  the  radula  and  eye.||  The 
nervous  system  and  other  anatomical  features  were  examined  by 
E.  L.  Bouvier.1T 

As  a  subfossil  it  was  recorded  from  the  neighbourhood  of 
Brisbane  by  Jack  and  Etheridge;**  from  Maitland,  N.S.W.,  by 
David  and  Etheridge,tt  and  from  Shea's  Creek  by  Etheridge,. 
David  and  Grimshaw.JI 

No  doubt  the  species  was  largely  used  as  food  by  the  coast 
natives.  The  aborigines  of  Moreton  Bay,  Queensland,  called  the 
species  Toondah.§§  It  was  found  by  Anderson||||  in  kitchen 
middens  on  the  Wagonga  River,  N.  S.  Wales.     Waite  notesUlI  that 


*  Trans.  Wagner  Inst.  Sci.  iii.  1892,  p. 290. 

t  Nomenclator  Zoologicus,  1842,  MoUusca,  p. 74. 

:j:  Description  g^ologique  cles  couches  des  environs  de  Paris. 

§  Voy.  Astrolabe,  Zool.  iii.  1834,  p.  123,  pl.lv.,  f.1-3. 

II  Journ.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xxii.  1888  (1889),  p.  150,  pl.iv.,  f.4;  pi. v. 

f.6';  pi.  vi.,  f.7. 

^  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.  (7),  Zool.  iii.  1887,  p.  142,  pi.  vii.,  f.28,  copied  Perrier 
Traits  Zool.  iv.  1897,  p.20.S6,  f.1473. 

**  Geol.  and  Paleont.  Queensland,  1892,  p.  642,  pi.  xxxvi.,  f.  14-16. 

+t  Rec.  Geol.  Survey  N.  S.  Wales,  ii.  1890,  p.48. 

tt  Journ.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  xxx.  1896(1897),  p.  169. 

§§  S.  Kent,  Great  Barrier  Reef,  1893,  p. 253. 

till  Rec.  Geol.  Survey  N.  S.  Wales,  ii.  1890,  p. 56. 

HIT  These  Proceedings  (2),  ix.  1895,  p.562. 


532  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

they  are  sold  for  food  under  the  name  of  "whelks"  in  the  Sydney 
markets. 

Eighteenth  centui^  writers  record  the  species  in  error  from 
New  Zealand  and  the  Friendly  Islands.  On  the  stren^^th  of  "A 
single  dead  specimen,"  it  has  been  ascribed  to  Lord  Howe  Island."**" 
Round  Sydney,  as  Angas  and  Whitelegge  remark, f  it  is  very 
abundant.  I  have  traced  it  north  to  the  edge  of  the  tropics, 
where  in  Port  Curtis  its  range  overlaps  that  of  its  relations, 
Pyrazus  semitrisulcatus  Bolten,  P.  Jluvidtilis  Potiez  &  Michaud, 
and  Telescopium  telescopium  Linn.  Here  the  shell  is  reduced  in 
size  as  if  struggling  against  adverse  conditions.  In  the  south  I 
have  taken  it  in  Twofold  Bay.  Pritchard  and  Gatliff  note  it  from 
MpJacoota  Inlet,  Victoria;!  and  Tate  &  May  from  Frederick 
Henry  Bay,  Tasmania. §  It  has  been  vaguely  reported  from 
South  Australia  by  Adcock.]] 

The  species  is  strictly  estuarine,  and  is  commonly  associated 
with  Area  lischkei.  It  crawls  among  the  roots  of  the  Avicennia 
mangrove  and  on  Zostera  flats  between  tide  marks.  A  young 
oyster  is  often  mounted  on  the  back  of  the  whelk  shell. ^ 

Mr.  F.  E.  Grant  has  kindl}^  prepared  for  me  the  accompanying 
view  of  the  radula.      He  notes  that  "a  shell  86mm.  in  length 


produced  a  radula  6  mm,  long  of  94  +  ?  rows,  and  0*95  mm.  broad 
when  the  uncini  are  folded  over  the  laterals.  Radula  of  normal 
T^nioglossa  form  2,  1,  1,  1,  2.  Rachidian  with  large  median 
cusp  and  two  small  laterals  on  either  side.       Lateral  teeth  with 

•  Etheridge,  Mem.  Austr.  Mus.  ii.  1889,  p.  23. 
t  Angas,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1867,  p. 208;  Whitelegge,  Journ.  Roy.  Soc.  N.  .•^. 
Wales,  xxiii.  1889,  p.266. 

X  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  n.s.  xiii.  1900,  p.  156. 

§  These  Proceedings,  xxvi.  1901,  p,.387. 

II  Hand  List  Aquatic  Mollusca  South  Australia,  1893,  p. 7. 

^  Saville  Kent,  Great  Barrier  Reef,  1 893,  pi.  xiv.  f .9. 


BY  C.   HEDLEY.  533 

first  cusp  small  followed  by  a  large  cusp,  which  is  again  succeeded 
by  about  four  or  five  small  cusps  in  a  diminishing  series.  Below 
these  there  is  a  prominent  truncated  lobe  reaching  slightly  below 
the  level  of  the  rachidian.  Both  uncini  are  curved  and  carry 
four  cusps." 

Egg-cluster  of  Purpqra  succincta  Martyn. 

(Plate  xxxiii.,  figs  31,  32.) 

During  an  excursion  of  the  Field  Naturalists  Club,  on  30th  Sept. 
1905,  several  specimens  of  Purpura  succincta  were  observed  in 
the  act  of  depositing  masses  of  ova  round  the  trunks  of  the 
Ascidian,  Cynthia  prceputialis,  at  low  tide  mark  on  Wyargine 
Point,  Middle  Harbour. 

As  no  account  of  these  has  appeared  in  literature,  I  give  an 
enlarged  view  of  a  single  unhatched  capsule,  and  a  sketch  of  a 
small  cluster.  Most  capsules  were  a  pale  cream  colour,  but  some 
were  stained  with  purple.  Each  stood  erect  on  a  common  mem- 
brane; the  height  of  each  was  about  9  mm.  and  the  longest 
diameter  about  6  mm.  When  tightly  packed  the  summits  were 
rhomboidal,  but  oblong  when  separate,  flat,  surrounded  by  a 
rim  which  is  often  emarginate  on  one  side.  Across  the  major 
diameter  is  a  streak  and  near  the  centre  a  clear  spot  which 
appears  at  first  sight  to  be  a  perforation. 

The  egg-capsule  of  an  unknown  mollusc  from  Tranquebar, 
figured  by  Lund,*  has  a  great  resemblance  to  that  now  illustrated. 

According  to  the  description  and  figures  of  C.  W.  Peach,  f  the 
capsules  of  Purpura  lapillus  differ  by  being  stalked  and  by 
having  a  caducous  operculum. 

The  young  shell,  dentition  and  operculum  have  already  been 
figured  in  these  Proceedings,  t 


*  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.  (2),  i.  Zool.  1834,  p.99,  pl.vi.,  f.2. 
t  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  xi.  1843,  p.28,  pi.  i.,  a.  f.1-3. 
:  Vol.  xxvi.  1902,  p.538,  pi.  xxix.,  f.l,  6,  8. 
35 


534  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

MiTROMORPHA    PALLIDULA,  11. sp. 

(Plate  xxxii.,  fig.26). 

Shell  small,  narrow  fusiform,  blunt  at  each  end.  Whorl& 
wound  obliquely,  five  including  a  protoconch  of  a  whorl  and  one- 
half.  Colour  dull  white;  on  the  last  whorl  are  two  narrow,  pale 
brown,  spiral  bands,  one  on  the  periphery,  the  other  between  it 
and  the  canal;  the  lower  one  is  more  defined  and  spreads  over 
five  ridges  and  furrows.  Sculpture  :  the  dome-shaped  protoconch 
is  carved  with  fine,  close,  radial  riblets,  and  concludes  with  a 
slight  varix.  Adult  sculpture  commences  suddenly  with  seven 
evenly  spaced  spiral  ridges  and  equal  furrows;  these  gradually 
increase  in  size  and  number.  On  the  last  whorl  the  ridges 
amount  to  twentj^-six,  growing  smaller  and  more  crowded  ante- 
riorly. The  ridges  are  square  in  section,  polished,  and  a  little 
narrower  than  the  flat  furrows,  which  are  radially  striated. 
Aperture  narrow,  columella  excavate,  anal  sinus  indistinguish- 
able, canal  a  notch.     Length  4-n,  breadth  1-5  mm. 

Hah. — Manly  Beach,  near  Sydney;  a  single  specimen  collected 
by  Miss  L.  Parkes. 

T  y  p  e.  —  Miss  Parkes  has  generously  presented  her  type  speci- 
men to  the  Australian  Museum. 

The  novelty  belongs  to  a  small  group  comprising  M.  brazieri 
Smith,  from  this  State,  M.  siibstriata  Suter,  and  M.  suteri 
Murdoch,  from  New  Zealand,  which  though  lacking  a  columellar 
fold,  has  been  referred  by  Smith*  to  Ilitromorpha.  This  group 
does  not  embrace  M.  alba  Petterd,  wrongly  thought  by  Tate  and 
Mayt  to  be  the  same  as  M.  brazieri. 

Since  writing  the  above,  Mr.  W.  L.  May  has  shown  me  a  speci- 
men taken  by  Mr.  A.  Morton  and  himself  in  24  fathoms  off  the 
mouth  of  the  Derwent  Pviver,  Tasmania. 

Pleurotoma  sterrha  Watson. 

Every  detail  of  figure,  description  and  locality  given  for  this 
species  so  exactly  corresponds  to  the  characters  mentioned  by 

*  Proc.  Zool.  iSoc.  1891,  p.  486. 
f  These  Proceedings,  xxvi.  1891,  p.456. 


BY  C.   HEDLEY.  535 

Smith  for  his  Pleurotoma  toyresiana^'  that  repeated  comparison 
confirms  me  in  the  belief  that  both  names  are  based  on  the  same 
shell.  If  this  be  so,  priority  must  be  awarded  to  Watson,  whose 
preliminary  description!  of  this  Torres  Straits  shell  appeared  on 
November  3rd,  1881. 

CoNus  coxENi  Brazier. 
Brazier,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1875,  p.34,  pi.  iv.  f.4. 
Messrs.  G.  Gross  and  C.  J.  Wild,  who  have  frequently  collected 
the  species  in  and  around  Moreton  Bay,  consider  that  Conns 
innotabilis  Smith |  intergrades  with  C.  coxeni.  They  showed  me  a 
series  of  intermediate  forms,  in  which  the  spire  was  more  or  less 
elevated  and  the  spiral  grooves  on  the  shoulder  were  more  or  less 
developed. 

Action  roseus,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxiii.,  fig. 42.) 

Shell  large,  ovate-acuminate,  rather  thin,  spire  acute.  Whorls 
seven,  round-shouldered,  parted  by  channelled  sutures,  surface 
smooth  and  glossy.  Colour  a  pale  flesh-pink,  darkest  behind  the 
aperture,  interrupted  by  a  broad  white  peripheral  band. 
Sculpture  :  narrow,  shallow  punctate  grooves  numbering  about 
thirty  on  the  last  whorl,  and  on  the  two  previous  six  each, 
crowded  at  the  base  and  wider  spaced  towards  the  suture,  separate 
smooth  flat-topped  narrow  spiral  riblets.  Base  perforate  excavate 
around  the  umbilicus.  Aperture  half  the  total  length  of  the 
shell,  rounded  below;  columella  broad  with  a  reflected  margin; 
plication  not  prominent;  inner  lip  spreading  a  sheet  of  callus  on 
the  base  of  the  previous  whorl.      Length  15,  breadth  8  mm. 

Hah. — I  have  only  seen  two  specimens,  one  the  type,  was 
gathered  by  Mr.  J.  Brazier  in  the  dyke-trough  at  Wyargine 
Point,  Middle  Harbour,  Sydney.  The  other  I  collected  in 
August,  1900,  near  Eden,  N.  S.  Wales. 

Type  . — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

*  Zool.  Coll.  Alert,  1884,  p.37,  pi.  iv.,  f.D,  d1. 

t  Journ.  Linn,  Soc.  xv.,  p.426. 

\  Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1891,  p.487,  pi.  xl.,  f.l. 


536  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,  IX., 

Superficially  the  novelty  has  a  general  resemblance  to  the 
European  A.  tornatilis  Linn.  From  A.  austrinus  Watson,  the 
only  species  yet  recorded  from  this  coast,  it  is  easily  separated  by 
its  large  size,  different  colour  and  sculpture.  It  is  also  twice 
the  size  of  any  of  the  genus  described  from  Australian  Tertiary 
beds. 

There  is  a  closely  allied  species  from  110  fathoms  off  the  Great 
Barrier  Island,  New  Zealand,  which  my  friends  Messrs.  R. 
Murdoch  and  H.  Suter  are  about  to  describe  as  A.  cratericulatus. 
The  New  Zealand  shell  differs  by  being  much  smaller,  with 
sharper  sculpture,  the  grooves  being  broader  and  deeper  and 
crossed  by  more  distant  and  elevated  threads. 

Tethys  norfolkensis  Sowerby. 
(Plate  xxxiii.,  figs. 33,  34). 
Aplysia  norfolkensis  Sowerby,  Conch.   Icon.,  xvii.,  1869,  pi.  x., 
fig.42. 

This  species  has  not  been  found,  as  the  name  falsely  implies,  at 
Norfolk  Island.  The  type  was  taken  by  Brazier  in  Sydney 
Harbour.  As  the  species  has  hitherto  rested  on  the  shell  alone, 
I  take  the  opportunity  of  supplying  a  figure  and  description  of  an 
animal  procured  during  an  excursion  of  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club 
to  Balmoral. 

The  animal  in  extension  was  about  40mm.  long,  but,  as  its 
shell  was  smaller  than  others  I  have  seen,  I  suppose  it  to  be  a 
small  specimen.  In  colour  it  was  the  brown  of  the  kelp  weed, 
spotted  with  scattered  white  dots,  and  edged  with  black  along 
the  margins  of  the  lobes  and  on  the  tentacles.  Parapodial  lobes 
short,  united  behind,  with  digitate  margin,  free  from  the  siphon. 
The  crown  of  the  shell  protruded  through  an  opening  in  the 
centre  of  the  mantle.  On  the  hind  right  side  the  mantle  is 
produced  into  a  large  orifice  enclosed  by  upstanding  lobes. 
From  the  shell  the  mantle  is  rayed  with  brown  and  white.  The 
branchiae  in  life  are  entirely  concealed.  Tail  rather  long.  The 
animal  kept  in  confinement  did  not  use  its  lobes  for  swimming, 
and  emitted  purple  when  annoyed. 


BY  C.   HEDLEY.  537 

The  exposure  of  the  shell  and  production  of  mantle  in  a  tube 
connects  this  with  the  European  T.  depilans  Linn.,  and  con- 
sequently places  it  in  the  typical  section  of  Tethys  as  restricted 
by  Pilsbry.* 

The  shell  does  not  differ  from  that  of  A.  brunnea  Hutton,t  nor, 
if  T  can  trust  my  recollection  of  the  type,  from  that  of  A.  tryoni 
Meinertz.  Probably  these  and  others  will  be  reduced  to  the 
synonymy  of  2\  no^-folkensis  when  they  are  carefully  re-examined. 

Cassidula  zonata  H.  and  A.  Adams. 

(Plate  xxxiii.,  fig.30.) 

No  illustration  has  yet  appeared  of  this  species,  a  deficiency 
which  I  now  supply.  The  animal  occurs  under  sticks  and  stones 
near  high  water  mark  along  the  edge  of  mangrove  swamps, 
associated  with  Ophic'ardelus,  Assiminea,  Tatea  and  Salinator. 
It  was  originally  described  from  Sydney.  |  A  better  account 
was  afterwards  framed  by  PfeifFer.§  It  was  redescribed  by 
Tenison  Woods||  as  Auricula  {Rhodostortia)  dyeri^  from  the  north 
coast  of  Tasmania.  This  name  was  recognised  as  a  synonym  by 
W.  F.  Petterd.U  The  species  was  reported  from  Port  Mackay, 
Queensland,  by  Schmeltz,"*^"^  but  I  have  not  myself  traced  it  north 
of  Moreton  Bay.  From  the  last  monograph  of  the  Auriculidse 
in  the  Conchylien  Cabinet,  the  species  has  been  entirely  omitted. 
The  example  figured  is  from  the  Lane  Cove,  and  is  10  mm.  in 
length. 

Pinna  serrata  Soweriiy. 

The  description  of  this  species  by  G.  B.  Sowerbyff  preceded 
the  figure!  I  by  a  few  months.      No  locality  was  given  in  the  first 


*  Man.  Conch,  xvi.  1895,  p  67. 

t  Trans.  N.Z.  Inst.  vii.  1875,  p.279,  pi.  xxi. 

X  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1854  (1855],  p.32. 

§  Cat.  Auricul.  Brit.  Mus.  1857,  p. 84. 

II  Proc.  Roy.  Soc  Tas.  1875  (1876).  p.  158. 

%  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1879,  p.  70. 

**  Mus.  Godeffroy,  Cat.  v.  1874,  p. 88. 

ft  Cat.  Shells  coll.  Tankerville,  1825,  Suppl.  p. v. 

\\  J.  deC.  Sowerby,  Genera  rec.  foss.  Shells,  Pt.  xxvi.  1825,  pi.  102. 


$38  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

account,  but  Hanley*  later  ascribed  the  species  to  New  South 
Wales,  a  statement  which  though  accurate  at  the  time,  ceased  to 
be  so  after  the  political  separation  of  Queensland. 

Reeve  introduced  confusion  by  describing  this  shell  firstly!  as 
Pinna  serra,  presumably  a  new  species,  from  Moreton  Bay,  and 
secondlyl  as  P.  serrata  Solander,  from  the  West  Indies.  The 
species  is  not  included  in  any  West  Indian  catalogue  to  which  I 
have  access. 

This  mistake  dislocated  the  literary  history  of  the  species. 
Subsequent  authors,  von  Martens,§  Smith, ||  and  Clessin^  lost 
si<^ht  of  G.  B.  Sowerby's  original  name,  and  have  used  P.  serrata 
Reeve,  for  the  species. 

The  shell  seems  to  be  a  rare  one.  The  locality  of  Moreton  Bay 
has  been  recently  confirmed  by  Mr.  G.  Gross,  and  I  have  seen  an 
example  from  Keppel  Bay. 

Standella  nicobarica  Gmelin. 

The  first  regular  binomial  given  to  this  species  was  that  of 
Mactra  nicobarica,  which  Gmelin**  founded  on  an  illustration 
by  Chemnitz. ft  Several  subsequent  writers  appeared  to  have 
confused  this  Oriental  species  with  the  European  S.  rugosa 
Gmelin.  But  Reeve  figured  Gmelin's  M.  nicohaj'ica  under  the 
title  of  Mactra  cegyptiaca.  X  %  For  a  clue  to  this  complication  I  am 
indebted  to  a  reference  by  Dr.  Dall.§§ 

The  only  Australian  record  of  this  species  is  by  Angas,||||  who 
reported  it,  under  the  name  of  Merope  cbgyptiaca,  from  Lake 
Macquarie,  N.S.W^.  I  can  add  that  it  extends  thence  north- 
ward along  the  whole  Queensland  coast. 

*  Kecent  Shells,  1843,  p. 254. 
tConch.  Icon.  xi.  Pinna,  1S58,  pi.  xxiii.,  f.43. 

X  Op.  cit.  pl.xxxix.  f.65. 
§  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  [Z],  xvii.  1866,  p.86. 

il  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1891,  p.433. 

IT  Conch.  Cab.  viii.  Pt.  i.  1891,  p.60,  pl.28,  f.2. 

•  •  Syst.  Nat.  xiii.  1790,  p.  3261. 

ft  Conch.  Cab.  vi.  1782,  pi.  xxiv.  f.237. 

Xt  Conch.  Icon,  viii.,  Mactra,  pi.  xx.,  f.  112,  1854. 

§§  Trans.  Wagner  Free  Inst.  Science,  iii.  1898,  p. 887. 

nil  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1871,  p.  100. 


BY  C.   HEDLEY.  539 

What  von  Martens  figured"*^  under  the  name  of  Lutraria 
{Merope)  nicobarica  Gmel.,  appears  to  be  a  different  species. 

ECTORISMA    GRANULATA  Tate. 

Tate,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Australia,  xv.  1892,p.l27,pl.i.,fig.3,3a. 

A  living  specimen  of  this  was  taken  by  Mr.  G.  H.  Halligan  and 
myself  16  miles  east  of  Wollongong  in  100  fathoms,  and  again 
by  Mr.  W.  F.  Petterd  and  myself  27  miles  east  of  Sydney  in  300 
fathoms.  It  had  not  before  occurred  beyond  the  coast  of  South 
Australia. 

Crassatellites  kingicola  Lamarck. 

In  the  last  part  of  this  series  I  discussed  the  nomenclature  of 
this  species,  and  concluded  that  the  name  of  C.  j^onderosus 
Gmelin  ought  to  be  applied  to  it.  Australian  naturalists  have 
since  benefited  by  an  examination  of  the  question  by  Mr.  E.  A. 
Smith,  t  With  greater  skill  in  the  elucidation  of  such  problems, 
and  with  material  and  literature  inaccessible  to  me,  Mr.  Smith 
shows  that  the  southern  origin  ascribed  by  its  introducer  was 
false,  and  that  Gmelin's  C.  ponderosus  is  the  Grignon  fossil 
C.  tumida  Lamarck.  This  decision  permits  the  use  of  C.  kingicola 
Lamarck  for  the  Australian  shell. 

Dr.  J.  C.  Verco  has  recently  discussed  |  the  range  and  variation 
of  the  species  in  South  Australia. 

CONDYLOCARDIA  OVATA,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxi.,  figs. 5,  6.) 

Shell  rather  large  for  the  genus,  glossy,  thin,  translucent, 
obHquely  ovate.  Colour  white.  Sculpture  :  about  fourteen 
concentric  wave  ribs,  more  or  less  developed,  close  microscopic 
concentric  threads  oblique  to  the  main  sculpture.  Prodissoconch 
prominent,  no  free  edge,  a  gently  swelling  central  imperforate 
boss,    finely   concentrically    corrugate.       Muscular    impressions 

*  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  Zool.  xxi.  1887,  p.217,  pi.  xvi.,  f.7a,  h. 

t  Journ.  of  Malacology  xii.  1905,  p. 26. 

X  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Austr.  xxix.  1905,  p.  169. 


540  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

distinct,  edge  of  valve  not  plicated,  thin.  Specimen  drawn; 
height  1*35,  length  1-55,  diameter  of  single  valve  0-45mm. 
Another  specimen;  length  1-85,  height  l-4mm. 

Hah. — Manly  Beach,  in  shell  sand  (Miss  L.  Parkes),  several 
specimens. 

T  5^p  e. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

Half  of  this  genus  have  radial  sculpture,  half  concentric. 
From  the  latter  the  novelty  is  distinguished  by  large  size  and  more 
oval  form. 

On  the  genus  Cyamiomactra. 

A  preliminary  account  of  this  genus  was  given  by  Felix 
Bernard  *  based  on  material  dredged  by  Filhol  off  Stewart 
Island,  New^  Zealand.  The  petaloid  cardinal  of  the  left  valve 
suggested  to  him  a  Mactroid  relationship,  but  he  acknowledged 
that  the  genus  could  not  be  regarded  as  an  arrested  phase  of  the 
Mactroid  model.  The  untimely  death  of  this  brilliant  writer 
deprived  the  world  of  the  full  account  of  the  development  and 
affinities  of  Cyamiomactra  on- which  he  was  then  engaged. 

The  next  reference  to  the  subject  was  by  Dr.  Dall,  w4io 
grouped  f  this  genus  in  the  Leptonacea. 

Bernard's  account  was  rather  generic  than  specific,  and  it  was 
after  much  difficulty  that  1  detected  the  species  in  Stewart  Island 
material  kindly  supplied  me  by  Mr.  A.  Hamilton.  To  facilitate 
recognition  of  it  the  original  account  is  now  supplemented  by  a 
drawing  of  the  shell  (plate  xxxi.,  figs. 7,  8). 

Its  range  in  New  Zealand  has  been  by  Murdoch  extended  to 
Whangaroa  Harbour  in  the  North  Island.  | 

Laying  stress  on  the  entire  pallial  line,  and  inviting  comparison 
between  the  hinge  of  C yamiornacti^a  and  that  of  Cuna,  1  would 
suggest  another  relationship  for  this  puzzling  genus,  and  class  it 
in  the  family  CrassatellitidcB.  It  also  seems  to  me  that  another 
aberrant  genus  Hemidonax,  which  has  been  referred  to  many 
different  positions   in  the   taxonomic   scale,  is  a  kindred  form, 

*  Bull.  Mus.  Hist.  Nat.  1897,  p.  311,  fig. 2. 

t  Trans.  Wagn.  Inst,  ill.,  1900,  p.lll6. 

t  Trans.  N.Z.  Inst,  xxxvii.,  1904  (1905),  p. 231. 


BY  C.   HKDLEY.  54l 

and  may  likewise  find  an  appropriate  abiding  place  in  the 
Crassatellitidce. 

Enlarging  Cyamiomactra  by  the  addition  of  two  Australian 
species  the  genus  may  be  thus  reviewed  : — 

C.  iiroblematica,  larger,  compressed,  no  ribbing. 

G.  mactroides,  smaller,  inflated,  ribbed  from  end  to  end. 

C.  communis,  smaller,  inequilateral,  ovate,  ribbed  medially. 

C.  mactroides  Tate  and  May*  was  originally  described  from 
Tasmania.  Additional  drawings  of  the  shell  and  hinge  (plate 
xxxi.,  figs.  9,  10)  are  now  tendered  in  support  of  the  transfer- 
ence from  Cyamium  to  Cyamiomactra.  As  I  recognise  it,  the 
species  varies  so  widely  that  on  first  acquaintance  the  extremes 
appeared  worthy  of  specific  differentiation.  In  shape  it  is  more 
or  less  inflated,  a  very  swollen  form  being  expressed  by  Tate  and 
May's  figure.  In  colour  it  is  white  or  white  tinged  at  end  and 
apex  with  brown,  or  all  brown,  or  entirely  bright  pink. 
Specimens  from  the  northern  extremity  of  its  range  are  dwarfed. 

The  following  localities  are  known  to  me  : — Eagle  Hawk  Neck, 
Tasmania  (Mrs.  C.  Hedley),  Western  Port,  Victoria  (J.  H. 
Gatliff),  Wreck  Bay,  N.S.W.  (self),  off  Port  Kembla,  N.S.W.,  in 
63-75  fath.  ("Thetis"),  ocean  beaches  around  Sydney  (Miss  L. 
Parkes),  Capricorn  Group,  Queensland  (self). 

Cyamiomactra  communis,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxi.,  figs.  11,  12,13.) 

Shell  elongate-ovate,  shallow,  inequilateral,  the  posterior  end 
produced,  the  anterior  rounded.  Colour  dorsally  dark  cinnamon- 
brown,  which  gradually  fades  into  translucent  ice  white,  medially 
a  dozen  narrow  opaque  rays,  which  do  not  represent  a  thickening 
either  within  or  without  but  are  a  denser  substance  contrasting 
with  the  translucent  ground.  They  fall  short  of  the  umbo. 
Prodissoconch  smooth,  oval,  rather  flat  and  well  defined.     Sculp- 


*  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.A.,  1900,  p. 102;  these  Proceedings,  xxvi.,  p.433, 
pi.  xxvii.,  f.l03. 


542  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,  IX., 

ture :  dense,  fine,  regular  concentric  threads.  On  the  inner 
ventral  margin  are  a  dozen  small  tubercles  answering  to  the 
opaque  rays.  Length  2-1,  height  1*5,  depth  of  single  valve 
0-25  mm. 

ffah. — Manly  Beach,  near  Sydney,  type  (Miss  L.  Parkes); 
Wreck  Bay,  N.S.W,  (self);  Port  Fairy,  Victoria  (the  late  Rev. 
T.  Whan). 

Type. — Miss  Parkes  has  generously  promised  to  present  the 
type  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

MONTACUTA    SEMIRADIATA  Tate. 

(Plate  xxxi.,  figs.l,  2.) 
Tate,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  1888,  p.63.  pi.  xL,  f.2. 
This  species  is  externally  so  like  what  I  have  just  described 
as  Cyamiomactra  conwiunis  that  Prof.  Tate  distributed  C.  com- 
munis to  his  friends  under   the   label  of  M.   semiradiata.     To 
better  elucidate  the  difference,  I  have  by  the  kindness  of  Dr.  J.  C. 
Verco  been  enabled  to  figure  one  of  the  type-lot  of  M.  semiradiata. 
M.  semiradiata  does  not  appear  to  me  to  be  happily  placed, 
but  I  am  not  now  prepared  to  decide  on  a  better  generic  location. 
Perhaps  it  is  related  to  Poromya. 

Neolepton  rostellatum  Tate. 
(Plate  xxxi  ,  figs. 3,  4.) 

Kellia  rostellata  Tate,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  xi.  1888  (1889), 
p.63,  pi.  xi.,  f.l4. 

Dr.  Verco  has  kindly  lent  me  the  type  specimens  of  this  species. 
From  the  hinge,  now  for  the  first  time  figured,  it  seems  that  the 
species  was  not  properly  classed  in  Kellia,  and  I  propose  to 
transfer  it  to  Neolepton.  The  latter  genus  has  not  hitherto 
embraced  an  Australian  example,  but  two  species  from  New 
Zealand  were  assigned  to  it  by  Bernard. 

The  type  series  of  Prof.  Tate  exhibits  considerable  variation  in 
colour  and  contour.  A  more  oblong  shell  than  that  originally 
fisfured  is  selected  for  illustration. 


BY  C.  HEDLEY.  543 

BORNIA    LEPIDA,  n.Sp. 

(Plate  xxxii.,  figs. 22,  23.) 

Shell  of  rather  variable  outline,  oblong,  subequilateral,  com- 
pressed, umbo  prominent,  ventral  margin  perceptibly  sinuate. 
Colour  uniform  pale  brown.  Sculpture  :  fine,  dense,  radiating 
threads,  interrupted  by  concentric  growth  lines.  Depth  of  single 
valve  1,  height  4,  length  6-3  mm. 

^a6.— Manly  Beach  (Miss  L.  Parkes),  Watson's  Bay  (H.  L. 
Kesteven),  Maroubra,  Balmoral,  and  Wreck  Bay  (C.  Hedley), 
and  Long  Bay  (H.  S.  Mort).  Not  uncommon  in  shell  sand  on 
the  ocean  beaches  near  Sydney. 

Type. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

The  novelty  is  very  like  B.  radiata^  from  111  fathoms  off  Cape 
Byron,  but  differs  by  being  almost  equilateral. 

Kellia  suborbicularis  Montagu. 

Mya  suhorbicidaris  Montagu,  Test.  Brit.,  1804,  pp.39,  564, 
pi.  xxvi.,  fig.  6. 

Modern  writers  have  developed  a  world-wide  range  for  this 
species,  but  it  has  so  far  escaped  inclusion  in  Australian  catalogues. 
Hanley  f  considered  that  Amphidesma  physoides  Lamarck  % 
described  from  King  George's  Sound,  W".A.,  was  identical  with 
Montagu's  species.  He  noted  later  that  the  type  oiA.  physoides, 
which  he  had  examined  in  the  Paris  Museum  in  1843,  was, 
according  to  Recluz,  destroyed  in  1856.§ 

Smith  has  repeatedly  ||  expressed  his  conviction  that  Ei-ycina 
rotunda  DeshayesU  from  More  ton  Bay,  Queensland,  cannot  be 
separated  from  K.  suborbicularis. 


*  Hedley,  Records  Austr.  Mus.  vi.  1905,  p. 48,  f.l2. 

t  Cat.  Kecent  Shells,  1843,  p.  43. 

X  Anim.  s.  Vert,  v.,  1818,  p. 493. 

§0p.  cit.,  1856,  p.  343. 

II  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.   (6),  x.,   1892,  p.  132  and  Proc.  Malac.  Soc.  v. 

1902,  p.  163. 

IT  Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1855,  p.  181. 


544  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,   IX., 

JoANNisiELLA  sPHiERicuLA  Deshayes. 
(Plate  xxxii..  figs.18,  19,  20,  21.) 

A  small  bivalve  from  the  Parramatta  River  was  recorded  and 
described  by  G.  F.  Angas  *  under  the  name  of  Mysia  sphcericula 
or  Diplodonta  sphcericula  Deshayes.  He  did  not  as  usual  quote 
a  reference,  and  apparent^  regarded  the  name  as  an  unpublished 
one. 

Subsequent  authors  who  referred  to  this  species  and  failed  to 
trace  the  name  to  its  source  are,  Try  on,  f  Tapparone  Canefri  % 
and  Pritchard  and  Gatliff.g  The  latter,  who  extended  the  range 
of  the  shell  to  Victoria,  indeed  substituted  Angas  for  Deshayes 
as  the  author  of  the  species.  Though  Deshayes  never  described 
a  Diplodonta  under  this  title,  it  is  obvious  that  his  Cyrenella 
sphceincida  ||  from  Moreton  Bay,  Queensland,  was  based  on  the 
species  under  discussion. 

The  thin  swollen  shell,  epidermis  and  other  characters,  do  not 
suit  the  usual  classification  of  this  in  Diplodonta,  but  appear  to 
claim  for  it  admittance  to  a  genus  Joatmisiella,  proposed  by  Dall^ 
for  an  Oriental  group,  typified  by  Cyrenoida  oblonga  Hanley.** 

As  this  species  has  not  yet  been  illustrated,  I  add  drawings  of 
a  specimen  from  Sydney  Harbour,  18mm.  long  and  16mm.  high. 

Philobrya  parallelogramma,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxii.,  figs.  14,  15,  16.) 

Shell  rather  large  for  the  genus,  solid,  considerably  inflated, 
very  inequilateral;  in  outline  the  younger  shells  are  nearly  square^ 
but  the  older  approach  a  parallelogram.  Colour  white.  Sculp- 
ture :  seventeen  strong  radiating  ribs  which  undulate  the  margin; 
a  concentric   system  develops    cross-bars    in    the    furrows    and 


*Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1867,  p.  927. 

tProc.  Acad.  Nat   Sci.  Philad.  1872,  p.95. 

Ij:  Acad.  R.  Sc.  Torino  (2)  xxviii.,  1873,  p.  2.38. 

§Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict.  (2j  xvii.,  1904,  p.224. 

II  Deshayes,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1854  (1855),  p.340. 

•i  Nautilus  ix.,  1895,  p.78. 
•*  Hanley,  Recent  Shells,  1844,  pi.  xv.,  fig  6. 


BY  C.   HEDLEY.  545 

nodules  on  the  ribs.  The  rim  of  the  prodissoconch  stands 
out  from  the  summit  of  the  valve;  it  is  semicircular,  the  edge 
turned  up,  the  interior  tumid,  and  the  centre  umbilicate.  Length 
2-45,  height  3*25,  depth  of  single  valve  I '3  mm. 

Hah.  —  In  shell  sand  on  Manly  Beach,  numerous  specimens. 
(Miss  L.  Parkes). 

T  y  p  e. — To  be  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum. 

By  its  sculpture  the  present  form  is  well  distinguished  from 
other  Australian  species.  But  it  closely  resembles  P.  costata 
Bernard,  from  South  New  Zealand,  which  slightly  differs  by  fewer 
and  bolder  radial  ribs. 

While  on  the  subject  of  Philohrya  I  may  take  this  opportunity 
of  observing  that  the  genus  Limarca  of  Tate*  is  synonymous. 
Prof.  Howchin  has  very  kindly  permitted  me  to  examine  the 
types  preserved  in  the  School  of  Mines,  Adelaide.  Mr.  J. 
Dennant  also  lent  me  co-types  received  from  the  author.  From 
both  sets  it  is  apparent  that  in  creating  the  genus  Prof.  Tate 
used  two  species  of  different  genera,  one  a  Philohrya,  the  other  a 
Limopsis.  But  the  example  labelled  "  type  "  is  the  Philohrya, 
and  to  it  rather  than  to  the  Limopsis  is  applicable  the  epithet 
"  angustifrons,"  and  the  opening  descriptive  phrase,  "  very 
inequilateral."  The  Limopsis  is  an  aberrant  form,  and  probably 
undescribed.  Before  returning  his  example  to  Mr.  Dennant, 
I  took  the  accompanying  sketch  (Plate  xxxii.,  fig.  17)  of  the 
Limopsis  hinge. 

Arca  venusta  Dunker. 

Dunker,  Zeitschr.  f.  Mai.  1852,  p. 59;  id.  Novitat.  Conch.  1867, 
p. 91,  pi.  xxxi.,  f.l. 

This  bivalve  is  an  addition  to  the  Australian  fauna.  As 
separate  valves  it  occurs  frequently  on  the  beach  at  Mapoon, 
entrance  to  the  Batavia  River;  and  I  noticed  it  again  at  Karumba, 
mouth  of  the  Norman  River,  Gulf  of  Carpentaria,  Queensland. 
Dr.  E.  Lamy,  of  Paris,  a  specialist  on  this  genus,  has  kindly 
confirmed  my  identification. 

*  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Austr.  viii.  p.  135,  pi.  viii.,  f.5,  a,  h. 


546  STUDIES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  MOLLUSCA,  IX. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  XXXL-XXXIIL 

Plate  XX xi. 

Figs.  1,  2. — Montacuta  semiradiata  Tate;  hinge  and  valve. 
Figs.  3,  4. — NeoUpton  rostellatum  Tate;  hinge  and  valve. 
Figs.  5,  6. — Oondylocardia  ovata  Hedley;  hinge  and  valve. 
Figs.  7,  S. — Gyamiomactra  problematica  Bernard;  hinge  and  valve. 
Figs.  9,  10. — Cyamiomactra  mactroides  Tate  and  May;  hinge  and  valve. 
Figs.  11,  12,  13. — Gyamiomactra  communis  Hedley;  hinge  and  valve,  and 
exterior  and  interior. 

Plate  xxxii. 

Figs.  14,  15,  16. — Philohrya  parallelogramma  Hedley;    young  and   adult 

valve,  and  prodissoconch. 
Fig.  17. — Lima7xa  angustifrons  T&te  {jjartim);  hinge. 
Figs.  18,  19,  20,  21. — Joannisiella  sphrericida  Deshayes;  hinge  and  valve; 

full  and  profile. 
Figs.  22,  23. — Bornia  kpida  Hedley;  valve;  full  and  profile. 
Fig.  24. — Bissoa  emblematica  Hedley. 
Fig.  25. — Rissoa  piUvillus  Hedley. 
Fig.  26. — Mitromorpha  pallidvla  Hedley. 
Figs.  27,  28,  29. — A'isim,i7iea  tasmanica  Ten.  Woods;    shell  and  operculum; 

exterior  and  interior. 

Plate  xxxiii. 
Fig.  30. — Gorssidida  zonata  A.  Adams. 
Figs.   31,  32. — Purpura  succincta  Marty n;  cluster    of   ova  and  magnified 

single  capsule. 
Figs.  33,  34 — Tethys  norfolkensis  Sowerby;  from  the  side  and  from  above. 
Fig.  35.  — Diala  translucida  Hedley. 
Fig.  36. — Diala  monile  A.  Adams. 

Figs.  37,  ^^.—Emargintda  dilecta  A.  Adams;  full  and  profile. 
Figs.  39,  40. — Eidimella  anabathron  Hedley;  shell  and  apex  (magnified). 
Fig.  41. — Odostomia  opaca  Hedley. 
Fig.  42. — ActcEon  roseus  Hedley. 
Fig.  43. — Leiostraca  inusta  Hedley. 


547 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  THREE  NEW  SPECIES  OF 
AUSTROGOMPHUS  [Neuroptera  :  Odonata]. 

By    R.  J.  TiLLYARD,  B.A. 

(Plate  xxxiv.) 

The  Australian  species  of  the  subfamily  Gomphinse  are  com- 
prised in  the  three  genera  Aust7'ogomphus,  Ictinus  and  Petalura. 
The  two  latter  contain  one  species  apiece;  of  the  former,  twelve 
species  have  already  been  described.  Three  new  species  are  now 
added,  all  of  which  come  from  Northern  Queensland. 

1.   AusTROGOMPHUS  ARBUSTORUM,  n.sp.  (  =  proselytus  Selys,  MSS.) 
(Plate  xxxiv.,  fig.l). 

(J.  Total  length,  38  mm.;  abdomen,  28  mm.:  wings,  fore  23mm., 
hind  2 1-5  mm. 

Wings. — Neuratio7i  black;  memhranule  nil;  jHerostigma 
nearly  3  mm.,  fairly  broad,  black.     Nodal  Indicator    10-12     7-9 

7-9     7-9 

Head. — Occipital  ridge  I  mm.,  black  with  a  large  triangular 
yellow  spot.  Vertex  black  with  a  round  excavate  yellow  spot. 
Ocelli  in  a  triangle,  front  transparent,  other  two  black.  Antennce 
short,  black,  basal  joint  short,  thickened,  a  small  yellow  spot  on 
inner  side  of  base.  Eyes  brown.  Front  low  and  narrow,  yellow 
with  a  black  band,  widest  in  the  middle,  across  the  clypeal 
suturCj  and  extending  on  to  the  postclypeus.  Clypeus  yellow. 
Lahrum  yellow,  upper  suture  black;  often  with  a  thin  vertical 
transverse  central  line  reaching  half-way  across  from  above. 
Labium  and  mandibles  yellow;  mouth  edged  with  dark  brown. 

T  h  o  r  a  x. — Prothorax  black  with  a  transverse  yellow  line  and 
a  central  yellow  spot.  Meso-  and  metathorax  black,  marked  with 
yellow  as  follows  : — A  pair  of  dorsal  spots  next  prothorax;  behind 
these   an  interrupted  yellow  collar  formed   by   two    transverse 


548  DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTROGOMPIIUS, 

elongated  spots  separated  by  the  front  of  the  dorsal  ridge;  behind 
these  the  dorsal  ridge  is  elevated  and  marked  for  about  1*5  mm. 
with  a  tine  yellow  line;  fork  of  ridge  also  yellow.  On  either 
side  of  ridge  an  elongate-oval  humeral  yellow  spot;  below  this 
an  irregular  subhumeral  yellow  band  enlarged  into  a  small  round 
spot  in  front  of  wing-joins;*  then  another  broader  lateral  band 
separated  from  the  last  by  an  irregular  band  of  black  ground- 
colour; next  a  narrow  and  very  irregular  black  band  along  the 
lateral  suture,  followed  by  a  broad  yellow  band  and  another 
irrec'ular  black  band.  Rest  of  sides  and  underside  yellow. 
Wing-joins  black  spotted  with  yellow;  scuta  and  scutell^e  yellow. 
Legs  :  coxee  yellow;  one  half  of  profemora  and  one-third  of  meso- 
and  metafemora  yellow  underneath;  elbows  with  a  bright  yellow 
spot;  rest  black. 

Abdomen. — 1-2  swollen,  3-6  very  narrow,  7-10  clubbed. 
Colour  :  1  yellow  with  a  transverse  basal  black  band;  2  black 
above,  a  yellow  stripe  along  the  dorsum,  not  quite  the  length  of 
the  segment;  sides  yellow,  carrying  a  pair  of  small  yellow  spurs; 
3-6  black  with  a  transverse  basal  yellow  band;  a  thin  yellow  line 
along  the  dorsum,  not  as  long  as  the  segment,  and  decreasing  in 
length  from  3-6;  low  down  on  each  side  a  central  yellowish  spot; 
7  black  with  the  transverse  basal  yellow  band,  and  a  yellow  spot 
low  down  on  each  side  about  one-third  from  the  base  and  joining 
the  basal  band  below;  8  black,  a  large  basal  yellow  spot  on  either 
side,  suture  touched  with  yellow;  9  same  as  8,  but  shorter, 
spots  smaller,  and  with  a  transverse  anal  yellow  line;  10  yellow 
above  with  a  basal  black  line  and  two  slanting  black  dorsal  lines, 
sides  and  underside  black.     Ventral  carina  blackish. 

Appendage  s. — Sicperior  rather  short,  1  mm.,  slightly 
separate  at  bases,  subcornute,  divergent.  Colour  yellow,  tips 
touched  with  dark  brown.  At  the  bases,  underneath,  is  a  pair 
of  sharp  curved  claws  reaching  downwards  between  the  two 
parts  of  the  inferior  appendage.     Inferior  short,  bifid,  the  two 


*This  term  is  used  as  the  equivalent  of   "  naissances  des  ailes  "  of  M. 
Ren^  Martin. 


BY  R.   J.  TILLYARD.  549 

parts  widely  separate;  tips  rather  thick  and  blunt,  upcurved; 
yellowish-brown. 

9.  Yery  similar  to  (J,  differing  as  follows  : — Ahdome7i  broader, 
more  cylindrical,  less  clubbed;  2  with  a  large  diamond-shaped 
dorsal  yellow  spot;  no  spurs;  10  dull  olive-green,  short,  projecting 
below  between  appendages.  Appe7idages  short,  about  1  mn),, 
subcorneal,  wide  apart,  parallel,  bluntly  pointed,  yellowish;  the 
projection  of  seg.  10  appearing  as  an  olive-coloured  tubercle 
between  them,  and  nearly  as  long. 

H  a  b. — Kuranda,  N.Q.;  December-January;  local. 

This  species  appears  to  be  confined  to  a  small  area  on  the 
ranges  about  Kuranda.  It  does  not  occur  higher  up  at  Atherton, 
and  below  the  range  I  took  only  isolated  specimens. 

It  is  abundant  along  the  sandy  banks  of  the  River  Barron, 
where  I  took  it  resting  high  up  on  the  bushes  and  small  trees 
along  the  river  bank.  It  never  appears  to  settle  on  the  ground, 
but  a  dozen  or  more  might  often  be  seen  resting  on  one  small 
tree.  When  disturbed  it  generally  flies  off  with  the  wind  to 
another  tree.  It  is  also  fond  of  flying  in  and  out  about  the  trees 
on  warm  still  days. 

Note. — M.  Rene  Martin  informs  me  that  there  is  in  the 
collection  of  Baron  de  Selys-Longchamps  a  specimen,  undescribed, 
but  named  A.  proselytus,  which  he  considers  identical  with  this 
species;  locality  uncertain,  but  supposed  to  be  Queensland. 

2.   AUSTROGOMPHUS    ARENARIUS,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxiv.,  fig. 2). 
(J.  Total  length,  49-51  mm.;  abdomen,  35-37  mm.  :  wings,  fore 
29  mm.,  hind  27  mm. 

Wings.  —  Costa  pale  yellowish  outwards  to  tip,  rest  of  neura- 
tion  black.  Wings  often  slightly  suffused  with  brownish  all  over. 
Memhranule  nil.  Pterostigma  fairly  broad,  3  mm.  long,  covering 
5  cellules,  black.      Xodal  Indicator  \  13      8-9 

10     7-10 

Head. — Occipital  ridge   1mm.,  black,   marked  with  a  large 
yellow  spot  above.      Vertex  black,  a  pair  of  small  tubercles  behind 
ocelli,   and  behind   these  a  curved  yellow   plate.     Ocelli  black, 
36 


550  DESCEIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTROGOMPHCS, 

collinear.  Eyes  brown,  edged  with  yellowish  beneath.  Antennce 
thick,  short,  black,  with  a  yellow  line  on  inner  side  of  base. 
Front  greenish-yellow.  ClypcMs  greenish-yellow,  separated  from 
the  front  by  a  black  band  in  the  suture,  broadest  in  the  middle. 
Lahrum  greenish-yellow,  bordered  all  round  with  black.  Lahnim 
dull  yellowish.  Mandibles  yellow;  7)io7Uh  thickly  edged  with 
black. 

Thorax. — Prothorax  black  with  a  yellow  collar  in  front; 
behind,  an  irregular  transverse  yellow  band,  thickened  at  sides 
and  curving  outwards  in  the  middle  so  as  to  embrace  two  small 
round  dorsal  yellow  spots,  very  close  together.  Meso-  and  meta- 
thorax  black  above,  marked  with  bright  yellow  as  follows  : — A 
thin  line  along  the  dorsal  carina,  which  is  elevated,  forming  an 
obtuse-angled  vertical  ridge;  on  either  side  a  large  mark  in  the 
form  of  a  broad  figure  7;  below  this  mark  on  either  side  three 
yellow  spots  on  a  broad  black  band;  the  first  spot  close  to  the 
front  wing-join  and  the  tail  of  the  7,  the  second  below  the  middle 
of  the  7,  the  third  close  up  to  the  angle  of  the  7  and  often  con- 
junct with  it.  Be3^ond  this  last  spot  and  close  to  it  is  a  small 
round  yellow  spot,  just  over  the  mesocoxa.  The  sides  of  the- 
thorax  may  be  described  as  bright  yellow  with  two  parallel  bands 
of  black;  the  first  band  irregular,  the  second  fairly  straight,  and 
both  meeting  near  the  metacoxa  and  forming  a  broad  irregular 
cross-band  running  up  around  the  cox^.  Wing-joins  black 
spotted  with  yellow;  scuta  and  scutellas  bright  yellow,  separated 
by  black  ground-colour.  Underside  pale  yellowish.  Legs  black, 
except  profemora,  yellow  touched  with  black;  other  femora  with 
a  yellowish  stripe;  elbows  spotted  with  3'ellow;  coxae  with  large 
yellowish  spots  at  bases. 

Abdomen. — 1-2  swollen,  3-7  narrow,  8-10  clubbed.  Colour : 
1  yellow  with  a  transverse  black  band  interrupted  by  the  dorsal 
carina;  2  black  with  a  large  dorsal  bright  yellow  mark,  the 
shape  of  which  varies  in  difierent  specimens,  being  sometimes  a 
narrow  isosceles  triangle  with  its  base  at  the  base  of  the  segment, 
and  sometimes  like  a  chess-pawn;  two  large  yellow  spots  on  each 
side,  merging  into  one  another;  this  segment  also  carries  a  pair 


BY  R.  J.   TILLYARD.  551 

of  rounded  yellow  spurs  :  3-6  black,  with  a  fairly  broad  trans- 
verse basal  yellow  ring,  and  an  elongate  oval  dorsal  yellow  mark, 
pointed  basally;  this  mark  is  small  in  6,  large  in  5,  and  in  3-4  so 
large  as  to  become  merged  into  the  basal  ring;  7,  basal  three- 
fifths  yellow,  rest  black;  8  black,  with  a  pair  of  large  basal 
yellow  spots  just  touching  dorsally:  9  yellow,  with  a  large  black 
dorsal  spot,  and  on  either  side  a  large  irregular  smear  of  brownish- 
black;  10  black,  with  a  transverse  yellow  line  close  to  append- 
ages.    Underside  black,  3-5  lined  with  yellowish. 

Appendages  very  remarkable.  Supei^ior  1*3  mm.,  bluntly 
subcylindrical;  bright  yellow  slightly  tipped  with  black  and 
carrying  some  tiny  hairs;  close  together  at  bases,  divergent,  point- 
ing somewhat  upwards.  Each  appendage  carries  underneath  on 
its  basal  half  an  enormous  black  recurved  tubercle  or  tooth  wider 
than  the  appendage  itself;  behind  this  at  the  base  is  a  small 
round  black  tubercle.  Inferior  bifid,  the  two  parts  separated  by 
the  superior  tubercles;  half  as  long  as  superior,  downy,  curving 
upwards  and  ending  in  a  blunt  clubbed  tip;  black,  with  long 
brown  hairs  at  base. 

The  form  of  the  appendages  is  best  understood  by  reference  to 
the  figure  (Pl.xxxiv.,  fig. 2). 

9.  Similar  to  ^  in  size  and  markings.  Abdomen  thicker,  not 
so  clubbed,  no  spurs  on  2;  10  small,  black.  Appendages  sub- 
cylindrical,  scarcely  1  mm.  long,  separate  at  bases,  parallel, 
pointed  at  tips,  downy,  bright  yellow. 

Hab. — Kuranda,  N.Q.;  January;  rare. 

This  species  is  found  along  the  sandy  shores  of  the  River 
Barron.  It  is  much  rarer  than  the  preceding,  isolated  specimens 
only  occurring.  Unlike  the  preceding,  this  species  seldom 
if  ever  rests  in  trees  or  bushes,  but  is  generally  found  resting 
either  on  the  hot  sand  or  on  a  low  twig  or  branch  close  to  the 
ground.  It  is  active  and  alert.  When  disturbed,  it  flies  quickly 
ofi"  a  foot  or  two  above  the  ground  and  generally  settles  down 
again  some  twenty  or  thirty  yards  further  on.  It  is  difficult  to 
capture. 


552  DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTROGOMPHUS, 

This  species  probably  has  a  restricted  range  along  the  coastal 
ranges  behind  Cairns.  A  few  specimens  were  seen  by  me  along 
the  river  below  the  ranges,  but  it  is  by  no  means  a  common 
species  in  any  locality. 

No  specimen  is  known  in  any  European  collection  which  can 
be  referred  to  this  species.  The  remarkable  appendages  mark  it 
out  as  very  distinct  from  other  species  of  Austrogomphus. 

3.   AuSTROGOMPHUS    PRASINUS,   n.sp. 

(Plate  xxxiv.,  fig. 3). 

$.  Total  length  4:3mm.;  abdomen  32  mm.;  wings,  fore  28  mm., 
hind  26mm. 

Wings. — Neuration  black,  a  faint  touch  of  saffroning  at 
bases.  Memhranule  nil.  Pterostigma  3  mm.  long,  covering  3-4 
cellules,  fairly  broad,  black.     Nodal  Indicator     14-17     9-11 

I  10-11         11 

Head. — Occipital  ridge  1  mm.,  black  above,  greenish  behind. 
Vertex  black.  Ocelli  black,  the  median  one  set  below  the  other 
two.  Antennce  thin,  black,  basal  joint  short  and  thick.  Eyes 
very  dark  brown.  Front  yellowish-green,  bordered  above  and 
below  with  black.  Clypeus:  postclypeus  black  with  a  yellowish- 
green  spot  low  down  on  either  side  near  anteclypeus,  the  latter 
yellowish-green  with  a  black  band  in  the  suture  next  labrum. 
Labrum  yellowish-green  with  an  inverted  black  T-mark.  Labium 
and  mandibles  yellowish;  mouth  broadly  edged  with  black. 

Thorax. — Prothorax  black,  with  two  small  round  central 
yellowish-green  spots  close  together,  and  a  larger  spot  just  behind; 
suture  yellowish-green.  Meso-  and  metathorax  black,  with  a  pair 
of  deep  green  humeral  marks  somewhat  enlarged  in  front,  so  as 
to  resemble  a  figure  7  with  the  top  part  cut  off  short.  Dorsal 
ridge  elevated  into  a  small  spike  near  the  middle,  and  touched 
for  about  1  mm.  with  a  fine  yellow  line.  Following  the  7-mark  on 
either  side  is  a  narrow  subhumeral  green  stripe,  separated  from 
the  7-mark  by  a  broad  band  of  black;  next,  a  rather  broad  black 
band;  then  on  the  sides  the  colour  is  greenish-yellow,  with  a 
curved  black  mark  close  under  the  fore  wing-joins,  and  a  small 
dull   brownish    spot   on    the    mesospiracle.      Wing-joins     black; 


BY  R.  J.  TILLYARD.  553 

scuta  and  scutellse  yellow,  surrounded  by  black.  Underside 
greenish-yellow.  Legs  black;  coxse  and  undersides  of  profemora 
yellowish. 

A  b  d  o  m  e  n. — 1-2  swollen,  3-7  narrow,  8-10  broad  and  clubbed. 
Colour :  1  black  above,  with  a  large  triangular  yellowish  mark; 
sides  3Tellowish  :  2  with  a  suboval  dorsal  yellowish  mark,  some- 
what contracted  in  the  middle;  sides  yellowish;  genital  appen- 
dages large,  black;  spurs  rounded  :  3-6  black,  with  a  transverse 
basal  yellowish  band;  7,  basal  third  yellowish,  rest  black,  the 
yellow  marking  enlarged  above  and  extending  along  the  dorsal 
ridge  to  a  sharp  point  at  anal  end  of  segment :  8  black;  on  each 
side,  low  down,  a  basal  yellowish  spot  :  9-10  black. 

Appendage  s. — Superior  1  mm.,  wide  apart,  parallel, 
subcylindrical,  fairly  thick,  ending  outwards  in  a  small  spike; 
bright  yellow,  bases  black.  Underneath  is  a  curved  blunt 
hooked  tubercle.  Inferior  very  short,  one-third  as  long  as 
superior,  bifurcate,  the  two  parts  wide  apart;  blunt,  curved 
upwards  in  a  hook,  so  as  to  meet  superior  near  bases;  black, 
separated  by  a  brownish  tubercle  on  10. 

5.  A  similar  but  slightly  larger  insect;  total  length  47  mm.; 
wings  often  tinged  with  pale  brownish.  Differs  from  $  as 
follows  : — Abdomeri  much  thicker,  subcylindrical,  not  clubbed; 
no  spurs  on  2;  10  short,  swollen  below  appendages  into  a  rough 
blackish  tubercle. 

Appendages. — 0.8mm.,  conical,  slightly  separated  and 
inclined  towards  one  another,  tips  with  a  sharp  spike  on  the 
outer  margin,  blunt  inwards,  touched  with  black.  Colour 
yellow. 

Hab. — Kuranda,  N.Q.;  January;  local. 

Unlike  the  two  preceding  species,  this  one  is  never  found 
along  the  banks  of  the  main  river,  but  is  confined  to  a  few  densely 
wooded  mountain  creeks  in  its  vicinity.  It  is  extremely  local, 
but  abundant  when  it  occurs.  It  has  a  fast  zig-zag  flight,  and 
is  fond  of  sitting  on  leaves  of  trees  or  grass  stems.  It  takes 
alarm  very  easily,  but  is  not  difiicult  to  capture. 


554  DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTROGOMPHUS. 

It  is  difficult  to  indicate  any  special  affinities  which  these  three 
species  possess  with  other  members  of  the  genus.  All  the  species 
are  very  closely  related,  and  this  has  led  M.  Rene  Martin  to 
include  them  all  under  the  one  genus  Austrogomphus,  which  now 
contains  both  the  Austrogomphus  and  Hemigomphus  of  former 
writers.  A.  pi-asinus  seems  to  be  the  least  closely  allied  to  the 
others,  and  it  is  the  only  one  whose  colours  are  not  pure  yellow 
and  black;  but  I  cannot  see  any  characteristic  which  would 
warrant  its  forming  the  type  of  a  new  genus. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  XXXIV. 

Y'lg.l.— Austrogomphus  arhustoriim,  n.sp.;  <^  appendages. 
Fig. 2. —  ,,  arenarius,  n.sp.;  J^  appendages. 

Fig. 3. —  ,,  prasinus,  n.sp.;  <?  appendages. 

A.  Dorsal  view.      B.  Lateral  view 


555 


THE  PROBABLE  IDENTITY  OF  THE  OPSONINS  WITH 
THE  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS. 

By  R.  Greig-Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the 

Society. 

In  the  body  fluids  of  animals  there  exist  certain  substances 
which  while  exerting  no  bacteriolytic  action,  prepare  bacteria  for 
inception  by  the  mobile  phagocytes.  These  were  discovered  by 
Denys  and  Leclef,"^  but  were  apparently  rediscovered  by  Wright 
and  DouglaSjt  who  named  them  opsonins.  It  is  only  after 
bacteria  have  been  subjected  to  the  action  of  the  opsonins  that 
they  are  ingested  by  the  polymorphonuclear  white  blood  cor- 
puscles. The  average  number  of  bacteria  englobed  by  a  poly- 
nuclear  corpuscle  can  be  used  to  indicate  the  relative  amount  of 
opsonins  in  a  serum.  The  opsonins  appear  to  play  an  active  part 
in  immunity.  Their  activity  was  specially  noted  by  Wright  and 
Douglas  in  the  susceptibility  or  non-susceptibility  of  individuals 
towards  invasion  by  the  pyogenic  staphylococci.  The  blood 
serum  of  patients  who  were  subject  to  boils,  etc.,  was  always 
found  to  be  low  in  opsonic  power  towards  staphylococci  compared 
with  the  serum  of  normal  individuals.  By  the  regulated  inocula- 
tion of  staphylococcus  vaccine,  a  patient  could  be  protected  against 
accidental  invasion,  and  at  the  same  time  the  opsonic  power  of 
his  serum  rose  above  the  normal. 

Blood  serum  can  opsonisej  a  variety  of  bacteria.  All  the 
bacteria  tested  by  Wright  and  Douglas  were  ingested  by  the 
mobile  phagocytes  after   treatment  with  blood  serum.      These 

*  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  xxiv,  685  (also  La  Cellule,  1895). 
t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Ixxii.  (No.483),  1903,  p.357;  and  Ixxiii.  (490),  1904,  128. 
I  A  non-specificity  does  not  appear  to  be  claimed  by  Wright  and  Douglas 
for  the  opsonins,  as  they  always  speak  of  "the  opsonins."  Bulloch  and 
Atkin,  on  the  other  hand,  refer  to  "the  opsonin,"  from  which  it  would 
appear  that  they  consider  there  is  only  one,  and  that  non-specific. 


556  IDENTITY  OF  OPSONINS  WITH  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS, 

included  staphylococci,  pneumococci  and  the  micro-organisms  of 
plague,  Malta  fever,  dysentery,  diphtheria,  xerosis,  anthrax  and 
cholera.     Bac.  tuberculosis'*'  is  also  capable  of  being  opsonised. 

The  opsonins  are  thermolabile,  being  destroyed  by  an  exposure 
to  a  temperature  of  60°  for  15  minutes.  This  was  confirmed  by 
Bulloch  and  Atkin,t  who  also  showed  that  a  longer  exposure  at 
a  lower  temperature  had  the  same  destructive  ejBfect.  In  their 
conclusions  they  write,  "  The  action  of  heat  is  to  destroy  the 
opsonin,  and  not  merely  to  convert  it  into  a  non-opsonisable 
modification." 

Wright  and  Douglas,  and  also  Bulloch  and  Atkin,  worked  upon 
the  staphylococcus,  and  when  the  temperature  of  destruction  of 
the  opsonins  is  given  at  60°  it  can  only  refer  to  staphjdococcus 
opsonin.  In  their  second  paper,  published  before  that  of  Bulloch 
and  Atkin,  Wright  and  Douglas  show  that  the  opsonins  are  not 
entirely  destroyed  by  heat  when  bacteria  other  than  the  staphy- 
lococcus are  examined.  In  fact,  staphylococcus  opsonin  appears 
to  be  peculiar  in  being  completely  destroyed  at  so  low  a  temper- 
ature as  60''  in  15  minutes.  Still  this  is  given  by  these  authors 
as  the  destructive  temperature  for  the  opsonins,  and  we  must  use 
it  as  a  working  basis. 

The  action  of  the  opsonins  is  to  prepare  the  bacteria  for 
inception  by  the  phagocytes.  This  might  be  accomplished  in 
three  ways.  First,  the  capsule  may  be  altered  to  a  chemotactic 
modification;  secondly,  it  may  be  dissolved;  and  thirdly,  it  may 
be  covered  by  a  film  of  a  positively  chemotactic  precipitate. 

As  the  bacteria  appear  quite  normal  after  opsonisation,  the 
capsule  is  probably  not  dissolved.  It  may  be  altered,  or  it  may 
be  covered.  Neither  alteration  nor  covering  is  visible,  but  the 
same  can  be  said  about  the  films  upon  bacteria  that  have  been 
agglutinated. 

I  have  already  shown |  that  bacteria  such  as  Bac.  typhis  which 
have  been  agglutinated,  are  capable  of  being  englobed   by  the 


*  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Ixxiv.  (499),  159;  and  Urwick,  Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  July 
22nd,  1905,  p.  172. 

t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Ixxiv.  (504),  1905,  379. 
+  ^?i;eap.2S9. 


BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH.  557 

polynuclear  leucocytes,  towards  which  in  the  normal  or  untreated 
state  the}^  are  indifferent.  In  this  respect,  therefore,  the  opsonins 
are  identical  with  the  agglutinins.  They  both  prepare  the 
bacteria  for  inception  by  the  phagocytes. 

The  similar  behaviour  of  opsonised  and  agglutinated  bacteria 
leads  one  to  believe  that  after  all  there  may  be  a  close  analogy 
between  opsonin  and  agglutinin,  and  that  certain  of  the  points 
of  difference  might  disappear  upon  further  examination. 

We  know  that  blood  serum  normally  contains  small  quantities 
of  various  agglutinins,  but  to  make  the  matter  certain,  especially 
with  regard  to  the  staphylococcus  agglutinins,  I  exnmined  normal 
serum,  my  own,  and  found  a  decided  agglutination  for  Micr. 
aureus  with  serum  diluted  from  3  to  200  times.  Suspensions  of 
dead  staphylococci  which  had  been  killed  by  heat  were  also 
agglutinated.  "^ 

The  chief  difference  between  the  two  is  found  in  the  action  of 
heat.  The  opsonins  are  destroyed  at  60°,  but  there  is  some 
diversity  of  opinion  regarding  the  effect  of  an  exposure  at  that 
temperature  upon  the  agglutinins.  This  is  without  doubt  due  to 
the  fact  that  not  only  are  the  agglutinins  specific  with  regard  to 
their  affinities  for  the  products  of  particular  bacteria,  but  they 
also  differ  in  their  behaviour  to  physical  agents  such  as  heat. 
According  to  Scheller,  normal  equine  serum  contains  marked 
quantities  of  typhoid  agglutinin  which  is  scarcely  affected  by  an 
exposure  to  a  temperature  of  62°  for  30  minutes.  Human 
typhoid  agglutinin  is  considerably  altered  upon  heating  it  at  60° 
for  15  minutes.  In  two  cases  which  I  tested,  the  agglutinating 
powers  were  reduced  to  one-seventh  and  one-tenth  respectively. 
With  regard  to  the  normal  agglutinins,  which  occur  ordinarily 


•  It  may  be  mentioned  in  this  relation  that  while  Wright  and  Douglas 
found  that  heating  the  staphylococcus  suspension  to  115°  had  no  influence 
upon  the  behaviour  of  the  bacteria  towards  the  opsonins,  Bulloch  and  Atkin 
demonstrated  a  reduction  of  the  opsonic  action  after  the  bacteria  had  been 
heated  for  longer  periods  at  high  temperatures;  for  example  an  exposure 
for  60  minutes  at  10U°  reduced  the  phagocytic  index  (the  average  number  of 
cells  englobed  by  a  polynuclear  leucocyte  under  the  conditions  of  experiment) 
from  30  to  20.  .^-i:—  _ 

L  S  B  R  A  R  Y  :io| 
i^         ^^0  ^^       ■  "^^ 


558  IDENTITY  OF  OPSONINS  WITH  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS, 

in  the  human  blood,  we  know  little  or  nothing  beyond  the  fact 
that  they  are  present  in  relatively  small  amount. 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  effect  of  moderate  heat  upon 
the  agglutinins  is  to  partially  destroy  them,  but  Dreyer  found 
that  coli  agglutinin  which  had  lost  much  of  its  power  by  heating 
exhibited  its  full  power  if  the  agglutination  test  was  prolonged 
for  24  hours,  and  from  this  he  concluded  that  the  action  of  heat 
consisted  in  a  slowing  of  the  reaction  between  the  agglutinin  and 
the  bacterial  agglutinable  substance.  I  believe  this  to  be  the 
true  explanation.  Typhoid  agglutinin  is  certainly  not  destroyed, 
for  I  found  that  suspensions  of  typhoid  bacteria  treated  with 
heated  agglutinating  serum  beyond  the  limiting  ratio  for  the 
heated  serum  were  sedimented  easily  by  the  centrifuge,  while 
neither  normal  suspensions  nor  those  treated  with  unheated 
serum  beyond  the  limiting  ratio  were  so  easily  precipitated. 

Those  who  have  worked  with  opsonins  have  not  examined  the 
time  factor  in  opsonisation,  and  it  occurred  to  me  that  if  instead 
of  15  minutes,  24  hours  were  given  for  the  heated  opsonin  to  act, 
phagocytosis  might  be  obtained. 

As  it  would  be  necessary  to  check  vegetative  growth  in 
experiments  that  were  to  continue  for  24  hours,  the  cells  in  the 
suspension  of  Micrococcus  aureus  (derived  from  a  whitlow)  were 
steamed  for  10  minutes.*  The  suspension  was  then  centrifuged 
to  get  rid  of  any  small  clumps  that  might  have  formed.  The 
washed  leucocytes  were  obtained  in  the  manner  recommended  by 
Wright  and  Douglas,  which  has  been  described  in  these  pages 
{a7itea,  p.  296).  The  proportions  of  corpuscles,  bacterial  suspen- 
sion and  serum  were  measured  and  treated  as  by  these  investi- 
gators excepting  where  otherwise  noted. 

The  heated  serum  was  mixed  with  the  bacterial  suspension  in 
the  proportion  of  3  :  1  and  sealed  in  a  capillary  tube  which  was 
heated  for  20  hours  at  37°.  It  was  then  mixed  with  the  cor- 
puscular suspension  in  the  proportion  of  4  :  3.  A  control  test 
was  made  with  the  same  serum,  unheated,  which  had  been  kept 

*  When  the  temperature  of  a  control  tube  was  94°. 


BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH. 


559 


at  room  temperature  (17°).  The  tests  were  sealed  in  capillary 
tubes  and  heated  at  37°  for  30  minutes.  Films  were  made  and 
stained  with  the  Leishman  stain.  The  polynuclear  leucocytes 
were  enumerated  and  the  staphylococci  contained  within  were 
counted. 

In  the  tabulated  results  that  follow,  the  phagocytic  index  means 
the  average  number  of  bacteria  englobed  by  a  polynuclear  white 
blood  corpuscle,  and  the  numbers  within  the  brackets  indicate 
the  total  number  of  the  phagocytes  that  were  counted.  The 
brackets  following  the  suspensions  show  the  time  during  which 
the  serum  and  suspension  were  in  contact. 

Opsonisation  by  heated  serum. 


Normal  saline  +  suspension  +  corpuscles  

Normal  serum  +  suspension  +  corpuscles  

Heated  serum  +  suspension  (20  hours  at  37' 
+  corpuscles. 


No  phagocytosis.* 
Phagocytosis.     Phagocytic 

Index,  (22)  =  25. 
Phagocytosis.     Phagocytic 

Index,  (22)  =  25. 


From  this  experiment  it  is  clear  that  heating  the  serum  for  15 
minutes  at  60°  does  not  destroy  the  opsonins,  but  simply  retards 
their  activity.  By  allowing  a  sufficient  time  for  the  reaction  to 
take  place,  the  opsonisation  is  complete. 

A  second  experiment  was  made  two  weeks  later  with  the 
following  results. 


Phagocytic  Index. 

Normal  serum  +  suspension  +  corpuscles 

Normal   serum  +  suspension  (20    hours  at   37°)  + 

corpuscles , 

Heated  serum  +  suspension  +  corpuscles 

Heated    serum  +  suspension    (5    hours   at    37°)  + 

corpuscles. 

Heated    serum  +  suspension   (20  hours   at    37°)  + 

corpuscles 

(40)  =  23 

(25)  =  24 
(29)=  0 

(25)  =  10 

(40)=24 

This  also  shows  that  the  opsonin  in  time  recovers  from  the 
effect  of  the  heat  to  which  it  has  been  subjected,  or  to  express  it 


*  In  the  normal  saline  test,  there  were  no  bacteria  within  the  leucocytes; 
one  or  two,  here  and  there,  were  on  the  outside  of  the  phagocytes,  but  as 
these  had  evidently  adhered  in  drying  the  films  they  were  ignored. 


560  IDENTITY  OF  OPSONINS  WITH  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS, 

in  a  better  way,  the  reaction  between  the  opsonin  and  the  pro- 
ducts of  the  bacterium  that  has  been  retarded  by  heat  is  complete 
in  at  least  20  hours.  Contact  for  5  hours  produced  a  partial 
recovery  of  the  reaction.  A  similar  experiment  confirmed  these 
results. 

In  order  to  vary  the  experiment,  serum  was  diluted  with 
normal  saline  in  the  proportion  of  1  of  the  former  to  4  of  the 
latter,  thus  making  a  20  %  solution  of  serum.  It  was  heated  for 
15  minutes  at  50°,  60°,  65°  and  70°,  then  mixed  with  the  suspen- 
sion of  dead  bacteria,  sealed  in  capillary  tubes  and  heated  at  37* 
for  24  hours  before  being  treated  with  the  suspension  of  blood 
corpuscles.  The  proportion  of  dilute  serum,  bacterial  suspension 
and  corpuscles  was  the  usual  3:1:3,  and  30  minutes  was  the 
time  given  for  phagocytosis  to  take  place  at  37°.  In  enumerating 
the  bacteria  ingested,  it  was  evident  that  the  results  in  some 
cases  could  only  be  approximate,  for  in  certain  of  the  tests  the 
bacteria  had  agglutinated  and  many  of  the  phagocytes  had 
gathered  round  the  clumps.  Again,  polynuclear  leucocytes  were 
seen  over,  under,  or  against  clumps,  making  it  impossible  to  tell 
how  many  cells  were  within  the  phagocyte.  Furthermore,  as  in 
such  cases,  the  cells  were  not  uniformly  distributed,  every  mobile 
leucocyte  would  not  have  the  same  chance  of  englobing  a  staphy- 
lococcus or  even  a  small  clump.  When  there  is  no  clumping,  the 
numbers  of  bacteria  ingested  vary  within  comparatively  narrow 
limits,  but  when  the  microbes  are  agglutinated  the  variations  are 
great  and  there  are  many  phagocytes  noted  with  no  bacteria. 
Since  one  cannot  count  the  bacteria  within  the  phagocytes  which 
have  gathered  around  a  large  bacterial  clump,  even  when,  as  is 
generally  the  case,  they  are  gorged,  it  is  only  fair  to  ignore  the 
polymorphonuclear  corpuscles  when  they  contain  none,  one  or  up 
to  five  cells  and  when  they  contain  over  fifty.  The  proof  that 
such  a  discrimination  is  necessary  is  shown  in  the  following  table 
in  the  test  with  the  diluted  serum  heated  to  50^.  The  bacteria 
were  clumped  and  the  readings  were — 

Total  count (50)  =  7 

Omitting  numbers  under  6  and  over  50  as  above  explained....     (11)  =  31 


BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH. 


561 


The  amended  phagocytic  index  is  identical  with  that  of  the 
unheated  dilute  serum,  and  that  is  what  we  should  expect  to  find. 

Opsonisation  with  diluted  sekum. 


Dilute  serum 

heated  for 
15  minutes  at 

Hours  during 

which  serum 

+  suspension 

was  heated 

at  37°. 

Condition  of 
free  bacteria 
in  the  films. 

Original  Pha- 
gocytic Index 
of  tests  when 
amended. 

Phagocytic 
Index. 

Room  temperature 
50° 
60° 
65° 
70° 
60° 
60° 

0 

24 
24 
24 
24 
5 
0 

distributed 

agglutinated 

agglutinated 

distributed 

distributed 

agglutinated 

distributed 

(25)^31 
(11)  =  31 
(35)  =  33 
(25)  =  10 

(25)  =  0 
(17)-28 

(25)r:0 

(50)  =  7 
(77)  =  13 
(50) -^4 

(25)  =  19 

Opsonisation  with  the  same  serum  undiluted. 


Heated  at  60*^  +  suspension  +  corpuscles 
Not  heated  +  suspension  +  corpuscles     . . 


Phagocytic  Index,  (25)  =0 
Phagocytic  Index,  (20)-=25 


The  clumping  that  occurred  in  certain  of  these  tests  was  pro- 
nounced, and  strongly  supports  the  idea  that  opsonisation  is  a 
phase  of  agglutination.  We  must  distinguish  between  a  deposi- 
tion of  a  precipitate  and  the  flocculation  of  the  same.  The  pre- 
cipitate formed  by  the  action  of  the  agglutinin  (precipitin  or 
opsonin)  upon  the  agglutinable  substance  oozing  through  the 
bacterial  membranes  is  deposited  upon  the  capsules  of  the  cells 
This  is  probably  opsonisation,  and  is  the  first  phase  of  the  com- 
plete phenomenon.  The  second  is  the  flocculation  of  these 
■deposited  films,  that  is  the  agglutination  of  the  opsonised  bacteria 
under  the  further  influence  of  the  saline  matter  of  the  suspension. 
In  the  first  test  there  was  opsonisation  without  agglutination, 
because  a  sufficient  time  had  not  been  given  for  the  second  phase 
to  develop.  In  the  second,  third  and  sixth  tests,  even  when  the 
•dilute  serum  had  been  heated,  the  time  was  sufficient  for  the 
phenomenon  to  be  complete. 

An  alkaline  citrate  was   used   in  diluting  the  serum  for   the 
purpose  of   hindering   the    clumping    and    thus    regulating    the 


56: 


IDENTITY  OF  OPSONINS  WITH  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS, 


ingestion  of  the  opsonised  bacteria.  This  object,  however,  was 
not  attained,  for  agglutination  was  manifest  in  the  films.  Pro- 
bably the  citrate  was  not  present  in  sufficient  amount  to  prevent 
the  flocculating  action  of  the  common  salt  added  with  the  corpus- 
cular and  bacterial  suspensions.  In  the  experiment,  the  serum 
was  diluted  with  four  parts  of  1  %  potassium  citrate  or  of  normal 
saline  (0-6  %  NaCl). 


Opsonisation  and  Agglutination  with  dilute  serum. 


Serum  diluted 
with 

Treatment. 

Hours  dur- 
ing which 
serum  +  sus- 
pension was 
heated 
at37-\ 

Condition  of 

free  bacteria  in 

the  films. 

Original 
Phagocytic 

Index  of 
tests  when 
amended. 

Phagocytic 
Index. 

citrate 

not  heated 

heated  at  eo"" 

heated  at  65 « 
heated  at  60'= 

" 

0 
24 

48 

0 

24 

48 
24 
48 
24 

48 
24^ 

distributed 

agglutinated 

agglutinated 

distributed 

agglutinated 

agglutinated 

distributed 

distributed 

agglutinated 

agglutinated 

agglutinated 

(50)=25 
(50)=39 

(50)  =  17 
(50)  =  17 

(50*)  =  38 
(50)  =  35 
(50)  =  34 

(80)  =  14 
(17)=28 
(21)  =  33 
(25)=0 
(20)=2] 
(8)  =  26 
(50)  =  4 
(75)  =  1 
(22)=80 
(26)  =  35 
(21)  =  35 

"      

»)      

normal  saline 

Opsonisation  with  undiluted  sekum. 


Serum  (24  hours  at  20*)  +  suspension  + 

corpuscles distributed 

Serum  (24  hours  at  37")  +  suspension  + 

corpuscles distributed 

Serum,  heated  at  60*^  + suspension  (15 

hours  at  37°)  + corpuscles     agglutinated  j  (41)=26 

Serum,  heated  at  60°  + suspension  (24 

hours  at  37*)  + corpuscles agglutinated     (50) =26 


(50)=20 
(50)  =  13 
(35)=22 
(30)  =24 


Without  discussing  the  action  of  the  citrate  in  hindering  or  in 
not  assisting  the  opsonic,  and  probabl}^  also  the  agglutinative 
effect,  it  is  evident  that  the  experiments  confirm  what  has  already 


Serum  heated  before  dilution. 


BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH. 


563 


been  done,  and  emphasise  the  correspondence  of  opsonisation  and 
agglutination.  The  citrated  serum  showed  a  certain  opsonic 
effect  within  half-an-hour,  but  when  the  time  of  contact  with  the 
bacteria  was  increased,  the  agglutinative  effect  became  manifest 
and  simultaneously  the  opsonic  effect  was  enhanced. 

In  the  experiments  with  the  diluted  serum,  it  was  curious  that 
while  normal  serum  had  a  phagocytic  index  of  25,  the  same 
serum,  diluted  to  one-fifth,  instead  of  an  index  of  5  had  that  of 
31.  The  phagocytosis  with  the  dilute  serum  was  relatively  six 
times  greater  than  with  the  undiluted.  This  was  also  found  by 
Wright  and  Douglas  in  experiments  with  unheated  serum  diluted 
with  heated  serum  and  with  normal  saline.  In  their  experiments 
a  three-fold  dilution  of  serum  increased  the  opsonic  effect  to  a 
maximum.     In  the  following,  the  same  result  was  obtained. 

The  effect  of  diluting  norbial  serum. 


Serum  not  diluted       

Phagocytic  Index.  (401=25 

Serum  and  normal  saline  1:1  

,       (40)=28 

,,      1:3  ... 

(40)  =  29 

\l                   !,          ,,      1:5  

(40)=28 

„      1:10    

,       (50) =23 

„      1:20    

,       (40)  =  14 

„      1:40    

,       (40)  =8 

,,      1:80    

,       (50)=6 

It  is  known  that  in  flocculation  generally,  potassium  salts  are 
more  active  than  those  of  sodium.  In  the  special  case  of  agglu- 
tination, Friedberger*  showed  that  the  same  law  held,  and  Joosf 
admitted  that  suspensions  of  Bad.  typhi  were  rather  more  slowly 
agglutinated  by  sodium  chloride  than  by  potassium  or  ammonium 
chlorides. 

In  three  experiments  with  living  staphylococci,  opsonisation 
was  more  pronounced  when  potassium  chloride  was  used  in 
making  the  dilutions,  the  bacterial  and  the  corpuscular  suspen- 
sions. 


*  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  i.  xxx.  342(table). 
t  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  i.  xxx.  857. 


564  IDENTITY  OF  OPSONINS  WITH  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS, 


Opsonisation  in  Solutions  oi 

Sodium  and  Potassium  Chlorides. 

Phagocytic  Index  with 

Sodium  chloride 

Potassium  chloride 

(0-6%). 

(0'6%). 

6/11/05.     Serum  diluted,  1-10. 

(50^  =  10 

(25)  =  18 

9/11/05.         „             „       1-20. 

(25)-ll 

(25)=18 

14/11/05.     Serum  undiluted.* 

(25)  =  13 

(50)=  13 

Serum  diluted,  1-3, 

(25)=  12 

(50)  =  12 

r25)  =  8 

(25)  =  9 

,,       1-12. 

<25)  =  6 

(50)  =  10 

„       1-18. 

(25)  =  6 

(25)  =  9 

„       1-25. 

f25^=6 

(25)  =  8 

„       1-32. 

(25)=6 

(50)  =  8 

„       1-iO. 

(25)  =  5 

(25)  =  6 

An  agglutination  test  was  made  at  the  same  time,  but  as 
clumping  was  pronounced  with  a  dilution  of  1-40,  it  was  repeated 
upon  the  following  day. 

Agglutination  of  living  Staphylococcus  suspensions  with  normal  serum 
diluted  with  sodium  and  potassium  chlorides  (0'6  %). 


Dilution  of 
i     serum  ( 1 ) 
to  salt. 

Sodium  chloride; 

Potassium  chloride; 

unheated  serum. 

unheated  serum. 

heated  serum. 

30  min. 

60  min. 

.30  min. 

60  min. 

2  hours.  1     20  hours. 

5 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

10 

2 

2 

0 

15 

3 

3 

0 

20 

3 

3 

0      1 

30 

2 

3 

0 

40 

2 

3 

0 

complete 

50 

2 

3 

0     1 

sedimentation 

60 

2 

3 

0 

80 

2 

3 

0 

100 

1 

1 

3 

0 

140 

0 

1 

I 

3 

0 

200 

0 

1 

3 

0        . 

Check 

— 

— 

— 

— 

0 

partial 
'sedimentation 

*  The  index  of  the  undiluted  serum  is  low.  Variations  in  the  opsonic 
power  of  the  same  individual  are  of  common  occurrence,  although  Urwick 
(Brit.  Med.  Journ.  July  22,  1905,  173)  writes,  *'  The  opsonic  power  of  healthy 
people  varies  very  slightly,  or  not  at  all,  from  day  to  day."  Upon  reading 
through  the  papers  of  Wright  and  Douglas,  one  finds  similar  variations, 
e.g.,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  74  (499)  152,  patient's  serum  13/4/04,  (20)  =  30 '3; 
15/4/04,  (20)  =  10-05.  Again,  oj).  cit.  72  (483)  363,  with  A.  E.  W.'s  serum, 
Expt.  3,  tube  1,  (9)  =  25 -4,  tube  2  (18)  =  16-0. 


BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH.  565 

In  the  table,  "0"  means  no  agglutination  visible,  "1"  represents 
small  suspended  floccules,  "2"  stands  for  a  partial  flocculent 
sedimentation,  and  "  3 "  indicates  a  complete  flocculent  sedi- 
mentation with  a  faint  opalescence.  The  small  sedimentation 
tubes  were  kept  at  37*^,  excepting  in  the  case  of  the  heated 
serum,  which  stood  overnight  at  room  temperature  (20°). 

We  see  that  potassium  chloride  agglutinated  suspensions  of 
living  staphylococci  more  readily  than  sodium  chloride,  and  that 
heating  the  serum  to  60°  for  15  minutes  prohibited  the  rapid 
action  of  the  staphylococcus  agglutinin.  That  the  action  of  the 
heat  was  not  to  destroy  the  agglutinin  was  shown  by  the  com- 
plete sedimentation  of  the  tests  at  the  end  of  20  hours.  The 
microscopical  examination  of  the  sediments  after  that  time  proved 
that  the  partial  sedimentation  of  the  check  test  was  due  to 
gravitation,  for  the  bacteria  were  singly  and  in  pairs.  In  all  the 
tests  which  had  been  treated  with  heated  serum  small  clumps 
were  found  in  addition  to  the  individual  and  paired  cells.  The 
influence  of  the  dilution,  in  increasing  the  agglutination,  as  seen 
in  the  tests  with  5-,  10-  and  15-fold  dilutions,  is  noteworthy  in 
view  of  the  fact  that  a  relatively  greater  opsonic  eff'ect  is  obtained 
upon  diluting  serum  (p. 563). 

The  staphylococci  lend  themselves  admirably  to  experiments 
such  as  these.  They  are  comparatively  large,  they  stain  very 
deeply,  and  they  are  not  easily  bacteriolysed.  Enumeration  is 
easy,  and  the  results  can  be  relied  upon.  With  other  bacteria 
there  is  more  or  less  swelling  and  disintegration  within  the  leuco- 
cytes. Wright  and  Douglas  noted  this  in  their  work  upon  the 
other  bacteria. 

Some  of  the  bacteria  that  had  been  examined  by  these  investi- 
gators were  employed  in  an  experiment  which  had  for  its  object 
the  recovery  of  the  opsonic  power  after  its  retardation  by  heat. 
The  serum  was  diluted  with  normal  saline  to  make  a  10  %  solu- 
tion. The  films  showed  that  a  considerable  bacteriolysis  had 
occurred  within  the  polynuclear  white  blood  corpuscles.  All 
stages  between  the  normal  bacterium  and  the  smallest  granule, 
the  final  visible  result  of  bacteriolytic  action,  were  seen.  It  was 
37 


566  IDENTITY  OF  OPSONINS  WITH  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS, 

clearly  evident  that  any  enumeration  of  the  englobed  bacteria 
would  be  misleading  and  of  no  value  whatsoever.  It  was  also- 
found  that  Bac.  diphtherice  did  not  markedly  differ  from  £ac. 
typhi,  Bac.  coli,  Bac.  dysenterice  (Shiga),  Micr.  melitensis,  or  Vib. 
cholei'ce*  The  opsonic  power  was  reduced  but  never  destroyed  by 
heat. 

Although  the  experiment  was  mainly  intended  to  demonstrate 
the  recovery  of  the  opsonic  power  after  heating,  this  could  not  be 
done  for  the  following  reason.  When  dead  suspensions  of  Bac. 
coli  or  Bac.  tyiohi  are  kept  in  contact  for  24  hours  with  serum 
that  has  been  heated  at  60°  the  greater  part  of  the  staining 
power  is  lost.  A  considerable  portion  disappears  by  contact 
with  heated  (62-5°)  serum  and  a  small  part  with  dilute  serum 
that  has  been  heated  at  65°  for  15  minutes.  This  factor  contri- 
buted largely  to  prevent  a  reliable  enumeration.!  The  obser- 
vation raises  the  question,  are  the  alexines  of  the  serum  destroyed 
by  heat  as  easily  as  is  generally  supposed  ? 

An  experiment  with  Bac.  typhi  and  Bac.  coli  showed  that  they 
were  opsonised  extensively  by  diluted  serum  heated  at  60°,  62-5° 
and  65°.  Phagocytosis  in  all  cases  was  pronounced;  the  majority 
of  the  polynuclear  leucocytes  were  gorged  with  bacteria  in  all 
stages  of  disintegration. 

The  instances  of  similarity  between  the  opsonins  and  agglu- 
tinins, that  I  have  brought  forward,  point  strongly  to  the  pro- 
bable identity  of  the  two.  But  there  are  other  indications  of 
similar  behaviour.  There  is  a  rise,  fall,  and  presumably  higher 
base  level  of  the  agglutinins  during  the  course  of  uncomplicated 
typhoid  fever.  This  has  been  shown  by  Jorgen.sen|  and  by 
Iverson.§      It   appears  to  be  akin   to  the    positive  phase    and 

*  These  bacteria  were  obtained  from  Dr.  Tidswell,  of  the  Board  of  Health, 
Sydney. 

t  Mici\  melitens^is  was  the  only  micro-organism  that  showed  an  increased 
phagocytic  index  in  the  case  of  the  long  contact  with  heated  serum,  doubtless 
because  it  is  more  resistant  to  the  action  of  the  bacteriolytic  bodies. 
+  Cent.  f.  Bakt.  (Orig.)  xxxviii.  (1905),  475,  566. 
§  Zeitsch.  f.  Hygiene,  xlix.  1. 


BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH.  567 

higher  base  level  of  opsonic  action  which,  according  to  Wright, 
follow  the  inoculation  of  staphylococcus  vaccine.  Another 
similarity  between  opsonins  and  agglutinins  is  observed  in  the 
power  which  bacteria  have  of  fixing  and  removing  them  both 
from  solutions. 

The  points  of  possible  difference  between  the  opsonins  and 
agglutinins  relate  to  the  experiments  of  others  upon  the  simul- 
taneous rise  and  fall  of  the  two  during  immunisation.  A  very 
strong  indictment  against  their  identity  is  made  by  Wright  and 
Douglas,*  who  say  that  "  Normal  human  serum  does  not  exert 
any  characteristic  agglutinating  action  upon  the  staphylococcus. 
Such  agglutination  as  is  obtained  is  not  very  sensibly  increased 
under  the  influence  of  staphylococcus  inoculations."! 

The  races  of  bacteria  are  known  to  vary  in  their  agglutinability, 
and  the  staphylococcus  is  no  exception.  Otto|  found  that  the 
agglutinability  of  races  of  the  truly  pathogenic  staphylococci 
varied.      Nicoles  and  Lesieur§    immunised  a  goat  to  a  race  of 

*  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Ixxiv.,  1904,  148. 
t  At  another  place  they  say  that  no  parallel  exists  between  the  opsonic 
and  agglutinating  powers  of  the  blood  of  tubercular  patients.  The  agglu- 
tination of  Bac.  tuberculosis  is  difficult  to  determine.  The  bacterium  grows 
very  slowly,  and  in  the  cultures  there  are  many  old  cells.  It  is  a  peculiarity 
of  some  bacteria  that  in  their  senescence  they  produce  autoagglutinins  and 
perhaps  autolysins.  Such  has  been  demonstrated  by  Emmerich  and  Loew 
in  the  case  of  Bac.  pyocyaneus.  Bac.  tuberculosis  produces  autoagglutinins, 
and  it  is  difficult  to  distribute  cultures  uniformly  in  saline  solutions.  Wright 
and  Douglas  ground  up  their  cultures  in  an  agate  mortar  with  a  O'l  % 
solution  of  common  salt  and  obtained  a  suspension  of  bacterial  fragments 
in  which  the  autoagglutinatire  action  was  in  abeyance.  Although  this 
strength  of  salt  is  not  the  most  favourable,  it  is  still  sufficient  to  enable 
agglutination  to  become  manifest  in  an  hour  at  37*=".  But  it  is  probable 
that  any  agglutination  that  did  appear  might  have  been  a  combination  of 
true  agglutination  and  autoagglutination,  the  latter  being  induced  by  the 
salts  added  with  the  serum.  For  this  reason  Bac.  tuberculosis  does  not 
promise  to  be  suitable  for  showing   analogies  between   agglutination   and 

opsonisation. 

+  Cent.  f.  Bact.  (Orig.)  xxxiv.  44. 

§  Ibid.  (Ref.)  xxxi.  158. 


568  IDENTITY  OF  OPSONINS  WITH  NORMAL  AGGLUTININS, 

Micr.  aureus  and  found  that  the  serum  agglutinated  the  infected 
race  in  dilutions  of  1-50,  while  with  three  other  races  one  gave  a 
characteristic  reaction  and  two  did  not. 

With  regard  to  the  action  of  normal  human  serum  upon  sus- 
pensions of  the  staphylococcus,  very  little  has  been  done. 
Beitzke*  tested  44  specimens  of  serum,  chiefly  of  corpses. 
Seventeen  of  these  did  not  agglutinate  when  used  in  dilutions  of 
I-IO.  Seven  agglutinated  in  dilutions  of  1-50,  nine  in  1-100, 
eight  in  1-200,  and  one  each  in  1-500,  1-1000,  1-2000.  He  thus 
found  that  61  %  of  the  cases  gave  a  characteristic  reaction,  and 
he  considered  that  the  agglutination  of  the  staphylococcus  by 
normal  human  blood  was  of  remarkably  frequent  occurrence.  It 
may  be  objected  that  the  blood  of  cadavers  can  scarcely  be  called 
normal. 

Wrightf  examined  the  blood  of  four  normal  men  and  found 
that  they  agglutinated  suspensions  of  the  staphylococcus  when 
diluted  up  to  8-  and  16 -fold. 

The  experiment  on  p. 5 64  shows  that  my  own  serum  when 
diluted  at  least  200-fold  agglutinated  suspensions  of  the  race  of 
staphylococcus  that  has  been  used  in  this  investigation.  An 
agglutination  in  such  dilution  is  undoubtedly  characteristic. 

Upon  the  quantity  of  agglutinable  substance  secreted  or 
excreted  by  the  bacterium  depends  the  rapid  or  slow  agglutina- 
bility  with  a  normal  serum.  The  thinnest  film  of  precipitate, 
resulting  from  the  reaction  between  agglutinin  and  agglutinable 
substance,  will  alter  the  nature  of  the  bacterial  surface.  From 
being  indifferent  to  the  leucocytes,  the  bacteria  will  become  posi- 
tively chemotactic.  The  flocculating  action  of  the  salts,  however, 
may  not  be  sufficiently  powerful  to  cause  the  thinnest  films  with 
the  enveloped  bacteria  to  run  together  into  clumps.  We  can 
therefore  expect  to  find  that  races  of  the  staphylococcus  while 
exhibiting  a  normal  opsonisation  may  be  very  slowly  agglutinated. 
This  was  to  a  certain  extent  borne  out  b}'-  the  examination  of 
two  races  which  1  obtained  from  Dr.  Tidswell,  one  of  Staphylo- 

*  Cent,  f.  Bakt.  (Ref.)  xxxv.  709. 
t  Lancet,  29th  March,  1902,  p.874. 


BY    R,    GREIG-SMITH. 


569 


COCCUS  pyogenes  albus,  the  other  Staph,  pyogenes  aureus.  These 
races  were  compared  with  the  race  which  had  been  used  through- 
out these  experiments  under  the  name  of  Micr.  aureus  (Mig.). 
In  testing  the  agglutinative  power,  the  serum  was  used  in 
dilutions  varying  from  1-10  to  1-100. 

Agglutination  and  Opsonisation  of  three  races  of  Staphylococcus. 


Agglutination  visible 
microscopically  in 

Phagocytic 
Index. 

15  min. 

4  hours. 

Micr.  aureus,  24  hours  at  3T^.. 
Staph,  aureus,  24  hours      ,, 

,,         ,,        48  hours      ,, 
Staph,  albus,  24  hours        ,, 

,,         ,,       48  hours       ,, 

1-100 

1-10 

1-10 

1-25 

1-100 

MO 

(50;  =  26 
(75)  =  14 
(30)=21 
(75)=16 
(30)=24 

The  experiment  shows  that  a  weak  agglutination  may  be 
accompanied  by  a  weak  opsonisation,  but  when  time  is  given  for 
the  bacteria  to  produce  a  greater  quantity  of  agglutinable  sub- 
stance, the  agglutination  becomes  stronger  and  at  the  same  time 
the  opsonic  power  is  increased. 

The  investigation  has  shown  that  the  opsonins  and  agglutinins 
are  probably  identical,  inasmuch  as  they  have  many  points  of 
similarity,  and  probably  no  points  of  difference.  The  similarities 
are  as  follows  : — 

1.  Staphylococcus  opsonin  and  agglutinin  are  not  destroyed 
at  60°;  their  powers  are  only  temporarily  in  abeyance.  Contact 
with  the  bacteria  for  20  hours  induces  a  recovery. 

2.  In  dilute  saline  solutions  the  recovery  of  the  opsonic  power 
is  accompanied  by  an  agglutination  of  the  bacteria. 

3.  Potassium  chloride  gives  a  greater  agglutinative  and  a 
greater  opsonic  effect  than  sodium  chloride. 

4.  Dilution  of  the  serum  with  saline  solutions  increases  the 
agglutinative  and  the  relative  opsonic  effects. 

5.  Longer  cultivation  of  a  weak  race  of  staphylococcus  increases 
the  agglutinability  and  the  opsonisation  of  the  cells. 

Opsonisation  appears  to  be  the  first  phase  of  agglutination. 


670 


A  PLEOMORPHIC  SLIME  BACTERIUM. 

[Bacillus  alatus,  n.sp.) 

By  R.  Grbig-Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay   Bacteriologist   to  the 

Society. 

(Plate  XXXV.) 

In  isolating  Rhizohium  legumiiiosarum  from  the  nodules  of 
Lujnnus  luteus,  a  peculiar  bacterium  was  found  forming  slimy 
colonies  upon  maltose-ammonium-sulphate-agar.  Upon  this 
medium,  the  bacterium  grew,  as  a  rod  of  greater  breadth  than 
length,  and  attached  to  the  broad  ends  were  rounded  wing-like 
structures.  The  medium  was  particularly  suited  for  the  produc- 
tion of  these  forms.  The  method  of  division  is  also  peculiar, 
for  as  the  length  is  less  than  the  breadth,  the  cell  appears  to 
divide  longitudinally.  When  the  microbe  has  divided,  there  is 
but  one  wing  attached,  although  another  soon  grows  upon  the 
naked  end. 

The  micro-organism  is  very  pleomorphic.  In  bouillon,  upon 
nutrient  meat-agar  and  upon  potato,  it  occurs  as  ordinary  short 
or  long  rods  with  rounded  ends,  and  stains  uniformly.  Upon 
saccharose-potato-agar,  they  are  of  the  same  shape,  but  stain 
bipolarly,  and  they  may  or  may  not  be  surrounded  by  a  rod-shaped 
capsule.  In  saccharose-asparagin-fluid,  the  approximately  oval 
cells  occur  in  chains.  Upon  ordinary  glucose-gelatin,  the  wings 
are  pronounced,  but  both  the  staining  portion  and  the  lateral 
appendages  are  long,  and  in  some  cases  the  newly  divided  cells 
are  spatulate  or  club-shaped. 

The  effect  of  various  carbonaceous  nutrients  in  conjunction 
with  ammonium  sulphate  and  citrate  was  tested.  Glycerin  pro- 
duces a  rod-shaped  capsule  with  a  short  transverse  staining  por- 
tion or  bar,  or  with  a  coccoid,  or  an  almost  square  staining  centre. 


BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH.  571 

Raffinose  or  lactose  also  gives  a  rod-shaped  capsule  with  a  trans- 
verse bar.  Levulose  produces  an  ordinary  uniformly  staining 
naked  rod,  while  with  galactose  the  rod  is  similar,  but  stains 
bipolarly.  Mannit  gives  a  variety  of  forms  such  as  might  be 
obtained  from  a  mixture  of  raffinose  and  galactose.  Dextrose 
behaves  like  saccharose-potato-agar. 

The  bacterium  is  to  a  certain  extent  acid-fast,  for,  when 
stained  with  fuchsin,  the  colour  is  not  discharged  by  5  %  hydro- 
chloric acid,  although  it  is  by  stronger  solutions.  It  stains  well 
with  carbol-violet  or  carbol-blue;  carbol-fuchsin  does  not  differen- 
tiate the  capsule  well.  A  solution  of  fuchsin  or  gentian-violet 
in  1  %  acetic  acid  proved  to  be  best.     The  Gram  stain  is  negative. 

While  slime  is  produced  readily  and  luxuriantly  upon  certain 
media  with  a  vegetable  base,  and  therefore  with  a  mixture  of 
nutrients,  as  with  saccharose-potato-glycerin-agar,  it  is  not  formed 
easily  upon  media  of  simpler  composition.  Upon  an  agar  medium 
containing  ammonium  sulphate  (0-04  %)  and  potassium  citrate 
(0'2%),  certain  carbonaceous  nutrients  (2  %)  gave  the  following 
yields  of  slime  from  100  c.c.  of  medium — maltose  15;  glycerin  5; 
mannit  4;  dextrose,  galactose,  raffinose  2;  lactose  1;  saccharose, 
levulose,  none. 

A  quantity  of  slime  was  grown  upon  saccharose-glycerin- 
potato-agar,  and  as  in  all  former  and  similar  cases,  the  gum  was 
obtained  from  the  slime  by  the  autoclave  method,  and  the 
reducing  sugars  and  other  matters  were  removed  by  precipitating 
the  gum  with  alcohol.  A  thick  mucilage  gave  the  reactions  of 
arabin. 

The  gum  was  hydrolysed  upon  boiling  it  for  five  hours  with 
5  %  sulphuric  acid,  and  the  neutral  solution  reduced  Fehling's 
solution.  Osazones  were  prepared,  and  after  purification  these 
were  separated  into  arabinosazone  (m.p.  158°),  and  another  melt- 
ing at  184°.  It  will  be  remembered  that  an  osazone  similar  to 
the  latter  had  been  obtained  from  the  gum  of  Macrozamia. 
Furfural  was  detected  during  the  hydrolysis  of  the  gum,  and 
upon  oxidation  with  dilute  nitric  acid  there  were  obtained  mucic 
and  oxalic  acids.     It  is  therefore  probable   that  the  reducing 


572  A    PLEOMORPHIC    SLIME    BACTERIUM, 

body  which  yielded  the  osazone  with  the  melting  point  184°  if» 
related  in  some  way  to  galactose.  The  gum  formed  by  this 
bacterium  seems  to  lie  midway  between  Macrozamia  gum,  the 
product  of    Bac.  macrozamice,  and  gum  Acacia,  the  product   of 

Bact.  acacice. 

Bacillus  alatus,  n.sp. 

Shape,  etc. — In  or  on  ordinary  media,  it  appears  as  a  rod  with 
rounded  ends,  staining  sometimes  bipolarly.  On  maltose  media, 
it  is  generally  furnished  with  lateral,  globular  capsules  and 
the  stained  portion  is  shorter  than  it  is  broad.  It  is  motile, 
the  flagella  being  numerous  and  peritrichous.  When  stained 
with  fuchsin,  the  colour  is  fast  to  5  %  hydrochloric  acid.  The 
Gram  stain  is  negative. 

Relation  to  oxygen. — The  growth  under  the  mica  plate  was 
feeble. 

Nutrient  agar  plate. — The  colonies  are  translucent  white  and 
amceboid,  the  raised  projections  become  club-shaped,  and  the 
growing  points  are  raised  and  white,  while  the  centre  of  the 
colony  is  flat  and  transparent.  Some  of  the  colonies  are  rounded, 
dirty-white,  flat  and  waxy,  with  an  uncharacteristic  microscopical 
appearance.     The  deep  colonies  are  granular  and  dark  brown. 

Glucose-gelatin  plate. — The  colonies  are  rounded,  white,  raised, 
fatty  and  opalescent  by  transmitted  light,  showing  faint  lines 
radiating  outwards  from  the  centre.  Microscopically,  the  margin 
is  sharp  and  the  structure  is  finely  granular  with  annular  cloud- 
ings.    The  deep  colonies  are  opaque. 

Nutrient  agar  stroke. — The  growth  is  raised  and  translucent 
white  with  smooth  margin;  it  is  of  a  thin  gummy  consistency. 
The  colour  slowly  becomes  pale  buff  and  the  growth  gravitates. 

Ghicose-gelatin  stroke. — The  growth  is  raised,  narrow,  trans- 
lucent white  and  glistening.  The  base  becomes  furrowed  as  the 
gelatin  slowly  liquefies. 

Saccharose-potato-agar*  stroke. — The  growth  is  raised,  trans- 
lucent white  and  slimy;  it  becomes  luxuriant  and  of  a  pale  buff 

*  Saccharose  20,  glycerin  10,  potato  extract  250,  agar  20,  water  to  1000  c.c. 


BY    R.    GREIG  SMITH.  573 

colour  as  it  slowly  gravitates.  Gas  bubbles  are  sometimes  formed 
in  the  medium. 

Nutrient  gelatin  stab. — A  filiform  white  growth;  the  nail-head 
has  a  raised  margin  and  depressed  centre;  the  medium  is  con- 
sumed and  slowly  liquefies  funicularly. 

Ghccose-gelatin  stab. — The  growth  is  as  on  nutrient  gelatin  but 
stronger;  the  nail-head  is  at  first  uniformly  raised,  but  becomes 
corrugated  and  terraced.  The  filiform  stab  becomes  coiled  as  the 
neighbouring  medium  softens,  but  no  liquefaction  is  apparent. 
Gas  bubbles  form  in  the  medium. 

Potato. — A  pale  bufi"  or  canary-coloured  glistening,  rough 
growth  is  formed,  while  the  medium  darkens. 

Bouillon. — The  medium  becomes  turbid,  and  a  slight  surface 
film  and  coherent  sediment  is  formed.  Indol  is  produced,  and 
nitrates  are  reduced  to. nitrites. 

Milk. — The  medium  is  slowly  and  slightly  thickened  and  it 
then  coagulates  at  55''. 

(Plate  XXXV.) 


574 


NOTES  AND  EXHIBITS. 


Mr.  Stead  exhibited  an  interesting  series  of  New  South  Wales 
Whitings  (Fam.  SiUaginidce),  embracing  Sillago  ciliata  (Sand 
Whiting),  S.  maculata  (Trumpeter  Whiting),  S.  punctata 
(Spotted  Whiting),  and  S.  basserisis  (School  Whiting);  and  he 
offered  some  observations  upon  their  general  appearance,  their 
occurrence  and  distribution.  He  also  contributed  the  following 
note  upon  S.  bassensis  : — "The  specific  name  bassensis  has  had  a 
most  unhappy  career.  It  was  first  applied  in  1829  to  a  form  of 
Sillayo  taken  at  Port  Western,  Victoria,  by  Quoy  and  Gaimard 
during  the  voyage  of  the  '  AstrolaVje.'  Since  then  the  species  has 
been  treated,  by  most  authors,  as  synonymous  with  either  one  or 
other  of  the  species  ciliata  and  maculata^  principally  the  latter. 
Castelnau  even  went  so  far  as  to  suggest*  that  it  might  be  a 
variety  of  S.  punctata;  but  the  very  elongate  body,  small  scales, 
and  increased  number  of  second  dorsal  and  anal  rays  at  once  put 
this  out  of  consideration.  Great  confusion  has  prevailed  all  along 
regarding  the  identity  of  our  Whitings;  but,  in  my  opinion,  the 
confusion  has  been  caused  to  a  great  extent  by  either  insufficient 
material,  or  from  careless  examination.  There  appears  to  me  no 
doubt  that  the  fish  here  determined  as  Sillago  bassensis  is  the 
true  bassensis  of  Cuvier  and  Valenciennesf,  figured  later  on  by 
Quoy  and  Gaimard  J.  This  Whiting  is  exceedingly  common  along 
the  New  South  Wales  coast,  where  it  inhabits  fairly  deep  water 
off  shore.  At  certain  seasons  of  the  year,  particularly  from 
January  to  March,  it  is  found  in  considerable  numbers  at  the 
entrance  to  Port  Jackson,  and  is  captured  in  abundance  by  means 
of  hook  and  line,  being  familiarly  known  to  boys  as  "  School 
Whiting."  Though  this  must  have  gone  on  for  a  number  of 
years,  it  seems  very  strange  that  it  should  have  seemingly 
altogether  escaped  the  notice  of  naturalists.     It  is  a  comparatively 

*  Proc.  Zool.  Acclim.  Soc.  Vict,  i.,  1872,  p.93. 

t  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  iii.,  1829,  p.415. 

X  Voy.  'Astrolabe,'  pi.  i.,  fig.  2. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  575 

small  species,  attaining  maturity  at  about  one-half  the  size  of  the 
mature  Trumpeter  Whiting  (»S'.  maculata),  which  is  the  next 
species  in  point  of  size.  It  is  the  cleanest-looking  of  our 
Whitings,  being  generally  semitransparent,  with  a  whitish - 
silvery  body  and  a  broad  silvery  band  along  each  side.  The 
dorsal  surface  is  inclined  to  be  of  a  rufous  tinge,  while 
along  each  side,  above  the  median  line,  are  a  number  of 
reddish  or  reddish-brown  somewhat  narrow  diagonal  blotches. 
Looked  at  from  above,  these  are  seen  to  be  arranged 
symmetrically  on  each  side.  They  are  not  nearly  so  prominent 
as  the  large  irregular  dusky  blotches  to  be  seen  on  the  sides  of 
S.  maculata;  from  which  species  it  also  differs  in  the  number  of 
scales  in  the  lateral  line,  and  in  the  number  of  rays  in  the  second 
dorsal  and  anal  fins.  A  v'ery  noticeable  character  also,  is  that, 
unlike  S.  ciliata  and  S.  maculata,  there  is  no  dark  spot  at  the 
base  of  the  pectoral  fin.  This  is  the  species  that  was  obtained 
so  plentifully  with  the  trawl  during  the  '  Thetis  '  expedition  in 
1898  in  depths  ranging  from  16  to  8-t  fathoms,  and  which  was 
referred  by  Waite  to  the  Trumpeter  Whiting,  S.  iiiaculata*  It 
would  have  been  remarkable  if  a  littoral  fish  like  S.  maculata, 
whose  natural  habitat  in  our  waters  is  the  muddy  bottoms  of 
harbours  and  coastal  lakes  and  estuaries,  were  found  to  have 
such  a  great  bathj^metrical  distribution  as  its  capture  in  84 
fathoms  would  imply.  So  far  there  is  no  authentic  record  of  the 
capture  of  ^.  macidata  at  sea  excepting  on  muddy  bottoms,  such  as 
occur,  for  instance,  at  the  entrance  to  the  Hawkesbury  River." 

•'  Sillago  bassensis  is  the  common  Whiting  of  Tasmania,  where, 
following  Johnston,f  it  is  at  present  usuall}'  distinguished  as 
*S'.  ciliata  (our  Sand  Whiting)  from  which,  however,  it  greatly 
differs. 

-  "The  young  fry  of  this  Whiting  may  be  obtained  by  the  hauling- 
net  on  fairly  shallow  sandy  bottoms  off  the  coastal  beaches  and  at 
the  entrance  to  Port  Jackson,  and  some  other  somewhat  similar 


*  Mem.  Aust.  Mus.  iv.,  1S99,  p.  109. 
t  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.  1S90,  p.  25. 


576  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

localities,  in  great  abundance.  It  is  quite  easily  recognised,  even 
if  mixed  with  the  fry  of  other  species,  as  it  possesses  the  distinc- 
tive appearance  of  the  adult  down  to  a  very  small  size.  In  the 
fry  of  S.  maculata  the  dark  blotches  are  relatively  much  larger 
than  they  are  in  the  adult  of  that  species,  while  the  young  of 
S.  ciliata  possess  small  dark  blotches,  which  entirely  disappear 
before  the  age  of  maturity  is  reached." 

Mr.  L.  Harrison  exhibited  an  egg  of  the  Pallid  Cuckoo  {Cuculns 
pallidus  Lath.)  taken  by  Mr.  R.  L.  Harrison  at  Manly  on  29th 
October,  1905.  The  female  was  flushed  from  the  ground  and. 
the  egg  picked  up  at  the  spot  from  which  she  rose. 

Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  a  series  of  specimens  obtained  at 
Bondi  by  Mr.  H.  Ashton,  illustrating  the  life-history  of 
Fauropsalta  annulata  Goding  ^  Froggatt.  The  insect  is  the  most 
common  of  the  small  Cicadas;  and,  in  the  larval  and  pupal  stages, 
it  lives  on  the  roots  of  grass  and  of  young  wattles.  He  also 
showed  two  fine  examples  of  the  curious  neuropterous  insect, 
Croce  attenuata  Froggatt  (Fam.  Nemopteridm),  forwarded  by  Mrs. 
Black,  of  North  Queensland. 

Mr.  Gurney  showed  a  series  of  insects  collected  at  Coolabah, 
Western  New  South  Wales.  Worthy  of  note  were  the  larvae 
and  adults  of  a  beetle  {Bryachus  squamicollis,  Pasc.)  which  feed 
on  the  bark  of  Eucalypts;  and  also  a  cluster  of  small  brown 
capsules,  presumably  the  egg-cases,  found  on  the  trunk  of  a  tree; 
three  eggs  were  laid  in  each,  apparently,  as  there  were  three 
young  larvae  enclosed  in  each  capsule.  Some  of  the  large  mud 
cells  of  the  wasp  Felopceus  Icetus  were  also  shown,  together  with 
a  large  green  parasite  (Fam.  Chrysiclidce)  taken  from  one  of  the 
cells. 

Mr.  Hedley  exhibited  a  pelagic  crustacean,  Phronima  seden- 
taria  Forsk.,  which  he  had  found  stranded  on  Maroubra  beach  in 
August  last.  It  was  then  alive  and  breeding  in  a  '  Phronima 
house,'  formed  of  the  bell  or  test  of  the  ascidian  Pyrosoma.  Mr. 
A.  McCulloch,  who  determined  the  specimen,  informed  him  that 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS,  577 

the  species  had  not  hitherto  been  recorded  from  Australia,  though 
an  unnamed  Phronima  was  taken  by  the  '  Challenger '  between 
Sydney  and  New  Zealand. 

Mr.  W.  S.  Dun  exhibited  specimens  of  a  new  species  of  Lej^i- 
dodendron  from  Yalwal,  collected  by  Mr.  E.  C.  Andrews.  These 
were  evidently  of  the  Lepidodendron  veltheimianum  type,  and 
constitute  a  new  species  somewhat  closely  allied  to  Nathorst's  L. 
Heeri  from  the  Lower  Carboniferous  of  Nova  Zembla.  From 
stratigraphical  considerations  the  Lepidodendron  beds  at  Yalwal 
appeared  to  be  of  Devonian  age. 

Mr.  C.  A.  Siissmilch  exhibited  a  specimen  of  a  similar  Lepi- 
dodendro)i  collected  by  Mr.  W.  W.  Simpson  at  Bermagui. 

Mr.  E.  Cheel  showed  herbarium  specimens,  together  with  fresh 
examples  raised  from  seed,  of  what  he  believed  to  be  an  unde- 
scribed  species  of  Callisteinon,  collected  on  mountain  slopes  of  the 
Crawford  River  near  Bulahdelah  in  October,  1902.  One  plant, 
although  only  three  years  old,  produced  thirty-seven  spikes  of 
bloom.  All  the  seedling  plants  show  the  characteristics  of  the 
parent  plant,  viz.,  bracts  very  persistent,  leaves  acuminate, 
strongly  veined  and  somewhat  undulate;  fruits  slightly  smaller 
than  those  of  C.  lanceolatus  DC,  and  densely  covered  with  per- 
sistent silky  hairs.  A  series  of  specimens  of  0.  lanceoiatus 
showing  considerable  variation  was  exhibited  for  comparison. 

Mr.  D.  McAlpine  sent,  for  exhibition,  a  specimen  of  a  new 
species  of  Rust  {Piiccinia  loranthicola  McAlp.)  recently  met  with 
upon  the  leaves  of  Loranthus  celastroides  in  Victoria. 

Mr.  Maiden  showed  a  large  number  of  herbarium  specimens  in 
illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Tillyard  showed  the  type-specimens  of  three  new  species 
of  Austrogomphus  in  illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  T.  G.  Taylor  exhibited,  and  explained  the  construction  of 
a  Stereogram  of  New  South  Wales.  The  model  is  about  6x5 
feet,  and  was  made  in  the  Geological  Department  at  the  Univer- 
si.ty,  by  the  direction  of  Professor  David.     The  horizontal  scale 


578  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

is  12  miles  to  the  inch;  and  the  vertical  4000  feet  to  the  inch^ 
gi^ing  the  vertical  an  exaggeration  of  seventeen  times  the 
horizontal.  Among  other  important  features,  the  model  shows 
very  clearly  the  ancient  trend  of  the  Shoalhaven  and  Wollondilly 
Rivers  to  the  north,  possibly  towards  the  old  Permo-Carboniferous 
sea;  the  shifting  of  the  Divide  by  the  Hunter  and  Goulburn 
Rivers;  the  uniform  north-west  trend  of  the  upper  waters  of  the 
Darling  tributaries,  indicating  an  ancient  Divide  running  more 
to  the  north-east  than  at  present;  the  exceptionally  curved  course 
of  the  Castlereagh,  seen  to  be  due  to  the  elevation  of  the 
eruptive  mass  of  the  Warrumbungles;  the  much  greater  bulk  of 
the  New  England  Plateau  as  compared  with  the  Kosciusko 
system;  and  the  unexplained  isolation  of  the  Lake  George 
drainage.  The  model  will,  it  is  hoped,  be  of  use  in  connection 
with  many  physiographical  problems  in  this  State. 

Dr.  R.  Greig  Smith  showed  a  number  of  lantern  slides  in 
illustration  of  his  papers. 

Mr.  North  sent  for  exhibition  a  specimen  of  a  Motacilla  closely 
allied  to  Motacilla  borealis  and  M.  cinereicapilla  of  Europe.  It 
was  obtained  on  the  10th  June,  1905,  at  Bimbi,  on  the  Dawson 
River,  Queensland,  by  the  well-known  collector  Mr.  H.  G. 
Barnard.  The  addition  of  the  genus  Motacilla  to  the  Australian 
avifauna  is  of  considerable  interest.  It  is  somewhat  remarkable, 
however,  that  its  single  representative  is  not  allied  to  M.  Jlava, 
whose  range  extends  to  Java  and  Timor,  but  to  species  of  more 
restricted  habitats.  The  specimen  under  consideration  is  an 
adult  male,  in  perfect  plumage.  It  has  a  well  pronounced  white 
superciliary  stripe,  as  is  shown  in  Dr.  R.  B.  Sharpe's  fig.  6  of  the 
head  of  M.  cinereicapilla  *  but  the  throat  is  yellow,  not  white  ; 
the  lores  and  feathers  below  the  eye  are  black,  and  a  blackish 
wash  extends  over  the  anterior  portion  of  the  ear  coverts,  and  the 
chin  is  white.  On  the  underparts  it  resembles  fig.  1  on  the  same 
plate,  M.   borealis,  in  having  the  throat  yellow,  and  a  blackish 

*  Cat.  Bds.  Brit.  Mus.  Vol.x.  pl.vii. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  579 

narrow  band  across  the  foreneck.  Total  length  6-15  inches, 
wing  3-08,  tail  2*9,  bill  0-5,  tarsus  0-9.  Owing  to  seasonal 
changes  and  varying  phases  of  plumage,  considerable  difference 
of  opinion  exists  among  ornithologists  who  have  made  a  life-long 
study  of  the  genus  Motacilla,  as  to  the  validity  of  certain  of  its 
species  or  subspecies.  Should  the  specimen  obtained  by  Mr. 
Barnard  in  Queensland  not  be  an  unusually  plumaged  visitor  or 
straggler  from  another  clime,  and  the  characters  pointed  out 
above  in  which  it  differs  from  M.  cinereicapilla,  prove  constant, 
Mr.  North  proposed  to  distinguish  it  under  the  name  of  Motacilla 
harnardi  in  honour  of  its  discoverer.  Mr.  Barnard  thus  refers 
to  the  above  specimen:  "I  send  you  a  small  bird  I  shot  at  Bimbi 
on  the  10th  June,  1905,  which  is  new  to  me.  When  first  seen  it 
was  on  the  ground,  and  ran  along  like  the  Australian  Pipit 
(Anthus  australis).  During  flight  the  white  feathers  on  each 
side  of  the  tail  were  very  conspicuous.  It  is  the  only  one  [  have 
ever  seen,  and  my  attention  was  first  attracted  to  it  by  its  sharp 
whistling  note." 


580 


DONATIONS  AND  EXCHANGES. 

Received  during  the  period  December  1st,  1904, 
to  November  29th,  1905. 

(From  the  respective  Societies^  <tc.,  tinless  otherwise  mentioned.) 


Adelaide. 
Department  of  Mines,  South  Australia — 

Review  of  Mining  Operations  in  the  State  of  South  Australia 

during  the  Half -year  ended  December  31st,  1904  (1905). 
Supplementary  Mining  Records,  consisting  of  Notes  on  the 
Iron  and  Phosphate  Deposits  of  South  Australia,  by  the 
Government  Geologist  (H.  Y.  L.  Brown,  F.G.S.);  Reports 
from  the  Warden  and  Inspector  of  Mines  (W.  H.  Matthews, 
M.I.M.M.,  Lond.),  and  other  Departmental  Reports. 
Compiled  and  Edited  by  L.  C.  E.  Gee,  S.M.  (1905), 
Public  Library,  Museum,  &c.,  of  South  Australia — 

Report  of  the  Board  of  Governors  for  1903-1904,  and  1904- 
1905. 
Royal  Society  of  South  Australia — 

Transactions  and  Proceedings.    xxviii.(1904). 

Amsterdam. 

KONINKLIJKE  AkADEMIE  VAN  WeTENSCHAPPEN  — 

Jaarboek,  1903. 

Proceedings  of  the  Section  of  Sciences.    vi.(  1903-04). 
Verhandelingen.    2*i«  Sectie.    x.1-6,  T.p.,  &c.(1903-04). 
Verslag  van  de  Gewone  Vergaderingen.    xii.(  1903-04). 
Koninklijke     Zoologisch    Genootschap  :     Natura    Artis 
Magistra — 
Bijdragen  tot  de  Dierkunde.    17^-18^  Afl.(1893-1904). 

Antwerp. 

Societe  Royale  de  Geographie  d'Anvers — 
Bulletin,    xxviii. 2-4(1 904-05). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  581 

Baltimore. 
Johns  Hopkins  University — 

Hospital  Bulletin.    xv.l63-165(1904);  xvi.l66-175(1905). 

Hospital  Reports.    xii.(1904). 

Journal  of  Experimental  Medicine,    ii.4-6;  iii.l,  2,  3,  6;  vi.3 

(1897-1902). 
University  Circulars.    1904,  1-8;  1905,  1(1904-05). 
Maryland  Geological  Survey — 

Reports  dealing  with  the  Systematic  Geology  and  Palaeonto- 
logy of  Maryland.    Vol.ii.  Miocene.   Text  and  Plates(1904). 

Basel. 

Naturforschende  Gesellschaft  in  Basel — 
Verhandlungen.    xv,  3;  xvii.(1904). 

Berkeley,  CaL 

University  of  California — 

Announcement  of  Courses,  1903-04,  1904-05(1903-04). 
Publications.    Botany,    ii.  1-2(1904). 

,,  Geology.    Bulletin,    iii.  16-22,    T.p.,  &c.;   iv.  1 

(1904). 
Pathology.    i.2-7(1904). 

Physiology,    i.13-22,  Tp.,  &c.;  ii.l-9(1904-05). 
Zoology,   i.6-8;  ii.  1-3(1904-05). 
University  Quarterly  Bulletin,    n.s.   v. 3;  vi. 1-2(1904). 
College  of   Agriculture :   Agricultural    Experiment  Station. 
Bulletins.    155-161(1904). 
Circulars.    5-12  and  "The  New  Fertilizer  Law  "(1903-04). 

Berlin. 

Archiv  f.   Naturgeschichte.       1896(lxii.  Jahrg.)  ii.l(1904); 

1897(lxiii.  Jahrg.)ii.l  and   3(1904-05);   1898(lxiv.Jahrg.) 

ii.3(1905);     1901(lxvii.   Jahrg.)  ii.2,^,  1-2  Lieferung(1904); 

1904(lxx.Jahrg.)i.2(1904);1905(lxxi.Jahrg.)i.l-2(1904-05). 

EntOxMologischer  Verein  zu  Berlin — 

Berliner  Entomologische  Zeitschrift.    xlix.  3-4(1 905). 
Gesellschaft  f.  Erdkunde  zu  Berlin — 
Zeitschrift.      1904,5-10;   1905,1-5. 
38 


582  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Berne. 

Naturforschende  Gesellschaft  in  Bern — 

Mitteilungen  aus  dem  Jahre  1904.    Nr.  1565-1590(1905). 

SOCIETE  HeLVETIQUE  DES  SCIENCES  NaTURELLES — 

Actes.    87°^«  Session,  1904(1905). 

Bonn. 

Naturhistorischer  Yerein  in  Bonn — 
Verhandlungen.    1x1.1(1904). 

Sitzungsberichte    der    Niederrheinischen    Gesellschaft    fiir 
Natur-  und  Heilkunde  zu  Bonn.      1904,1(1904). 

Boston. 

American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences  — 

Proceedings.  xxxix.24(1904);xl.l-23(1904-05);  xli.l-7(1905). 

Boston  Society  of  Natural  History — 
Memoirs,    v.10-11,  T.p.,&c.;  vi.l(i903-05). 
Proceedings,    xxxi.2-10,  T.p.,&c.;  xxxii.l-2(1903-04). 

Bremen. 

Naturwissenschaftlicher  Verein  — 
Abhandlungen.    xviii.  1(1905). 

Brisbane. 

Department  of  Agriculture — 

Annual  Report  of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  and  Stock 

for  the  Year  1904-05(1905). 
Queensland    Agricultural    Journal.     xv.5-8,T.p.,ii:c.;  xvi.1-2 
(1905). 
Geological  Survey  of  Queensland — 

Publications.    Nos.l96-200(1905). 
Queensland  Museum — 

Annals.   No.6(n.d.). 
Royal  Geographical  Society  of  Australasia  (Queensland 
Branch) — 
Queensland  Geographical  Journal,  (n.s.)    xix.-xx.(  1903-05). 
Royal  Society  of  Queensland — 
Proceedings.    xix.l(1905). 


DONATIONS   AND    EXCHANGES.  583 

Brooklyn,  U.S.A. 

Brooklyn  Institute  of  Arts  and  Sciences— 

Cold  Spring  Harbour  Monographs.    Nos.3-5(1905). 
Science  Bulletin.    i.5-6(1905). 

Brussells. 

Academie  Royale  de  Belgique — 

Annuaire.    1905. 

Bulletin  de  la  Classe  des  Sciences.    1904,  5-12;  1905,  1-4. 
Societe  Entomologique  de  Belgique  — 

Annales.    xlviii.(1904). 
Societe  Royale  Linneenne  de  Bruxellbs — 

Bulletin,    xxx.l, 3-9(1904-05). 
Societe  Royale  Zoologiqub  et  Malacologique  de  Belgique 

Annales.    xxxvii.-;cxxix.(  1903-05). 

Budapest 

Museum  Nationals  Hungaricum — 
Annales.    ii.2;  iii.l(1904-05). 

Baenos  Aires. 

MusEO  Nacional  de  Buenos  Aires — 

Anales.    x.-xi.(1904-05).    [Serie  iii.    Tomes  iii.-iv.] 

Caen. 

Societe  Linneenne  de  Normandie — 
Bulletin.    (5),vii.    Annee  1903(1904). 

Calcutta. 

Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal— 
Journal.    Ixxiii.    Parti.  ^os.S-i — Part  ii.  'Nos.S-d —Part  iii. 

Nos.3-4(1904). 
Proceedings.    1904,  6-10(1904-05). 
Geological  Survey  of  India — 

Palaeontologia    Indica.     New    Series.    Vol.ii.    Memoir  No.  2 

(1905). 
Records,    xxxi.4;  xxxii.l-2(1904-05). 
Indian  Museum — 

Annual  Report,  1903-04(1905). 


584  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Indian  Museum  (continued) — 

Catalogue  of  the  Indian  Decapod  Crustacea  in  the  Collection 

of  the  Indian  Museum.    Part  ii.  Anomura;    Fasciculus  1, 

Pagurides.    By  A.  Alcock,  M.B.,  LL.D.,  F.R.S.,  (tc.(4to., 

1905). 
An  Account  of  the  Deep-Sea  Holothurioidea  collected  by  the 

Royal  Indian  Marine  Survey  Ship  Investigator.      By  R. 

Kcehler  and  C.  Vaney(4to.,  1905). 

Cambridge,  England. 

Cambridge  Philosophical  Society — 
Proceedings,    xiii.  1-2(1 905). 

Cambridge,  Mass. 

American   Naturalist,    xxxviii.  453-456  (Sept.-Dec,  1904) ; 

xxxix. 457-466  (Jan.-Oct.,  1905).     From  the  Puhlishers. 
Museum  op  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard  College — 
Annual  Report  of  the  Keeper  for  1903-04(1904). 
Bulletin.    xlii.6(Geol.  Ser.vi.);  xlv.4;  xlvi.2-9;xlvii.(1904-05). 

Cape  Town. 

Department  of  Agriculture,  Cape  of  Good  Hope — 

Geological  Commission.   Ninth  Annual  Reportforl904(1905). 
Index  to  the  Annual  Reports  of  the  Geological  Commission 
for  the  Years  1896-1903(1904).      From  the  Director. 
Marine  Investigations  in  South  Africa.    ii.(1904);  iii.pp.17- 
152(1903-04).     From  the  Government  Biologist. 
South  African  Museum — 
Annals,    iii. 6-9(1 904-05). 
South  African  Philosophical  Society  — 

Transactions,    xv.3-5,  T.p.,&c.;  xvi. 1(1904-05). 
Cherbourg. 

Societe  Nationale  des  Sciences  Natukelles,  &c. — 
Memoires.    xxxiv.(1904). 

Chicago. 

Field  Columbian  Museum — 

Geological  Series,    ii.5-6;  iii.l(1904-05). 

Report  Series.    ii.4(1904). 

Zoological  Series.    T.p.,&c.  toiii.;  iv.l-2(1904). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  585 

Christiana. 

Vidbnskabs-Selskabet  I  Christiania — 
Forhandlinger.    Aar  1903(1904). 
Skrifter.    i.Math.-Naturvid.  Klasse.  1903(1904). 

Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
Lloyd  Library — 

Bulletin  No.7(1903)  [Reproduction  Series,  No.4];  No.8(1905) 

[Mycological  Series,  No.  3]. 
Mycological  Notes.    Nos. 16-18(1904). 

Colombo,  Ceylon, 
Colombo  Museum — 

Spolia  Zeylanica.    ii.7'8;  iii.9-10(1904-05). 

Colorado  Springs,  U.S.A. 
Colorado  College — 

Studies     General  -Series,    xi.  Nos.33-35,  36-38,  39-41(1904- 
05).    Language  Series,   xii.  Nos.l5-17(1904). 

Columbus,  Ohio. 

Biological  Club  of  the  Ohio  State  University — 

Ohio  Naturalist,    v.  1-8(1 904-05). 
Journal  of  Mycology,     x.74;  xi. 75-77(1 904-05).     From  the 
Editor,  Dr.   W.  A.  Kellerinan. 

Copenhagen. 

Academie  Royale  des  Sciences  et  des  Lettres  de  Danemark. 

Bulletin.     1904,4-6(1904);  1905,1-3(1905). 
Naturhistoriske  Forening  I  Kjobenhavn  — 

Videnskabelige  Meddelelser  for  Aaret  1904. 

Dublin. 

Royal  Dublin  Society — 

Economic  Proceedings.    i.5-6(  1904-05). 

Scientific  Proceedings.    New  Series,    x.2-3,  T.p.,  &c.;  xi.  1-5 

(1904-05). 
Scientific  Transactions,    Second  Series,    viii.6-16.,  T.p.,  (fee; 
ix.  1(1904-05). 
Royal  Irish  Academy — 

Proceedings,    xxv.    Section  B.  Parts  1-5(1905). 


586  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Dunedin. 

Australasian  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science. 

Report  of  the  Tenth  Meeting  held  at  Dunedin,  1904(1905). 
Otago  Museum  — 

Transactions  and  Proceedings  of  The  New  Zealand  Institute, 
xxvii.-xxxvii. (1894-1905). 
Edinburgh. 

Royal  Physical  Society — 

Proceedings,    xvi.  1-3(1904-05). 
Scottish  Microscopical  Society — 
Proceedings,    iv.  1(1904). 

Florence. 

SociETA  Entomologica  Italiana — 
Bullettino.    xxxvi.l-3(1905). 
Frankfurt  am  Main. 

Senckenbergische  Naturforschende  Gesellschaft — 
Abhandlungen.    xxvii. 4(1905). 
Bericht,  1904. 

Freiburg  i.  Br. 

Naturforschende  Gesellschaft  zu  Freiburg  i  Br. — 
Berichte.    xiv.(1904). 
Geelong. 
Geelong  Field  Naturalists'  Club — 

''  Geelong  Naturalist."    Second  Series,    i.3-4;  ii.l(1904-05). 
Geneva. 
Societe  de  Physique  et  d'Histoire  Naturelle  de  Geneve-  — 
Memoires.    xxxiv.5;  xxxv.l(1905). 

Genoa. 

Museo  Civico  di  Storia  Naturale  di  Genova — 
Annali.    Serie  3^    Vol.i.(xli.)[1904-05]. 

Grahamstown,  South  Africa. 
Albany  Museum — 
Records.    1.4-5(1905). 

Granville,  Ohio. 

Denison  University — 

Bulletin  of  the  Scientific  Laboratories,    xii. 9-1 1(1904). 
General  Index  to  the  first  ten  Volumes  of  the  Bulletin,  1885- 
1897(1904). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  587 

Graz, 

Naturwissenschaftlicher  Verein  f.Steiermark — 
Mitteilungen.    1904(1905). 

Haupt-Repertorium  iiber  samtliche  Vortrage,  &c.,  welche 
sich  in  den  Heft  xxi.-xl.(1884-1903)der  Mitteilungen  befin- 
den(1905). 

Haarlem. 

SOCIETE  HoLLANDAISE  DES  SCIENCES — 

Archives   Neerlandaises.     Serie  ii.    ix.4-5,    T.p.,   &c.;    x.  1-4 

(1904-05). 
Natuurkundige  Verhandelingen.    Serie  iii.    vi.  1(1 905). 

Hague. 

Nederlandsche  Entomologische  Vereeniging — 

Entomologische  Berichten.    Nos.  19-24(1 904-05). 
Tijdschrift  voor  Entomologie.    xlvii. 2-4(1 904). 

Hamburg. 

Naturhistorisches  Museum  in  Hamburg — 

Mitteilungen.    xxi(1903)[1904]. 
Naturwissenschaftlicher  Verein — 

Verhandlungen.    iii.  Folge.    xii.(1905). 

Hamilton. 
Hamilton  Scientific  Association — 

Journal  and  Proceedings.   No.xx.    Session  1903-04(1 904  \ 

Helsingfors. 
SociETE  DES  Sciences  de  Finlande — 
Bidrag  till  Kannedom,  61-62(1902-05). 
Observations  Meteorologiques  faites  a  Helsingfors  en  1891- 

92,  1892-93,  1899(1904-05). 
Oefversigt.    xliv.-xlvi.(  1902-04). 

Etat  des  Glaces  et  des  Neiges  en  Finlande  pendant  I'Hiver 
1893-1894, 1894-1895,  expose  par  Axel  Heinrichs(  1904-05). 
SociETAs  PRO  Flora  et  Fauna  Fennica — 
Acta.    xxvi.(1904). 
Meddelanden.    xxx.(1904). 


588  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Hobart. 

Department  of  Mines — 

Progress    of    the    Mineral    Industry   of    Tasmania    for    the 

Quarters  ending  30th  September  and  31st  December,  1904; 

31st  March  and  30th  June,  1905. 
Report  on  Coal  near  George  Town  and  Slate  near  Badger 

Head.       By  W.  H.  Twelvetrees,  Government  Geologist 

(1904). 
Report   on   Coal   at    Mount   Rex.       By  W.  H.  Twelvetrees 

(1905). 

Honolulu,  T.H. 

Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop  Museum — 

Occasional  Papers,    ii. 3(1905). 
Hawaiian  Sugar  Planters'  Association — 

Report  of  Work  of  the  Experiment   Station.     Division   of 
Entomology.    Bulletin  No.  1.   Parts  1-4(1905). 

Indianapolis,  Ind. 

Indiana  Academy  of  Science — 
Proceedings,  1903(1904). 

Jena. 

Medicinisch-Naturwissenschaftliche  Gesellschaft — 

Jenaische  Zeitschrift.    xxxix.2-4;  xl.l-3(1904-05). 

Kiew- 

Societe  des  Naturalistes  de  Kiew — 
Memoires.    xix.(1905). 

Landshut  (Bayern). 

Naturwissenschaftlicher  (vormals  Botanischer)  Verein — 
Siebzehnter  Bericht.    1900-1903(1904). 

Lansing,  Mich- 

Michigan  Academy  of  Science — 
Fifth  Annual  Report,  1903(1904). 

La  Plata. 

Facultad   de   Ciencias  Fisico-Mathematicas   de    la   Uni- 
versidad — 
Publicaciones.    No.2(1904). 


DONATIONS     AND    EXCHANGES.  589 

Launceston,  Tas. 
Victoria  Museum  — 

Memoir  on  Macropus  Anak^  from  Kin^  Island(1905). 

Leipzic- 

ZooLOGiscHER  Anzeiger.    xxviii.6-26,  T.p.,&c.(Nov  1904-May, 
1905);  xxix.  1-1 4(June-0ct.  1905).      From  the  Editor. 
Liege. 

SociETE  Geologique  de  Belgique  — 

Annales.    xxxi.4,  T.p.,&c.;  xxxii. 1-2(1905). 

Lincoln,  U.S.A. 

American  Microscopical  Society — 

Transactions,    xxv.,  and  Index  to  Vols.i.-xxv.(1904). 

London. 

Bentham  Trustees  (per  Royal  Botanic  Gardens,  Kew) — 
Hooker's    Icones    Plantarum.    Fourth    Series.    viii.4(Jan., 

1905). 
British  Museum  (Natural  History) — 

Catalogue    of    the     Lepidoptera    Phalsense    in    the    British 

Museum.    Vol.v.    Text  and   Plates  (1905).     By  Sir  G.  F. 

Hampson,  Bart. 
Catalogue  of    the   Mesozoic  Plants  in   the   Department  of 

Geology,    British   Museum    (Nat.    Hist.).      The   Jurassic 

Flora.      Part  ii.      Liassic  and  Oolitic  Floras  of  England. 

By  A.  0.  Seward,  F.R.S.  (1904). 
Guide  to  the  Gallery  of  Birds  in  the  Department  of  Zoology 

of  the  British  Museum  (Nat.  Hist.)  (1905). 
Illustrations     of     Australian     Plants     collected     in     1770 

during  Captain  Cook's  Voyage  Round  the  World  in  H.M.S. 

Endeavour  by  The  Right  Hon.  Sir  Joseph  Banks,  Bart., 

K.B.,   P.R.S.,   and   Dr.   Daniel  Solander,  F.R.S.     With 

Determinations   by  James    Britten,   F.L.S.,   &c.    Part  iii, 

(1905). 
Second  Report  on  Economic  Zoology.     By  F.  V.  Theobald, 

M.A.  (1904). 
Synonymic   Catalogue  of    Orthoptera.      By   W.    F.    Kirby. 

Vol.i.(1904). 


590  DOXATIOyS  asd  exchaxgzs. 

E5T0M0LOGICAL  SOCIETY — 

Transactions.    1904,4-5:  1905,2-3(1904-05). 
Geological  Society — 

Geological    Literature   added    to    the    Geological    Society's 

Library  during    the   Year   ended    December  31st.    1904 

(1905). 
List  of  the  Society.    November,  1904. 
Quarterly  Journal,    lx.4:  1x1.1-3(1904-05). 
LiKKEA>-  Society — 

Jonmal.      Botany,    xxxvii.257-259 — Zoology,    xxix.190-192 

(1904-05). 
List  of  the  Society.    1904-05. 

Proceedings.     1 16th  Session  (November,  1903-June,  1904). 
Transactions.    Second  Series.    Botany.  vi.lC-ll.T.p.,<kc.:  vii. 

\-'2[\^^^0d)— Zoology,  ix.6-9;  x.  1-3(1904-05). 
Royal  Microscopical  Society — 

Journal.    1904,5-6;  1905,1-4(1904-05). 
Royal  Society — 

Obituary  Notices  of  the  Fellows  of  the  Royal  Society.    Parts 

1  and  4(1904-05;. 
Proceedings.    Ixxiv. 500-50 6 (1904-05). 
Proceedings.     Series  A.   Ixxvi.  [Mathematical,  (tc,  Sciences] 

N"os.A.507-512(1905). 
Proceedings.    Series  B.    Ixxvi.    [Biological  Sciences]  Nos.B. 

507-512(1905). 
Reports  to  the  Evolution  Committee.    ii.(1905). 
Reports    of    the    Sleeping    Sickness    Commission.    Nos.5-6 

(1905). 
Zoological  Society — 
Abstract  of  Proceedings.    Dec.  1st,  1903:  Nov.  15th  and  29th, 

Dec.  13th,  1904;  Feb.  21st,  1905,  and  Nos.  16-21  (March- 
June,  1905). 
Proceedings.     1904,  i.2;  ii.1-2;  1905,  i.l. 

Lyons. 

Societe  BoTA?riQCE  DE  Lyon — 
Annales.    xxviii.  1-4(1903;. 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  591 

Madison,  Wis- 

Wisconsin  Acai>eiiy  of  Sciences,  Arts,  and  Letters — 

Transactions.    xiv.2(1904:). 
Manchester. 

CONCHOLOGICAL  SOCIETY  OF  GrEAT  BRITAIN  AND  IRELAND — 

Journal  of  Conchology.    xi. 5-8(1905). 
Manchester  Literary  and  Philosophical  Society — 

Memoirs  and  Proceedings,    xlix.  1-3(1905). 
Manchester  Muskum,  Owens  College — 

Publications.    Nos.54-57(  1904-05). 

Manila,  PI. 

Department  of  thk  Interior  :  Bureau  of  Government 
Laboratories.  Publications.  Nos. 1-2, -t-5,  7-9,  13-31(1902- 
05) :  Third  Annual  Report  of  the  Superintendent  for  the 
Period  from  Sept.  1st,  1903,  to  Aug.  31st,  1904(1905): 
Price  and  Exchange  List  of  Philippine  Birds  in  the  Collec- 
tion of  the  Bureau  (1905) :  Vaccine  Virus,  Method  of  Pre- 
paration at  the  Serum  Laboratory.  By  P.  G.  Woolley,  !M.D. 
(1904). 

Department  of  the  Interior  :  Ethnological  Survey  Pub- 
lications.   Vol.ii.   Part  1(1904). 

Philippine  Exposition  Board — 

Album  of  Philippine  Types  (1904).  [Presented  by  the 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History  on  behalf  of  the 
Philippine  Government]. 

Marseilles. 

Faculte  des  Sciences  de  Marseille — 

Annales.    xiv.(1904). 
MusEE  d'Histoire  Xaturelle  Dfi  Marseille — 

Annales.    viii.    Section  de  Zoologie(1903). 

Melbourne. 

Australasian  Institute  of  Mining  Engineers — 

Transactions.    x.(1905). 
Australasian    Journal    of    Pharmacy.      Vol.xix.22S(Dec., 
1904);  xx.229-23S(Jan.-Oct.,1905).     Frmn  the  FubtL^her. 


592  donations  and  exchanges. 

Australasian  Ornithologists'  Union — 

"The  Emu."    iv.3-i;  v.1-2  and  Supplement  (1905). 
Department  of  Agriculture  of  Victoria— 

Journal.    T.p.  &c.,  to  ii.;  iii.l-9(1905). 
Field  Naturalists'  Club  of  Victoria — 

Victorian   Naturalist,     xxi.8-12;    xxii.l-7(1904-05).      Rules 
and  List  of  Members  (1905). 
Public  Library,  Museums,  ifec,  Victoria — 

Catalogue  of  Current    Periodicals  received  at  the   Public 
Library  of  Victoria  (1905). 

Report  of  the  Trustees  for  1904(1905). 
Royal  Geographical  Society   of  Australasia  (Victorian 
Branch) — 

Victorian  Geographical  Journal,    xxii.  1904(1 905). 
Royal  Society  of  Victoria — 

Proceedings.    New  Series,    xvii.2;  xviii.l(1905). 
Zoological  and  Acclimatisation  Society  of  Victoria  — 

Forty-first  Annual  Report,  1904(1905). 

Mexico. 

Instituto  Geologico  de  Mexico — 
Boletin.    7-9(in  one;   1897). 
Parergones.    i.4-8  1904-05). 

Michigan. 

Michigan  Academy  of  Science — 
M.  A.  S.  Bulletin,    i.2;  ii.  1(1904-05). 

Modena. 

La  Nuova  Notarisia.      Serie  xvi.    Gennaio,  Aprile,  Luglio, 
Ottobre,   1905.     Fro7n  the  Editor,  Dr.  G.  B.  De  Toni. 

Monaco. 

MusEE  Oceanographique  de  Monaco — 
Bulletin.    Nos.10-12,  20-47(1904-05). 

Montevideo. 

MusEO  Nacional  de  Montevideo — 

Anales.    Tomo  v.    pp.161-375,  T.p.&c.(1905). 
Seccion  Historico-Filosofica.    Anales.    Tomo  i.(1904). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  593. 

Montreal. 

Montreal  Society  op  Natural  History — 

Canadian  Record  of  Science,    ix. 3-5(1 905). 
Royal  Society  of  Canada — 

Proceedings  and  Transactions.    Second  Series,    x.  1-2(1905). 

Moscow. 

SociETE  Imperiale  des  Naturalistes — 
Bulletin.    Annee  1904,2-4(1905). 

Munich. 

Konigliche  Bayerische  Academie  der  Wissenschaften — 
Abhandlungender  Math.-physikal.Classe.  xxii. 2(1904):  Two 
Pamphlets  :   "  Zum  Andenken  an  Karl  von  Zittel,"  von 
K.  Th.  von  Heigel(1904);  "  Ueber  Wert  und  angeblichen 
XJnwert  der  Mathematik,"  von  A.  Pringsheim  (1904). 
Sitzungsberichte  der,  Math.-physikal.Classe.    1904,3;  1905,1 
(1905). 
Nantes. 

Societe  des  Sciences  Naturelles  de  l'Ouest  de  la  France. 
Bulletin.    2^Serie.    iii.3-4;  iv.l-4(1904). 

Naples. 

ZooLOGiscHE  Station  zu  Neapel — 
Mittheilungen.    xvi.4(1904}. 

New  York. 

American  Geographical  Society — 

Bulletin,    xxxvi.10-12,  T.p.&c;  xxxvii.  1-10(1904-05). 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History — 

Annual  Report  for  the  Year  1904(1905). 

Bulletin,    xvii.3;  xviii.3;  xx.(1904-05). 

Memoirs.    iii.3(1904). 

One  Separate  :  "  The  Grande  Soufriere  of  Guadeloupe,"  by 
E.  0.  Hovey  (Bull.  Amer.  Geog.  Soc,  Sept.  1904). 
New  York  Academy  of  Sciences — 

Annals.    T.p.  &c.  to  xiv.;  xv.3,T.p.&c.;  xvi-l(1904-05). 

Memoirs.    ii.4(1905). 

Odessa. 

Societe  des  Naturalistes  de  la  Nouvelle-Russie — 
Memoires.    xxvi. -xxvii. ( 1 904- 1905). 


594  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Ottawa. 

Department  of  thk  Interior  (Geographer's  Branch) — 
Maps  showing  Mounted  Police  Stations  in  North-Western 

Canada  (two  sheets)  and  in  the  North- West  Territories 

(two  sheets;   1904). 
Relief  Map  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada  (1904). 
Resource  Map,  Dominion  of  Canada  (1905). 
Map  of  Ontario.    Windsor  Sheet.    Sheet  1  S.W.(1904). 
■Geological  Survey  op  Canada — 

Annual    Report.     New   Series.     Vol.xiii.  1900(1903),    with 

Pocket  of  Maps(1904:. 
Catalogue  of  Canadian  Birds.    Part  iii.    By  J.  Macoun,  M.  A., 

<!^c.(1904). 
Contributions  to  Canadian  Palaeontology.     Vol.iii.(  Quarto) 

Part  3(1904). 

Oxford. 

Radcliffe  Library,  Oxford  University  Museum — 
Catalogue  of  Books  added  during  1904(1905). 

Palo  Alto,  California. 

Leland  Stanford  Junior  University— 

University  Quarterly  Bulletin.    No.22(1905). 

Para,  Brazil- 

Museu  Paraense  de  Hist.  Nat.  e  Ethnog.  (Museu  Gceldi) — 
Boletim.    iv-l-3(1904). 

Paris. 

Journal  de  Conchyliologie.    lii.3-4;  liii.  1(1904-05). 

Museum  d'Histoire  Naturelle — 

Bulletin.    Annee  1904,1-8,  T.p.&c:  1905,1(1904-05). 

Nouvelles  Archives.    4™^Serie.    vi.  1-2(1904). 
Societe  Zoologique  de  France — 

Bulletin.    xxix.l-9,T.p.&c.(1904-05). 

Memoires.    xvi.(1903). 

Perth,  W.A. 

Department  of  Agriculture,  West  Australia — 
.Journal.   X..5-6;  xi.l-6,T.p.(tc.;  xii.l-4(1904-05). 


donations  and  exchanges.  595 

Obological  Survey  op  West  Australia — 

Annual  Progress  Report  for  the  Year  1904(1905). 

Bulletin.    Nos.  14-20(1 904-05). 
Government  Statistician,  West  Australia — 

Monthly  Statistical  Abstract.    Nos.54-65(1904-05). 
West  Australian  Natural  History  Society — 

Journal.    No.2(1905). 

Philadelphia. 

Academy  of  Natural  Sciences — 

Proceedings,    lvi.2-3;  Ivii.  1(1904-05). 
American  Philosophical  Society — 

Proceedings,    xlii.174;  xliii.176-178;  xliv. 1 79(1 904-05). 

Transactions,    xii.-xx.,  xxi.l(1862-1905). 
University  op  Pennsylvania — 

University  Bulletins.    Fifth  Series.    No. 2,  Part  2;  No.  3,  Part 
2(1904-05). 
Zoological  Society  op  Philadelphia — 

Thirty-third  Annual  Report  of  the  Board  of  Directors(1905). 

Pietermaritzburg. 

Geological  Survey  of  Natal  and  Zululand — 

Second  Report.    By   W.   Anderson,  Government   Geologist 
(1904). 

Plymouth. 

Marine  Biological  Association  of  the  United  Kingdom^ — 
Journal.    New  Series.     vii.2(1904). 

Prague. 

SoCIETAS  EnTOMOLOGICA    BOHEMIiE — 

Acta.    i.l-4,T.p.  &c.(1904). 

Richmond,  N.  S-W. 

Hawkesbury  Agricultural  College — 
H.  A.  C.  Journal,    ii.1-1 1(1904-05). 

Rochester,  N-Y. 

Rochester  Academy  of  Science — 
Proceedings.    iv.pp.l37-148(l904). 


596  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

St.  John,N.B. 

Natural  History  Society  of  New  Brunswick — 
Bulletin,    v.3[No.xxiii.](1905). 

St.  Louis. 

Academy  of  Science — 

Transactions,    xii.9-10,  T.p.,  &c.;    xiii.1-9,  T.p.,  (fee;    xiv.1-6 
(1902-04). 
Missouri  Botanical  Garden — 

Sixteenth  Annual  Report  (1905). 

St.  Petersburg. 
Academie  Imperials  des  Sciences — 

Annuaire  du  Musee  Zoologique.    ix.3-4(  1904-05). 
Comite  Geologique  (Institut  des  Mines) — 

Bulletins,    xxii.5-10;  xxiii.l-6(1903-04). 

Memoires.    Nouvelle  Serie.    Livraisons  10,  11,  13,  14,  15,  17 
(1904), 
Russisch-Kaiserliche  Mineralogische  Gesellschaft — 

Materialien  zur  Geologie  Russlands.    xxii.  1(1904). 

Verhandlungen.    Zweite  Serie.    xli.2;  xlii.l(1903-04). 
Societe  Entomologique  de  Russie — 

Horse  Entomologicse.    xxxvii.  1-2(1904). 

San  Francisco. 

California  Academy  of  Sciences  - 

Memoirs.    Tp.,&c.,to  ii.(1888-96);  iv.(1904). 
Proceedings.    Botany.  T.ip.,&:c.,  to  i.;  ii.ll,  T.p.,  &c.  (1904) — 
Geology.    110,T. p., &c,{\90A)— Zoology.    T.p.,  &c.,  to  i,  ii.; 
iii.7-13(1900-04). 

Sao  Paulo. 

Museu  Paulista — 

Revista.    vi.(1904). 
Sociedade  Scientifica  de  Sao  Paulo  — 
Relatorio  da  Directoria,  1903-1904(1904). 
Revista.    No.  1(1905). 
Siena. 

ISTITUTO  BOTANICO  DELLA   R.   UnIVERSITA  DI  SiENA — 

Bullettino.    vii.  1-4(1905). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  597 

Stockholm. 

Entomologiska  Foreningen  I  Stockholm — 
Entomologisk  Tidskrifb.    xxv.  1-4(1 904). 

KONGL.   SVENSKA  VeTENSK APS-AkADEMIE 

Arkiv.  f.  Botanik.  iii.1-4;  iv.l-3(1904-05) — Kemi,  Mineralogi 
och  Geologi.  i.3-4;  ii.  1(1904-0.5) — Mathematik,  Astronomi 
ochFfjsik.    i.3-i{lQ04:)~Zoologi.    ii.l-3(1904-05). 

Handlingar,  N.F.    xxxvii.3;  xxxviii.  1-5(1 903-04). 

Les  Prix  Nobel  en  1901;  en  1902(1904-05). 

Meddelanden.    i.  I  (1905). 

"  Peter  Artedi."  A  Bicentenary  Memoir  written  on  behalf 
of  the  Swedish  Royal  Academy  of  Science  by  E.  Lonnberg. 
^rranslated  by  W.  E.  Harlock  (1905). 

ZooTOMiscHE  Institut  der  Universitat  zu  Stockholm — 

Arbeiten.    iv. 

Stuttgart. 

VEREi>r  p.  vaterlaendisghe  Naturkunde  in  Wuerttemberg. 
Jahreshefte.    Ix.  Jahrgang  u.  Beilage(1904). 

Sydney,  N.S.W. 

Australian  Museum — 

Records.    x.b-Q;  vi.  1-2(1 904-05). 

Report  of  the  Trustees  for  1903-04(1901). 
Board  of  Fisheries,  N.S.W. 

Report  of  Commissioners  of  Fisheries  for  the  Year  1903. 
Part  1(1904). 

Botanic  Gardens  and  Government  Domain,  Sydney — 

Critical   Revision   of  the  Genus   E^icalyptus.    Parts  vi.vii. 
(1905).     By  J.  H.  Maiden,  Government  Botanist  of  New- 
South  Wales  and  Director  of  tlie  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 
Reportof  the  Director  for  the  Years  1903(1904);  1904(1905). 
Ethnological  Committee  of  New  South  Wales — 

Third     Annual     Report    1904-05(1905).       Frojn    Percy    E. 
Williams,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec. 
39 


598  donations  and  exchanges. 

Department  of  Lands,  Forest  Branch,  N.S.W. — 

Forest  Flora  of  N.  S.  Wales.     By  J.  H.  Maiden,  Government 

Botanist,  <kc.    ii.3-7(1904-05). 
Report  of  the  Forestry  Branch  for  the  Period  1st  Jan.,  1904- 

30th  June,1905(1905). 

Department  of  Mines  and  Agriculture,  N.S.W. — 

Agricultural  Gazette  of    New  South  Wales.    xv.l2,   Index^ 

cfec;  xvi.l-ll(1904-05). 
Annual  Report  of  the  Department  of  Mines  for  1904(1905). 
Geological   Sketch   Map  of  the  Country  in   the  Vicinity  of 

Sydney  (1904). 
Geological  Survey  :  Memoirs.    Palaeontology.    No.l3(1904). 
Records,    vii.4;  viii.  1(1 904-05). 

Government  Statistician's  DeparTxMent,  N.S.W. — 

Statistical  Account  of  Australia  and  New  Zealand,  1903-04. 

By  T.  A.  Coghlan. 
Results  of  a  Census  of  New  South  Wales  taken  for  the  night 
of  the  31st  March,  1901(1904). 

Institution  of  Surveyors,  New  South  Wales — 

"  The  Surveyor."    xvii.11-12;  xviii.l-10(1904-05). 
Public  Library  of  New  South  Wales  — 

Report  of  the  Trustees  for  the  Year  1904  (1905). 
Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales — 

Abstract  of  Proceedings.    November,  1904;  May-November,. 
1905. 

Journal  and  Proceedings,    xxxviii.  1904(1 905). 
Sydney  Observatory — 

Current  Papers,  No. 8(1 904). 

Results  of  Meteorological  Observations  in  New  South  Wales 
during  1900,  1901  and  1902(1904). 

Results  of  Rain,  River,  and  Evaporation  Observations  made 
in  New  South  Wales  during  1901-02(1904). 
University  of  Sydney — 

Calendar,  1905. 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  599 

Tiflis. 

Jardin  Botaniquk  de  Tiplis  (Caucasus) — 
Memoires.    vii.3(1905). 
Tokyo. 

COLLBGK  OF  SCIENCE,  IMPERIAL  UNIVERSITY  OP  TOKYO — 

Journal,    xiv.;  xviii.8,  T.p.,  ifec;  xix.9  and  15,  T.p.,  (fee;  xx. 
1-7(1901-04). 
Department  op  Natural  History,  Tokyo  Imperial  Museum. 

Proceedings.    1.1-2(1904). 
Tokyo  Zoological  Society — 

Annotationes  Zoologicse  Japonenses.    v. 3-4(1 904-05). 

Toronto. 

Canadian  Institute — 

Proceedings,    n.s.    ii. 6(1 904). 
Transactions.    viii.i(1905). 

Turin. 

MUSEO  DI    ZOOLOGIA,  &C.,  DELLA    R.   UnIVERSITA  DI    ToRINO — 

Bollettino.    xix.(1904). 

Upsal. 

Kongl.  Universitets-Bibliotheket  I  Upsal  — 

Bulletin    of    the     Geological     Institution,     vi.     1902-03, 

[Nos.ll-12](1905). 
Meddelanden,  Nos.  26-28(1 904-05). 

Vienna. 

K.K.  Naturhistoriches  Hofmuseum  in  Wien — 

Annalen.    xix.  1-3(1904). 
K.K.  Zoologisch-botanische  Gesellschapt— 
Verhandlungen.    liii.-liv.(1903-04). 

Washington,  D.C. 
Bureau  of  American  Ethnology — 

Twenty-first  and  Twenty-second  Annual  Reports,  1899-1 900, 
1900-1901(1903-04). 
Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington — 

Publications.  Nos. 23, 24,30  (Papers  of  Station  for  Experi- 
mental Evolution  at  Cold  Spring  Harbour,  New  York, 
Nos.  1-3;  1905). 


$00  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington  (contimied) 

"The  Waterlilies  :  A  Monograph  of  the  Genus  Nymphcea." 
By  H.  S.  Conard(1905). 
Smithsonian  Institution — 

Annual  Report  of  the  Board  of  Regents  for  the  Year  ending 

June  30th,  1903(1904). 
Smithsonian    Miscellaneous     Collections,     xxx.  (Scientific 
Writings   of  Joseph   Henry,   2  vols.;  1886),  xxxiii.(Nos. 
543,  592,  636,  661),  xxxiv.(No.630  only),  xlii.-xliii.(1884- 
1901). 
U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture — 

Annual  Reports  for  the  Years  ended  June  30th,  1901;  and 
June  30th,  1904(1901-04). 
Bureau  of  Animal  Industry.     Bulletin,  Nos.  28,  34,37,  39  Pts. 
vii.-xi.,  52Pts.i.  &  iii., 54,58-72(1901-05) :    Circular,  Nos.l 
(rev.),  6-8,  19,  23(rev.),  31(rev.),  35,  47,  48,  50-52,  55-71, 
73-76,  78-80(1900-05)  :  Special  Report  on  the  Diseases  of 
Cattle(revised  ed.;  1904) :  Twentieth  Annual  Report,  for 
the  Year  1903(1904)  :  One  Reprint  from  Yearbook,  1904. 
Bureau  of  Chemistry.     Bulletin,  Nos.  13  Pts.ix.-x., 65,  68,69 
Pts.i.-v.,70,  77,  81,  83  Pts.i.ii.,  84  Pt.i.,  85-89(1898-1905). 
Circular,  Nos.l 5-1 6(rev.),  20-23(1904-05). 
Bureau  of  Forestry.     Bulletin,  Nos.7, 13(rev.),  24Pt  ii., 46-49, 
51-55,  60(1897-1905):    Circular   21-23  (rev.),   29,   32-34 
(1904-05). 
Bureau,  of  Plant  Industry.     Bulletin,  Nos.20,51Pts.i.(l-iv.-vi,, 

60-63,  65,  67-71,  72Pts.i.-iv., 73-76(1902-05). 
Bureau   of  Soils.      Bulletin,    Nos.ll,  23-25,   27(1898-05): 
Circular,   Nos.  14-1 5(1 904-05)  :    Field   Operations  of    the 
Bureau  of  Soils,  1903,  with  78  Maps  (1904). 
Division  of  Agrostology.     Circular,  No.l8(1899). 
Division  of  Botany.     Circular,  No.27(rev.;  1901). 
Division   of  Biological  Survey.      Bulletin,  Nos.  15-16,  18-20 
(1901-04) :     Circular,     Nos.42,  43,  47(1904-05)  :     North 
American  Fauna,  No. 24(1904). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  €01 

Department  of  Agriculture  (continued) — 

Division  of  Entomology.  Bulletin,  Nos.47,  50,  51,  53(1904- 
05):  Circular,  Nos. 9,  11,  13(rev.),  16,  26(rev.),  31,  32(rev.), 
34(rev.),  39,  47(rev.),  52,  56-59,  61,  62(1895-1904). 

Division  of  Pomology.     Bulletin,  No.8(1899). 

Division  of  Publications.  Bulletin,  No. 7(1 902)  :  Circular, 
No.  1(1 904)  :  List  of  Bulletins  and  Circulars  issued  by  the 
U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture,  tfec,  corrected  to  No- 
vember 1st,  1904. 

Farmers'  Bulletin,  Nos.71,  72,  81,  82,  85,  86,  89,  95,  96,  97, 
99,  103,  105-107,  109,  111,  120-122,  124,  126-129,  133-135, 
137,  138,  143,  147,  154,  156,  158,  164,  166,  170,  174,179, 
181,183-187,  192,198-200,  202-204,  206,  208-214,  216,  217, 
219,  220,  221,  223-226(1898-1905). 

Office  of  Exferimenl  Stations.  Annual  Report  for  the  Year 
ended  June  30th,  1903(1904):  Bulletin,  Nos.  28(rev.),  31, 
33,  63,  101,  102,  112(rev.),  136,  142-152,  154(1896-1905): 
Circular,  Nos. 23,  45,  46,  49,  56,  60,  61,  63(1901-05)  :  Ex- 
periment Station  Record,  xiv.4;  xv.lO-12,T.p.,<fec.;  xvi. 
1-10(1902-05):  Experiment  Station  Work.    ii.8-9(190j). 

Office  of  the  Secretary.     Circular,  Nos.  12-13(1 904). 

Hawaiian  Agricultural  Experiment  Station.  Bulletin,  No.  8 
(1905). 

Porto  Rico  Agricultural  Experimetit  Station..  Bulletin,  No. 
4(1904). 

Report  of  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture,  1904(1904). 

Yearbook,  1904(1905). 

U.S.  Geological  Survey — 

Bulletin.    Nos.226,  228-242,  244-246,  248-250,  252-255,  258- 

261,  264(1904-05). 
Mineral  Resources  of  the  United  States,  1903(1904). 
Professional  Papers.    Nos.22-33,  35,  39(1904-05). 
Twenty-Fifth  Annual  Report,  1903-04(1904). 
Water  Supply  and  Irrigation  Papers.    Nos. 93,  95-1 18(1904). 


602  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

U.S.  National  Muskum — 

Annual  Report  for  Year  ending  June  30th,  1903(1'905). 

Bulletin.    No.50,  Partiii.(1904). 

Contributions  from  the  U.S.  National  Herbarium,    viii.4;  ix. 

(1905). 
Proceedings.    xxvii.(1904). 
Special  Bulletin.     American  Hydroids.    Part  ii.    The  Sertu- 

laridcB.    By  C.  C.  Nutting(1904). 

Washington  Academy  of  Sciences— 

Proceedings,    vi.pp.203-481,  i.-viii.;  vii.l-300(l 904-05). 

Wellington,  N.Z. 

New  Zealand  Institute — 

Transactions  and  Proceedings,    xxxvii.,  1904(1 905). 

Private  Donors. 

Bailey,  F.  M.,  F.L.S.,  Brisbane — Four  Botanical  Separates  : 
"  Contributions  to  the  Flora  of  Queensland  "  (Queensland 
Agricultural  Journal,  April  and  July,  1904,  February  and 
June,  1905) — General  Index  to  the  "Queensland  Flora" 
(1905). 

De  Toni,  Pkof.  G.  B.,  Modena,  Italie — Two  Separates  :  "  Intorno 
al  Byssus  Purpurea  del  Lightfoot :  Nuove  Osservazioni " 
(Atti  de  Reale  Istituto  Venetio  di  Scienze,  kc,  1903-04.  T. 
xliii.):  ''  Intorno  ad  alcune  Bangia  di  Bory  e  di  Zanardini  " 
(Estratto  dall  Nuova  Notarisia,  Serie  xv.  Luglio  1904). — 
Sylloge  Algarum.  Vol.iv.  Floridese.  Sectio  iv.  Familiae 
i.-vii.(1905). 

Froggatt,  W.  W.,  F.L.S.,  Sydney — One  Entomological  Separate 
from  Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.W.  (being  Miscellaneous 
Publication  No.775  :   1904). 

Hancock,  Joseph  L.,  Chicago — Monograph  :  "The  Tettigida?  of 
North  America"  (8vo.,  Chicago,  1902). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  603 

Jordan,  President  David  Starr,  Palo  Alto,  Cal. — One  Separate: 
'*  Some  Experiments  of  Luther  Burbank  "  (Popular  Science 
Monthly,  Jan.,  1905):  "Fundamental  Principles  of  Plant 
Breeding."  By  Luther  Burl^ank.  (Read  at  the  Inter- 
national Plant  Breeding  Conference,  New  York,  Sept  30th 
to  Oct.  2nd,  1902). 

McAlpine,  D.,  Melbourne — One  Separate:  "A  New  Genus  of 
Uredine?e,  Uromycladium  "  ("  Annales  Mycologici,"  iii.4, 
1905). 

Maiden,  J.  H  ,  F.L.S.,  etc.,  Sydney — One  Separate  :  "  On  Hybri- 
dization in  the  Genus  Eucalyptus"  (Report  Aust.  Assoc. 
Advancement  Sci.,  Dunedin,  Jan.,  1904). 

Marshall,  C.  E.,  Ph.D.,  Lansing,  Mich. — One  Pamphlet :  "  Bac- 
teriology and  the  Bacteriological  Laboratory"  (1904). 

Perthes,  J.,  Gotha — Abdruck  aus  Dr.  A.  Petermanns  Geogr. 
Mitteilungen  1904,  Heft.xii.,  pp.217-226. 

Raffray,  a.,  Rome — Two  Separates  :  "  Genera  et  Catalogue  des 
Pselaphides  "  (Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  France,  Ixxii.,  Ixxiii.,  1903-04). 

Smith,  E.  A.,  LS.O.,  F.Z.S.,  Lond. — Eight  Separates  from  Proc. 
Malacol.  Soc.  vi.  1904  ("Note  on  the  Epiphragms  of 
Thaumastus,  &c.";  ^^  Cassis  fortisulcata,  n.sp.";  "  New  Land- 
Shells  from  East  Africa  "  ;  "  Description  of  a  New  Species 
of  Opisthostoma,  &c."  ;  "  The  Mollusca  of  Lake  Tanganyika  "; 
"  Note  on  Valuta  Brazieri  Cox  ";  "  New  Species  of  Ojnstho- 
stoma  from  Sarawak  ";  "  Species  of  Chione  from  New  Zea- 
land ") — One  Separate  from  Journ.  Malacol.  xi.  1904  ("  On  a 
Collection  of  Marine  Shells  from  Port  Alfred,  Cape  Colony"). 
— Three  Separates  from  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (7),  xiii.-xiv. 
1904-05  ("On  Mollusca  from  the  Bay  of  Bengal,  kc" 
(Nos.i.ii.);  "  Description  of  a  New  Species  of  Opisthostoma 
from  North  Borneo." 

Smith,  R.  Greig,  D.Sc,  Sydney — Two  Bacteriological  Separates: 
"  The  Production  and  Identification  of  the  Vegetable  (Bac- 
terial)   Gums"    (Report   Aust.    Assoc.    Advancement    Sci., 


604  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Dunedin,  1904,  and  Journal  of  the  Society  of  Chemical 
Industry,  Sydney,  N.S.W.  Section,  1904)— "  Northumber- 
land Sea  Fisheries  Committee,  Report  on  the  Scientific  In- 
vestigations for  the  Year  1904,"  Edited  by  A.  Meek,  M.Sc, 
F.Z.S.,  tkc,  (Dec,  1904). 

Spatzier,  Dr.  W.,  Schoneberg  bei  Berlin — One  Separate:  "Eine 
Sammlung  von  Referaten  neueren  Arbeiten  iiber  allgemeine 
Insektenbiologie  "  (Sonderdruck  aus  der  Allgemeinen  Zeit- 
schrift  fiir  Entomologie,  Ed.  ix.,  1904}. 

Waite,  Edgar  R.,  F.L.S.,  Sydney — Two  Separates  :  "Breeding 
Habits  of  the  Fighting  Fish";  ''Breeding  Habits  of  the 
Paradise  Fish"  v Records  Australian  Museum,  Vols,  v.-vi. 
(1904-05). 

Waters,  A.  W.,  Davos  Dorf,  Switzerland — Two  Separates  from 
Journ.  Linn.  Soc,  Zoolog}^,  xxix.  ("  Bryozoa  from  Franz- 
Josef  Land,  <fec.";  "Bryozoa  from  near  Cape  Horn  ") — One 
Separate  from  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (7).  xv.  1905  ("Notes 
on  some  recent  Bryozoa  "j. 


605 


WEDNESDAY,  MARCH  28th,  190G. 


The  Thirty-first  Annual  General  Meeting  of  the  Society  was 
held  in  the  Linnean  Hall,  23  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on 
Wednesday  evening,  March  28th,  1906. 

Mr.  T.  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

The  Minutes  of  the  preceding  Annual  General  Meeting 
(March  29th,  1905)  were  read  and  confirmed. 

The  President  delivered  the  Annual  Address. 


PRESIDENTIAL  ADDRESS. 


The  past  Session  has  been  marked,  as  usual,  by  an  amount  of 
scientific  activity  which  affords  grounds  for  satisfaction.  Thirty- 
two  papers  were  read,  and  opportunities  for  the  discussion  of  the 
subjects  treated  of  were  offered,  at  the  Meetings  held  during  the 
year.  The  majority  of  the  papers  have  been  published  and  dis- 
tributed, together  with  a  "Check-List  of  the  Sub-family  Carahince" 
which  was  issued  as  a  Supplement  to  Part  i.,  free  of  cost  to  the 
Society.  The  remainder,  comprising  the  seven  papers  read  at 
the  concluding  Meeting  of  the  Session,  have  been  printed  off  and 
will  be  issued  in  the  last  part  of  the  Proceedings  for  1905,  which 
is  now  almost  ready  for  publication.  Last  year's  volume  will,  in 
respect  of  size,  be  somewhat  behind  its  immediate  predecessors, 
but  in  this  connection  it  must  be  remembered  that  early  in  the 
Session  a  new  issue  of  the  Rules,  &c.,  was  printed,  and  also  that 
the  Session  opened  with  a  debit  balance  of  <£63,  which  neces- 
sitated some  curtailment  of  the  Society's  publishing  energy.  I 
am  very  glad  to  say  that  the  Hon.  Treasurer  will  presently  be 
able  to  announce  not  only  that  the  debit  balance  has  been 
liquidated,  but  also  that  the  Society  begins  the  new  financial 
40 


606  PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS. 

year  with  a  balance  to  the  good.  This  is  a  matter  for  satisfac- 
tion, but  it  has  mainly  been  brought  about  by  constant  watchful- 
ness on  the  part  of  the  Council  to  in  every  possible  way  keep 
down  the  cost  of  publication.  The  necessity  for  the  utmost  care 
in  this  matter  will  be  apparent  when  I  point  out  that  a  recent 
re-investment  of  £2,000  of  the  Society's  capital  had  to  be  made 
at  the  rate  of  3 J  %  interest,  the  lowest  which  we  have  ever 
received.  This  item  alone  means  a  reduction  of  XI 0  in  the 
Society's  income,  which,  as  you  know,  has  already  been  affected 
by  the  shrinkage  in  the  interest-bearing  value  of  money  to  an 
extent  which  was  never  anticipated  by  our  revered  patron,  Sir 
William  Macleay. 

For  the  reasons  mentioned  the  Council  found  it  necessary  to 
postpone  temporarily  the  publication  of  the  Macleay  Fellow's 
first  paper,  on  account  of  the  length  of  the  MS.,  and  the  numerous 
illustrations  required.  A  beginning  will,  however,  be  made  with 
this  paper  at  the  April  Meeting. 

In  addition  to  the  full  number  of  ordinary  meetings,  a  special 
meeting  was  held  in  January  last,  at  which  Dr.  W.  A.  Roth, 
Chief  Protector  of  Aborigines,  Queensland,  gave  a  most  luminous 
and  instructive  lecture  on  the  Aborigines  of  North  Queensland, 
illustrated  by  a  quite  unique  collection  of  lantern  slides.  ]t  is  a 
pleasure  to  place  on  record  our  very  high  appreciation  of  the 
work  which  is  being  carried  out  by  Dr.  Roth,  in  the  fulfilment 
of  his  important  duties  in  furthering  the  best  interests  of  the 
Aborigines,  and  in  his  extremely  valuable  ethnological  observa- 
tions. 

Nine  Ordinary  Members  were  elected  during  the  year,  and  two 
resignations  were  received,  a  nett  increase  of  seven.  As  the 
names  of  twenty-five  non-effective  Members  were  removed  from 
the  Roll  just  before  the  issue  of  the  new  edition  of  the  Rules 
and  List,  the  number  of  Members  remains  at  about  120. 

The  Society  has  to  regret  the  loss  of  the  oldest  surviving 
Honorary  Member,  Captain  F.  W.  Hutton,  F.R.S.,  Curator  of  the 
Canterbury  Museum,  Christchurch,  New  Zealand,  whose  connec- 
tion with  the  Society  dated  from  28th  October,  1878.     Captain 


president's  address.  607 

Hutton  retired  from  the  army  in  1866,  after  seeing  active  service 
in  the  Crimea,  in  China,  and  in  India  during  the  Mutiny.  Upon 
his  retirement  he  emigrated  to  New  Zealand,  and  had  nearly 
completed  forty  years  of  almost  uninterrupted  scientific  and 
educational  work  in  that  Colony.  Captain  Hutton  died  at  sea, 
while  on  the  return  voyage  from  a  holiday  trip  to  Europe,  on 
27th  October,  1905,  within  a  few  days  of  the  completion  of  his 
69th  year.  A  brief  biographical  sketch  of  Captain  Hutton  will 
be  found  in  '  Nature  '  for  9th  Nov.,  1905  (p.32).  A  less  recent, 
but  much  longer  account  of  his  life  and  work,  with  a  portrait, 
was  published  in  the  '  New  Zealand  Journal  of  Science  '  (Vol.ii., 
No.  7,  p. 301).  At  the  time  of  his  death  Captain  Hutton  was 
President  of  the  New  Zealand  Institute.  His  New  Zealand 
colleagues  have  already  taken  steps  to  inaugurate  a  Hutton 
Memorial  Research  Fund.  Captain  Hutton  contributed  several 
papers  to  our  Proceedings.  He  will  be  affectionately  remembered 
by  Australian  scientists  who  have  had  frequent  opportunities  of 
meeting  him  on  his  periodical  visits,  particularly  in  connection 
with  the  meetings  of  the  Australasian  Association  for  the 
Advancement  of  Science. 

Mr.  H.  I.  Jensen,  B.Sc,  has  been  reappointed  to  a  Linnean 
Macleay  Fellowship;  but  the  Council  did  not  see  its  way  to 
make  any  new  appointments  of  Macleay  Fellows  last  year.  The 
standard  which  the  Council  has  fixed  is  a  high  one,  and  it  is 
considered  desirable  that  the  most  ample  proof  of  ability  and  of 
sufficient  preliminary  experience  should  be  asked  from  Candidates 
for  so  important  appointments. 

The  present  Macleay  Fellow,  Mr.  Jensen,  during  the  past  year 
has  been  occupied  with  a  research  on  the  distribution,  nature  and 
sequence  of  volcanic  rocks,  particularly  trachytes,  in  certain 
districts.  In  April,  1905,  he  went  to  Queensland,  where  he  spent 
three  months  investigating  in  the  field  and  mapping  the  volcanic 
masses  of  parts  of  the  East  Moreton  and  Wide  Bay  districts. 
He  found  that  rocks  of  the  Glass  House  Mountain  type  recur 
about  twenty  miles  north  of  the  Glass  House  Mountains,  in  the 
Maroochy   River   district,    near  Yandina,    after    a    considerable 


008  PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS. 

break  covered  with  basalt  flows.  Here  these  rocks  are  associated 
with  rhyolites,  dacites,  aiidesites  and  basalts.  Necks  and  plugs, 
forming  gigantic  monoliths  (Coolum  Mt.,  Mt.  Cooran,  Mt. 
Cooroora,  Mt.  Eerwah,  (tc),  and  belonging  to  this  group,  were 
found  at  intervals  between  the  coast  on  the  east  and  the  Blackall 
Range  on  the  west,  the  Maroochy  River  on  the  south,  and 
Kin-Kin  Creek  on  the  north. 

In  the  D'Aguilar  Range  he  discovered  on  and  around  Mount 
Mee  an  interesting  series  of  metamorphic  rocks,  including  glauco- 
phane  and  anthophyllite  schists,  rutile  and  cyanite  granulites,  and 
allied  rare  rocks.  Further  westward,  on  the  Stanley  River  at 
Neurum,  he  found  numerous  rhyolite  and  pitchstone  peaks  (Mt. 
Archer,  ifec).  The  metamorphic  rocks  of  the  D'Aguilar  Range  were 
found  to  be  traversed  by  dykes  of  solvsbergite  and  keratoiDhyre. 
Many  interesting  physiographical  problems  were  studied,  and 
the  observations  made  upon  raised  beaches,  the  enormous  sand 
hills  along  the  coast  at  Noosa  River,  and  the  great  Coolum 
swamps  and  coastal  lakes  at  Noosa  should  prove  of  interest.  An 
important  fact  noticed  was  the  occurrence  of  great  igneous 
intrusions  of  porphyrite  at  Pt.  Ark w right,  and  of  true  quartz 
diorite  at  Noosa  Head  into  the  Triassic  sandstones. 

On  his  return  to  Sydney  Mr.  Jensen  sectioned  and  examined 
under  the  microscope  the  rocks  collected  upon  the  excursion,  and 
spent  some  time  writing  up  his  results,  making  maps,  and  drawing 
ideal  sections  of  the  district. 

In  October  he  again  left  Sydney,  going  this  time  to  the 
Warrumbungle  Mts.,  where  he  made  a  preliminary  trip  through 
the  district,  going  completely  round  the  mountain  mass,  and 
making  incursions  to  the  centre  of  the  group  from  Coonabarabran, 
Tannabar,  \V argon  Creek,  Tooraweanah  and  Bugaldi.  He  was 
able  in  this  way  to  construct  a  rough  geological  map  of  the 
district,  which  will  serve  as  an  excellent  basis  for  further  work 
this  year.  The  nature  of  the  volcanic  rocks  which  range  from 
trachyrhyolite  to  basalt,  and  their  relations  to  the  Triassic  and 
Permo-Carboniferous  sedimentary  rocks  of  the  district,  were 
investigated  as  closely  as  time  would  permit.     A  new  diatomaceous 


president's  address.  609 

•earth  deposit  was  examined  at  Bugaldi,  and  was  seen  to  be  over- 
lying as  well  as  capped  by  basalt. 

The  most  interesting  results  of  the  trip  were,  however,  the 
physiographical.  The  volcanic  masses  are,  in  Mr.  Jensen's 
opinion,  the  remains  of  an  old  dome-shaped  lava  plain,  to  which 
the  term  "  conoplain  "  may  be  extended  to  apply.  The  dissection 
of  this  plain  has  taken  place  mainly  through  "  arid  agencies." 
We  have  then,  in  this  district,  excellent  examples  of  "arid 
erosion." 

Before  returning  to  Sydney  Mr.  Jensen  visited  the  Nandhewar 
Mts.,  which,  both  in  petrological  character  and  in  topography, 
bear  close  resemblance  to  the  Warrumbungles,  and  also  give 
definite  evidence  of  the  arid  cycle  type  of  erosion. 

On  his  return  from  this  expedition  in  December,  the  Macleay 
Fellow  took  up  the  chemical  investigation  of  the  Glass  House 
Mountain  rocks,  and  has  since  made  twelve  complete  rock  analyses 
and  several  silica  estimations,  which  are  bringing  to  light  impor- 
tant facts.  Many  of  the  rocks  hitherto  described  as  "  orthophyric 
trachytes  "  are,  in  reality,  too  acidic  to  bear  the  name  of  trachyte. 
They  belong  to  the  comendites  and  pantellarites.  The  highly  sodic 
nature  of  all  the  rocks  of  the  district  was  chemically  veritied, 
And  the  close  relationship  of  the  Pt.  Arkwright  porphyrite  with 
the  Noosa  Head  quartz  diorite  was  verified  analytically  as  well  as 
mineralogically. 

During  the  past  year,  the  Macleay  Bacteriologist  continued 
■certain  work  upon  the  bacterial  origin  of  the  vegetable  gums. 
The  gumm}'^  exudate  issuing  from  a  species  of  Hakea  was 
shown  to  possess  rather  indefinite  characters  which  militated 
against  tracing  it  to  any  of  the  bacteria  that  were  found  in  the 
tissues  of  the  plant.  The  investigation,  however,  went  far  to 
prepare  the  way  for  another  research.  While  it  is  evident  that 
a  gum  or  mucilage  which  may  exude  from  a  plant  is  abnormal 
and  may  be  the  result  of  the  work  of  micro-organisms,  we  are  not 
so  ready  to  believe  that  a  mucilage  which  does  not  exude  and 
which  is  a  normal  constituent  of  a  plant,  can  have  other  than  a 
vegetable  origin.     Yet  it  has  not  been  shown  that  a  regulated 


610  president's  address. 

formation  of  slime,  gum  or  mucilage  by  bacteria  is  otherwise 
than  an  advantage  to  the  plant.  It  may  be  that  it  is  only  an 
abnormal  production  that  is  injurious  and  makes  itself  evident 
as  a  gum — or  slime — flux.  An  investigation  of  the  gum  of  Lin- 
seed mucilage  and  of  the  gums  produced  by  bacteria  isolated 
from  the  tissues  of  the  plant,  showed  that  one  or  two  of  the 
microbes  formed  gum  so  similar  to  Linseed  gum  as  to  point  to  its 
having  been  originally  formed  by  the  bacteria  and  subsequently 
altered  by  the  plant  to  mucilage.  In  reviewing  the  work  that 
has  been  done  in  the  Society's  laboratory,  upon  the  production 
of  gum,  it  will  be  noticed  that  the  majority  of  the  bacteria  are 
very  closely  allied;  the  only  differences  being  in  the  nature  of 
the  srums  aud  the  cultural  characters  which  are  influenced  bv  the 
gums.  It  has  been  found  that  their  typical  faculty  alters  under 
certain  circumstances,  and  it  is,  therefore,  probable  that  the 
group  originally  consisted  or  consists  of  one  type-species,  the 
physiological  activity  of  which  has  been  or  can  be  modified  by  a 
host-plant.  Bacteria  are  to  a  certain  extent  classified  by  their 
action  while  growing  upon  gelatin  media,  which  they  either  do 
or  do  not  liquefy.  A  microbe  which  brings  about  a  hardening  of 
the  medium  is  a  novelty,  and  such  a  microbe  has  been  described 
by  our  bacteriologist.  Another  curiosity  which  he  brought 
forward  was  a  bacterium  which  had  attached  to  it  capsular 
structures  like  lateral  wings. 

In  another  branch  of  bacteriology,  Dr.  Greig-Smith  has  indi- 
cated that  the  immunity  which  we  all  possess  against  the  multi- 
plication of  the  putrefactive  bacteria  may  have  its  origin  in  the 
slow  but  continued  passage  of  these  bacteria  across  the  wall  of 
the  intestinal  tract.  The  result  is  as  if  we  were  being  continu- 
ously vaccinated  with  these  bacteria.  Within  the  tissues  and 
vessels  of  the  immune  animal,  bacteria  are  destroyed  either  in 
the  fluids  or  within  the  phagocytes.  The  mobile  leucocytes  can 
readily  ingest  harmless  bacteria,  but  the  same  facility  is  not 
exhibited  towards  those  which  are  virulent.  From  a  considera- 
tion of  the  physical  relation  betw^een  a  microbe  and  a  mobile 
phagocyte,  it  appeared  probable  that  if  the  former  were   covered 


president's  address.  611 

with  a  substance  positively  chemotactic  towards  the  latter,  it 
would  be  englobed  and  in  all  probability  subsequently  dissolved. 
Such  a  covering  occurs  in  the  first  phase  of  agglutination.  This 
matter  was  investigated  and  it  was  found,  after  the  destruction 
of  certain  substances  which  might  interfere  with  the  main  issue, 
that  agglutinated  bacteria  were  phagocytosed.  It  was  also  found 
that  bacteria  which  had  been  agglutinated  by  certain  chemical 
substances,  instead  of  by  active  sera,  were  refused  by  the 
phagocytes.  The  property  of  immune  serum  to  induce  the 
phagoc3^tosis  of  bacteria  has  been  previously  noted  and  recently 
the  active  substance  has  been  called  opsonin.  The  similar 
behaviour  of  agglutinin  suggested  that  they  might  be  closely 
related.  The  subject  was  experimentally  examined  and  it  was 
shown  that  the  opsonins  and  the  agglutinins  agreed  in  so  many 
points  as  to  leave  little  doubt  that  opsonisation  is  the  first  phase 
of  agglutination. 

Two  students  received  full  courses  of  instruction  in  the 
Society's  laboratory  during  the  year. 

It  is  with  special  pleasure  that  I  allude  to  the  receipt  by 
Professor  Haswell  of  a  grant  of  £125  from  the  Royal  Society  of 
London  for  the  purpose  of  carrying  on  dredging  operations  in  the 
Tasman  Sea.  Mr.  Hedley  is  co-operating  with  Professor  Haswell 
in  this  important  scientific  undertaking.  The  military  authorities 
have  granted  the  use  of  s.s.  "Miner"  for  the  purpose.  Messrs. 
BuUivant  have  kindly  undertaken  to  supply  the  necessary  3,000 
fathoms  of  steel  wire  rope,  with  special  non-purchase  reel,  at  cost 
price,  and,  although  this  will  absorb  the  bulk  of  the  grant,  it  is 
confidently  anticipated  that  the  results  obtained  will  be  such  as 
will  lead  to  further  aid  being  granted.  It  is  intended  to  investi- 
gate the  life  of  the  Tasman  Sea  at  depths  of  about  2,000  fathoms, 
dredges  of  special  novel  construction  being  used. 

Another  matter  of  interest  which  I  would  just  like  to  mention 
is  the  recent  examination  of  the  Blue  Lake,  Mount  Kosciusko, 
by  means  of  a  little  dredge  worked  in  the  most  ingenious  manner 
from  a  specially  built  coracle  by  Professor  David,  Mr.  Hedley, 
and  colleagues.     The  detailed  results  are  not  yet  av..,iiable,  but 


0)12  PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS. 

Professor  DaA^id  informs  me  that  the  general  character  of  the 
organisms  secured  is  distinct!}'  Tasmanian. 

It  is  with  pleasure  and  .  satisfaction  that  I  have  to  announce 
that  the  Council  has  arranged  to  give  our  respected  Secretary, 
Mr.  Fletcher,  a  well  deserved  holiday.  After  his  record  of  some 
20  years  of  continuous,  faithful  and  unremitting  service,  without 
anything  but  the  briefest  of  holidays  from  to  time,  during  which 
long  period  Mr.  Fletcher  has  been  absent  from  only  two  monthly 
meetings,  and  that  through  sickness,  I  feel  sure  that  the  Council's 
action  will  meet  with  the  cordial  approval  of  the  Members,  and 
in  your  name  I  desire  to  assure  Mr.  Fletcher  of  the  high  esteem 
in  which  he  is  held  by  Council  and  Members  alike.  Mr.  Fletcher 
has  decided  to  take  his  leave  in  instalments,  and  goes  on  a  visit 
to  the  north  in  a  few  weeks'  time.  During  his  absence  it  has 
been  arranged  that  the  secretarial  work  will  be  carried  on  by 
Dr.  Greig-Smith. 

Dr.  Greig-Smith  having  expressed  a  desire  to  visit  Europe  in 
order  to  bring  himself  into  touch  with  the  present  condition  of 
bacteriological  science,  the  advance  in  which  is  so  extremely 
rapid,  the  Council  has  granted  him  the  requisite  leave,  and  he 
intends  going  towards  the  end  of  the  present  year,  and  will  be 
absent  for  about  nine  months. 

Since  the  arrangements  for  the  Annual  Elections  were  made  by 
the  Council,  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  Rules,  and 
too  late  for  consideration  at  this  Meeting,  the  Council  received 
Mr.  Edgar  R.  Waite's  resignation  as  a  Member  of  Council,  in 
consequence  of  his  contemplated  removal  to  New  Zealand,  to  take 
up  the  position  of  Curator  of  the  Christchurch  Museum,  in 
succession  to  the  late  Captain  Hutton.  The  extraordinary 
vacancy  so  caused  will  be  filled  by  the  Council  at  an  early  date, 
in  accordance  with  the  powers  conferred  by  the  Act  of  Incorpor- 
ation. In  the  meantime  the  Council  has  placed  on  record  an 
expression  of  its  regret  at  Mr.  Waite's  departure  from  Australia. 
And  1  feel  sure  that  in  addition  to  the  congratulations  of  the 
Council  upon  his  appointment,  and  its  hearty  good  wishes  for  a 
most  prosperous  career  in  New  Zealand,  I  may  cordially  offer 
those  of  the  Society  at  large. 


president's  address.  613 

The  necessity  for  taking  effectual  steps  to  combat  the  continued 
spread  of  the  rabbit  in  Australia  is  one  which  is  patent  to  alL 
A  new  phase  of  the  problem  involved  in  the  destruction  of  this 
animal  has  been  recently  presented  to  us,  and  it  takes  a  form 
which  should  not  fail  to  arouse  the  watchfulness  and  attention 
of  Australian  Scientific  Societies.  Last  December  the  Minister 
for  Lands  approved  of  experiments  being  carried  out  with  a 
disease  the  use  of  which  was  proposed  by  Dr.  Danysz  of  Paris, 
provided  the  Government  were  not  asked  to  bear  the  cost.  The 
management  of  the  scheme  has  been  committed  to  the  Pastures 
Board  Council  of  Advice,  which  has  received  sufficient  monetary 
support  from  pastoralists  and  stockowners  towards  the  <£  15,000 
required,  to  enable  the  negotiations  with  Dr.  Danysz  to  take 
practical  shape.  Broughton  Island,  situated  ol  miles  north  of 
Newcastle,  and  having  an  area  of  about  1000  acres,  has  been 
selected  as  the  locality  for  the  experiment,  and  a  supply  of  rabbits 
from  the  mainland  has  already  been  turned  loose  thereon.  If 
the  negotiations  with  Dr.  Danysz  do  not  fall  through  it  seems 
probable  that  practical  work  will  be  entered  upon  at  no  very 
distant  date.  The  preliminary  arrangements  are  evoking  numer- 
ous expressions  of  public  opinion  which  vary  according  to 
individual  standpoint,  but  practically  only  two  views  are  held. 
One  side  appears  to  think  and  talk  as  lightly  of  the  introduction 
of  a  foreign  pathogenic  microbe  of  unknown  potency  under 
changed  conditions,  as  did  those  primarily  responsible  for  the 
introduction  of  the  rabbit  itself  as  well  as  of  the  fox,  sparrow, 
starling  and  other  pests,  of  any  possible  danger  to  the  country  in 
the  course  they  were  taking.  The  other  side,  profiting  by  past 
experience,  desires  to  consider  probable  developments  before  the 
country  is  committed  to  a  step  which  may  have  results  of  the 
gravest  character. 

The  promotors  of  the  scheme  are  sanguine  through  the  opera- 
tion of  this  disease,  if  not  to  exterminate  the  rabbit,  to  at  any  rate 
hold  it  materially  in  check.  Taking  past  experience  as  a  guide, 
it  does  seem  desirable  to  be  better  assured  than  we  now  are  that 
the  disease  in  question  will  confine  itself  to  the  rabbit.     We  have 


614  president's  address. 

a  parallel  case  in  the  plague  bacillus  as  affecting  m<m  and  the 
rat  in  common,  the  latter  being,  like  the  rabbit,  a  rodent. 
There  is  also  the  question  whether  the  means  proposed  are 
likely  to  have  the  desired  effect.  While  thousands  of  rats 
have  died  through  the  operation  of  plague,  in  no  case  do  we 
hear  that  there  has  been  extermination.  The  disease  only  kills 
those  individuals  which  are  susceptible,  leaving  the  others 
which  are  sufficiently  resistant  to  recover  or  to  escape  infection 
altogether;  and  when  the  epidemic  has,  as  it  is  termed,  "run 
its  course,"  the  balance  of  population  is  quickly  restored  from 
the  surviving  immune  stock.  There  appears  to  be  no  reason  to 
expect  anything  else  with  rabbits;  it  seems  inevitable  that  there 
will  be  no  extermination,  but  merely  a  killing  off  of  susceptible 
individuals,  leaving  the  others  to  propagate,  while  we  have  the 
serious  risk  that  the  disease  will  not  confine  itself  to  the  rabbit, 
for  there  is  no  foretelling  in  what  direction  it  may  develop  or 
what  other  animals  may  be  attacked  when  the  bacillus  has  become 
acclimatised.  That  some  microbic  diseases  are  prof oundly  altered 
in  their  nature  by  passing  through  one  or  more  hosts  of  different 
species,  is  now  well  established,  and  there  is  no  guarantee  that  this 
rabbit  disease — which  we  are  informed  is  not  directly  communic- 
able to  man — may  not  become  so  after  affecting  another  animal^ 
which  may,  perhaps,  be  reptile,  mammal  or  bird.  The  same 
danger  applies  to  domestic  animals  and  stock,  which  may  quite 
possibly  become  secondar}'-  hosts  for^  the  bacillus.  Bacteriology 
has  taught  us  in  how  remarkable  a  manner  many  bacilli  are  able 
to  adapt  themselves  to  new  conditions,  and  how  readily  and 
unexpectedly  they  will  become  acclimatised  when  their  surround- 
ings are  altered. 

There  appears  to  be  a  good  deal  of  mystery  about  the  precise 
nature  of  the  disease  which  it  is  proposed  to  utilise,  and  different 
statements  on  this  point  have  found  currency.  As  bearing  on 
the  whole  question,  it  may  not  be  out  of  place  to  mention  a  fact 
which  does  not  appear  to  be  very  well  known  in  Australia,  that 
in  certain  parts  of  Europe  a  disease  known  as  rabl)it  syphilis  is 
prevalent  amongst  these  creatures,  and  though,  so  far  as  is  known, 


president's  address.  615 

it  is  not  communicable  to  man,  its  existence  is  naturally  viewed 
with  repugnance  by  the  people.  In  Westphalia,  for  instance, 
although  the  disease  is  very  common,  the  animals  are  not 
exterminated  thereby  ;  there  are  always  plenty  of  healthy  as  well 
as  diseased  rabbits  to  be  seen,  the  fact  being  that  the  balance  of 
numbers  is  maintained  by  the  healthy  stock.  Where  this  disease 
occurs  rabbits  are  never  used  as  human  food. 

Considering  the  matter  broadly,  it  is,  to  say  the  least,  highly 
undesirable  that  disease  should  be  wilfully  communicated  to  any 
animal  to  be  broadcasted  over  the  land.  It  is  quite  certain  that 
the  rabbit  has  come  to  stay  ;  it  will  never  be  exterminated  :  but 
it  certainly  can  and  ought  to  be  kept  in  bounds  ]:)y  means  other 
than  the  introduction  of  disease. 

A  matter  which  calls  for  the  active  attention  of  all  lovers  of 
Nature  in  Australia  is  the  preservation  of  the  native  fauna.  The 
indiscriminate  and  wanton  destruction  of  birds  and  mammals 
which  is  now  going  on  over  the  length  and  breadth  of  the  land 
is  appalling.  It  is  bad  enough  when  introduced  pests  like  the 
fox  are  threatening  the  absolute  extinction  of  such  characteristic 
birds  as  the  lyre-bird,  but  when  to  this  is  added  the  meaningless 
slaughter,  for  the  mere  sake  of  killing,  of  anything,  be  it  bird  or 
mammal,  which  is  capable  of  being  shot,  by  the  so-called  sports- 
man, it  is  surely  time  to  call  a  halt.  A  member  of  this  Society 
put  the  case  excellently,  when  in  speaking  of  the  purposeless 
killing  of  the  native  bear,  he  said — "A  man  who  can  go  and  shoot 
bears  for  the  fun  of  it  should  feel  at  home  with  a  gun  among  a 
flock  of  sheep."*  To  this  must  be  added  the  inadvertent  destruc- 
tion of  native  animals  through  poison  laid  for  rabbits.  By  the 
careless  use  of  poison,  either  in  baits  or  in  water,  enormous 
numbers  of  our  native  mammals  and  birds  are  being  killed,  and 
as  the  latter  include  some  of  the  most  valuable  insectivorous 
species,  their  destruction  must  have  its  inevitable  result  in  the 
undue  multiplication  of  noxious  insects  which  will  exact  a  heavy 

*  Mr.  A.  H.  S.  Lucas.  Handbook  of  Melbourne:  Aust.  Assoo.  Adv. 
Science,  1890,  p.61. 


616  president's  address. 

toll  from  the  crops  of  the  agriculturist.  As  a  community  we 
seem  strangely  slow  to  learn  by  experience.  The  introduction  of 
sheep  and  cattle,  to  say  nothing  of  rabbits,  has  been  a  profound 
factor  in  altering  the  balance  of  Nature  in  Australia,  and  when 
in  addition  useful  and  harmless  creatures  alike  are  persecuted 
out  of  existence  in  a  spirit  of  mere  idle  brutality,  it  is  little  to  be 
wondered  at  that  nature  retaliates  in  no  uncertain  way. 

OCEANIC  PHYSICS. 

Taking  advantage  of  the  generous  latitude  in  the  choice  of  a 
subject  for  his  Annual  Address  which  in  the  past  has  been 
accorded  to  your  President,  I  desire  to  ask  your  attention  to-night 
to  one  to  which  I  have  devoted  some  study  during  the  last  few 
years — that  of  Oceanic  Physics. 

The  study  of  the  features  of  our  ocean  as  they  present  them- 
selves to  the  physicist  is  very  necessary  if  we  are  to  clearly 
understand  the  problems  with  which  we,  as  naturalists,  are 
continually  faced  in  the  course  of  our  observations  on  the  sea  and 
its  living  denizens.  For  a  proper  comprehension  of  the  more 
important  phenomena  pertaining  to  our  ocean  we  must  take  a 
great  step  backwards  and  draw  an  imaginary  picture  of  what 
were  the  physical  conditions  of  the  cosmos  at  extremely  remote 
periods  in  geological  time.  The  exigencies  of  our  subject  take  us 
far  back  down  the  ages  to  the  ver}'^  genesis  of  the  world,  and 
knowledge  placed  at  our  disposal  by  the  researches  of  modern 
investigators  renders  it  a  comparatively  simple  matter  to  picture 
to  ourselves  the  conditions  which  must  have  prevailed  when  the 
sea  lirst  began  to  come  into  existence.  The  nebular  hypothesis 
provides  that  at  one  stage  in  the  history  of  the  solar  system,  of 
which  our  world  is  so  small  a  unit,  the  matter  of  which  it  is 
composed  was  in  an  extremely  finely  divided  or  nebulous 
condition,  and  occupying  a  very  great  volume  in  infinite  space. 
At  this  time,  what  is  now  our  solar  system  probably  formed  one 


president's  address.  617 

amongst  the   many  others  which    then,  as  now,  existed  in   all 

stages  of   metamorphosis,   floating   in    the    limitless    regions   of 

stellar  space  : — 

"  Where  never  creeps  a  cloud,  nor  moves  a  wind, 
Nor  ever  falls  the  least  white  star  of  snow, 
Nor  ever  lowest  roll  of  thunder  moans, 
Nor  sound  of  human  sorrow  mounts,  to  mar 
Their  sacred  everlasting  calm." 

Speculation  and  theory,  founded  on  the  investigations  of 
specialists  in  mathematics,  physics  and  chemistry,  are  now  carried 
much  farther  back  than  this  stage,  far  back  even  to  the  condition 
before  matter  as  such  existed,  when  that  which  we  now  know  as 
matter  was  in  the  form  to  which  the  name  of  protyle  has  been 
aptly  applied  by  Sir  William  Crookes,  and  to  which  form, 
curiously  enough,  recent  researches  on  radium  and  its  allies  are 
leading  us  to  believe  matter  is  again  returning.  This  is  a  very 
wonderful  thought,  and  Sir  William  Crookes  thoroughly  grasped 
its  immense  significance  when,  in  speaking  of  radium,  he  recently 
said  :  "  Matter  will  sooner  or  later  be  dissolved  into  a  '  formless 
mist,'  and  the  hour-hand  of  eternity  will  have  completed  one 
revolution." 

With  this  period  in  the  history  of  the  earth  we  will  not  deal 
to-night,  but,  starting  at  the  nebular  stage,  we  will  commence 
our  brief  retrospect.  Let  us  imagine  the  material  of  which  our 
solar  system  is  composed,  in  a  state  of  disintegration,  probably 
dissociated  into  its  constituent  elements,  and  occupying  a  vast 
portion  of  space  having  a  diameter  greater  than  the  orbit  of  the 
most  distant  planet,  so  much  attenuated,  indeed,  as  to  be  in  a 
condition  resembling  that  of  the  gas  inside  an  exhausted  vacuum 
tube.  Matter  in  this  condition  would  still  obey  the  ordinary 
physical  laws,  and  so  be  subject  to  the  action  of  gravity. 
Such  being  the  state  of  affairs,  motion  towards  the  centre 
would  begin.  The  individual  atoms  or  molecules  would 
commence  to  move  with  a  slow  but  constantly  accelerating 
motion,  which  might  be  so  slight  as  only  to  amount  in  the  first 
instance  to  a  few  inches,  or  a  few  fractions  of  an  inch,  in  many 
years'  time,  but  with  all  eternity  in  which  to  act  this  would  be  a 


618  president's  address. 

matter  of  no  moment.  The  motion  so  begun  would,  under  the 
well  understood  action  of  gravity,  be  constantly  accelerated, 
until,  with  the  lapse  of  time,  material  concentration  had  taken 
place. 

As  a  result  of  this  falling  together,  and  ai)art  altogether  from 
the   enormous  energy  set  free  through  the  chemical  reaction  of 
elements   one   with  another,   vast  quantities  of   heat  would  be 
generated.     Lord  Kelvin  has  calculated  that  the  heat  liberated 
by  the  condensation  of   matter  in  this  manner  would  be  amply 
sufficient  to  render  the  whole  mass  glowing  hot,  and  would,  in 
the  case  of   the   solar   system,    readily  account  for    the  present 
heated  condition  of  the  sun.      The  incandescent  mass  would  surge 
and  boil  out  again,  and  probably  in  so  doing  become  separated 
into    numerous    portions,    and    these    having    in    this    manner 
acquired  initial  proper  motion,  would  form  the  nucleus  of  a  solar 
system.     By  slow   degrees    the   vapours   forming   one   of   these 
masses,  which  we  will  suppose  to  be  the  infant  earth,  would  cool 
down  sufficiently  to  form  a  molten  mass,  in  which  only  the  more 
intractable   substances   would   be    in    a  fixed   condition,  all  the 
others  constituting  a  glowing  atmosphere  such  as  at  the  present 
time  surrounds  the  sun.     Water  would  either  be  dissociated  into 
its  elements  or  later  on  would  exist  as  steam.     As  the  process  of 
cooling  went  on  the  more  readily  condensed  bodies  would  fall  as 
rain — iron,  for   example,   as    glowing   drops    of    oxide — into   a 
molten  sea  surrounding  the  young  world.      Probably  substances 
like  gold,  platinum,  silica,  etc.,  having  the  highest  melting  points, 
would   be   the  first   to  condense,  thus  forming  a  heavy  nucleus, 
and  it  is  possible  that  the  rare  heavy  metals  named,  with  many 
others  now  obtainable  only  in  small  amounts  scattered  through 
the  upper  crust  of  the  earth,  are  but  the  froth  and  splashes  from 
immense  central  stores  which  formed  the  first  core  of  the  youth- 
ful earth.     It  has  been  found  that  on  an  average  the  increase  in 
temperature  of  the  earth's  crust  downwards  for  such  depths  as 
we  have   been  able   to  examine,  is   V  F.   for  about  51   feet  of 
descent.     The   greatest  depth,    however,   to   which  it  has   been 
found  possible  to  penetrate  with  the  boring  appliances  at  our 


president's  address.  ()19 

disposal,  is  a  very  minute  fraction  of  the  distance  to  tlie  earth's 
centre.  In  the  consideration  of  the  condition  of  matter  at  o-reat 
depths  beneath  the  surface  it  is  frequently  assumed  that  the 
observed  rate  continues,  or  even  increases,  and  that,  consequently, 
extremely  high  temperatures  exist  towards  the  centre.  The 
earth's  radius  is  roughly  about  21,000,000  feet,  and  if  the  above 
rate  of  increase  were  maintained  throughout  we  should  have  at 
the  centre  a  temperature  of  about  420,000°  F.,  while  some 
writers  have  not  hesitated  to  estimate  the  probable  temperature 
at  as  high  as  1,000,000^^  F.  Matter  of  any  kind  with  which  we 
are  acquainted  would,  at  such  temperatures,  be  much  above  its 
critical  point,  i.e.,  the  temperature  at  which  condensation  is 
possible,  and  hence  would  be  in  a  state  of  vapour.  It  has  been 
considered  that  the  enormous  pressure  to  which  everything  at  such 
depths  is  subjected  would  render  this  gaseous  matter  more  rigid 
than  solid  steel,  the  gaseous  molecules  being  in  a  state  which  might 
be  expressed  as  one  of  "  gaseous  solidity."*  A  careful  review  of 
the  evidence,  and  particularly  of  the  masterly  mathematical 
examination  of  the  subject  by  Lord  Kelvin,!  leads  me  to 
the  conviction  that  reasoning  based  on  the  assumption  of  a 
uniform  increase  in  temperature  downwards  is  quite  fallacious, 
and  that  a  maximum  is  reached  at  a  comparatively  moderate 
depth.  The  conclusion  arrived  at  by  Lord  Kelvin  is  that  the 
observed  increase  in  temperature  downwards  is  not  maintained, 
but  falls  off  at  such  a  rate  that  at  a  depth  of  about  600,000  feet 
the  rate  of  augmentation  has  fallen  to  only  one-tenth  of  a  degree 
F.  per  51  feet,  while  at  about  800,000  feet  it  has  practically 
reached  zero  with  a  temperature  of  about  7,000"  F.,  which 
continues  to  the  centre. 

As  the  process  of  cooling  proceeded  the  growing  earth  would 
become  denser  and  denser  until  solidification  ensued, and  the  more 


*  Nature,  13th  April,  1905  (Vol.  71,  p.  559)  and  Uth  May,  1905  (Vol.  72, 
p.  30). 

t  Thomson  and  Tait,  Natural   Philosophy,   Vol.  i.,  Appendix  D;    Hep. 
British  Assoc.  Adv.  Science,  1876,  Reports,  p. 204. 


620  president's  address. 

volatile  substances  would  commence  to  fall  as  rain.  In  this  way, 
prior  to  the  condensation  of  water,  such  bodies  as  salt  would  fall 
like  snow,  or  perhaps  as  brine,  and  afterwards,  when  the  water 
condensed,  would  l)e  dissolved,  and  so  the  primitive  ocean  would 
be  saline.  The  tirst  sea  would  be  a  boiling  one,  the  water  being 
continually  vapourised  and  falling  again  as  hot  rain.  Obviously 
all  the  saline  matter  in  the  earth  would  not  be  subject  to  the 
solvent  action  of  the  hot  primitive  ocean,  as  large  quantities 
would  be  combined  with  and  mixed  up  with  the  other  solid 
substances. 

We  now  have  our  young  world  with  its  hot  ocean,  probably 
Salter  than  it  is  at  present,  because  vast  quantities  of  water  which 
are  now  contained  in  the  sea  would  then  be  floating  as  a  dense  cloud 
around  the  earth.  As  the  process  of  cooling  and  condensation 
went  on  the  ocean  would  become  less  saline  and  cooler,  and  so 
better  fitted  for  the  establishment  of  living  organisms.  We 
have  evidence  that  the  earliest  forms  of  living  things  originated 
in  the  sea.  and  from  thence  by  slow  degrees  spread  to  the  dry  land. 

The  ancients  considered  the  world  to  be  a  flat  disc-shaped 
body,  surrounded  by  a  river,  which  they  named  Oceanus,  hence 
our  present  name.  Quite  three-fourths  of  the  earth's  surface  is 
covered  l)y  the  sea,  this  being  equal  to  an  area  of  about 
140,000,000  square  miles.  The  earth  is,  of  course,  not  truly 
spherical  in  shape,  but  is  flattened  at  tiie  poles  and  bulging  at  the 
equator,  though  most  people  have  a  greatly  exaggerated  idea  of 
the  extent  of  this  polar  flattening.  In  reality  it  is  not  nearl}'  as 
great  in  proportion  as  that  of  an  orange,  to  which  the  earth  is  sa 
often  likened.  The  longer  or  equatorial  diameter  is  about  7,927 
miles,  and  the  shorter  or  polar  7,900,  a  difference  of  onlj'^  27 
miles,  which  is  equal  to  1  in  300,  or  for  a  globe  25  feet  in 
diameter,  a  flattening  of  half  an  inch  at  each  pole,  an  amount 
quiie  imperceptible  to  the  eye. 

The  saline  matter  in  tiie  ocean  is  continually  being  added  to 
by  that  washed  out  of  the  earth  by  rain  and  carried  to  the  sea  by 
rivers  and  percolation.  In  this  connection  a  recently  published 
analysis  by  Mr.  A.  G.  Levy  of  water  from  the  Siniplon  Tunnel  is 


/ 


PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS.  621 

of  interest.*"  This  water  is  considered  by  M.  Bertram  Blount  to 
be  entirely  plutonic  in  its  origin,  and,  while  it  contains  consider- 
able proportions  of  calcium  and  magnesium  sulphates,  is  remark- 
able in  being  quite  free  from  chlorides.  The  chlorides  are 
amongst  the  most  volatile  of  the  so-called  fixed  salts,  and  hence 
would  be  the  last  to  condense  during  the  genesis  of  the  earth. 
Professor  Joly  has  based  calculations  regarding  the  age  of  the 
earth  upon  the  estimated  rate  at  which  chlorides  are  now  being 
carried  by  water  from  the  land  to  the  ocean ;  but  consideration 
of  the  probabilities  as  to  the  condensation  of  such  substances 
during  the  earlier  part  of  the  earth's  history  and  the  consequent 
enormous  initial  saltness  of  ihe  sea,  indicates  how  very  unsafe 
are  the  conclusions  arrived  at  from  evidence  of  the  kind.f 

If  the  process  of  land  denudation  now  going  on  lasts  for  a 
sufficiently  long  period  the  time  will  come  when  the  whole  surface 
of  the  globe  will  be  covered  with  water,  and,  if  the  solid  matter 
is  uniformly  spread  over  the  ocean  floor,  the  universal  ocean  will 
have  a  depth  of  about  1,700  fathoms.  The  mean  present  depth 
of  the  sea  is  about  2,500  fathoms,  or  almost  three  miles,  so  that 
the  mass  of  land  above  sea  level  is  sufficient  in  bulk,  if  thus 
spread  out,  to  reduce  the  depth  over  the  whole  surface  by  only 
some  800  fathoms.  As  a  matter  of  fact  the  submerged  valleys 
beneath  the  surface  of  the  sea  are  sufficient  in  size  to  contain 
quite  three  times  as  much  bulk  as  there  is  of  dry  land  above 
sea  level. 

The  greatest  known  depth  is  about  27,700  feet,  or  5|  miles. 
At  such  enormous  depths  as  this  the  pressure  of  the  water  is  very 
great.  A  column  of  fresh  water  one  mile  in  depth  exerts  a 
pressure  of  2,288  lbs.  per  square  inch,  whilst  the  same  depth  of 
the  heavier  sea  water  has  a  pressure  of  2,347  lbs.  For  a  depth 
then  of  5 J  miles  we  have  the  prodigious  pressure  of  12,320  lbs., 
or  5^  tons  per  square  inch. 


*  The  Analyst,  xxx.,o(J7. 

t  See  Prof.  G.  H.  Darwin's  Presidential  Address  to  the  British  Association. 

Nature,  August  81st,  1905  ;  Chemical  News,  Ixxxix.  ]3  (1904). 


^22  PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS. 

Ordinary  light  can  only  penetrate  to  a  comparatively  small 
depth,  for  at  200  fathoms  practically  no  action  on  a  photographic 
plate  can  be  detected.  At  depths  greater  than  2,000  fathoms 
the  water  is  never  more  than  a  very  few  degrees  above  freezing 
point  and  is  practically  uniform  in  temperature  over  the  bulk  of 
the  ocean  floor.  It  thus  comes  about  that  the  same  forms  of  life 
are  dredged  from  great  depths  everywhere,  and  there  is  abso- 
lutely no  barrier  at  such  depths  to  the  uniform  migration  of 
animals  in  all  directions. 

Of  the  superficial  characters  of  the  ocean,  waves  are  probably 
the  first  feature  which  would  attract  the  attention  of  an  observer. 
In  ordinary  wave-motion  there  is  very  little  drift  or  translatory 
movement  of  the  water ;  the  water  remains  practically  in  the 
same  spot:  it  is  the  motion  only  which  travels.  A  wave  is,  in 
fact,  the  passage  of  motion  from  position  to  position.  The  water 
is  first  heaj)ed  up,  forming  the  crest,  and  then  depressed,  forming 
the  trough,  the  mass  of  water  which  forms  a  given  crest  sinking, 
and,  as  it  were,  forcing  up  the  mass  in  front  to  form  the  next 
crest.  From  this  it  is  obvious  that  the  motion  exists  equally 
beneath  as  above  the  surface,  and  the  consequent  friction  is  the 
principal  cause  of  the  rapid  flattening  of  the  water  which  ensues 
when  the  wind  ceases.  The  greatest  height  attained  by  ocean 
waves  does  not,  probably,  often  exceed  45  feet,  but  to  reach  such 
a  height  the  essential  conditions  are  a  sufficient  stretch  of  ocean 
and  a  great  enough  velocity  of  wind  sustained  for  a  long  enough 
period.  There  is  a  relationship  between  the  size  of  waves  and 
the  velocity  of  the  wind,  which  may  be  expressed  in  the  terms 
that  the  velocity  of  the  wind  in  miles  per  hour  is  roughly  twice 
that  of  the  height  of  the  waves  in  feet.  Thus,  suppose  the  wind 
to  be  blowing  over  a  stretch  of  ocean  of  sufficient  breadth  at  the 
rate  of  twentj'-five  miles  per  hour,  it  is  able  to  raise  waves  having 
a  height  of  about  12^  feet.  The  waves  are  prevented  from 
attaining  a  greater  height  because  they  have  not  a  sufticient 
thickness  to  permit  of  their  withstanding  the  increased  total 
v?ind  pressure  which  they  would  then  have  to  bear,  and,  accord- 
ingly, the   wind   would   merely  tend  to  depress  them.      A  given 


president's  addkess.  623 

wave  is,  in  fact,  in  equilibrium  with  the  wind  when  once  the 
height  corresponding  with  the  wind  velocity  is  reached.  It  is  a 
matter  of  common  observation  that  a  certain  breadth  of  ocean  is 
required  before  the  wind  can  raise  waves  corresponding  in  height 
to  its  velocity;  this  is  technically  known  as  "fetch."  A  steady 
wave  has  a  maximum  length — distance  from  crest  to  crest— of 
somewhere  about  twenty  times  its  own  height,  and,  in  a  general 


I 
Diagram  showing  the  relation  of  Wave-height  to  Wave-length. 

way,  the  "  fetch "  necessary  for  the  production  of  a  normal 
wave  is  about  2,000  times  its  length.  Taking  the  case  before 
cited  of  a  wave  12 J  feet  high,  which,  we  have  seen,  corresponds 
to  a  wind  velocity  of  25  miles  per  hour  : — 12J  x  20  gives  250  feet 
as  the  normal  length  of  such  a  wave,  and  250  x  2,000  =  500,000 
feet,  or  nearly  95  miles.  We  see  then  that  a  wind  blowing  at 
the  rate  of  25  miles  per  hour,  requires  a  stretch  of  some  95  miles 
of  ocean  in  which  to  raise  12 J  feet  waves,  the  normal  height  for 
this  wind  speed.  Higher  wind  velocities  require  correspondingly 
longer  "  fetches "  of  ocean  surface  in  order  to  produce  their 
maximum  wave  efiPect.  When  the  wind  dies  away  the  waves 
tend  to  flatten  down  and  form  ocean  swell,  which  really  consists 
of  waves  of  comparatively  small  height,  but  considerable  wave 
length.  With  such  a  swell  already  in  existence  a  fresh  storm 
travelling  in  the  same  direction  will  quickly  raise  waves  of  the 
maximum  height.  Further,  the  rate  at  which  wave  motion 
travels  on  water  varies  with  the  other  properties  of  the  wave. 
Another  important  property  of  any  wave  is  its  frequency  or 
number  of  recurrences  in  a  unit  of  time.  This  is  a  product  of 
^^Mw  and  becomes   smaller    as    the   wave  becomes   larger.       In 

length  ^ 


624 


PKESIDENTS  ADDRESS. 


the  table  following,  and  on  Plate  xxxvi.,  data  are  given 
illustrating  the  relation  between  these  properties.  It  is 
interesting  to  note  that  in  the  case  of  small  waves  the  rate  of 
travel  is  much  greater  than  that  of  the  exciting  wind.  At  first 
glance  this  seems  paradoxical,  but  on  consideration  it  is  seen  that 
the  water  forming  the  waves  is  practically  stationary  relative  to 
the  wind  which  gives  its  impetus  to  each  wave  surface  as  it  rises. 

Table  showing  Properties  of  Steady  Waves. 


Wind 
velocity, 

miles 
per  hour. 

Fetch, 

Wave 
length. 

Wave 
height. 

Wave  speed, 
miles 

Frequency. 
Waves  per 

feet. 

feet. 

per  hour. 

minute. 

43  1 

v. 

3-78  v. 

10  v. 

*v. 

4-9  V'v. 

Vv. 

0-2 

0-6 

1-7 

t\ 

2-6 

134-7 

I 

3  8 

10 

h 

4-9 

431 

2 

7-6 

20 

1 

6-9 

30-3 

10 

38 

100 

5 

15-5 

13-6 

20 

76 

200 

10 

21-9 

9-6 

30 

114 

300 

15 

26-8 

7-8 

40 

152 

400 

20 

310 

6-8 

50 

189 

500 

25 

34-6 

6-1 

60 

227 

600 

30 

38  0 

5-6 

70 

265 

700 

35 

40-9 

5-2 

80 

303 

800 

40 

43-8 

4-8 

90 

340 

900 

45 

46-5 

4-5 

Data  for  Calculatiox  of  Properties  of  Waves. 

Length =20  x  height. 

Wind  velocity  (miles  per  hour)  -2  x  height  in  feet. 

Fetch  zz  2000  x  length. 

Fetch  in  miles  ^  0-3788  x  length  in  feet. 

Wave  speed  in  miles  =1-55  x  Vlength  in  feet. 

Wave  speed. 

Wave  length. 

When  watching  waves  beating  on  the  ocean  beach  most  people 
have  noticed  that  at  more  or  less  frequent  intervals  a  wave  con- 
siderably larger  than  the  others  will  occur.  The  steady  waves 
may  be  due  to  wind,  while  the  larger  ones  of  longer  period  may 


Frequency: 


president's  address.  625 

arise  from  one  or  other  of  different  causes,  but  we  have  in  such 
a  case  merely  to  do  with  two  different  wave-systems  acting 
simultaneously.  Each  series  has  its  own  properties,  and  the 
larger  waves  arrive  at  their  proper  intervals  quite  independently 
of  the  smaller. 

Next  to  waves  quite  the  most  striking  physical  phenomenon 
connected  with  the  sea  is  that  of  tides.  A  tide  is  by  no  means 
the  simple  movement  of  the  water  which  might  be  supposed. 
There  are  many  complicating  influences  besides  the  ever-varying 
incidences  of  the  attraction  of  moon  and  sun,  and  the  tide  is 
really  a  summation  of  all  these.  I  will  not,  however,  deal  par- 
ticularly with  the  problem  of  tidal  analysis,  but  I  desire  more 
especially  to  speak  of  one  of  the  more  important  results  of  the 
action  of  tides  upon  the  fate  of  the  world.  The  effects  of  the  tides 
on  terrestrial  motion  are  of  the  most  profound  importance,  for 
the  result  of  their  action  is,  through  friction,  to  slow  down  the  rate 
of  rotation  of  the  earth,  and  thus  to  lengthen  our  day.  So  great, 
however,  is  the  energy  by  virtue  of  which  the  earth  is  spinning 
on  its  axis,  that  the  enormous  force  with  which  the  tides  tend  to 
retard  it  is  only  competent  in  1,000  years  to  increase  the  length  of 
our  day  by  a  small  fraction  of  a  second.  As  Sir  Robert  Ball  has 
very  truly  said,  however,  "  what  may  be  a  very  small  matter  in 
one  thousand  years  can  become  a  very  large  one  in  many  millions 
of  years."  This  will  help  us  in  our  attempts  to  form  some  mental 
conception  of  the  expanse  of  time  which  is  involved  in  the 
history  of  the  world.  There  was  a  time  when  our  earth  whirled 
round  its  axis  in  some  three  hours,  that  being  the  length  of  the 
day,  and  we  calculate  that  it  was  somewhere  about  this  period 
that  the  moon  was  thrown  off.  Since  that  unspeakably  remote 
period  the  moon  has  been  steadily  at  work  acting  as  a  break  on 
the  world,  and  at  the  same  time  has  been  continually  increasing 
her  own  distance  from  us.  In  obedience  to  a  well  defined  law, 
the  moon  is  ceaselessly  withdrawing  from  the  earth,  her  orbit 
being  really  an  ever  expanding  spiral.  This  is  a  n<  cessary  result 
of  tidal  action,  and  the  distance  of  the  moon  from  us  is  rigidly 
determined   by  tlie   rate  at  which  the  world   revolves.      Let  us 


626  PRESIDENTS  ADDRESS. 

think  of  the  aions  of  millions  of  years  which  have  elapsed  since 
the  moon  began  at  the  average  rate  of  a  small  fraction  of  a 
second  in  a  thousand  years  to  increase  the  length  of  the  terres- 
trial day  by  some  21  hours!  And  this  action  must  go  on  until 
our  day  becomes  longer  and  longer,  until  it  stretches  out  to  a 
month,  and  the  moon  will  then  face  the  earth  continuously  at  one 
spot,  and  lunar  tides  will  cease.  The  moon  and  the  earth  will  then 
be  each  revolving  around  its  axis  in  equal  times,  and  so  must 
face  one  another  in  one  position.  The  tidal  influence  of  the  sun 
will  still  go  on,  and  the  ultimate  result  will  be  that  in  the 
infinitely  remote  future  the  period  of  the  earth's  revolution  will 
stretch  out  to  a  3^ear,  and  the  earth  will  then  face  the  sun  as  the 
moon  now  faces  the  earth.  It  will  then  be  perpetual  day  on  the 
side  of  the  earth  which  is  turned  to  the  sun,  and  perpetual  night 
on  that  which  is  turned  away.  That  is  assuming  that  the  sun  is 
still  capable  of  giving  off  heat  and  light.  And  all  this  will  have 
been  due  to  the  tides ;  so  we  see  how  profound  are  the  results 
induced  by  the  physical  properties  of  the  ocean.  The  fact  of  the 
absence  of  tides  in  enclosed  seas  of  even  considerable  size,  such, 
for  example,  as  the  Caspian  and  Black  Seas,  and  the  very  insig- 
nificant tides  experienced  in  the  Mediterranean,  are  due  to  the  area 
of  these  not  being  sufficiently  great  for  the  moon  to  be  able  to 
raise  a  tide;  the  moon  pulls  such  areas  of  water  practically  as  a 
whole. 

Considering  the  enormous  effect  of  the  moon  when  acting  on  a 
large  surface  area,  it  is  not  a  little  surprising,  at  first  sight,  to 
find  that  appliances  of  the  utmost  delicacy  are  required  to 
measure,  or  even  to  demonstrate,  our  satellite's  attraction.  The 
amount  of  this  attraction  can  be  calculated  readily  enough,  but 
to  show  its  existence  experimentally  is  a  very  difficult  matter. 
This  was  done  by  Professor  G.  H.  Darwin  at  Cambridge,  by 
suspending,  with  most  elaborate  precautions,  a  mass  of  copper 
weighing  several  pounds,  on  a  long  wire,  in  such  a  position  that 
when  the  moon  was  at  right  angles  to  the  weight,  and  therefore 
pulling  horizontally,  the  minute  displacement  could  be  measured 
by  means  of  a  tiny  mirror  placed  on  a  wire  torsion  frame  attached 
to  the  weight  and  reflecting  a  beam  of  light  on  to  a  scale. 


president's  ADDrtESS.  627 

It  is  from  the  evaporation  of  the  water  of  the  ocean  through 
the  agency  of  the  sun's  heat  that  is  derived  by  far  the  greater 
bulk  of  the  rain  and  snow  which  fall  on  the  globe.  When  water 
is  evaporated  a  large  amount  of  heat  is  rendered  latent  and 
locked  up  in  the  vapour,  to  be  given  out  again  on  condensation. 
Heat  is  measured  in  terms  of  the  amount  required  to  warm 
water.  The  quantity  of  heat  which  will  warm  1  lb.  of  water 
1°  F.  is  termed  a  heat  unit,  and  is  the  British  thermal  standard. 
Now  water  warmed  from  ordinary  temperature,  say  60°  F.,  to 
boiling  point,  which  is  212°  F.,  requires  just  152  heat  units  per 
lb.  When  a  pound  of  water  is  evaporated,  however,  a  very 
much  larger  quantity  of  heat  is  necessary,  for  it  requires  966 
units  to  merely  evaporate  that  amount  without  further  increasing 
its  temperature.  This  means  that  just  about  6J  times  the 
amount  of  heat  is  required  to  change  water  into  vapour  as  would 
suffice  to  raise  it  from  the  ordinary  temperature  to  boiling  point. 
It  does  not  matter  whether  the  water  is  boiling  or  not,  its 
evaporation  at  ordinary  or  any  temperature  requires  practically 
the  same  amount  of  heat,  and  the  vapour  on  condensing  gives  up 
the  whole  of  this.  As  perhaps  giving  a  better  idea  of  the  signi- 
ficance of  these  figures,  it  may  be  mentioned  in  passing  that  the 
quantity  of  heat  required  to  evaporate  one  pound  of  water 
represents  energy  equivalent  to  the  force  required  to  lift 
3 J  tons  100  feet  above  the  earth's  surface.  Every  pound  of 
water  which  falls  as  rain  has  therefore  seized  on  and  transported 
to  the  area  in  which  the  rain  is  condensed  sufficient  heat  to  elevate 
3J  tons  100  feet.  The  imagination  fails  to  properly  grasp  how 
enormous  must  be  the  amount  of  heat  required  to  vapourise  the 
great  volume  of  water  daily  evaporated  from  the  ocean.  The 
transference  of  such  quantities  of  the  sun's  heat  from  the  surface 
of  the  ocean  where  it  is  received  to  the  places  where  the  clouds 
are  formed  has  a  very  great  effect  on  climate  ;  in  fact  we  may 
safely  say  that  the  ocean  forms  the  great  storehouse  of  heat  for 
the  habitable  part  of  the  globe's  surface,  and  that,  but  for  the  sea 
and  the  phenomena  of  evaporation  and  rain,  the  climatic  condi- 
tions would  be  such  that  the  earth  would  be  uninhabitable  to 


628  president's  address, 

creatures  constituted  as  we  are.  But  for  the  equalising  effect  of 
the  great  ocean  surfaces  and  the  evaporation  therefrom,  with  the 
consequent  transport  of  heat,  together  with  the  Ijlanketing  effect 
of  the  clouds,  we  should  have,  over  the  greater  part  of  the  earth's 
surface,  intense  heat  by  day  and  unendurable  cold  as  soon  as  the 
sun  had  set. 

Another  matter  of  immense  importance  in  the  relationship  of 
the  ocean  and  atmosphere  is  the  regulating  effect  which  is 
exercised  by  the  former  on  the  carbon  dioxide  content  of  the 
latter.  This  question  has  been  studied  by  Dr.  A.  Krogh  of 
Copenhagen.*  Briefly  put,  the  conclusions  arrived  at  may  be 
stated  thus.  The  atmosphere  over  the  southern  hem.isphere, 
where  ocean  surface  greatly  preponderates,  contains  0*026  per 
cent,  of  carbon  dioxide  ;  over  the  northern  oceans  the  proportion 
is  0-029  per  cent.,  while  in  Central  Europe  it  rises  to  0-033  per 
cent.  The  total  amount  of  carbon  dioxide  contained  in  the  ocean 
has  been  calculated  to  be  about  6-55  x  1 0^^  kilograms,  existing 
mainly  in  readily  dissociated  salts,  while  the  atmosphere  holds 
about  one  twenty-seventh  of  this  amount.  Any  increase  in  the 
proportion  of  carbon  dioxide  in  the  atmosphere  is  checked  by  the 
action  of  the  ocean  water,  which  immediately  absorbs  the  greater 
bulk  of  it.  To  increase  the  proportion  of  carbon  dioxide  in  the 
atmosphere  from  the  present  0*03  per  cent,  to  0*04  per  cent, 
would  require  in  the  first  place  an  addition  of  one-third  of  the 
total  existing  amount,  which  in  itself  is  an  enormous  quantity; 
and  further,  in  order  to  bring  the  ocean  into  equiliJDrium  with 
the  air  so  as  to  enable  the  latter  to  retain  the  increase,  about 
twice  the  present  amount  in  the  air  would  have  to  be  provided. 
Dr.  Krogh  considers  from  this  standpoint  the  effect  of  the  world's 
consumption  of  coal,  which  is  estimated  to  pour  into  the  atmos- 
phere annually  about  one-thousandth  of  its  present  percentage 
proportion  of  carbon  dioxide.  This  means  that  assuming  the 
coal  supply  to  last  and  consumption  to  continue  at  present  rate, 


•  Meddelelser  om   Gronland,  xxvi.  333-409;  Journ.  Chem.  Soc.  London, 
Ixxxviii.,  11,  26  ;  Compt.  rend.  139,  896-8;  Nature,  Ixxi.  283. 


PRESIDENTS  ADDRKSS.  G29 

in  one  thousand  yeai*s  the  proportion  of  carbon  dioxide  in  the 
air  would,  apart  from  the  regulating  effect  of  the  sea,  be  doubled, 
and  the  percentage  would  then  be  0*06,  a  proportion  which  it  is 
considered  would  render  the  atmosphere  almost  unfit  for  con- 
tinued respiration.  As  the  result  of  direct  experiment  it  is  con- 
cluded that  before  the  proportion  of  carbon  dioxide  rose  to  0'031 
per  cent,  the  sea  would  absorb  it  as  fast  as  it  was  produced, 
"  and,  owing  to  the  large  volume  required  to  bring  the  ocean 
into  equilibrium  with  the  air,  it  is  probable  that  at  the  expira- 
tion of  the  thousand  years  the  proportion  of  carbon  dioxide  in 
the  air  would  not  be  more  than  3'5  vols,  per  10,000,"  which  is 
0035  per  cent.  So  far  as  the  products  of  the  life  and  decay  of 
living  organisms  are  concerned,  it  may  be  safely  concluded  that 
by  these  agencies  there  is  returned  to  the  air  the  same  amount 
of  carbon  dioxide  as  is  withdrawn,  for  the  sum  total  of  organic 
life  remains  practically  unaltered  from  year  to  year. 

In  considering  the  influence  of  atmospheric  constituents  on 
living  organisms  it  is  interesting  to  note  some  observations  made 
by  Dr.  A.  Marcacci,*  who  has  shown  that,  when  the  nitrogen  in 
the  air  is  replaced  by  hydrogen,  animals  placed  therein  soon  die, 
not  from  any  poisonous  effect  of  the  hydrogen,  but  simply  because 
of  the  much  greater  thermal  conductivity  of  that  gas.  The  death 
of  the  animals  is  in  fact  due  to  the  increased  loss  of  heat,  which 
the  organism  is  unable  to  maintain,  though  the  effort  to  do  so  is 
evidenced  by  a  greatly  increased  absorption  of  oxygen  and 
evolution  of  carbon  dioxide. 

Vast  quantities  of  water  are  condensed  around  the  cold  polar 
regions  of  the  earth,  giving  rise  to  the  accumulations  of  ice  which 
permanently  cap  the  poles.  The  opinion  was  at  one  time  widely 
held  that  there  must  be  prodigious  aggregations  of  ice  at  the 
poles,  because  where  the  ice  never  melts  there  seemed  no  limit 
to  the  possibilities  of  its  accumulation,  and  it  was  even  considered 
probable  that  a  world-wide  deluge  might  be  caused  when  the 
mountain  of  ice  became  so  great  as  to  overbalance,  and  in  falling 


*  Nature,  June  30,  1904,  201.  ^-<  ^^  p 

42 


630  president's  addkess. 

into  the  ocean  set  up  a  huge  wave  of  disphicement  which  would 
sweep  to  its  furthest  limits.  Happily,  however,  for  the  stability 
of  the  eartli,  there  is  a  property  of  ice  which  renders  this  impos- 
aible.  If  we  take  a  piece  of  ice  and  submit  it  to  pressure  it 
becomes  plastic  and  moulds  itself  exactly  to  the  shape  of  the 
vessel  in  which  it  is  contained,  and  if  the  pressure  is  sufficiently 
great  the  ice  becomes  liquefied.  When  ice  is  piled  on  ice  until  a 
sufficient  pressure  is  attained,  the  bottom  ice  spreads  out  like  so 
much  pitch,  and  even  the  pressure  of  a  very  moderate  height  is 
ample  to  produce  this  effect  on  unrestrained  ice.  Lord  Kelvin 
has  shown  that,  under  the  conditions  ruling  in  the  great  south 
polar  continent,  it  is  improbable  that  ice  can  be  so  restrained  as  to 
attain  a  greater  thickness  than  2,000  or  3,000  feet.  This  when 
melted  is  equivalent  to  a  depth  of  1,600  to  2,400  feet  of  water. 
Free  or  unrestrained  ice,  whether  resting  on  land  or  floating  on 
water  cannot  permanently  retain  any  given  thickness;  owing  to 
its  plasticity  it  will  slowly  but  surely  spread  out  until  stopped 
by  barriers  or  melted.  It  is  to  this  plasticit}'^  that  are  due  the 
enormous  ice  cliffs  so  graphically  illustrated  in  the  account  of  the 
recent  National  Antarctic  Expedition,*  for  the  great  ice  mass 
merely  flows  under  the  pressure  of  its  own  weight  until  it  reaches 
the  sea  where  it  floats,  while  portions  are  broken  off  and  drift 
away  as  icebergs.  The  ice  barrier  is,  in  fact,  the  continually 
renewed  face  of  the  ice  mass  which  is  ceaselessly  moving 
outwards  in  obedience  to  the  pressure  of  the  constant  accumula- 
tion behind. 

It  iij  quite  possible  that  there  may  at  various  periods  in 
geological  time  have  been  considerable  fluctuations  in  the  quantity 
of  ice  accumulated  at  the  poles,  and  it  will  be  interesting  to 
consider  very  briefly  what  would  be  the  effect  on  the  ocean  level 
of  the  withdrawal  of  definite  quantities  of  water  to  be  stored  at 
the  poles  as  ice,  or  conversely  what  would  be  the  result  of  the 
addition  to  the  sea  of  the  masses  of  water  set  free  by  the  melting 
of  given  heights  of  polar  ice. 


The  Voyage  of  the  Discovery:  Capt.  R.  F.  Scott,  1905. 


president's  address.  631 

Taking  Murray's  estimate  of  the  size  of  the  south  polar 
continent  as  being  about  one-fortieth  of  the  total  atea  of  the 
earth's  surface,  Lord  Kelvin  calculates  that  a  layer  of  ice 
1,200  feet  in  thickness  covering  this  area — equivalent  to  a  depth 
of  1,000  feet  of  water — would,  if  melted  and  added  to  the  ocean, 
suffice  to  raise  its  level  all  over  the  globe  by  about  25  feet.  In 
like  manner  a  withdrawal  of  the  same  amount  of  water  would 
cause  a  universal  lowering  of  the  ocean  level  by  25  feet.  Were 
there  a  similar  accumulation  at  the  Arctic  pole,  the  total  varia- 
tion in  ocean  level  would  be  50  feet.  There  does  not  seem  to  be 
any  other  way  in  which  serious  quantities  of  water  could  be 
taken  from  the  ocean  or  added  thereto.  Now  Professor  Suess  in 
his  great  work  '  Das  Antlitz  der  Erde,'  published  in  1884,  an 
English  translation  of  which  by  Dr.  Hertha  Sollas  and  Professor 
W.  J.  Sollas  was  brought  out  so  recently  as  1904,"*^  combats 
altogether  the  theory  of  the  rise  of  land  masses.  Suess  considers 
that  all  phenomena  indicating  a  lowering  of  ocean  level  relative 
to  land  are  due  to  real  alterations  in  the  water  level,  and  not  to 
any  rising  of  the  land.  He  concludes  that  any  plateau  consisting 
of  marine  sedimentary  rocks  now  existing  at  an  altitude  above 
sea-level,  indicates  vertical  alteration  in  the  level  of  the  water  at 
least  equal  to  such  altitude.  We  have  seen  that,  assuming 
an  Arctic  area  available  for  storage  of  ice  equal  to  that  existing 
in  the  Antarctic,  an  accumulation  of  1,200  feet  of  ice  over  both 
regions  would  be  competent  to  produce  a  universal  lowering  of 
about  50  feet  in  the  ocean  level,  and  that  the  maximum  height 
to  which  ice  could  be  piled  under  polar  conditions  is  considered 
by  Lord  Kelvin  to  be  about  3,000  feet.  From  these  figures  it  is 
easy  to  calculate  that,  given  a  uniform  accumulation  of  ice  to  a 
height  of  3,000  feet  over  both  polar  regions,  the  difference  in 
ocean  level  would  only  be  about  125  feet,  while  we  have 
innumerable  large  areas  of  marine  sedimentary  rocks  at 
enormously  greater  altitudes  than  this.  While  it  thus  seems 
evident  that  the  greatest  possible  accumulation  of  ice  in  the  polar 

*  Reviewed  by  J.W.G.  in  '  Nature,'  June  29,  1905,  P-  193. 


^32  PKKSIUKNTS    ADDliKSS. 

rci'nis  is  not  sutficient  to  account  for  the  difiference  between  the 
existing  sea-level  and  the  horizon  of  very  many  deposits  of  marine 
strata,  it  is  quite  probable,  as  has  been  already  indicated,  that 
considerable  fluctuations  in  the  quantity  of  ice  stored  at  the  poles 
may  have  taken  place,  and  that  some  of  the  minor  mutations  in 
ocean  level,  which  have  left  records  behind,  may  have  been  due 
to  this  cause. 

The  existence  of  fossils  of  various  kinds  i/i  siiii  in  the  polar 
regions   proves   that   at  some  period  in  the  past  the  climate  in 
these  places  must  have  been  ver^^  much  warmer  than  is  now  the 
case.      Now    there    are   very    great    physical    difficulties    in   the 
way   of  any  change  in    the    position    of  the    world    relative    to 
the  sun,  which  would  cause  any  material  alteration  in  the  situation 
of  the  polar  ice-caps.      In  fact,  short  of  a  catastrophaic  occurrence 
quite  out  of  the  orderly  sequence  of  events,  there  does  not  seem 
any  possibility  of  such  a  change  taking  place.     The  total  variation 
of  polar  position  relative  to  the  sun,  caused  by  the  precession  of 
the  equinoxes — an  event  occupying  about  26,000  years—  is  much 
too  small  to  have  so  great  an  effect,  even  when   the  period  of 
greatest  displacement  of   the  earth's  poles  is  made   to  coincide 
with  the   most    favourable    position  of    the    earth   in   its   orbit, 
relative    to    the    sun.        By    a    catastrophaic    occuirence    is    to 
be    understood    such    an   event    as    the    impact    of    a    gigantic 
meteorite,     sufficient    to    upset    the    equilibrium    of    the    earth 
and  materially  alter  its   centre  of  gravity.     While  it  is  by  no 
means  impossible  or  even  improbable  that  such  an  event  may 
have  taken  place,  we  have  no  direct  evidence  thereof,  and  there 
is   little  doubt   that  collision  with    a  body  sufficiently   large   to 
induce   so  great  a  change  would  result  in  the  liberation  of  an 
amount  of  heat  that  would  instantly  destroy  all  life  on  the  globe. 
Certainly  there   are  in    particular  spots   on   the  earth's   surface 
great  masses    of    iron,    which   are  usually   considered    to    be    of 
meteoric  origin,  but  it  may  well  be  doubted  if  the  impact  of  these 
would  be  sufficiently  severe  to  produce  the  change  in  position  in 
question.       It    has    been   suggested    that,   as   the    world    in    the 
first  instance  gradually  cooled  from  its  pristine  molten  condition, 


president's  address.  <)33 

the  equatorial  regions  must  have  been  intolerably  hot  at  a 
period  when  the  poles  enjoyed  quite  a  moderate  climate, 
or  even  one  comparable  with  present-day  tropical  conditions.  It 
would  thus  come  about  that  the  polar  regions  would  be  the  tirst 
portion  of  the  earth's  surface  to  become  inhabitable  to  li\ing 
organisms,  and  so  in  the  seas  around  a  polar  continent  may  have 
originated  the  life  now  common  to  the  whole  world.  The  fossil 
remains,  however,  which  are  found  in  the  polar  rej^ions,  are  not 
those  of  such  organisms  as  investigation  elsewhere  has  shown  to 
have  existed  at  early  geological  periods,  while  in  the  Arctic 
region,  at  any  rate,  remains  of  trees  of  modern  age  have  V)een 
found  apparently  in  situ. 

The  subject  is  one  of  great  difficulty  and  obscurity,  but  «o 
far  as  I  understand  the  evidence,  the  most  probable  cause 
of  a  material  change,  in  the  rigour  of  the  polar  climate  is 
alteration  in  the  land  level.  Tn  different  tropical  and  sub- 
tropical regions  of  the  earth  there  is  unmistakable  evidence  of 
glacial  action,  where,  1  take  it,  it  is  inadmissible  to  suppose 
that  under  existing  conditions  of  land  level  the  climate  can  ever 
have  been  frigid.  We  seem  forced,  then,  to  accept  the 
hypothesis  that,  when  glaciation  occurred,  the  land  surfaces 
involved  were  at  a  much  greater  elevation  than  now,  and,  in 
fact,  constituted  true  alpine  areas. 

Let  us  for  a  moment  apply  this  principle  to  the  polar  regions. 
Were  the  entire  polar  areas  free  from  land,  and  covered  by  open 
sea  having  full  communication  with  the  tropical  oceans,  the 
result  would  be  a  flow  of  warm  water  from  the  tropics  across  the 
poles,  and  a  profound  change  in  the  prevailing  temperature,  a 
modification  much  greater  indeed  than  that  produced  in  Northern 
Europe  by  the  influence  of  the  Gulf  Stream.  Where  there  is 
no  land  neither  ice  nor  snow  can  accumulate,  and  given  limited 
areas  of  land  forming  islands  studding  the  polar  seas,  the  climate 
on  these  would,  during  the  summer,  be  quite  comparable  with 
that  of  temperate  regions,  while  the  winter  would  be  much  less 
rigorous  than  under  existing  conditions.  The  blanketing  effect 
of  the  dense  clouds  which  would  be  continually  hanging  over  the 


634  PRESIDENTS    ADDRESS. 

poles,  t(jgether  with  the  heat  liberated  by  their  condensation  from 
vapour,  would  have  much  to  do  with  the  production  of  an 
equable  climate.  The  germ  of  this  theory  was,  I  believe,  first 
suggested  by  Sir  Charles  Lyell,  and  afterwards  developed  by 
Lord  Kelvin,  and  it  seems  to  offer  a  very  acceptable  solution  of 
the  problem.  When  we  have  in  India  and  elsewhere  evidences 
of  glacial  action  necessitating  enormous  change  in  land  horizon, 
it  is  reasonable  to  admit  the  very  much  smaller  rise  or  fall 
required  to  produce  the  requisite  climatic  changes  at  the  poles. 

T  \v\\\  conclude  with  a  favourite  sentiment  of  a  revered  former 
occupant  of  this  honourable  chair — 

"  Floreat  Societas  Linneana  !  " 


The  Hon.  Treasurer  presented  the  balance  sheet  for  the  year 
1905,  which  was  received  and  adopted.  The  Society's  income  for 
the  year  ended  December  31st,  1905,  was  £1,098  13s.  4d.;  the 
expenditure  £957  6s.  3d.;  with  a  debit  balance  of  £63  2s.  6d. 
from  the  previous  year,  leaving  a  credit  balance  of  £78  4s.  7d. 
The  income  of  the  Bacteriological  Department  was  £540  13s.  4d.; 
and  the  expenditure  £496  Os.  lid.;  with  a  credit  balance  of 
£193  15s.  Id.  from  the  previous  year,  leaving  a  credit  balance 
of  £238  7s.  6d.  In  regard  to  the  Macleay  Fellowships'  Account, 
the  income  was  £1,349  8s.  6d.;  and  the  expenditure  £300  lOs.  6d.; 
leaving  a  credit  balance  of  £1,048  18s.  6d.  to  be  carried  to 
Capital  Account. 

After  a  ballot  had  been  taken  to  fill  vacancies  in  the  Council, 
the  President  declared  the  following  elections  for  the  current 
Session  to  have  been  duly  made  : — 

President  :  Thomas  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S. 

Members  of  Council  (to  fill  six  vacancies)  :  R.  T.  Baker, 
F.L.S.,  W.  W.  Froggatt,  F.L.S.,  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  A.  H.  S. 
Lucas.  M.A.,  B.Sc,  and  Fred.  Turner,  F.L.S.,  F.R.H.S. 

Auditors  :  Duncan  Carson,  E.  G.  W.  Palmer,  J. P. 


ANNOUNCEMENTS.  635 

The  President  commended  the  following  three  matters  to  the 
favourable  consideration  of  the  Members  :  — 

(1.)  A  circular  received  from  the  Philosophical  Institute  of 
Canterbury,  N.Z.,  giving  particulars  of  the  projected  Hutton 
Memorial  Research  Fund. 

(2.)  A  circular  from  the  Director  of  the  British  Museum 
(Natural  History),  London,  forwarded  by  the  Department  of 
Public  Health,  Sydney,  asking  for  collections  of  blood-sucking 
Diptera  (other  than  Mosquitoes)  for  scientific  purposes. 

(3.)  A  letter  from  Mr.  C.  G.  Lloyd,  of  the  Lloyd  Library, 
Cincinnati,  asking  for  specimens  of  Puff-balls  {Ly coper daceoi),  to 
aid  him  in  the  study  of  this  group  of  the  Fungi. 

On  the  conclusion  of  the  formal  business  of  the  Meeting,  a 
very  hearty  vote  of  thanks  to  the  President  for  his  interesting 
address  and  for  his  assiduous  attention  to  the  Society's  interests 
was  carried  by  acclamation,  on  the  motion  of  Professor  David. 


636 


O 


^0 


Z 

o 
o 
o 

^^  < 

o 
ft-  o 

o    o 


H 


^-  O  o  --r  c  »-T  o       o  cc    I  >r: 

CXXOO-JO  lOt^     ICC 


:o  ".t  c-  re  o  <M 


(NCC  CO 


III 

O    -    _ 


-    S3    2 


o    rf    t- 
-   r   c3     •  s-  t****: 


W;5 

o  o 
o  o 

2    <-> 

=  13 


--;  —  o 


CO  -^ 
:*^  CTi  cc 


°    =    6  -*^    -. 

S     03     C  f"'   -P 


o 

1 ; 

o 

o 

1 

lO 

1 

cc 

1 

cc 

«rt 

85  ^ 


^^    a;  r— 


< 

'C'            o       c 

oo 

o 

>; 

o      o 

o  o 

o 

o 

09 

o 

-       1    i 

§ 

§ 

g 

H? 

L-^ 

ec 

cc 

o 

^ 

cc 

HH 

r-         -'"'r^         •      « 

<ri 

03 

< 

r    Willian 
bate  Duty 

est  ordere( 
apital 
ouncil  to  b 

pq 

thed     by     Si 
,000,  less  Pro 

nulated  inter 
be  added  to  C 
ordered  by  C 

«3  <M          5    « 

'1 

,- 

E.^     i  §^  S 

o 

iut      be( 

lacleay, 

600 

nt  of  a 

y  Counci 

er  Amoi 

2 

5 

g^-^    3^5 

eS 

Oi 

<3          <i1      tft 

a 

637 


•  £ 
o  o 


Eh 
03 


o 

< 


^-  «3  O  <0  Oi  O  O 

<£>  0«Dt- 

-«*< 

.(NO'XJOO^ 

i>-t-eo  -^t 

00 

CO                     f-H 

rH 

CC  00  »0  >-t  05  — • 

OO'-HQO 

00 

^^^s^ 

tr-Tji        ir-. 

o 

^ 

:    :    :    :    :    :  o  i-i  t>. 

CO        o 

'H 

;     .     .     .       i-H 

OOS(N 

2    o 

3 

:    :    •    :    :    .-^osoo 

?;!     -^ 

:    :  o 

:    :    :    :    :    :coi-i 

Oi        (M 

.  o 

i 

^ 

s< 

g 

S    :        :        :    :    :    : 

o    : 

:f| 

1 

2    ■  >. 

_^' 

-Si 

s 
« 

2  ^.o    :    :    :    :    :    : 

&«? 

H 

■73  r^  "^  CO    •    :  c    :    • 

o<3 

S'S'S 

1^ 

02  fl   S 
^e3   S 

Balance  to 
Salaries  an 
Printing  ar 
Illustration 
Telephone  , 
Law  Costs  . 
Ground  Rei 
Rates 
Insurance  . 

11 

CO    2 

J" 

etty  Cash 
xchanges 
alance  to 

PhH  CO 

t^^^^^^,^^ 

•N            .% 

M 

n-*             O  O  O        O  © 

■^ 

M          c;  c:  Tf      t-  o 

CO 

"— ' 

»— t 

'^          ^^®      ^2g 

00 

r-^                                I-H    t- 

«rt 

oo 

:    i'^    :    : 

"*  00 

o  -^^ 

^ 

o  c 

S-4      <V 

§^ 

i  •>  s  : 

CO 

tH 

C4_       fl 

» 

«rt    . 

CO    O    S 

1905      ... 

3ars 

y  Member 
00  copies 
y  the  Gov 
ments . . . 

P5 

^       g                           r^^-^^ 

^             03  .^     o     (U     K- 

W               OJ    tS  -S    2    c 

fl                   QJ    ft-^    5  t-H 

•2         ^g^-Sfi 

-^                      QJ     S^„   O     *-     O 

ft          o  5Pc  rs  _ 

Subscri 

Entran 
Exchar 
Sales  (i 
ingsp 
Interes' 

o    ^        ,.    ^   ^ 

H    - 

"    "    " 

II 

^•o         o 

o 

«o          o 

o 

^i   1 

8 

t- 

lo         -t 

Ci 

:^^  ; 

'=H 

tJ   a> 

<a  ^ 

}■* 

:  H  c:    ; 

'!§  ' 

-o^ 

^Q^o  : 

^Ss      .. 

1&I2 

l^|3 

^"^f 

iCured 
oan  B 
e),  the 
logyC 

oan  A  (s€ 
art  of    L 
Mortgag 
Bacterio 

>-^fU 

^-      o      o 

o 

^      o      o 

o 

^    i    B 

s 

«fj    ©    t^ 

1- 

•«*'        iO 

a^ 

f— 1 

^ 

s  :?3  : 

.2    k  • 

—1           K* 

S  --s^ 

^J-^^ 

•om     Sir 
s  life-tim 
thed   by 
te  Duty, 

-:sgi 

^  j^  _a    _ 

recei' 
leay  du 
Sum 
00,  less 

ount 
Mac 

ther 
£6,0 

£      3 

<      Pm 

1' 

43 


638 


^•oo  «o 

;o 

•      o      oec 

ec 

»®22 

00 

^        O        OQO 

CO 

O  O  00 

CI 

O         OC5 

<=^  ; 

^^  s 

■^ 

lO         (M  -1- 

zt 

cc 

5^          CN          OO 

ec   t 

^ 

•^       1    m       !      ; 

la 

"  +s 

X>        -r-i.        •        . 

s 

1       n=      :i 

o 

i 

Q 

3 

:    .8 
o 

1       5 

•J 
< 

ibed  4%  Fun 
t,  1907... 
•ibed  4%  Fui 
t,  1909... 
bal  Account 

o 

H 
P* 

fl4 

:     |§|S'3. 

^ 

^^^ 

^  J=  ^  ^  _^ 

Eh 

III 

H 

§ 

O 

o 

o 

+3    -^    ^    — 

'    1 §^  ^  s 

5 

:c&.<3 

o 

3  ^    3  .^    j3 

O  jiQ    O  no    e3 

<j 

>»  "  ► 

<j 

s    s    -1 

^ 

P5    -   - 

<     <     p: 

09 

P4 

2 

M 

HH 

w 

-■  ^ 

«o 

» 

r3              O              05              ;0 

re 

£? 

r,;    * 

00     '. 

CQ 

^           o           c;           00 

oo 

o 

03 

^ 

!'2                                                                               ^H 

Oi 

a> 

O               O               00 

o 

4?^^ 

41 

o 

^    1    1    !- 

re 
in 

=+5 

^ 
H 
(^ 

it -.il  '.O  • 

U 

1 

O 

1 

•s 

a 

o 

thed    by    Sir    Willi 
5,000,  less  Probate  D 

ome  Account  capital 
equest  on  3l8t Decern 

;ome  Account  capital 
eques  t  on  3 1  st  Decern 

3 

1X4 

gs    =-=    =-^ 

S     >3           3     00             £     03 

§ 

43 

© 

^  uo  ^    I-        C3   I. 

Ui 

-  U'-'-^^Z  c>^§ 

x> 

"S 

i^wS.S2S.=  2 

j 

l-H 

o           -           ce 

1 

o 

£         IS        1= 

1 

fH 

<         :c         ^ 

•-      -< 


[Printed  oflF  April  lOtb,  1906.] 


(1905.) 
Names  in  Italics  are  Synonyms. 
Note. — Pp.  52-90  are  indexed  by  Nat.  Orders  only. 


•*% 

PAGE 

PAFE 

Abutilon  otocarpum     39 

Acacia  polybotrya 

43,  394 

Acacia     

...    41,43,393 

var.  foliolosa 

.,..     394 

amblygona  .. 

394 

pruinosa      ... 

...       43 

aneura 

38,  40,  41,  394 

salicina 

...     214 

armata 

205,  221 

sentis 

.. 

36,  40 

Baileyana  ... 

488 

sp 

211 

212.  221 

brachybotrya 

43 

spectabilis  ..     43, 

208. 

211,  212, 

buxifolia 

394 

215 

218 

,  221,  394 

cardiophylla 

394 

stricta 

..      488 

colletioides 

393 

tereticornismr.  dealbata..      214 

conferta 

393 

triptera 

211, 

212,  218, 

cultriformis 

43,  218,  221,  394 

221,  393 

dealbata 

38,'43,  205,  211, 

vestita 

., 

. .     205 

212,  215,  218,  221 

Acanthacete 

.. 

...       73 

decora 

43,  205,  207,  208, 

Acmea  sp. 

...     478 

211,  212,  215, 

Acotyledonese    ... 

49,  51 

[218,  221,  393 

Actaeon  austrinus 

...     536 

decurrens     3 

8,  43,  215,  488,  491 

cratericulatus 

...     536 

dodonseifolia 

363 

roseus 

535,  546 

doratoxylon 

40,  43,  212,  214, 

sp 

.. 

....  478 

215,  221,  362 

tornatilis     ... 

...     536 

var.  ovata 

362 

Actinoceras 

..     280 

excelsa 

...    38,  43,  490 

Actinotus  bellidioides 

226,  227 

falcata 

488 

Forsythii     . . . 

226,  227 

farnesiana  ... 

36,  43 

Gibbonsii    ...  226 

227 

364,  365 

gladiiformis 

218,  219,  221 

var.  Bauerlenii 

...     364 

glaucescens 

43 

glomeratus 

226,  227 

Gnidium     .. 

215,368 

Helianthi    ... 

206,  226 

var.  latifol 

a       362 

leucocephalus 

...     226 

hakeoides   .. 

212,  218.  221,  393 

minor 

.. 

...     226 

harpophylla 

216 

Paddisoni  ... 

...     225 

homalophylla 

L     38,  40,  207,  208, 

rhomboideus 

...     226 

211,  212,  213,  221 

Schwarzii   ... 

.. 

226,  227 

implexa 

212,  214,  218,  221 

Adelium  convexiusculum 

...     181 

lanigera 

205 

eliipticum  ... 

....     181 

leptoelada  .. 

350 

globulosum 

...     184 

lineata 

218,  221,  393 

helmsi 

...     181 

longifolia  var 

488 

minor 

183,  184 

melanoxylon 

205,  221 

minutum    ... 

...     184 

neriifolia     ... 

43,  214 

plicigerum  ... 

...     182 

notabilis 

43,  393 

reticulatum 

...     181 

Oswaldi 

212,  218,  219,  221 

striatum 

181,  183 

pendula 

43,  211,212,217, 

violaceum  ... 

...     182 

221,  490 

^olis      

...     328 

penninervis 

393 

Aeschninae 

...     348 

11. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

A  garista  glycine  351 

Agrionidffi  ...  302,  305,  307,  344 

Ajuga  australis 212,  218 

Alaba  flammea 523 

fnlva  524 

var  pyrrhacme 524 

goniochila 522 

martens:     ...         ...         ..      524 

monile         ..  ...         ..      523 

semistriata...         .  ..      523 

striata         524 

sulcata        523 

Albizzia  basaltica         219 

Alsophila  australis        ..  ...       49 

Alveolites  ..  276,  277,  280 

Amarantaceee    ...         ...  76,  77 

Amarantus  mitchelli    ...         ...       36 

Amaryllidea      47,  82 

Amia  guentheri 486 

roseigaster  ...         ...         ...     486 

Amphidesma  physoides  ...     543 

Amphistegina  lessoni    264,  265,  267, 

268,  271 

Amplexus  ...         ...        276,  277 

Amusium  sp.     ...         ...         ...     477 

Andropogon  sericeus    ...         ...       48 

Anepigraphocis 246 

basiventris ...          ...          ...     246 

Angophora  cordifolia 488 

intermedia  ...  206,  207,  208,  211, 

212,  488 

lanceolata  .,.         ...         390,  488 

subvelutina...         ...         ...     490 

Anomala...         ...         ...         ...     319 

Anomalina  sp 268,  269 

Antennaria         ...         ...         ...     230 

Antennarius       ...          ...         ...     230 

Anthistiria         ...          ...         ...       48 

avenacea     ...         ...  36,  48 

ciliata  ...         ...         ...       48 

Anthocercis  albicans    ...        368,  369 

scabrella     369 

Anthus  australis  ...         ...     579 

Aonychus  251,  257 

argus  ...  252,  254,  255 

Hopei  252 

var.  bicruciatus...         ..,     253 
lineatus       ...  252,  254,  257 

luctuosus    ...  252,  253,  254 

pachypus    252,  256 

striatus        252,  253 

Aplysia  brunnea  ...         ...     537 

nor/olkensis  ...        536,  537 


Aplysia  tryoni 537 

ApocyneK  ...  .  45,  71 

Apophyllum  anomalum  211,  212,  490 

Area  antiquata  ..  477 

clathrata ...     477 

lima 477 

lischkei       532 

sp ^   477 

venusta       ...         ...        477,  545 

Argemone  mexicana      205,  211,  212 
Arnidius...         ...         ...  ..     117 

Arthropodium  minus 36 

strictum      ...         ...         ...     213 

Arthropterus  darlingensis       ...     259 
Asclepiade»        ..         ...  45,  71 

Asplenium  falcatum    49 

Assiminea  528,  537 

affinis  528 

gramim       ...         ...          ...     528 

tasmanica  ..  527,  528,  546 

Astraea  sp.  479 

Astrebla 48 

triticoides 36 

Astylospongia 280 

Atalantia  glauca  ...  85,  212,  2 1 3 

Atalaya  hemiglauca     ...         ...     212 

Atlanta  sp 478 

Atriplex  ...  ...         ..  ...       46 

Atrypa  reticularis  276,  277,  280, 

[285 

sp 276 

Auricula  dyeri 537 

Austrogomphus...  547,  552,  554,  577 
arbustorum  ...        547,  554 

arenarius    ...         ...        549,  554 

prasinus      ...         ...        552,  554 

proselytus   ...         ...         ...     547 

Avena  fatua       ...         ..  ...       48 

Avicennia  ...         ...         ..      532 

Bacillus  alatus  ...         ...        570,  572 

atherstonei...         ...        138,  170 

coli 566 

diphtheriee 566 

dysenteriaB  ...         ...         ...     5fi6 

indurans     339,  .342 

levaniformans  137,  139,  146 

linii.-ii.      ...  161,171,173 

macrozamiae  ...         ...     572 

pseudarabinus  ii.  ...10,  136,  139, 

146,  148,  170 
pyocyaneus  ...         ...     567 

tuberculosis  ...        556,  567 

Backhousia  myrtifolia..  ...     490 


INDEX. 


111. 


PAGE 

Bacterium  acacias  139,  148,  166, 

168,  169,  170, 

[172,  572 

var.  metarabinum         ...     339 

coli  commune        ...         ...     295 

macrozamife  ..  169,572 

metarabinum  138,  139,  144,  145, 

146,  148,  169,  170 

sacchari      ...         ...  ..     168 

typhi  ...294,  297,  299.  300, 

556,  563 

xylinum      168 

Bairdia  foveolata  272,  273,  274 

sp 264,  272 

Banksia  ..  ...         ...         ...       46 

serrata         488 

Barleeia  imbricata       ..  ...     524 

Barrandella  linguifera...        277,  278 

va7\  wilkinsoni  ...         ..      278 

Beggiatoa  arachnoidea  (?)        ..     397 

Betta  pugnax     394 

Bignoniacete      ...         73 

Bittium  minimum        529 

sp 478 

Blastoidea  ...         ...         ...     487 

Blennodia  lasiocarpa 212 

Blepiarda  235 

undulata 236,  239 

vitiata         ...         ...         ...     238 

Bleptocis 247 

collaceratus  248 

Bobyrid^  314 

Boerhaavia  diffusa        36 

Bolivina  nobilis 265,269 

textilarioides         ...        264,  269 

Boragineae  45,  71,  72 

Bornia  lepida     543,546 

radiata        ...         ...         ...     543 

Boronia  Barkeriana      ...         ...     395 

Fraseri         ...     358 

granitica     357,  358 

ledifolia      358 

mollis  358 

pinnata       ...         ...         ...     358 

Botryohium  ternatum 49 

Brachyloma  daphnoides  ...     218 

Breynia 371 

Brissus  carinatus  479 

Bromus  atenarius         36 

sterilis         ...         ...         ...       49 

Brunonia  australis       ...  44,  208,  212 

Bryachus  squamicollis 576 

Bulbine  bulbosa  213 


Bulla       ...    .     ... 

Bursaria  spinosa 
Busbeckia 
Cactese     .. 
Cadulus  sp. 
(Jeesalpiniese 
Csesia  vittata 
Calliscapterus    . . . 
Callistemon 

lanceolatus... 

linearis 

sp 

Callitris  calcarata 

robusta 


Calotis     ...         ... 

cuneifolia    . . 
Calyptorhynchus  sp. 
Calythrix  tetragona 
Campanulaceae  ... 
Oantharus  W aterhoudcB 
Capparideee 
Capparis  lasiantha 

mitchelli 

nobilis 

var.  pubescens 

nummularia 

sarmentosa 

Capulus 

Carabidee 
Cardita  sp. 
Cardium  bechei... 

sp 

Carenarchus 

fortis 

mastersi 
Carenides 
Carenidium 

aberrans 

bicornutum... 

chaudoiri    ... 

dameli 

darlingense... 

gagatinum  ... 

leai  ... 

modestum  ... 

mucronatum 

purpuratum 

pyripenne   ... 

riverinte 

sapphirinum 

septentrionale 

spaldingi      ... 


PAGE 

...     331 
...     488 
...     355 
64 
..      478 
43,  60 
...       36 
...     117 
...       43 
...     577 
...     488 
...     577 
.      210 
205,  207,  208, 
210,  211,  213 

44 

208,  212,  218 

.388 

208, 


53, 


218 
70 
529 
354 
35 
35,  38,  212,  490 
355 
354 
35 
354 
328 
103 
477 
477 
477 
130 
130 
130 
132 
120 
12(5 
129 
127 
126 
127 
125 
126 
120 
126 
129 
125 
127 
127 


129, 


103, 
125, 

i26, 


126, 


126,  128, 


125, 


126, 
126 
125,  1-26 
125,  127 


IV. 


INDEX. 


PAGE   1 

1 

PAGE 

Carenidium  superbum  , .. 

125, 

126  1 

Carpenteria  capitata    ... 

...     270 

tropicale 

126, 

127  i 

proteiformis 

265,  269 

Carenoscaphus 

... 

117  i 

raphidodendron     ... 

...     270 

litcklns        

122 

sp.            263,  264,  266, 

267,  270 

Carenum...      116,  117,  119, 

120, 

121 

CaryophylleEe     

...       54 

anthracinum 

120, 

121 

Casearia  esculenta 

...     355 

bipunctatvm 

123 ; 

Cassia     

...       43 

bonellii        

121 

eremophila 

...     212 

brisbanense 

122 

sp 

208,  211 

carbonarium 

119 

Cassididse           

...     115 

chaudoiri 

.. 

121 

Cassidula  zonata 

537,  546 

concinnum...            117, 

lis, 

119 

Cassinia  lasvis 

...     212 

coracinum  ... 

... 

122 

Theodori     

...     205 

coruscum 

117 

Cassis      

...     328 

cupreo-marginatum 

... 

117 

vibex            

..      478 

cyaneiLm 

121 

Cassytha  glabella 

218,  219 

cyanipenne.. 

120 

121  ! 

Casuarina 

373,  512 

deamatnm  ... 

116 

Cambagei    ...          211, 

212,  213, 

distinctnm 

118 

119 

217,  221 

elegans         

117 

Cookii         

385,  386 

foveigerum  .. 

116 

Covillei       

...     384 

foreipenne  ... 

.. 

116 

Cunninghamiana ... 

207,  211, 

foveolatum 

116 

221,  387 

gemmatum  ... 

... 

116 

distyla         ...    372,378 

,  380,  381 

glaherrimum 

123 

var.  prostrata    ... 

...     371 

interruptum 

... 

120 

inophloia 

...     372 

kingi            

... 

120 

lepidophloia 

...     212 

leevigatum 

120 

Luehmanni     207,  208, 

211,  213, 

loculosum 

... 

116 

221,222 

mvhiimpressum     ... 

116 

nana           

...     372 

nitesctns      

i20 

,121 

paludosa  (?)            208, 

210,218, 

opacum       

,^ 

122 

221,  372 

ovipenne      

122 

quadrivalvis 

210,  876 

politidvm    

120 

stricta     210,  221,  376, 

377,  380, 

propinquum 

120 

381,  383,  384, 

386,  387, 

rugatum      

... 

119 

[388,  3SC 

,  391.  490 

salehrosum 

116 

suberosa      ...           372 

,  391,  488 

scihdum      

... 

121 

torulosa            385,  3Sb 

,  388,  4S8 

simile           

122 

villosa          

...     373 

smaragdalum 

... 

117 

Casuarineffi          79,  80,  371 

,  488,  490 

spencei         

... 

116 

Cavolinia  inflexa 

...     478 

subcyaneum 

... 

119 

longirostris 

...     478 

subporcatulum 

120 

sp 

...    478 

subrngosulum 

... 

123 

CelastrineaB         

57,  490 

suhstriatxdum 

123 

Centaurea  melitensis    ... 

...     208 

sulcaticeps 

... 

119 

Centrolepideffi    

...       S3 

tinctillatum 

123 

Centropercis  nudivittis 

...     486 

triste             

... 

122 

;  Ceratopetalum  apetalum 

...     490 

undulatum  ... 

123 

Cerithiopsis        

...     529 

viciniim        

... 

119 

cessicius       

...     529 

riridimarginatum  . . . 

120 

minima 

...     529 

viridipenne 

... 

121 

tubercularis 

...     529 

we>iliooodi    .. 

.► 

121 

Cerithium           

...     531 

INDEX. 


V. 


PAAE 

Cerithium  minimum    ...    ■ 

...     529 

Cerithium  ebeninum 

530,  531 

ferruginosum 

..      530 

Ch£etetes(?)        

...     280 

Chariscapterm 

...     117 

opulens       

...     117 

Cheilanthes  tenuifolia      49, 

208,  213 

Chelodina  longicollis    ... 

96,  98 

Chenopodiaceas  .. 

16,  75,  76 

Chenopodium  auricomum 

...       36 

Chlamys  sp 

...     477 

Chloris 

...       48 

Chonetes 

...     276 

australis      

...     285 

culleni          ...           280 

281,  285 

Choretrum  CandoUei  ... 

213,  218 

Chrysididas         

...     576 

Chrysomelidse    

...     307 

Cicindela 

...     230 

circumcincta 

...     233 

curvicollis 

.  ...     233 

doddi           

...     2.30 

froggatti      

232,  233 

hackeri        ...           229 

230,  234 

interrupta    .. 

232.  233 

iosceles        

230,  232 

leai 

..      234 

masters!      

...     233 

plebeia         

...     232 

tenuicollis 

...     234 

Cingula  maricB 

..     527 

Circe  gibba         

...     477 

Cladonia  aggregata 

...     309 

macilenta 

...     309 

retipora       

...     309 

Clausilia 

...     327 

Clava       

...     531 

herculea      

...     530 

Clematis  aristata 

...       42 

microphylla 

42,  208 

Cliantiius            

...       43 

Clio  pyramidata 

...     478 

subulata      

...     478 

Clivinini 

...     104 

Clypeaster  scutiformis... 

...     479 

Cochlospermum  gossypium 

...     164 

Cceloria  sp 

...     479 

Collema  byrsinum 

...     308 

leucocarpum 

...     308 

Columbarium     

...     101 

Columhella  epidelia 

...     529 

Columbella  sp 

...     478 

Colydidge            

...     352 

PAGE 

Commelynacese 83 

Commersonia  Fraseri 490 

Compositae  ...        44,  65,  66,  67, 

68,  69,  365 

Condylocardia  ovata    ...        539,546 

ConiferjB  47,  80 

Conocyathus  sp.  ...        442,  479 

Conopterum        ...  125,  126,  127,  129 

incornutum...         ...         ...     127 

littorale       127 

Conularia  inornata        ...         ...     395 

quadrisulcata         ..  ...     395 

sp.  nov 395 

Conus  coxeni     ..  535 

gubernator ...         ...         ...     478 

innotabilis 535 

lividus         478 

sp ,         ...        477,478 

ConvolvulaceaB 45,  72 

Convolvulus  erubescens  208,  212 

Corallinse  479 

Coralliophila  ...  »^.  >..  101 
Corchorus  cunninghamii  ...  101 
Coripera  deplanata       ^         ...     185 

distincta      185,  186 

geminata     185,  187 

morleyana 184,  187 

ocellata        185,  187 

Crassatellites  kingicola  ..      539 

ponderosus 539 

tumida        ...         ...         ...     539 

CrassatellitidsB 540,  541 

Crassulaceee       62 

Cratystylis  ...         .«         ..      307 

Cressa  cretica     45 

Crinum  flaccidum         ...         ...       36 

Croce  attenuata...         ...         ...     576 

Cromus  sp 276 

Croton  Verreauxii        ...         ...     490 

Cruciferas  ...         42,  52,  53,  354 

Cryptandra  amara        218 

7;ar.  longiflora       ,.,         ...      208 
Cry ptocary a  Cunninghamii     ...     519 

foetida  517,  519 

glaucescens...  517,  518,  519 

Mackinoniana       ...         ...     519 

microneura 518 

Moretoniana  519 

obovata       ...         ...         ...     519 

patentinervis  ...        517,  518 

Cuculleea  caraerata       477 

sp 477 

Cuculus  canorus     260 


VI, 


INDEX. 


Cuculus  intermedius 

pallidus 
Cucumis  myriocarpus 

trigonus 
CucurbitacesB     .. 
Cuna 

CurculionidsB     ... 
Cuspidaria 
Cuvierina  columnella 
Cyamiomactra  ... 

communis  ... 

mactroides  ... 

problematica 
Cyamium 
Cyathocrinus  (?) 
Cyathophyllum  ... 

shearsbyi    .. 

Cycadeai 

Cycloclypeus 

carpenter!  ... 

guemhelianus 


PAGE 

260 

576 

43 

..   35 

...43,64 
540 

117,235 

101 

478  1 

540,  541  i 
541,  542,  54(5 

541,  546  I 
541,  546 

.  541 
...  282 
276,277,  278, 
279,  280 
277,  278 
47,  80 
273,  274 

271 

271 


pustulosus  ...  265,  268,  271,  274  i 

sp 263,  264,  271 

Cylichna  sp 478 

Cymatium  ...  101,  326,  328, 

329,  333 

Cymbidium  eanaliculatum        36,  47 

Cymonomops  glaucomma       ...     317 

similis         ...  315,  317,  324 

Cynthia  praeputialis     533 

Cyperaeeae  ...         47,  84,  85,  374 

Cyperus  esculentus       37 

Ifievigatus 394 

lucidus        37,  213 

platystylis ...     394 

Cyphastrsea  sp ...     479 

Cypraa 331 

Cyrendla  .sphcericula 544 

Cyrenoida  oUontja        ...  ,      544 

Cystiphyllum ...     285 

australasicum        ...         ...     279 

Dampiera  adpressa         208,  212,  218 
brownii        ...         ...         ...       44 

Danthonia         48 

bipartita     37 

Datura    ...         ...         ..  45^  51 

Davallia  pyxidata         49 

Daviesia 43 

latifolia       205 

recurvata ...     360 

ulicina        218 

Dentalium  quadricostatum     ...     478 


Dentalium  sp 

Diala  albugo..    ... 

hardyi 
Diala  monile 

translucida... 
Dicksonia  antarctica     . 
Dicotyledonese  ... 
Dilleniaeeae 
Dillwynia  ericifolia 

fioribunda  ... 

juniperina  ... 
Diphyphyllum  .. 

gemmiforme 
Diplacodes  bipunctata. 

ha3matodes ... 

melanopsis... 
Dij)lodonta  sphcericula 
Discorbina  bertheloti    . 

biconcava  (?) 
Distichopora  sp. 
Diuris  sp. 
Dodonaea  boroniaefolia. 

cuneata 

sp 

triangularis 
truncatiales 

var.  heterophylla 


viscosa 

Dolium 

Donax  deltoidalis 
Dorippidas 
Doryphora  sassafras 
Dosinia  sp. 
Drimys  dipetala 
Droseraceae 
Duboisia  hopwoodii 
Ebalia  tuberculosa 
Echidna  hystrix 
Echinocyamus  sp. 
Echinopora  reflexa 
Echinum  violaceum 
Ectorisma  granulata 
Egestria  albilineata 
EIreodendron  australe 
Emarginula  Candida 

dilecta 

incisura 
Embiidae 
Encara  nigra     ... 

submaculatum 
Enchylaena  tomentosa, 
Encrinurus  barrandei 

sp 


208, 


521, 


PAGE. 

437,  47S 
...  523 
..  524 
523,  546 
522,  546 
...  49 
51 
...  52 
..  219 
...  21s 
...  21s 
...  2s0 
279,  281 
...  346 
..  346 
...  346 
...  544 
265,  269 
265,  269 
...  479 
.  .  205 
...  2lS 
...  218 
...  211 
208,  218 
208,  218 
...  208- 
212,  218 
...  328 
...  397 
...  315 
...  490 
...  477 
...  490 
...  62 
...  39 
...  315 
94,  98- 
...  479 
...  479 
...  20& 
...  539' 
...  189 
...  490 

521,  522 

522,  546 
..  521 

...  175 
...  178 

178,  179 
...  35 
...  277 

276,  282 


INDEX. 


Vll. 


Epacricleae 
Epacris  obtusifolia 
Epilecta  ... 

Epilectm 

Episocliocis 

microderes  ... 
Eragi'ostis 

Brownii 

concinna     ... 

costata 

pilosa 
Eremophila 

Brownii 

longifolia    ... 

maculata     ... 

Mitchelli     ... 
Erycina  rotunda 
Erythroxylon  australe.. 

Coca  


PAGE 

45,  70,  71,  360 

45 

129 

129,  130 

244 

245 

32,  48 

91 

91 

91 

37 

46 

212 

207,  212 

46 

211,  212,  217 
543 

...     357 

...     357 


Eucalyptus        ...40,  41,  43,  492,  493 

acaciaeformis  ...        498,  499 

affinis        ...  207,  208,  209,  221, 

496,  498,  515 


albens 

...     377 

algeriensis   .. 

...     500 

amplifolia  .^ 

...     512 

amygdalina 

192, 

204,  221, 
384,  493 

var.  nitida 

... 

...     192 

amygdalina  x  coriacea 

...     493 

Baileyana    ... 

.^     493 

Bancrofti    ... 

... 

...     512 

Baueriana  var.  conica 

...     206 

Bauerleni    ... 

...     500 

Boormani    ... 

492,  494 

botryoides  ...  502, 

*503, 

504,  505, 

506 

,507 

508,  509 

Bridgesiana 

204,  221 

Caleyi 

"512 

514,  515 

Cambagei    ... 

197 

204,  221 

capitellata  ...  193 

,  194 

202,  488 

conica          ...206, 

208, 

211,  212, 
216,  221 

Consideneana 

195 

196,  494 

coriacea 

190, 

204,  221, 
384,  493 

cornuta 

...     500 

corymbosa  ... 

199, 

390,  488, 
493,  512 

crebra         ...  197, 

208, 

209,  210, 

211 

218,  221 

crncivalvis  ... 

... 

...     511 

dealhata 

...     512 

PAGE 

Eucalyptus  Deanei         198,  337,  338 

delegatensis  493 

dives  ...  192,  204,  221 

drepanophylla       ...         ...     509 

dumosa       38,211,221 

Dunnii        336,  338 

eugenioides      193,  202,  488,  509 

var.  nana  193 

eximia  199 

fasciculosa  (?)        497 

globulus      499,  500 

globulus  X  viminalis  ...     499 

gomphocephala     ...         ...     500 

gomphocornuta     500 

goniocalyx  ...         ...         ...     197 

Gunnii        ...  198,  500,  510 

var.  acervula     510 

var.  maculosa  198,  200,  202, 
204,  510,  511 

var.  rubida  198,  204,  511 

haemastoma  ...         ..      488 

var.  micrantha     197,  204,  221 

hemiphloia...  390,  490,  491,  494, 

495   509 

var.  albens  205,  206,  208, '209, 
211,  212,  216, 
[221,  496,  49S 

jugalis         509 

Kirtoniana 501 

Kitsoni        500 

lactea  ...  ...  ...     510 

largiflorens...  212,  216,  221 

leucoxylon 496,  497 

longifolia 490 

McClatchie  510 

macrorrhyncha       193,  194,  195, 

204,  205,  221 

maculosa     ...  198,  202,  204,  221 

Maideni      499,  500 

melanophloia  210,  509,  513 

melliodora  ...197,  204,  205,  206, 

208,211,216,221, 

[495,  496,  514 

micrantha 197 

microcarpa 611 

Moorei         ...  191,  192,  201,  202 

Muelleri      510 

Muelleriana  509 

neglecta      500 

nitida  192 

nova-anglica  499 

obliqua        493 

var.  alpina        ..  ...     493 


Vlll, 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

Eucalyptus  obliqua  x  coi-iacea{?}   493 
occidentalis  ...         ...     500 

oreades        ...  ...      196 

paniculata  ...  197,  209,  488,  515 
paniculata  X  hemiphloia  ..  498 
pafentinervis  ...         ...     501 

pilularis      488 

piperita  ...195,  196,  200,  488, 
494 

Planchoniana        493 

polyanthemos        ..         205,  221 
populifolia  ..  211,212,216, 

221,  490 
populifolia  X  fasciculosa  ...     498 
propinqua  ...         ...         ...     338 

pseudo-globulus     ...         ...     499 

punctata     198,  488 

regnans       ...         ...         ...     192 

resinifera 198,  488 

var.  grandiflora 509 

robusta        ...  ..        501,  507 

robusta  X  resinifera  ...     501 

Rossii  204 

rostrata       ...205,  206,  211,  212, 
221,  501 
rostrata  X  rudis      ..,         ...     500 
rubida         ...  198,  204,  221,  511 
rudis  ...         ...         ...     501 

saccharifera  ...         ...     511 

sacchariflua  ...  ...     511 

saligna        ...336,337,488,498, 

499,  502,  503,  504, 

505,  506,  507,  508, 

[509 

var.  botryoides...  502,  504 
saligna  X  acaciaeformis  ..  498 
siderophloia     197,  210,  221,  488, 

494,  495,  515,  516 
var.  glauca  210,  221,  515 

siderophloia  x  hemiphloia . . .    494 
sideroxylon...205,  207,  208,  209, 
211,  212,  214,  221 

495,  496,  497,  498, 
512,  513,  514,  515, 

[516 
var.  pallens       ...         ...     515 

sideroxylon  x  fasciculosa . . .     498 
sideroxylon  x  hemiphloia 

var.  albens     ...          ..      496 

sideroxylon  x  melliodora  495,496 

sideroxylon  X  Woollsiana..     498 

Sieberiana  ...  195,  196,  197,  202, 

494,  496 


PAGE 

Eucalyptus  squamosa  ...         ...     512 

stellulata 191 

var.  angustifolia  ...     191 

stricta         ...  188,  191,  196,200, 

201,  202 

Stuartiana 204,  499 

Stuartiana  x  nova-anglica. .     499 

tereticornis...  204,  205,  207,  208, 

211,  212,  221.  337, 

[338,  490,  511,  512 

var.  Bancrofti    ..  ...     512 

var.  brevifolia    ...  ...     512 

var.  dealbata       207,  208,  212, 
214,  218,  221,  512 

var.  latifolia      512 

var.  squamosa  ...         ...     512 

terminalis   ...  ...         ...       38 

trachyphloia  ...         ...     493 

umbra  ...         ...         ...     509 

vernicosa ...     510 

viminalis    ..      38,  198,  199,  204, 

221,  384,  499,  500,  511 

var.  Bauerleni   ...         ...     500 

var.  macrocarpa  499,  500 

var.  microcarpa  ...     511 

viminalis  X  globulus  ...     500 

virgata  var.  altior 196 

viridis         ...   207,211,218,  221 

vitellina      493 

vitrea  ...         ...         ...     493 

Wilkinsoniana       ...         ...     509 

Woollsiana...  207,  208,  211,  212, 
216,  221 

Eugenia  cyanocarpa     364 

sp 488 

Eulima 522 

sp 478 

Eulimella  anabathron  ...        524,  546 
Euphorbia  drummondii  ..         39 

EuphorbiacejB  ...       46,  79,  370,  490 
Eurygnathus      ...         ...         ...     129 

forfis  129,  130 

Euryscaphus      112 

affinis  113 

arenarius    ...         ...         ...     113 

carbonarms  ...         ...     113 

dilatatus      113 

hopei  112,  113 

minor  ...         ...         ...     113 

politus  ...         ...         112,  118 

Eutoma 117 

loddonense  .  .         ...         ...     123 

loeve 123 


INDEX. 


IX. 


Eutoma  mastersi 
newmani 
punctulatum 
tinctillatum 

Eutomus... 

Exooarpus  aphylla 


PAGE 

]23 
123 
123 
123 
117 
213 


cupressiformis        ...35,205,211, 
218,  488 

Favosites 276,279,280 

goldfussi      285 

gothlandica 276,  277 

Ficoidese..  64 

Ficus  aspera       ..  ...         ...       35 

rubiginosa  ...         ...         ...       35 

Filices 49,  90 

Flindersia  maculosa     38 

Frankeniaceas    ...         ...         ...       54 

Frenelaspp 41 

Fumariaceae       ...         ...         ...       53 

Fungia  sp.  479 

Fusanus  acuminatus     ...        85,  ^11, 

'  213,  3i2 

persicarius  ...         ..  ...       35 

Fusus  bifrons     334 

Galaxea  sp.         ...         ...         ...     479 

•Galeichthys        486 

Galium  umbrosum        208 

•Gaudryina  subrotundata        265,  269 

Geijera  parviflora         ...42,  211,  212, 

217,  490 

Gentianese  ...         ...         ...       71 

Geonemertes  sp.  487 

•Geoplana  cserulea         ...         ..      223 

McMahoni 350 

mediolineata  var.  simularis    223 

sanguinea 223,  350 

Spenceri      ..  223 

Sugdeni       350 

'Geoscaptus         103,  105 

cacus  ...   105,  106,  107,  108 

crassus        ...         ...         ...     107 

laevissimus 106,107 

macleayi     108 

planiusculus  ..         ...     106 

plicatulus 107 

GeraniacejB        56 

Geranium  dissectum     37 

Globigerina  bulloides    263,  264,  265, 

266,  267,  268, 

[269 

conglobata 266,269 

rosacea        ...  .         263,  264 

Jsp.    .«         ...  263,  264,  453 


PAGE 

(ilochidion  ...         ...         ...     371 

umbratile 370 

Glochinorrhinus  249 

Cooki  251 

Doubledayi  ...        249,  250 

evanidus     249,  251 

Glycine  clandestina      ...        208,  218 

Glyphagia  246 

Glyptauchen  panduratus        ...     486 

Goniastrasa  sp 479 

Goodenia  ...         ...         ...       44 

pinnatifida  ...  208,  212,  218 

Goodenoviese      ...         ..  44,  70 

Gramineffi  ...  44,  47,  48,  85,  86, 

87,  88,  89 

Grammitis  rutsefolia    ...         ...       49 

Gratiola  pedunculata 39 

Grevillea 46 

arenaria      ...         .  ...     218 

robusta        488 

striata         40,  46,  490 

Gyrineum  pusillum      478 

Haemodorum  planif  olium        ..        39 

Hakea     40,  46,  136,  137,  139 

acicularis 488 

dactyloides 488 

leucoptera 40,  213 

saligna        ...  136,  139,  148,  164, 
168,  169,  488 

Halimeda  opuntia        479 

Haliotis  conicopora      ...         ...     520 

cyclobates   .  520 

excavata     ...         ...         ...     520 

granti  ...         ...         ...     520 

hargravesi  ...         .  .         ...     520 


ncevosa 

520 

roei 

520,  521 

Vubicundus... 

521 

tricostalis    . . . 

.      521 

tubifera 

520 

Halorageae 

62 

Haloragis  elata  ... 

..      208 

Hardenbergia  monophylla    205,  218, 

219 
Helcioniscus  tramosericus  ...  397 
Heleocharis  sphacelata ...  37 ,  39 

Helichrysum  apiculatum         ...     208 

Boormanii 366 

bracteatum 208,  218 

collinum     366 

diosmif olium  208,  218,  365 

elatum         ...         ...         ...     366 

glutinosum...         ...         ...     366 


X. 


INDtX. 


PAGE 

Heliolites 

276,  277 

Heliopora  sp.  (?) 

...     479 

Helipterum  incanum    ... 

208,  212 

Hemianax  Papuensis    ... 

...     345 

Hemidonax        

...     540 

Hemigomphus 

...     554 

Herpolitha  v?)  sp. 

...     479 

Herviera 

...     525 

isidella        

...     525 

Heterodea  muelleri 

...     309 

Heterodendron  oleaefolium   207,  208, 

211,  212,  217 

Heterostegina  depressa  265,  271 

margaritata  263,  264,  265, 

267,  271 

sp 263,  266,  268,  271 

Hibbertia  fasciculata 362 

linearis       208 

var.  canescens 212 

sp 205,  211 

Hippopus  hippopus      477 

Hispidfe 307,  308 

Hordeum  murinum      ...49,  205,  208 

Hovea      43 

Hyastenus  Fultoni       ...        313,324 

Hydrocena  hidalgoi      528 

HydrocharideaB  ...         ...         ...       80 

HypericineaB       ...         ...         ...       54 

Hypoxis  hygrometrica...         ...       37 

Ibacus  alticrenatus       ...         ...     322 

t'a?'.  septemdentatus  322,  324 
Ictinus     ...         ...         ...  .     547 

Imperata  arundinacea 39 

Indigofera  australis      ...        208,218 

Irideae      47,  82 

lachnura 302,304,305 

delicata       348,  487 

elegans        ,.     305 

heterosticta      302,  305,  307,  487 

veiticalis     304 

Isopogon 46 

Ixiola3na  leptolepis       212 

Jacksonia  ...         ...         ...       43 

Japyx      259 

Jasminese  .  ...  45,  71 

Jasminum  lineare  ...  45,212 

suavissimum  ...         ...       45 

Joannisiella       ...  ...     544 

sphaericula 544,  546 

Josephinia  ...         ...         ...       51 

Juncaceae  83 

Kellia  rostellata . . .         ...         ...     542 

Kellia  suborbicularis 543 


PAGE 

Kennedya  monophylla    205,  218,  219 

Kochia ..       46 

microphyUa  208,211,213 

Kunzea  bracteolata       363 

capitata       ...         ...         ...     364 

corifolia       364,488 

opposita       ...  ..          ...     364 

parvifolia 212,  218 

Labiatse 46,  74,  75,  369 

Laccoptera         ...         ...         ...     115 

Laccopterum      ...  ..  ...     115 

hutneralis    ...         ...         ...     116 

lacimosum  ...         ...         ...     116 

macleayi      ...  ...          ...     116 

Laccoscaphus     115,  121 

cyaneuB       lid 

danviniensis  116 

deauratus    ...         ...         ...     116 

foveigerus 116 

foveipennis  116 

foveolatus  ...         ...  ..     116 

gemmatus  ,..         ...         ...     116 

humeralis  .^  116 

lacunosus    ...         ...         ...     116 

looulosus     ...         ...         ...     116 

macleayi      ..  ...         ...     11& 

multiimpressus      116 

salebrosus   ...         ...         ...     116 

spencei        ...         ...         ...     116 

LBBvilitorina       527 

caliginosa    ...         527 

mariee  ...  ...  ...     .527 

Laganum  depressum     479 

Lasiopetalum ...     357 

longiatamineum     ...        355,  357 
macrophyllum       ...        356,  357 

Laireillidae         317 

Latreillopsis  bispinosa 319 

petterdi       317,  324 

Lavatera  plebeia  ...         ...       37 

Lecanora  subfusca        ...         ...     311 

Lecidea  parvifolia         ...         ...     311 

Leda  sp 477 

Leguminosae      ...        41,  42,  359,  488 
Leiostraca  inuata  ...        525,  546 

Lemnaceae  ...         ...          ...       83 

Lepidium  phlebopetalum         . . .     354 
Lepidium  rotundum     ..  ...     354 

var,  phlebopetalum       ...     354 

Lepidocyclina    ...  262,  263,  264,  266, 

268,  270,  272,  273, 

[274,  416,  437,  455 

andrewsiana  ...        268,  272 


iNDEX, 


XI. 


PAGE 

Lepidocyclina  formosa  ...     272 

insulje-natalis  263,  266,  267,  268 

271,  272,  274 

var.  inaequalis      263,  267,  271 

martini        ...263,  264,  265,  267, 

268,  272,  274 

var.  rotula  265,  272,  274 

murrayana  271 

neodispansa  ...  .      270 

sp 264,  272 

suraatrensis  (?)         267,  268,  272 

Lepidodenclron  Heeri 577 

sp.n.  577 

veltheimianum       577 

Lepidosperma  lineare  ..  ...     374 

Lepidurus  sp 487 

Lepisma  ...         ...         ...         ...     259 

longicaudata  ...         ...     259 

producta      259 

saccharina  ...         ...         ...     259 

Lepteena ...     280 

Leptastraea  sp ...     479 

Leptogium  hypotrachynum     ...     308 

marginellum  308 

tremelloides  ...         ...     308 

Leptomeria  billardieri 35 

Leptoria  sp 479 

Leptospermum 43 

flavescens  var 488 

Lestes  cingulata  487 

leda 346,348,487 

Leucopogon       ...         ...         ...       45 

Leucosiidffi  315 

Liliaceae 47,  82 

Lima  alata  (?) 477 

sp 442,  477 

Limarca  ...         ...         ...         ...     545 

angustifrons  ...        545,  546 

Limopsis 545 

sp 477 

Linete      56,357 

Linmu  marginale  ...  39,  212 

usitatissimmn        161 

Liotiasp.  478 

Lispognathus  Thomsoni  ...     323 

Lissanthe  strigosa        ...        208,218 
Lithophaga  levigata  (?)  ..      477 

sp 477 

Lithothamnion  ...  263,  264,  266,  267, 
268,  274,  455 

Litophyllum       280 

Littorina  neritoides      ..          ...     333 
scabra         333 


PAGE 

Loganiaceae        ...         ...         ...     368 

Lolium  temulentum      49 

Lomatia  ...         ...         ...         ...       46 

Loranthacea3      ...       43,  65,  488,  489 

Loranthus  44,  398 

celastroides...  488,  489,  490,  577 


dictyophlebus 

...     490 

exocarpi 

■65,  490 

linearifolius 

..      490 

longiflorus 

'.488 

489,  491 

Melaleucce  ... 

...     490 

miraculosus 

488 

490,  491 

pendulus           212, 

218 

490,  491 

var.  parviflorus. 

488,  490^ 

sp 

205,  491 

Lotorium 

326,  335 

Loxonema 

...     280 

compressa  ... 

...     277' 

Lucina  sp. 

...     477 

Lupinus  luteus    . 

...     570 

Lutraria  nicobarica 

...     539 

Lycopodiacese     ... 

90,  395- 

Lyonsia  eucalyptifolia 

...     212 

Lysiosepalmn     ... 

...     356 

LythrarieaB 

...       64 

Macadamia  ternifolia 

...     352 

Machilis 

...     259^ 

Macrozamia 

...       35 

spiralis 

10,  37,  47 

Mactra  cegyptiaca 

..      538 

nicobarica  ... 

...     538 

Maculotriton  bracteatus 

...     529 

Madrepora  sp 

...     479- 

MagnoliaceEe 

.. 

...     490 

Maiidffi 

...     313 

Malvaceje 

i2,  54,  55 

Marsdenia  Leichhardtiana 

35,  212: 

217 

Marsilea  angustifolia  . 

...     374 

drummondii 

...       37 

MarsileacetG 

90 

Mecistostylus 

...     236 

Megalatractus    ...  328, 

■329 

,  332,  335 

aruanus 

326, 

329,  352 

Melaleuca 

...     4a 

genistifolia  ... 

...     490 

linariifolia  ... 

, 

488,  490' 

nodosa 

..     488 

styphelioides 

.. 

..      488 

uncinata      ...  208, 

212, 

218,  219 

Meleagrina  vulgaris 

...     351 

Melia  composita 

488,  491 

Meliacea) 

!56, 

488,  490- 

xn. 


INDEX, 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Melichrus  urceolatus   . 

,. 

...     218 

Motacilla  cinereicapilla 

...     578 

Melithreptus  albigularis 

...     395 

flava            

...     578 

lunulatus    ... 

...     395 

Murex     

...     .328 

Melo        

...     328 

denudata 

...     328 

Menephilus  a3neus 

...     179 

ternispina 

...     478 

rudcornis     .. 

...     180 

tribulus       

...     3.34 

Mentha  australis 

...       39 

Mussa  sp.           

...     479 

granditlora... 

...       39 

Mya  suborhicularis 

...     543 

saturejoides 

...       39 

Myoporineie       

45,  73,  74 

Meristella  sp 

...     277 

Myoporum  deserti 

35 

Me  rope  (tgyptiaca 

...     538 

platycarpum 

211,212,217 

nicoharica  ... 

...     539 

Myosotis  australis 

...       45 

Mesembryanthemum  aequilate- 

Myrmecia  pyriformis  .. 

...     175 

rale 

...       35 

Myrsinacea;        

...     488 

Micrococcus  aureus 

557, 

558,  568, 

Myrsine  variabilis 

...     488 

569  1 

Myrtace^e           ...43,  62 

63,  64,  363, 

melitensis  ... 

...     566  1 

488,  490 

Microplasma 

.. 

...     280 

Mysia  sphcericula 

...     544 

Microseris  forsteri 

...       37 

Naiadeae 

...       83 

Miliolina  oblonga 

.. 

267,  268 

Nassa  sp.            

...     478 

seminulum  ... 

.. 

267,  268 

Natiea  areolata 

...     478 

sp 

264,  268 

sp 

...     478 

subrotunda  .. 

.. 

267,  268 

Nautilus  sp 

...     280 

Millepora 

...     263 

Nemopteridse     

...     576 

Mimosese 

43, 

30,  61,  62 

Neocarenum  mastersi  . . 

...     130 

Mimulus  gracilis 

212,  217 

Neolepton  rostellatum.. 

542,  546 

Minuria  leptophylla 

...     208 

Neomystocis      

...     242 

Miogypsina 

270,  273 

squamiventris 

...     243 

burdigalensis  263 

265 

270,  273 

Nepharis  alata 

...     352 

complanata 

265 

,  270.  273 

Nerita  maxima 

...     478 

globulina  (?) 

263 

270,  273 

melanotragus 

...     397 

irregularis  ... 

265 

270,  273 

undulata     

...     478 

neodispansa 

267,  270 

Neritina 

...     327 

Mirbelia  aotoides 

...     360 

Nicotiana 

...       45 

pungens 

208,  218 

Nitraria  schoberi 

...       35 

Mitra  coronata  ... 

...     478 

Nostoc  sp.           

...     397 

sp 

..      478 

Xothola&na  vellea 

...       49 

Mitromorpha     ... 

...     584 

Notothixos  cornifolius.. 

...       43 

alba 

...     534 

incanus       

...     490 

brazieri 

...     534 

Nuytsia  floribunda 

...     491 

pallidula     ... 

,. 

534,  546 

Nyctaginefe         

...       77 

substriata     .. 

...     534 

Obtortio 

...     524 

suteri 

..      5.34 

Odostomella       

...     525 

Monimiaceae 

...     490 

Odostomia  kymatodes .. 

...     525 

Monocentriim 

...     130 

opaca           

524,  546 

Monocentrus     ... 

... 

...     130 

pupa            

...     525 

Monoeotyledoneae 

47,  51 

sp 

...     478 

Monodonta  zebra 

...     397 

CEdemeridas       

...     187 

Monotaxis  macrophyll 

a 

...     371 

Ogmorhinus  leptonyx  , 

...     308 

Montacuta  semiradiata 

542,  546 

Olacinepe             

...       57 

Motacilla 

578,  579 

Olearia  coiiocephala     . 

...     307 

barnardi 

..      579 

Olearia  pimeloides 

...     212 

borealis 

...     578 

I  Oligotoma  gurneyi 

...     175 

INDEX. 


X111-. 


PAGE 

Oliva  irisans 

..      478 

Olivella  sp 

...     478 

Onagrariese         

...       64 

Operculina  complanata 

...     271 

Ophicardelus      ... 

...     537 

Ophioglossum  vulgatum 

...       49 

Orbicella  sp 

417,  479 

Orhitoides  neodispansa 

...     270 

Orchidese            ...           47, 

80,  81,82 

Origma  rubricata 

...     396 

Orthis  sp.            

...     276 

Orthoceras  spp 

...     277 

Oscillaria  sp 

...     397 

Otrintus  Behri... 

..     180 

Jacksoni     

...     180 

Owenia  acidula 

...       36 

Oxylobium         

...       43 

hanmlosum 

...     359 

Pultengea    

...     359 

Pachypora  (?)  sp. 

...     277 

Paguridse            

...     319 

Paguristes  aciculus 

ai9,  324 

tuberculatus 

...     322 

Paliscaphus       

...     117 

Paludina 

...     327 

granum       

...     528 

Panicum             

37,  48 

decompositum 

...       37 

lencopheeum 

...       39 

Pannaria  mariana 

...     311 

Pannychia  moseleyi     ... 

...     101 

Papaver  horridum 

...       39 

Papaverace^      

...       52 

Papilionaeese      ...           43, 

58,  59,  60 

Paranomocerus 

...     236 

Parmelia  conspersa      ... 

...     309 

limbata       

..     309 

perforata     

...     309 

tinctorum 

...     309 

Paronychiacese 

77 

Pasimachides     ...           103,  105,  108 

Patella 

...     332 

Patersonia  glauca 

...       47 

Pauropsalta  annulata  ... 

...     576 

Paussoptinus  laticornis 

...     352 

Pavonia  sp 

...     479 

Pecten  pallium 

...     478 

sp 

...     477 

Pectunculus  sp 

...     478 

Pedaline?e           

51,  73 

Pedilidse 

...     189 

Pelopaeus  Isetus 

...     576 

Peltigera  polydactyla   .., 

...     310 

PAGE. 

Pentamerus  Knightii 277 

linguifer  var.  wilkinsoni...     277 
Persepho7ia  grarmlosa  ...         ...     315, 

•     tuberculosa  ...         ...     315 

Persoonia  ... 46. 

salicina       490 

sp 218 

tenuifolia 36 

Petalura 547 

Petrogale  inornata       98 

Petrophila  46 

Pezichus 239,  243,  249. 

binotatus 240 

gracilis        241 

Phalaenoides  glycine    ...  ...     351 

Philobrya  ...         ...  ...     545 

costata        545, 

parallelogramma  ...        544,  546 

Philoscaphus     105,  113, 

barnardi      ...  ...  ...     114 

bicostatus  ...  ...  ...     114 

carinatus    ...          ...  ..     114 

costalis        113,  114 

crassus        ...  .  ...     114 

duboulayi    ...         ...         ...     11.4 

lateralis      ...  ...  ...     114 

mastersi 114,  115 

tepptri         ...          ...  ...     114 

tuberculatus  ...        105,  114 

Philydracese       82 

Photinia  serrulata        488 

Phragmites  communis... ,       ...       40 
Phragmoceras  subtrigonum    ...     285 

Phronima  sedentaria 576 

sp 577 

Phyllanthus       ...         371= 

Phylloglossum  Drummondii  ...     395 
Physcia  chrysophthalma         . . .     310 

picta  311 

speciosa       ...         ...         ...     310- 

Phytolaccacese 75. 

Pimelea  ...         ...         ...         ...       46' 

glauca  208,  213 

linifolia       ...  207,  213,  218 

microcephala         ...         ...     213  = 

Pimpla  intricatoria       ...         ..      351 

Pinna  serra        ...         ...          ...     538 

Pinna  serrata     ...         ...        537,  538 

Pinus  insignis 488,  489 

Pittosporea3        53,488-; 

Pittosporum  phillyraeoides     37,  211, 

[2L2- 
Plagiosetum       51 1 


1X1V. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

Planorbulina  (?)  sp.      ...        263,  269 

Plantaginere       ...           ..         ...  75 

Plantago  varia  ...         ...         ...  37 

Platythorax        117 

Plesionika  semilecvis 323 

Pleurotoma  crispa        478 

sp 477,  478 

sterrha        534 

torresiana  ...         ..           ...  535 

'Podaxon  .Egyptiacus 259 

Poephila  acuticauda     ...         ..  101 

aurantiirostris       ...          ...  101 

hecki           101 

personata    ...         ...         ...  101 

Polinices  conicus          ...         ...  333 

incei            333 

Polyacanthus  opercularis        ...  308 

Polygaleaa           54 

Polygonaceae      ...  77 

Polypodium  serpens     49 

Polystomella  (?)  sp.      ..         263,  270 
Polytrema      miniaceum      var. 

inrolva             270 

Polytrema  planum  264,  268,  270,  274 

Porites  sp.          ...         ...         ...  479 

Pororaya...         ..           ...         ...  542 

Portulaca  oleraeea        ...         ...  38 

Portulacese         ...         ...         ...  54 

Potamides          ...         ...          ...  531 

herculeus     ...         ...         ...  531 

Primulacete        71 

Promecotheea 307 

Prostanthera      ...         ...         ...  46 

granitica     369 

rhombea     370 

Proteaceae  ...       46,78,488,490 

Protopalus         236,  239 

Pseudagrion  cyane       487 

Pseudolychus  elegantulus       ...  189 

hcemorrhoidalis     ..           ...  188 

luctuosus 189 

marginatus 188,  189 

montanus 187 

puberulus ...  188 

rufipennis 188 

Psoralea  patens 212 

Psychotria  loniceroides            ...  490 

Pteris  aquilina  var.  esculenta...  38 

falcata         394 

Pterohelaeus  icarus       ...         ...  177 

Walkeri       178 

Pterostylis  rufa 47 

Ptilotis  plumula           260 


PAGE 

Ptilotus  exaltatus         213 

Ptinidte 352 

Puccinia  loranthicola  ...         ...     577 

Pulex  irritans    ..  ...         ...       44 

Pultenaea  43 

cinerascens...         ...        361,  362 

Hartmanni 361,  362 

microphylla  ...        208,  218 

mollis  360,  361 

Pulvinulina  sp 265,270 

i  Puncturella  sp.  ...         ...         ...     478 

Purpura .  ...     334 

lapillus        533 

succincta 533,  546 

Pyrazus...  531 

baudlni        ...         ...         ...     503 

fluviatilis    ...          ...  ...     532 

herculeus    ...  529 

semitrisulcatus      ...         ...     532 

Pyrgulina  sp 478 

Pyrosoma  sp.     ..  ...         ..      576 

Ramalina  gracilis         309 

Eanunculaceae   ...         ...  42,  52 

Receptaeulites  australis  ...     280 

Reichia  lucifuga  104 

Restiaceje  ...         ...  ...       84 

Retepora  sp 479 

Retusa  pyriformis         ...         ...     478 

sp 478 

Rhagodia  hastata  36 

Rhamneae  ...         ...  42,  57 

Rhizobium  leguminosarum     ...     570 
Rhizophyllum  interpunctatum      278 
EhizospermaB     ...         ...  ...     874 

Phodostoma  dyeri         ...         ...     537 

Rhyothemis  graphiptera         345,  346 

Ricasolia  hartmanni 310 

rhapispora ...         ...         ...     310 

Riecia  sp.  ...         ...         ...     395 

Ringicula  sp 478 

Risella  melanostoma    ...         ...     397 

Rissoa      527 

cheilostoma  526 

emblematica  ...        526,  546 

maricB  ...         ...         ...     527 

pulvillus     526,  546 

nieinue         ...         ...  ...     527 

Robinia  pseudacacia 488 

Rosaceae  ...         ...  ..  ...       62 

Rubiacese  65,490 

Rubus  parvifolius         36 

Rutacese 42,  56,  357 

Salinator  ...         ...         ...     537 


INDEX. 


XV. 


PAGE 

PAGE 

■SamydaceaB 

.355 

Seguenzia           

..      478 

Santalaceae 

80,  488 

Senecio  capillifolius 

...     367 

Sapindacese 

42,  57 

Senecio  lautus 

...     367 

Sarcostemma  australe 

39 

Sillaginidse         

...     574 

SaxifragesB 

490 

Sillago  bassensis 

574,  575 

Scasvola  spinescens 

212 

ciliata          ...           574 

575,  576 

Scala  sp 

478 

maculata    ...           574 

575,  576 

Scaraphites 

103,  108 

punctata     

...     574 

affinis 

113 

Siphonophora  granaria 

...     487 

assimilis 

112 

Solanefe  ...          .           45,72,73,368 

bacchus 

109 

Solanum  esuriale 

...86,  45 

carhonarius 

113 

ferocissimum 

...     218 

crenaticollis 

112 

Solarium  sp 

...     478 

gigas 

109 

Spartothamnus  junceus 

...       39 

heros 

109 

Spergularia  rubra 

...     212 

hirtipes 

109,  111,  112 

Sphaeroidina  bulloides    265, 

268,  269 

hopei 

...     112 

Sphserophoron  compressum 

...     308 

humeralis  ... 

109 

Spirifera  Isevicostata    ... 

...     285 

insulans 

112 

reticularis 

...     285 

ijifermedius... 

112 

sp 

...     277 

laticollis 

109 

Yassensis    ...  279,  280, 

281,  285 

latipennis    . . . 

Ill 

Spondylus  varians 

...     478 

lenseus 

109,  111 

Spongophyllum  sp. 

...     280 

lucidus 

109,110 

Sporobolus  lindleyi 

...       38 

macleayi      ... 

112 

Stackhousia  linariaefolia 

205,  208 

martini 

HI 

Stackhousiese     

...       57 

mastersi 

109,  111 

Standella  nicobarica 

...     538 

pacificus 

109,  111 

rugosa         

...     538 

rotundipennis 

109,  112 

Staphylococcus  pyogenes  albus     569 

silenus 

109,  HI 

pyogenes  aureus    ... 

...     569 

■Scarites  ... 

105,  116,  117 

Steganoma          

103,  104 

approxirnatus 

108 

porcatum    

...     104 

hipimctatus . . . 

108 

Sterculia 

...     169 

bostocki 

106 

diversifolia    38,  39,  41, 

205,  207, 

cacus 

108 

208,211,212, 

217,  490 

cyaneus 

116,  121 

Sterculiacese       55, 

355,  490 

damastes     ... 

106 

SLereocaulon  ramulosum 

...     309 

geryon         ... 

106 

Sticta  aurata      

...     310 

mitchellii     ... 

..      108 

dichotomoides 

...     310 

lemeus 

Ill 

mix 

...     310 

planiusculus 

106,  107 

karstenii      

...     310 

plicatuhis    ... 

106,  107 

pulmonacea 

...     310 

rotundipennis 

112 

subvariabilis 

..     310 

ruficornis    ... 

108 

Stictina  fragilima 

...     310 

suhporcatulua 

108 

quercizans 

...     310 

suhstriatus  ... 

..       108 

retigera        

...     310 

ivaterhousei 

108 

Stipa        

...       48 

Scaritides           ...  103, 

104,  105,  106 

aristiglumis 

...       48 

Scaritini 

103,  105 

Stromatopora     ...   276,  277, 

279,  280 

Scaritoderus 

103 

concentrica 

...     285 

Schinus  molle    ... 

339,  488 

Strombus  campbelli 

...     523 

Scrophularinese... 

45,  73 

urceus          

...     478 

Scyllaridge 

322 

ustulatus    

...     478 

XVI. 


INDEX. 


PAEE 

Strychnos  psilosperma 368 

Stylidieffi  ...         44,  69,  70,  367 


Stylidium  debile  

var.  paniculatum 

graminifolium  var.  album 

Stylifer    

Styliferina 
Styliferina  sulcata 
Stylophora  palmata 
Stypandra  glauca 
Styphelia  triflora 
Swainsona 

procumbens 

sp 

Syncarpia  laurifolia 
Synoum  grandulosum 
Synthemis  eustalacta 
Syringopora  sp, ... 
Syrnola  sp. 

Tapes  sp.  

Targionia  sp. 

Tatea       

Teinostoma  sp 

Telephlebia  Godefroyi-,^ 
Telescopium  telescopium 
Tellina  sp 


36 
367 
44 

522 
523 
523 
479 

218 

367 

43 

208 

212 

488 

490 

345 

276,  277,  280 

...  478 


Tenebrionidse     ... 
Teratidium 

convexum    .. 

frenchi 

grandiceps  ... 

laticeps 

longiceps     ... 

macros 

megacephalum 

perlongum  ... 
Terebra  dimidiata 

subula 
Tethys     

depilans 

norfolkensis 
Textularia  gramen 

rugosa 

sp 

Thalassogeron  cautus 
Thecidia  maxilla 
Theora  sp. 
Thracia  sp. 
Thymeleae 

Thysanotus  tuberosus 
Tiliaceae  ... 
Tinoporus  sp. 


...  478 
...  395 
...  537 
...  478 
...  345 
...  532 
...  478 
...  177 

130,  135 

131,  134 
131,  133 
...  131 
...  131 
...  131 

30,  131,  132 
...  131 
131,  135 
...  478 
...  478 
...  537 
..  537 
546 
268 
268 
269 
...  395 
...  477 
...  478 
...  478 
46,  78,  79 
38,213,  218 
...  55 
...  272 


536,  537, 
267, 

267, 


Trichocarenum  castelnaui 


123 


Trichocarenum  cylindricum 

elderi  

Tridacna  gigas 

Triglochin  procera 
Triodia  mitchelli 


PAGE 

124 
124 

478 
38. 
38 


Triphora 

sp 

Triticum  repens... 

Triton      

Triumfetta 
Trochus  maculatus 
Trophon  ... 
Truncatulina 

lobatula 

refulgens     ... 

sp 

ungeriana  ... 
Tryplasma  sp.    ... 
Turbo  imperialis 
Turbonilla 

sp 

Turritella  sp.     ... 
Typha  angustifolia 
Typhaceae 
Ulmus  chinensis 
Umbellif  erse 


328,  334 

478 

259' 

..      326 

51 

478 

101 

263,  266,  26a 

263,269 

267,  269 
266,  268,  269 

265,  269 

276,  277 

397 

334 

..      478- 

478 

38,  40 

83 

488 

..    64,  65,  364 


Uroptychus  australis    »„ 

gracilimanus 
Urticeas  ... 
Usnea  barbata   .. 

longissima  ... 

trichoidea   ... 
Yentilago  viminalis 
Verbena  officinalis 
Verbenaceae 
Vertagus... 
Vibrio  cholersb  ... 
Violariea? 
Viseum  articulatum 

Vitis  sp 

Volvula  ... 
Wahlenbergia  gracilis  ... 


...  323 
...  323 
...  79 
...  309 
...  309' 
...  309 
40,  42 
39,  212 
...  74 
...  531 
...  566 
...  53- 
43,  490 
...  222 
...  331 
208,  211, 
212,  218 

Westringia  rosmarinifolia  ...  369' 
Xanthagrion  erythroneurum  ...  344 
Xanthorrhcea  arborea...  ...       40 


sp. 


18 


Xanthoxylum  brachyacanthum  358 

Xerotes  longifolia          ...         ...  39 

Xyrideffi 83 

Zea  mays            175 

Zygophylleae      56 

Zygophyllum  glaucescens        ...  212 


P.LS.N.S.W.I905. 


PLXXX. 


RJ.B.,de.l.ad  not. 


3  5      6       7 

CRYPTOCARYA     FCETIDA,   R.T  B. 


H.J.A.Boron,  lith. 


P.L.S.N.S  W.    1606. 


AUSTRALIAN    MOLLUSCA. 


P.L.S.N.S  W.    1905. 


^,/^6<^fa^ 


AUSTRALIAN    MOLLUSCA. 


P.L.S.N.S  W.    1808. 


<^.  A'^,2^^  ,2^ 


AUSTRALIAN    MOLLUSCA. 


•.L.s.N.s  w.  isoe. 


I 


A.      Dorsa/    Vfew 


f\  Dors  a/    I// 


B  LaCcra./     l/>  ^ 


B  Latzra./    Vtex 


JK. 


ft  J.T 


ni 


artnarius 


>ra  Sf  n  us 


P.L.S.N.S.W.  1905- 


CO  CXD 


o-o   00 


CJD 


OO  o 


o  (Z) 


J 


CUKU 


M  ALTO  SE 


G  L  V  C  e  R  I  M  . 


(        i         ) 
(    I  ) 

R  A  r  r  I M  o  s  E . 
\_  ACT  ose. 

GLYCER  I  N 


GLUCOSE -GE  LAT(M 


POTATO. 
B  O  u  I  L  i_  O  M 
LEVULOSE. 
MEAT-  AGAR, 


I 
f 


GALACTOSE. 

SACCHAROSE-  POTATO- AGAR 
DE  XTROSE. 


SACCHAROSE  -  ASPARAGIN 
FLUl O. 


I \ I I I I 1 

O  2.  4-  ^/^ 


c 


J  c 


3 


GPtiO    SMITH     DEC- 


SACCHAROSE -POTATO -AGAR 
DEXT  ROSE. 


PLEOMORPHIC    SLIME-BACTERIUM    (BacUlllS    ttlatUS,    N.  SP.) 


g              g             8              ?              3              8              1              ^              S              2 

1 

A                                          4 

--^          ^                            A 

S                                                                                     L                                       lJ 

S                                                     C              A                              -t-Jt 

^^                                                          A                    r                                       -J 

^                                                         ^                    t                                 ^^f 

S                                                ^              A                            ^3 

^                                              t"               e                           ^ 

s                           jl            \                 -Si 

"v                                              '           -\                         ^                                      lij    > 

5                             ^            r                  IJ 

^                      -^-^X            A                 2^- 

5                    ^  \            ^,-     --        ^tt  ~  ~ 

S                                                         "             Jl-                                                  V                                                         ^Vr 

S                            ^^               ^A                    121 

_;        s                   l\            s.^            _x^t 

^                   5i             :^\               ^U 

5                        g.                13                     R 

^       "           Sv             ^--t            ISlI" 

-^\.             ^A           _,\          ^i 

'  k  N           1           \                " ". ,               l!Jt    ^ 

^^    ^     cA         vi       ^i 

-S=\        1             vS                        \\\                ^^^ 

t^            n\                     \          >?^ 

'^^5«       5\                ^        Jdik 

^              ^x                                   ^,_       ^^^^ 

JI^S        ^i.\                      %          ^ 

_j  ';2^    •-            "  .      I  k 

'      ■S'^  ^v                t     tiF 

5^^             \    r  ^ 

-\           s  \       ^  Xl    ^''' 

'               5  ■                \i     H" 

^          ^x 

_j                      ^                 V         " 

V                AT 

J                                                 >5                    '"/-U           "" 

^                                                VS                   (-^r            - 

VS        /    A 

^  "^  /  x^ 

V    ST       \ 

T                          v/^      v-' 

Zj                                       ^"     S       T" 

-J                                   ^'  \      S    T 

■                              ^^         "-    ""^    J 

::--  — -  — ^^n:^r::.::^d— ^-^^  — -^-- "^^-^^ 

1              1              1              1              S              3         '     1               3            '§               R 

{ 


X 

k 


:FROOEEIDI2SrG-S 

OF    THE  "'-~ 

LINNEAN    SOCIETY 

OP 


SUPPLEMENT  TO  PROCEEDINGS,   1905. 


CENSUS  MUSCORUM  AUSTRALIENSIUM. 

A  CLASSIFIED  Catalogue  of  the  Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia 
AND  Tasmania,  collated  from  available  Publications  and 
Herbaria  Records,  by  the  Rev.  W.  Walter  \Yatts  and 
Thomas  Whitelegge,  F.R.M.S. 

Part  II. 

Introductory  Note. 

This  second  Part  of  the  Census  completes  the  Mosses  known 
as  Acroca-rps.  In  the  endeavour  to  make  it  as  accurate  as  pos- 
sible, we  have  had  valued  assistance  from  the  late  Mr.  Luehmann, 
who  generously  placed  all  the  records  in  the  Melbourne  Herba- 
rium at  our  disposal,  from  Mr,  F.  M.  Bailey,  and  from  Mr.  "\V. 
A.  Weymouth.  The  later  records  in  the  National  Herbarium, 
Sydney,  have  unfortunately  not  been  available. 

When  in  the  future,  as  we  hope,  the  genera  of  our  Australian 
Mosses  shall  be  carefully  studied  by  monographers,  the  number 
of  species  given  in  this  Census  will  doubtless  be  considerably 
reduced.     This  is  a  field  awaiting  workers. 

For  the  contractions  used,  see  Introduction  to  Part  I. 
7 


92  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,    II., 

Tribe  xii.    Orthotrichacese. 
A  M  P  H  1  D  I  u  M  (Nees,  1819)  Schimp.  emend.  '55. 

535.  A.  CYATHiCARPUM  (Mont.,  Ann.  Sc.  Kat.  '46,  Zygo- 
don)  Broth.  Bryales;  JRhabdotveisia,  Mitt.  Cat.;  Am- 
phoridium  Schimp.  '60;  Didymodon  Mitt.,  Journ.  L. 
Soc.  '59. 

Tas.,  Che.shunt:  Archer.  On  ground,  Dromedar}^  New  Norfolk: 
Oldlield.  Wet  rocks,  Mt.  Faulkner,  '92,  rocks,  Columba  Falls, 
'94:  Weymouth. — Vic,  Ovens  River:  Mrs.  McCann.  Loutit 
Bay,  Luehmann,  '91.— S. A.,  Clarendon:  Tepper.  Clarendon 
Biver,  on  stones  in  stagnant  waterhole,  Feb.  '82  :  herb.  Melb. — 
N.S.W.,  Mt.  Kosciusko:  herb.  Melb.  On  rocks,  by  bridge,  Tumut 
River,  7  m.  from  Tumut  :  Watts,  Feb.  1904. 

536.  A.  REMOTiDENS  (C.M.Symb.,  No.  216,  Zygodo7i) Broth. 
Bryales;  Amphoridium,  Par.  Index.  This  is  evidently 
A.  MacCannice  {Maclaunice  in  error)  of  Geheeb's  list 
in  Rev.  Bry.  '97. 

Yic,  Upper  Ovens  River  :  Mrs.  McCann,  hb.  Melb.  '83. 

Zygodox  Hook,  et  Tayl.,  '18;  Codonohlepharum,  Schwgr.  '23. 

537.  Z.  ANOMALUS  Doz.  et  M.;  Z.  Bemwardtii,  fid.  Mitt. 
Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59  and  Cat. 

Tas.,  on  decayed  wood,  gully,  near  the  Huon  River  :  Oldfield. 
On  trees,  Stackhouse's  Falls  :  Archer.  Mt.  Wellington:  Bastow. 
On  trees,  St.  Crispin's  Well  :  Weymouth. 

[The  above  localities  include  Z.  Reinwardtii  records.  In  Broth. 
Bryales,  Z.  anomalus  is  omitted,  and  Z.  Reiniuardtii  is  said  to 
occur  "from  Ce3don  and  Java  to  Tasm.  and  N.Z."  Jaeg.  Ad. 
gives  Z.  anomalus  for  Java  only.  Dr.  Brotherus,  in  a  private 
note,  says,  "  It  was  by  mistake  that  I  classed  Z.  anomalus  and 
Z.  Reimvardtii  together.  They  are  different  species."  Wey- 
mouth records  both  sp.  for  Tasm.] 

538.     Z.  BRACHYODUS  CM.  et  Hpe.,  Linn.  '56. 
Yic,    Sealer's   Cove:    F.v.M.   '54.      Australian    Alps:    Stirling 
(ascends  to  6000')— Tas.,  Wellington  Falls  :  Bastow,  'm. 


BY  REV.   W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.  93 

Z  Y  G  o  D  0  N  (continued).  [Of'thotrichacece. 

539.  Z.  Brownii  Schwgr.  Suppl.  iv. 

Tas.,  common  on  ])ark  of  trees  and  on  rocks  throughout  the 
island  (Fl.  Tas.) :  R.  Brown,  Archer,  Bastow  et  al.  Mt.  Welling- 
ton, Macquarie  Harbour,  etc.  :  Weymouth. — Vic,  frequent, 
Tarwin,  '54,  Bunyip  Creek,  etc.:  F.v.M.  E.  Gippsland  :  C. 
Walter,  '69,  C.  French,  '82.  Between  Capes  Otway  and  Patter- 
son: C.  Walter, '74.  Mt.  William:  Sullivan, '83.  Upper  Ovens 
River:  Mrs.  McCann.  Bonang,  3500':  Biiuerlen,  '89.  Loutit 
Bay:  Luehmann,  '91.  Alps:  Stirling. — N.S.W.,  Blue  Mtns., 
teste  herb.  Melb. 

540.  Z.  CONFERTUS  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  218. 

Vic,  Kiewa  :  Miss  Flora  Campbell  (Mrs.  Martin),  '89. 

Z.  Drummondii  Tayl.     See  Nos.  541  and  544. 

541.  Z.  HooKERi  Hpe.,  Linn.  '60. 

Vic,  on  trees,  Grampians,  F.v.M.  '54  {Z.  intermedins  H.f.W.; 
Z.  Drummondii  var.  major  in  herb.  Melb.). 

542.  Z.  HYMEXODONTOIDES  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  220. 
Vic,  Gippsland,  Moe  River  :  Luehmann,  herb.  Melb. 

543.  Z.  iNTERMEDius  Br.  Eur.  iv. 

Tas.,  Cheshunt:  Archer.  Mt.  Wellington':  Mossman,  Lawrence, 
Spence,  Neil,  Weymouth  (Cascades  Rivulet,  '88). — N.S.W., 
Tingiringi  Mtn.  :  Bauerlen,  '88. 

544.  Z.   Menziesii  (Schwgr.)    W.  Arn.;    Z.  Drummondii 
Tayl.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '46. 

W.A.,  Swan  River  :  Drummond. — Vic,  stems  of  tree  ferns,  Port 
Albert  and  Tarwin:  F.v.M.  '54.  Grampians:  Sullivan,  '87. — 
SA.,  Kiwimanila  River,  Port  Adelaide:  Behr. — Tas.:  Gunn, 
Archer  (Cheshunt),  Oldfield  (on  trees  and  ground  in  open  forests), 
McLeod  (Strathmore,  '86),  Taylor  (Mt.  Wellington  and  Cataract 
Gorge,  '86),  Bastow  (Mt.  Wellington),  Weymouth  (on  willow, 
Johnny's  Creek,  Derwent  Valley).  First  found  by  Menzies  in 
N.Z. 


94  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

Z  Y  G  0  D  0  N  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

545.  Z.  MiNUTUS  CM.  et  Hpe.,  Linn.  '56;    Z.  mucronatus 
Broth. 

Vic,  Sealer's  Cove  :  F.v.M.  Australian  Alps,  6000'  :  Stirling. 
— Tas.,  on  trees  :  Gunn. 

546.  Z.  OBTUSiFOLius  Hook.,  M.  Exot.  t.l59. 

Tas.,  Sophia  Point,  Macquarie  Harbour:  T.  B.  Moore  in  herb. 
Weymouth  (determ.  Broth.).  Broth.  Bryales  gives  Xepal  and 
Sikkim  only. 

Z.  Preissia.nus  Hpe.      See  TriquetreUa. 

547.  Z.  Keinwardtii  (Hsch.)  Al.  Br. 
Tas.     For  localities  and  note  see  No.  537. 

Z.  scaber  CM.     See  TriquetreUa. 

Yic,  Pyrenees  :  Sullivan,  '83. 

Z.  Sch.caegrichenii  CM.,  Linn.  Vol.  18;  Syrrhopodon 
duhius  Schw.;  Codonohlepharum  Jaeg.  Ad.;  Broth. 
Bryales  says  this  sp.  belongs  to  Didymcchn  {Ery- 
throphyllura). 

N.S.W.  :  Sieber,  ?loc. 

Z.  stellatum.     In  herb.  Melb.  \yithout  author's  name^ 
sub  Codonohlepharo,  coll.   by  Eaves  in  S.    Queens- 
land, '73. 
[Note. — A  Z.  Martinice  Broth,  is  in  Q.  herb.,  leg.  Mrs.  Martin 
in  Tic,  apparently  a  Triquelrella..~\ 

Orthotrichum  Hedw.  1789. 

548.  O.  acroblephare  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  223. 
Yic,  Upper  Ovens  Pviver  :  Mrs.  McCann,  '82. 

0.  cah-um  H.f.AV.     See  note  after  No.  556. 
0.  Campbellice.     See  No.  549. 

549.  O.  excalyptaceum  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  225. 

Vic,  Mt.  Ararat,  on  Hymenanthera  Banksii :  Sullivan,  Sept.  '83. 
— N.S.W.,  summit  of  Mt.  Kosciusko  ("  f.  robustior  surculo  Icn- 
giore  ")  :  Sullivan,  '84,  herb.  Melb. 


BY  REV.   W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.  95 

Oethotrichum  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

(a)  var.  tenuiseta  CM.  ibid.;  0.  Camphellice  CM.  in 

herb. 
Yic,  Miss  Campbell  in  herb.  Broth.  "89  (Mt.  Macedon,  '83,  herb. 
Reader).     CM.  in  Symb.  gives  "  S.A."  in  error. 

550.  O.  lateciliatum  Yent.  in  Broth.  A.M.  '93,  No.  37; 
Weymouth,  M.  Tas.  p.  3. 

Tas.,  on  trees,  iSTewtown  Rivulet,  St.  Crispin's,  Mt.  Wellington, 
Tasman's  Peninsula,  etc.  :  Weymouth. 

(a)  var.  apiculatum  Yent.  in  Weym.  M.  Tas.,  p.  21. 
Tas.,  on  rock,  Hobart  Rivulet  :   Weymouth,  '92. 

551.  0.  laterale  Hpe.  in  Linn.  '76;   Ulota  Jaeg.  Ad. 
Yic,  Ovens  River,  '53  (^);  also  Goulburn  River  and  in  ferntree 
gullies  and  banks  of  Hume  River  :  F.v.M.     Australian  Alps  : 
Stirling. — N.S.W.,  teste  Melb.  Census,  possibly  referring  to  the 
Hume  River  record. — Tas.,  on  wood,  Mt.  Wellington:  Weymouth. 

552.  0.  Lawrexcei  Mitt,  in  F\.  Tas. 
Tas.,  ?  loc.  :  Lawrence,  herb.  Melb.  and  Hobart. 

553.  0.    rupestre  Schleich.       (Type    sp.    in    Europe,    the 
Himalayas  and  N.Z.) 

(a)  var.  1  f.  praeperistomata  Yent.  in  Rev.  Bry.  '96. 
Tas.,  on  rocks. 

(b)  var.  1  f.  rupestriformis  Yent.  loc.  cit. 
Tas.,  on  rocks. 

551.     0.  SuLLiVANi  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  224a. 
Yic,  Grampians,  Mt.  Ararat,  '83:  Sullivan.     Omeo,  3-4000',  '84: 
Stirling.— N.S.W.,  Mt.  Kosciusko  :  Sullivan,  '84. 

555.  0.  TASMANicuM  H.f.W.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '48. 
Tas.,  frequent.  First  found  in  '41  by  R.  Gunn  on  branches  of 
Hymenanthera  angustifolia  at  N.  Esk.  Falls  River :  Archer. 
New  Norfolk,  etc.  :  Oldfield.  Distillery  Creek,  Launceston,  and 
Silver  Falls  :  Bastow,  '87.  Mt.  Wellington,  '88,  Lauriston  Gully, 
Johnny's  Creek,   etc.  :    Weymouth. — Yic,    Avon    Ranges,    '55, 


96  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    ALSTRALIEXSIUM,   II., 

0  R  T  H  0  T  R  I  c  11  u  M  (continued).  [Orthotrichacea  . 

Hume  and   Ovens  Rivers:  F.v.M.     Upi^er  Ovens  River:    Mrs. 
McCann.     On  bark  of  trees  nr.  Doncaster  :  Reader,  '84.     Buffalo 
Range  :  F.v.M.     Also  coll.  by  Lucas,  loc.  ? 
0.  Waltlieri.     See  note  after  556. 

556.  O.  Whiteleggei  CM.,  Symb.  No.  224. 
N.S.W.,  Moss  Vale:  Whitelegge,  '84,  c.fr. 

[Note. — 0.  calvum  H.f.W.  (syn.  0.  Waltheri)\^  given  in  Herlj. 
Melb.  for  Vic,  Mt.  Elliott,  det.  Hpe.     Broth,  and  Jaeg.  limit  to 
N.Z.] 
Ulota  Mohr;  Brid.  1819.      Weissia  (Ehrh.)  Lindb. 

557.  U.  ANCEPS  Vent,  in  Broth.  A.M.  '93,  No.  35.  U. 
ajypressa  Mitt.,  fid.  Vent. 

Tas.,  on  trees,  Mt.  Wellington  :  Weymouth,  '91. 

U.  appressa  Mitt.  See  No.  557.  Broth,  in  litt.  says 
U.  appressa  is  a  good  species,  but  doubts  if  it  has 
been  described. 

558.  U.  cochleata  Vent,  in  Broth.  A.M.  '93,  No.  34. 
Tas.,   on   trees,   Mt.    W^ellington  :  Weymouth,    '91    and   '97;  L. 
Rodway,  '93. 

559.  U.  crispa  (Hedw.  Sp.M.,  Orthotrichum)  Brid.,  Bry. 
Un.;  Broth.  Bryales  gives  precedence  to  the  name  U. 
ulophylla  (Ehrh.  Weissia).  An  European  and  N. 
Amer.  sp. 

Tas.,  trunks  of  trees,  St.  Patrick's  River  :  Gunn.     Mt.  Welling- 
ton :   Hooker,  Tajdor,  Bastow  (St.  Crispin's),  Weymouth  (Springs 
Track,  '91,  McRobie's  Gully,  '97). 
TJ,  crocea.     See  No.  561. 

560.  U.  FULVA  Brid.,  Bry.  Univ.;  CM.  Syn. 

Tas.,  Plains  Creek,  Mt.  AVellington  :  A.  J.  Taylor,  Jan.  '86  (herb. 
Weym.).      On  wood,  Comet-Dundas  Road,  West   Coast  :    Wey- 
mouth,   Oct.    '93.       (Specimens    determ.    by   Venturi.       1  roth. 
Brj'ales  gives  the  East  African  Isls.  only). 
U,  glaiccescens.     See  No.  561. 


BY   REV.   W.   AVALTEH  AVATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.  97 

U  L  0  T  A  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

561.  U.  LUTEA  (Mitt.,  Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59,  Orthotrichnm);  0. 
crispu7n  var.  H.f.W.;  0.  croceum  Hpe.  in  Frag.  I'hyt. 
Austr.  xi.  Suppl. 

Tas.,  on  trees,  rivulet  behind  Cumming's  Head,  Western  Mtns.  : 
Archer.  Mt.  Wellington :  Mossman,  Gunn,  Hooker,  Bastow 
('86),  Weymouth  (McRobie's  Gully,  '85),  et  al.— Vic,  Mt. 
Macedon  :  teste  Melb.  Census  (BeaconsfieLl  :  Mrs.  Martin,  teste 
F.  M.  Bailey) -'?N.S.W.,  Illawarra :  S.  Johnson  in  herb.  Melb. 

(a)  var.  glaucescens  Vent. 
Tas.,  on  wood,   McRobie's  Gully,  Mt.  Wellington  :  Weymouth, 
Oct.  '92. 

U.  stellulata  Hook,  et  Grev.  A  sp.  so  named  is  in 
Melb.  herb.,  leg.  C.  Walter  at  Mt.  Ellery,  Gipps- 
land.  Broth,  in  litt.  says  "  unknown  to  me,  but 
most  certainly  not  identical  with  Macronntrium 
stellu/ahim  H.  et  G." 
U.  iihphylla.     See  No.  659. 

562.  U.  viridis  Vent,  in  Broth.  A.M.  '93,  No.  36. 
Tas.,  on  trees,  Mt.  Wellington  :   Weymouth,  Oct.  '90. 

U.   Waltheri.     See  note  after  556. 

563.  U.  Weymouthii  C.M.,  Vent,  in  Weymouth  M.Tas.  '93, 
"bona  sp.  ex  Venturi,"  teste  Broth. 

Tas.,  on  wood,  Falls  track,  Mt.  Wellington  :  Weymouth. 

M  A  c  R  o  M  I  T  R  I  u  M   Brid.,  1819. 

M.  adstrictum  {M.  Owahiense  C.  M.)  is  wrongly  attri- 
buted to  N.S.W.  (Wollongong)  in  Jaeg.  Ad.  Suppl. 
and  Mitt.  Cat.  It  belongs  to  the  Sandwich  Islands 
and  Tahiti. 

M.  amoenum  Hsch.     See  No.  582. 

564.  M.  Archeri  Mitt.,  Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59  and  Fl.  Tas.;  M. 
linearifoliumj  fid.  Mitt.  Cat. 

Tas.,  on  trees,  Cheshunt  :  Archer.  On  dead  branches  of  trees, 
Kermandie  Kivulet  :  Oldfield.     On  rocks,  Mt.   Nelson:  Taylor 


98  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

]\I  A  c  R  0  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  ( coutinupd).  [OrthotHchacece. 

and  Weymouth.  Porteus  Gully,  W.  Coast,  '91,  Millhouse's 
Falls,  Mt.  Wellington,  '93  :  Weymouth.— Q.,  Brisbane  River  : 
Dietrich,  '64.— Vic,  Apollo  Bay  :  F.v.M.,  herb.  Melb.— KS.W., 
on  trees,  Lawson  :  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '85  (c.fr.).  Broth.  Bryales 
gives  Tas.  only. 

565.  M.    ASPERULUM    Mitt,    in    Fl.    Tas.;    M.  fimhriatum 
H.f.W. 

Tab.,  Mt.  Wellington  :  Lawrence,  Taylor,  Bastow,  Weymouth 
(St.  Crispin's).  West  Coast :  T.  B.  Moore,  Weymouth.  Tas- 
pian's  Peninsula:  Weym.  In  herb.  Tech.  Mus.  Sydney  is  a 
specimen  so  named  coll.  on  the  Brunswick  River,  N.S.W.,  by 
Bauerlen,  Sept.  '95;  and  Melb.  Census  records  for  Q.  But  these 
are  doubtful  records.     Broth.  Brj^ales  gives  Tas.  only. 

566.  M.  AURESCRXS  Hpe.  in  Linn.  '60. 

Q.,  growing  on  Delabechia,  Mt.  Archer,  nr.  Keppel  Bay  :  F.v.M- 
— N.S.W.,  George's  River,  in  a  gully  nr.  Railway  Bridge  :  White- 
legge, Aug.  '84  (c.fr.\  On  rocks.  Manly,  Jan.  '96,  and  on  trees, 
off  Alstonville  Rd.,  7  m.  from  Ballina,  Richmond  River,  May '96 
(c.fr.):  Watts. 

J/,  aureum  Hpe.  In  Melb.  Census  for  J/,  aurescens 
("Q.  Herb.  Bailey").  M.  aureum  CM.  is  a  New 
Granada  sp. 

567.  M.  Baileyi  Mitt.  Cat. 
Q  ,  Brisbane  River  :  Bailey. 

568.  M.  BRACHYPODiuM  CM.,  Bot.  Zeit.  '59. 

Q.  or  Vic,  Mt.  Elliott  l  Melb.  Census  gives  Vic  Jaeg.  Ad. 
Suppl.  refers  to  a  mem.  of  Hampe's  in  Linn.  '74,  p. 633  (to  which 
we  have  not  access)  and  says  "  Patria  ?  "  Broth.  Bryales  gives 
Isle  of  Pines,  nr.  New  Caledonia;  and  in  a  letter  to  us  says  he  has 
not  seen  this  sp.  from  Australia.  We  record  it,  therefore,  with 
doubt. 

569.  M.  BREViSETACEUM  Hpe.  in  Linn.  '74. 

N.S.W.,  leg.  Leichhardt :  teste  Melb.  herb.  Mt.  Dromedary: 
Reader,  '80.  Manning  River  :  Cross,  '82.  Broth.  Bryales  gives 
Lord  Howe  Isl.  only. 


BY  REV.   W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.  99 

Macro  MiTRiUM  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

570.  M.  CALOBLASTOiDES  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  255. 

Q., Brisbane:  Bailey,  inhb.Broth.  '88. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  River 
and  Brunswick  River  :  Watts,  '96  if.  (c.fr.).  Dorrigo,  Bellinger 
River:  Mrs.  W.  Johnson,  1900. 

571.  M.  CALOBLASTUM  CM.  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  Cambewarra:  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '85  (c.fr.).— Q.,  Ithaca 
Creek  :  Bailey.  Burpengary :  Wild.  [Some  doubt  attaches  to 
this  sp.] 

572.  M.  CARINATUM  Mitt.,  Cat. 

N.S.W.  and  Q.  :  teste  Melb.  Census.  Loc.  not  given  in  Mitt- 
Cat.      Broth,  gives  E.  Australia. 

573.  M.  ciRCiNiCLADUM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  241. 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  River  :  Miss  Hodgkinson,  '80  (c.fr.),  herb. 
Melb. 

574.  M.  CYLiNDROMiTRiuM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  243. 

Q.,  Wide  Bay,  nr.  Gayndah  :  Daemel,  '74.  Enoggera  :  Bailey, 
herb.  Broth.  '90. 

575.  M.  Daemelii  CM.,  Rev.  Bry.  '77  (name),  Symb.,  No. 
259. 

Q.,  Wide  Bay,  Gayndah  :  Daemel,  '74.  Brisbane  :  Bailey,  '88. 
Toowoomba  :  Hartmann.  N.  Pine  River  :  Musson.  Mt.  Perry  : 
Keys. — N.S.W.,  Patterson  River:  J.  Lamont,  '88.  Richmond, 
Clarence,  and  Brunswick  Rivers  ('96  if.),  nr.  Sydney,  on  Cambe- 
warra Mtn.,  etc.,  very  plentiful :  Watts.  Nepean  River  :  A. 
Sharpe,  '99.     Tentertield  :  Bauerlen.     Also  found  in  Samoa. 

f.  cal.  parce  hirtula  Broth,  in  sched. 
N.S.W.,  Alstonville,  Richmond  River  :  Watts,  Jan.  '99  (c.fr.). 

576.  M.  DiAPHANUM  CM.  in  Linn.  '71-3. 

Q,,  Brisbane  River :  A.  Dietrich  ('64),  Bailey,  J.  H.  Simmonds. 
Pimpama  :  Wild. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers: 
Watts,  '96  if.,  generally  on  sheoaks  or  logs  on  flat  country,  but 
occasionally  on  trees  in  scrub.     Manning  River:  Turner,  Nov.  '99. 


lOU  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    A  USTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

M  A  c  R  0  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  (coutlmLed).  [Orthotrichacece. 

577.  M.  DiMORPHUM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  256. 

Q.,  Taylor's  Eange,  nr.  Brisbane  :  Bailey,  herb.  Broth.  '88.— 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  liiver,  on  pine  trees,  Wardell,  Feb.  '98  (c.fr.), 
and  on  stone,  Newrybar,  May,  '99  :  Watts. 

578.  M.  EUCALYPTORUM  Hp.  et  CM.  in  Linn.  '53;  M.  vncrc 
phyllnin,  fid.  Mitt   Cat. 

Vic,  on  decaying  trunks  of  Eucalyptus,  Bunyip  Creek  and 
Sealer's  Cove  :  F.v.M.  Also  at  many  places  by  F.v.M.,  Lucas, 
Luehmann  (Mt.  Juliette,  '75),  Schauinsland  (Blacks' Spur,  '96-7), 
and  others.— N.S.W.,  Parramatta:  F.v.M.  Clyde  River  :  Bau- 
erlen.  Moss  Vale,  on  willow  tree,  near  Fitzroy  Falls  :  White- 
legge,  '84.— Tas.,  Archer,  Weymouth  (West  Coast,  '91),  et  al— 
Q  ,  on  Sir  Thomas  Mitchell's  Delabecliia,  Dawson  River:  F.v.M. 
Toowoomba  :    FLartmann. 

(a)  var.  brevipedicillatum  CM. 

N.S.W.,  on  sheoak,  Cook's  River  :   Whitelegge,  Nov.  '84  (c.fr.). 

(b)  var.  gracile  (herb.  Melb.). 
Vic,  Tarwin  River:  F.v.M.  '54. 

579.  M.  EXSERTUM  Broth.  Geh.  in  Broth.  A.M.  '93,  No.  39. 
N.S.W.,  Clyde  Mtns.,  3000',  and  Sugarloaf  Mtns.:  Bauerlen,  '88. 

M.  fimhriatum  H.f. W.     See  No.  565. 

580.  M.  Geheebii  CM,    Linn.   '76,  and   Symb.,  No.  238; 
J/.  Johnsoni  Hpe.  sched. 

N.S.W.,  nr.  Sydney  :  Mrs.  Kayser,  '72.  Illawarra :  S.  Johnson, 
75.  Mt.  Tomah  and  Mt.  King  George  :  C  T.  Musson,  '94. 
Stewart's  Brook  :  Maiden,  Aug.  '99.  Mosman's  Bay  (Oct.  '99), 
Blue  Mtns.  (Katoomba  and  Blackhealh),  '02  ff..  Cambewarra,  '03: 
Watts.  —  Vic,  Dandenong  Ranges  :  C  French. 

581.  M.  Hartmanni  CM,  in  sched. 

Q.,  ^nr.  Toowoomba  :  Hartmann.  Gympie  :  Musson.  Nr.  Bris- 
bane :  J.  H.  Simmonds,  Aug.  ,'87. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  River 
(Alstonville  and  Wardell)  and  Brunswick  River  :  Watts,  '96  ff. 
(c.fr.),  det.  Broth. 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WIIITELEGGE.        10 1 

M  A  C  R  0  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

582.  M.  HEMiTRiCHODES  Schwgr.,  Suppl.  ii,  t.  172.;  M. 
amoenum  Hsch.  in  Sielx  M.  Nov.  HolL;  M.  Sieheri 
Hsch. 

N.S.W.  Sieber  first  found  on  Eucalyptus,  nr.  Dapto  {M.  mnoe- 
num).  Common  about  Sydney  and  apparently  throughout  the 
State.  Recorded  from  Kurrajong  (Musson),  Fitzroy  Falls 
(Whitelegge),  Mt.  Dromedary  (Reader),  Richmond  and  Bruns- 
wick Rivers,  Cambewarra,  Nowra  Falls,  etc.  (Watts),  Hunter 
River  (Mrs.  Forde),  Mt.  Seaview,  Wyong,  etc.  (herb.  Sydney). — 
Q.,  Burnett  Ranges  :  F.v.M.     Daintree  R,iver  :  Pentzche. 

583.  M.  INCURVULUM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  264. 
Q,,  Logan  River  :  Scortechini,  herb.  Levier,  '93. 

584.  M.  iNDiSTiNCTUM  CM.  in  sched.  (herb.  Melb.). 
Q.,  Cunningham's  Gap  :  Hartmann. 

585.  M.  INTERMEDIUM  Mitt.  Catt. 

Q.,  Brisbane  River  :  Bailey.  Port  Curtis  :  Musson.  Nei  ang  -. 
H.  Schneider. 

586.  M.  INVOLUTIFOLIUM  (Hook.  et  Grev.,  Brewst.  Edin. 
Jour.,  Orthotrichu'in)  Schwgr. 

Q.,  Burnett  Ranges  :  F.v.M.  Toowoomba  :  Hartmann.  Bris- 
bane :  Slater. — N.S.W. ,  Parramatta  :  Hobson,  F.v.M.  et  al. 
Hurstville  :  Whitelegge,  '85.  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers, 
frequently:  Watts,  '96  ff. — W.  A.,  King  George's  Sound  :  Dickson. 
[This  locality,  given  in  Jaeg.  Ad.,  is  open  to  doubt.] 
M.  Joh7isoni  Hpe.     See  No.  580. 

587.  M.  LiGULAEFOLiUM  Broth.,  A.M.  '98,  No.  107. 
N.S.W.,  on   rocks,   Roseville,   nr.  Sydney,  Mch.  '96  (type)  and, 
later,  on  the  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers,  mostly  on  trees 
in  scrubs,  but  also  on  rocks  at  Lennox  Head  :  Watts  (c.fr.). 

588.  M.  LiGULARE  Mitt.,  Jour.  L.  Soc.  '59;  M.  weisioides, 
fid.  Mitt.,  but  not  Broth. 

Q.,  Burnett  Ranges  :  F.v.M.  Brisbane:  Bailey.— N.S.W.,  Par- 
ramatta :  F.v.M.  Broth.  Bryales  gives  for  N.Z.  only.  Cf.  M 
iveisioides. 


102  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

M  A  c  R  0  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  (continued).  [^Orthotrichacece. 

589.  M.  LiGULATUM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  254. 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  River:  Miss  Hodgkinson,  '81. 

590.  M.  LiNEARiFOLiuM   CM.,   Liiin.   '72;  M.  Archeri,  fid. 
Mitt. 

N.S.W.,  Maitland  :  Vickary.     (Sent  to  Hpe.  in  1869). 

591.  M.  LONGIPES  (Hook.  M.  Exot.,  Orthotrichum)  Schwgr. 
Tas.,  Hoc.     Also  in  N.Z.,  where  Menzies  first  found  it. 

592.  M.    LONGIROSTRE    (Hook.    M.    Exot.,     Orthotrichum) 
Schwgr. 

Tas.,  Spence  and  Neil,  ?loc.  Lake  Bellinger  Track,  and  Henty 
River,  W.  Coast :  W.  "Weymouth.     Also  in  Chili  and  N.Z. 

(a)  var.  acutifolium. 
Tas.,  loc.  1 

593.  M.  Luehmannianum  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  257. 
Vic,  Gippsland,  Moe  River:   Luehmann,  '81. 

594.  M.  MALACOBLASTUM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  253. 
N.S.W.,  nr.  Tilba  :  F.  M.  Reader,  '80.     Walcha :   Crawford,  '84. 
Cambewarra  :  Thorpe. 

595.  M.  MACROPHYLLUM   Mitt. 

Vic,  leg.  Lucas,  loc. "?  (herb.  Melb.). 

M.  microhlastum,  Broth,  in  sched.     See  No.  613. 

596.  M.   MiCROPHYLLUM   (Hook.   et   Grev.,    Orthotrichum), 
Brid. 

Tas  ,  on  trees  in  creeks  and  damp  woods  :  Archer.  Mitt.  Cat. 
thinks  M.  eucalyjjtorum,  which  he  records  for  Vic,  Q.,  and  Tas. 

597.  M.    MICROSTOMUM    (Hook,     et    Grev.,     Orthotrichum) 
Schwgr. 

Q.,  Rockingham's  Bay,  Mt.  Scott,  on  rocks  :  Dallachy,  '68.  Bur- 
pengary:  Wild, '87.  Brisbane:  Bailey.  Toowoomba:  Hartmann. 
— Vic,  Sealer's  Cove:  F.v.M.— Tas.,  Hoc.  :  Dr.  Spence.  Near 
Hobart,  alt.  1400':  Hooker,  Gunn.  Tasman's  Peninsula  :  Wey- 
mouth.    Macquarie  Harbour :  T.  B.  Moore. 

M.  mucrouulatum  CM.     See  No.  620. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        105 

Macromitrium  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

598.  M.  MuELLERi  Hpe.  in  Linn.  '60. 

Yic,  Sealer's  Cove  or  Tar  win  River  :  F.v.M.  Paris,  Index,  says^ 
*'  M.  pusillum  Mitt.?"     Hpe.  expresses  the  same  doubt. 

599.  M.  Nov.E  Yalesi^  CM.,  Rev.  Bry.  '76  (name);  Symb., 
No.  237. 

N.S.W.,  "  near  Sydney  "  :  Kayser,  herb.  Geheeb,  '72. 

600.  M.  PALLiDO-viRENS  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  239. 
Q.,  Nerang  :  H.  Schneider,  herb.  Kioer,  '85. 

601.  M.  PERTORQUESCENS  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  247. 

var.  TORQUATULUM  CM.,  ibid.;   M.  torquatulum  CM. 
in  herb.  Burchard,  '91,     {M.  longirostre  Sch.,  fid. 
Broth.,  teste  Weymouth). 
Tas.,  Henty  River,  W.  "Coast,   Feb.    '91,  and   Wood  Lake,  W. 
Coast,  Apl.  '91  :  Weym. 

[The  typ.  species  belongs  to  N.Z.] 

602.  M.  platyphyllaceum  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  262. 

Q.,  Bunya  Mtns.  '85,  nr.  Brisbane  :  Bailey,  hb.  Broth.  '88. — 
N.S.  W.,  at  several  places  on  the  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers, 
on  trees,  logs,  and  rocks  :  Watts,  '97  if.  (c.fr.).  Cambew^arra 
Mtn.  and  Nowra  :  idem,  '03. 

603.  M.  PROLixuM  Bosw.,  Journ.  Bot.  '92. 
N.S.W.,  Woode  Glen,  Blue  Mtns.  :  Roper. 

604.  M.    prorepens    (Hook.     M.     Exot.,     Orthotrichum), 
Schwgr. 

N.S.W.,  loc.  not  specified  :  Daemel,  herb.  Melb. — Vic,  "  Aus- 
tralia Felix  "  :  F.V.M.,  herb.  Melb.  Mitt.  Cat.  gives  Norfolk 
IsL  (Bauer);  and  Broth.  Bryales  limits  to  Norfolk  Isl.  and  N.Z. 

605.  M.  puGiONiFOLiuM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  242. 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  Pviver,  on  trees  :  Miss  Hodgkinson,  '80,  herb, 
Melb.  Gosford  :  Whitelegge,  hb.  Broth.  '92.  Richmond  River^ 
tree.  Heath,  E.  Ballina  :   Watts,  '96  ff.  (c.fr.). 


104  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

]M  A  c  R  0  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

GOG.  M.  PUSILLUM  Mitt.,  Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59,  and  Fl.  Tas. 
Vic,  Dandenong  Range  :  C.  French. — Tas.,  on  stones, 
Cataract  Hill  :  Archer.  Circular  Head  and  Mt.  Nelson : 
Weymouth.— N.S.W.,  "  nr.  Sydney":  Mrs.  Kayser.  On 
trees,  N.  Shore,  Syd.,  and  Lawson,  Blue  Mtns.  :  VVhitelegge. 
Richmond  River,  frequently  on  trees,  also  on  rocks  at  Roseville, 
Syd.,  and  at  Emu,  foot  of  Blue  Mtns  :  Watts,  '96  ff.  Barber's 
Creek  and  Valley  of  Waters :  Forsyth,  '99  (herb.  Syd.).— Q., 
Tringilburra  Creek,  aST.Q.  :  Bailey.  On  trees,  Burpengary,  Pim- 
pama  :  Wild. 

607.  M.  Reinwardtii  Schwgr.  t.  173;  Fl.  Tas. 

Tas.,  leg.  Grunn,  loc.  1  "  Specimens  very  scanty  and  imperfect "  : 
Fl.  Tas.     Also  in  Sunda  Isl.  and  Tahiti. 

608.  M.  REPANDUM  CM.  in  Engler's  Bot.  Jahrb.  '83. 
Q.,  ''  East  Australia,"  teste  Broth.  Bryales. 

609.  M.  Richmond!^  Broth,   in   sched.,   herb.   Watts;  M. 
suhhemitr idiocies  Broth,  olim. 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  on  decaying  tree,  Park  Gray's  Isl., 
also  Friday  Hut  Road,  nr.  Ballina,  etc.  :  Watts. 

610.  M.  RUPicoLUM  CM.  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  on  rocks,  Mosman's  Bay,  Manly,  Greenwich,  N.  Shore, 
and  Hurstville  :  Whitelegge,  Aug.  '84  (c.fr.).  Richmond  River, 
Alstonville  :  S.  Gibson,  Apl.  '96,  herb.  Watts. 

611.  M.  Sayeri  Mitt.  MS. 

Q.,  Russell  River :  W.  A.  Sayer,  'U,  herb.  Melb. 

612.  M.  ScoTTLE  CM.  in  Linn.  '67-8. 

N.S.W.,  Ash  Island,  Hunter  River:  Miss  Scott  (Mrs.  Forde). 
Fitzroy  Falls,  on  trees  :  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '84.  Richmond  River 
and  Brunswick  River,  frequently  :  Watts,  '96  ff.  Monga,  on 
rocks:  Biiuerlen,  '98.  Near  Nowra  :  Watts,  '05.  —  Tas.,  Gunn, 
loc? 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         105 

M  A  c  R  O  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  (continued).  [Orthotrichacece. 

613.  i\r.  Sheareri  Broth,  in  sched.,  herb.  Watts;  M.  micro- 
hlastuyn  Broth,  olim. 

N.S.W.,  on  decaying  pine  trees,  Wilson's  Creek,  near  Federal, 
Richmond  River  :   Watts  and  Shearer,  Sept.  '97  (c.fr.),  sp.nov. 

614.  M.  SPIRALS  Hpe.,  MS.;  Mitt.  Cat. 
■"  Locality  unrecorded,"  teste  Mitt.  Cat. 

615.  M.  soRDiDE-viRENS  CM.  in  Linn.  '71-3. 
Q.,  Brisbane  River  :  A.  Dietrich,  '64. 

616.  M.  suBHEMiTRicnoDES  CM.  in  Symb.,  No.  240. 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  River:  Miss  Hodgkinson,  '80  (herb.  Melb  ). 

(a)  var.  Hodgkinsoni^  CM.,  ibid. 
N.S  W.,  Richmond  River  :  Miss  Hodgkinson,  '80. 

M.  suhheniitri'chodes  Broth.     See  No.  609. 

617.  M.  subulatum  Mitt.  Cat. 

Vic,  Bass's  Straits  :  Milne. — Tas.,  teste  Melb.  Census. 

618.  M.  tasmanicum  Broth.,  A.M.  '95,  No.  74. 

Tas.,  Circular  Head,  S.  Road  Forest:  Weymouth,  '92.— N.S.W., 
summit  of  Mt.  Warning :  D.  Goldsmid,  Sept.  '99,  herb.  Syd. 

(a)  f.  lutescens  Broth.,  ibid. 
Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  Fork  Creek  :   Weymouth,  '88. 

M.  torquatidum  CM.     See  No.  601. 

619.  M.  viRiDissiMUM  Mitt.  Cat. 

Q.,  Burnett  Ranges:  F.v.M.  Toowoomba:  Hartmann. — N.S.W., 
Parramatta:  F.v.M.,  herb.  Melb. 

620.  M.  Wattsii  Broth.,  A.M.  '98,  No.  106;  M.  mucronu- 
latum  CM.,  Symb.  204. 

Q.,  Burpengary  :  Wild,  '88  (J/,  mucromdatuni  CM.). — N.S.W., 
Wollongong,  on  rocks,  '95;  Richmond  River,  common  on  cliffs 
and  on  trees  near  the  coast;  near  Sydney,  plentiful;  Errowal 
and  Mayiield,  near  Nowra,  on  trees  :  Watts,  '96  ff.  S.  Head 
Rd  ,  nr.  Sydney  :  J.  B.  Ward,  '99. 


106  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

M  A  c  R  0  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  (continued).  [Orthoti'ichaceoi. 

The  name  31.  Wattsii  was  published  b}'-  Brotherus  the  same 
year  as  C.M.'s  M.  mucronulatum.  Broth.,  in  Bryales,  retains  his 
name  to  avoid  confusion  between  such  similar  names  as  M. 
mucronulatum  and  M.  mucronatulum,  a  New  Cal.  sp.  with 
which  the  former  was  compared. 

621.  M.  WEisioiDES  CM.  in  Linn.  '71-3. 

Q.,  Brisbane  River  :  A.  Dietrich,  '64. — N.S.  \V.,  on  sapling,  E. 
Ballina,  Ju.  '97  (c  fr.)  and  on  tree,  Uralba,  Ju.  '99,  Richmond 
River  :  Watts. 

622.  M.  Weymouthii  Broth.,  A.M.  '95,  Xo.  73. 

Tas.,  Mt.  \Yellington,  '^^•,  W.  Coast,  Macquarie  Harbour,  Queen 
River  Rd.,  Porteus  Grully,  also  Henty  River;  '91  :  Weymouth. 

623.  M.  Whiteleggei  Broth,  et  Geh.  in  Broth.  A.M.  '95, 
No.  72. 

N.S.W.,  Hurstville,  nr.  Sydney,  and  Port  Hacking  :  Whitelegge, 
'84.  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers,  on  trees,  very  frequently: 
Watts,  '96  ff.  Drake  :  D.  A.  Porter,  '98.  Watson's  Bay  : 
Watts,  '99.— Q.,  Bellenden  Ker  and  Mt.  Bartle  Frere :  S.  John- 
son, '91. 

624.  M.  WooLLsiANUM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  265. 
N.S.W.,  loc.  not  specified  :  Harriott  &  Woolls,  herb.  Melb.  '81. 

(a)  var.  chlorophyllosa  CM.,  ibid. 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  River  :  Miss  Hodgkinson,  herb.  Melb.  '81. 

[Note. — M.  tongense  Sulliv.  occurs  in  Melb.  Census  for  N.S.W., 
probably  referring  to  a  Lord  Howe  Island  record.] 

Schlotheimia  Brid. 

625.  S.  Bailkyi  Broth.,  A.M.  '90,  No.  11;  delin.  in  Bail.  Q. 
n.  Suppl.  3,  p.97,  t.l7,  fig.4. 

Q.,  Bellenden  Ker,  5000':  Bailey,  '89  (on  rotten  wood).— N.S.W., 
Richmond  River,  plentiful,  esp.  on  old  fig  trees  in  scrub  :  Watts, 
'96  ff.  Williams  River  :  Lamont,  Oct.  '87.  Mullumbimby  : 
Bauerlen,  herb.  Tech.  IMus.  Syd. 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         107 

SCHLOTHEIMIA  (continued).  [Orlholrichacece. 

(a)  f.  compacta,  herb.  Melb. 
KS.W.,  Illawarra:  Kirton. 

626.     S.  Brovvnii  Schwgr.,  Suppl.  t.  167. 
Yic,    Australia    Felix:    F.v.M.— N.S.W.,    Port   Jackson:     R. 
Brown.     Illawarra:  Kirton,  herb.  Melb.     Mosman's  Bay,  Manly, 
Hurstville,  and  Cook's  Biver,  nr.   Syd.,   on  rocks  :  Whitelegge 
(c.fr.).      Parramatta  :  F.v.M. 

(a)  var.  fol.  magis  regularibus,  herb.  Melb. 
Vic,  Australia  Felix,  hb.  iVIelb. 

This  species  and  var.  are  recorded  with  doubt.  Broth.  Bryales. 
gives  N.Z.  only,  and  in  a  letter  to  us  says,  "I  have  not  seen  S. 
Broionii  from  Australia,  and  doubt  if  it  is  to  be  found  there." 
Probably  all  the  Australian  records  should  be  changed  to  S. 
Baileyi. 

Tribe  xiii.    Splachnaceae. 

T  A  Y  L  0  R I  A  Hook.,  1816,  emend.  Mitt.  1859. 

627.  T.  (Eremodon)  calophylla  (CM.,  Bot.  Zeit.  '51, 
Dissodon)  Mitt.  Cat.;  Splachnum  Fl.  Tas.;  Eremodo')i 
rohnstus  H.f.W.,  Fl.  N.Z.  (teste  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  121). 

Tas.,  on  trunks  of  trees  and  damp  earth,  Ferntree  Valley,  Mt. 
Wellington  :  Mossman,  '50.     Also  in  N.Z. 

628.  T.  nanocarpa  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  124,  Dissodon). 
Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  4100'. 

629.  T.  Nov^  Valesi^  (CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.l24;  Dissodon). 
Vic,  Grampians  and  Mt.  William  :  Sullivan,  '82,  and  Stirling. 
"Throughout  the  East  Coast  of  Australia  from  Victoria  through 
N.S.W.  to  Q."— CM.  loc.  cit.  This  note  makes  it  clear  that 
this  plant  is  identical  with  that  returned  b}^  Dr.  Brotherus  as 
T.  octoblepharis.  CM.  limited  T.  octohlei^haris  to  Tasmania. — 
W.W.W. 

630.  T.  OBTUsissiMA  Broth.,  A.M.  '95,  No.  76. 
Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  Falls  Track  :  Wevmouth,         ^^   _^^ 

-  i  B  R  A  R  Yf 


J'#' 


108  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

T  A  Y  L  o  R  I  A  (continued).  [Splachnacece. 

631,  T.  ocTOBLEPiiARis  (Hook.,  M.  Exot.,  Splachnum  Octo- 
hlepharum)  Mitt.;  Dissodon 'Pa.r.  Index;  D.  cuspidatus 
CM.;  D.  plagiopus  (Mont.)  CM.,  Jaeg.  Ad. 

Throughout  Australia  and  Tasmania,  Recorded  for  W.A., 
S.A.,  Vic,  N.S.W.,  and  Q.  The  Melb.  Herb,  contains  specimens 
coll.  by  the  late  Baron  von  Mueller  from  all  the  States.  Found 
by  many  collectors  since.  Plentiful  on  the  Blue  Mtns.,  and  in 
New  England,  N.S.W.     Common  in  Tasmania. 

CM.  limits  T.  octohlepharis  to  Tas.,  and  keeps  T.  plagiopus 
(Mont.)  for  Ins.  Auckland.  Broth.  Bryales  omits  7'.  plagiopus 
and  extends  T.  octoblepha7ns  to  N.Z.  and  the  Auckland  and 
Campbell  Islands. 

(a)  var.  major  (H.f.W.  El.  Antarct,),  Jaeg.  Ad. 
Ta.s.,  on  trees  and  rocks  :  Mossman.     Johnny's  Creek  :  Oldfield. 

(b)  var.  MINOR  CM.  and  Hpe.  in  Linn.  '53  (name  only). 
Vic.  {1),  Irishtown  :  F.v.M.,  herb.  Melb. 

(c)  var.  PIRIFORMIS  (H.f.W.),  Jaeg.  Ad. 
Tas.,  on  trees  and  rocks  :  Mossman. 

T.  paUescens  (CM.  in  litt.,  Dissodon).  The  moss  so 
named,  coll.  by  Reader  at  Murrumbeena,  Vic,  in 

^^Q,  is  T.  octohlepharis. 

T.  purpurascens  (H.f.W.)  is  recorded  in  herb.  Melb. 
for  Blue  Mtns.,  N.S.W.  The  record  is  doubtful, 
though  the  specimen  which  I  have  seen  differs  from 
the  typical  T.  octoblepliaris.  It  may  be  a  form 
intermediate  between  the  two  species. — W.W.W. 

632.  T.  TASMANiCA  (Hpe.  in  Linn.  '76,  Tetraplodon)  Broth. 
Bryales;  Splachnum  Gunnii,  fid.  Mitt. 

Tas.,  towards  Lake  Redder  :  Schuster,  '75.  Collected  also  by 
W.  Fitzgerald  and  T.  B.  Moore,  teste  Weymouth. 


BY  REV.   W.   AVALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         109 

S  p  L  A  c  H  N  u  M  L.  (1753).  [Splachnacece. 

633.  S.  GuNNii  H.f.W.,  Lond.  Jour.  Bot.  '48. 

Tas.,  on  dead  tree  ferns,  Acheron  River  :  Gunn,  '45.  Coll.  also 
by  W.  Fitzgerald,  teste  Weymouth. 

Mitt,  identified  with  :Z^.  tasmmiica;  butGeheebin  Rev. 
Bryol.  '97  says,  "  T.  tasm.  a  S.  Gunnii  follis  inte- 
gerrimis  jam  recedit."     See  Weymouth,  M.  Tas. 

Splachnobryum  cm.  (1869). 

Broth.  Bryales  places  under  Fottiacece;  CM.  in  Gen. 
M.  under  "  Splachnacese  Spurise." 

634.  S.  Baileyi  Broth,  in  Bot.  Centralbl.  '88;  Bailey,  Syn. 
Q.  Fl.  Suppl.  ii.;  Wild,  Proc.  R.  Soc.  Q.  '89,  p.76. 

Q.,  on  walls  of  hothouse,  Acclimatisation  Society's  Gardens, 
Brisbane  :  Bailey.     Also  coll.  by  Wild,  Apl.  '88. 

635.  S.  Wattsii  Broth.,  A.M.  '99,  No.  152. 

N.S.W.,  Watson's  Bay  and  Parsley  Bay,  nr.  Sydney,  under  cliff 
in  wet  places  :  Watts,  Feb.  and  Oct.  '99;  also  damp  places  on 
hillside.  Parsley  Bay,  and  under  cliff,  Abbotsford,  1903. 

Tribe  xiv.    Funariacesa. 
GiGASPERMUM  Lindb.  (1864). 

636.  G.  REPENS  (Hook.  M.  Exot.,  Anoectangium)  Lindb.; 
Leptangium  Mitt.  Cat.;  Physcomitrium  CM.;  Hed- 
wigia  Fl.  N.  Z.  and  Fl.  Tas. 

W.A.:  Menzies,  1791;  Swan  River:  Preiss. — Tas.,  Port  Sorrell 
and  Cataract,  Launceston  :  Archer.  Ocean  Grove  Rd.:  Bastow, 
^88.  Brook's  Field,  Kangaroo  Point  :  Taylor. — Vic,  Grampians 
and  Mt.  Ararat  :  Sullivan,  '82-3.  Nr.  Williamstown :  Reader, 
Aug.  '85.  Wimmera  :  Eckert,  '90,  hb.  Geheeb.— N.S.W.,  Tarn- 
worth  :  Musson.  Genoa  River :  Biiuerlen.  Yalwal  Creek  : 
Forsyth,  Sept.  '99.  Young  District,  at  many  places,  Aug.-Sept. 
'03,  and  nr.  Armidale,  Nov.  '03  :  Watts. — Q.,  North  Quay,  Bris- 
bane :  Wild,  Aug.  '87.  Gladfield  :  C  J.  Gwyther.  (Though 
widely  distributed  and  reaching  to  Q.,  no  trace  as  yet  in  the 
Northern  Rivers  Districts  of  N.S.W.) 


110  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

G  I  G  A  s  P  E  R  M  u  M  (continued).  [Funariacece. 

G37.     G.  suBREPENs  CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.l30. 
W.A.,  Swan  River:  Preiss,  '39-'40. 

638.  G.  TUMIDUM  (Mitt.  Cat.,  Lej)tangium)  Lindb. 
Tas.  :  Archer. 

Ephemerella  cm.,  Syn.  '49. 

639.  E.    (Physcomitridium)    Readeri    CM.    (where   de- 
scribed ?). 

Vic,  basin  of  old  sheepwash,  Upper  Region  Station  :  Reader, 
Sept.  '97  (c.fr.).     Broth.  Bryales  thinks  this  is  a  Physcomitrella. 

E  p  H  E  M  E  R  u  31  Hpe.  (1837). 

640.  E.  CRISTATUM  (H.f.W.,  Icon.  pi.  rar.,  Phascum)  CM., 
Bot.  Zeit.  '47. 

AV.A.,  Swan  River:  Drummond. — Tas.,  Cheshunt  :  Archer. 
Bellerive:  Bastow, '86.  Brook's  Field,  Kangaroo  Point:  Taylor. 
'86.— N.S.W.,  Park,  Emu  Plains,  Oct.  '99  (c.fr.),  in  paddock, 
back  of  cemetery,  Young,  and  hillside,  Temora  Ed.  about  11m. 
from  Young  (plentiful),  July  to  Sept.  '03:  Watts  (c.fr.).— Vic, 
teste  herb.  Melb. 

641.  E.  FiMBRiATUM  CM.  in  Linn.  '71-3. 

Q.,  Brisbane  River  :  Mrs.  A.  Dietrich,  '64.  Burpengary:  Wild^ 
May,  '88. 

642.  E.  GROsso-ciLiATUM  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  84. 

Vic,  Kew,  nr.  Melbourne,  on  trunks  of  trees,  with  Fisside7is 
pnngens  :  Reader,  Jul}',  '84. 

643.  E.    Whiteleggei   Broth.,   Geh.  in    Broth.  A.M.   '95, 
No.  64. 

N.S.W.,  North  Shore  and  Ball's  Head  Bay:  Whitelegge,  April, 
'85  (c.fr.).     Tempe  :  For.syth,  July,  '99,  herb.  Syd. 

[Note. — An  Ephemerum  sp.  1  was  found  at  Miller's  landing 
wharf,  Teven  Creek,  Richmond  River  (Watts,  Nov.  1900),  the 
only  instance  as  yet  of  an  Ephemerum  on  the  Northern  River& 
of  N.S.W.] 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         Ill 

Physcomitrella  Bry.  Eur.  1849.  [Fii7iariacece. 

Q4:i.      P.  austro-patens  Broth,  in  sched. 
Yic,  on    wet   soil    nr.   Yarranback    Creek,    Brim,    co.    Boring : 
Reader,  July  27,  '02. 

Physcomitrium  (Brid.)  Fuernr.,  1829. 

645.  P.  BRiSBANicuM  CM.  in  Linn.  '71-3. 

Q.,  Brisbane  Biver:  Amalie  Dietrich,  '64.     Pimpama  and  border 

of  N.S.W.  :  Wild,  April,  '88.— N.S.W.,  nr.  Ballina,  Richmond 
River,  Sept.  '99,  nr.  Federal,  Richmond  River,  Oct.  '01  and  Aug. 
'02  :  Watts.  Also  a  form  on  hillside,  by  beach,  Newcastle  : 
Watts,  Nov.  1900. 

646.  P.  coxicuM  Mitt.,  Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59,  and  Fl.  Tas. 
Tas.,  Leith's  Creek  :  Archer. 

P.  ene7've.     See  Goniomitriwm. 
P.  firiniim.     See  No.  648. 

647.  P.  FLACciDUM  Mitt.  Oat. 

N.8.  W.,  Ash  Island,  Hunter  River  :  Mrs.  Forde. 

618.     P.  INTEGRIFOLIUM  Hpc.  et  CM.,  Linn.  '53;  P.firmuni 
Mitt.,  Kew  J.  Bot.  viii.,  fid.  Broth.  Bryales. 
Vic,  Delatite:  F.v.M.,  Mch.  '55.— N.S.W.,  Snowy  River:  F.v.M. 
'55,  hb.  Melb. 

649.  P.  minutulum  CM.,  Linn.  '71-3. 

Q.,  Brisbane  River  :  Amalie  Dietrich,  '64.  Nr.  Port  Denison, 
'89  :   Welden  Birch. 

650.  P.  NODULiFOLiuM  Mitt.  Cat. 
Q.,  near  Moreton  Bay  :  F.v.M.  '56. 

651.  P.  Nov^  Yalesi^  Broth,  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  on  ground,  nr.  Ballina,  April,  '86,  and  later  at  many 
other  places  on  the  Richmond  River,  plentiful :  Watts.  New 
England  (Applecross,  Wandsworth  and  Mt.  Duval) :  Watts,  Oct. 
'03.     A  specimen  of  this  moss  is  in  the  Melb.  Herb,  under  the 


112  CENSUS    MUFCOIUJM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

P  H  Y  S  c  o  M  I  T  R  I  U  M  (continued ).  \^Funariacect. 

name  of  Pottia  Stackhoiisii  (q.v.),  coll.  by  the  late  Capt.  Stack- 
house  on  the  Richmond  River  about  1880. 

P.  obconiciun  is  suggested,  prob.  by  Hampe,  for  a 
doubtful  sp.nov.  in  Melb.  Herb.,  coll.  on  the  Blue 
Mtns.,  N.S.W.     Material  imperfect. 

652.  P.  (Cryptopyxis)  Readeri  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.ll2. 
Vic,   on  decaying   tree  stumps,   nr.   water,   Kew,   Melbourne  : 
Reader,  July,  '84(c.fr.). 

653.  P.  subserratum  Hpe.,  Linn.  '59-60  ("an  P.  conicum 
Mitt,  r  Hpe.  I.e.). 

Vic,  Dargo  River:  F.v.M.  '55.  Alps:  Stirling,  "ascends  to 
3000'." — N.S.W.,  on  clay  in  dam.  Ball's  Head  Bay  :  Whitelegge, 
Sept.  and  Oct.  '85  (c.fr.).— Q.,  Burnett  R.  :  J.  Keys,  '89  (hb. 
Melb.). 

654.  P.  TORQUESCENS  CM.  in  F.v.M.,  Frag.  Phyt.  and  Gen. 
M.,  p.  112. 

N.S.W.,  teste  CM.  loc.cit. 

655.  P.  Tryoni  Broth,  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.ll2. 

Q.,  banks  of  Brisbane  River,  Breakfast  Creek  :  H.  Tryon,  June, 
'90. 

[Note. — In  Herb.  Melb.  P.piriforme  (L.)  Brid.,  an  European 
sp.,  is  recorded  for  Dargo  R.  and  Snowy  R.  (F.v.M.  '55);  ap- 
parently the  specimens  were  either  P.  integrifolium  or  P.  sub- 
serratum q.v.] 

Goniomitrium  Wils.,  1846. 

656.  G.  ACUMINATUM    H.f.W.,   Lond.   J.   Bot.   '46;  Physco- 
r)iitrium  CM.,  Syn.  (cf.  Geh.  in  Rev.  ^ry.  '79). 

W.A.,  on  black  soil,  Swan  River  :  Drummond. — Q.,  Clermont  : 
Miss  Gore. — N.S.W.,  on  ground,  nr.  Lugar  Tennis  Court,  Temora 
Rd.,  via  Young :  Watts,  Sept.  '03. 


BY  REV.   W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        113 

G  0  N  I  0  M  I  T  R  I  u  M  (contiH'iied).  [^Funariacece. 

657.  G.  ENERVE  H.f.W.,  Lond.  J.  Bot,  '46;  Physconiitriuin 
CM.,  Syn. 

W.A.,  on  red  soil,  Swan  River  :  Drummond. — N.S.W.,  on  hard 
ground  at  many  places  near  Young  (fine  specimens  at  top  of 
Weedallion  Mtn.)  :  Watts,  July-Sept.  '03  (c.fr.), 

FuNARiA  Schreb.  (1791),  emend.  Linb.  (1870). 
Subgenus  Entosthodon. 

658.  F.  AMPULLACEA  (C.M.,  Gen.  M.  p.  109,  Entosthodon). 
Q.,  Dawson  Kiv^er  and  Brisbane  River  :  Musson. 

659.  F.  APOPHYSATA  (Tayl.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '46,  Gymnosto- 
mum)  Broth.  Bryales;  Physcomitriam  Wils.  and  Fl. 
Tas.;  Entosthodon  Tayhri  CM.,  Syn.  and  Jaeg.  Ad.; 
Eyitosthodon  Mitt.,  Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59. 

W.A.,  Swan  River:  Drummond. — Tas.,  frequent.  The  Hum- 
mock: Archer.  Macquarie  Plains:  Weymouth. — Vic,  Yarra, 
Goulburn  and  Avon  Rivers:  F.v.M. '54ff.  Loutit  Bay  :  Lueh- 
niann.  Alps :  Sullivan  and  Stirling.  Wimmera  :  Reader. 
Heyington  :  Watts. — S.A.,  Gawler  River,  herb.  Melb. — N.S.W., 
Parramatta:  F.v.M.,  herb.  Melb.  Springfield:  herb.  Melb. 
Emu  Plains,  1900;  near  Young,  frequent,  Aug. -Sept.  '03;  near 
Armidale,  '03  :  Watts. — Q.,  Miss.  Gore,  ?  loc.  Port  Denison  : 
Welden  Birch,  '89.      Beenleigh  :  Wild,  '87. 

660.  F.  ARiSTATA  Broth.,  A.M.  '93,  No.  40. 

N.S.W.,  Lilyvale:  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '91  (c.fr.).  Lane  Cove, 
'98;  near  Barber's  Creek,  '99;  Warrumbungle  Ranges,  '99  : 
Forsyth.  Emu  Plains,  1900;  nr.  Young,  frequent;  nr.  Armidale, 
Nov.  '03;  Tumut  District,  '04  :  Watts.— Vic,  Genoa  River,  E. 
Gippsland  :  herb.  Melb.  '80.  The  sp.  was  based  on  Whitelegge's 
Lilyvale  specimens,  the  Vic.  record  not  being  then  known 
apparently. 

661.  F.  BRACHYCAULis  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.l09,  Entosthodon). 
Tas.,  teste  CM.  in  loc.  cit. 


114  CKNSU8    MUSCOHUM    AUSTKALIENSIUM,   II., 

F  LI  N  A  li  I  A  (continued).  [Funariacect. 

661a.  F.bullata  Broth,  in  sched.,  Vict.  Naturalist,  Feb  '05, 
Vic,  Railway  Embankment,  Heyington  Stn.,  nr.  Melb.:  Watts, 
Sept.  '02  (c.fr.). 

662.  F.  Campbelli.e  (Broth,  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  109. 
FiUosthodon). 

Coll.  by  Miss  Flora  Campbell  (Mrs.  Martin)  in  Vic;  Melb.  List 
gives  "Q.,"  apparently  in  error. 

663.  F.  CLAVyEFORMis  (Hpe.  et  CM.  in  Linn.  '53,  Entostho- 
d'jn)  Broth.  Bry. 

S.A.,  Torrens  River:  F.v.:\L  herb.  Melb. 

664.  F.  DissoDONTOiDES  (CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  107). 

Vic,  crevices  of  rocks,   Mt.  William  :  Sullivan,  Mch.  '83,  herb. 
Melb. 

665.  F.  ELATA  (Mitt,  in  hb.  Melb.,  Entosthodon) . 
Q.,  Moreton  Bay  :  F.v.M. 

666.  F.  gracilis  (H.f.W.,  Fl.  N".  Z.,  Entosthodon)  Broth. 
Biyales. 

Tas.,  Brown's  River  and  New  Norfolk  :  Oldfield.  Mt.  Rumney  : 
Bastow, '85.  Bellerive:  Taylor, '85.  Launceston :  Miss  Oakden. 
Blackman's  Bay  :  Weymouth.  The  Glen,  Knock  Lofty  :  Wey- 
mouth, Watts. — Vic,  Studley  Park,  Melb.  :  Reader,  '83;  also 
Dimboolashire,  Aug.  '00.— N.S.W.,  Parramatta :  F.v.M.,  Blue 
Mtns.,  hb.  Melb.     Also  in  N.Z. 

667.  F.  integerrima  (CM.  in  sched.,  Entosthodon). 
Vic,  wet  soil,  Dimboolashire  :  Reader,  July,  '96  (c.fr.). 

668.  F.  LAXA  (H.f.W.,  Fl.  Antarct.,  Fhyscomitrium);  En- 
tosthodon, Mitt.  Cat.  In  hb.  Melb.  Physcomitrium 
Tai/lori,  i.e.,  F.  apophysata.     Not  in  Broth.  Bryales.  * 

Vic,  Australian  Alps:  F.v.M.  '55,  and  Stirling. — Tas.,  on  stones, 
rivulet  nr.  Cumming's  Head  :  Archer.    "?loc.  :  Oldfield." 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         115 

F  u  N  A  R  I  A  ( contiyiued ).  [Funariacece. 

6Q\\     F.  MiNUTicAULis  (CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  109,  Entosthodon, 
and  Geh.  Rev.  Bry.  '97). 
Vic,  Moyston  :  Sullivan,  '82.     Grampians:  Stirling  &  Sullivan, 
"up  to  3000'." 

669a.   F.  perpusilla  Broth,  insched.;  Vict.  Naturalist,  Feb. 
'05. 
Vic,  nr.  Railway  Stn.,  Heyington:  Watts,  Sept.  '02  (c  fr.). 

670.  F.  PRODUCTA  (Mitt.  Journ.   L.  Soc.  '59,  Entosthodon) 
Broth.  Brj^ales. 

Tas.,  on  earth  behind  Cumming's  Head,  Western  Mtns.:  Archer. 
Blackman's  Bay,  East  Coast  ;  Weymouth. — Vic,  Port  Phillip  : 
hb.  Melb. 

671.  F.  RADIANS  (Hedw.,   Weisia)  Mitt.,  Kew  J.  Bot.  viii. 
259,  Hdbk.  N.  Z.  FL  450. 

Mitt.   Cat.    makes  F,   radians    a    syn.   of    F.  glabra; 
Broth.   Bryales  separates  the  two,  and  brings  F. 
radiaiis  under  the  subgen.  Evitosthodon.     (See  also 
F.  crispida.) 
Tas.  :  Archer,  1  loc. 

672.  F.  RECURViPiLA  (CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.l09,  Entosthodon). 
Vic,  East  Gippsland  :  hb.  Melb. 

673.  F.    Smithhurstii,   Broth.  Geh.  in   Broth.  A.M.   '95, 
No.  77. 

Q.,  Bundaberg  :  W.  H.  Smithhurst. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  River, 
Ballina,  German  Creek,  and  Coraki  :  Watts,  '96  if.  Nepean 
River:  Watts,  Oct. '99.— Vic,  Echuca  :  Arthur  Sharpe,  Oct. '00. 

674.  F.  sQUARRiFOLiA  Broth.,  A.M.  '98,  No.  111. 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  Ballina,  under  bushes  Alstonville  Rd. 
(April,  '96),  German  Creek,  and  at  many  other  places,  frequent  : 
Watts  (c.fr.  Apl.-Sept.). 

675.  F.  SuLLiVANi  (CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.l09,  Entosthodon). 
Vic,    Moyston :    D.    Sullivan,    Oct.   '82.      Grampians  :  Stirling. 
Upper  Yarra  Pviver  :  C  Walter,  '93. 


116  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTKALIENSIUM,   II., 

F  u  X  A  K  I  A  (conthii(ed).  \_Funariacece. 

[Brutli.  thinks  tliis  is  only  a  form  of  F.  gracilis.     Teste  Geli., 
Kev.  Bry.  '97.] 

G7G.     F.    Tatean'a    (CM.,    Gen.    M.,     p.  109,     Entosthodon 
Tateanus). 
N.S.W.,  Darling  River:  Tate,  hb.  Melb. 

F.  Taylori  (CM.,  Entosthodon).     See  659. 

677.  F.  VARiA  (Mitt.  Cat.,  Entosthodon)  Broth.  Bryales. 
Vic,  leg.  Adamson,  hb.  Melb. 

678.  F.  VESicuLiFOLiA  (CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.l09,  Entosthodon). 
Tas.,  teste  CM.  in  loc.  cit. 

679.  F.  WooLLSiANA  (CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  109,  Entosthodon). 
N.S.  W.,  Lane  Cove  Rd.,  Burn's  Ba}^  and  Auburn,  nr.  Sydney: 
Whitelegge,  '84  (c.fr.  July-Oct.). 

Subgenus  Eufunaria. 

680.  F.  ACAULis  Hpe.  in  Linn.  '59-60. 
Vic,  Gippsland  :  F.v.M.  '55,  hb.  Melb. 

681.  F.  CALVESCENS  Schwgr.;  F.  hi/gromei7'icav3iV.  calvescens 
Brid.,  Par.  Index. 

This  S.  Amer.  sp.  is  not  abundant,  but  is  widespread  in  Australia 
and  Tasmania,  being  recorded  from  Swan  River  and  Lake  Dun- 
gunibar  nr.  Perth  (Preiss,  '39),  Barossa  Range  (F.v.M.  '48,  as  F. 
aitsiralis),  Victoria  Range  (Wilhelm,  '57),  King  George's  Sound 
(J.  R.  Muir),  Bellenden  Ker  Range  (S.  Johnson,  '91),  Endeavour 
River,  Sydney  (Voy.  Novara),  Richmond  River  (Tuckombil  : 
David  Watts,  '96;  Uralba,  etc.:  Watts,  '98  ff.),  Wentworth  Falls, 
Blue  Mtns.  (Steel,  '00,  hb.  Tech.  Mus.  Syd.),  Surges  Bay,  Tas., 
etc.  (Weymouth),  Eumundi,  Q.,  Field  Naturalists. 

682.  F.  CRISPULA  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas.  {F.  radiaris  Mitt.,  fid.  Fl. 
Tas.). 

Tas.,  not  uncommon,  Kermadie  Rivulet  and  Port  Sorell:  Oldfield. 
Near  Cheshunt,  and  on  rocks,  Cataract,  Launceston  :  Archer. 
Launceston  :   Miss  Oakden.      Peppermint  Bay,  etc.:  Weymouth. 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WIIITELEGGE.         117 

F  u  N  A  R  I  A  (continued).  \_Funariacece. 

— Vic,  Rose  Vale  :  McLeod,  77.  LoutitBay  :  Luehmann,  '91. — 
KS.W.,  Blue  Mtns.  '91:  hb.  Melb.— Q.,  Ashgrove :  Wild, '87. 
Enoggera  :  Bailey. 

683.  F.  cuspiDATA  H.f.W.,  Fl.  N.  Z.;  Weymouth,  M.  Tas., 
p.22. 

Tas.,  on  ground,  Carlton  :  Weymouth,  '89. — Q.,  Mt.  Perry  :  Keys 
(in  hb.  Melb.  and  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  as  Entosthodon  cuspidatus 
Kiaer.).~N.S.W.,  Turramurra  and  La  Perouse  :  Forsyth,  July- 
Aug.  '98.  Rookwood  :  Cheel,  Aug.  '98.  Emu  and  W.  Maitland, 
Nov.  and  Dec.  '00,  and  near  Sutherland  Railway  Stn.,  July,  '03 
(c.fr.juv.)  :  Watts. 

684.  F.  GLABRA  Tayl.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '46;  F.  acaidis  Hpe. 
and  F.  radians  Mitt.,  fid.  Mitt.  Cat.  Broth.  Bryales 
keeps  distinct. 

W.A.,  Swan  River:  Drummond. — Tas.,  Vic,  N.S.W.,  Q..  com- 
mon.    Also  N.Z.  and  N.  Caledonia. 

685.  F.  HYGROMETRiCA  (L.)  Sibth.  var.  sphaerocarpa  (CM.) 
Watts;  F.  sphoirocarpa  CM.,  Bot.  Zeit.  '51;  F.  hygro- 
metrica  Fl.  N.  Z.;  F.  liygromMrica  (L.)  fid.  Broth.  (In 
Gen.  M.,  C.  M.  says  of  his  F.  sphcerocarpa  "the 
representative  of  our  (European)  F.  hygrometrica.^'' 

Throughout  Australia  and  Tasmania;  many  habitats,  but  espe- 
cially burnt  soil  and  burnt  logs. 

686.  F.  INTEGRIFOLIA  Broth.  in  sched. 

Vic,  sandy  desert,  Wimmera,  Dimboolashire  :  Reader,  Sept.  '98. 

687.  F.  Nov^  VALESI.E  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  106. 
N.g.W.,  ?  local. 

688.  F.  PAPiLLATA  Hpe.  in  Linn.  '76. 
Q.,  Brisbane  River  :  Slater. 

F.  p'difera  Broth.     See  note  after  No.  692. 

689.  F.  PULCHRiDENS  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.l06. 

Vic,  Mt,  Cole,  Pyrenees:  Sullivan,"  Oct. '82.  Stirling,  "  up  to 
3000'."  Sandy  soil,  hilly  niallee  country,  N.W.  of  Dimboola  : 
Reader,  July,  '96  (c.fr.). 


11J<  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTKALIENSIUM,   II., 

F  u  N  A  R  I  A  (cojitimied).  [Funariacece. 

GDO.     F.  SALSicoLA  CM.  (where  described'?). 
Vic,  surroundings  of  Salt  Lake,  Dimboolashire :  Reader,  July, 
'96  (c.fr.). 

691.  F.  SUBNUDA  Tayl.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.,  '46;  F.  physcomi- 
troides  var.  CM.,  Syn. 
W.A.,  Swan  River  :  Drummond. — S.A.,  Barossa  Range  :  F.v.M. 
hb.  Melb.  (CM.  det.).— N.S.W.,  Auburn,  Ball's  Head  Bay,  Hurst- 
ville,  etc.  :  Whitelegge,  '84  (c.fr.).  Broth.  Bryales  gives  W.A. 
only. 

G«)2.  F.  TASMANiCA  Hpe.  et  CM.  in  Linn.  '53;  F.v.M.,  Austr. 
M.t.i. 
Tas  ,  Stuart.  This  is  the  only  record  in  Mitt.  Cat.,  and  Broth. 
Bryales  gives  Tas.  only;  but  in  Melb.  herb,  there  are  specimens 
so  named  from  the  Lofty  Range  (F.v.M.  '48)  and  Gippsland 
(F.v.M.  '55).  In  1903,  Aug.-Nov.,  this  sp.  was  frequently  found 
nr.  Young  and  Tumut,  and  in  a  deep  gorge,  Hillgrove,  New 
England  :  Watts  (determ.  Broth.).  Coll.  by  Musson  nr.  Tam- 
worth  several  years  ago. 

[Note.  —  Although  a  monographer  might  reduce  the  No.  of  our 
Funarise,  Australia  is  evidently  rich  in  this  genus,  especially  in 
the  Entosthodon  group,  which,  following  Dr.  Brotherus  (after 
Lindberg),  we  have  included  in  the  genus  Funaria.  From  Dr. 
Mueller's  remark,  quoted  under  685,  it  is  clear  that  he  did  not 
recognise  F.  hygronietrica  (L.)  in  Australia.  His  F.  splicer ocarp a 
is,  however,  scarcely  more  than  a  variety  of  the  European  plant. 
A  recent  return  from  Dr.  Brotherus  contains  F.  pilifera  Broth, 
(paddock,  Thuddungra,  Young,  Aug.  '03  :  Watts).] 

Tribe  xv.    Mitteniaceae. 

M  I  r  T  L  N  I  A  Lindb.,  1862;  Maiopsis  Mitt.,  Fl.  Tas. 

093.     M.  PLUMULA  (Mitt.)  Lindb.;  Mniopsis  Mitt.,  Fl.  Tas.; 
Broth.  Bryales,  fig.394. 
Ta.s.  :    Archer,     Oldtield    (below    quarry.    Oven's    Creek),    Miss 
Oakd.m  (Launceston,  '88),   AVeymouth  (Happy  Valley,  Mt.  Bis- 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WIIITELEGGE.        119 

M  I  T  T  E  N  I  A  (continued).  [Mitteniacece. 

chof,  '92)  et  al.— N.S.W.,  Lilyvale,  Sept.  '91,  and  Nellie's  Glen, 
Blue  Mtns.,  Oct.  '91  (c.fr.):  Whitelegge.  Dry  bank,  Rous  tram- 
line, Richmond  River,  July,  '97  (ster.),  Katoomba  Falls,  Jan.  '02, 
Woodford,  May,  '05  :  Watts.  Valley  of  Waters,  Aug.  '99  (c.fr.): 
Forsyth. 

694.  M.    ROTUNDiFOLiA   CM.,  Gen.    M.    '01;    Mniopsis  in 
CM.  Symb.  No.  3;  Broth.  Bryales,  fig.394. 

KS.W.,  Lilyvale:  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '91, 

[Note. — Judging  from  a  note  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  Dr.  Mueller 
did  not  know  M.  2)lumula  from  N.S.W.] 

Tribe  xvi.  Bryaceae. 
MiELiCHHOFERiA  Hornsch.,  Bryol.  germ.  1831. 

695.  M.  AUSTRALis  Hpe.,  Linn.,  '59-'60. 

Vic,  Gippsland  and  Grampians  :  F.v.M.  ("  Gippsland  in  Monte 
Grampian." — Hpe.  I.e.) 

696.  M.  EcKLONi  Hpe.  et  CM.,  Linn.  '41. 

Vic,  Gippsland  :  F.v.M.  '55. — Tas.,  Hoc:  Archer.  On  ground, 
Gullies  Road,  Brown's  River :  Gunn.  The  Glen,  Knock  Lofty, 
on  shaded  rocks  :  Bastow,  Weymouth,  Watts.  [Dr.  Mueller 
limits  this  sp.  to  S.  Africa  (see  Gen.  M.  p.  191).  Broth.  Bryales 
gives  S.  Af.,  E.  Australia,  Tas.  and  N.Z.] 

697.  M.  FoRSYTHii  Broth. 

N.S.W.,  damp  places  under  rock,  Koorawatha :  Watts,  Sept.  '03. 
Original  local.  % 

698.  M.  MiCRODONTA  Mitt.  Cat.  and  F.v.M.  Frag.  Phyt.  xi. 
Suppl.  {Leptochlaena). 

Vic,  Gippsland  :  F.v.M.— Tas.  :  Archer,  Oldfield.  [This  sp.  is 
mentioned  in  Broth.  Bryales,  but  not  apparently  in  CM.,  Gen.M.] 

699.  M.  SuLLiVANi  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  106. 

Vic,  Grampians  and  Pyrenees,  Mt.  William  and  Mt.  Cole,  Oct. 
'82,  and  '83  :  D.  Sullivan. 


120  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

M  I  E  L  I  C  H  H  0  F  E  R  I A  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

700.  M-  TURGENS  Broth,  in  sched. 

N.8.W.,  Weedallion  Mtn.,  Aug.  '03,  Koorawatha  and  Green 
Gully,  nr.  Young,  .^ept.  '03  :  Watts. 

Orthodontium  Schwgr.,  1826;  Apalodiuyn  Mitt. 

701.  O.  australe  H.f.W.,  Lond.  Jour.  Bot.  '44.  and  Fl. 
Ant. 

Tas.,  on  trees,  West  End  Rivulet:  Archer.  On  dry  trunks  of 
trees,  Mt.  Wellington  and  Back  River,  Brown's  River  :  Hooker, 
Oldtield.  At  many  other  places  :  Bastow,  Taylor,  Weymouth, 
McLeod,  Watts,  et  al. 

702.  O.  INFLATUM  (Mitt.,  Voy.  H.IVLS.  "  Challenger,"  Bot. 
iv.,  Apalodium)  Paris;  Wilsoniella  co77ipacta  Geh.,  fide 
hb.  Melb. 

N.S.W.,  Blue  Mtns  (?). 

703.  O.  LANCEOLATUM  Mitt.,  Kcw  J.  Bot.  '56. 

Tas.,  Hoc.  :  Archer.  Skye  Farm  Rd.,  Mt.  Faulkner  :  Weymonth. 
— Vic,  Gippsland :  F.v.M.  '55.  Black  Ranges:  D.  Sullivan,  '87. 
On  charred  stumps  of  trees  nr.  Doncaster  :  Reader,  '84.  Alps  : 
Stirling  ("ascends  to  5000'  "). 

0.  lineare.     See  No.  705. 

704.  O.  OVALE  CM.,  in  Broth.  A.M.  '93,  No.  41. 
N.S.W.,  Gosford,  on  rotten  wood  :  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '91  (c.fr.). 
Cook's  River,  nr.  Sydney,  '95,  and  at  Park  Gray's  Island  and 
other  places  on  the  Richmond  River,  '96  ff.  :  Watts.     La  Perouse  : 
Forsyth,  '98. 

705.  0.  PALLEXS  (H.f.W.,  Weisia)  Broth.  Bryales;  Apcdo- 
dium  lineare  Mitt. 

Tas.,  Beaconsfield:  Weymouth, '92.— N.S.W.,  Gosford:  White- 
legge, '91.  La  Perouse  :  Forsyth,  '98.  Burnt  log,  Nepean 
River,  '99,  ground,  Mt.  Duval,  Nov.  '03  :  Watts.  [Broth,  gives 
W.A.  also,  so  that  this  is  evidently  the  moss  variously  named 
Weisia^  Seliyeria,  Microdus  and  Dicranella.  See  Census,  Part  i. 
No.  206.] 


BY  REV.   W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WIIITELEGGE.         121 

Orthodontium  fcoiitinued).  [Bryacece. 

706.  O.    ROBUSTiuscriLUM  CM.,    Symb.    No.    108;    Broth. 
Bryales,  fig. 406. 

Tas.,  Eagle  Hawk  Neck  Hill :  Weymouth,  Oct.   '99. 

707.  O.  SULCATUM  H.f.W.,  Hook.  Ic.  PI.  rar. 

W.A.,  Swan  River:  Drummond. — N.S.W.,  Parramatta  :  F.v.M. 
Teinpe  :  Hamilton,  Sept.  '98. — Yic,  Grampians,  D.  Sullivan,  '87. 
[Broth.  Bryales  gives  E.  Austr.,  Tas.  and  N.Z.  CM.  limits  to 
W.A.  in  Gen.  M.  p.l93.] 

708.  O.  Zetterstedtii  CM.,  Symb.,  No.  107. 

First  found  by  Zetterstedt  in  '67  in  Australia,  local,  not  named. 
—  Vic,  Black  Range,  Pyrenees :  Sullivan,  Oct.  '83.  Mt. 
William,  hb.  Melb— N.S.W.,  root  of  tree,  Woollahra,  Ball's 
Head  Bay  ('84),  and  Nellie's  Glen,  Blue  Mtns.  ('91) :  Whitelegge. 
End  of  decaying  log,  by  bridge,  Keira  Railway,  nr.  WoUongong  : 
Watts,  Nov.  '95  (c.fr.).  ' 

WiLSONiELLA  CM.,  Bot.  Centralbl.  '81. 

[This  peculiar  genus,  with  the  habit  and  leaf-formation  of 
Orthodontium  and  the  peristome  of  Trichostomum,  is  placed 
among  the  Bryacece  by  CM.,  I.e.;  Broth.  Bryales  omits  it,  but 
purposes  in  a  Suppl.  placing  it  under  Trematodontece.^ 

709.  W.  Karsteniana  CM.,  loc.  cit. 
Q.,  Trinity  Bay  :  Karsten,  hb.  Melb.  '81. 

[Note. — Two  other  species  are  in  hb.  Whitelegge,  viz.,  W. 
compacta  Geh.  (on  roots  of  trees.  Botany,  nr.  Sydney  :  Whitelegge, 
June,  '85),  and  W.  Whiteleggei,  Geh.  (on  logs  in  gully,  nr.  Hurst- 
ville  Railway  Station  :  Whitelegge,  Dec.  '84).  The  former  is 
given  in  hb.  Melb.  for  Blue  Mtns.  and  La  Perouse,  and  may  be 
0.  injlafiim.^ 

Leptobryum  (Bryol.  eur.)  Wils.,  Bryol.  brit.  '55. 

710.  L   pyriforme  (L.,  J/^imm)  Wils.;  Broth.  Bryales,  fig. 
408;  Bryum  {Senodictyon)  CM.,  Gen.  M. 

Cosmopolitan. — Tas.,  on  decayed  Avood,  Back  River  Gully: 
Oldfield.     Near  R.  Nile  :  R.  G.  McLeod,  '84.     Also  recorded  by 


122  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

L  E  P  T  0  n  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

Weymouth.— N.S  W.,  Maitland  :  Vickary.  Near  %dney,  Glebe 
Point,  '01,  and  floor  of  bushhouse  (Hon.  E.  Vickery's),  Waverley, 
Jan.  '02,  and  Deep  Creek,   Batlow,  Tumut  District,  Mch.  '04  : 

Watts. 

L.  senodictyon  ?.     A  species  with    the   name   Bryum 

senodictyon  is  recorded  in  hb.  Melb.  (Gawler  River, 

on  stones  :  F.v.M.  '48).     In  Melb.   List  given  for 

S.  A.  and  Tas.      Prob.  =  L.  pyriforme. 

L.  sericeum  (Hpe.,  CM.)  Par.     See  No.  719. 

P  0  II  L  I  A  Hedw.,  1787;  Webera  Hedw.,  1782  (name  preoccupied); 
Bryum  {Senodictyon)  CM. 

P.  austro-nutans.     See  No.  718. 

711.  P.   Beccarii  (CM.,  Symb.   No.  Ill,  Bryum), 

Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington  :  Dr.  Beccari,  Feb.  '98.  [Broth.  Bryales 
thinks  scarcely  differs  from  P.  nutans.^ 

712.  P.  clav^formis  (Hpe.  in  Linn.  '69-'70,  Sect,  of  Bryum) 
Broth.  Bryales. 

Vic,  Mt.  Disappointment :  R.  Taylor,  hb.  Melb. 
P.  criula  (L)  Lindb.     See  No.  713. 

713.  P.  ERYTHROCAULis  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '71-3,  Bryum);   Webera 
Jaeg.  Ad.  Suppl.;  P.  cruda,  fid.  Broth. 

N.S.W.,  Blue  Mtns.:  Mrs.  Calvert,  hb.  Melb.  -Vic,  Austr.  Alps: 
hb.  Melb. 

714.  P.  LKPTOPELMATA  (CM.,  Symb.,  No.  113,  Bryum). 
N.S.W.,   Mt.    Kosciusko:    D.    Sullivan,    '84.       [Broth.    Bryales 
thinks  scarely  differs  from  P.  nutans.] 

715.  P.   LONGIFOLIA  (Hpe.  et  CM.,  Linn.  '56,  Bryum);  P. 
nutans,  fid.  Mitt.,  and  Broth.  Bryales. 

Vic,  Sphagnum  bogs,  Cobberas  Mtns.,  6000';  F.v.M. 

716.  P.    MiKLicHiiOFERiA    (CM.,    Symb.,    No.  110,    Bryum), 

Broth.  Bryales. 
Vic,  Grampians,  Mt.  Ararat  :   D.  Sullivan,  Oct.  '83. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        123 

P  o  H  L  I  A  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

717.  P.    MONTANA    (CM.,    Symb.,    No.   112,    Bryum);    P. 
nutans,  fid.  Broth.  Bryales. 

Vic,  Mt.  William :  Sullivan,  '84,  hb.  Melb. 

718.  P.  NUTANS  (Schreb,,  Bryum)  Lindb. 
Cosmopolitan.  — Tas.,  Splitter's  Hill  :  Archer.  Western  Mtns.  : 
Ounn.  Mt.  Wellington,  etc.:  Oldfield,  Bastow,  Weymouth,  et 
al.  — Vic,  Grampians,  Sealer's  Cove,  Snowy  River,  etc.  :  F.v.M. 
Mt.  William  and  Pyrenees  :  Sullivan,  Nov.  '82  {Bryum  austro- 
nutans),  Stivling.  Moyston  :  Geo.  Miller,  hb.  Melb.  — N.S.W., 
Blue  Mtns.  :  Saunders,  hb.  Melb.  Mt.  Kosciusko  :  Forsyth,  Jan. 
'99  (also  La  Perouse,  Nov.  '99).  Katoomba  Falls,  Jan.  '02, 
Gordon  Falls,  Leura,  Budong  Falls,  Tumut  District :  Watts. 

719.  P.  SERiCEA  (Hpe.  et  CM.  Linn.  '53,  Bryum);  Lepto- 
hryum  Par.  Index.  Ed.  i.;  Bryum  {Senodictyon),  tenui- 

folium,  CM.,  Gen.  M.  p. 224.     Not  in  Broth.  Bryales. 
Tas.,  Stuart. 

720.  P.  TENUiFOLiA  (H.f.W.,  Bryum)  Broth. 
N.S.W.,  cutting,  Cambewarra  Mtn.  :  Watts,  May,  '03. 

Mniobryum  (Schimp.  ex  p.)  Limpr.  '92. 

721.  Mn.  albicans  (Wahlenb.,  Mnium)  Limpr. 
Cosmopolitan,  esp.  in  mountainous  regions. — Vic  ,  Upper  Ovens 
River  :  Mrs.  McCann  and  Prof.  Dickie,  hb.  Melb. 

722.  Mn.  tasmanicum  Broth.,  A.M.  '93,  No.  42. 

Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  on  wet  banks  of  streams,  Falls  track,  St. 
Crispin's,  and  Newtown  Falls  :  Weymouth.  Coll.  also  by  T.  B. 
Moore. 

Brachymenium  Schwgr.  1823. 

723.  B.  acithecium  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p. 203,  Bryum,  Dicra- 
nohryum). 

Vic,  Grampians,  Moyston  :  Sullivan,  Oct.  '82.     Stirling. 
9 


124  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

B  R  A  c  II  Y  M  E  N  I  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

724.  B.    CHLOROBLASTUM    (CM.,  Gen.   M.   p. 203,    Bryiun, 
Dicranohryum). 

N.S.W.,  on  stones  under  plank  bridge,  Moore  Park,  Sydney  : 
Whitelegge,  Aug.  '91  (c.fr.). 

725.  B.   COARCTATUM  (CM.,    Bryum)   Bryol.   jav,;    Broth. 
Bryales,  fig.  41 7. 

Tas.,  Ocean  Grove:  Bastow,  '88.— N.S.W.,  brick  foundation  of 
Manse,  Hinton,  Nov.  '00,  and  on  old  brickwork,  Mosman's  Falls, 
Nov.  '00 :  Watts. 

[My  specimens  were  det.  by  Dr.  Brotherus;  but  in  Bryales  he 
gives  the  sp.  for  Java,  N.Z.  and  New  Caled.  alone.  CM.  limits 
to  Java  (Gen.  M.  p. 202).  As  B.  pilosithecium  was  found  by  my 
colleague  at  Mosman's,  the  two  mosses  may  be  identical. — 
W.W.W.] 

726.  B.  LANCEOLATUM  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas.;  Bryuin  Mitt. 
Tas.  ;  Gunn,  ?  loc. 

[In  Melb.  List  for  Tas.,  Vic,  and  W.A.] 

B.  melanothecium  is  given  in  Melb.  List,  but  this  is  a 
Samoan  sp.     See  Gen.  M.  p,203. 

727.  B.  NoViE  VALEsiiE  Broth,  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  damp  sea  cliff,  Skinner's  Head,  near  Ballina  :  Watts, 
Apl.  16,  '00,  and  later  (fine  specimens,  but  sterile). 

728.  B.  PILOSITHECIUM  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.203,  Bryum). 
N.S.W.,  on  walls  of  dam.  Ball's  Head   Bay  and  Mosman's  Bay  : 
Whitelegge,  '84  (c.fr.).     See  note  under  B.  coarctatutn. 

729.  B.  Preissianum  (Hpe.,  Ic.  M.  t.25,  Bryum)  Jaeg.  Ad. 
W.A.,  near  Fremantle  :  Preiss,  Aug.  '39.  Swan  River  :  Drum- 
mond. — Q.,  near  Alice  Springs :  C  Giles.  Also  coll.  by  Guil- 
foyle,  75.— S.A.,  towards  Rivoli  Bay  :  F.v.M.,  Oct.  '48.  Also 
River  Gawler,  hb.  Melb. — Tas.,  on  face  of  stone  wall,  Garden 
Ores.  Reservoir,  Hobart :  Weymouth,  '90. 


BY  REV.   W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         125 

Brachymbnium  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

730.  B.  SEMPERLAXUM  (CM.,  Linn.  74,  Bryum)  Jaeg.  Ad 
Q.,  Brisbane  River:  A.  Dietrich  ('67?).  Three  Mile  Scrub,  near 
Brisbane:  0.  Wild,  July,  '88.     Near  Brisbane  :  J.  H.  Simmonds. 

Plagiobrtum.     For  P.  Wildii  see  Bryum. 
Bryum  Dill.  1718,  emend.  Schimp.  1860. 

731.  B.    ABRUPTiNERViUM    CM.,   Symb.,   No.  102;    Rhodo- 
bryum,  Par.  Index,  ed.  i.  Suppl. 

N.S.W.,  Mosman's  Bay,  Hurstville,  and  Ball's  Head  Bay  : 
Whitelegge,  Sept.-Oct.  '84.  Cambewarra  :  id.  Dec.  '85.  Rich- 
mond River,  on  rocks  in  Wilson's  Creek,  Dec.  '98,  also  at  Dal- 
wood  and  several  other  places  on  the  R.  R.  '99-'02  :  Watts. 
Kiama :  Forsyth,  Dec.  '99. — Yic,  Murrumbeena  :  Reader,  Aug. 
'86. 

(a)  var.   fol.  magis  oblique  pungentibus   atque  theca 
magis  oblique  oblonga.     Perhaps  a  sep.  sp. 
Vic,  near  Melbourne  :  Reader,  '83  and  '86. 

732.  B.  AERUGiNOSUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  95. 

N.S.W.,  Ball's  Head  Bay  and  Double  Bay,  nr.  Sydney :  White- 
legge, July  and  Oct.  '84  (c.fr.). 

733.  B.  ALBOLiMBATUM  (Hpe.   et   CM.,   Linn.  '69,   Rhodo- 
hryum). 

W.A.,  Porongerup:  F.v.M.  '67.— N.S.W.,  Northwood,  Lane  Cove 
River:  Whitelegge,  Aug.-Sept.  '84  (c.fr.).  In  hb.  Melb.  the 
N.S.W.  record  is  questioned. 

734.  B.  ALTiSETUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  132. 

Vic,  Moyston  :  Sullivan,  Oct.  '83.  Also  Stirling.  Near  Dim- 
boola  :  Reader,  Oct,  '93. 

(a)  var.  humilisetum  CM.,  ibid.;  B.  humilisetum  CM. 

in  sched. 
Vic,  with  type  :  Sullivan,  Oct.  '83. 

735.  B.  AMBLYACis  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  149. 

Vic,  Gippsland,  Stringer's  Creek  :  Tysdale,  '81.  {Bryuvn  suh- 
flavi/olium  CM.  in  herb,  and  Gen.  M.  p. 238).  Genoa  River  : 
Witherhead,  '81. 


126  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

B  R  Y  U  M  (continued).  [BryacecB. 

B.  amoenum  Wright,  sp.n.,  in  sched.  to  Tech.  Mus. 
Syd.,  coll.  by  Bauerlen  at  Tintenbar,  Richmond 
River,  in  Aug.  '95,  appears  to  be  B.  sublej^itothecium. 

B.  angeiophylh(,m  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

736.  B.  ANNULATUM  H.f.W. 

Vic,  Mt.  Ararat :  Sullivan,  July,  75.  [Given  inMelb.  List  for 
Tas.  only.] 

737.  B.  ARGENTEUM  L. 

Cosmopolitan.     Common  throughout  Austr.  and  Tas. 

(a)  var.  niveum  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas. 

Tas.,  ?  original  loc.  On  roof  of  church,  Hobart :  Weymouth. — 
Vic.  :  F.v.M.— N.S.W.,  Tamworth  :  Musson,  '90.  Richmond 
River,  on  rocks  at  various  places,  Sept.  '99  ff.,  in  the  Young 
District,  '03,  at  Armidale  and  on  Cambewarra  Mtn.  '03  :  Watts. 

(b)  var.  lanatum  Br.  Eur. 

N.S. W.,  on  rock,  Myocum,  Brunswick  River:  Watts,  Sept.  '97 
(c.fr.). 

[NoTB. — Dr.  C.  Mueller  regarded  the  Australian  representa- 
tives of  the  Argyro-Bryum  group  as  separate  species  from  B. 
argenteum,  and  set  up  a  B.  Hamjjeanum  from  Mt.  Ararat  in  Vic, 
and  a  B.  Bateanum  from  Mt.  Dromedary  in  N.S.W.  (leg.  Miss 
Bate,  '83).  Broth,  keeps  B.  argenteum  with  vars.  as  above.  In 
Gen.  M.,  CM.  ('01)  gives  B.  Bateanum  as  an  Argyro-Bryum,  but 
in  Symb.  ('98)  B.  Bateanum  (q.v.)  is  of  a  different  group.] 

738.  B.  ARGiLLicoLA  Broth.,  A.M.  '99,  No.  156. 
Tas.,  Port  Cygnet,  Lymington  :   Weymouth. 

B.  atrojmrpureum  Wahl.  has  been  recorded  for  Q.  and 
Vic,  but  Broth,  limits  to  Europe  and  N.  America, 
and,  with  Hagen,  makes  it  a  Mniobryum.  See 
No.  743. 

B.  attenuatum.  Name  supplied  by  Mr.  Stirling,  Vic, 
not  in  Melb.  List. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        127 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

739.  B.  AUSTRALE  Hpe.,  Ic.  M. 
"W.A.,  Swan  River:  Preiss. 

(a)  var.  minus  Hpe.,  Linn.  '52. 
N.S.W.,   Blue  Mtns.  :    F.v.M.,  hb.  Melb.     [Vic:  F.v.M.,  ace. 
to  Mitt  Cat] 

740.  B.  AusTRO-ALPiNUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  137. 

Yic,  Ballarat :  G.  Day,  '75.— N.S.W.,  Nelligen  :  W.  Bauerlen, 
'85.  Shoalhaven  River  :  Forsyth,  '99.  [Scarcely  differs  from 
B.  crassum  specifically  ace.  to  Broth.] 

741.  B.  AUSTRO-ARGENTEUM  Broth.  in  sched. 

Q.,  common  about  Brisbane,  but  rarely  in  fruit  :  H.Tryon  (c.fr.) 
herb.  Bailey. 

742.  B.  Baileyi  Broth.,  A.M.  '90,  No.  13. 

Q..  Freshwater  Creek,  Trinity  Bay,  on  stony  ground  :  Bailey,  '89. 
Bellenden  Ker  Range  :  S.  Johnson. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,. 
Maclean's  Ridges,  on  hard  ground  :  Watts,  Aug.  '99  (ster.). 
The  Eyrie,  Manly,  Jan.  '03  :  Watts,  who  also  coll.  a  var.  at 
Coraki,  Richmond  River,  Nov.  '01.  Valley  of  Waters  :  Watts, 
Apl.  '03. 

743.  B.  balanoides  Tayl.,  in  Drumm.  M.  Swan  River;  B. 
atropurpu7'eum,  Wahl.,  fid.  Mitt.,  Kew  J.  Bot.  '54. 
Broth.  Bryales  distinguishes. 

W.A.,  Swan  River  :  Drummond. 

744.  B.  Bateanum  CM.,  Symb.,  '98,  No.  126. 

N.S.W.,  Mt.  Dromedary  :  Miss  Bate,  '83,  hb.  Melb.  [See  Note 
to  No.  737.  In  hb.  Melb.  a  record  ("Port  Phillip:  French") 
may  refer  to  the  undescribed  B.  {Argyrohryum)  Bateanum.^ 

745.  B.  Baeuerleni  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  136. 
N.S.W.,  the  Clyde  :   W.  Bauerlen,  Oct.  '86. 

746.  B.   BiLLARDiERi  Schwgr.;  Rhodohryum,  Par. 

Tas.,  frequent :  Archer  (Cheshunt),  Gunn  (Yorktown),  Hooker, 
Stuart,  Mossman  (Wellington  Falls),   Bastow,  Weymouth  (Old 


128  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

B  R  Y  U  M  (coyitiimed).  [Bryacece. 

Beach)  et  al.— Vic,  Alps:  F.v.M.,  Stirling.  Latrobe  River: 
F.V.M.— S.A.,  Lofty  Ranges:  F.v.M.,  Aug.  '50  (var.  cijgnicoUum). 
N.S.TV.,  Tomah  :  Cunningham. — A  W.A.  record  in  PL  Preiss. 
becomes  B.  pallenticoma,  CM.,  sp.n.  (q.v.). 

747.  B.   BiMCM  Schreb. 

A  Northern  Hemisphere  sp.  — Tas.,  Cheshunt :  Archer.  Huon 
Rd.  :   Bastow.     "  Turnip  Fields,"  Mt.  Wellington  :   Weymouth. 

748.  B.   BLANDUM  H.f.W.;  Fl.  Ant.  and  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '44. 
Tas.  :  Gunn  ("scanty  and  imperfect  specimens" — Fl.Tas.).     Guy 
Fawkes  Rivulet:    Weymouth. — N.S.W.,   Budong  Falls,    Tumut 
District,  in  running  stream,  3000' :   Watts,  Mch.  '0-4. 

(a)  var.  luridum  H.f.W.,  Fl.Tas. 
Tas.:  Gunn. 

749.  B.  brachyaris  CM.,  in  Mitt.  Cat.  (name). 

Vic,  Sources  of  Yarra.  Cardie's  River,  Dec.  '73,  and  Apollo  Bay : 
F.v.M. 

750.  B.  BRACHYCLADULUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  135. 
N.S.W.,  Lane  Cove,  Sydney  :  De  Camara,  in  hb.  Melb.  '81  (c.fr. 
supramat.  et  juv.). 

751.  B.  BRACHYTHECiELLA  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  120. 
N.S.W.,  Mosman's  Bay:  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '84  (c.fr.).     Penshurst: 
E.  Cheel,  '99.     Wentworth  Falls,  June,  '99,  and  Jamieson  Valley, 
Aug.   '99  :    Forsyth.       Wentworth    Falls    and    Govett's    Leap  : 
Watts,  '03. 

752.  B.  BREViCAULE  Hpc,  Linn.  '70. 

W. A.,  Preiss  coll.  No.2464.  Porongerup:  F.v.M.  [CM.,  Linn. 
"72,  changes  the  name  to  B.  7nac)'opelma  CM.,  on  account  of  B. 
brevicaule  Schimp.,  and  alters  Hampe's  description.  Broth, 
drops  Schimper's  name  and  retains  Hampe's.  See  also  No.  780]. 
B.  brevicoma.     See  No.  777. 

753.  B.  BREViRAMULOSUM  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '76,  Rhodohryum). 
Vic,    Mt.    Ararat,   '75,   and   Mt.    William,  '87  :     Sullivan    and 
Stirling.— N.S.W.,  Lane  Cove,  Sydney:  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '85 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        129 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

(c.fr.). — Tas.,  old  log,  Millhouse's  Falls,  Huon  Rd.  :  Weymouth, 
'93. _Q.  :  teste  Melb.  List. 

754.  B.  BRUNNEiDEXs  CM.,  Svmb.  '98,  No.  150. 
Vic,  Gippsland,  Genoa  River:  \Yitherliead,  '81. 

755.  B.   c^spiTicioiDES   CM.,  Symb.  "98,  Xo.  116;   Broth. 
Bryales,  fig.  440. 

Tas.,  West  Coast,  Feb.  '90,  Queen's  River  Rd.,  Macquarie  Har- 
bour, '91,  Hobart  Waterworks,  '92  :  Weymouth. 

756.  B.  C.ESPITICIUM  L. 

Cosmopolitan,  though  apparently  rare  in  S.  Hemisphere. — Tas., 
dry  ground,  Hobart  :  Gunn.  Port  Sorrell :  Archer.  Also  coll. 
by  Weymouth. 

(a)  var.  ckixitcm  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas. 
Tas.,  ]  loc. 

B.  callicostatum  CM.     See  note  after  Xo.  832. 

757.  B.  calodictyon  Broth,  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  many  places  near  Young,  generally  in  damp  banklets : 
Watts,  Sept.  "03  ff. 

B.  Campbellice  CM.     See  note  after  Xo.  832. 

B.  camptothecium  Tayl.     See  No.  758. 

B.  Ca7?ipi/Iopus.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

758.  B.    campylothecium   Tayl.,    Lond.    J.    Bot.  '46;    B. 
camptothecium  Tayl.  in  Mitt.  Cat. 

W.A.,  Swan  River  :  Drummond.  Albany :  hb.  Melb. — Tas., 
frequent  :  Stuart,  Bastow  (Proctor's  Rd.),  Weymouth  (Kangaroo 
Pt.  and  Old  Beach),  Watts  (St.  Crispin's).— Yic,  Mt.  WiUiam  : 
F.v.M.  E.  Gippsland  :  C  Walter.— S. A.,  Lofty  Range  :  F.v.M. 
(Lyndoch  Valley). 

B.  capillar e  L.  This  N.  Hemisphere  sp.  is  recorded 
in  Fl.  Tas.  ("rocks,"  leg.  Oldfield,  "specimens 
few  and  imperfect ").  Broth.  Bryales  does  not 
recognise  this  sp.  in  Austr.  or  Tas. 


130  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

B.  capillaripes  CM.,  and  B.  capitellatum  CM.     See 

note  after  No.  832. 
B.  catenulatum  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

759.  B.  CHLORORHODON  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  154. 
Vic,  on  sandy  soil  in  woods,  Dimboolashire :  Reader,  '96. 

760.  B.  CHRYSONEURON  CM.,  Bot.  Zeit.  '51;  B.  duriusculum 
H.f.W.,  Fl.N.Z. 

Vic,  CobberasMtns.:  F.v.M.  Alps:  Stirling. — Tas.,  Bastow. — 
N.S.W.,  Illawarra:  Johnson,  '75.  Parramatta :  F.v.M.  Rich- 
mond River  :  De  Camara.  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers,  on 
old  Platyceria  and  burnt  logs  at  several  places  :  Watts,  '96  £f. 
Lane  Cove  :  Forsyth,  '98.  Tweed  River  :  Goldsmid,  Aug.  '99, 
herb.  Syd. 

B.  clavatum.     See  No.  767. 

B.  Commersonii  (Schwgr.)  is  recorded  in  Melb.  List, 
for  Q.  (Logan  River:  Scortechini)  and  for  N.S.W. 
Broth.  Bryales  limits  it,  as  Rhodohryum  Commer- 
sonii (Schwgr.)  Par.,  to  the  E.  African  Islands. 
B.  co7iostomoides.     See  note  after  No.  832. 
B.  coronato-affine.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

76L     B.  CORONATUM  Schwgr.;  Broth.  Bryales,  fig.439. 
No  actual  record;    but   Broth.    Bryales   says    it   is  distributed 
over  the  whole  temperate  and  tropical  zone,  and  thinks  B.  sub- 
atropurpureum  (q.v.)  is  identical  with  it. 

var.  m,inus  Hpe.,  PL  Preiss.     See  No.  799. 

762.  B.  CRAssixNERVE  H.f.W.,  Fl.N.Z. 

Vic,  Munyang  Mtns.:  F.v.M.  '55.  Alps.:  Stirling.— Tab.,  teste 
Paris. 

763.  B.  CRASSUM  H.f.W.,  Fl.N.Z. 

Tas.,  Cheshunt :  Archer.  New  Country  and  Risdon  :  Hooker. 
Hobart :  Weymouth.  Also  coll.  by  Gunn,  Bastow,  et  al. — Vic, 
Mt.  Hotham,  Austr.  Alps.  :   F.v.M.  and  Stirling,  hb.  Melb. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTEK  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        131 

B  R  y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

764.  B.  CREBERRiMUM  TayL,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '46. 

W.A.,  Swan  River:  Drummond. — N.S.W.,  Illawarra  :  Kirton. 
Mt.  Dromedary :  Reader.  Lane  Cove  and  Mt,  Seaview :  Forsyth, 
'97-8. — Vic,  Glenelg  River,  Bunyip  Creek,  Sealer's  Cove:  F.v.M. 
Delegate  River,  Gippsland  :  Ed.  Merratz,  '87. — Tas.,  nr.  Rich- 
mond, '88,  and  on  wet  bank,  the  Nut,  Circular  Head,  '92 : 
Weymouth.— S. A.,  teste  Melb.  List. 

765.  B.  CRENATiDENs  CM.,  Gcn.  M.,  p.238. 

N.S.W.,   Cambewarra  :    Whitelegge,    Dec.    '85.      King's    Falls, 
Alstonville,  Richmond  River :  Watts,  Sept.  '99. 
B.  crispatum.     See  Rhodobryum. 

766.  B.  cuPULATUM  CM.,  Linn.'71-3;  Gen.  M.  p.208. 
S.A.,  Brown    Hill    Creek,   St.    Vincent's    Gulf:    F.v.M.— Vic, 
Murrumbeena  :  Reader,  Aug. '86. — Tas.:  Weymouth. — N.S.W., 
Parramatta  Rd.,  Leichhardt,  Sydney  :   Watts,  Jul}^  '03.     Port 
Phillip  :  C  French,  '86. 

767.  B.  CURVICOLLUM  Mitt,  in  Hdbk.  N.Z.  Fl.;  B.  clavatum 
H.f.W. 

Tas.  :  Archer,  Gunn,  et  al.  Claremont :  Weymouth.  Newtown 
Rivulet :  Watts,  '95. 

B.  dichotomum  Hedw.,  given  in  Melb.  List  for  W.A., 

Tas..   and    Vic,   is   restricted  by  both   CM.   and 

Broth,  to  N.Z.     See  No.  799. 

768.  B.  dilatato-marginatum  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  144. 
N.S.W.,  Cambewarra  :  Whitelegge,  Dec.  '85  (c.fr.).     Brunswick 
River,    Myocum,   Sept.   '97,   and    Heath,   E.  Ballina,   Richmond 
River,  '99  :  Watts. 

769.  B.  DoBsoNiANUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  157. 
Tas.,  Dead  Island  :  Judge  Dobson,  '84. 

B.  duriuscidiivi.     See  No.  760. 

770.  B.  ERYTHROCARPOIDES  Hpe.  ct  CM.,  Linn.  '55. 
S.A.,  Cataracts,  Lofty  Range  :  F.v.M. — Vic,  Sealer's  Cove  and 
Avon,   Gippsland:  F.v.M.— N.S.W.,    Cambewarra:  Harris,  '85, 


132  CENSUS    MU8C0RUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

Watts, '03.  Richmond  River :  Stackhouse,  hb.  Melb.  Richmond 
and  Brunswick  Rivers  at  many  places  on  stones,  earth,  burnt 
wood,  etc.  :  Watts,  '96  ff.  Mittagong  :  Miss  Watts,  '03.  Blue 
Mtns.,  Govett's  Leap,  '03  :  Watts.— Tas.,  "  Gentle  Annie," 
Hobart  Waterworks  :  Weymouth,  '92.  [Broth.  Bryales  thinks 
scarcely  differs  specifically  from  B.  erythrocarpum  Schwgr.,  an 
European  sp.,  which  is  recorded  for  W.  A.  (Swan  River :  Preiss, 
'39)  and  N.S.W.  (Ash  Island  :  Mrs.  Forde,  hb.  Melb.)]. 
B.  erythrocarpum.     See  No.  770. 

771.  B.  ERYTHROPYXis  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  143. 

Vic,  Hume  River:  Miss  Campbell  (type). — N.S.W.,  Cambe- 
warra  :  Whitelegge,  '85,  Watts,  '03.  Appin,  National  Park,  La 
Perouse,  Jamieson  Valley,  Warrumbungle  Ranges,  etc.:  Forsyth, 
'98  ff.,  hb.  Sydney.  Jenolan  Caves  :  Blakely,  '98,  hb.  Syd. 
Stewart's  Brook  :  Maiden,  '99.  Richmond  River  :  Watts,  '00  ff. 
Tamworth:  D.  A.  Porter,  '00.  Gray's  Gap,  Nowra  '03,  nr.  Young 
'03,  Eyrie,  Manly,  '03,  Gully,  Lof tus,  '03  :  Watts.  Nr.  Mayfield, 
Nowra  :  H.  Monaghan,  '03. 

(a)  var.  minor  Broth. 
N.S.W. ,   stones   and   earth,   Newrybar,    Brooklet  and    Pearce's 
Creek,  Richmond  River:  Watts,  Dec.  '99. 

B.  eximium  Mitt,  is  recorded  for  N.S.W.  in  hb.  Melb., 
leg.    Camara,    Richmond   River.      Broth.    Bryales 
restricts  to  N.Z. 
B.  extenuat^iin.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

772.  B.  FiLiCAULE  Broth,  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  wet  sea  cliff.  Skinner's  Head,  nr.  Ballina  :  Watts,  April, 
'00  ff.  (ster.). 

B.  flaccidifolium  Hpe.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

B.  flaccidisetum  Hpe.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

773.  B.  FLAYiFOLiUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  151. 
Vic,  Gippsland,  nr.  Moe  River;  Luehmann,  '81. 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         133 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

774.  B.  Gambierense  CM.,   Linn.   71-3;   Broth.   Bryales, 
fig.439. 

S.A.,  Mt.  Gambler:  F.v.M.— Vic,  ?  loc:  F.v.M.  Moyston  : 
Sullivan, '82  and  '87.  Towards  Dandenongs :  Luehmann.  Dim- 
boolashire  :  Reader,  '93  and  *00. — Tas.,  on  ground,  Lymington, 
Port  Cygnet,  '89,  and  at  Carlton  and  Blackman's  Bay:  Weymouth. 

(a)  var.  nanum  CM. 
Yic,  Sandy  desert,  Wimmera  :  Reader,  Sept.  '84. 

775.  B.  globulare  Hpe.     .     .     .     CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.238. 
Yic,  Pyer's  River  :  teste  CM.  I.e.     Mt.  Macedon  :  Miss  Camp- 
bell.     Mt.    Arapiles:    Reader,    Aug.   '96. — N.S.W.,    Richmond 
River,  Rous  Falls,  '98,  nr.  Ballina,  '01,  Mayfield,  nr.  Nowra,  '03, 
Mt.  Duval,  etc.,  nr.  Arinidale,  '03  :  Watts. 

B.  Hampeanujn  CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.217,  "das  Gegenstiick 

zu  B.  leucophi/llum."     See  No.  737. 
B.  humilisetuni  CM.     See  No.  734  var. 
B.  humipetens  CM.     See  Rhodohryum. 

776.  B.  iMMARGiNATUM  Broth.,  A.M.  '93,  No.  45. 

Q.,  Mt.  Perry  :  J.  Keys.  — N.S.W.,  Oyster-shell  bank.  Racecourse, 
Ballina :   Watts,  '00. 

777.  B.  iN^QUALE  Tayl.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '48. 

W.A.,  Swan  River:  Drummond. — Vic,  Mt.  William  :  Sullivan, 
'82,  Stirling— S.  A.,  Lofty  Range:  hb.  Melb.— ?  Tas.  In  hb. 
Melb.  a  specimen  coll.  by  Stuart  in  '50,  and  given  as  B.  brevicoma, 
sp.n.,  is  said  to  be  "  B.  inaequali  affinis." 

B.  incanifolium  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

778.  B.  INTERMEDIUM  (Ludw.)  Brid. 

European,  American,  etc. — Tas.,  turf  banks,  Glen  Leith:  Hooker. 
Kangaroo  Pt.  :  Miss  Eva  Brookes,  '86. 

779.  B.  iscHYRORHODON  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  146. 
N.S.W.,  Clarence  River:   Wilcox,  Nov.  '75. 


134  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

780.      B.  ITKRATUM  Par.  Index;  B.  macropelma  CM.,  Linn. 
72  (not  Syn.  i.  275)  and  Gen.  M.  p. 209  (B.  hrevicaule 
Hpe.,  fid.  CM.). 
W.A.,  "  loc:  Preiss,  '39  ca.     Porongerup  :  F.v.M. 

[Apparently  this  =  ^.  hrevicaule  Hpe.  (see  CM.,  Linn.  72),  but 
Broth,  retains  the  two  sp.] 

78L     B.  L^viGATULUM  Broth.,  A.M.  '98,  No.  117. 
Tas.:  Weymouth. 

782.  B.   l^vigatum    H.f.W.,    Lond.    J.    Bot.    '44;    Broth. 
Bryales,  fig.445. 

Tas.,  coll.  Lawrence,  Archer  (wet  rocks,  Cheshunt),  Gunn,  T.  B. 
Moore,  Bastow  (Newtown  Falls,  Oct.  '86),  Weymouth. 

783.  B.  leptopelma  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  115. 

N.S.W.,  Flatrock  Creek,  N.  Shore,  Sydney :  Whitelegge,  Aug. 
'84  (c.fr.). 

784.  B.    LEPTOTHECIUM   Tayl.,    Phytol.  '44;    B.  truncorum 
H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas.;  Rhodohryum,  Par.  Index,  Ed.l. 

Throughout  E.  Austr.  and  Tas.,  but  more  frequent  in  S.  latitudes. 
Tas.,  as  B.  truncorum  recorded  in  Fl.  Tas.  for  Cheshunt  (Archer). 
Penquite,  South  Huon  (Gunn,  Oldfield).  Also  coll.  by  Mossman, 
Weymouth,  et  al. — Q.,  Toowoomba  :  Hartmann. — N.S.W.,  Par- 
ramatta :  F.v.M.  Clarence  River,  '96,  Richmond  River,  several 
places,  '99  ff.,  Gray's  Gap,  Nowra,  and  Valley  of  Waters:  Watts. 
Tweed  River  :  Goldsmid.  Jenolan  Caves :  Malthouse.  Nr. 
Sydney  and  in  Valley  of  Waters  :  Forsyth. — Vic,  Sealer's  Cove: 
F.v.M.  Moyston,  etc.:  Sullivan  and  Stirling.  Dandenongs : 
A.  G.  Campbell. 

(a)  var.  alpinum. 
Vio.,  Austr.  Alps  :  F.v.M.  '55. 

var.  extenuatum.     See  No.  836. 

785.  B.  LEPTOTHRix  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  128. 
Q.,  Trinity  Bay;  Karsten,  '81. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.    135 

B  R  Y  u  M  (co7it'inued).  [BryacecB. 

B.  leucocanthum  Hpe.  Recorded  for  Brisbane  River, 
but  Broth.  Bryales  limits  to  Lord  Howe  Island. 
So  also  CM.,  Gen.  M. 

786.  B.  LEUCOTHECiUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  152. 

Vic,  Grampians :  hb.  Melb.  '81.  Mt.  William :  Sullivan,  Oct. 
78  and '83  ("all  over  the  district").  In  Melb.  List  recorded 
also  for  N.S.W.  and  Q. — apparently  in  error. 

787.  B.  LONCHONEURUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  121. 
N.S.W.,   Richmond   River  :   Stackhouse,  '81,  hb.  Melb.     [Very 
nearly  related  to  B.  erythrocarpoides^  tid.  Broth.  Bryales]. 

788.  B.  LuEHMANNiANUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  140. 
Vic,  Fernshaw,  Upper  Yarra  River  :  Luehmann,  Jan.  '81,  mixed 
with  Dawsonia  longiseta  Hpe. 

B.  'macropehna  CM.     See  No.  780. 

B.  madoriculum  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

789.  B.  MicRORHODON  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  156. 

Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  St.  Crispin's  track,  Nov.  '90,  and  Kangaroo 
Point,  Oct.  '90  :  Weymouth. 

790.  B.  MiCROSPORUM  Broth.,  A.M.  '99.     No.  153. 
Tas.,  Peppermint  Bay,  Mason's  Creek  :  Weymouth. 

791.  B.  MiCROTHECiUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  129. 
N.S.W.,  Ball's  Head  Bay,  Sydney  :  Whitelegge,  Aug.  '84  (c.fr.). 

B.  Mielichhoferia  CM.     See  Pohlia. 

792.  B.  MiNUTissiMUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  114. 

Q.,  Brisbane,  N.  Quay :  Tryon,  Aug.  '90.  [Very  nearly  related 
to  B.  erythrocarpum^  fid.  Broth.  Bryales]. 

793.  B.  MULTiCAULE  Tayl.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '46. 
W.A.,  Swan  River:   Drummond. 

P,  nanoides  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

B.  nano-torquescens  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 


136  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [BryacecB. 

794.  B.  OBCONICUM  Hsch.;  CM.,  Syn.  i.  282. 

This  Europ.  and  N.  Amer.  sp.  is  recorded  in  Fl.  Tas.  for  Tas., 
Circular  Head  (Gunn),  but  with  note  "  specimens  small  and 
imperfect." 

795.  B.  OBLONGiFOLiUM  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '60,  Hypnum)  CM., 
Gen.  M.  p. 234;  Amhlystegium,  Mitt.  Cat. 

Tas.,  in  water  in  middle  of  South  Esk  River  (ster.)  :  1  Gunn. — 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  River:  teste  CM.,  I.e.  [Records  seemingly 
confused.  CM.,  I.e.,  gives  S.  Esk  River,  Vic,  and  says  that 
Hampe  received  it  later  from  the  Richmond  River,  N.S.W.,  and 
from  Tas.  Broth.  Bryales  thinks  it  scarcely  differs  from  B. 
hlandum\. 

796.  B.  oviCARPUM  Broth.,  A.M.  '99,  No.  155. 
Tas.,  Hobart,  on  earth  :  Weymouth. 

797.  1  B.  PACHYPOMA  Mont. 

N.S.W.,  Wilson's  Creek,  Richmond  River:  Watts,  Aug.  '98. 
Named  by  Dr.  Brotherus  with  hesitation.  The  sp.  belongs  to 
Java. 

798.  B.  PACHYPOMATULUM  Broth.,  A.M.  '99,  No.  157;  B. 
inicropachypoma  Broth,  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  sea  cliff,  Black  Head,  '97  ff.  (ster.), 
Blue  Mtns.,  wet  rocks  above  ladders.  Valley  of  Waters,  Ap.  '03 
(c.fr.)  :  Watts. 

B.  pachypyxis  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

799.  B.  PACHYTHECA  CM.,  Syn.  i.  307;  B.  dichotomum 
Hedw.,  tid.  Mitt.  Cat.,  and  B.  halanoides  Tayl.  (Broth, 
keeps  distinct);  B.  coronatum  var.  minus  Hpe.  in 
Preiss,  PL  N.  Holl. 

Throughout  Austr.  and  Tas.,  on  earth,  old  brickwork,  etc.,  very 
rarely  on  trees  mixed  with  Tortulse.  CM.  limits  to  W.A.,  and 
makes  the  Eastern  plant  B.  pachythecioides,  sp.n.  Broth,  returns 
B.  pachytheca  for  Vic,  N.S.  W.  (many  places,  including  N.  and  S. 
Coasts,  Cobar  (Bauerlen),  Young,  etc.)  and  Tas.  Very  variable 
in  appearance. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        137 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

(a)  var.  crassinerve  (H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas.,fol.  angustiori- 
bus  nervo  crassiore). 

Tas.,  1  loc,  leg.  Gunn. 

(b)  var.  INFLATUM  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas. 
Tas.,  1  loc,  leg.  Oldfield. 

B.  pachythecioides.     See  No.  799. 

800.  B.  PALLENTicoMA  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  139;  B.  Billar- 
dierl  var.  Hpe.,  PI.  Preiss. 

W.A.,  Swan  River  :  Preiss. 

801.  B.  peraristatum  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  153. 

Vic,  1  loc,  hb.   Melb.— S.A.,  Clarendon  :  Tepper,  hb.  Melb.  '81. 

— N.S.W.,  Tumbleton   and   Memagong,   nr.   Young,    Sept.  '03  : 

Watts. 

B.  piligerum  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832.  . 

802.  B.  PiMPAM^  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  119;  B.  Wildii  CM. 
olim  in  Hb. 

Q.,  Pimpama:  C  Wild,  Aug.  '87.— N.S.W.,  Cutting,  Cambe- 
warra  Mtns.,  May,  '03:  Watts.  Kangaroo  Valley  Rd.,  May,  '03: 
Miss  Amy  Monaghan. 

803.  B.  PLEBEJUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  127. 
Vic,  Port  Phillip  :  French,  '83,  hb.  Melb. 

804.  B.  poHLi^opsis  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  155. 
Vic,  Moyston  :  Sullivan,  Oct.  '83. 

B.  prui7iosum  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

805.  B.  PSBUDO-PALLESCENS  Hpe.  et  CM.  in  Mitt.  Cat. 
Vic,  Gippsland,  Cobberas  Mtns.  and  Mitta  Mitta  :  F.v.M.  '54  ff. 
Glenelg  River  :  Wilhelmi,  hb.  Melb.— N.S.W.,  teste  Melb.  List. 

806.  B.  pusiLLUM  Broth.,  A.M.  '90,  No.  12. 

Q.,  Helidon,  on  bark  of  tree  sparsely  :  Wild,  Dec.  '88.— N.S.W., 
Richmond  River,  on  trees  nr.  Ballina,  Aug.  '98  (ster.),  on  stone, 
Brooklet,  and  on  Cycad,  Park  Gray's  Island,  M  ay,  '00  :  Watts, 
The  Glen,  Lawson,  Ap.  '03  :  Watts. 


138  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

807.  B.  PYROTHECiUM  Hpe.  et  CM.,  Linn.  '53. 

From  mcany  parts  of  Vic.  (F.v.M.  '54,  Stirling,  et  al.)  and  N.S.W. 
(N.  and  S.  Coasts,  Blue  Mtns.,  New  England,  Young,  etc.). 
Frequent  in  Tas.  (Taylor,  Weymouth,  et  al.).  In  hb.  Melb.  is  a 
record  from  Albany,  W.A.     King  IsL:  A.  G.  Campbell,  '02. 

808.  B.  ROBUSTUM  Hpe.,  Linn.  '59-'60;  Rhodohryum,  Par. 
Index,  Ed.  i. 

Vic,  Tarwin  Rirer  :  F.v.M.     East  Gippsland  :  Merrall.      Loutit 

Bay:  Luehmann.      Alps:   Stirling. — S.A.,  Mt.  Gambier :  teste 

Tate,  Report  Roy.  Soc.  S.A.  '80-'8L— N.S.W,  Mt.  Dromedary  : 

Reader.     Richmond  River,  on  rocks,  Marshall's  Falls  :  Watts, 

Apl.  '96. 

B.  roseodens  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

B.  rotundum  Hpe.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

?  B.  ruhellum  H.f.W.     (A  doubtful  record) 
Q.,  Moreton  Bay  :  1  Cheelman,  hb.  Melb.— N.S.W.,  teste  Melb. 
Liet. 

809.  B.  RUBiGiNOsuM  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas. 
Tas.,  wet  places  :  Gunn  (ster.). 

810.  B.  RUFESCENS  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas. 

Vic,  1  loc.  :  F.v.M.  Gippsland  :  Mrs.  Murray.  Upper  Ovens 
River  and  Snowy  Creek,  nr.  Buffalo  Range  :  Mrs.  McCann,  '81. 
Studley  Park,  nr.  Melbourne:  Reader,  '83. — Tas.,  Hooker 
iHobart  and  nr.  Risdon),  Gunn,  Weymouth. 

(a)  var.  brevifolium  H.f.W.,  Fl   Tas. 
Tas.  :  Gunn  and  Oldfield. 

(b)  var.  MAMMILLATUM  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas. 

Tas.,  by  seaside.  Port  Esperance,  Penquite  :  Gunn.  Also  coll. 
Lyall. 

811.  B.  suBiENEUM  Hpe.  et  CM.,  Linn.  '53. 

Vic,  River  Yarra:  F.v.M.  Mt.  Arapiles:  Reader,  '96.— W. A.: 
A.  Oldfield  ?,  herb.  Melb. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        139 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

812.  B.  SUBATROPURPUREUM  CM.,  Linn.  71-3. 
Q.,  Brisbane  River :  A.  Dietrich,  '64,  Slater  and  J.  H.  Simmonds 
(One  Tree  Hill,  Aug.  '87).  Dawson  River :  Musson.  Near 
Beenleigh:  Wild,  June,  '87. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  on  log 
and  decaying  fern,  Alstonville,  Apl.  '96  (c.fr.),  and  on  ground, 
rocks,  etc.,  at  several  places,  later,  also  on  Oycad  and  ground, 
Nowra,  May,  '03,  nr.  Young,  '03,  Blackheath,  Govett's  Leap,  '03: 
Watts.    [Broth.,  Bryales  thinks  this  sp.  probably  =  B,  coronatum.] 

(a)  var.  minus  Broth. 
Q.,  Mt.  Perry  :  J.  Keys. 

B.  suh campy lothecium  Broth.     See  note  after  No.  820. 
B.  suhcrisjjatum  CM.     See  No.  836. 

813.  B.  suBcupuLATUM  CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.209. 
N.S.W.,   Mosman's   Bay':  Whitelegge,  '91.      The  Falls,  Nowra, 
May,  '03,  and  Cliffs,  Valley  of  Waters,  Apl.  '03  :   Watts. 

B.  subdichotomum  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

814.  B.   SUBERYTHROCARPULUM    Broth.    in    sched.    '99;    B. 
erythy'ocarpulum  Broth.,  MS. 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  on  wet  rocks,  Shaw's  Bay,  Oct.  '96 
(c.fr.),  on  wet  cliffs  of  river  bank,  Wardell,  Dec.  '96,  and  in 
Wilson's  Creek,  Aug.  '98  :  Watts. 

815.  B.  suberythrocarpumCM  ,  Bot.  Zeit.  '56;  B.  erythro- 
carpon  var.  australis  Hpe. 

W.A.,  Rottnest :  Preiss.      Porongerup  :  Dr.  Rothlich,  '67. 
B.  suhfasciculare  Hpe.     See  No.  816. 

816.  B.  subfasciculatum  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '76,  Rhodohryum); 
B.  suhfasciculare  Hpe.  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.  p. 233. 

Q.,  subtrop.  E.  Austr.  (S.  Queensland):  Eaves. — N.S.W.,  Clifton: 
Whitelegge,  Aug.  '91,  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers,  at 
many  places,  '96  ff.,  and  at  Bulli  Pass,  Nov.  '95,  Mt.  Duval,  '03  : 

Watts, 

B.  suhjiavi folium.     See  No.  735. 

B.  subinclinatum.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

B.  sublcevigattim  Broth.     See  note  after  No.  ^'6k^s /rS*^'^'  •'*^o: 


10 


H  Y 


130 


^Ai 


140  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  ^Bryacece. 

817.  B.  suBLEPTOTHECiUM  CM.,   Rev.  Bry.  '76,  Gen.  M., 
p.  230;  Rhodohryum,  Par.  Index,  Ed.  i. 

N.S.W.,  nr.  Sydney:  Kayser.  Richmond  River:  Camara,  '80 
or '81.  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers,  at  many  places:  Watts, 
'96  ff.  Tamworth  :  Musson,  '90  Casino  :  D.  A.  Porter,  '98. 
Warrumbungle  Ranges  :  Forsj'th,  '99.  Yic,  ?  loc:  Mrs.  Martin 
(Miss  Campbell).  Alps  :  Stirling.  —  Q.,  Burpengary  :  Wild,  '88. 
Nr.  Brisbane:  Simmonds,  '91. 

B.  suhlonginervium  Geh.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

818.  B.  SUBOLIVACEUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  147. 
N.S.W.,  the  Clyde  :   Bauerlen,  Oct.  '84.     Richmond  and  Bruns- 
wick Rivers,  many  places  :   Watts,  '96  ff. — Q.,  Petrie's  Quarries, 
Brisbane  :  Tryon  (date  ?). 

f.  fol.  argutius  serratis,  Broth. 
N.S.W.,  in  scrub,  Myocum,  Brunswick  River  :   Watts,  Sept.  '97 
(c.fr.). 

819.  B.  suBPACHYPOMA  Hpc.,  Linn.  '69-'70. 
Q.,  Rockingham  Bay  :  Dallach}',  '69. 

B.  subpilosum.     See  note  after  No.  832. 

820.  B.    SUBROTUNDIFOLIUM    Jacg.,    Ad.    ii.   707;    Argyro- 
Bryurri  subrotitndum  Hpe.,  Linn.  '76. 

Vic,  Mt.  Ararat :  Sullivan  &  Stirling,  '75-6.  Mt.  Macedon  : 
Mrs.  Martin. — Q.,  teste  Mell).  List  (prob.  error). 

821.  B.  SUBTOMENTOSUM  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '69-'70,  Ehodobryum). 
Vic,  S.  Gippsland,  Childer's  Farm  :  C  French,  hb.  Melb.  Nr. 
Melbourne  :  Adamson. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  River  :  De  Camara. 
— Q.,  Toowoomba  :  Hartmann,  '86.     Brisbane  River  :  Bailey. 

B.  suhtorqiiescens  Geh.     See  No.  825. 

822      B.  SuLLiVANi  CM.  in  Broth.,  A.M.  '93,  No.  43. 
Vic,  Mt.  William,  Moyston  :  Sullivan,  Oct.  '82  and  Nov.  '87 
(also  Stirling).     Loutit  Bay:  Sullivan,  '91.      Mt.  Granger:  C 
Walter, '91.  — Tas.,  wet  rocks,  the  Nut,  Circular  Head :  Weymouth, 
Sept.  '92. 


BY  REV.   W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         141 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

823.  B.  SYNOicuM  CM.,  Symb.  '98.  No.  131. 

N.S.W.,  Ball's  Head  Bay  and  Randwick  :  Whitelegge,  Aug.- 
Sept.  '84  (c.fr.).  Bichmond  River,  Teven,  on  stones  :  Watts, 
Sept.  '97.— Q.,  Bunya  Mtns.  :  Bailey,  May,  '85.— Vic,  Mrs. 
Martin  (Miss  Campbell),  herb.  Melb. 

824.  B.  TASMANicuM  Hpe.,  Linn.  '52. 

Tas.,  ?  loc  :  R.  Brown.  Cheshunt  :  Archer.  S.  Esk  River: 
Mossman,  C.  Stuart,  '50.  Also  coll.  by  Weymouth.-  Vic, 
Cobberas  Mtns.,  6000',  hb.  Melb.  Glenelg  River  :  Wilhelmi. 
Austr.  Alps :  hb.  Melb.  Nr.  Ballarat  :  C.  French.  Little 
Desert,  '96,  and  near  Dimboola,  '98  :  Reader. — N.S.W.,  Green 
Gulty,  Young,  Sept,  '03  :  Watts  (f.  seta  breviore),  det.  Broth. 

f.  compacta  breviseta. 
Tas.,  wall  of  Reservoir,  Garden  Ores.,  Hobart :  Weymouth. 

825.  B.  TORQUESCENS  Br.  et  Schimp.,  Br.  Eur. 

Tas.,  Cheshunt :  Archer.  Mt.  Wellington  :  Mossman.  Kan- 
garoo Pt.:  Taylor,  '86  — N.S.W.,  Parramatta  :  F.v.M.  Moss 
Vale:  hb.  Melb.  Cambewarra:  C.  Harris,  '85. — Vic,  Doncaster: 
Reader,  Aug.  '93  (B.  subtorquescens  Geh.  =  B.  torq.  var.). 

[This  subalpine,  European  species,  though  recorded  as  above, 
is  not  recognised  for  Austr.,  or  Tas  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  or  in 
Broth.,  Bryales.] 

B.  truncoruin  Brid.     See  No.  784. 

[H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas.,  etc.,  identify  Taylor's  B.  leptothecium  with 
B.  truncorurn  (Ins.  Bourbon).  Jaeg.,  Ad.  i.  gives  both  sp.  for 
N.Z.  and  Tas.  Mitt,  thinks  B.  lejotothecium  Tayl.,  should  be 
adopted  for  the  N.Z.  and  Austr.  moss,  since  its  identity  with  the 
original  B.  truncorum  is  not  established.] 

826.  B.  Tryoni  Broth.,  A.M.  '93,  No.  44. 
Q.,  S.  Brisbane,  west  end  :  Tryon,  Aug.  '90. 

B.  undulatum  is   recorded   in   hb.   Melb.  for  N.S.W. 
(leg.  Leichhardt).     Information  needed. 

827.  B.  VENTRicosuM  Dicks.,  var. 
N.S.W.,  the  Eyrie,  Manly  :  Watts,  June,  '03. 


142  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AU8TRALIEN8IUM,  II., 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).  [Bryacece. 

B.  viryatum  CM.     See  note  after  No.  832. 
B.  viridissimum  Broth.     See  note  after  832. 

828.  B.  viRiDULUM  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  148. 

N.S. W.,  Mt.  Dromedary  :  Miss  Bates,  '83.  Nr.  Sydney:  Kayser, 
hb.  Geheeb,  76.  Sydney:  WooUs,  '81.— Vic,  Port  Phillip: 
French. — Q.,  Brisbane  :  hb,  Bailey. 

829.  B.  Wallaceanum  CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  117. 

Vic,  Daylesford :  Wallace,  '80.  Omeo,  2500'-3000'  :  Stirling, 
'84. 

830.  B.  Wattsii  Broth.,  A.M.  '99,  No.  154. 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  cutting,  Bex  hill  Rd.,  Pearce's 
Creek;  stump  of  palm,  Wardell;  old  tree  stump.  Brown's  Farm, 
Alstonville  :  Watts,  '96  ff.  [Very  closely  related  to  B.  erythro- 
caYpura^  fid.  Broth.,  Bryales.] 

831.  B.  Weymouthi  Broth.,  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.228. 
Tab.,  %  loc:  Weymouth. 

832.  B.  WiLDii  (Broth.,  A.M,  '90,   No.  14,  Plagiohnjum), 
Broth.,  Bryales;  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  204. 

Q.,  Highfields  :  C  Wild,  Dec.  '88. 

Note. 
A  monograph  of  the  genus  Bryum  would  no  doubt  reduce  the 
number  of  our  Austr.   species.     In  addition   to  the  above,  the 
following  names  may  be  noted  for  the  guidance  of  students  : — 

(1)  Dr.  C  Mueller,  in  Gen.  M.,  gives  B.  angeiophyllum  CM. 
(Q.,  hb.  Bailey);  B.  callicostatum  CM.  (Tas.,  teste  CM.  I.e.);  B. 
conostomoides  CM.   (Grampians,    2000-3000',   Vic);    B.   incani- 

folium  CM.  (W.A.,  Swan  River);  B.  suhcampylotheciurri  Broth. 
(Tas.);  B.  svbhdichoiomum  CM.,  F.v.M.,  Frag.  Phyt.  xi.  (N.S.W., 
local,  not  recorded). 

(2)  In  Melb.  Herb,  and  List  the  following  occur — B.  Camjyy- 
lopiis  (N.S.W.);  B.  Campbellice  CM.  (Vic,  leg.  Miss  Campbell); 
B.  catenulatum  CM.  (Q.,  teste  hb.  Melb.);  B.  extenuatum  Brid. 
(N.S.W.,  Richmond,  River:  Camara — a  doubtful  record);  B. 
pachypyxis  CM.  {pachypyxata)  (Vic,  Mt.  Ararat,  Sullivan,  Oct. 


BY  REV.  W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        143 

B  R  Y  u  M  (continued).      ■  [Bryacem. 

'82);  B.  rotundum  Hpe.   (Vic,  Ararat);  B.  suhinclinatum  (Blue 
Mtns.,  N.S.W.);  B.  subpilosum  (Vic,  Sealer's  Cove  :  F.v.M.). 

(3)  Mr.  F.  M.  Reader  possesses  specimens  collected  by  himself 
and  named  as  follows — B.  capillaripes  CM.  (Sandy  Desert, 
Dimboolashire,  Aug.  '86);  B.  flaccidifolium  Hpe.  (hilly,  mallee 
country,  N.W.  of  Dimboola,  Wimmera,  July, '96);  B.  Jlaccidisetum 
Hpe.  (on  stumps  of  trees,  Dimboolashire,  June,  '96);  B.  madori- 
culum  CM.  (near  swamps,  Dimboolashire,  Sept.,  '97);  B.  nanoides 
CM.  (on  ground  nr.  saline  depressions,  Dimboolashire,  Aug.  '97); 
B.  7iano  torquescens  CM.  (hilly,  mallee  country,  N.W.  of  Dim- 
boola, July,  '96);  B.  pUigerum  CM.  (Mt.  Arapiles,  Aug.  '96) 
B.  pruinosum  CM.  (on  stumps  of  trees,  Dimboolashire,  June  '97) 

(4)  The  following  must  also  be  noted— ^.  coronaio-ajine  CM 
(Q  ,  Brisbane  River  :  Tryon,  hb.  Bailey);  B.  roseodens  CM.,  Rev 
Br  J.  '76  (nr.  Sydney :  Kayser.  Richmond  River :  Camara,  hb, 
Melb.)— not  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.;  B.  suhlcevigatum  Broth,  in  sched 
(N.S.W.,  Weedallion  Mtn.,  nr.  Young  :  Watts,  '03);  B.  suhlonyi 
nervium  Geh.  (N.S.W.,  Cambewarra  :  Whitelegge,  Dec.  '85);  B 
tenuicosiatum  Broth.  (German  Creek,  Richmond  River,  N.S.W. 
Watts);  R.virgatum  CM.  (in  hb.  Melb.  for  "  River  Esk:  F.v.M." 
— Tas.,  Middle  Esk  River  :  Stuart)  prob.  =  B.  oblong  if olium;  B. 
viridissimum  Broth,  in  sched.  (Q.,  Brisbane  :  Tryon). 

Rhodobryum  (Schimp.)  Hpe.,  Linn.  '70. 

833.  Rh.  crispatum  Hpe.,  Linn.  '76. 

Vic,  nr.  Cape  Otway  :  C  Walter,  '74  [CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.238, 
says  "N.S.W.,"  apparently  in  error]. 

834.  Rh.  humipetens  (CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  141,   Bryum) 
Par.  Index. 

Q.,  Gladfield  :  Gwyther.      Bailey  in  hb.  Broth.  '91. 

835.  Rh.    olivaceum    Hpe.,  Linn.    '76  ;     Broth.,    Bryales, 
fig.454;  Geh.,  Rev.  Bry.  '97. 

Q.,  "subtrop.  E.  Austr."  (S.  Qd.):  Eaves,  herb.  Melb.— N.S.W., 
Richmond  River:  Stackhouse,  '80  or  '81.  Ibid.,  North  Creek 
Rd.,  and  scrub,  E.  Ballina :  Watts,  June-Aug.  '96  ff.  (c.fr.). 
Drake :  D.  A.  Porter,  June,  '98. 


144  CENSUS  MUSCORUM  AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

Rhodobryum  (continued).  \^Bryacece. 

836.  Rh.  subscripatum  (CM.,  Symb.  '98,  No.  142,  Bryum) 
Par.  Index. 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  River:  Mrs.  Hodgkinson,  '85.  Sandhills, 
nr.  Ballina;  Myocum  (Brunswick  River),  Park  Gray's  Island,  etc.: 
Watts,  '96  ff.  Mt.  Warning  :  Guilfoyle,  '71  (Bryiim  leptothecium 
var.  extenuata  in  hb.  Melb.).— Q.,  Brisbane:  Bailey,  '87-8,  and 
Simmonds.  Woolston  Scrub  :  Wild,  Aug.  '88  (comna.  as  Bryum 
suhcrispatulum  CM.). 

Rh.  suhcrispatulum.     See  No.  836. 

Leptostomacese. 

Leptostomum  Pt.Br.,  1811. 

837.  L.  DEPiLE  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.l47. 

Vic,  Upper  Kiewa  :  Miss  Campbell,  '88  (CM.  says  "  S.A."). 

838.  L.   erectum  R.Br.,  Trans.  L.  Soc.  x.  320;  Gymnosto- 
mum  lepostomtim  Hook.,  M.  Exot. 

N.S.W.,  not  uncommon  in  mountainous  districts.  Recorded  from 
Hawkesbury  and  Grose  Rivers  (R.Br.),  ?  loc.  (Sieber),  Clarence 
River  (hb.  Melb.),  Cambewarra  (Thorpe),  Blue  Mtns.  (White- 
legge),  Jenolan  Caves  (Blakely,  hb.  Syd.),  Snowy  River  and 
Tenterfield  (Bauerlen),  Kiama  (Forsyth),  Armidale  and  Nowra 
(Watts),  Corricudgy  Mtn.  (Baker,  hb.  Tech.  Mus.).— Q.,  Cun- 
ningham's   Gap   and    Toowoomba  :     Hartmann.       Also  in  New 

Guinea. 

L.flexipile  CM.     See  No.  840. 

839      L.  gracile  R.Br.,  I.e. 
Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington  :  Bastow,  '86,  Weymouth.     [Jaeg.,  Ad.  and 
CM.,  Gen.  M.,  give  N.Z.  only  (Dusky  Bay  :  Menzies).     Broth., 
Bryales  adds  Tas.]. 

840.     L.    INCLINANS   R.Br.,  I.e.;    Gymnostomum  Hook.;    L. 

flexipile  CM.,  Bot.  Zeit.  '51,  fid.  Mitt.  Cat.  and  Broth., 

Bryales. 

Vic — N.S.W.,   Alpine   regions,    etc.       In   hb.   Melb.   there  are 

many  specimens  (inch  L.  flexipile)  coll.  by  F.v.M.  (Sealer's  Cove, 

'54),  Wilhelmi  (Grampians,  '57),  Merrall  (Mt.  Ellery,  '87),  Sulli- 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.    145 

Leptostomum  (continued).  [Leptostomacece, 

van,  Bauerlen  (Snowy  River,  '89),  C.  Walter,  et  al. — Tas.,  Mt. 
Wellington,  Western  Mtns.,  etc.,  frequent  :  many  collectors. 

(a)  var.  longiseta  Hpe.,  Linn.  '56. 
Vic,  Sealer's  Cove  :  F.v.M.  '54,  hb.  Melb. 

f.  procera. 
Tas.,  River  Henty  :  Weymouth. 

L.  macrocarpurti  (Hedw.,  M.  Frond.,  Bryum)  R.Br. 

Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington  :  R.  NeilL— N.S.W.,  Blue  Mtns.:  Woolls, 
hb.  Melb.  Genoa  River :  Bauerlen  (445). — Q.,  Toowoomba  : 
Hartmann.  [These  records  are  doubtful.  Hedwg.  gave  only 
"  in  insulis  meridionalibus."  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  believes  it  was 
received  from  Banks,  and  coll.  in  N.Z.,  not  in  Tahiti,  as  given  in 
Par.  Index,  ed.  i.  Since  found  frequently  in  N.Z.  Bescherelle 
questions  the  Tahiti  record,  and  Broth.,  Bryales,  the  Tasmanian. 
The  specimens  in  hb.  Melb.  should  be  examined.  They  are 
probably  L.  erectuni.^ 

L.  Menziesii  (Hook.)  R.Br. 
Tas.,    Mt.   Wellington,  McRobie's   Gully :  L.    Rodway,  '85,  hb. 
Melb.     [Record  doubtful.     Type  found  in  Fuegia,  and  Jaeg.,  Ad., 
CM.,  Gen.  M.,  and  Broth.,  Bryales,  limit  to  S.  America.] 

Mniaceae. 
M  N  I  u  M  (Dill,  ex  p.)  L.  emend. 

Mn.  Novce  Valesice  CM  ,  Rev.  Bry.  '76;  Mn.  JVovce 
Ilollandice,  herb.  Whitelegge:  Mn.  rostratum,  fid. 
Mitt.  Cat.,  and,  evidently.  Broth.,  Bryales. 

841.     Mn.  rostratum  Schrad. 
Cosmopol. — N.S.W.,nr.  Sydney:  Kayser.     Cambewarra:  White- 
legge, '85  (Jfn.  Novce,  Hollandioi).     New  England,  Apsley  Falls  : 
Cheel.     Nr.  Budong  Falls,  Mch.  '04  :  Watts. 

Mn.  tasmayiicum  occurs  in  Melb.  List  for  Tas.  Prob. 
=  Mn.  rostratum. 


146  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

Rhizogoniaceae. 
Hymenodon  H.f.W.  1844. 

842.  H.  piLiFERus  H.f.W.,  Fl.N.Z.  ii.  117. 

Tas.,  on  tree  ferns,  wood,  etc.,  in  gullies,  Mt.  Wellington,  Huon 
River,  Cheshunt,  etc.,  frequent. — Vic,  Sealer's  Cove, '54:  F.v.M. 
Between  Capes  Otway  and  Patterson,  '86:  C.  Walter.  Dandenong 
Ranges,  '91  :  Luehmann. 

Rhizogonium  Brid.  1827. 

843.  Rh.   alpestre   CM.,  Symb.  No.  7;    Gen.  M.  p.  142, 
Mnium. 

Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington  :  Kayser,  lib.  Melb.  '83. 

[Broth.,  Bryales  omits  this  CM  ,  Gen.  M.,  compates  it  with 
"J/ri.  gracillimum^'  Hpe.,  which,  ace.  to  Broth.,  is  a  Porotrichum. 
Hence  Rh.  alpestre  probably  becomes  Porotrichuyn  alpestre.] 

844.  Rh.    aristatum    Hpe.,   Linn.    '76  ;    Broth.,   Bryales, 
fig.466. 

Tas.,  Mtns.  towards  Lake  Pedder :  Schuster,  '70,  hb.  Melb. 
Also  coll.  by  T.  B.  Moore. 

845.  Rh.  bifarium  (Hook.,  M.  Exot.,  Hypnum)  Schimp., 
Bot.  Zeit.  '44;  Broth.,  Bryales,  fig.466. 

TaSm  Mt.  Wellington  gullies :  Oldfield,  Weymouth,  Moore,  et  al. 
— Vic,  Apollo  Bay :  hb.  Melb.  E.  Gippsland,  '69,  and  between 
Capes  Otway  and  Patterson,  '74  :  Walter. — IST.S.W.,  on  rocks, 
Fitzroy  Falls:  Whitelegge,  Oct.  '84  (ster.),  fid.  CM.,  Gen.  M., 
p.l41. 

846.  Rh.    brevifolium    Broth.,     A.M.    '90,    No.  15,   and 
Bryales,  fig. 468. 

Q.,  Bellenden  Ker,  5200',  on  rotten  wood:  Bailey,  '89.  Bellenden 
Ker  Range,  '91,  and  Mt.  Bartle  Frere,  5000',  '91  :  S.  Johnson. 
Endeavour  River,  '91  :  ?  Coll. 

847.  Rh.   distichum  (Sw.,  Hypnum)  Brid.;  Rh.  Muelleri 
Hpe.,  fid.  Hdbk.  N.Z.  FL,  and  Broth.,  Bryales. 

Tas.  and  Vic,  frequent:  F.v.M.  '54,  Archer,  Mossman,  Gunn, 
Bastow,  Weymouth,  Luehmann,  C.  Walter,  C  French,  et  al. — 
N.S.W.,  Fitzroy  Falls:  Whitelegge  (ster.).     Bulli  Pass  :   Watts, 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         147 

Rhizogonium  (continued).  [Rhizogoniaeece. 

Nov.  '95  (ster.).— Q.,  teste  Melb.  List.     First  found  by  Menzies, 
Dusky  Bay,  N.Z. 

848.  Rh.  Geheebii  CM.  in  sched.'72;  Symb.'97,No.5. 
N.S.W.,  nr.  Sydney :  Kayser.  On  logs  in  woods,  Gosford : 
Whitelegge,  Sept.  '91  (c.fr.).  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers, 
on  cedar  logs  in  scrubs  at  Myocum,  Rous,  Ballina,  Alstonville? 
etc.:  Watts,  June,  '96  ff.  (c.fr).  [At  first  det.  by  Dr.  Broth,  as 
Rh.  Nov.  Holl.^  which  does  not  seem  to  grow  on  the  northern 
rivers].  Richmond  River  :  Stackhouse,  '81  (form,  with  leaves 
more  remote). 

Rh.  gracUlinium  Hpe.      See  Porotrichum. 

Rh.  Hookeri  (CM.)  and  Rh.  M ossmannia^ium  CM. 
Many  specimens  with  these  names  (as  syns.)  are  in  Melb.  Hb. 
from  Q.,  N.S.W.,  Vic,  and  Tas.  But  all  must  apparently  be 
referred  to  Rh.  mnioides  and  vars..  q.v.  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  140, 
limits  Rh.  mnioides  to  S.  Amer.,  Rh.  Hookeri  to  Auckland  Is., 
and  Rh.  Mossmannianum  to  N.Z.  Broth.,  Bryales  omits  CM.'s 
species,  and  extends  Rh.  innioides  to  Austr.,  Tas.,  and  N.Z. 

849.  Rh.  mnioides  (Hook.,  M.  Exot.,  Hypnum)  Schimp. 
Tas.,  Western  Mtns.,  Mt.  Wellington,  etc.:  Mossman,  Archer, 
Stuart,  Bastow, ,  Weymouth,  et  al. — Vic,  Cobberas  Mtns.,  '54, 
Sealer's  Cove  and  Austr.  Alps:  F.v.M.  E.  Gippsland  :  Bauerleiu 
— N.S.W.,  Blue  Mtns.:  F.v.M.  Budong  Falls,  Tumut  Distr.; 
Watts,  Mch.  '04  (ster.).— Q.,  Pimpama  :  Wild,  '87. 

(a)  var.  contortum  H.f.  W.,  FL  Tas.;  Rh.  Hookeri  and 
Rh.  Mossmanniayiuyn,  fid.  Mitt.  Cat.  and  Hdbk. 
N.Z.Fl. 

Tas.,  c.  typ.,  Mt.  Wellington. 

(b)  var.  lutkscens  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas. 
Tas.,  c.  typ.,  Western  Mtns. 

Rh.  Mossmannianum  (CM.,  Bot.  Zt. '51).     See  above, 
Rh.  Muelleri  Hpe.,  Linn.  '46.     See  No.  847. 

850.  Rh.  Nov^  Hollandi^  Brid.;  CM.,  Sym.  i.  173. 
First  found   by  Labillardiere  in    1791    "on   the  Austr.  coasts" 


148  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

Rhizogonium  (continued).  [Bhizogoniacece. 

(teste  CM.,  Gen.  M.). — Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  etc.:  Archer, 
Bastow,  Weymouth,  Gulliver,  Watts,  et  al.  — Vic,  Dandenongs  : 
F.v.M.— N.S.W,,  ^Richmond  River:  Watts,  '96  ff.  (see  note  to 
M.  Geheehii).  Burringbar  :  Forsyth,  Nov.  '98.  Blue  Mtns., 
especially  Neate's  Glen,  Blackheath  :   Watts,  Apl.  '03. 

851.  Rh.  pakramattense  (CM.,  Syn.  ii.  225,  Mnium). 
Many  Iocs.  Recorded  in  hb.  Melb.  for  E.  coast  of  Austr.,  from 
Bellenden  Ker  in  N.Q.  to  Vic.  First  found  at  Parramatta, 
N.S.W.:  hb.  Kunze.  [Some  doubt  attaches  to  some  of 
these  records,  since  Mueller  did  not  recognise  Rh.  spiniforme^  to 
which  Rh.  parramattense  is  very  similar,  in  Austr.  Dr.  Brotherus 
returns  both  sp.  for  the  Richmond  River,  Rh.  spiniforme  being 
the  most  frequent.  He  confirms  the  following  for  Rh.  par7'a- 
mattense — Richmond  River,  Rous,  etc.  (Watts  and  Bauerlen), 
Casino  (Porter),  Minmi  and  BuUi  Pass  (Watts).] 

vars.  NANUM  (1  loc),  gracilior  (Mt.  Armit :  Pentzcke), 

and  MINUS  Hpe.(  Rockingham  Bay  :    Dallachy)  are 

recorded  in  herb.  Melb.  for  Q. 
Rh.  pellucidum.     See  No.  853. 
Rh.  plumaeforme  Hpe.     A  specimen  so  named  is  in 

hb.  Melb.   (Rockingham's  Bay,  Q.:  W.  Kellaway). 

It  appears  to  be  Mesochcete  undulata. 
Rh.  reticidatuni.     See  No.  853. 

852.  Rh.   spiniforme  (L.,   Hypnum)  Bruch,    '46;    Broth., 
Bryales,  fig.467. 

Throughout  Australia,  and  in  Tas.  (Weymouth).  Found  in 
various  tropical  and  subtrop   regions. 

(a)  var.  minor  (det.  Broth,). 

N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  Tintenbar,  May,  '96,  Coolgardie  Forest, 
Aug.  '98  (c.fr.)  :  Watts. 

(b)  var.  australe  CM  ,  M.  Schauinslandiani. 
N.S.W.,  Katoomba  Falls  :  Schauinsland,  '96-7.     [CM.  appears 
never  to  have  recognised  the  typ.  sp.  in  Austr.] 


BY  REV.   W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITBLEGGE.        149 

Rhizogonium  (coritinued).  [Ehizogoniacece. 

Eh.  spitiinerve  Brid.      A  specimen  so  named  received 

from  hb.  Bailey,  Q.,  is  evidently  Bh.  spiniforme. 
Rh.  suhhasilare.     See  No.  853. 
Iih.  taxiforme.     See  No.  855. 
Rh.  undulatum.     See  No.  854. 

GoNiOBRYUM  Lindb.  '64. 

853.  G.  PELLUCIDUM  (Mitt.,  Samoan  M.,  Photinophyllum) 
Broth.,  Bryales,  fig. 469;  Rh.  reticulatuin  Hpe.,  Linn. 
'60  (not  H.f.W.). 

Vic,  Apollo  Bay  :  F.v.M.  {Rh.  reticulat.  in  hb.  Melb.).  Between 
Capes  Otway  and  Patterson  :  Walter,  '74.  E.  Gippsland  : 
French,  '89.  Loutit  Bay  :  Luehmann,  '91. — Tas.,  nr.  Cheshunt : 
Archer.  St.  Crispin's  :  Bastow  {Rh.  suhbasilare  in  hb.  Melb.). 
Mt.  Wellington  :  Weymouth  {Rh.  subbasil.).—N.S.W.,  Delegate  : 
?  Bauerlen,  hb.  Melb. 

[Note. — Specimens  in  hb.  Melb.  on  which  Hampe  founded  his 
Rh.  reticulatum  belong  here.  G.  reticulatum  (H.f.W.)  Lindb.,  is 
limited  to  Patagonia  and  Fuegia  by  Dr.  Brotherus,  who  also 
thinks  that  presumed  specimens  of  G.  suhhasilare  from  N.Z.  and 
Tas.  are  G.  j^ellucidum.^ 

G.  reticulatum  Hpe.,  and  G.  suhhasilare,     SeeNo.853. 

MESOCH.ETE  Lindb.,  1870. 

854.  M.  UNDULATA  Lindb.  '69;  Rhizogonium,  Par.  et  al. 
N.S.W.  and  Q.,  not  infrequent  in  damp  shady  places  in  coastal 
districts.  Fine  specimens  (c.fr.),  Richmond  River:  Watts. — 
Q.,  Port  Denison  :  Welden  Birch,  '89.  South  Q.  :  Eaves,  '73. 
Toowoomba  :  Hartmann.  Pimpama  :  Wild.  Brisbane  :  Sim- 
monds. — N.S.W.,  Hurstville  :  Whitelegge.  Near  Newcastle: 
Mrs.  Forde.  Parramatta  :  F.v.M.  Mt.  Dromedary :  Reader. 
Jamieson  Yalley:  Forsyth,  '99.  Richmond  to  Brunswick  Rivers, 
Stanwell  Park,  etc.:  Watts. — Vic,  leg.  Lucas,  hb.  Melb. — S.A., 
Clarendon  River  :  Aug.  Rudder,  '82. 


150  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,  II., 

Mesochjete  (continued).  [Ehizogoniacece. 

855.  M.  TAXiFORME  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '76,  Rhizogonium). 

Q.,  Johnston  River :  Fitzalan  and  W.  Hill.  [Broth.,  Bryales 
thinks  scarcely  differs  specifically  from  M.  undulata.  Hampe, 
I.e.,  says  it  seems  more  coriaceous,  larger  and  more  thickly 
margined]. 

Aulacomniacese- 
Leptotheca  Schwgr.,  1826-7. 

856.  L.  Gaudichaudii  (Spreng.,  Syst.  Veg.  iv.  212,  Bryum) 
Schwgr. 

N.S.W.,  Port  Jackson,  on  moist  sandy  soil  :  Gaudichaud.  Mer- 
maid's Glen,  Blue  Mtns.:  Whitelegge,  '85.  Wentworth  Falls, 
'03,  Budong  Falls,  Tumut  District:  Watts,  Mch.  '04.— Vic, 
Grampians,  Avon  Ranges,  and  Mt.  Juliette  :  F.v.M.  Mt.  Ellery: 
E.  Merrall  and  C.  Walter.  Upper  Ovens  River  :  Mrs.  McCann. 
Mt.  William  :  Sullivan.  Tarwin :  Manton.— Tab.,  Mt.  Welling- 
ton, etc.:  Oldfield,  Hooker,  Bastow,  Weymouth,  Watts,  et  al. — 
Q.,  teste  Melb.  List. 

L.  Beccarii  C.M.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  148  (leg.  Dr.  Beccari, 
Mt.  Wellington).  Prob.  L.  Gaudichaudii,  which 
C.M.  apparently  did  not  extend  to  Tas. 

Aulacomnium  Schwgr.,  Suppl.  iii.  1827. 

857.  A.  palustre  (L.)  Schwgr.,  Fl.  Tas.  ii.;  Broth.,  Bryales, 
fig.  473;  Gymnocybe,  Mitt.  Cat. 

Tas.:  Gunn,  teste  Mitt.  Cat.  Broth.,  Bryales  says,  "  in  Ostaus- 
tralien,  auch  aus  Tasmanien  angegeben."  The  Tas.  record  in  Fl. 
Tas.  is  Formosa  :  Gunn  (barren  specimens  only  with  pseudo- 
podia),  var.  caule  gracili. — N.S.W.,  Budong  Falls,  Mch.  '04  : 
Watts. 

Meeseacese  (Broth.). 

Meesea  Hedw.,  1782. 

M.  macrantha,  Mitt.     See  No.  858. 

858.  M.  Muellbri  Hpe.,  Linn.  '56;  M.  macrantha,  Mitt., 
Lond.  J.  Bot.  '56,  fid.  Mitt.  Cat. 

Vic,  in  bogs,  Cobberas  Mtns.:  F.v.M.  '54.  Alps:  Stirling. — 
W.A.,  teste  Melb.  List. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        151 

Bartratniaceae. 
Bartramia  Hedw.,  1789. 

B.  acerosa  Hpe.     See  No.  863. 

B.  austro-alpina  CM.     See  note  after  No.  865. 

B.  chrysocoma.     See  No.  863. 

859.  B.    ERECTA    (Hpe.,  Linn.    76,   Glyphocarpa)    Broth., 
Bryales;  Bartramidula  Hampei,  Mitt.  Catt. 

Vic,  Mt.  William  and  Mt.  Ararat :  Sullivan,  Oct.  76  and  '82 
<"up  to  7000'"  :  Stirling). 

B.flavo-lurida  CM.     See  note  after  No.  865. 

860.  B.  FRAGiLis  Mitt.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  '59,  and  Fl.  Tas. 
C?  B.  papillata). 

Tas.,  on    rocks    of   rivulet,   Cumming's    Head,   Western   Mtns.: 

Archer.     Brook's  Field  :  Bastow,  '86.     [Not  in  Broth.,  Bryales.] 

B.  gracilicaulis,  CM.  in  F.v.M.,  Frag.  Phyt.  xi.  Suppl., 

for  an  unrecorded  locality  in  N.S.W.      Not  in  CM., 

Gen.  M. 

861.  B.  GYMNOSTOMA,  Broth.  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  at  several  places,  on  ground  in  shade  of  rocks,  near 
Young  :  Watts,  Aug.-Sept.  '03  (c.fr.). 

B.  Halleriana  Hedw.     See  No.  862. 

B.  homalostegia  CM.     See  note  after  No.  865. 

B.  leptonpAira  CM.     See  note  after  No.  865. 

B.  Maccannice  CM.     See  note  after  No.  865. 

862.  B.  MOSSMANNIANA  CM.,  Bot.  Zeit.  '51  (?);  B.  Halleri- 
ana Hedw.,  fid.  Mitt. 

Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  etc.,  frequent :  Mossman,  Hooker,  Archer, 
Ounn,  Bastow,  Weymouth,  Watts,  et  al. —  Yic,  Alps.  :  F.v.M., 
'55  {B.  Halleriana).  [CM.,  Gen.  M.,  says  this  sp.  was  wrongly 
brought  under  B.  Halleriana.  Broth.,  Bryales,  merges  B.  Hall- 
eriana in  B.  7iorvegica,  and  thinks  B.  mossm.  scarcely  differs 
specifically]. 

B.  norvegica  (Gunn.)  Lindb.     See  No.  862. 

B.  pallidifolia  CM.     See  note  after  No.  865. 


152  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTKALIENSIUM,    II., 

Bartramia  (continued).  [Bartramiacece. 

863.  B.  PAPiLLATA  H.f.W.,  Fl.N.Z.;  B.  acerosaBpe.,  Lum. 
'56. 

Yic,  Alps :  F.v.M.  '55.  Upper  Ovens  River :  Mrs.  McCann. 
Munyang  Mtns.  '74  (a  note  of  Hampe's  on  the  packet  in  Melb.  hb. 
says  "  B.  acerosa  nob.  antea  ").  Gippsland,  etc.,  Studley  Park  nr. 
Melb.:  Reader,  '83.— N.S.W.,  Mt.  Dromedary:  Reader,  'SO  or  '81. 
Blackheath  :  Whitelegge,  '85  (cir.).  Tingiringi  '88,  and  Dele- 
gate '99  :  Bauerlen.  Mt.  Kosciusko,  Warrumbungle  Ranges, etc.: 
Forsyth,  '99  ff.  Near  Young,  Tumut  (Budong  Falls)  and  Armi- 
dale:  Watts.— Tas.,  Back  River:  Oldfield.  Knock  Lofty: 
Bastow,  Weymouth,  Watts,  et  al.  East  side  of  Ovens  Creek  : 
Archer.      Also  coll.  by  Gunn. 

(a)  var.  brevifolia  Broth.,  Geh 

N  S.W.,  summit  of  Mt.  Kosciusko;  Sullivan.  ("  Probably  my  B. 
erecta  of  the  Grampians  and  Pyrenees," — Hpe.  in  hb.  Melb.). 

(b)  var.  MINOR  Hpe. 

N.S.W.,  Mermaid's  Glen,  Blackheath:  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '85. 
[In  hb.  Melb.  is  a  specimen  from  Tas.  (leg.  Stuart)  marked  "  B. 
acerosa  var.  minor  Hpe.;  B.  chrysocoma  Wallroth]. 

864.  B.  Stirlingi  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.  351  (Vaginella). 
Vic.,Omeo:  Stirling.     Studley  Park,  nr.  Melb.:  Reader,  Sept.  '84. 

865.  B.  strictifolia  Tayl.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '46. 

W.A.,  Swan  River  :  Drummond.— "  N.  W.  Australia":  hb.  Melb. 
(c.fr.).— S.A.,  Barossa  Range  :  F.v.M.(?)— Vic,  nr.  Heyington 
Railway  Station,  banks  of  Yarra  :  Watts,  Sept.  '02.— N.S.W., 
Shoalhaven  River  :  For.syth,  Sept.  '99.  Bank  of  Nepean  River, 
Emu  Plains,  Oct.  '99,  and  nr.  Young  and  Armidale  :  Watts. 

(a)  var.  minor. 
Tas.,  on  ground,  Bay  View  Paddock,  Bellerive  :  Weymouth,  '89. 
[Par.,  Index,  ed.  i.,  and  Jaeg.,  Ad.,  include  this  species  under  B. 
stricta  Brid.     An  error.] 

B.  suhacerosa.     See  following  note. 


BY  REV.  W.  WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.        153^^ 

Bartramia  (continued).  [Bartramiacece. 

Note. 
CM.,  in  Gen.  M.,  gives  the  following,  without  description  : 
B.  austro-alpina  CM.  (N.S.W.,  Mt.  Kosciusko:  Sullivan);  B. 
fiavo-lurida  CM.  (Vic,  Daintree  Ptiver  :  hb.  Melb.);  B.  lepto- 
neura  CM.  (Vic,  Gippsland,  Genoa  River);  B.  Maccamiice  CM. 
(Vic,  Upper  Ovens  River :  Mrs.  McCann);  B.  pa/lidifolia  CM. 
(Q.,  Hoc);  and  B.  subacerosa  CM.,  Frag.  Phyt.  (N.S.W.,  "l  loc). 
In  hb.  Reader  is  also  a  B.  homalostegia  CM.  (Vic,  Mt.  Arapiles  : 
Reader,  Aug.  '96). 

CoNOSTOMUM  Sw.,  Schrad.  Neu  Jour.  f.  Bot. 

866.  C  australe  Swartz,  I.e.;  Mitt.,  Austr.  Am.  M. 

Tas.,  Rivulet  behind  Cumming's  Head,  W.  Mtns.  :  Archer. 
Ground  and  rocks,  The  Glen,  Knocklofty :  Weymouth,  Watts. 
Top  of  Mt.  Wellington  :  Weymouth,  '88. 

867.  C.  curvirostre  (Mitt.,  Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59,  Bartramia) 
Mitt.,  Cat.;  Broth.,  Bryales,  fig.  484;  Bartramidula 
Mitt.,  Kew  J.  Bot.  viii.  260;  Glyphocarpa  rostrata 
Hpe.,  fid.  CM.,  Gen.M.;  Glyphocarjm  Muelleri  Hpe. 
in  hb.  Melb. 

Vic,  Munyang  Mtns.,  Alpine  Springs  :  F.v.M.  '74  {G.  rostrata 
Hpe  ;  Bartramia  (Philonotula)  rostrata  Mitt,  in  hb.  Melb.). — 
N.S.W.,  Mt.  Kosciusko:  Sullivan,  Aug.  '86  and  Jan.  '89,  hb.  Melb. 
Ibid.:  Forsyth,  Jan.  '99,  hb.  Syd.  In  hb.  Melb.  there  is  a  Blue 
Mtn.  record,  without  details.  "  Seems  allied  to  my  Bartramidula 
pygmcBa  "  :  CM.  in  hb.  Melb. 

C.  parvulum  Hpe.     See  No.  868. 

868.  C  PUSiLLUM  H.f.W.,  Fl.N.Z.  ii.  88,  t.  86;  C.  parvulum 
Hpe.,  Linn.  '55,  207. 

Tas.,  Falls  and  rivulet  behind  Cumming's  Head  :  Archer.  Back 
River:  Oldfield.  Mt.  Arthur:  Sullivan,  hb.  Melb.  Mt.  Wel- 
lington :  W^eymouth  (Falls  track),  Watts  ("  Ploughed  Field  ").— 
Vic,  Cobberas  Mtns.  :  F.v.M.  '54.  Grampians  :  Sullivan. 
Beechworth :  Falk,  hb.  Melb.  Mt.  Arapiles  :  Reader,  '96. — 
N.S.W.,    Mermaid's   Glen,   Blackheath :    Whitelegge,  Sept.   '85. 


154  CENSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,    II., 

CoNOSTOMUM  (continued).  [Bartrmniacece. 

Mt.  Kosciusko,  Jan.  '99,  and  King's  Tableland,  Nov.  '98:  Forsyth, 
lib.  Syd. 

B  A  R  T  R  A  M  I  D  u  L  A,  Br.  Eur.  1846. 
B.  erecta      See  No.  859. 

869.  B.    FLEXiNUTANS   (CM.,    Gen.    M.    p.    336,    Sect,   of 
Barti'amia). 

Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  teste  CM.,  I.e.  (?  B.  pusilla). 
B.  Hampei  Mitt.     See  No.  859. 

870.  B.  PUSILLA  (H.f.W.,  Lond.  J.  Bot.  '44,   Glyphocarpa) 
Jaeg.,  Ad.;   Bortramia  CM..  Syn. 

Tas.,  Brown's  River,  Mt.  Wellington,  etc.  :  Archer,  Oldfield, 
Lyall  (on  rocks  nr.  Hobart),  Bastow  (Ocean  Grove,  '88),  Wey- 
mouth (St.  Crispin's  track,  on  rocks). 

871.  B.  PYGMiEA  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  336,  Sect.  oiBartramia). 
Vic,  Mt.  William,  '82,  and  Grampians  :  Sullivan.  Also  coll.  by 
Stirling.      Moysten  :  F.v.M.,  hb.  Melb.  (?  B.  jmsilla), 

872.  B.  Weymouthi  Broth,  in  sched.  (Weymouth). 
Tas.,  1  loc:  Weymouth. 

Philonotis,  Brid.  1827. 

Ph.  appvessa  H  f.W.     See  No.  888. 

873.  Ph.  arapilesii  (CM.  in  sched.,  Sect,  of  Bartramia). 
Vic,  Mt.  Arapiles  :  Reader,  Aug.  '96. 

874.  Ph.  atro-lutea  CM.,  Rev.  Bry.  '76;  Gen.  M.  p.  342. 
N.S.  W.,  nr.  Sydney  :  Kayser.— Vic,  E.  Gippsland,  '87,  hb.  Melb. 

875.  Ph.  austro-pyrenaica  (CM.,  in  hb.  Melb.). 
Vic,  Pyrenees,  Mt.  Cole  :  Sullivan  and  Stirling,  hb.  Melb. 

876.  Ph.   c  \tenulata  (Hpe  ,  Linn.   '59,  Bartramia)  Par., 
Index,  ed.  i.;  F.v.M.,  Austr.  M.,  fig. 

Vic,  Austr.  Alps,  Cobberas  Mtns.,  6000':  F.v.M.  '55.  [CM.  in 
"Gen.  M.  makes  this  the  type  of  his  Sect,  Gatenularia.  Broth., 
Bryales,  brings  it  under  Ph.  scnbrifolia,  this  and  Ph.  remotifolia. 
Hpe.,  I.e.,  says,  "  B.  remotifoliye  H.f.W.,  similis.  B.  appressse 
^orum  confinis,  ac  eadem  :  sed  ex  descriptione  spec,  steril.  depic- 
torum  non  certe  elucet." 


BY  REV.   W.   WALTKR  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  VVIIITKLEGGE.         155 

Philonotis  (contimied).  [/lartrauiiacece. 

877.  Ph.  dicranellacea  ( CM.,  Gen.  M.,  ip.34:'2, Bartramia). 
N.S.W.,  first  found  by  Whitelegge  at  North  Shore  (Lavender 
Bay),  Sept.-Oct.  '84  (c.fr.).  Wollongong,  '95,  and  at  many  places 
on  the  Richmond  Ptiver,  '97  ff.:  Watts. 

(a)  f.  robusta  Broth. 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  on  rocks  below  Killen's  Falls,  Newry- 
bar :  Watts,  June,  '96  ff.  (ster.). 

878.  Ph.  fertilis  (Mitt.,  Kew.  J.  Bot.  '56,   Sect,  of  Bar- 
tramia)  Mitt.  Cat. 

Vic,  Mt.  Hotham,  l^oyang  Range,  Austr.  Alps  :  F.v.M.  '55; 
("ascends  to  6000',"  Stirling).— Tas.,  Ben  Lomond:  De  Boraford, 
'86,  hb.  Bastow  and  Taylor.     1  loc:  Weymouth,  No.  1304. 

879.  Ph.  gemmifera  Hpe.  et  CM.  in  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  p.339. 
Vic,  local,  not  given. 

880.  Ph.  glaucescens    (CM.,  Gen.   M.,   p.  334,  Sect,   of 
Bart7'aniia) . 

Vic,  Upper  Ovens  River,  and  on  the  Pyers  River,  Gippsland  ; 
teste  CM.  I.e.     Genoa  River  :  hb.  Broth.,  teste  hb.  Melb. 

88L     Ph.  graminea  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  309,  Bartramia). 
N.S.W.,  or  Q.,  local,  not  given. 

882.  Ph.  Harrisii  Geh.  in  sched. 

N.S.W.,  Cambewarra  :  C  Harris,  Sept. '85  (c.fr.).  Richmond 
River,  frequent,  '96  ff.  (c.fr.,  Oct.),  and  at  Watson's  Bay,  Sydney, 
'98  :  Watts.  Between  Casino  and  Tenterfield  :  I).  A.  Porter, 
Oct.  '98  (fine  fruiting  specimens). 

883.  Ph.  micro pteris  Broth,  in  sched. 

N.S.W  ,  Richmond  River,  bank  of  putting,  Alston ville  Rd.,  about 
6  m.  from  Ballina  (type),  Apl.  '98;  Granuaile  Rd.  and  Uralba, 
'98-9  :  Watts.      Watson's  Bay  and  Manly  :  idem,  'i'9. 

884.  Ph.  pallida  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '76,  Bartramia)  Jaeg.,  Ad. 
Q.,  "  subtrop.  E.  Australia"  (i.e.,  S.Q. ):  Eaves  {liPh.  radicalis 
H.f.W.).— Vic,  Mt.  William:  Sullivan,  hb.  Melb. 

11 


156  CKNSUS    MIISCORUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

Philonotis  (continued).  [Bartramiacece, 

885.  Ph.  percapillaris  CM.  (not  in  Gen.  M.). 
N.S.W.,  Richmond  River  :  Bauerlen,  Aug.   '95.     R.R.,  Cumba- 
lum  and  Lismore,  June,  '98,  and  Rous  Falls,  Sept.  '00  :  Watts. 
Tweed  River  :  Goldsmid,  Aug.  '99.     [First  records  unknown  to 
us]. 

886.  Ph.  pilata  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  339,  Bartramia). 
N.S.W.,  on  wet  rocks,  Ball's  Head  Bay:  Whitelegge,  Aug.-Sept. 
'84  (c.fr.). 

887.  Ph.  pseudo-mollis  (CM.,  Linn.  '71-3,  Bartramia) 
Jaeg.,  Ad. 

Q.,  Brisbane  River  :  Mrs.  Dietrich,  '64;  also  Musson.  Hamilton: 
Wild,  '87. — N.S.W.,  Richmond  and  Brunswick  Rivers,  at  several 
places:  Watts,  '96  IF.     Richmond  River  :  Camara,  '81  (cir.). 

Ph.  pseudo-Philonotis  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  342,  Bartra- 
mia.    See  No.  914). 

888.  Ph.  remotifolia  (H.£.  VV.,  F1.  Tas.  ii.  193,  Bartramia) 
Jaeg.,  Ad.;  Bartramia  apj^ressa  H.f.  W.,  Fl.  N.Z.; 
Hypnum  scabrifolium  H.f.W.,  Fl.  Ant.  138;  Bartra- 
mia exigua  Sull.,  U.S.  Expl.  Exped.;  B.  pusilla  Sull,, 
Kew  Jour.  ii.  316. 

Tas.,  Brown's  River  :  Oldfield.  Elliott  Rivulet,  nr.  Cumming's 
Head  :  Archer.  Cataract,  Launceston,  etc.:  A.  J.  Taylor. — Vic., 
Austr.  Alps  :  F.v.M.  Upper  Ovens  River  :  Mrs.  McCann. 
Alps:  Stirling.— N.S.W.,  Mt.  Kosciusko  :  Sullivan,' 88,  Forsyth, 
'99.  Koorawatha  (frequent),  Young  District,  and  nr.  Tumut 
and  Armidale  :   Watts,  Sept.  '03-Mch.  '04. 

[A  most  interesting  sp.  First  found  (ster.)  by  Hooker  fil.  in 
Auckland  IsL,  and  published  in  Fl.  Ant.  as  Hypnum  (Tama- 
riscdla)  scabrifolium.  Sullivant,  after  having  seen  the  fruit, 
named  it  Bartramia  exigua.  In  Fl.N.Z.,  H.f.W.  described  it  as 
Bartramia  appressa.  Later,  in  Fl.  Tas.,  it  became  B.  remotifolia 
H.f.W.,  and  in  Hdbk.N.Z.Fl.  the  name  B.  appressa  is  said  to 
have  been  abandoned  as  unsuited  to  the  female  plant,  which 
had  spreading  leaves.     Mitt.,  however,  in  the    M.  Austr.  Am., 


BY  REV.   W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         157 

Philonotis  (continued).  \Bartramiacece. 

kept  the  name  B.  appressa^  subordinating  to  it  the  other  names 
mentioned  above.  CM.,  Gen.  M.,  gives  preference  to  Sullivant's 
B.  exigua.  Broth.,  Bryales,  gives  Ph.  scahrifolia  (H.f.W.),  and 
speaks  of  Ph.  reniotifolia  and  Ph.  catemdata  as  scarcely  tenable 
species.  We  have  kept  the  name  adopted  by  H.f.W.  in  Fl.  Tas. 
and  N.Z.Hdbk.] 

889.  Ph.  rigens  Broth.  (Weymouth's  List). 
Tas.,  Hoc:   Weymouth. 

890.  Ph.  scariosifolia  (CM.,  Cen.  M.  p.  342,  Sect,  of 
Bartramia). 

Tas.,  Hoc:   Weymouth. 

Ph.  simplex.     See  No.  892. 

891.  Ph.  slateri  (Hpe.,  T^inn.  76,  Bartramia)  Jaeg.,  Ad. 
Q.,  Brisbane  Kiver  :  Slater,  Simmonds  (Ithaca  Creek),  lib.  Bailey. 
— N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  damp  places  in  Alstonville  Cutting, 
Sept.  '96  (c.fr.)  and  Cooper's  Creek,  Oct.  '01  :  Watts.  National 
Park  :  Forsyth,  Aug.  '98. 

892.  Ph.  SUBSIMPLEX  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  339,  Bartramia); 
Ph.  simplex  (CM.)  in  sched.  [Ph.  simplex  (CM.)  Jaeg., 
or  belongs  to  Fiji  and  Samoa]. 

N.S.W.,  on  wet  rocks,  Fitzroy  Falls:  Whitelegge,  Oct -Nov.  '84 
(c.fr.). 

Ph.  tenuicula  Geh.     See  No.  899. 

893.  Ph.  TENUIS  (Tayl.,  Phytol.  '44,  Bartramia)  Jaeg.,  Ad. 
Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington:  Oldfield  (nr.  Springs) et al.  St.  Crispin's: 
Bastow, '86.  Watchhorn's  Hill  :  Weymouth, '88.  Ben  Lomond: 
De  Bomford.  [A  record  for  N.S.W.,  Richmond  River,  Tintenbar 
(Tech.  Mus.  Syd.  No.  1622)  is  prob.  an  error]. 

894.  Ph.  timmioides  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  342,  and  Rev.  Bry. 
'76). 

N.S.W.,  near  Sydney  :  Kayser. 

895.  Ph.  tortipolia  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  339,  Bartramia). 
Q.     Original  local,  unknown  to   us.      N.S.W.  — Richmond   and 
Brunswick    Rivers,    Alstonville    Cutting   and    Marshall's   Falls, 


158  CKXSUS    MUSCORUM    AUSTIIALIENSIUM,   II., 

Philonotis  (continued).  [Bartramiacece. 

Sept.-Oct.  '96  (cir.),  Bangalow  Rd.,  Newrybar,  Aug.  '98  (ster.), 
and  near  Mullumbimby  :  Watts. 

896.  Ph.  uncinatula  (CM.,  Rev.  Bry.  '76,  and  Gen.  M. 
p.  339,  Bartraniia). 

N.8.W.,  near  Sydney  :  Kayser.  A  specimen  in  Tech.  Mus.  Syd. 
is  labelled  "  Open  Forest,  Port  Stephen  "  C?  leg.  Bauerlen). 

897.  Ph.  Walhall^  (C.  M.,  Gen.  M.  p.  342,  Bartramia). 
Vic,  Walhalla,  Gippsland,  teste  CM.  I.e. 

898.  Ph.  Weymouthi  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  342,  Bartramia). 
Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington  :   Weymouth,  '90. 

899.  Ph.  Whitkleggei  Watts;  Ph.  tenuicula  Geh.  insched. 
N.S.W.,  on  wet  rocks,  Cambewarra  :  Whitelegge,  Sept.  '84  (c.fr.) 
and  Harris,  '85.  BuUi  Pass,  '95,  Richmond  and  Brunswick 
Rivers,  '98  if.  (c.fr.),  Minrni,  '01  :   Watts. 

B  R  K  u  T  E  L  I  a  Schimp.  1856;   Bartramia  (Plicatella)  CM. 

900.  B.  AFFiNis  (Hook.,  M.  Exot.,  Bartramia)  Mitt.,  Cat.; 
Glyphocarpus^  Jaeg.,  Ad.;  Philonotis,  id.  Suppl.  and 
Par.  Index. 

Throughout  Tas.,  and  the  colder  parts  of  Australia.  First  found 
in  Tas.  by  R.  Brown.  Generally  on  shady  banks  and  hillsides. 
Records  from  S.A.  (Tepper  and  F.v.M.),  Vic.  (F.v.M.  and  Mrs. 
McCann,  Reader,  et  al),  N.S.W.  (F.v.M.,  Blakely,  Forsyth, 
Watts,  et  al.),  Tas.  (Hooker,  Gunn,  Oldfield,  Mossman,  and  most 
other  collectors). 

(a)  var.  tomentosa  CM. 
Vic,  on  stones.  Grange  Creek,  nr.  Hamilton :  Reader,  Feb.  '87. 

B.  atrata.     See  No.  914. 
901       B.  Baeuerlenii  (C  M.,  Gen.  M,  p.  347,  Sect,  of  Bar- 

trainia). 
N.S.W.,  Clyde  River  :  Bauerlen. 

902.     B.   Campbelliana   (CM.,   Gen.    M.  p.  348.,  Sect,  of 

Bartramia). 
Vic.,  Hume  River:  Miss  Campbell  (Mrs.  Martin). 

B.  comiramea.     See  No.  904. 


BY  REV.   VV.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         159 

Breu  TELIA  (continued).  [Bartramiacece. 

903.  B.  COMMUTATA  (Hpe.,  Linn.  '76,  Bnrtramia). 

Vic,  Grampians  :  Sullivan,  Nov.  73,  hb.  Melb.  Mt.  Arapiles  : 
Reader,  Aug.  '96  (c.fr.).  Alps:  Stirling. — Tas.,  Lauriston  Gully, 
Kangaroo  Pt.  '8'3,  and  Knock  Lofty:  Weymouth. — N.S.W., 
Nelligen  :  Bauerlen,  '85.  Tallwong  Creek  :  Forsyth,  '00.  Tam- 
worth :  Musson.  Near  Young,  Koorawatha,  Tumut  and  Armi- 
dale  :   Watts,  '03-4. 

(a)  f.  minor  Hpe.,  ibid. 
Tas.,  mountainous  places  nr.  Lake  Pedder  :  Schuster,  '75. 

[Sullivan's  specimens   (Grampians)   are   labelled  in  hb.  Melb. 
"var.  major,"  and  certainly  seem  to  differ  from  the  typical  form]. 

904.  B.  COMOSA  (Mitt.,  Journ.  L.  Soc.  '59,  and  Fl.  Tas.,  Bar- 
tramia)  Mitt.,  Cat.  CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  344,  places 
under  Sect.  Lycopodiohryuiu.,  with  some  doubt,  as  B. 
comiramea  CM.,  of  which  he  regards  Mitten's  B. 
comosa  as  a  shorter  form.  Broth.,  Bryales,  keeps  B. 
comosa. 

Tas,  Western  Mtns.:  Archer.  Mt.  Wellington:  Mossman 
(Wellington  Falls),  Bastow,  Weymouth,  et  al.  Ben  Lomond  : 
De  Bomford. — N.S.W.,  Mt.  Dromedary:  Reader.  Blue  Mtns., 
teste  hb.  Melb.— Vic,  E.  Gippsland  :  hb.  Melb.  Mt.  William  : 
Sullivan.      Buffalo  Range  :  1  F.v.M. 

905.  B.  crassa  (H.f.W.,  Fl.  Tas.,  Bartramia)  Jaeg.,  Ad. 
Tas.,  Mt.  La  Perouse  :  Oldfield.     Common  on  Mt.  Wellington, 
coll.  by  Gunn,  Bastow,  Weymouth,  Watts,  et  al.      Western  Mtns.: 
Archer. 

906.  B.  Crawfordi  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  347,  Bartramia). 
N.S.W.,  New  England,  Apsiey  River  :  Crawford. 

907.  B.  DiVARiCATA  (Mitt.,  Journ,  L.  Soc.  '59,  Bartramia) 
Mitt.,  Cat. 

Tas.,  Cheshunt :  Archer.  Maria  Isl:  T.  S.  Perrin,  '86.— S.A., 
Mt.  Bonney  :  Mrs.  Wehl,  '74,  hb.  Melb.  [CM.  gives  N.Z.  only- 
Broth.  N.Z.  and  Tas.l. 


160  CENSUS    MUSCOKUM    AUSTRALIENSIUM,   II., 

B  R  E  u  T  E  L  I  A  (coyitinued).  [Bartramiacecn. 

908.  B.  ELONGATA  (Hf.W.,  Fl.  Ant.,  Ilypnum). 

Tas.:  Archer,  teste  Mitt.,  Cat.     [Broth.,  Bryales,  limits  to  iS.Z. 
and  the  Antarct.  Isls.]. 

909.  B.  Fusco-AUREA  Broth.,  A.M.  '99,  No.  158. 
N.S.W.,  Wentworth  Falls  :  Betche,  Aug. '95.  Lawson  :  Hamil- 
ton, Nov.  '98,  hb.  Syd.  Katoomba :  Mrs.  King,  Jan.  '00,  hb. 
Watts,  At  many  places  on  the  Blue  Mtns.  (Lawson,  "Went- 
worth, Leura,  Valley  of  Waters,  Blackheath,  Neate's  Glen,  etc.): 
Watts,  Jan.  '02  and  Apl.  '03. 

910.  B  LEPTODONTOiDES  (CM.,  Geii.  M.,  p.  347,  Bartramia). 
N.S.W.,  local,  not  given. 

911.  B.  LONCHOPELMA  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  355,  Bartramia). 
Vic. — N.S.W.,  Snowy  River,  etc. 

912.  B.  LUTEOLA  (CM.,  Rev.  Bry.  '76,  and  Gen.  M.  p.  347, 
Bartramia). 

N.S.W.,  "near  Sydney  "  :  Kayser.     Delegate  district :   Biiuerlen, 
'86  (c.fl.m.). 

B.  naiio-arcuata  CM.,  in  hb.  Bailey,  for  Q.     Not  in 
CM.,  Gen.  M. 

913.  B  PENDULA  (Hook.,  M.  Exot.,  Bartramia)  Jaeg.,  Ad. 
Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington  and  Mt.  Nelson  :  Hooker,  Weymouth,  et 
al.  Brown's  River  :  Oldfield.-  N.S.W.,  nr.  Port  Jackson  : 
Sieber.  Tam worth  :  Musson.  Blue  Mtns.,  Mermaid's  Glen  : 
Whitelegge,  '85.  Tumberumba  :  W.  Bull. — Vic,  E.  Gippsland  : 
Merrall.  Genoa  River,  Hume  R.,  Black  Spur,  Upper  Yarra,  '72, 
etc.,  hb.  Melb.  [A  note  of  Mitten's  in  Fl.  Tas.,  says,  "This  I 
take  to  be  the  true  B.  Sieberi."     But  see  Broth.,  Bryales]. 

(a)  var.  minor  Broth. 
Tas.,  Forest  Rd.,  Hobart :   Weymouth,  No.  28.— N.S.W.,  Yalwal 
Creek,  Sept.  '89   (Shoalhaven  district),  and  Valley  of  Waters  to 
Wentworth    Falls,    Aug.   '99  :    Forsyth,   hb.   Syd.     Blue   Mtns.: 
Whitelegge,  '85. 

[In  hb.  Melb.  is  a  var.  prostrata  Hpe.,  but  without  specified 
local.  1 


BY  REV.   W.    WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITELEGGE.         161 

B  R  E  u  T  E  L  I  A  (continued).  [Bartramiacece. 

914.  B.  pseudo-Philonotis  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  342,  Bar- 
tramia,  Sect.  Philonotis);  Barlramia  atrata  CM., 
sched. 

N.S.W.,  on  wet  rocks,  Ball's  Head  Bay,  Aug. -Oct.  '84  :  White- 
legge  (c.fr.). 

(a)  var.  longiseta  CM. 
N.S.W.,  same  place  and  date  :  Whitelegge  ^c.fr.). 

915.  B.  REFLEXA  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  347,  Bartramia). 
N.S.W.,  Tingiringi  Mtns.  :  Biiuerlen,  '89,  5000'  (see  Geh.,  Kev. 
Bry.  '97).     CM.,  I.e.,  says  "  aus  Gippsland." 

916.  B.  SiEBERi  (Hsch.,  Sieb.   M.   :Nov.  Holl.,  Bartramia) 
Mitt.  Cat. 

N.S.W.,  near  Port  Jackson  :  Sieber.  Mt.  Tomah  :  Cunningham. 
Blackheath  :  Whitelegge.  Greenwich,  Nepean  River,  Mosman's 
Falls  and  Emu  Plains  :  Watts.  Monga  :  Bauerlen.  Mt.  Kosci- 
usko and  National  Park :  Forsyth.  Illawarra  :  Camara  and 
Kirton.  Parramatta :  F.v.M.— Tas.,  Mt.  Wellington,  etc.: 
Archer,  Hooker,  Oldfield,  Weymouth,  et  al.  Ben  Lomond  :  De 
Bomford. — Vic. "?  loc. :  Lucas.    Upper  Ovens  River :  Mrs.  McCann. 

(a)  f.  robusta  Broth. 
N.S.W.,  Blue  Mtns.,  Katoomba:   Forsyth,  Sept.  '99. 

917.  B.  WiTHERHEADi  (CM.,  Gen.  M.  p.  347,  Bartramia). 
N.S.W.,  1  New  England  :  Witherhead. 

Calomniaceae. 
Calomnion  H.f. W. 

918.  C  L^TUM  H.f.W.,  Fl.N.Z.ii.  55;  Broth.,  Bryales,  fig. 
507. 

N.S.W.,  on  stems  of  tree  ferns,  Cambewarra  Mtn.  :  Watts,  May- 
June,  '03. 

Supplementary  Note. 
In  Part  I.  we  adopted,  with  hesitancy  (see  note  before  No.  260) 
the  generic  names  Lencoloma  and  Dicranumi.     We  desire  now  to 
substitute  Dicranoloma  for  the  bulk  of  the  species,  dividing  them 
thus : — 


162 


CENSUS    MUSCORLM    AUSTKAl-IENSIUM,   II., 


261. 

LeuGoloma  Bauer c^  (C. -M.)  Par. 

262. 

brachypelmafum  (CM.). 

264. 

clav'inerve  CM. 

266. 

Fraseri  (Mitt.)  Par. 

268. 

imhricatiun  Broth.,  Geh. 

269. 

incaniua  Mitt. 

273. 

Sieberia7ium  (Hsch.)  Par. 

274. 

strictipilum  (CM.)  Par. 

275. 

suhinteyruni  Broth. 

260. 

Dicranoloma  austro-scoparium  (CM.). 

263. 

,             calymjjeraceum  (CM.). 

265. 

,             dicarpum  (Hsch.). 

267. 

,             Harrisii  (Geh.). 

270. 

,             Leichhardti  (Hpe.). 

271. 

,             limhatuin  {^Yoth..). 

272. 

,             serratum  (Broth.). 

276. 

,             Sullivani  (CM.). 

277. 

Whiteleggei  (CM.). 

278-309.      , 

,             atigusiifolium,  (H.f.  W.),   angustinerve  (Mitt.), 

argutum   (Hpe.),    austrinum  (Mitt.),    austro- 

congestum  (CM.),  Baileyanum  (CM.),  Billar- 

dierii  (Schwgr.),  Burchardi  (Par.),  chlorocla- 
dunt  (CM.),  co7ifine  (Hpe.  et  CM.),  diaphano- 
neuron  (Hpe),  eucamptodontoides  (Broth., 
Geh. ),i>i^e9'e?-rimi<m(  Broth.,  Geh.),  Kroneanum 
(CM.),  Menziesil  (Tayl.),  monocarpum  {CM.), 
Nelsoni  (CM.),  oedithecium  (CM.),  poly- 
chcetuin  (Hpe.),  polysetum  (Hpe),  punctn- 
latiim  (Hpe.),  pungeMS  (H.f. W.),  pungentella 
(CM.),  robiisium  (H.f.W.),  setostwi  (H.f.W.), 
sordide-viride  (CM.),  suherectum  (Hpe.),  suh- 
puinjens  (Hpe.),  suhsetosum  (CM.),  tricho- 
phylhi.m  (Hpe.),  Walieri  (Hpe.),  Weymouthi 
(CM.). 


BY  KKV.   W.   WALTER  WATTS  AND  THOMAS  WHITKLKGGK. 


163 


APPENDIX. 
Add  to  Intkoductory  Note  : 

The  following  addition  must  be  made  to  tlie  List  in  Part  i.  of 
the  Literature  of  Australian  Mosses,  viz.  : — 

"  Nouvelles  Additions  aux  flores  bryologiques  de  I'Australie 
et  de  la  Tasmanie."  A.  Geheeb,  in  Kevue  Bryologique, 
1897. 


INDKX  OF  GENERA. 

(Names  in  italics  are  Synonyms.) 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Amphidium 

..       92 

Philonotis 

154-158 

Apalodium 

..      120 

Physcomitrella  . 

..     Ill 

Aulacomnium    . . 

..     J50 

Physcomitrium  . 

111-112 

Bartramia 

151-158 

Plagiohryum 

..     125 

Bartramia  [Plicatella) . 

. .     158 

Pohlia      . . 

122-123 

Bartramidula     . . 

.    '      ..      154 

Khizogonium 

146-149 

Brachymenium  . . 

123-125 

Rhodobryum 

143-144 

Breutelia . . 

158-161 

Schlotheimia 

106-107 

Bryum     . . 

125-143 

Splachnobryum. 

. .     109 

Bryum  {Senodictyon)    . 

. .      1 22 

Splachnum 

. .     109 

Calomnion 

..     161 

Tayloria  . . 

107-108 

CodonoblepJtarum 

. .       92 

Ulota 

. .  96-97 

Conostomum 

153-154 

Webera     . . 

. .     122 

Dicranoloma 

161,  162 

Weissia    . . 

..       96 

Dicranum 

..     161 

Wilsoniella 

..     121 

Ephemerella 

..     110 

Zygodon  .. 

. .  92-94 

Ephemerum 

..     110 

Funaria  . . 

113-118 

Gigaspermum     . . 

109-110 

Goniobryum 

..      149 

Goniomitrium    . . 

112-113 

Hymenodon 

..     146 

Leptobryura 

121-122 

Leptostomum     . . 

144-145 

Leptotheca 

..     150 

Leucoloma 

161,  162 

Macromitrium  . , 

97-106 

Meesea     . . 

..     150 

Mesochajte 

149-150 

Mielichhoferia   . . 

119-120 

Mittenia  . . 

.     118 

Mniobryum 

. .     123 

Mniopsis  . . 

..     118 

Mnium    . , 

. .      145 

Orthodontium    . . 

120-121 

Orthotrichum     . . 

. .  94-96 

[Printed  off  April  10th,  1906. 


Issued  Jidij  14th,  1005. 


'^^K0Vo\.  XXX. 


Part  1  (with  a  Supplement). 
THE 


No.  117. 


/: 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN    SOCIETY 


OF 


■i 


NEW    SOUTH    Y/ALES  , 


FOR  THE  YEAR 


1Q05 


PABT    I. 

Containing  Papers  read  in 

MARCH  to   APRIL, 

WITH    ONE    PLATE. 


SYDNEY : 

PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 
BY 

F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,   146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
[Price,  with  Supplement,  7/-] 


-A-O-EJISTT'S   IInT    ETJ3E?.0:E>E 


^       Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W. 
S^/^t'^^  Messrs.  R.  Friedl^.nder  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W. 


NOTICE 


•^E-.l:-- 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I. -VI.  of  the  Proceedings— of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  VV.,  or 
R.  Friedlander  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : — 

Proceedings  for  1882,  Vol.  VIL— Part  1,  la.  6cl.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3,  5s.; 
Part  4,  10s. 
r   1, ^;._,.  f^,.  ,«q.^   Vol    VTII.— Part  1,  10s.;    Part  2,  5s.;    Part  3,  7s.; 

-Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.; 

Parti,  12s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  15s.; 

Part  4,  17s.  ^d. 

Pfoceediiigs  for  1886,  Vol.  I.— Part  1,  10s.  6d.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  Pis,  6cl. 

Proceedings  for  1887,  Vol.  II.— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  8s.;  Part  3,  12s.; 
Part  4,  £1  7s. 

Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.  III.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  £l4s.;  Part  3,  £1; 
Part  4,  18s. 

Proceedings  for  1889,  Vol.  IV.— Parti,  lis.;  Part  2,  16s.;  Part  3,  19s.; 
Part  4.  lis. 

Proceedings  for  1890,  Vol.  V.— Part  1,  lis.;  Part  2,9s.;  Part  3,9s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.  6d.;  Part'3,  17s.; 
Part  4,  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d.;  Part  2,  4s.  6d.;  Part  3, 
8s. ;  Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.  VIIL— Part  1,  5s.;  Part  2,  lis.;  Part  3,  6s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.  IX. —Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1895,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6cl.;  Part  3,  10s. 
Supplement,  Is.  6d.;  Part  4,  12s. 


Proceedings  for  1896— Part  1,  9s.,  Supplement,  2s.  6d.;    Part  2,  6s.  6d.; 
Part  3,  7s.  6(1.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1S97— Part  1,  10s.;    Part  2,  8s.  6d.;   Part  3,  9s.;    Part  4, 

12:..   6d. 

Proceedings  for  1898  -  Part  1,  3s.;  Part  2,  6s.;   Part  3,  12s.;  Part  4,  14s 


SlDOOlsriD    SeEpIES   (eontinued). 
Proceedings  for  1899— Part  1,  12s.  6d.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part3, 10s.;  Part4, 
10s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1900— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  10s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s.  6d.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1901 -Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  5s.;  Part  4, 
17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1902— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  7s.  6d.,  Supple- 
ment, 3s;  Part  4,  15s, 

Proceedings  for  1903— Part  1,  9s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4, 
15s. 

Proceedings  for  1904 -Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4, 
10s. 

Proceedings  for  1905— Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s. 

A  reduction  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to  Members  of  the  Society. 

The  Macleay  Memorial  Volume  [issued  October  13th,  1893]. 
Royal  4to.j  li.  and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates. 
Price  £3  3s. 

CONTENTS. 

The  Hon.  Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt.,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C.  :  (By  the  Editor). 


Professor  W.  Baldwin  Spencer,  M.A.  :  Contributions  to  our 
Knowledge  of  Geratodus.  Part  I. — The  Blood  Vessels.  (Plates  i.-v. )  — 
Prof.  F.  W.  HuTTON,  F.R.S.  :  The  Phocene  Mollusca  of  New  Zealand. 
(PI.  vi.-ix.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  A  Alonograph  of  the 
Temnocephalece.  (PL  x.-xv.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  On 
an  apparently  new  Type  of  the  Platyhehninfhes  ( Trematoda  ? )  (PI.  xvi.) — 
Prof.  T.  Jeffery  Parker,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.,  and  Miss  J.  G.  Ricii  :  Observa- 
tions on  the  Myology  of  Palinurm  Edwardsii,  Hutton.  (PI.  xvii.-xxi).  — 
Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B.,  B.Sc  :  Obsei 
vations  upon  the  Anatomy  of  the  Muzzle  of  the  Ornithorhynchus.  (PI.  xxii. 
xxm.)  — Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B., 
B.Sc.  :  On  the  Peculiar  Rod-like  Tactile  Organs  in  the  Integument  and 
Mucous  Membrane  of  the  Muzzle  of  Ornithorhynchus.  (PI.  xxiv.-xxvi.)  — 
C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  :  On  FarmacocMea  Fischeri,  Smith.  (PI.  xxvii.)  — 
Prof.  R.  Tate,  F.L.S.,  F.G.S.,  &c.  :  On  the  Geographic  Relations  of  the 
Floras  of  Norfolk  and  Lord  Howe  Islands  —  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G., 
F.R.S. :  Notes  on  an  Undescribed  Acacia  from  New  South  Wales.  (PI. 
xxviil) — Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  F.R.S.,  and  J.  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S. ,  F.C.S.  :  Description  of  a  New  Hakea  from  Eastern  New  South 
Wales.  (PI.  XXIX.)  —  R.  Etheridge,  Jun.  :  A  Description  of  some  of  the 
Weapons  and  Implements  of  the  Alligator  Tribe,  Port  Essington,  North 
Australia  (PI.  xxx.-xxxv.)  —  N.  A.  Cobb,  Ph.D.  :  New  Nematodes  from 
Fiji  and  Australia.     (PI.  xxxvi.-XLii.) 

Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Australian  Fishes.  By  William 
Macleay,  F.L.S.  [1881].     A  few  copies  only.     Price  £1,  net. 

The  Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  New 
South  Wales,  2  vols.,  8vo  [Vol.  i.  tive  Parts,  1863-66;  Vol.  ii.  five 
Parts,  1869-73;  all  published],  price  £'2,  net,  are  also  obtainable, 
but  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes  are  sold  separately. 


PROCEEDINGS,  1905.  EART  1. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 


Presidential  Address,   delivered    at   the    Thirtieth    Annual    Ganeral 

Meeting,  March  29th,  1905.     By  Dr.  T.  Storie  Dixson 2 

Abstract  of  a  Lecture  entitled  "Our  First  Line  of  Defence  against 
Microbic  Attacks,"  delivered  by  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.  Sc,  Macleay 
liacteriologist  to  the  Society   ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         26 

Cotany  of   North-Western  New   South  Wales.     By  Fred.   Turner, 

F.L.S.,  F.R.H.S.,  etc.     (Platei.) 32 

Contribution  to  our  Knowledge  of  the  Physiology  of  the  Pancreas. 
By  H.  G.  Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.  (From  the  Physiological 
Laboratory  of  the  University  of  Sydney).    ...         ...         ...         ..  9^2 

Revisional  Notes  on  Australian  Carabidce.     Part  ii.     By  Thomas  G. 

Sloane 103 

The  Possible  Relationship  between  Bacteria  and  the  Gum  of  Hakea 
maligna  (Bac.  liseudarabinus  ii.,  n.sp.).  By  R.  Greig  Smith, 
D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society 130 

The  Origin  of  Natural  Immunity  towards  the  Putrefactive  Bacteria. 

By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society.       149 

The  Probable  Bacterial  Origin  of  the  Gum  of  Linseed  Mucilage. 
{Bacilli  lini,  i-ii.,  n.spp. ).  By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay 
Bacteriologist  to  the  Society 161 

Balance  Sheet,  &c 28 

Elections  and  Announcements       27,31,102,176 

Notes  and  Exhibits 101,175 

Special  General  Meeting      ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  1 

Supplement  (issued  separately)— Australian  Carabidce:  Check-List. 
Part  i.  Subfamily  Carahhw.     By  Thomas  G.  Sloane. 


Issued  J\dy  IJfth^  1905. 


Vol.  XXX. 

Part  1. 


No.  117. 


SUPPLEMENT 


TO    THE 


PEOCEEDING-S 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN   SOCIETY 


OF 


NEVy   SOUTH   V^ALES 


FOR  THE  YEAR 


ISO  5. 


AUSTRALIAN  CARABID.E. 

CHECK-LIST.     Part  i.  Subfamily  CARABIIT.S. 

By  Thomas  G.  Sloane. 


SYDNEY : 
PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 

BY 

F.  OUNNINGHAME  «&  CO.,  146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
[Price,  1/-] 

oi^       Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.  ■^4)    _^_ 

f^K/*"^- Messrs.  R.  Friedl^nder  &  Sohx,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlio,  N.W.  Jj^\i^^ 


'::^d^^ 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I. -VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  tfe  Co.,  37  Soiio  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Friedliinder  ct  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : — 

Proceedings  for  18S2,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  Ts.  6d.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3,  os.; 
Part  4,  10s. 

Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  5s.;  Part  3,  7s.; 
Part  4,  8s.  y 

Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  os.; 
Part  4,  £1  os. 

Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Parti,  12s.;  Part 2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  15s.j 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

Pfoccedings  for  1886,  Vol.  I.— Part  1,  10s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  12s.  6d. 

Proceedmgs  for  1887,  Vol.  II.— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  8s.;  Part  3,  12s.; 
Part  4,  £1  7s. 

Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.  III.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  £14s.;  Part  3,  £1; 
Part  4,  18s. 

Proceedings  for  1889,  Vol.  IV.— Part  1,  lis.;  Part  2,  16s.;  Part  3,  19s.; 
Part  4.  J  ]  s. 

Proceedmgs  for  1890,  Vol.  V.— Part  1,  lis.;  Part  2,9s.;  Part  3,9s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.  6d.;  Part  3,  17s.; 
Part  4,  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  4s.  ^d.;  Part  3, 
8s. ;  Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.  VIIL— Part  1,  5s.;  Part  2,  lis.;  Part  3,  6s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.  IX.  —Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  Ss. 

Proceedings  for  1895,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s. 
Supplement,  Is.  6d. ;  Part  4,  12s. 

Proceedings  for  1896— Part  1,  9s.,  Supplement,  2s.  6d.;  Part  2,  6s.  6d.; 
Part  3,  7s.  6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1897— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4, 
12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1898 -Part  1,  3s.;  Part  2,  6s.;  Part  3,  12s.;  Part  4,  14s 


SECOnsriD     SEI4IE3S    (continued). 
Proceedings  for  1899— Part  1,  r2s.  6d.;  Part 2,  12s.;  Part 3, 10s.;  Part 4, 
10s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1900— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  10s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s.  6d.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1901 —Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  os.;  Part  4, 
17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1902— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  7s.  6d.,  Supple- 
ment, 3s;  Part  4,  15s. 

Proceedings  for  1903— Part  1,  9s.;  Part  2,  12s.  Gd.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4, 
15s. 

Proceedings  for  1904 -Part  1,  lOs.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4, 
10s. 

Proceedings  for  1905 — Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s. 

A  reduction  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to  Members  of  the  Society. 

The  Macleay  Memorial  Volume  [issued  October  13th,  1893]. 
Royal  4to.,  li.  and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates. 
Price  £3  3s. 

CONTENTS. 

The  Hon.  Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt.,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C.  :  (By  the  Editor). 


Professor  W.  Baldwin  Spencer,  M.A.  :  Contributions  to  our 
Knowledge  of  Geratodus.  Part  I. — The  Blood  Vessels.  (Plates  i.-v. )  — 
Prof.  F.  \V.  HuTTON,  F.R.S.  :  The  Phocene  Mollusca  of  New  Zealand. 
(PL  VI. -IX.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  A  ^Monograph  of  the 
Temnocephalece.  (PI.  x.-xv.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  On 
an  apparently  new  Type  of  the  Platyhdmintltts  (Trtmatoda? )  (PI.  xvi. ) — 
Prof.  T.  Jeffery  Parker,  D.Sc,  F.K.S.,  and  Miss  J.  G.  PvICH  :  Observa- 
tions on  the  Myology  of  PaUnuruH  Edirardsii,  Hutton.  (PI.  xvii.-xxi).  — 
Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B.,  B.Sc  :  Obsei 
vations  upon  the  Anatomy  of  the  Muzzle  of  the  OrnithorhynchuH.  (PI.  xxii. 
xxiii.)  — Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B., 
B.Sc.  :  On  the  Peculiar  P^-od-like  Tactile  Organs  in  the  Integument  and 
Mucous  Membrane  of  the  Muzzle  of  Ornithorhyarhus.  (PI.  xxiv.-xxvi.)  — 
C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  :  On  Parmacochlea  Fisclieri,  Smith.  (PI.  xxvii.)  — 
Prof.  R.  Tate,  F.L.S.,  F.G.S.,  &c.  :  On  the  Geographic  Relations  of  the 
Floras  of  Norfolk  and  Lord  Howe  Islands  —  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G., 
F.R.S. :  Notes  on  an  Undescribed  Acaciahowx  New  South  Whales.  (PL 
xxviii.) — Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  F.R.S.,  and  J.  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S. ,  F.C.S.  :  Description  of  a  New  Hakea  from  Eastern  New  South 
Wales.  (PL  xxix.)  —  R.  Etheridge,  Jun.  :  A  Description  of  some  of  the 
Weapons  and  Implements  of  the  Alligator  Tribe,  Port  Essingtou,  North 
Australia  (PL  xxx.-xxxv. )  —  N.  A.  Cobb,  Ph.D.  :  New  Nematodes  from 
Fiji  and  Australia.     (PL  xxxvi.-xlii.) 

Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Australian  Fishes.  By  William 
Macleay,  F.L.S.  [1881].     A  few  copies  only.     Price  £1,  net. 

The  Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  New 
South  Wales,  2  vols.,  8vo  [Vol.  i.  live  Parts,  1863-66;  Vol.  ii.  five 
Parts,  1869-73  ;  all  published],  price  <£2,  net,  are  also  obtainable, 
but  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes  are  sold  separately. 


Issued  September  27th,  1905 


Ste- 


Part  2. 


No.  118. 


/: 


'<iJ:C 


THE 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN    SOCIETY 


OF 


NEV^    SOUTH    V^ALES 


FOR  THE  YEAR 


1  9  O  5  . 


PART     II. 

Containing  Papers  read  in 
MAY  to   AUGUST, 

WITH    TEN    PLATES. 


SYDNEY : 

PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 

BY 

F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  00.,   146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


[Price,  10/-] 


k 


.A-O-EHSTTS    IIT    B3Tmo:E»B3 


_    cT^       Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W. 

fJ^/f^M.- Messrs.  R.  Friedl^nder  &  Soiin,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W. 


^?'? 


^i>~-. 


Jm 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VJ.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Priedliinder  Sl  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : — 

Proceedings  for  1882,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  7s.  6d.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3,  5s.; 
Part  4,  10s. 

Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,-lOs.;    Part  2,  5s.;    Part  3,  7s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.; 
Part  4,  £1  5s. 

Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Parti,  12s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  15s.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1886,  Vol.  I.— Part  1,  10s.  6d.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1887,   Vol.   II.— Part  1,   7s.;    Part  2,  8s.;    Part  3,  12s.; 
Part  4,  £1  7s. 

Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.  III.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  £1  4s.;  Part  3,  £1; 
Part  4,  18s. 

Proceedings  for  1889,  Vol.  IV.— Part],  lis.;    Part  2,  16s.;    Part  3,  19s.; 
Part  4.  lis. 

Proceedings  for   1890,  Vol.    V.  — Tart  1,  lis.;    Part  2,9s.;    Part  3,9s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Parti,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.  6d.;  Part  3,  17s.; 
Part  4,  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d.;  Part  2,  4s.  6a.;  J'art  3, 
Ss. ;  Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.  VIIL— Part  1,  5s.;   Part  2,  lis.;    Part  3,  6s.: 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.  IX.  —Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  12s.;    Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1895,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s. 
Supplement,  Is.  6d. ;  Part  4,  128. 


Proceedings  for  1896 — Part  1,  9s.,  Supplement,  28.  6d.;    Part  2,  6s.  6d. ; 
Part  3,  7s.  6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1S97— Part  1,  10s.;   Part  2,  8s.  6d.;   Part  3,  9s.;    Part  4, 
12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1898     Part  1,  3s.;  Part  2,  6s.;   Part  3,  12s.;  Part  4,  14s 


SEOOlSriD     SEJItlEiS    (continued). 
Proceedings  for  1899— Part  1,  12s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  128.;  Part  3, 10s.:  Part  4, 
10s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1900— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  10s.  6d.;  Part  3,  lOs.  6d.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1901 —Part  l,^Os.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  5s.;  Part  4, 
17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1902— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  7s.  6d.,  Supple- 
ment, 3s;  Part  4,  15s. 

Proceedings  for  1903— Part  1,  9s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4, 
15s. 

Proceedings  for  1904  -Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4, 
10s. 

Proceedings  for  1905 — Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s.;  Part  2,  10s. 

A   reduction  of  20  per  cent,   on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to   Members  of  the  Society. 

The  Macleay  Memorial  Volume  [issued  October  13th,  1893]. 
Royal  4to.,  li.  and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates 
Price  £3  3s. 

CONTENTS. 

The  Hon.  Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt.,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C.  :  (By  the  Editor). 


Professor  W.  Baldwin  Spencer,  M.A.  :  Contributions  to  our 
Knowledge  of  Geratodus.  Part  I. — The  Blood  Vessels.  (Plates  i.-v. )  — 
Prof.  F.  W.  HuTTON,  F.R.S.  :  The  Pliocene  Mollusca  of  New  Zealand. 
(PI.  vi.-ix.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.  A.,  D.Sc.  :  A  Monograph  of  the 
Temnocephalece.  (PI.  x.-xv.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  On 
an  apparently  new  Type  of  the  Platyhelminthes  ( Trtmatoda  ?)  (PI.  xvi.) — 
Prof.  T.  Jeffery  Parker,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.,  and  Miss  J.  G.  Rich  :  Observa- 
tions on  the  Myology  of  Palijiurus  Edwardsii,  Hutton.  (PI.  xvii.-xxi).  — 
Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B.,  B.Sc  :  Obsei 
vations  upon  the  Anatomy  of  the  Muzzle  of  the  Ornithoi^hynchiLS.  (PI.  xxii. 
xxm.)  — Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B., 
B.Sc.  :  On  the  Peculiar  Rod-like  Tactile  Organs  in  the  Integument  and 
Mucous  Membrane  of  the  Muzzle  of  O^-nithorhynchus.  (PL  xxiv.-xxvi.)  — 
C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  :  On  Parmacochlea  Fischeri,  Smith.  (PI.  xxvii.)  — 
Prof.  R.  Tate,  F.L.S.,  F.G.S.,  &c.  :  On  the  Geographic  Relations  of  the 
Floras  of  Norfolk  and  Lord  Howe  Islands  —  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G., 
F.R.S. :  Notes  on  an  Undescribed  ^cacm  from  New  South  Wales.  (PI. 
XXVIII.) — Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  F.R.S.,  and  J.  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S.,  F.C.S.  :  Description  of  a  New  Hakea  from  Eastern  New  South 
Wales.  (PI.  XXIX.)  —  R.  Etheridge,  Jun.  :  A  Description  of  some  of  the 
Weapons  and  Implements  of  the  Alligator  Tribe,  Port  Essington,  North 
Australia  (PI.  xxx.-xxxv.)  —  N.  A.  Cobb,  Ph.D.  :  New  Nematodes  from 
Fiji  and  Australia.     (PI.  xxxvi.-xlii.) 

Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Australian  Fishes.  By  William 
Macleay,  F.L.S.  [1881].     A  few  copies  only.     Price  £1,  net. 

The  Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  New 
South  Wales,  2  vols.,  8vo  [Vol.  i.  live  Parts,  1863-66;  Vol.  ii.  five 
Parts,  1869-73  ;  all  published],  price  <£2,  net,  are  also  obtainable, 
but  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes  are  sold  separately. 


PKOOEKDINGS,  1905,  PART  2, 


CONTENTS. 

^  PAGE 

Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Australian  Coleoptera.  Part  i.     By  H. 

J.  Carter,  B.A.  p..       177 

Notes  on  the  Eucalypts  of  the  Blue  Mountains.     By  J.  H.  Maiden 

and  R.  H.  Cambage      ..        190 

Notes  on  the  Native  Flora  of  New  South  Wales.     By  R.  H.  Cambage. 

Part iii.  Orange  to  Dubbo  and  Gilgandra.     (Plates  ii.-iii.)  ...       203 

On  an  Undescribed  Species  of  Actinotus  from  Eastern  Australia.     By 

R  T.  Baker,  P.L.S.,  Curator,  Technological  Museum.  (Plate  iv.)       22.5 
Five  New  Species  of  Cicindela  from  Tropical  Australia.     By  Thomas 

G.  Sloane  229 

Revision  of  the  Curculionidce  belonging  to  the  Subfamily  Cryptorhyn- 

chides.    Part  vii.    By  Arthur  M.  Lea,  F.E.S 235 

List  of  Lichens  from  the  eastern  slopes  of  New  England,  N.S.W., 

exhibited  by  Mr.  Fred.  Turner  259,308 

Notes  on  the  Older  Tertiary  Foraminiferal  Rocks  on  the  West  Coast 
of  Santo,  New  Hebrides.  By  Frederick  Chapman,  A.L.S., 
F.R.M.S.,   National  Museum,  Melbourne.      {Communicated  by 

Professor  David.)     (Plates  v.- viii.) ...       261 

On  the  Occurrence  of  a  Bed  of  Fossiliferous  Tuff  and  Lavas*between 
the  Silurian  and  Middle  Devonian  at  Cavan,  Yass,  N.S.W., 
similar  in  Age  and  Character  to  the  Snowy  River  Porphyries  of 
Victoria.     By  A.  J.  Shearsby.      {Communicated  by  W.  S.  Dun.) 

(Plate  ix.) 275 

The  Role  of  Agglutination  in  Immunity.     By  R.  Greig  Smith,  D.  Sc.  , 

Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society  289 

On  Dimorphism    in    the    Female    of    Ischnnra   heterosticta,   Burm. 

[Neuroptera  :  Odonaia].     By  R.  J.  Tilltard,  B.A.  302 

Crustacea  dredged  off  Port  Jackson  in  deep  water.     By  F.  E.  Grant, 

F.L.S.     (Plates  x.-xi.) 812 

Notes  on  Prosobranchiata.     No.  iv.     The  Ontogenetic  Stages  repre- 
sented by  the  Gastropod  Protoconch.     By  H.  Leighton  Kesteven.       325 
On  a  new  Species  of  Eucalyptus  from  Northern  New  South  Wales. 
By  J.   H.   Maiden,  Government  Botanist  and  Director,  Botanic 

Gardens,  Sydney  '      336 

A  Gelatin-hardening  Bacterium  {Bacillus   indurans,   n.sp.).     By  R. 

Greig  Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society         ...       339 
On  the  supposed  Numerical  Preponderance  of  the  Males  in  Odonata. 

By  R.  J.  TiLLYARD,  B.A 344 

Elections  and  Announcements       224,260,311 

Notes  and  Exhibits 222,259,307,350 


Issued  Decemher  20th^  1905. 


Vol.  XXX. 

Part  3. 


No.  119. 
THE 

PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN    SOCIETY 


OF 


NEV^   SOUTH    V^ALES 


FOR  THE  YEAR 


1Q05 


"'-f^\ 


PART    III. 
Containing  Papers  read  in     \>''/.     ' 


SEPTEMBER  to   OCTOBER, 
WITH    EIGHTEEN    PLATES. 


SYDNEY : 


PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 
BY 

F.  OUNNINGHAME  &  00.,  146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


[Price,  12/6] 


_  ^^       Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.  /^^rv 

^f^%K  Messrs.  R.  Friedl^nder  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.    /CAw 

^M 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Eoad,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Friedlander  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : — 

Proceedings  for  18S2,  Vol.  VIL— Part  1,  7s.  6d.;  Part 2,  10s.;  Part  3,  5s.; 
Part  4,  10s. 

Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  5s.;  Part  3,  7s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.; 
Part  4,  £1  5s. 

Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Parti,  12s.;  Part 2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  15s.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

SECOISriD     SEIilES- 

Pfoceedings  for  1886,  Vol.  I.— Part  1,  10s.  6d.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1887,  Vol.  II.— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  8s.;  Part  3,  12s.: 
Part  4,  £1  78. 

Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.  III.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  £14s.;  Part  3,  £1; 
Part  4,  18s. 

Proceedings  for  1889,  VoL  IV.— Part  1,  lis.;  Part  2,  16s.;  Part  3,  19s.; 
Part  4,  1  Is. 

Proceedings  for  1890,  Vol.  V.— Part  1,  lis.;  Part  2,9s.;  Part  3,9s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1, 10s.;  Part  2,  9s.  6d.;  Part  3,  17s. 
Part  4,  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d.;  Part  2,  4s.  6d.;  Part  3, 
8s.;  Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,  5s.;  Part  2,  lis.;  Part  3,  6s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.  IX.  —Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  r2s,;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1895,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s. 
Supplement,  Is.  6d.;  Part  4,  12s. 

Proceedings  for  1896— Part  1,  9s.,  Supplement,  2s.  6d.;  Part  2,  6s.  6d.; 
Part  3,  7s.  6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1897— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4, 
12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1898  -  Part  1,  3s.;  Part  2,  6s.;   Part  3,  12s.;  Part  4,  14s 


BY  D.   MAWSON.  485 

Plate  xxviii. 
Map  of  Efat6  from  Admiralty  chart.  The  hatched  areas  are  only  approxi- 
mately  accurate,  but  serve  to  illustrate  the  text.  The  details  of 
geological  features  are  not  in  any  way  complete;  indeed,  it  is  quite 
likely  that  outcrops  of  Miocene  rocks  may  occur  near  Mt.  Macdonald 
to  the  south. 

Plate  xxix. 

Sketch  Map  of  South-west  Santo;  outline  drawn  from  Admiralty  chart  and 
detail  filled  in  by  the  author  to  illustrate  the  text.  Hatched  areas 
are  only  roughly  approximate. 


CORRIGENDA. 

On  p. 422,  line  7— for  plain  of  marine  erosion  read  plane  of  marine  erosion. 
On  p. 442,  line  29— for  Plate  xix.  fig.l  read  Plate  xxii.  fig.l. 
On  p. 459,  line  10 — -/oi*  Plate  xix.  fig.2  read  Plate  xxii.  fig.2. 


PKOCEEDINGS,  1905,  PART  ^ 


CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Notes  from  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney.   No.  11.      By  J.  H,  Maiden 

and  E.  Betche ,.       354 

Notes  on  the  Native  Flora  of  New  South  Wales.  By  R.  H.  Cambage. 
Part  iv.  The  Occurrence  of  Casuarina  stricta  Ait.,  on  the 
Narrabeen  Shales.     (Plates  xii.-xiii.)  ...  _  376 

Census  Muscorum  Australiensium.  A  classified  Catalogue  of  the 
Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia  and  Tasmania,  collated  from 
available  Publications  and  Herbaria  Records,  by  the  Rev.  W. 
Walter  Watts  and  Thomas  Whitelegge,  F.R.M.S.     Part  ii.*...       391 

[Title.] 

The   Geology  of   the  New  Hebrides.     By  D.  Mawson,  B.E.,  B.Sc, 
Lecturer   in   Mineralogy   and    Petrology    at    the    University   of 
•  Adelaide.     (Plates  xiv.-xxix.) 400 

Elections  and  Announcements      353,  399 

Notes  and  Exhibits , 392 


*  To  be  issued  separately  as  a  Supplement  to  Part  4  of  this  Volume. 


Ismed  April  l.'th,  1900 


Vol.  XXX. 


Part  4. 


No.  120. 


THE 


PBOCEBDINGS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN    SOCIETY 


OF 


NEV/    SOUTH    V/ALES 


PART    IV. 
Containing  Papers  read  in 

NOVEMBER, 

WITH    SEVEN    PLATES. 


SYDNEY : 
PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 

BY  ' 

F,  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,  146  PiTT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
[Price,  with  Supplement,  10/6] 


^D^      Messrs.  DULAU&  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London   \^^  /TN^^^ 

^^ Messrs.  R.  Fkiedl.ndek  &  Sohn,  Carlstra^se  11,  B-lin,  K^^.^^^^ 

^^V^ " " -.-tU&V-V 


NOTICE. 


With  tiie  exception  of  Volumes  I. -VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
wliich  tlie  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  iu  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  .Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
^^Jj  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Friedliinder  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.AV.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : — 

Proceedings  for  1882,  Vol.  VII,— Part  1,  7s.  6d.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3,  5s.; 
Part  4,  10s. 

Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,  10s.;    Part  2,  5s.;    Part  3,  7s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  Ss.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.; 
Part  4,  £1  5s. 

Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Parti,  12s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  15s.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

SEConsri)    SEIJ.IE1S-. 

Proceedings  for  1886,  Vol.  I.— Part  1,  10s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for   1887,    Vol.    II.— Part  1,   7s.;    Part  2,   8s.;    Part  3,  12s.: 
Part  4,  £1  7s. 

Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.  III.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  £l4s.;  PartS,  £1; 
Part  4,  18s. 

Proceedings  for  1889^,  Vol.  IV.— Parti,  lis.;    Part  2,  16s.;    Part  3,  19s.; 
Part  4.  ]]s. 

Proceedings  for   1890,  Vol.    V.— Part  1,  lis.;    Part  2,  9s.;    Part  3,9s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.  6d.;  Part  3,  17s. 
Part  4,  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d.;  Part  2,  4s.  6d.;  Part  3, 
8s.;  Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1893,  \1d1.  VIII.— Part  1,  5s.;  Part  2,  lis.;   Part  3,  6s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.  IX. —Part  ],  12s.;  Part  2,  12s.;    Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1895,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s. 
Supplement,  Is.  6d. ;  Part  4,  12s. 


Proceedings  for  1896— Part  1,  9s.,  Supplement,  2s.  6d.;    Part  2,  6s.  6d.; 
Part  3,  7s.  6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1897— Part  1,  10s.;   Part  2,  8s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  9s.;   Part  4, 
12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1898  -  Part  1,  3s.;  Part  2,  Gs.;  Part  3,  12s.;  Part  4,  14s 


SEJCOISTID     SBI4IES    (continued). 
Proceedings  for  1899— Part  1,  12s.  6-1.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part8.10s.:  Part4 
10s.  6d.  '         '  > 

Proceedings  for  1900— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  10s.  6cl.;  Part  3.  10s,  6d  • 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1901 —Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  os  •  Part  4 
17s.  6d.  >         ,  , 

Proceedings  for  1902— Fart  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  7s.  6d.,  Supple- 
ment, 3s;  Part  4,  15s. 

Proceedings  for  1903— Part  1,  9s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d.;  Part  3,  14s.:  Part  4 
15s. 

Proceedings  for  1904  -Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4. 
10s. 

Proceedings  for  1905— Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3. 
P2s.  6d.;  Part  4,  with  Supplement,  10s.  6d. 

A  reduction  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to  Members  of  the  Society. 

The  Macleay  Memorial  Volume  [issued  October  13th,  1893]. 
Royal  4to.,  Li.  and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates. 
Price  £3  3s. 

CONTENTS. 

The  Hon.  Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt.,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C.  :  (By  the  Editor)- 

Professor  W.  Baldwin  Spencer,  M.A.  :  Contributions  to  our 
Knowledge  of  Ceratodus.  Part  I. — The  Blood  Vessels.  (Plates  i.-v.)  — 
Prof.  F.  W.  Hdtton,  F.R.S,  :  The  Pliocene  Mollusca  of  New  Zealand. 
(PI.  vi.-ix.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.  A.,  D.Sc.  :  A  Monograph  of  the 
TemnocephalecB.  (PI.  x.-xv.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  On 
an  apparently  new  Type  of  the  Platyhelminthes  (Trematoda  ?)  (PI.  xvi.) — 
Prof.  T.  Jeffeky  Parker,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.,  and  Miss  J.  G.  Rich  :  Observa- 
tions on  the  Myology  of  Palimirus  Edioardsii,  Hutton.  (PI.  xvii.-xxi)  — 
Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B.,  B.Sc  :  Obsei 
rations  upon  the  Anatomy  of  the  Muzzle  of  the  Or7iithorhynchm.  (PI.  xxii. 
xxiiL)  — Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martlv,  M.B., 
B.Sc.  :    On  the  Peculiar  Pa»d-iike  Tactile  Organs  in  the  Integument  and 

Mucous  Membrane  of  the  Muzzle  of  Ornithorhynchus.     (PI.  xxiv.-xxvi.) 

C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  :  On  Parmacochlea  Fischeri,  Smith.  (PI.  xxvii.) — 
Prof.  R.  Tate,  F.L.S.,  F.G.S.,  &c.  :  On  the  Geographic  Relations  of  the 
Floras  of  Norfolk  and  Lord  Howe  Islands  —  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G., 
F.R.S. :  Notes  on  an  Undescribed  ^maa  from  New  South  Wales.  (Pi' 
xxviiL)— Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  F.R.S.,  and  J,  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S. ,  F.C.S.  :  Description  of  a  New  Hakea  from  Eastern  New  South 
Wales.  (PI.  XXIX.)  —  R.  Etheridge,  Jun.  :  A  Description  of  some  of  the 
Weapons  and  Implements  of  the  Alligator  Tribe,  Port  Essington,  North 
Australia  (PI.  xxx.-xxxv.)  —  N.  A.  Cobb,  Ph.D.  :  New  Nematodes  from 
Fiji  and  Australia.     (PI.  xxxvi.-xlii.) 

Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Australian  Fishes.  By  William 
Macleay,  F.L.S.  [1881].     A  few  copies  only.     Price  £\,  net. 

The  Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  New 
South  Wales,  2  vols.,  8vo  [Vol.  i.  live  Parts,  1863-66;  Vol.  n.  five 
Parts,  1869-73;  all  published],  price  £2,  net,  are  also  obtainable, 
but  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes  are  sold  separately. 


PHOCERDINGS,  1905,  PART  4. 


CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Further  Notes  on  Hybridisation  in  the  Genus  Eiicalpptus.  By  J.  H. 
Maiden,  Government  Botanist,  and  Director  of  the  Botanic 
Gardens,  Sydney . .  . .  . .  , .  . .  . .  . .  . .     492 

Miscellaneous  Notes  (chiefly  taxonomic)  on  Eucalyptm^.  ii.  By  J.  H. 
Maidex,  Government  Botanist,  and  Director  of  the  Botanic 
Gardens,  Sydney. .  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..         ..  ..     502 

On  an  undescribed  Species  of  Cryptocarya  from  Eastern  Australia. 

By  R.  T.  Baker,  F.L.S.,  Curator,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney. 

(Plate  XXX.)  ..  ..  ..  ..         ..  ..  ..  ..     517 

Studies  on  Australian   Mollusca.    Part  ix.       By  C.   Hedley,   F.L.S. 

(Plates  xxxi.-xxxiii.)       ..  ..  ..  .,  ..  ..  ..     520 

Descriptions  of  three  New  Species  of  Austrogomphus  [Neuroptera  : 

Odonata].  By  R.  J.  Tillyard,  B.A.  (Plate  xxxiv.)  ..  ..547 
The  Probable  Identity  of  the  Opsonins  with  the  Normal  Agglutinins. 

By  R.  Greig-Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society  555 
A  Pleomorphic  Slime-Bacterium  {Bacillus  alatus,  n.sp. ).    By  R.  Greig- 

Smith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society.  (Plate  xxxv.)  570 
Presidential   Address   delivered   at  the   Thirty-first  Annual    General 

Meeting,   March   28th,    1906,  by  Tno^ix^  Steel,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S. 

(Plate  xxxvi. )       .- 605 

Balance  Sheet,  &c 636 

Elections  and  Announcements         492 

Notes  and  Exhibits 486,574 

Donations  and  Exchanges      . ,  . .  . .  .  .  . .  . .  . .     580 

Title-page  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . ,  ,  .        i. 

List  of  Contributors  and  Titles  of  Papers. .  ..  ..  ..  ..      iii. 

Contents  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .     vii. 

List  of  Plates xi. 

List  of  New  Generic  Terms  proposed  in  this  Volume     . .  . .  . .     xii. 

Corrigenda        . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .  . .     xii. 

Index. 

Supplement  (issued  separately)— Census  Muscorum  Australiensium. 
A  classified  Catalogue  of  the  Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia  and 
Tasmania,  collated  from  available  Publications  and  Herbaria 
Records,  by  the  Rev.  W.  Walter  Watts  and  Thomas  Whitelegge, 
F.R.M.S.     Part     . 


Issued  April  12th,  190(J 


Vol.  XXX. 

Part  4. 


No.  120. 


THE 

PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THK 


LINNEAN    SOCIETY 


NEV\f    SOUTH    V/A1_ES 


FOR  THE  YEAR 


1905 


SUPPLEMENT  TO  PART  t^:.:^ 

CENSUS  MUSCORUM  AUSTRALIENSIUl&4l 

A  CLASSIFIED  Catalogue  of  the  Frondose  Mosses  of  Australia 
AND  Tasmania,  collated  from  available  Publications  and 
Herbaria  Records,  by  the  Rev.  W.  Walter  Watts  and 
Thomas  Whitelegge,  F.R.M.S.     Part  II. 


SYDNEY : 

printed  and  published  for  the  society 

BY 

F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,  146  PlTT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


[Price,  2/6] 


:;f 


» 


-A.Gf-E3srTS  insr  E3tji4o:e>e 
Messrs.  DuLAU  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W. 
Messrs.  R.  Friedl^nder  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Borlio,  N.W 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Friedliinder  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : — 

Proceedings  for  18S2,  Vol.  VIL— Parti,  7s.  6d.;  Part2,  10s.;  Part  3,  5s.; 
Part  4,  10s. 

Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,  10s.;    Part  2,  5s.;    Part  3,  7s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.; 
Part  4,  £1  5s. 

Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Parti,  12s.;  Part 2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  15s.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

SECOaSTHD     SEieiES- 

Proceedings  for  1886,  Vol.  I.— Part  1,  10s.  6d.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  12s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for   1887,   Vol.   II.— Part  1,   7s.;    Part  2,  8s.;    Part  3,  12s.: 
Part  4,  £1  7s. 

Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.  III.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  £14s.;  Part  3,  £1; 
Part  4,  18s. 

Proceedings  for  1889,  Vol.  IV.— Part  1,  lis.;    Part  2,  16s.;    Part  3,  19s.; 
Part  4.  lis. 

Proceedings  for   1890,  Vol.    V.— Part  1,  lis.;    Part  2,  9s.;    Part  3,9s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.  6d.;  Part  3,  17s. 
Part  4,  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  6s,  6d.;  Part  2,  4s.  6d.;  Part  3, 
88. ;  Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,  5s.;   Part  2,  lis.;    Part  3,  6s.; 
Part  4,  9s. 

Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.  IX.  -Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  r2s.;   Part  3,  13s.; 
Part  4,  8s. 

Proceedings  for  1895,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  15s.;  Part  2,  8s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s. 
Supplement,  Is.  6d. ;  Part  4,  12s. 


Proceedings  for  1896— Part  1,  9s.,  Supplement,  2s.  6d.;    Part  2,  6s.  6d.; 
Part  3,  7s.  6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1S97— Part  1,  10s.;   Part  2,  8s.  6d.;   Part  3,  9s.;    Part  4, 
123.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1898  -  Part  1,  3s.; 'Part  2,  6s.;   Part  3,  12s.;  Part  4,  14s 


SECOlSriD     SEJIRIES    (contimied). 
Proceedings  for  1899— Part  1,  12s.  6d.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3, 10s.:  Part  4, 
10s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1900^Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  10s.  6d.;  Part  3,  10s.  6d.; 
Part  4,  17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1901 —Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  5s.;  Part  4, 
17s.  6d. 

Proceedings  for  1902— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  7s.  6d.,  Supple- 
ment, 3s;  Part  4,  15s. 

Proceedings  for  1903— Part  1,  9s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4, 
15s. 

Proceedings  for  1904  -Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4, 
10s. 

Proceedings  for  1905— Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s.;  Part  2, 10s.;  Part  3, 
12s.  6d. ;  Part  4,  with  Supplement,  10s.  6d. 

A  reduction  of  20  [)er  cent,   on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to   Members  of  the  Society. 

The  Macleay  Memorial  Volume  [issued  October  13th,  1893]. 
Royal  4to.,  li.  and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates. 
Price  £3  3s. 

CONTENTS. 

The  Hon.  Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt.,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C.  :  (By  the  Editor). 

Professor  W.  Baldwin  Spencer,  M.A.  :  Contributions  to  our 
Knowledge  of  Ge7-atodus.  Part  I. — The  Blood  Vessels.  (Plates  l-v.)  — 
Prof.  F.  W.  HuTTON,  F.R.S.  :  The  Pliocene  Mollusca  of  New  Zealand. 
(PL  VI. -IX.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  A  Monograph  of  the 
Temnocephaleoi.  (PI.  x.-xv.)  —  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  :  On 
an  apparently  new  Type  of  the  Platyhelminthes  (Trematoda  ?)  (PI.  xvi. ) — 
Prof.  T.  Jeffery  Parker,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.,  and  Miss  J.  G.  Rich  :  Observa- 
tions on  the  Myology  of  Palinurus  Edwardsii,  Hutton.  (PI.  xvii.-xxi).  — 
Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C,  J.  Martin,  M.B.,  B.Sc  :  Obsei 
vations  upon  the  Anatomy  of  the  Muzzle  of  the  Ornithorhynchus.  (PI.  xxii. 
xxm.)  — Prof.  J.  T.  Wilson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  C.  J.  Martin,  M.B., 
B.Sc.  :  On  the  Peculiar  Rod-like  Tactile  Organs  in  the  Integument  and 
Mucous  Membrane  of  the  Muzzle  of  Ornithorhynchus.  (PI.  xxiv.-xxvi.)  — 
C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  :  On  Parmacochlea  Fischeri,  Smith.  (PI.  xxvii.)  — 
Prof.  R.  Tate,  F.L.S.,  F.G.S.,  &c.  :  On  the  Geographic  Relations  of  the 
Floras  of  Norfolk  and  Lord  Howe  Islands  —  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G., 
F.R.S. :  Notes  on  an  Undescribed  Acacia  from  New  South  Wales.  (PI, 
xxviil) — Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  F.R.S.,  and  J.  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S.,  F.C.S.  :  Description  of  a  New  Hakea  from  Eastern  New  South 
Wales.  (PI.  XXIX.)  —  R.  Etheridge,  Jun.  :  A  Description  of  some  of  the 
Weapons  and  Implements  of  the  Alligator  Tribe,  Port  Essington,  North 
Australia  (PI.  xxx.-xxxv.)  —  N.  A.  Cobb,  Ph.D.  :  New  Nematodes  from 
Fiji  and  Australia.     (PI.  xxxvir-XLii. ) 

Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Australian  Fishes.  By  William 
Macleay,  F.L.S.  [1881].     A  few  copies  only.     Price  £1,  net. 

The  Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  New 
South  Wales,  2  vols.,  8vo  [Vol.  i.  live  Parts,  1863-66;  Vol.  n.  five 
Parts,  1869-73  ;  all  published],  price  £2,  net,  are  also  obtainable, 
but  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes  are  sold  separately. 


MBL  WHOI   LIBRARY 


UH    lADB    + 


I